2 020101 082 e (T1) PDF

R U S S I A N M A R I T I M E REGISTER OF SHIPPING
Electronic version of printed

document approved on 30.09.14
RULES
FOR T H E CLASSIFICATION
AND
CONSTRUCTION
OF SEA-GOING
VOLUME
1
2-020101-082-E
Saint-Petersburg
E d i t i o n 2015
SHIPS
Rules f o r t h e Classification a n d Construction o f Sea-Going Ships o f Russian M a r i t i m e Register o f

Shipping have been approved i n accordance w i t h the established approval procedure. T h e date o f c o m i n g into
force o f the present Rules is 1 January 2015.
The Rules are based o n t h e seventeenth edition (2014) taking into account amendments developed
immediately before publication.
The unified requirements, interpretations a n d recommendations o f t h e International Association o f
Classification Societies ( I A C S ) a n d the relevant resolutions o f the I n t e r n a t i o n a l M a r i t i m e O r g a n i z a t i o n ( I M O )
have been taken into consideration i nthe Rules.
The Rules a r epublished i nfive volumes.
General Regulations f o rt h e Classification a n d Other Activity, Part I "Classification", Part I I " H u l l " ,
Part I I I "Equipment, Arrangements a n dOutfit", Part I V "Stability", Part V "Subdivision", Part V I "Fire
Protection" areincluded i n V o l u m e 1.
Part V I I "Machinery Installations", Part V I I I "Systems a n d Piping", Part I X"Machinery", Part X
"Boilers, H e a t Exchangers a n d Pressure Vessels", P a r t X I "Electrical E q u i p m e n t " , P a r t X I I "Refrigerating
Plants", Part X I I I "Materials", Part X I V "Welding", Part X V " A u t o m a t i o n " , Part X V I " H u l l Structure and
Strength o f Glass-Reinforced Plastic Ships and Boats" areincluded i n V o l u m e 2.
Part X V I I "Distinguishing M a r k s and Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n the Class N o t a t i o n Specifying Structural
and Operational Particulars o f Ships" is included i n V o l u m e 3.
Part X V I I I " C o m m o n Structural Rules f o r Double H u l l O i l Tankers" is included i n V o l u m e 4 (in
electronic f o r m a t only).
Part X I X " C o m m o n Structural Rules for B u l k Carriers" is included i n V o l u m e 5 (in electronic f o r m a t
only).
The C o m m o n S t r u c t u r a l R u l e s ( C S R ) f o r D o u b l e H u l l O i l T a n k e r s a n d f o r B u l k Carriers are identical t o
IACS CSR.
ISBN
978-5-89331-277-5
, 2 0 1 5
As compared
to the previous
edition
(2014),
the eighteenth
edition
contains
the f o l l o w i n g
GENERAL REGULATIONS FOR T H E CLASSIFICATION A N D OTHER
amendments.
ACTIVITY
1 . C h a p t e r 1.3: p a r a 1 . 3 . 1 . 1 c o n t a i n i n g t h e l i s t o f r u l e s u s e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r h a s b e e n s u p p l e m e n t e d w i t h
the Rules for the Surveys o f I n l a n d N a v i g a t i o n Ships i n Service (for E u r o p e a n I n l a n d waterways)
and the Rules for Planning and Execution o f M a r i n e Operations.
RULES FOR T H E CLASSIFICATION A N D CONSTRUCTION OF SEA-GOING
SHIPS
PART I. CLASSIFICATION
1. C h a p t e r 1.1: i n p a r a 1.1.1 t h e d e f i n i t i o n " A s h i p o f r i v e r - s e a n a v i g a t i o n " h a s b e e n specified c o n s i d e r i n g

the R u l e s application practice;
i n p a r a 1.1.2 t h e e x p l a n a t i o n " A s h i p u n d e r c o n s t r u c t i o n " h a s b e e n specified c o n s i d e r i n g t h e R u l e s a p p l i c a t i o n practice;
p a r a 1.1.2 h a s b e e n s u p p l e m e n t e d w i t h t h e e x p l a n a t i o n " D u a l class".
2. C h a p t e r 2 . 1 : i n p a r a 2 . 1 . 6 o n e m o r e c a s e w h e n t h e C l a s s i f i c a t i o n C e r t i f i c a t e b e c o m e s i n v a l i d h a s b e e n
i n t r o d u c e d , n a m e l y : i n case o f t h e ship's seizure b y pirates;
i n p a r a 2.1.7 t h e p e r i o d o f class suspension has been specified.
3. C h a p t e r 2 . 2 : t h e b e g i n n i n g o f t h e C h a p t e r h a s b e e n s u p p l e m e n t e d w i t h t h e e x p l a n a t i o n w h e n t h e R S
class is assigned t o ships a n d f l o a t i n g facilities;
the C h a p t e r has been supplemented w i t h n e w p a r a 2.2.2.5 c o n t a i n i n g the r e q u i r e m e n t f o r n e w
d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k i n t h e R S class n o t a t i o n w h e n t h e ships a n d f l o a t i n g facilities are classed w i t h
t h e R e g i s t e r a l o n g w i t h a n o t h e r classification society ( d u a l class);
i n para 2.2.3.4 the requirement f o r the Ice N a v i g a t i o n Ship Certificate issued t o the s h i p o w n e r b y
the Register has been specified;
the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f paras 2.2.13, 2.2.25 a n d 2.2.26 h a v e been specified: t h e y also a p p l y t o F O P ;
para 2.2.24.3 has been supplemented w i t h the p r o v i s i o n o n the possibility o f the distinguishing m a r k S P M
i n t h e class n o t a t i o n o f ships c a r r y i n g l i q u e f i e d gases i n b u l k ;
the C h a p t e r has been supplemented w i t h n e w para 2.2.28 c o n t a i n i n g the requirement f o r the distinguishing
m a r k G F S i n t h e class n o t a t i o n o f ships e q u i p p e d f o r u s i n g gas fuel;
t h e e x i s t i n g p a r a s 2.2.28 a n d 2.2.29 h a v e b e e n r e n u m b e r e d as p a r a s 2.2.29 a n d 2 . 2 . 3 0 .
4. C h a p t e r 3 . 1 : i n p a r a 3 . 1 . 3 t h e r e f e r e n c e t o I A C S U I a n d t h e t i t l e o f t h e S u p p l e m e n t t o r u l e s o f R u s s i a n
M a r i t i m e Register o f S h i p p i n g h a v e been specified.
5. C h a p t e r 3 . 2 : h a s b e e n s u p p l e m e n t e d w i t h n e w p a r a 3 . 2 . 2 . 1 0 c o n t a i n i n g t h e r e q u i r e m e n t f o r t h e l i s t o f
structural measures a n d engineering s o l u t i o n s e n s u r i n g electrostatic a n d galvanic i n t r i n s i c safety t o be
submitted to the Register;
the C h a p t e r has been supplemented w i t h n e w para 3.2.7.12 c o n t a i n i n g the r e q u i r e m e n t f o r electrochemical
p r o t e c t i o n scheme i n o i l t a n k e r s t o be s u b m i t t e d t o the Register;
the C h a p t e r has been supplemented w i t h n e w para 3.2.8.5.12 c o n t a i n i n g the r e q u i r e m e n t f o r calculation o f
p o w e r o f t h e m a i n m a c h i n e r y f o r ice ships o f Ice2 A r c 9 categories t o be s u b m i t t e d t o t h e Register;
the r e q u i r e m e n t o f p a r a 3.2.9.1 has been specified;
para 3.2.11.16 has been deleted, subsequent paragraphs have been r e n u m b e r e d accordingly, the
r e q u i r e m e n t o f existing p a r a 3.2.11.20 has been specified accordingly.
6. E d i t o r i a l a m e n d m e n t s h a v e b e e n m a d e .
P A R T .
HULL
1 . C h a p t e r 1.2: i n p a r a 1 . 2 . 3 . 3 t h e r e q u i r e m e n t f o r t h e v a l u e o f h a s b e e n s p e c i f i e d ;
p a r a s 1.2.3.7, 1.2.3.8 a n d 1.2.3.12 h a v e b e e n a m e n d e d c o n s i d e r i n g I A C S U R S 6 ( R e v . 7 A p r . 2 0 1 3 ) .
2. C h a p t e r 1.4: i n p a r a 1 . 4 . 4 . 3 a n d F o r m u l a ( 1 . 4 . 4 . 3 - 1 ) a m i s p r i n t h a s b e e n c o r r e c t e d .
3. C h a p t e r 1.6: i n p a r a 1 . 6 . 5 . 5 t h e d e f i n i t i o n o f v a l u e s s' a n d s h a s b e e n s p e c i f i e d .
4. C h a p t e r 3 . 1 0 : i n p a r a 3 . 1 0 . 1 . 1 . 5 t h e r e q u i r e m e n t f o r t h e I c e N a v i g a t i o n S h i p C e r t i f i c a t e i s s u e d t o t h e
s h i p o w n e r b y the Register has been specified.
5. C h a p t e r 3 . 1 1 : t h e r e q u i r e m e n t o f p a r a 3 . 1 1 . 1 . 1 h a s b e e n s p e c i f i e d .
6. C h a p t e r 3 . 1 2 : i n p a r a 3 . 1 2 . 4 . 1 t h e v a l u e o f f a c t o r A: h a s b e e n s p e c i f i e d .
7. A p p e n d i x 1 : T a b l e 1 h a s b e e n s u p p l e m e n t e d w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t f o r t e s t i n g s e a c h e s t s a n d i c e b o x e s .
P A R T III. E Q U I P M E N T , A R R E N G E M E N T S A N D O U T F I T
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
Chapter
2.9: the r e q u i r e m e n t o f p a r a 2.9.15 has been specified.

3 . 1 : the r e q u i r e m e n t o f p a r a 3.1.4 has been specified.
5.4: i n p a r a 5.4.8 t h e r e q u i r e m e n t f o r a p p l i c a t i o n o f t o w h o o k s has b e e n specified.
5.5: i n p a r a 5.5.2 t h e r e q u i r e m e n t f o r o p e r a t i n g t h e t o w i n g w i n c h h a s b e e n specified.
5.6: i n p a r a 5.6.1 t h e r e q u i r e m e n t f o r t h e l e n g t h o f t o w line f o r t o w i n g w i n c h has been specified.
6. C h a p t e r 7 . 1 4 : i n p a r a 7 . 1 4 . 2 t h e t i t l e o f t h e S u p p l e m e n t t o r u l e s o f R u s s i a n M a r i t i m e R e g i s t e r o f
S h i p p i n g h a s been specified.
7. C h a p t e r 8 . 5 : t h e r e q u i r e m e n t o f p a r a 8 . 5 . 4 . 2 . 5 h a s b e e n s p e c i f i e d .
8. C h a p t e r 9 . 1 : h a s b e e n s u p p l e m e n t e d w i t h n e w p a r a 9 . 1 . 1 s p e c i f y i n g t h e s c o p e o f a p p l i c a t i o n o f S e c t i o n 9 ;
existing para 9.1.1 h a s been r e n u m b e r e d as para 9.1.2.
P A R T IV. S T A B I L I T Y
1 . C h a p t e r 1.5: p a r a 1 . 5 . 1 . 3 h a s b e e n d e l e t e d ;
t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f p a r a s 1 . 5 . 1 . 4 , 1.5.3 a n d 1 . 5 . 7 h a v e b e e n s p e c i f i e d ;
t h e r e f e r e n c e s i n p a r a s 1.5.3.5 a n d 1.5.5 h a v e b e e n s p e c i f i e d .
2. C h a p t e r 3 . 7 : t h e e x p l a n a t i o n t o F o r m u l a ( 3 . 7 . 3 . 1 - 2 ) h a s b e e n s p e c i f i e d .
P A R T V. S U B D I V I S I O N
1. C h a p t e r 2 . 5 : i n p a r a 2 . 5 . 1 . 1 t h e f o r m u l a f o r d e t e r m i n i n g f a c t o r s i h a s b e e n a l i g n e d w i t h r e g u l a t i o n I I - 1 / 7 - 2 . 1 . 1
o f S O L A S - 7 4 , as amended (including the 2010 amendments).
2. C h a p t e r 2 . 7 : h a s b e e n s u p p l e m e n t e d w i t h n e w p a r a 2 . 7 . 5 c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 2 5 ( 9 0 ) .
3. C h a p t e r 3 . 4 : p a r a 3 . 4 . 3 . 1 h a s b e e n a m e n d e d c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 2 6 6 ( 8 4 ) ;
p a r a s 3.4.9.2.1, 3.4.9.2.2 a n d 3.4.9.3 h a v e been a m e n d e d c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 3 5 ( 9 0 ) .
4. C h a p t e r 4 . 2 : h a s b e e n s u p p l e m e n t e d w i t h n e w p a r a 4 . 2 . 3 . 4 c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 4 5 ( 9 1 ) ;
existing para 4.2.3.4 h a sbeen renumbered as para 4.2.3.5.
5. A p p e n d i x 1 : i n p a r a 2 . 2 . 1 . 1 1 t h e r e f e r e n c e t o I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 2 4 5 ( 8 3 ) h a s b e e n r e p l a c e d w i t h t h e
reference t o I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 6 2 ( 9 2 ) .
PART VI. FIRE
PROTECTION
1. C h a p t e r 4 . 2 : t h e d e f i n i t i o n " F o a m e x p a n s i o n r a t i o " h a s b e e n s p e c i f i e d ;
new definitions " F o a m delivery ducts", "Outside a i r f o a m system", "Inside a i r f o a m system", " H i g h
e x p a n s i o n f o a m fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g system" h a v e been i n t r o d u c e d considering I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 2 7 ( 9 0 ) .
2. C h a p t e r 2 . 2 : T a b l e s 2 . 2 . 1 . 5 - 1 , 2 . 2 . 1 . 5 - 2 h a v e b e e n a m e n d e d c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 3 8 ( 9 1 ) ;
the requirement o f para 2.2.4.2 has been aligned w i t h regulation II-2/9.4.1.1.7 o f S O L A S - 7 4 , as amended.
3. C h a p t e r 2 . 3 : T a b l e s 2 . 3 . 3 - 1 , 2 . 3 . 3 - 2 h a v e b e e n a m e n d e d c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 3 8 ( 9 1 ) .
4. C h a p t e r 3 . 2 : t h e r e q u i r e m e n t o f p a r a 3 . 1 . 2 . 1 h a s b e e n s p e c i f i e d . T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r e q u i v a l e n t f i r e
e x t i n g u i s h i n g systems h a v e been transferred t o C h a p t e r 3.9, as a m e n d e d ;
T a b l e 3.1.2.1 h a s been s u p p l e m e n t e d w i t h f o o t n o t e 2 0 based o n t e c h n i c a l s u p e r v i s i o n experience;
p a r a 3.1.2.2 h a s been a m e n d e d considering I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 3 9 ( 9 1 ) ;
the r e q u i r e m e n t o f p a r a 3.1.4.2 h a s been specified.
5. C h a p t e r 3 . 2 : p a r a 3 . 2 . 1 . 2 h a s b e e n s u p p l e m e n t e d w i t h a r e f e r e n c e t o p a r a 3 . 2 . 5 . 7 ;
t h e r e q u i r e m e n t o f p a r a 3 . 2 . 1 . 1 0 h a s b e e n a l i g n e d w i t h r e g u l a t i o n -2/10.2.2.4.2 o f S O L A S - 7 4 , a s a m e n d e d .
6. C h a p t e r 3 . 3 : p a r a 3 . 3 . 1 . 1 h a s b e e n a m e n d e d c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 2 7 ( 9 0 ) .
7. C h a p t e r 3 . 4 : p a r a 3 . 4 . 1 h a s b e e n a m e n d e d c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 3 9 ( 9 1 ) ; d u p l i c a t i o n o f
requirements h a s been eliminated;
the r e q u i r e m e n t o f p a r a 3.4.9 h a s been specified;
para 3.4.10 h a s been deleted, i t s requirements have been a m e n d e d considering I M O circular
M S C . 1/Circ. 1268 a n d transferred t o 3.4.9.
8. C h a p t e r 3 . 7 . p a r a 3 . 7 . 1 . 2 h a s b e e n a m e n d e d c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 2 7 ( 9 0 ) ;
paras 3.7.1.3, 3.7.1.7 h a v e been a m e n d e d considering I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 3 9 ( 9 1 ) ;
the r e q u i r e m e n t o f p a r a 3.7.2.12 has been s u p p l e m e n t e d w i t h a reference t o p a r a 6.4.1.2, P a r t X V I I " D i s t i n g u i s h i n g
M a r k s a n d Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n the Class N o t a t i o n Specifying Structural a n d Operational Particulars o f Ships";
p a r a 3.7.3 h a s b e e n c o m p l e t e l y a m e n d e d c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 2 7 ( 9 0 ) ;
para 3.7.3.2.2 h a s been a m e n d e d considering I A C S U I S C 2 6 2 (June 2013).
9. C h a p t e r 3 . 8 : p a r a s 3 . 8 . 1 . 1 , 3 . 8 . 1 . 5 h a v e b e e n a m e n d e d c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 3 9 ( 9 1 ) ;
t h e r e q u i r e m e n t o f p a r a 3.8.1.13 h a s b e e n s p e c i f i e d .
10. C h a p t e r 3 . 9 : h a s b e e n c o m p l e t e l y a m e n d e d c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 3 9 ( 9 1 ) .
11. C h a p t e r 3 . 1 0 : t h e r e q u i r e m e n t o f p a r a 3 . 1 0 . 3 . 1 h a s b e e n a l i g n e d w i t h t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f t h e I n t e r n a t i o n a l
Code for the Construction and E q u i p m e n t o fShips C a r r y i n g Liquefied Gases i n Bulk.
12. C h a p t e r 3 . 1 2 : p a r a 3 . 1 2 . 3 . 1 h a s b e e n a m e n d e d c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 3 8 ( 9 1 ) .
13. C h a p t e r 4 . 2 : p a r a 4 . 1 . 2 h a s b e e n a m e n d e d c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 3 9 ( 9 1 ) .
14. C h a p t e r 5 . 1 : h a s b e e n s u p p l e m e n t e d w i t h n e w p a r a 5 . 1 . 6 . 3 c o n s i d e r i n g I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 3 9 ( 9 1 ) ;
para 5.1.15.2 h a s been a m e n d e d considering I M O r e s o l u t i o n M S C . 3 3 9 ( 9 1 ) ;
t h e C h a p t e r has been s u p p l e m e n t e d w i t h n e w p a r a 5.1.15.3 c o n s i d e r i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.1.1.1, C h a p t e r 3 o f
the International Code for Fire Safety Systems ( I M O resolution M S C . 9 8 (73)) and I M O resolution M S C . 3 3 8 (91);
the n u m b e r o f existing p a r a 5.1.15.3 h a s been deleted, the t e x t has r e m a i n e d u n c h a n g e d .
CONTENTS
G E N E R A L R E G U L A T I O N S F O R T H EC L A S S I F I C A T I O N A N D O T H E R
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2
General
Application
Classification and other activity
Rules
Documents
T h e Register responsibilities
Confidentiality
Surveys
9
9
9
10
11
12
12
13
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
ACTIVITY
General
Surveys during the manufacture o f mate
rials a n d products
S u r v e y s o f ships a n d F O P u n d e r c o n s t r u c t i o n ,
reconstruction and conversion
Surveys o f ships a n d F O P i n service. . . .
Surveys i n compliance w i t h the requirements
o f international conventions and agreements.
R U L E S F O RT H EC L A S S I F I C A T I O N A N D C O N S T R U C T I O N O F S E A - G O I N G
P A R T I. CLASSIFICATION
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
General
Definitions and explanations
Application
Compliance w i t h statutory requirements .
Class o f a ship
General
Class n o t a t i o n o f a ship
A d d i t i o n a l characteristics
A l t e r a t i o n o f m a r k s i n class n o t a t i o n . .
Technical documentation
General
Plan approval documentation
P r o g r a m m e s o f m o o r i n g a n d sea t r i a l s . .
Classification o f refrigerating plants . . .
General
Class o f a refrigerating plant
Technical d o c u m e n t a t i o n o f a refrige
rating plant
P A R T .
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
2
2.1
15
15
18
19
19
19
20
29
30
30
30
30
37
38
38
38
39
H U L L
Design principles
General
Materials
Design loads
Longitudinal strength
V i b r a t i o n o f h u l l structures. V i b r a t i o n
standards
Requirements f o r scantlings o f h u l l
structural members
W e l d e d structures a n d joints
General requirements for hull
structures
General
41
41
49
54
56
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
64
64
71
80
80
3.11
3.12
A p p
A p p
13
13
13
14
14
SHIPS
Shell plating
Single b o t t o m
Double bottom
Side f r a m i n g
Decks and platforms
Bulkheads, propeller shaft t u n n e l . . . .
F o r e a n d after ends
Pillars and panting beams
Stems, keels, r u d d e r h o r n , propeller shaft
brackets, fixed nozzles o f propeller . . .
Seatings o f machinery a n d boilers . . . .
Superstructures, deckhouses and quarter
decks
M a c h i n e r y casings
Bulwarks
Requirements for structures of ships
of special design
Ships w i t h large deck openings
R o l l - o n / r o l l - o f f ships
B u l k carriers and o i l o r b u l k dry cargo
carriers
O r e carriers and ore o r o i l carriers . . .
Tankers
Vessels o f dredging fleet
F i s h i n g vessels a n d special p u r p o s e
s h i p s u s e d f o r p r o c e s s i n g o f sea l i v i n g
resources
S u p p l y vessels
Tugs
S t r e n g t h e n i n g o f ice ships
a n d icebreakers
Ice strengthening o f tugs
Floating docks
e n d i x 1. Testing procedures o f watertight
compartments
e n d i x 2. R e q u i r e m e n t s t o ship l o a d i n g
instruments
81
83
86
93
97
103
108
114
115
118
120
125
126
127
127
130
133
142
144
145
159
166
167
168
189
191
202
207
Contents
P A R T . E Q U I P M E N T , A R R A N G E M E N T S A N D O U T F I T
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
General
Application
Scope o f survey
General
W o r k i n g a n d a l l o w a b l e stresses
Materials and welding
D e s i g n accelerations due to heave
o f t h e sea
2
R u d d e r a n d steering gear
2.1 G e n e r a l
2.2 Initial design data
2.3 R u d d e r s t o c k
2.4 R u d d e r blade a n d steering nozzle . . . .
2.5 C o u p l i n g s
2.6 R u d d e r pintles
2.7 R u d d e r axle
2.8 R u d d e r stock bearings
2.9 Steering gear
2.10 Efficiency o f rudders a n d steering nozzles .
3
Anchor arrangement
3.1 G e n e r a l
3.2 E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r
3.3 B o w e r a n d s t r e a m a n c h o r s
3.4 C h a i n cables a n d ropes f o r b o w e r anchors.
3.5 C h a i n cable o r w i r e r o p e f o r s t r e a m a n c h o r .
3.6 A n c h o r appliances
3.7 A n c h o r m a c h i n e r y
3.8 S p a r e p a r t s
4
Mooring arrangement
4.1 G e n e r a l
4.2 M o o r i n g ropes
4.3 M o o r i n g appliances
4.4 M o o r i n g machinery
5
Towing arrangement
5.1 G e n e r a l
5.2 T o w line
5.3 T o w i n g a p p l i a n c e s
5.4 Special a r r a n g e m e n t f o r tugs
5.5 T o w i n g w i n c h e s
5.6 T o w line f o r t o w i n g w i n c h
5.7 E m e r g e n c y t o w i n g a r r a n g e m e n t s
o n ships
6
Signal masts
6.1 G e n e r a l
6.2 S t a y e d m a s t s
6.3 U n s t a y e d m a s t s
6.4 M a s t s o f special c o n s t r u c t i o n
7
Openings i n hull, superstructures a n d deck
houses a n d their closing appliances . . . .
7.1 G e n e r a l
7.2 Side scuttles
7.3 F l u s h d e c k scuttles
212
212
212
214
215
215
215
216
216
216
217
224
224
227
229
230
230
230
232
235
235
238
239
240
241
241
242
243
243
243
243
244
244
244
244
245
245
245
246
246
246
248
248
248
248
249
249
249
250
252
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
8
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
9
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
A p p
Openings i n shell plating and their closing

appliances
Superstructures and deckhouses
E n g i n e a n d boiler casings
C o m p a n i o n hatches, skylights a n d venti
lating trunks
Ventilators
Manholes
H a t c h w a y s o f dry cargo holds
H a t c h w a y s o f cargo tanks i n type " A "
ships
Openings in watertight subdivision
bulkheads a n d their closing appliances .
C a r g o h a t c h covers o f b u l k carriers, ore
carriers and c o m b i n a t i o n carriers . . . .
Access t o spaces i n the cargo area
o f o i l tankers and b u l k carriers
Additional requirements for openings and
their closing appliances i n r o - r o ships . .
Arrangement a n d equipment o f ship's
spaces, various equipment, arrangements
a n d outfit
General
L o c a t i o n o f spaces
N a v i g a t i o n bridge
E q u i p m e n t o f dry cargo holds
Exits, doors, corridors, stairways and
vertical ladders
G u a r d rails, b u l w a r k a n d gangways . . .
H o i s t i n g gear o f shipborne b a r g e s . . . .
Pilot transfer arrangements, means
of embarkation and disembarkation. . .
E m e r g e n c y outfit
General
Items required
Storage o f emergency outfit
Marking
Collision mats
e n d i x . Calculation o f the w i d t h o f
s t a i r w a y s f o r m i n g m e a n s o f escape o n
passenger ships a n d o n special purpose
ships c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 60 persons. . .
252
255
256
257
260
260
260
275
275
279
282
282
283
283
283
283
283
285
289
290
290
291
291
291
293
293
293
295
P A R T IV. STABILITY
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
General
Application
Scope o f survey
General technical requirements
I n c l i n i n g tests a n d l i g h t - w e i g h t c h e c k s .
Departures f r o m the Rules
C o n d i t i o n s o f sufficient stability
298
298
298
299
299
304
306
306
Contents
1.8
Passage o f ships f r o m one p o r t to

another
2
General requirements for stability
2.1 W e a t h e r criterion
2.2 R i g h t i n g lever curve
2.3 M e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t
2.4 A l l o w a n c e f o r icing
3
Additional requirements for stability . . .
3.1 Passenger ships
3.2 D r y cargo ships
3.3 T i m b e r c a r r i e r s
3.4 T a n k e r s
3.5 F i s h i n g vessels
3.6 Special p u r p o s e ships
3.7 T u g s
3.8 Vessels o f d r e d g i n g fleet
3.9 S h i p s u n d e r 2 4 m i n l e n g t h
3.10 C o n t a i n e r ships
3.11 S u p p l y vessels
3.12 Ships o f river-sea n a v i g a t i o n
4
Requirements for the stability o f floating
cranes, crane ships, transport pontoons,
docks a n d berth-connected ships
4.1 F l o a t i n g cranes a n d crane ships
4.2 P o n t o o n s
4.3 F l o a t i n g d o c k s
4.4 Berth-connected ships
A p p e n d i x 1 . Instructions o n drawing up
Information o n Stability
A p p e n d i x 2 . D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f capsizing
m o m e n t for a floating crane
Table o f symbols for the values
adopted
in Part I V "Stability"
307
307
307
309
309
309
310
310
311
311
312
314
315
315
317
319
320
321
322
323
323
331
331
332
334
343
346
P A R T V. SUBDIVISION
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
General
Application
Scope o f survey
General technical requirements
Satisfactory subdivision
Permeability index
Probability estimation o f subdivision . . .
General
Required subdivision index R
Attained subdivision index A
Calculation o f the factor p
Calculation o f the factor s
Permeability
Special requirements concerning passenger
ship stability
T i m b e r deck cargo i n the context o f damage
stability requirements
B o t t o m damage
t
348
348
348
349
350
352
352
353
353
353
353
354
355
357
357
359
359
3
3.1
3.2
3.3
D a m a g e trim a n d stability
General
E x t e n t o f design damage
Requirements for damage t r i m and stability
characteristics
3.4 A d d i t i o n a l r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r d a m a g e t r i m
and stability
4
Special requirements for type " B " ships
with reduced freeboard a n d for type " A "
ships
4.1 General
4.2 T r i m and loading condition o f the ship
prior to damage
4.3 E x t e n t o f d a m a g e
4.4 D a m a g e t r i m a n d stability
5
Requirements for ships in service
5.1 B u l k carriers, ore carriers a n d c o m b i n a t i o n
carriers
A p p e n d i x 1 . Guidelines for the preparation
o f subdivision and damage stability
calculations
A p p e n d i x 2 . D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f the m o u l d e d
penetration depth b
P A R T V I .F I R E
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
359
359
360
360
361
366
366
367
367
368
369
369
370
372
PROTECTION
General
Application
Scope o f survey
Fire plans
C a t e g o r i e s o f ship's spaces
Subdivision and testing o f materials
and products according to the F i r e Test
Procedures Code
1.7 A l t e r n a t i v e d e s i g n a n d a r r a n g e m e n t s . .
2
Structural fire protection
2.1 G e n e r a l
2.2 Passenger ships
2.3 C a r g o ships
2.4 O i l tankers
3
Fire-fighting equipment a n d systems . . .
3.1 G e n e r a l
3.2 W a t e r fire m a i n s y s t e m
3.3 S p r i n k l e r s y s t e m
3.4 Pressure w a t e r - s p r a y i n g s y s t e m
3.5 W a t e r - s c r e e n s y s t e m
3.6 D r e n c h i n g s y s t e m
3 . 7 F o a m fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m
3.8 C a r b o n d i o x i d e s m o t h e r i n g s y s t e m . . .
3 . 9 E q u i v a l e n t fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s
f o r m a c h i n e r y spaces a n d c a r g o p u m p r o o m s
m e n t i o n e d i n 1.5.7.1
3.10 D r y p o w d e r system
3 . 1 1 A e r o s o l fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m . . . .
373
373
373
375
375
376
378
378
379
379
386
398
403
408
408
414
418
420
421
421
422
427
430
430
431
3.12 F i x e d local application fire extinguishing

systems f o r use i n m a c h i n e r y spaces . . . 4 3 2
3.13 T e s t i n g o f fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g systems . . .
433
4
Fire detection a n d alarm systems
435
4.1 General
435
4.2 F i r e detection a n d fire a l a r m systems . . 435
4.3 F i r e w a r n i n g a l a r m s
439
5
Fire-fighting outfit, spare parts a n d tools . 4 4 0
5.1 F i r e - f i g h t i n g o u t f i t
440
5.2 Spare p a r t s a n d t o o l s
450
6
R e q u i r e m e n t s for fire protection
o f special p u r p o s e ships a n d special facilities
on ships
451
6.1 Ships equipped w i t h helidecks
451
6.2 Special p u r p o s e ships
451
6 . 3 O i l t a n k e r s ( > 6 0 C)
452
6.4 O i l recovery ships a n d bilge w a t e r r e m o v i n g
ships
453
6.5 B e r t h - c o n n e c t e d ships
453
6.6 S h i p s h a v i n g a d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k o f
provision with means for
fire-fighting
a b o a r d o t h e r ships
453
7
Special requirements for ships carrying
packaged dangerous goods a n d dangerous
goods in bulk
456
7.1 G e n e r a l
456
Contents
7.2
7.3
8
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
8.13
8.14
Ships carrying packaged dangerous goods

or dangerous goods i n bulk
Ships carrying packaged irradiated nuclear
fuel, p l u t o n i u m a n d high-level radioactive
wastes ( I N F cargo)
R e q u i r e m e n t s for fire protection o f c a r g o
s h i p s o f l e s s t h a n 500 g r o s s t o n n a g e . . .
General, definitions and application. . .
Fire control plans
A l t e r n a t i v e design a n d arrangements . .
S t r u c t u r a l fire p r o t e c t i o n
Requirements for materials
Fire-fighting equipment a n d systems . .
W a t e r fire m a i n s y s t e m
F i x e d fire d e t e c t i o n a n d fire a l a r m
systems
Fire-fighting outfit
A d d i t i o n a l fire s a f e t y m e a s u r e s
for oil tankers
S h i p s n o t fitted w i t h p r o p e l l i n g
machinery
Ships carrying packaged dangerous goods
or dangerous goods i n bulk
O i l recovery ships a n d bilge w a t e r r e m o v i n g
ships
Special purpose ships
456
460
461
461
461
462
462
463
463
464
465
465
466
466
466
466
466
G E N E R A L REGULATIONS F O RT H E CLASSIFICATION
AND OTHER ACTIVITY
1 GENERAL
1.1
APPLICATION
1.1.1 T h e p r e s e n t G e n e r a l R e g u l a t i o n s f o r t h e
Classification and Other Activity cover the activity o f
Russian M a r i t i m e Register o f Shipping during:
review and agreement o f technical documentation for the construction, repair, conversion a n d
m o d e r n i z a t i o n o f ships a n d fixed offshore p l a t f o r m s ,
for the manufacture o f materials and products for
ships a n d F O P ;
technical supervision o f the construction, repair,
c o n v e r s i o n a n d m o d e r n i z a t i o n o f ships a n d F O P ;
survey o f ships a n d F O P i n service.
T h e classification a c t i v i t y o f t h e R e g i s t e r is based
on Regulations Concerning the Classification o f
Ships and Fixed Offshore Platforms.
T h e R e g i s t e r a c t i v i t y i n o t h e r spheres is r e g u l a t e d
by relevant documents.
1
1.2 C L A S S I F I C A T I O N A N D O T H E R
ACTIVITY
1.2.1 T h e R e g i s t e r c a r r i e s o u t s u r v e y s o f a n d a s signs class t o c i v i l ships. T h e R e g i s t e r is a m e m b e r t o

I n t e r n a t i o n a l A s s o c i a t i o n o f Classification Societies
( I A C S ) a n d uses I A C S resolutions i n its activity.
The Register maintains a quality management
system complying w i t h the requirements o f I A C S and
w i t h the applicable requirements o f I S O 9001 w h i c h
is c o n f i r m e d b y t h e r e l e v a n t certificates.
Besides, being a u t h o r i z e d b y the g o v e r n m e n t o f
the Russian Federation and by the governments o f
other countries t o act o n their behalf, the Register
carries o u t surveys w i t h i n its terms o f reference f o r
compliance w i t h the requirements o f international
conventions and agreements to w h i c h the above
g o v e r n m e n t s are parties.
1.2.2 T h e R e g i s t e r e s t a b l i s h e s t e c h n i c a l r e q u i r e m e n t s e n s u r i n g safe o p e r a t i o n o f ships a n d F O P i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e i r p u r p o s e , s a f e t y o f l i f e a t sea
a n d safe c a r r i a g e o f g o o d s b y sea a n d i n l a n d w a t e r w a y s as w e l l as p o l l u t i o n p r e v e n t i o n f r o m ships; i t
carries o u t surveys f o r compliance w i t h the above
r e q u i r e m e n t s , assigns class t o ships a n d F O P , determines the net a n d gross tonnage o f sea-going ships
3
h e r e i n a f t e r referred to as "the Register",

h e r e i n a f t e r referred to as " F O P " .
'Hereinafter referred to as " R F " .
and F O P and the tonnage measurement characteristics o f i n l a n d n a v i g a t i o n ships i n its registry.

1.2.3 T h e R e g i s t e r a c t i v i t y i s b a s e d o n t h e r u l e s
p u b l i s h e d b y t h a t b o d y a n d is a i m e d a t d e t e r m i n i n g
w h e t h e r ships a n d F O P i n i t s r e g i s t r y as w e l l as m a terials a n d products intended for the construction
a n d repair o f ships a n d F O P a n d their e q u i p m e n t
c o m p l y w i t h the rules a n d w i t h additional requirements. T h e application a n d fulfillment o f the rules
and additional requirements are the obligation o f
design bureaus, shipowners, shipyards a n d m a n u facturers o f materials and products to w h i c h the requirements o f the rules apply.
The interpretation o f the requirements o f the
R e g i s t e r rules a n d o t h e r n o r m a t i v e d o c u m e n t s is
within the competence o f the Register only.
T h e Register activity does n o t substitute f o r t h e state
surveillance o f m e r c h a n t shipping carried o u t b y b o t h
the federal b o d y o f executive p o w e r responsible f o r
transport a n d the federal b o d y o f executive p o w e r responsible f o r fisheries, n o r does i t interfere w i t h shipowners, shipyards o r manufacturers technical control.
1.2.4 C l a s s i f i c a t i o n a c t i v i t y o f t h e R e g i s t e r c o v e r s
the following:
.1 d e v e l o p m e n t a n d p u b l i c a t i o n o f r u l e s a n d
other normative documents;
.2 r e v i e w a n d a p p r o v a l o f t e c h n i c a l d o c u m e n t a t i o n ;
.3 c o n s t r u c t i o n , c o n v e r s i o n , m o d e r n i z a t i o n a n d
repair surveys o f ships a n d F O P , m a n u f a c t u r e a n d
r e p a i r s u r v e y s o f p r o d u c t s as w e l l as m a n u f a c t u r e
surveys o f materials for shipbuilding;
.4 s u r v e y s o f s h i p s a n d F O P i n s e r v i c e ;
.5 a s s i g n m e n t , r e n e w a l a n d r e i n s t a t e m e n t o f c l a s s ;
.6 d r a w i n g u p a n d i s s u e o f t h e R e g i s t e r c e r t i f i c a t e s .
1.2.5 O t h e r a c t i v i t y o f t h e R e g i s t e r c o v e r s :
.1 c o n s t r u c t i o n , c o n v e r s i o n , m o d e r n i z a t i o n a n d
r e p a i r s u r v e y s o f ships a n d F O P as w e l l as m a n u facture and repair surveys o f products and m a n u facture surveys o f materials for shipbuilding for
compliance w i t h the provisions o f international conventions and agreements;
.2 s h i p a n d F O P r e g i s t r y ;
.3 i n v e s t i g a t i o n a n d r e g i s t r y o f a c c i d e n t s a b o a r d s h i p s ;
.4 i n i t i a t i v e s u r v e y s o f s h i p s ;
.5 j u d g e m e n t i n t e c h n i c a l m a t t e r s ;
.6 o t h e r a c t i v i t y n o t c o n n e c t e d w i t h c l a s s i f i c a t i o n
o f ships a n d F O P .
10
G e n e r a l Regulations
1.2.6 T h e R e g i s t e r c a r r i e s o u t c l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f t h e
f o l l o w i n g types o f sea-going ships, ships o f i n l a n d
navigation a n d fixed offshore platforms b o t h under
c o n s t r u c t i o n a n d i n service:
.1 passenger ships a n d t a n k e r s , tugs, ships d e signed f o rt h e carriage o f dangerous goods, pleasure
craft a l l these irrespective o f their m a i n engine p o w e r
and gross tonnage;
.2 s e l f - p r o p e l l e d s h i p s n o t m e n t i o n e d
under
1.2.6.1 w i t h m a i n e n g i n e p o w e r o f 5 5 k W a n d a b o v e ;
.3 s h i p s n o t m e n t i o n e d u n d e r 1 . 2 . 6 . 1 a n d 1 . 2 . 6 . 2
w i t h a gross tonnage o f 8 0 a n d above o r w i t h t h e
total power o fprime movers o f 100k W a n d above;
.4 f i x e d o f f s h o r e p l a t f o r m s o f d i f f e r e n t p u r p o s e s .
1.2.7 T h e R e g i s t e r c a r r i e s o u t s u r v e y s o f s h i p
refrigerating plants f r o m t h e p o i n t o f v i e w o f ship's
safety, safe c a r r i a g e o f g o o d s , a b s e n c e o f t h e o z o n e destructive effect o f refrigerants u p o n t h e e n v i r o n ment, as well as t h e classification o f ship refrigerating
plants.
1.2.8 T h e R e g i s t e r c a r r i e s o u t s u r v e y s o f s h i p
cargo-handling gear o f 1 t lifting capacity a n d u p wards.
1.2.9 O n s p e c i a l a g r e e m e n t , t h e R e g i s t e r m a y
c a r r y o u t surveys o f ships, installations o r arrangem e n t s n o t specified i n 1.2.6 t o 1.2.8.
1.2.10 T h e t e c h n o l o g i c a l a n d s p e c i a l a r r a n g e m e n t s o f f i s h i n g vessels, cable layers, vessels o f
dredging fleet a n d special p u r p o s e ships a r e n o t
subject t o t h e Register survey except t h e e q u i p m e n t
specified i n t h e relevant p a r t s o f t h e rules.
1.2.11 D r a f t s t a n d a r d s a n d o t h e r n o r m a t i v e
documents related t o t h e Register activity are reviewed a n d approved b y t h e Register.
1.2.12 T h e R e g i s t e r m a y i n i t i a t e e x a m i n a t i o n s o f
technical issues related t o i t s a c t i v i t y o r participate
therein.
1.2.13 T h e R e g i s t e r o f S h i p s i s p u b l i s h e d b y t h e
Register, containing t h e particulars o f self-propelled
sea-going ships o f 1 0 0 gross tonnage a n d u p w a r d s
classed w i t h t h e Register.
1.2.14 F o r s e r v i c e s r e n d e r e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r f e e s
a r e c h a r g e d a c c o r d i n g t o t h e scales o f fees o f t h e
Register. I f t h e c o m m i t m e n t s t o t h e Register includi n g those o n p a y m e n t f o r i t s services fail t o b e performed o r are improperly performed, t h e Register is
entitled n o t t o assign a class o r , w h e r e a class h a s
already been assigned, t o suspend o r w i t h d r a w i t
f r o m t h e ship i n connection w i t h w h i c h t h e c o m m i t ments t o t h eRegister, including those o np a y m e n t for
its services failed t o b e p e r f o r m e d o r w e r e i m p r o p e r l y
performed, a n d t o withdraw (make a n entry i n dicating cessation o f validity) t h e certificates issued
by t h e Register.
for the Classification
and Other
Activity
1.3 R U L E S
1.3.1 R u l e s t o b e a p p l i e d .
1.3.1.1 T h e f o l l o w i n g r u l e s a r e d e v e l o p e d , p u b lished a n d used b y t h e Register:
.1 R u l e s f o r t h e C l a s s i f i c a t i o n a n d C o n s t r u c t i o n
o f Sea-Going Ships;
.2 R u l e s f o r t h e E q u i p m e n t o f S e a - G o i n g S h i p s ;
.3 L o a d L i n e R u l e s f o r S e a - G o i n g S h i p s ;
.4 R u l e s f o r t h e C a r g o - H a n d l i n g G e a r o f S e a G o i n g Ships;
.5 R u l e s f o r t h e C l a s s i f i c a t i o n S u r v e y s o f S h i p s i n
Service;
o f I n l a n d N a v i g a t i o n Ships ( f o r E u r o p e a n Inland
Waterways);
.7 R u l e s f o r t h e S u r v e y s o f I n l a n d N a v i g a t i o n
Ships i n Service (for E u r o p e a n I n l a n d waterways);
.8 R u l e s f o r t h e C l a s s i f i c a t i o n , C o n s t r u c t i o n a n d
Equipment o f Mobile Offshore Drilling Units
( M O D U ) a n d Fixed Offshore Platforms (FOP);
of Chemical Tankers;
o f Nuclear Ships a n d Floating Facilities;
o f N u c l e a r S u p p o r t Vessels;
o f Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases i n Bulk;
o f Ships Carrying Compressed N a t u r a l G a s ;
o f M a n n e d Submersibles, Ship's D i v i n g Systems a n d
Passenger Submersibles;
of High-Speed Craft;
of Type A W I G Craft;
.17 R u l e s f o r t h e C a r r i a g e o f G r a i n .
.18 R u l e s f o r t h e C o n s t r u c t i o n o f H u l l s o f S e a G o i n g Ships a n d Floating Facilities Using R e inforced Concrete;
.19 R u l e s f o r t h e T o n n a g e M e a s u r e m e n t o f S e a G o i n g Ships;
.20 R u l e s f o r t h e T o n n a g e M e a s u r e m e n t o f I n land N a v i g a t i o n Ships;
.21 R u l e s f o r T e c h n i c a l S u p e r v i s i o n d u r i n g
Construction o fShips a n d Manufacture o f Materials
and Products f o r Ships;
.22 R u l e s f o r t h e S u r v e y o f S h i p P r o p u l s i o n
Plants f o r Compliance with Technical Standards o f
N o x i o u s Substance Emission into theA i r ;
o f S m a l l S e a F i s h i n g Vessels;
11
General
.24 R u l e s f o r t h e C l a s s i f i c a t i o n , C o n s t r u c t i o n a n d
Equipment o f Floating Offshore Oil-and-Gas Production Units;
o f Pleasure Craft;
.26 R u l e s f o r t h e O i l - a n d - G a s E q u i p m e n t o f
Floating Offshore Oil-and-Gas Production Units,
Mobile Offshore Drilling Units a n d Fixed Offshore
Platforms;
.27 R u l e s f o r P l a n n i n g a n d E x e c u t i o n o f M a r i n e
Operations.
1.3.1.2 B e s i d e s t h e r u l e s m e n t i o n e d u n d e r 1 . 3 . 1 . 1 ,
the following rules are applied i n t h e Register
activity:
.1 R u l e s f o r t h e M e a s u r e m e n t o f Vessels f o r t h e
Panama Canal;
.2 R u l e s f o r t h e T o n n a g e M e a s u r e m e n t f o r t h e
Suez Canal;
.3 R u l e s o f t h e R F R i v e r R e g i s t e r ;
.4 o t h e r e x t e r n a l n o r m a t i v e d o c u m e n t s a p p r o v e d
by t h e Register.
1.3.1.3 T h e R e g i s t e r a l s o d e v e l o p s , p u b l i s h e s a n d
uses guidelines o n t h e survey o f ships, F O P , m a t e r i a l s
a n d p r o d u c t s f o r s h i p b u i l d i n g as w e l l as o t h e r
guidelines a n d technical requirements regulating t h e
Register activity i n o t h e r spheres.
1.3.2 A p p l i c a t i o n o f t h e r u l e s t o s h i p s a n d F O P
under construction, materials a n d products.
1.3.2.1 N e w l y p u b l i s h e d r u l e s a n d a m e n d m e n t s
thereto c o m e i n t o force o n t h e date stated i n t h e
a n n o t a t i o n o n t h e back o ft h e title page. Before that
date, they shall be considered recommendations.
1.3.2.2 F o r n e w l y b u i l t s h i p s a n d F O P t h e r u l e s o r
a m e n d m e n t s thereto as i n effect o n t h e date o f signing
t h e c o n t r a c t f o r c o n s t r u c t i o n o f a s h i p (series o f sister
ships) o r t h e F O Prespectively a r e generally applied.
I f t h e s h i p / F O P design is submitted t o t h e Register f o r a p p r o v a l before t h e date o f signing t h e
contract f o rconstruction, the Rules o r amendments
thereto as i n effect o n t h e date o f t h e customer's r e q u e s t f o r t h e design r e v i e w a r e a p p l i e d . I n t h i s case, i f
the n e w rules o r a m e n d m e n t s t o t h e rules, according
to w h i c h t h e s h i p / F O P design w a sapproved become
effective o n t h e date o f signing t h e contract f o r c o n struction o f a s h i p / F O P , t h e design shall be revised
for compliance w i t h t h e above rules o r amendments.
1.3.2.3 M a t e r i a l s a n d p r o d u c t s , t e c h n i c a l d o c u m e n t a t i o n o n w h i c h is submitted t o theRegister f o r
a p p r o v a l after t h e enforcement o f t h e rules o r
amendments thereto, shall comply w i t h the requirements o fthe above rules a n d amendments.
1.3.3 A p p l i c a t i o n o f r u l e s t o s h i p s a n d F O P i n
service.
1.3.3.1 F o r s h i p s a n d F O P i n s e r v i c e t h e r e quirements o f t h e edition o f t h e rules, according t o
w h i c h t h e ships a n d F O P w e r e built, a r e applied,
unless o t h e r w i s e specified i n t h e subsequent editions

o f the rules a n d notices o fa m e n d m e n t s thereto issued
after p u b l i c a t i o n o ft h e above rules.
1.3.3.2 F o r s h i p s a n d F O P i n s e r v i c e , c l a s s i f i e d b y
the Register f o r t h e first time, t h e requirements o f the
rules effective f o r t h e p e r i o d o f c o n s t r u c t i o n o f t h e
given ship/FOP considering the requirements o f
subsequent editions o fthe rules, w h i c h apply t o ships
a n d F O P i n service.
1.3.3.3 T h e s c o p e o f a p p l i c a t i o n o f t h e n e w l y
p u b l i s h e d rules t o ships a n d F O P i n service, repair
after a n accident o r o t h e r s i m i l a r cases, as w e l l as a t
c o n v e r s i o n , shall be specified b y t h e Register c o n sidering practicability a n d technical feasibility i n each
p a r t i c u l a r case.
1.3.4 E q u i v a l e n t s .
1.3.4.1 T h e R e g i s t e r m a y a l l o w t o u s e m a t e r i a l s
a n d products, ship structures, F O Po r their separate
arrangements, other t h a n those required b y t h e rules,
p r o v i d e d t h e y a r e as effective as those specified b y t h e
rules. W h e r e ships a n d F O P covered b yi n t e r n a t i o n a l
conventions a n d agreements are concerned, equivalents m a y o n l y be a l l o w e d b y t h e Register i f they are
accepted b y t h e relevant conventions o r agreements.
I n t h e a b o v e cases, d a t a s h a l l b e s u b m i t t e d t o t h e
Register enabling t o ascertain that t h e materials,
structures a n d products i n question meet t h e req u i r e m e n t s ensuring t h e s h i p / F O P safety, safety o f
life a t sea, safe c a r r i a g e o f g o o d s b y sea a n d b y i n l a n d w a t e r w a y s as w e l l as ecological safety o f t h e
environment.
1.3.4.2 W h e r e t h e s t r u c t u r e o f a s h i p , F O P , m a chinery, arrangements, installations, equipment a n d
o u t f i t o r t h e m a t e r i a l s used c a n n o t be recognized as
being adequately verified i n service, t h e Register m a y
r e q u i r e special tests t o b e h e l d d u r i n g c o n s t r u c t i o n
a n d , i n case o f a ship i n service, m a y reduce i n t e r v a l s
between periodical surveys o r extend t h e scope o f
these surveys.
I f the Register considers i t necessary, appropriate
restrictive entries m a y be m a d e i n the classification o r
o t h e r certificates issued b y t h e Register a n d i n t h e
Register o f Ships. T h e restrictions are w i t h d r a w n
subsequent t o satisfactory results o b t a i n e d i n service.
1.4 D O C U M E N T S
1.4.1 A s a r e s u l t o f i t s a c t i v i t y , t h e R e g i s t e r i s s u e s
relevant certificates:
.1 certificates c o n f i r m i n g c o m p l i a n c e w i t h t h e
requirements o f Rules f o r the Classification a n d
C o n s t r u c t i o n o f Sea-Going Ships a n d rules f o r t h e
clas-sification a n dconstruction o fparticular types o f
ships;
12
.2 s e a w o r t h i n e s s c e r t i f i c a t e s s t i p u l a t e d b y t h e
Merchant Shipping Code;
.3 c e r t i f i c a t e s s t i p u l a t e d b y i n t e r n a t i o n a l c o n ventions a n d codes;
.4 s u r v e y r e p o r t s s e r v i n g a s t h e b a s i s f o r i s s u i n g
relevant certificates;
.5 c e r t i f i c a t e s f o r p r o d u c t s , m a t e r i a l s , w o r k s ,
services a n d processes c o n f i r m i n g t h e i r c o m p l i a n c e
w i t h the requirements o f the Register rules.
1.5 T H E R E G I S T E R
RESPONSIBILITIES
1.5.1 T h e R e g i s t e r e n t r u s t s c a r r y i n g o u t i n s p e c tions t o experts adequately skilled a n d p e r f o r m i n g

their duties w i t h proper diligence.
T h e R e g i s t e r is responsible f o r f a i l u r e t o p e r f o r m
or f o r i m p r o p e r performance o f its c o m m i t m e n t s o n l y
w h e n f o u n d g u i l t y ( b y i n t e n t o r carelessness).
T h e R e g i s t e r covers t h e losses t o persons e n t e r i n g
w i t h i t i n t o c o n t r a c t u a l r e l a t i o n s , as s t i p u l a t e d b y t h e
R u l e s , a n d w h o s e losses result f r o m its f a i l u r e t o
p e r f o r m o r i m p r o p e r performance o f its contractual
c o m m i t m e n t s due t o carelessness, t o the a m o u n t n o t
e x c e e d i n g t h e c o n t r a c t fees d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e b a s i s o f
t h e R e g i s t e r scales o f fees a n d p r o v i d e d s o l e l y t h e
causal relationship has been proved between such
for
the Classification
and Other
Activity
failure to p e r f o r m or improper performance o f cont r a c t u a l c o m m i t m e n t s b y t h e R e g i s t e r a n d t h e suff e r e d losses.
1.6
CONFIDENTIALITY
1.6.1 T h e R e g i s t e r c o n s i d e r s a s c o n f i d e n t i a l a n y
i n f o r m a t i o n o b t a i n e d i n t h e c o u r s e o f r e n d e r i n g services a n d does n o t p r o v i d e its contents o r copies
w i t h o u t prior agreement w i t h the customer to outside
o r g a n i z a t i o n s except f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g : i n cases specified i n the Register rules, u p o n the requirements o f
the current legislations, u p o n a decision o f the court,
o n t r i a l s a n d a t t h e r e q u e s t o f f l a g states.
1.6.2 N o t w i t h s t a n d i n g t h e g e n e r a l d u t y o f c o n fidentiality o w e d by the Register t o its customer i n
accordance w i t h the Register rules, the Register
participation i n I A C S Early W a r n i n g System requires
each I A C S m e m b e r to provide its fellow I A C S
m e m b e r s w i t h r e l e v a n t t e c h n i c a l i n f o r m a t i o n o n serious h u l l structural a n d engineering systems failures
to facilitate the proper w o r k i n g o f I A C S E a r l y
W a r n i n g System.
T h e Register w i l l p r o v i d e its c u s t o m e r w i t h details o f such i n f o r m a t i o n u p o n sending the same t o
I A C S members.
Surveys
13
2 SURVEYS
2.1
G E N E R A L
2.1.1 F o r t h e s u r v e y s t o b e c a r r i e d o u t , t h e
shipowners, administrations o f shipyards, m a n u facturers a n d other enterprises shall ensure that the
Register representatives have the o p p o r t u n i t y to
c a r r y o u t s h i p s u r v e y s , as w e l l as free access t o a l l
places w h e r e materials a n d products are m a n u factured a n d tested, a n d shall p r o v i d e a l l c o n d i t i o n s
for the surveys t o be carried o u t .
W h e r e necessary, the Register m a y require t o
p r o v i d e t h e access t o s u r v e y e d i t e m s as w e l l as t h e
conditions for performing the w o r k by Surveyors to
the Register together w i t h external auditors w h e n the
latter carry o u t audits o f the Register quality m a n agement system.
2.1.2 S h i p o w n e r s , s h i p y a r d s , d e s i g n b u r e a u s a n d
manufacturers shall fulfil the requirements o f the
Register o r S u r v e y o r s t o the Register w h e n they are
in the course o f their duty.
2.1.3 A n y a l t e r a t i o n s o n t h e p a r t o f s h i p o w n e r s ,
shipyards, design bureaus a n d manufacturers i n respect o f s h i p a n d F O P m a t e r i a l s a n d s t r u c t u r e s , as
w e l l as p r o d u c t s , t o w h i c h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e
R u l e s a p p l y shall be a p p r o v e d b y the Register before
t h e y are p u t i n t o service.
2.1.4 C o n t r o v e r s i a l i s s u e s a r i s i n g i n c o n n e c t i o n
w i t h the Register activity m a y be transferred b y
shipowners, shipyards, manufacturers and other enterprises t o the higher Register B r a n c h Office. T h e
j u d g e m e n t o f the R e g i s t e r H e a d Office is final.
2.1.5 T h e R e g i s t e r m a y r e f u s e f r o m a s u r v e y i n
case a s h i p y a r d o r m a n u f a c t u r e r s y s t e m a t i c a l l y v i o lates the R u l e s o r i f the o t h e r p a r t y t o a c o n t r a c t
violates it.
2.1.6 W h e n a m a t e r i a l o r p r o d u c t p r o v e s d e f e c tive under a valid certificate, the Register m a y require
a d d i t i o n a l tests o r r e l e v a n t repair t o be c a r r i e d o u t ,
a n d w h e r e t h e defects c a n n o t be r e p a i r e d , m a y cancel
the certificate.
2.2.2 M a t e r i a l s a n d p r o d u c t s w i t h i n t h e R e g i s t e r
t e r m s o f reference s h a l l be m a n u f a c t u r e d i n accordance w i t h technical documentation approved by
the Register.
2.2.3 D u r i n g s u r v e y s , t h e R e g i s t e r m a y c h e c k
compliance w i t h structural, technological and prod u c t i o n standards a n d processes w h i c h are n o t
regulated by the Rules, but w h i c h m a y influence the
fulfillment o f the Rules requirements.
2.2.4 D u r i n g s h i p a n d F O P c o n s t r u c t i o n o r r e p a i r ,
manufacture o f materials and products, the Register
shall approve the application o f n e w materials, products a n d processes, o r those s u b m i t t e d t o i t f o r the first
t i m e , t h a t are w i t h i n its t e r m s o f reference. F o r this
purpose, specimens o f the material, product o r the n e w
process shall be tested i n the scope agreed w i t h t h e
Register subsequent to their technical documentation
being approved b y the Register.
2.2.5 T h e R e g i s t e r s u r v e y s d u r i n g t h e m a n u facture o f materials a n d products are carried o u t b y
S u r v e y o r s t o t h e R e g i s t e r , o r m a y be e n t r u s t e d b y t h e
Register to another classification body i n accordance
with Agreement o n M u t u a l Substitution.
2.2.6 I n c a s e s s p e c i f i e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r , t h e
m a n u f a c t u r i n g w o r k s w i l l be surveyed b y the Register
to inspect the facilities f o r m a n u f a c t u r i n g materials
and products complying w i t h the Register requirements.
2.2.7 I n t h e p r o c e s s o f s u r v e y s d u r i n g m a n u facture materials and products shall undergo the
surveys a n d tests a c c o r d i n g t o the p r o c e d u r e s a n d
w i t h i n the scope prescribed by the Register.
2.2.8 M a t e r i a l s a n d p r o d u c t s m a n u f a c t u r e d i n a c cordance w i t h the Register r e q u i r e m e n t s shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h the d o c u m e n t s specified b y t h e Register a n d ,
w h e r e necessary, the b r a n d s a n d m a r k i n g enabling t o
determine their compliance w i t h the above documents.
2.2.9 I n s o u n d c a s e s , t h e R e g i s t e r m a y e s t a b l i s h
special c o n d i t i o n s f o r the a p p l i c a t i o n o f p a r t i c u l a r
products.
2.2 S U R V E Y S D U R I N G T H E M A N U F A C T U R E
OF MATERIALS A N D PRODUCTS
2.3 S U R V E Y S O F S H I P S A N D F O P
UNDER CONSTRUCTION, RECONSTRUCTION
AND CONVERSION
2.2.1 T h e r e l e v a n t p a r t s o f t h e R u l e s c o n t a i n l i s t s
o f materials and products the manufacture o f w h i c h
s h a l l be s u r v e y e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r , as w e l l as t e c h n o logical processes specified b y the Register.
B y special agreement, the Register m a y carry o u t
the surveys o f materials a n d products n o t m e n t i o n e d
i n the a b o v e lists.
2.3.1 S u r v e y s o f s h i p s a n d F O P u n d e r c o n s t r u c t i o n ,
reconstruction a n d conversion are carried o u t b y Surv e y o r s t o t h e Register o n t h e basis o f technical docu m e n t a t i o n a p p r o v e d b y the Register. T h e scope o f
e x a m i n a t i o n s , m e a s u r e m e n t s a n d tests d u r i n g s u r v e y s is
d e t e r m i n e d b y the Register o n t h e basis o f c u r r e n t i n structions a n d proceeding f r o m the situation.
14
2A
SURVEYS O F SHIPS AND F O P I N SERVICE
2.4.1 S u r v e y s o f s h i p s a n d F O P i n s e r v i c e i s
carried o u t according to Rules for the Classification
Surveys o f Ships i n Service a n d other n o r m a t i v e
documents o f the Register.
2.5 S U R V E Y S I N C O M P L I A N C E
W I T H T H ER E Q U I R E M E N T S O F I N T E R N A T I O N A L
CONVENTIONS AND A G R E E M E N T S
2.5.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e f o l l o w i n g i n t e r n a t i o n a l c o n v e n t i o n s a n d a g r e e m e n t s , as w e l l as
a m e n d m e n t s thereto, are t a k e n i n t o account i n the
relevant Rules:
International C o n v e n t i o n for the Safety o f Life at
Sea, 1974, P r o t o c o l s , 1978, 1988 thereto;
International C o n v e n t i o n for the Prevention o f
P o l l u t i o n f r o m Ships, 1973 a n d P r o t o c o l , 1978
thereto;
International C o n v e n t i o n o n L o a d Lines, 1966
a n d P r o t o c o l o f 1988 R e l a t i n g thereto (revised i n
2003);
International Convention on Tonnage Measurem e n t , 1969;
International C o n v e n t i o n o n Occupation Safety
a n d H e a l t h ( D o c k W o r k ) , 1979 ( I L O 152 ) ;
for
the Classification
and
Other
Activity
Shipping Regulations for the D a n u b e , 1975;

C o n v e n t i o n o n Tonnage Measurement o f Ships
o f I n l a n d N a v i g a t i o n , 1966;
International Regulations for Preventing Collisions at Sea, 1972;
F i n a l Acts o f the W o r l d A d m i n i s t r a t i v e R a d i o
Conference, 1997;
I M O Code for the Construction and E q u i p m e n t
o f Ships Carrying Dangerous Chemicals i n Bulk;
o f Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases i n Bulk;
I M O Code o f Safety for High-Speed Craft;
of M o b i l e Offshore Drilling Units;
I M O Code o f Safety for Special Purpose Ships;
I M O Code o f Safety for D i v i n g Systems;
inter-governmental agreements o n load lines i n
force;
other normative documents used i n international
sea-going practice.
The provisions o f the above conventions a n d
agreements a p p l y t o ships engaged o n i n t e r n a t i o n a l
voyages.
2.5.2 S u r v e y s o f i t e m s f a l l i n g u n d e r t h e r e q u i r e ments o f international conventions and agreements
are carried o u t i n c o n f o r m i t y w i t h a p p r o v e d technical
documentation and the n o r m a t i v e documents o f the
Register considering the requirements o f the above
conventions and agreements.
R U L E S F O RT H E CLASSIFICATION AND CONSTRUCTION

OF SEA-GOLNG SHIPS
1 GENERAL
1.1 D E F I N I T I O N S A N D E X P L A N A T I O N S
Definitions and explanations pertinent to the

general terminology used i n the n o r m a t i v e documents
o f the Register are given i n P a r t I " G e n e r a l Regulations
for Technical Supervision" o f Rules for Technical
Supervision during Construction o f Ships and M a n u facture o f Materials and Products for Ships.
F o r the purpose o f Rules for the Classification
and Construction o f Sea-Going Ships the following
definitions and explanations have been adopted
(unless expressly p r o v i d e d otherwise i n particular
parts o f the Rules).
1.1.1 D e f i n i t i o n s .
A b a r g e is a n o n - s e l f propelled cargo ship
designed t o be t o w e d o r p u s h e d .
A b a r g e c a r r i e r ( l i g h t e r c a r r i e r ) is a
d r y cargo ship carrying cargo i n shipborne barges (lighters).
A t u g is a ship specially i n t e n d e d f o r t h e t o w a g e
a n d p u s h i n g o f o t h e r ships a n d f l o a t i n g facilities.
Displacement o f a light ship
means
the displacement o f a ship w i t h o u t cargo, fuel o i l ,
lubricating o i l , ballast, fresh a n d boiler feed w a t e r i n
its tanks, p r o v i s i o n s , c o n s u m a b l e stores, a n d also
w i t h o u t passengers, c r e w a n d t h e i r effects.
A c a r g o s h i p is a n y ship w h i c h is n o t a
passenger ship (dry cargo ship, tanker, refrigerating
t r a n s p o r t ship, icebreaker, tug, pusher, salvage ship,
vessel o f dredging fleet, cable layer, special purpose
ship a n d other non-passenger ship).
A h o p p e r b a r g e is a self-propelled o r n o n self-propelled ship intended for the carriage o f spoil.
R e i d v a p o u r p r e s s u r e is the pressure o f
liquid v a p o u r established by standard procedure i n
t h e R e i d t e s t e r a t t h e t e m p e r a t u r e o f 3 7 , 8 C a n d a t
t h e gas t o l i q u i d v o l u m e r a t i o o f 4 : 1 .
D e a d w e i g h t means the difference between
the displacement o f a ship at the load waterline
corresponding t o the s u m m e r freeboard assigned f o r
t h e w a t e r w i t h a d e n s i t y o f 1,025 t / m a n d t h e
displacement o f a light ship.
A v e s s e l o f d r e d g i n g f l e e t is a selfp r o p e l l e d o r non-self-propelled vessel i n t e n d e d f o r
extraction and carriage o f spoil.
A d r e d g e r is a self-propelled o r non-selfpropelled ship intended for extraction o f spoil using
d r e d g i n g gear (buckets, s u c t i o n pipes, grabs, etc.) a n d
having n o holds f o r the storage o r carriage o f spoil.
1
h e r e i n a f t e r referred to as "the Rules".
A c o m b i n a t i o n c a r r i e r is a ship i n t e n d e d
for the carriage o f crude o i l a n d p e t r o l e u m products
i n b u l k , as w e l l as b u l k c a r g o e s ( b y these ships are
m e a n t ore/oil carriers, oil/bulk dry cargo carriers a n d
similar ships).
A c o n t a i n e r s h i p is a ship i n t e n d e d f o r the
carriage o f goods i n containers o f the international
standard a n d p r o v i d e d w i t h the cellular guides i n the
holds.
A c r a n e s h i p is a c o n s t r u c t i o n s i m i l a r t o the
floating crane, b u t o n a floating h u l l w i t h ship lines o r
lines o f a similar shape.
A n
icebreaker
is a self-propelled ship
intended for various types o f icebreaking operations
t o m a i n t a i n n a v i g a t i o n i n t h e f r e e z i n g seas ( f o r d e t a i l s
refer t o 2.2.3.1.1).
A t i m b e r c a r r i e r is a d r y cargo ship
intended f o r the carriage o f deck t i m b e r cargo.
P l a c e o f r e f u g e is a n y n a t u r a l l y o r a r t i f i c i a l l y s h e l t e r e d a q u a t o r i u m w h i c h m a y be u s e d as a
shelter b y a ship u n d e r conditions likely t o endanger
the safety o f the ship.
A b u l k c a r r i e r is a o n e d e c k ship w i t h t o p side a n d h o p p e r - s i d e t a n k s i n c a r g o spaces w h i c h is
p r i m a r i l y intended f o r the carriage o f b u l k cargoes.
T h i s s h i p t y p e a l s o i n c l u d e s s u c h t y p e s as o r e
carriers a n d c o m b i n a t i o n carriers. T o apply the t e r m
" b u l k carrier" correctly, o n e s h o u l d be guided b y the
provisions o f I M O resolution MSC.277(85).
A r o l l - o n / r o l l - o f f s h i p is a ship specially
designed for transportation o f various wheeled
vehicles (cars, r o l l i n g stock, t r a c k e d vehicles, trailers
w i t h and w i t h o u t cargo), i n w h i c h the cargo loading
operations are p e r f o r m e d preferably i n a h o r i z o n t a l
direction - by a roll-on/roll-off.
A d o c k l i f t s h i p is a d r y c a r g o ship a d a p t e d
to carry o u t cargo handling operations using the
d o c k i n g principle i n p o r t s a n d protected w a t e r areas.
A t a n k e r i s a ship intended for the carriage o f
liquid cargoes i n bulk, including:
a s p e c i a l t a n k e r is a ship i n t e n d e d f o r the
b u l k carriage o f liquid cargoes other t h a n o i l a n d
p e t r o l e u m products. T h e precise purpose o f the
special t a n k e r is stated b y the descriptive n o t a t i o n
i n the class n o t a t i o n i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2.2.28;
a n o i l t a n k e r is a ship i n t e n d e d f o r the carriage
i n b u l k o f crude o i l and petroleum products having a
f l a s h p o i n t 6 0 C a n d b e l o w f o r s e a - g o i n g s h i p s , 5 5 C
a n d b e l o w f o r ships o f i n l a n d n a v i g a t i o n , R e i d v a p o u r
pressure being b e l o w a t m o s p h e r i c pressure;
16
Rules
a n o i l t a n k e r ( > 6 0 C) is a sea-going
ship intended for the carriage o f p e t r o l e u m products
h a v i n g a f l a s h p o i n t o v e r 6 0 C i n b u l k ;
a n o i l t a n k e r ( > 5 5 C) is a ship o f i n l a n d
navigation intended for the carriage o f p e t r o l e u m
p r o d u c t s h a v i n g a f l a s h p o i n t o v e r 5 5 C i n b u l k ;
a n o i l r e c o v e r y s h i p is a ship i n t e n d e d f o r
recovery o f crude o i l and petroleum products having
a f l a s h p o i n t o f 6 0 C o r b e l o w f r o m t h e s e a s u r f a c e ;
a n o i l r e c o v e r y s h i p ( > 6 0 C) is a ship
intended for recovery o f crude o i l and p e t r o l e u m
p r o d u c t s h a v i n g a f l a s h p o i n t a b o v e 6 0 C f r o m t h e s e a
surface;
a b i l g e w a t e r r e m o v i n g s h i p is a ship
designed to r e m o v e the bilge water f r o m the
m a c h i n e r y spaces o f ships.
A p a s s e n g e r is e v e r y p e r s o n o t h e r t h a n the
master a n d the members o f the crew o r other persons
employed o r engaged i n any capacity o n board a ship
(special personnel) o n the business o f t h a t ship, a n d a
c h i l d u n d e r o n e y e a r o f age.
A p a s s e n g e r s h i p is a ship i n t e n d e d f o r o r
carrying m o r e t h a n 12 passengers.
A r o l l - o n / r o l l - o f f passenger
ship
( r o - r o p a s s e n g e r s h i p ) is a passenger ship
w i t h enclosed o r o p e n cargo spaces w h i c h are l o a d e d /
u n l o a d e d i n a h o r i z o n t a l direction, o r w i t h special
c a t e g o r y spaces as d e f i n e d i n 1.5.4.3 a n d 1.5.9,
Part V I "Fire Protection".
Classed a m o n g passenger r o - r o ships are also ferries,
i.e. ships l o a d e d / u n l o a d e d i n t h e h o r i z o n t a l d i r e c t i o n
w h i c h regularly carry passengers a n d w h i c h carry
vehicles w i t h fuel i n their t a n k s a n d / o r r a i l w a y carriages
o n o p e n a n d / o r enclosed decks at ferry crossings.
A f l o a t i n g c r a n e is a crane s t r u c t u r e o n a
f l o a t i n g h u l l o f p o n t o o n o r s i m i l a r type, w h i c h is
intended for cargo handling or other w o r k i n g operations ( m o u n t i n g , undersea, hydraulic engineering,
salvage, p i p e l a y i n g , etc.) a n d m a y be also used f o r
the carriage o f cargoes o n deck and/or i n the h o l d .
A l i g h t s h i p is a n o n - s e l f - p r o p e l l e d s h i p
h a v i n g special e q u i p m e n t (light appliances, f o g
s i g n a l i n g a r r a n g e m e n t s , r a d a r beacons, etc.) i n t e n d e d
for b o u n d i n g n a v i g a t i o n a l hazards a n d ships orientat i o n t o ensure safety o f n a v i g a t i o n .
A n o r e c a r r i e r is a ship p r i m a r i l y designed
for the carriage o f ore, the structure o f w h i c h includes
longitudinal bulkheads separating the central double
b o t t o m o r e h a t c h e s f r o m t h e side ones.
A f i s h i n g v e s s e l is a vessel used directly f o r
catching o r f o r catching a n d processing the catch (fish,
w h a l e s , seals, w a l r u s o r o t h e r l i v i n g r e s o u r c e s o f t h e sea).
A salvage
s h i p is a self-propelled ship
i n t e n d e d f o r r e n d e r i n g assistance t o ships i n distress
a t sea.
S p e c i a l p e r s o n n e l means all persons w h o
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
are n o t passengers o r m e m b e r s o f the crew o r

c h i l d r e n o f u n d e r o n e year o f age a n d w h o are
carried o n b o a r d i n c o n n e c t i o n w i t h the special
purpose o f t h a t ship o r because o f special w o r k being
carried o u t aboard that ship. Special personnel
include the following:
scientists, technicians a n d expeditionaries o n
ships engaged i n research, n o n - c o m m e r c i a l expeditions and survey;
personnel engaged i n training and practical
m a r i n e experience t o develop seafaring skills suitable
f o r a p r o f e s s i o n a l c a r e e r a t sea;
personnel w h o process the catch o f fish, whales
o r o t h e r l i v i n g r e s o u r c e s o f t h e sea o n f a c t o r y s h i p s
n o t engaged i n catching;
salvage p e r s o n n e l o n salvage ships, cable-laying
p e r s o n n e l o n cable-laying ships, seismic p e r s o n n e l o n
seismic survey ships, d i v i n g personnel o n d i v i n g
s u p p o r t ships, pipe-laying p e r s o n n e l o n pipe layers
and crane operating personnel o n floating cranes a n d
crane ships;
other personnel similar to those referred to above
w h o , i n the o p i n i o n o f the F l a g State M a r i t i m e
A d m i n i s t r a t i o n , m a y be referred t o this g r o u p .
A berth-connected
s h i p is a n o n - s e l f
propelled floating facility, h a v i n g the p o n t o o n - t y p e o r
ship-type h u l l , w h i c h is i n o p e r a t i o n either w h e n l y i n g
at anchor or bottomed or w h e n m o o r e d at quay. These
ships include f l o a t i n g docks, f l o a t i n g hotels a n d hostels,
floating workshops, floating p o w e r plants, floating
w a r e h o u s e s , f l o a t i n g o i l storages, etc.
A s h i p o f r i v e r - s e a n a v i g a t i o n is a
s h i p i n t e n d e d f o r n a v i g a t i o n a t sea a n d o n i n l a n d
waterways.
A s h i p b o r n e b a r g e ( l i g h t e r ) is a n o n self-propelled cargo ship u n m a n n e d and appropriated f o r t r a n s p o r t a t i o n i n specially equipped ships
(barge a n d lighter carriers) and f o r t o w i n g (pushing)
w i t h i n the specified restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n .
A s u p p l y v e s s e l is a vessel designed basically
for the carriage o f supplies a n d cargoes t o the m o b i l e
a n d fixed offshore units intended for the different
purposes, a n d fitted generally w i t h a f o r w a r d superstructure a n d a n after weather cargo deck f o r process i n g o f t h e c a r g o a t sea. T h e s h i p m a y b e u s e d f o r
towing operations provided the appropriate requirem e n t s o f the Register rules are c o m p l i e d w i t h .
A special purpose
s h i p means a mechanically self-propelled ship w h i c h by reason o f its
f u n c t i o n carries o n b o a r d m o r e t h a n 12 special
personnel, including passengers (the later shall n o t
exceed 12 people, o t h e r w i s e such ship s h o u l d n o t be
c o n s i d e r e d a special p u r p o s e s h i p , as i t is a p a s s e n g e r
ship). S u c h ships include research, expedition, h y d r o graphic, t r a i n i n g ships; w h a l e a n d fish f a c t o r y ships
a n d o t h e r ships engaged i n processing o f living
Part I.
Classification
r e s o u r c e s o f t h e sea a n d n o t e n g a g e d i n c a t c h i n g ;
salvage ships, cable-laying ships, seismic survey ships,
d i v i n g s u p p o r t ships, pipe layers, floating cranes a n d
crane ships.
A d r y c a r g o s h i p is a ship i n t e n d e d f o r the
carriage o f different cargoes (general cargoes, containers, t i m b e r , b u l k cargoes, etc.), except f o r the
liquid b u l k cargoes.
A p o n t o o n is a n o n - s e l f - p r o p e l l e d u n m a n n e d
ship intended for the carriage o f deck cargo a n d
h a v i n g n o hatches o n deck, except f o r s m a l l m a n h o l e s
f o r access i n t o t h e h u l l , w h i c h a r e c l o s e d b y c o v e r s
w i t h seal gaskets.
A h o p p e r d r e d g e r is a self-propelled o r
non-self-propelled ship intended for the extraction o f
spoil using dredging gear (buckets, suction pipes,
grabs, etc.) a n d h a v i n g h o l d s f o r t h e storage o r
carriage o f spoil.
C r e w means all persons carried o n board the
ship to provide navigation and maintenance o f the
ship, its m a c h i n e r y , systems a n d arrangements
e s s e n t i a l f o r p r o p u l s i o n a n d safe n a v i g a t i o n o r t o
p r o v i d e services f o r o t h e r persons o n b o a r d .
C r e w o f a f i s h i n g v e s s e l means persons
engaged i n any buisines o n board a ship connected
w i t h its purpose.
D e f i n i t i o n s o f particular types o f ships (nuclear
ships a n d f l o a t i n g facilities, n u c l e a r s u p p o r t vessels,
high-speed craft, dynamically supported craft, W I G
craft, gas carriers, c h e m i c a l t a n k e r s , pleasure craft,
drilling ships, m o b i l e o f f s h o r e drilling u n i t s a n d fixed
offshore platforms, m a n n e d submersibles and diving
systems) are given i n relevant rules f o r the classificat i o n a n d c o n s t r u c t i o n o f such types o f ships.
T h e R e g i s t e r r u l e s a r e l i s t e d i n 1.3, G e n e r a l
Regulations for the Classificationand Other Activity.
1.1.2 E x p l a n a t i o n s .
F o r the purpose o f the present R u l e s classification means development, publication and application
of the Rules continuous compliance w i t h which will,
along w i t h the proper maintenance o f the ship by the
o w n e r o r b y the operator, ensure:
structural strength and integrity o f the hull and
its e l e m e n t s i n c l u d i n g s t r u c t u r a l fire p r o t e c t i o n ;
seaworthiness (stability) o f the ship under all
s p e c i f i e d l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s a n d u n d e r p a r t i c u l a r seaand-wind conditions;
safe a n d r e l i a b l e o p e r a t i o n o f i t s p r o p u l s i o n
plant, systems a n d devices f o r ship c o n t r o l , o t h e r
systems, auxiliary m a c h i n e r y a n d e q u i p m e n t including fire-fighting equipment,
a n d t h e r e b y p e r m i t safe o p e r a t i o n o f t h e s h i p i n
accordance w i t h its purpose.
17
Date o f contract for c o n s t r u c t i o n

a ship (series o f ships).
.1 T h e d a t e o f " c o n t r a c t f o r c o n s t r u c t i o n " o f a
ship is the d a t e o n w h i c h the c o n t r a c t t o b u i l d the
ship is signed between the prospective o w n e r a n d the
shipbuilder. This date and the construction numbers
(i.e. h u l l n u m b e r s ) o f a l l t h e s h i p s i n c l u d e d i n t h e
c o n t r a c t shall be declared t o the Register b y the p a r t y
a p p l y i n g f o r t h e a s s i g n m e n t o f class t o a n e w b u i l d i n g .
.2 T h e d a t e o f " c o n t r a c t f o r c o n s t r u c t i o n " o f a
series o f ships, i n c l u d i n g specified o p t i o n a l ships f o r
w h i c h the o p t i o n is u l t i m a t e l y exercised, is t h e date
o n w h i c h t h e c o n t r a c t t o b u i l d t h e series is signed
between the prospective o w n e r and the shipbuilder.
Ships built u n d e r a single contract f o r construct i o n are c o n s i d e r e d a "series o f ships" i f t h e y are b u i l t
to the same a p p r o v e d plans f o r classification
p u r p o s e s . H o w e v e r , ships w i t h i n a series m a y h a v e
design alterations f r o m the original design provided:
.2.1 s u c h a l t e r a t i o n s d o n o t a f f e c t m a t t e r s r e l a t e d
to classification; o r
.2.2 i f t h e a l t e r a t i o n s a r e s u b j e c t t o c l a s s i f i c a t i o n
requirements, these alterations shall c o m p l y w i t h the
classification r e q u i r e m e n t s i n effect o n t h e d a t e o n w h i c h
the alterations are contracted between the prospective
o w n e r a n d the shipbuilder or, i n the absence o f the
alteration contract, c o m p l y w i t h the classification
r e q u i r e m e n t s i n effect o n the date o n w h i c h the
alterations are submitted t o the Register f o r approval.
T h e o p t i o n a l ships w i l l be considered p a r t o f t h e same
series o f s h i p s i f t h e o p t i o n i s e x e r c i s e d n o t l a t e r t h a n
1 y e a r a f t e r t h e c o n t r a c t t o b u i l d t h e series w a s s i g n e d .
3 I f a contract f o r c o n s t r u c t i o n is later a m e n d e d t o
include a d d i t i o n a l ships o r a d d i t i o n a l o p t i o n s , the date
o f "contract f o r c o n s t r u c t i o n " f o r such ships is the date
o n w h i c h the a m e n d m e n t t o the contract, is signed
between the prospective o w n e r a n d the shipbuilder. T h e
a m e n d m e n t t o t h e c o n t r a c t s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d as a
"new contract" t o w h i c h the above explanations apply.
.4 I f a c o n t r a c t f o r c o n s t r u c t i o n i s a m e n d e d t o
change the ship type, the date o f "contract f o r
c o n s t r u c t i o n " o f t h i s m o d i f i e d s h i p o r ships is t h e d a t e
o n w h i c h revised c o n t r a c t o r n e w c o n t r a c t is signed betw e e n the shipowner, o r shipowners a n d the shipbuilder.
of
N o t e s : 1. B y o p t i o n a l s h i p s , s h i p s a r e m e a n t , w h i c h a r e
included i n the contract with the condition o f the additional
confirmation o f their construction (order) b y a prospective owner.
2. T h i s e x p l a n a t i o n b e c a m e e f f e c t i v e o n 1 J u l y 2 0 0 9 .
A d d i t i o n a l r e q u i r e m e n t s are the requirements caused b y the i t e m features o r its operational conditions, w h i c h are n o t p r o v i d e d f o r b y the
rules i m p o s e d b y the Register i n w r i t i n g t o ensure the
safety o f i t e m s o f technical supervision.
18
Rules
M e a s u r e m e n t
o f d i s t a n c e s unless
explicitly stipulated otherwise i n the text o f the
regulations i n S O L A S , L o a d Line and M A R P O L
C o n v e n t i o n s a n d a n y o f t h e i r m a n d a t o r y C o d e s , as
w e l l as i n t h e t e x t o f t h e R e g i s t e r r u l e s a n d g u i d e l i n e s ,
d i s t a n c e s ( s u c h as t a n k l e n g t h , h e i g h t , w i d t h , s h i p ( o r
s u b d i v i s i o n o r w a t e r l i n e ) l e n g t h , etc.) shall be
measured by using moulded dimensions.
T h e R e g i s t e r c l a s s ( c l a s s ) is a c o m b i n a t i o n o f c o n v e n t i o n a l characters and descriptive
n o t a t i o n s assigned t o the ships, o t h e r f l o a t i n g
f a c i l i t i e s , as w e l l as t o f i x e d o f f s h o r e p l a t f o r m s ,
w h i c h define their structural features, purpose a n d
operational conditions stipulated by the Rules.
A n o p e r a t o r is a p h y s i c a l p e r s o n o r legal
entity operating a ship o n the basis o f a contract
concluded w i t h an owner or shipowner.
R u l e s ( t h e R e g i s t e r R u l e s ) a r e t h e set
o f the regulating and technical requirements for
objects u n d e r technical supervision.
T h e R e g i s t e r R u l e s a r e l i s t e d i n 1.3, G e n e r a l
Regulations for the Classification and Other Activity.
A n o w n e r is a p h y s i c a l p e r s o n o r legal e n t i t y
h a v i n g proprietary rights to a ship irrespective o f the
fact w h e t h e r he (she) o r i t operates the ship o n his
(her) o r its o w n , o r has placed i t i n the o p e r a t i o n o f
another person or entity whether o n the fiduciary or
s o m e o t h e r legal basis.
D u a l c l a s s is a class o f a ship classed w i t h t w o
societies entered i n t o a n a g r e e m e n t o n a d u a l class.
S p e c i a l c o n s i d e r a t i o n is the d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f the extent, to w h i c h a n object under technical
supervision meets the additional requirements.
S t a n d a r d s , as a p p l i e d t o t h e R u l e s , m e a n s a l l
kinds o f standards and other regulating and technical
documents o f all countries approved or recognized by
the Register.
A s h i p u n d e r c o n s t r u c t i o n is a ship
during a period f r o m the keel laying date till the date
o f issuing the documents for a ship.
K e e l laying date means: the date (day, m o n t h ,
year) o n w h i c h the installation at the building berth
o f a base section o r block (island) i n section o r b l o c k
(island) construction respectively, o r
such a stage o f c o n s t r u c t i o n at w h i c h construct i o n i d e n t i f i a b l e w i t h a specific ship begins a n d
assembly o f that ship has commenced comprising at
least 50 t o r 1 per cent o f the estimated m a s s o f a l l
s t r u c t u r a l m a t e r i a l s , w h i c h e v e r i s less.
F o r fibre-reinforced plastic ( F R P ) ships, the keel
l a y i n g d a t e s h a l l be i n t e r p r e t e d as t h e d a t e t h a t t h e
first structural reinforcement o f the complete thickness o f t h e a p p r o v e d l a m i n a t e schedule is l a i d e i t h e r
in or o n the m o u l d .
A s h i p i n s e r v i c e is a ship w h i c h is n o t
under construction.
and
Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
A s h i p o w n e r is a physical person o r legal

entity operating a ship o n his (her) o r its o w n behalf
irres-pective o f t h e fact w h e t h e r h e (she) o r i t is the o w n e r
o r is o p e r a t i n g t h e ship o n s o m e o t h e r legal basis.
1.2
APPLICATION
1.2.1 R u l e s f o r t h e C l a s s i f i c a t i o n a n d C o n s t r u c tion o f Sea-Going Ships apply to:

.1 p a s s e n g e r s h i p s , t a n k e r s , s h i p s i n t e n d e d f o r t h e
c a r r i a g e o f d a n g e r o u s g o o d s as w e l l as tugs, irrespective
o f the p o w e r o f m a i n engines a n d gross tonnage;
.2 s e l f - p r o p e l l e d s h i p s n o t s p e c i f i e d i n 1 . 2 . 1 . 1 , w i t h
the m a i n engines o f p o w e r o u t p u t 55 k W a n d u p w a r d s ;
.3 s h i p s n o t s p e c i f i e d i n 1 . 2 . 1 . 1 a n d 1 . 2 . 1 . 2 o f
80 gross tonnage a n d u p w a r d s o r ships fitted o u t w i t h
machinery and equipment o f total prime movers
p o w e r o u t p u t 100 k W a n d upwards;
.4 m a t e r i a l s a n d e q u i p m e n t t h a t s h a l l b e i n s t a l l e d o n
the a b o v e ships (lists o f r e l e v a n t m a t e r i a l s a n d e q u i p m e n t
are given i n the appropriate parts o f the Rules).
1.2.2 T h e p r e s e n t R u l e s a l s o a p p l y t o t h e
f o l l o w i n g types o f ships a n d f l o a t i n g facilities t o the
extent specified i n the relevant rules f o r their
classification and construction:
.1 n u c l e a r ships a n d f l o a t i n g f a c i l i t i e s ( r e f e r t o
Rules for the Classification and Construction o f
Nuclear Ships and F l o a t i n g Facilities);
.2 n u c l e a r s u p p o r t v e s s e l s ( r e f e r t o R u l e s f o r t h e
Classification and Construction o f Nuclear Support
Vessels);
.3 g a s c a r r i e r s ( r e f e r t o R u l e s f o r t h e C l a s s i f i c a t i o n
and Construction o f Ships C a r r y i n g Liquefied Gases i n
B u l k and Rules for the Classification and Construction
o f Ships C a r r y i n g Compressed N a t u r a l Gas);
.4 c h e m i c a l t a n k e r s ( r e f e r t o R u l e s f o r t h e
Classification and Construction o f Chemical T a n kers);
.5 m o b i l e o f f s h o r e d r i l l i n g u n i t s a n d fixed o f f shore p l a t f o r m s (refer t o Rules f o r the Classification,
Construction and Equipment o f Mobile Offshore
Drilling Units and Fixed Offshore Platforms);
.6 h i g h - s p e e d c r a f t ( r e f e r t o R u l e s f o r t h e C l a s sification and Construction o f High-Speed Craft);
.7 t y p e A W I G c r a f t ( r e f e r t o R u l e s f o r t h e C l a s s i fication
and Construction o f Type A W I G Craft);
.8 m a n n e d s u b m e r s i b l e s , s h i p ' s d i v i n g s y s t e m s a n d
passenger submersibles (refer t o R u l e s f o r the Classification
and Construction o f M a n n e d Submersibles,
Ship's D i v i n g Systems and Passenger Submersibles);
.9 p l e a s u r e c r a f t ( r e f e r t o R u l e s f o r t h e C l a s s i f i c a tion and Construction o f Pleasure Craft);
.10 s m a l l s e a fishing v e s s e l s ( r e f e r t o R u l e s f o r t h e
Classification a n d C o n s t r u c t i o n o f S m a l l Sea F i s h i n g
Vessels);
Part I.
Classification
19
.11 f l o a t i n g o f f s h o r e o i l - a n d - g a s p r o d u c t i o n u n i t s
(refer t o R u l e s f o r the Classification, C o n s t r u c t i o n
and Equipment o f Floating Offshore Oil-and-Gas
Production Units).
1.2.3 W i t h t h e R e g i s t e r c o n s e n t , t h e R u l e s m a y b e
applied f o r the classification o f ships n o t specified i n
1.2.1 a n d 1.2.2.
1.2.4 F o r s p e c i a l p u r p o s e s h i p s o f l e s s t h a n
500 gross tonnage, the applicable scope o f the present
R u l e s r e q u i r e m e n t s is d e t e r m i n e d b y the R e g i s t e r o n
the case-to-case basis.
1.2.5 T h e R u l e s s e t d o w n t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
r e g u l a t i n g the a s s i g n m e n t o f class t o a ship o r a
shipboard refrigerating plant.
1.2.6 C o n f i r m a t i o n o f c o m p l i a n c e w i t h t h e
requirements o f the Register rules is the Register
p r e r o g a t i v e a n d is c a r r i e d o u t i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h the
procedure established by it.
A n y statements t o the effect a supervised i t e m

complies w i t h the rules requirements, w h i c h are m a d e
or documentally supported by a body other t h a n the
Register and w h i c h are n o t c o n f i r m e d by the latter i n
accordance w i t h the established procedure, c a n n o t be
c o n s i d e r e d as e v i d e n c e o f s u c h a c o m p l i a n c e .
1.3 C O M P L I A N C E W I T H S T A T U T O R Y
REQUIREMENTS
1.3.1 A s f a r a s p r a c t i c a b l e , t h e R u l e s c o n s i d e r t h e
requirements o f i n t e r n a t i o n a l conventions and codes
c o m i n g w i t h i n the Register t e r m s o f reference (refer
to 2.5, G e n e r a l R e g u l a t i o n s f o r the Classification a n d
O t h e r Activity). S o m e o f t h e m are directly incorporated i n the text o f the Rules, w h i l e others are
referred to i n the text o f the Rules.
2 CLASS OF A SHIP
2.1
G E N E R A L
2.1.1 A s s i g n m e n t o f t h e R e g i s t e r c l a s s t o a s h i p
means c o n f i r m a t i o n b y the Register that the ship
construction complies w i t h the applicable requirements
o f the Register rules a n d its technical c o n d i t i o n
complies w i t h the conditions o f the ship operation;
the ship is registered w i t h the Register f o r a specified
period w i t h p e r f o r m i n g the surveys stipulated by Rules
for the Classification Surveys o f Ships for this period.
2.1.2 T h e R e g i s t e r m a y a s s i g n a c l a s s t o a s h i p p r o ceeding f r o m the results o f survey d u r i n g its construct i o n , as w e l l a s a s s i g n o r r e n e w a c l a s s t o a s h i p i n s e r v i c e .
2.1.3 R e n e w a l o f a s h i p ' s c l a s s m e a n s c o n f i r m a t i o n
by the Register that the construction and technical
condition o f the ship c o m p l y w i t h the provisions based
o n w h i c h a c l a s s h a s b e e n a s s i g n e d a s w e l l as e x t e n s i o n
o f vality o f the Register documents for a definite period
as r e q u i r e d b y t h e R u l e s .
2.1.4 C l a s s o f a s h i p i s , g e n e r a l l y , a s s i g n e d o r
renewed by the Register f o r 5 years, however, i n
s o u n d cases the R e g i s t e r m a y assign o r r e n e w a class
f o r a lesser p e r i o d .
2.1.5 I f a s h i p h a s t h e v a l i d R e g i s t e r c l a s s t h i s
m e a n s t h a t the ship's technical c o n d i t i o n i n full measure
o r t o a degree considered adequate b y the Register
complies w i t h the requirements o f the Rules w h i c h
a p p l y t o i t according t o its purpose, service c o n d i t i o n s
a n d class n o t a t i o n . I f a class o f a ship is v a l i d i t is
certified b y the valid Classification Certificate o n board.
2.1.6 C l a s s i f i c a t i o n C e r t i f i c a t e b e c o m e s i n v a l i d
a n d classification is a u t o m a t i c a l l y suspended i n the
f o l l o w i n g cases:
i f t h e s h i p as w h o l e o r h e r s e p a r a t e e l e m e n t s h a v e
not been subjected to scheduled periodical o r
occasional surveys i n specified t e r m s ( i f the special
s u r v e y has n o t been c o m p l e t e d o r the ship is n o t
under attendance for completion prior to resuming
trading, b y the due date; i f the a n n u a l survey has n o t
been completed w i t h i n three (3) m o n t h s o f the due
date o f the a n n u a l survey; i f the intermediate survey
has n o t been completed w i t h i n three (3) m o n t h s o f
the due date o f the third a n n u a l survey i n each
periodic survey cycle);
unless t h e ship is u n d e r attendance f o r c o m p l e t i o n o f t h e r e l e v a n t s u r v e y o r i f i n R S R u l e s i t is n o t
required otherwise;
after a n accident (the ship shall be s u b m i t t e d f o r
occasional survey at p o r t w h e r e the accident t o o k
place o r at the first p o r t o f call, i f the accident t o o k
place a t sea);
if alterations n o t agreed w i t h the Register have
t a k e n place i n the c o n s t r u c t i o n a n d / o r i f a n y change
has been made i n the equipment w h i c h m a y result i n
reducing the standards required by the Rules;
w h e n repair o f ship's items has been p e r f o r m e d
w i t h o u t the agreement and/or survey by the Register;
w h e n a ship navigates w i t h a draught exceeding
t h a t specified b y the Register f o r specific c o n d i t i o n s
as w e l l as i n case o f o p e r a t i o n o f a s h i p i n c o n d i t i o n s
which do n o t comply w i t h the requirements for
assigned class o f a ship o r the restrictions specified b y
the Register;
i f the prescribed specific r e q u i r e m e n t s w h i c h
during previous survey o f the ship were the conditions for assignment or retainment o f the Register
20
Rules
class h a v e n o t been fulfilled w i t h i n t h e specified

period;
if the process o f surveying the ship by the
Register has been suspended o n the shipowner's
initiative o r t h r o u g h his fault;
w h e n the ship has been t a k e n o u t o f service f o r a
long period (more than 3 months) for fulfillment o f
t h e R e g i s t e r r e q u i r e m e n t s (except t h e case w h e n a
ship is u n d e r r e p a i r f o r these purposes);
i n case o f t h e ship's seizure b y pirates.
T h e Register shall specially notify the s h i p o w n e r
o f suspension o f a ship's class a n d C l a s s i f i c a t i o n
Certificate.
2.1.7 S u s p e n d e d ( a s s t a t e d i n 2 . 1 . 6 ) c l a s s o f a s h i p
m a y be reinstated o n t h e basis o f satisfactory results o f
the appropriate periodical or occasional survey carried
o u t b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n t h e case o f ship t o be s u b m i t t e d f o r
survey. I n so d o i n g w h e n t h e ship is t a k e n o u t o f service
f o r a l o n g p e r i o d ( m o r e t h a n 3 m o n t h s ) , the scope o f
s u r v e y f o r r e i n s t a t e m e n t o f a ship's class s h a l l be
specially established b y the Register t a k i n g i n t o account
t h e a g e a n d c o n d i t i o n o f t h e s h i p a s w e l l as t h e p e r i o d f o r
w h i c h she is t a k e n o u t o f service.
D u r i n g the p e r i o d f r o m suspension o f a class t o
its reinstatement o r r e n e w a l the ship is considered t o
h a v e b e e n l o s t t h e R e g i s t e r class.
T h e class m a y be suspended f o r a p e r i o d o f n o m o r e
t h a n six m o n t h s unless expressly p r o v i d e d o t h e r w i s e
by the R S rules a n d n o r m a t i v e documents.
2.1.8 T h e c l a s s o f a s h i p i s w i t h d r a w n b y t h e
R e g i s t e r i n t h e f o l l o w i n g cases:
.1 u p o n e x p i r a t i o n o f t h e m a x i m u m t e r m o f class
suspension;
.2 w h e n t h e R e g i s t e r a n d / o r s h i p o w n e r c o n s i d e r
r e i n s t a t e m e n t o f t h e class s u s p e n d e d as s t a t e d i n 2.1.6
t o be impossible;
.3 u p o n t r a n s f e r o f t h e s h i p t o t h e c l a s s o f a n o t h e r
classification body;
.4 a t t h e r e q u e s t o f t h e s h i p o w n e r .
W i t h d r a w a l o f t h e ship's class m e a n s cessation o f
the Classification Certificate validity.
2.1.9 T h e c l a s s o f a s h i p s h a l l b e c a n c e l l e d d u e t o
h e r loss o r scrapping.
2.1.10 A f t e r a s s i g n i n g t h e c l a s s t h e R e g i s t e r i n t r o
duces the sea-going self-propelled ships a n d self-pro
pelled m o b i l e offshore drilling u n i t s o f 100 gross tonnage
a n d u p w a r d s i n t o the Register o f Ships a n d excludes
t h e m i n c a s e o f w i t h d r a w a l o r c a n c e l l a t i o n o f a class.
2.2 C L A S S N O T A T I O N O F A
SHIP
Ships a n d floating facilities, c o m p l y i n g fully o r t o

a degree considered adequate b y the Register w i t h the
relevant requirements o f the Rules, are assigned the
R S class w i t h t h e class n o t a t i o n as s p e c i f i e d b e l o w .
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T h e class n o t a t i o n assigned b y t h e R e g i s t e r t o a ship

or floating facility consists o f the character o f
classification a n d distinguishing m a r k s a n d descrip
tive notations defining structure and purpose o f a
ship o r floating facility.
T h e sequence o f distinguishing m a r k s a n d
descriptive notations ( i f any) being added to the
c h a r a c t e r o f c l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f a s h i p is set d o w n b y t h e
p r o v i s i o n s o f t h i s C h a p t e r as w e l l as b y r e l e v a n t
p r o v i s i o n s c o n c e r n i n g the class n o t a t i o n i n c l u d e d i n
rules f o r the classification a n d c o n s t r u c t i o n o f ships
o f s p e c i a l t y p e s , as l i s t e d u n d e r 1.2.2.
2.2.1 T h e c h a r a c t e r o f c l a s s i f i c a t i o n a s s i g n e d b y
the Register t o a ship o r floating facility consists o f
distinguishing marks:
KM, K M * , ( K M ) * f o r s e l f - p r o p e l l e d s h i p s
a n d floating facilities;
KE, K E * , ( K E ) * f o r n o n - s e l f - p r o p e l l e d
ships a n d f l o a t i n g facilities w i t h t o t a l p o w e r o u t p u t o f
prime movers 100 k W and upwards;
, K * , ( K ) * f o r o t h e r n o n - s e l f - p r o p e l l e d
ships a n d f l o a t i n g facilities.
2.2.2 D e p e n d i n g o n t h e R u l e s o n t h e b a s i s o f w h i c h
a ship o r a floating facility w a s surveyed, a n d the
classification b o d y w h i c h carried o u t the survey, the
c h a r a c t e r o f c l a s s i f i c a t i o n is established as f o l l o w s :
.1 ships a n d f l o a t i n g facilities b u i l t a c c o r d i n g t o
the Rules o f a n d surveyed by the Register are
assigned a class n o t a t i o n w i t h the character o f
c l a s s i f i c a t i o n : K M o r KE o r K ( r e f e r t o 2 . 2 . 1 ) ;
.2 s h i p s a n d f l o a t i n g f a c i l i t i e s w h i c h w e r e a s a
whole (or their hull or machinery installation,
machinery and equipment) built and/or manufac
tured according to the Rules o f another classification
body recognized by the Register and surveyed by that
body during their construction and manufacture,
w h e n classed w i t h the Register are assigned a class
n o t a t i o n w i t h the character o f classification: K M * ,
K E * o r K * (refer t o 2.2.1);
.3 s h i p s a n d f l o a t i n g f a c i l i t i e s w h i c h w e r e a s a w h o l e
(or their hull o r machinery installation,machinery and
equipment) built and/or manufactured w i t h o u t being
surveyed by a classification b o d y recognized b y the
Register o r w i t h o u t a n y survey o f a classification b o d y
a t a l l , w h e n classed w i t h t h e Register, are assigned a
class n o t a t i o n w i t h t h e character o f classification:
( K M ) * o r ( K E ) * o r ( K ) * (refer t o 2.2.1);
.4 s h i p s a n d f l o a t i n g f a c i l i t i e s f o r w h i c h t h e i r
design does n o t p e r m i t the character o f classification
o u t o f t h o s e listed i n 2.2.2.2 t o be assigned a class
n o t a t i o n w i t h the character o f classification: K M * o r
K E * or K * .
T h i s also applies w h e n a ship o r floating facility
changes a class t o t h e R e g i s t e r f r o m o n e o f t h e I A C S
M e m b e r Societies. T h e possibility o f such a change is
c o n s i d e r e d i n e a c h case b y t h e R e g i s t e r H e a d Office.
Part I.
Classification
.5 f o r s h i p s a n d floating f a c i l i t i e s c l a s s e d w i t h t h e
Register ( w i t h t h e character o f classification assigned
in compliance w i t h 2.2.2.1) along w i t h another
classification society ( d u a l class), t h e d i s t i n g u i s h i n g
m a r k is used i n s t e a d o f i n t h e R S class n o t a t i o n .
I n t h i s case, c l a s s i f i c a t i o n societies c a r r y i n g o u t
classification surveys o f ships ( f l o a t i n g facilities) act
u n d e r d u a l class agreement.
2.2.3 T h e R e g i s t e r i c e c a t e g o r y m a r k s a n d I A C S
See circular 812
polar class notations.
2.2.3.1 I c e c a t e g o r y m a r k s a r e a s s i g n e d t o
icebreakers a n d ice class ships i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h
the requirements o f 2.2.3.2 t o 2.2.3.6.
T h e I A C S p o l a r class n o t a t i o n s a r e assigned t o
p o l a r class ships i n accordance w i t h t h e requirements
o f Section 1, P a r t X V I I "Distinguishing M a r k s a n d
Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n t h e Class N o t a t i o n Specifying Structural a n d Operational Particulars o f Ships".
T h e I A C S p o l a r class n o t a t i o n s a r e assigned a t
the shipowner's discretion. A t the same time, f o r the
Register-classed ships intended f o r o p e r a t i o n i n
R u s s i a n a r c t i c seas as w e l l as f o r i c e b r e a k e r s t h e
Register ice category m a r k s are assigned i n c o m p l i ance w i t h 2.2.3.2 a n d 2.2.3.3.3.
A t the shipowner's discretion the I A C S polar
class n o t a t i o n s a n d t h e R e g i s t e r ice c a t e g o r y m a r k s
m a y b e a p p l i e d s i m u l t a n e o u s l y ( d o u b l e ice class),
p r o v i d e d such ships c o m p l y w i t h the requirements f o r
b o t h t h e I A C S p o l a r class ships a n d t h e R e g i s t e r ice
strengthened ships.
2.2.3.1.1 I c e b r e a k e r s
a r e specialized ships
intended f o r a l l kinds o f icebreaking operations:
escort o f ships i n ice, s u r m o u n t o f ice ridges, b r e a k i n g
o f a navigable channel, t o w i n g , breaking o f ice a n d
rescue o p e r a t i o n s . T h e r e a r e t w o m a i n r e g i m e s o f ice
navigation while performing icebreaking operations:
continuous motion and ramming.
2.2.3.1.2 I c e c l a s s s h i p s a r e s h i p s i n t e n d e d
for independent ice navigation including m o t i o n i n
fractures b e t w e e n floes, s u r m o u n t i n g o f ice i s t h m u s e s
and portions o f relatively thin compact ice, o r
n a v i g a t i o n i n ice w i t h icebreaker escort.
2.2.3.1.3 T h e f o l l o w i n g d e f i n i t i o n s a r e u s e d f o r
t h e d e s c r i p t i o n o f ice n a v i g a t i o n c o n d i t i o n s :
i c e c o n c e n t r a t i o n is a measure o f ice
continuity, w h i c h is characterized b y t h e ratio o f
the area covered b y ice t o t h e total water area using
10 n u m b e r scale;
o p e n f l o a t i n g i c e is ice o f concentration 4
t o 6, w h e r e m o s t o f the floes d o n o t t o u c h each other;
c l o s e f l o a t i n g i c e is ice o fconcentration 7
t o 8 w h e r e m o s t o f the floes t o u c h each o t h e r f o r m i n g
ice i s t h m u s e s ;
v e r y c l o s e f l o a t i n g i c e is ice o f concent r a t i o n 9 o r o v e r , b u t less t h a n 1 0 ;
c o m p a c t i c e is ice o fconcentration 10.
21
2.2.3.2 I f a n i c e b r e a k e r c o m p l i e s w i t h t h e
requirements o f t h e Rules, o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g ice
category m a r k s is added t o t h e character o f
classification: Icebreaker6; Icebreaker7; Icebreaker8;
Icebreaker!).
Icebreakers o f t h e above categories have t h e
f o l l o w i n g tentative service characteristics:
Icebreaker6 intended f o r ice breaking operat i o n s i n h a r b o u r a n d r o a d s t e a d w a t e r areas as w e l l as
i n n o n - a r c t i c f r e e z i n g seas w h e r e t h e i c e i s u p t o
1,5 m t h i c k . C o n t i n u o u s m o t i o n c a p a b i l i t y i n u n b r o k e n ice u p t o 1 m thick;
Icebreaker7 intended f o r ice breaking operat i o n s i n t h e a r c t i c seas o n c o a s t a l r o u t e s d u r i n g
winter/spring n a v i g a t i o n i n ice u p t o 2,0m t h i c k a n d
s u m m e r / a u t u m n navigation i n ice u p t o 2,5 m thick;
i n n o n - a r c t i c f r e e z i n g seas a n d m o u t h s o f r i v e r s
f l o w i n g i n t o a r c t i c seas i n i c e u p t o 2 , 0 m t h i c k . C o n tinuous m o t i o n capability i n u n b r o k e n ice u p t o
1,5 m t h i c k . T h e t o t a l s h a f t p o w e r n o t less t h a n 1 1 M W ;
I c e b r e a k e r 8 i n t e n d e d f o r ice b r e a k i n g o p e r a t i o n s
i n t h e a r c t i c seas o n c o a s t a l r o u t e s d u r i n g w i n t e r / s p r i n g
n a v i g a t i o n i n ice u p t o 3,0 m t h i c k a n d s u m m e r / a u t u m n
navigation w i t h o u t restrictions. C o n t i n u o u s m o t i o n
capability i n u n b r o k e n ice u p t o 2,0 m thick. T h e t o t a l
s h a f t p o w e r n o t less t h a n 2 2 M W ;
Icebreaker9 intended f o r ice breaking operat i o n s o n c o a s t a l r o u t e s i n a r c t i c seas d u r i n g w i n t e r /
s p r i n g n a v i g a t i o n i n ice u p t o 4,0 m t h i c k a n d s u m m e r /
a u t u m n navigation w i t h o u t restrictions. C o n t i n u o u s
m o t i o n capability i n u n b r o k e n ice over 2,0 m thick.
T h e t o t a l s h a f t p o w e r n o t less t h a n 4 8 M W .
2.2.3.3 C a t e g o r i e s o f i c e c l a s s s h i p s .
2.2.3.3.1 I f a s e l f - p r o p e l l e d s h i p c o m p l i e s w i t h t h e
relevant requirements o fthe Rules, o n e o fthe following
ice c a t e g o r y m a r k s s h a l l b e a d d e d t o i t s c h a r a c t e r o f
classification: I c e l , Ice2, Ice3, A r c 4 , A r c 5 , A r c 6 , A r c 7 ,
A r c 8 , Arc9. Ice category m a r k s need n o t be added t o t h e
character o f classification o f non-self-propelled ships.
2.2.3.3.2 C a t e g o r i e s I c e l , I c e 2 , I c e 3 w h i c h f o r m
the g r o u p o f non-arctic categories refer t o ships
i n t e n d e d f o r n a v i g a t i o n i n f r e e z i n g n o n - a r c t i c seas
(non-arctic ships).
2.2.3.3.3 C a t e g o r i e s A r c 4 , A r c 5 , A r c 6 , A r c 7 ,
A r c 8 , A r c 9 w h i c h f o r m t h e g r o u p o farctic categories
r e f e r t o s h i p s i n t e n d e d f o r n a v i g a t i o n i n a r c t i c seas
(arctic ships). A t t h e shipowner's discretion i f a n
arctic ship performs icebreaking operations periodically a n d complies w i t h the relevant requirements o f
the Rules, o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g ice category m a r k s
m a y be added t o t h e character o f classification:
Icebreaker6 o r Icebreaker7.
2.2.3.3.4 F o r t u g s , d e p e n d i n g o n t h e c o m p l i a n c e
w i t h t h e appropriate ice category requirements, o n e
o f t h e following m a r k s is added t o t h e character o f
classification: Ice2, Ice3, Arc4, Arc5.
22
Rules
2.2.3.4 A v e r a g e d q u a n t i t a t i v e d a t a o n p e r m i t t e d
service areas a n d ice service c o n d i t i o n s presented i n
Tables 2.2.3.4-1 t o 2.2.3.4-3 shall be used w h e n
c h o o s i n g t h e ice category o f arctic ships, w h i l e w h e n
c h o o s i n g t h eicecategory o f non-arctic ships, d a t a o n
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
permitted ice navigation conditions given i n

T a b l e 2.2.3.4-4. I t is n o t p e r m i t t e d t o use these data
for regulating the allowable navigation conditions o f
ships i n service. I t is a s s u m e d t h a t d u r i n g service t h e
shipowner will f o l l o w the r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s o f the Ice
T a b l e
2.2.3.4-1
Service areas a n d conditions for ships o f arctic categories

C a t e g o r y T y p e o f ice
o f ice
navigation
strengthening
Winter/spring navigation
The
Barents
Sea
E N H M E
Arc4
Arc6
Arc7
Arc8
Arc9
The
The
The East
The
K a r a Sea Laptev Sea Siberian Chuckchee
Sea
Sea
- * +
+
+
IN
The
Barents
Sea
E N H M E
E N H M E
E N H M E
E N H M E
IN
IEN
Arc5
Summer/autumn navigation
E N H M E
+ + + +
IEN
*+ + +
- - *
IN
*+ + +
- - -
IEN
+ + + +
**+
IN
+ + + +
IEN
+ + + +
IN
+
+
Kara
The
The East
The
Sea
Laptev Sea Siberian Chuckchee
Sea
Sea
E N H M E
+
E N H M E
E N H M E
E N H M E
+ + + +
*+ + +
+ + + +
- + + +
+
- * +
+
+
- - *
+ + + +
*+ + +
*+ + +
*+ + +
*+ + +
- - -
+ + + +
+ + + +
- + + +
- + + +
- + + +
- * +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
- - -**
The
-**
+
+ + + +
*+ + +
*+ + +
*+ + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
- * +
- * +
*+ + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
IEN
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
IN
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
IEN
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
+ + + +
- - -
S y m b o l s :
I N independent navigation
I E N icebreaker escorted navigation
+ operation allowed
operation not allowed
* operation connected with the increased risk o f d a m a g e
E N extreme navigation (average periodicity once i n ten years)
H , M , E h a r d , m e d i u m , easy navigation (average periodicity once i n three years)
^ o r s h i p s w i t h ice c a t e g o r y m a r k A r c 7 a n i n d e p e n d e n t (IN) y e a r - r o u n d n a v i g a t i o n i n the s o u t h w e s t e r n p a r t o fthe K a r a S e a , a t E N ,
H , M a n d E types o f navigation.
T a b l e
Ship category
2.2.3.4-2
P e r m i t t e d t y p e a n d thickness o f ice
Winter/spring navigation
Summer/autumn navigation
Arc4
T h i n first-year
M e d i u m f i r s t - y e a r u p t o 0,9 m
Arc5
M e d i u m f i r s t - y e a r u p t o 0,8 m t h i c k
M e d i u m first-year
Arc6
T h i c k f i r s t - y e a r u p t o 1,5 m
Arc7
T h i c k f i r s t - y e a r u p t o 1,8 m
Second-year
Arc8
M u l t i - y e a r u p t o 3,4 m
Multi-year
Arc9
Multi-year
Multi-year
N o t e . T h e classification o f ice a d o p t e d a c c o r d i n g t o t h e " S e a Ice N o m e n c l a t u r e " o f t h e W o r l d M e t e o r o l o g i c a l O r g a n i z a t i o n ( W M O ) :

Ice type
Ice thickness
Multi-year
> 3,0 m
Second-year
> 2,0 m
T h i c k first-year
> 1,2 m
0,7 1,2 m
T h i n first-year
< 0,7 m
Part I.
Classification
23
T a b l e
Ship category
Permitted speed,
in knots
Ice concentration a n d type
Ice thickness, i n m
M e t h o d s o fs u r m o u n t i n g ice ridges
Winter/spring
navigation
Summer/
autumn
navigation
open floating first-year ice
0,6
0,8
0,8
1,0
Arc6
1,1
1,3
Arc7
close floating first-yearice
1,4
1,7
Episodic ramming
Arc4
6 8
Arc5
2.2.3.4-3
Continuous motion
Arc8
10
close floating
second-year ice
2,1
3,0
Regular ramming
Arc9
12
very close floating a n d

compact multi-year ice
3,5
4,0
S u r m o u n t o f ice ridges
a n d episodic r a m m i n g
o f c o m p a c t ice fields
T a b l e
Ship
category
Icel
Ice2
Ice3
2.2.3.4-4
P e r m i t t e d t h i c k n e s s o f ice, i n m
Independent navigation i no p e n p a c k N a v i g a t i o n i n channel following a nicebreaker i n
ice a t a s p e e d o f 5 k n o t s
c o m p a c t ice a t a speed o f3 k n o t s
0,40
0,55
0,70
N a v i g a t i o n Ship Certificate issued b y t h e Register

u p o n shipowner's request a n d specifying t h e condi
t i o n s o f safe o p e r a t i o n o f t h e s h i p i n ice d e p e n d i n g o n
t h e ice c a t e g o r y m a r k , t h e ship's specific features, ice
conditions a n d icebreaker support.
T a b l e 2.2.3.4-1 s h o w s service areas f o r ships i n
t h e R u s s i a n a r c t i c seas ( t h e B a r e n t s S e a , t h e K a r a
Sea, t h e L a p t e v S e a , t h e E a s t - S i b e r i a n S e a ,t h e
C h u k c h e e S e a ) i n r e l a t i o n t o t h e season, tactics o f
ice n a v i g a t i o n a n d t y p e o f n a v i g a t i o n .
T a b l e 2.2.3.4-2 shows, f o r arctic category ships,
limiting type a n dthickness o f ice enabling a ship t o
navigate i n a channel following a nicebreaker a t a l o w
speed (3 t o 5 k n o t s ) w i t h o u t r u n n i n g a heightened
r i s k o f d a m a g e t h r o u g h c o n t a c t o f h u l l w i t h ice.
T a b l e 2.2.3.4-3 shows, f o r arctic category ships
o p e r a t i n g i n d e p e n d e n t l y , permissible speeds w h i c h a
ship under t h e iceconditions seto u t i n t h e table m a y
reach w h e n n a v i g a t i n g i n fractures between floes o r
s u r m o u n t i n g ice isthmuses w i t h o u t r u n n i n g a heigh
t e n e d r i s k o f d a m a g e t h r o u g h c o n t a c t o f h u l l w i t h ice.
2.2.3.5 A r c t i c s h i p s m a y n a v i g a t e i n n o n - a r c t i c
f r e e z i n g seas i n i c e c o n d i t i o n s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h o s e
stated i n Tables 2.2.3.4-2 a n d 2.2.3.4-3.
2.2.3.6 I n T a b l e 2 . 2 . 3 . 6 a n a t t e m p t h a s b e e n m a d e t o
correspond t h e ice category m a r k s o f the present R u l e s
to those o f t h e Rules, edition 1995. T h e provisions
o f 2.2.3.4 a n d 2.2.3.5 d o n o t a p p l y t o t h e ships b u i l t
according t o t h e Rules, e d i t i o n 1995 a n d earlier.
I n accordance w i t h t h e requirements o f the
present Rules, ice category m a r k s m a y only be
Type o f operation
Episodically
Regularly
Regularly
0,35
0,50
0,65
able
Present Rules
Rules, edition
1995
Ice ships
Present Rules
Rules, edition
1995
Icebreakers
Icel
4(4)
lcebreakei-6
4 ( L L 4 )
Ice2
JI3(L3)
Icebreaker?
( L L 3 )
Ice3
2(2)
Icebreaker8
2 ( L L 2 )
Arc4
1 ( L I )
Icebreaker9
1 ( L L 1 )
Arc5
( U L )
Arc6
Arc7
( U L A )
Arc8
Arc9
applied t o such ships a t t h e shipowner's discretion

a n d after their h u l l e x a m i n a t i o n f o r compliance w i t h
the requirements o f3.10, P a r t I I " H u l l " .
2.2.4 S u b d i v i s i o n d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k s .
Ships c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e applicable require
ments o fPart V "Subdivision" a n dfully complying
w i t h the requirements o f Section 3 o fthe above Part
i n t h e case o f f l o o d i n g o f a n y o n e c o m p a r t m e n t o r
any t w o o r three adjacent compartments over
c o m p l e t e l e n g t h o f t h e s h i p i n t h e case o f design side
d a m a g e specified i n 3.2 a r e assigned s u b d i v i s i o n
d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k , o r a d d e d t o t h e c h a r a c t e r
o f classification, respectively.
24
Rules
2.2.5 Distinguishing m a r k s f o r restricted a r e a s o f

navigation.
2.2.5.1 Ships c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e Rules requirem e n t s p r o v i d e d f o r ships o p e r a t i n g o n l y i n restricted
areas o fn a v i g a t i o n a r e assigned o n e o f the f o l l o w i n g
distinguishing marks: R l , R 2 , R 2 - R S N , R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) ,
R 3 - R S N o r R 3 added t o the character o f classification
t o clarify restrictions o f the ship n a v i g a t i o n as follows:
. 1 R l n a v i g a t i o n i n s e a a r e a s a t seas w i t h a
w a v e height o f 8,5 m w i t h 3 p e r cent p r o b a b i l i t y o f
exceeding level a n d w i t h t h e ships proceeding n o t
m o r e t h a n 200 miles a w a y f r o m t h e place o f refuge
a n d w i t h a n a l l o w a b l e distance between the places o f
refuge n o t m o r e t h a n 400 miles;
.2 R 2 n a v i g a t i o n i n sea a r e a s a t seas w i t h
a w a v e height o f 7,0 m w i t h 3 per cent p r o b a b i l i t y o f
exceeding level w i t h ships proceeding n o t m o r e t h a n
100 miles a w a y f r o m the place o f refuge a n d w i t h a n
allowable distance between t h e places o f refuge n o t
m o r e than 200 miles;
.3 R 2 - R S N r i v e r - s e a n a v i g a t i o n a t seas w i t h
a w a v e h e i g h t o f 6,0 m w i t h 3 per cent p r o b a b i l i t y o f
exceeding level w i t h ships proceeding f r o m the place
o f refuge:
i n o p e n seas u p t o 5 0 m i l e s a n d w i t h a n a l l o w a b l e
distance between the places o frefuge n o t m o r e t h a n
100 miles;
i n e n c l o s e d seas u p t o 1 0 0 m i l e s a n d w i t h a n
. 4 R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) - r i v e r - s e a n a v i g a t i o n a t seas w i t h a
w a v e height o f 4,5 m w i t h 3 p e r cent p r o b a b i l i t y w i t h
ships proceeding f r o m the place o f refuge:
i n o p e n seas u p t o 5 0 m i l e s a n d w i t h a n a l l o w a b l e
distance between the places o frefuge n o t m o r e t h a n
100 miles;
i n e n c l o s e d seas u p t o 1 0 0 m i l e s a n d w i t h a n
.5 R 3 - R S N r i v e r - s e a n a v i g a t i o n a t seas w i t h
a w a v e h e i g h t o f 3,5 m w i t h 3 p e r c e n t p r o b a b i l i t y o f
exceeding level w i t h d u e regard f o r particular
restrictions o n the area and conditions o f navigation
resulting f r o m t h ew i n d a n dw a v e conditions o f the
basins w i t h determination o f a m a x i m u m allowable
distance f r o m t h e place o f refuge w h i c h i n n o case
shall be m o r e t h a n 50 miles;
.6 R 3 h a r b o u r , roadstead a n d coastal n a v i g a t i o n
w i t h i n l i m i t s e s t a b l i s h e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
Restrictions for particular floating crane operations
(cargo-handling operations o r navigation w i t h eventual
carriage o f cargoes o n deck and/or i n the h o l d ) shall b e
i m p o s e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h p a r t i c u l a r case;
.7 B e r t h - c o n n e c t e d s h i p ( w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f t h e
p o s i t i o n s o f stay a n d geographical service area according t o F i g . 4.3.3.6, P a r t I V "Stability").
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
2.2.5.2 T h erestrictions provided f o r b y 2.2.5.1

define t h e a l l o w a b l e c o n d i t i o n s o f ship's n a v i g a t i o n
resulting f r o m ship's stability a n d strength w h i c h a r e
indicated i nt h eSeaworthiness Certificate and i n the
Classification Certificate.
2.2.5.3 P a r t i c u l a r restrictions o n t h e area a n d
c o n d i t i o n s o f n a v i g a t i o n f o r ships o f river-sea n a v i g a t i o n
R 3 - R S N are determined as the geographical place-names
o f basins o r their parts w i t h t h e indication, where
necessary, o f the geographical b o u n d a r y o f the navigat i o n area w i t h i n the basin, the restrictions o n proceeding
f r o m t h e place o f refuge a n d t h e restrictions o f ship
navigation b y calendar periods, o r a n indication o f
v o y a g e b e t w e e n t h e t e r m i n a l p o r t s . I n t h i s case, t h e
restrictions w i t h d u e regard t o t h e w i n d a n d w a v e
conditions o f the basins shall b e determined b y using
t h e d a t a o f T a b l e 2.2.5.3 o r t h e d a t a f r o m t h e s u b m i t t e d
t o the Register justifications o f possibility o f ship's n a v i g a t i o n i n t h e certain area o r passage, m a d e i n accordance w i t h the procedure approved b y the Register.
2.2.5.4 W h a t e v e r t h e area o f n a v i g a t i o n o f ships
whose stability does n o t c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f Part I V "Stability" o f the Rules imposed
u p o n the ships n a v i g a t i n g i n w i n t e r seasonal zones t o
t h e N o r t h o f p a r a l l e l 6630' N a n d t o t h e S o u t h o f
p a r a l l e l 6600' S a s w e l l a s i n w i n t e r i n t h e B e r i n g S e a ,
the Sea o f O k h o t s k a n d i n t h e T a t a r Strait, t h e
R e g i s t e r specifies t h e a p p r o p r i a t e r e s t r i c t i o n s b y
introducing t h eentry into t h e Classification Certificate t h a t t h e ship is n o ta l l o w e d t o navigate i n t h e
above w i n t e r seasonal zones a n d areas.
2.2.6 Distinguishing automation m a r k s .
S h i p s a n d f l o a t i n g f a c i l i t i e s fitted w i t h a u t o m a tion equipment complying w i t h the requirements o f
P a r t X V " A u t o m a t i o n " a r e assigned o n e o f t h e
following distinguishing m a r k s added t o t h e character o f classification, namely:
.1 A U T 1 - where t h e a u t o m a t i o n extent is
sufficient f o r t h e machinery installation operation
w i t h u n a t t e n d e d m a c h i n e r y spaces a n d t h e m a i n
machinery control room;
.2 A U T 2 - w h e r e t h e a u t o m a t i o n e x t e n t i s
by one operator a t the m a i n machinery control r o o m
w i t h u n a t t e n d e d m a c h i n e r y spaces;
.3 A U T 3 - w h e r e t h e a u t o m a t i o n e x t e n t i s
o f a ship w i t h the m a i n machinery p o w e r o u t p u t n o t
more than 2250 k W w i t h unattended machi nery
spaces a n d t h e m a i n m a c h i n e r y c o n t r o l r o o m ;
.4 A U T 1 - C , A U T 2 - C o r A U T 3 - C - w h e r e
a u t o m a t i o n is based o ncomputers o r programmable
logic controllers meeting the requirements o fSection 7,
Part X V "Automation";
.5 A U T 1 - I C S , A U T 2 - I C S o r A U T 3 - I C S - w h e r e
a u t o m a t i o n is made w i t h t h e use o f a computerized
Part I.
Classification
25
Table
Basin
Geographical
2.2.5.3
Season
restrictions
The Sea of Azov
No
restrictions
Throughout the year
T h e Adriatic Sea
S o u t h o f 42N, 2 0 - m i l e c o a s t a l a r e a a l o n g t h e E a s t a n d W e s t c o a s t , c r o s s i n g t h e s e a i n O t r a n t o T h r o u g h o u t t h e y e a r
S t r a i t i n t h e a r e a o f p . B r i n d i z i (p. B a r i ) p . B a r a n d i n t h e a r e a o f t h e C a p e F r a n c h e s c o t h e
L a s t o v o I s l a n d . N o r t h o f 42N, 4 0 - m i l e c o a s t a l a r e a w i t h c a l l i n g a t p o r t s o f t h e W e s t c o a s t
T h e Baltic S e a
N o restrictions, including the Gulfs o f Bothnia, F i n l a n d , R i g a , the Z u n d , G r e a t a n d T h r o u g h o u t the year

S m a l l B e l t , K a t t e g a t S t r a i t s t o t h e S o u t h o f 5745'N.
T h e Baltic S e a a n d
the N o r t h S e a
E x i t t o the S k a g e r r a k Straits i n the waters t o t h e E a s t o f t h e line the C a p e S k a g e n M a r c h t o S e p t e m b e r

O s l o - F j o r d a n d S o u t h o f 59N a n d a l s o a l o n g t h e c o a s t o f S w e d e n i n S e k k e n a n d S i n g l e Fjord Straits
M a y to October
The White Sea
T h e O n e z h s k y , D v i n s k y a n d K a n d a l a k s h s k y G u l f s , as well as 20-mile coastal area t o the

S o u t h o f 6645'N
The Ionian Sea
March to November
20-mile coastal area a l o n g t h e E a s t c o a s t f r o m K a t h i r a t o O t r o n t o Straits
20-mile c o a s t a l area a l o n g t h e E a s t c o a s t f r o m t h e G u l f o f P a t r a i k o s t o t h e Strait o f O t r a n t o T h r o u g h o u t t h e y e a r
The Kara Sea
The Caspian Sea
20-mile coastal area f r o m p . D i k s o n t o r . P y a s i n g

20-mile coastal area a l o n g t h e N o r t h a n d W e s t c o a s t o f t h e Y a m a l P e n i n s u l a
O b s k a y a G u b a t o p . K h a r a s a v e y via the M a l y g j n Straits
July to September
f r o m A u g u s t t o 15 O c t o b e r
T o t h e N o r t h o f 4430'N a s w e l l a s t o t h e S o u t h o f 4430'N w i t h i n 2 0 - m i l e c o a s t a l a r e a M a r c h t o N o v e m b e r
along the E a s t coast u p t op. T u r k m e n b a s h i (port o f Bekdash), along the W e s t coast u p
to p . M a k h a c h k a l a a n d f r o m p . B a k u u p t o p . Anzali, a n d within t h e area f r o m
S h a k h o v a y a S p i t a t 3950'N a n d 5020'E u p t o K u r i n s k a y a S p i t a t 3900'N a n d 4944'E
s h i p s a r e a l l o w e d t o p r o c e e d u p t o 25 m i l e s a w a y f r o m t h e s h o r e ; p a s s a g e f r o m t h e E a s t
coast i n t h earea o f p . T u r k m e n b a s h i (port o f Bekdash) southern extremity o f
K r a s n o v o d s k a y a Spit t o the West coast i n the area o fS h a k h o v a y a Spit .
1
T h e L a p t e v S e a a n d 20-mile coastal area f r o m t h e m o u t h o f r. Y a n a t o t h e m o u t h o f r. K o l y m a

t h e E a s t - S i b e r i a n S e a C o a s t a l a r e a w i t h i n 6 t o 15 m i s o b a t h f r o m t h e m o u t h o f r . K o l y m a t o p . P e v e k
20 J u l y t o S e p t e m b e r
August to September
during years o f l o w to
m e d i u m ice formation
determined b y the
position o fthe A y o n
ice m a s s
T h e S e a o f M a r m o r a N o restrictions f r o m B o s p o r u s t o Dardanelles Straits
Throughout the year
T h e P e r s i a n G u l f ( t h e E a s t p a r t f r o m O r m u s S t r a i t t o 54E; c e n t r a l p a r t c o a s t a l a r e a a l o n g t h e W e s t c o a s t T h r o u g h o u t t h e y e a r
Arabian Sea)
i n t h e a r e a r e s t r i c t e d b y 54E, p a r a l l e l 2859'N a n d l i n e c o n n e c t i n g i s l a n d s A b u - M u s a ,
K h a l u l , A l - K h a r k u s , F a l a i k a ; n o r t h p a r t f r o m p a r a l l e l 2859'N
The North Sea
H e l g o l a n d B a y t o t h e S o u t h o f 5402'N a n d t o t h e E a s t o f 758'E
Throughout the year
C o a s t a l area i n the z o n e o f traffic separation a l o n g the E a s t - F r i s i a n I s l a n d s a n d farther M a r c h t o O c t o b e r
o n w i t h possible calls a tthe ports o fS o u t h coast t o p .A n t w e r p inclusive
T h e M e d i t e r r a n i a n S e a F r o m R h o d e s Strait i n 20-mile coastal area t o the p o r t s o f Israel inclusive w i t h calls a t M a r c h t o N o v e m b e r

the port o fC y p r u s Island
The Black Sea
20-mile c o a s t a l a r e a a l o n g t h e N o r t h , W e s t a n d E a s t c o a s t f r o m p . B a t u m i t o S t r a i t s o f B o s p h o r u s T h r o u g h o u t t h e y e a r
The Aegean Sea
F r o m t h e D a r d a n e l l e s t o K a r p a t h o s a n d K i t h i r a S t r a i t s t o t h e N o r t h o f 36N
Throughout the year
Passage t o t h eIonian S e a through t h eG u l f o f Saronikos, Corinth Canal, G u l f o f T h r o u g h o u t the year
Corinth, Gulf of Patraikos
T h e S e a o f J a p a n a n d 20-mile coastal area a l o n g t h e W e s t c o a s t f r o m p . V l a d i v o s t o k t o t h e P r e o b r a z h e n i a B a y T h r o u g h o u t t h e y e a r

the S e a o f O k h o t s k T h e T a t a r Strait a n d t h e A m u r F i r t h f r o m t h e line o f p . S o v e t s k a y a G a v a n p . J u n e t o O c t o b e r
U g l e g o r s k t o t h e line o ft h e C a p e M e n s h i k o v t h e C a p e T a m l a v o
1
F o r ships h a v i n g the R e g i s t e r - a p p r o v e d area o f n a v i g a t i o n t o the S o u t h o f p . T u r k m e n b a s h i (port o fB e k d a s h ) w i t h i n 20-mile

c o a s t a l a r e a a l o n g t h e E a s t c o a s t u p t o p o r t s o f I r a n , f r o m C h e l e k e n P e n i n s u l a a t 3926'N a n d 5240'E u p t o t h e s o u t h e r n e x t r e m i t y o f
O g u r c h i n s k y I s l a n d a t 3840'N a n d 5300'E t h e 2 0 - m i l e c o a s t a l a r e a s h a l l b e c o u n t e d f r o m t h e c o a s t o f O g u r c h i n s k y I s l a n d .
26
Rules
integrated m o n i t o r i n g and control system meeting the

r e q u i r e m e n t s o f S e c t i o n 7, P a r t X V " A u t o m a t i o n " .
2.2.7 Distinguishing m a r k o f one m a n bridge
operated ship.
I f the navigational equipment o f self-propelled
ship installed o n the navigation bridge complies w i t h
the requirements for self-propelled one m a n bridge
operated ships specified i n P a r t V " N a v i g a t i o n a l
E q u i p m e n t " o f R u l e s f o r the E q u i p m e n t o f SeaG o i n g Ships, a d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k O M B O is a d d e d
to the character o f classification.
2.2.8 Distinguishing m a r k f o r a ship carrying
equipment f o r fire fighting a b o a r d other ships.
I f a ship carries supplementary systems, equipm e n t a n d o u t f i t f o r fire fighting a b o a r d o t h e r ships,
offshore drilling units, floating a n d shore facilities
a n d i f t h e ship is i n f u l l c o m p l i a n c e w i t h the r e l e v a n t
requirements o f the Rules i n respect to those
appliances, distinguishing m a r k s F F 1 W S , F F 1 ,
F F 2 W S , F F 2 or F F 3 W S are a d d e d t o the character
o f classification proceeding f r o m the degree o f the
ship e q u i p m e n t w i t h these appliances.
T h e degree o f the ship e q u i p m e n t for fire
fighting
i n o t h e r structures is d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e basis o f the
l i s t o f fire fighting e q u i p m e n t a n d s y s t e m s p r e s c r i b e d
b y 6.6, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n " .
2.2.9 Distinguishing m a r k for ships fitted with a
dynamic positioning system.
I f a s h i p i s fitted w i t h a d y n a m i c p o s i t i o n i n g
s y s t e m c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f S e c t i o n 8,
Part X V "Automation", one o f the following
distinguishing marks: D Y N P O S - 1 , D Y N P O S - 2 or
D Y N P O S - 3 is a d d e d t o the ship's c h a r a c t e r o f
classification, depending o n the redundancy o f the
dynamic positioning system.
2.2.10 Distinguishing m a r k for ships fitted w i t h
position mooring systems.
I f a s h i p i s fitted w i t h t h e p o s i t i o n m o o r i n g
system, o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k s is
added to the character o f classification:
.1 P O S I M O O R - i f the p o s i t i o n m o o r i n g system
meets the requirements o f 9.1 t o 9.3, P a r t X V
"Automation";
.2 P O S I M O O R - T A - i f t h e p o s i t i o n m o o r i n g
system meets the requirements o f 9.1 t o 9.4, P a r t X V
" A u t o m a t i o n " w h e n applying thrusters complying
w i t h t h e a p p l i c a b l e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f S e c t i o n 8,
Part X V "Automation".
2.2.11 Distinguishing m a r k for a ship intended for
carriage of refrigerated cargo.
Ships intended for carriage o r storage o f refrigerated c a r g o o r c a t c h i n ship's c a r g o spaces a n d / o r
in t h e r m a l containers w i t h the use o f a refrigerating
p l a n t available o n b o a r d a n d classed i n compliance
w i t h Section 4 o f the present Part o f the Rules and
meeting the requirements o f Part X I I "Refrigerating
and
Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
Plants" are assigned the distinguishing m a r k R E F

added to the character o f classification.
Ships intended f o r carriage o r storage o f refrigera t e d c a r g o o r c a t c h i n ship's c a r g o spaces a n d / o r i n
t h e r m a l containers a n d using non-classed refrigerating
plant for maintaining the required temperature, c o m plying w i t h the relevant requirements o f Part X I I
"Refrigerating Plants", are assigned the distinguishing
m a r k ( R E F ) added t o the character o f classification.
2.2.12 Distinguishing m a r k for ships fitted with the
m a i n electric propulsion plant.
I f a s h i p i s fitted w i t h t h e m a i n e l e c t r i c p r o p u l s i o n
p l a n t c o m p l y i n g w i t h the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f S e c t i o n 17,
Part X I "Electrical Equipment", the distinguishing
m a r k E P P is a d d e d t o the c h a r a c t e r o f classification.
2.2.13 D i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k f o r s h i p s fitted w i t h
equipment for icing protection.
I f a ship o r F O P is fitted w i t h e q u i p m e n t
p r o v i d i n g effective icing p r o t e c t i o n i n compliance
w i t h the requirements o f Section 4, P a r t X V I I
"Distinguishing M a r k s and Descriptive Notations i n
the Class N o t a t i o n Specifying Structural a n d Operational Particulars o f Ships", the distinguishing m a r k
A N T I - I C E is a d d e d t o t h e c h a r a c t e r o f classification.
2.2.14 Distinguishing m a r k f o r a ship i n t e n d e d f o r
carriage o f p a c k a g e d irradiated nuclear fuel, pluto
n i u m a n d high-level radioactive wastes ( I N F cargo).
Ships intended for carriage o f packaged irradiated nuclear fuel, p l u t o n i u m and high-level radioactive wastes, w h i c h c o m p l y w i t h the requirements
o f 7.3, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n " , are assigned one o f
the following distinguishing m a r k s added to the
character o f classification:
E N F 1 f o r Class I N F 1 ships;
E N F 2 f o r Class I N F 2 ships;
E N F 3 f o r Class I N F 3 ships.
2.2.15 Distinguishing m a r k f o r ships fitted w i t h a
loading instrument.
I f a s h i p i s fitted w i t h a l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t
c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.4.9.4 a n d
A p p e n d i x 2, P a r t I I " H u l l " , the distinguishing m a r k
L I is a d d e d t o the character o f classification.
2.2.16 Distinguishing m a r k f o r ships fitted w i t h a
cargo vapour discharge system.
I f a s h i p i s fitted w i t h a c a r g o v a p o u r d i s c h a r g e
s y s t e m c o m p l y i n g w i t h the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 9.9,
P a r t V I I I "Systems and Piping", the distinguishing
m a r k V C S is a d d e d t o t h e c h a r a c t e r o f classification.
2.2.17 Distinguishing m a r k f o r ships fitted w i t h
an inert gas system.
I f a s h i p i s fitted w i t h a n i n e r t g a s s y s t e m c o m p l y i n g
w i t h the requirements o f 9.16, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d
P i p i n g " , o n e o f the f o l l o w i n g distinguishing m a r k s is
added t o the character o f classification:
. 1 I G S - I G i f a s y s t e m uses a n o i l - b u r n i n g i n e r t gas
g e n e r a t o r as t h e i n e r t gas s o u r c e a n d t h e r e q u i r e -
Part I.
Classification
merits o f 9.16.9, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d P i p i n g " are

complied with;
.2 I G S - N G i f a s y s t e m u s e s a n i t r o g e n g e n e r a t o r a s
the inert gas source a n d t h e requirements o f 9.16.12,
Part V I I I "Systems a n d Piping" are complied with;
.3 I G S - P a d i f a n i n e r t g a s s y s t e m i s o n l y i n t e n d e d
for f o r m i n g a n i n s u l a t i n g p a d i n cargo t a n k s a n dt h e
requirements o f 9.16.11, Part V I I I "Systems a n d
Piping" are complied with. This distinguishing m a r k
m a y be used where systems w i t h inert gas supplied
f r o m cylinders a r e i n s t a l l e d as w e l l as f o r systems
using inert gas a n d nitrogen generators
whose
capacity is insufficient f o r assigning t h e distinguishing m a r k s I G S - I G o r I G S - N G .
2.2.18 D i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k f o r s h i p s f i t t e d w i t h a
crude oil washing system.
I f a ship is fitted w i t h a crude o i l washing system
c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e requirements o f 9.12, P a r t V I I I
"Systems a n d Piping", the distinguishing m a r k C O W
is a d d e d t o t h e c h a r a c t e r o f c l a s s i f i c a t i o n .
2.2.19 D i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k f o r s h i p s f i t t e d w i t h a
centralized cargo control system.
I f a ship is fitted w i t h a cargo c o n t r o l r o o m
complying w i t h the requirements o f 3.2.11, Part V I I
"Machinery Installations", the distinguishing
m a r k C C O is added t o t h echaracter o f classification.
2.2.20 D i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k s f o r s h i p s o f h i g h
ecological safety.
S h i p s c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f Sect i o n 3, P a r t X V I I " D i s t i n g u i s h i n g M a r k s a n d D e scriptive N o t a t i o n s i n t h e Class N o t a t i o n Specifying
Structural a n d Operational Particulars o f Ships" are
assigned w i t h o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g distinguishing
m a r k s added t o t h e character o f classification:
.1 E C O i f a s h i p m e e t s t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r
controlling a n d limiting operational emissions a n d
discharges, as w e l l as requirements f o r p r e v e n t i o n o f
e n v i r o n m e n t a l p o l l u t i o n i n case o f emergency, as
specified i n 3.5, P a r t X V I I " D i s t i n g u i s h i n g M a r k s a n d
Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n t h e Class N o t a t i o n Specifying
Structural a n d Operational Particulars o f Ships";
.2 E C O - S i f a s h i p m e e t s m o r e s t r i n g e n t
requirements t h a n those f o r assignment o f t h e disting u i s h i n g m a r k E C O i n t h e class n o t a t i o n , as specified i n
3.5, P a r t X V I I " D i s t i n g u i s h i n g M a r k s a n d D e s c r i p t i v e
N o t a t i o n s i n t h e Class N o t a t i o n Specifying Structural
and Operational Particulars o f Ships".
2.2.21 D i s t i n q u i s h i n g m a r k f o r a s h i p c o m p l y i n g
with ballast water m a n a g e m e n t requirements.
I f a ship performs ballast water m a n a g e m e n t
t h r o u g h ballast w a t e r exchange a t sea a n d , as
appropriate, carries Ballast W a t e r M a n a g e m e n t P l a n
a p p r o v e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r (refer t o 1.4.13, P a r t I V
"Stability"), a n d t h e ship ballast systems c o m p l y w i t h
the requirements o f 8.7, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d
Piping", o n e o f the following distinguishing m a r k s is
21
added t o t h echaracter o f classification: B W M ( E - S ) ,

B W M ( E - F), B W M ( E - D), B W M ( E - S F ) , B W M ( E
- SD), B W M ( E - FD) or B W M ( E - SFD). B W M
means that t h e ship performs ballast water management; E means that ballast water management is
p e r f o r m e d t h r o u g h ballast w a t e r exchange a t sea; S
means t h a t sequential m e t h o d is used; F means that
f l o w - t h r o u g h m e t h o d is used; D means that d i l u t i o n
m e t h o d is used; S F , S D ,F D a n d S F D m e a n that
combined ballast water exchange m e t h o d is used
being a combination o fthe above methods.
2.2.22 D i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k s f o r a s h i p f i t t e d w i t h
a diving system permanently installed o n the ship.
I f a ship is fitted w i t h a diving system permanently installed o n t h e ship, w h i c h c o m p l y w i t h t h e
relevant requirements o f Rules f o rthe Classification
and Construction o f M a n n e d Submersibles, Ship's
D i v i n g Systems a n d Passenger Submersibles, o n eo f
the following distinguishing m a r k s is added t o the
character o f classification:
.1 S D S < 12 f o r s h i p s f i t t e d w i t h a d i v i n g s y s t e m
d e s i g n e d f o r d i v i n g o p e r a t i o n s a t d e p t h s less
than 12m ;
.2 S D S < 60 f o r s h i p s f i t t e d w i t h a d i v i n g s y s t e m
d e s i g n e d f o r d i v i n g o p e r a t i o n s a t d e p t h s less t h a n 6 0 m ;
3 S D S > 60 f o r s h i p s f i t t e d w i t h a d i v i n g s y s t e m d e s i gned f o rdiving operations a t depths o f 6 0 m a n d over.
2.2.23 D i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k f o r a s h i p f i t t e d w i t h a
manned submersible.
I f a ship is fitted w i t h a m a n n e d submersible
complying w i t h the relevant requirements o f Rules
for t h e Classification a n d C o n s t r u c t i o n o f M a n n e d
Submersibles, Ship's D i v i n g Systems a n d Passenger
Submersibles, t h edistinguishing m a r k M S is added t o
the character o f classification.
2.2.24 D i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k f o r a s h i p t o c a r r y o u t
cargo operationsa t offshore terminals.
Oil tankers t o carry o u t cargo operations a t
offshore terminals i n compliance w i t h the requirem e n t s o f S e c t i o n 5, P a r t X V I I " D i s t i n g u i s h i n g M a r k s
and Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n t h e Class N o t a t i o n
Specifying Structural a n d Operational Particulars o f
Ships" are assigned o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g distinguishing m a r k s a d d e d t o t h e character o f classification:
.1 B L S - S P M - i f a s h i p i s f i t t e d w i t h t h e b o w
loading system a n d fully complies w i t h the requirements for equipment o f o i l tankers t o carry o u t cargo
operations at offshore terminals;
.2 B L S - i f a s h i p i s f i t t e d w i t h t h e b o w l o a d i n g
system a n d complies w i t h the requirements f o r
equipment o f o i l tankers t o carry o u t cargo operat i o n s a t o f f s h o r e t e r m i n a l s , except f o r 5.6.2 t o 5.6.9
a n d 5.6.12 t o 5.6.14, P a r t X V I I " D i s t i n g u i s h i n g
M a r k s a n d Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n t h e Class
N o t a t i o n Specifying Structural a n d Operational
Particulars o f Ships";
28
Rules
3 S P M - i f a ship is n o t fitted w i t h t h e b o w
loading system, t h o u g h complies w i t h t h e require
m e n t s o f 5.6.2 t o 5.6.9 a n d 5.6.12 t o 5.6.14, P a r t X V I I
"Distinguishing M a r k s and Descriptive Notations i n
the Class N o t a t i o n Specifying Structural and Opera
tional Particulars o f Ships".
T h i s distinguishing m a r k m a y also be added t o
the character o f classification o f ships carrying
l i q u e f i e d gases i n b u l k .
2.2.25 Distinguishing m a r k for a ship fitted with
helicopter facilities.
I f ships a n d F O P a r e fitted w i t h helicopter
facilities i n compliance w i t h t h e requirements o f
Section 6, P a r t X V I I " D i s t i n g u i s h i n g M a r k s a n d
Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n the Class N o t a t i o n Specify
ing Structural a n d O p e r a t i o n a l Particulars o f Ships",
one o f the following distinguishing m a r k s isadded t o
the character o f classification:
.1 H E L T D E C K - i f a ship ( F O P ) is fitted w i t h a
h e l i d e c k a n d c o m p l i e s w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 6.2, 6.3,
6.4.1, 6 . 6 a n d 6.7, P a r t X V I I " D i s t i n g u i s h i n g M a r k s
a n d Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n the Class N o t a t i o n Speci
fying Structural and Operational Particulars o f Ships";
.2 H E L T D E C K - F - i f a s h i p ( F O P ) i s f i t t e d w i t h
helicopter refuelling facilities a n d , i n a d d i t i o n t o
2.2.25.1, complies w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 6.4.2
(as f a r a s applicable), 6.5.1 a n d 6 . 5 . 2 ( a s f a r a s
applicable), P a r t X V I I "Distinguishing M a r k s a n d
Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n the Class N o t a t i o n Specify
ing Structural a n d O p e r a t i o n a l Particulars o f Ships";
3 H E L I D E C K - H - i f a ship ( F O P ) is fitted w i t h
h a n g a r facilities a n d fully complies w i t h the requirements
o f Section 6, P a r t X V I I " D i s t i n g u i s h i n g M a r k s a n d
Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n t h eClass N o t a t i o n Specifying
Structural and Operational Particulars o f Ships".
2.2.26 Distinguishing m a r k f o r a ship e q u i p p e d to
ensure long-term operation at low temperatures.
I f ships a n d F O P are equipped t o ensure l o n g - t e r m
operation a t l o w temperatures i ncompliance w i t h t h e
requirements o f Section 7, Part X V I I "Distinguishing
M a r k s a n d Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n the Class N o t a t i o n
Ships", a t the shipowner's discretion the distinguishing
m a r k W T N T E R I Z A T I O N ( D A T ) is added t o t h e char
acter o f classification, w h e r e design a m b i e n t tempera
t u r e i s i n d i c a t e d i n brackets, i n Celsius degrees, e.g.
W T N T E R I Z A T I O N ( - 40).
2.2.27 D i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k f o r p r o p u l s i o n p l a n t
redundancy.
W h e r e provision is made for theredundancy o f
propulsion plant components complying with the
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f S e c t i o n 8, P a r t X V I I " D i s t i n g u i s h i n g
M a r k s a n d Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n t h e Class
N o t a t i o n Specifying Structural a n d Operational
Particulars o f t h e Ship", o n e o f the following
distinguishing marks is added t o the character o f
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
classification: R P - 1 , R P - 1 A , R P - 1 A S , R P - 2 o r R P - 2 S ,
depending o n the redundancy arrangement.
2.2.28 Distinguishing m a r k f o r a ship e q u i p p e d to
use g a s fuel.
I f ships a r e equipped f o r using gas fuel i n
compliance w i t h Section 9 o f Part X V I I "Distinguishing
M a r k s a n d Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n the Class N o t a t i o n
S h i p s " , t h e d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k G F S (gas fuelled ships)
is a d d e d t o t h e c h a r a c t e r o f c l a s s i f i c a t i o n .
2.2.29 Descriptive notation in the class notation.
Ships c o m p l y i n g w i t h a definite scope o f require
ments o f the Rules taking account o f their structural
particulars a n d service c o n d i t i o n s a r e assigned t h e
appropriate descriptive n o t a t i o n added t o t h e char
acter o f classification o f a ship.
The current Register rules cover certain require
ments the fulfilment o f which makes
possible
introducing o f the f o l l o w i n g descriptive notations i n
the class n o t a t i o n :
Bilge water removing ship
B u l k carrier
Catamaran
Container ship
Crane vessel
Docklift ship
Dredger
Escort tug
Fishing vessel
Floating crane
Floating dock
Hopper
Oil recovery ship
Oil tanker
Oil/bulk carrier
Oil/bulk/ore carrier
Ore carrier
Passenger ship
Pontoon
Pontoon for technologicalservices
Pontoon for transportation services
R o - r o passenger ship
R o - r o ship
Salvage ship
Shipborne barge
Special purpose ship
Supply vessel
Tanker
T a n k e r (water)
T a n k e r (wine)
Timber carrier
T u g , etc.
N o t e . D e s c r i p t i v e n o t a t i o n i n the class n o t a t i o n is w r i t t e n
in E n g l i s h . A t the discretion o f the s h i p o w n e rit m a y b e w r i t t e n i n
two languages, E n g l i s h a n d Russian, f o r example: Oil tanker
() ( E S P ) .
See 794c
Part I.
Classification
29
T o t h e class n o t a t i o n s o f n u c l e a r ships a n d
f l o a t i n g facilities, n u c l e a r s u p p o r t vessels, g a s carriers, c h e m i c a l tankers, high-speed craft, type A W I G
craft, m o b i l e offshore drilling units, m a n n e d submersibles a n d d i v i n g systems, sea-going pleasure
craft, t h edistinguishing m a r k s a n ddescriptive n o t a tions shall be inserted i n conformity w i t h t h e
provisions o f rules f o r t h e classification a n d cons t r u c t i o n o f t h e r e l e v a n t types o f ships (refer t o 1.2.2).
The descriptive n o t a t i o n T a n k e r shall be accompanied b y a cargo carried specification i n brackets
such as T a n k e r (water), T a n k e r (wine).
F o r ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n w i t h the
descriptive n o t a t i o n Berth-connected ship (refer t o
2.2.5.1.6), t h e descriptive n o t a t i o n shall be supplemented b ythe statement o f ship purpose o u t o f those
listed i n t h e definition o f t h e berth-connected ship
(refer t o 1.1.1).
I f the scope o f the R u l e s requirements w h i c h a
ship complies w i t h allows, t w o a n d m o r e descriptive
n o t a t i o n s m a y b e stated i n the class n o t a t i o n o f a ship
(e.g. S u p p l y vessel, S a l v a g e s h i p s T u g ) o r t h e
descriptive n o t a t i o n m a y be written as c o m p o u n d s
(e.g. O i l / b u l k c a r r i e r , O i l / b u l k / o r e c a r r i e r ) .
I f a n o i l tanker o r o i l recovery ship complies w i t h
the r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r the ships, w h i c h c a r r y p e t r o l e u m
products o r recover t h e m f r o m t h e sea surface a n d
c a r r y t h e m h a v i n g f l a s h p o i n t a b o v e 6 0 C, t h i s
temperature shall be indicated i n t h e descriptive
n o t a t i o n . F o r e x a m p l e : O i l t a n k e r ( > 6 0 C), O i l / o r e
c a r r i e r ( > 60 C), O i l r e c o v e r y s h i p ( > 60 C).
For o i l tankers fully complying w i t h the requirements o f Part X V I I I " C o m m o n Structural Rules for
Double Hull O i lTankers" the distinguishing
m a r k C S R shall m a n d a t o r y be added t o the character
o f classification.
F o r b u l k carriers fully c o m p l y i n g w i t h the requirements of Part X I X " C o m m o n Structural Rules for Bulk
Carriers" the distinguishing m a r k C S R shall m a n d a t o r y
be a d d e d t o the character o f classification.
W h e n adding t h e descriptive n o t a t i o n B u l k
c a r r i e r t o t h e character o f classification f o r ships
150 m l o n g a n d o v e r w i t h t h e r e l e v a n t r e q u i r e m e n t s
in Part X I X " C o m m o n Structural Rules f o r Bulk
Carriers" met, o n e o f the following distinguishing
m a r k s is added t o the descriptive n o t a t i o n :
.1 B C - A - f o r s h i p s d e s i g n e d t o c a r r y t h e b u l k
cargoes having density 1 t / m a n d above w i t h
specified h o l d s e m p t y a t the m a x i m u m draught;
.2 B C - B - f o r s h i p s d e s i g n e d t o c a r r y t h e b u l k
cargoes h a v i n g density 1 t / m a n d above w i t h a l l
holds loaded;
.3 B C - C - f o r s h i p s d e s i g n e d t o c a r r y t h e b u l k
c a r g o e s h a v i n g d e n s i t y less t h a n 1 t / m .
F o r b u l k carriers h a v i n g distinguishing m a r k
B C - A o r B C - B i n t h e i r class n o t a t i o n , a n d c a r g o
3
holds o f w h i c h a r e designed f o r loading/unloading

using grabs w i t h a mass o f 2 0 t a n d over each i n
compliance w i t h t h e requirements o f Section 1,
Chapter 12,Part X I X " C o m m o n Structural Rules
for B u l k Carriers", after t h e above m a r k t h e
distinguishing m a r k G R A B ( X ) , where grab mass i n
tons shall be indicated instead o f X , f o r example,
GRAB(30t), shall m a n d a t o r y be added.
For a l l other b u l k carriers addition o f t h e
distinguishing m a r k G R A B ( X ) shall be voluntary.
I n case w h e n t h e ship h a s n o t been designed f o r
l o a d i n g a n d u n l o a d i n g i n several p o r t s , t h e n o t a t i o n (no
M P ) is added after a l l the above distinguishing m a r k s .
W h e n adding descriptive n o t a t i o n t o the character
o f classification o f self-propelled ships such as C h e m i c a l
tanker, O i l tanker, B u l k carrier, O r e carrier o rt h e
w o r d combinations: Oil/bulk carrier, Oil/ore carrier
etc. a f t e r d e s c r i p t i v e n o t a t i o n i t s h a l l b e a d d e d ( E S P ) .
T h i s m e a n s t h e necessity t o s u r v e y these ships based o n
the Enhanced Survey P r o g r a m m e .
F o r e x a m p l e : O i l / o r e c a r r i e r ( > 6 0 C) ( E S P ) .
The descriptive n o t a t i o n E s c o r t t u g is added t o
the character o f classification o f tugs c o m p l y i n g w i t h
the requirements o f Section 2, P a r t X V I I "Distinguishing M a r k s a n d Descriptive Notations i nthe
Class N o t a t i o n Specifying Structural a n d Operational Particulars o f Ships".
2.2.30 L i m i t a t i o n s o n v a l i d i t y o f s o m e d i s t i n g u i s h ing m a r k s .
W h e n t h e particular scope o frequirements o f the
R u l e s o n the basis o f w h i c h t h e a p p r o p r i a t e d i s t i n g u i s h ing m a r k s are i n t r o d u c e d i n t h e class n o t a t i o n are m e t
o n l y u n d e r l i m i t a t i o n s specified b y t h e Register, these
distinguishing m a r k s a n d limitations, o n exceeding o f
w h i c h these m a r k s b e c o m e i n v a l i d , a r e a d d e d ( i n
parentheses)
t o t h e class n o t a t i o n , e.g.:
KMArc7lAUT2Ro-ro s h i p ( A r c 7 l a t rf<8,4 m ) .
2.3 A D D I T I O N A L
CHARACTERISTICS
2.3.1 W h e n c o m p l y i n g w i t h definite r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f the Rules stipulated b y t h e structural features o r
operational characteristics o f the ship the fulfilment o f
w h i c h i s n o t reflected b y distinguishing m a r k s a n d
descriptive n o t a t i o n i n t h e class n o t a t i o n , t h e c o n firmation
o f compliance o f t h e ship w i t h such
r e q u i r e m e n t s is certified b y the e n t r y i n c o l u m n " O t h e r
characteristics" o f the Classification Certificate stating
f o r e x a m p l e t h a t t h e s h i p i s fit f o r t h e c a r r i a g e o f
dangerous goods as i t is indicated i n the Certificate...;
the ship is equipped f o r t h e carriage o f cargo i n
international standard containers o n deck and/or i n
appropriate holds, that t h e ship is suitable f o r
o p e r a t i o n i n w a t e r s c o v e r e d w i t h o i l , etc. ( r e f e r a l s o
t o 1.1.4.8, 1.1.5.1, 1.1.5.2 a n d 3.3.1.5, P a r t I I " H u l l " ) .
30
See 794c
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
2.3.2 T h e c o l u m n " O t h e r c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s " o f t h e

C l a s s i f i c a t i o n Certificate o f s u p p l y vessels a n d o t h e r
ships s e r v i n g o f f s h o r e o i l a n d gas fields (except f o r
m o b i l e offshore drilling units, floating cranes, pipelaying barges and floating hotels), w h i c h c o m p l y w i t h
the requirements o f Guidelines for the Transport and
Handling o f Limited Amounts o f Hazardous and
N o x i o u s L i q u i d Substances i n B u l k o n Offshore
S u p p o r t V e s s e l s ( I M O r e s o l u t i o n A . 6 7 3 ( 1 6 ) , as
amended by I M O resolution MSC.236(82) and
I M O resolution M E P C . 158(55)), shall have a n entry
r e a d i n g as f o l l o w s : " T h e s h i p is f i t t o c a r r y a l i m i t e d
a m o u n t o f hazardous and n o x i o u s liquid substances
i n b u l k , as s t a t e d i n C e r t i f i c a t e o f F i t n e s s o f O f f s h o r e
Support Vessel ( F o r m 2.1.47)".
Section 1, C h a p t e r 1, P a r t X L X " C o m m o n S t r u c t u r a l
R u l e s f o r B u l k Carriers") shall be entered i n c o l u m n
" O t h e r characteristics" o f the Classification Certificate
i n t h e f o l l o w i n g cases:
for distinguishing m a r k s B C - Aa n d B C - B - entry
" m a x i m u m c a r g o d e n s i t y .... t / m " i s m a d e i f t h e
m a x i m u m d e n s i t y o f c a r g o is less t h a n 3 t / m ;
for the distinguishing m a r k B C - A the acceptable
c o m b i n a t i o n o f p a r t i c u l a r e m p t y c a r g o t a n k s is
additionally entered, for example: "cargo tanks
N o s . 2, 4, ... m a y b e e m p t y " .
2.3.3 F o r b u l k c a r r i e r s w i t h d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k s
B C - A o r B C - B (refer t o 2.2.28) i n t h e class n o t a t i o n ,
t h e restrictions t o be observed d u r i n g o p e r a t i o n due t o
l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s a s s u m e d i n design (refer t o 3.1.3,
2.4.1 T h e R e g i s t e r m a y d e l e t e o r a l t e r a n y m a r k
i n the class n o t a t i o n i n t h e case o f a n y a l t e r a t i o n of,
or non-compliance w i t h the requirements defining the
i n s e r t i o n o f this m a r k i n the class n o t a t i o n .
3 TECHNICAL
3.1
2.4 A L T E R A T I O N O F M A R K S I N C L A S S
NOTATION
DOCUMENTATION
G E N E R A L
3.1.1 G e n e r a l p r o v i s i o n s p e r t i n e n t t o t h e r e v i e w
and approval (agreement) o f technical documentation
o n ships, m a t e r i a l s a n d p r o d u c t s are g i v e n i n P a r t I I
"Technical Documentation" o f Rules for Technical
Supervision during Construction o f Ships and M a n u facture o f Materials and Products for Ships.
3.1.2 T h e p r e s e n t P a r t o f t h e R u l e s c o n t a i n s l i s t s
o f the p l a n a p p r o v a l d o c u m e n t a t i o n t o be s u b m i t t e d
to the Register for review and approval.
3.1.3 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e s c o p e o f t e c h n i c a l
documentation o f a ship under conversion, repair o r
r e n o v a t i o n , t r a n s f e r o f class, as w e l l as d u r i n g t h e i n i t i a l
survey o f ship n o t built under the technical supervision
o f the Register o r a n y other classification body, are
given i n Part I "General Provisions" o f Rules for the
Classification Surveys o f Ships i n Service.
A t the same time, technical documentation for
conversion o f single-hull tankers to double-hull tankers
or b u l k carriers shall meet the relevant requirements o f
the Rules taking i n to account I A C S U I SC226 ( R e v . l
D e c 2 0 1 2 ) set o u t i n t h e S u p p l e m e n t t o r u l e s o f R u s s i a n
M a r i t i m e Register o f Shipping " I A C S Unified Interp r e t a t i o n s a n d R e c o m m e n d a t i o n s " ( p u b l i s h e d i n elect r o n i c f o r m as a s e p a r a t e e d i t i o n ) .
3.1.4 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e s c o p e o f t e c h n i c a l
d o c u m e n t a t i o n o f materials a n d products f o r ships
are given i n the relevant Parts o f the Rules.
3.1.5 W h e n a l t e r n a t i v e d e s i g n a n d a r r a n g e m e n t s
being applied o n board deviate f r o m statutory
r e q u i r e m e n t s , a n engineering analysis shall be sub-
mitted for the Register approval w i t h a technical

justification demonstrating that the alternative design
and arrangements provide a n equivalent level o f
safety t o t h a t stipulated b y the relevant s t a t u t o r y
requirements (refer t o I M O resolution M S C . 2 1 6 ( 8 2 ) ) .
T h e engineering analysis shall be p e r f o r m e d i n
accordance w i t h the provisions o f Guidelines o n
A l t e r n a t i v e Design a n d A r r a n g e m e n t s (refer t o I M O
M S C . l / C i r c . 1212).
F o r fire safety alternative design a n d arrangem e n t s r e f e r t o 1.7, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n " .
3.2 P L A N A P P R O V A L
DOCUMENTATION
3.2.1 G e n e r a l p r o v i s i o n s .
3.2.1.1 P r i o r t o c o m m e n c e m e n t o f a s h i p c o n s t r u c tion, the plan approval documentation proving that all
requirements o f the Register rules applicable t o the ship
concerned are c o m p l i e d w i t h shall be s u b m i t t e d t o the
Register for review. T h e documentation for review shall
be s u b m i t t e d t o t h e R e g i s t e r , as a r u l e i n e l e c t r o n i c f o r m
i n P D F f o r m a t b y m u t u a l l y a g r e e d w a y , o r as a h a r d
c o p y i n triplicate, c o m p l e t e d i n accordance w i t h the lists
g i v e n i n 3.2.2 t o 3 . 2 . 1 1 , t a k i n g i n t o a c c o u n t the
peculiarities a n d type o f a ship.
D o c u m e n t a t i o n m a r k e d w i t h ( * ) is t h e d o c u m e n tation, w h i c h r e v i e w results are d o c u m e n t e d by
s t a m p i n g as p e r t o 8 . 3 . 1 , P a r t I I " T e c h n i c a l D o c umentation" o f the Rules for Technical Supervision
during Construction o f Ships and Manufacture o f
Materials and Products for Ships.
Part I.
Classification
31
D o c u m e n t a t i o n m a r k e d w i t h (**) is the docu

m e n t a t i o n , w h i c h r e v i e w results are d o c u m e n t e d b y
s t a m p i n g as p e r t o 8.3.2, P a r t I I " T e c h n i c a l D o c
umentation" o f the Rules for Technical Supervision
during Construction o f Ships and Manufacture o f
Materials and Products for Ships.
3.2.2 G e n e r a l :
.1 ship specification ( * * ) ;
.2 g e n e r a l a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f
escape routes ( * ) ;
.3 l i s t o f c o m p o n e n t s a n d m a t e r i a l s w i t h i n d i c a
tion o f the Register approval (**);
.4 d r a w i n g o f d a n g e r o u s z o n e s a n d s p a c e s ( * ) ;
.5 p l a n s h o w i n g t h e p o s i t i o n o f t h e I M O n u m b e r
o n b o a r d a ship i n compliance w i t h the requirements o f
R e g u l a t i o n X I - 1 / 3 o f S O L A S - 7 4 / 2 0 0 4 (for a l l passenger
ships o f 100 gross t o n n a g e a n d above a n d f o r a l l cargo
ships o f 300 gross tonnage a n d above) ( * ) ;
.6 l i s t o f e q u i v a l e n t s o f s t r u c t u r e s , m a t e r i a l s a n d
products w i t h justification o f their application (refer
to 1.3.4.1, G e n e r a l R e g u l a t i o n s f o r the Classification
and Other Activity), i f any (*);
.7 e n g i n e e r i n g a n a l y s i s o f a l t e r n a t i v e d e s i g n a n d
arrangements (refer t o 3.1.5), i f a n y ( * * ) ;
.8 r e p o r t o n q u a l i t a t i v e f a i l u r e a n a l y s i s f o r p r o
p u l s i o n a n d steering i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h Section 12, P a r t
V I I " M a c h i n e r y I n s t a l l a t i o n s " ( f o r passenger ships) ( * * ) ;
.9 e n g i n e e r i n g a n a l y s i s o f t h e c a p a b i l i t y o f a s h i p t o
r e t u r n t o p o r t i n case o f a n accident i n i n c o m p l i a n c e
w i t h 2.2.6 a n d 2.2.7, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n " ,
considering interpretations o f I M O M S C . l / C i r c . 1 3 6 9
(for passenger ships h a v i n g l e n g t h o f 120 m a n d above
o r h a v i n g three o r m o r e m a i n vertical zones) (**);
.10 l i s t o f s t r u c t u r a l m e a s u r e s a n d e n g i n e e r i n g
solutions ensuring electrostatic a n d galvanic intrinsic
safety ( * * ) .
3.2.3 H u l l d o c u m e n t a t i o n :
.1 h u l l m e m b e r s s c a n t l i n g s d e t e r m i n a t i o n , as w e l l
as a n a l y s i s o f t h e o v e r a l l l o n g i t u d i n a l s t r e n g t h a n d
b u c k l i n g stability o f m e m b e r s f o r a l l specified l o a d i n g
conditions o f a ship, including the loading a n d
carriage o f b u l k cargoes other t h a n grain (**);
.2 m i d s h i p s e c t i o n p l a n a n d t h e t y p i c a l t r a n s v e r s e
sections w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f spacing between the m a i n
longitudinal a n d transverse members, m a i n particulars
o f t h e ship a n d t h e i r r a t i o s , class n o t a t i o n o f a ship a n d
values o f design still w a t e r bending m o m e n t s ( * ) ;
.3 c o n s t r u c t i o n a l p r o f i l e w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f f r a m e
spacing, boundaries o f the p o r t i o n s o f a ship length,
position o f the watertight bulkheads, pillars, arrange
m e n t o f superstructures and deckhouses (*);
.4 d e c k a n d p l a t f o r m p l a n s w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f
design loads (including the loads induced by lift
1
trucks and containers), positions and dimensions o f

openings, their strengthening, end structures o f the
side c o a m i n g s ( * ) ;
.5 d o u b l e b o t t o m ( s i n g l e b o t t o m ) p l a n . T h e p l a n
shall contain:
sea c h e s t s e c t i o n s w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f p r e s s u r e i n
the b l o w i n g system;
table o f pressure heads;
boundaries o f watertight compartments;
dimensions and position o f manholes and other
openings.
F o r b u l k carriers a n d ore carriers a n allowable l o a d
o n the i n n e r b o t t o m p l a t i n g shall be i n d i c a t e d ( * ) ;
.6 s h e l l e x p a n s i o n w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f t h e s h i p h u l l
boundaries, positions and dimensions o f openings i n
shell plating, a n d f o r ships strengthened f o r naviga
t i o n i n ice also t h e u p p e r a n d l o w e r edges o f t h e ice
belt a n d corresponding f o r w a r d a n d aft draughts
(with due regard to trim), arrangement o f intermedi
ate frames. S h e l l e x p a n s i o n f o r glass r e i n f o r c e d ships
shall be s u b m i t t e d i f the o u t e r shell p l a t i n g has
different thickness (*);
1
.7 d r a w i n g s o f l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d t r a n s v e r s e b u l k
heads, including t a n k w a s h bulkheads (for tanks the
heights o f o v e r f l o w a n d air pipes shall be indicated) (*);
.8 d r a w i n g o f t h e a f t e r e n d f r a m i n g a n d
sternframe (*);
.9 d r a w i n g o f t h e f o r e e n d f r a m i n g a n d s t e m ( * ) ;
.10 d r a w i n g s o f p r o p e l l e r b r a c k e t s a n d b o s s i n g s ,
as w e l l as f i x e d n o z z l e s ( * ) ;
.11 d r a w i n g s o f s e a t i n g s f o r t h e m a i n m a c h i n e r y ,
boilers a n d shaft bearings, including b o t t o m con
struction w i t h indication o f type and power o f the
m a c h i n e r y , as w e l l as w i t h i n d i c a t i o n t h a t seatings
c o m p l y w i t h the requirements o f the supplier's
technical documentation o n the m a i n machinery
a n d boilers o r t h a t n o special r e q u i r e m e n t s are placed
by the supplier o n the seatings (*);
.12 d r a w i n g s o f s e a t i n g s f o r a u x i l i a r y m a c h i n e r y ,
e q u i p m e n t a n d g e a r s a c c o r d i n g t o 2 . 1 1 , P a r t I I ( * ) ;
.13 d r a w i n g s o f e n g i n e a n d b o i l e r c a s i n g s ,
coamings, companions and other guards o f openings
i n the ship's h u l l (*);
.14 d r a w i n g o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s a n d d e c k h o u s e s ( * ) ;
.15 b u l w a r k d r a w i n g s ( * ) ;
.16 s t r e n g t h c a l c u l a t i o n s o f s e a t i n g s f o r m o o r i n g
and t o w i n g appliances ( * * ) ;
.17 d r a w i n g s o f s e a t i n g s f o r m o o r i n g a n d t o w i n g
appliances (*);
.18 p l a n o f w e l d c o n t r o l a n d t a b l e o f h u l l
welding (*), containing the following i n f o r m a t i o n :
.18.1 n a m e a n d t h i c k n e s s o f s t r u c t u r a l c o m p o
nents t o be j o i n e d ;
1
' A l l constructional drawings mentioned here shall indicate the scantlings o f the hull m e m b e r s , their material (with indication o f
g r a d e s a c c o r d i n g t o P a r t X I I I " M a t e r i a l s " ) , a s w e l l a s t y p i c a l s e c t i o n s a n d details, t y p e s a n d d i m e n s i o n s o f fillet w e l d s .
32
Rules
.18.2 s h a p e o r s y m b o l o f e d g e p r e p a r a t i o n ;
.18.3 b r a n d s a n d g r a d e s o f b a s e m e t a l ;
.18.4 b r a n d s a n d g r a d e s o f w e l d i n g c o n s u m a b l e s ;
.18.5 m e t h o d o f w e l d i n g a n d p o s i t i o n o f j o i n t i n
space ;
.19 p l a n o f t e s t i n g t h e h u l l f o r w a t e r t i g h t n e s s ( * ) ;
.20 d r a w i n g s o f p e n e t r a t i o n s o f p i p i n g , v e n t i l a t i o n
ducts, cable ducts, etc. t h r o u g h t h e bulkheads, decks,
inner b o t t o m , watertight floors a n d w e b members (*);
.21 s p e c i f i c a t i o n s o f p r o t e c t i v e c o a t i n g s a c c o r d i n g
to 6.5,P a r t X I I I " M a t e r i a l s "(*);
.22 b a s i c p a r a m e t e r s o f t h e h u l l p r o t e c t i o n b y
d a m p i n g f r o m damages w h e n m o o r i n g ( f o r ships t o
be m o o r e d a t sea t o o t h e r ships) ( * * ) ;
.23 d e t a i l e d d e s c r i p t i o n o f t h e h u l l c o n s t r u c t i n g
process, c o n t a i n i n g t h e i n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e materials,
m e t h o d s o f f o r m i n g t h e structural items, necessary
c o n d i t i o n s required d u r i n g h u l l c o n s t r u c t i o n , as w e l l
as a n a l y s i s o f t h e s t r u c t u r a l s t r e n g t h b o t h l o c a l a n d
general ( o n l y f o r ships constructed o f glass-reinforced
plastic) ( * * ) ;
.24 l o a d i n g m a n u a l f o r s h i p s o f 6 5 m a n d o v e r i n
l e n g t h ( r e f e r t o 1.4.9, P a r t I I " H u l l " ) ( * ) .
3.2.4 D o c u m e n t a t i o n o n a r r a n g e m e n t s , e q u i p m e n t a n d outfit:
.1 a r r a n g e m e n t plans, d r a w i n g s o f essential
assemblies a n d parts o f closing appliances o f openings i n hull, superstructures, deckhouses a n d subdivision bulkheads, including data o n coamings
height a n d type o f closing appliances (*);
.2 c a l c u l a t i o n s o f b o w , s i d e a n d s t e r n c l o s i n g
appliances i n a ship's h u l l ( * * ) ;
.3 a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s o f m a c h i n e r y a n d a c t u a t o r s
o f rudder a n d steering gear w i t h indication o f
essential parts a n d assemblies (*);
.4 s t r e n g t h c a l c u l a t i o n o f e s s e n t i a l p a r t s a n d
assemblies o f rudder a n d steering gear ( * * ) ;
.5 c a l c u l a t i o n o f e f f i c i e n c y o f r u d d e r a n d s t e e r i n g
gear ( * * ) ;
.6 a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n w i t h e s s e n t i a l p a r t s a n d
assemblies o f h a t c h w a y s o f d r y cargo holds (*);
.7 s t r e n g t h c a l c u l a t i o n s o f h a t c h w a y s o f d r y c a r g o
holds (**);
.8 c a l c u l a t i o n s o f a n c h o r , m o o r i n g a n d t o w i n g
arrangements (**);
.9 a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s w i t h e s s e n t i a l p a r t s a n d
assemblies o f anchor, m o o r i n g a n d t o w i n g arrangements (*);
.10 c a l c u l a t i o n s o f s i g n a l m a s t s a n d r i g g i n g ( * * ) ;
.11 d r a w i n g s o f s i g n a l m a s t s a n d r i g g i n g ( * ) ;
1
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
assemblies o f g u a r d rails (*);
.13 c a l c u l a t i o n s o f e s s e n t i a l p a r t s a n d a s s e m b l i e s
o f guide members f o rcontainers i n cargo holds (**);
.14 a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s o f e s s e n t i a l p a r t s a n d
assemblies o f guide m e m b e r s f o r containers i n cargo
holds (*);
.15 p l a n s o f a r r a n g e m e n t a n d f a s t e n i n g o f l a d d e r s
w i t h essential parts a n d assemblies (including accomm o d a t i o n a n d pilot ladders, a n d gangways) (*);
.16 a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n w i t h e s s e n t i a l p a r t s a n d
assemblies o f c a t w a l k o n o i l tankers (*);
.17 p l a n o f e s c a p e r o u t e s ( * ) ;
assemblies o f m e a n s o f access f o r i n s p e c t i o n s o f
spaces i n cargo area a n d o t h e r spaces o n o i l t a n k e r s
and b u l k carriers (*);
.19 m e a n s o f a c c e s s m a n u a l ( f o r o i l t a n k e r s a n d
b u l k carriers) (*);
.20 c a l c u l a t i o n o f h o i s t i n g g e a r o f s h i p b o r n e
barges ( * * ) ;
.21 g e n e r a l v i e w o f h o i s t i n g g e a r o f s h i p b o r n e
barges (*);
.22 l i s t o f e m e r g e n c y o u t f i t ( * * ) .
3.2.5 D o c u m e n t a t i o n o n s t a b i l i t y a n d m a n o e u v rability:
.1 lines d r a w i n g , c o o r d i n a t e tables o f lines ( * * ) ;
.2 h y d r o s t a t i c c u r v e s ( * * ) ;
.3 c u r v e s o f a r e a s a n d s t a t i c m o m e n t s o f h u l l
cross sections ( * * ) ;
.4 c a l c u l a t i o n s a n d c u r v e s o f a r m s o f f o r m
stability (cross-curves) w i t h schemes o f t h e relevant
hull volumes (**);
.5 s u m m a r y t a b l e o f d i s p l a c e m e n t s , p o s i t i o n s o f
centre o fgravity, t r i m a n d initial stability f o r various
loading conditions (**);
.6 c a l c u l a t i o n s r e l a t i n g t o v e r i f i c a t i o n o f a s h i p ' s
stability according t o t h e Rules; mass tables f o r
v a r i o u s l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f dist r i b u t i o n o f cargoes, fuel o i l , fresh w a t e r a n d liquid
ballast i n tanks; calculations o f roll amplitude a n d
weather criterion; diagrams o f windage area o fa ship
and calculations o fheeling moments;
calculations o f heel caused b y c r o w d i n g o f
passengers a n d b y t u r n i n g ; calculations o f icing,
angles o f f l o o d i n g , corrections f o r free surface effect
o f l i q u i d cargoes a n d stores, etc. ( * * ) ;
.7 s u m m a r y t a b l e o f t h e r e s u l t s o f s t a b i l i t y
verification according t o the Rules a n d curves o f
static o r d y n a m i c stability ( * * ) ;
3
' i f t h e i n f o r m a t i o n i n d i c a t e d i n 3.2.3.18.1 t o 3.2.3.18.5 i s s t a t e d t o t h e f u l l i n t h e d r a w i n g s o f a s h i p ' s h u l l , t h e n s u b m i s s i o n o f t h e

table o f welding is n o t required.
I t c a n b e m e r g e d w i t h p l a n o f s u b d i v i s i o n a c c o r d i n g t o 3.2.6.3.
I f all necessary information concerning escape routes is stated i n t h e general arrangement plan, plan o f escape routes isn o t
required.
2
Part I.
Classification
.8 s t a b i l i t y c a l c u l a t i o n s f o r t h e c a s e o f l o a d i n g
and stowage o f b u l k cargoes other t h a n grain (**);
.9 f r e e b o a r d p l a n ( * * ) , c o n t a i n i n g :
i n f o r m a t i o n a b o u t m a x i m u m draught o f the ship;
general arrangement p l a n o f openings a n d closing
appliances, w h i c h contribute t o t h e w a t e r t i g h t integrity
o f t h e ship external boundaries (external doors, cargo
h a t c h e s , s e r v i c e h a t c h e s ; b o w , s t e r n a n d side d o o r s a n d
r a m p s ; scuttles a n d w i n d o w s , freeing p o r t s a n d scuppers,
b o t t o m a n d side v a l v e s o f sea w a t e r systems, sewage
s y s t e m etc.; a i r p i p e s a n d v e n t i l a t i o n h e a d s , c l o s u r e s o f
v e n t i l a t i o n ducts, engine r o o m s k y l i g h t s , etc.);
arrangement plan o f means f o r protection o f the
c r e w ( b u l w a r k , g u a r d rails, g a n g w a y s , p a s s a g e w a y s , etc.).
3.2.6 D o c u m e n t a t i o n o n s u b d i v i s i o n :
calculations o n probability estimation o f
subdivision ( i f required) (**);
.2 c a l c u l a t i o n s o f d a m a g e t r i m a n d s t a b i l i t y ,
including static stability curves ( * * ) ;
.3 p l a n o f s u b d i v i s i o n s h o w i n g a l l w a t e r t i g h t
structures a n d openings w i t h indication o f types o f
closing appliances, as w e l l as arrangements used f o r
equalizing heel a n d t r i m o f a damaged ship (**);
.4 c r o s s - c u r v e s o f s t a b i l i t y ( f o r a d a m a g e d s h i p ) i f
necessary f o r t h e adopted m e t h o d o f d a m a g e stability
calculation (**);
.5 c a l c u l a t i o n s o f s e c t i o n a l a r e a s o f c r o s s - f l o o d i n g
fittings a n d o f uprighting t i m e o f a ship (**);
.6 c o r n e r p o i n t c o o r d i n a t e t a b l e f o r c o m p a r t
ments a n d tanks (**);
.7 a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n o f t h e f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n
sensors o f w a t e r ingress i n t o c o m p a r t m e n t s o f
passenger ships, b u l k carriers o r single-hold cargo
ships b e l o w 1 0 0 m i n l e n g t h , as specified i n P a r t V
"Subdivision". T h e arrangement plan, as a m i n i m u m ,
shall include the following:
technical description o f the flooding detection
system equipment (**);
Type A p p r o v a l Certificate f o r the flooding
detection system (*);
single-line diagrams o f t h e f l o o d i n g detection
system w i t h indication o f equipment location i nthe
ship general arrangement p l a n (*);
documents w i t h indication o flocation, fastening,
p r o t e c t i o n a n d test procedures f o r t h e f l o o d i n g
detection system equipment (*);
description o f procedures necessary t o be per
f o r m e d i n case o f t h e f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n s y s t e m
failure (**);
requirements f o r the flooding detection system
equipment maintenance (**).
3.2.7 D o c u m e n t a t i o n o n f i r e p r o t e c t i o n :
. 1 d o c u m e n t s o n s t r u c t u r a l fire p r o t e c t i o n :
.1.1 a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n o f
fire-protective
divisions,
including doors a n d penetrations (cutouts) i n these
structures w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f categories o f these
33
spaces i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h 2.2.1.3, 2.2.1.5, 2.3.3 o r

2.4.2, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n " (*);
.1.2 s c h e m e s o r d e s c r i p t i o n o f i n s u l a t i o n , l i n i n g ,
f i n i s h i n g , d e c k c o v e r i n g a n d o t h e r finishing m a t e r i a l s ( * ) ;
.1.3 c a l c u l a t i o n s r e q u i r e d b y 2 . 1 . 1 . 4 a n d 2 . 1 . 1 . 1 0 ,
Part V I "Fire Protection" (**);
.2 d i a g r a m s o f fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s a n d
smoke detection system b y air sampling w i t h
associated calculations a n d other data, w h i c h con
firm t h e f u l f i l l m e n t o f t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f P a r t V I
"Fire Protection" (*);
.3 l i s t o f fire-fighting o u t f i t ( * * ) ;
.4 s t r u c t u r a l d r a w i n g s o f a s s e m b l i e s a n d p a r t s o f
fire-protective
divisions (*);
.5 s t r u c t u r a l d r a w i n g s o f i n s u l a t i o n , l i n i n g a n d
deck covering (*);
.6 a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n o f fire-fighting o u t f i t ( * ) ;
.7 l i s t o f s p a r e p a r t s a n d t o o l s ( * * ) ;
.8 p r e l i m i n a r y fire p l a n ( * * ) ;
.9 c a l c u l a t i o n s o f fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s ( * * ) ;
.10 s t r u c t u r a l d r a w i n g s o f a s s e m b l i e s a n d e q u i p
m e n t o f fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s ( * ) ;
.11 d i a g r a m s a n d o p e r a t i o n a l m a n u a l s f o r fire
extinguishing systems, w h i c h shall be available o n
board t h e ship i n compliance w i t h the requirements
of Part V I "Fire Protection" (**).
N o t e . W h e n equipment o f carbon dioxide smothering
systems, a e r o s o l fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g systems, fixed l o c a l a p p l i c a t i o n
fire extinguishing s y s t e m s a r e s u p p l i e d a s c o m p l e t e delivery,
a p p r o p r i a t e d i a g r a m s a n d c a l c u l a t i o n s a s r e q u i r e d b y 3.2.7.2,
3.2.7.9 a n d 3.2.7.10 f o r t h e m e n t i o n e d s y s t e m s m a y b e s u b m i t t e d
t o g e t h e r w i t h t h e d o c u m e n t a t i o n r e q u i r e d b y S e c t i o n 4, P a r t I V
"Technical Supervision during Manufacture o f Products" o f the
Rules f o rTechnical Supervision during Construction o f Ships
and Manufacture o f Materials a n d Products for Ships;
.12 e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l p r o t e c t i o n s c h e m e i n o i l
tankers (*).
3.2.8 D o c u m e n t a t i o n o n m a c h i n e r y a n d b o i l e r
installations:
.1 g e n e r a l a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s o f m a c h i n e r y a n d
e q u i p m e n t i n t h e m a c h i n e r y spaces o f c a t e g o r y A , as
w e l l as i n t h e e m e r g e n c y diesel g e n e r a t o r spaces (refer
t o 1.2, P a r t V I I " M a c h i n e r y I n s t a l l a t i o n s " ) w i t h
i n d i c a t i o n o f escape routes ( * ) ;
.2 d r a w i n g s o f s e a t i n g a n d a t t a c h m e n t fittings o f
the m a i n machinery, shafting bearings a n d boilers (*);
.3 d i a g r a m ( * ) a n d d e s c r i p t i o n ( * * ) o f t h e r e m o t e
control f o r the m a i n machinery complete with
i n f o r m a t i o n o n equipment o fremote c o n t r o l stations
w i t h c o n t r o l devices, i n d i c a t i o n a n d a l a r m devices,
means o fcommunication a n d other arrangements.
N o t e . W h e n remote control f o r the main machinery is
supplied a s complete delivery with the m a i n engines and/or with
steerable propellers, the m e n t i o n e ddiagram a n d description m a y
be submitted together with the documentation required b y
S e c t i o n 12, P a r t I V " T e c h n i c a l S u p e r v i s i o n d u r i n g M a n u f a c t u r e
of Products" o f the Rules f o r Technical Supervision during
Construction o f Ships a n d Manufacture o f Materials a n d
Products for Ships;
34
Rules
drawings o farrangement a n d outfitting i n fuel

oil a n d lubricating oil tanks (*);
.5 d o c u m e n t a t i o n o n s h a f t i n g :
.5.1 g e n e r a l v i e w o f s h a f t i n g ( * * ) ;
.5.2 d r a w i n g o f s t e r n t u b e a n d p a r t s o f s t e r n t u b e
arrangement, d r a w i n g o f casing protecting t h e area
between t h e sterntube a n d propeller boss (*);
.5.3 s t e r n t u b e b e a r i n g a n d s t e r n t u b e s e a l l u b r i c a
tion a n d cooling diagrams (*);
.5.4 d r a w i n g s o f s h a f t s ( p r o p e l l e r , i n t e r m e d i a t e
and thrust) (*);
.5.5 d r a w i n g s o f s h a f t c o n n e c t i o n s a n d c o u p l i n g s ( * ) ;
.5.6 d r a w i n g s o f j o u r n a l a n d t h r u s t b e a r i n g s o f
shafting a n d their fastening t o t h e seatings (*);
.5.7 s t r e n g t h c a l c u l a t i o n o f s h a f t s a n d t h e i r
fastening parts (**);
.5.8 c a l c u l a t i o n o f t h e n u m b e r o f s h a f t b e a r i n g s ,
their position a n d experienced loads (**);
.5.9 c a l c u l a t i o n o f p a r a m e t e r s o f s h a f t i n g a l i g n
ment (**);
.5.10 c a l c u l a t i o n o f f i t t i n g o f p r o p e l l e r a n d
shafting couplings (**);
.5.11 t o r s i o n a l v i b r a t i o n c a l c u l a t i o n s i n c o n f o r
m i t y w i t h S e c t i o n 8, P a r t V I I " M a c h i n e r y I n s t a l l a
t i o n s " . I n s o m e cases, c a l c u l a t i o n o f a x i a l a n d
bending vibration o f shafting m a ybe required (**).
1
N o t e . W h e n controllable pitch propeller is supplied as

complete delivery with the propulsion plant, t h e documentation
l i s t e d i n 3.2.8.5.2 t o 3 . 2 . 8 . 5 . 1 1 m a y b e s u b m i t t e d t o g e t h e r w i t h t h e
d o c u m e n t a t i o n r e q u i r e d b y S e c t i o n 6, P a r t I V " T e c h n i c a l
Supervision during Manufacture o f Products" o f the Rules f o r
Technical Supervision during Construction o f Ships a n d M a n u
facture o f Materials a n d Products for Ships;
.5.12 c a l c u l a t i o n o f p o w e r o f t h e m a i n m a c h i n e r y
f o r ice ships o f Ice2 A r c 9 categories i n c o m p l i a n c e
with the requirements o f 2.1, Part V I I "Machinery
Installations" t o the m i n i m u m value o f power
delivered t o t h e propeller shafts o f t h e ships ( * * ) ;
.6 d o c u m e n t a t i o n o n p r o p e l l e r ' :
.6.1 g e n e r a l v i e w o f p r o p e l l e r ( * * ) ;
.6.2 s t r e n g t h c a l c u l a t i o n o f p r o p e l l e r b l a d e , a n d
for detachable blade propellers a n dcontrollable pitch
propellers (CP-propellers), also calculation o f fasten
ing o f blades t o t h e boss ( * * ) .
1
N o t e . T h e mentioned calculations m a y b e submitted

t o g e t h e r w i t h t h e d o c u m e n t a t i o n r e q u i r e d b y S e c t i o n 7, P a r t I V
"Technical Supervision during Manufacture o f Products" o f the
Rules f o rTechnical Supervision during Construction o f Ships
and Manufacture o f Materials a n d Products for Ships;
.6.3 d r a w i n g s o f b l a d e , b o s s a n d c o n e , a s w e l l a s
items f o r their securing ( f o r detachable blade
propeller a n d CP-propeller) (*);
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
.6.4 d r a w i n g o f p r o p e l l e r a t t a c h m e n t t o p r o p e l l e r
shaft (*);
.6.5 d e s c r i p t i o n o f p i t c h a c t u a t i n g m e c h a n i s m
() a n d i t s c o n t r o l s y s t e m ( * * ) ;
.6.6 d i a g r a m s o f p i t c h a c t u a t i n g m e c h a n i s m
() ( * ) ;
.6.7 a s s e m b l y d r a w i n g o f p i t c h a c t u a t i n g m e c h a n
i s m () c o m p l e t e ( * * ) ;
.6.8 d r a w i n g s o f t h e m a i n p a r t s , i n c l u d i n g
shaft, h y d r a u l i c cylinders, p u s h - p u l l rods, pistons,
slides, o i l d i s t r i b u t i o n boxes, l u b r i c a t i n g o i l s u p p l y
tube t o hydraulic cylinder i n h u b (*).
N o t e . T h e d o c u m e n t a t i o n l i s t e d i n 3.2.8.6.3 t o 3.2.8.6.8
m a y b e submitted together with t h edocumentation required b y
S e c t i o n 7, P a r t I V " T e c h n i c a l S u p e r v i s i o n d u r i n g M a n u f a c t u r e o f
Products" o f the Rules f o r Technical Supervision during
Products for Ships;
.7 d o c u m e n t a t i o n o n a c t i v e m e a n s o f t h e s h i p ' s
steering ( A M S S ) ' :
.7.1 d r a w i n g s o f i n s t a l l a t i o n a n d a t t a c h m e n t o f
A M S S (*);
.7.2 d a t a t o c o n f i r m c o m p l i a n c e o f t h e A M S S
construction with operational conditions (**);
.7.3 g e n e r a l v i e w w i t h n e c e s s a r y s e c t i o n s a n d
sealing details ( * * ) ;
.7.4 c a l c u l a t i o n s o f p r o p e l l e r ( o r i m p e l l e r o f
water-jet), shafts, couplings, p i n i o n s , gear wheels o f
steerable propellers, water-jets a n d thrusters ( w h e n
CP-propeller is used, refer t o 3.2.8.6) ( * ) ;
.7.5 d r a w i n g s o f p r o p e l l e r ( o r i m p e l l e r o f w a t e r jet), shafts, couplings, pinions, gear wheels o f
steerable propellers, water-jets a n d thrusters ( w h e n
CP-propeller is used, refer t o 3.2.8.6) ( * ) ;
.7.6 s t r e n g t h c a l c u l a t i o n s o f t h e d r i v i n g s h a f t o f
rotor, blade, gearing o fvertical-axis propellers ( * * ) ;
.7.7 d r a w i n g s o f s h a f t s , g e a r i n g , r o t o r s , b l a d e s
and blade t u r n i n g mechanism o f vertical-axis pro
pellers (*);
.7.8 d r a w i n g s o f b e a r i n g s a n d s e a l s ( * ) ;
.7.9 c a l c u l a t i o n o f c o n n e c t i o n s , d r a w i n g s o f
propeller nozzles a n d tunnel, including i n f o r m a t i o n
o n acceptable clearance between ready-fitted propel
ler a n d t u n n e l (nozzle) ( * * ) ;
.7.10 h u l l m e m b e r d r a w i n g s a n d d r a w i n g s o f
reversible-steering gear o f water-jets (*);
.7.11 d i a g r a m s o f c o o l i n g , l u b r i c a t i n g a n d h y
draulic t u r n i n g systems f o r steerable propellers
(blades o f C P - p r o p e l l e r s ) , as w e l l as p a r t i c u l a r s o f
piping o f the above m e n t i o n e d systems (*);
.7.12 c a l c u l a t i o n s o f e l e c t r i c d r i v e s f o r e l e c t r i c a l l y
driven A M S S (**);
1
' T h e documentation shall contain information o n treatment a n d geometry o f w o r k i n g surfaces, heat treatment, tolerances o n
m a t i n g parts, h y d r a u l i c tests, n o n - d e s t r u c t i v e testing, etc.
F o r propellers n o t c o v e r e d b y the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f the R u l e s , the d r a w i n g list shall b e a g r e e d w i t h t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h particular
case.
2
Part I.
Classification
.7.13 d i a g r a m s o f e l e c t r i c d r i v e s f o r e l e c t r i c a l l y
driven A M S S (*);
.7.14 d o c u m e n t a t i o n o n m o n i t o r i n g , c o n t r o l , a n d
protection systems (*);
.7.15 t o r s i o n a l v i b r a t i o n c a l c u l a t i o n s ( f o r m a i n
A M S S a n d d y n a m i c p o s i t i o n i n g systems) a n d service
life c a l c u l a t i o n o f r o l l i n g bearings ( * * ) .
Moreover, the Register m a y require presentation
o f rotational a n d calculations o f pendular vibration
for steerable propellers i f used as m a i n A M S S ( * * ) ;
.7.16 A M S S s p e c i f i c a t i o n , c o n t a i n i n g i t s p r i n c i p a l
characteristics, as w e l l as m a t e r i a l specifications f o r
principal parts a n d assemblies ( * * ) ;
.7.17 p r o t o t y p e a n d p i l o t s p e c i m e n t e s t p r o gramme (*);
.7.18 d e s c r i p t i o n , s e r v i c e a n d m a i n t e n a n c e m a n ual (**).
N o t e . T h e d o c u m e n t a t i o n l i s t e d i n 3.2.8.7.3 t o 3.2.8.7.18
m a y b e submitted together with thedocumentation required b y
S e c t i o n 7, P a r t I V " T e c h n i c a l S u p e r v i s i o n d u r i n g M a n u f a c t u r e o f
Products" o f the Rules f o r Technical Supervision during
Products for Ships;
.8 d o c u m e n t a t i o n o n r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t s ( r e f e r
t o 4.3).
3.2.9 D o c u m e n t a t i o n o n a u t o m a t i o n e q u i p m e n t :
.1 t e c h n i c a l d e s c r i p t i o n o f a u t o m a t i o n systems
a n d devices w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f t h e i r purpose a n d
principle o foperation (**);
.2 f u n c t i o n a l d i a g r a m s o f a l a r m a n d m o n i t o r i n g
systems ( A M S ) , centralized m o n i t o r i n g systems,
computer-based a n d integrated c o n t r o l systems a n d
A M S , including diagrams o fpower supply (*);
.3 l i s t o f c o n t r o l l e d p a r a m e t e r s w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f
types o f devices ( * ) ;
.4 t e c h n i c a l d o c u m e n t a t i o n o n r e m o t e a u t o m a t e d
c o n t r o l f o r m a i n engines a n d CP-propellers: functional diagrams, front panels o f t h e remote autom a t e d c o n t r o l deck w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f a l l devices,
diagram o f power supply t o remote automated
control, diagrams o f protection, a l a r m a n dindication
o f parameters o f t h e m a i n engines a n d C P - p r o p e l lers ( * ) ;
.5 f u n c t i o n a l d i a g r a m s o f a u t o m a t i o n s y s t e m s f o r
m a i n engines (cooling, lubricating o i l , fuel o i l
p r e p a r a t i o n systems, etc.) ( * ) ;
.6 t e c h n i c a l d o c u m e n t a t i o n o n a u t o m a t i o n o f
auxiliary engines a n d electric generating plant:
functional diagrams, front panels o f c o n t r o l desks
for electric generating p l a n t w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f a l l
devices, d i a g r a m o f p o w e r supply, p r o t e c t i o n , a l a r m
a n d i n d i c a t i o n o f parameters o f auxiliary engines a n d
electric generators ( * ) ;
.7 t e c h n i c a l d o c u m e n t a t i o n o n a u t o m a t i o n o f
boiler installation: functional diagrams, front panels
o f c o n t r o l desks w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f a l l devices,
35
diagrams o f p o w e r supply, protection, a l a r m a n d

indication o fparameters (*);
.8 f u n c t i o n a l d i a g r a m s o f a u t o m a t i o n o f s t a r t i n g
air compressors, including diagrams o f protection,
alarm and indication (*);
.9 f u n c t i o n a l d i a g r a m s o f a u t o m a t i o n a n d r e m o t e
c o n t r o l o f bilge a n d ballast systems, diagrams o f
power supply, a l a r m a n d indication (*);
.10 f u n c t i o n a l d i a g r a m s o f r e m o t e l e v e l s o u n d i n g
in tanks (*);
.11 d i a g r a m s o f e l e c t r i c c o n n e c t i o n s ( f o r s y s t e m s
a n d e q u i p m e n t specified i n 3.2.9.2, 3.2.9.4 t o 3.2.9.10)
w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f cable types a n d places o f installation o f all elements o f the diagrams (*);
.12 d r a w i n g s o f f r o n t p a n e l s o f d e s k s a n d b o a r d s
o f c o n t r o l a n d a l a r m systems a t t h e ship's c o n t r o l
station a n d o n t h e navigation bridge w i t h indication
o f a l l devices ( * ) ;
.13 g e n e r a l a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s o f a u t o m a t i o n
e q u i p m e n t a t t h e ship's c o n t r o l station a n d o n t h e
navigation bridge (*);
.14 f a i l u r e m o d e a n d e f f e c t s a n a l y s i s ( F M E A ) f o r
d y n a m i c p o s i t i o n i n g systems o n t h e ships h a v i n g
distinguishing marks D Y N P O S - 2 , D Y N P O S - 3 i nthe
class n o t a t i o n ( * * ) ;
.15 m o u n t i n g a n d s t r u c t u r a l d r a w i n g s o f a u t o m a t i o n systems a n d devices, sensors, a l a r m devices,
instruments, as w e l l as o f switchboards a n d desks o f
control a n d monitoring (*);
.16 t e c h n i c a l b a c k g r o u n d f o r j u s t i f i c a t i o n c o n taining substantiation o f distinguishing automation
m a r k i n class n o t a t i o n o f t h e ship ( * * ) .
N o t e . T h e d o c u m e n t a t i o n l i s t e d i n 3.2.9.4 t o 3.2.9.8,
3.2.9.14 a n d 3.2.9.15 m a y b e s u b m i t t e d t o g e t h e r w i t h t h e
d o c u m e n t a t i o n r e q u i r e d b y S e c t i o n 12, P a r t I V " T e c h n i c a l
Supervision during Manufacture o f Products" o f the Rules f o r
Technical Supervision during Construction o f Ships a n d M a n u facture o f Materials a n d Products for Ships.
3.2.10 D o c u m e n t a t i o n o n s y s t e m s a n d p i p i n g :
.1 d o c u m e n t a t i o n o n ship's systems:
.1.1 b i l g e s y s t e m d i a g r a m ( * ) ;
.1.2 b a l l a s t s y s t e m d i a g r a m ( * ) ;
.1.3 h e e l i n g a n d t r i m m i n g s y s t e m d i a g r a m s , a s
w e l l as d i a g r a m s o f devices ( a u t o m a t i c a n d m a n u a l l y
controlled) f o r ship t r i m m i n g b y cross-flooding (*);
.1.4 a i r , o v e r f l o w a n d s o u n d i n g p i p e s d i a grams (*);
.1.5 d i a g r a m s o f v e n t i l a t i o n a n d a i r c o n d i t i o n i n g
systems o f a c c o m m o d a t i o n , service, cargo, m a c h i n e r y
a n d p r o d u c t i o n spaces w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f w a t e r t i g h t
bulkheads a n d fire-proof divisions, arrangement o f
fire dampers, as w e l l as i n d i c a t i o n o f closures o f
ventilation ducts a n d openings (*);
.1.6 d i a g r a m s o f s e w a g e a n d w a s t e w a t e r s y s t e m s ,
as w e l l as s c u p p e r s w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f w a t e r t i g h t
bulkheads, freeboard deck a n d distances f r o m w a t e r l i n e
36
Rules
o r f r e e b o a r d d e c k t o t h e r e l e v a n t o p e n i n g s , as stated i n
4.3.2.4 a n d 4.3.2.6, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d P i p i n g " (*);
.1.7 d i a g r a m s o f h e a t i n g a n d b l o w i n g s y s t e m s o f s e a
chests, h e a t i n g s y s t e m o f side fittings, h e a t i n g s y s t e m
for liquids i n tanks, steaming system for tanks (*);
.1.8 d i a g r a m o f t h e c o m p r e s s e d a i r s y s t e m f o r
t y p h o o n s , f o r b l o w i n g t h e sea c h e s t s ( * ) ;
.1.9 d i a g r a m s o f h y d r a u l i c s y s t e m s f o r d r i v e s o f
mechanisms and arrangements (*);
.1.10 d i a g r a m s o f s p e c i a l s y s t e m s f o r o i l t a n k e r s
and c o m b i n a t i o n carriers (*);
.1.11 c a l c u l a t i o n s o f t h e s y s t e m s : b i l g e , b a l l a s t ,
vapour emission control; ventilation o f battery
r o o m s , c a r g o p u m p r o o m s , enclosed spaces a n d
holds intended for the carriage o f m o t o r vehicles ( * * ) ;
.1.12 d i a g r a m o f t h e r m a l l i q u i d s y s t e m ( * ) ;
.2 d o c u m e n t a t i o n o n m a c h i n e r y i n s t a l l a t i o n s y s t e m s :
.2.1 d i a g r a m s o f l i v e a n d e x h a u s t s t e a m s y s t e m s ( * ) ;
.2.2 d i a g r a m s o f b l o w i n g - o f f s y s t e m s f o r b o i l e r s ,
machinery and steam piping (*);
.2.3 d i a g r a m o f c o n d e n s a t e a n d f e e d w a t e r s y s tem (*);
.2.4 d i a g r a m o f f u e l o i l s y s t e m ( * ) ;
.2.5 d i a g r a m o f l u b r i c a t i n g o i l s y s t e m ( * ) ;
.2.6 d i a g r a m s o f f r e s h a n d s e a w a t e r c o o l i n g
systems (*);
.2.7 d i a g r a m o f s t a r t i n g a i r s y s t e m ( * ) ;
.2.8 d i a g r a m o f e x h a u s t g a s p i p e s a n d u p t a k e s ( * ) ;
.2.9 d r a w i n g o f s e a c h e s t s a n d i c e c h e s t s e q u i p ment (*);
.2.10 c a l c u l a t i o n o f s t a r t i n g a i r s y s t e m ( * * ) ;
.2.11 c a l c u l a t i o n o f f u e l o i l s e r v i c e t a n k c a p a c i t y
o f emergency diesel-generator ( * * ) ;
.2.12 d r a w i n g s o f s i l e n c e r s a n d s p a r k a r r e s t e r s o f
e x h a u s t gas pipes a n d u p t a k e s ( * ) ( m a y be s u b m i t t e d
t o g e t h e r w i t h t h e d o c u m e n t a t i o n r e q u i r e d b y S e c t i o n 8,
Part I V "Technical Supervision during Manufacture
o f Products" o f the Rules for Technical Supervision
during Construction o f Ships and Manu-facture o f
Materials and Products for Ships);
.2.13 d r a w i n g s o f p o s i t i o n a n d d e t a i l s o f a t t a c h m e n t o f b o t t o m a n d side v a l v e s a n d v a l v e s a t t h e
collision bulkhead (*);
.2.14 d r a w i n g s o f a i r p i p e s a n d v e n t i l a t o r s o n
o p e n deck spaces ( * ) ;
.2.15 d r a w i n g s o f l e a d i n g t h e p i p e s a n d v e n t d u c t s
t h r o u g h the w a t e r t i g h t bulkheads, fire p r o o f divisions, decks a n d p l a t f o r m s ( m a y be c o m b i n e d w i t h
drawings required by 3.2.3.18) (*);
.3 d a t a o n p i p e d i m e n s i o n s ( d i a m e t e r a n d w a l l
thickness), o n piping construction (materials, insulation, manufacturing methods, installation, arrangem e n t , h y d r a u l i c tests, etc.) as w e l l as d a t a o n m a t e r i a l
o f applicable pipes, m a t e r i a l o f gaskets a n d types o f
p i p e c o n n e c t i o n s s h a l l be c o n t a i n e d i n d o c u m e n t a t i o n
listed i n 3.2.10.1 a n d 3.2.10.2.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
3.2.11 D o c u m e n t a t i o n o n e l e c t r i c a l e q u i p m e n t :
.1 d i a g r a m s o f p o w e r g e n e r a t i o n a n d d i s t r i b u t i o n
f r o m the m a i n a n d emergency sources o f electrical
p o w e r : ship's m a i n s , l i g h t i n g (up t o section switchboards) and navigation lights (*);
.2 d i a g r a m s a n d g e n e r a l v i e w o f t h e m a i n a n d
emergency switchboards, c o n t r o l desks a n d other
switchboards o f non-standard design (*);
.3 c a l c u l a t i o n r e s u l t s o f n e c e s s a r y o u t p u t o f t h e
ship's electric p o w e r p l a n t p r o v i d i n g f o r the operati n g c o n d i t i o n s specified i n 3.1.5, P a r t X I " E l e c t r i c a l
E q u i p m e n t " , substantiation o f the choice o f the
n u m b e r a n d p o w e r o u t p u t o f g e n e r a t o r s , as w e l l as
calculation o f capacity o f emergency sources o f
electrical p o w e r ( * * ) ;
.4 c a l c u l a t i o n r e s u l t s o f c r o s s - s e c t i o n s o f c a b l e s w i t h
i n d i c a t i o n o f their types, currents a n d p r o t e c t i o n ( * * ) ;
.5 d e t a i l e d d i a g r a m s o f t h e m a i n c u r r e n t , e x c i t a tion, control, pilot, signalling, protection and interl o c k i n g o f the electric p r o p u l s i o n p l a n t ( * ) ;
.6 c a l c u l a t i o n r e s u l t s o f n e c e s s a r y p o w e r o u t p u t
o f the propulsion generators to ensure n o r m a l
operation under all operating conditions (**);
.7 c a l c u l a t i o n r e s u l t s o f s h o r t - c i r c u i t c u r r e n t s a n d
analysis o f selective properties o f p r o t e c t i o n equipm e n t for total rated current o f generators w o r k i n g i n
p a r a l l e l i n excess o f 1 0 0 0 A ( * * ) ;
.8 c a l c u l a t i o n r e s u l t s o f i l l u m i n a t i o n i n t e n s i t y f o r
areas a n d spaces ( * * ) ;
.9 d i a g r a m s o f e l e c t r i c e n g i n e r o o m t e l e g r a p h ;
telephone c o m m u n i c a t i o n ; general a l a r m system; fire
detection a n d fire a l a r m system; release i n d i c a t i o n o f
fire s m o t h e r i n g system; i n d i c a t i o n o f closing o f
w a t e r t i g h t a n d fire doors; s o u n d signals i n engineers'
a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces; p e r s o n n e l a l a r m ; c a r g o h o l d
water level a l a r m system o n b u l k carriers, passenger
ships c a r r y i n g 36 o r m o r e persons, single-hold cargo
ships o t h e r t h a n b u l k carriers; release i n d i c a t i o n o f
fixed local application fire extinguishing system ( * ) ;
.10 d i a g r a m s o f e s s e n t i a l e l e c t r i c d r i v e s ( a c c o r d i n g t o 1.3.2.1 a n d 1.3.2.2, P a r t X I " E l e c t r i c a l
Equipment"). (*);
.11 d i a g r a m s o f l u b r i c a t i o n s y s t e m s f o r e l e c t r i c
machines a n d air c o o l i n g systems f o r the m a i n electric
machines (*);
.12 d i a g r a m s o f e a r t h i n g o f t h e p r o t e c t i o n s y s t e m
and, i f necessary, drawings a n d calculations (**) o f
l i g h t n i n g c o n d u c t o r s f o r o i l t a n k e r s , gas c a r r i e r s ,
drilling u n i t s a n d n o n - m e t a l ships (*);
.13 d i a g r a m o f c a b l e r u n s w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f
spaces w h i c h t h e y pierce ( * ) ;
.14 c a p a c i t y c a l c u l a t i o n r e s u l t s f o r a c c u m u l a t o r
batteries o f emergency lighting, n a v i g a t i o n lights,
general a l a r m system, fire a l a r m system a n d fire
s m o t h e r i n g appliances starting devices o f the emerg e n c y d i e s e l - g e n e r a t o r set ( * * ) ;
Part I.
Classification
.15 r e s u l t s o f p r e l i m i n a r y c a l c u l a t i o n s o f f a c t o r s
accounting for voltage anharmonicity i n different
parts o f the ship's m a i n s w h e n using p o w e r semiconductor units (**);
.16 c a l c u l a t i o n o f e x p e c t e d e f f i c i e n c y o f o v e r l o a d
p r o t e c t i o n o f g e n e r a t o r sets b y m e a n s o f d i s c o n n e c tion o f the part o f consumers w i t h explanations o f the
n u m b e r o f d i s c o n n e c t i o n steps a n d the list o f
disconnected c o n s u m e r s i n every step ( * * ) ;
.17 d i a g r a m a n d d r a w i n g o f d i s c o n n e c t i o n a n d
b l o c k i n g s y s t e m o f electrical e q u i p m e n t , w h i c h is n o t
used i n the o i l recovery ship operations o n eliminat i o n o f o i l spillage ( * ) ;
.18 i n s t r u c t i o n o n p r e p a r a t i o n a n d a p p l i c a t i o n o f
electrical equipment o f o i l recovery ship f o r eliminat i o n b y i t o f o i l spillage d e t e r m i n i n g procedure o f
c o m p u l s o r y disconnection a n d blocking o f electrical
consumers w i t h o u t Certificates o n Safe T y p e Electrical E q u i p m e n t (**);
.19 l i s t o f e l e c t r i c a l e q u i p m e n t i n s t a l l e d i n
d a n g e r o u s zones, c o n t a i n i n g i n f o r m a t i o n o n spaces
a n d areas w h e r e i t is i n s t a l l e d w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f z o n e s
according to 19.2.3.1, Part X I "Electrical Equipment", and i n f o r m a t i o n o n this equipment w i t h
indication o f type o f protection (**);
.20 d o c u m e n t a t i o n o n f i x e d a n d p o r t a b l e d e v i c e s
for measuring and signalling o f explosive concentrat i o n s o f gases ( * ) ;
.21 c a l c u l a t i o n o f v o l t a g e d r o p w h e n a c o n s u m e r
w i t h the m a x i m u m starting p o w e r is switched o n ( * * ) ;
.22 l i s t o f m e a s u r e s t o b e t a k e n t o e n s u r e t h e
electromagnetic compatibility o f a ship equipment (**);
.23 f a i l u r e m o d e a n d e f f e c t s a n a l y s i s ( F M E A ) f o r
all electric a n d h y d r a u l i c c o m p o n e n t s o f the p o d d e d
d r i v e u s e d as t h e r u d d e r a n d steering gear ( m a y be
submitted together w i t h the documentation required
b y S e c t i o n 7, P a r t I V " T e c h n i c a l S u p e r v i s i o n d u r i n g
Manufacture o f Products" o f the Rules for Technical
Supervision during Construction o f Ships and M a n ufacture o f Materials and Products for Ships) (**);
.24 d i a g r a m s o f e l e c t r i c c o n n e c t i o n s ( f o r s y s t e m s
and e q u i p m e n t specified i n 3.2.11.1, 3.2.11.2,
3.2.11.5, 3.2.11.9, 3.2.11.10, 4.3.1.1.12) w i t h indica-
31
t i o n o f cable types a n d places o f installation o f a l l

elements o f the diagrams (*);
.25 d r a w i n g s o f c a b l e r u n s a n d t h e i r p e n e t r a t i o n s
t h r o u g h watertight, gastight and fire-proof divisions
w i t h indication o f measures t a k e n to suppress radio
interferences (*);
.26 d i a g r a m s o f t h e m a i n a n d e m e r g e n c y l i g h t i n g
i n t h e spaces a n d places o f a r r a n g e m e n t o f essential
appliances, escape routes, s u r v i v a l craft e m b a r k a t i o n
stations o n the deck and o u t b o a r d (supplying f r o m
section switchboards) (*);
.27 d r a w i n g s o f a r r a n g e m e n t a n d i n s t a l l a t i o n o f
essential electrical e q u i p m e n t (*);
.28 a s s e m b l y d r a w i n g s ( o n l y f o r n o n - s t a n d a r d
products) o f the m a i n and emergency switchboards,
electric p r o p u l s i o n p l a n t boards, c o n t r o l stations a n d
desks, special boards, p o w e r a n d l i g h t i n g switchboards (*);
.29 d i a g r a m s a n d i n s t a l l a t i o n d r a w i n g s o f d e v i c e s
for m e a s u r i n g non-electric values (level, pressure,
t e m p e r a t u r e i n d i c a t o r s , etc.) ( * ) ;
.30 t e c h n i c a l b a c k g r o u n d c o n t a i n i n g s u b s t a n t i a tion o f distinguishing m a r k E P P ( i f applicable) i n
class n o t a t i o n ( * * ) ;
.31 s h i p y a r d / i n d u s t r y s t a n d a r d s o n w i r i n g w o r k s
confirming compliance w i t h the requirements o f the
Register Rules (**);
.32 w h e r e r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t s s h a l l b e c l a s s i f i e d ,
d o c u m e n t a t i o n stated i n 3.2.11.1 t o 3.2.11.31 shall
contain the data concerning electrical equipment o f
refrigerating plant.
3.3 P R O G R A M M E S O F M O O R I N G A N D S E A T R I A L S
(*)
3.3.1 P r o g r a m m e s o f m o o r i n g a n d s e a t r i a l s s h a l l
be a p p r o v e d b y the Register p r i o r t o c o m m e n c e m e n t
o f the relevant trials.
3.3.2 T h e s c o p e o f m o o r i n g a n d s e a t r i a l s s h a l l
comply w i t h the relevant requirements o f P a r t V
"Technical Supervision during Construction o f
Ships" o f the Rules for Technical Supervision during
Construction o f Ships and Manufacture o f Materials
and Products for Ships.
38
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
4 CLASSIFICATION O F REFRIGERATING PLANTS
4.1
G E N E R A L
4.1.1 F o r e n s u r i n g s a f e t y o f a s h i p a n d p r e v e n t i n g
ozone-destructive effect o f refrigerants o n e n v i r o n m e n t t h e refrigerating plants installed i n ships classed
w i t h t h e Register a r e subject t o surveys i n t h e
f o l l o w i n g cases:
.1 r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t s w o r k i n g w i t h G r o u p I I
refrigerants i n accordance w i t h Table 2.2.1, Part X I I
"Refrigerating Plants";
.2 r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t s w o r k i n g w i t h G r o u p I
refrigerants a n d comprising t h e compressors w i t h
theoretical suction capacity 125 m / h a n d above;
.3 r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t e n s u r e s t h e f u n c t i o n i n g o f
systems affecting t h e ship safety.
4.1.2 F r o m t h e n u m b e r o f t h e r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t s
stated i n 4.1.1 t h e Register assigns a class t o :
.1 r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t s i n t e n d e d f o r d e v e l o p i n g
and m a i n t a i n i n g t h e required temperatures i n refrigerated cargo spaces o f t r a n s p o r t ships, as w e l l as i n
t h e r m a l containers t o provide proper carriage o f
goods;
.2 r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t s i n t e n d e d f o r d e v e l o p i n g
and m a i n t a i n i n g t h e required temperatures i n refrigerated cargo spaces, f o r c o l d - t r e a t m e n t o f sea
products (cooling, freezing) a n d supplying t h e cold
necessary f o r operation o f process plants i n fishing
ships a n d o t h e r ships used f o r processing o f t h e
b i o l o g i c a l resources o f sea;
.3 r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t s i n t e n d e d t o m a i n t a i n t h e
required conditions f o r transportation o f liquefied
gas i n b u l k i n g a s carriers.
Other refrigerating plants f r o m the n u m b e r o f
those stated i n 4.1.1 subject t o t h e Register supervision are cosidered unclassed.
3
4.2 C L A S S O F A R E F R I G E R A T I N G P L A N T
4.2.1 G e n e r a l .
4.2.1.1 T h e R e g i s t e r m a y a s s i g n a c l a s s t o a
refrigerating p l a n t after t h e ship's construction, as
w e l l as assign, o r r e n e w a class o f a r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t
installed i n a ship i n service.
4.2.1.2 A s s i g n m e n t o r r e n e w a l o f a c l a s s m e a n s
that t h e refrigerating p l a n t fully o r t o a degree
considered acceptable b y t h e Register complies w i t h
the requirements o f t h e relevant Rules. T h e fact o f a
class b e i n g assigned o r r e n e w e d indicates t h a t t h e
refrigerating plant complies either fully o r t o a degree
deemed acceptable b y t h e Register, w i t h t h e require-
ments o f t h e relevant Rules a n d is taken under the

Register supervision, a n dthat thetechnical condition
o f the plant is i n accordance w i t h the provisions o f
design specifications included i n t h e Classification
Certificate f o rRefrigerating Plant.
4.2.1.3 A s s i g n m e n t o r r e n e w a l o f a c l a s s s h a l l b e
c o n f i r m e d b y t h e issue o f a C l a s s i f i c a t i o n Certificate
for Refrigerating P l a n t after t h e appropriate survey
carried o u t .
4.2.2 C l a s s n o t a t i o n o f a r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t .
4.2.2.1 T h e c h a r a c t e r o f c l a s s i f i c a t i o n o f a
refrigerating plant consists o f t h e f o l l o w i n g m a r k s :
REF f o r a r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t b u i l t a c c o r d i n g
to t h e Rules a n d surveyed b y the Register;
R E F * f o ra refrigerating plant built according
to t h eRules o fa classification body recognized b y the
Register, surveyed b y that classification body a n d
t h e n classed b y t h e Register;
( R E F ) * f o ra refrigerating plant built w i t h o u t
being surveyed b y a classification body recognized b y
the Register o r w i t h o u t being surveyed b y a
classification b o d y a t a l l , b u t subsequently classed
w i t h the Register;
R E F * f o ra refrigerating plant built according
to t h e Rules o f a n I A C S M e m b e r Society, surveyed
by that Society during construction a n d subsequently
classed b y t h e Register, i f t h e refrigerating p l a n t does
not fully comply w i t h the requirements o f Part X I I
"Refrigerating Plants".
4.2.2.2 M a r k o f a c a p a b i l i t y t o c a r g o r e f r i g e r a t i o n .
I f the refrigerating plant has a capacity sufficient
to refrigeration o f a non-precooled cargo o n shipboard during a period o f time that provides
preservation o f that cargo, a distinguishing m a r k
P R E C O O L I N G shall be added t o t h e character o f
classification.
I n such a case a n o t e specifying t h e c o n d i t i o n s o f
cargo cooling o n shipboard shall be entered into the
Classification Certificate f o rRefrigerating Plant a n d
in the Register o f Ships.
4.2.2.3 M a r k o f c a p a b i l i t y f o r c o o l i n g o r f r e e z i n g
sea p r o d u c t s .
The distinguishing m a r k Q U I C K F R E E Z I N G is
added t o t h e character o fclassification i f the plant is
i n t e n d e d f o r c o o l i n g o r freezing sea p r o d u c t s a n d is i n
accordance w i t h t h e relevant r e q u i r e m e n t s specified
in Part X I I "Refrigerating Plants".
4.2.2.4 D i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k s o f r e f r i g e r a t i n g
plants.
4.2.2.4.1 I f a r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t i s i n t e n d e d f o r
cooling o f cargo transported i n t h e r m a l containers
and complies w i t h applicable requirements o f
Part I.
Classification
Part X I I "Refrigerating Plants" the distinguishing

m a r k C O N T A I N E R S is added t o t h e character o f
classification o f t h e plant.
4.2.2.4.2 I f , i n a d d i t i o n t o a r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t , a
ship is equipped w i t h atmosphere c o n t r o l system i n
refrigerated spaces a n d / o r t h e r m a l c o n t a i n e r s w h i c h
complies w i t h applicable requirements o f P a r t X I I
"Refrigerating Plants" t h e distinguishing m a r k C A is
added t o t h e character o fclassification o f the plant.
4.2.2.4.3 I f a r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t i s i n t e n d e d t o
maintain the required conditions f o r transportation
o f liquefied gas i n b u l k i n a gas carrier a n d complies
w i t h applicable requirements o f P a r t X I I "Refrigerating Plants" t h e distinguishing m a r k L G is added t o
the character o fclassification o fthe plant.
4.2.3 A d d i t i o n a l c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s .
4.2.3.1 A d d i t i o n a l d e t a i l s o f c o n d i t i o n s f o r c o o l ing cargoes o n b o a r d , specified t e m p e r a t u r e c o n d i tions f o r t r a n s p o r t a t i o n o f cargoes a n d other details
are indicated i n t h e Classification Certificate f o r
Refrigerating Plant a n d i n t h e Register o f Ships i fit is
f o u n d necessary b y t h e Register t o specify t h e
purpose o r structural features o f t h e refrigerating
plant.
4.2.3.2 N u m b e r o f t h e r m a l c o n t a i n e r s s e r v e d b y
the refrigerating plant is indicated i n t h e Classification Certificate f o r Refrigerating Plant a n d i n the
Register o f Ships.
4.2.4 A l t e r a t i o n o f m a r k s i n c l a s s n o t a t i o n .
T h e Register m a y delete o r alter a m a r k s h o w n i n
the class n o t a t i o n i n case o f a n y m o d i f i c a t i o n o r n o n compliance w i t h the requirements w h i c h served as t h e
basis f o r t h e i n s e r t i o n o f t h a t m a r k i n t o t h e class
notation.
4.3 T E C H N I C A L D O C U M E N T A T I O N
OF A REFRIGERATING P L A N T
4.3.1 P l a n a p p r o v a l d o c u m e n t a t i o n o f a c l a s s e d
refrigerating p l a n t
43.1.1 P r i o r t o c o m m e n c e m e n t o f a ship's c o n s t r u c tion, p l a n a p p r o v a l d o c u m e n t a t i o n w i t h a sufficient
scope o f i n f o r m a t i o n t o p r o v e t h a t t h e requirements o f
the Register Rules for a refrigerating plant are complied
w i t h , shall be submitted t o t h e Register for review:
.1 t e c h n i c a l d e s c r i p t i o n o f a r e f r i g e r a t i n g
plant (**);
.2 c o o l i n g c a p a c i t y c a l c u l a t i o n s w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f
t h e r m a l l o a d f r o m each refrigerated cargo space a n d
cold consumer (**);
.3 g e n e r a l a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s o f a r e f r i g e r a t i n g
plant o n b o a r d t h e ship (*);
.4 c i r c u i t d i a g r a m s o f w o r k i n g a n d e m e r g e n c y
ventilation systems i n t h e refrigerating m a c h i n e r y
spaces w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f t h e w a t e r t i g h t b u l k h e a d s
39
a n d fire-proof divisions, as w e l l as t h e n u m b e r o f air

changes per h o u r (*);
.5 c i r c u i t d i a g r a m s o f r e f r i g e r a n t , c o o l i n g m e d i u m ,
c o o l i n g w a t e r systems w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f places f o r
i n s t a l l a t i o n o f i n s t r u m e n t s a n d a u t o m a t i c devices ( * ) ;
.6 a i r c o o l i n g d i a g r a m w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f w a t e r tight bulkheads a n d fire-proof divisions (*);
.7 a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s o f e q u i p m e n t i n r e f r i g e r a t ing m a c h i n e r y spaces w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f escape
routes (*);
.8 a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s o f e q u i p m e n t i n r e f r i g e r a t e d
spaces w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f places f o r i n s t a l l a t i o n o f
t e m p e r a t u r e c o n t r o l devices ( * ) ;
.9 c o n s t r u c t i o n p l a n s o f i n s u l a t i o n o f r e f r i g e r a t e d
spaces w i t h specification o f i n s u l a t i n g m a t e r i a l s ( * ) ;
.10 d i a g r a m o f w a t e r s c r e e n s y s t e m i n r e f r i g e r a t ing m a c h i n e r y space ( f o r refrigerant o fG r o u p I I ) ( * ) ;
.11 g e n e r a l a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s o f f r e e z i n g a n d
cooling arrangements a n d other refrigerating processing equipment (*);
.12 c i r c u i t d i a g r a m s o f a u t o m a t i c c o n t r o l , p r o t e c tion a n d a l a r m systems (*);
.13 l i s t o f m a c h i n e r y , v e s s e l s a n d a p p a r a t u s o f
refrigerating plant w i t h indication o f technical
characteristics ( * * ) ;
.14 l i s t o f c o n t r o l d e v i c e s a n d m e a s u r i n g i n s t r u ments, protection a n d a l a r m systems w i t h indication
o f technical characteristics ( * * ) ;
.15 t a b l e s o f t h e v a l u e s o f t h e b o u n d i n g s u r f a c e
areas o f t h e refrigerated cargo spaces a n d h o l d s w i t h
data o n calculated heat transfer coefficient f o r each
surface ( * * ) ;
.16 d r a w i n g s o f c a r g o c o o l i n g a i r d u c t s i n
thermoinsulated containers w i t h a n indication o f
the layout o n board (*);
.17 d r a w i n g s o f a i r d u c t i n s u l a t i o n w i t h t e c h n i c a l
data o finsulation materials (*);
.18 d r a w i n g s o f s e a l i n g a n d f l e x i b l e j o i n t s w i t h
indication o f details o n materials (*);
.19 g e n e r a l a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s o f a t m o s p h e r e
control installation (*);
.20 l i s t o f e q u i p m e n t o f t h e a t m o s p h e r e c o n t r o l
system, i n c l u d i n g c o n t r o l a n d a u t o m a t i c devices ( * * ) ;
.21 d r a w i n g s o f i n s t a l l a t i o n a n d f a s t e n i n g o f
m a c h i n e r y , vessels a n d a p p a r a t u s ( * ) ;
.22 a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s o f p i p i n g o f r e f r i g e r a n t ,
cooling m e d i u m a n d cooling water system w i t h
indication o f places o f their p e n e t r a t i o n t h r o u g h t h e
bulkheads, decks a n d platforms (*);
.23 a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n o f e m e r g e n c y
discharge
system o frefrigerant outboard (*).
4.3.2 T e s t p r o g r a m (*).
4.3.2.1 T e s t p r o g r a m w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f t h e
m e t h o d o fdesign t h e r m a l load generation (including
a calculation o fthe p o w e r o f additional heaters t o be
used) a n d t h e m e t h o d o f determining t h e actual
40
Rules
averaged heat-transfer coefficient for the insulating

s t r u c t u r e o f r e f r i g e r a t e d c a r g o spaces s h a l l be
approved by the Register prior to commencement
o f t h e r e l e v a n t tests.
4.3.2.2 T h e s c o p e o f t e s t s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e
relevant requirements o f Section 11, Part V "Technical Supervision during Construction o f Ships" o f the
Rules for Technical Supervision during Construction
o f Ships and Manufacture o f Materials and Products
for Ships.
and
Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
4.3.3 P l a n a p p r o v a l d o c u m e n t a t i o n o f a n u n classed refrigerating p l a n t

4.3.3.1 P r i o r t o c o m m e n c e m e n t o f a ship's
construction, P l a n A p p r o v a l D o c u m e n t a t i o n listed
i n 4.3.1.1.3 4.3.1.1.5 ( f o r refrigerant o n l y ) , 4.3.1.1.7,
4.3.1.1.10, 4.3.1.1.11 ( f o r devices o p e r a t i n g u n d e r the
refrigerant pressure only), 4.3.1.1.12 (for protection
and a l a r m system only), 4.3.1.1.13, 4.3.1.1.14 (for
gauges i n refrigerant system a n d protection a n d
a l a r m devices o n l y ) , 4.3.1.1.21, 4.3.1.1.22. ( f o r
refrigerant only), 4.3.1.1.23.
P A R T II. H U L L
1 DESIGN PRINCIPLES
1.1
G E N E R A L
1.1.1 A p p l i c a t i o n .
1.1.1.1 U n l e s s p r o v i d e d o t h e r w i s e , r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f t h e p r e s e n t P a r t o f the R u l e s a p p l y t o steel ships o f
welded construction, f r o m 12 t o 350m i n length
whose proportions are taken within the limits given
i n T a b l e 1.1.1.1.
T a b l e
1.1.1.1
Area o f navigation
Proportion
of ship Unrestricted
LID
BID
18
2,5
Rl
R2
19
2,5'
20
3
2
R 2 - R S N R2-RSN(4,5) R 3 - R S N
21
3
21
3
22
3
R3
23
4
3
' F o r v e s s e l s o f d r e d g i n g f l e e t , n o t m o r e t h a n 3.
F o r v e s s e l s o f d r e d g i n g f l e e t , n o t m o r e t h a n 4.
F o r f l o a t i n g c r a n e s , n o t l e s s t h a n 4,5.
The requirements o fthe present Part o fthe Rules

do n o t apply t o o i l tankers o f 150 m a n d over i n length
a n d t o b u l k carriers o f 9 0 m a n d over i n length.
T h e scantlings o f h u l l m e m b e r s , essential t o t h e
strength o f h u l l a n dt h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o fthe said ships
are regulated b y P a r t X V I I I " C o m m o n Structural
Rules f o r Double H u l l O i l Tankers" a n d Part X I X
" C o m m o n Structural Rules f o rB u l k Carriers".
1.1.1.2 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f h u l l m e m b e r s , e s s e n t i a l
to t h e strength o f ships w h o s e c o n s t r u c t i o n a n d m a i n
dimensions are n o tregulated b y thepresent Rules are
subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e Register.
1.1.2 G e n e r a l .
1.1.2.1 A l l h u l l s t r u c t u r e s r e g u l a t e d b y t h e p r e sent P a r t o f t h e R u l e s a r e subject t o t h e Register
survey. F o r t h i s p u r p o s e a n access s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d
for their survey.
1.1.2.2 T h e s t r u c t u r e s r e g u l a t e d b y t h e p r e s e n t
Part o fthe Rules shall comply w i t h t h e requirements
of Part X I I I "Materials" and Part X I V "Welding"
a n d w i t h t h e a p p r o v e d technical d o c u m e n t a t i o n listed i n Part I "Classification".
1.1.2.3 T i g h t n e s s t e s t o f s h i p ' s h u l l s h a l l b e c a r ried o u taccording t o t h eprovisions o fAppendix 1.
1.1.3 D e f i n i t i o n s a n d e x p l a n a t i o n s .
The definitions a n d explanations relating t o the
general terminology o f the Rules are given i n P a r t I
"Classification".
For t h epurpose o fthe present Part o fthe Rules
the following definitions a n d explanations have been
adopted.
Upper
d e c k is t h e uppermost
continuous
deck extending t h e full length o f t h e ship.
M o u l d e d d e p t h D is t h e vertical distance
measured amidships f r o m t h et o po fthe plate keel o r
f r o m t h e p o i n t w h e r e t h e i n n e r surface o fshell p l a t i n g
abuts u p o n t h eb a r keel, t o t h et o po fthe upper deck
b e a m a t side. I n ships h a v i n g a r o u n d e d g u n w a l e , t h e
depth is measured t o the point o fintersection o f the
m o u l d e d lines o f u p p e r d e c k a n d side, t h e lines e x tending so as i f t h e g u n w a l e w e r e o fangular design.
L e n g t h Lis t h e d i s t a n c e , i n m , o n t h e s u m m e r
l o a d w a t e r l i n e f r o m t h e f o r w a r d side o f t h e s t e m t o
t h e after side o f t h e r u d d e r p o s t o r t o t h e centre o f t h e
rudder stock i f there isn o rudder post, o r t h e distance
equal t o 9 6p e rcent o fthe length o n the s u m m e r load
w a t e r l i n e f r o m t h e f o r w a r d side o f t h e s t e m t o t h e
after side o f after e n d o f t h e ship, w h i c h e v e r i s t h e
greater.
H o w e v e r , L need n o t be greater t h a n 9 7 p e r cent
o f t h e ship's length o n t h e s u m m e r l o a d waterline.
W h e r e t h e fore o r after e n d is o f a n u n u s u a l f o r m ,
l e n g t h L is subject t o special consideration b y t h e R e gister.
A f t e r p e r p e n d i c u l a r is a vertical line r u n
t h r o u g h t h e ship centreline, w h i c h limits t h e ship
length L at theaft end.
Block coefficient
is t h e block coefficient a t draught d corresponding t o s u m m e r load
waterline, based o n length L a n d breadth B , determined b y the formula
M o u l d e d displacement ( m )
LBd
'
S u m m e r l o a d w a t e r l i n e is the waterline
o n t h e level o ft h e centre o f t h e load line ring f o r t h e
ship's p o s i t i o n w i t h o u t heel a n d t r i m .
E n g i n e r o o m a f t corresponds t o the position o f t h e mid-length o f t h e engine r o o m beyond
0,3L aft o f amidships.
M i d s h i p s e c t i o n is t h e h u l l section a t t h e
m i d d l e o f ship's l e n g t h L .
S u p e r s t r u c t u r e is a decked structure o n the
u p p e r d e c k e x t e n d i n g f r o m side t o side o f t h e ship o r
w i t h t h e side p l a t i n g n o t b e i n g i n b o a r d o f t h e shell
plating m o r e t h a n 4 p e r cent o f t h e breadth o f t h e
ship.
T i g h t s t r u c t u r e isa structure impervious t o
water a n d other liquids.
L o w e r d e c k s are t h edecks located below t h e
upper deck.
42
Rules
W h e r e t h e ship h a s several l o w e r decks, they are

called: second deck, t h i r d deck, etc.,c o u n t i n g f r o m
the u p p e r deck.
F o r w a r d p e r p e n d i c u l a r is a vertical line
r u n t h r o u g h t h e ship centreline at a p o i n t where t h e
s u m m e r l o a d l i n e a n d t h e f o r e side o f s t e m intersect.
S h i p ' s e n d s a r e p o r t i o n s o fthe ship's length
beyond themidship region.
D r a u g h t d is t h e v e r t i c a l d i s t a n c e m e a s u r e d
amidships f r o m the top o f the plate keel, o r the point
w h e r e t h e i n n e r surface o f t h e shell p l a t i n g abuts
u p o n t h e b a r keel, t o t h e s u m m e r load waterline. I n
ships w i t h t i m b e r freeboard t h e d r a u g h t shall be m e a
s u r e d a t side t o t h e s u m m e r t i m b e r l o a d w a t e r l i n e .
M a i n
frames
a r e v e r t i c a l side f r a m i n g
m e m b e r s fitted i n the plane o f floors o r bilge brackets
w i t h i n a spacing o feach other.
F r e e b o a r d d e c k is t h edeck f r o m w h i c h the
freeboard is calculated.
S u p e r s t r u c t u r e d e c k is a deck f o r m i n g
the t o p o f a tier o f superstructure. W h e r e t h e super
structure h a s several tiers, t h e superstructure decks
are called as follows: first tier superstructure deck,
second tier superstructure deck, etc., c o u n t i n g f r o m
the u p p e r deck.
B u l k h e a d d e c k is t h e deck t o w h i c h the
m a i n transverse watertight bulkheads are carried.
D e c k h o u s e t o p is a deck forming t h et o p o f
a tier o f a deckhouse.
W h e r e t h e deckhouse h a s several tiers, t h e deck
house tops are called as follows: first tier deckhouse
top, second tier deckhouse t o p ,etc., c o u n t i n g f r o m
the u p p e r deck. I f a deckhouse is fitted o n a super
structure deck o f first tier, second tier, etc., t h e
deckhouse top iscalled accordingly the top o f second
tier deckhouse, t h i r d tier deckhouse, etc.
P l a t f o r m is a lower deck extending over
p o r t i o n s o fthe ship's length o r breadth.
Intermediate
frames
are additional
frames fitted between m a i n frames.
S t r e n g t h d e c k is the deck forming the upper
flange o f h u l l girder. T h e uppermost continuous
deck, l o n g bridge deck, l o n g forecastle o r l o n g p o o p
deck outside e n dregions, o r quarter deck outside the
transition area m a y be considered as t h e strength
deck (refer t o 2.12.1.2).
D e c k h o u s e isa decked structure o nthe upper
deck o r superstructure deck w i t h i t s side p l a t i n g , o n
o n e side a t least, b e i n g i n b o a r d o f t h e shell p l a t i n g b y
m o r e t h a n 4 p e r cent o fthe breadth o fthe ship.
S p e c i f i e d s p e e d o f s h i p v is the max
i m u m speed o f the ship, i n k n o t s , a t the s u m m e r l o a d
w a t e r l i n e i n still w a t e r a t rated engine speed o f p r o
pulsion plant.
g = 9,81 m / s acceleration d u e t o gravity;
p = 1,025 t / m d e n s i t y o f sea w a t e r .
0
Ships
M i d s h i p r e g i o n is t h e p a r t o f t h e ship's
length equal t o 0,4L (0,2L forward a n d afto f amid
ships), unless expressly p r o v i d e d otherwise.
M o u l d e d b r e a d t h is t h e greatest m o u l
ded breadth, i n m , measured amidships f r o m outside
o f frame t o outside o f frame.
S p a c i n g is t h e distance between p r i m a r y
m e m b e r s , d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e basis o f t h e v a l u e o f
standard spacing a ,i n m , determined b y the f o r m u l a
a = 0 , 0 0 2 L + 0,48.
D e v i a t i o n f r o m n o r m a l spacing m a y be p e r m i t t e d
w i t h i n t h e following limits:
0,75a t o l , 2 5 a f o r ships o f unrestricted area o f
navigation a n d restricted area o f navigation R l ;
0,7a t o l , 2 5 a f o r ships o f restricted areas o f
navigation R 2 , R 2 - R S N andR2-RSN(4,5);
0,65a t o l , 2 5 a f o r ships o f restricted areas o f
navigation R 3 - R S N a n dR3.
I n the fore a n d after peaks the spacing o f p r i m a r y
m e m b e r s shall n o t exceed 0,6 m ; b e t w e e n t h e fore
peak bulkhead a n d 0,2L aft o f the forward perpen
dicular n o t m o r e t h a n 0,7 m . V a r i a t i o n s f r o m these
values a r e subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e
Register.
I n a l l cases t h e spacing o f p r i m a r y m e m b e r s s h a l l
n o t exceed 1m .
1.1.4 B a s i c p r o v i s i o n s f o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e s c a n t
lings o fhull members.
1.1.4.1 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f h u l l m e m b e r s a r e r e g u
lated based o n t h e R u l e design loads, calculation
m e t h o d s a n d safety factors w i t h d u e regard t o cor
r o s i o n a l l o w a n c e (refer t o 1.1.5).
1.1.4.2 D e r i v a t i o n o f t h e s c a n t l i n g s o f h u l l m e m
bers i n t h e R u l e s is based o n s t r u c t u r a l idealization
u s i n g b e a m m o d e l s subject t o b e n d i n g , shear, l o n g
i t u d i n a l l o a d i n g a n d t o r s i o n h a v i n g r e g a r d t o the effect
o f adjacent structures.
1.1.4.3 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h e p r e s e n t P a r t o f t h e
Rules, t h e design characteristics o fthe m a t e r i a l used
for h u l l structures shall be as f o l l o w s :
R
= u p p e r y i e l d stress, i n M P a ;
= d e s i g n s p e c i f i e d y i e l d s t r e s s f o r n o r m a l
stresses, i n M P a , d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
0
e H
235
(1.1.4.3-1)
w h e r e | = a p p l i c a t i o n f a c t o r o f m e c h a n i c a l p r o p e r t i e s o f s t e e l ,
d e t e r m i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1.1.4.3;
= d e s i g n s p e c i f i e d y i e l d s t r e s s f o r s h e a r s t r e s
ses, i n M P a , d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
= 0,57CT.
(1.1.4.3-2)
T a b l e
a n d C o n s t r u c t i o n of S e a - G o i n g
1.1.4.3
235
315
355
390
1,0
0,78
0,72
0,68
P a r t II. H u l l
43
1.1.4.4 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r s t r e n g t h o f s t r u c
t u r a l m e m b e r s a n d structures as a w h o l e a i m i n g a t
determining their scantlings a n d strength character
istics a r e set f o r t h i n t h e R u l e s b y a s s i g n i n g t h e spe
cified v a l u e s o f p e r m i s s i b l e stresses f o r d e s i g n n o r m a l
Op = ka a n d s h e a r z = k z s t r e s s e s ( w h e r e k a n d
k = f a c t o r s o f p e r m i s s i b l e n o r m a l a n d s h e a r stresses
respectively).
T h e values o fk a n d k aregiven i n the relevant
chapters o fthis Part o f the Rules.
1.1.4.5 T h e b u c k l i n g s t r e n g t h r e q u i r e m e n t s a r e
i m p o s e d u p o n t h e s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s subject t o c o n
siderable c o m p r e s s i v e n o r m a l a n d / o r s h e a r stresses
(refer t o 1.6.5).
1.1.4.6 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f h u l l s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s
determined according t o t h e requirements o f the
present P a r t o f t h e Rules shall be t h e m i n i m u m
thickness specified f o r p a r t i c u l a r structures i n t h e
relevant chapters o fthe present P a r t o fthe Rules.
F o r ships o f restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o nR 2 ,
R 2 - R S N , R2-RSN(4,5), R 3 - R S N a n d R3, a reduction
in t h ethickness o f hull members ispermitted, b u t n o t
i n excess o f t h e v a l u e s g i v e n i n T a b l e 1.1.4.6.
p
T a b l e 1.1.4.6
Permissible reduction o fm i n i m u m hull m e m b e r thickness
Service area
Hull members
Primaty
members
o f ballast
Other hull
support
in w a y
tanks
members
R2, R 2 - R S N
and R2-RSN(4,5)
R 3 - R S N a n dR 3
15 p e r c e n t
30 p e r c e n t
10 p e r c e n t
20 p e r c e n t
I n a l l cases, u n l e s s e x p r e s s l y p r o v i d e d o t h e r w i s e , t h e
h u l l m e m b e r t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 4 m m .
1.1.4.7 I n t h e p r e s e n t P a r t o f t h e R u l e s , t h e r e q u i r e
m e n t s f o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e h u l l m e m b e r scantlings a r e
based o n t h eassumption that d u r i n g t h e construction
a n d service o f a ship measures a r e t a k e n f o r t h e cor
rosion prevention o f the hull i n accordance w i t h current
standards a n d other current n o r m a t i v e documents.
1.1.4.8 O n a g r e e m e n t w i t h t h e s h i p o w n e r , a r e d u c
t i o n i n t h e scantlings o f certain h u l l m e m b e r s m a y be
permitted w i t h i n t h e limits agreed w i t h t h e Register.
T h e reduced scantlings as w e l l as scantlings de
termined i n accordance w i t h t h e requirements o f t h e
present R u l e s f o r t h e 24-years service life o f t h e s h i p
shall be expressly indicated i n t h e h u l l structural
d r a w i n g s s u b m i t t e d t o t h e Register f o r review. A special
entry shall be made i nthe Classification Certificate o f
such ships (refer t o 2.3.1, P a r t I "Classification").
1.1.5 C o r r o s i o n a l l o w a n c e .
1.1.5.1 C o r r o s i o n a l l o w a n c e As, i n m m , i s s e t f o r
t h e structures w h o s e p l a n n e d service life exceeds
12 years a n d i s d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
As = u ( T - l 2 )
(1.1.5.1)
where = average annual reduction i nthickness o f the member,

in m m p e r a n n u m , d u e t o corrosion wear o r tear
a c c o r d i n g t o 1.1.5.2;
T = p l a n n e d service life o f structure, i n years; i f service life i s
n o t s p e c i a l l y p r e s c r i b e d , T s h a l l b e t a k e n e q u a l t o 24.
F o r t h e structures w h o s e p l a n n e d service life i s

l e s s t h a n 1 2 y e a r s , As = 0 .
I n t h e drawings o f h u l l structures, w h i c h planned
s e r v i c e life h a s b e e n t a k e n t o b e less t h a n 2 4 y e a r s ,
scantlings determined a t T = 2 4shall beadditionally
indicated. A special e n t r y shall be m a d e i nt h e Clas
sification Certificate o f such ships (refer t o 2.3.1,
Part I "Classification").
1.1.5.2 W h e n t h e r e a r e n o s p e c i a l r e q u i r e m e n t s
for service c o n d i t i o n s a n d m e a n s o f c o r r o s i o n pre
v e n t i o n o ft h e h u l l f o r determining t h e scantlings o f
hull members according t o t h e Rules o n e shall be
guided b y t h edata o n t h eaverage a n n u a l reduction
in thickness o f structural m e m b e r given i n T a
ble 1.1.5.2 d e p e n d i n g o n t h e g r o u p o f ships a n d t h e
d e s i g n a t i o n o f t h e space.
T a b l e 1.1.5.2 p r o v i d e s f o r d i v i s i o n o f a l l ships i n t o
t w o groups depending o ncorrosion wear conditions:
G r o u p I : d r y cargo ships a n d similar ships as regards
the service c o n d i t i o n s ;
G r o u p I I : tankers, b u l k carriers, c o m b i n a t i o n carriers
a n d similar ships as regards t h e service
conditions.
F o r t h e webs separating t h e different purpose
c o m p a r t m e n t s , is d e t e r m i n e d as t h e average value
for adjacent compartments.
F o r ships o f restricted service i n t e n d e d t o operate
o n l y i n fresh w a t e r basins, t h e v a l u e o f m a y b e r e
d u c e d 2 , 5 t i m e s f o r g r o u p I a n d 1,2 t i m e s f o r g r o u p I I ;
for ships intended t o operate i n fresh w a t e r basins o n l y
for a part o f time, shall be determined b y linear
interpolation i nproportion t o that part o f time.
I n t h e d r a w i n g s o f h u l l structures, w h i c h scan
tlings have been adopted w i t h regard t o t h e reduced
v a l u e o f u, t h e r e d u c e d s c a n t l i n g s d e t e r m i n e d a t
a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 1.1.5.2 s h a l l b e a d d i t i o n a l l y i n
dicated. A special e n t r y shall be m a d e i n t h e Classi
fication Certificate o f such ships (refer t o 2.3.1, P a r t I
"Classification").
1.1.5.3 T h e f a c t o r co t a k i n g i n t o a c c o u n t c o r r o s i o n
allowance w i t h regard t o t h e cross-sectional area o f the
w e b a n d t o t h e section m o d u l u s o f m e m b e r s o f rolled
section is determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
c
co = 1 + ctcAs
(1.1.5.3)
w h e r e <x = 0 , 0 7 + ^ ^ 0 , 2 5 f o r W < 2 0 0 c m ;
c
( 0 , 0 1 + $ f o r W > 2 0 0 c m
where W = section m o d u l u s o f the m e m b e r under consideration in

a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.4.2;
f o r A s , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
44
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T a b l e
1.1.5.2
Average annual reduction in thickness o f structural members

it, i n m m p e r a n n u m
Nos.
Structural member
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
2
2.1
2.1.1
2.1.2
2.1.3
2.2
Plating of decks and platforms

Upper deck
Lower deck
D e c k i n accommodation a n d working spaces
Side plating
Side (no inner s k i n is provided):
freeboard
in the region o f alternating waterlines
below the region o f alternating waterlines
Side (inner s k i n is provided) (compartments o f double s k i n side a r e n o t designed
to b e
filled):
freeboard
in the region o f alternating waterlines
below the region o f alternating waterlines
Side (inner s k i n is provided) (compartments o f double s k i n side are designed f o r
the o f carriage cargo, fuel oil o r water ballast):
freeboard:
. 1 t a n k s filled w i t h f u e l o i l
.2 t a n k f o r r e c e p t i o n o f w a t e r b a l l a s t
in the region o f alternating waterlines:
. 1 t a n k filled w i t h f u e l o i l
below the region o f alternating waterlines:
. 1 t a n k filled w i t h f u e l o i l
B o t t o m plating
B o t t o m (inner b o t t o m is n o t provided):
including bilge
in w a y o f cargo tanks
in w a y o f fuel oil tanks
in w a y o f ballast compartments
B o t t o m (inner b o t t o m is provided):
including bilge
Plating o f inner bottom, hopper t a n k a n d trapezoidal stools under transverse
bulkheads
I n n e r b o t t o m i n t h e area o f cargo holds (tanks):
in w a y o f boiler r o o m
in w a y o f engine r o o m
with n o w o o d sheathing i n holds i f cargo is expected to b e discharged b y g r a b s
H o p p e r tanks, trapezoidal stools u n d e r transverse bulkheads, m a r g i n plate:
plating o f h o p p e r t a n k s a n d trapezoidal stools:
bottom strake
other strakes
m a r g i n plate (inclined a n d horizontal)
margin plate i n boiler r o o m :
inclined
horizontal
Plating o f longitudinal a n d transverse bulkheads o f inner skin
Watertight bulkheads:
t o p s t r a k e (0,10 f r o m t h e u p p e r d e c k )
middle strake
bottom strake
Bulkheads between holds loaded with bulk cargoes:
other strakes
Bulkheads between holds loaded with oil cargo or
bulk cargo:
other strakes
Bulkheads between cargo tanks:
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.3
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
3
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
3.1.4
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
4
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
4.1.5
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
5
5.1
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
5.2
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.3
5.3.1
5.3.2
5.4
5.4.1
Group I
Group II
0,1
0,11
0,14
0,2 >
0,1
0,17
0,14
0,13
0,19
0,16
0,1
0,17
0,14
0,1
0,17
0,14
0,19
0,21
0,19
0,21
0,18
0,21
0,18
0,21
0,17
0,18
0,17
0,18
0,14
0,14
0,17
0,2
0,17
0,17
0,2
0,14
0,15
0,2
0,14
0,15
0,2
0,12
0,15
0,3
0,2
0,3
0,17
0,2
0,3
0,2
0,3
0,25
0,12
0,2
0,3
0,17
0,22
0,28
0,23
0,3
0,28
0,1
0,12
0,13
0,13
0,18
0,16
0,18
0,2
P a r t II.
Hull
45
Table
Structural member
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
7.1.6
8
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.2
8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
9
9.1
9.2
continued
it, mm p e r a n n u m
Nos.
5.4.2
5.4.3
5.5
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.6
6
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.1.6
6.2
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.3
7
7.1
1.1.5.2
Group I
middle strake
bottom strake
Bulkheads between cargo a n d ballast compartments:
middle strake
bottom strake
Topside tanks
Framing of decks and platforms
D e c k l o n g i t u d i n a l s a n d b e a m s o f d e c k s a n d p l a t f o r m s f o r m i n g b o u n d a r i e s of:
holds loaded with general cargoes
holds loaded with bulk cargoes
holds loaded with crude oil a n d petroleum products or b u l k cargoes
cargo tanks
fuel oil t a n k s
ballast compartments
D e c k girders, t r a n s v e r s e s o f d e c k s a n d p l a t f o r m s f o r m i n g b o u n d a r i e s of:
cargo tanks
fuel oil t a n k s
Cargo hatch coamings
F r a m i n g of sides and bulkheads
L o n g i t u d i n a l s , m a i n a n d w e b f r a m e s , c r o s s ties, v e r t i c a l stiffeners a n d h o r i z o n t a l
g i r d e r s o f sides a n d b u l k h e a d s f o r m i n g b o u n d a r i e s of:
cargo tanks
fuel oil t a n k s
F r a m i n g of bottom and inner bottom
B o t t o m centre girder, side girders, floors a n d b o t t o m longitudinal girders (inner
b o t t o m is omitted):
in general cargo compartments
in cargo tanks
in ballast compartments
under the boilers
B o t t o m centre girder, side girders, floors, b o t t o m a n d inner b o t t o m longitudinals
in double bottom compartments:
n o t intended to be filled
in oil fuel t a n k s
in water ballast tanks
under the boilers
Superstructures, deckhouses and bulwarks
Shell plating
Framing
Group II
0,13
0,18
0,13
0,15
0,16
0,12
0,3
0,25
0,2
0,2
0,12
0,15
0,18
0,15
0,18
0,25
0,17
0,2
0,12
0,19
0,21
0,1
0,13
0,15
0,2
0,19
0,21
0,12
0,1
0,18
0,21
0,13
0,15
0,2
0,18
0,21
0,14
0,2
0,3
0,2
0,2
0,3
0,14
0,15
0,2
0,25
0,14
0,15
0,2
0,25
0,1
0,1
0,1
0,1
' F o r c o m b i n a t i o n c a r r i e r s a n d s h i p s f o r t h e c a r r i a g e o f b u l k c a r g o e s , = 0,15 m m p e r a n n u m .
W i t h a c o m p a r t m e n t f i l l e d w i t h i n e r t g a s , i s i n c r e a s e d b y 10 p e r c e n t .
F o r h o r i z o n t a l s t i f f e n e r s a r r a n g e d i n t h e u p p e r p o r t i o n h a v i n g a w i d t h o f 0,1 t i m e s t h e c o m p a r t m e n t h e i g h t , = 0,25 m m p e r a n n u m .
1.1.6 C o m p l i a n c e w i t h s t a t u t a r y r e q u i r e m e n t s .
1.1.6.1 I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s , t h e k e e l s o f w h i c h w e r e
laid o r w h i c h w e r e at a s i m i l a r stage o f c o n s t r u c t i o n
before 1 J a n u a r y 2009, the p e a k a n d m a c h i n e r y space
b u l k h e a d s , s h a f t t u n n e l s , etc. s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e
following requirements :
1
.1 a f o r e p e a k o r c o l l i s i o n b u l k h e a d s h a l l be
f i t t e d w h i c h s h a l l be w a t e r t i g h t u p t o t h e b u l k h e a d
d e c k . T h i s b u l k h e a d s h a l l be l o c a t e d a t a d i s t a n c e
f r o m the f o r w a r d p e r p e n d i c u l a r o f n o t less t h a n
5 per cent o f the length o f the ship L and n o t m o r e
t h a n 3 m plus 5 per cent o f the l e n g t h o f the ship L .
s
^ o r the p u r p o s e o f this p a r a g r a p h , " l e n g t h o f s h i p " is the l e n g t h m e a s u r e d b e t w e e n p e r p e n d i c u l a r s f r o m the e x t r e m e p o i n t s o f the s h i p

o n t h e l e v e l o f t h e d e e p e s t s u b d i v i s i o n l o a d l i n e . F o r t h e d e f i n i t i o n s o f t h e d e e p e s t s u b d i v i s i o n l o a d l i n e r e f e r t o 1.2, P a r t V " S u b d i v i s i o n " .
46
Rules
W h e r e the stem forms the external contour o f the

hull f r o m the f o r w a r d end w i t h n o protruding parts
except the bulbous b o w , the f o r w a r d perpendicular
shall coincide w i t h the f o r w a r d edge o f the s t e m o n
the level o f the deepest subdivision l o a d line;
.2 w h e r e a n y p a r t o f t h e s h i p b e l o w t h e w a t e r l i n e
e x t e n d s f o r w a r d o f t h e f o r w a r d p e r p e n d i c u l a r , e.g. a
b u l b o u s b o w , t h e distances s t i p u l a t e d i n 1.1.6.1.1 s h a l l be
measured f r o m a p o i n t either at the m i d l e n g t h o f such
e x t e n s i o n , o r a t a d i s t a n c e 1,5 p e r c e n t o f t h e l e n g t h o f
the ship f o r w a r d o f the f o r w a r d perpendicular, o r at a
distance 3 m f o r w a r d o f the f o r w a r d perpendicular,
w h i c h e v e r gives the smallest m e a s u r e m e n t ;
.3 w h e r e a l o n g f o r w a r d s u p e r s t r u c t u r e i s f i t t e d ,
the fore peak o r collision b u l k h e a d o n all passenger
ships shall be extended w e a t h e r t i g h t t o the n e x t full
d e c k a b o v e t h e b u l k h e a d deck. T h e e x t e n s i o n s h a l l be
so a r r a n g e d as t o p r e c l u d e t h e p o s s i b i l i t y o f t h e b o w
d o o r c a u s i n g d a m a g e t o i t i n t h e case o f d a m a g e t o ,
or detachment of, the b o w door;
.4 t h e e x t e n s i o n r e q u i r e d i n 1 . 1 . 6 . 1 . 3 n e e d n o t b e
fitted directly above the bulkhead below, provided
that all parts o f the extension are n o t located f o r w a r d
o f t h e f o r w a r d l i m i t specified i n 1.1.6.1.1 o r 1.1.6.1.2.
H o w e v e r , i n ships constructed before 1 J u l y 1997:
.4.1 w h e r e a s l o p i n g r a m p f o r m s p a r t o f t h e e x t e n s i o n , t h e p a r t o f t h e e x t e n s i o n w h i c h is m o r e t h a n
2,3 m a b o v e t h e b u l k h e a d d e c k m a y e x t e n d n o m o r e
t h a n 1 m f o r w a r d o f the f o r w a r d limits specified
i n 1.1.6.1.1 o r 1.1.6.1.2;
.4.2 w h e r e t h e e x i s t i n g r a m p d o e s n o t c o m p l y
w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r a c c e p t a n c e as a n e x t e n s i o n
to the collision bulkhead and the position o f the r a m p
prevents the siting o f such extension w i t h i n the limits
specified i n 1.1.6.1.1 o r 1.1.6.1.2, t h e e x t e n s i o n m a y
be sited w i t h i n a l i m i t e d distance aft o f the aft l i m i t
specified i n 1.1.6.1.1 o r 1.1.6.1.2. T h e l i m i t e d distance
aft s h a l l be n o m o r e t h a n is necessary t o ensure n o n interference w i t h the r a m p .
T h e extension to the collision bulkhead shall open
forward. T h e extension shall comply w i t h the requirem e n t s o f 1.1.6.1.3 a n d s h a l l be so a r r a n g e d as t o p r e clude the possibilityo f the r a m p causing damage t o i t i n
t h e case o f d a m a g e t o , o r d e t a c h m e n t of, t h e r a m p ;
.5 r a m p s t h a t d o n o t c o m p l y w i t h t h e a b o v e r e q u i r e m e n t s s h a l l be d i s r e g a r d e d as a n e x t e n s i o n o f t h e
collision bulkhead;
.6 i n s h i p s c o n s t r u c t e d b e f o r e 1 J u l y 1 9 9 7 , t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.1.6.1.3 a n d 1.1.6.1.4 s h a l l a p p l y n o t
later t h a n the date o f the first periodical survey after
1 J u l y 1997;
.7 a n a f t e r p e a k b u l k h e a d d i v i d i n g t h e e n g i n e
r o o m f r o m the cargo a n d passenger spaces f o r w a r d
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
a n d aft, shall also be fitted a n d m a d e w a t e r t i g h t u p t o

the b u l k h e a d deck.
T h e a f t e r p e a k b u l k h e a d m a y , h o w e v e r , be stepped b e l o w the b u l k h e a d deck, p r o v i d e d the degree o f
safety o f t h e s h i p as r e g a r d s s u b d i v i s i o n is n o t
thereby diminished;
.8 i n a l l cases s t e r n t u b e s s h a l l b e e n c l o s e d i n w a t e r t i g h t spaces o f m o d e r a t e v o l u m e . T h e s t e r n g l a n d s h a l l
be situated i n a w a t e r t i g h t shaft t u n n e l o r o t h e r w a t e r t i g h t space separate f r o m t h e s t e r n t u b e c o m p a r t m e n t
a n d o f such v o l u m e that, i f flooded b y leakage t h r o u g h
the stern gland, the m a r g i n line w i l l n o t be submerged.
1.1.6.2 I n c a r g o s h i p s , o t h e r t h a n t a n k e r s , t h e
keels o f w h i c h w e r e laid o r w h i c h w e r e at a similar
stage o f c o n s t r u c t i o n b e f o r e 1 J a n u a r y 2 0 0 9 , as w e l l
as i n t a n k e r s i r r e s p e c t i v e o f t h e c o n s t r u c t i o n d a t e t h e
p e a k a n d m a c h i n e r y space b u l k h e a d s , stern tubes
shall c o m p l y w i t h the following requirements :
.1 a c o l l i s i o n b u l k h e a d s h a l l be fitted w h i c h s h a l l
be w a t e r t i g h t u p t o the freeboard deck. T h i s b u l k h e a d shall be located at a distance f r o m the f o r w a r d
p e r p e n d i c u l a r o f n o t less t h a n 5 p e r c e n t o f t h e l e n g t h
o f t h e s h i p o r 1 0 m , w h i c h e v e r is t h e less, i n s e p a r a t e
cases o t h e r v a l u e m a y be p e r m i t t e d , b u t n o t m o r e
t h a n 8 per cent o f the length o f the ship;
b u l b o u s b o w , t h e distances s t i p u l a t e d i n 1.1.6.2.1 s h a l l
be m e a s u r e d f r o m a p o i n t either at the m i d - l e n g t h o f
s u c h e x t e n s i o n , o r a t a d i s t a n c e 1,5 p e r c e n t o f t h e
length o f the ship f o r w a r d o f the f o r w a r d perpendicular,
o r at a distance 3 m f o r w a r d o f the f o r w a r d perpendicular, w h i c h e v e r gives the smallest m e a s u r e m e n t ;
.3 t h e b u l k h e a d m a y h a v e s t e p s o r r e c e s s e s p r o v i d e d t h e y are w i t h i n t h e l i m i t s prescribed i n 1.1.6.2.1
o r 1.1.6.2.2;
the collision b u l k h e a d shall be extended w e a t h e r t i g h t
t o the deck n e x t above the freeboard deck. T h e ext e n s i o n need n o t be fitted directly a b o v e the b u l k h e a d
b e l o w p r o v i d e d i t is l o c a t e d w i t h i n the l i m i t s p r e scribed i n 1.1.6.2.1 o r 1.1.6.2.2 w i t h t h e e x e m p t i o n
p e r m i t t e d b y 1.1.6.2.5 a n d t h e p a r t o f t h e d e c k w h i c h
f o r m s the step is m a d e effectively w e a t h e r t i g h t ;
.5 w h e r e b o w d o o r s a r e f i t t e d a n d a s l o p i n g
loading r a m p forms part o f the extension o f the fore
peak b u l k h e a d above the freeboard deck, the p a r t o f
t h e r a m p w h i c h is m o r e t h a n 2,3 m a b o v e t h e freeb o a r d deck m a y e x t e n d f o r w a r d o f the l i m i t specified
i n 1.1.6.2.1 o r 1.1.6.2.2. T h e r a m p s h a l l be w e a t h e r tight over its complete length;
.6 t h e n u m b e r o f o p e n i n g s i n t h e e x t e n s i o n o f t h e
fore p e a k b u l k h e a d a b o v e the freeboard deck shall be
1
' F o r the purpose o f the present paragraph "freeboard deck", "length o f ship" a n d "forward perpendicular" have the meanings as
d e f i n e d i n 1.2 o f L o a d L i n e R u l e s f o r S e a - G o i n g S h i p s .
P a r t II.
Hull
restricted t o the m i n i m u m compatible w i t h the design

a n d n o r m a l o p e r a t i o n o f the ship;
.7 b u l k h e a d s s h a l l b e f i t t e d s e p a r a t i n g t h e e n g i n e
r o o m f r o m cargo a n d passenger spaces f o r w a r d a n d
aft a n d m a d e w a t e r t i g h t u p t o the freeboard deck;
.8 s t e r n t u b e s s h a l l b e e n c l o s e d i n a w a t e r t i g h t
space ( o r spaces) o f m o d e r a t e v o l u m e . O t h e r m e a sures m a y be t a k e n t o m i n i m i z e the d a n g e r o f w a t e r
p e n e t r a t i n g i n t o t h e ship i n case o f d a m a g e t o
sterntube arrangements.
1.1.63 I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s a n d c a r g o s h i p s , o t h e r
t h a n tankers, the keels o f w h i c h w e r e laid o r w h i c h w e r e
a t a s i m i l a r stage o f c o n s t r u c t i o n o n 1 J a n u a r y 2 0 0 9
o r after t h a t date, the p e a k a n d m a c h i n e r y space
b u l k h e a d s , shaft t u n n e l s , etc. s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e
following requirements:
.1 a c o l l i s i o n b u l k h e a d s h a l l be f i t t e d w h i c h s h a l l
be w a t e r t i g h t u p t o the b u l k h e a d deck. T h i s b u l k h e a d
shall be located at a distance f r o m the f o r w a r d perp e n d i c u l a r o f n o t less t h a n 5 p e r c e n t o f t h e l e n g t h o f
t h e s h i p o r 1 0 m , w h i c h e v e r is t h e less, a n d i f o t h e r
v a l u e is n o t p e r m i t t e d , n o t m o r e t h a n 8 per cent o f
the length o f the ship o r 3 m plus 5 per cent o f the
l e n g t h o f t h e ship, w h i c h e v e r is t h e greater;
b u l b o u s b o w , t h e distance s t i p u l a t e d i n 1.1.6.3.1 s h a l l
be m e a s u r e d f r o m a p o i n t either at the m i d l e n g t h o f
s u c h e x t e n s i o n , o r a t a d i s t a n c e 1,5 p e r c e n t o f t h e
length o f the ship f o r w a r d o f the f o r w a r d perpendicular, o r at a distance 3 m f o r w a r d o f the f o r w a r d
perpendicular, w h i c h e v e r gives the smallest m e a surement;
.3 t h e b u l k h e a d m a y h a v e s t e p s o r r e c e s s e s p r o vided that they are w i t h i n the limits prescribed
i n 1.1.6.3.1 o r 1.1.6.3.2;
.4 n o d o o r s , m a n h o l e s , a c c e s s o p e n i n g s , v e n t i l a t o r s o r a n y o t h e r openings shall be f i t t e d i n the c o l lision b u l k h e a d b e l o w the b u l k h e a d deck;
.5 e x c e p t a s p r o v i d e d i n 1 . 1 . 6 . 3 . 6 , t h e c o l l i s i o n
b u l k h e a d m a y be pierced b e l o w the b u l k h e a d deck b y
n o t m o r e than one pipe for dealing w i t h the forepeak
t a n k , p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e pipe is f i t t e d w i t h a screwd o w n valve capable o f being operated f r o m above the
b u l k h e a d deck, the valve chest being secured inside
the forepeak tank to the collision bulkhead. T h i s
v a l v e m a y be f i t t e d o n t h e after side o f t h e c o l l i s i o n
b u l k h e a d p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e v a l v e is r e a d i l y accessible
u n d e r a l l service c o n d i t i o n s a n d t h e space i n w h i c h i t
is l o c a t e d is n o t a c a r g o space. A l l v a l v e s s h a l l be o f
steel, b r o n z e o r o t h e r a p p r o v e d d u c t i l e m a t e r i a l .
V a l v e s o f o r d i n a r y cast i r o n o r similar m a t e r i a l are
n o t acceptable;
.6 i f t h e f o r e p e a k i s d i v i d e d t o h o l d t w o d i f f e r e n t
k i n d s o f liquids, the c o l l i s i o n b u l k h e a d t o be pierced
b e l o w the b u l k h e a d deck b y t w o pipes, each o f w h i c h
47
is f i t t e d as r e q u i r e d b y 1.1.6.3.5, p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e r e is
n o practical alternative to the fitting o f such a second
pipe a n d that, h a v i n g regard t o the a d d i t i o n a l subdivision p r o v i d e d i n the forepeak, the safety o f the
ship is m a i n t a i n e d ;
the c o l l i s i o n b u l k h e a d shall be extended w e a t h e r t i g h t
t o the deck n e x t above the b u l k h e a d deck. T h e ext e n s i o n o f the c o l l i s i o n b u l k h e a d need n o t be fitted
d i r e c t l y a b o v e the b u l k h e a d b e l o w p r o v i d e d i t is l o cated w i t h i n t h e l i m i t s prescribed i n 1.1.6.3.1
o r 1.1.6.3.2 w i t h t h e e x e m p t i o n p e r m i t t e d b y 1.1.6.3.8
a n d the p a r t o f the deck w h i c h f o r m s the step is m a d e
effectively w e a t h e r t i g h t . T h e e x t e n s i o n s h a l l be so
a r r a n g e d as t o p r e c l u d e t h e p o s s i b i l i t y o f t h e b o w
d o o r causing d a m a g e t o i t i n t h e case o f d a m a g e t o ,
o r detachment of, the b o w door;
.8 w h e r e b o w d o o r s a r e f i t t e d a n d a s l o p i n g
loading r a m p forms part o f the extension o f the
collision b u l k h e a d above the b u l k h e a d deck, the
r a m p shall be w e a t h e r t i g h t o v e r its c o m p l e t e length.
I n c a r g o ships, t h e p a r t o f t h e r a m p w h i c h is m o r e
t h a n 2,3 m a b o v e t h e b u l k h e a d d e c k m a y e x t e n d
f o r w a r d o f t h e l i m i t specified i n 1.1.6.3.1 o r 1.1.6.3.2.
R a m p s n o t m e e t i n g the a b o v e r e q u i r e m e n t s shall be
d i s r e g a r d e d as a n e x t e n s i o n o f t h e c o l l i s i o n b u l k h e a d ;
.9 t h e n u m b e r o f o p e n i n g s i n t h e e x t e n s i o n o f t h e
collision b u l k h e a d a b o v e the freeboard deck shall be
restricted t o the m i n i m u m compatible w i t h the design
and n o r m a l operation o f the ship. A l l such openings
shall be capable o f being closed w e a t h e r t i g h t ;
.10 b u l k h e a d s s h a l l b e f i t t e d s e p a r a t i n g t h e m a c h i n e r y space f r o m cargo a n d a c c o m o d a t i o n spaces
f o r w a r d and aft and made watertight u p to the
b u l k h e a d deck. I n passenger ships, a n afterpeak
b u l k h e a d shall also be f i t t e d a n d m a d e w a t e r t i g h t u p
t o the b u l k h e a d deck. T h e afterpeak b u l k h e a d m a y ,
h o w e v e r , be stepped b e l o w the b u l k h e a d deck, p r o v i d e d t h e degree o f safety o f t h e s h i p as r e g a r d s
s u b d i v i s i o n is n o t t h e r e b y d i m i n i s h e d ;
.11 i n a l l c a s e s s t e r n t u b e s s h a l l b e e n c l o s e d i n
w a t e r t i g h t spaces o f m o d e r a t e v o l u m e . I n passenger
ships, the stern g l a n d shall be situated i n a w a t e r t i g h t
shaft t u n n e l o r o t h e r w a t e r t i g h t space separate f r o m
the stern tube c o m p a r t m e n t and o f such v o l u m e that,
if flooded by leakage t h r o u g h the stern gland, the
b u l k h e a d d e c k w i l l n o t be i m m e r s e d . I n c a r g o ships,
o t h e r measures t o m i n i m i z e the d a n g e r o f w a t e r pen e t r a t i n g i n t o t h e ship i n case o f d a m a g e t o s t e r n t u b e
a r r a n g e m e n t s m a y be t a k e n .
1.1.6.4 I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s , t h e k e e l s o f w h i c h w e r e
laid o r w h i c h w e r e at a s i m i l a r stage o f c o n s t r u c t i o n
before 1 January 2009, the double b o t t o m shall
c o m p l y w i t h the following requirements:
.1 a d o u b l e b o t t o m s h a l l be f i t t e d e x t e n d i n g f r o m
t h e f o r e p e a k b u l k h e a d t o t h e a f t e r p e a k b u l k h e a d as
48
Rules
far as this is practicable a n d compatible w i t h t h e

design a n d proper w o r k i n g o fthe ship.
I n s h i p s o f 5 0 m a n d u p w a r d s b u t less t h a n 6 1 m
i n l e n g t h a d o u b l e b o t t o m shall be fitted a t least f r o m
the engine r o o m t o t h e fore peak bulkhead, o r as near
thereto as practicable.
I n s h i p s o f 6 1 m a n d u p w a r d s b u t less t h a n 7 6 m i n
l e n g t h a d o u b l e b o t t o m shall b e fitted a t least o u t s i d e t h e
engine r o o m , a n dshall extend t o the fore a n d after peak
bulkheads, o r as near thereto as practicable.
I n ships o f 76 m i n l e n g t h a n d u p w a r d s , a d o u b l e
b o t t o m shall be fitted amidships, a n d shall extend t o
the fore a n d after peak bulkheads, o r as near thereto
as practicable;
.2 w h e r e a d o u b l e b o t t o m i s r e q u i r e d t o b e f i t t e d ,
its d e p t h shall be i n accordance w i t h the requirements
o f 2.4.4.1 a n d the inner b o t t o m shall be continued o u t
t o t h e ship's sides i n s u c h a m a n n e r as t o p r o t e c t t h e
b o t t o m t o t h e t u r n o fthe bilge. S u c h p r o t e c t i o n will
be d e e m e d satisfactory i f t h e line o f intersection o f
the o u t e r edge o f t h e m a r g i n plate w i t h t h e bilge
plating is n o t lower at a n y part than a horizontal
plane passing t h r o u g h the p o i n t A a t m i d s h i p section,
as s h o w n i n F i g . 1.1.6.4;
\
25
/
Base
line
B/2
F i g . 1.1.6.4
.3 s m a l l w e l l s c o n s t r u c t e d i n t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m i n
connection w i t h drainage arrangements o f holds, etc.
shall n o t extend d o w n w a r d s m o r e t h a n necessary.
T h e d e p t h o f t h e w e l l s h a l l i n n o case b e m o r e t h a n
t h e d e p t h less 4 6 0 m m o f t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m a t t h e
centreline, n o r shall t h e well extend below t h e hor
i z o n t a l p l a n e r e f e r r e d t o i n 1.1.6.4.2. A w e l l e x t e n d i n g
to the outer b o t t o m is, however, permitted at the
after e n d o f t h e shaft t u n n e l . O t h e r w e l l s (e.g., f o r
lubricating o i l under m a i n engines) m a y be p e r m i t t e d
if the arrangements give protection equivalent t o that
afforded b y a double b o t t o m complying with the
requirements o fpresent paragraph;
.4 a d o u b l e b o t t o m n e e d n o t b e f i t t e d i n w a y o f
w a t e r t i g h t c o m p a r t m e n t s o f m o d e r a t e size u s e d e x
clusively f o r t h e carriage o f liquids, p r o v i d e d t h e
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
safety o f t h e ship, i n t h e e v e n t o f b o t t o m o r side

damage, is n o tthereby impaired.
1.1.6.5 I n c a r g o s h i p s o t h e r t h a n t a n k e r s , t h e k e e l s
o f w h i c h w e r e l a i d o r w h i c h w e r e a t a s i m i l a r stage o f
construction before 1 January 2009, t h e double b o t t o m
shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e following requirements:
.1 a d o u b l e b o t t o m s h a l l b e f i t t e d e x t e n d i n g f r o m
the collision b u l k h e a d t o t h e after p e a k b u l k h e a d , as
design a n d proper w o r k i n g o fthe ship;
.2 t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m d e p t h s h a l l b e i n c o n f o r m i t y
w i t h 2.4.4.1, a n dt h e inner b o t t o m shall be continued
o u t t o t h e ship's side i n s u c h a m a n n e r as t o p r o t e c t
the b o t t o m t o t h e t u r n o fthe bilge;
.3 s m a l l w e l l s c o n s t r u c t e d i n t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m , i n
connection w i t h the drainage arrangements o f holds,
shall n o t extend i n d e p t h m o r e t h a n necessary. A w e l l
extending t o t h e outer b o t t o m m a y , h o w e v e r , be per
m i t t e d a t t h e after e n d o f the shaft t u n n e l o f the ship.
Other wells m a y be permitted i f the arrangements give
protection equivalent t o that afforded b y a double
b o t t o m c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e present paragraph;
watertight compartments used exclusively f o r the
carriage o fliquids, p r o v i d e d t h e safety o fthe ship i n
the event o fb o t t o m damage is n o tthereby impaired.
1.1.6.6 I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s a n d c a r g o s h i p s , o t h e r
t h a n tankers, t h e keels o f w h i c h were laid o r w h i c h
w e r e a t a similar stage o f c o n s t r u c t i o n o n 1 J a n
u a r y 2009 o r after that date, t h e double b o t t o m shall
comply with thefollowing requirements:
.1 a d o u b l e b o t t o m s h a l l b e f i t t e d e x t e n d i n g f r o m
the collision b u l k h e a d t o t h e after p e a k b u l k h e a d , as
design a n d proper w o r k i n g o fthe ship;
.2 t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m d e p t h s h a l l b e i n a c c o r d a n c e
w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.4.4.1 a n d t h e i n n e r b o t t o m
s h a l l b e c o n t i n u e d o u t t o t h e ship's sides i n s u c h a
m a n n e r as t o protect the b o t t o m t o the t u r n o f the bilge;
.3 s m a l l w e l l s c o n s t r u c t e d i n t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m ,
in connection w i t h the drainage arrangements o f
holds, etc. shall n o t extend d o w n w a r d m o r e t h a n
necessary. A well extending t o t h e outer b o t t o m is,
however, p e r m i t t e d a t t h e after e n d o f t h e shaft
t u n n e l . O t h e r w e l l s (e.g., f o r l u b r i c a t i n g o i l u n d e r
m a i n engines) m a ybe p e r m i t t e d i f the arrangements
give protection equivalent t o that afforded b y a
double b o t t o m c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e present para
g r a p h . I n n o case s h a l l t h e v e r t i c a l distance f r o m t h e
b o t t o m o fsuch a well t o a plane coinciding w i t h the
k e e l l i n e b e n o t less t h a n 5 0 0 m m ;
small-sized watertight compartments used exclusively
for t h e carriage o fliquids, p r o v i d e d t h e safety o f the
ship i n t h e e v e n t o f b o t t o m o r side d a m a g e i s n o t
thereby impaired;
P a r t II. H u l l
49
.5 a n y p a r t o f a p a s s e n g e r s h i p o r a c a r g o s h i p
that is n o t fitted w i t h a double b o t t o m i n accordance
w i t h 1.1.6.6.1 o r 1.1.6.6.4 s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e quirements o f 2.9, P a r t V " S u b d i v i s i o n " ;
.6 i n c a s e o f u n u s u a l b o t t o m a r r a n g e m e n t i n a
passenger ship o r a cargo ship i t shall be d e m o n strated that t h e ship is capable o fwithstanding bottom
d a m a g e s as specified i n 2.9.3, P a r t V
"Subdivision".
1.1.6.7 T h e f r e e i n g p o r t s i n b u l w a r k s s h a l l b e
assigned proceeding f r o m 3.2.13 o f L o a d L i n e R u l e s
for S e a - G o i n g Ships.
The l o w e r edges o f freeing p o r t s shall b e a r r a n g e d
as n e a r t o t h e d e c k a s p r a c t i c a b l e , b u t t h e y s h a l l n o t
bear u p o n t h e sheerstrake.
I n ships o f 65 m i n l e n g t h a n d u p w a r d s a c o n t i nuous slot shall generally be provided between t h e
freeboard a n d sheerstrake edge instead o f freeing ports.
1.1.6.8 I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s a n d c a r g o s h i p s , t h e
design o f w a t e r t i g h t decks, t r u n k s , etc. shall c o m p l y
w i t h the following requirements:
.1 w a t e r t i g h t d e c k s , t r u n k s , t u n n e l s , d u c t k e e l s a n d
ventilation ducts shall have a strength equal t o that o f
watertight bulkheads fitted o n t h e same level. W a t e r tight v e n t i l a t i o n ducts a n d t r u n k s shall be carried a t
least t o t h e b u l k h e a d deck i n passenger ships a n d a t
least t o t h e f r e e b o a r d deck i n cargo ships;
.2 w h e r e a v e n t i l a t i o n t r u n k p a s s i n g t h r o u g h a
structure penetrates t h e b u l k h e a d deck, t h e t r u n k
shall be capable o f w i t h s t a n d i n g t h e w a t e r pressure
that m a y be present w i t h i n t h e t r u n k , after h a v i n g
taken i n t o account t h e m a x i m u m heel angle allowable d u r i n g i n t e r m e d i a t e stages o f f l o o d i n g , i n acc o r d a n c e w i t h 3.3.3, P a r t V " S u b d i v i s i o n " ;
.3 w h e r e a l l o r p a r t o f t h e p e n e t r a t i o n o f b u l k head deck is o n t h e m a i n r o - r o deck, t h e t r u n k shall
be capable o f w i t h s t a n d i n g i m p a c t pressure d u e t o
internal water motions o f the trapped water o n the
vehicle deck.
1.2 M A T E R I A L S
a n d F 3 6 steel grades w i t h t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress

Re = 3 5 5 M P a , a n d A 4 0 , D 4 0 , E 4 0 a n d F 4 0 s t e e l
grades w i t h t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress R
= 390 M P a .
The a p p l i c a t i o n o f h i g h s t r e n g t h steel grades D ,
E , F w i t h t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress o f 4 2 0 M P a a n d
above is subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e
R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
1.2.2.2 I n c a s e o f h i g h l o c a l s t r e s s e s i n t h e
thickness direction, Z-steel (refer t o 3.14, P a r t X I I I
"Materials") shall be used f o r t h e fabrication o f
s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s h a v i n g a t h i c k n e s s i n excess o f
18 m m u n l e s s n o m e a s u r e s a r e t a k e n t o s t r u c t u r a l l y
prevent lamellar tearing.
1.2.2.3 W h e r e c l a d s t e e l i s u s e d , t h e m e c h a n i c a l
properties o ft h e base m a t e r i a l shall n o t be l o w e r t h a n
those r e q u i r e d f o r t h e steel g r a d e specified i n 1.2.3.1.
H u l l s t r u c t u r a l steel stated i n 3 . 1 7 , P a r t X I I I
" M a t e r i a l s " shall be used as t h e base m a t e r i a l .
1.2.3 S e l e c t i o n o f s t e e l g r a d e s f o r h u l l s t r u c t u r e s .
1.2.3.1 S t e e l g r a d e s f o r h u l l s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s
s h a l l b e selected a c c o r d i n g t o 1.2.3.7, w h e r e a s steel
grades f o r structural m e m b e r s designed f o r p r o l o n g e d
e x p o s u r e t o l o w service t e m p e r a t u r e s a c c o r d i n g t o
F i g s 1.2.3.1-1 t o 1.2.3.1-3 s h a l l b e selected f o r v a r i o u s
Classes o f structural m e m b e r s proceeding f r o m t h e
actual thickness adopted for the m e m b e r concerned a n d
the design temperature o f structures t o be determined
b y a procedure agreed w i t h t h e Register.
For h u l l structural m e m b e r s o f icebreakers a n d
A r c 4 t o A r c 9 category ice ships, t h e design t e m p e r a t u r e f o r w h i c h d o e s n o t e x c e e d 3 0 C, w i t h
m e m b e r thickness exceeding 2 5m m , the Register m a y
r e q u i r e f o r a p p l i c a t i o n o f steel o f i m p r o v e d w e l d a b i l i t y a n d o f steel c o m p l y i n g w i t h specific R e g i s t e r
requirements f o rviscosity a n d c o l d resistance p r o p erties (steels m a r k e d w i t h a n a d d i t i o n a l supers c r i p t " A r c " ) . R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r these steels a r e
specified i n P a r t X I I " M a t e r i a l s " o f R u l e s f o rt h e
Classification, Construction a n d E q u i p m e n t o f M o bile Offshore D r i l l i n g U n i t s a n d F i x e d Offshore
Platforms.
e
1.2.3.2 T h e d e s i g n t e m p e r a t u r e o f t h e s t r u c t u r e s
w h i c h come constantly o r periodically i ncontact w i t h
a m b i e n t a i r a r e expressed i n terms o f m i n i m u m design temperature o fa m b i e n t a i r T . I nt h e absence o f
any other provisions, f o rthe value o f T the minim u m average daily a i rtemperature is adopted w h i c h
c a n t a k e p l a c e d u r i n g a five-year p e r i o d o f o p e r a t i o n
on t h e routes passing i n t h e m o s t unfavourable w a ters as regards c o o l i n g c o n d i t i o n s .
1.2.1 G e n e r a l .
The materials used f o rh u l l structures regulated
by this Part o f t h e Rules shall comply w i t h t h e requirements o fPart X I I I "Materials".
1.2.2 S t e e l g r a d e s f o r h u l l s t r u c t u r e s .
1.2.2.1 H u l l m e m b e r s s h a l l b e f a b r i c a t e d o f m i l d
steel grades A , B , D a n d E w i t h t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress
1.2.3.3 I n a l l c a s e s t h e v a l u e o f T s h a l l n o t e x c e e d :
R
= 235MPa and o fA H , D H , E Hand F H high
4 0 " C f o r icebreakers o f categories Icebreaker9,
tensile steel grades A 3 2 , D 3 2 , E 3 2 a n d F 3 2 w i t h t h e
I c e b r e a k e r 8 , I c e b r e a k e r 7 a n d ships w i t h ice strengthenu p p e r y i e l d stress R
= 3 1 5 M P a , A 3 6 , D 3 6 , E 3 6 ing o f categories A r c 9 , A r c 8 , A r c 7 , A r c 6 , A r c 5 ;
A
e H
'if operation involves sailing into t h em o u t h s o fnorthern rivers, the value o f T
s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 50 C.
50
Rules
Design
temperature
of structure,
in C
Design
and Construction
temperature
of structure,
of Sea-Going
Ships
in C
F i g . 1.2.3.1-2 S t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s o f C l a s s I I
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
Design temperature of structure, in C
-60
-10
-20
-30
-40
-50
Design temperature of structure, in C
F i g . 1.2.3.1-3 S t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s o f C l a s s I I I
-60
Part
II. H u l l
51
3 0 C f o r i c e b r e a k e r s o f c a t e g o r y I c e b r e a k e r 6
a n d ships w i t h ice strengthening o fcategory Arc4;
1 0 C f o r s h i p s w i t h i c e s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f c a
tegories Ice3, Ice2 a n d Icel.
1.2.3.4 A n a p p r o x i m a t e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f t e m
peratures o fstructures is permitted based o n t h e v a
lues o f T o b t a i n e d b y this m e t h o d i n accordance
w i t h t h e r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s g i v e n i n T a b l e 1.2.3.4.
1.2.3.5 A t t h e d e s i g n t e n s i l e s t r e s s e s i n t h e u p p e r
d e c k a n d side l o n g i t u d i n a l s ( o f sheerstrake) d u e t o t h e
still w a t e r h o g g i n g m o m e n t ( o ) , exceeding t h e v a
lue 65/ri , t h e design t e m p e r a t u r e o f l o n g i t u d i n a l s m a y
b e c o r r e c t e d b y t h e v a l u e o f AT = - 1 0 ( 0 ^ / 6 5 - 1 ) C.
1.2.3.6 T h e d e s i g n t e m p e r a t u r e o f h u l l s t r u c t u r e s
l o c a t e d w i t h i n t h e r e f r i g e r a t e d cargo spaces s h a l l be
assumed equal t o thetemperature i nt h e refrigerated
c a r g o space.
The design temperature o f the structures f o r m i n g
b o u n d a r i e s o f t h e r e f r i g e r a t e d cargo spaces s h a l l be
assumed as follows:
w i t h n o i n s u l a t i o n fitted o n t h e side o f t h e r e
frigerated c a r g o space, t h e t e m p e r a t u r e i n t h i s space;
w i t h i n s u l a t i o n fitted o n t h e side o f t h e r e
frigerated cargo space a n d w i t h n o i n s u l a t i o n o n t h e
o t h e r side, t h e t e m p e r a t u r e o n t h e u n i n s u l a t e d side o f
the b o u n d a r y i n t h e space;
w i t h i n s u l a t i o n f i t t e d o n b o t h sides, a r i t h m e t i c a l
m e a n o f t h e t e m p e r a t u r e s i n t h e adjacent spaces.
1.2.3.7 D e p e n d i n g o n t h e l e v e l a n d t y p e o f a p p l i e d
stress, p r e s e n c e o f stress c o n c e n t r a t i o n s , c o m p l e x i t y o f
structural design o f t h e assemblies a n d t h e w o r k m a n
ship, t h e assumed damage consequences f o r safety o f
the ship as a w h o l e , the structural m e m b e r s a r e g r o u p e d

i n t o three Classes according t o T a b l e 1.2.3.7-1.
T h e steel grade o f s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s s h a l l n o t
be b e l o w t h e grade specified i n T a b l e s 1.2.3.7-1
t o 1.2.3.7-6.
Additional requirements:
for single deck ships w i t h l e n g t h exceeding 150 m ,
e x c l u d i n g t h o s e c o v e r e d i n T a b l e 1.2.3.7-3, a r e g i v e n
i n T a b l e 1.2.3.7-2;
for m e m b r a n e type liquefied gas carriers w i t h
l e n g t h exceeding 150 m a r e g i v e n i n T a b l e 1.2.3.7-3;
for ships w i t h l e n g t h exceeding 250 m are given i n
T a b l e 1.2.3.7-4;
for ships w i t h ice strengthening a r e given i n
T a b l e 1.2.3.7-5.
T h e steel grade d e p e n d i n g o n t h e s t r u c t u r a l
m e m b e r thickness is determined i n accordance w i t h
T a b l e 1.2.3.7-6.
1.2.3.8 S t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s n o t m e n t i o n e d i n
T a b l e s 1.2.3.7-1 t o 1.2.3.7-5, w h o s e scantlings a r e
regulated b y t h e present Part, shall be referred t o
Class I . T h e steel grade shall c o r r e s p o n d t o t h easb u i l t p l a t e t h i c k n e s s a n d m a t e r i a l class.
1.2.3.9 F o r s t r u c t u r e s w i t h h i g h l e v e l o f s t r e s s
c o n c e n t r a t i o n , subject t o d y n a m i c l o a d s (e.g. w h e n
m o o r i n g a t sea) o r b e i n g i n c o m b i n e d stress state, t h e
use o f steel grade D o r grade E m a y b e r e q u i r e d . Steel
grade A is n o tpermitted.
1.2.3.10 S i n g l e s t r a k e s r e q u i r e d t o b e o f C l a s s I I I
o r s t e e l g r a d e E / E H a n d w i t h i n 0,4L a m i d s h i p s s h a l l
h a v e b r e a d t h s n o t less t h a n 8 0 0 + 5 L m m , n e e d n o t b e
greater t h a n 1800 m m .
s w
T a b l e
Design temperature T
Hull structure
Insulation
Heating
E x p o s e d p a r t o f strength deck, side plating portion

a b o v e s u m m e r l o a d waterline (for ships intended t o
operate i n ice a b o v e icebelt) a s well a s adjacent
f r a m i n g a n d p o r t i o n s u p t o 1,0 m w i d e o f b u l k h e a d
structures, decks, platforms, topside t a n k s , etc.
Fitted
Not
Strength deck portion under unhealed superstructures
Not
Not
E x t e r n a l structures o fsuperstructures a n d
deckhouses
Structures cooled o nb o t h sides with ambient a i r

Side plating portion i n t h eregion o f alternating
waterline. R e g i o n I o f ice strengthening o f ships
intended t o operate i n ice
relevant
fitted
Not
holds
provided
Provided
Not
provided
relevant N o t
provided
Provided
0,50
0 J 0 T
+ 5 C
-10
0,50
Fitted
Not
fitted
Fitted
Not
Not
relevant
fitted
Not
provided
0,70T
Not
provided
Not
provided
0,55T
Provided
Not
provided
N o t e . F o r external structures o funderwater portion o fthe hull T
= 0 C.
Region o f spaces
other than cargo
spaces
Cargo space region

tanks
0,35T
0,0
1.2.3.4
0,60
52
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
T a b l e
Structural member
Nos.
category
L o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s t r a k e s , o t h e r t h a n t h a t g i v e n i n p a r a 7.
D e c k p l a t i n g e x p o s e d t o w e a t h e r , o t h e r t h a n t h a t g i v e n i n p a r a s 5, 12, 13, 15 a n d 16
Side plating
4
5
6
B o t t o m plating, including keel plate

Class I I amidships
S t r e n g t h d e c k p l a t i n g , e x c l u d i n g t h a t g i v e n i n p a r a s 12, 13, 14, 15 a n d 16
Class I outside o f amidships
Continuous longitudinal plating o f strength members above strength deck, excluding
hatch coamings
Uppermost strake i nlongitudinal bulkhead
Vertical strake (hatch side girder) a n d u p p e r m o s t sloped strake i n top wing t a n k
L o n g i t u d i n a l h a t c h c o a m i n g s o f l e n g t h l e s s t h a n 0,15
External longitudinal members, plating a n d framing of long superstructures a n d plating o f
sides o f s h o r t s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s a n d d e c k h o u s e s (first tier)
11
12
13
1.2.3.7-1
Material class/grade
1
2
3
7
8
9
10
Ships
Class I throughout the length o f a ship
Sheerstrake
Stringer plate i n strength deck
Deck strake a t longitudinal bulkhead, excluding deck plating i n w a y o f inner-skin
bulkhead o f double-hull ships
L o w e r deck strakes a t cargo hatch corners i n refrigerated spaces
Class III amidships

Class I I outside o f amidships
Class I outside 0,6i amidships
15
Strength deck plating a t o u t b o a r d corners o f cargo hatch openings i n container carriers

and other ships with similar hatch opening configurations
Class
Class
Class
Class
16
Strength deck plating a t corners o f cargo hatch openings i n b u l k carriers, o r e carriers,

combination carriers a n d other ships with similar hatch opening configurations
T r u n k deck a n d inner deck plating at corners o f openings for liquid a n d gas domes i n
m e m b r a n e type liquefied gas carriers
Class I I I within 0,6i o f the ship

Class I I within rest o f cargo region
18
B i l g e s t r a k e i n s h i p s w i t h d o u b l e b o t t o m o v e r t h e f u l l b r e a d t h a n d l e n g t h l e s s t h a n 150 m
Class I I within 0,6i amidships

19
Bilge strake i n other ships
20
21
L o n g i t u d i n a l h a t c h c o a m i n g s o f l e n g t h g r e a t e r t h a n 0,15L, i n c l u d i n g c o a m i n g t o p p l a t e
and flange
E n d brackets a n d deck house transition o flongitudinal cargo hatch coamings
Class III amidships

N o t t o b e less t h a n G r a d e D / D H
22
Side plating a t cargo port corners
Class throughout the length o fa ship
23
P l a t i n g a n d f r a m i n g ( w e l d e d m e m b e r s ) i n i c e - s t r e n g t h e n i n g r e g i o n I ( r e f e r t o F i g s . 3.10.1.3.2
a n d 3.10.1.3.3), w e l d e d p l a t e s t e m s a n d s t e r n f r a m e s o f :
.1 s h i p s o f ice c a t e g o r i e s A r c 4 , Ice3, Ice2, I c e l
Class I throughout the length o fa ship
14
17
III amidships
I I outside o f amidships
I outside 0,6i amidships
III within cargo region
Class III amidships

.2 s h i p s o f i c e c a t e g o r i e s A r c 9 , A r c 8 , A r c 7 , A r c 6 , A r c 5 a n d i c e b r e a k e r s i r r e s p e c t i v e o f C l a s s I I t h r o u g h o u t t h e l e n g t h o f a s h i p
category
24
Rolled section framing of:

.1 s h i p s irrespective o f ice c a t e g o r y a n d i c e b r e a k e r s o f ice c a t e g o r y
.2 i c e b r e a k e r s o f i c e c a t e g o r i e s I c e b r e a k e r 9 , I c e b r e a k e r 8 ,
Icebreaker6
Icebreaker7
Class I throughout the length o fa ship

Class I I throughout the length o f a ship
' S i n g l e s t r a k e s r e q u i r e d t o b e o f C l a s s I I I w i t h i n 0 , 4 Z a m i d s h i p s s h a l l h a v e b r e a d t h s n o t l e s s t h a n 8 0 0 + 5L m m , n e e d n o t b e g r e a t e r t h a n
1800 m m , u n l e s s l i m i t e d b y t h e g e o m e t r y o f t h e s h i p ' s d e s i g n ;
T h e b o u n d a r i e s o f a r e a s f o r m e m b e r s r e l a t e d t o t h i s c a t e g o r y c o r r e s p o n d t o F i g . 1.2.3.7.
2
T a b l e
Structural member
category
1.2.3.7-2
Material grade
Longitudinal plating o f strength deck Grade B / A H amidships

where contributing to t h e longitudinal
strength
Continuous longitudinal plating o f
strength members above strength deck
Single side strakes for ships without inner
continuous longitudinal bulkhead(s)
between b o t t o m a n d the strength deck
Grade B / A H
cargo region
within
1.2.3.11 F o r s h i p s less t h a n 4 0 m i n l e n g t h , s t e e l
specified f o r Classes o f s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s outside
a m i d s h i p s a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 1.2.3.7-1 m a y b e u s e d
t h r o u g h o u t t h e length o f the ship.
1.2.3.12 P l a t i n g m a t e r i a l s f o r s t e r n f r a m e s s u p
p o r t i n g t h e r u d d e r a n d propeller boss, rudders, r u d
der h o r n s a n d shaft brackets shall i n general n o t beo f
lower grades t h a n corresponding t o Class I I . F o r
r u d d e r a n d r u d d e r b o d y plates subjected t o stress
c o n c e n t r a t i o n s (e.g. i n w a y o f l o w e r s u p p o r t o f s e m i -
P a r t II. H u l l
53
T a b l e
Structural member
category
Longitudinal plating o f strength deck

where contributing to t h e longitudinal
strength
T a b l e
Structural member
Grade B / A H amidships
T r u n k deck plating
Continuous
longitudinal
plating o f
s t r e n g t h
m e m b e r s
above the
strength deck
1.2.3.7-3
Material class/grade
category
1.2.3.7-5
Material grade
S h e l l s t r a k e s i nw a y of ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g
area f o r plates
Grade B / A H
Class I I amidships
Inner deck plating

Grade B / A H amidships
Longitudinal
strength
member plating between
the trunk deck a n d inner
deck
Note.
Table is applicable to similar ship types with
"double deck" arrangement above t h e strength deck.
T a b l e
Structural member
category
1.2.3.7-4
F i g . 1.2.3.7
A r e a s o f c a r g o h a t c h corners (lined) b e l o n g i n g t o m e m b e r s
referred t o Class I I I
Material grade
Sheerstrake a tstrength deck

Stringer plate i n strength deck
Bilge strake
Grade E / E H amidships
Grade E / E H amidships
Grade D / D H amidships
Single strakes required to b e o f Grade E / E H a n d within OAL

a m i d s h i p s s h a l l h a v e b r e a d t h s n o t l e s s t h a n 800 + 5 L m m , n e e d
n o t b e g r e a t e r t h a n 1800 m m , u n l e s s l i m i t e d b y t h e g e o m e t r y o f
the ship's design.
spade rudders o r a t upper part o f spade rudders),

Class I I I shall be applied.
1.2.4 A l u m i n i u m a l l o y s .
1.2.4.1 T h i s P a r t o f t h e R u l e s a d m i t s t h e f o l
l o w i n g applications o fa l u m i n i u m alloys:
hull,
superstructures
a n d deckhouses, i f
12 < L ^ 4 0 m ;
superstructures a n d deckhouses, i fL > 4 0m .
1.2.5 A n t i c o r r o s i v e p r o t e c t i o n a n d c o a t i n g s .
1.2.5.1 E f f e c t i v e p r o t e c t i v e c o a t i n g s c o m p l y i n g
w i t h t h e requirements o f 6.5.1.1, P a r t X I I I " M a t e r i
als" shall be applied t o t h e i n n e r surfaces o f ballast
tanks.
It i s r e c o m m e n d e d t o p r o t e c t t h e i n n e r spaces o f
cofferdams, duct keels, supports o f transverse bulk
h e a d s a n d o t h e r s i m i l a r v o i d spaces o f o i l t a n k e r s a n d
bulk carriers w i t h protective coatings i n accordance
w i t h 6.5.1.2 o fP a r t X I I I "Materials".
1.2.5.2 A n t i - f o u l i n g c o a t i n g s o f s h i p h u l l s , i n c a s e
of their application, shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e require
m e n t s o f 6.5.2, P a r t X I I I " M a t e r i a l s " .
1.2.5.3 F o r c a r g o t a n k s o f o i l t a n k e r s o f 5 0 0 0 t
deadweight a n d over carrying crude o i l ,o n e o f the
f o l l o w i n g effective measures o n c o r r o s i o n p r o t e c t i o n
shall be implemented:
applying protective coatings i n compliance w i t h
IMO
resolution MSC.288(87)
(refer t o 6.5.1.2,
Part X I I I "Materials");
using alternative means o f protection o r corro
sion resistant materials t o maintain t h e required
structural integrity f o r 25 years i n accordance w i t h
IMO
resolution MSC.289(87)
(refer t o 3.16.1.2,
Part X I I I "Materials").
T a b l e
Structural member
t h i c k n e s s S, i n m m
Class, hull m e m b e r is related t o

I
M i l d steel
II
H i g h tensile steel
M i l d steel
III
H i g h tensile steel
5<15,0
15 < 5 < 2 0
AH
M i l d steel
A
AH
H i g h tensile
steel
AH
D H
20 < 5 < 2 5
D
25 < 5 < 3 0
D
30 < 5 < 3 5
D H
35 < 5 < 4 0
40 < 5 < 5 0
1.2.3.7-6
D H
EH
EH
54
Rules
1.3 D E S I G N
LOADS
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
= a s d e f i n e d i n 1.3.2.2.
1.3.2.2 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e p , i n k P a , d u e t o
ship's h u l l m o t i o n a b o u t t h e w a v e c o n t o u r is de
termined by the following formulae:
for t h e points o f application o f t h e loads below
the summer load waterline
w
1.3.1 G e n e r a l .
1.3.1.1 T h i s C h a p t e r c o n t a i n s t h e b a s i c f o r m u l a e
for determining t h edesign weather loads o n hull, ship
acceleration a t m o t i o n s as w e l l as loads f r o m d r y a n d
liquid cargoes.
1.3.1.2 W a v e i n d u c e d l o a d s o n t h e f o r w a r d p o r
t i o n o ft h e b o t t o m a n d flare, loads f r o m vehicles a n d
d e c k h e a v y c a r g o as w e l l as e m e r g e n c y loads a r e g i
ven i n the chapters o f the Rules pertaining t o the
appropriate structures.
1.3.1.3 R u l e s o f d e t e r m i n i n g t h e l o a d v a l u e a n d
the l o a d p o i n t a r e specified i n t h e appropriate chap
ters p e r t a i n i n g t o particular structures. I nt h e absence
o f such provisions t h e l o a d is assumed t o be o n t h e
l o w e r edge o f t h e plate, a t t h e m i d d l e o f design span
o f t h e m e m b e r o r at t h e centre o f t h e area t a k i n g u p
distributed load.
1.3.1.4 T h e b a s i c p a r a m e t e r o f d e s i g n l o a d a n d
accelerations o n ship's h u l l exposed t o w e a t h e r is t h e
wave factor c determined b y the formulae:
c = 0,08 5 6 L f o r L ^ 9 0 m ;
= D
\5c^-
(1.3.2.2-1)
for t h e points o f application o f t h e loads

Pw
= Pw -7,5a Zi
a
above
(1.3.2.2-2)
where p
=
5^ ;
f o r c , r e f e r t o 1.3.1.4 a n d 1.3.1.5;
w
' 71 ' )
8
'5;
M l 0 , 2 6 7 ;
k =
f a c t o r e q u a l t o 0,8 a n d 0,5 f o r h u l l s e c t i o n s f o r w a r d a n d
aft o f the m i d s h i p section respectively;
xi = d i s t a n c e o f t h e c o n s i d e r e d s e c t i o n f r o m t h e n e a r e s t f o r e
or after perpendicular, i n m ;
f o r Zj, r e f e r t o F o r m u l a (1.3.2.1-2);
I n a n y c a s e , t h e p r o d u c t ^ s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n a s l e s s
t h a n 0,6.
x
Distribution o f load p over the hull

c o n t o u r is s h o w n i n F i g . 1.3.2.2.
w
= 10,75 (
3 Q
Q
1
0 0
~ )
3 / 2 f o r
90 < L < 300 m ;
section
c=
10,75f o r3 0 0 3 5 0 m .
(1.3.1.4)
1.3.1.5 F o r s h i p s o f r e s t r i c t e d a r e a o f n a v i g a t i o n
the w a v e factor c shall be multiplied b y t h e reduc
t i o n f a c t o r (p o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1.3.1.5.
w
T a b l e
1.3.1.5
Area o f navigation
Rl
R2
R2-RSN
R2-RSN(4,5)
R3-RSN
R3
1
l,25-0,25L-10"4l
1,0-0,20Z/10"
0,94-0,19Z/10"
0,86-0,18Z/10"
0,75-0,18Z/10"
2
1.3.2 W a v e l o a d s .
1.3.2.1 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e p , i n k P a , a c t i n g o n
the ship's h u l l exposed t o w e a t h e r is d e t e r m i n e d b y
the following formulae:
for t h e points o f application o f t h e loads below
P = P s t
+ P
where p
above
(1.3.2.1-2)
s
= static pressure, i n k P a , d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
Pst = ,;
z = distance f o r m thepoint o fapplication o fthe load t o t h e

s u m m e r load waterline, i n m ;
f
1.3.3 A c c e l e r a t i o n a t m o t i o n s .
1.3.3.1 D e s i g n a c c e l e r a t i o n a , i n m / s , a t m o t i o n s
i n waves is determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
2
(1.3.2.1-1)
for t h e points o f application o f t h e loads

P = P v
F i g . 1.3.2.2
a = Ja
+ al +
0,4a?
(1.3.3.1-1)
where a = projection o f ship's centre o f gravity acceleration

o n t h e appropriate direction;
a , a = projections o f pitching a n d rolling acceleration o nt h e
appropriate directions a t t h epoint under consideration.
c
ber
Acceleration projections f o r t h e considered m e m

o n the vertical (index z), horizontal-transverse
P a r t II. H u l l
55
( i n d e x y) a n d h o r i z o n t a l - l o n g i t u d i n a l ( i n d e x x ) d i r e c
tions aredetermined b y the following formulae:
a
a
a
a
a
1/3
= 0,1(100 ;
= ,2( ;
= 0,2(100Ag gcp ;
= (2n/T ) y\iz ;
= 0;
= (2n/T ) tyx ;
= 0;
= (2n/T ) Qz ;
= (2n/T ) Qy
c x
1/3
c y
1 / 3
c z
p x
(1.3.3.1-2)
r x
= h g(l +a /g)
P c
(1.3.4.1)
where h = design stowage height, i n m ;

p = density o fthe cargo carried, i n t / m ;
a = design acceleration i nthe vertical direction determined i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.3.3.1,
c
r y
r z
.7
' V L
=
p z
w h e r e i s g i v e n i n T a b l e 1.3.1.5 (cp = 1 f o r s h i p s o f u n r e s t r i c t e d
service);
T a n d T = pitching a n d rolling p e r i o d s , i n s, d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formulae:
p y
a
a
a
a
1.3.4 C a r g o , f u e l a n d b a l l a s t l o a d s .
1.3.4.1 D e s i g n p r e s s u r e p , i n k P a , o n t h e g r i l l a g e s
o f cargo decks, p l a t f o r m s a n d double b o t t o m f r o m
package cargo is determined having regard t o inertia
forces b y t h e f o r m u l a
10
(1.3.3.1-3)
cB/Jh
where = numerical factor determined o n the basis o f the data for

the ship o f similar type. A s a first a p p r o x i m a t i o n ,
= 0,8;
h = metacentric height for the m o s t unfavourable conditions
o f operation; f o r a ship i n fully loaded condition,
A 0,07-8 u n l e s s m o r e d e t a i l e d d a t a a r e a v a i l a b l e .
F o r a t a n k e r i nb a l l a s t c o n d i t i o n , T, a s a first a p p r o x i m a t i o n ,
can b edetermined b y the formula
b u t n o t less t h a n 2 0 k P a .
1.3.4.2 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e s t r u c t u r e s
forming boundaries o f the compartments intended
for t h e carriage o fliquid cargoes a n dballast i n tan
kers, t h eballast t a n k s i n dry cargo ships as w e l l as t h e
tanks for ballast a n d fuel oil isdetermined depending
o n their dimensions, t h e extent o f filling a n d t h e
height o f air pipe. B y c o m p a r t m e n t ism e a n t a t a n k o r
a p a r t o f a t a n k confined b e t w e e n t h e effective
bulkheads. B o t h watertight a n dwash bulkheads w i t h
the total area o fopenings n o t over 10 p e r cent o f t h e
b u l k h e a d area a r econsidered as effective bulkheads.
1.3.4.2.1 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e p , i n k P a , o n t h e
structures o f fully loaded compartments is de
termined b y the following formulae:
c
\|f = d e s i g n a n g l e o f t r i m , i n r a d , d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
\|r = 1
0,23
Z/10"
(1.3.3.1-4)
Pc
Pc
Pc
p
c
=
=
=
=
PcgOPcg(zi
P<g{zi
0,75p
(1.3.4.2.1-1)
(1.3.4.2.1-2)
(1.3.4.2.1-3)
(1.3.4.2.1-4)
(1.3.4.2.1-5)
+ ajgfo;
+ bQ);
+ |0;
g(z,- + A z ) ;
Pc = PcgZi + Pv
w h e r e f o r cp, r e f e r t o T a b l e 1.4.4.3 (cp = 1 f o r s h i p s o f u n r e s t r i c t e d

service);
9 = design angle o f heel, i n r a d , determined b y the f o r m u l a
where
p = cargo, ballast o r fuel density, i n t / m , whichever is

appropriate;
a = design acceleration i n t h e vertical direction according
t o 1.3.3.1;
Zj = d i s t a n c e , i n m , f r o m t h e m e m b e r c o n c e r n e d t o t h e d e c k
level (tank top) a s m e a s u r e d a tthe centreline;
9 a n d \ | f = a s d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a e (1.3.3.1-4) a n d (1.3.3.1-5);
A z = height, i n m , o f air pipe a b o v e d e c k (tank top), b u t shall n o t
b e l e s s t h a n : 1,5 m f o r t h e b a l l a s t t a n k s o f d r y c a r g o s h i p s
a n d f o r f r e s h w a t e r t a n k s , 2,5 m f o r t h e t a n k s o f t a n k e r s
a n d f o r fuel o i l a n d lubricating o i l tanks; f o r small
e x p a n s i o n t a n k s a n d f o r lubricating o i l t a n k s o fless t h a n
3 m capacity, the m i n i m u m values o f A z are not stipulated;
p r e s s u r e , i n k P a , f o r w h i c h the safety v a l v e i s set, i f fitted,
b u t s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n : 15 k P a f o r t h e b a l l a s t t a n k s o f
d r y c a r g o s h i p s a n d f o r f r e s h w a t e r t a n k s , 25 k P a f o r t h e
t a n k s o ftankers a n d for fuel oil a n d lubricating oil tanks;
for small expansion t a n k s a n d for lubricating oil t a n k s o f
less t h a n 3 m capacity, the m i n i m u m values o f p are n o t
stipulated;
c
9 = cp
x
y,
0
0,6
1 + 0.510-
(1.3.3.1-5)
= distance o f t h e considered point f r o m t h e transverse

plane passing t h r o u g h the ship's centre o fgravity, i n m ;
z = distance o fthe considered point f r o m the centreline a n d
the horizontal plane passing t h r o u g h the ship's centre o f
gravity respectively, i n m .
I f i s ; 4 0 m i n F o r m u l a e (1.3.3.1-4) a n d (1.3.3.1-5), L s h a l l
b e t a k e n e q u a l t o 40 m .
0
A t all types o f m o t i o n s , t h etotal acceleration i n

the vertical direction a , i n m/s , c a n be determined
by the formula
2
0 9
g f ^ ( l + k
a =
z
(1.3.3.1-6)
w h e r e k = 1,6(12,5 X i / L ) ^ 0 i n t h e f o r w a r d r e g i o n ;
k = 0,5(1 - 3 , 3 3 x i / I . ) > 0 i n t h e a f t r e g i o n ;
f o r x \ , r e f e r t o 1.3.2.2.
I f L < 80 m i n F o r m u l a (1.3.3.1-6), L s h a l l b e t a k e n e q u a l
t o t e n s i l e 80 m .
a
/ a n d b = length a n d breadth, in m , o fa compartment a smeasured a t

mid-height; i fthe values o f / a n d / o r b change abruptly over
the compartment height, / and/or b are measured a t m i d height o feach c o m p a r t m e n t section where their variation i s
n o t a p p r e c i a b l e ; t h e F o r m u l a e (1.3.4.2.1-2) a n d (1.3.4.2.1-3)
are used for each measured value o f/ a n d b accordingly,
whichever is t h e greater.
56
Rules
1.3.4.2.2 W h e r e a c o m p a r t m e n t shall b e p a r t i a l l y
filled proceeding f r o m service c o n d i t i o n s , w i t h t h e
compartment length / < 0 , 1 3 L a n d compartment
breadth 6<0,6 t h e design pressure p , i n k P a , f o r
t h e s t r u c t u r e s m e n t i o n e d b e l o w s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
f o r t h e side, l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s a n d a d j o i n
ing c o m p a r t m e n t t o p w i t h i n 0,256 o f t h e line o f
c o m p a r t m e n t t o p a n d side i n t e r s e c t i o n , o r o f t h e
longitudinal bulkhead
c
p = (5-/100)6;
c
(1.3.4.2.2-1)
for transverse bulkheads a n d adjoining c o m

p a r t m e n t t o pw i t h i n 0,25/ o f the line o f c o m p a r t m e n t
top a n d transverse bulkhead intersection
Pc= p (4-L/200)Z.
(1.3.4.2.2-2)
/ a n d b shall b e m e a s u r e d o n t h e level o f the free

surface o f liquid.
F o r compartments where / > 0,13L and/or
b > 0,61?, t h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e f o r t h e case o f p a r t i a l
f l o o d i n g is d e t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h a special
procedure approved b y t h e Register.
1.3.4.3 T h e design pressure p , i n k P a , o n struc
tures b o u n d i n g the b u l k cargo h o l d is determined b y
the f o r m u l a
Pc = P c g k ( l + ajgfo
(1.3.4.3)
c
and Construction
1.4 L O N G I T U D I N A L
of Sea-Going
Ships
STRENGTH
1.4.1 G e n e r a l a n d definitions.
1.4.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f this C h a p t e r a p p l y t o
ships o f unrestricted service a n d o f restricted areas o f
navigation R l a n d R 2 , 65m i n length a n d upwards,
as w e l l a s t o s h i p s o f r e s t r i c t e d a r e a s o f n a v i g a
tion R 2 - R S N , R2-RSN(4,5),R 3 - R S N a n dR 3 , 60 m
i n length a n d upwards, whose p r o p o r t i o n s a r e stated
i n 1.1.1.1.
S h i p s w i t h large d e c k o p e n i n g s a n d vessels o f
dredging fleet shall c o m p l y a d d i t i o n a l l y w i t h t h e r e
q u i r e m e n t s o f3.1 a n d3.6 respectively.
1.4.1.2 S p e c i a l c o n s i d e r a t i o n s h a l l b e g i v e n t o
ships h a v i n g t h e f o l l o w i n g characteristics:
.1 p r o p o r t i o n
L/B^5;
B / D ^ 2 , 5 ( f o rships o f restricted areas o f n a v i
gation R 2 , R 2 - R S N , R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) ,R 3 - R S N a n d R 3
the r a t i o B / D i s o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1.1.1.1);
.2 b l o c k coefficient C < 0 , 6 ;
. 3 s p e c i f i e d s p e e d VQ e x c e e d i n g t h e v a l u e o f v, i n
knots, determined b y the formula
b
v = k J Z
(1.4.1.2.3)
w h e r e = 2 , 2 i f L ^ 100 m ;
= 2 , 2 - 0 , 2 5 ( Z , - 1 0 0 ) / 1 0 0 i f L > 100 m .
w h e r e f o r p , r e f e r t o 1.3.4.1;
c
= sin atg (45-cp, /2) + cos <x;
or
k = c o s <x,
whichever i s t h e greater;
<x = a n g l e o f w e b i n c l i n a t i o n t o t h e b a s e l i n e , i n d e g . ;
: = i n t e r n a l f r i c t i o n a n g l e o f b u l k c a r g o , i n d e g . ;
a = d e s i g n a c c e l e r a t i o n i n t h e v e r t i c a l d i r e c t i o n a c c o r d i n g t o 1.3.3.1;
z = vertical distance f r o m t h eload application point t o t h e
free surface level o f cargo, i n m ,
c
T h e pressure o n t h ei n n e r b o t t o m is determined
by F o r m u l a (1.3.4.3) where k = 1.
1.3.4.4 T h e design pressure f r o m p a c k a g e c a r g o
acting u p o n t h e structures i nh o r i z o n t a l plane is de
t e r m i n e d w i t h regard f o r i n e r t i a forces. I n F o r
m u l a (1.3.3.1-1) t h e acceleration i n t h e h o r i z o n t a l transverse direction is determined b y the f o r m u l a
c
a = y]a% + ( a
y
r y
+ g s i n ) ;
(1.3.4.4-1)
and i nthe horizontal-longitudinal direction

a
= V < 4 + (a
where
p x
+ g s i n v|/)
0 a n d \|f a r e d e t e r m i n e d
a n d (1.3.3.1-5).
(1.3.4.4-2)
b y Formulae
(1.3.3.1-4)
Special c o n s i d e r a t i o n w i l l also b e given t o ships

c a r r y i n g heated cargoes a n d ships o f u n u s u a l design
and/or type.
1.4.1.3 F o r l o n g i t u d i n a l s t r e n g t h c a l c u l a t i o n , d e
sign loads shall include still w a t e r bending m o m e n t s
a n d shear forces, w a v e bending m o m e n t s a n d shear
forces, a n d f o r ships w i t h large flare, bending m o
m e n t s d u et o w a v e impacts o n t h e flare as well.
Design wave a n d impact loads m a y be calculated
both f r o m formulae given i nthe Rules a n d according
to the approved procedure taking into consideration
the rolling i nwaves, long-term distribution o f wave
conditions a n d area o f navigation.
1.4.1.4 D o w n w a r d shear forces a r e a s s u m e d t o b e
t a k e n as positive values a n d u p w a r d shear forces
as n e g a t i v e v a l u e s . T h e h o g g i n g b e n d i n g m o m e n t s a r e
assumed t o be t a k e n as positive values a n d sagging
bending m o m e n t s as negative values.
F o r the c a l c u l a t i o n o f still w a t e r bending m o m e n t
and shear force, transverse loads shall be integrated
in the f o r w a r d direction f r o m theafte n d o f L ; i n this
case, d o w n w a r d l o a d s a r e a s s u m e d t o b e t a k e n as
positive values.
T h e sign conventions o fstill w a t e r bending m o
m e n t a n d s h e a r f o r c e a r e a s s h o w n i n F i g . 1.4.1.4.
P a r t II.
Hull
57
Shear
forces
F i g . 1.4.1.4
1.4.2 S y m b o l s .
F o r the purpose o f this Chapter the following
symbols have been adopted:
L = length o f the c o m p a r t m e n t considered, i n m ;
Bi = breadth o f the c o m p a r t m e n t considered, i n m ;
A=
difference between the area o f h o r i z o n t a l
upper deck projection (including forecastle deck) a n d
s u m m e r load waterline o n a length up to 0 , 2 L aft
f r o m the f o r w a r d perpendicular, i n m ;
z = vertical distance f r o m the s u m m e r l o a d
waterline t o the upper deck (forecastle deck included),
as m e a s u r e d o n t h e f o r w a r d p e r p e n d i c u l a r , i n m ;
/ = actual inertia m o m e n t o f the hull about the
h o r i z o n t a l neutral axis o f the h u l l section under
consideration, i n cm ;
S = actual statical m o m e n t , about the neutral
axis, o f the p o r t i o n o f the considered h u l l section,
located above or b e l o w the level at w h i c h the thickness o f t h e w e b is d e t e r m i n e d , i n c m ;
x = distance o f the considered h u l l section f r o m
the after perpendicular, i n m .
1.4.3 S t i l l w a t e r b e n d i n g m o m e n t s a n d s h e a r f o r c e s .
1.4.3.1 T h e s t i l l w a t e r b e n d i n g m o m e n t s a n d
shear forces shall be calculated f o r a l l actually possible cases o f w e i g h t d i s t r i b u t i o n o v e r t h e l e n g t h o f
the ship including full-load a n d ballast conditions for
departure a n d arrival o f the ship.
T h e bending m o m e n t s a n d shear forces i n the
course o f consuming the contents o f each t a n k w i t h
ship's stores (fuel o i l , w a t e r , l u b r i c a t i n g o i l ) d u r i n g
voyage shall be also calculated i f the above m o m e n t s
a n d forces exceed those f o r departure o r a r r i v a l o f the
ship. T h e same applies t o ship's ballasting/deballasti n g a t sea. I n so d o i n g , p a r t i a l l y f i l l e d b a l l a s t t a n k s ,
i n c l u d i n g peak tanks, shall be i g n o r e d i n the cons i d e r a t i o n e x c e p t i n g t h e f o l l o w i n g cases:
calculated bending m o m e n t s a n d shear forces d o
n o t exceed the m a x i m u m design values at a l l levels o f
ballast tanks filling f r o m a n e m p t y condition to full
filling;
x
for b u l k carriers, a l l intermediate conditions o f

b a l l a s t t a n k s filling f r o m a n e m p t y c o n d i t i o n t o f u l l
filling
w i t h each cargo h o l d flooded are considered
(refer t o 3.3.5).
A s a rule, w h e n determining the scantlings o f
f r a m i n g m e m b e r s , consideration shall be given t o the
following loading conditions:
.1 f o r d r y cargo ships, ships w i t h large deck
o p e n i n g , r o l l o n - r o l l o f f ships, refrigerated cargo
ships, b u l k carriers a n d ore carriers:
homogeneous loading conditions at m a x i m u m
draught;
ballast condition;
s p e c i a l l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s , e.g. c o n t a i n e r o r l i g h t
l o a d c o n d i t i o n s a t less t h a n t h e m a x i m u m d r a u g h t ,
heavy cargo, e m p t y holds o r non-homogeneous cargo
c o n d i t i o n s , d e c k c a r g o c o n d i t i o n s , etc., w h e r e a p p l i c a b l e ;
short voyage, w h e r e applicable;
loading and unloading transitory conditions;
docking condition afloat;
.2 f o r o i l t a n k e r s :
homogeneous loading conditions (excluding dry
and clean ballast tanks);
partly loaded and ballast conditions for b o t h
departure and arrival;
a n y specified n o n - u n i f o r m d i s t r i b u t i o n o f loads;
mid-voyage conditions relating to tank cleaning
o r other operations w h e r e these differ significantly
f r o m the ballast conditions;
loading and unloading transitory conditions;
docking condition afloat;
.3 f o r c o m b i n a t i o n c a r r i e r s :
l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s as specified f o r d r y c a r g o
ships a n d o i l tankers;
.4 b a l l a s t l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s w h e r e f o r e p e a k ,
afterpeak and/or other ballast tanks are partly
filled
at the departure, arrival o r m i d - v o y a g e , shall n o t be
c o n s i d e r e d as t h e d e s i g n l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s .
The
e x c e p t i o n s h a l l be t h e cases w h e r e a n y p a r t i a l
filling
o f the t a n k does n o t exceed the permissible strength
l i m i t a t i o n s . A n o t i o n " a n y p a r t i a l filling" i n t h e p r e sent p a r a g r a p h assumes l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n , w h i c h
corresponds to an empty tank, fully loaded tank and
a t a n k filled u p t o t h e p r e s c r i b e d l e v e l .
W h e r e there are several partly loaded tanks, then
all the combinations comprising empty, full and
p a r t l y filled t a n k s s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d .
F o r o r e carriers w i t h large side ballast t a n k s i n
c a r g o area f o r t h e case w h e r e e m p t y o r f u l l l o a d i n g o f
o n e o r m a x i m u m t w o pairs o f these ballast t a n k s causes
a t r i m exceeding at least o n e o f the values m e n t i o n e d
b e l o w , t h e n i t shall be sufficient t o demonstrate c o m pliance w i t h m a x i m u m , m i n i m u m a n d assigned p a r t i a l
filling l e v e l s o f t h e s e o n e o r m a x i m u m t w o p a i r s o f s i d e
tanks, so t h a t actual t r i m does n o t exceed a n y o f these
t r i m values. F i l l u p levels f o r t h e rest side ballast t a n k s
58
Rules for the Classification and Construction of Sea-Going
shall beconsidered between full a n d empty. T h e abovem e n t i o n e d t r i m values are as follows:

t r i m b y t h e stern f o r 3 per cent o f ship length;
t r i m b y t h e b o w f o r 1,5 p e r c e n t o f s h i p l e n g t h ;
any t r i m , a t w h i c h propeller depth axis con
stitutes 2 5 p e r cent o f its diameter.
M a x i m u m a n d m i n i m u m filling levels o f the abovem e n t i o n e d o n e o r m a x i m u m t w o pairs o f side ballast
tanks shall be included t o the L o a d i n g M a n u a l .
I n cargo loading conditions, the requirements o f
the present paragraph apply t o t h e peak tanks only.
T h e requirements o f t h e present paragraph d o n o t
a p p l y t o b a l l a s t w a t e r e x c h a n g e a t s e a u s i n g t h e se
quential m e t h o d . H o w e v e r , bending m o m e n t a n d shear
force calculations f o r each ballasting o r deballasting
stage i n t h e ballast w a t e r exchange sequence shall b e
included i n t h e Loading M a n u a l o r Ballast W a t e r
M a n a g e m e n t P l a n o f a n y ship that intends t o e m p l o y
the sequential ballast water exchange m e t h o d .
1.4.3.2 T h e m a x i m u m a b s o l u t e v a l u e s o f sagging
and hogging bending moments M
a n d shear
force N
shall be determined f o r a n y section along
the ship's l e n g t h f o r a l l t h e still w a t e r l o a d i n g c o n
ditions, w h i c h a r e possible i n service.
T h e values M
a n d N a r eregarded f u r t h e r as
design values f o r t h e section under consideration.
1.4.3.3 F o r ships w i t h o u t effective l o n g i t u d i n a l
bulkheads, w i t h n o n - u n i f o r m d i s t r i b u t i o n o f loads, i.e.
a l t e r n a t i o n o f l o a d e d a n d e m p t y holds, t h e still w a t e r
shear force curve m a y b e corrected b y reducing its o r dinates o n transverse bulkheads b y a value equal t o t h e
total o f b o t t o m l o n g i t u d i n a l responses i n w a y o f those
b u l k h e a d s i n t h e e v e n t o f b o t t o m b e n d i n g ( F i g . 1.4.3.3).
T h e b o t t o m l o n g i t u d i n a l responses i n w a y o f
transverse bulkheads shall b e d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e basis
o f t h e b o t t o m grillage calculation i n accordance
w i t h 3.3.4.1. T h edesign loads t o be considered shall
n o t i n c l u d e t h e w a v e l o a d s m e n t i o n e d u n d e r 1.3.2.2,
Ships
the angles o f heel, t r i m a n d accelerations a t m o t i o n s

d e t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h 1.3.3.1.
1.4.3.4 W h e r e p r o v i s i o n i s m a d e i n ship's design
for loading conditions resulting i n regular change o f a
sign o f the still w a t e r b e n d i n g m o m e n t ( i n fully l o a d e d
a n d ballast conditions o n direct a n d r e t u r n voyages),
its c o m p o n e n t s a t t h e section w i t h the m a x i m u m range
o f b e n d i n g m o m e n t ( F i g . 1.4.3.4) s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d
f o r u s e i n t h e c a l c u l a t i o n u n d e r 1.4.6.3.
Hogging
sw
F i g . 1.4.3.4
sw
sw
sw
1.4.4 W a v e b e n d i n g m o m e n t s a n d s h e a r forces.
1.4.4.1 T h e w a v e b e n d i n g m o m e n t M i n k N - m ,
acting i n t h e vertical plane a t t h e section under con
sideration shall be determined b y the formulae:
hogging bending m o m e n t
W9
= l90c BL C OL'lOw
(1.4.4.1-1)
sagging bending m o m e n t
M
= -U0c BL (C
w
+ 0,7)a-10"
(1.4.4.1-2)
w h e r e c = a s d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.3.1.4;
oc = c o e f f i c i e n t d e t e r m i n e d f r o m T a b l e
F i g . 1.4.4.1;
= a s d e f i n e d i n 1.1.3, b u t n o t l e s s t h a n 0,6.
w
1.4.4.1 a n d
T a b l e
Loaded
hold
Empty
hold
Position o fsection along

the ship's length
Z <
k"
Sf
/
/'
'
2 5
0,4^-^0,65
A '
1.4.4.1
(l-x/L)
0,35
>0,65
/
/
s /
Ai
W
0,8
F i g . 1.4.3.3
Shear force curve correction diagram:
1 transverse bulkhead; 2 uncorrected curve;
3 corrected curve; R i a n d R total o f b o t t o m longitudinal
responses for a loaded hold i n w a y o f aft bulkhead a n d forward
bulkhead accordingly;
R \ a n d R' = same for a nempty hold
0,6
0,4
0,2
0,2
0,4
0,65
0,1
1,0
FP
AP
F i g . 1.4.4.1
X L
Part II.
Hull
59
1.4.4.2 T h e w a v e s h e a r f o r c e N
i n k N , at the
section concerned shall be determined b y t h e formulae:
positive
W9
T a b l e 1 . 4 . 4 . 3 a s w e l l a s b y t h e f a c t o r s v|/ a n d v d e
termined b y thefollowing formulae:
2
= 30c BL(C
+ 0,7)/i-l(r ;
(1.4.4.2-1)
= 0,95(1 + P / - 1 0 - ) ;
(1.4.4.3-1)
negative
N
= -30c BL(C
+ 0,7)/ -10"
(1.4.4.2-2)
p = oc (0,5 + 2 , 5 s i n p ) ^ a f o r c o n v e n t i o n a l b o w s h a p e
(no bulb);
p = a ( l + oc ) ^ 1 f o r a b u l b o u s b o w ;
oc = w a t e r p l a n e a r e a c o e f f i c i e n t f o r s u m m e r l o a d w a t e r l i n e ;
Po = a n g l e , i n d e g . , b e t w e e n a f r a m e t a n g e n t i a l a n d a v e r t i c a l
at t h e level o f s u m m e r l o a d waterline a t t h e section
w i t h i n 0,4(1 Cb)L^0,1
L f r o m the fore perpendicular;
w h e r e c = a s d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.3.1.4;
= a s d e f i n e d i n 1.1.3, b u t n o t l e s s t h a n 0 , 6 ;
f i a n d f = c o e f f i c i e n t s d e t e r m i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1.4.4.2, F i g s . 1.4.4.2-1
a n d 1.4.4.2-2.
0^x/L<
0,2
0,2^JC/L^0,3
0,3 < x / L < 0,4
1.4.4.2
3
D
0
1,5%
l,59/o-(15,9/ -7)x
x (x/L-0,3)
V100)
\S
V100 7
'
0,92-2,2(JC/L-0,3)
= D +
h = height o f continuous h a t c h side c o a m i n g s , i n m
t h e s e a r e n o t f i t t e d , h = 0);
(where
0,7
0,7
0,7 + 3 ( x / L - 0 , 6 )
0,7 ^ x / L ^
0,85
0,85 < x / L ^ l , 0
1,0
l-6,67(x/L-0,85)
0,7 + ( 1 7 , 3 / - 7 ) x
x (x/L-0,6)
l,73/o
/ [l,73-ll,53(x/L0
-0,85)]
f -
i p
0,92
0,4^JC/L^0,6
J o
4,6x/L
x/L
0,6 < x / L < 0,7
L(p>
fi
fi
7,945f
Position o f section
along the ship's
length
T a b l e
where
0 , 0 4 5 (
- 0 ^ 2 ^ - ^ - .
T h e a b o v e requirements apply t o ships o f restricted

area o fnavigation, f r o m 6 0 t o 150 m i n length. A p p l i
c a t i o n o f the requirements t o ships o f a different length is
subject t o special consideration b y t h e Register.
T a b l e
1.4.4.3
C + 0,7
b
Area o f navigation
Rl
1,1-0,23L-10" ^1
R2
1,0-0,25L-10~
R2-RSN
0,94-0,26L-10~
R2-RSN(4,5)
0,92-0,29L-10~
R3-RSN
0,71-0,22L-10~
R3
0,60-0,20L-10~
fl
AP
FP
F i g . 1.4.4.2-1
1.4.5 B e n d i n g m o m e n t d u e t o w a v e i m p a c t s o n t h e flare.
1.4.5.1 T h e b e n d i n g m o m e n t d u e t o w a v e i m p a c t s
o n t h e flare shall be calculated o n l y f o r ships o f
length f r o m 100 t o 200 m where the relationship
A /Lz ^0,l
is satisfied.
1.4.5.2 T h e s a g g i n g b e n d i n g m o m e n t d u e t o w a v e
i m p a c t s o n t h e flare M shall be calculated as f o l l o w s :
F
0,92
= -kFC BL\C
w
+ 0,7)ayl0"
(1.4.5.2)
w h e r e k = 7 ( 1 + l , 2 5 f / V L ) c \ c , b u t n o t m o r e t h a n 23;
c i = ( L - 1 0 0 ) / 3 0 f o r 1 0 0 ^ L < 130 m ;
c = 1 f o r130^1,^170 m ;
c i = l - ( L - 1 7 0 ) / 3 0 f o r 170 < 1 ^ 2 0 0 m ;
c = 5A /Lz -0,5
a t 0,1
Â /Lz ^0,3;
c = A / L z + 0,7 a t 0,3 < A / L z < 0,4;
c=
1,1 a t A / L z ^ 0,4;
f o r c , r e f e r t o 1.3.1.4;
OLF i s o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1.4.5.2 a n d F i g . 1.4.5.2.
F
F i g . 1.4.4.2-2
1.4.4.3 F o r s h i p s o f r e s t r i c t e d a r e a o f n a v i g a t i o n ,
the w a v e b e n d i n g m o m e n t s a n d shear forces de
t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.4.4.1 a n d 1.4.4.2 s h a l l
b e m u l t i p l i e d b y t h e r e d u c t i o n f a c t o r cp o b t a i n e d f r o m
1.4.5.3 F o r s h i p s o f r e s t r i c t e d a r e a o f n a v i g a t i o n , t h e
bending m o m e n t d u e t o w a v e impacts o n t h e flare M
c a l c u l a t e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.4.5.2 s h a l l b e m u l t i p l i e d
b y t h e r e d u c t i o n f a c t o r cp d e t e r m i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1.4.4.3.
60
Rules
T a b l e
1.4.5.2
Position o f section along the ship's length
Mi
w =
where M
x/L^0,15
10
and Construction
(1.4.6.4)
s w
0,45^
x/L
x/L
0,1 + 3 ( x / L - 0 , 1 5 )
^0,75
s w
> 0,75
Ships
= \
+ M + M \ design bending moment, in k N m ,
at t h e section c o n c e r n e d e q u a l t o t h e m a x i m u m a b s o l u t e
value o falgebraic s u m o fM , M a n d M components a t
this section;
M
= m a x i m u m still w a t e r s a g g i n g b e n d i n g m o m e n t o r
m i n i m u m h o g g i n g b e n d i n g m o m e n t i fsolely the h o g g i n g
bending m o m e n t s occur a t this hull section, i n k N - m ;
w a v e s a g g i n g b e n d i n g m o m e n t ( r e f e r t o 1.4.4);
a s d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.4.5;
M
f o r , r e f e r t o 1.4.6.2.
0,667JC/L
0,15 < x / L < 0,45
of Sea-Going
l-4(x/L-0,75)
F o r ships o f restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3 - R S N

and R 3 M p = 0.
1.4.6 H u l l s e c t i o n m o d u l u s a n d m o m e n t o f i n e r t i a .
1.4.6.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f this p a r a g r a p h reg
ulate the hull section m o d u l u s and m o m e n t o f inertia
a b o u t t h eh o r i z o n t a l neutral axis.
1.4.6.2 T h e h u l l s e c t i o n m o d u l u s ( f o r deck a n d
b o t t o m ) W, i n c m , a t t h e s e c t i o n c o n c e r n e d s h a l l
n o t b e less t h a n
3
10
where M
(1.4.6.2)
= \M
+ M \ design bending moment, i nk N m , at
the section c o n c e r n e d e q u a l t o t h e m a x i m u m a b s o l u t e
value o f algebraic s u m o f M
and M components at
this section;
f o r M , r e f e r t o 1.4.3, i n k N m ;
f o r M , r e f e r t o 1.4.4;
S W
= c BL\C
m i n
+ 0,7)
(1.4.6.7-1)
w h e r e f o r c , r e f e r t o 1.3.1.4.
w
F o r ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n , t h e

m i n i m u m hull section modulus, i n c m , w i t h i n t h e
midship region (for deck a n d b o t t o m ) shall n o t be
less t h a n W i
o r Wi ,
w h i c h e v e r is t h e greater,
determined b y thefollowing formulae:
3
m ni
m n2
1.4.6.5 T h e h u l l section m o d u l u s determined

from
1.4.6.2 t o 1.4.6.4 f o r m a x i m u m v a l u e o f d e s i g n b e n d i n g
m o m e n t shall be maintained w i t h i n 0 , 4 L amidships.
H o w e v e r , i ft h e m a x i m u m design bending m o m e n t
occurs outside 0 , 4 L amidships, t h e steady section
m o d u l u s r e q u i r e m e n t is applicable over t h e ship's
length u p t o t h e section where m a x i m u m design
b e n d i n g m o m e n t acts.
The section m o d u l u s shall be gradually reduced
t o w a r d s the ship's ends outside the r e g i o n i n w h i c h i t
is b e i n g m a i n t a i n e d .
1.4.6.6 F o r s h a r p - l i n e d ships w i t h o u t m i d d l e b o d y , d e v i a t i o n f r o m t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.4.6.5 m a y
be p e r m i t t e d o n agreement w i t h t h e Register.
1.4.6.7 I n a n y case, t h e h u l l s e c t i o n m o d
ulus, i nc m , w i t h i n the midship region (for deck and
b o t t o m ) s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
^ m i
(1.4.6.7-2)
9 ^ m i n ;
175
^ m i n
where
1.4.6.3 I n cases specified b y 1.4.3.4 t h e s e c t i o n

m o d u l u s W d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.4.6.2
shall be multiplied b y the factor m determined b y t h e
formula
m = 1 +
w m i n
sw
10MZ
w m i n
sw
X
w m a x
sw
+
1
0,016c BL (C
w
+ 0,7)
-1)
(1.4.6.3)
w h e r e Af^,
= 0,95
(1.4.6.7-3)
MPa.
= absolute values o fh o g g i n g a n d sagging b e n d i n g

m o m e n t s a t t h e m a x i m u m r a n g e section, i n k N - m (refer t o
F i g . 1.4.3.4),
f o r , r e f e r t o T a b l e 1.4.4.3;
f o r , r e f e r t o F o r m u l a (1.4.4.3-1);
f o r v , r e f e r t o F o r m u l a (1.4.4.3-2).
1.4.6.8 Scantlings o f a l l c o n t i n u o u s l o n g i t u d i n a l
members o f hull girder based o n the section m o d u l u s
r e q u i r e m e n t i n 1.4.6.7 s h a l l b e m a i n t a i n e d w i t h i n
0 , 4 L a m i d s h i p s . H o w e v e r , i n special cases, b a s e d o n
consideration o ftype o fship, h u l l f o r m a n d loading
conditions, t h e scantlings m a y be gradually reduced
towards t h e ends o f t h e 0 , 4 L part, bearing i n m i n d
the desire n o t t o i n h i b i t t h e ship's l o a d i n g flexibility.
1 . 4 . 6 . 9 T h e m o m e n t o f i n e r t i a o f h u l l s e c t i o n /, i n c m ,
w i t h i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
4
b u t n o t less t h a n 1 .
1.4.6.4 F o r ships f o r w h i c h t h e b e n d i n g m o m e n t
d u e t o w a v e i m p a c t s o n t h e f l a r e (refer t o 1.4.5) s h a l l
b e c o n s i d e r e d t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W, i n c m , a t t h e
s e c t i o n c o n c e r n e d s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
min
= 3c BL (C
w
+ 0,7)
where c
= a s d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.3.1.4.
(1.4.6.9-1)
P a r t II. H u l l
61
F o r ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n , I

s h a l l b e m u l t i p l i e d b y t h e r e d u c t i o n f a c t o r cp d e
termined by the formula
m i n
(1.4.7.2-2)
18
(1.4.6.9-2)
w h e r e f o r cp, r e f e r t o T a b l e 1.4.4.3;
f o r |, r e f e r t o 1.1.4.3;
(LID)
= m a x i m u m permissible value o f L I D f o r t h e area o f
n a v i g a t i o n u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n , o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1.1.1.1.
n m x
1.4.6.10 A s a m i n i m u m , h u l l l o n g i t u d i n a l s t r e n g t h
checks shall be carried o u ta t t h e following locations
outside amidships:
in w a yo f the f o r w a r d e n d o ft h e engine r o o m ;
in w a yo fthe f o r w a r d e n d o f t h e foremost cargo
hold;
where there are significant changes i n t h e h u l l
cross-section;
where there are changes i n the f r a m i n g system.
T h e following shall be made outside amidships:
buckling strength o f members contributing t othe
l o n g i t u d i n a l strength a n d subjected t o compressive
a n d s h e a r stresses s h a l l b e checked, i n p a r t i c u l a r i n
regions w h e r e changes i n t h e f r a m i n g s y s t e m o r sig
nificant changes i n t h e h u l l cross-section occur i n
c o m p l i a n c e w i t h 1.6.5;
continuity o f structure shall be maintained
t h r o u g h o u t t h e length o f t h e ship. W h e r e significant
changes i n structural arrangement occur adequate
transitional structure shall be provided;
for ships w i t h large deck openings such as a
containerships, sections a t o r near t o t h e a f t a n d
f o r w a r d quarter length positions shall be checked.
F o r such ships w i t h cargo h o l d s a f t o f t h e super
structure, deckhouse o r engine r o o m , strength checks
o f sections i nw a y o f the a f t e n d o f the a f t - m o s t holds,
and theafte n do f the deckhouse o r engine r o o m shall
be p e r f o r m e d .
1.4.7 T h i c k n e s s o f s i d e s h e l l p l a t i n g a n d c o n t i n u o u s
longitudinal bulkhead plating.
1.4.7.1 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f s i d e s h e l l p l a t i n g s,
in m m , at t h e considered section over the length a n d
depth o f t h e ship where longitudinal bulkheads are
n o t f i t t e d s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
+ N ) S
10
I
W
(1.4.7.1)
w h e r e N = a s d e f i n e d i n 1.4.3.2, i n k N ;
f o r N, r e f e r t o l . 4 . 4 . 2 a n d 1.4.4.3;
x = 110/ri M P a .
sw
1.4.7.2 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f s i d e s h e l l p l a t i n g s a n d
t h i c k n e s s o f l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d p l a t i n g 57, i n m m ,
at t h e section u n d e r consideration f o r ships w i t h t w o
p l a n e l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
s
x w
+ N
r e f e r t o 1.4.7.1;
<x = 0,27;
a , = 0,23.
S ,
10 ;
(1.4.7.2-1)
1.4.7.3 F o r s h i p s h a v i n g o n e o r m o r e t h a n t w o
c o n t i n u o u s plane l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s as w e l l as
longitudinal bulkheads w i t h horizontal corrugations
t h e r e q u i r e d t h i c k n e s s o f side p l a t i n g a n d m e m b e r s i n
question shall be calculated according t o t h e proce
dure approved b y t h e Register.
A p p r o p r i a t e calculation m a y also be required f o r
ships w i t h t w o c o n t i n u o u s l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads i f
the transverse distribution o f load is substantially
different f r o m u n i f o r m distribution.
1.4.8 C a l c u l a t i o n o f a c t u a l h u l l s e c t i o n m o d u l u s .
1.4.8.1 T h e h u l l s e c t i o n m o d u l u s i s d e t e r m i n e d :
for strength deck
a t m o u l d e d deck line a t
side ( l o w e r edge o f d e c k s t r i n g e r ) ;
for b o t t o m W, a t m o u l d e d base line ( t o p o f plate
keel).
F o r ships w i t h c o n t i n u o u s l o n g i t u d i n a l strength
members above strength deck including t r u n k a n d
c o n t i n u o u s h a t c h side c o a m i n g s , W i s c a l c u l a t e d b y
dividing t h e m o m e n t o finertia o fh u l l section about
the h o r i z o n t a l neutral axis b y t h e value o f z de
b
z = z(0,9 +
t
0,2y/B)
(1.4.8.1)
where z = distance from neutral axshall the t o p o f continuous

strength member above deck included i nthe calculation
o f Wd, i n m ;
= horizontal distancef r o m the centrelineo fthe ship to the
top o fcontinuous strength m e m b e r above deck included
i n t h e c a l c u l a t i o n o f Wj, i n m .
z a n d shall be measured t o thepoint giving the

l a r g e s t v a l u e o f z.
1.4.8.2 W h e n c a l c u l a t i n g t h e h u l l s e c t i o n m o d
ulus, a l lcontinuous longitudinal strength members
shall be taken i n t o account, including continuous
h a t c h side c o a m i n g s , a n d , w h e r e t h e ship's design
provides f o rmultiple hatchways the longitudinal
deck strips between t h e m o n c o n d i t i o n t h edeck strips
are effectively supported b y l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads,
including t h e topside t a n k bulkheads (inner skins).
T h e sectional area o fl o n g bridges o r deckhouses
shall be included w i t h the reduction coefficient w h i c h
s i m i l a r l y t o stresses i n t h e ship's h u l l a n d super
structure (deckhouse) is determined according t o the
procedure approved b y t h e Register.
C o n t i n u o u s h a t c h side c o a m i n g s i n s h i p s w i t h s i n g l e
hatches n o t above the m e n t i o n e d structures m a y be i n c l u
ded i n t h e calculation o f the h u l l section m o d u l u s o n l y i f
t h e c a l c u l a t i o n h a s b e e n s p e c i a l l y a p p r o v e d t o t h i s effect.
T h e sectional area o f l o n g i t u d i n a l deck strips,
each being o fa u n i f o r m w i d t h t h r o u g h o u t t h e length,
including deck plating w i t h longitudinal framing a n d
t
62
Ships
( 7 ) Longitudinal deck strip

(T) Transverse deck strip
F i g . 1.4.8.2
L o n g i t u d i n a l deck strips t o b e included i n the calculation o f h u l l section m o d u l u s
h a t c h side c o a m i n g s n o t s u p p o r t e d b y l o n g i t u d i n a l
b u l k h e a d s , is i n c l u d e d w i t h t h e r e d u c t i o n c o e f f i c i e n t
determined b y the f o r m u l a
L
Sfe +
where
A/i + Afe
(1.4.8.2)
0,10 a t = 1;
I - 0 , 1 2 a t n = 2;
n = n u m b e r o f l o n g i t u d i n a l strips over ship's breadth;
iZl = t o t a l l e n g t h o f l o n g i t u d i n a l deck strips, i n m ;
All, Al = length o f e n d attachments o f l o n g i t u d i n a l deck strips aft
and forward, in m .
I f the end o f the longitudinal deck strip iseffectively attached
t o c o n t i n u o u s deck a n d / o r l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d ( F i g . 1.4.8.2),
m
/1,2 =
4f/Bi, s
2
d l 2
where / = sectional area o f one longitudinal deck strip, i n c m ;

1,2
breadth o f ship i n w a y o f longitudinal deck strip
termination, in m ;
4 2
g thickness o f the p o r t i o n o f deck plating between
t h e e x t e n s i o n o f l o n g i t u d i n a l deck strip a n dship's side
a l o n g the effective attachment, i n m m .
W h e r e a longitudinal deck strip terminates a t the transverse deck
s t r i p , p r o v i d e d 10b"s'j ^ n f a n d b" > b'
=
F i g . 1.4.8.3
Design section
Al
=l,3nj^(b'/b"+l)
w h e r e sfj = a v e r a g e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e t r a n s v e r s e d e c k s t r i p , i n m m ;
b' = d i s t a n c e b e t w e e n l o n g i t u d i n a l e d g e o f t h e h a t c h o p e n i n g
and s y m m e t r y plane o f the longitudinal deck strip, i n m ;
b" = l e n g t h o f t r a n s v e r s e d e c k s t r i p , i n m .
1.4.8.3 L a r g e o p e n i n g s , i . e . o p e n i n g s e x c e e d i n g
2,5 m i n l e n g t h a n d / o r 1,2 m i n b r e a d t h , a n d s c a l l o p s ,
where scallop-welding is applied, shall be deducted
f r o m the sectional areas used i n the section m o d u l u s

calculation.
Smaller openings (manholes, lightening holes,
single scallops i n w a y o f w e l d s , etc.) need n o t b e d e
ducted, i f the f o l l o w i n g conditions are met:
the s u m o f their breadths a n d shadow area
b r e a d t h s ( F i g . 1.4.8.3) i n o n e t r a n s v e r s e s e c t i o n o f t h e
h u l l d o e s n o t e x c e e d 0 , 0 6 (BlLb) ( w h e r e T,b i s t h e t o t a l
breadth o f openings) o r does n o t reduce t h e section
m o d u l u s a t deck o r b o t t o m b y m o r e t h a n 3 per cent;
the height o f lightening holes, drain holes a n d
single scallops i n l o n g i t u d i n a l m e m b e r s does n o t ex-
P a r t II. H u l l
63
ceed 2 5 p e r cent o f t h e w e b depth, a n d t h e height o f

scallops i n w a y o fwelds is n o t o v e r 7 5 m m .
1.4.8.4 W h e r e c o n t i n u o u s l o n g i t u d i n a l m e m b e r s
are b u i l t o f h i g h e r tensile steel, t h e y s h a l l e x t e n d s o f a r
beyond amidships towards t h e ends as t o provide a
h u l l section m o d u l u s i n w a y w h e r e t h e y i e l d stress
c h a n g e s n o t less t h a n r e q u i r e d f o r a n i d e n t i c a l h u l l o f
o r d i n a r y steel.
1.4.8.5 T h e c o n t i n u o u s l o n g i t u d i n a l m e m b e r s a t a
distance f r o m h o r i z o n t a l n e u t r a l axis o f h u l l section
greater t h a n
A.
a
^ = i
(1.4.8.5)
where z = distanceo fstrength deck (upper face plate o f continuous

h a t c h side c o a m i n g ) o rb o t t o m f r o m neutral axis, i n m ;
| = f a c t o r g i v e n i n T a b l e 1 . 1 . 4 . 3 f o r t h e m e m b e r s o f t h e
remainder o fhull section;
W , W -i
= actual section modulus a n d required section modulus
w i t h | = 1 f o r t h e d e c k ( c o n t i n u o u s h a t c h c o a m i n g ) o r
b o t t o m respectively,
a
s h a l l b e m a d e o f steel w i t h t h e s a m e y i e l d stress as
the strength deck (continuous hatch coaming) o r
bottom.
1.4.9 L o a d i n g c o n t r o l f a c i l i t i e s .
1.4.9.1 B y l o a d i n g c o n t r o l f a c i l i t i e s a r e m e a n t
Loading M a n u a l a n dloading instrument b y means o f
w h i c h i tc a n b e ascertained t h a t t h e still w a t e r b e n d i n g
m o m e n t s , shear forces, a n d t h e still w a t e r t o r s i o n a l
a n d lateral loads, w h e r e applicable, i n a n y l o a d o r
ballast c o n d i t i o n w i l l n o t exceed t h e specified p e r m i s
sible values.
1.4.9.2 S h i p s t o b e p r o v i d e d w i t h l o a d i n g c o n t r o l
facilities a r e categorized as follows.
Category I :
ships w i t h large deck opening, f o r w h i c h c o m
b i n e d stresses d u e t o v e r t i c a l a n d h o r i z o n t a l h u l l
girder bending, as w e l l as t o r s i o n a l a n d l a t e r a l loads,
shall be considered;
ships f o r w h i c h u n e v e n l o a d i n g , i.e. u n e v e n dis
t r i b u t i o n o f cargo a n d / o r ballast, is possible;
chemical tankers a n d gas carriers.
Category II:
ships w i t h a r r a n g e m e n t g i v i n g s m a l l possibilities
for v a r i a t i o n i n cargo a n d ballast distribution;
ships o n regular a n d fixed t r a d i n g p a t t e r n w h e r e
the L o a d i n g M a n u a l gives sufficient guidance;
ships n o t falling u n d e r category I i n c l u d i n g ships
o f less t h a n 1 2 0 m i n l e n g t h , w h i c h d e s i g n t a k e s u n
even distribution o fcargo o r ballast i n t o account.
1.4.9.3 A L o a d i n g M a n u a l i s a d o c u m e n t a p
p r o v e d b y t h e Register w h i c h describes:
the loading conditions o n w h i c h t h edesign o f the
ship h a s been based;
permissible limits o f still w a t e r bending m o m e n t
and shear force a n d , where applicable, limitations
due t o torsional a n d lateral loads;
the results o f t h e calculations o f still w a t e r

bending m o m e n t s , shear forces f o r l o a d i n g conditions
stated i n 1.4.3.1;
the allowable local loadings f o r t h e structure
( h a t c h covers, decks, d o u b l e b o t t o m , etc.).
T h e L o a d i n g M a n u a l shall be prepared i n a
language understood b y t h e users a n d i n English.
1.4.9.4 A l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t i s a n i n s t r u m e n t
approved b y t h e Register, w h i c h is either analog o r
digital b y means o f w h i c h t h e still w a t e r bending
m o m e n t s , shear forces a n d t o r s i o n a l a n d lateral
loads, where required, i n a n y load o r ballast condi
t i o n c a n be easily a n d q u i c k l y checked a t specified
readout points.
T h e n u m b e r a n d p o s i t i o n o f sections a n d per
missible still w a t e r bending m o m e n t s a n d shear forces
as w e l l a s t h e l i m i t a t i o n s d u e t o t o r s i o n a l a n d l a t e r a l
loads shall be approved b y t h e Register.
Single p o i n t l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t s a r e n o t acceptable.
A n approved Operational M a n u a l shall be pro
vided f o r the loading instrument.
T h e O p e r a t i o n a l M a n u a l a n d calculation results
shall be prepared i n a language understood b y t h e
users a n d i n English.
1.4.9.5 A l l s h i p s o t h e r t h a n c a t e g o r y I I s h i p s o f
less 9 0 m i n l e n g t h , w h i c h d e a d w e i g h t i s n o t g r e a t e r
than 3 0 per cent o f s u m m e r load line displacement,
shall be provided w i t h the L o a d i n g M a n u a l approved
by t h e Register. I n addition t o t h e L o a d i n g M a n u a l ,
all ships o f category I h a v i n g l e n g t h o f 1 0 0 m a n d
m o r e shall carry a loading instrument approved b y
the Register (requirements f o r loading instruments
are given i n A p p e n d i x 2 ) .
1.4.9.6 F o r o r e c a r r i e r s , o r e - o i l c a r r i e r s a n d o i l b u l k carriers h a v i n g a length o f 150 m a n d m o r e ,
additional requirements f o r strength control during
l o a d i n g a r e g i v e n i n 3.3.6.
1.4.9.7 I n f o r m a t i o n ( b o o k l e t ) o n S t a b i l i t y a n d
Strength during Loading, Unloading a n dStowage o f
B u l k Cargoes Other than G r a i n .
T o p r e v e n t excessive h u l l stresses, p r o v i s i o n s h a l l
be m a d e f o r I n f o r m a t i o n ( b o o k l e t ) o n S t a b i l i t y a n d
strength during Loading, U n l o a d i n g a n d Stowage o f
B u l k Cargoes other than G r a i n t o be carried o n
board, including t h e f o l l o w i n g as a m i n i m u m :
. 1 s t a b i l i t y d a t a r e q u i r e d i n 1 . 4 . 1 1 , P a r t " S t a b i l i t y " ;
.2 d a t a o n t h e c a p a c i t y o f b a l l a s t t a n k s a n d o f
equipment f o rtheir filling a n d emptying;
.3 m a x i m u m p e r m i s s i b l e l o a d u p o n a u n i t o f
d o u b l e - b o t t o m p l a t i n g surface;
.4 m a x i m u m p e r m i s s i b l e c a r g o h o l d l o a d ;
.5 g e n e r a l i n s t r u c t i o n s c o n c e r n i n g l o a d i n g a n d
unloading a n d pertinent t o hull strength, including
any limitations duet o the worst operating conditions
d u r i n g loading, unloading, h a n d l i n g o f w a t e r ballast,
and during the voyage;
64
Rules
.6 a n y s p e c i a l l i m i t a t i o n s , f o r i n s t a n c e , t h o s e d u e
to t h e w o r s t operating conditions, where applicable;
.7 w h e r e n e c e s s a r y s t r e n g t h c a l c u l a t i o n s :
m a x i m u m permissible forces a n d m o m e n t s affecting
the hull during loading, unloading a n d the voyage.
T h e I n f o r m a t i o n(booklet) shall be prepared i n a
language understood b y t h e ship officers, a n d i n
English.
1.4.9.8 W h e n d e v e l o p i n g t h e L o a d i n g M a n u a l
and Information (booklet) o n Ship Stability a n d
Strength D u r i n g Loading, Unloading a n dStowage o f
B u l k Cargoes Other T h a n G r a i n , o n eshall be guided
by the recommendations contained i n Collectiono f
Regulating D o c u m e n t s o f the Register, B o o k 9.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
report shall c o n t a i n those measures as well as t h e

results o f a second m e a s u r e m e n t o f vibrations t o
c o n f i r m t h e efficiency o fmeasures taken.
1.5.3 M e a s u r e d v i b r a t i o n p a r a m e t e r s .
1.5.3.1 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h e p r e s e n t C h a p t e r ,
the following v i b r a t i o n parameters have been adopted as m a i n ones:
root m e a n square value o f vibration velocity
measured i n one-third octave bands a n d ,where necessary, i n octave bands;
root m e a n square value o f v i b r a t i o n acceleration
a n d , i n w e l l - g r o u n d e d cases, t h e r o o t m e a n s q u a r e o r
peak value o fvibratory displacement.
1.5.3.2 V i b r a t i o n p a r a m e t e r s s h a l l b e m e a s u r e d i n
absolute u n i t s o r i n l o g a r i t h m i c u n i t s (decibels) w i t h
regard t o standard threshold values o f vibration velocity o r acceleration equal t o 5 x l 0
mm/s and
3 x 1 0 ~ m/s , accordingly.
1.5.3.3 M e a s u r e m e n t s s h a l l b e c a r r i e d o u t i n t h e
following directions:
in each o f t h e inter-perpendicular directions w i t h
regard t o t h e ship: vertical, horizontal-transverse a n d
horizontal-longitudinal direction, w h e n measuring
the m a i n hull vibration;
in t h e direction n o r m a l t o t h e plane o f ship
s t r u c t u r e s (deck, side, b u l k h e a d s , e t c . ) o r i n t h e
lowest-rigidity direction o f t h e h u l l girder, w h e n
measuring local vibration.
1.5.3.4 T h e p e r m i s s i b l e r o o t m e a n s q u a r e v a l u e s
o f vibration velocity a n d v i b r a t i o n acceleration o f the
h u l l a n d superstructures as w e l l as h u l l structures a r e
m e n t i o n e d i n T a b l e 1.5.3.4 a n d i n F i g . 1.5.3.4.
1.5.3.5 W h e n m e a s u r i n g t h e p a r a m e t e r s i n o c t a v e
b a n d s , t h e p e r m i s s i b l e v a l u e s stated i n T a b l e 1.5.3.4
for m e a n geometric frequencies o f 2 , 4 , 8 , 1 6 , 31.5 a n d
63 H z m a y b e increased 1,41(^/2) t i m e s o r b y 3 d B as
compared t o tabulated values.
1.5.3.6 P e r m i s s i b l e v a l u e s g i v e n i n T a b l e 1 . 5 . 3 . 4
a n d i n F i g . 1.5.3.4 s h a l l n o t b e e x c e e d e d a t specified
ship speeds a n d a t zero speed, i f specified.
-
1.5 V I B R A T I O N O F H U L L S T R U C T U R E S .
STANDARDS
VIBRATION
1.5.1 G e n e r a l .
1.5.1.1 T h e p r e s e n t C h a p t e r s h a l l e s t a b l i s h t h e
highest permissible v i b r a t i o n levels (hereinafter, v i b r a t i o n standards) o f h u l l structures i n sea-going
displacement ships.
1.5.1.2 T h e v i b r a t i o n s t a n d a r d s a r e s e t d o w n
proceeding f r o m the condition o f ensuring the
strength o f hull structures a n d t h e dependability o f
machinery, instruments a n d equipment installed o n
b o a r d t h e ship.
1.5.1.3 T h e a p p l i c a t i o n o f s t a n d a r d s s t i p u l a t e d i n
this C h a p t e r does n o t release o n e f r o m c o m p l i a n c e
w i t h sanitary n o r m s a n d other requirements f o r
permissible v i b r a t i o n parameters a t w o r k places i n
t h e a c c o m m o d a t i o n , service a n d o t h e r spaces o f
ships.
1.5.1.4 V i b r a t i o n s t a n d a r d s f o r s h i p m a c h i n e r y
a n d e q u i p m e n t a r e specified i n Section 9, P a r t V I I
"Machinery Installations".
1.5.1.5 W h e r e v i b r a t i o n p a r a m e t e r s a r e d e t e r m i n e d a t t h e design stage, t h e y m a y b e calculated
using theprocedures given i nt h eCollection o f Regulating D o c u m e n t s o fthe Register, B o o k 14.
1.5.1.6 V i b r a t i o n s s h a l l b e m e a s u r e d i n t h e f i r s t
s h i p o f a series a n d i n single b u i l d i n g s . T h e p r o c e dure, scope a n d sequence o f v i b r a t i o n m e a s u r e m e n t
shall be approved b y t h e Register.
1.5.1.7 O n s p e c i a l a g r e e m e n t w i t h t h e R e g i s t e r ,
departure f r o m t h e present standards m a y be perm i t t e d i n w e l l - g r o u n d e d cases.
1.5.2 T e c h n i c a l d o c u m e n t a t i o n .
A f t e r m o o r i n g tests a n d sea trials, a r e p o r t o n
vibration measurement shall be submitted t o the
Register, w h i c h shall be approved b y t h e managem e n t o f the firm having carried o u ttheevaluationo f
the v i b r a t i o n characteristics o f t h e ship. W h e r e a d ditional measures are taken t o reduce vibration, the
Ships
1.6 R E Q U I R E M E N T S F O R S C A N T L I N G S O F H U L L
STRUCTURAL M E M B E R S
1.6.1 G e n e r a l .
1.6.1.1 T h i s C h a p t e r c o n t a i n s g e n e r a l r e q u i r e ments f o rplating a n d framing.
1.6.1.2 P l a t e s t r u c t u r e m e a n s a p o r t i o n o f
plating bounded b y stiffening members. B y plate
structures a r e m e a n t p o r t i o n s o f t h e deck, p l a t f o r m
and inner b o t t o m plating a n d portions o f the b o t t o m ,
side, b u l k h e a d p l a t i n g as w e l l as w e b s o f deep m e m bers.
1.6.1.3 I n t h e p r e s e n t P a r t o f t h e R u l e s t h e t e r m
"framing" includes p r i m a r y members a n d deep
P a r t II. H u l l
65
T a b l e
Hull a n d superstructure, rigid
members
1.5.3.4
Hull structures
frames
M e a n geometric values o f octave
ranges, i nH z
1,60
2,00
2,50
3,15
4,00
5,00
6,30
8,00
10,00
12,00
16,00
20,00
25,00
31,50
40,00
50,00
63,00
80,00
plates
Permissible root m e a n square values

vibration
velocity
vibration
acceleration
mm/s
dB
m/s
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
5,6
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
0,054
0,067
0,084
0,106
0,135
0,170
0,210
0,270
0,340
0,430
0,540
0,670
0,840
1,060
1,350
1,700
2,100
2,700
vibration
velocity
vibration
acceleration
dB
mm/
dB
m/s
45
47
49
51
53
55
57
59
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
79
5,6
5,6
5,6
7,1
8,9
11,0
11,0
11,0
11,0
11,0
11,0
11,0
11,0
11,0
11,0
8,9
7,1
5,6
101
101
101
103
105
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
105
103
101
0,054
0,067
0,084
0,135
0,210
0,340
0,430
0,540
0,650
0,840
1,060
1,350
1,700
2,100
2,700
2,700
2,700
2,700
vibration
velocity
vibration
acceleration
dB
mm/
dB
m/s
45
47
49
53
57
61
63
65
67
69
71
73
75
77
79
79
79
79
5,6
5,6
5,6
7,1
8,9
11,0
14,0
16,0
16,0
16,0
16,0
16,0
16,0
16,0
16,0
12,5
10,0
8,0
101
101
101
103
105
107
109
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
108
106
104
0,054
0,067
0,084
0,135
0,210
0,340
0,540
0,750
0,940
1,200
1,500
1,900
2,400
3,000
3,800
3,800
3,800
3,800
dB
45
47
49
53
57
61
65
68
70
72
74
76
78
80
82
82
82
82
' H u l l a n d s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s , r i g i d m e m b e r s a r e t h e intersections o f d e c k s w i t h m a i n t r a n s v e r s e a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s , sides,

transom, superstructure walls, etc.
Girders supporting the foundations o f ship machinery a n d equipment are included.
2
m e m b e r s strengthening t h e plate structures. D e e p

m e m b e r s also serve as s u p p o r t i n g structures f o r p r i
m a r y members. P r i m a r y members are deck long
i t u d i n a l s , side l o n g i t u d i n a l s , b u l k h e a d l o n g i t u d i n a l s ,
inner b o t t o m p l a t i n g a n d b o t t o m longitudinals, as
w e l l as vertical a n d h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners o f b u l k
heads, frames, beams, reverse a n d b o t t o m frames o f
bracket floors, etc. D e e p m e m b e r s are deck transverses, d e c k girders, w e b f r a m e s , side stringers,
f l o o r s , side girders, centre girder, v e r t i c a l w e b s a n d
h o r i z o n t a l girders o f bulkheads, etc.
1.6.1.4 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f p r i m a r y a n d d e e p
members are based o n t h e required section m o d u l u s ,
m o m e n t o f inertia, w e b sectional area, thicknesses o f
w e b a n d face plate, as w e l l as w i d t h o f t h e face plate.
G e o m e t r i c properties o f t h e m e m b e r section,
unless stated otherwise, are determined t a k i n g into
account t h e effective flange.
I f the m e m b e r is so arranged that i t is n o t n o r m a l
t o t h e effective flange, t h e section m o d u l u s shall be
i n c r e a s e d i n p r o p o r t i o n t o 1/cos a ( w h e r e a i s t h e a n g l e ,
i n degrees, b e t w e e n t h e m e m b e r w e b a n d t h e perpen
dicular t o t h e effective flange a t t h e section considered.
I f o c < 15, n o i n c r e a s e o f s e c t i o n m o d u l u s i s r e q u i r e d .
1.6.1.5 R o u n d i n g o f f t h e r e q u i r e d s c a n t l i n g s o f
structural members generally shall be made i n the
direction o f increase. Plate thickness shall be r o u n d e d
o f f t o t h e nearest 0,5 o r integer o f millimetres.
T h e values o f negative rolling tolerances f o r

plates shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.2.7,
Part X I I I "Materials".
1.6.2 S y m b o l s .
F o r the purpose o f this Chapter, the following
/ = span o fconcerned member, determined f r o m
1.6.3.1, i n m ;
p = design pressure a t t h e p o i n t o f l o a d applica
tion, determined i n the relevant chapters o f the pre
sent P a r t o f t h e R u l e s , i n k P a ;
a = spacing, i n m , o fconcerned p r i m a r y o r deep
m e m b e r s o f l o n g i t u d i n a l o r t r a n s v e r s e f r a m i n g sys
t e m ; w h e r e this varies, a is a h a l f - s u m o fdistances o f
adjacent m e m b e r s f r o m t h e m e m b e r concerned;
h = depth o fthe member web, i n c m ;
/ = actual m o m e n t o f inertia o f the hull about the
horizontal neutral axis, i n c m ;
zi = v e r t i c a l d i s t a n c e f r o m h o r i z o n t a l n e u t r a l a x i s
o f ship t o t h e centre o f section area o f t h e long
itudinal considered, i n m ;
= d e s i g n s p e c i f i e d y i e l d s t r e s s f o r n o r m a l
stresses, i n M P a , d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.1.4.3;
= d e s i g n s p e c i f i e d y i e l d s t r e s s f o r s h e a r s t r e s
ses, i n M P a , d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1 . 1 . 4 . 3 ;
As = c o r r o s i o n a l l o w a n c e , i n m m , d e t e r m i n e d
f r o m 1.1.5.1.
4
66
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
50mTn/s 120dB
}
OJrnm/s,
1
2
1,25
1,6
66dBj
k
2,5
3,15
1 6
10
5
6J
12,5
20
25
>
63
80
50
\ o
100
200
Frequency,
Hz
F i g . 1.5.3.4
Permissible m e a n root values o fvibration velocity a n d vibrational acceleration:
1 - hull, superstructures a n d rigid members;
2 - framing m e m b e r s including the girders b ywhich the foundations o fship machinery a n d equipment are supported;
3 - plates
1.6.3 S p a n a n d e f f e c t i v e f l a n g e o f m e m b e r .
1.6.3.1 T h e s p a n o f p r i m a r y a n d d e e p m e m b e r / i s
m e a s u r e d a l o n g t h e m e m b e r face p l a t e as t h e distance
between its span points. Unless provided otherwise,
w h e r e t h e e n d b r a c k e t s a r e fitted, t h e s p a n p o i n t s
shall betaken a tthe mid-length o f the bracket. I n this
case, t h e s p a n p o i n t p o s i t i o n s h a l l b e s u c h t h a t t h e
height o ft h e e n dbracket i n i t does n o t exceed t h e

w e b d e p t h o f t h e m e m b e r considered ( F i g . 1.6.3.1).
F o r curvilinear members t h e span shall b e t a k e n
equal t o t h ec h o r d connecting t h e span p o i n t centres.
1.6.3.2 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e e f f e c t i v e f l a n g e i s
taken equal t o its m e a n thickness i nt h e considered
section o f the member.
P a r t II. H u l l
67
hi
0
I
F i g . 1.6.3.1
1.6.3.3 T h e w i d t h o f t h e e f f e c t i v e f l a n g e a , i n m , o f
p r i m a r y members shall be determined b y t h e formulae:
f
/ = 1/6;
cif=
(1.6.3.3-1)
(1.6.3.3-2)
0,5(fli + a )
2
where a\,a = distance o fthe considered m e m b e r from the nearest

m e m b e r s o f the s a m e direction located o n b o t h sides o f
the considered member, i n m ,
2
whichever is t h e smaller.
1.6.3.4 T h e w i d t h o f t h e e f f e c t i v e f l a n g e o f d e e p
m e m b e r s /, i n m , i s d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
(1.6.3.4)
Cf= kc
w h e r e = 0,5(ci + c ) ;
ci, c = d i s t a n c e o f t h e c o n s i d e r e d d e e p m e m b e r f r o m t h e n e a r e s t
deep members o f the same direction located o n both
sides o f the considered m e m b e r , i n m ;
= f a c t o r o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1.6.3.4 d e p e n d i n g o n c, g i v e n
span l
a n d number n o f members supported b y
considered deep members.
1.6.3.5 T h e w i d t h o f t h e h a t c h c o a m i n g e f f e c t i v e
flange shall be equal t o one-twelfth o ftheir span b u t
n o t m o r e t h a n h a l f t h e distance between t h e cargo
h a t c h a n d t h e ship's side f o r t h e side c o a m i n g a n d ,
accordingly, h a l f the distance between a cargo hatch
a n d a transverse b u l k h e a d (or the b e a m nearest t o t h e
cargo hatch) f o rt h e hatch e n d coaming.
1.6.3.6 T h e w i d t h o f t h e e f f e c t i v e f l a n g e o f d e e p
members located n o r m a l t o the direction o f corru
g a t i o n s s h a l l b e t a k e n e q u a l t o 155* a n d 205* f o r t r a
pezoidal a n d wave-shaped corrugations respectively
(s = t h i c k n e s s o f c o r r u g a t e d p l a t e s , i n m m ) o r 0 , 1 c
( f o r c, r e f e r t o 1 . 6 . 3 . 4 ) , i n m m , w h i c h e v e r i s l e s s .
1.6.3.7 W h e r e p r i m a r y m e m b e r s p a r a l l e l t o d e e p
m e m b e r s a r e fitted o v e r t h e w i d t h o f t h e e f f e c t i v e
flange o f t h e latter, full cross-sectional areas o ft h e
above p r i m a r y m e m b e r s shall be adopted f o r calcu
lation when determining the inertia m o m e n t a n d
section m o d u l u s o f t h e deep members.
1.6.3.8 I n c a s e t h e a r e a o f t h e e f f e c t i v e f l a n g e i s
less t h a n t h a t o f t h e face p l a t e , t h e d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f
section m o d u l u s a n d m o m e n t o f inertia o f t h e deep
m e m b e r s is subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e
Register. T h i s requirement applies t o deep m e m b e r s
o f corrugated structures.
1.6.4 S c a n t l i n g s o f s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s .
1.6.4.1 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W, i n c m , o f p r i
m a r y m e m b e r s o f r o l l e d s e c t i o n s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
3
W =
(1.6.4.1)
W'Vr
where
W = section
determined
co = m u l t i p l i e r
determined
c
modulus o f m e m b e r considered, i n c m ,
f r o m 1.6.4.2;
taking into account corrosion allowance,
i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.1.5.3;
sp
T a b l e
Num
ber o f
mem
bers n
1.6.3.4
l /c e q u a l t o :
values a t
T h e section m o d u l u s o f built-up welded members

s h a l l satisfy t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.6.4.2. I n t h i s case
the thickness o f section elements shall be increased b y
c o r r o s i o n a l l o w a n c e As.
1.6.4.2 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f m e m b e r c o n
sidered, i n c m , w i t h o u t t a k i n g i n t o account c o r r o
sion allowance is determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
3
sp
>b
0,38
0,62
0,79
0,88
0,94
0,98
<3
0,21
0,4
0,53
0,64
0,72
0,78
0,8
7 and
more
QH0
m k O
N o t e . F o r i n t e r m e d i a t e v a l u e s o f l /c
determined b y linear interpolation.
sp
a n d n, the factor is
F o r simply supported deep m e m b e r s t h e given

s p a n l = /, a n d f o r fixed d e e p m e m b e r s l = 0 , 6 / .
T h e w a y i n w h i c h the framing members shall be
s u p p o r t e d ( s i m p l e s u p p o r t i n g o r fixing) i s d e t e r m i n e d
proceeding f r o m t h e general engineering principles
w i t h regard f o r t h e actual structure (presence o f
brackets, w e l d i n g o f w e b s , face plates, etc.) a n d is
characterized b y t h e presence o r absence o f bending
m o m e n t effects i n t h e s p a n p o i n t o f t h e m e m b e r .
sp
sp
(1.6.4.2)
where Q = p a l transverse load o n m e m b e r considered, i nk N ;

m , kfj = f a c t o r s o f b e n d i n g m o m e n t a n d p e r m i s s i b l e s t r e s s e s t o b e
found i n the relevant chapters o f the present Part o f the
Rules.
1.6.4.3 T h e n e t s e c t i o n a l a r e a ( e x c l u d i n g o p e n
ings) f , i n c m , o f p r i m a r y a n d deep m e m b e r webs
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
for members o frolled section
2
fw
(1.6.4.3-1)
fw^c
where f \
k ^n
T
(1.6.4.3-2)
68
Rules
-Wmax> k = m a x i m u m s h e a r f o r c e v a l u e a n d p e r m i s s i b l e s h e a r s t r e s s
factor a s defined i n the relevant chapters o f the Rules;
f o r w , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.3;
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
= factor o f permissible stresses determined i n the relevant

chapters o f the present Part o f the Rules.
for built-up welded members, the required w e b

cross-sectional area shall be determined b y F o r
m u l a (1.6.4.3-2) w i t h a subsequent increase i n thick
n e s s b y t h e v a l u e o f As.
1.6.4.4 T h e t h i c k n e s s s, i n m m , o f t h e p l a t e s u n
d e r t r a n s v e r s e l o a d s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
I n t h i s case, t h e f o l l o w i n g r e l a t i o n s h i p s h a l l b e
satisfied:
(1.6.4.5.2-2)
R/s^n/;
.3 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f t h e c o r r u g a t i o n i s d e
t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2 t a k i n g
Q = pd l ( f o r d , r e f e r t o F i g . 1 . 6 . 4 . 5 ) .
T h e spacing a n d section m o d u l u s o f corrugations
can be determined b y the formulae given i n T a
ble 1.6.4.5. ( L i n e a r d i m e n s i o n s a r e expressed i n c m ,
a n d Po i n deg.).
0
s = -
(1.6.4.4)
+ As
w h e r e m , k = b e n d i n g m o m e n t a n d p e r m i s s i b l e s t r e s s f a c t o r s a s
defined i n the relevant chapters o f the Rules;
= 1,20,5a/6, b u t n o t g r e a t e r t h a n 1;
a a n d b = s m a l l e r a n d g r e a t e r sizes, i n m , o f s u p p o r t i n g c o n t o u r
sides o f plate structure.
T a b l e
1.6.4.5 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f t h e c o r r u g a t e d s t r u c
tures shall c o m p l y w i t h the following requirements:
.1 t h e thickness o f t h e t r a p e z o i d a l c o r r u g a t i o n s
shall be determined b y F o r m u l a (1.6.4.4) t a k i n g a
e q u a l t o b o r c, w h i c h e v e r i s t h e g r e a t e r ( F i g . 1 . 6 . 4 . 5 ) .
T h e f o l l o w i n g r e l a t i o n s h i p shall be satisfied:
b/s^ 0,067
Spacing o f
corrugations
Section modulus
Trapezoidal
do = 2(6 + c c o s c p )
W = hs(b + c / 3 )
Wave-shaped
do = 4 i ? s i n P o
Po + 2 P c o s P o l , 5 s i n 2 P
1 cosPo
'
2
where b = width o f the panel parallel to the bulkhead plane, i n m

( r e f e r t o F i g . 1.6.4.5).
I n calculating t h e factor y , the angle p shall be

taken i n rad.
1.6.4.6 P e r m i s s i b l e s t r e s s f a c t o r s fc a n d k d e
fined i n t h e relevant chapters o f t h e Rules m a y be
increased b y 5 p e r cent f o r ships o f restricted areas o f
navigation R 2 , R 2 - R S N a n d R2-RSN(4,5) a n d by
10 p e r cent f o r R 3 - R S N a n d R 3 unless d e p e n d e n t
u p o n the factors k a n d k determined b y F o r
m u l a (2.2.4.1).
1.6.5 B u c k l i n g s t r e n g t h o f h u l l s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s .
1.6.5.1 T h e b u c k l i n g s t r e n g t h o f l o n g i t u d i n a l s ,
shell plates a n d h u l l structure plating shall be ensured
i n ships o f unrestricted service a n d ships o f restricted
areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R l a n d R 2 , 65 m a n d greater i n
length, o f restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 - R S N ,
R2-RSN(4,5), R 3 - R S N a n d R 3 , 6 0 m a n d greater i n
l e n g t h subject t o c o m p r e s s i v e stresses d u e t o l o n g
itudinal bending o f t h e h u l l girder.
E f f e c t i v e c o m p r e s s i v e streses a , i n M P a , s h a l l b e
determined by the following formula:
0
b/2
d
ysR
(1 6 4 5 3)
' ' ' '
CT
a)
W =
Factor is determined by the formula
(1.6.4.5.1)
A n g l e ( r e f e r t o F i g . 1.6.4.5 a ) s h a l l b e a s s u m e d
n o t l e s s t h a n 40;
1.6.4.5
Type of
corrugation
F i g . 1.6.4.5
T r a p e z o i d a l (a)
a n d w a v e - s h a p e d (b) c o r r u g a t i o n s
-10 >30/
.2 t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e w a v e - s h a p e d
t i o n s s, i n m m , s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n
corruga
+ As
where M
s = 22P rJ-P
(1.6.4.5.2-1)
half-angle o f spread o f corrugation

F i g . 1.6.4.5, b ) i n r a d . ;
R = radius o fcorrugation, i n m ;
0
(refer t o
M
=
M =
for M ,
s
= design bending m o m e n t , i n k N - m , at the section u n d e r

consideration equal t o t h em a x i m u m absolute value o f
algebraic s u m o f the m o m e n t components;
+ M\ f o r l o n g i t u d i n a l m e m b e r s a r r a n g e d b e l o w
the neutral axis;
\ M + M + M \ f o r l o n g i t u d i n a l m e m b e r s a r r a n g e d
above the neutral axis;
a s d e f i n e d i n 1.4.3, i n k N m ;
a s d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.4.4;
r e f e r t o 1.4.5.
where
(1.6.5.1-1)
P a r t II. H u l l
69
T h e m a x i m u m hogging bending m o m e n t shall be

assumed as design value M f o r l o n g i t u d i n a l m e m
bers arranged b e l o w t h e neutral axis, a n d t h e m a x
i m u m sagging bending m o m e n t f o r longitudinal
m e m b e r s arranged above t h e n e u t r a l axis.
T h e b u c k l i n g strength o f side shell a n d l o n g
itudinal bulkheads a t t h e section considered shall be
e n s u r e d u n d e r s h e a r stresses , i n M P a , c a l c u l a t e d b y
f o r side shell p l a t i n g i n ships w i t h o u t effective
longitudinal bulkheads
T
section, except f o r t h e areas adjoining t h e long

itudinals a n dhaving a breadth equal t o 0,25 o f the
shorter side o fs u p p o r t i n g c o n t o u r , w i t h t h e r e d u c e d
f a c t o r v|/ t o b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
*
2s
--10 ;
I
(1.6.5.1-2)
f o r side shell p l a t i n g i n ships w i t h t w o effective

longitudinal bulkheads
N
+ N S
(1.6.5.1-3)
a, - i ( r ;
s,
I
for l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d plating i n ships w i t h
t w o effective l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads
=
N
where
+ N
s,
S W
S
I
(1.6.5.1-4)
Where o n eo r more than t w o continuous long

itudinal plane bulkheads o r longitudinal bulkheads
w i t h h o r i z o n t a l corrugations a r e fitted, t h e shear
stresses a r e d e t e r m i n e d b y a p r o c e d u r e a p p r o v e d b y
the Register.
1.6.5.2 T h e b u c k l i n g s t r e n g t h o f l o n g i t u d i n a l
members is considered sufficient i f t h e following
conditions are met:
c
c r
cr
e H
eH
eII
1.6.5.4 W h e n c h e c k i n g t h e b u c k l i n g s t r e n g t h , t h e
E u l e r stresses a , i n M P a , f o r p r i m a r y a n d d e e p
longitudinal members shall be determined b y t h e
following formulae:
.1 f o r c o l u m n b u c k l i n g o f p r i m a r y l o n g i t u d i n a l
members w i t h o u t r o t a t i o n o f t h e cross section
e
(1.6.5.4.1)
206i/jf
ka â
w h e r e <y , = E u l e r n o r m a l a n d s h e a r s t r e s s e s t o b e d e t e r m i n e d i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.5.4 a n d 1.6.5.5.
= still w a t e r s h e a r force a t t h e section considered,

d e f i n e d i n 1.4.3, i n k N ;
N = w a v e v e r t i c a l s h e a r f o r c e d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.4.4.2;
,s = a c t u a l t h i c k n e s s o f s i d e s h e l l p l a t i n g i n s h i p s w i t h o u t
longitudinal bulkheads, i n m m ;
s , si = a c t u a l t h i c k n e s s e s o f s i d e s h e l l p l a t i n g a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l
b u l k h e a d plating a tthe section considered i n ships with
two longitudinal bulkheads, i n m m ;
S, 1 = a s d e f i n e d i n 1.4.2;
f o r a , <X;, r e f e r t o 1.4.7.2.
1.6.5.3 C r i t i c a l s t r e s s e s a a n d z , i n M P a , s h a l l
determined b y the formulae:
& when a ^0,5R ;
(1.6.5.3)
= (1-/4)
when a >
0,5R ;
= x when z ^0,29ReH,
= (0,58-0,08 / ) w h e n z >
0,29R
c
be
&cr
Gr
z
*cr
cr
*c =
(1.6.5.2-2)
^n-GcrlGc-
where i = m o m e n t o f inertia, i n c m , o f longitudinal, including

plate flange a n d calculated with thickness reduced b y the
v a l u e o f A s ( f o r A s , r e f e r t o T a b l e 1.6.5.5-2);
/ =
cross-sectional area, i n c m , o f longitudinal, including
plate flange a n d calculated with a thickness reduced b y
t h e v a l u e o f A s ( f o r A s , r e f e r t o T a b l e 1.6.5.5-2); a p l a t e
flange equal t o the frame spacing m a y b e included;
2
.2 f o r t o r s i o n a l b u c k l i n g o f p r i m a r y l o n g i t u d i n a l
members
a = (m/fyiJipXm
+ / ) + 793,
(1.6.5.4.2)
w h e r e = 0,05!*1;
m = n u m b e r o f h a l f w a v e s , g i v e n b y T a b l e 1.6.5.4;
i, = m o m e n t o f i n e r t i a , i n c m , o f p r o f i l e u n d e r s i m p l e t o r s i o n
(without plate flange), determined a s follows:
4
i,=
^ "
i, = - y - [h sl,
(1.6.5.2-1)
f o r flat bars;
+ bjSjil 0 , 6 3 f y / i / ) ] - 1 0
- 4
f o r angles,
bulb,
symmetrical bulb a n d T-profiles;

i = polar m o m e n t o f inertia, i n c m , o f profile a b o u t
connection o f stiffener t oplate, determined a s follows:
.3
i= ^ l O " f o r f l a t b a r s ;
4
where = 1 f o r plating a n d f o r w e b plating o f stiffeners;

= 1,1 f o r s t i f f e n e r s ;
F o r plate panels, t h e factor m a y be reduced i n

respect o fships o f restricted n a v i g a t i o n areas: R l
by 1 0 p e r cent, R 2 , R 2 - R S N a n d R2-RSN(4,5)
by 15 p e r cent, R 3 - R S N a n d R 3 b y 2 0 p e r cent.
T h e factor f o r plate panels o fa hull o fberth con
nected ships is subject t o special consideration. I n this
case, w h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e a c t u a l section m o d u l u s o f
h u l l i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.4.8, t h e s t r e n g t h r e d u c t i o n
o f compressed plate shall be considered, i.e. where
a < a the plates shall be included i n the h u l l girder
c r
i (^+ h^bjiSj)-10~
f o r angles, bulb, symmetrical b u l b a n d
T-profiles;
i = sectional m o m e n t o f inertia, i n c m , o f profile a b o u t
connection o f stiffener t oplate, determined a s follows:
f.3 3
-6
6
f ( ) r
flat
T a b l e
0<fc<4
1.6.5.4
4 < < 36 36 < it < 144 ( m - \ f m < k < m ( m + i f

2
70
Rules
' for T - a n d symmetrical b u l b profiles;
12
iw = + '?
2bjHw
^ ~
68.7W
<y
<y
i
a
>
of Sea-Going
= 7,S3(s /h ) -l0
for web plates
o f longitudinal deep members;
e
Ships
(1.6.5.4.3)
for
angles a n d b u l b profiles;
h = web height, i n m m ;
s = w e b t h i c k n e s s , i n m m , r e d u c e d b y t h e v a l u e o f As ( f o r As,
r e f e r t o T a b l e 1.6.5.5-2);
bf = f l a n g e w i d t h , i n m m , f o r a n g l e s a n d T - p r o f i l e s o r b u l b
width, i n m m , for b u l b a n d symmetrical b u l b profiles;
Sf = f l a n g e t h i c k n e s s o r b u l b t h i c k n e s s , i n m m , r e d u c e d b y t h e
v a l u e o f As ( f o r As, r e f e r t o T a b l e 1.6.5.5-2). F o r b u l b
a n d s y m m e t r i c a l b u l b p r o f i l e s , Sf m a y b e a d o p t e d e q u a l
to the m e a n thickness o f the bulb;
= spring stiffness exerted b y supporting plate panel,
(1 +
and Construction
for flanges o f deep longitudinal m e m b e r s buck

ling is t a k e n care b yt h e f o l l o w i n g requirement:
bjjs >
15
w h e r e bf = f l a n g e w i d t h , i n m m , f o r a n g l e s , h a l f t h e f l a n g e w i d t h
for T-sections;
Sf = f l a n g e t h i c k n e s s , i n m m .
1 . 6 . 5 . 5 E u l e r n o r m a l a a n d s h e a r z stresses, i n M P a ,
f o r plate structures shall b e determined as for rectangular
plates b y the formulae:
e
-io- )a
= l < y j < y ^ 0 ( t o b e t a k e n n o t l e s s t h a n 0,1 f o r a n g l e s ,

bulb, symmetrical b u l b a n d T-profiles);
= c o m p r e s s i v e s t r e s s a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.5.1;
= E u l e r s t r e s s o f s u p p o r t i n g p l a t e a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.5.5;
= supporting plate thickness, i n m m , reduced b y the value
o f As ( f o r As, r e f e r t o T a b l e 1.6.5.5-2);
= distance between longitudinals;
E
. 3 f o r w e b a n d flange b u c k l i n g
= 0,1854n(y'/&) ;
= 0,1854'/6)
(1.6.5.5-1)
(1.6.5.5-2)
w h e r e n = factor d e p e n d i n g o n the l o a d type o fthe plate a n d t h e

r a t i o o f s i d e s ( T a b l e 1.6.5.5-1);
s = a s - b u i l t t h i c k n e s s o f t h e p l a t e r e d u c e d b y t h e v a l u e o f As
o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1.6.5.5-2;
b = plate side located n o r m a l t o t h edirection o f n o r m a l
compressive stresses; w h e n the plate i se x p o s e d t o shear
stresses, b i sthe smaller side o f the plate, i n m .
1
T a b l e
Type o f load
= a/b
> 1
<1
'
+1,1
> 1
1 0 \ | ^ - 6 , 4 ^ + 7,6
<1
e [ 1 0 V - 1 4 \ | f + 1,9(1 + \( + 1/) ]
> 1
5,34 + 4 /
N o t e s : 1 . \|r = r a t i o b e t w e e n s m a l l e s t a n d l a r g e s t c o m p r e s s i v e s t r e s s w h e n l i n e a r v a r i a t i o n a c r o s s p a n e l .
2. e = 1,3 w h e n p l a t i n g i s s t i f f e n e d b y f l o o r s o r d e e p g i r d e r s ;
e = 1,21 w h e n s t i f f e n e r s a r e a n g l e s , s y m m e t r i c a l b u l b s o r T - s e c t i o n s ;
e = 1,1 w h e n s t i f f e n e r s a r e b u l b f l a t s ;
e = 1,05 w h e n s t i f f e n e r s a r e f l a t b a r s .
1.6.5.5-1
P a r t II. H u l l
71
T a b l e
1.6.5.5-2
Structure
As, in m m
Compartments carrying d r y bulk cargoes.

Vertical surfaces a n d surfaces sloped a t a n
a n g l e g r e a t e r t h a n 25 t o t h e h o r i z o n t a l l i n e .
O n e side exposure t o ballast a n d / o r liquid cargo
0,05*
(0,5Âs^l)
Horizontal surfaces a n d surfaces sloped a t a n

a n g l e l e s s t h a n 25 t o t h e h o r i z o n t a l l i n e .
O n e side exposure t o ballast a n d / o r liquid cargo
0,10s
(2sSAssS3)
0,15s
(2Â$^4)
,s = a s - b u i l t t h i c k n e s s , i n m m , o f t h e s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r u n d e r
consideration.
N t e . A s = 0 otherwise.
1.6.5.6 T h e m o m e n t o f i n e r t i a i, i n c m , o f t h e
stiffeners o n deep g i r d e r w e b s (refer t o 1.7.3.2) s h a l l
n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a e :
f o r t h e stiffeners f i t t e d n o r m a l t o t h e g i r d e r face
plate
;
(1.6.5.6-1)
f o r t h e stiffeners p a r a l l e l t o t h e girder face p l a t e
Requirement
Thickness o f plating f o rthe

shell, decks (without covering),
bulkheads, enclosures a n d
other details m a d e o f plates
for superstructures
o f framing
Cross-sectional area o f pillars
Horizontal surfaces a n d surfaces sloped a t a n

a n g l e l e s s t h a n 25 t o t h e h o r i z o n t a l l i n e .
T w o side exposure t o ballast a n d / o r liquid cargo
- 3
Parameter
Section modulus
members
Vertical surfaces a n d surfaces sloped a ta n angle

g r e a t e r t h a n 25 t o t h e h o r i z o n t a l l i n e .
T w o side exposure t o ballast a n d / o r liquid cargo
i = yajMO
T a b l e
(f+0Ms)f
(1.6.5.6-2)
w h e r e = c o e f f i c i e n t o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1.6.5.6 d e p e n d i n g o n t h e
ratio o f t h e girder w e b d e p t h h t o the s p a c i n g o f stiffeners a \ ,
a = spacing o f stiffeners, i n c m ;
,s = a c t u a l t h i c k n e s s o f t h e w e b , i n m m ;
/ = actual cross-sectional area o f the stiffener, i nc m ;
/ = s p a n o f the stiffener, i n m .
| = a s d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.1.4.3.
M o m e n t o f inertia o f pillars
and framing members
S! = SyfRelll
Rp
1.6.6.1
for m a i n hull
fl
WR
e H
/R
=fReHlR
l > 0 2
P a ; 1
= 3/
N o t e s : 1. R
= p r o o f stress o f a l u m i n i u m alloy, i n M P a .
2. T h e v a l u e s o f s, W, f , I a s s t i p u l a t e d b y t h e R u l e s m a y b e
adopted without corrosion allowance.
P o 2
1.6.6.2 T h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f s t e r n f r a m e , s t e m ,
bar keel a n d propeller shaft brackets shall be
1,3 t i m e s t h a t r e q u i r e d f o r s t e e l a p p l i c a t i o n .
1.6.6.3 W h e r e c o n t i n u o u s w e l d s ( f i l l e t s , b u t t
welds) a r e located i n m o s t stressed positions, a c c o u n t
shall be taken o f the reduction i n strength at the
welded joint location depending o n the given alumi
n i u m alloy a n d t h e process o f welding.
1.6.6.4 O n a g r e e m e n t w i t h t h e R e g i s t e r , t h e b i
m e t a l l i c (steel a l u m i n i u m ) pressed elements f o r
c o n n e c t i o n o f steel a n d a l u m i n i u m a l l o y structures
m a y be used.
1.7 W E L D E D S T R U C T U R E S A N D J O I N T S
T a b l e
1.6.5.6
H/a
1 and
less
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,8
2,0
2,5
3,0
3,5
4,0
0,3
0,6
1,3
2,0
2,9
4,1
8,0
12,4
16,8
21,2
N o t e . T h e intermediate values o f are determined b y linear

interpolation.
1.6.6 A l u m i n i u m a l l o y s t r u c t u r e s .
1.6.6.1 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f a l u m i n i u m a l l o y s t r u c
tures shall be d e t e r m i n e d b y c o n v e r s i o n o f t h e scan
tlings r e l a t i n g t o t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g steel structures.
The conversion shall be made using the formulae o f
T a b l e 1.6.6.1 w i t h o u t c o n s i d e r i n g t h e l i m i t s b y
m i n i m u m scantlings o f steel structures.
1.7.1 G e n e r a l .
1.7.1.1 A n y c h a n g e i n t h e s h a p e o r s e c t i o n o f t h e
m e m b e r s o f welded h u l l structure shall take place
gradually. A l l openings shall have rounded corners
a n d s m o o t h edges.
1.7.1.2 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f s e c t i o n s a n d t h e t h i c k
nesses o f plates used f o r l o n g i t u d i n a l m e m b e r s s h a l l
change gradually t h r o u g h o u t t h e ship's length.
A n y change o f framing system a n d plating
thicknesses u s e d f o r t h e s t r e n g t h deck, b o t t o m , side
shell a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads shall n o t be per
m i t t e d i n areas w h e r e m e c h a n i c a l p r o p e r t i e s o f steel
change.
1.7.1.3 C o n t i n u i t y s h a l l b e e n s u r e d f o r a s m a n y o f
m a i n l o n g i t u d i n a l m e m b e r s as possible, a n d a gra
d u a l change o ftheir sections is required i n w a y o f t h e
ends together w i t h other arrangements, contributing
t o t h e r e d u c t i o n o f stress c o n c e n t r a t i o n .
72
Rules
1.7.1.4 I n t i g h t s t r u c t u r e s , a s w e l l a s i n n o n - t i g h t
structures subject t o intense v i b r a t i o n , stiffeners a n d
similar details shall be fitted t o prevent h a r d spots i n
t h e p l a t i n g a t t h e toes o f b r a c k e t s a n d i n w a y o f face
plates o f t h e m e m b e r s passing t h r o u g h , o r terminat
ing a t t h e above-mentioned structures.
1.7.1.5 T h e l e n g t h o f u n s u p p o r t e d p l a t i n g b e
tween t h e e n d o f a l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d t h e nearest w e b
n o r m a l t o direction m e m b e r shall be as short as
p o s s i b l e , h o w e v e r , n o t m o r e t h a n As o r 6 0 m m ,
w h i c h e v e r i s l e s s (s = p l a t e t h i c k n e s s , i n m m ) .
1.7.1.6 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h i s P a r t o f t h e R u l e s ,
the h u l l structures subject t o intense v i b r a t i o n are
those situated i n w a y o f machinery a n d equipment
w h i c h constitute a source o f vibration.
Considered as regions w i t h h i g h level o f v i b r a t i o n
i n a l l ships a r e t h e regions situated b e l o w t h e l o w e r
platform continuous w i t h i n t h e engine r o o m a n d
bounded:
at a f t e n d , b y a section f o r w a r d o f t h e edge o f
propeller boss a t twice t h epropeller diameter, b u t n o t
less t h a n t o t h e a f t e r p e a k b u l k h e a d ;
i n t h e engine r o o m , b y the bulkheads o f this
space.
T h e bulkheads f o r m i n g boundaries o f engine
r o o m , t h e after peak b u l k h e a d a n d t h e l o w e r con
tinuous platform i nt h eabove regions t h r o u g h o u t the
length o f t h e ship are considered t o be structures
subject t o intense v i b r a t i o n .
1.7.1.7 I n w a y o f t h e e n d s o f b u l w a r k , b i l g e k e e l s ,
a n d other details w e l d e d t o t h e hull, as well as gen
erally o f g u t t e r w a y bars, t h e i r h e i g h t shall decrease
o n a l e n g t h o f a t l e a s t 1,5 t i m e s t h e h e i g h t o f t h e s e
members. T h e ends o f b u l w a r k s shall be tapered. T h i s
is also r e c o m m e n d e d f o r t h e p o r t i o n s o f t h e e n d s o f
the gutter bars.
1.7.1.8 W e l d e d j o i n t s , w e l d i n g c o n s u m a b l e s a n d
procedures, testing a n d inspection methods o f welded
joints shall comply w i t h requirements o f Part X I V
"Welding".
1.7.2 C o n n e c t i o n s o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s .
1.7.2.1 I n g e n e r a l , t h e f r a m i n g m e m b e r s s h a l l
have butt-welded joints. Overlapping joints m a y be
a l l o w e d o n agreement w i t h t h e Register, except i n
regions w i t h h i g h level o f vibration, deep m e m b e r
connections a n di nw a y o fheavy concentrated loads.
I n general, brackets shall b e m a d e o f steel h a v i n g
t h e s a m e y i e l d stress as t h e steel o f t h e m e m b e r s
connected.
1.7.2.2 C o n n e c t i o n s o f p r i m a r y m e m b e r s .
1.7.2.2.1 U n l e s s p r o v i d e d o t h e r w i s e , t h e s i z e o f
b r a c k e t s c, i n c m , m e a s u r e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h
F i g . 1.7.2.2.1 s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
= 5 ^ / ^
(1.7.2.2.1)
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
w h e r e W = required section m o d u l u s o fthe m e m b e r attached, i n c m ;

i = thickness o fbracket, i nm m .
T h e thickness o fbracket is taken equal t o that o f

the m e m b e r w e b . W h e r e the w e b thickness is m o r e
t h a n 7 m m t h e bracket thickness m a y be reduced b y
1 m m ; where thew e b thickness is m o r e t h a n 12 m m ,
the bracket thickness m a y be reduced b y 2 m m .
W h e r e a bracket connects t w om e m b e r s o f dif
ferent profile, the characteristics o f the smaller profile
s h a l l b e u s e d f o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e b r a c k e t size.
T h e b r a c k e t h e i g h t h (refer t o F i g . 1.7.2.2.1) s h a l l
b e n o t l e s s t h a n 0 , 7 t i m e s t h e r e q u i r e d s i z e c.
F i g . 1.7.2.2.1
T h e size o f b r a c k e t s d e t e r m i n e d a s i n d i c a t e d
a b o v e , refers t o t h e case w h e n t h e m e m b e r s t o b e
interconnected are n o t welded t o each other o r t h e
member butts are n o twelded t o the plating. T h e al
l o w a b l e g a p shall n o t exceed 4 0 m m o r 2 5 p e r cent o f
s i z e c, w h i c h e v e r i s l e s s . O t h e r w i s e , m a y b e r e q u i r e d
to be increased.
1.7.2.2.2 I f t h e f r e e e d g e /, i n m m , o f a b r a c k e t
( r e f e r t o F i g . 1 . 7 . 2 . 2 . 1 ) i s l o n g e r t h a n 45s (s = t h i c k
ness o f t h e bracket, i n m m ) , t h e bracket shall h a v e a
flange (face plate). T h e w i d t h o f t h e flange shall be
n o t less t h a n 5 0 m m , t h e w i d t h o f t h e face p l a t e , n o t
less t h a n 7 5 m m . T h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e face p l a t e s h a l l
n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f t h e b r a c k e t . T h e w i d t h o f t h e
flange (face plate) s h a l l be i n accordance w i t h t h e
requirements o f 1.7.3.1.
1.7.2.2.3 T h e size o f b r a c k e t s m a y b e r e d u c e d :
b y 10 p e r cent, w h e r e t h e f r a m i n g m e m b e r s a r e
welded t o each other o r t o t h e plating;
b y 15 p e r cent, w h e r e a face p l a t e o r f l a n g e i s
provided;
b y 2 5 p e r cent, w h e r e t h e f r a m i n g m e m b e r s a r e
welded t o each other a n d t h e brackets are provided
w i t h a face plate o r flange.
1.7.2.2.4 I n r e g i o n s w i t h h i g h l e v e l o f v i b r a t i o n
the butt ends o fframing members shall generally be
connected, w i t h the m i n i m u m dimensions o f t h e
Part II. Hull
73
plating portions
( F i g . 1.7.2.2.4).
unsupported
by
the
framing
stiffener shall b e fitted parallel t o t h e line connecting

bracket ends a t t h e distance a equal t o / o f t h e
bracket height o r 35 times its thickness (whichever is
less). T h e i n e r t i a m o m e n t o f t h e stiffener s h a l l b e
determined b y F o r m u l a (1.6.5.6-2).
Brackets shall be additionally stiffened depending
o n t h e i r size a n d c o n f i g u r a t i o n (refer t o 1.7.3.2.2).
1.7.2.3.3 T h e r a d i u s o f r o u n d i n g s h a l l n o t b e less
than t h e depth o fthe smaller members connected.
T h e w e b s a n d face plates shall b e s u p p o r t e d b y
stiffeners a n d t r i p p i n g brackets i n w a y o f r o u n d i n g
( F i g . 1.7.2.3).
1.7.2.4 T h e c o n s t r u c t i o n s used f o r t h e a t t a c h m e n t
o f p r i m a r y members t o supporting members shall
comply w i t h existing standards.
1.7.3 C o n s t r u c t i o n o f deep m e m b e r s .
1.7.3.1 T h e d e p t h h a n d thickness s o f m e m b e r
webs (as w e l l as o f b u i l t - u p p r i m a r y m e m b e r s ) a n d
their sectional area are regulated b y t h e relevant
chapters o f this Part o f t h e Rules. T h e w i d t h o f
m e m b e r f a c e p l a t e b, i n m m , a s m e a s u r e d f r o m i t s
web, shall n o tbe m o r e t h a n
l
F i g . 1.7.2.2.4
1.7.2.2.5 W h e r e t h e r e is a g a p b e t w e e n t h e b u t t o f
b e a m a n d t h e f r a m e i n w a y o f side s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f
ships m o o r i n g a t sea, i n r e g i o n I o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g
i n categories A r c 9 , A r c 8 , A r c 7 , A r c 6 , A r c 5 ships a n d
i n r e g i o n A I o f category Ice3 ships, t h e b e a m bracket
shall h a v e a face plate o r flange.
1.7.2.3 D e e p m e m b e r s a r e r e c o m m e n d e d t o b e
connected b y rounded brackets w i t h s m o o t h change
o f w e b d e p t h a n d face p l a t e size.
b = 200s . l J R ^ h
(1.7.3.1)
f P
w h e r e s/_ = t h i c k n e s s o f m e m b e r f a c e p l a t e , i n m m .
p
T h e thickness o f face p l a t e shall n o t n o r m a l l y

exceed a triple thickness o fthe w e b plate.
1 . 7 . 3 . 2 W h e r e h/s > 6 0 ^ / r j ( f o r h a n d s , i n m m ,
refer t o 1.7.3.1), t h e w e b s o f m e m b e r s (except f o r
those whose buckling strength shall be checked i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.5) s h a l l b e s t i f f e n e d b y t r i p p i n g
brackets a n d stiffeners ( F i g . 1.7.3.2).
w
F i g . 1.7.2.3
a)
J7
1.7.2.3.1 T h e height a n d w i d t h o f brackets i n
terconnecting the members, o r attaching t h e m t o
bulkheads are, unless p r o v i d e d otherwise, t o be n o t
less t h a n t h e m e m b e r s w e b d e p t h ( o r t h e lesser w e b
depth o f t h e members connected). T h e bracket
t h i c k n e s s i s a s s u m e d e q u a l t o t h e lesser o f t h e m e m
ber w e b thicknesses. I nm e m b e r connections n o gaps
are permissible.
1.7.2.3.2 T h e brackets c o n n e c t i n g t h e m e m b e r s
shall h a v e a face plate o r flange a l o n g t h e free edge.
I n places o f t r a n s i t i o n f r o m the face plates o f brackets
to those o fmembers, t h ew i d t h a n d thickness o f t h e
face p l a t e a l o n g t h e free e d g e a t d i f f e r e n t sizes o f t h e
m e m b e r face plates shall change s m o o t h l y . T h e area
o f face plate ( o r flange) o f t r i p p i n g b r a c k e t shall b e
t a k e n n o t less t h a n 0 , 8 t i m e s t h e a r e a o f lesser face
plate o fthe members connected.
I f t h e distance, i n m m , between bracket ends
e x c e e d s 1 6 0 5 ^ / r j (s = t h i c k n e s s o f b r a c k e t , i n m m ) , a
b)
1
1
'
6)
'Bracket
)
4
F i g . 1.7.3.2
74
Rules
1.7.3.2.1 W h e r e h/s ^ 1 6 0 ^ / r f , t h e w e b s o f m e m bers shall be stiffened w i t h t h e stiffeners fitted parallel

t o t h e m e m b e r face p l a t e ( r e f e r t o F i g . 1.7.3.2 a ) .
W h e r e h/s < 1 6 0 ^ / r f , s t i f f e n i n g m a y b e c a r r i e d o u t a s
s h o w n i n F i g . 1 . 7 . 3 . 2 b,c.
T h e spacing o f stiffeners ( w i d t h o f non-stiffened
w e b area),_ i n m m , shall n o t be greater t h a n
a = 90s /jr].
O n agreement w i t h t h e Register, the structure
s h o w n i n F i g . 1 . 7 . 3 . 2 dmay
be permitted.
I n w a y o f p o r t i o n s e q u a l t o 0 , 2 / , b u t n o t less t h a n
l,5h f r o m supports (/a n d h are the span a n ddepth o f
m e m b e r w e b respectively), t h e spacing a shall be red u c e d 1,5 t i m e s .
Stiffeners fitted n o r m a l t o t h e face p l a t e o f t h e
m e m b e r supporting p r i m a r y members (e.g. longitudinals, b u l k h e a d stiffeners, frames, etc.) shall be
fitted n o t further t h a n i n line w i t h every second
member i n question.
V a r i a t i o n f r o m t h e above spacing o f stiffeners
m a y be a l l o w e d o n t h e basis o f t h e results o f direct
strength calculation.
1.7.3.2.2 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f s t i f f e n e r s h a l l n o t b e
less t h a n 0 , 8 . v M o m e n t o f i n e r t i a o f t h e s t i f f e n e r s i s
d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.5.6.
1.7.3.2.3 T h e t r i p p i n g b r a c k e t s s t i f f e n i n g d e e p
m e m b e r s s h a l l b e f i t t e d a t t h e toes o f b r a c k e t s securing t h e m e m b e r s i nw a y o f r o u n d i n g s a n d struts as
w e l l as i n w a y o f span o f t h e m e m b e r (refer t o
F i g . 1.7.3.2 a a n d b). I n a n y case, t h e spacing o f
b r a c k e t s s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 3 , 0 m o r \5bf
(bf_ = f u l l
w i d t h o f face p l a t e , i n m m ) , w h i c h e v e r i s less.
T h e thickness o f t h e tripping brackets shall ben o t
less t h a n r e q u i r e d f o r t h e m e m b e r w e b . T h e b r a c k e t s
s h a l l b e e x t e n d e d t o t h e m e m b e r face p l a t e a n d b e w e l d e d t o i t i f t h e w i d t h o f t h e face p l a t e exceeds 1 5 0 m m , as
m e a s u r e d f r o m t h e m e m b e r w e b t o t h e free edge o f face
plate. T h e w i d t h o f t h e bracket section being welded
s h a l l b e a t least 1 0 m m s m a l l e r t h a n t h e face p l a t e w i d t h .
W h e r e t h e w i d t h o f face plates s y m m e t r i c t o t h e m e m b e r
w e b exceeds 2 0 0 m m , s m a l l brackets shall be fitted a t t h e
o p p o s i t e side o f t h e w e b i n line w i t h t h e t r i p p i n g bracket.
T h e w i d t h o f the t r i p p i n g brackets, m e a s u r e d a t t h e base
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n h a l f t h e i r d e p t h .
w
T h e b r a c k e t s h a l l h a v e a face p l a t e o r flange i f the

l e n g t h o f f r e e e d g e / > 6 0 j (s = t h i c k n e s s o f b r a cket, i n m m ) . T h e w i d t h o f t h e face p l a t e o r flange
s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n l/s.
1.7.3.3 L i g h t e n i n g h o l e s , c u t - o u t s f o r t h e p a s s a g e
o f f r a m i n g members, etc. are permitted i n t h e m e m ber webs.
T h e total depth o f openings i n t h e same section
shall n o t exceed 0,5 o f t h e m e m b e r depth. F o r deck
transverses, deck girders, webs a n d girders o f watertight b u l k h e a d s i n d r y cargo ships, this v a l u e m a y be
increased t o 0,6 o f t h e m e m b e r depth.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T h e distance f r o m t h e edges o f a l l o p e n i n g s i n deep

m e m b e r s t o t h e edges o f c u t - o u t s f o r t h e passage o f
p r i m a r y m e m b e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e d e p t h o f
these m e m b e r s . T h e openings i n deep m e m b e r webs,
except f o r cut-outs f o r the passage o f p r i m a r y m e m b e r s ,
s h a l l b e l o c a t e d a t a d i s t a n c e n o t less t h a n h a l f t h e d e e p
m e m b e r d e p t h f r o m t h e toes o f brackets attaching this
m e m b e r . W h e r e i t i s impossible t o satisfy this requirement, compensation shall be provided b y local thickening o f t h e web, fitting o f collars, etc.
I n a l l cases, t h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f a deep m e m b e r
( e x c l u d i n g o p e n i n g s ) s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n r e q u i r e d i n
the relevant chapters o fthis P a r t o fthe Rules.
F o r requirements regarding openings i n floors,
side girders a n d centre girder, refer t o 2.4.2.7.
1.7.4 D e t a i l s o f w e l d e d s t r u c t u r e s .
1.7.4.1 T h e f a c e p l a t e s a n d / o r w e b s s h a l l b e
sniped a t t h e m e m b e r ends depending o n t h e construction used f o rattachment o f members.
1.7.4.2 T h e w i d t h o f f l a n g e ( f a c e p l a t e ) o f
b r a c k e t s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 8 b r a c k e t t h i c k n e s s e s
unless expressly p r o v i d e d otherwise i n t h e relevant
chapters o fthis Part o fthe Rules.
1.7.4.3 T h e e d g e s o f b r a c k e t s , f a c e p l a t e s a n d
webs o f the members shall be welded a l lr o u n d a n d
shall have n o craters. T h i s requirement also applies t o
air a n d d r a i n holes a n d cut-outs f o r t h e passage o f
framing members a n d welded joints.
W h e r e these openings a r e carried t o t h e deck
o r b o t t o m shell plating, their length as measured a t
the plating, shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements
o f 1.7.5.8.
1.7.4.4 W e l d e d j o i n t s s h a l l b e a r r a n g e d i n l e a s t
stressed s t r u c t u r a l sections, as f a r as practicable f r o m
a b r u p t changes o f sections, openings a n d details
w h i c h w e r e subject t o cold f o r m i n g .
1.7.4.5 T h e b u t t j o i n t s o f f a c e p l a t e s o f t h e i n tersection girders under variable d y n a m i c loads
(e.g. i n r e g i o n s w i t h h i g h l e v e l o f v i b r a t i o n ) s h a l l b e m a d e
w i t h s m o o t h t r a n s i t i o n b y m e a n s o f d i a m o n d plates.
1.7.4.6 I t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t l o c a l c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f welds, crossings o f w e l d s a t a n acute angle, as
w e l l as close locations o fparallel butts o r fillet welds
a n d b u t t welds, be avoided. T h e distance between
parallel welded joints, whatever their direction, shall
n o t b e less t h a n :
200 m m between parallel butt welds;
7 5 m m b e t w e e n p a r a l l e l fillet a n d b u t t w e l d s ;
5 0 m m b e t w e e n p a r a l l e l fillet a n d b u t t w e l d s o n a
length n o t exceeding 2 m .
O n agreement w i t h t h e Register, t h e distance
between welded j o i n t s m a y be reduced.
T h e angle between t w obutt welds shall n o t be
l e s s t h a n 60 ( F i g . 1 . 7 . 4 . 6 ) .
1.7.4.7 T h e b u t t s ( s e a m s ) i n a s s e m b l i n g j o i n t s o f
t h e p l a t i n g s h a l l b e l o c a t e d a t a d i s t a n c e n o t less t h a n
P a r t II. H u l l
75
j ^ r
KJ J
8
\
F i g . 1.7.4.6
200 m m f r o m t h e bulkheads, decks, inner b o t t o m

plating, deep m e m b e r s fitted parallel t o t h e abovementioned joints.
I n assembling joints, thewelded butts o f built-up
members shall be arranged so that the butts o f a
m e m b e r w e b a r e n o t less t h a n 1 5 0 m m c l e a r o f t h e
b u t t s o f this m e m b e r face plate.
O n agreement w i t h t h e Register, t h e butts o f
w e b s a n d face plates m a y be a r r a n g e d i n t h e same
plane provided that:
full penetration welding is ensured a t the con

n e c t i o n o f t h e w e b t o face p l a t e o n a l e n g t h o f a t least
100 m m each side o f t h e b u t t b y n o n - d e s t r u c t i v e
testing o fthe welded butt i n every third member;
overlapping o f the butt b y the framing elements
(knees, brackets, etc., fitted i n line w i t h t h e w e b ) is
e n s u r e d o n a l e n g t h n o t less t h a n t h e face p l a t e w i d t h
e a c h side o f t h e b u t t .
1.7.5 T y p e s a n d d i m e n s i o n s o f f i l l e t w e l d s .
1.7.5.1 T h e d e s i g n t h r o a t t h i c k n e s s a , i n m m , o f
fillet welds f o r tee-connections f o r m a n u a l a n d semi
a u t o m a t i c w e l d i n g s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
=
(1.7.5.1)
w h e r e <x = w e l d f a c t o r g i v e n i n T a b l e 1.7.5.1-1. F o r s t r u c t u r e s
i n s i d e c a r g o t a n k s o f t a n k e r s <x s h a l l b e i n c r e a s e d b y 0,05;
P = f a c t o r g i v e n i n T a b l e 1.7.5.1-2 d e p e n d i n g o n t h e r a t i o o f
w e l d p i t c h t, i n m m , t o w e l d l e n g t h /, i n m m ( F i g . 1.7.5.1-1);
i = thickness o f the lesser o f the parts joined.
T h e relationship between t h e leg length o f t h e fillet

w e l d a n d t h e h e i g h t o f t h e isosceles t r i a n g l e i n s c r i b e d
i n t o t h e cross section o f t h e w e l d ( F i g . 1.7.5.1-2) shall
b e a s s u m e d a s = 1 , 4 a o r a = 0,7k. W h e n a u t o m a t i c
T a b l e
Nos.
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
1.9
1.10
1.11
1.12
1.13
1.14
1.15
1.16
1.17
1.18
1.19
1.20
1.21
1.22
1.23
1.24
2
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
Connection o f structural members
1.7.5.1-1
Weld factor a
Double bottom
Centre girder a n d duct keel to plate keel
0,35
Ditto to inner bottom plating
0,25
Ditto to inner bottom plating i n theengine r o o m and i nw a yo f thrust bearings
0,35
F l o o r s t o c e n t r e g i r d e r a n d d u c t k e e l u n d e r e n g i n e s , b o i l e r s , t h r u s t b e a r i n g s a n d w i t h i n 0,2510,35
from F.P.
Floors t o centre girder a n d duct keel elsewhere
0,25
Floors t o m a r g i n plate a n d inner b o t t o m plating under the corrugated b u l k h e a d plates
0,35
Watertight floors, portions o fside girders o r centre girder r o u n d the boundaries o ftanks, plating
o f b i l g e w e l l s t o t h e i r b o t t o m p l a t e s a n d t o i n n e r b o t t o m , floors a n d s i d e g i r d e r s
0,35
F l o o r s a n d s i d e g i r d e r s t o s h e l l p l a t i n g w i t h i n 0,251- f r o m F . P .
0,25
Ditto, elsewhere
0,2
F l o o r s a n d side girders t o inner b o t t o m plating u n d e r engines, boilers a n d thrust bearings
0,25
Ditto, elsewhere
0,15
F l o o r s t o s i d e g i r d e r s w i t h i n 0,251- f r o m F . P .
0,25
Ditto, elsewhere
0,2
M a r g i n plate t o shell plating
0,35
Inclined m a r g i n plate to inner b o t t o m plating
0,35
B r a c k e t floors: b o t t o m f r a m e s a n d b r a c k e t s t o s h e l l p l a t i n g
0,15
Reverse frames and brackets to inner bottom plating
0,1
B r a c k e t s , f r a m e s ( r e f e r t o 2.4.4.5) t o d u c t k e e l , p l a t e k e e l , s h e l l a n d i n n e r b o t t o m p l a t i n g
0,35
W i t h l o n g i t u d i n a l f r a m i n g , b o t t o m transverses t o shell, i n n e r b o t t o m plating, centre girder a n d d u c t
k e e l , m a r g i n p l a t e w h e r e t h e f l o o r s p a c i n g i s l e s s t h a n 2,5 m o u t s i d e t h e r e g i o n s d e f i n e d i n 1.4 a n d 1.7
0,25
D i t t o , w i t h floor s p a c i n g 2,5 m a n d m o r e , i n a l l r e g i o n s
0,35
L o n g i t u d i n a l s t o s h e l l p l a t i n g w i t h i n 0,251- f r o m F . P .
0,17
Ditto, elsewhere
0,13
Longitudinals to inner bottom plating
0,1
B r a c k e t s ( r e f e r t o 2.4.2.5.2) t o s h e l l p l a t i n g , m a r g i n p l a t e , i n n e r b o t t o m p l a t i n g a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l s
0,25
Single bottom
Centre girder to plate keel
0,35
Centre girder t o face plate
0,25
Floors t o centre girder a n d longitudinal bulkheads
0,45
F l o o r s a n dside girder w e b s t o their face plates a n d t o shell plating u n d e r engines, boilers a n d
0,25
thrust bearings, a s well a s i n t h e after p e a k
F l o o r s a n d side girder w e b s t o shell plating elsewhere
r e f e r t o 1.8,1.9,1.19 a n d 1.20
F l o o r s a n d side girder w e b s t o their face plates elsewhere
0,15
Side girder webs to
floors
0,2
r e f e r t o 1.21 a n d 1.22
B o t t o m longitudinals t o shell plating
76
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Table 1.7.5.1-1
Nos.
Connection o f structural members
3
3.1
Side framing
F r a m e s ( i n c l u d i n g w e b f r a m e s ) a n d s i d e s t r i n g e r s t o s h e l l p l a t i n g w i t h i n 0,251- f r o m F . P . i n t a n k s ,
i n the engine r o o m , i nw a y o fice strengthening a n d strengthening o f sides o fships m o o r i n g a t sea
alongside other ships o r offshore units
Ditto, elsewhere
F r a m e s ( i n c l u d i n g w e b f r a m e s ) a n d s i d e s t r i n g e r s t o t h e i r f a c e p l a t e s i n r e g i o n s d e f i n e d i n 3.1
Ditto, elsewhere
F r a m e s (including w e b frames) a n d side stringers t o shell plating i n t h e after p e a k
Ditto t o their face plates
Side stringers to w e b frames
Side longitudinals to shell plating
Ditto t o face plates
Bilge brackets to m a r g i n plate a n d face plates o f floors outside double b o t t o m
Ditto to shell plating
Deck framing and decks
Deck transverses a n d girders to deck plating
Cantilever b e a m s to deck plating a n d to their face plates
W e b s o f deck transverses to girder webs a n d bulkheads
B e a m s i n w a y o f tanks, fore a n d after peaks, a s well a s hatch e n d beams, t o deck plating
Ditto, elsewhere
D e c k longitudinals to deck plating a n d their face plates
Stringer plate o f strength deck to shell plating
Ditto f o r other decks a n d platforms
Hatch coamings to deck plating at hatch corners
Ditto, elsewhere
F a c e plates o f hatch coamings to vertical plates o f same
Stays, horizontal a n d vertical stiffeners t o vertical plates o f hatch c o a m i n g s
Side a n d e n d bulkheads o f superstructures a n d deckhouses to deck plating
Other bulkheads o f superstructures a n d deckhouses to deck plating
Bulwark stays to bulwark plating
B u l w a r k stays to deck a n d g u a r d rails
Pillars t o d e c k a n d inner b o t t o m , pillar brackets t o pillars, decks, inner b o t t o m a n d other structures
Bulkheads a n d partitions
F o r e a n dafter p e a k b u l k h e a d s , t a n k (cargo o i l tank) boundaries, b u l k h e a d s (including w a s h
bulkheads) inside after p e a k a r o u n d t h e perimeter
Other watertight b u l k h e a d s (including w a s h bulkheads) t o b o t t o m shell o r inner b o t t o m plating,
shell plating i n w a y o f the bilge
Ditto t o sides a n d deck
Vertical b o xcorrugations o f corrugated bulkheads to inner bottom plating o r upper strake o f
lower stool
Shaft tunnel plating all r o u n d
V e r t i c a l a n d h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners t o b u l k h e a d p l a t e s u n d e r 5.1, a n d t o w a s h b u l k h e a d s
Ditto o f other bulkheads
V e r t i c a l w e b s a n d h o r i z o n t a l g i r d e r s t o b u l k h e a d p l a t e s a c c o r d i n g t o 5.1, a n d t o w a s h b u l k h e a d s
Vertical webs a n d horizontal girders to plating o f other bulkheads
Transverse bulkheads to wash bulkheads
B r a c k e t s a n d stiffeners
Brackets for interconnection o f structural members
S t i f f e n e r s a n d t r i p p i n g b r a c k e t s ( r e f e r t o 1.7.3.2) o f d e e p m e m b e r s , f l o o r s , e t c .
Foundations for m a i n engines, boilers a n d other machinery
Vertical plates t o shell, inner b o t t o m a n d deck plating
T o p plates (face plates) t o l o n g i t u d i n a l girders, brackets, k n e e s
Brackets a n dknees o f foundations t o vertical plates, shell plating, inner b o t t o m (floor face
plates) a n d t o deck plating
Brackets a n d knees t o their face plates
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
4.16
4.17
4.18
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
6
6.1
6.2
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
Ships
continued
W e l d factor a
0,17
0,13
0,13
0,1
0,25
0,17
0,25
0,17
0,13
0.35
0,25
0,17
0,13
0,25
0,25
0,15
0,1
0,1
0,45
0,35*
0,45
0,35
0,25
0,2
0,35
0,25
0,2
0,35
0,35
2
0,35
0,35
0,25
0,35
0,35
0,15
0,1
0,17
0,13
0,13
0,1
0.35
0,35
0,1
0,35"
0,45
0,35"
2
0,25
'Double continuous weld shall b e applied.

F u l l penetration welding shall b e provided.
F i l l e t w e l d s a t t a c h i n g f a c e p l a t e s t o m e m b e r w e b s s h a l l b e w e l d e d i n w a y o f b r a c k e t s w i t h w e l d f a c t o r 0,35.
T h e face plates shall b e welded t o t h ebrackets b y t h e s a m e weld a s that o f the face plate o f the m e m b e r i n t h e s p a n between t h e
brackets.
"The structures under thegirder webs, brackets a n d knees o ffoundations shall b e welded to the inner b o t t o m a n d decks b y double
c o n t i n u o u s f i l l e t w e l d s w i t h f a c t o r 0,35.
2
P a r t II. H u l l
11
T a b l e
T y p e o f fillet w e l d
Double
continuous
1.7.5.1-2
1,0
Staggered, chain a n d scalloped
t/l
Single continuous
2,0
Single intermittent
2t/l
welding is employed instead o f the proposed m a n u a l

welding, the w e l d throat o r leg length, whichever is
adopted i n calculation, m a y be reduced i n height f o r
single-run welds b y n o t m o r e t h a n 3 0 p e r cent. F o r
m u l t i r u n welds t h e percentage o f t h e above reduction
is subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r .
I f t h e thickness o f t h e thinner o f t h e items t o be
j o i n e d i s less t h a n h a l f t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e t h i c k e r
item, t h e n t h e leg lengths a r e subject t o special c o n
sideration b y the Register.
T h e t h r o a t thickness a o fa fillet w e l d shall n o t be
less t h a n :
2,5 m m f o r j < 4 m m ;
3,0 m m f o r 4 < j < 1 0 m m ;
3,5 m m f o r 1 0 < J < 15 m m ;
a)
0,25J f o r s > 15 m m .
T h e dimensions o f fillet welds t a k e n f r o m calcu
l a t i o n s s h a l l n o t e x c e e d a^0,ls
(k^s).
1.7.5.2 O v e r l a p p i n g connections, i f a l l o w e d (refer
t o 1.7.2.1), s h a l l b e w e l d e d a l l r o u n d b y c o n t i n u o u s
weld w i t h factor 0,4. T h e length o f overlap, i n m m ,
s h a l l b e n o t l e s s t h a n b = 2s + 2 5 , b u t n o t m o r e t h a n
5 0 m m (s = t h i c k n e s s o f t h e t h i n n e r o f t h e p l a t e s
joined).
1.7.5.3 T h e p r i m a r y m e m b e r s (beams, d e c k
longitudinals, frames, b u l k h e a d stiffeners, etc.) shall
be connected t o s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s (deck girders,
d e c k transverses, side stringers, h o r i z o n t a l girders,
etc.) b y w e l d s w i t h f a c t o r 0,35.
T h e sectional area /, i n c m , o f t h e welds con
necting the primary members t o supporting members
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
2
/ =
25pal/a
(1.7.5.3)
where p = pressure, i n k P a , specified i n appropriate chapters o f

this P a r t o f the Rules;
a = spacing o fmembers, i n m ;
/ = span o fmember, in m ;
f o r <y, r e f e r t o 1.1.4.3.
up
T h e w e l d sectional a r e a / i s determined b y s u m m i n g
t h e results obtained b y m u l t i p l y i n g t h e t h r o a t
b)
t
U u .
1
'
'
\
/
F i g . 1.7.5.1-1
W e l d types:
a staggered intermittent; b chain intermittent; scalloped; d single intermittent; e staggered spot
78
1,75%
2a
io
Ships
(1.7.5.4.3)
w h e r e S\ = a r e a o f w e l d c o n n e c t i n g l o n g i t u d i n a l b u t t e n d s t o
transverse bulkheads, i n c m ;
a = accepted design thickness o f fillet w e l d connecting
bracket t o longitudinal, i n m m .
2
1.7.5.5 W h e r e plate thickness exceeds 18 m m , f o r

c o n n e c t i o n s m a d e b y fillet w e l d s i n w h i c h excessive
stress i n Z - d i r e c t i o n m a y b e c a u s e d b y w e l d i n g p r o
t h i c k n e s s b y t h e w e l d l e n g t h o f e a c h p o r t i o n o f t h e cess o r b y e x t e r n a l l o a d s , Z - s t e e l ( r e f e r t o 1.2.2.2)
shall be used o r structural measures shall be taken t o
connection o f member web t o supporting member.
p r e v e n t l a m e l l a r t e a r i n g . I n a l l cases, r e d u c i n g o f re
1.7.5.4 T h e f r a m i n g m e m b e r s c u t a t i n t e r s e c t i o n w i t h
s i d u a l stress l e v e l s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d .
other structures shall be i n g o o d alignment. A n o n a l i g n m e n t shall n o t exceed h a l f t h e thickness o f t h e
1.7.5.6 D o u b l e c o n t i n u o u s w e l d s s h a l l b e used i n
member. W h e r e continuity is obtained b y directing
the f o l l o w i n g regions (refer also t o F o o t n o t e 1 t o
welding o f the m e m b e r s t o t h e structure involved, t h e T a b l e 1.7.5.1-1):
t h r o a t thickness o f the w e l d shall be determined con
.1 within 0,25L f r o m t h ef o r w a r d perpendicular
sidering the thickness o f the m e m b e r concerned. Other
i n ships w i t h l e n g t h L ^ 3 0 m , f o r c o n n e c t i o n o f
wise, t h r o u g h penetration welding shall be performed. I f
f r a m i n g m e m b e r s t o b o t t o m shell, a n d i n case o f o n l y
t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e t h i n n e r o f t h e p a r t s j o i n e d i s less t h a n
a single b o t t o m i n this region, also f o r w e l d i n g o f the
0,7 o f t h e thickness o f t h e o t h e r part, t h e t h r o a t thickness
w e b s o f centre girder, side girders a n d f l o o r s t o face
shall be calculated w i t h regard t o the particular loading
plates o f these members;
conditions i n w a y o f the intersection.
.2 i n r e g i o n I o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g i n ships o f ca
tegories A r c 9 , A r c 8 , A r c 7 , A r c 6 , A r c 5 , A r c 4 a n d i n
W h e r e longitudinals a r e c u t a t transverse bulk
r e g i o n A I o fcategory Ice3 ships, f o r c o n n e c t i o n o f
heads, t h e construction used f o r their attachment
side f r a m i n g t o shell p l a t i n g ;
shall c o m p l y w i t h the following requirements:
.1 w h e n t h e brackets are fitted i n line o n b o t h
.3 i n w a y o f f o u n d a t i o n s f o r m a c h i n e r y a n d
sides o f t h e b u l k h e a d , t h e area / i n c m , o f t h e w e l d
e q u i p m e n t w h i c h m a y constitute a source o f v i b r a t i o n
connecting t h e brackets (and t h e longitudinal butt
(refer t o 1.7.1.6), f o r c o n n e c t i o n o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s t o
ends, i f they a r e welded) t o transverse bulkheads
b o t t o m a n d inner b o t t o m platings, deck f r a m i n g t o
( F i g . 1 . 7 . 5 . 4 a) s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y
deck plating;
the f o r m u l a
.4 f o r the structures i n the after peak;
.5 i n w a y o f s u p p o r t s a n d m e m b e r ends, f o r
(1.7.5.4.1)
fx = 1 , 7 5 S
connection o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s t o the plating (refer
t o 1.7.5.8);
w h e r e S = cross-sectional area o f the l o n g i t u d i n a l (effective flange
excluded), i n c m ;
.6 i n t a n k s ( i n c l u d i n g d o u b l e b o t t o m t a n k s ) , ex
.2 i f o n e c o n t i n u o u s b r a c k e t plate w e l d e d i n t h e clusive the t a n k s f o r fuel o i l o r l u b r i c a t i n g o i l ;
.7 f o r structures p r o v i d i n g tightness.
appropriate slot cut i n the bulkhead plating is fitted
( F i g . 1 . 7 . 5 . 4 Z>), t h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f t h e b r a c k e t a t
1.7.5.7 Single c o n t i n u o u s w e l d s shall n o t b e used:
t h e b u l k h e a d s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 1 , 2 5 % ;
. 1 w i t h i n 0 , 2 L f r o m F . P . f o r c o n n e c t i o n o f side
f r a m i n g t o shell plating, a n d w i t h i n 0 , 2 5 L f r o m F . P .
a)
b)
for connection o f b o t t o m f r a m i n g t o shell plating;
.2 f o r structures subject t o intense v i b r a t i o n (refer
t
o
1
.7.1.6);
J
.3 i n r e g i o n I o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f ships;
.4 f o r w e l d i n g o f side f r a m i n g i n ships m o o r i n g
alongside o t h e r ships a t sea o r offshore units;
.5 f o r c o n n e c t i o n s w h e r e t h e angle b e t w e e n a
1
m e m b e r w e b a n d t h e p l a t i n g d i f f e r s b y m o r e t h a n 10
f r o m a right angle.
1.7.5.8 F o r a l ltypes o f i n t e r m i t t e n t j o i n t s t h e
F i g . 1.7.5.4
w e l d l e n g t h ( r e f e r t o F i g . 1 . 7 . 5 . 1 - 1 ) s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 15a ( f o r a, r e f e r t o 1 . 7 . 5 . 1 ) o r 5 0 m m , w h i c h e v e r
.3 t h e a r m l e n g t h l o f t h e b r a c k e t , i n m m , o v e r
i s t h e g r e a t e r . T h e s p a c i n g o f w e l d s (t l) f o r c h a i n
t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y
w e l d s a n d s c a l l o p e d f r a m i n g , a n d (t 2l)/2
f o r s t a g g e r e d w e l d s ) s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 15s (s = p l a t e
the f o r m u l a
F i g . 1.7.5.1-2
br
P a r t II. H u l l
79
t h i c k n e s s o r w e b t h i c k n e s s , w h i c h e v e r i s less). I n a n y
case, t h e spacing o f w e l d s o r scallop l e n g t h , w h e r e
scalloped frames a r e used, shall n o t exceed 1 5 0 m m .
I n t e r m i t t e n t o r single c o n t i n u o u s welds connecting
the f r a m i n g m e m b e r s t o t h e plating shall be substituted i n w a y o f supports a n d m e m b e r ends b y
double continuous welds having the same throat
thickness as t h e i n t e r m i t t e n t o r single c o n t i n u o u s
welds o f the remaining part o f the members. T h e
l e n g t h o f j o i n t s w e l d e d f r o m b o t h sides s h a l l b e n o t
less t h a n t h e s u m o f b r a c k e t a r m a n d t h e w e b d e p t h , i f
a bracket is fitted, a n d shall be twice t h ew e b depth i f
n o bracket is fitted. W h e r e t h e f r a m i n g m e m b e r s pass
t h r o u g h supporting structures (deck transverses, deck
girders, floors, etc.), t h e aforesaid r e i n f o r c e m e n t shall
be p r o v i d e d o n b o t h sides o f s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r .
W h e r e single c o n t i n u o u s welds a r e used, b a c k r u n s a t
least 5 0 m m l o n g a n d spaced n o t m o r e t h a n 5 0 0 m m
a p a r t s h a l l b e w e l d e d o n t h e reverse side o f t h e d e t a i l
joined. T h ethroat thickness o fback w e l d shall be the
same as t h a t o f t h e single c o n t i n u o u s w e l d .
1.7.5.9 S t a g g e r e d s p o t w e l d s a n d s i n g l e i n t e r m i t t e n t w e l d s ( r e f e r t o F i g . 1 . 7 . 5 . 1 - 1 d, e) m a y b e u s e d
in t h e structures o f deckhouses a n dsuperstructures o f
the second tier a n d above, o n decks inside first tier
superstructures, casings, enclosures inside t h e h u l l ,
n o t subject t o intense v i b r a t i o n a n di m p a c t loads a n d
n o t affected b y active c o r r o s i o n , p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e
m a x i m u m plate o r m e m b e r w e b thickness is n o t m o r e
t h a n 7 m m . T h e s p o t d i a m e t e r d, i n m m , s h a l l n o t b e
less t h a n
d = IJZjrts
(1.7.5.9)
w h e r e t = p i t c h o f s p o t w e l d ( r e f e r t o F i g . 1.7.5.1-1);
= 80 m m ;
f o r a a n d s, r e f e r t o 1.7.5.1.
I f d > 1 2 m m , as d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e F o r m u l a (1.7.5.9), t h e w e l d pitch shall be increased o r

another type o fw e l d shall be chosen.
1.7.5.10 S c a l l o p e d c o n s t r u c t i o n s h a l l n o t b e u s e d :
.1 f o r side f r a m i n g w i t h i n 0 , 2 L f r o m F . P . a n d f o r
connection o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s t o b o t t o m shell
plating within 0,25L from F.P.;
.2 i n r e g i o n s w i t h h i g h l e v e l o f v i b r a t i o n ( r e f e r
t o 1.7.1.6);
.3 f o r s i d e a n d b o t t o m f r a m i n g i n r e g i o n I o f i c e
belt a n d f o r side f r a m i n g i n ships m o o r i n g a t sea
alongside o t h e r ships o r offshore units;
.4 f o r c o n n e c t i o n o f b o t t o m c e n t r e g i r d e r t o p l a t e
keel;
.5 f o r d e c k a n d i n n e r b o t t o m f r a m i n g i n l o c a t i o n s
w h e r e containers, trailers a n dvehicles m a y be stowed
and for upper deck f r a m i n g under deckhouses i n w a y
o f t h e i r e n d s a t a d i s t a n c e less t h a n 0 , 2 5 o f t h e
deckhouse height f r o m theintersection o f deckhouse
side a n d e n d b u l k h e a d .
1.7.5.11 I n s c a l l o p e d c o n s t r u c t i o n ( r e f e r t o
F i g . 1.7.5.1-1) t h e w e l d i n g s h a l l b e carried r o u n d t h e
ends o f a l l lugs. T h ed e p t h o fscallop i nm e m b e r w e b
shall n o t exceed 0,25 o fthe m e m b e r d e p t h o r 7 5 m m ,
w h i c h e v e r i s less. T h e s c a l l o p s s h a l l b e r o u n d e d w i t h
r a d i u s n o t less t h a n 2 5 m m . T h e s p a c i n g o f l u g s /
s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h e l e n g t h o f t h e s c a l l o p .
Scallops i n frames, beams, stiffeners a n d similar
structures shall be kept clear o f the ends o f structures,
as w e l l a s i n t e r s e c t i o n s w i t h s u p p o r t i n g s t r u c t u r e s
(decks, side stringers, d e c k girders, e t c . ) b y a t least
twice t h e m e m b e r depth, a n d f r o m t h e toes o f t h e
brackets b y a t least h a l f t h e m e m b e r depth.
1.7.5.12 I n t h e f r a m i n g o f t a n k s ( i n c l u d i n g d o u ble-bottom tanks a n dthe tanks o f tankers), provision
shall b e m a d e f o ropenings t o ensure free a i r f l o w t o
air pipes, as w e l l as a n o v e r f l o w o f liquid.
It is recommended that openings i n longitudinals
shall be elliptical w i t h a distance f r o m t h e edge o f
opening t o deck plating o r b o t t o m shell plating n o t
less t h a n 2 0 m m .
I n w a y o f a i r a n d drain holes, cut-outs f o r the
passage o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s a n d welded j o i n t s t h e
joints shall be welded as double welds o n a length o f
50 m o n b o t h sides o f t h e o p e n i n g .
1.7.5.13 W h e r e w e l d i n g o f t e e - j o i n t s b y f i l l e t
w e l d s i s i m p r a c t i c a b l e , p l u g w e l d s ( F i g . 1 . 7 . 5 . 1 3 a) o r
t e n o n w e l d s ( F i g . 1 . 7 . 5 . 1 3 b) m a y b e u s e d .
T h e l e n g t h / a n d p i t c h t shall be d e t e r m i n e d asf o r
scalloped frames under 1.7.5.11.
F o r p l u g w e l d i n g , t h e slots shall be o fcircular o r
linear f o r m , w i t h throat thickness o f w e l d equal t o0,5
o f plate thickness. I n general, t h eends o fslots i n p l u g
w e l d i n g shall be m a d e semicircular. T h e linear slots
s h a l l b e a r r a n g e d w i t h l o n g e r side i n t h e d i r e c t i o n o f
t h e p a r t s t o b e j o i n e d (refer t o F i g . 1.7.5.13 b).
Complete filling o f slot is n o t permitted.
I n regions o f h i g h level o f v i b r a t i o n (refer
t o 1.7.1.6) w e l d e d j o i n t s w i t h c o m p l e t e r o o t penet r a t i o n a n d p e r m a n e n t b a c k i n g r i n g ( F i g . 1.7.5.13 c)
are r e c o m m e n d e d instead o f t e n o n welds o r p l u g
welds.
1.7.5.14 W h e r e a l u m i n i u m a l l o y s t r u c t u r e s a r e w e l ded according t o T a b l e 1.7.5.1-1, i t is n o t permitted:
.1 t o u s e i n t e r m i t t e n t w e l d s (except i n scalloped
construction);
.2 t o u s e s c a l l o p e d c o n s t r u c t i o n i n r e g i o n s o f h i g h
level o f v i b r a t i o n (refer t o 1.7.1.6).
T h e t h r o a t t h i c k n e s s o f w e l d s s h a l l b e n o t less
t h a n 3 m m , b u t n o t m o r e t h a n 0 , 5 J ( f o r s, r e f e r
t o 1.7.5.1).
80
Rules
2 G E N E R A L R E Q U I R E M E N T S F O RH U L L
2.1 G E N E R A L
2.1.1 A p p l i c a t i o n .
The requirements given i n this Section apply to
sea-going ships o f a l l types a n d purposes, h a v i n g reg a r d t o a d d i t i o n a l p r o v i s i o n s o f S e c t i o n 3.
The Section contains the requirements for hull
structures: shell plating, platings, p r i m a r y a n d deep
m e m b e r s , p i l l a r s , stems, s t e r n f r a m e s , seatings, etc.
2.1.2 S y m b o l s .
For the purpose o f this Chapter, the following
L \ = length o f the compartment, i n m , measured
as f o l l o w s :
w i t h p l a n e b u l k h e a d s , as t h e distance b e t w e e n
bulkhead platings;
w i t h c o r r u g a t e d b u l k h e a d s , as t h e distance bet w e e n c o r r u g a t i o n axes or the axes o f trapezoidal
stools at the i n n e r b o t t o m level;
w i t h c o f f e r d a m b u l k h e a d s , as t h e distance bet w e e n m i d d l e c o f f e r d a m axes;
Bi = b r e a d t h o f the c o m p a r t m e n t , i n m , m e a s u r e d a t its m i d - l e n g t h as f o l l o w s :
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
STRUCTURES
for single s k i n c o n s t r u c t i o n , as t h e distance bet w e e n t h e sides o r b e t w e e n t h e side a n d t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d at the u p p e r edge o f the floor;
for d o u b l e s k i n c o n s t r u c t i o n , as t h e distance between inner skins or between the inner skin and the
longitudinal bulkhead;
w h e r e h o p p e r side t a n k s a r e f i t t e d , as t h e distance
between hopper tanks at the inner b o t t o m level or
between the longitudinal bulkhead and the hopper
side t a n k ;
where several longitudinal bulkheads are fitted,
as t h e s p a c i n g o f l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s o r as t h e
distance between the l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d nearest
t o t h e side a n d t h e a p p r o p r i a t e side;
/ = span o f the m e m b e r , i n m , defined i n 1.6.3.1,
unless p r o v i d e d otherwise;
h = depth o f the member web, i n cm;
a = spacing o f p r i m a r y or deep m e m b e r s concerned (longitudinal or transverse framing); where
the spacing varies, a is the h a l f - s u m o f the distances
o f adjacent m e m b e r s f r o m the m e m b e r concerned;
s = plate thickness, i n m m ;
W = section m o d u l u s o f members, i n c m ;
3
P a r t II. H u l l
81
/ = m o m e n t o finertia o fmembers, i nc m ;
As = c o r r o s i o n a l l o w a n c e t o t h e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s ,
i n m m (refer t o 1.1.5.1);
co = f a c t o r t a k i n g a c c o u n t o f c o r r o s i o n a l l o w a n c e
t o t h e section m o d u l u s o f m e m b e r s (refer t o 1.1.5.3).
c
less. T h e c o r n e r s o f t h e t h i c k e n e d i n s e r t p l a t e s h a l l b e
rounded. T h ethickness o f the thickened insert plate
1,5s w h e n s < 2 0 m m ;
30 m m w h e n 2 0 < J < 2 4 m m ;
1,25J w h e n s > 2 4m m
w h e r e ,s = t h i c k n e s s o f s h e l l p l a t i n g i n w a y o f t h e o p e n i n g .
2.2 S H E L L
PLATING
2.2.1 G e n e r a l a n d s y m b o l s .
2.2.1.1 R e q u i r e m e n t s a r e g i v e n i n t h i s C h a p t e r
for t h e t h i c k n e s s o f b o t t o m a n d side shell p l a t i n g ,
thickness a n d w i d t h o f sheerstrake, plate keel, garb o a r d strakes, as w e l l as t h e requirements f o r t h e
m i n i m u m s t r u c t u r a l thicknesses o f these m e m b e r s
and construction o f openings therein. T h e requirem e n t s a r e applicable t o a l l regions over t h e ship's
length a n d depth unless a d d i t i o n a l requirements f o r
shell p l a t i n g thickness a r e p u t f o r w a r d .
2.2.1.2 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h i s C h a p t e r t h e f o l lowing symbols have been adopted:
p = design static pressure according t o 1.3.2.1;
p = design pressure d u e t o t h e m o t i o n o f ship
h u l l a b o u t w a v e c o n t o u r a c c o r d i n g t o 1.3.2.2;
p = design pressure f r o m carried liquid cargo,
ballast o r o i l fuel according t o 1.3.4.2.1.
2.2.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
2.2.2.1 N o o p e n i n g s s h a l l b e c u t i n t h e u p p e r e d g e
o f sheerstrake o r i n t h e side shell p l a t i n g i f t h e distance between t h e upper edge o f o p e n i n g a n d t h e
s t r e n g t h d e c k i s less t h a n h a l f t h e o p e n i n g d e p t h . A l l
o t h e r cases s h a l l b e specially c o n s i d e r e d b y t h e R e g ister.
R e c t a n g u l a r o p e n i n g s c u t i n t h e side shell p l a t i n g
shall have their corners rounded w i t h the radius equal
to 0,1 o f t h e opening depth o r w i d t h , whichever is
less, b u t n o t less t h a n 5 0 m m .
I n a l l cases w h e n t h e o p e n i n g s m a y r e s u l t i n
considerable reduction o f longitudinal o r local
strength o f t h e ship, p r o v i s i o n shall be m a d e f o r rei n f o r c e m e n t o f such areas.
Reinforcement b y means o f thickened insert
plates is required f o r openings located w i t h i n
0,35L
f r o m t h e m i d s h i p region, t h e distance f r o m their
u p p e r edge t o t h e s t r e n g t h d e c k b e i n g less t h a n t h e
depth o f opening. T h em i n i m u m w i d t h o f thickened
insert plates, as measured f r o m t h e upper o r l o w e r
edge o fopening, shall be equal t o 0,25 o fthe d e p t h o r
l e n g t h o f t h e o p e n i n g , w h i c h e v e r i s less; t h e t o t a l
w i d t h measured outside t h e opening shall be greater
t h a n t h e m i n i m u m thickness b y a t least 0,25 o ft h e
d e p t h o r l e n g t h o f t h e o p e n i n g , w h i c h e v e r i s less. T h e
m i n i m u m distance f r o m t h e e n d o f t h e thickened i n sert plate t o t h enearest edge o f o p e n i n g , as m e a s u r e d
a l o n g t h e length, o ft h e ship shall be e q u a l t o a t least
0,35 o f t h e d e p t h o r l e n g t h o f opening, w h i c h e v e r is
s t
A thicknened insert plate m a y be fitted a r o u n d

the perimeter o f t h e opening.
I n ships o f restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 - R S N ,
R2-RSN(4,5), R 3 - R S N a n d R 3 w i t h shelter upper decks
or deck stringers o f a l o n g i t u d i n a l cargo h a t c h c o a m ings o r t h e like, a l l t h e t o p free edges o f t h e a b o v e
structures, as w e l l as free edges o f large c u t o u t s i n shell
plating shall be s m o o t h i n t h e ship's h u l l l o n g i t u d i n a l
direction a n d r o u n d e d i n t h e transverse o n e .
2.2.2.2 T h e a r e a o f t r a n s i t i o n f r o m s h e e r s t r a k e t o
d e c k s t r i n g e r m a y b e r o u n d e d . I n t h i s case, t h e r a d i u s
o f c u r v a t u r e o f s h e e r s t r a k e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
15 t i m e s t h e s h e e r s t r a k e t h i c k n e s s . N o o p e n i n g s a r e
p e r m i t t e d i n t h e r o u n d e d area.
2.2.3 L o a d s o n s h e l l p l a t i n g .
The external pressure p , i n k P a , o n t h e b o t t o m
a n d side s h e l l p l a t i n g i s d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
P = Pst + Pw
(2.2.3-1)
F o r ships w i t h d o u b l e b o t t o m a n d d o u b l e skin
side c o n s t r u c t i o n i n t e n d e d f o r l i q u i d b a l l a s t a n d f o r
tankers w i t h neither double b o t t o m n o r double skin
s i d e c o n s t r u c t i o n , t h e i n t e r n a l p r e s s u r e p=p
shall be
determined additionally b y F o r m u l a e (1.3.4.2.1).
W h e r e p > p , counterpressure shall be considered
c
s t
P=Pc-(Pst-Pw)-
(2.2.3-2)
F o r ships w i t h d o u b l e b o t t o m a n d d o u b l e skin
side c o n s t r u c t i o n , p a n d p s h a l l be d e t e r m i n e d i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.3.2as i n t h e case o f t h e ballasted
ships.
A s t h edesign pressure, b o t h external a n d i n t e r n a l
pressure m a ybe adopted, w h i c h e v e r is t h e greater.
The pressure p above t h e s u m m e r l o a d waterline
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n p ^ , i n k P a , d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formula
s
Pmin = 0 , 0 3 L + 5 .
(2.2.3-3)
W h e r e L > 250 m , L shall be taken equal t o 250 m .

v a l u e o f pmm m a y b e r e d u c e d b y m u l t i p l y i n g b y t h e
f a c t o r cp o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1 . 3 . 1 . 5 .
2.2.4 S c a n t l i n g s o f p l a t e s t r u c t u r e s o f s h e l l p l a t i n g .
2.2.4.1 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f b o t t o m a n d side s h e l l
p l a t i n g s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (1.6.4.4) taking:
r
82
Rules
m = 15,8;
for b o t t o m shell plating
= 0,3fcg^0,6
i n the midship region f o r
L > 6 5 m a n d transverse f r a m i n g system;
k = 0,6i n themidship region for L = 12 m a n d
transverse f r a m i n g system.
W h e r e 12 < L < 65, k shall be determined b y
linear interpolation taking k = 0,45f o rL = 65m ;
k = 0,6 i n the midship region f o r longitudinal
f r a m i n g system;
k = 0 , 7 a t t h e e n d s o f t h e s h i p w i t h i n 0,1 L f r o m
the fore o r after perpendicular.
F o r regions between t h e midship region a n d the
above portions o f ship's ends, k shall be determined
by linear interpolation;
f o r side shell p l a t i n g i n w a y o f (0,4 0,5)-D f r o m
the base line
k = 0,6 i n the midship region;
k = 0,1 a t t h e e n d s o f t h e s h i p w i t h i n 0 , \ L f r o m
F o r regions between t h e midship region a n d the
by linear interpolation.
F o r region b e l o w 0,4D f r o m t h e base line, k is
determined b y linear interpolation between t h e values
o f k f o r b o t t o m shell p l a t i n g a n d t h o s e f o r side shell
plating i n w a y o f (0,4 0,5)/) f r o m t h e base line.
F o r r e g i o n a b o v e 0,5-D f r o m t h e base l i n e , k i s
determined b y linear interpolation between k f o r
u p p e r d e c k level a n d k f o r side shell p l a t i n g i n w a y
o f (0,4 0 , 5 ) D f r o m t h e base line.
k for upper deck level is determined i n t h e same
w a y as k f o r b o t t o m shell plating, p a r a m e t e r k
being substituted f o rparameter k
a
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
2.2.4.5 T h e s h e e r s t r a k e w i d t h b , i n m m , s h a l l n o t
be less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a ( 2 . 2 . 4 . 4 ) t a k i n g
b n o t greater than 2000 m m .
T h e sheerstrake thickness amidships shall n o t be
less t h a n t h a t o f a d j o i n i n g s t r a k e s o f side s h e l l o r d e c k
plating (stringer plate), whichever is t h e greater. A t
ends, t h e sheerstrake thickness m a y be equal t o that
o f side shell p l a t i n g i n this r e g i o n .
2.2.4.6 T h e s h e l l p l a t e s a d j o i n i n g t h e s t e r n f r a m e ,
as w e l l a s t h e p l a t e s t o w h i c h t h e a r m s o f p r o p e l l e r s h a f t
b r a c k e t s a r e a t t a c h e d , s h a l l h a v e a t h i c k n e s s s, i n m m ,
o f n o t less t h a n :
s
s = 0 , l L + 4,4 f o rL < 80 m ;
s = 0,055L + 8 for
80m .
(2.2.4.6-1)
(2.2.4.6-2)

T h e aforesaid thickness shall be ensured after h o t
bending, i f applied.
2.2.4.7 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f g a r b o a r d s t r a k e s d i r e c t l y
a d j o i n i n g t h e b a r k e e l s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t r e
quired for t h eplate keel, a n d their w i d t h shall n o t be
less t h a n h a l f t h e w i d t h r e q u i r e d f o r t h e p l a t e k e e l i n
accordance w i t h 2.2.4.4.
2.2.4.8 I n a n y c a s e , t h e t h i c k n e s s o f s h e l l p l a t
i n g s, i n m m , s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n :
Jmin = 3 , 1 + 0 , 1 2 L f o r L < 3 0 m ;
J m i n = ( 5 , 5 + 0,04^ f o r
30 m
(2.2.4.8-1)
(2.2.4.8-2)
w h e r e f o r |, r e f e r t o 1.1.4.3.
k =W
B
where
F
B
\x\W ;k =W
D
F
D
\x\W
(2.2.4.1)
W =
requiredhull section m o d u l u s amidships i n accordance

w i t h 1.4.6 a n d a s s u m i n g | = 1 ;
WB a n d Wr> = a c t u a l s e c t i o n m o d u l i f o r b o t t o m a n d d e c k a m i d s h i p s
a c c o r d i n g t o 1.4.8;
n = f a c t o r i n d i c a t i n g a p p l i c a t i o n o f t h e s t e e l m e c h a n i c a l
p r o p e r t i e s f o r t h e m e m b e r f o r w h i c h k i s d e t e r m i
n e d , t o b e e s t a b l i s h e d o n t h e b a s i s o f 1.1.4.3.
2.2.4.2 T h e b u c k l i n g s t r e n g t h o f b o t t o m p l a t i n g ,
strake a b o v e bilge, sheerstrake a n d strake b e l o w i n
the m i d s h i p region o f ships over 65 m i n length shall
be v e r i f i e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.5.
2.2.4.3 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f b i l g e s t r a k e s h a l l b e
a d o p t e d e q u a l t o t h a t o f b o t t o m o r side shell p l a t i n g ,
2.2.4.4 T h e w i d t h o f p l a t e k e e l b , i n m m , s h a l l
k
= 800+ 5L;
(2.2.4.4)
i n t h i s case, b n e e d n o t exceed 2 0 0 0 m m .
T h e thickness o f plate keel shall be 2 m m greater
t h a n that o f b o t t o m shell plating.
k

W h e r e t h e a d o p t e d s p a c i n g i s less t h a n t h e s t a n d a r d
o n e ( r e f e r t o 1.1.3) f o r s h i p s o f u n r e s t r i c t e d a r e a o f
n a v i g a t i o n a n d restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R l , a r e
duction o f m i n i m u m thickness o f shell plating is per
m i t t e d i n p r o p o r t i o n t o t h e ratio o f adopted spacing t o
standard spacing b u t n o t m o r e t h a n 10 p e r cent.
2.2.5 S p e c i a l r e q u i r e m e n t s .
2.2.5.1 T h e g r a d e o f s t e e l u s e d f o r t h e s h e e r s t r a k e
shall be t h e same as that used f o r t h e strength deck.
T h e u p p e r edge o f sheerstrake shall be s m o o t h , a n d
their corners shall be w e l l r o u n d e d i n t h e transverse
direction.
R e q u i r e m e n t t o t h e edge design covers also free
edges o f c o n t i n u o u s l o n g i t u d i n a l structures located
above t h e sheerstrake a n d ensuring longitudinal
strength o f t h e ship's hull.
2.2.5.2 F o r s h i p s o f 6 5 m a n d a b o v e , w i t h i n
0,6L amidships n o parts shall be welded t o the upper
edge o f sheerstrake o r t o t h e sheerstrake r o u n d i n g .
2.2.5.3 B i l g e k e e l s s h a l l b e a t t a c h e d t o t h e s h e l l
plating b y means o f a n intermediate member, i.e. a
flat b a r welded t o t h e shell plating w i t h a n a l l - r o u n d
c o n t i n u o u s fillet w e l d . C o n n e c t i o n o f t h e b i l g e k e e l t o
P a r t II. H u l l
83
this m e m b e r shall be weaker t h a n that o fthe m e m b e r

to t h e shell plating. H o w e v e r , t h e connection shall be
strong e n o u g h t o keep t h e bilge keels u n d e r t h e o r dinary operating conditions o f t h e ship. T h e intermediate m e m b e r shall be made continuous over the
length o fbilge keel. Bilge keels shall t e r m i n a t e i n t h e
stiffened area o f shell plating a n d shall be gradually
tapered a t ends.
The bilge keel a n d t h e intermediate m e m b e r shall
be o f t h e s a m e steel grade as t h e shell p l a t i n g i n t h i s
region.
2.2.5.4 I n b o t t o m - a n d - s i d e f i t t i n g s , t h e w e l d e d
b r a n c h w a l l t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f
shell plating determined according t o 2.2.4.8,
or 12 m m ,w h i c h e v e r is t h e greater.
2.3 S I N G L E
B O T T O M
for t h e b o t t o m f r a m i n g o f ships h a v i n g n o d o u b l e
b o t t o m a n d i n w a yw h e r e i t is o m i t t e d , as w e l l as f o r
the floors, centre girder, b o t t o m longitudinals a n d
the brackets b y w h i c h they are connected.
L = length o fthe compartment concerned (hold,
t a n k , engine r o o m , etc.), i n m ;
B\ = breadth o f the c o m p a r t m e n t concerned, i n m ;
B = breadth o f ship, i n m , i n w a y o f considered
section a t the level o f s u m m e r load waterline.
2.3.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
2.3.2.1 I n t a n k e r s o f 8 0 m a n d a b o v e , l o n g i t u d i n a l
f r a m i n g shall be p r o v i d e d f o r single b o t t o m .
2.3.2.2 T h e s t r u c t u r e o f c e n t r e g i r d e r s h a l l s a t i s f y
the following requirements:
.1 t h e c e n t r e g i r d e r s h a l l e x t e n d t h r o u g h o u t t h e
ship's l e n g t h as f a r as practicable. I n ships greater
t h a n 65 m i n length, a continuous centre girder is
recommended between transverse bulkheads;
.2 w h e n t h e b o t t o m i s f r a m e d l o n g i t u d i n a l l y , t h e
centre girder s h a l l b e stiffened o n b o t h sides w i t h
flanged brackets fitted between t h e b o t t o m transverses a n d b e t w e e n b o t t o m transverse a n d transverse
bulkhead. T h e distance between brackets, between
bracket a n d b o t t o m transverse o r between bracket
a n d t r a n s v e r s e b u l k h e a d s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 1,2 m .
T h e brackets s h a l l b e c a r r i e d t o t h e face p l a t e o f t h e
centre girder i f t h e w e b o f t h e latter is stiffened vertically o r t o t h e second h o r i z o n t a l stiffener f r o m b e l o w i f
the centre girder w e b is stiffened horizontally.
I n w a yo f b o t t o m plating, t h e brackets shall extend t o t h e nearest b o t t o m l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d shall be
welded thereto.
x
2.3.2.3 W h e n t h e b o t t o m i s f r a m e d t r a n s v e r s e l y ,
floors shall generally be fitted a t every frame.
W h e r e t h e floors are c u t a t t h e centre girder, their
face plates s h a l l b e b u t t - w e l d e d t o t h e face plate o f t h e
centre girder. I f t h e actual section m o d u l u s o f floors
exceeds t h e v a l u e r e q u i r e d b y 2 . 3 . 4 . 1 . 2 less t h a n
1,5 t i m e s , t h e w i d t h o f t h e i r f a c e p l a t e s s h a l l b e d o u bled, w h e r e a t t a c h e d t o t h e centre g i r d e r face plate, o r
h o r i z o n t a l b r a c k e t s o f a d e q u a t e size s h a l l b e f i t t e d .
T h e f l o o r face plates m a y be replaced b y flanges.
Flanged floors are n o tpermitted i nw a y o f engine
r o o m , i n t h e after peak, a n d i n ships o f 3 0 m a n d
above; they are n o tpermitted within 0,25L f r o m the
fore perpendicular, either.
2.3.2.4 W h e n t h e b o t t o m i s f r a m e d l o n g i t u d i n a l l y ,
brackets shall be fitted i n line w i t h t h e b o t t o m transverse w e b o n b o t h sides o f t h e c e n t r e g i r d e r w h e r e t h e
girder is higher t h a n t h e b o t t o m transverse a t t h e place
o f their connection. A bracket shall be welded t o bott o m t r a n s v e r s e face p l a t e a n d t o centre g i r d e r w e b a n d
face plate. T h e free edge o f t h e b r a c k e t s h a l l b e stiffened
w i t h a face p l a t e , a n d t h e angle o f i t s i n c l i n a t i o n t o
b o t t o m t r a n s v e r s e f a c e p l a t e s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 45.
Similar requirements apply t o the connections o f the
stringer t o b o t t o m transverse w h e r e t h e stringer is higher
t h a n t h e b o t t o m transverse a t t h e place o f connection.
2.3.2.5 W h e n t h e b o t t o m i s f r a m e d l o n g i t u d i n a l l y ,
t h e spacing o f side girders a n d t h e distance f r o m t h e
c e n t r e g i r d e r o r ship's side t o t h e side g i r d e r s h a l l
n o t exceed 2 , 2 m .
T h e side g i r d e r plates s h a l l b e c u t a t f l o o r s a n d
welded thereto.
T h e face plates o f side girders s h a l l b e w e l d e d t o
those o f floors.
2.3.2.6 I n t a n k e r s , t h e s i d e g i r d e r s , i f f i t t e d , s h a l l
f o r m a r i n g system together w i t h vertical stiffeners o f
transverse bulkheads a n d deck girders.
D e e p side girders h a v i n g t h e s a m e d e p t h as t h e
centre girder, as w e l l as c o n v e n t i o n a l side girders
h a v i n g t h e same d e p t h as b o t t o m transverses, shall
run continuous f r o m o n e transverse bulkhead t o
another with L \ \ B \ < 1.
2.3.2.7 I n t h e e n g i n e r o o m , t h e c e n t r e g i r d e r m a y
be o m i t t e d i f t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l girders u n d e r engine
seating extend f r o m t h e fore t o t h e after b u l k h e a d o f
the engine r o o m a n d terminate w i t h brackets beyond
the bulkhead according t o 2.3.5.1.
2.3.2.8 I n s h i p s h a v i n g a l e n g t h o f 6 5 m a n d
m o r e , t h e b u c k l i n g s t r e n g t h o f centre g i r d e r a n d side
girders i n t h e m i d s h i p region shall be ensured i n acc o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.5.
T h e w e b s o f centre girder, side girders a n d f l o o r s
s h a l l b e s t i f f e n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.7.3.
2.3.2.9 C o n n e c t i o n s o f b o t t o m l o n g i t u d i n a l s t o
transverse bulkheads shall be such t h a t t h e effective
sectional area o fthe longitudinals is maintained.
84
Rules
2.3.3 S i n g l e b o t t o m l o a d s .
2.3.3.1 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n s i n g l e b o t t o m
structures o f d r y cargo ships is t h e external pressure
determined b y F o r m u l a (2.2.3-1) f o ra ship i n t h e
ballast condition. W h e n determining p
i n For
m u l a (2.2.3-1), t h e ballast draught m a y be taken
as 0 , 6 o f t h e s u m m e r d r a u g h t .
I f a d r ycargo ship is designed t o operate i n a
fully loaded condition w i t h some holds empty t h e
static p r e s s u r e p i n F o r m u l a (2.2.3-1) f o r these h o l d s
shall be determined a t s u m m e r draught.
2.3.3.2 A s t h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n s i n g l e b o t t o m
structures o f tankers, external pressure determined
by F o r m u l a (2.2.3-1) a t s u m m e r draught is adopted, o r
the t o t a l pressure determined b y F o r m u l a (2.2.3-2),
w h i c h e v e r is t h e greater.
2.3.4 S c a n t l i n g s o f s i n g l e b o t t o m m e m b e r s .
2.3.4.1 T h e b o t t o m w i t h t r a n s v e r s e f r a m i n g s h a l l
satisfy t h e f o l l o w i n g requirements:
.1 t h e d e p t h o f f l o o r s a t t h e c e n t r e l i n e s h a l l n o t b e
l e s s t h a n 0 , 0 5 5 2 ? i . I n a n y c a s e , B\ s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n
l e s s t h a n 0,62?*. A l l o w a b l e r e d u c t i o n o f f l o o r d e p t h
shall n o t b e m o r e t h a n 10 p e r cent, t h e required f l o o r
section m o d u l u s being maintained.
I n the engine r o o m , theheight o f floor w e b between
l o n g i t u d i n a l g i r d e r s u n d e r t h e s e a t i n g s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 0,65 o f t h e required depth a t t h e centreline.
A reduction o f floor section m o d u l u s b y m o r e
t h a n 1 0 p e r cent as c o m p a r e d t o t h a t required
by 2.3.4.1.2 is n o t permitted.
A t a distance o f 0,372?* f r o m t h e c e n t r e l i n e , t h e
d e p t h o f f l o o r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 5 0 p e r c e n t o f
the required depth o f the centreline floors;
.2 a t t h e c e n t r e l i n e , t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f f l o o r s
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.4.1
a n d 1.6.4.2 t a k i n g :
m = 13;
= 0,6;
1 = B\, b u t n o t l e s s t h a n 0,62?*;
f o r p , r e f e r t o 2 . 3 . 3 . 1 , b u t i t s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 3 5 k P a f o r d r y c a r g o s h i p s a n d n o t less
than 85 k P af o r tankers.
O n p o r t i o n s e q u a l t o 0,052?* f r o m ship's side, t h e
f l o o r w e b s e c t i o n a l a r e a s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e
t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.4.3 t a k i n g :
-Nmax =
0,4pal;
= 0,6.
W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g p a n d /, t h e a b o v e l i m i t a t i o n s
shall be used;
.3 i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2 . 3 . 4 . 1 . 2 , t h e s e c t i o n m o d
u l u s o f c e n t r e g i r d e r s h a l l b e a t least 1,6 t i m e s g r e a t e r
t h a n t h e section m o d u l u s o fa floor a t t h e centreline.
T h e depth o fcentre girder shall be equal t o that o f a
floor a t t h e place o f their connection;
.4 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f a s i d e g i r d e r s h a l l n o t
be less t h a n t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f a f l o o r a t t h e
s
s t
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
centreline i n accordance w i t h 2.3.4.1.2. T h e depth o f

side g i r d e r s h a l l b e e q u a l t o t h a t o f t h e f l o o r a t t h e
place o f their connection.
2.3.4.2 I f l o n g i t u d i n a l s y s t e m o f f r a m i n g i s
adopted, t h e b o t t o m members i n w a y o f t h e cargo
tanks i n tankers shall satisfy t h e f o l l o w i n g require
ments:
.1 t h e section m o d u l u s o f b o t t o m l o n g i t u d i n a l s
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e
w i t h 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2 t a k i n g :
p = as defined i n 2.3.3.2;
/ = span, i n m , equal t o t h e distance between
b o t t o m transverses o rbetween b o t t o m transverse a n d
transverse bulkhead;
m = 12;
k = 0,45<0,65 i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n ;
k = 0,65 a t t h e ends o fthe ship w i t h i n 0,12, f r o m
F o r regions between t h e midship region a n d t h e
above p o r t i o n s o f ship's ends, k shall be determined
k shall be determined b y F o r m u l a (2.2.4.1);
.2 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f a b o t t o m t r a n s v e r s e
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.6.4.1
a n d 1.6.4.2. B o t t o m t r a n s v e r s e w e b s e c t i o n a l area,
e x c l u d i n g o p e n i n g s , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n s t i p u l a t e d
u n d e r 1.6.4.3 t a k i n g :
/ = 2?
= = 0,6;
for a wing tank
m = 18;
-Nmax =
0,35pal;
for a centre t a n k
m =m ;
-Nmax =
0,7n .tpal;
and
shall be obtained f r o m T a
ble 2.3.4.2.2 depending u p o n t h e parameter a n d t h e
n u m b e r o fb o t t o m transverses w i t h i n a tank;
=
^\L IB f;
a =
W . /W . ;
W
= b o t t o m transverse section m o d u l u s sa
tisfying t h e present requirements;
W
= centre girder section m o d u l u s satisfying
the requirements o f 2.3.4.2.3.
The value o f t h e parameter a is optional, b u t
shall n o t exceed 0,6; t h e v a l u e o f t h e p a r a m e t e r
s h a l l n o t exceed 1,5.
B o t t o m transverse section m o d u l u s shall n o t be
less t h a n
aW . ;
.3 c e n t r e g i r d e r s e c t i o n m o d u l u s s h a l l n o t b e l e s s
t h a n d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2. T h e sec
t i o n a l a r e a o f c e n t r e g i r d e r w e b s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r 1.6.4.3 t a k i n g :
1 = W,
a
b J
b t
bJ
cg
c g
c g
P a r t II. H u l l
85
T a b l e
2.3.4.2.2
N u m b e r o f transverses within a tank
m .t
c.g
n .t
"eg
0,01
96,0
95,9
95,9
95,8
27,3
21,7
25,5
23,3
0,253
0,255
0,256
0,257
0,329
0,370
0,393
0,409
0,02
95,8
95,6
95,4
95,1
27,6
22,1
26,0
23,9
0,256
0,260
0,261
0,264
0,326
0,367
0,387
0,401
0,04
95,4
95,4
93,9
92,7
28,3
22,8
27,1
25,0
0,261
0,269
0,271
0,277
0,318
0,355
0,375
0,387
0,06
94,7
92,7
91,8
89,3
28,9
23,5
28,1
26,2
0,267
0,277
0,281
0,289
0,311
0,346
0,364
0,374
0,08
93,9
90,5
89,2
85,5
29,6
24,3
29,1
27,4
0,272
0,286
0,290
0,301
0,304
0,337
0,354
0,363
0,1
92,9
88,1
86,3
81,5
30,2
25,0
30,2
28,6
0,276
0,293
0,298
0,311
0,298
0,329
0,344
0,352
0,2
86,5
75,1
72,1
64,0
33,4
28,9
35,5
34,7
0,298
0,326
0,333
0,352
0,269
0,294
0,304
0,307
0,3
79,6
64,0
61,1
52,3
36,6
32,8
40,9
41,0
0,316
0,352
0,359
0,382
0,246
0,266
0,273
0,274
0,4
73,3
55,7
53,1
44,7
39,8
36,9
46,5
47,6
0,330
0,373
0,380
0,404
0,226
0,243
0,249
0,249
0,6
63,2
44,9
43,3
36,1
46,2
45,4
58,0
61,6
0,354
0,404
0,409
0,436
0,195
0,206
0,213
0,214
0,8
56,1
38,5
37,6
31,5
52,6
54,4
70,1
76,6
0,371
0,426
0,429
0,457
0,171
0,184
0,188
0,189
1,0
51,0
34,4
34,0
28,6
59,0
64,0
82,8
93,1
0,386
0,443
0,445
0,471
0,153
0,165
0,170
0,171
1,2
47,2
31,6
31,6
26,9
65,4
74,2
96,6
110,8
0,397
0,456
0,456
0,482
0,138
0,150
0,155
0,158
1,5
43,1
28,8
29,1
25,0
75,0
90,7
117,0
141,1
0,410
0,471
0,469
0,492
0,120
0,132
0,139
0,142
m = m_;
-Nmax =
0,7n pal;
m
and n
ble 2.3.4.2.2 depending u p o n the parameter a n d t h e
n u m b e r o f floors within a tank; shall be determined
i n accordance w i t h 2.3.4.2.2;
k = 0,6 a t t h e ends o f the ship w i t h i n 0,12, f r o m
F o r regions between the midship region a n d the
= 0,6;
k shall be determined b y F o r m u l a (2.2.4.1).
T h e section m o d u l u s o f centre girder shall n o t be
l e s s t h a n W Ja
where W
is b o t t o m transverse
section
modulus
satisfying
the
requirements
o f 2.3.4.2.2; a shall be as stipulated u n d e r 2.3.4.2.2;
.4 i n ships o f 2 0 0 m a n d a b o v e , p r o v i s i o n s h a l l be
m a d e f o r side girders m i d w a y b e t w e e n l o n g i t u d i n a l
b u l k h e a d a n d centre girder, as w e l l as between
l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d a n d ship's side, i n centre a n d
wing tanks.
T h e section m o d u l u s o f d e e p side girders, w h e n
f i t t e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2 . 3 . 2 . 6 , s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 0,5 o fcentre girder section m o d u l u s . T h e centre
girder section m o d u l i m a y be reduced i n c o n f o r m i t y
w i t h 2.3.4.2.3 a n d those o f b o t t o m transverse, i n
c o n f o r m i t y w i t h 2.3.4.2.2 b y 15 p e r cent.
c
cg
c g
bJ
T h e section m o d u l u s o f c o n v e n t i o n a l side girders,

w h e n fitted i n accordance w i t h 2.3.2.6, shall n o t be
less t h a n b o t t o m t r a n s v e r s e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s ;
.5 a l t e r n a t i v e l y t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.3.4.2.2
to 2.3.4.2.4, t h e scantlings o f b o t t o m transverses,
centre g i r d e r a n d side girders m a y b e selected p r o
ceeding f r o m the calculation o f b o t t o m grillage, using
b e a m m o d e l s . I n t h i s case, design l o a d s s h a l l b e
c h o s e n i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2.3.3.2, p e r m i s s i b l e stress
factors, i n accordance w i t h 2.3.4.2.2 a n d 2.3.4.2.3,
b o u n d a r y c o n d i t i o n s , proceeding f r o m cargo dis
tribution over t h e length a n d breadth o fthe ship a n d
the type o f structures adjoining t h e calculated o n e .
T h e effect o f brackets shall be considered;
.6 i n t h e engine r o o m , t h e b o t t o m transverse a n d
side g i r d e r w e b t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e
centre girder w e b thickness.
I f a g i r d e r acts as t h e v e r t i c a l p l a t e o f e n g i n e seat
i n g , t h e g i r d e r t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e v e r
tical plate thickness as required b y 2.11.3. T h e d e p t h o f
b o t t o m transverse shall be increased i n p r o p o r t i o n t o
the h e i g h t a t w h i c h engine seatings a r e fitted.
2.3.4.3 T h e thickness, i n m m , o f single b o t t o m
m e m b e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
Jmin = 5,3 + 0 , 0 4 2 . f o r L < 8 0 m ;
Jmin = 6 , 5 + 0 , 0 2 5 2 . f o r
80 m .
(2.3.4.3-1)
(2.3.4.3-2)
86
Rules
F o r t h e centre girder, s \
shall be increased
b y 1,5 m m , b u t s h a l l n o t e x c e e d t h e p l a t e k e e l
thickness; f l o o r w e b thickness need n o t exceed t h e
b o t t o m shell plating thickness.
I n tankers, t h e m i n i m u m thickness o f single
b o t t o m m e m b e r s shall also satisfy t h e requirements
o f 3.5.4, w h i c h e v e r is t h e greater.
2.3.5.1 E n d a t t a c h m e n t s o f b o t t o m m e m b e r s a n d
deep m e m b e r w e b stiffening shall satisfy t h e f o l l o w ing requirements:
.1 centre g i r d e r a n d side girders s h a l l b e a t t a c h e d
t o t r a n s v e r s e b u l k h e a d s b y b r a c k e t s . F o r size o f
b r a c k e t s , refer t o 1.7.2.3;
.2 i n d r y c a r g o s h i p s , t h e h e i g h t o f b r a c k e t s m a y b e
r e d u c e d t o h a l f t h e centre g i r d e r d e p t h i f t h e face p l a t e
o f centre girder is welded t o the transverse bulkhead. I n
case t h e centre g i r d e r face p l a t e i s w i d e n e d t o a t least
twice the n o r m a l value i n w a y o f abutting u p o n t h e
transverse bulkhead, t h e brackets need n o t be fitted. I f
the centre girder is n o tfitted i nthe engine r o o m , then a t
discontinuities beyond bulkheads i t shall be terminated
i n gradually tapered brackets o f a length equal t o twice
t h e c e n t r e g i r d e r d e p t h , b u t n o t less t h a n t h r e e s p a c i n g s ;
m n
.3 i n t a n k e r s , t h e b o t t o m t r a n s v e r s e s s h a l l b e a t tached t o side transverses a n d / o r v e r t i c a l w e b s o f

l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s b y b r a c k e t s . F o r size o f
b r a c k e t s , refer t o 1.7.2.3.
2.3.5.2 I f t r a n s v e r s e s y s t e m o f f r a m i n g i s a d o p t e d ,
the holes c u t i n floors shall have a diameter n o t exceeding h a l f t h e floor depth i n this location. T h e
distance b e t w e e n t h e h o l e edge a n d f l o o r face p l a t e
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 2 5 t i m e s t h e f l o o r d e p t h i n t h i s
location. T h e distance b e t w e e n t h e edges o f adjacent
h o l e s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e f l o o r d e p t h . F l o o r
plates p r o v i d e d w i t h holes shall be strengthened w i t h
vertical stiffeners.
2.3.5.3 T h e w e b s o f s i d e g i r d e r s a n d f l o o r s s h a l l
be p r o v i d e d w i t h d r a i n holes.
2.4 D O U B L E
B O T T O M
2.4.1 G e n e r a l .
Requirements are given i n this Chapter f o r double b o t t o m structures i n c l u d i n g b o t t o m f r a m i n g u p t o
the t o p o f bilge r o u n d i n g , inner b o t t o m plating a n d
f r a m i n g , centre g i r d e r a n d d u c t k e e l , side girders a n d
half-height girders, m a r g i n plate w i t h stiffeners,
brackets, knees a n d intermediate vertical stiffeners i n
t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m space, sea chests a n d d r a i n wells.
Additional requirements f o rdouble bottoms are
g i v e n i n 1.1.6.3 ( p a s s e n g e r ships), 1.1.6.4 ( c a r g o ships,
o t h e r t h a n t a n k e r s ) , 3 . 1 ( c o n t a i n e r ships), 3.3 ( b u l k
carriers a n d oil/bulk d r y cargo carriers), 3.4 ( o r e
carriers a n d ore/oil carriers), 3.11 (icebreakers).
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
2.4.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
2.4.2.1 I n t a n k e r s o f 8 0 m i n l e n g t h , b u l k c a r r i e r s
a n d o r e carriers, as w e l l as i n o i l / b u l k d r y cargo
carriers a n d ore/oil carriers, t h e double b o t t o m shall
be f r a m e d l o n g i t u d i n a l l y .
2.4.2.2 T h e c e n t r e g i r d e r s h a l l e x t e n d f o r e a n d a f t
as f a r as p r a c t i c a b l e t o t h e s t e m a n d s t e r n f r a m e a n d
shall be attached t o t h e m w h e n e v e r possible. T h e
centre girder shall generally be continuous w i t h i n
at least 0,62. amidships. W h e r e l o n g i t u d i n a l f r a m i n g
is a d o p t e d i n t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m , b r a c k e t s s h a l l b e
f i t t e d o n b o t h sides o f c e n t r e girder, w h i c h s h a l l b e
s p a c e d n o t m o r e t h a n 1,2 m a p a r t , e x t e n d e d t o t h e
nearest l o n g i t u d i n a l o r l i g t h e n e d side g i r d e r a n d
welded thereto. T h edistance between brackets shall
n o t e x c e e d 1,2 m .
2.4.2.3 I n l i e u o f c e n t r e g i r d e r , a d u c t k e e l m a y b e
f i t t e d c o n s i s t i n g o f t w o plates a r r a n g e d o n b o t h sides
o f the centreline. T h e duct keel shall be wide enough
f o r t h e access t o a l l i t s s t r u c t u r e s t o b e e n s u r e d .
A d u c t k e e l o f m o r e t h a n 1,9 m i n w i d t h i s s u b j e c t t o
special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e Register.
Transverse m e m b e r s w i t h brackets shall be fitted
at every frame i n w a yo f t h e b o t t o m a n d inner bott o m p l a t i n g b e t w e e n t h e side plates o f t h e d u c t k e e l .
I f longitudinal system o f f r a m i n g is adopted,
b r a c k e t s s h a l l b e f i t t e d a t e v e r y f r a m e o n b o t h sides o f
the duct keel, similar t o those used f o r t h e centre girder.
W h e r e t h e duct keel fitted only over a part o f the
ship's l e n g t h terminates a n d is t r a n s f o r m e d i n t o t h e
centre girder, t h e duct keel a n d centre girder plates
shall o v e r l a p o v e r a l e n g t h o f a t least o n e f r a m e
spacing a n d s h a l l t e r m i n a t e i n brackets w i t h face
plates. I n t h i s case, t h e l e n g t h o f t h e b r a c k e t s s h a l l
n o t b e less t h a n t h r e e s p a c i n g s i f t h e t r a n s i t i o n a r e a s
lie w i t h i n 0 , 6 2 . a m i d s h i p s , a n d n o t less t h a n t w o
spacings elsewhere.
2.4.2.4 T h e d e s i g n o f s i d e g i r d e r s a n d m a r g i n
plate shall satisfy t h e f o l l o w i n g requirements:
.1 t h e spacing o f side girders a n d t h e distance
b e t w e e n a side g i r d e r a n d centre g i r d e r o r m a r g i n
plate, as measured a t t h e level o f t h e double b o t t o m
plating, shall n o t exceed 4 , 2 m f o r transversely
framed double b o t t o m a n d 5,0 f o rlongitudinally
framed double bottom;
.2 i f l o n g i t u d i n a l f r a m i n g i s a d o p t e d i n t h e d o u b l e
b o t t o m , l i g h t e n e d side girders m a y b e fitted o n b o t t o m
a n d double b o t t o m instead o f longitudinals (for panels
w i t h large openings, refer t o 2.4.2.7.2 a n d 2.4.2.7.4);
.3 w h e r e t h e r e a r e t w o t u n n e l s s y m m e t r i c a l w i t h
regard t o t h e centreline, their design is subject t o
special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e Register;
.4 i n t h e e n g i n e r o o m , t h e a r r a n g e m e n t o f s i d e
girders shall be consistent w i t h that o f t h e engine,
boiler a n d t h r u s t b l o c k seatings, so t h a t a t least o n e
o f t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l girders under t h e seating is fitted
P a r t II. H u l l
87
i n line w i t h t h e side girder. I n t h i s case, a n a d d i t i o n a l

side g i r d e r s h a l l be p r o v i d e d u n d e r t h e seating i n line
w i t h the second longitudinal.
W h e r e side girders c a n n o t be a r r a n g e d u n d e r t h e
seatings i n line w i t h l o n g i t u d i n a l girders, a d d i t i o n a l
side girders s h a l l be f i t t e d u n d e r e a c h l o n g i t u d i n a l
girder.
A d d i t i o n a l side girders m a y be replaced b y h a l f
h e i g h t side girders w e l d e d t o t h e i n n e r b o t t o m p l a t i n g
and floors only, i fapproved b y the Register;
.5 i n c l i n e d m a r g i n plate, i f fitted, s h a l l e x t e n d
throughout the double b o t t o m length.
2.4.2.5 T h e arrangement a n d design o f floors
shall satisfy t h e f o l l o w i n g requirements:
.1 i ftransverse f r a m i n g is adopted i n t h e double
b o t t o m , plate floors shall be fitted at every frame:
in engine a n d boiler rooms;
at the fore e n d w i t h i n 0,251, f r o m the fore perpendicular;
in the holds intended f o r the carriage o f heavy
c a r g o a n d o r e , as w e l l as i n h o l d s f r o m w h i c h c a r g o is
regularly discharged b y grabs;
i n ships w h i c h m a y h a p p e n t o be a g r o u n d d u e t o
the ebb-tide i n ports.
I n o t h e r regions, plate floors m a y be fitted five
s p a c i n g s o r 3 , 6 m a p a r t , w h i c h e v e r i s less. I n t h i s
case, p r o v i s i o n s h a l l be m a d e f o r o p e n f l o o r s ( b r a c k e t
or lightened).
B r a c k e t floors consist o f b o t t o m a n d reverse
f r a m e s c o n n e c t e d w i t h b r a c k e t s a t centre girder, side
girders a n d m a r g i n plate ( F i g . 2.4.2.5.1-1).
N o t less t h a n 0,75h
N o t less t h a n
0,75h
N o t less t h a n 0,5h
N o t less t h a n
0,5h
F i g . 2.4.2.5.1-2
in the holds intended f o r the carriage o f heavy

c a r g o a n d o r e , as w e l l as i n h o l d s f r o m w h i c h c a r g o is
regularly discharged b y grabs;
i n ships w h i c h m a y h a p p e n t o be a g r o u n d d u e t o
the ebb-tide i n ports.
I n other regions, plate floors m a y be fitted five
s p a c i n g s o r 3 , 6 m a p a r t , w h i c h e v e r i s less. W h e r e
l i g h t e n e d side girders a r e f i t t e d i n l i e u o f b o t t o m a n d
double b o t t o m longitudinals (refer t o 2.4.2.4.2), the
above spacing m a y be increased, b u t n o t m o r e t h a n
twice.
W h e n t h e ship's side is f r a m e d t r a n s v e r s e l y a n d
double b o t t o m is f r a m e d l o n g i t u d i n a l l y , brackets
shall be fitted at every frame between plate floors t o
stiffen t h e m a r g i n plate, w h i c h shall be carried t o t h e
nearest b o t t o m a n d inner b o t t o m longitudinals o r t o
t h e nearest a d d i t i o n a l side girder, a n d w e l d e d t h e r e t o
(Fig. 2.4.2.5.2).
F i g . 2.4.2.5.2
Fig.
2.4.2.5.1-1
Lightened floors consist o f plate panels h a v i n g

large o p e n i n g s o f a s m o o t h shape b e t w e e n side girders ( F i g . 2.4.2.5.1-2);
.2 i f l o n g i t u d i n a l f r a m i n g is a d o p t e d i n t h e d o u b l e
b o t t o m , plate floors shall generally be fitted a t a
distance n o t exceeding t w o spacings f r o m each other:
in engine a n d boiler rooms;
at the fore e n d w i t h i n 0,251, f r o m the fore perpendicular;
U n d e r the seating o f m a i n engine, plate floors

shall be fitted at every frame a n d carried t o the
nearest side g i r d e r o u t s i d e t h e m a i n engine seating;
.3 i r r e s p e c t i v e o f t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2 . 4 . 2 . 5 . 1
a n d 2.4.2.5.2, plate floors shall be fitted:
under pillars a n d ends o f longitudinal partial
bulkheads;
u n d e r bearers a n d boiler bearer ends;
under transverse bulkheads a n d sloping plates o f
l o w trapezoidal stools o f corrugated bulkheads;
88
Rules
u n d e r b r a c k e t toes o f deep t a n k b u l k h e a d stif

feners i n transversely f r a m e d double b o t t o m ;
u n d e r b l o c k b e a r i n g seatings.
I n t h e a b o v e cases, t h e f l o o r s n e e d n o t b e f i t t e d
t h r o u g h o u t t h e ship's breadth. P a r t i a l floors m a y be
f i t t e d a n d c a r r i e d t o t h e side g i r d e r nearest t o t h e
structure being stiffened.
2.4.2.6 A r r a n g e m e n t o f s t i f f e n e r s o n c e n t r e g i r d e r
a n d d u c t k e e l , side girders a n d f l o o r s s h a l l satisfy t h e
.1 stiffeners shall be p r o v i d e d w h e r e transverse
system o f f r a m i n g is adopted a n d plate floors are
m o r e t h a n 900 m m i n depth. T h e spacing o f stiffeners
s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 1,5 m . T h e s p a c i n g o f s t i f f e n e r s o f
lightened f l o o r s shall n o t exceed 2 , 2 m .
I f longitudinal system o f framing is adopted, the
stiffeners o n plate f l o o r s shall be fitted i n line w i t h
b o t t o m a n d inner b o t t o m longitudinals. T h e stiffen
ers s h a l l b e c a r r i e d t o t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l s a n d w e l d e d
thereto.
T h e stiffeners shall be fitted u n d e r t h e pillars, a t
bracket toes o f e n d stiffeners o f l o n g i t u d i n a l p a r t i a l
bulkheads, etc;
.2 w a t e r t i g h t f l o o r s s h a l l b e f i t t e d w i t h v e r t i c a l
stiffeners spaced n o t m o r e t h a n 0,9 m apart.
2.4.2.7 H o l e s ( m a n h o l e s ) s h a l l s a t i s f y t h e f o l
lowing requirements:
.1 a n adequate n u m b e r o fholes (manholes) shall
be p r o v i d e d i n t h e i n n e r b o t t o m p l a t i n g , side girders
a n d f l o o r s f o r access t o a l l p o r t i o n s o f d o u b l e b o t
t o m . T h e size o f t h e h o l e s , i n c l u d i n g l i g h t e n i n g h o l e s ,
shall satisfy t h e requirements o f standards o r other
n o r m a t i v e documents recognized b y t h e Register.
A i r a n d d r a i n holes, cut-outs f o r t h e passage o f
w e l d e d j o i n t s , refer t o 1.7.5.12;
.2 t h e h o l e s i n c e n t r e g i r d e r , s i d e g i r d e r s a n d
floors shall have a s m o o t h r o u n d e d shape. T h e
m i n i m u m allowable height o f t h e plate adjoining
b o t t o m shell plating o r inner b o t t o m plating is i n
dicated i n T a b l e 2.4.2.7.2. Besides, t h e m i n i m u m
h e i g h t o f t h e p l a t e i n w a y o f t h e h o l e s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n /g o f t h e l e n g t h o f t h e h o l e .
T h e plate height indicated i n T a b l e 2.4.2.7.2 m a y
be reduced i f suitable stiffening is p r o v i d e d . Besides,
l i g h t e n e d side g i r d e r a n d f l o o r plates s h a l l satisfy t h e
requirements o f 2.4.4.5.5, a n d i ft h e plate height h ,
l
T a b l e
Member
Centre girder
Side girders
L i g h t e n e d side girders
Floors:
plate
lightened
2.4.2.7.2
M i n i m u m allowable plate
height (inparts o f m e m b e r
height)
0,3
0,25
0,15
0,25
0,2
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
i n m m , e x c e e d s 25sy/r] ( w h e r e s i s t h e w e b t h i c k n e s s ,
i n m m , o f a l i g h t e n e d side girder o r f l o o r ) , t h e free
edge o f the plate shall be stiffened;
.3 t h e d i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e e d g e s o f a d j a c e n t
o p e n i n g s i n centre girder, side girders a n d p l a t e f l o o r s
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n h a l f t h e l e n g t h o f t h e l a r g e s t
opening.
T h e distance o f t h e edges o f openings i n t h e
floors f r o m l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads, centre girder,
side girders, i n c l i n e d m a r g i n p l a t e a n d i n n e r edges o f
h o p p e r side t a n k s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n h a l f t h e c e n t r e
girder d e p t h i n this region. T h edistance o f t h e edge
o f o p e n i n g i n a l i g h t e n e d f l o o r f r o m t h e side g i r d e r
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n o n e - q u a r t e r o f c e n t r e g i r d e r
depth.
I n e x c e p t i o n a l cases, d e v i a t i o n f r o m t h e a b o v e
requirements is permitted;
.4 o n e o r m o r e c o n s e c u t i v e o p e n i n g s m a y b e
p e r m i t t e d i n a l i g h t e n e d side g i r d e r w e b b e t w e e n
adjacent floors o r i n a lightened floor w e b between
adjacent side girders. I n t h e l a t t e r case, v e r t i c a l stif
feners shall be fitted between openings. T h e l e n g t h o f
o n e o p e n i n g s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 1,2 t i m e s t h e a c c e p t e d
depth o f centre girder o r 0,7 times t h e distance be
t w e e n f l o o r s (side girders) o r b e t w e e n a f l o o r (side
g i r d e r ) a n d v e r t i c a l s t i f f e n e r , w h i c h e v e r i s less ( r e f e r
t o F i g . 2.4.2.5.1-2). T h e distance o f t h e edges o f
o p e n i n g s i n l i g h t e n e d side girders a n d f l o o r s f r o m
e a c h o t h e r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n h a l f t h e c e n t r e g i r d e r
depth i n this region;
.5 n o r m a l l y , o p e n i n g s a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d :
i n centre girder over a length o f 0,752. f r o m t h e
fore perpendicular;
i n centre g i r d e r a n d side girders ( l i g h t e n e d side
girders) u n d e r pillars a n d i n sections a d j o i n i n g
transverse bulkheads (between t h e bulkhead a n dex
treme floor f o r double b o t t o m w i t h transverse
framing a n do n a length equal t o thedepth o f double
bottom with longitudinal framing);
in floors under pillars a n d i n w a y o f partial
longitudinal bulkheads;
i n floors a t t h e toes o f brackets transversely
s u p p o r t i n g m a i n m a c h i n e r y seatings;
i n f l o o r s b e t w e e n t h e side ( i n n e r side) a n d t h e
nearest l i g h t e n e d side girder, p r o v i d e d t h e spacing o f
floors is increased i n accordance w i t h 2.4.2.5.2.
I n e x c e p t i o n a l cases, o p e n i n g s a r e p e r m i t t e d i n
the above members provided the webs i n w a y o f the
openings are suitably stiffened;
.6 c i r c u l a r l i g h t e n i n g o p e n i n g s a r e p e r m i t t e d f o r
b r a c k e t s , h a v i n g a d i a m e t e r n o t g r e a t e r t h a n '/ o f t h e
w i d t h o r h e i g h t o f t h e b r a c k e t , w h i c h e v e r i s less.
2.4.2.8 W h e r e d o u b l e s k i n s i d e c o n s t r u c t i o n i s
provided, the inner b o t t o m plating shall extend
t h r o u g h t h e i n n e r skin as f a r as t h e shell plating. A
side g i r d e r s h a l l b e f i t t e d i n l i n e w i t h t h e i n n e r s k i n .
P a r t II. H u l l
89
F e s t o o n plates m a y be fitted i n lieu o f t h e inner

b o t t o m p l a t i n g i n s i d e t h e d o u b l e s k i n side o r a d d i
t i o n a l side g i r d e r i n l i n e w i t h t h e i n n e r s k i n .
2.4.2.9 C o n n e c t i o n s o f b o t t o m a n d i n n e r b o t t o m
lon-gitudinals t o watertight floors shall be such that
the effective sectional area o f these m e m b e r s is
maintained.
2.4.3 D o u b l e b o t t o m l o a d s .
2.4.3.1 T h e e x t e r n a l p r e s s u r e o n d o u b l e b o t t o m
structures is determined b y F o r m u l a (2.2.3-1).
F o r d e s i g n b a l l a s t c o n d i t i o n , t h e v a l u e o f z,i n F o r m u l a (1.3.2.1-2) shall be counted f r o m t h e de
sign ballast waterline.
2.4.3.2 D o u b l e b o t t o m l o a d s f r o m i n s i d e :
.1 design pressure o n t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m f r o m
general cargo i s determined according t o 1.3.4.1;
.2 d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m f r o m
liquid cargo o r ballast is determined
according
t o 1.3.4.2;
.3 d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m f r o m
b u l k c a r g o i s d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.3.4.3;
.4 t e s t l o a d s
where
h
for
for
a .
c
h = h e i g h t o f c e n t r e g i r d e r , i n m , r e q u i r e d b y 2.4.4.1;
= actual height o fcentre girder, i n m ;
|, r e f e r t o 1.1.4.3;
A s , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1;
= 0 , 0 3 1 , + 8 , 3 , b u t n o t g r e a t e r t h a n 11,2.
I n a n y case, t h e t h i c k n e s s o f centre girder s h a l l b e

1 m m greater t h a n that o f a plate floor.
T h e t h i c k n e s s o f side g i r d e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
that o fplate floors;
.2 t h e b u c k l i n g s t r e n g t h o f c e n t r e g i r d e r w e b a n d o f
side girders, a s w e l l a s o f l o n g i t u d i n a l stiffeners f i t t e d
a l o n g t h e m s h a l l b e e n s u r e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.5;
.3 a t e n d s w i t h i n 0 , 1 2 . f r o m t h e f o r e a n d a f t e r
perpendiculars, t h ecentre girder w e b thickness m a y
be 1 0 p e r c e n t less t h a n t h a t i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n , a s
d e t e r m i n e d f o r steel u s e d a t e n d s , b u t n o t less t h a n
the m i n i m u m thickness stipulated u n d e r 2.4.4.9.
T h e t h i c k n e s s o f side plates o f t h e d u c t k e e l s h a l l
n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 9 o f t h a t r e q u i r e d f o r t h e c e n t r e
girder i n this region;
.4 t h e t h i c k n e s s o f w a t e r t i g h t s e c t i o n s o f c e n t r e
g i r d e r a n d side g i r d e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e
termined b y F o r m u l a (1.6.4.4) taking:
p = as d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a e
(1.3.4.2.1-4)
p = l,5h
(2.4.3.2.4)
and (1.3.4.2.1-5) f o r t h e m i d - d e p t h o f centre girder (side
girder), w h i c h e v e r is t h e greater ( w h e r e n o safety v a l v e i s
where h = vertical distance,i nm , f r o m inner b o t t o m plating t o t h e
fitted, p s h a l l b e t a k e n as z e r o ) ;
t o p o fair pipe;
m = 15,8;
.5 l o a d s d u e t o t h e e m e r g e n c y f l o o d i n g o f d o u b l e
i f t h e centre girder (side girder) i s stiffened w i t h
bottom compartments
vertical brackets o r stiffeners,
Jc = 0,6<0,75 f o r 2 . ^ 6 5 m i n t h e m i d s h i p r e
gion;
p = 10,5(rf-A)
(2.4.3.2.5)
= 0,75 f o r L = 12 m .
w h e r e h = actual d e p t h o fd o u b l e b o t t o m , i n m .
F o r 1 2 < L < 6 5 m , Jc s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y
l i n e a r i n t e r p o l a t i o n t a k i n g Jc = 0 , 6 8 f o r L = 6 5 m ;
2.4.3.3 T h e t o t a l d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m
is d e f i n e d a s a d i f f e r e n c e b e t w e e n t h e e x t e r n a l p r e s s u r e p
i f t h e centre girder (side girder) i s stiffened w i t h
a n d t h e cargo (ballast) pressure f r o m inside p . I n this
h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners, i nt h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n
case, t h e v a l u e o f p i s d e f i n e d a s t h e smallest v a l u e o f
= 0,75;
counterpressures d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 2.4.3.2.1 t o 2.4.3.2.3
at t h e ends o f t h e ship w i t h i n 0,12. f r o m t h e fore
w i t h p > p a n d as t h e greatest o f t h e above values
o r after perpendicular
with p <p .
Jc = 0 , 8 5 .
F o r regions between t h e midship region a n d
I f a h o l d m a y b e e m p t y d u r i n g service, t h e e x
a b o v e p o r t i o n s o f s h i p ' s e n d s , Jc s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d
ternal pressure p shall be t a k e n as t h edesign pressure.
2.4.4 S c a n t l i n g s o f d o u b l e b o t t o m m e m b e r s .
2.4.4.1 A t c e n t r e g i r d e r , t h e d e p t h o f d o u b l e
b o t t o m h , i n m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
T h e thickness o ft h e w a t e r t i g h t sections o f centre
g i r d e r a n d side girders n e e d n o t b e greater t h a n t h a t
o f adjacent shell plating.
h = ^+0,042?+ 3,5-^
(2.4.4.1)
2.4.4.3 F l o o r s s h a l l s a t i s f y t h e f o l l o w i n g r e q u i r e
ments:
b u t n o t less t h a n 0 , 6 5 m .
.1 t h e thickness, i n m m , o f w a t e r t i g h t f l o o r s s h a l l
n
o
t
b e less t h a n
2.4.4.2 T h e c e n t r e g i r d e r a n d s i d e g i r d e r s s h a l l
s = a k a j r ] + As
(2.4.4.3)
.1 t h e thickness, i n m m , o f centre girder ( d u c t
p
k e e l ) s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
s =
+ As
(2.4.4.2.1)
w h e r e <x = 0 , 1 2 2 , - 1 , 1 , b u t n o t g r e a t e r t h a n 6,5 f o r t r a n s v e r s e l y
framed double bottom;
<x = 0 , 0 2 3 1 , + 5,8 f o r l o n g i t u d i n a l l y f r a m e d d o u b l e b o t t o m ;
90
Rules
= \,
= c o e f f i c i e n t s g i v e n i n T a b l e s 2.4.4.3-1 a n d 2.4.4.3-2
respectively;
a = spacing, i n m , o f stiffeners, b u t n o t greater than t h e
actual d e p t h o fdouble b o t t o m ;
f o r |,
r e f e r t o 1.1.4.3;
f o r A s , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1;
ki,k
T a b l e
Coefficient k
Framing
system
2.4.4.3-1
ajja
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
.1 t h ethickness o f inner b o t t o m plating, includ

i n g m a r g i n p l a t e , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y
F o r m u l a (1.6.4.4) taking:
m = 15,8;
p = m a x i m u m design pressure as stipulated u n
der 2.4.3.2;
k& = 0 , 6 & s ^ 0 , 8 i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n f o r
2 . ^ 6 5 m a n d transverse f r a m i n g system;
k = 0,8 i n t h emidship region for L = 12m a n d
W h e r e 1 2 < L < 6 5 m , fc i s d e t e r m i n e d b y l i n e a r
interpolation taking k = 0,7 f o rL = 65 m ,
k = 0,8 i n t h e midship region f o r longitudinal
framing system;
k = 0,9 a t t h e ends o fthe ship w i t h i n 0,12. f r o m
.2 i n a n y c a s e , t h e t h i c k n e s s o f i n n e r b o t t o m
p l a t i n g Jmin, i n m m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
a
1,15
1,20
1,25
1,30
CT
Transverse
Longitudinal
1,25
1,45
1,65
1,85
S y m b o l s :
Of = d i s t a n c e , i n m , b e t w e e n p l a t e f l o o r s ;
a = spacing, i n m .
T a b l e
Coefficient
Framing system
2.4.4.3-2
N u m b e r o fgirders per side

0
3 and above
Transverse
0,97
0,93
0,88
Longitudinal
0,93
0,86
0,80
Smin = ( 3 , 8 + 0 , 0 5 2 . ) ^ f o r L < 8 0 m ;
Smin = ( 5 + 0 , 0 3 5 2 . ) ^ f o r 2 . ^ 8 0 m
(2.4.4.4.2-1)
(2.4.4.4.2-2)
w h e r e | = a s s t a t e d i n T a b l e 1.1.4.3.
.2 t h e f l o o r s s h a l l b e s t i f f e n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e
1.7.3.2.
B e t w e e n t h e fore p e a k b u l k h e a d a n d 0,252. f r o m
the f o r w a r d perpendicular, i n t h e engine r o o m a n d
peaks, a n d i n t h eholds o f ships w h i c h m a y h a p p e n t o
be a g r o u n d d u e t o ebb-tide o r f r o m w h i c h c a r g o i s
regularly discharged b y grabs, t h ethickness o f plate
f l o o r s Jmin, i n m m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
for transverse f r a m i n g system
with
S m i n
= 0,0352. + 5;
(2.4.4.3.2-1)
for longitudinal framing system

S m i n
= 0,0352. + 6;
(2.4.4.3.2-2)
.3 t h e t h i c k n e s s o f w a t e r t i g h t f l o o r s s h a l l n o t b e
less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a ( 1 . 6 . 4 . 4 ) t a k i n g :
p = as determined b y F o r m u l a e (1.3.4.2.1-4)
and (1.3.4.2.1-5) f o r t h e m i d d e p t h o f t h e floor,
w h i c h e v e r is t h e greater ( i n t h e absence o f a safety
valve, p = 0 ) ;
m = 15,8;
k = 0,85.
I n a n y case, t h e thickness o f w a t e r t i g h t f l o o r s
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d f o r p l a t e f l o o r s i n
this region.
2.4.4.4 I n n e r b o t t o m p l a t i n g a n d m a r g i n p l a t e
v

W h e r e t h e a d o p t e d s p a c i n g i s less t h a n t h e s t a n
d a r d o n e (refer t o 1.1.3) f o r s h i p s o f u n r e s t r i c t e d a r e a
o f navigation a n d restricted area o fnavigation R l ,
the m i n i m u m thickness o f i n n e r - b o t t o m plating m a y
be r e d u c e d i n p r o p o r t i o n t o t h e r a t i o o f a d o p t e d
spacing t o t h e standard spacing, b u tn o t m o r e t h a n
b y 1 0 p e r cent. I n a n y case, t h e m i n i m u m thickness
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 5 , 5 m m .
T h e thickness o f inner b o t t o m plating i n holds
into w h i c h water ballast m a y be taken, as well as i n
t h e c a r g o ( b a l l a s t ) t a n k s o f t a n k e r s s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n stipulated u n d e r 3.5.4.
I n t h e engine r o o m a n dholds under cargo hat
c h e s w h e r e n o w o o d s h e a t h i n g i s p r o v i d e d , Sm\ s h a l l
be increased b y 2 m m .
I n holds where n o w o o d sheathing is provided a n d
c a r g o i s d i s c h a r g e d b y g r a b s , s^ s h a l l b e i n c r e a s e d
by 4 m m ;
.3 i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n o f s h i p s o f 6 5 m a n d
greater i n length, t h ebuckling strength o f inner b o t t o m
plating and m a r g i n plate shall be ensured i n accordance
w i t h 1.6.5.
2.4.4.5 P r i m a r y m e m b e r s o f b o t t o m a n d i n n e r
b o t t o m shall satisfy t h e f o l l o w i n g requirements:
.1 t h e section m o d u l u s o f b o t t o m a n d inner
b o t t o m longitudinals, as w e l l as o f t h e b o t t o m a n d
reverse frames o f bracket floors a n d d u c t keel shall
n o t b e less t h a n s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r 1.6.4.1 t a k i n g :
n
P a r t II. H u l l
91
p = design pressure, i n k P a , determined f o r b o t t o m

longitudinals a n d the b o t t o m frames o f bracket floors
and duct keel i n accordance w i t h 2.4.3.1, a n d for inner
b o t t o m longitudinals a n d t h e reverse frames o f bracket
floors a n d duct keel, i n accordance w i t h 2.4.3.2;
m = 12;
/ = design span, i n m , o f longitudinal, defined as
the spacing o f floors f o r b o t t o m a n dinner b o t t o m
longitudinals, as t h e distance betwen bracket toes o r
b e t w e e n a b r a c k e t t o e a n d side girder f o rt h e b o t t o m
a n d reverse frames o f bracket floors, as t h e spacing o f
webs f o r duct keel;
greatest opening length m i n u s its r o u n d i n g - o f f radius.

T h e plate section shall include t h e effective flange o f
shell plating (inner b o t t o m plating), as described under
1.6.3.2 a n d 1.6.3.3, a s w e l l a s t h e f l a n g e o r h o r i z o n t a l
stiffener o f t h e free edge o f t h e plate, i f these a r e f i t t e d .
2.4.4.6 T h e s t i f f e n e r s o n t h e w a t e r t i g h t s e c t i o n s o f
centre girder (duct keel), side girders a n d f l o o r s shall
.1 t h e section m o d u l u s o f vertical stiffeners o n t h e
w a t e r t i g h t sections o f centre girder (duct keel), side
g i r d e r s a n d f l o o r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n s t i p u l a t e d
u n d e r 1.6.4.1 t a k i n g :
p = as determined b y F o r m u l a (1.3.4.2.1-5) f o r
m i d - h e i g h t o f vertical stiffener;
for b o t t o m longitudinals
/ = span, i nm , o f stiffener, defined as t h e spacing
o f longitudinals t o w h i c h t h e stiffener is welded o ras
k = 0,65 a t t h e ends o f the ship w i t h i n 0,12. f r o m
double b o t t o m depth i f the stiffener is n o t i n line w i t h
F o r regions between t h e midship region a n d t h e b o t t o m o r inner b o t t o m longitudinals;
m = 8 a n d 10 f o rstiffeners sniped a t ends a n d
welded t othe b o t t o m a n d inner b o t t o m longitudinals
respectively;
for inner b o t t o m longitudinals
= 0,75;
k = 0,6&<0,75 i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n ;
.2 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f h o r i z o n t a l s t i f f e n e r s o n
the centre girder (duct keel) a n d side girders shall n o t
be less t h a n s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r 1.6.4.1 t a k i n g :
p = as determined b y F o r m u l a (1.3.4.2.1-5) f o r
the level o f t h e h o r i z o n t a l stiffener considered;
/ = distance, i n m , between floors o r between
floors a n d brackets (refer t o 2.4.2.2);
m = 12;
for b o t t o m frames o f bracket floors a n d duct keel
= 0,65;
for reverse frames o fbracket floors a n d d u c t keel
= 0,75;
.2 i f i n t e r m e d i a t e s t r u t s a r e f i t t e d a t m i d - s p a n
between b o t t o m a n d inner b o t t o m longitudinals, the
section m o d u l u s o f such longitudinals m a y be r e
.3 i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n o f s h i p s o f u n r e s t r i c t e d
duced b y 3 5 p e r cent;
service a n d o f restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R l a n d
R 2 , 6 5 m a n d greater i n length, as w e l l as o f ships o f
.3 i f t h e r a t i o o f t h e s p a n o f a b o t t o m o r i n n e r
b o t t o m l o n g i t u d i n a l t o i t s d e p t h i s less t h a n 1 0 , t h e r e s t r i c t e d a r e a s o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 - R S N , R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) ,
R 3 - R S N a n d R 3 , 6 0m a n d greater i n length, t h e
s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l w e b s h a l l n o t b e less
b u c k l i n g strength o f h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners o n t h e
than determined
b y F o r m u l a (1.6.4.3-1)
taking
centre girder (duct keel) a n d side girders shall b e
Nmax = 0,5pal ( p , l = d e s i g n p r e s s u r e a n d d e s i g n s p a n o f
e n s u r e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.5.
l o n g i t u d i n a l as stipulated u n d e r 2.4.4.5.1), k = k w h e r e
k i s as d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 2.4.4.5.1 w i t h k = 1,25;
2.4.4.7 T h e i n t e r m e d i a t e s t r u t s b e t w e e n b o t t o m
.4 i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n o f s h i p s o f 6 5 m i n l e n g t h
a n d inner b o t t o m longitudinals, as w e l l as between
and above, thebuckling strength o f b o t t o m a n d inner
b o t t o m a n d reverse frames o f bracket floors shall
b o t t o m longitudinals shall be ensured i n accordance
w i t h 1.6.5;
.1 t h e sectional area /, i n c m , o f intermediate
s t r u t s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
.5 a t t h e c e n t r e o f o p e n i n g s i n l i g h t e n e d s i d e g i r d e r s
a n d floors, t h e section m o d u l u s o f t h e plate adjoining
J p a i
(2.4.4.7.1)
the shell plating o r inner b o t t o m plating shall c o m p l y
kvG
w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.4.4.5.1 f o r b o t t o m a n d inner
w h e r e p = design pressure, i nk P a , defined a s the greater o f the values
b o t t o m longitudinals a n d transverses respectively. I n
o f p o r p a c c o r d i n g t o 2.4.3.1 o r 2.4.3.2, w h i c h e v e r i s t h e
t h i s case, t h e design s p a n / s h a l l b e t a k e n e q u a l t o t h e
greater;
a
92
Rules
I = design span, i n m , o f stiffened longitudinals;

0,6;
h = height, i n c m , o f the strut cross section;
.2 t h e i n e r t i a m o m e n t i, i n c m , o f i n t e r m e d i a t e
s t r u t s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
2
i = 0,01/7 rj
(2.4.4.7.2)
w h e r e / = s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f i n t e r m e d i a t e s t r u t s a s g i v e n i n 2.4.4.7.1;
/ = length, i n m , o f intermediate strut.
2.4.4.8 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f b r a c k e t s o f c e n t r e g i r d e r
(duct keel) a n d m a r g i n plate, as w e l l as o f t h e
brackets o f bracket floors a n d the brackets connect
ing bottom a n d inner b o t t o m longitudinals t o w a
tertight floors, i f the longitudinals are cut at the
f l o o r s , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e t h i c k n e s s o f p l a t e
floors adopted i n this region.
I n w a y o f centre girder a n d m a r g i n plate, t h e
thickness o f brackets fitted i n line w i t h the bracket floor
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 7 5 o f t h e c e n t r e g i r d e r d e p t h .
T h e free edges o f brackets s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h
flanges o r face plates. T h e side girder fitted i n line w i t h
the bracket floor shall be provided w i t h a v e r t i c a l
stiffener w h o s e profile shall be selected i n t h e s a m e
w a y as t h a t o f t h e reverse f r a m e o f t h e floor.
T h e a r m length o f brackets connecting long
itudinals o n the b o t t o m a n d inner b o t t o m plating t o
w a t e r t i g h t f l o o r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 2 , 5 t i m e s t h e
b o t t o m l o n g i t u d i n a l depth ( F i g . 2.4.4.8).
T h e scantlings o f knees b y w h i c h b o t t o m a n d
reverse frames o f t h e duct keel are secured shall be
d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.7.2.2.
F i g . 2.4.4.8
2.4.4.9 S t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s i n s i d e t h e d o u b l e
b o t t o m s h a l l h a v e a t h i c k n e s s 5 , i n m m , n o t less
than:
m i n
Smin = 0 , 0 4 5 L + 3 , 9 f o r L < 8 0 m ;
Smin = 0 , 0 2 5 L + 5 , 5 f o r L > 8 0 m .
(2.4.4.9-1)
(2.4.4.9-2)

F o r centre girder, 5 ^ shall be increased
b y 1,5 m m .
2.4.4.10 I n w a y o f h o l d s d e s i g n e d f o r t h e c a r r i a g e
o f h e a v y cargoes, t h e strength o f double b o t t o m
structure shall be verified b y the calculation o f t h e
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
b o t t o m grillage strength using design loads stated

i n 2.4.3, as required b y 3.3.4.1.1.
2.4.5.1 P a r t i a l d o u b l e b o t t o m a n d s t i f f e n i n g i n
w a y o f variable double b o t t o m d e p t h shall satisfy t h e
.1 w h e r e t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m t e r m i n a t e s , g r a d u a l
transition from longitudinal members o f double
b o t t o m t o those beyond i t shall be ensured.
T h e inner b o t t o m plating shall be gradually ta
pered ( o n a l e n g t h o f a t least three f r a m e spaces) i n t o
t h e face plates o f centre girder a n d side girders o f
single b o t t o m . I n w a y o f t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m b o u n d
a r y , t h e w i d t h o f t h e s e face p l a t e s s h a l l b e n o t less
t h a n h a l f t h e distance b e t w e e n adjacent side girders.
T h e m a r g i n plate shall extend beyond the double
b o t t o m as a bracket w i t h t h e height equal t o t h e
m a r g i n plate w i d t h a n d t h e l e n g t h e q u a l t o a t least
t h r e e f r a m e spaces, w i t h a face p l a t e o r flange a l o n g
its free edge;
.2 w h e r e t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m d e p t h c h a n g e s i n t h e
f o r m o fa knuckle, o n e e n d o fthe knuckle shall be i n
w a y o f a transverse bulkhead a n d the other, o n t h e
folate floor. H o w e v e r , b o t h the knuckles m a ybe ar
r a n g e d o n p l a t e f l o o r s i n w h i c h case t h e s t r u c t u r e i s
subject t o special consideration b y t h e Register;
.3 w h e r e t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m d e p t h c h a n g e s i n t h e
f o r m o f a step, t h e l a t t e r s h a l l n o r m a l l y b e a r r a n g e d
o n a transverse bulkhead.
A t t h e step, t h e i n n e r b o t t o m p l a t i n g o f t h e l o w e r
section should extend f o r a length o f three frame
spaces w h e n L > 8 0 m a n d f o r t w o f r a m e spaces w h e n
L < 80 m . F o r w a r d (or aft) o f the e n d o fthe exten
sion the general requirements f o r partial double
b o t t o m shall be complied with.
I f the step is a r r a n g e d b e y o n d 0 , 5 L a m i d s h i p s o r
i f t h e h e i g h t o f t h e step i s less t h a n 6 6 0 m m , t h e
double b o t t o m structure i nw a y o fthe extension is i n
each case subject t h e special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e
Register;
.4 c o n t i n u i t y a n d r e d u c t i o n o f s t r e s s c o n c e n t r a
t i o n s shall b e ensured i n w a y o f t h e step w h e r e a
v a r i a t i o n o f t h e d e p t h o f centre girder, side girders,
m a r g i n plate a n d inner b o t t o m longitudinals takes
place ( i f longitudinal system o f f r a m i n g is adopted).
2.4.5.2 B i l g e w e l l s , s e a c h e s t s a n d i c e b o x e s s h a l l
.1 i n c a r g o ships, t h e bilge w e l l s s h a l l , as f a r as
practicable, satisfy t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.1.6.3.3.
T h e capacity o f bilge wells is specified i n
Part V I I I "Systems a n dPiping".
T h e thickness o f the walls a n d b o t t o m plates o f a
bilge w e l l shall exceed t h a t o f w a t e r t i g h t floors b y n o t
less t h a n 2 m m ;
.2 t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e f l o o r s , s i d e g i r d e r s a n d
i n n e r b o t t o m p l a t i n g f o r m i n g t h e w a l l s o f sea chests
P a r t II. H u l l
93
shall be 2 m m greater t h a n t h a t required b y 2.4.4.2

t o 2.4.4.4.
I n a n y case, t h e t h i c k n e s s o f sea chest a n d i c e b o x
w a l l s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d b y 2 . 2 . 4 . 1 f o r
the shell plating i n t h e region under consideration.
2.4.5.3 W h e n o i l f u e l t a n k s a r e a r r a n g e d i n t h e
double b o t t o m , the manholes i n the t a n k tops arr a n g e d w i t h i n t h e e n g i n e a n d b o i l e r r o o m s f o r access
t o t h e t a n k s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h c o a m i n g s n o t less
t h a n 0 , 1 m i n height, besides t h e general p r o v i s i o n s
for t h e arrangement o f fuel o i l tanks.
2.4.5.4 W h e r e t h e b e d p l a t e o f m a i n e n g i n e a n d t h e
t h r u s t b l o c k a r e seated directly o n t h e i n n e r b o t t o m
p l a t i n g , i n s e r t p l a t e s h a v i n g a t h i c k n e s s n o t less t h a n
stipulated under 2.11.3.1 shall be welded t o the plating
under the supporting parts o f bed plate a n d thrust
b l o c k . T h e size o f w e l d e d i n s e r t s s h a l l b e s u c h as t o
ensure a n adequate arrangement o f supports a n d the
a t t a c h m e n t o f m a c h i n e r y , a n d s h a l l i n a n y case b e n o t
less t h a n t h a t o f t h e s u p p o r t i n g p a r t s o f b e d p l a t e .
W h e r e t h e engine b e d plate a n d thrust block are fitted
o n t h e i n n e r b o t t o m plating, t w o girders, o r o n e girder
a n d a half-height girder shall be provided i n w a y o f
their arrangement along each welded insert plate. T h e
upper part o f the girder webs shall have the same
thickness as t h e w e l d e d insert f o r a t least 0,2 o f t h e
girder depth, o r alternatively, t h ethickness o f the webs
t h r o u g h o u t their d e p t h shall be as required b y 2.11.3
f o r t h e v e r t i c a l plates o f seatings.
Between t h e girders, a h o r i z o n t a l stiffener o f t h e
size r e q u i r e d i n t h e f o r e g o i n g f o r t h e u p p e r p a r t o f
girder webs shall be fitted, account being t a k e n o f the
holes f o rthe h o l d d o w n bolts o f t h e bed plate.
O n a g r e e m e n t w i t h t h e Register, o n l y o n e side
girder m a y be fitted under the welded insert plate f o r
small p o w e r engines.
2.4.5.5 T h e p l a t i n g o f t h e recess u n d e r t h e e n g i n e
crankcase, as w e l l as t h e side girders a n d f l o o r s b y w h i c h
it is confined, shall have a thickness 2 m m greater t h a n
that o fthe inner b o t t o m plating i n this region.
T h e m i n i m u m d i s t a n c e f r o m t h e recess p l a t i n g t o
t h e b o t t o m s h e l l p l a t i n g s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 4 6 0 m m .
side s h e l l p l a t i n g a n d i n n e r s k i n , b o t h e i t h e r
strengthened w i t h frames a n d longitudinals o rn o t ,
and connected w i t h plate structures perpendicular
thereto: vertical (diaphragms) and/or horizontal
(platforms). I f n o diaphragms o r platforms are fitted,
the inner skin together w i t h f r a m i n g shall be considered as l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d a n d s h a l l c o m p l y
w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.7.
2.5.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
2.5.2.1 W h e n t h e s h i p ' s s i d e i s f r a m e d t r a n s v e r sely, side stringers m a y b e p r o v i d e d . I n t a n k e r s w i t h
t w o o r m o r e l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads, fitting o f cross
ties is r e c o m m e n d e d b e t w e e n t h e side stringers a n d
h o r i z o n t a l girders o f l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads.
W e b f r a m e s m a y be f i t t e d i f t h e ship's side is
framed transversely, a n d they shall be fitted, i f the
ship's side is f r a m e d l o n g i t u d i n a l l y . T h e y s h a l l b e
fitted i n line w i t h plate floors, as w e l l as w i t h deep
beams, i f a n y . I n tankers w i t h t w o o r m o r e longi t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s , fitting o f cross ties is r e c o m m e n d e d b e t w e e n side transverses a n d v e r t i c a l
webs o flongitudinal bulkheads.
2.5.2.2 S t r u c t u r e s o f d o u b l e s k i n s i d e s h a l l s a t i s f y
.1 i f t h e s a m e f r a m i n g s y s t e m i s a d o p t e d f o r side
shell a n d i n n e r skin, fitting o f frames o r longitudinals
o f b o t h side shell a n d i n n e r s k i n i n line w i t h e a c h
o t h e r is r e c o m m e n d e d . I n t h i s case, cross ties m a y b e
f i t t e d b e t w e e n t h e f r a m e s o r l o n g i t u d i n a l s o f t h e side
shell a n d i n n e r skin, w h i c h shall be arranged a t m i d span o f relevant members;
.2 d i a p h r a g m s o r p l a t f o r m s s h a l l b e s t i f f e n e d i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.7.3.2. I n t h i s case, t h e s h o r t e r side,
in m m , o fpanel o fthe diaphragrnor platform being
stiffened shall n o t exceed l O O j ^ / n , w h e r e s is t h e
thickness, i n m m , o f the d i a p h r a g m o r platform;
.3 a n a p p r o p r i a t e n u m b e r o f o p e n i n g s ( m a n h o l e s )
shall be provided i n t h e diaphragms a n d platforms
f o r access t o a l l t h e s t r u c t u r e s o f d o u b l e s k i n side.
T h e total breadth o f openings i n a diaphragm o r
p l a t f o r m section shall n o t exceed 0,6 o f t h e d o u b l e
s k i n side b r e a d t h .
T h e edges o f o p e n i n g s i n d i a p h r a g m s a n d platforms, arranged w i t h i n / o f t h e span f r o m their
supports, shall be reinforced w i t h collars o r stiffeners.
T h e distance b e t w e e n t h e edges o f adjacent openings
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e l e n g t h o f t h e o p e n i n g s .
Normally, openings are n o t permitted, w i t h the
exception o f a i r a n d d r a i n holes:
i n p l a t f o r m s o n a l e n g t h n o t less t h a n t h r e e f r a m e
s p a c e s o r 1,5 t i m e s t h e d o u b l e s k i n s i d e b r e a d t h ,
w h i c h e v e r i s less, f r o m t r a n s v e r s e b u l k h e a d s o r p a r tial b u l k h e a d s , w h i c h serve as p l a t f o r m supports;
i n d i a p h r a g m s o n a l e n g t h n o t less t h a n 1,5 t i m e s
t h e d o u b l e s k i n side b r e a d t h f r o m d e c k p l a t i n g a n d / o r
d o u b l e b o t t o m , w h i c h serve as d i a p h r a g m supports.
l
2.5 S I D E
FRAMING
2.5.1 G e n e r a l a n d d e f i n i t i o n s .
f o r side f r a m e s , w e b f r a m e s (side transverses), side
l o n g i t u d i n a l s , side stringers, cross ties c o n n e c t i n g side
transverses t o vertical webs o n l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k heads i n t a n k e r s , as w e l l as f o r specific structures o f
d o u b l e s k i n side.
2.5.1.2 B y t h e d o u b l e s k i n s i d e c o n s t r u c t i o n , a
side s t r u c t u r e is m e a n t w h i c h consists o f w a t e r t i g h t
94
Rules
2.5.2.3 I n t h e e n g i n e r o o m , t h e s i d e f r a m i n g s h a l l
be s t r e n g t h e n e d b y f i t t i n g o f w e b f r a m e s a n d side
stringers.
T h e w e b frames shall be fitted n o t m o r e than
5 standard spacings o r 3 m apart, whichever is t h e
greater. T h e w e b frames shall be arranged t a k i n g i n t o
a c c o u n t t h e l o c a t i o n o f m a i n engine, i.e. t h e y s h a l l be
f i t t e d a t t h e e x t r e m i t i e s o f t h e engine a t least. I n t h e
engine r o o m , t h e w e b frames shall be carried t o t h e
nearest continuous p l a t f o r m . Deep beams shall be
fitted i n line w i t h w e b frames.
I n t h e engine r o o m , t h e side stringers s h a l l be
fitted so t h a t t h e vertical distance between t h e m , as
w e l l as b e t w e e n a side s t r i n g e r a n d d e c k o r t a n k t o p
( u p p e r edge o f f l o o r ) a t side does n o t exceed 2 , 5 m .
2.5.3 S i d e l o a d s .
2.5.3.1 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e s i d e s h e l l s h a l l
be d e t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h 2.2.3. I n w a y o f
tanks, t h e pressure determined i n accordance w i t h
1.3.4.2 s h a l l a d d i t i o n a l l y b e t a k e n i n t o c o n s i d e r a t i o n .
2.5.3.2 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n d o u b l e s k i n s i d e
structures shall be d e t e r m i n e d as f o l l o w s :
.1 t h e design p r e s s u r e o n t h e i n n e r s k i n a n d
framing
shall be determined
i n accordance
w i t h 1.3.4.2 o r 1.3.4.3 d e p e n d i n g o n t h e k i n d o f c a r g o
c a r r i e d a n d o n w h e t h e r t h e d o u b l e side space i s u s e d
as t a n k space, b u t s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e d e s i g n
pressure o n w a t e r t i g h t b u l k h e a d structures, as stipulated under 2.7.3.1;
.2 t h e s c a n t l i n g s o f c r o s s s e c t i o n s o f d i a p h r a g m s
and platforms are determined using t h e design pressure specified i n 2.2.3;
.3 t h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e w a t e r t i g h t s e c t i o n s
of diaphragms a n d platforms bounding the tanks i n
t h e d o u b l e side space s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d i n acc o r d a n c e w i t h 1.3.4.2.
2.5.4 M e m b e r s c a n t l i n g s o f s i d e s t r u c t u r e s .
the section m o d u l u s o fh o l d frames i n d r ycargo ships
a n d o f side f r a m e s i n t a n k e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.6.4.1 t a k i n g :
p = as d e f i n e d i n 2.5.3; t h e v a l u e o f p f o r t h e side
s h e l l s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
and Construction
(2.5.4.1-1)
(2.5.4.1-2)
where z = distance, i n m , from themid-span o f theframe to the

s u m m e r load waterline;
/ = span, i n m , between adjacent supports, as

measured i n accordance w i t h 1.6.3.1; unless expressly
provided otherwise, the supports o f a frame are
b o t t o m , d e c k o r p l a t f o r m , side stringers;
m = 1 2 f o r single s k i n side c o n s t r u c t i o n w h e n
determining t h e section m o d u l u s o f t h e supporting
section o f t h e frame t a k i n g i n t o consideration t h e
Ships
bracket, i f any, included i n t h e section, as w e l l asf o r

f r a m e s o f t h e side shell a n d i n n e r s k i n f o r m i n g d o u b l e
s k i n side c o n s t r u c t i o n ;
m = 18 f o r single s k i n side c o n s t r u c t i o n w h e n
determining t h e section m o d u l u s i n t h e frame span;
Jc = 0 , 6 5 f o r f r a m e s o f t h e s i d e s h e l l ;
k(j = 0 , 7 5 f o r f r a m e s o f t h e i n n e r s k i n .
v a l u e o f Pmia m a y b e r e d u c e d b y m u l t i p l y i n g b y t h e
2.5.4.2 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f ' t w e e n d e c k
f r a m e s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.6.4.1
taking:
p = design pressure, as stipulated u n d e r 2.5.3;
/ = span, i n m , b e t w e e n adjacent supports, as
measured i n accordance w i t h 1.6.3.1; frame supports
are decks a n d p l a t f o r m s ;
m = 1 0 f o r single s k i n side f r a m e s ;
m = 1 2 f o r f r a m e s o f t h e side shell a n d i n n e r s k i n
f o r m i n g d o u b l e s k i n side c o n s t r u c t i o n ;
Jc = 0 , 6 5 f o r s i d e s h e l l f r a m e s ;
Jc = 0 , 7 5 f o r i n n e r s k i n f r a m e s .
T h e a b o v e applies i n case t h e l o w e r e n d o f ' t w e e n
deck frame is n o t stiffened b y a bracket. I f t h e l o w e r
end o fthe frame is stiffened b y a bracket o fa height
n o t less t h a n 0 , 1 / a n d t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f t h e
f r a m e i n w a y o f d e c k i s n o t less t h a n 1,75 o f t h e
section m o d u l u s determined above, t a k i n g t h e
bracket i n t o consideration, t h e section m o d u l u s o f
' t w e e n deck f r a m e m a y be reduced b y 3 0 p e r cent.
2.5.4.3 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f s i d e l o n g i t u d i n a l s
o f a l l ships s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.4.1 t a k i n g :
p = as defined i n 2.5.3;
a = spacing o f longitudinals, i n m ;
/ = average spacing o f w e b frames o r diaphragms, i n m ;
m = 12;
f o r side shell
Jc = 0 , 6 5 w i t h i n ( 0 , 4 0 , 5 ) 2 ) f r o m t h e b a s e l i n e .
F o r regions b e l o w 0,42) f r o m t h e base line,
Jc s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y l i n e a r i n t e r p o l a t i o n b e t w e e n
Jc
f o r b o t t o m longitudinals i n accordance w i t h
2 . 4 . 4 . 5 . 1 a n d Jc w i t h i n ( 0 , 4 0 , 5 ) 2 ) f r o m t h e b a s e l i n e .
F o r regions above 0,52) f r o m t h e base line,
Jc s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y l i n e a r i n t e r p o l a t i o n b e t w e e n Jc f o r s t r e n g t h d e c k l o n g i t u d i n a l s i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2 . 6 . 4 . 2 a n d Jc w i t h i n ( 0 , 4 0 , 5 ) 2 ) f r o m
the base line.
F o r t h e i n n e r s k i n , Jc s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d a s i n
the case o f h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners o f l o n g i t u d i n a l
bulkheads i n tankers i n accordance w i t h 2.7.4.2.
T h e buckling strength o f three upper a n d three
lower longitudinals i n the midship region o f
ships 6 5 m a n d greater i n length shall be ensured i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.5.
a
Pmin = l O z + 0 , 3 L + 1 f o r L < 6 0 m ;
Pmin = 1 0 z + 0 , 1 5 L + 1 0 f o r L ^ 6 0 m
of Sea-Going
P a r t II. H u l l
95
2.5.4.4 I n a t r a n s v e r s e l y f r a m e d s i d e , t h e s e c t i o n
m o d u l u s o f side s t r i n g e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n s t i
p u l a t e d u n d e r 1.6.4.1 t a k i n g :
k is d e t e r m i n e d i n t h e same w a y as f o r side shell
longitudinals m e n t i o n e d u n d e r 2.5.4.3;
a
/ = spacing, i n m , o f w e b frames a n d w h e r e these

are n o t fitted, between transverse bulkheads, includ
ing e n d brackets;
a = spacing, i n m , o f side stringers;
m = 1 8 w i t h o u t cross ties;
m = 27,5 w i t h cross ties.
T h e cross-sectional area, i n c m , o f a side stringer
w e b s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g
2
t o 1.6.4.3 t a k i n g :
refer t o 1.7.3.
2
2.5.4.6 T h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a / , i n c m , o f a c r o s s t i e
f i t t e d b e t w e e n deep m e m b e r s o f side f r a m i n g a n d o f
l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
/ =
-Nmax = npal;
n = 0,5 w i t h o u t cross ties;
n = 0,4 w i t h o n e cross tie;
n = 0 , 3 7 5 w i t h t w o cross ties;
n = 0,35 w i t h three cross ties;
k = 0,65.
I f w e b f r a m e s a r e fitted, t h e scantlings o f side
stringer section m a y be d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e basis o f the
c a l c u l a t i o n o f t h e side grillage u s i n g b e a m m o d e l s . T h e
design loads shall be determined i n accordance
w i t h 2 . 5 . 3 . 1 , p e r m i s s i b l e stress f a c t o r s s h a l l b e selected
i n accordance w i t h t h i s p a r a g r a p h . W h e r e cross ties
are fitted, t h ecalculation shall consider the interaction
b e t w e e n side grillage a n d grillage o f t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l
b u l k h e a d b e i n g c o n n e c t e d w i t h t h e cross ties.
2.5.4.5 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f w e b f r a m e s ( s i d e
transverses) fitted i n t h e holds a n d 'tween decks o f
d r y cargo ships, as w e l l as i n t h e t a n k s o f t a n k e r s ,
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r 1.6.4.1
%
a n d 1.6.4.2 taking:
/ = distance, i n m , f r o m the upper edge o f a single

bottom floor o r from inner b o t t o m plating t o the
l o w e r edge o f a deep b e a m ;
a = spacing o fw e b frames, i n m ;
m = 1 0 f o r 'tween deck frames;
m = 1 1 f o r h o l d s a n d t a n k s w i t h o u t cross ties;
m = 1 8 w i t h o n e o r t w o cross ties;
m = 27,5 w i t h three cross ties;
k = 0,65.
T h e cross-sectional area, i n c m , o f a side t r a n s
verse ( w e b f r a m e ) w e b , excluding openings, shall n o t
b e less t h a n s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r 1.6.4.3 t a k i n g :
-Nmax = npal;
n = 0,5 w i t h o u t cross ties;
n = 0,375 w i t h o n e cross tie;
n = 0 , 3 5 w i t h t w o o r m o r e cross ties;
k = 0,65.
W h e n t h e side is t r a n s v e r s e l y f r a m e d , t h e scan
tlings o f w e b frames m a y be d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e basis
o f t h e side grillage c a l c u l a t i o n i n accordance w i t h t h e
a
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.5.4.4. I n t h i s case, t h e p e r m i s s i b l e
stress f a c t o r s s h a l l b e selected i n accordance w i t h t h e
requirements o f this paragraph.
I n single-deck ships, t h e d e p t h o f w e b f r a m e (side
transverse) webs m a y be taken variable over the
ship's depth w i t h reducing a t t h e t o p e n d a n d i n
creasing at t h e b o t t o m e n d . V a r i a t i o n o f w e b depth
shall n o t exceed 1 0 p e r cent o f its m e a n value.
F o r stiffening o f w e b frames (side transverses),
k ^ ^ +
0,05EA/AJ
(2.5.4.6)
w h e r e p = design pressure, i n k P a , a t mid-length o f a cross tie, a s

d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 2.2.3 o r 2.7.3.2, w h i c h e v e r i s t h e g r e a t e r ;
a = s p a c i n g o f w e b f r a m e s c o n n e c t e d w i t h c r o s s ties, i n m ;
at = m e a n d e p t h , i n m , o f s i d e a r e a s u p p o r t e d b y a c r o s s t i e ;
TJtt = p e r i m e t e r o f c r o s s s e c t i o n , i n c m , o f a c r o s s t i e ;
= 2,5 b u c k l i n g s t r e n g t h m a r g i n ;
= c r i t i c a l s t r e s s e s i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.5.3 c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o
the E u l e r stresses, i n M P a , a s d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
206?
w h e r e i = m i n i m u m m o m e n t o f inertia, i n c m , o f a c r o s s tie;
/ = cross tie length, i n m , a s measured between t h e inner
edges o f d e e p m e m b e r s o f side f r a m i n g a n do f long
itudinal bulkhead;
/ = a s d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (2.5.4.6).
2.5.4.7 T h e s i d e f r a m i n g o f t h e e n g i n e r o o m a n d
tanks shall satisfy t h e f o l l o w i n g requirements:
.1 t h e scantlings o f m a i n frames i n t h eengine r o o m
shall be determined i n accordance w i t h 2.5.4.1 taking:
/ = s p a n m e a s u r e d b e t w e e n side stringers o r b e
t w e e n t h e l o w e r side s t r i n g e r a n d i n n e r b o t t o m p l a t
i n g ( u p p e r edge o f f l o o r ) , o r b e t w e e n t h e u p p e r side
stringer a n d t h e l o w e r edge o f b e a m .
T h e scantlings o f longitudinals shall be de
t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h 2.5.4.3.
T h e scantlings o f w e b frames (side transverses)
shall be d e t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h 2.5.4.5 t a k i n g :
/ = span measured between inner b o t t o m plating
(upper edge o f f l o o r ) a n d t h e l o w e r edge o f deep b e a m ;
.2 i n t h e e n g i n e r o o m o f s h i p s l e s s t h a n 3 0 m i n
l e n g t h , t h e w e b f r a m e s a n d side stringers r e q u i r e d
b y 2.5.2.3 m a y be o m i t t e d o n c o n d i t i o n t h a t t h e m a i n
f r a m e h a s a s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W, i n c m , n o t l e s s t h a n
3
W=l,8W
(2.5.4.7.2)
w h e r e W\ = s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f m a i n f r a m e , a s s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r
2.5.4.7.1;
.3 i n w a y o f t h e b a l l a s t a n d f u e l o i l t a n k s o f d r y
cargo ships 3 0 m a n d greater i n length, t h e scantlings
o f side f r a m i n g s h a l l satisfy t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f 2.5.4.1, 2.5.4.3, 2.5.4.5 f o r side f r a m i n g
tanks i n tankers.
in way of
96
Rules
I f transverse system o f f r a m i n g is adopted, the

s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f side s t r i n g e r s s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2
taking:
= 0,65;
m = 10.
I n a l l o t h e r respects, t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.5.4.4
shall be complied with;
.4 i n t h e e n g i n e r o o m , t h e w e b f r a m e s s h a l l h a v e a
d e p t h n o t less t h a n 0 , 1 o f t h e s p a n , a n d a w e b t h i c k
n e s s n o t less t h a n 0 , 0 1 o f t h e w e b d e p t h p l u s 3 , 5 m m ;
.5 i n t h e e n g i n e r o o m , t h e w e b d e p t h o f a s i d e
stringer shall be equal t o that o f a w e b frame.
T h e w e b t h i c k n e s s o f a side s t r i n g e r m a y b e 1 m m
less t h a n t h a t o f a w e b f r a m e . T h e side s t r i n g e r face
p l a t e thickness s h a l l b e e q u a l t o t h e face p l a t e
thickness o f a w e b frame.
2.5.4.8 T h e d i a p h r a g m s a n d p l a t f o r m s o f t h e
d o u b l e s k i n side s h a l l satisfy t h e f o l l o w i n g r e q u i r e
ments:
.1 t h e section m o d u l i a n d cross-sectional areas o f
diaphragms a n d p l a t f o r m s shall satisfy t h e require
ments f o r t h e section m o d u l i a n d cross-sectional
areas o f side s t r i n g e r w e b s , as specified i n 2.5.4.4, a n d
o f w e b frames, as specified i n2.5.4.5, u s i n g t h e design
pressure determined i n accordance w i t h 2.5.3.2.2.
I n a n y case, t h e thickness, i n m m , o f d i a p h r a g m
a n d p l a t f o r m s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
Smin = 0 , 0 1 8 2 . + 6 , 2 ;
(2.5.4.8.1)
.2 t h e s t i f f e n e r s o f d i a p h r a g m s a n d p l a t f o r m s
s h a l l satisfy t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.7.3.2.2;
.3 t h e p l a t f o r m s i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n a n d t h e i r
c o n t i n u o u s l o n g i t u d i n a l stiffeners, i f any, shall c o m
ply w i t h therequirements for the buckling strength o f
l o n g i t u d i n a l f r a m i n g m e m b e r s , as specified i n 1.6.5.2,
w i t h i n 0,252) above t h ebase line a n d 0,252) b e l o w t h e
strength deck;
.4 t h e t h i c k n e s s o f w a t e r t i g h t s e c t i o n s o f d i a
p h r a g m s a n d p l a t f o r m s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t
determined b y F o r m u l a (1.6.4.4) taking:
p = as defined i n 2.5.3.2.3;
m = 15,8;
= 0,9;
.5 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f s t i f f e n e r s o f t h e w a
tertight sections o f d i a p h r a g m s a n d p l a t f o r m s shall
n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.6.4.1 t a k i n g :
p = as defined i n 2.5.3.2.3;
/ = span o f stiffener, i n m , equal t o : t h e dia
p h r a g m spacing, f o r stiffeners parallel t o t h e shell
p l a t i n g ; t h e distance b e t w e e n t h e i n n e r edges o f p r i
m a r y m e m b e r s o f side shell a n d i n n e r s k i n i f t h e
stiffener is welded thereto, f o r stiffeners perpendi
c u l a r t o t h e shell p l a t i n g ; t h e d o u b l e s k i n side b r e a d t h
if t h e stiffener ends are sniped;
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
m = 12 f o r c o n t i n u o u s stiffeners parallel t o t h e
side p l a t i n g ;
m = 1 0 f o r stiffeners p e r p e n d i c u l a r t o t h e side
plating a n d welded t o primary framing members;
m = 8 elsewhere;
= 0,75.
2.5.4.9 I f t h e r e a r e l a r g e o p e n i n g s ( e x c e e d i n g
0,7 t i m e s t h e ship's b r e a d t h i n w i d t h ) i n t h e deck,
s t i f f e n i n g o f t h e d i a p h r a g m s a n d f r a m e s o f t h e side
shell a n d inner s k i n m a y be required o n agreement
w i t h the Register i n connection w i t h the upper deck
pliability, w h i c h shall be determined b y calculation
(refer also t o 3.1.4).
2.5.4.10 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f i n n e r s k i n s h a l l c o m p l y
w i t h the requirements f o r t h e thickness o f long
i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d p l a t i n g i n tankers, as specified
i n 2.7.4.1, using t h e design pressure determined i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2 . 5 . 3 . 2 . 1 . I n a n y case, t h i s thickness
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r
m u l a (2.7.4.1-1).
2.5.4.11 T h e c r o s s t i e s b e t w e e n f r a m e s a n d
l o n g i t u d i n a l s o f side s h e l l a n d i n n e r s k i n , as m e n
tioned under 2.5.2.2.1, shall comply w i t h the re
quirements f o r t h e intermediate struts o f double
b o t t o m , as m e n t i o n e d i n 2.4.4.7 u s i n g t h e design
pressure determined f r o m 2.5.3.1 o r 2.5.3.2.1,
I f cross ties a r e fitted, t h e section m o d u l u s o f
f r a m e s c o m p l y i n g w i t h 2.5.4.1 a n d 2.5.4.2, as w e l l as
o f longitudinals c o m p l y i n g w i t h 2.5.4.3, m a y be r e
duced b y 3 5 p e r cent.
2.5.4.12 I n t h e c a r g o a n d b a l l a s t t a n k s o f t a n k e r s ,
in holds i n t o w h i c h water ballast c a n be taken a n d i n
t a n k s , t h e t h i c k n e s s o f s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s o f side
f r a m i n g s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d b y 3 . 5 . 4 .
efficient c o n n e c t i o n o f l o w e r ends o f frames t o bot
t o m structures shall be ensured b y means o f bilge
brackets o r other structures o f equivalent strength.
T h e bilge brackets shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g
requirements:
.1 t h e d e p t h o f b i l g e b r a c k e t s s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n t h a t o f t h e bilge as a w h o l e . T h efree edge o f a
bilge b r a c k e t s h a l l b e f l a n g e d o r stiffened w i t h a face
plate the dimensions o fw h i c h shall be i n compliance
w i t h 1.7.2.2.2.
T h e thickness o fa bilge bracket is t a k e n equal t o
that o f plate floors i n t h e hull region under con
sideration, b u t i t need n o t exceed t h e f r a m e w e b
t h i c k n e s s m o r e t h a n 1,5 t i m e s .
H o l e s c u t i n bilge brackets shall be such that t h e
w i d t h o f p l a t i n g o u t s i d e t h e h o l e i s n o w h e r e less t h a n
'/ o f t h e b r a c k e t w i d t h .
I n a n y case, t h e size o f b i l g e b r a c k e t s s h a l l n o t b e
less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d b y 1.7.2.2;
P a r t II. H u l l
.2 t h e e n d a t t a c h m e n t s o f a f r a m e t o b i l g e b r a c k e t
shall be designed so that a t n o section t h e section
m o d u l u s i s less t h a n r e q u i r e d f o r a f r a m e ;
.3 w h e r e a n i n c l i n e d m a r g i n p l a t e i s f i t t e d i n t h e
double b o t t o m , t h e bilge bracket shall be carried t o
t h e i n n e r b o t t o m p l a t i n g , a n d i t s face plate (flange)
shall be welded t o t h e plating;
.4 w h e r e a h o r i z o n t a l m a r g i n p l a t e i s fitted i n t h e
double b o t t o m o r transverse system o f f r a m i n g is
adopted i n t h e single b o t t o m , t h e w i d t h o f bilge
brackets shall be determined proceeding f r o m the
condition that their section m o d u l i at t h e p o i n t o f
connection t o the inner b o t t o m plating o r upper
edge o f f l o o r shall be a t least twice those o f t h e
frame.
T h e face p l a t e (flange) o f a bilge b r a c k e t m a y be
w e l d e d t o e i t h e r t h e i n n e r b o t t o m p l a t i n g o r t h e face
plate (flange) o f a floor, o r i t m a y be sniped a t ends.
I f t h e face p l a t e ( f l a n g e ) i s w e l d e d , t h e f l o o r w e b s h a l l
be stiffened w i t h a v e r t i c a l stiffener o r a bracket a t
the p o i n t o fwelding, also welded t o t h einner b o t t o m
p l a t i n g o r t o t h e f l o o r face plate (flange).
T h e d e p t h o f a b i l g e b r a c k e t s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
its w i d t h ;
.5 i f l o n g i t u d i n a l s y s t e m o f f r a m i n g i s a d o p t e d i n
the single b o t t o m , t h e bilge bracket shall be carried a t
least t o t h e b o t t o m l o n g i t u d i n a l nearest t o t h e side
and shall be welded thereto. T h esection m o d u l u s o f
the bracket at t h e section perpendicular t o t h e shell
plating w h e r e t h e bracket w i d t h is t h e greatest shall
be a t least t w i c e t h e section m o d u l u s o f t h e f r a m e .
2.5.5.2 I n a l l t h e s p a c e s , t h e u p p e r e n d s o f f r a m e s
shall be carried t o t h e decks ( p l a t f o r m s ) w i t h m i n i m u m gaps i f they a r e c u t a t t h e decks (platforms).
The beams o f transversely f r a m e d decks (platforms)
shall be c a r r i e d t o t h e i n n e r edges o f f r a m e s w i t h
m i n i m u m gaps.
T h e u p p e r m o s t decks o f ships (except f o r those
secured alongside o t h e r ships a t sea) m a y be designed
w i t h beams carried t o the shell plating w i t h m i n i m u m
gaps, a n d frames carried t o t h e beams.
The brackets b y w h i c h t h e upper ends o f frames
are attached shall be sized i n accordance w i t h t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.7.2.2. I f t h e d e c k i s f r a m e d l o n g itudinally, t h e bracket shall be carried a t least t o t h e
deck l o n g i t u d i n a l nearest t o t h e deck a n d welded t o
that longitudinal.
2.5.5.3 I f t h e f r a m e i s c u t a t d e c k , i t s l o w e r e n d
shall be attached b y a bracket c o m p l y i n g w i t h the
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.7.2.2 T h e b r a c k e t m a y b e o m i t t e d i f
the ends o fthis frame are welded t o the deck plating
f r o m above a n d below, a n d full penetration is ensured.
2.5.5.4 S i d e s t r i n g e r s s h a l l b e a t t a c h e d t o w e b
f r a m e s b y b r a c k e t s c a r r i e d t o t h e w e b f r a m e face
plate a n d welded thereto.
97
2.5.5.5 I f c r o s s t i e s a r e fitted i n t h e w i n g t a n k s o f
t a n k e r s , t h e side t r a n s v e r s e a n d side s t r i n g e r w e b s i n
w a y o f t h e cross t i e attachments shall be p r o v i d e d
w i t h stiffeners w h i c h shall be a n extension o f t h e
cross t i e face plates. C r o s s t i e a t t a c h m e n t s t o side
transverse (side stringer) shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.7.2.3.
2.6 D E C K S A N D
P L A T F O R M S
2.6.1 G e n e r a l .
2.6.1.1 R e q u i r e m e n t s a r e g i v e n i n t h i s C h a p t e r f o r
the deck a n d p l a t f o r m structures o f ships w h e r e t h e
w i d t h o f o p e n i n g f o r a single cargo h a t c h does n o t
exceed 0,7 times t h e ship's b r e a d t h abreast o f t h e
opening. A d d i t i o n a l requirements f o r t h e decks a n d
p l a t f o r m s o f ships h a v i n g greater w i d t h o f openings
a n d their length exceeding 0,7 times t h e spacing o f
centres o f transverse deck strips between t h e openings,
as w e l l a s f o r t h e d e c k s a n d p l a t f o r m s o f ships w i t h
t w i n o r triple h a t c h openings, a r e specified i n 3 . 1 .
Requirements f o r cantilever beams shall also be
f o u n d there.
F o r decks a n d p l a t f o r m s o f r o - r o ships, refer t o 3.2.
Requirements f o r the cargo hatch coamings o f
b u l k carriers are given i n 3.3.
Requirements o f this Chapter cover plating a n d
f r a m i n g m e m b e r s o f decks a n d p l a t f o r m s : deck
longitudinals, beams, deck transverses, deck girders,
h a t c h e n d b e a m s , h a t c h side c o a m i n g s a n d h a t c h e n d
coamings, w a s h plate i n the tanks o f tankers.
A d d i t i o n a l requirements f o r t h e areas o f upper
deck situated below the superstructures are given
in 2.12.5.1 t o 2.12.5.3.
2.6.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
2.6.2.1 I n t a n k e r s o f 8 0 m a n d a b o v e , b u l k c a r r i e r s
a n d o r e carriers, as w e l l as i n o i l / d r y b u l k cargo carriers,
a n d ore/oil carriers, l o n g i t u d i n a l system o f f r a m i n g
shall be adopted f o rt h e strength deck i n w a y o f cargo
holds (tanks).
W h e r e longitudinalsystem o ff r a m i n g is adopted,
the spacing o f deck transverses shall n o t exceed t h a t
o f b o t t o m transverses.
2.6.2.2 P r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e f o r t h e s t r u c t u r a l
continuity o fdeck girders o f the strength deck i n the
midship region. I ft h e deck girders are c u t at transverse bulkheads, their w e b plates shall be welded t o
the transverse bulkheads a n d attached thereto b y
brackets.
T h e w e b plates o f h a t c h e n d coamings, deck
transverses, h a t c h e n d beams a n d w a s h plates shall be
s t r e n g t h e n e d b y stiffeners a n d b r a c k e t s (refer t o 1.7.3).
T h e face plates o f deck girders s h a l l b e c o n n e c t e d
to t h e face plates o f h a t c h e n d b e a m s b y m e a n s o f
98
Rules
d i a m o n d plates (refer t o 1.7.4.5) w h o s e t h i c k n e s s

shall b e e q u a l t o t h e greater face p l a t e thickness.
2.6.2.3 O n t h e s t r e n g t h d e c k , t h e e n d s o f s i d e
coamings at t h e corners o fhatchways shall be either
bent along t h e line o f hatch corner r o u n d i n g a n d
buttwelded t o the hatch e n d coaming o r extended, i n
the f o r m o f a bracket, beyond the corner o f the
hatchway. Provision shall be made f o r a gradual
termination o f the bracket above thedeck girder web.
T h e u p p e r edges o f c o a m i n g s a c t i n g as d e c k gir
ders shall b e stiffened w i t h face plates a n d t h e l o w e r
edges o f t h e c o a m i n g s shall be r o u n d e d .
T h e u p p e r edge o f h a t c h side c o a m i n g shall be
s m o o t h a n d their corners shall be well rounded i n the
transverse direction.
2.6.2.4 T h e d e c k g i r d e r s a n d d e c k t r a n s v e r s e s i n
w a y o f pillars shall be strengthened b y stiffeners o r
tripping brackets.
W h e r e deck girders are connected t o deck trans
verses a n d t h e i r w e b h e i g h t i s different, t h e deck girder
w e b shall be strengthened b y brackets fitted i n line w i t h
the deck transverse. T h e brackets shall be welded t o t h e
face p l a t e o f d e c k transverse, t o t h e w e b a n d face p l a t e
o f deck girder.
W h e r e deck girders are attached t o conventional
beams, t h e w e b o f deck girder shall be strengthened
by vertical stiffeners.
2.6.2.5 I n t h e c a s e o f c o n n e c t i o n o f d e c k l o n g
i t u d i n a l s t o t r a n s v e r s e b u l k h e a d s , t h e e f f e c t i v e sec
tional area o f t h e longitudinals shall be maintained.
2.6.2.6 I n t a n k e r s w i t h t w o e f f e c t i v e l o n g i t u d i n a l
bulkheads, provision shall be made f o ra w a s h plate
at the centreline.
2.6.3 D e c k l o a d s .
2.6.3.1 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e w e a t h e r d e c k
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
p = Q,lp >Pmm
(2.6.3.1)
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
itudinals, t h e design pressure value shall be suitably

increased.
F o r decks a n d p l a t f o r m s intended f o r t h e crew,
passengers a n d equipment, t h e design pressure shall
be d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (1.3.4.1) w h i l e t h e p r o d u c t
hpcg s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n 3 , 5 k P a .
F o r platforms i n the engine r o o m , the m i n i m u m
design pressure shall be 18 k P a .
W a t e r t i g h t lower decks a n d p l a t f o r m s shall be
a d d i t i o n a l l y calculated u s i n g t h e test loads, i n k P a , as
follows:
p = l,5h,
(2.6.3.2)
where h, = vertical distance, i nm ,f r o m deck (platform) plating t o

air pipe top.
2.6.3.3 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e s t r u c t u r e s o f
decks a n d p l a t f o r m s f o r m i n g boundaries o f c o m
partments intended for the carriage o f liquids shall be
2.6.4 S c a n t l i n g s o f d e c k m e m b e r s .
2.6.4.1 T h i c k n e s s o f d e c k p l a t i n g .
2.6.4.1.1 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f s t r e n g t h d e c k p l a t i n g
outside t h e line o f hatch openings, t a k i n g deck
longitudinals i n t o account, shall be t h a t necessary t o
give t h e h u l l section m o d u l u s f o r s t r e n g t h deck, as
r e q u i r e d b y 1.4.6.
T h e adopted thickness o f strength deck plating
w i t h i n midship region shall be i naccordance w i t h the
r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r b u c k l i n g s t r e n g t h (refer t o 1.6.5).
2.6.4.1.2 T h e p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s f o r d e c k s a n d
p l a t f o r m s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r
m u l a (1.6.4.4) taking:
m = 15,8;
for strength deck

w h e r e p = w a v e l o a d a t t h e d e c k l e v e l , a s d e f i n e d i n 1.3.2.2;
0 , 1 1 . + 7 a t t h e f o r e e n d w i t h i n 0 , 2 1 , f r o m t h e f o r w a r d
perpendicular;
0 , 0 1 5 1 , + 7 i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n a n d a f t o f t h e m i d s h i p
region; f o r regions between the fore e n d a n d the midship
r e g i o n , s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y l i n e a r i n t e r p o l a t i o n .
F o r ships o f restricted area o f navigation t h e value
o f a y b e r e d u c e d b y m u l t i p l y i n g b y t h e f a c t o r c p
o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1.3.1.5.
m
k a = 0,3<0,6 i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n f o r
L ^ 6 5 m a n d transverse framing system;
k = as d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (2.2.4.1);
k = 0,6i n themidship region for L = 12 m a n d
the deck is transverse framing system.
W h e r e 1 2 < L < 6 5 m , fc s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y
linear interpolationtaking k = 0,45f o rL = 65m ;
k = 0,6 i n the midship region f o r longitudinal
framing system;
k = 0,7 a t t h e ends o fthe ship w i t h i n 0,12. f r o m
F o r regions between the midship region a n dthe
above p o r t i o n s o f ship's ends, k shall be d e t e r m i n e d
D
CT
2.6.3.2 F o r w e a t h e r d e c k s i n t e n d e d t o c a r r y d e c k
cargo (except t i m b e r a n d coke), t h e design pressure
shall be t a k e n equal t o t h e cargo pressure p de
termined b y F o r m u l a (1.3.4.1). F o r weather decks
intended t o carry timber a n d coke, the value o fh i n
F o r m u l a (1.3.4.1) shall be taken equal t o 0,7 times the
stowage height o f t i m b e r a n d coke o n deck.
F o r l o w e r decks a n d p l a t f o r m s , t h e design pres
sure shall be t a k e n according t o 1.3.4.1. F o r decks
where cargo is suspended f r o m beams o r deck long
c
for t h e second continuous deck situated above

0,752) f r o m t h e base line
k = 0,65k
< 0,8 i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n f o r
2 . ^ 6 5 m a n d transverse framing system;
a
P a r t II. H u l l
99

k = 0,8 i n t h emidship region for L = 12m a n d
linear interpolation taking k = 0,73 f o rL = 65 m ;
k = 0,8 i n t h e midship region f o r longitudinal
framing system;
for other lower decks a n d platforms, k = 0,9.
2.6.4.1.3 I f t h e e n g i n e r o o m i s l o c a t e d a f t , t h e
plating thickness a n d t h e scantlings o f deck long
itudinals, a t the poop (aftdeckhouse) front shall be
maintained abaft t h e poop (deckhouse) front f o r a
l e n g t h o f a t least t h e w i d t h o f m a c h i n e r y casing
opening.
I f t h e distance f r o m t h e fore edge o f casing
o p e n i n g t o t h e p o o p ( d e c k h o u s e ) f r o n t i s less t h a n t h e
w i d t h o f t h e opening, additional strengthening o f
deck m a ybe required i n this region.
2.6.4.1.4 I f t h e t h i c k n e s s o f s t r e n g t h d e c k p l a t i n g
is t a k e n less t h a n t h e side p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s , a d e c k
s t r i n g e r p l a t e s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d . T h e w i d t h b, i n m m ,
o f t h e s t r e n g t h d e c k s t r i n g e r p l a t e s h a l l n o t b e less
than
W h e r e t h e a d o p t e d s p a c i n g i s less t h a n t h e s t a n
d a r d o n e (refer t o 1.1.3) f o r ships o f u n r e s t r i c t e d a r e a
o f navigation a n d restricted area o fnavigation R l ,
the m i n i m u m deck plating a n d p l a t f o r m thickness
m a y be reduced i np r o p o r t i o n t o the ratio o f adopted
spacing t o t h e standard spacing, b u t n o t m o r e t h a n
b y 1 0p e r cent.
I n a n y case, t h e m i n i m u m thickness s h a l l n o t b e
less t h a n 5 , 5 m m .
I n w a y o f compartments intended for the carriage
o f liquids, t h ethickness o f plating a n ddeck structural
members (including perforated members) shall n o t be
less t h a n r e q u i r e d b y 3 . 5 . 4 f o r t a n k e r s a n d n o t less
t h a n determined b y F o r m u l a (2.7.4.1-2) f o r other
ship types.
2.6.4.2 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f d e c k l o n g i t u d i n a l s
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.4.1
a n d 1.6.4.2 t a k i n g :
m = 12;
b = 5 L+ 800 < 1800,
for other decks

k = 0,75.
2.6.4.3 W h e n t h e d e c k s a r e f r a m e d t r a n s v e r s e l y , t h e
scantlings o f b e a m s shall satisfy t h e f o l l o w i n g require
ments:
.1 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f b e a m s s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.6.4.1 t a k i n g :
m = 10;
= 0,65;
.2 t h e i n e r t i a m o m e n t i , i n c m , o f w e a t h e r d e c k
b e a m s i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n o f ships 6 5 m a n d
greater i n l e n g t h shall b e d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e basis o f a
buckling strength calculation o f deck grillage using
b e a m m o d e l s i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.5.
F o r beams having t w o o rm o r e intermediate rigid
supports, t h e required inertia m o m e n t m a y be de
termined, alternatively t o t h e grillage calculation, b y
the following f o r m u l a :
CT
(2.6.4.1.4)
for weather deck

k = 0,45k
< 0,65 i nt h e m i d s h i p region;
k = 0,65 a t the ends o f the ship w i t h i n 0,12. f r o m
a
and t h e thickness o f stringer plate shall n o t be

less t h a n t h a t o f side s h e l l p l a t i n g ( s h e e r s t r a k e ) .
2.6.4.1.5 T h e t h i c k n e s s s^m, i n m m , o f d e c k
p l a t i n g a n d p l a t f o r m s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
f o r u p p e r d e c k b e t w e e n t h e ship's side a n d l i n e o f
large openings ( t a n k decks o f tankers) i n t h e m i d s h i p
region
Smin = ( 4 + 0 , 0 5 2 . f o r L < 1 0 0 m ;
Smin = ( 7 + 0 , 0 2 2 . f o r
100 m ;
(2.6.4.1.5-1)
(2.6.4.1.5-2)
for upper deck a t t h e ends o f the ship a n d inside

the line o flarge openings, as w e l l as f o r t h e second
deck
Smin = ( 4 + 0 , 0 4 2 . ) ^ f o r L < 1 0 0 m ;
Smin = ( 7 + 0 , 0 1 2 . ) ^ f o r 2 . ^ 1 0 0 m ;
(2.6.4.1.5-3)
(2.6.4.1.5-4)
for t h e t h i r d deck a n d other l o w e r decks a n d

platforms
i = 6,33(j/a) / cp3c-10-
(2.6.4.3.2)
Smin = ( 5 + 0 , 0 1 /
(2.6.4.1.5-5)
w h e r e | = a s d e f i n e d i n 1.1.4.3.
w h e r e / = b e a m s p a n , i nm , b e t w e e n supports;
cp = 1 w h e r e ^0,5<, ;
= 4 / ^ ( 1
X=
-=p*-)
4
X /(4-l,5X );
where
a >0,5^;
c
100
Rules
X =
4 - ^ - ( a / s ) , b u t n o t m o r e t h a n 1;
and Construction
2.6.4.4 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f d e c k f r a m i n g m e m b e r s ,
s u c h as deck transverses, deck girders, h a t c h c o a m i n g s
a n d h a t c h e n d beams, s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e basis
o f deck grillage calculation using b e a m models, except
f o r cases m e n t i o n e d u n d e r 2.6.4.5 t o 2.6.4.8. D e s i g n
loads shall be chosen i n accordance w i t h 2.6.3. W h e r e
pillars are fitted, t h e interaction between deck grillage
a n d upper and/or l o w e r structures shall be considered
w i t h regard f o rthe arrangement o f pillars.
P e r m i s s i b l e stress factors s h a l l b e t a k e n as f o l
lows:
strength deck
f o r d e c k girders a n d h a t c h side c o a m i n g s w h i c h
are arranged i n line w i t h t h e deck girders
k
0,35^7)^0,65 i n the midship region for
L^65 m;
k = 0,65i n the midship region f o rL = 12 m .
linear interpolation t a k i n g k = 0,5 for L = 65m ;
above p o r t i o n s o f ship's ends, k shall be d e t e r m i n e d
for deck transverses a n d h a l f beams, h a t c h
coamings, w h i c h are n o t arranged i n line w i t h t h e
deck girders a n d hatch e n d beams
= 0,65;
for deep members, w h i c h are calculated using t h e
shear stresses
= 0,65;
for deep m e m b e r s o f other decks a n d p l a t f o r m s
* , = *,= 0 , 7 .
T h e deep m e m b e r s o f weather deck i n t h e m i d s h i p
region shall also c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements
o f 2.6.4.9.
2.6.4.5 I n t a n k e r s w i t h t w o e f f e c t i v e l o n g i t u d i n a l
bulkheads a n d w i t h n o deck girders, a n d w h e r e
l o n g i t u d i n a l system o f f r a m i n g is adopted, t h e scan
tlings o f deck deep m e m b e r s i n t h e centre t a n k shall
comply w i t h the following requirements:
.1 t h e section m o d u l u s o f deck transverse shall
n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.4.1
a n d 1.6.4.2, t h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f d e c k t r a n s v e r s e w e b ,
e x c l u d i n g o p e n i n g s , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d
f r o m 1.6.4.3 t a k i n g :
k a n d k = as determined according t o 2.6.4.4;
1 = B ; { B = breadth, i n m , o fcentre tank);
m =m ;
-Nmax =
0,7n . pal;
=
CT
b J
b t
Ships
and
shall be determined f r o m T a
ble 2.3.4.2.2 depending u p o n t h eparameter a n d t h e
n u m b e r o f deck transverses w i t h i n t h e t a n k ;
rs = c o m p r e s s i v e s t r e s s e s a s d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.5.1;
,s = a c t u a l d e c k p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s , i n m m .
of Sea-Going
^XuiBtf;
a =
W . /W . .
d t
w p
where L \ = tank length, i n m ;

Wrf.<
section modulus o f deck transverse complying with the
present requirements;
W ,, = s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f w a s h plate c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e
present requirements.
=
w p
T h e value o f t h e parameter a is optional, b u t

shall n o t be greater t h a n 0,6; t h e value o f t h e para
m e t e r s h a l l n o t exceed 1,5.
T h e deck transverse section m o d u l u s shall n o t be
less t h a n
aW . ;
.2 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f w a s h p l a t e s h a l l n o t b e
less t h a n s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2,
the sectional area o f w a s h plate w e b , excluding
o p e n i n g s , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r
1.6.4.3 t a k i n g :
k a n d k = as determined f o r deck girders i n
accordance w i t h 2.6.4.4;
1 = W,
a = distance, i n m , between t h e w a s h plate a n d
longitudinal bulkhead;
m = m , ;
-Nmax =
0,7n . pal;
m
and n
ble 2.3.4.2.2 depending u p o n t h eparameter a n d t h e
n u m b e r o f deck transverses w i t h i n t h etank; shall be
determined i n accordance w i t h 2.6.4.5.1.
Besides, t h e section m o d u l u s o f w a s h plate shall
n o t b e l e s s t h a n W Ja
where W is the deck trans
verse section m o d u l u s c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e require
ments o f 2.6.4.5.1;
a shall be determined i n
accordance w i t h 2.6.4.5.1.
A l o n g t h e free edge, t h e w a s h plate shall be
s t r e n g t h e n e d w i t h a face plate t h e sectional area o f
w h i c h s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f t h e d e c k t r a n s
verse face p l a t e .
2.6.4.6 T h e d e c k t r a n s v e r s e s o f t a n k e r s h a v i n g a
single l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d , t a n k e r s w i t h t w o l o n g
itudinal bulkheads a n d n o deck girders o r strengthened
longitudinals ( i n w i n g t a n k s only), as w e l l as deep h a l f
beams, deep beams a n d hatch e n d coamings o f d r y
cargo ships, w h i c h m a y be considered as m e m b e r s w i t h
rigid s u p p o r t s s h a l l h a v e a s e c t i o n m o d u l u s n o t less
t h a n s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2 a n d a w e b
s e c t i o n a l a r e a , e x c l u d i n g o p e n i n g s , n o t less t h a n s t i p u
l a t e d u n d e r 1.6.4.3 t a k i n g :
w p
c g
c g
dt
k a n d k = as defined i n 2.6.4.4;
m = 10;
-Nmax = 0 , 5 ^ a / .
a
P a r t II. H u l l
101
2.6.4.7 D e c k g i r d e r s a n d h a t c h s i d e c o a m i n g s
.1 d e c k girders a n d h a t c h side c o a m i n g s w h i c h
m a y be considered as members w i t h rigid supports
s h a l l h a v e a s e c t i o n m o d u l u s n o t less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d
i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2, a n d a w e b
s e c t i o n a l a r e a , e x c l u d i n g o p e n i n g s , n o t less t h a n s t i
p u l a t e d u n d e r 1.6.4.3 t a k i n g :
Jc a n d k = a s d e f i n e d i n 2 . 6 . 4 . 4 ;
-Nmax =
0,5pal;
m = 1 0 f o r i n t e r c o s t a l d e c k girders a n d h a t c h side
coamings;
m = 12 f o r continuous deck girders a n d h a t c h
side c o a m i n g s w h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s
at supporting section t a k i n g into account the bracket,
if any, included i n this section;
m = 18 f o r continuous deck girders a n d h a t c h
side c o a m i n g s w h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s
i n t h e s p a n o f a d e c k girder, h a t c h side c o a m i n g ;
.2 f o r s h i p s l e s s t h a n 3 0 m i n l e n g t h , t h e d e c k
girder w e b thickness need n o t be taken greater t h a n
the deck plating thickness, a n d t h e hatch c o a m i n g
w e b thickness shall be 1 m m greater t h a n t h ethick
ness o f deck p l a t i n g ;
.3 i f t h e side c o a m i n g s o f s t r e n g t h d e c k h a t c h e s
t e r m i n a t e i n brackets, t h e length l, i n m , o f these
brackets o n t h e deck shall be:
a
l > 0 , 7 5 h a t Re<3l5 M P a ;
l > l , 5 h a t Re = 3 9 0 M P a
b
(2.6.4.7.3)
where h = height o f coaming a b o v e deck, i n m .
W h e r e deck is framed longitudinally a n d n o deck gir

ders a r e f i t t e d , o r d e c k g i r d e r s s e r v e a s r i g i d s u p p o r t s f o r
d e c k transverses, t h e r e q u i r e d m o m e n t o f i n e r t i a I, i n c m ,
o f deck transverses m a y b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o l l o w i n g
f o r m u l a , as a n alternative t o grillage calculation:
4
I . = 0 , 7 6 ( / / c ) ^ icpx
d
(2.6.4.9)
where / =
=
i =
i =
s p a n o fdeck transverse b e t w e e n supports, i n m ;

distance, i nm , b e t w e e n deck transverses;
spacing o fdeck longitudinals, i n m ;
actual inertia m o m e n t , i n c m , o f deck longitudinal
p r o v i d e d with a face plate;
cp = 1 w h e r e 1,15 ^0,5<, ;
= 4,6 / (1-15 / ) w h e r e l,15cr > 0 , 5 ^ ;
4
X i s d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (2.6.4.3) t a k i n g X = 1,15
<y = c o m p r e s s i v e s t r e s s a s d e f i n e d i n 1.6.5.1;
<y = a c t u a l E u l e r s t r e s s e s i n d e c k l o n g i t u d i n a l s , d e t e r m i n e d i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.5.4.
c
2.6.5.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r h a t c h o p e n i n g s a s
given b e l o w apply t o single hatches w h o s e scantlings
d o n o t exceed those stipulated u n d e r 2.6.1.
T h e openings aresupposed t o be arranged i n the
f o r e - a n d - a f t d i r e c t i o n w i t h t h e i r greater side. O t h e r
wise, t h e corner design o f openings w i l l be subject t o
2.6.5.1.1
F o r t h e strength
deck
within
0,62. a m i d s h i p s , i f L > 65 m , a n d 0,52., i f 4 0 < 2. < 6 5 m ,
the corner radii o f openings i n cargo hatches a n d engine
a n d boiler casings shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g r e
quirements:
w h e n t h e corners a r e r o u n d e d along t h e cir
cumferential arc w i t h a radius r, i n m ,
F o r t h e intermediate values o fR , t h e bracket

length shall be determined b y linear interpolation;
.4 i f c o n t a i n e r s o r o t h e r c a r g o a r e s t o w e d o n c a r g o
h a t c h covers, t h e scantlings o f stiffeners f o r vertical
c o a m i n g plates shall b e so chosen as t o consider b o t h
the h o r i z o n t a l a n d vertical c o m p o n e n t s o f i n e r t i a forces
acting u p o n t h e stiffeners i n t h e event o f rolling.
2.6.4.8 I f d e c k d e e p m e m b e r c a n b e c o n s i d e r e d se
p a r a t e l y f r o m o t h e r s , i t s s e c t i o n m o d u l u s s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2 u s i n g t h e d e s i g n
l o a d s a n d f a c t o r Jc d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 2 . 6 . 4 . 4 a n d
w i t h m = 10.
T h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f s u c h m e m b e r s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n determined b y F o r m u l a (1.6.4.3-1) taking:
Jc = a s s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r 2 . 6 . 4 . 4 ;
-Nmax =
0,5pal;
p = as defined i n 2.6.3.
2.6.4.9 I n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n o f a s h i p 6 5 m a n d
greater i n length, t h e deep m e m b e r scantlings o f t h e
weather deck shall c o m p l y w i t h t h ebuckling strength
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.6.5, t h e b u c k l i n g s t r e n g t h v a l u e s t o
be d e t e r m i n e d b y c a l c u l a t i o n o f t h e deck grillage
using beam models.
r^0,labu
(2.6.5.1.1-1)
e H
w h e n t h e c o r n e r s a r e rounded a l o n g t h e e l l i p t i c a l a r c
w i t h t h e r a t i o o f t h e l e n g t h o f l o n g i t u d i n a l h a l f - a x i s d\, i n m ,
t o t h e l e n g t h o f t r a n s v e r s e h a l f - a x i s c\, i n m , b e i n g e q u a l
to 2
ci>0,07e&i
(2.6.5.1.1-2)
where a = 1, i f t h e corners o f openings a r e n o t reinforced b y

thickened insert plates;
a = 0,7, i f t h e c o r n e r s o f o p e n i n g s a r e r e i n f o r c e d b y t h i c k e n e d
insert plates;
b\ = w h e n c ^ c o , f o r a d j a c e n t e d g e s o f s u c c e s s i v e o p e n i n g s ;
b\ = b w h e n > c , f o r a d j a c e n t e d g e s o f s u c c e s s i v e o p e n i n g s
a n d i nall other cases;
= distance, i n m , between adjacent edges o f successive
openings (length o flanding betweenopenings);
b = breadth, i nm , o f opening;
0
l = length o fopening, i n m .
T h e size o f t h i c k e n e d i n s e r t plates b y w h i c h t h e
corners o fopenings are reinforced shall be i n c o m
pliance w i t h F i g . 2.6.5.1.1 o r w i t h t h e requirements
o f 2.6.5.1.5 w h e r e r shall b e d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r
m u l a (2.6.5.1.1-1) i ft h e r o u n d i n g is m a d e along t h e
102
Area
Area A
>3,5r
Fig.
Ships
I f t h e h a t c h side c o a m i n g t e r m i n a t e s i n a b r a c k e t ,
the bracket the shall n o t coincide w i t h the butt joint
o f the deck plating.
2.6.5.1.5 I f the lost cross-sectional area o f deck
shall be compensated i n w a y o f an isolated opening,
reinforcement shall be applied as s h o w n i n
F i g . 2.6.5.1.5. T h e v a l u e o f f a c t o r s h a l l b e selected
proceeding f r o m t h e relationship between t h e deck
p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s s, i n s e r t p l a t e t h i c k n e s s s\ a n d
o p e n i n g w i d t h b, b u t s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n l e s s t h a n
= 0,35s/s\.
2.6.5.1.1
c i r c u m f e r e n t i a l a r c ; r = c\ f o r t h e t r a n s v e r s e d i m e n
s i o n s o f t h e i n s e r t p l a t e , a n d r = d\ f o r i t s l o n g
i t u d i n a l d i m e n s i o n s i f t h e r o u n d i n g is m a d e a l o n g t h e
e l l i p t i c a l a r c , a n d c\ s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r
m u l a (2.6.5.1.1-2).
2.6.5.1.2 F o r t h e strength deck outside t h e area
indicated i n2.6.5.1.1 a n d f o r the second continuous
d e c k s i t u a t e d a b o v e 0,75Z> f r o m t h e b a s e l i n e , t h e
corner radii o f openings, as required b y 2.6.5.1.1,
m a y , i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.1.3, b e r e d u c e d b y h a l f i n
the midship region. T h e m i n i m u m radius shall not be
t a k e n less t h a n 0 , 2 m .
F o r other regions, other decks and platforms, as
w e l l a s f o r s h i p s less t h a n 4 0 m i n l e n g t h , t h e m i n i m u m
corner radius o f openings i n cargo hatches and engine
a n d boiler casings m a y b e t a k e n equal t o 0,15 m .
2.6.5.1.3 A t corners o f openings i n t h e cargo
hatches o fdecks (irrespective o ftheir location over
the length a n d depth o f t h e hull) exposed t o l o w
temperatures, t h e radii o f curvature shall comply
w i t h t h e requirements f o r similar structures o f t h e
strength deck, situated i n t h e m i d s h i p region (refer
to 2.6.5.1.1).
2.6.5.1.4 I n t h e area A (refer t o F i g . 2.6.5.1.1),
butts o f deck p l a t i n g a n d c o a m i n g plates, b u t t welds
o f p r i m a r y and deep longitudinal members, openings
w e l d i n g o f shackles, f r a m e s , etc., as w e l l as m o u n t i n g
parts, t o deck plating are n o t permitted.
I n the area (refer t o F i g . 2.6.5.1.1), o n l y s m a l l
openings generally o f a r o u n d o relliptical shape w i t h
a m i n i m u m s i z e n o t e x c e e d i n g 2 0 s (s = d e c k p l a t i n g
thickness, i n m m ) are permitted. P e n e t r a t i o n o f welds
t o l o n g i t u d i n a l edges o f openings shall b e a v o i d e d as
far as practicable.
I f t h e deck plating is terminated a t a hatch
c o a m i n g (or engine casing) a n d welded thereto, full
penetration welds shall be used. W h e r e t h e deck
p l a t i n g extends inside a h a t c h c o a m i n g , the free edges
o f p l a t i n g shall b e s m o o t h w i t h i n the h a t c h a n d free
of weld attachments.
F i g . 2.6.5.1.5
2.6.5.1.6 T h e deck plating thickness between

transverse edges o f adjacent successive openings i n
cargo hatches a n d engine casings (refer t o 2.6.5.1.1)
w i t h i n their w i d t h except f o r t h e transverse d i m e n
s i o n s o f r o u n d i n g s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n s t i p u l a t e d
under 2.6.4.1.5.
T h e thickness 5 1 is permitted i nw a y o f trans
verse edges o f isolated openings i n the area s h o w n i n
F i g . 2.6.5.1.6.
I f longitudinal system o f framing is adopted, the
deck plating between hatch e n d coamings shall be
additionally strengthened b y fitting o f transverse i n
tercostal stiffeners a t every frame.
Fig.
2.6.5.1.6
2.6.5.1.7 Single openings i n the strength deck a n d

i n t h e s e c o n d c o n t i n u o u s d e c k s i t u a t e d a b o v e 0,75Z>
f r o m the base line, i n areas w i t h i n the m i d s h i p region,
P a r t II. H u l l
103
as m e n t i o n e d i n 2 . 6 . 5 . 1 . 1 a n d 2.6.5.1.2, a n d b e t w e e n
t h e ship's side a n d t h e line o f h a t c h o p e n i n g s i n ships
o f 4 0 m a n d greater i n l e n g t h shall be as s m a l l as
practicable a n d be arranged w e l l clear o f the corners
o f openings i n cargo hatches a n d engine a n d boiler
casings, as w e l l as o f the ends o f superstructures.
Rectangular a n d circular openings i n the above
areas need n o t be reinforced, i f their w i d t h (diameter)
is less t h a n 2 0 t i m e s t h e d e c k p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s i n w a y
o f t h e o p e n i n g , o r 3 0 0 m m , w h i c h e v e r i s less.
N o openings arepermitted i n the thickened insert
plates b y w h i c h t h e corners o f cargo hatches a n d
engine a n d b o i l e r casings a r e reinforced, as w e l l as i n
the thickened deck stringer plates a t t h e ends o f sup e r s t r u c t u r e s a n d a t t h e toes o f b r a c k e t s i n w h i c h side
coamings terminate.
Openings (including rectangular ones) shall n o t
be r e i n f o r c e d w h e n located inside t h e line o f large
h a t c h w a y openings n o t m o r e t h a n 0,256 f r o m t h e
centreline a n d 0 , 5 6 f r o m t h e transverse edges o f a
cargo h a t c h w a y opening (where b is t h e w i d t h o f
cargo hatch, i n m ) .
F o r isolated openings i n the area indicated i n
Fig. 2.6.5.1.6, reinforcement is n o t required.
I f the distance between t h e edge o fa n o p e n i n g i n
t h e s t r e n g t h d e c k a n d ship's side ( o r a h a t c h side
c o a m i n g ) i s less t h a n t w i c e t h e o p e n i n g w i d t h , a p propriate reinforcement shall be provided irrespective
o f t h e w i d t h a n d shape o f opening. T h e aforesaid
d i s t a n c e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 7 5 m m .
T h e corners o f rectangular openings shall be
rounded w i t h a radius. I n general, r
= 0,16 (where
b i s t h e w i d t h o f o p e n i n g , i n m ) . I n a n y case, t h e
m i n i m u m r a d i u s o f c u r v a t u r e s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n less
than twice the plating thickness i n w a y o f the opening
o r 5 0 m m , w h i c h e v e r is t h e greater.
2.6.5.2 T h e t h i c k n e s s s, i n m m , o f t h e c o a m i n g s
o f v e n t i l a t o r s ( v e n t i l a t i n g t u b i n g , ducts, t r u n k s , etc.)
o n t h efreeboard deck a n d quarter deck, as w e l l as o n
the o p e n decks o f superstructures w i t h i n 0,252. f r o m
t h e f o r w a r d p e r p e n d i c u l a r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
where d = internal diameter o r length o f t h e greater side o f a

c o a m i n g section, i n m m ;
s = thickness o f deck plating, i n m m ,
d
T h e thickness o f coamings o n decks o f t h e first
tier superstructures situated outside 0,252. f r o m t h e
f o r w a r d perpendicular m a y be reduced b y 10per cent
as c o m p a r e d t o t h a t r e q u i r e d f o r c o a m i n g s o n f r e e b o a r d deck a n d raised quarter deck.
W h e r e t h e t h i c k n e s s o f d e c k p l a t i n g i s less
than 10 m m , a welded insert o r doubling plate shall
be fitted i n w a y o f t h e c o a m i n g , h a v i n g a thickness
e q u a l t o a t l e a s t 1 0 m m , l e n g t h a n d b r e a d t h n o t less
than twice the diameter o r twice the length o f the
greater side o f t h e c o a m i n g section.
I n case o f a n efficient c o n n e c t i o n o f the c o a m i n g
to t h e deck framing, fitting o fwelded insert o r doubling plate is n o t required.
W h e r e t h e height o f a ventilator coaming is
greater t h a n 0,9 m a n d t h e c o a m i n g is n o t supported
by adjacent h u l l structures, brackets shall be fitted t o
attach t h e c o a m i n g t o t h e deck.
T h e height o f ventilator coamings shall be determined i n accordance w i t h 7.8, Part I I I "Equipment, Arrangements a n d Outfit".
T h e structure o f c o m p a n i o n w a y a n d skylight
coamings shall have strength equivalent t o that o f
cargo hatches, whereas t h e thickness o f t h e coamings
s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n less t h a n 7 m m , b u t n e e d n o t e x c e e d
the thickness o f deck plating i n w a y o fthe coaming.
min
s = 0,0W + 5
C
(2.6.5.2-1)
where d = internal diameter o r length o f t h e greater side o f a

c o a m i n g section, i n m m .
c
T h e t h i c k n e s s s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 7 m m , b u t i t
need n o t be greater t h a n 10 m m .
I n ships o f restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 ,
R 2 - R S N , R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) , R 3 - R S N a n d R 3 , less t h a n
2 4 m i n l e n g t h , t h e t h i c k n e s s s, i n m m , o f v e n t i l a t o r
c o a m i n g s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
s = 0 , 0 W + 4;
or
(2.6.5.2-2)
s = s + 1
(2.6.5.2-3)
2.7 B U L K H E A D S , P R O P E L L E R S H A F T
T U N N E L
2.7.1 G e n e r a l a n d d e f i n i t i o n s .
for various types o f bulkheads, propeller shaft t u n n e l
and cofferdams. Requirements f o r cofferdam bulkheads are given under 3.3.
2.7.1.2 D e f i n i t i o n s .
F o r the purpose o f this Chapter, the following
definitions have been adopted.
W a t e r t i g h t ( e m e r g e n c y ) b u l k h e a d is
a bulkhead restricting t h e f l o w o f water t h r o u g h ship
spaces i n t h e case o f emergency.
C o f f e r d a m b u l k h e a d is a bulkhead having t w o parallel tight platings, either strengthened
w i t h vertical o r h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners o r n o t , w h i c h are
connected t o each other b y plate structures perpendicular t o the platings: vertical structures (diaphragms) and/or h o r i z o n t a l structures (platforms). I f
n o diaphragms a n dplatforms are fitted, t h e structure
shall be considered as t w o bulkheads b o u n d i n g t h e
cofferdam.
104
Rules
T i g h t b u l k h e a d is a bulkhead p r o o f against
water a n d other liquids.
W a s h b u l k h e a d is a bulkhead w i t h openings, fitted inside a c o m p a r t m e n t i n order t o reduce
i m p a c t pressure d u e t o t h e m o v e m e n t o f liquid
therein.
T a n k / c a r g o t a n k b u l k h e a d is a bulkhead b o u n d i n g a ballast, fuel o r other tank, as w e l l as
a cargo tank o f tanker.
P a r t i a l b u l k h e a d is a bulkhead fitted i n a
c o m p a r t m e n t o r part thereof, w h i c h shall ensure a d ditional support f o rdeck structures.
2.7.1.3 T h e t o t a l n u m b e r o f t r a n s v e r s e w a t e r t i g h t
bulkheads, including fore a n d after peak bulkheads,
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n specified i n T a b l e 2 . 7 . 1 . 3 . T h e s e
requirements apply t o cargo ships o n l y a n d are
minimum.
T a b l e
2.7.1.3
Total number o f bulkheads

L e n g t h o f the ship, i n m
Machinery
amidships
U p t o 65
65 t o 8 5
85 t o 105
105 t o 125
125 t o 145
145 t o 165
165 t o 185
A b o v e 185
Machinery
aft
4
4
5
6
7
8
9
O n a g r e e m e n t wi t h t h e
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
Register
' W i t h after p e a k b u l k h e a d forming after b o u n d a r y o ft h e

engine room.
Where compliance w i t h subdivision requirements

shall be ensured, t h e n u m b e r a n d disposition o f w a tertight bulkheads ( a n d o f partial watertight bulkheads) shall be determined proceeding f r o m the
requirements o fPart V "Subdivision".
I n special cases, a r e d u c t i o n i n n u m b e r o f b u l k h e a d s m a y b e p e r m i t t e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r . I n t h i s case,
t w o adjacent w a t e r t i g h t bulkheads shall be spaced
n o t m o r e t h a n 3 0 m apart. Increase o f this distance
shall be a m a t t e r o f t h e special c o n s i d e r a t i o n o f t h e
A l l t h e transverse watertight bulkheads located
between fore a n d after peak bulkheads shall generally
be carried t o t h e freeboard deck.
2.7.1.4 P e a k a n d e n g i n e r o o m b u l k h e a d s , s h a f t
tunnels shall also c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements
o f 1.1.6.1 o r 1.1.6.2.
2.7.1.5 C o m p a r t m e n t s i n t e n d e d f o r t h e c a r r i a g e
o f liquid cargoes a n d ballast, f o r w h i c h I > 0,132.
a n d / o r b > 0,6B (I a n d b a r e t h e l e n g t h a n d b r e a d t h ,
i n m , o f a c o m p a r t m e n t , as measured i n the m i d d l e o f
its height), a r e subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e
Register.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
2.7.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
2.7.2.1 T i g h t b u l k h e a d s m a y b e e i t h e r p l a n e o r
corrugated. W a s h bulkheads w i t h openings shall be
plane bulkheads.
F o r the construction o f longitudinal tight bulkheads, as w e l l as f o r t h e t i g h t b u l k h e a d s o f l o g a n d
d e p t h s o u n d e r w e l l s , escape t r u n k s , p r o p e l l e r shaft
tunnel, etc., t h e same requirements apply as f o r
transverse tight bulkheads.
I n b u l k h e a d s , w a t e r t i g h t steps a n d recesses a r e
permitted.
I n tankers, the longitudinal bulkheads shall be
tight throughout the cargo t a n k region (including
p u m p rooms a n d cofferdams) w i t h the exception o f
the third bulkhead a t the centreline w h i c h m a y be
constructed as a w a s h bulkhead.
A t intersections o f longitudinal a n d transverse
bulkheads, structural continuity o f longitudinal
bulkheads shall be ensured. T h e t e r m i n a t i o n o f
longitudinal bulkheads shall be smooth.
Partial bulkheads shall be plane bulkheads.
2.7.2.2 I n c o r r u g a t e d l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s , t h e
corrugations shall generally be arranged horizontally,
while i n transverse bulkheads t h e arrangtement o f
corrugations m a ybe b o t h horizontal a n dvertical.
Plane bulkheads shall be strengthened b y vertical
o r h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners. T h e vertical a n d h o r i z o n t a l
stiffeners o f plane b u l k h e a d s as w e l l as the v e r t i c a l a n d
horizontal corrugations o fcorrugated bulkheads m a y
be s u p p o r t e d b y h o r i z o n t a l girders o r v e r t i c a l w e b s
respectively.
T h e h o r i z o n t a l girders a n d vertical webs shall be
stiffened i n accordance w i t h t h e requirements
o f 1.7.3.
Partial bulkheads shall be strengthened b y vertical webs.
2.7.2.3 T h e e n d a t t a c h m e n t s o f b u l k h e a d f r a m i n g
members shall c o m p l y w i t h the following requirements:
.1 t h e ends o f v e r t i c a l w e b s a n d h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners o f bulkheads shall generally be attached b y
b r a c k e t s c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.7.2.2.
Bracket attachments are required f o r t h e ends o f
m a i n f r a m i n g o f forepeak b u l k h e a d b e l o w t h e freeb o a r d deck;
.2 i f t r a n s v e r s e s y s t e m o f f r a m i n g i s a d o p t e d , t h e
brackets b y w h i c h t h e vertical webs o f transverse
bulkheads are attached t o deck plating a n d inner
b o t t o m plating ( b o t t o m plating) shall be carried t o
the b e a m o r floor nearest t o t h e b u l k h e a d a n d welded
thereto.
W h e r e transverse f r a m i n g system is adopted, t h e
brackets b y w h i c h t h e h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners o f b u l k h e a d s a r e a t t a c h e d t o t h e side o r o t h e r b u l k h e a d s h a l l
be carried t o t h e f r a m e o r v e r t i c a l stiffener nearest t o
the bulkhead a n d welded thereto;
P a r t II. H u l l
105
.3 w h e n t h e v e r t i c a l s t i f f e n e r s o f b u l k h e a d s a r e
cut a t decks, p l a t f o r m s o r h o r i z o n t a l girders a n d n o
brackets are fitted, t h e stiffener ends shall be welded
to deck o r p l a t f o r m plating, t o h o r i z o n t a l girder web,
o r sniped a t ends;
.4 t h e e n d a t t a c h m e n t s o f v e r t i c a l w e b s a n d
h o r i z o n t a l girders shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements
o f 1.7.2.3.
W h e r e there are n o h o r i z o n t a l girders o n longi t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s a n d / o r side stringers a t t h e level o f
the h o r i z o n t a l girder brackets o f transverse bulkheads, the brackets shall be carried t o t h e nearest
vertical w e b o n longitudinal bulkhead and/or the
nearest frame a n d welded thereto.
I f the vertical w e b o n a transverse bulkhead is n o t
i n l i n e w i t h t h e centre g i r d e r o r side girder, a b r a c k e t
shall be fitted i n the double b o t t o m under t h e bracket
by w h i c h t h e l o w e r e n d o f the vertical w e b is attached.
2.7.2.4 T h e a t t a c h m e n t s o f c o r r u g a t e d b u l k h e a d s
.1 w h e r e a h o r i z o n t a l l y c o r r u g a t e d b u l k h e a d is
attached t o deck a n d b o t t o m (inner b o t t o m ) o r a
vertically corrugated b u l k h e a d is attached t o ship's
sides a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s , p r o v i s i o n s h a l l be
m a d e f o r flat transition areas w h o s e structure,
thickness a n d stiffening shall be i n compliance w i t h
the requirements f o rplane bulkheads;
.2 a t t a c h m e n t o f c o r r u g a t i o n e n d s s h a l l b e e f fected b y w e l d i n g t h e m directly t o t h e i n n e r b o t t o m
p l a t i n g ( b o t t o m p l a t i n g ) , side p l a t i n g , d e c k p l a t i n g ,
etc. I n s o d o i n g , a t t e n t i o n s h a l l b e g i v e n t o e l i m i n a t i n g h a r d spots (refer t o 1.7.1.4) i n t h e a b o v e
structures;
.3 r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e a t t a c h m e n t s o f c o r r u gated b u l k h e a d s i n b u l k carriers a r e g i v e n i n 3.3.2.
2.7.3 B u l k h e a d l o a d s .
2.7.3.1 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e p , i n k P a , o n w a t e r tight b u l k h e a d structures a n d propeller shaft t u n n e l
shall be taken equal t o
p = az
(2.7.3.1)
w h e r e <x = 10 f o r f o r e p e a k b u l k h e a d s t r u c t u r e s ;
<x = 7,5 e l s e w h e r e ;
z = distance, i n m , a s m e a s u r e d a t t h ecentreline, f r o m t h e
p o i n t o f design l o a d application t o i t s u p p e r level; t h e
u p p e r load level is: t h e b u l k h e a d deck f o r watertight
bulkheads a n d propeller shaft tunnel, t h eu p p e r edge o f
forepeak b u l k h e a d f o r t h eforepeak bulkhead.
If partial watertight b u l k h e a d s are fitted o nthe b u l k h e a d
d e c k i n line w i t h t h e watertight b u l k h e a d s o r i n close
vicinity t o them, z shall b e measured t o theupper edge
of the watertight partial bulkheads.
b
I n a n y case, t h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e s h a l l b e n o t less
t h a n 12 k P a f o r watertight bulkhead structures a n d
n o t less t h a n 1 6 k P a f o r f o r e p e a k b u l k h e a d s t r u c t u r e s .
2.7.3.2 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e b u l k h e a d s o f
tanks, cargo tanks a n d water ballast holds shall be
T h e design pressure o n t h e w a s h bulkheads a n d

plates shall be determined b y F o r m u l a e (1.3.4.2.2-1)
a n d ( 1 . 3 . 4 . 2 . 2 - 2 ) , b u t s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
Pmin = 2 5 k P a .
T h e design pressure o n bulkheads b o u n d i n g
heavy b u l k cargo holds shall be determined i n acc o r d a n c e w i t h 1.3.4.3.
2.7.4 S c a n t l i n g s o f b u l k h e a d m e m b e r s .
2.7.4.1 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f b u l k h e a d p l a t i n g s h a l l b e
n o t less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a ( 1 . 6 . 4 . 4 ) t a k i n g :
m = 15,8;
for thelongitudinalbulkheads o ftankers 65 m o r
greater i n length, w i t h transverse f r a m i n g i n t h e
midship region
k = 0,55<0,8 a t t h e l e v e l o f b a s e l i n e ;
k = 0,55k
< 0,8 a t t h e u p p e r d e c k level;
k = 0,8 i n w a y o f (0,4 0,5)2) f r o m t h e base line.
F o r intermediate regions over t h e ship's depth, k
shall be determined b y linear interpolation;
k = 0,8 f o r L = 12 m .
linear interpolation taking k = 0,68 f o rL = 65 m a t
the level o f base line a n d u p p e r deck;
k = 0,9 a t t h e ends o ft h e ship w i t h i n 0,12. f r o m
k = 0,9 f o rother bulkheads.
I n ships o f5 0 m i n length, t h e thickness o f water
tight bulkhead plating m a y be reduced b y 0,5 m m ,
a n d i n ships o f 4 0 m i n l e n g t h o r b e l o w , b y 1 m m .
F o r intermediate ship lengths, the reduction i n
thickness shall be determined b y linear interpolation.
I n tankers, the thickness o f t o p a n d b o t t o m
strakes o f l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads shall c o m p l y w i t h
t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r side p l a t i n g , as g i v e n i n 2.2.4,
w i t h regard f o r t h e liquid cargo pressure.
T h e p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s Srr,\ , i n m m , o f w a t e r t i g h t
bulkheads a n d bulkheads o f lubricating o i l tanks
a
CT
Jmin = 4 + 0,022..
(2.7.4.1-1)
W h e r e L > 150 m , L shall be t a k e n equal t o 150 m .
T h e thickness o fb o t t o m plates o fbulkheads shall
e x c e e d t h e a b o v e v a l u e b y 1 m m , b u t s h a l l n o t b e less
than 6m m .
F o r t a n k bulkheads (except lubricating o i l tanks),
t h e t h i c k n e s s Srr,\ , i n m m , o f p l a t i n g , f a c e p l a t e s a n d
w e b s o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
n
Jmin = 5 + 0,0152.;
6,0<j
<7,5 m m .
m i n
(2.7.4.1-2)
106
Rules
I n tankers, t h e m i n i m u m bulkhead plating

thickness i n w a y o fcargo a n d ballast tanks shall n o t
b e less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d b y 3 . 5 . 4 .
Bulkhead plating m a y have a thickness n o t exceeding that o f relevant shell plating strakes a n d deck
p l a t i n g , w h e r e t h e spans a n d y i e l d stress v a l u e s a r e
identical. T h e same applies t o t h e thickness r e lationship o f bulkhead b o t t o m plating a n d inner
b o t t o m plating ( b o t t o m plating).
T h e breadth o f t o p a n d b o t t o m strakes o f b u l k heads shall be determined i naccordance w i t h 2.7.5.1.
W h e r e sterntubes penetrate t h r o u g h bulkhead
plating, t h e thickness o f the latter shall be doubled.
T h e thickness o fcorrugated bulkheads shall be
d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.4.5 w i t h r e g a r d f o r
the requirements f o rt h e section m o d u l i o f vertical
a n d h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners, as specified i n 2.7.4.2.
2.7.4.2 T h e section m o d u l u s o f vertical a n d h o r i z o n t a l s t i f f e n e r s o f b u l k h e a d s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2 t a k i n g :
m = as obtained f r o m T a b l e 2.7.4.2;
T a b l e
2.7.4.2
Framing members
Single s p a n vertical stiffeners:
both ends sniped
upper e n d sniped, lower e n d welded t o supporting
structure
both ends welded t o supporting structure
10
u p p e r e n d welded t o supporting structure, lower e n d

bracketed
14
both ends bracketed
18
M u l t i s p a n vertical stiffeners:
within span
18
within intermediate supporting section, w h e r e stiffener

is c o n t i n u o u s t h r o u g h s u p p o r t i n g s t r u c t u r e
12
H o r i z o n t a l stiffeners
12
Additionally, strength i nthe supporting section shall b e

verified, considering t h e bracket a s part o f t h e section,
w i t h m = 12.
W i t h r e g a r d f o r a bracket, i f fitted, i n t h e s u p p o r t i n g
section.
2
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
Unear interpolation, taking k = 0,65 f o r L = 65 m
at t h e base Une a n d upper deck level.
k = 0,75 f o r o t h e r girders o f b u l k h e a d f r a m i n g .
m = 10f o r corrugations;
m = 13 f o r vertical corrugations o f bulkheads
whose t o p a n d b o t t o m ends are attached t o deck a n d
b o t t o m o r t o inner b o t t o m b y transverse members o f
rectangular o r trapezoidal section a n db y supports o f
t r a p e z o i d a l section c o m p l y i n g w i t h 3.3, respectively.
H o r i z o n t a l stiffeners o f l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads
fitted a t a distance o f0,152) f r o m deck a n d b o t t o m
shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e buckUng strength requirements
o f 1.6.5.
F o r t a n k bulkheads (except lubricating o i l tanks),
the thickness o f m e m b e r w e b s a n d face plates as w e l l
as o f t h e i r s t i f f e n i n g b r a c k e t s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
required b y F o r m u l a (2.7.4.1-2), a n d f o rt h e bulk
heads o ftankers i nw a y o fcargo a n d ballast tanks i t
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r 3 . 5 . 4 .
2.7.4.3 B u l k h e a d vertical webs a n d h o r i z o n t a l
girders shall satisfy t h e f o l l o w i n g requirements:
.1 t h e section m o d u l u s a n d w e b sectional area, ex
cluding openings, o f t h e vertical webs o f bulkheads
w h o s e structure does n o t include h o r i z o n t a l girders,
a n d o f t h e h o r i z o n t a l girders o f bulkheads w h o s e
structure does n o t include vertical webs, shall n o t be
less t h a n s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r 1 . 6 . 4 . 1 t o 1.6.4.3 t a k i n g :
CT
-Nmax = npal;
m a n d n for the longitudinalbulkheads o f tankers
shall be determined f r o m T a b l e 2.7.4.3-1 depending
u p o n t h e n u m b e r o f cross ties fitted i n w i n g t a n k s
between deep m e m b e r s o f b u l k h e a d a n d o f ship's
side; f o r o t h e r b u l k h e a d s f o r w h i c h v e r t i c a l w e b s a r e
provided, b u t h o r i z o n t a l girders a r e o m i t t e d , o r vice
versa, t h e values o f m a n d n shall be obtained f r o m
Table 2.7.4.3-2;
/ = span, including t h e brackets, i n m ;
k is determined f o r h o r i z o n t a l girders o f l o n g
itudinal bulkheads i n tankers i n the same w a y as f o r the
a
for h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners o f l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k heads fitted i n t h e midship region o f tankers 65 m

and greater i n length
k = 0,55<0,75 a t t h e l e v e l o f b a s e U n e ;
k = 0,55&<0,75 a t t h e u p p e r d e c k l e v e l ;
k = 0,75 w i t h i n ( 0 , 4 - 0 , 5 ) 2 ) f r o m t h e base Une.
F o r intermediate regions over t h e ship's depth,
k shall be determined b y Unear interpolation;
k = 0,75 f o r L = 12 m ;
T a b l e
Member
Parameter
2.7.4.3-1
N u m b e r o f cross ties
11
24
24
24
0,5
0,325
0,3
0,275
18
36
36
36
0,5
0,35
0,3
0,3
Vertical w e b
Horizontal
girder
P a r t II. H u l l
107
T a b l e
2.7.4.3-2
Vertical web:
in holds o r tanks
in 'tween decks
11
10
0,5
0,5
Horizontal girder:
in tanks
in wing tanks
10
18
0,5
0,5
Member
.2 p a r t i a l b u l k h e a d s t i f f e n e r s s u p p o r t i n g d e c k
transverses a n d h a t c h e n d beams shall be i n ac
cordance w i t h the requirements f o r relevant pillars
(refer t o 2.9).
I n a n y case, t h e E u l e r stresses, i n M P a , i n a
stiffener, t o be d e t e r m i n e d i naccordance w i t h 2.9.4.1,
<y = 200.
e
h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners o f those b u l k h e a d s i n accordance

w i t h 2 . 7 . 4 . 2 ; f o r o t h e r w e b s a n d g i r d e r s , Jc = 0 , 7 5 ;
= 0,75;
.2 w h e r e t h e b u l k h e a d s t r u c t u r e i n c o r p o r a t e s
b o t h v e r t i c a l webs a n d h o r i z o n t a l girders, t h e scan
tlings o f those m e m b e r s shall be determined o n the
basis o f grillage c a l c u l a t i o n using b e a m models, w i t h
design loads as stipulated u n d e r 2.7.3 a n d permissible
stress f a c t o r s as s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r 2.7.4.3.1;
.3 f o r t h e g i r d e r s a n d w e b s o f c o r r u g a t e d b u l k
heads, t h e l o w e s t cross section shall be a d o p t e d as t h e
design cross section; t h e face p l a t e w i d t h s h a l l be
d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.3.6;
.4 f o r t a n k b u l k h e a d s ( e x c e p t l u b r i c a t i n g o i l
t a n k s ) , t h e w e b a n d face p l a t e thickness o f girders
a n d o f t h e i r b r a c k e t s a n d s t i f f e n e r s s h a l l n o t b e less
than required b y F o r m u l a (2.7.4.1-2); f o r tanker
bulkheads i n w a y o f cargo a n d ballast tanks, this
t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d b y 3 . 5 . 4 .
2.7.4.4 I n c o m p a r t m e n t s i n t e n d e d f o r t h e c a r r i a g e
o f liquid cargoes a n d ballast, t h e scantlings o f m e m
bers o f w a s h bulkheads a n d w a s h plates shall c o m p l y
w i t h the following additional requirements:
.1 i n t h e w a s h b u l k h e a d s , t h e t o t a l area o f
openings shall n o t be greater t h a n 10 per cent o f the
b u l k h e a d a r e a as a w h o l e . T h e n u m b e r a n d size o f
openings i n t h e t o p a n d b o t t o m strakes shall be as
small as possible.
T h e thickness a n d breadth o f the t o pa n d b o t t o m
plates o f w a s h bulkheads shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e re
quirements for the bulkhead plating o f tanks o r cargo
(ballast) tanks proceeding f r o m t h e purpose;
.2 a w a s h p l a t e s h a l l b e s t i f f e n e d b y f r a m i n g
complying w i t h the requirements f o rw a s h bulkhead
framing.
T h e free edge o f the w a s h plate shall be stiffened
b y a h o r i z o n t a l stiffener o r a face plate. T h e i r section
modulus shall comply w i t h the requirements f o r the
primary members o fwash bulkheads.
W h e r e a w a s h plate serves as t h e u n d e c k girder, i t
shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.6.
2.7.4.5 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f p a r t i a l b u l k h e a d m e m
bers shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g requirements:
.1 t h e t h i c k n e s s o f p a r t i a l b u l k h e a d p l a t i n g s h a l l
n o t b e less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d b y F o r m u l a ( 2 . 7 . 4 . 1 - 1 ) ;
a
(2.7.4.5.2)
T h e m o m e n t o f inertia a n d sectional area o f t h e

stiffener o n t h e basis o f w h i c h t h e E u l e r stresses
therein are determined shall be calculated w i t h regard
f o r t h e face p l a t e o f p a r t i a l b u l k h e a d p l a t i n g e q u a l i n
w i d t h t o h a l f t h e distance between t h e stiffeners;
.3 i f t h e p a r t i a l b u l k h e a d t a k e s u p t h e l o a d d i
rectly f r o m cargo, t h e scantlings o f its m e m b e r s shall
comply with the requirements f o r hold bulkheads
w i t h regard f o rt h e particular cargo.
2.7.4.6 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f s h a f t t u n n e l m e m b e r s ,
its recess i n c l u d e d , a n d t h o s e o f t h e t i g h t b u l k h e a d s
o f l o g a n d d e p t h s o u n d e r wells, escape t r u n k s , etc.
shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements f o r t h e scantlings
of watertight bulkhead members.
I f the shaft t u n n e l passes t h r o u g h a c o m p a r t m e n t
intended f o r t h e carriage o f liquid cargo o r ballast,
the scantlings o f its m e m b e r s shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e
requirements f o r t h e scantlings o f t h e m e m b e r s o f
tight bulkheads bounding the compartment.
I f t h e t o p plating is well curved, t h e thickness
m a y be reduced b y 10 p e r cent.
U n d e r hatchways the t o p plating thickness shall
be increased b y 2 m m .
2.7.5.1 T h e b r e a d t h o f t h e b o t t o m s t r a k e o f
b u l k h e a d , as m e a s u r e d f r o m i n n e r b o t t o m plating,
or, where double b o t t o m is omitted, f r o m the b o t t o m
shell, s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 0 , 9 m f o r s h i p s o f 4 0 m
a n d g r e a t e r i n l e n g t h , a n d n o t less t h a n 0 , 4 m f o r
ships o f 12 m i n length. F o r i n t e r m e d i a t e ship
lengths, thebreadth o f this strake shall be determined
by Unear interpolation. I f the double b o t t o m extends
t o t h e b u l k h e a d o n o n e side o n l y , t h e b o t t o m s t r a k e
o f b u l k h e a d p l a t i n g shall extend f o r a t least 0,3 m
above the inner b o t t o m plating.
I n the boiler r o o m , the b o t t o m strake o f the
b u l k h e a d shall e x t e n d f o r a t least 0,6 m a b o v e t h e
flooring.
T h e u p p e r edge o f b o t t o m strake o f transverse
bulkheads i n the cargo tanks o f tankers shall be at
least 100 m m a b o v e t h e u p p e r toes o f brackets o f
b o t t o m longitudinals. T h e t o p a n d b o t t o m strake
breadth o flongitudinal bulkhead plating shall n o tbe
l e s s t h a n 0 , 1 - D , b u t n e e d n o t e x c e e d 1,8 m .
2.7.5.2 C o f f e r d a m s a n d t h e b u l k h e a d s f o r m i n g
their boundaries shall c o m p l y w i t h the following re
quirements:
108
Ships
.1 u n l e s s e x p r e s s l y p r o v i d e d o t h e r w i s e i n t h e s u m m e r l o a d w a t e r l i n e a n d w e a t h e r d e c k w i t h t h e
ship's side a t a cross section w i t h i n 0 , 0 5 L f r o m t h e
other Parts o f the Rules, the b r e a d t h o f vertical coff o r w a r d perpendicular ( F i g . 2.8.1.2-1);
ferdams stipulated under 2.4.7, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o tection", 4.3.4, P a r t V I I " M a c h i n e r y Installations"
a n d 13.7.5, 14.5.2, 17.3, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d
P i p i n g " s h a l l b e e q u a l t o o n e s p a c i n g , b u t n o t less
t h a n 0,6 m , a n d the h e i g h t o f h o r i z o n t a l cofferdams
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0,7 m .
I n a n y case, c o f f e r d a m d i m e n s i o n s s h a l l b e s o
selected as t o m a k e t h e c o f f e r d a m s accessible f o r i n spection a n d repair.
Instead o f cofferdams, cofferdam bulkheads m a y
be fitted i n accordance w i t h 3.3 unless expressly
provided otherwise b ythe Rules;
L o a d waterline
.2 c o f f e r d a m s a d j o i n i n g c a r g o t a n k s a n d f u e l
tanks shall be watertight.
Bulkheads separating cofferdams f r o m tanks
shall c o m p l y w i t h the requirements for the bulkheads
of those tanks.
T h e bulkheads o f cofferdams filled w i t h w a t e r shall
comply w i t h the requirements for t a n k bulkheads.
The bulkheads o f cofferdams w h i c h shall ensure
tightness, b u t w h i c h a r e n o t filled w i t h water, shall
comply w i t h the requirements for watertight bulkheads.
The bulkheads o f cofferdams w h i c h are n o n - t i g h t
CL
shall c o m p l y w i t h the requirements for partial bulkF i g . 2.8.1.2-1
D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f a n g l e <x
heads as stipulated under 2.7.4.5, except t h e r e quirement f o r vertical webs supporting
deck
transverses a n d hatch e n d beams. T h e y m a y have
openings provided t h e corners o f the openings are
r o u n d e d a n d the edges a r e suitably reinforced. S u c h
openings shall n o t generally be arranged i nthe t o p
a n d b o t t o m strakes o f l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads.
x
2.8 F O R E A N D A F T E R
ENDS
for t h e following structures: fore peak a n d bulb
(if any), b o t t o m w i t h i n 0 , 2 5 L aft o f the fore perpend i c u l a r , side w i t h i n 0 , 1 5 L a f t o f t h e f o r e p e r p e n d i cular, structures located a f t o f t h e after peak
b u l k h e a d , as w e l l as s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f b o t t o m a n d side
f o r w a r d i n the region o f i m p a c t pressure.
It is assumed i n this Chapter that t h e upper
b o u n d a r y o f the fore a n d after peak is f o r m e d b y a
tight deck o r p l a t f o r m arranged directly above t h e
summer load waterline.
d = m i n i m u m design draught, i n m , i n w a y o f
forward perpendicular;
a* = angle, i n deg., b e t w e e n a v e r t i c a l a n d t h e
straight line connecting t h e intersection points o f
f
Fig. 2.8.1.2-2
D i a g r a m for determining the angle a n d the area (lined)
to w h i c h the m o v e impact pressure is applied:
1 o p e n upper deck; 2 w a t e r line f o r d e t e r m i n i n g the angle;
3 f o r w a r d perpendicular; 4 i m p a c t pressure area;
h vertical distance between the loadline a n d the open upper
deck a t f o r w a r d perpendicular
N
P a r t II. H u l l
= angle, i n deg., between a tangent t o t h e

waterline at vertical mid-distance between the sum
m e r load waterline a n d weather deck o n f o r w a r d
perpendicular, a n d a Une parallel t o t h e centreUne a t
a cross section w i t h i n 0,052. f r o m t h e f o r w a r d per
pendicular ( F i g . 2.8.1.2-2).
2.8.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
2.8.2.1 T h e f o l l o w i n g f r a m i n g s y s t e m s a r e a d o p
ted a t ends:
transverse system o f f r a m i n g f o r b o t t o m i n peaks;
transverse o r longitudinal system o f f r a m i n g f o r
other structures.
2.8.2.2 F o r e p e a k f l o o r s s h a U b e f i t t e d a t e v e r y
f r a m e . T h e i r h e i g h t s h a U n o t b e less t h a n s t i p u l a t e d
u n d e r 2.4.4.1, b u t need n o t exceed 2,25 m , a n d t h e
t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n r e q u i r e d b y F o r
m u l a (2.4.4.3.1) a t = 1 a n d a = 0,6m ; however, they
need n o t be t h i c k e r t h a n t h e b o t t o m sheU p l a t i n g i n this
region. F l o o r webs shall be strengthened w i t h vertical
stiffeners t o be spaced n o t m o r e t h a n 0,6 m apart.
F l o o r face p l a t e s s h a l l h a v e a t h i c k n e s s n o t less
than t h e floor thickness a n d a breadth required
b y 1.7.3.1.
A t t h e centreUne a n i n t e r c o s t a l side g i r d e r w i t h a
face p l a t e s h a l l b e f i t t e d as a n e x t e n s i o n o f centre
girder i n w a y o f t h e holds. T h e height a n d thickness
o f girder plates as w e l l as t h e thickness a n d w i d t h o f
girder face p l a t e s h a l l b e e q u a l t o t h o s e o f the f l o o r s .
W h e r e the webs o f the girder cannot be arranged, t h e
f l o o r face plates shaU b e i n t e r c o n n e c t e d a t t h e centreUne
b y a n a n g l e , t e e s e c t i o n , etc. t h e f l a n g e s o f w h i c h h a v e t h e
s a m e w i d t h a n d thickness as t h e f l o o r face plates.
2.8.2.3 I f t r a n s v e r s e s y s t e m o f f r a m i n g i s a d o p t e d
i n t h e f o r e p e a k side, t h e side stringers s h a l l b e f i t t e d
at least u p t o t h e deck directly a b o v e t h e s u m m e r l o a d
waterline. Side stringers shall be so fitted that t h e
distance measured vertically between t h e m does not,
i n general, exceed 2 m .
Side stringers shall be supported b y p a n t i n g
b e a m s fitted a t a l t e r n a t e f r a m e s a n d s h a l l , w h e r e
possible, be supported a t t h e centreUne b y a l o n g
itudinal bulkhead.
T h e free edge o f t h e side stringers s h a l l b e stif
f e n e d b y a face p l a t e h a v i n g a t h i c k n e s s n o t less t h a n
that o f a stringer w e b a n d a breadth i n accordance
w i t h 1.7.3.1. A tevery frame, t h e stringer w e b shall be
stiffened b y b r a c k e t s h a v i n g t h e side d i m e n s i o n s n o t
less t h a n h a l f t h e s t r i n g e r w e b h e i g h t , a n d w h e r e
p a n t i n g b e a m s a r e fitted, t h e s e s h a l l b e n o t l e s s t h a n
r e q u i r e d b y 1.7.2.2 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f b r a c k e t s s h a l l
n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f t h e s t r i n g e r w e b .
I n s t e a d o f p a n t i n g b e a m s , t h e side stringers m a y
be s u p p o r t e d b y w e b frames spaced n o t m o r e t h a n
3 m apart.
I t is recommended that non-tight platforms be
fitted i n s t e a d o f s i d e s t r i n g e r s w i t h p a n t i n g b e a m s o r
109
w e b f r a m e s . I n t h i s case, t h e distance b e t w e e n t h e
platforms m a y be increased t o 2,5 m . T h e beams o f
n o n - t i g h t p l a t f o r m s s h a l l b e fitted a t e v e r y f r a m e .
I f i n the structure w i t h panting beams o r w e b
frames t h e distance f r o m t h e base line t o t h e nearest
deck o r p l a t f o r m exceeds 9 m , a n o n - t i g h t p l a t f o r m
s h a l l b e fitted a t t h e m i d d l e o f t h i s l e n g t h , i n w h i c h
the t o t a l area o f openings shall n o t exceed 10 p e r cent
o f its area.
W i t h l o n g i t u d i n a U y f r a m e d f o r e p e a k side, t h e
spacing o f w e b frames shaU n o t exceed 2 , 4 m . D e c k
transverses shall be fitted i n w a y o f t h e w e b frames
passage t h r o u g h o r a t t a c h m e n t t o decks a n d p l a t f o r m s .
Floors w i t h o u t w e b frames fitted i n Une w i t h
t h e m s h a l l b e a t t a c h e d t o t h e nearest side l o n g
itudinals b y brackets.
2.8.2.4 T h e b u l b s h a l l b e s t r e n g t h e n e d b y p l a t
f o r m s spaced n o t m o r e t h a n 2 m apart. B e a m s o f the
p l a t f o r m s h a l l b e fitted a t e v e r y f r a m e .
If the length o fthe bulb forward o fthe forward
perpendicular exceeds 0,032., a n o n - t i g h t b u l k h e a d
s h a l l b e fitted a t t h e c e n t r e U n e , w i t h s t i f f e n e r s a r
ranged at every frame.
I f t h e l e n g t h o f t h e b u l b i s less t h a n 0 , 0 3 2 . , t h e
b u l b m a y b e s t r e n g t h e n e d b y a g i r d e r fitted a t t h e
centreUne i n c o n t i n u a t i o n o f t h e centre girder.
T h e construction o f the fore e n d shall provide for
the anchor t o be lowered freely past t h ebulb w i t h the
ship Usted 5 degrees e i t h e r side.
I n w a y o f eventual touching o fthe bulb, t h e shell
plating thickness shall be increased a n d intermediate
frames
fitted.
2.8.2.5 I n s h i p s w i t h s i n g l e b o t t o m , t h e b o t t o m
structure i nw a y o f the fore e n d outside the fore peak
shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.3.2, 2.3.4
a n d , besides, w i t h those g i v e n b e l o w :
.1 i f transverse s y s t e m o f f r a m i n g i s a d o p t e d , t h e
spacing o f side girders, as w e l l as t h e distance f r o m
t h e centre g i r d e r o r t h e ship's side t o a side girder,
shall n o t exceed 1 , 1 m w i t h i n 0,252. f r o m t h e f o r w a r d
perpendicular.
I f longitudinal system o f f r a m i n g is adopted a n d
m i n i m u m d r a u g h t i s less t h a n 0 , 0 3 5 2 . i n w a y o f t h e
f o r w a r d perpendicular, i n cargo tanks o f tankers a n
a d d i t i o n a l transverse w i t h a face plate a l o n g i t s free
e d g e s h a l l b e fitted m i d w a y b e t w e e n t h e b o t t o m
transverses. T h e depth o f this transverse shall n o t be
less t h a n t h a t o f b o t t o m l o n g i t u d i n a l s ;
.2 f o r w a r d o f c a r g o t a n k s :
if transverse system o f f r a m i n g is adopted, i n
t e r c o s t a l side girders w i t h face plates a l o n g t h e i r free
edges shall be fitted i n c o n t i n u a t i o n o f every second
b o t t o m l o n g i t u d i n a l , e x t e n d i n g f o r w a r d as f a r as
practicable. T h e d e p t h a n d t h i c k n e s s o f t h e side gir
der w e b s , as w e l l as t h e scantlings o f t h e face plates,
shall be t a k e n t h e same as f o r t h e floors;
Rules
if longitudinal system o f f r a m i n g is adopted, the

spacing o f floors shall n o t exceed 2,8 m . A n inter
c o s t a l side g i r d e r h a v i n g t h e s a m e scantlings as t h e
f l o o r s s h a l l b e fitted o n e i t h e r side o f t h e ship b e t w e e n
the centre girder a n d longitudinal bulkhead.
2.8.2.6 I n w a y o f t h e f o r e e n d , t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m
structure outside the fore peak shall comply w i t h the
requirements o f 2.4.2 a n d those given below.
W i t h i n 0,252. f r o m t h e f o r w a r d perpendicular t h e
distance b e t w e e n side girders s h a l l n o t exceed 2 , 2 m .
I f transverse system o f f r a m i n g is adopted, i n this
r e g i o n h a l f - h e i g h t side girders s h a l l b e fitted a d
ditionally a n d welded t o the b o t t o m a n d floors. T h e
distance b e t w e e n side girders a n d h a l f - h e i g h t girders
shall n o t exceed 1 , 1 m . These h a l f - h e i g h t girders shall
be e x t e n d e d as f a r f o r w a r d as practicable, w h e r e a s
their free edges s h a l l be r e i n f o r c e d w i t h flanges o r
face plates.
I f longitudinal system o fframing is adopted, the
floors shall be strengthened w i t h stiffeners i n line
w i t h e a c h h a l f - h e i g h t side g i r d e r a n d e a c h b o t t o m
longitudinal.
I n ships greater t h a n 8 0 m i n l e n g t h w i t h a
m i n i m u m d r a u g h t less t h a n 0 , 0 2 5 2 . i n w a y o f t h e
f o r w a r d perpendicular, t h e edges o f o p e n i n g s i n
f l o o r , side g i r d e r a n d centre g i r d e r w e b s s h a l l be
stiffened w i t h i n 0,252. f r o m t h e f o r w a r d perpendi
cular.
2.8.2.7 I f t r a n s v e r s e f r a m i n g s y s t e m i s a d o p t e d ,
i n t e r c o s t a l side stringers s h a l l b e fitted w i t h i n 0,152.
f r o m the forward perpendicular, outside the fore
peak, a t t h e level o f t h e f o r e p e a k side stringers. T h e
depth a n d thickness o fa stringer plate shall be equal
to those o f t h e frame. T h e intercostal brackets fitted
as s t r i n g e r plates s h a l l b e w e l d e d t o t h e w e b s o f
frames a t b o t h ends a n d t o t h e shell plating. O n the
f r e e e d g e o f a s t r i n g e r , a f a c e p l a t e s h a l l b e fitted w i t h
t h e t h i c k n e s s n o t less t h a n t h a t o f t h e w e b a n d t h e
breadth i n accordance w i t h 1.7.3.1.
T h e i n t e r c o s t a l side s t r i n g e r m a y b e o f t h e s a m e
profile as t h e frames.
T h e s t r i n g e r face p l a t e ( f l a n g e ) s h a l l n o t b e w e l
d e d t o t h e face p l a t e o f f r a m e .
Intercostal stringers shall be attached t o t h e
bulkheads b y brackets.
T h e face plates (flanges) o f i n t e r c o s t a l stringers
m a y be o m i t t e d w h e r e t h e spacing o f frames does n o t
exceed t h e i r d o u b l e d e p t h . I n t h i s case, t h e i r t h i c k
n e s s s, i n m m , s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n s = l/4s + As
or s = 0 , 0 5 A , w h i c h e v e r i s t h e g r e a t e r , w h e r e / i s t h e
l e n g t h o f t h e free edge o f stringer b e t w e e n fra
mes, i n m m ; h is the stringer depth, i n m m .
I n s h i p s h a v i n g t h e c h a r a c t e r i s t i c (v /y/L)
> 1,5 o r
a large b o w flare, p r o v i s i o n shall be m a d e f o rw e b
f r a m e s a n d side stringers s u p p o r t e d t h e r e b y . T h e spa
c i n g o f w e b f r a m e s s h a l l n o t exceed 5 f r a m e spaces.
0
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
W h e r e longitudinal f r a m i n g is adopted i n the

ship's side f o r w a r d o u t s i d e t h e f o r e p e a k , t h e spacing
o f side transverses s h a l l n o t exceed 3 m . I n t h e h o l d s
o f a n y ship, as w e l l as i n ' t w e e n decks a n d super
structures
o f ships
with
the
characteristic
( v / y / L ) > 1,5 o r w i t h a l a r g e b o w f l a r e , p r o v i s i o n
shall be made f o ra vertical intercostal m e m b e r hav
i n g t h e s a m e scantlings as side l o n g i t u d i n a l s , t o b e
fitted
b e t w e e n side transverses. T h e s t r u c t u r e o f t h e
m e m b e r s h a l l b e s i m i l a r t o t h a t o f t h e i n t e r c o s t a l side
stringers required b y transverse f r a m i n g system. T h e
intercostal member c a n terminate at the upper a n d
l o w e r side l o n g i t u d i n a l s o f t h e h o l d , ' t w e e n decks a n d
s u p e r s t r u c t u r e . E v e r y s e c o n d side l o n g i t u d i n a l s h a l l
be a t t a c h e d t o t h e side transverses b y b r a c k e t s e x
t e n d e d t o t h e f r a m e face plate.
0
2.8.2.8 W i t h i n 0 , 1 2 . f r o m t h e f o r w a r d p e r p e n d i
cular, t h e span o f weather deck transverses shall n o t
exceed 3 m , a n d t h e deck girder span shall n o t
exceed 3,6 m .
W i t h i n 0,22. f r o m t h e f o r w a r d perpendicular, t h e
section m o d u l u s o f weather deck transverses shall n o t
b e less t h a n r e q u i r e d f o r d e c k g i r d e r s w i t h e q u a l
spans a n d spacing o f members.
2.8.2.9 T h e s t r u c t u r e l o c a t e d a f t o f t h e a f t e r p e a k
bulkhead shall be sufficiently rigid i nt h e vertical a n d
h o r i z o n t a l p l a n e . F o r t h i s p u r p o s e , fitting o f a d d i
tional longitudinal bulkheads o r platforms, thicken
i n g o f deck p l a t i n g a n d shell p l a t i n g , as w e l l as
connection o f b o t t o m a n d upper deck longitudinals
w i t h pillars o r struts m a y be required. I f t h e stern
overhang is large o r t h e after peak
width
e x c e e d s 2 0 m a t a n y s e c t i o n , fitting o f a d d i t i o n a l
longitudinal non-tight bulkheads is recommended
port o r starboard.
W h e r e there is a flat o f t h e b o t t o m , additional
strengthening m a y be required t o take u p t h e loads
due t o i m p a c t pressure.
2.8.2.10 F l o o r s i n t h e a f t e r p e a k s h a l l c o m p l y
w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.8.2.2.
I n single screw ships, t h e floors shall be extended
a b o v e t h e sterntube, b u t i n a n y case t o a h e i g h t o f n o t
less t h a n 0 , 8 m . I f t h i s i s i m p r a c t i c a b l e , t i e p l a t e s w i t h
f a c e p l a t e s o n b o t h e d g e s s h a l l b e fitted t r a n s v e r s e l y
at every frame above t h e sterntube. T h ethickness o f
t h e t i e p l a t e s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f t h e f l o o r .
T i e p l a t e e x c e e d i n g 1,5 m i n l e n g t h s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d
w i t h a s t i f f e n e r fitted i n t h e m i d d l e o f i t s l e n g t h .
F l o o r s w i t h f l a n g e d edges a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d .
I n ships greater t h a n 2 0 0 m i n length, floors shall
be extended t o t h e p l a t f o r m located a b o v e t h e
sterntube. Longitudinally, t h efloors shall be stiffened
w i t h b r a c k e t s fitted a t t h e c e n t r e U n e a n d , i f p r a c t i c
able, supporting t h e floor f o r a full depth. Brackets
above t h e sterntube a r e necessary. T h e brackets shall
be carried t o t h e p r o p e l l e r post. T h e y need n o t be
111
P a r t II. H u l l
fitted where a w a s h plate is located above t h e floors,

w i t h its l o w e r edge e x t e n d i n g a t least 0,8 m b e l o w t h e
face plates o f t h e floors.
T h e opening i n floors f o r t h e sterntube shall be
r e i n f o r c e d w i t h face plate a l o n g t h e edges. B e l o w t h e
s t e r n t u b e , t h e o p e n i n g s s h a l l b e r e i n f o r c e d w i t h face
plates o r stiffeners.
2.8.2.11 I f t r a n s v e r s e f r a m i n g i s a d o p t e d i n t h e
after p e a k side, p a n t i n g b e a m s a n d side stringers,
b e a m knees, f r a m e t o side s t r i n g e r a t t a c h m e n t s , a r
rangement a n dstructure o f web frames a n dnon-tight
platforms shall comply w i t h the requirements
o f 2.8.2.3. T h e v e r t i c a l distance b e t w e e n side stringers
shall n o t exceed 2,5 m , a n d t h e f r a m e span, as m e a
s u r e d o n t h e side p l a t i n g , s h a l l n o t exceed 3,5 m .
I n ' t w i n - a n d m u l t i - s c r e w ships h a v i n g a cruiser
o r t r a n s o m stern, t h e distance between stringers, as
m e a s u r e d o n t h e side p l a t i n g , s h a l l n o t exceed 2 m ,
w i t h one o f the stringers being fitted i n w a y o f the t o p
edge o f propeller shaft bossing o r i n line w i t h t h e
shaft bracket. W h e r e w e b frames are fitted, their
spacing shall n o t exceed 2 , 4 m .
I f longitudinal f r a m i n g is adopted i n t h e after
p e a k side, r e l e v a n t r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.8.2.3 s h a l l be
complied with.
2.8.2.12 T h e e n d s o f a f t e r p e a k m e m b e r s ( i n c l u d i n g
deck, p l a t f o r m a n d b u l k h e a d f r a m i n g ) , as w e l l as t h e
ends o f h o r i z o n t a l a n d , w h e r e practicable, v e r t i c a l stif
feners o f f l o o r s s h a l l b e secured (refer t o 1.7.1.4).
T h e face plates o f t h e after p e a k f l o o r s a n d d e c k
transverses shall be sniped i n w a y o f their attach
m e n t s t o l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads. B u l k h e a d stiffeners
shall b e a t t a c h e d t o t h e f l o o r face plates b y brackets
f i t t e d o n e i t h e r side o f t h e b u l k h e a d .
T h i s also applies t o d e c k g i r d e r a n d side g i r d e r
attachments t o transverse bulkheads.
2.8.2.13 T h e s p a c i n g o f o r d i n a r y a n d b e v e l f r a m e s
m a y be t h e same as i n t h e m i d s h i p region, b u t shall n o t
exceed 7 5 0 m m . A side g i r d e r o f t h e s a m e d e p t h as t h a t
o f f l o o r s s h a l l b e fitted a t t h e centreline. I n case o f
t r a n s o m s t e r n a n d / o r f l a t o f t h e b o t t o m , t h e side girders
shall be spaced n o tm o r e t h a n 2 m apart.
I n full cruiser sterns a n d w h e r e t h e f r a m e span
f r o m t h e upper edge o f f l o o r s t o t h e nearest deck
exceeds 2,5 m , a d d i t i o n a l strengthening shall be
p r o v i d e d b y m e a n s o f w e b f r a m e s a n d a side stringer.
2.8.2.14 I f p e a k s a r e u s e d a s t a n k s , f i t t i n g o f a
w a s h b u l k h e a d is r e c o m m e n d e d a t t h e centreUne.
2.8.3 L o a d s o n s t r u c t u r e s a t e n d s .
2.8.3.1 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e s t r u c t u r e s a t
ends is d e t e r m i n e d u s i n g t h e design loads specified
i n 2.2 t o 2.7 a n d t h e e x t r e m e loads specified i n 2.8.3.2
a n d 2.8.3.3.
T h e scantUngs o f fore e n d m e m b e r s subject t o
i m p a c t pressure shall be verified b y applying extreme
loads:
i n accordance w i t h 2.8.3.2 f o r ships greater t h a n

65 m i n l e n g t h w i t h a m i n i m u m d r a u g h t o f0,0452. i n
w a y o f the f o r w a r d perpendicular;
i n accordance w i t h 2.8.3.3 f o r ships h a v i n g t h e
c h a r a c t e r i s t i c ( v / y / L ) > 1,5 o r a c o n s i d e r a b l e b o w
flare.
2.8.3.2 U n d e r t h e w a v e i m p a c t u p o n t h e b o t t o m
o f the fore e n d ,t h e extreme values o f t h e design h y d r o d y n a m i c pressure p , i nk P a , shall be determined
by the formula
0
S L
p = 5,5dC 9 ^(l -54/L)(l2
where d
X l
/l )-l0
(2.8.3.2-1)
= yfb f o r 1 , ^ 2 0 0 m ;
C i = 5 7 1 0 - 0 , 0 1 1 , f o r L > 200 m ;
C =
l =
f o r Vo,
cp =
2
0,134t> (l-17,14/Z,)/VZ;
(0,22 + 1,5C )Z,;
r e f e r t o 1.1.3;
a s o b t a i n e d f r o m 1.3.1.5 (cp = 1 f o r s h i p s o f u n r e s t r i c t e d
service);
0
ship breadth, i nm , i nthe considered cross section a t the

l e v e l o f 0,04 a b o v e t h e b a s e l i n e , b u t n o t g r e a t e r
t h a n 0,8;
x\ = d i s t a n c e , i n m , f r o m t h e c o n s i d e r e d c r o s s s e c t i o n t o t h e
f o r w a r d perpendicular, b u t n o t greater t h a n l.
x
F o r m u l a (2.8.3.2-1) is used f o r d e r i v a t i o n o f p v a
lues i n a n u m b e r o f sections w i t h i n t h e p o r t i o n 1 f r o m
w h i c h t h e m a x i m u m value o f p (hereinafter s y m
bol p ) a n d the value o f ^(hereinafter symbol x )
corresponding t o p a r e chosen. T h e design pressure p
(Fig. 2.8.3.2) is determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
PsL=Pf+
ip -pj)xil{x -Qfi5L)
when 0 < x i < x 0,052.;
m
PSL
~ P m
w h e n x 0 , 0 5 2 . ^x\^x
+ 0,052.;
PsL=P (0,5L-x )/(0,45L-x^)
w h e n x + 0,052.
0,52.
m
f2 8 3 2 - 2 )
F i g . 2.8.3.2 D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f d e s i g n p r e s s u r e PSL1 v a l u e o f p d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (2.8.3.2-1);

2 forward perpendicular
112
Rules
w h e r e p / = 0,5p
with bulb;
P / = 0 without bulb.
S L
= 0,9C d
(2.8.3.3)
= 2 , 2 + 1,5 t g o i x ;
_
> (0,6-20/)(1,2-0,2 /60) + 0,6^1,;
r e f e r t o 1.1.3;
= a s d e f i n e d i n 2.8.1.2.
0
Ships
(2.8.4.1.4)
T h e h y d r o d y n a m i c pressure
as determined
by F o r m u l a (2.8.3.2-2) is distributed over a height
o f 0,041? a b o v e t h e b a s e U n e .
2.8.3.3 U n d e r t h e w a v e i m p a c t u p o n t h e s i d e a t
the fore e n d ,t h e extreme values o f t h e design h y
d r o d y n a m i c pressure p , i n k P a , shall be determined
by the formula
where C
C =
for v,
ct a n d p
of Sea-Going
*mi = ( 5 + 0 , 0 2 2 . ,
PSL
and Construction
b u t n o t less t h a n 5 m m .
W h e r e L > 300 m , L shaU b e t a k e n equal t o 300 m ;
.5 i f t h e f o r e p e a k ( a f t e r p e a k ) i s u s e d a s t a n k s , t h e
scantUngs o f their m e m b e r s shall also c o m p l y w i t h t h e
requirements f o r the structural members o f tanks.
2.8.4.2 W h e r e e x p o s e d t o e x t r e m e l o a d s t o b e
determined i n accordance w i t h 2.8.3.2, t h e scantUngs
o f b o t t o m framing members a t t h e fore e n d shall
c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.2.4, 2 . 3 . 4
a n d 2.4.4, as w e l l as w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g a d d i t i o n a l
requirements:
.1 t h e thickness o f shell p l a t i n g s h a l l b e d e
termined b y F o r m u l a (1.6.4.4) t a k i n g
D e p t h w i s e t h e i m p a c t pressure is distributed over

P = WPSL
(2.8.4.2.1)
t h e p a r t o f t h e side a b o v e t h e b a l l a s t w a t e r U n e , a n d
l e n g t h w i s e o v e r t h e p a r t o f t h e side e x t e n d i n g as
w h e r e PSL = a s d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (2.8.3.2-2);
far a f t as t h e cross section a t 0 , 0 1 % L f r o m t h e for
m = 15,8;
w a r d perpendicular a n d as f a r f o r w a r d as t h e inter
= 0,7;
section o f t h e upper deck w i t h t h e stem (refer
to F i g . 2.8.1.2-2).
.2 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s , i n c m , o f a p r i m a r y
2.8.4 S c a n t l i n g s o f s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s a t e n d s .
m e m b e r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
2.8.4.1 T h e s h e l l p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s , s c a n t U n g s o f
W = 0,75
ovlO
(2.8.4.2.2)
single b o t t o m a n d d o u b l e b o t t o m m e m b e r s a n d o f
side f r a m i n g s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
w h e r e p = a s d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (2.8.4.2.1);
k a = 0,65;
o f 2.2.4, 2.3.4, 2.4.4, 2.5.4 u s i n g t h e service loads g i
m = 16, i f t h e m e m b e r s a r e c o n t i n u o u s t h r o u g h t h e w e b s o f
v e n i n 2.2, 2.3, 2.4, 2.5. Besides, w h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e
supporting structures;
scantlings o f fore a n d after peak members, t h e fol
m = 8, i f t h e m e m b e r s a r e c u t a t s u p p o r t s ;
m = 2 8 , i f t h e supporting sections o f t h e m e m b e r a r e
l o w i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s shall b e satisfied:
reinforced with brackets o n b o t h sides o f the supporting
.1 t h e section m o d u l u s o f f r a m e s s h a l l b e d e
structure; t h e depth a n d length o fbrackets are n o t less
t h a n 1,5 o f t h e m e m b e r d e p t h ;
termined b y F o r m u l a e (1.6.4.1) a n d(1.6.4.2) taking:
f o r w , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.3;
m = 12;
/ = spacing o f side stringers, as m e a s u r e d a l o n g
.3 t h e c r o s s - s e c t i o n a l a r e a , i n c m , o f a p r i m a r y
the shell plating;
member o ro f welds b y w h i c h intercostal members are
c o n n e c t e d t o s u p p o r t i n g s t r u c t u r e s s h a l l n o t b e less
.2 s c a n t U n g s o f p a n t i n g b e a m s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h
than
the requirements o f2.9.4.1;
.3 i n c a l c u l a t i n g t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s a n d c r o s s sectional area o f w e b frames,
/ = 5pa ~ ' + 0,05/
(2.8.4.2.3)
m = 10;
JVmax = 0,5pal
(2.8.4.1.3)
3
5 a
= 0,65;
~Lht = l e n g t h o f m e m b e r s e c t i o n p e r i m e t e r , i n c m ;
A s = a s o b t a i n e d f r o m 1.1.5.1.
w h e r e p = d e s i g n p r e s s u r e , i n k P a , a c c o r d i n g t o 2.5.3;
a = spacing o f web frames, i n m ;
/ = span o fw e b frame, i nm , a smeasured between the upper
edge o f floor a n d t h ed e c k (platform) b o u n d i n g the fore
p e a k (after p e a k ) o r t h e non-tight p l a t f o r m , i f a n y ,
nearest t o thebottom, o rbetween non-tight platforms,
the deck a n d non-tight p l a t f o r m less t h eheight o f deck
transverse o fthe relevant deck (platform);
T h e cross-sectional area o f a m e m b e r includes t h e

w e b area, as w e l l as t h e p o r t i o n o f t h e sectional area o f
s h e l l p l a t i n g , h a v i n g a b r e a d t h b\ = 3s ( w h e r e s i s t h e
thickness, i n m m , o f shell plating). I f the m e m b e r is o f
b u l b p r o f i l e , t h e w h o l e o f its face plate i s i n c l u d e d i n t h e
.4 p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s a n d f r a m i n g o f n o n - t i g h t
p l a t f o r m s h a l l s a t i s f y t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2 . 6 . 4 f o r cross-sectional area. I n t h e case o f m e m b e r o f T - s e c t i o n ,
a p o r t i o n o f i t s b r e a d t h 6 = 3sf, i s i n c l u d e d i n t h e
p l a t f o r m s a t ends. W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e design l o a d
b y F o r m u l a ( 1 . 3 . 4 . 1 ) , t h e p r o d u c t hp g s h a l l n o t b e c r o s s - s e c t i o n a l a r e a ( w h e r e s/_ i s t h e f a c e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s
o f the member, i n m m ) ;
less t h a n 3 , 5 k P a .
2
T h e thickness o f non-tight p l a t f o r m plating,

i n m m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
.4 t h e w e b t h i c k n e s s s, i n m m , o f f l o o r , s i d e g i r d e r
a n d c e n t r e g i r d e r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
P a r t II. H u l l
s = 0,7
113
+ As
(2.8.4.2.4)
a a n d b = average spacing o ffloors a n d girders accordingly (centre
g i r d e r a n d s i d e g i r d e r ) ; w h e n d e t e r m i n i n g b, h a l f - h e i g h t
side girders shall b e disregarded;
= 0,65;
h = depth, i n m , o f floor, side girder o r centre girder
accordingly;
A s = a s o b t a i n e d f r o m 1.1.5.1.
2.8.4.3 W h e r e e x p o s e d t o e x t r e m e l o a d s t o b e
d e t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h 2.8.3.3, t h e scantUngs
o f side f r a m i n g m e m b e r s a t t h e f o r e e n d s h a l l c o m p l y
w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.2.4 a n d 2.5.4, as w e l l as
w i t h the following additional requirements:
.1 t h e t h i c k n e s s o f s h e l l p l a t i n g s h a l l b e d e
termined b y F o r m u l a (1.6.4.4) t a k i n g
p = 0,5p
(2.8.4.3.1)
SL
w h e r e PSL = a s d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (2.8.3.3);
m = 15,8;
= 0,7;
.2 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f a p r i m a r y m e m b e r s h a l l
c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.8.4.2.2 using t h e
design load determined b y F o r m u l a (2.8.4.3.1);
.3 t h e c r o s s - s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f a p r i m a r y m e m b e r
shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.8.4.2.3 u s i n g
the design load determined b y F o r m u l a (2.8.4.3.1).
2.8.4.4 W i t h i n t h e a r e a o f t h e s t e r n c o u n t e r , t h e
s c a n t U n g s o f f r a m e s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h o s e o f
the after peak frames, unless their span ex
ceeds 2,5 m . W i t h a greater span, t h e f r a m e scan
tlings shall be increased accordingly. T h e thickness
o f f l o o r s a n d side g i r d e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n r e
quired b y 2.8.4.5.
2.8.4.5 T h e s i d e s t r i n g e r s o f f o r e a n d a f t e r p e a k s
s h a l l h a v e a w e b s e c t i o n a l a r e a f, i n c m , n o t less
than
2
/, = 12 + 0,45L.
(2.8.4.5-1)
2.8.4.6 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f s h e l l p l a t i n g i n w a y o f t h e
b u l b s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 0 8 2 . + 6 , b u t i t n e e d n o t
be t a k e n greater t h a n 2 5 m m . I n t h i s case, t h e shell
plating thickness at t h e lower part o f t h e bulb shall
n o t b e less t h a n s t i p u l a t e d u n d e r 2 . 8 . 4 . 2 . 1 f o r t h e h u l l
section i n w a y o f t h e f o r w a r d perpendicular.
2.8.5.1 V i s o r - t y p e b o w d o o r s .
2.8.5.1.1 T h e p r e s e n t r e q u i r e m e n t s a p p l y t o t h e
construction o f visor-type b o w doors w h i c h f o r m a
c o m p o n e n t part o f t h e fore e n d o f t h e ship, being
m e c h a n i c a l l y c o n n e c t e d w i t h t h e side a n d d e c k
structures a n d capable o f m o v i n g i n t h e vertical d i
r e c t i o n t o p r o v i d e access f o r m o t o r vehicles a n d / o r
other transport means.
2.8.5.1.2 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f v i s o r - t y p e b o w d o o r
p l a t i n g s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d b y 2 . 8 . 4
for t h e appropriate sections o f shell plating.
2.8.5.1.3 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f p r i m a r y m e m
b e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d b y 2 . 8 . 4 f o r
t h e a p p r o p r i a t e f o r e e n d regions. I n t h i s case, t h e
d e s i g n l o a d , i n k P a , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
Pmin =
0,8(1>
+ 0,6VZ) .
(2.8.5.1.3-1)
The sectional area o f m e m b e r w e b shall n o t be

less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a ( 1 . 6 . 4 . 3 - 1 ) t a k i n g
JVmax = 0,5pal
(2.8.5.1.3-2)
w h e r e p = d e s i g n l o a d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.3.2.2 o r 2.8.3.3,
whichever is the greater, b u t n o t less t h a n p ^ , i nk P a , a s
d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (2.8.5.1).
n
= 0,7.
2.8.5.1.4 S t r u c t u r a l m e a s u r e s s h a l l b e t a k e n t o
ensure rigid attachment o f p r i m a r y members a n d
support members o f b o w doors.
2.8.5.1.5 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f s u p p o r t m e m b e r s s h a U
be o b t a i n e d b y s t r e n g t h c a l c u l a t i o n u s i n g t h e design
l o a d s g i v e n i n 1.3.2.2 o r 2.8.3.3, w h i c h e v e r i s t h e
g r e a t e r , b u t n o t less t h a n p
determined b y For
m u l a (2.8.5.1.3-1), as w e l l as t h e p e r m i s s i b l e stress
factors k a = k = 0,6.
2.8.5.1.6 T h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f s u p p o r t m e m b e r s
s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.7.3.
2.8.5.2 I n s h i p s p r o v i d e d w i t h f i x e d p r o p e l l e r
nozzles, transverse bulkheads o r support members
shall be fitted i n w a y o f the nozzle attachment t o the
hull.
2.8.5.3 I n h u l l c u r v i l i n e a r s e c t i o n s ( d e a d r i s e ,
flare), i tis r e c o m m e n d e d that t h e f r a m i n g be fitted a t
a n a n g l e o f a p p r o x i m a t e l y 90 t o t h e s h e l l p l a t i n g .
2.8.5.4 I n m u l t i - s c r e w s h i p s , t h e s t r u c t u r a l
strength a n d rigidity i n w a y o f sterntube, shaft
bracket a n d shaft bossing attachments a r e subject t o
m i t 1
T h e s i d e s t r i n g e r w i d t h b, i n m , s h a l l n o t b e l e s s
than:
b = 0,24 + 0,0052. for 2 . < 8 0 m ;
b = 0,4 + 0,0032. f o rL > 8 0m .
(2.8.4.5-2)
T h e w e b thickness, i n m m , o f a side stringer s h a l l

Smin
= ( 5 + 0,02/ ,
(2.8.4.5-3)
Where
to 300 m .
L > 3 0 0 m , 2. shall be t a k e n
equal
114
Rules
2.9 P I L L A R S A N D P A N T I N G
B E A M S
for t h e scantUngs o fpillars fitted i n t h e hull, super
structures a n d deckhouses a n d f o r t h epanting beams
in peaks.
2.9.1.2 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h i s C h a p t e r t h e f o l
lowing symbols have been adopted:
/ = length o f pillar (panting beam), i n m , mea
sured: f o r t h e p i l l a r b e t w e e n t h e face p l a t e o f t h e
deck girder ( o r t h e deck transverse, i ft h e latter is
supported b y t h epillar) a n dt h edeck plating ( o r t h e
inner b o t t o m plating); f o rthe panting beam be
t w e e n t h e i n n e r edges o f t h e s t a r b o a r d a n d p o r t
frames o r f r o m t h e i n n e r edge o f the f r a m e t o a s t r o n g
support a t t h e centerUne;
/ = sectional area o f t h e pillar (panting beam),
in cm ;
i = t h e least m o m e n t o f inertia o f t h e pillar
(panting beam), i n c m ;
do = o u t e r d i a m e t e r o f t h e p i l l a r , i n m m .
2.9.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
2.9.2.1 T h e p i l l a r a x e s i n ' t w e e n d e c k s p a c e s a n d
holds shall generally be fitted i n t h e same vertical
Une, t h e heads a n d heels o f t h e pillars shall be
bracketed.
W h e r e theheel o fa tubular pillar w i t h t h e load
P < 2 5 0k N h a s n o brackets, t h edeck (inner b o t t o m )
plating under the heel shall be strengthened w i t h
doubling o r insert plates ( P = as determined
f r o m 2.9.3.1).
T h e w e bo fa f r a m i n g m e m b e r t o w h i c h t h e head
o f a pillar is attached shall be strengthened w i t h
brackets t o transmit t h eload t o t h e pillar.
T h e p i l l a r s s h a l l b e fitted o n p l a t e f l o o r s a n d side
girders w h i c h shall be strengthened w i t h vertical
brackets. O p e n i n g s i n f l o o r s a n d side girders u n d e r
the pillars aren o tpermitted.
W i t h t h e l o a d P > 2 5 0 k N ( P = as defined
i n 2.9.3.1), t h e pillars shall be fitted a t t h e intersec
t i o n o f p l a t e f l o o r s a n d side girders, o t h e r w i s e t h e
plate f l o o r (side girder) shall b e strengthened w i t h
vertical brackets attached t o t h e adjacent floors (side
girders).
2.9.2.2 T h e p i l l a r s s h a l l b e a t t a c h e d a t t h e i r h e a d s
a n d heels b y brackets o r o t h e r arrangements a p
proved b y t h e Register, i norder t o effectively trans
m i t t h eloads t o t h ehull structures below:
i n t h e h o l d s o f ships o f ice categories A r c 9 , A r c 8 ,
Arc7, Arc6, Arc5;
i n t h e tanks u n d e r w a t e r t i g h t platforms, deck
houses, ends o fsuperstructures, windlasses, winches,
capstans, etc.;
2
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
at t h e fore e n d o f ships w i t h t h e specified speed

Vo > l , 5 y / Z o r l a r g e b o w f l a r e .
2.9.3 D e s i g n l o a d s .
2.9.3.1 L o a d s o n t h e p i l l a r P , i n k N , i s d e
termined b y the formula
P = Plmbm
(2.9.3.1)
Z(pl b )i
m
w h e r e p = d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e a b o v e d e c k s p e c i f i e d i n 2.6.3, i n k P a ;
l = distance measured along thedeck girders between m i d
points o ftheir spans, i n m ;
b = m e a n breadth o f deck area (including t h e hatchways i n
the region concerned) supported b y t h epillar, i n m ;
SiplrJjî = s u m o floads f r o m the pillars fitted above, determined
h a v i n g r e g a r d t o 2.6.3, w h i c h m a y b e t r a n s m i t t e d t o t h e
pillar considered, i n k N .
m
2.9.3.2 L o a d s o n t h e p a n t i n g b e a m P , i n k N , i s
determined b y the formula
(2.9.3.2)
P =
where p = p + p design pressure o nt h eship's side i nw a y o f

i n s t a l l a t i o n o f t h e p a n t i n g b e a m , d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.3.2.1
a n d 1.3.2.2, i n k P a ;
a = spacing o f f r a m e s o n w h i c h p a n t i n g b e a m s a r e fitted,
in m ;
= half-sum o fframe spans m e a s u r e d vertically above a n d
under the b e a m considered, i n m .
s
2.9.4 S c a n t l i n g s o f p i l l a r s a n d p a n t i n g b e a m s .
2.9.4.1 T h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f p i l l a l r s a n d p a n t i n g
b e a m s / , i n c m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y
the iterative m e t h o d according t o t h e formula
2
/ =
(2.9.4.1)
+ /
w h e r e P = a s d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2.9.3;
= 2 buckling strength margin;
<Jcr= c r i t i c a l s t r e s s a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.5.3 a t E u l e r
determined b ythe formula
cr e
stress
206?
jp ;
2
Af=
wear allowances, i n c m , determined b y t h e following

formulae:
for tubular pillars
A / = 0,03dbA,s;
for box-shaped pillars
/ = A s
= perimeter length o fcross section, i n c m ;
for built-up pillars a n d panting b e a m s (I-beams, m a d e o f
c h a n n e l s , etc.);
/ = 0,05/$;
where
A s r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
2.9.4.2 T h e w a l l t h i c k n e s s s, i n m m , o f t u b u l a r
p i l l a r s s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n less t h a n
s = (do/50)
+ 3,5.
(2.9.4.2-1)
T h e wall thickness o f built-up pillars( b o x s h a p e d , m a d e o f c h a n n e l s o r I - b e a m s , e t c . ) s, i n m m ,

s =
h /50
where h
= width o fthe pillar wall, i n m m .
(2.9.4.2-2)
P a r t II. H u l l
115
The w a l l thickness o fa pillar, i ngeneral, shall n o t

b e t a k e n less t h a n 6 m m .
I n s m a l l ships t h e thickness o f t h e p i l l a r w a l l s
m a y , o n agreement w i t h t h e Register, be reduced
to 5 m m , provided t h e required sectional area o f t h e
pillar is maintained.
2.10 S T E M S , K E E L S , R U D D E R H O R N , P R O P E L L E R S H A F T
BRACKETS, FIXED N O Z Z L E S O F P R O P E L L E R
2.10.1 G e n e r a l .
for t h e c o n s t r u c t i o n a n d scantUngs o f t h e stem,
s t e r n f r a m e ( r u d d e r post, p r o p e l l e r post), solepiece o f
the sternframe, rudder h o r n o f semi-spade rudders,
propeller shaft brackets, b a r keel, fixed nozzles o f
propellers.
2.10.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
2.10.2.1 I t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t o u s e a b a r o r p l a t e
type welded stem. T h elower part o f the stem shall be
efficiently connected t o t h e b a r o r plate keel a n d ,
w h e n e v e r possible, t o t h e centre girder.
The w e l d e d stem plates shall be stiffened w i t h
transverse brackets. A r r a n g e m e n t o f transverse
brackets o f t h e stem shall, as f a r as possible, be
consistent w i t h t h ehull framing. Transverse brackets
stiffening t h e stem plate are fitted n o t m o r e t h a n 1 m
a p a r t b e l o w a n d n o t m o r e t h a n 1,5 m a b o v e t h e
s u m m e r load waterline. T h e brackets shall overlap
the joints o f the stem w i t h t h e shell plating a n d shall
be extended a n d w e l d e d t o t h e nearest frames.
The brackets w h i c h cannot be extended t o t h e
framing, except f o rt h e brackets i n w a y o fice belt i n
ships w i t h i c e categories, shall h a v e their rear edge
made along a s m o o t h curve.
I n case w h e r e t h e r a d i u s o f c u r v a t u r e o f t h e s t e m
is s u f f i c i e n t l y l a r g e , i t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t o f i t a c e n t e r U n e g i r d e r w i t h a face p l a t e .
2.10.2.2 T h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f s t e r n f r a m e o f a
single screw ship shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g r e
quirements:
.1 t h e sternframe s h a l l h a v e s u c h d i m e n s i o n s as t o
p r o v i d e t h e clearances b e t w e e n sternframe a n d propeller,
a n d b e t w e e n p r o p e l l e r a n d r u d d e r ( F i g . 2 . 1 0 . 2 . 2 ) n o t less
than indicated i n Table 2.10.2.2;
T a b l e
Dimensions
C l e a r a n c e s , i n m m 0,2R
R
b
P
0,42R
radius o fpropeller, i n m m
0,36,
2.10.2.2
e
0 , 0 8 , 200 250
F i g . 2.10.2.2
.2 t h e s o l e p i e c e s h a l l b e m a d e w i t h a s m o o t h r i s e
in the aft direction;
.3 t h e p r o p e l l e r p o s t s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h
transverse brackets i n t h e case o f w e l d e d s t e r n f r a m e
a n d w e b s i n t h e case o f cast s t e r n f r a m e . T h e brackets
a n d webs shall be spaced a t least 1 m apart; their
arrangement shall be consistent w i t h t h eh u l l f r a m
ing;
.4 t h e s t e r n f r a m e s h a l l b e e f f i c i e n t l y a t t a c h e d t o
the hull.
The lower part o f t h e sternframe shall be ex
tended f o r w a r d f r o m t h e propeller post a n d shall be
attached b yi t s brackets (webs) t o a t least three f l o o r s
i n ships w i t h a l e n g t h L > 1 2 0m a n d a t least t w o
floors i n ships w i t h a l e n g t h Z < 120 m . I n s m a l l ships
the sternframe m a ybe attached t o o n e floor only.
The rudder post shall extend over the counter t o
a height sufficient f o rits attachment t o t h e t r a n s o m
floor.
I n ships o f 8 0m a n d above a n d i n ships w i t h
cruiser stern, t h epropeller post shall also be extended
u p w a r d s t o a distance sufficient f o rits attachment t o
the additional t r a n s o m floor.
The thickness o f t r a n s o m floor a n d additional
t r a n s o m floor shall be increased as compared t o that
o f t h e floors i n t h eafter peak. I ngeneral, t h e above
floors shall be extended t o t h e nearest deck o r plat
form.
2.10.2.3 T h e s t e r n f r a m e i n t w i n s c r e w s h i p s s h a l l
comply w i t h the requirements f o r t h e sternframe i n
single screw ships, as specified i n 2.10.2.2. T h e l o w e r
part o ft h e sternframe t o be extended forward, m a y
be attached t o a t least t w o m a i n floors.
2.10.2.4 T h e s t e r n f r a m e o f t r i p l e s c r e w s h i p s s h a l l
c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements f o r t h e sternframe o f sin
gle screw ships, as specified i n 2.10.2.2 a n d 2.10.4.2.
116
Rules
2.10.2.5 T h e r u d d e r h o r n o f s e m i - s p a d e r u d d e r
shall be efficiently connected t o t h e respective floors
o f the after peak a n d its centreUne w a s h bulkhead.
T h e welded rudder h o r n shall be provided inside
w i t h transverse brackets; its m a i n supporting struc
tures shall be extended t o t h e nearest deck o r plat
f o r m ; t h e thickness o fthe floors t o w h i c h t h e rudder
h o r n is connected shall be increased as c o m p a r e d t o
that o f t h e floors i n t h e after peak.
2.10.2.6 T h e s t r u t s o f t w o - s t r u t s h a f t b r a c k e t s
s h a l l f o r m a n a n g l e o f a p p r o x i m a t e l y 90 t o e a c h
other. T h e i r axes shall intersect a t t h e axis o f t h e
propeller shaft.
T h e construction o f propeller shaft brackets w i t h
s t r u t s a r r a n g e d a t a n a n g l e l e s s t h a n 80 a n d g r e a t e r
t h a n 100, a d d i t i o n a l s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f t h e h u l l w i t h i n
the r e g i o n o f shaft brackets a r e subject t o special
consideration b y t h e Register.
T h e propeller shaft brackets shall be so arranged
i n r e l a t i o n t o t h e ship's h u l l t h a t t h e clearance be
t w e e n t h e blade t i p a n d t h e ship's h u l l is as large as
p o s s i b l e a n d , b u t , n o t less t h a n 2 5 p e r c e n t o f t h e
propeller diameter.
2.10.2.7 T h e o u t e r a n d i n n e r p l a t i n g o f p r o p e l l e r
nozzle shall be strengthened b y stiffeners w h o s e ar
r a n g e m e n t a n d size as w e l l as c o n n e c t i o n w i t h o u t e r
and inner plating o f t h e propeller nozzle shall be
determined according t o 2.4.2.2, P a r t I I I " E q u i p
ment, Arrangements a n d Outfit".
I n general, t h e transverse w e b plates shall be ar
ranged i n line w i t h t h e floors o f t h e after peak.
I n w a y o f attachment o f the nozzle t o the hull
s m o o t h t r a n s i t i o n f r o m t h e nozzle t o t h e ship's h u l l
shall be provided. T h e b o t t o m part o f the nozzle shall
be connected t o t h e h u l l . I f t h e p r o p e l l e r nozzle is
attached t o t h e h u l l b y shaft brackets, p r o v i s i o n shall
be m a d e f o r a n efficient c o n n e c t i o n o f t h e brackets
w i t h the framing i n the aft region o fthe hull a n dthe
framing inside t h e nozzle. T h econstruction o f shaft
brackets shall satisfy t h e requirements o f 2.10.2.6.
D r a i n plugs o fnon-corrosive material shall be fitted
in the t o p a n d b o t t o m parts o f outer plating.
2.10.3 D e s i g n l o a d s .
D e s i g n loads f o r t h e structures o f the solepiece a n d
rudder h o r n o f semi-spade rudders is taken equal t o t h e
r e a c t i o n f o r c e o f l o w e r s u p p o r t o f t h e r u d d e r R4 a c
c o r d i n g t o 2 . 2 . 4 . 1 2 , P a r t 1 " E q u i p m e n t , A r r a n g e m e n t s
and Outfit". I n the Formulae (2.2.4.7-2) t o (2.2.4.74) t h e
coefficient 0 4 s h a l l b e t a k e n e q u a l t o z e r o .
2.10.4 S c a n t l i n g s o f s t e m , s t e r n f r a m e , r u d d e r h o r n
and propeller shaft brackets, b a r keel a n d fixed nozzle
of propeller.
2.10.4.1 T h e s t e m s h a l l s a t i s f y t h e f o l l o w i n g r e
quirements:
.1 t h e sectional area /, i n c m , o f a b a r s t e m f r o m the
k e e l t o t h e s u m m e r l o a d w a t e r U n e s h a U n o t b e less t h a n
2
/ =
and Construction
of Sea-Going
l,3L-4.
Ships
(2.10.4.1.1)
T h e sectional area m a y be reduced f o r ships o f

restricted areas o f navigation:
R 2 , R 2 - R S N a n d R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) b y 1 0 p e r cent;
R 3 - R S N a n d R 3 b y 2 0 p e r cent.
A b o v e the s u m m e r load waterUne the sectional
area m a y be gradually reduced t o 7 0 p e r cent o f t h e
area stated above;
.2 t h e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s s, i n m m , o f w e l d e d s t e m
s = (0,085L + 5 , 5 ) ^
(2.10.4.1.2)
w h e r e | = a s d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.1.4.3,
W h e r e L > 220 m , L shall be taken equal t o 2 0 0 m .
T h e plate thickness o f t h e stem m a y be reduced
for ships o f restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n :
R 2 , R 2 - R S N a n d R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) b y 5 p e r cent;
R 3 - R S N a n d R 3 b y 10 p e r cent.
T h e plate thickness o f the stem above t h e summer
load waterUne m a y be gradually reduced t o that o f
shell plates adjoining t h e stem.
T h e thickness a n dw i d t h o f the stem plates i n w a y
o f a t t a c h m e n t t o t h e p l a t e k e e l s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
the thickness a n d w i d t h o f t h e latter.
When
t h e distance
between
the
brackets
strengthening t h e stem is reduced b y 0,5 m , as c o m
pared t o that required b y 2.10.2.1, the reduction o f
plate thickness o f stem b y 2 0 p e r cent m a y be per
mitted. I ft h e reduction o f t h e distance between t h e
b r a c k e t s i s less t h a n 0 , 5 m , t h e p e r m i s s i b l e r e d u c t i o n
o f plate thickness shall be determined b y Unear i n
terpolation;
.3 t h e t h i c k n e s s o f b r a c k e t s s t r e n g t h e n i n g t h e
s t e m s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f s h e l l p l a t i n g a d
joining t h e stem.
T h e thickness o f w e b a n d face p l a t e o f the girder
s t i f f e n i n g t h e s t e m a t t h e c e n t r e l i n e s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n that o f t h e brackets.
2.10.4.2 T h e s t e r n f r a m e o f a s i n g l e s c r e w s h i p
.1 t h e l e n g t h l a n d w i d t h b, i n m m , o f r e c t a n
gular soUd propeller post section, f r o m t h ekeel t ot h e
c o u n t e r , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
s
= 1,30L + 95; b = 1,60L + 2 0 for L < 120 m ;

(2.10.4.2.1)
4 = \ , \ 5 L + 110; b = 0 , 6 7 5 L + 1 3 0 f o r
120 m .
4
T h e scantlings o f t h e propeller post m a y be re

duced f o r ships o f restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n :
R 2 , R 2 - R S N a n d R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) b y 5 p e r cent,
P a r t II. H u l l
117
A b o v e t h e counter t h e sectional area o f stern

frame m a y be gradually reduced. A n d n o w h e r e its
s e c t i o n a l a r e a s h a l l b e less t h a n 4 0 p e r c e n t o f t h e
required area o fthe propeller post, corresponding t o
the scantlings stated above;
.2 t h e s c a n t l i n g s o f t h e p r o p e l l e r p o s t c r o s s sec
t i o n o f a cast sternframe w i t h t h e r u d d e r h a v i n g t o p
a n d b o t t o m supports shall be established i n ac
cordance w i t h F i g . 2.10.4.2-1 depending o n t h e v a
l u e so, i n m m , d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o l l o w i n g f o r m u l a e :
s = 0 , l L+ 4,4 f o rL < 200 m ;
5 = 0 , 0 6 L + 12,4 f o r L > 2 0 0 m .
(2.10.4.2.2)
F i g . 2.10.4.2-2:
s = l , 6 i a t L < 150 m ; s = l,5s f o r
150 m ;
l = 2 , 5 L + 180 m m f o r L < 2 0 0 m ;
l = 1,41, + 4 0 0 m m f o r 1 , ^ 2 0 0 m ;
R bending radius
0
.4 t h e finished thickness o f propeller boss shall b e

n o t less t h a n 3 0 p e r c e n t o f t h e s h a f t d i a m e t e r ;
.5 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W, i n c m , o f t h e solepiece a b o u t t h e v e r t i c a l a x i s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
3
H^ = 8 a i t o l -
(2.10.4.2.5-1)
3
T h e section m o d u l u s W , i n c m , o f t h e rudder
post about t h eh o r i z o n t a l longitudinal axis shall n o t be
less t h a n
rp
W_
r
F i g . 2.10.4.2-1:
1 w e b ; 2 adjoining plate o f shell;
Si = 1,5sq, S2 2 , 5 i o ! *
3,5io!
4 > 1,91. + 135 m m f o r 200 m ;
l > l , 4 L + 235 m m f o r 1 , ^ 2 0 0 m ;
r cast radius
=
= 8(1 -
(2.10.4.2.5-2)
w h e r e a = 0,85 i f t h e r e i s a r u d d e r p o s t ;
a = 1 i f t h e r e i s n o r u d d e r p o s t o r a b o l t e d r u d d e r p o s t i s fitted;
RA = a s d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 2.10.3;
x = distance f r o m t h e solepiece section concerned t o t h e
centre o fthe rudder stock (x shall n o t b e t a k e n less t h a n
0,54 a n d m o r e t h a n l ) ;
4 = s p a n o f t h e solepiece, m e a s u r e d f r o m t h ecentre o f the
rudder stock to the beginning o f rounding o f the
propeller post, i n m ;
l, = s p a n o f t h e r u d d e r post, m e a s u r e d vertically f r o m t h e
mid-thickness o f solepiece a t t h e centre o f t h e rudder
stock to the beginning o f rounding i n the upper part o f
the rudder post, i n m ;
r\ = a s d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.1.4.3.
s
rj
T h e thickness o f w e b s shall be a t least 5 0 p e r cent

greater t h a n that o f t h e shell plating adjoining t h e
sternframe;
.3 t h e s c a n t l i n g s o f t h e p r o p e l l e r p o s t c r o s s sec
tion o f a welded sternframe w i t h the rudder having
top a n d b o t t o m supports shall be established ac
cording t o F i g . 2.10.4.2-2 where s shall be de
t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h 2.10.4.2.2. T h e thickness
o f transverse brackets shall b e a t least 2 0 p e r cent
greater t h a n that o f t h e shell plating adjoining t h e
sternframe.
Welded propeller post o fother construction m a y
be used, p r o v i d e d t h a t i t s s t r e n g t h is e q u i v a l e n t t o
that o fthe abovementioned construction;
0
T h e section m o d u l u s o f the solepiece about t h e hor

i z o n t a l t r a n s v e r s e a x i s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 5 W w h e r e
W s h a l l b e fetermined b y F o r m u l a ( 2 . 1 0 . 4 . 2 . 5 - 1 ) . T h e
section m o d u l u s o fthe rudder post about t h e horizontal
transverse a x i s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0,5 W w h e r e W
shall b e determined b y F o r m u l a (2.10.4.2.5-2);
.6 t h e scantlings o f t h e sternframe s t r u c t u r a l
m e m b e r s m a y be d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e basis o f direct
s t r e n g t h c a l c u l a t i o n t a k i n g t h e p e r m i s s i b l e stress
factor k = 0,55a n d external loads according t o 2.2,
Part I I I"Equipment, Arrangements a n d Outfit".
s
r p
118
Rules
2.10.4.3 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f t h e s t e r n f r a m e o f t w i n
screw ships shall satisfy r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e scan
tUngs o f propeller post i n single screw ships as given
in 2.10.4.2 w i t h t h e following amendments:
.1 t h e s e c t i o n w i d t h o f t h e s t e r n f r a m e o f a s o l i d
rectangular cross section m a y b e reduced b y 5 0 p e r cent
as c o m p a r e d w i t h t h a t r e q u i r e d b y 2 . 1 0 . 4 . 2 . 1 ;
.2 t h e s c a n t U n g s o f t h e c a s t o r w e l d e d s t e r n f r a m e
m a y be reduced as c o m p a r e d w i t h those required
b y 2.10.4.2.2 a n d 2.10.4.2.3 respectively, so t h a t their
section m o d u l i about t h e h o r i z o n t a l longitudinala n d
transverse axes, a r e reduced b y n o tm o r e t h a n 5 0 p e r
cent. T h e thickness o f t h e sternframe w a l l shall be a t
least 7 m m .
2.10.4.4 F o r s e m i - s p a d e r u d d e r s w i t h o n e g u d
geon u p o n t h e h o r n , the section m o d u l u s , i n c m , o f
the rudder h o r n about the horizontal longitudinal
a x i s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
3
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
The height a n dw i d t h o f the b a r keel cross section

m a y be reduced f o r ships o f restricted areas o f n a v i
gation:
R2, R 2 - R S N a n d R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) b y 5 p e r cent;
2.10.4.7 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f o u t e r a n d i n n e r p l a t i n g
o f fixed propeller nozzle shall comply w i t h the re
quirements o f 2.4.2, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t , A r r a n g e
ments a n d Outfit" taking the following into
consideration:
w i d t h o f middle belt o f inner plating shall be
n o t less t h a n t h e d i s t a n c e f r o m 0 , 0 3 - D f o r w a r d o f t h e
p r o p e l l e r b l a d e t i p s a n d 0,01D
aft o f the propeller
blade tips where D is t h e internal diameter o f p r o
peller nozzle;
thickness o f f o r w a r d part o f t h e inner a n d outer
p l a t i n g s h a U b e n o t less t h a n r e q u i r e d f o r s i d e s h e U
plating (refer t o 2.2.4.1 f o r transverse f r a m i n g system).
T h e w i d t h o f a t t a c h m e n t shall be a t least 0,15-D .
The cross-sectional area o f t h e j o i n t shall be
n o t less t h a n r e q u i r e d b y 2 . 1 0 . 4 . 2 . 5 f o r t h e solepiece.
I f t h e solepiece serves as s u p p o r t o f t h e rudder, t h e
c o n n e c t i o n o f t h e n o z z l e t o t h e solepiece i s subject t o
F o r t w i n screw ships w h e n t h e propeUer nozzle is
not attached t o t h e h u U a t its b o t t o m part, t h e w i d t h o f
a t t a c h m e n t a t t h e t o p p a r t s h a U b e n o t less t h a n 0 , 3 - D .
I f t h e propeller nozzle is attached t o the h u l l b y
shaft brackets, their strength shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e
requirements o f 2.10.4.5.
I n w a y o f attachment o fthe nozzle t o t h eh u l l the
t h i c k n e s s o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
required b y F o r m u l a (2.4.2.2-2), P a r t I I I " E q u i p
o
W=\2R z t\
a
(2.10.4.4)
w h e r e R4 = a s d e f i n e d i n t o 2.10.3;
z = vertical distance f o r t h e mid-thickness o f t h e h o r n
g u d g e o n t o t h e s e c t i o n c o n c e r n e d , i n m (z s h a l l n o t b e
t a k e n l e s s t h a n 0,5/ a n d m o r e t h a n l ) ;
Ik = h o r n s p a n m e a s u r e d v e r t i c a l l y f r o m t h e m i d - t h i c k n e s s o f
the h o r n g u d g e o n t o the point o f intersection o fthe h o r n
axis with shell plating, i n m ;
| = a s d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.1.4.3.
s
W h e r e t h e rudder h o r n is w e l d e d o f plates, t h e
t h i c k n e s s o f t h e plates, i n a l l cases, s h a l l b e a t
least 7 m m .
The scantUngs o f t h e rudder h o r n m a y be de
t e r m i n e d o n t h e basis o f direct strength calculation
t a k i n g t h e p e r m i s s i b l e s t r e s s f a c t o r Jc = 0 , 3 5 a n d
external loads according t o 2.2, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t ,
Arrangements and Outfit".
2.10.4.5 T h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f e i t h e r s t r u t o f t w o s t r u t s h a f t b r a c k e t s s h a l l b e e q u a l t o n o t less t h a n
60 p e r cent o f t h e p r o p e l l e r shaft section i n t h e
b r a c k e t p l a n e , t h e s t r u t t h i c k n e s s t o n o t less t h a n
4 5 p e r c e n t , a n d t h e b o s s t h i c k n e s s t o n o t less t h a n
35 p e r cent o f the propeller shaft diameter. T h e length
o f the boss shall be i naccordance w i t h 5.6.1, P a r t V I I
"Machinery Installations".
a
The strength o f t h e welded shaft brackets shall

n o t b e less t h a n t h a t s p e c i f i e d a b o v e . T h e p l a t e
t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 7 m m .
T h e w e l d a r e a o f rivets a t t a c h i n g e a c h s t r u t t o t h e
h u U s h a U n o t b e less t h a n 2 5 p e r c e n t o f t h e p r o p e U e r
shaft sectional area. W h e r e t h e struts a r e attachhed b y
m e a n s o f flanges, t h e thickness o f t h e latter shaU b e
n o t less t h a n 2 5 p e r c e n t o f t h e p r o p e U e r s h a f t d i a m e t e r .
2.10.4.6 T h e h e i g h t h a n d w i d t h b , i n m m , o f t h e
b a r k e e l c r o s s s e c t i o n s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
h = l , 3 L + 100;
b = 0,1L + 8 f o r L < 6 0 m ;
(2.10.4.6)
b = 0,4L + 2 6 f o r L ^ 6 0 m .
s
2.11 S E A T I N G S O F M A C H I N E R Y A N D B O I L E R S
2.11.1 G e n e r a l .
2.11.1.1 R e q u i r e m e n t s a r e g i v e n i n t h i s C h a p t e r f o r
the c o n s t r u c t i o n a n d d i m e n s i o n s o f t h e seatings i n
tended f o r m a i n machinery a n d boilers, deck m a c h i n
ery, f i s h i n g i n s t a U a t i o n s , c a r g o h a n d U n g gear, a u x i U a r y
m a c h i n e r y , etc.
2.11.1.2 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s l a i d d o w n i n t h i s
Chapter are m i n i m u m . Requirements concerning
construction a n d dimensions o f structural compo
nents o f a seating, w h i c h are contained i n t h e tech
nical d o c u m e n t a t i o n o fthe m a c h i n e r y , u n i t o r device
to be installed o n t h e seating concerned, shall also be
compUed with.
2.11.1.3 F o r d i m e n s i o n s o f t h e s t r u c t u r a l c o m
p o n e n t s o f t h e seatings i n t e n d e d f o r m o o r i n g a n d
t o w i n g appUances - refer t o 4.3 a n d 5.3, P a r t I I I
"Equipment, Arrangements a n d Outfit".
P a r t II. H u l l
119
2.11.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n o f s e a t i n g s .
2.11.2.1 T h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f s e a t i n g s s h a l l s a t i s f y
.1 t h e seating s h a l l b e o f s u b s t a n t i a l c o n s t r u c t i o n
to ensure efficient attachment o f machinery, gear o r
device a n d t r a n s m i s s i o n o fforces t o t h e h u l l f r a m i n g ,
w h i c h shall be sufficiently strong. I f necessary, t h e
framing m a ybe strengthened;
.2 t h e s e a t i n g s h a l l b e s o c o n s t r u c t e d t h a t t h e
resonance v i b r a t i o n o f t h e seating as a w h o l e a n d o f
its structural c o m p o n e n t s c a n be avoided u n d e r a l l
specified r u n n i n g c o n d i t i o n s ;
.3 w h e r e t h e s e a t i n g i n s h i p s w i t h a l e n g t h
L > 65 m is installed o n t h econtinuous longitudinals
o f strength deck a n d double b o t t o m (bottom) within
0,5 a m i d s h i p s , t h e h e i g h t o f t h e v e r t i c a l p l a t e s o f t h e
seating a t t h e ends shall be gradually reduced. I f t h e
length o f t h e vertical plate is m o r e t h a n six times its
height, t h e vertical plate a n d its t o p plate shall be
m a d e o f t h e s a m e steel grade as t h e deck o r d o u b l e
b o t t o m ( b o t t o m ) structural m e m b e r o n w h i c h i t is
installed. T h e structural components o f t h e seating
shall n o t terminate a t t h e unsupported portions o f
plating. A t t a c h m e n t o f the seating t o t h e u p p e r edge
o f sheerstrake is subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y
the Register;
condition they are attached t o the framing members

a n d stiffeners (refer t o 1.7.1.4), o r o n cantilevers
connected t o f r a m i n g m e m b e r s o r stiffeners.
A t t a c h m e n t o f small-sized machinery a n d
equipment directly t o t h e above-mentioned structure
w i t h the help o fwelded pads is n o t permitted.
2.11.3 D i m e n s i o n s o f s t r u c t u r e s o f s e a t i n g s .
2.11.3.1 T h e t h i c k n e s s s, i n m m , o f s t r u c t u r a l
components o fa seating o f m a i n m a c h i n e r y o r boiler
.4 t h e seating s h a l l b e so designed t h a t t h e p l a t i n g
b e n e a t h is accessible f o r i n s p e c t i o n . M e a s u r e s shall be
taken t o prevent water f r o m accumulating under the
seating.
I n p a r t i c u l a r cases agreed w i t h t h e Register, a
hermetic construction o f the seating is permitted, t h e
i n n e r space o f t h e seating being filled w i t h s o m e
chemically neutral material w i t h good
adhesion
properties.
2.11.2.2 I n g e n e r a l , a s e a t i n g o f m a i n m a c h i n e r y
a n d boilers shall comprise t w o vertical plates (girder
webs) (for medium-speed a n d h i g h p o w e r engines
f o u r v e r t i c a l plates ( t w o e i t h e r side o f t h e e n g i n e ) )
a n d h o r i z o n t a l face plates ( t o p plates) t o w h i c h t h e
machinery (boiler) shall be attached directly. T h e vertical plates shall be strengthened w i t h brackets (knees)
h a v i n g face plates (flanges) a l o n g t h e free edges.
^ n a seating with f o u r vertical plates t h e thickness o ft h e

plates m a y b e taken equal t o the thickness o fbrackets a n d knees
W h e r e t h e seating comprises f o u r vertical plates,

the t o p plate is attached t o t w o vertical plates fitted
o n o n e side o f t h e m a c h i n e r y ; t h e o u t e r plates s h a l l
h a v e o p e n i n g s t o p r o v i d e access i n t o t h e seating. I n
t h e case o f m e d i u m - s p e e d engines, s u c h openings
shall n o t extend t o t h e t o p plate. T h e outer plates
m a y be m a d e sloped.
A l l t h e vertical plates shall be fitted i n line w i t h
t h e m a i n o r a d d i t i o n a l side girders.
2.11.2.3 M a c h i n e r y a n d e q u i p m e n t m a y b e i n stalled o n shell plating o f t h e hull, tight bulkheads,
decks a n d platforms (including t a n k bulkheads a n d
crown), inner b o t t o m a n d shaft-tunnel platings o n
(2.11.3.1)
s = k \ f Q + k\
0
w h e r e Q = m a s s o f m a c h i n e r y (boiler) i n w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n , i nt;
= f a c t o r g i v e n i n T a b l e 2 . 1 1 . 3 . 1 - 1 ;
k\ = f a c t o r g i v e n i n T a b l e 2.11.3.1-2.
T a b l e
2.11.3.1-1
Seating o f machinery
(boiler)
Top
plates
Vertical
plates
Brackets,
knees
M a i n internal combustion
engine
4,65
3,0
2,5
M a i n geared turbine set,

m a i n diesel generator a n d
propulsion motor
4,15
2,7
2,7
Boiler
3,65
2,4
2,4
T a b l e
2.11.3.1-2
Mass o f machinery
(boiler), i n t
^20
> 20
^50
> 50
^100
> 100
^200
*i
> 200
0
2.11.3.2 T h e t h i c k n e s s s, i n m m , o f s t r u c t u r a l
components o f a seating o f m a i n i n t e r n a l c o m b u s t i o n
e n g i n e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
s = k \fN+k
2
(2.11.3.2)
where N = specified p o w e r o f the engine, i n k W ;

k , k = f a c t o r s g i v e n i n T a b l e 2.11.3.2,
2
b u t n o t less t h a n r e q u i r e d b y 2 . 1 1 . 3 . 1 .
T a b l e
N, i n
k W
Number of
Factor
vertical plates
2
>
Brackets,
knees
1,7
0,9
1,4
0,9
0,9
1,0
1,0
0,7
13
0,8
0,7
0,7
11
1000
Vertical
plates
Top
plates
^1000
2.11.3.2
120
Rules
2.12 S U P E R S T R U C T U R E S , D E C K H O U S E S A N D Q U A R T E R
DECKS
2.12.1 G e n e r a l p r o v i s i o n s , d e f i n i t i o n s a n d s y m b o l s .
f o r s h o r t a n d l o n g bridges e x t e n d i n g f r o m side t o side
o f t h e ship as w e l l as t o s h o r t bridges w h i c h d o
n o t e x t e n d t o t h e sides o f t h e ship, forecastle, p o o p ,
l o n g f o r e c a s t l e a n d p o o p e x t e n d i n g t o ship's sides,
short deckhouses a n d q u a r t e r decks.
The applicability o f the requirements contained i n
this Chapter t o l o n g superstructures n o t extending f r o m
side t o side o f t h e s h i p as w e l l as t o l o n g d e c k h o u s e s
shall b e specially agreed w i t h t h e Register.
2.12.1.2 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h i s C h a p t e r t h e
following definitions have been adopted.
L o n g d e c k h o u s e is a deckhouse o fa length
n o t less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a ( 2 . 1 2 . 1 . 2 - 1 ) ,
b u t n o t less t h a n 0 , 2 0 L , h a v i n g n o e x p a n s i o n o r
sliding joints.
L o n g b r i d g e is a superstructure having a
l e n g t h n o t less t h a n
h = 2l ,
(2.12.1.2-1)
b u t n o t less t h a n 0 , 1 5 L .
Q u a r t e r d e c k is t h e after part o fupper deck
stepped u p t o a p o r t i o n o f ' t w e e n deck height.
S h o r t d e c k h o u s e is a n y deckhouse w h i c h is
n o t a l o n g d e c k h o u s e . D e c k h o u s e s o f s h i p s less t h a n
65 m i n l e n g t h a r e considered as s h o r t deckhouses.
S h o r t b r i d g e is a n y bridge w h i c h is n o t a
l o n g b r i d g e . S u p e r s t r u c t u r e s o f s h i p s less t h a n 6 5 m
i n l e n g t h are considered as s h o r t superstructures.
Ends o f superstructures a n d deckh o u s e s are the ends o f the length measured f r o m
the e n d bulkheads, i n m ,
4 = l,5(2? /2 + h).
2
(2.12.1.2-2)
T r a n s i t i o n a r e a o f q u a r t e r d e c k is a n
area m e a s u r e d f r o m t h e f o r w a r d edge o f b r e a k t o t h e
after edge o fu p p e r deck p l a t i n g a n d e x t e n d i n g b e l o w
the quarter deck.
L o n g f o r e c a s t l e ( p o o p ) is a forecastle
( p o o p ) h a v i n g a l e n g t h n o t less t h a n
h=0,lL + l
(2.12.1.2-3)
i n ships o f 65 m a n d greater i n length.

2.12.1.3 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h i s C h a p t e r t h e
following symbols have been adopted:
2?2 = b r e a d t h o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e d e c k m e a s u r e d a t
its m i d - l e n g t h , excluding t h e b r e a d t h o f openings o f
cargo hatches, m a c h i n e r y casings, i f any, i n m ;
h = height o f t h e first tier o f superstructure o r
deckhouse, i n m ;
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
4 = length o f superstructure (deckhouse) measured

between t h e e n d bulkheads; t h e l e n g t h o f forecastle
(poop) measured f r o m t h e fore o r after perpendicular t o
the e n d b u l k h e a d o f t h e forecastle ( p o o p ) , i n m ;
B = ship's breadth a t t h e level o fthe upper deck
at t h e section considered, i n m ;
b = breadth o f the deckhouse, i n m .
2.12.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
2.12.2.1 F o r t h e f i r s t t i e r o f l o n g b r i d g e o u t s i d e
the e n d portions, l o n g forecastle (poop) outside t h e
end portion, the requirements o f 2.6 f o r the upper
deck a n d the requirements o f 2.2 a n d 2.5 f o r the
ship's side i n w a y o f t h e u p p e r ' t w e e n d e c k space shall
be c o m p l i e d w i t h .
2.12.2.2 F o r t h e b u t t o m s t r a k e o f s i d e p l a t i n g a n d
longitudinal bulkhead plating o f short bridge, the
ends o f 1st tier l o n g bridges a n d l o n g forecastle
( p o o p ) , t h e b o t t o m s t r a k e o f side p l a t i n g o f steel
s h o r t deckhouses a n d t h e ends o f steel l o n g deckhouses fitted o n t h e s t r e n g t h deck, grade o f steel a n d
y i e l d stress shall b e t h e s a m e as r e q u i r e d f o r t h e
strength deck i nthis region. T h e w i d t h o fthe b o t t o m
s t r a k e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 5 h .
2.12.2.3 W h e n e v e r p r a c t i c a b l e , t h e e n d b u l k h e a d s
o f superstructures a n ddeckhouses shall be situated i n
Une w i t h t h e h u l l transverse b u l k h e a d s o r as close t o
the latter as possible.
W e b frames o r vertical webs, bulkheads o r partial bulkheads shall be fitted i n superstructures a n d
deckhouses i n such a w a y as t o be i n Unew i t h girder
webs o r bulkheads o f hull structures located below.
T h e vertical webs o f e n d bulkheads shall be fitted i n
Une w i t h t h e vertical webs o f h u l l bulkheads.
2.12.2.4 T h e l o w e r e n d s o f v e r t i c a l s t i f f e n e r s o f
the e n d bulkheads o f the 1st tier superstructures a n d
deckhouses shall be w e l d e d t o t h e deck. T h e l o w e r
ends o f side v e r t i c a l stiffeners o f 1st tier h o u s e s shall
be attached t o t h e deck b y brackets.
2.12.2.5 A d e q u a t e s t r e n g t h e n i n g s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d f o r t h e structures o f deckhouses a n d superstructures where launching a n d recovery appUances
for s u r v i v a l craft a n d rescue boats a r e fitted.
2.12.3 D e s i g n l o a d s .
2.12.3.1 T h e d e s i g n l o a d s o n t h e s u p e r s t r u c t u r e
sides a n d o n t h e s u p e r s t r u c t u r e a n d d e c k h o u s e decks
.1 d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e s u p e r s t r u c t u r e sides i s
determined according t o 2.2.3;
.2 d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n w e a t h e r a r e a s o f t h e s u perstructure a n d deckhouse decks shall be determined by the formula
x
p = ap
(2.12.3.1.2)
w h e r e p = w a v e l o a d a t t h e d e c k l e v e l a c c o r d i n g t o 1.3.2.2;
<x = 0,9 f o r f o r e c a s t l e d e c k , l o n g f o r e c a s t l e d e c k o r p a r t o f l o n g
b r i d g e d e c k w i t h i n 0,21, f r o m t h e f o r e p e r p e n d i c u l a r ;
121
P a r t II. H u l l
a = 0,8 f o r p o o p d e c k , l o n g p o o p d e c k o r p a r t o f l o n g b r i d g e
d e c k w i t h i n 0,21, f r o m t h e a f t e r p e r p e n d i c u l a r ;
<x = 0,7 f o r s h o r t b r i d g e a n d d e c k h o u s e d e c k s , l o n g s u p e r
structure a n d deckhouse decks, long forecastle a n d p o o p
decks within the midship region. F o r areas o flong bridge
a n d deckhouse decks, long forecastle a n d p o o p decks
outside themidship region a n d outside areas situated a t
0,21, f r o m t h e f o r e o r a f t e r p e r p e n d i c u l a r , a s h a l l b e
determined b y linear interpolation,
T a b l e
Bulkhead
Structure
Unprotected
Front
2.12.3.2-1
n
1st t i e r
2 + Zo/120
2nd tier
1 + Zo/120
3rd tier
0,5 + Z o / 1 5 0
Protected
b u t n o t less t h a n p
m i n
F o r t h e 1st tier superstructure a n d deckhouse

decks, Praia, i n k P a , shall be determined b y t h e fol
lowing formulae:
for forecastle, long forecastle decks o r p a r t o f
long bridge deck w i t h i n 0,22. f r o m t h e fore perpen
dicular
P m i n = 0,12.
Aft o f amidships
0,7 + l o / l O O O - O ^ / i
Forward o f amidships
0,5 + l o / l O O O - O M / L
end
Lo =
l e n g t h o f s h i p , i n m ( t o b e t a k e n n o t g r e a t e r t h a n 300 m f o r
the p u r p o s e o f calculation);
distance, i n m , between t h e after perpendicular a n d t h e
bulkhead under consideration.
x\ =
f o r m u l a i s also u s e d f o rt h e deckhhouses
sides.
7;
for poop, long p o o p deck o r part o f long bridge

d e c k w i t h i n 0,22. f r o m t h e after p e r p e n d i c u l a r
P m i n = 0,0152. + 4 f o r 2. < 8 0 m ;
P m i n = 0,032. + 2,8 f o r 2. > 8 0 m ;
for bridge a n d deckhouse decks, long forecastle
and p o o p decks w i t h i n t h e midship region
P m i n = 0,0152. + 4 ;
for areas o f bridge a n d deckhouse decks, long
forecastle a n d p o o p decks outside t h e m i d s h i p region
and outside areas situated a t 0,22. f r o m t h e fore o r
after perpendicular, p
shall be determined b y lin
ear i n t e r p o l a t i o n .
F o r decks o fthe superstructures a n d deckhouses
o f t h e 2 n d a n d u p p e r tiers
m i n
Praia = 2
Aft
T a b l e
2.12.3.2-2
L, in m
z , in m
L, in m
z , in m
20
0,87
180
9,85
40
2,59
200
10,25
60
4,07
220
10,55
80
5,42
240
10,77
100
6,6
260
10,92
120
7,69
280
11,0
140
8,63
300
11,03
160
9,35
350
11,05
kPa.
F o r ships greater t h a n 2 5 0 m i n length, p

is
determined taking 2.= 250 m .
F o r ships o f restricted area o f navigation, p
may
b e r e d u c e d b y m u l t i p l y i n g b y t h e f a c t o r cp o b t a i n e d
f r o m T a b l e 1.3.1.5.
2.12.3.2 P r e s s u r e o n t h e e n d b u l k h e a d s o f s u
p e r s t r u c t u r e s a n d d e c k h o u s e s a s w e l l a s o n sides o f
deckhouses p , i nk P a ,is determined b y the formula
m i n
m i n
p = 5,lnc2(kz
zi)
(2.12.3.2)
w h e r e n = f a c t o r d e t e r m i n e d f r o m T a b l e 2.12.3.2-1;
c = 0,3 + 0 , 7 b l B , i n t h i s c a s e , c > 0 , 5 ;
2
= 1,0 + (*^+
02 )
= 1,0 + 1,5(*^+ 0 5 )
45
il ^> ~>
T h e above-stated valus o f factor n apply t oa ship

having t h e freeboard equal t o m i n i m u m tabular
freeboard o fT y p e " B " ships, a n d a s t a n d a r d height o f
superstructures according t o Section 4 o fL o a d Line
Rules f o r S e a - G o i n g Ships. I ft h e deck o f t h e tier
considered is situated higher than t h e standard p o
sition d u et o a n increase o f freeboard, as against t h e
tabular value, then theappropriate factor n m a ybe
determined b yUnear interpolation between the values
o f that factor f o r superstructures w i t h standard a n d
actual positions o f decks under t h e superstructures.
I n a n y case, t h e design pressure shall n o t b e t a k e n
less t h a n i n d i c a t e d i n T a b l e 2 . 1 2 . 3 . 2 - 3 .
w h e n x i / L > 0,45;
for t h e sides o f deckhouses t h e factor is a s s u m e d t o

vary f o r t h e length o f b u l k h e a d . F o rthis purpose t h e
deckhouse is subdivided into parts o f approximately
e q u a l l e n g t h n o t e x c e e d i n g 0,151, e a c h , a n d X\ i s t a k e n a s
the distance between t h e after perpendicular a n d t h e
middle o fthe part considered;
s h a l l b e t a k e n a s n o t l e s s t h a n 0,6, n o r g r e a t e r t h a n 0,8;
f o r t h e a f t e n d b u l k h e a d s f o r w a r d o f a m i d s h i p s C = 0,8;
z = a s g i v e n i n T a b l e 2.12.3.2-2;
zi = vertical distance, i nm , f r o m t h es u m m e r l o a d waterline
to the mid-point o fthe plate p a n e l considered o rthe m i d
p o i n t o fs p a n o fthe b u l k h e a d stiffener.
b
T a b l e
2.12.3.2-3
Design pressure p , i n k P a
L, in m
for 1st tier
unprotected fronts
elsewhere
^50
15,6
7,8
50 < L < 2 5 0
13 + 0 , 0 5 2 1 ,
6,5 + 0 , 0 2 6 1 ,
>250
26
13
122
Rules
F o r ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n t h e

design pressure m a y be reduced b y multiplying b y the
2.12.4 S c a n t l i n g s o f s t r u c t u r e s o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s ,
deckhouses a n d quarter decks.
2.12.4.1 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f s i d e p l a t i n g o f s h o r t a n d
long bridges, forecastle a n d poop, l o n g forecastle a n d
p o o p shall be determined according t o 2.2.4.1 using
the deisgn loads given i n 2.12.3.1.1. F o r short
b r i d g e s , f o r e c a s t l e a n d p o o p , Jc = 0 , 7 .
F o r l o n g bridge, l o n g forecastle a n dp o o p outside
t h e e n d p o r t i o n s , Jc i s d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g
t o 2.2.4.1; a t sections i n w a y o f e n d b u l k h e a d s
Jc = 0 , 7 ; w i t h i n t h e e n d p o r t i o n s Jc s h a l l b e d e
termined b y Unear interpolation.
T h e t h i c k n e s s o f side p l a t i n g o f l o n g bridges, l o n g
forecastle a n d p o o p shall satisfy t h e requirements
o f 2.2.4.8.
I n a n y case, t h e t h i c k n e s s Smin, i n m m , o f side
plating o f short bridges, forecastle a n dp o o p shall n o t
b e less t h a n :
r
Ships
I n a n y c a s e , t h e t h i c k n e s s Smtr, i n m m , o f d e c k
plating o f short bridges, forecastle a n dp o o p , short
d e c k h o u s e s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
for o p e n forecastle deck
= ( 4 + 0,042. f o r L < 1 0 0 m ;
Jmin = ( 7 + 0 , 0 l L ) y / r ] f o r
100 m ;
Smin
(2.12.4.2-1)
for other decks o f superstructures a n d deck

houses o fthe l o w e s t t i e r
Smin = ( 5 + 0 , 0 1 L ) V r j ;
(2.12.4.2-2)
for superstructures o f t h e lowest tier

Smin
= (4,5 + 0 , 0 2 5 2 . ) ^ ;
for superstructures o f other tiers

*mi = ( 4 + 0 , 0 2 / ^
w h e r e | i s o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1.1.4.3.
W h e r e L > 300 m m , L shall be taken equal

to 300 m .
F o r ships o f unrestricted service a n d ships o f re
stricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R l , t h e reduction o f
m i n i m a l thickness, b u t n o t m o r e t h a n 1 0 p e rcent, is
p e r m i t t e d i n p r o p o r t i o n t o t h e r a t i o o f a d o p t e d spa
cing t o standard spacing, w h e r e t h e adopted spacing
is less t h a n t h e s t a n d a r d o n e ( r e f e r t o 1.1.3). I n a n y
case, f o r ships o f 3 0 m a n d greater i n l e n g t h t h e
m i n i m u m t h i c k n e s s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 5 m m .
2.12.4.2 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f d e c k p l a t i n g o f s h o r t a n d
l o n g bridges, forecastle a n d p o o p , l o n g forecastle a n d
poop, short a n dl o n g deckhouses shall be determined
according t o 2.6.4.1.1 a n d 2.6.4.1.2 using t h e design
loads stated i n 2.12.3.1.2. F o r s h o r t bridges, forecastle,
p o o p a n d s h o r t d e c k h o u s e s , Jc = 0 , 7 .
F o r l o n g bridge, l o n g forecastle a n dp o o p outside
t h e e n d p o r t i o n s , Jc i s d e t e r m i n e d a s f o r t h e s t r e n g t h
deck according t o 2.6.4.1.2; a t sections i n w a y o f e n d
b u l k h e a d s Jc s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y l i n e a r i n t e r
polation.
T h e thickness o f deck plating o f l o n g bridges,
l o n g forecastle a n dp o o p , l o n g deckhouses shall sa
tisfy t h e requirements o f 2.6.4.1.5 f o rt h e upper deck
b e t w e e n t h e side a n d t h e line o f large o p e n i n g s .
a
for superstructure a n d deckhouse decks o f other

tiers
Smin
= (4+ 0,01L)Vrj
(2.12.4.2-3)
w h e r e | i s o b t a i n e d f r o m 1.1.4.3.

F o r ships o f unrestricted service a n d ships o f re
stricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R l , t h e reduction o f
m i n i m a l thickness, b u t n o t m o r e t h a n 1 0 p e rcent, is
p e r m i t t e d i n p r o p o r t i o n t o t h e r a t i o o f a d o p t e d spa
cing t o standard spacing, w h e r e t h e adopted spacing
is less t h a n t h e s t a n d a r d o n e ( r e f e r t o 1.1.3). I n a n y
case, t h e m i n i m u m t h i c k n e s s m a y b e r e d u c e d
t o 4 m m f o r ships o f l e n g t h 2 > > 5 0 m a n d t o 3 m m
for ships o f l e n g t h L < 2 0 m , subject t o agreement
w i t h the Register.
2.12.4.3 T h e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e e n d b u l k h e a d s
o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s , sides a n d e n d b u l k h e a d s o f d e c k
h o u s e s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d
by F o r m u l a (1.6.4.4) taking:
m = 15,8;
= 0,6;
As = 0 ;
p = as defined i n 2.12.3.2.
T h e thickness o f side p l a t i n g o f deckhouses m a y
b e n o t less t h a n t h a t o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s a s s t a t e d
in 2.12.4.1, provided they are arranged similarly over
the ship's length a n d depth.
T h e thickness o f b o t t o m plates o f e n d bulkheads
i n superstructures (deckhouses) o f 1st tier shall be
increased b y 1 m m as compared w i t h t h e design
t h i c k n e s s . T h e w i d t h o f b o t t o m p l a t e s h a l l b e n o t less
than 0,5 m m .
I f the deckhouse front extends i n a fair convex f o r m
b e y o n d t h e i n t e r s e c t i o n w i t h t h e d e c k h o u s e sides, t h e
t h i c k n e s s o f p l a t i n g m a y b e t a k e n 0 , 5 m m less as c o m
pared w i t h the design value.
2.12.4.4 I n a n y c a s e , t h e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s s ^ m ,
i n m m , o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e e n d b u l k h e a d s , sides a n d
e n d b u l k h e a d s o f d e c k h o u s e s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
smin
for t h e lowest tier

= (5 + 0,01L)Vrj ;
(2.12.4.4-1)
P a r t II. H u l l
123
for o t h e r tiers
*mi
= (4+ 0,01L)Vrj
(2.12.4.4-2)
w h e r e | i s o b t a i n e d f r o m 1.1.4.3.

I n a n y case, t h e m i n i m u m t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 5 m m f o r ships o f l e n g t h 2 . ^ 5 0 m . T h e m i n i m u m
t h i c k n e s s m a y b e r e d u c e d to 4 m m f o r s h i p s o f l e n g t h
L < 2 0 m a n d to 3 m m f o r s h i p s o f l e n g t h L < 2 0 m ,
subject t o a n agreement w i t h the Register. R e d u c t i o n o f the
m i n i m u m thickness is n o t permitted f o r fronts o f bridge and
unprotected front o f p o o p i n ships o f l e n g t h 2 . ^ 2 0 m .
2.12.4.5 F r a m i n g o f t h e s i d e s , d e c k s a n d e n d
bulk-heads o f t h e forecastle, p o o p a n dbridge, quar
ter deck a n d deckhouse shall satisfy t h e f o l l o w i n g
requirements:
.1 side f r a m i n g o f t h e superstructure shall c o m p l y
w i t h t h e requirements f o r side f r a m i n g i n ' t w e e n deck
space as specified i n 2.5.4.2 t o 2.5.4.5 u s i n g t h e design
loads g i v e n i n 2 . 1 2 . 3 . 1 . 1 . F o r longitudinals a n d side
s t r i n g e r s o f s h o r t b r i d g e , f o r e c a s t l e a n d p o o p , Jc = 0 , 6 5 ;
F o r longitudinals a n d side stringers o f l o n g bridge,
l o n g f o r e c a s t l e a n d p o o p o u t s i d e t h e e n d p o r t i o n s , Jc i s
determined according t o 2.5.4.3 a n d 2.5.4.4; at sections
i n w a y o f t h e e n d b u l k h e a d s Jc = 0 , 6 5 ; w i t h i n t h e e n d
p o r t i o n s Jc s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y U n e a r i n t e r p o l a
tion;
.2 u n d e r d e c k f r a m i n g o f t h e s u p e r s t r u c t u r e a n d
deckhouse shall satisfy t h e requirements o f 2.6.4.2
t o 2.6.4.9 using t h e design loads stated i n2.12.3.1.2.
F o r longitudinals a n d deck girders o f short bridge,
f o r e c a s t l e a n d p o o p , Jc = 0 , 6 5 .
F o r longitudinals a n d deck girders o f l o n g bridge,
l o n g f o r e c a s t l e a n d p o o p o u t s i d e t h e e n d p o r t i o n s , Jc i s
determined i n accordance w i t h 2.6.4.2 a n d 2.6.4.4; at
s e c t i o n s i n w a y o f t h e e n d b u l k h e a d s Jc = 0 , 6 5 ; w i t h i n
t h e e n d p o r t i o n s Jc s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y U n e a r i n
terpolation;
.3 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f v e r t i c a l s t i f f e n e r s o f t h e
e n d b u l k h e a d s o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s , d e c k h o u s e sides
a n d e n d b u l k h e a d s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e
= 0,6;
= 1;
m = 12, i ft h e l o w e r e n d o f t h e stiffener is at
tached t o the deck b y a bracket;
m = 10, i f the l o w e r e n d o fthe stiffener is w e l d e d
t o t h e deck;
m = 8, i f t h e l o w e r e n d o f t h e stiffener is sniped.
T h e section m o d u l u s o f stiffeners o f deckhouse
sides n e e d n o t b e g r e a t e r t h a n t h a t o f f r a m e s o f s u
perstructures as stated i n 2.12.4.5.1, w h e r e arranged
similarly over ship's length a n d depth.
2.12.4.6 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f m e m b e r s o f b u l k h e a d s
and partial bulkheads inside the superstructures a n d
a
deckhouses shall satisfy t h e requirements o f 2.7.4.5,

unless stated otherwise.
2.12.5.1 T h e u p p e r d e c k a r e a s s i t u a t e d u n d e r t h e
long bridge, l o n g forecastle a n d p o o p outside t h e e n d
p o r t i o n s shall satisfy t h e requirements o f 2.6 f o r t h e
second deck. R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e upper deck areas
situated under the ends o f l o n g bridge, l o n g forecastle
and p o o p are determined b y Unear interpolation be
tween t h e requirements for t h e upper deck a n d those
for t h e second deck.
2.12.5.2 I n w a y o f t h e e n d b u l k h e a d s t h e f o l
lowing requirements shall be compUed with:
.1 w h e r e t h e s u p e r s t r u c t u r e e n d b u l k h e a d i s n o t
i n Une w i t h t h e transverse b u l k h e a d o f the hull, par
t i a l b u l k h e a d s o r p i l l a r s s h a l l b e fitted i n spaces b e l o w
the e n d bulkhead, o rframes a n d b e a m knees shall be
strengthened;
.2 w h e r e t h e e n d b u l k h e a d o f l o n g d e c k h o u s e i s
n o t i n Une w i t h t h e transverse bulkhead below, short
deck girders shall be fitted i n Une w i t h deckhouse
sides u n d e r t h e h o u s e d e c k s o a s t o e x t e n d f u r t h e r f o r
t h r e e f r a m e spaces f o r w a r d a n d a f t o f t h e d e c k h o u s e
end bulkhead;
.3 a t t h e s e c t i o n , w h e r e t h e e n d b u l k h e a d s o f
superstructures a n ddeckhouses abut o n t h e undeck
l o n g i t u d i n a l s t r u c t u r e s a n d t h e sides o f d e c k h o u s e s
o n t h e transverse underdeck structures fitted b e l o w
(bulkheads, partial bulkheads, undeck girders, deck
transverses, etc.), t h e w e b s o f these u n d e r d e c k struc
tures shall be stiffened w i t h brackets.
2.12.5.3 T h e s t r u c t u r e a t t h e e n d s o f s u p e r
structures shall satisfy t h e f o l l o w i n g requirements:
.1 a t t h e ends o f bridge, l o n g forecastle a n d p o o p
located w i t h i n 0,62. m i d s h i p region o f a ship w i t h a
l e n g t h 2 . ^ 6 0 m t h e side p l a t i n g s h a l l b e e x t e n d e d
beyond the endbulkhead w i t h s m o o t h tapering t o the
s h i p ' s s i d e o n a l e n g t h d\, i n m , ( F i g . 2 . 1 2 . 5 . 3 ) , d e
rfi > + h).
(2.12.5.3.1)
O n a g r e e m e n t w i t h t h e R e g i s t e r , t h e v a l u e o f d\
m a y be reduced provided that t h e thickness o f bot
t o m s t r a k e o f t h e s u p e r s t r u c t u r e side p l a t i n g , sheer
strake a n d deck stringer plate w i t h i n t h e region
s h o w n i n F i g . 2.12.5.3 is increased;
.2 i f t h e e n d o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e ( f o r e c a s t l e , p o o p ) i s
located w i t h i n 0,12. f r o m t h e fore o r after perpendi
cular, as w e l l as i n ships o f l e n g t h L < 6 5 m ,
t h e v a l u e o f d\ i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2 . 1 2 . 5 . 3 m a y b e
reduced b y half. I f the e n d o f a superstructure is l o
cated outside t h eabove-mentioned regions a n d out
s i d e 0 , 6 2 . a m i d s h i p s , t h e v a l u e o f d\ s h a l l b e
determined b y Unear interpolation;
.3 t h e b l u n t e d e n d s o f p r o j e c t i n g s i d e p l a t e s s h a l l
be m a c h i n e d flush w i t h t h e deck.
124
Rules for the Classification
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
0 , 5 < < / = 0,65<//<0,75/

2
F i g . 2.12.5.3
T h e c u r v e d edge o f side p l a t i n g s h a l l b e stiffened

b y flat b a r c a r r i e d d o w n f o r 5 0 m m f r o m t h e e d g e .
T h e ends o f that b a r shall b e sniped.
O p e n i n g s i n side p l a t i n g p r o j e c t i n g b e y o n d t h e
ends o f a superstructure are n o r m a l l y n o t permitted.
T h e projecting plates shall b e attached t o the b u l w a r k
b y means o f flexible joints;
.4 a t t h e e n d s o f s h o r t b r i d g e n o t e x t e n d i n g f r o m
side t o side o f ship t h e a t t a c h m e n t o f t h e side t o t h e
deck shall be made similarly t o t h e attachment re
q u i r e d b y 2.12.5.4 f o r deckhouses, o t h e r w i s e gussets
shall be used t o provide s m o o t h transition f r o m t h e
side t o a s h o r t deck girder s t r e n g t h e n i n g t h e deck
u n d e r t h a t side w i t h s i m u l t a n e o u s s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f
the deck stringer plate w i t h i n t h e region s h o w n
i n F i g . 2.12.5.3.
2.12.5.4 A t t a c h m e n t o f s i d e s o f t h e d e c k h o u s e t o
the e n d bulkhead arranged within 0,6L amidships o f
a ship w i t h a length L ^ 65 m shall be performed b y
r o u n d i n g w i t h a r a d i u s r, i n m , d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formula
r = ^ ( 1 , 5 + 0 , 1 / ^ 1,4
(2.12.5.4)
where b = breadth of the deckhouse in w a y of the e n d bulkhead, in m .
2.12.5.5 R e c t a n g u l a r o p e n i n g s i n o u t e r s i d e s a n d
top plating o f l o n g deckhouses shall have their cor
ners well rounded a n d shall b e substantially framed.
D o o r o p e n i n g s i n t h e sides o f a d e c k h o u s e , a r r a n g e d
w i t h i n 0 , 6 L amidships, shall be additionally reinforced
w i t h t h i c k e n e d plates as s h o w n i n F i g . 2 . 1 2 . 5 . 5 .
Rectangular openings are not permitted f o ra length n o t
l e s s t h a n t h e h e i g h t o f t h e d e c k h o u s e c o u n t e d from t h e
end bulkhead, i f the deckhouse i ssituated o n the strength
deck.
I f d o o r o p e n i n g s i n sides a r e a r r a n g e d o u t s i d e t h e
midship region o r i f t h e deckhouse is short, t h e
thickened plates m a y b e fitted o n l y b e l o w t h e o p e n i n g
as s h o w n i n F i g . 2.12.5.5.
F i g . 2.12.5.5:
1 d e c k h o u s e t o p ; 2 d e c k h o u s e side;
3 thickened plate; 4 strength deck
W h e r e t h e distance between t h e expansion o r

s l i d i n g j o i n t s i s less t h a n a t r i p l e h e i g h t o f t h e d e c k
house, i tis sufficient t o provide the r o u n d i n g o f t h e
c o r n e r s o f o p e n i n g s . O p e n i n g s f o r side scuttles s h a l l
h a v e t h e upper a n d l o w e r edges reinforced w i t h
h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners.
2.12.5.6 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r q u a r t e r d e c k i n s h i p s
greater t h a n 9 0m i n l e n g t h a r e subject t o special
consideration b y the Register. T h estructures i n w a y
o f t h e break a t connection o f t h e upper deck t o
quarter deck i n ships o f9 0 m a n d u n d e r shall satisfy
.1 t h e u p p e r deck p l a t i n g i n w a y o f t h e b r e a k
shall e x t e n d abaft t h e b r e a k f o r three f r a m e spaces i n
ships o f 60 m i n length a n d above, a n d f o r t w o frame
spaces i n ships less t h a n 6 0 m i n l e n g t h . T h e u p p e r
d e c k p l a t i n g o f s h i p s less t h a n 4 0 m i n l e n g t h n e e d
n o t extend abaft t h e break;
.2 t h e u p p e r d e c k s t r i n g e r p l a t e s h a l l e x t e n d a b a f t
t h e steel p l a t i n g f o r t h r e e f r a m e spaces, w h e r e
L ^ 6 0 m , a n d f o r t w o f r a m e spaces, w h e r e L < 6 0 m .
T h e stringer plate so arranged shall be tapered
f r o m its full w i d t h t o a w i d t h equal t o t h edepth o f
frame t o w h i c h i tis welded;
.3 t h e s t r i n g e r p l a t e o f q u a r t e r d e c k s h a l l e x t e n d
forward i n thef o r m o f a bracket gradually tapered t o
ship's side o n a l e n g t h o f t h r e e f r a m e spaces. T h e
quarter deck stringer plate projecting beyond t h e
b r e a k shall b e adequately stiffened a n d i t s free edge
s h a l l h a v e a f a c e p l a t e o r flange;
.4 t h e s h e e r s t r a k e o f q u a r t e r d e c k s h a l l e x t e n d
f o r w a r d o fthe deck stringer plate projecting b e y o n d
t h e b r e a k b u l k h e a d f o r a t l e a s t 1,5 t i m e s t h e h e i g h t o f
break a n d shall be s m o o t h l y tapered into the upper
P a r t II. H u l l
125
edge o f ship's side sheerstrake. F o r o t h e r s t r u c t u r a l

requirements, refer t o 2.12.5.3;
.5 d i a p h r a g m p l a t e s s p a c e d n o t m o r e t h a n 1,5 m
apart shall be fitted o v e r t h e ship's b r e a d t h between
the overlapping decks i n w a y o f t h e break. T h e
t h i c k n e s s o f d i a p h r a g m s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e
thickness o f the break bulkhead plating.
T h e d i a p h r a g m plates shall be strengthened b y
vertical stiffeners.
Vertical stiffeners w i t h effective flange shall have
a m o m e n t o f i n e r t i a n o t less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d
by F o r m u l a (1.6.5.6-1).
Continuous welds shall be used t o attach the hori z o n t a l edges o f d i a p h r a g m plates t o t h e decks, a n d t h e
v e r t i c a l edges t o b r e a k b u l k h e a d o n o n e side, a n d o n
t h e o t h e r side t o a n e x t r a s u p p o r t i n g b u l k h e a d m a d e o f
continuous plate welded t o t h e decks over t h e ship
breadth. T h e plate thickness o f that bulkhead shall be
n o t less t h a n t h e t h i c k n e s s o f b r e a k b u l k h e a d p l a t i n g
and m a yhave openings between diaphragms;
.6 w h e r e a s u p p o r t i n g b u l k h e a d is fitted, t h e
d i a p h r a g m plates shall be stiffened w i t h brackets
fitted t o t h e i r e n d s ( F i g . 2 . 1 2 . 5 . 6 . 6 ) ;
Z .
.8 s t r e n g t h e n i n g i n case w h e r e t h e b r e a k b u l k head is located w i t h i n 0,251, f r o m the after perpendicular shall comply w i t h thefollowing requirements:
i n ships greater t h a n 6 0 m i n length, t h e supp o r t i n g b u l k h e a d fitted o v e r t h e b r e a d t h t h e s h i p m a y
be o m i t t e d . T h e free edges o f d i a p h r a g m plates shall,
i n t h i s case, b e stiffened w i t h face plates o r flanges o f
a w i d t h e q u a l t o a t least t e n thicknesses o f t h e diap h r a g m plate;
i n ships o f 6 0 m i n l e n g t h a n d b e l o w , t h e u p p e r
deck plating need n o textend afto fthe break over t h e
ship breadth, however, t h e upper deck stringer a n d
the raised quarter deck stringer a n d sheerstrake shall
be extended f o r w a r d a n d a f t as p r o v i d e d i n 2.12.5.6.3
a n d 2.12.5.6.4.
2.12.5.7 T h e u s e o f a l u m i n i u m a l l o y s f o r t h e
construction o f deckhouses is permitted. Decks o f
a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces s i t u a t e d a b o v e t h e
m a c h i n e r y a n d c a r g o spaces s h a l l b e m a d e o f steel.
T h e scantUngs o f a l u m i n i u m deckhouses shall be
d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.6. T h e m i n i m u m scantUngs s h a l l be t h e s a m e as those r e q u i r e d f o r steel
deckhouses.
T h e degree t o w h i c h t h e deckhouse o f a l u m i n i u m
alloys contributes t o longitudinalbending o fthe hull
a n d stresses i n ship's h u l l a n d d e c k h o u s e s h a l l b e
determined according t o the procedure approved by
the Register.
2.13 M A C H I N E R Y
t = 4
CASINGS
8
F i g . 2.12.5.6.6:
s u p p o r t i n g b u l k h e a d ; 2,6 b r a c k e t s ; 3 q u a r t e r d e c k ;
( diaphragm; 5 break bulkhead; 7 upper deck;
8 stiffener i n line w i t h bracket
.7 w h e r e a r a i s e d q u a r t e r d e c k i s a d j o i n i n g t h e
bridge, i t shall extend into that superstructure f o r t w o
f r a m e spaces b e y o n d t h e b r e a k , t h e e x t e n s i o n being,
i n a n y case, n o t less t h a n t h e e l e v a t i o n o f s u p e r structure above t h e quarter deck.
T h e quarter deck stringer plate shall extend forw a r d f o r t w o f r a m e spaces w i t h t h e w i d t h g r a d u a l l y
reduced as r e q u i r e d b y 2.12.5.6.2.
Strengthening o fthe overlapping decks i n w a y o f
break shall c o m p l y w i t h requirements o f 2.12.5.6.5
a n d 2.12.5.6.6 depending o n t h e location o fthe break
along t h e length o f t h e ship.
T h e s u p e r s t r u c t u r e side plates e x t e n d i n g a f t o f
the superstructure shall be smoothly tapered into the
s h e e r s t r a k e o n a l e n g t h o f a t l e a s t 1,5 t i m e s t h e h e i g h t
o f break (refer also t o 2.12.5.3.1);
2.13.1 G e n e r a l .
2.13.1.1 O p e n i n g s i n d e c k s a n d p l a t f o r m s o v e r
engine r o o m s shall be protected b y s t r o n g casings.
T h e casings m a y b e o m i t t e d o n l y i n cases w h e r e
t h e space o n t h e deck o r p l a t f o r m is a p a r t o f t h e
engine r o o m .
2.13.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
2.13.2.1 W h e r e t h e r e a r e l a r g e o p e n i n g s i n t h e
deck i n w a y o f engine r o o m , additional pillars a n d
d e c k t r a n s v e r s e s s h a l l b e fitted f o r s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f
the deck i n w a yo fm a c h i n e r y casing.
2.13.2.2 F o r t h e l o w e r s t r a k e o f t h e c a s i n g l o n g itudinal w a l l plating, adjoining the strength deck w i t h i n
the 0 , 6 1 , m i d s h i p r e g i o n o f ships w i t h a length Z , > 6 5 m
o f steel grade a n d y i e l d stress s h a l l b e t h e s a m e as f o r t h e
strength deck plating i n this region.
2.13.2.3 W h e r e t h e o p e n i n g f o r m a c h i n e r y c a s i n g
is a r r a n g e d i n t h e s t r e n g t h deck, t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f 2.6.5.1 regarding t h e design o f corners a n d c o m pensation f o ropenings shall be compUed with.
2.13.3 S c a n t l i n g s o f m a c h i n e r y c a s i n g s t r u c t u r e s .
2.13.3.1 T h e p a r t o f m a c h i n e r y c a s i n g l o c a t e d
i n s i d e t h e enclosed spaces ( ' t w e e n d e c k spaces, fore-
126
Rules
castle, p o o p , bridge, d e c k h o u s e ) shall c o m p l y w i t h

the requirements o f 2.7.4.5 f o r p a r t i a l bulkheads.
T h e spacing o f stiffeners shall n o t exceed 0,9m .
T h e thickness o fplating o fthe part o f machinery
casing located inside t h e poop, bridge o r deckhouse
m a y b e 0 , 5 m m less t h a n specified.
below t h e bulkhead deck shall c o m p l y w i t h the re
q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.7.2.3, 2.7.4.1 t o 2.7.4.3 f o r w a t e r t i g h t
bulkheads where i t is included i n subdivision calcu
l a t i o n as w a t e r t i g h t c o n s t r u c t i o n .
above weather deck shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e require
ments o f 2.12 f o r deckhouses situated i n the same
region o f t h e ship. I n calculating t h e design loads
by F o r m u l a (2.12.3.2) c shall be taken equal t o 1.
2
2.14 B U L W A R K S
2.14.1 G e n e r a l .
Bulwarks o f strong construction shall be provided
i n places specified i n 8.6, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t , A r
rangements a n d Outfit".
The construction o f bulwarks i n the midship re
g i o n o f ships o f 65 m a n d above shall be such t h a t t h e
b u l w a r k doesn't contribute t o longitudinal bending
of the hull.
2.14.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
2.14.2.1 T h e h e i g h t o f t h e b u l w a r k a s m e a s u r e d
f r o m t h e upper edge o ft h e deck p l a t i n g o r f r o m t h a t
o f p l a n k i n g , i f a n y , t o t h e upper edge o f t h e rail
section shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 8.6.2,
Part I I I"Equipment, Arrangements and Outfit".
2.14.2.2 T h e b u l w a r k p l a t i n g w i t h i n t h e 0 , 6 2 .
m i d s h i p r e g i o n o f ships o f 6 5 m a n d above shall n o t
be w e l d e d t o t h e u p p e r edge o f sheerstrake. O u t s i d e
t h e a b o v e - m e n t i o n e d r e g i o n a s w e l l a s i n s h i p s less
than 65 m i n length, the openings c u t i n bulwarks
shall be so designed as t o ensure a s m o o t h t r a n s i t i o n
( w i t h a r a d i u s n o t less t h a n 1 0 0 m m ) f r o m t h e b u l
w a r k plate t o t h e sheerstrake.
W i t h i n 0,072. f r o m t h e fore perpendicular t h e
welding o f b u l w a r k plating t o t h e sheerstrake is ne
cessary.
2.14.2.3 T h e b u l w a r k s h a l l b e s u p p o r t e d b y s t a y s
s p a c e d n o t m o r e t h a n 1,8 m a p a r t . I n t h e r e g i o n o f
uprights f o r timber deck cargo, fastening t o bul
w a r k s , as w e l l as a t t h e f o r e e n d w i t h i n 0,072. f r o m
the fore perpendicular, t h e spacing o f stays shall be
n o t m o r e t h a n 1,2 m . I n t h e s h i p s w i t h l a r g e f l a r e o f
sides a n d i n ships w i t h m i n i m u m assigned f r e e b o a r d ,
stays m a y be r e q u i r e d t o be fitted a t every f r a m e
w i t h i n t h e region considered.
2.14.2.4 T h e s t a y s s h a l l b e f i t t e d i n l i n e w i t h d e c k
beams, brackets a n d other structures a n d shall be wel
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
ded t o t h e rail section, b u l w a r k plate a n d deck. T h e

a t t a c h m e n t o f stays t o b u l w a r k shall be ensured o n a
l e n g t h n o t less t h a n h a l f t h e h e i g h t o f t h e b u l w a r k .
I n w e l d i n g t h e stays t o t h e deck, holes sufficient i n
size t o a l l o w f r e e p a s s a g e o f w a t e r t o t h e s c u p p e r s s h a l l
be p r o v i d e d i n t h e stays. T h e w e l d e d c o n n e c t i o n o f t h e
b e a m (bracket) t o deck plating u n d e r t h e stay shall
n o t be w e a k e r t h a n t h e a t t a c h m e n t o f stay t o deck.
D i r e c t l y u n d e r t h e l o w e r ends o f stays n o cut-outs
i n t h e deck beams a n d n o gaps between frame ends
and deck are permitted.
T h e dimensions o f lightening holes i n stays shall
n o t exceed h a l f the stay w i d t h i n a n y section o f t h e stay.
T h e free edges o f stays s h a l l be stiffened w i t h face
plates o r flanges.
I n general, t h e flanges (face plates) o f stays shall
n o t be welded t o deck plating a n d rail section.
T h e flanges (face plates) o n t h e o u t e r edge o f t h e
stay shall n o t be welded t o h o r i z o n t a l stiffener
(flange) o f l o w e r edge o f t h e b u l w a r k i n w a y o f
continuous cut-out.
2.14.2.5 T h e r a i l s e c t i o n s h a l l h a v e a f l a n g e ( f a c e
plate) o r shall be o f bulb profile.
T h e l o w e r edge o f b u l w a r k shall be stiffened w i t h
h o r i z o n t a l stiffener o r flange i n w a y o f continuous
cut-out.
B u l w a r k s shall be adequately strengthened i n w a y o f
m o o r i n g pipes, fairleads a n d eyeplates f o r cargo gear.
2.14.2.6 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e d e s i g n o f f r e e i n g
p o r t s i n b u l w a r k s a r e g i v e n i n 1.1.6.7.
2.14.3 L o a d s o n b u l w a r k s .
T h e external pressure determined b y t h e F o r
m u l a (1.3.2.2-2) is t h e design pressure p , i n k P a ,
acting o n t h e b u l w a r k . T h e design pressure shall be
t a k e n n o t less t h a n
. = 0 , 0 2 2 . + 1 4 ,
(2.14.3)
W h e r e 2. > 300 m 2. shall be taken equal t o 300 m .
F o r ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n t h e
v a l u e o f Pmia m a y b e r e d u c e d b y m u l t i p l y i n g b y t h e
2.14.4 S c a n t l i n g s o f b u l w a r k s t r u c t u r e s .
2.14.4.1 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e b u l w a r k p l a t i n g
s = 0,0652. + 1,75 f o r 2 . < 6 0 m a n d
s = 0,0252. + 4 , 0 f o r2. > 6 0 m ,
(2.14.4.1)
r
b u t n o t less t h a n 3 , 0 , n o r g r e a t e r t h a n 8 , 5 m m .
T h e thickness o f b u l w a r k plating o f a super
structure located b e y o n d / o ft h e ship's l e n g t h f r o m
the fore perpendicular, as w e l l as that o f b u l w a r k
plating o f2 n d tier deckhouses o r superstructures m a y
be reduced b y 1 m m .
l
P a r t II. H u l l
127
F o r 3 r d a n d above tiers o f t h e deckhouses t h e

thickness o f t h e b u l w a r k p l a t i n g need n o t exceed t h e
t h i c k n e s s r e q u i r e d f o r t h e p l a t i n g o f sides o f 3 r d t i e r
deckhouse.
2.14.4.2 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f b u l w a r k s t a y
a d j o i n i n g t h e d e c k p l a t i n g s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e
m = 2;
= 0,65.
W h e r e thebulwarks arecutt o f o r m a gangway o r
provision is made f o r expansion joints, t h e section
m o d u l u s o f stay a t t h e ends o f t h e openings o r ex

p a n s i o n j o i n t s shall be increased b y 2 5 p e r cent.
T h e w i d t h o f stay a t t h e upper e n d shall be equal
to that o f t h e rail section.
2.14.4.3 W h e r e t h e d e c k c a r g o e f f e c t o n t h e b u l
w a r k is contemplated, t h e scantUngs o f t h e b u l w a r k
stays shall be d e t e r m i n e d b y strength c a l c u l a t i o n i n
v o l v i n g effect o f t h e said cargo, w i t h regard f o r heel
o f t h e ship determined b y F o r m u l a (1.3.3.1-5) a n d
acceleration i n the horizontal-transverse direction,
determined b y F o r m u l a e (1.3.3.1-2); t h e permissible
stress f a c t o r i s d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 2.14.4.2.
3 REQUIREMENTS F O RSTRUCTURES OF SHIPS OF SPECIAL DESIGN

3.1 S H I P S W I T H L A R G E D E C K
OPENINGS
3.1.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s C h a p t e r a r e a d
ditional t o those o f Sections 1 a n d 2.
3.1.1.2 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r d e c k s t r u c t u r e , e x
clusive o f those f o r cantilever beams, apply t o ships
w i t h single, t w i n a n d triple cargo h a t c h w a y s w h i c h
are considered t o f o r m a large deck opening meeting
the following conditions:
b/B^0,7;
l/l >0,7.
T h e requirements o f this Chapter shall be appUcable t h r o u g h o u t t h e entire cargo h a t c h region,
including t h e engine r o o m , provided i t is located be
tween t h e cargo holds.
3.1.1.3 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r c o n t a i n e r s e c u r i n g
arrangements a n d h u l l structures, w h i c h take u p
forces exerted b y t h e said arrangements, apply t o
c o n t a i n e r ships.
3.1.1.4 T h e c a n t i l e v e r b e a m i s a s h o r t d e e p h a l f
b e a m f o r w h i c h t h e s u p p o r t i n g effect o f t h e side h a t c h
c o a m i n g is disregarded i n t h e strength a n d buckUng
strength calculation t o be m a d e f o r deck grillage i n
accordance w i t h 2.6.4.4 a n d 2.6.4.9 respectively.
b = b r e a d t h o f deck o p e n i n g determined as t h e
distance b e t w e e n t h e o u t e r l o n g i t u d i n a l edges o f
h a t c h w a y o p e n i n g s a t ship's sides, i n m ;
/ = length o fhatchway opening, i n m ;
l = distance between centres o f transverse deck
strips a t each e n d o f opening, i n m ;
= distance b e t w e e n trasverse edges o f a d j o i n i n g
openings, i n m ;
n = total n u m b e r o f 20-ft containers carried b y
the ship.
m
3.1.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
3.1.2.1 F o r s h i p s w i t h a l e n g t h
80 m longitudinal
framing system is provided f o rthe deck a n d b o t t o m .
3.1.2.2 U p p e r d e c k a n d s i d e l o n g i t u d i n a l s s h a l l b e
c o n t i n u o u s w i t h i n t h e r e g i o n stated i n 3.1.1.2.
3.1.2.3 E n d s o f c a r g o h a t c h c o n t i n u o u s s i d e
c o a m i n g s s h a l l b e a t t a c h e d a s r e q u i r e d b y 1.7
a n d 2.6.2. I t is n o t r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t c o n t i n u o u s side
coamings be attached t o t h e front bulkhead o f t h ea f t
superstructure a n d t h e a f t b u l k h e a d o ft h e forecastle.
3.1.2.4 A b r u p t c h a n g e s o f c r o s s s e c t i o n a n d s h a p e
o f m e m b e r s referred t o i n 3.1.2.2 o v e r t h e l e n g t h o f t h e
ship is generaUy n o t permitted. W h e r e such changes are
necessary, arrangements shaU be such as t o m i n i m i z e
t h e c r e a t i o n o f stress c o n c e n t r a t i o n a n d a t t e n t i o n s h a U
be p a i d t o p r o v i s i o n o f b u c k h n g strength.
3.1.2.5 T h e a t t a c h m e n t o f t h e f o r w a r d e n d o f t h e
longitudinal strip t o the deck where there is a cargo
h a t c h single o p e n i n g f o r w a r d o f t h e a t t a c h m e n t shall
be specially considered b y t h e Register.
3.1.2.6 I t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t t r a n s v e r s e a n d
l o n g i t u d i n a l deck strips h a v e a box-shaped crosssection.
3.1.2.7 T r a n s v e r s e d e c k s t r i p s s h a l l b e e f f i c i e n t l y
attached t o theunderdeck framing members a n d w e b
frames i n Unew i t h w h i c h they are fitted. W h e r e t h e
plating o f t h e deck strips is arranged i n Une w i t h t h e
u p p e r flanges o f c o n t i n u o u s h a t c h side c o a m i n g s , t h e
a t t a c h m e n t o f d e c k strips t o t h e d e c k a n d side shell
shall be specially considered b y t h e Register.
3.1.2.8 O p e n i n g s i n t h e d e c k p l a t i n g i n i m m e d i a t e
p r o x i m i t y t o t h e attachments o f transverse a n d
l o n g i t u d i n a l deck strips a r e n o t permitted.
3.1.2.9 L a r g e d e c k o p e n i n g s :
.1 adjacent c o r n e r s o f h a t c h o p e n i n g s i n t h e u p p e r
deck arranged i n o n e Une shall be rounded w i t h
a r a d i u s r , i n m , ( F i g . 3 . 1 . 2 . 9 ) n o t less t h a n
128
Ships
(3.1.2.9.1)
r = kb
w h e r e k = 0 , 0 2 5 w h e n c\b ^ 0 , 0 4 ;
= 0 , 0 5 0 w h e n c/b ^ 0 , 2 ; t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e v a l u e s o f s h a l l b e
obtained b ylinear interpolation.
I n w a y o f l o n g i t u d i n a l deck strips t h e value

o f r m a y b e reduced b y 4 0 per cent.
Given below arem i n i m u m radii o f rounding o f
opening corners:
r \ = 300 m m i n w a y o f deck stringer plate;
^min 2 5 0 m m i n w a y o f l o n g i t u d i n a l d e c k s t r i p s .
T h i c k e n e d insert plates a r e required a t h a t c h
corners (refer t o F i g . 3.1.2.9);
.2 i n w a y o f conjugations o f o p e n a n d enclosed
parts o f t h e h u l l (adjacent t o t h e engine r o o m ,
b o w , etc.) t h e c o r n e r r a d i u s o f h a t c h o p e n i n g s s h a l l
m n
(3.1.2.9.2)
r = Ofilb ;
.3 h a t c h c o r n e r s i n t h e areas w h e r e c a r g o h a t c h
ways arranged abreast change i n n u m b e r shall be
specially considered b y the Register;
.4 f o r general r e q u i r e m e n t s r e g a r d i n g
deck
openings, refer t o 2.6.5.1.
F i g . 3.1.2.10
Stiffening o f cantilever beams
S i m i l a r increase i n t h e p l a t i n g thickness a n d
s t i f f e n i n g i n w a y o f c o n t a i n e r c o r n e r fitting p o c k e t s
and lashing pots shall be provided i n deck structure.
3.1.3 D e s i g n loads.
3.1.3.1 T h e design still w a t e r bending m o m e n t
s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.4.3.
3.1.3.2 T h e vertical w a v e bending m o m e n t shall
b e d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.4.4.
3.1.3.3 T h e design h o r i z o n t a l w a v e b e n d i n g m o
m e n t M, i n k N / m , is determined b y the f o r m u l a
h
250k c BL C a lO~
h
(3.1.3.3)
w h e r e k = ce(d/b + 0 , 3 ) ;
ce = l - 4 d / L ;
for c , refer t o 1.3.4.1;
h
= 0,5(1-cos-^-);
x = distance between t h e considered section a n d t h e after

perpendicular, i n m .
3.1.3.4 T h e design c o m p o n e n t s o f a w a v e torque,

i n k N / m , are determined b y the f o r m u l a e :
3
M
M
M
= 63kic BL\'W- ;
= 63k c BL C ai '10- ;
= l26k c BL C a> ;lO-
tWi
tW2
t2
tWj
Side
w h e r e k = 2ce% [l
x
+ 3,6(C
W L
(3.1.3.4-1)
(3.1.3.4-2)
(3.1.3.4-3)
-0,1)]B/L;
F i g . 3.1.2.9
a = l-Sd/L;
Xo= l-4C B/L;
C
= water plane area coefficient for s u m m e r load waterline;
f o r cei, r e f e r t o 3 . 1 . 3 . 3 ;
e = v e r t i c a l d i s t a n c e f r o m t h e t o r q u e c e n t r e t o a p o i n t a t 0,6d
above t h e base line; t h etorque centre p o s i t i o n shall b e
determined i naccordance w i t h the procedure approved
by the Register;
2nx
oc = 0 , 5 ( 1 c o s
);
x
3.1.2.10 T h e cantilever beams shall be fitted i n

line w i t h w e b frames. T h e i r c o n n e c t i o n shall satisfy
t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.7.2.3.
T h e c a n t i l e v e r b e a m s s h a l l b e fitted w i t h m i n i
m u m stiffeners as s h o w n i n F i g . 3.1.2.10.
3.1.2.11 Stiffeners, brackets o r deep m e m b e r s
s h a l l b e fitted u n d e r t h e v e r t i c a l g u i d e s o r c o r n e r
fittings
o f containers i ndouble b o t t o m o f container
ships. T h e i n n e r b o t t o m p l a t i n g i n these locations
shall be increased i n thickness o r t h ecorner
fitting
sockets shall b e w e l d e d therein.
T h e above also applies t o lashing pots.
WL
fi
3nx
L
2nx
L
f o r x , refer t o 3.1.3.3.
3.1.3.5 F o r container ships, t h e design statical

torque M i n k N / m , is determined b y the f o r m u l a
tS9
P a r t II. H u l l
t s
129
SOyJnB
CT
(3.1.3.5)
n o r m a l stresses, i n M P a , i n considered section d u e t o

design horizontal wave bending moment, determined b y
the formula
"
w h e r e n = total n u m b e r o f 20-ft c o n t a i n e r s c a r r i e d b y ship.
3.1.3.6 F o r s h i p s o f r e s t r i c t e d a r e a o f n a v i g a t i o n , t h e
horizontal w a v e bending m o m e n t (refer t o 3.1.3.3) a n d
the components o f a w a v e torque (refer t o 3.1.3.4) shall
b e m u l t i p l i e d b y t h e r e d u c t i o n f a c t o r cp d e t e r m i n e d i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h T a b l e 1.4.4.3.
3.1.3.7 T h e d e s i g n l o a d s f o r c a n t i l e v e r b e a m s a r e
determined i n accordance w i t h 2.6.3.
3.1.3.8 T h e d e s i g n l o a d s o n c o n t a i n e r s e c u r i n g
arrangements are determined w i t h due regard f o rthe
inertia forces caused b y ship's accelerations a t m o
tions i n accordance w i t h 1.3.3.1. T h e design m a s s
v a l u e o f I S O series 1 c o n t a i n e r s i s :
24,0 t f o r 20-ft containers,
30,5 t f o r 40-ft containers.
W h e n calculating strength o fcontainer securing
arrangements fitted o n weather deck, account shall
be t a k e n o f l o a d s f r o m t h e w i n d i n t h e d i r e c t i o n
perpendicular t o t h e centreUne o f t h e ship. T h e design
value o f w i n d pressure is
(3.1.4.1-4)
- - 1 0
w h e r e f o r M , refer t o 3.1.3.3;
W% = a c t u a l h u l l s e c t i o n m o d u l u s a b o u t t h e v e r t i c a l a x i s
t h r o u g h t h ecentreline o f t h e ship, i n c m , determined
by the formula
h
|-10 ;
where I = actual inertia m o m e n t o f the hull a b o u t the vertical axis,

z
2 2
in c m m ;
_y = h a l f t h e s h i p ' s b r e a d t h i n t h e c o n s i d e r e d s e c t i o n , i n m ;
&tw
twl&w\
a
= total w a r p i n g stresses, i n M P a , u n d e r t h e effects o ft h e
torques M , M
, , determined b ythe formula
=
ntw = V ( < i W +
C T
w h e r e <y
Ml
_ c
(3.1.4.1-5)
= n o r m a l w a r p i n g stresses, i n M P a , u n d e r t h eeffects o f
the torques M
,M
,
(refer t o 3.1.3.4), deter
mined b ythe formula
M
BjW
v i o
(3.1.4.1-6)
where B = biomoments i nconsidered section along the length o f

the o p e n p a r t o fthe ship u n d e r t h e effects o f M , M
,
M
respectively, i n k N / m . T h eb i o m o m e n t s a r e
determined b ythe procedure approved b ythe Register.
t
p = 1,0 k P a .
3.1.4.2 K i n e m a t i c p a r a m e t e r s o f w a r p i n g s h a l l b e
determined.
The elongation o f hatch opening diagonal under
3.1.4.1 T h e c o m b i n e d s t r e s s e s , i n M P a , i n
the effect o f h u l l w a r p i n g shall n o t exceed 3 5 m m .
strength deck longitudinals, determined b y F o r m u W h e r e such elongation obtained b y calculation is i n
la (3.1.4.1-1) a r en o t t o exceed 190/n i n a n y section
excess o f 3 5 m m , m e a s u r e s specially a g r e e d w i t h t h e
(3.1.4.1-1)
Register shall b e t a k e n f o r o p e n i n g edge reinforce
ments. T h e calculation shall be m a d e i n accordance
where a
= n o r m a l stresses, i n M P a , i n t h esection considered d u e
w i t h the procedure approved b y the Register.
to still w a t e r b e n d i n g m o m e n t , d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formula
3.1.4.3 A d e q u a t e b u c k U n g s t r e n g t h o f t h e l o n g
i t u d i n a l deck strip between t h e supports as w e l l as
(3.1.4.1-2)
_
-I f\3
t h a t o f i t s i t e m s as r e g a r d s t h e c o m p r e s s i v e stresses
w h e r e f o r M , i n k N / m , r e f e r t o 1.4.3;
due t o longitudinal bending shall be ensured.
W% = a c t u a l h u l l s e c t i o n m o d u l u s i n w a y o f d e c k , a s d e f i n e d
i n 1.4.8;
3.1.4.4 W h e r e t h e r a t i o o f t h e l e n g t h o f t h e h a t c h
<y = n o r m a l s t r e s s e s , i n M P a , i n t h e s e c t i o n c o n s i d e r e d d u e t o
o
p
e
n
ing t o t h e w i d t h o f the deck portion f r o m the
t h e static t o r q u e M (refer t o 3.1.3.5), d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
side shell t o t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l edge o f t h e nearest h a t c h
formula
o p e n i n g exceeds 10,calculation o f shape d e f o r m a t i o n
_
o f the deck portion concerned i n the horizontal plane
(3.1.4.1-3)
v i o
in accordance w i t h t h e procedure approved b yt h e
where B = b i o m o m e n t i nconsidered section along the length o f
Register a n d use o f t h e results obtained i n assessment
o p e n p a r t o f t h e ship u n d e r t h e effect o f t h e static
o
f t h e deck stressed state, design o f h a t c h covers a n d
_
torque M ,i n k N / m ;
side f r a m i n g m a y b e required.
= m a i n sectional area a tthe considered section point, i n m ;
/, = m a i n s e c t i o n a l m o m e n t o f i n e r t i a , i n m ;
3.1.4.5 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f c a n t i l e v e r b e a m s a n d
B , , I a r e d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o t h e p r o c e d u r e a p p r o v e d b y
a d j o i n i n g w e b frames shall satisfy t h e f o l l o w i n g r e
the Register;
<y = n o r m a l s t r e s s e s , i n M P a , i n c o n s i d e r e d s e c t i o n d u e t o
quirements:
vertical w a v e bending m o m e n t , determined b y the formula
.1 t h e section m o d u l u s , i n c m , o f cantilever b e a m
io
at a section i n w a y o fthe e n d o fa b e a m knee shall n o t
be less t h a n
w h e r e f o r M , r e f e r t o 1.4.4;
sw
s w
ts
t s
k-z = f a c t o r b y w h i c h v e r t i c a l b e n d s t r e s s e s a r e i n c r e a s e d
taking t h ehorizontal b e n d i n g a n d torque into account. I t
is d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
k-z = V
w h e r e= c t y / o v ;
+ 0,15(0,85 + Z,/600) (CT
W = (\pal
+ Q)-r^
co -10
c
(3.1.4.5.1)
where p = intensity o f design loads, i n k P a , o n the deck plating

s u p p o r t e d b y t h e cantilever b e a m , a sr e q u i r e d b y 3.1.3.7;
130
Rules
a = distance between adjacent cantilever beams, i n m ;

/ = span, i n m , o f a cantilever beam, measured f r o m the
section a t t h e e n d o f a b e a m k n e e t o t h e hatch side
coaming supported;
Q = design load, i n k N , transmitted from hatch cover to the
cantilever beam:
Q =
-jpiabi,
Pi = intensity o f design loads, i n k P a , o n t h ec o v e r o f h a t c h

a d j o i n i n g t h e c a n t i l e v e r b e a m a s r e q u i r e d b y 3.1.3.7;
b\ = w i d t h , i n m , o f o p e n i n g f o r a h a t c h a d j o i n i n g t h e
cantilever beam;
= 0,6;
w = a s d e f i n e d i n 1.1.5.3.
c
T h e sectional area o f t h e w e b o f cantilever b e a m

s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g
t o 1.6.4.3 t a k i n g :
= 0,6;
Nmax
p a l + Q f o r the section a t t h e e n d o f the
b e a m bracket;
-Nmax = Q f o r t h e s e c t i o n i n w a y o f t h e h a t c h s i d e
coaming adjoining the cantilever beam;
.2 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f t h e w e b f r a m e c o n
n e c t e d t o t h e u p p e r d e c k c a n t i l e v e r b e a m a t t h e sec
tion i n w a y o f the e n d o fthe beam bracket shall n o t
b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a ( 3 . 1 . 4 . 5 . 1 ) .
T h e section m o d u l u s o fthe w e bframe connected
to the cantilever b e a m o f t h e lower deck a n d fitted
below that deck at t h e section i n w a yo f t h e e n d o f
the beam bracket shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e same re
q u i r e m e n t b u t m a y b e r e d u c e d b y t h e v a l u e o f sec
tion m o d u l u s o f t h e w e b frame fitted above that
deck, a t t h e section i n w a y o f t h e e n d o f t h e bracket
adjoining t h e deck.
3.1.4.6 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f c o n t a i n e r s e c u r i n g a r
rangements shall be d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e basis o f
strength calculations using t h e design loads c o m p l y
i n g w i t h t h e requirements o f3.1.3.8, a n d t h e resulting
stresses s h a l l n o t exceed t h e p e r m i s s i b l e o n e s d e
t e r m i n e d u s i n g t h e p e r m i s s i b l e stress factors:
kv = k = 0 , 7 5 .
T h e strength o f h u l l structures t a k i n g u p forces
f r o m t h e container securing arrangements shall be
v e r i f i e d b y c a l c u l a t i o n o f t h e effects p r o d u c e d b y
these forces, a n d t h e r e s u l t i n g stresses s h a l l n o t e x
ceed t h e permissible ones specified i n Section 2 f o r t h e
appropriate structures.
=
3.2 R O L L - O N / R O L L - O F F
SHIPS
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
These requirements also apply t o decks a n d

d o u b l e b o t t o m s o fships c a r r y i n g w h e e l e d vehicles f o r
use i n cargo h a n d U n g .
Qo = s t a t i c l o a d o n t h e a x l e o f t h e w h e e l e d v e
hicle, i n k N ;
n = n u m b e r o fwheels o n a n axle;
n = n u m b e r o fwheels f o r m i n g a design load spot
(for a single w h e e l n = 1);
= size o f a t y r e p r i n t n o r m a l t o t h e a x i s o f r o t a
tion, i n m ;
v = size o f a t y r e p r i n t p a r a U e l t o t h e a x i s o f r o t a
tion, i n m ;
e = spacing between adjacent tyre prints, i n m ;
l = design load spot d i m e n s i o n parallel t o t h e
s m a l l e r side o f t h e p a n e l (directed across f r a m i n g
members), i n m ;
l = design load spot d i m e n s i o n parallel t o t h e
l a r g e r side o f t h e p a n e l (directed a l o n g f r a m i n g
members), i n m ;
a,b = s m a l l e r a n d l a r g e r s i d e s o f p a n e l , r e s p e c
tively, i n m ;
/ = span o f t h e considered girder between sup
p o r t s , i n m (refer t o 1.6.3.1).
3.2.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
3.2.2.1 V e h i c l e d e c k s a n d d o u b l e b o t t o m s o f r o - r o
ships a n d c a r ferries shall, i n general, be l o n g i t u d i n a l l y
framed. I ff r a m e d otherwise, t h e above structures are
3.2.2.2 M o v a b l e d e c k s f i t t e d t e m p o r a r i l y f o r t h e
carriage o f vehicles s h a l l be so fixed as t o p r e v e n t
these decks f r o m t a k i n g u p l o n g i t u d i n a l forces u n d e r
the h u l l longitudinal bending.
T h e Rules provide f o r m o v a b l e deck structure con
sisting o f a t o p decking w i t h a w e b structure a n d l o n g
itudinals welded thereto. Other forms o f m o v a b l e deck
c o n s t r u c t i o n s h a l l b e speciaUy considered b y t h e Register.
3.2.3 L o a d s f r o m w h e e l e d v e h i c l e s .
3.2.3.1 T h e d e s i g n l o a d s s h a l l b e b a s e d o n s p e c i
fication details o f vehicles carried o n b o a r d t h e ship
and used f o r cargo handUng. T h e design doc
umentation submitted t o the Register f o r the con
sideration shall include statical load o n vehicle axle,
n u m b e r o f wheels o n t h e axle, w h e e l spacing, tyre
print dimensions a n d tyre type.
W h e r e w h e e l p r i n t details are n o t initially avail
able, t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.2.3.5 shall b e applied.
3.2.3.2 T h e d e s i g n l o a d s p o t d i m e n s i o n s l a n d l
shall be chosen as t h e o v e r a l l dimensions o ft h e p r i n t
o f a wheel group consisting o fa m a x i m u m n u m b e r o f
wheels a n d complying w i t h the following conditions:
w h e n determining the required plating thickness,
the prints o f a l l t h e wheels i n a group shall be ar
r a n g e d w i t h i n t h e p a n e l s u r f a c e ( i . e . l ^ a a n d l ^b,
refer t o T a b l e 3.2.3.2);
0
3.2.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s C h a p t e r a p p l y t o
r o - r o ships, r o - r o passenger ships a n d a r e supple
m e n t a r y t o those o f Sections 1 a n d 2.
P a r t II. H u l l
131
T a b l e
3.2.3.2
Procedures for choosing design load spot dimensionswhen establishing deck plating thickness
Wheel prints
Design load spot

n = 1
<
>
>
<
V
V
b
<
2 +
"
>
<
>|
7|
>
V/
<
4v + >
"
>
= 3 h = 3v + 2
>\
<3
V/
S
V
= 1
2v + >
1 =
V/
w h e n determining t h e section m o d u l u s a n d cross

section o f a m a i n f r a m i n g girder, t h e prints o f a l l t h e
wheels o f a group shall be fully arranged w i t h i n the
surfaces o f t w o panels adjacent t o t h e girder u n d e r
c o n s i d e r a t i o n (i.e. l ^ 2 a a n d 4 < Z , refer t o F i g . 3.2.3.2).
T h e wheels m a y be united i n a group irrespective
o f t h e distance between prints p r o v i d e d t h e o v e r a l l
dimensions o f the group are i n accordance w i t h the
above limitations.
W h e r e t w o positions o f t h e design load spot are
possible (along a n d across m a i n f r a m i n g ) , 4 > / shall
be a d o p t e d as t h e design case (i.e. t h e spot p o s i t i o n e d
w i t h i t s l a r g e r side a l o n g m a i n f r a m i n g ) .
ff
-K
\
_i
F i g . 3.2.3.2
Design loaded spots for main framing
132
Rules
3.2.3.3 T o b e c o n s i d e r e d a r e t h e l o a d s r e s u l t i n g
f r o m t h e operation o f vehicles during cargo h a n d U n g
operations a n d f r o m stowage o fvehicles o n t h e deck
under conditions o f the ship motions.
3.2.3.4 T h e d e s i g n l o a d Q, i n k N , s h a l l b e d e
and Construction
of Sea-Going
3.2.3.6 I f t h e s i z e o f w h e e l p r i n t s i s a d o p t e d i n
accordance w i t h 3.2.3.5, t h e design load Q shall b e
increased b y 15 p e r cent.
3.2.3.7 T h e d e s i g n l o a d f o r t r a i n r a i l s Q, i n k N ,
shall be determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
Q = 0,5
(3.2.3.4)
0
where k = a i a d y n a m i c coefficient i n the process o f operation

o f vehicles u s e d for cargo h a n d l i n g operations;
<xi = f a c t o r e q u a l t o : 1,10 a n d 1,05 f o r v e h i c l e s ( e x c e p t f o r k l i f t
t r u c k s ) h a v i n g a n a x l e l o a d l e s s t h a n 50 k N a n d 50 k N
a n d m o r e , r e s p e c t i v e l y ; 1,0 f o r f o r k l i f t t r u c k s ;
<x = f a c t o r e q u a l t o : 1,03 a n d 1,15 f o r p n e u m a t i c a n d c a s t r u b b e r t y r e s , r e s p e c t i v e l y ; 1,25 f o r w h e e l s w i t h a s t e e l r i m ;
ka = 1 + a j g d y n a m i c factor characterizing the ship motions;
a = acceleration i n t h e ship section under consideration i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.3.3.1.
d
Ships
(3.2.3.7)
w h e r e k a = 1,1 i f t h e v e h i c l e m o v e s a b o u t d u r i n g c a r g o - h a n d l i n g
operations;
ka = 1 + a j g i n case o fthe ship motions;
a = acceleration i n considered ship section i n accordance
w i t h 1.3.3.1;
= n u m b e r o f vehicle wheels a r r a n g e d within t h e design
span o fframing member supporting railways.
z
W h e r e distribution o ft h e load between wheeled

vehicle axles is n o t u n i f o r m , t h e m a x i m u m axle load
shall be t a k e n as t h e design load. F o r f o r k Uft trucks
it is assumed that t h e total load is appUed t o t h e
f o r w a r d axle.
3.2.3.5 W h e r e s p e c i f i c a t i o n s o n t y r e p r i n t d i
mensions aren o t available, t h etyre print dimension
n o r m a l t o t h e w h e e l a x l e u, i n m , s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d
by the formulae:
3.2.3.8 T h e d e s i g n l o a d s f o r s i d e s h e l l a n d p e r
m a n e n t deck p r i m a r y m e m b e r s shall be those t o sa
tisfy t h e m o s t severe s t o w a g e a r r a n g e m e n t o f a l l
cargoes carried o n deck (including package cargo,
containers, wheeled vehicles, etc.) a n d t o a l l o w f o r
statical a n d inertia forces resulting f r o m t h e ship
motions. Accelerations shall be determined i n ac
c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.3.3.1.
3.2.3.9 T h e d e s i g n l o a d Q, i n k N , f o r t h e t r a n s
verses a n d girders o f m o v a b l e decks shall b e de
Q = kd(p
for wheels w i t h cast tyres
where
p
Pa
a
w h e r e Q o / n ^ 15 k H ;
(3.2.3.5-1)
= 0 , 1 5 + 0,001(Qo/o-15) w h e r e Q / n > 1 5 k H ;
0
for wheels w i t h pneumatic tyres

= 0,15+ 0,0025QoM)
w h e r e Q /o< W 0 k H ;
(3.2.3.5-2)
= 0,4 + 0,002(0o/o- W 0 ) w h e r e Q / n > 1 0 0 k H .
T h e tyre print dimension o f a wheel paraUel t o t h e
w h e e l a x l e v, i n m , s h a U b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
0
where p
T h e v a l u e o f ( p + p ) s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n less
than 2,5 kPa.
3.2.4 S c a n t l i n g s o f d e c k a n d s i d e s h e l l s t r u c t u r e s .
3.2.4.1 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f p l a t i n g s, i n m m , s h a l l
c
MQko
) '
1^\^
0
(3.2.3.5-3)
k a = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.2.3.4;
= static d e c k loads f r o m the cargo carried , i n k P a ;
= static d e c k loads f r o m d e c k o w n m a s s , i n k P a ;
= m e a n spacing o ftransverses a n d girders, i n m .
= 0,01Q /n
(3.2.3.9)
+ p )a l
+ 2
(3.2.4.1)
w h e r e Q = a s d e f i n e d u n d e r 3.2.3;
= f a c t o r a c c o u n t i n g f o r t h e e f f e c t s o f t o t a l h u l l b e n d :
r
= - ,r
^ 1 f the u p p e r (strength) d e c k a m i d s h i p s
1,4-0,8W7W&
w i t h l o a d s acting a t sea;
0
static specific pressure, i n k P a , t o b e a d o p t e d f r o m

T a b l e 3.2.3.5.
T a b l e
Vehicle
3.2.3.5
Pk
P n e u m a t i c tyres
C a s t tyres
=
ki =
k =
k, =
W'a
V',
2
1 elsewhere;
0,83/^
0,84/7/ -0,185;
0- ,- 1- 8- /- / + 0,38;
-
a c t u a l h u l l s e c t i o n m o d u l u s f o r d e c k i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.4.8.
a
3.2.4.2 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W o f l o n g i t u d i n a l s
a n d b e a m s , i n c m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n o b t a i n e d
f r o m 1.6.4.1 w i t h
Q = as defined i n 3.2.3;
3
Cars
Lorries, motor vans
Trailers
F o r k lift t r u c k s
200
800
800
800 ( w h e r e n = 1)
600 ( w h e r e n > 2)
1500
1500
1500
5,84
m = [I-0,51
k
k
lb/l\k '
a
= l - 0 , 2 0 4 ( / / a ) + 0,045(/ /a) ;
= 0,8/&o f o r c a r g o h a n d l i n g o p e r a t i o n s i n p o r t ;
a
P a r t II. H u l l
133
fc = 0 , 7 / k w i t h l o a d s a p p l i e d a t s e a ;
= f a c t o r d e f i n e d i n 3 . 2 . 4 . 1 .
3.2.4.3 T h e w e b c r o s s - s e c t i o n a l a r e a f , i n c m , o f
b e a m s a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n o b
t a i n e d f r o m 1.6.4.3 w i t h
CT
(3.2.4.3)
N ^ = Q k ( l - 0,47/ //);
ki k a
a
w h e r e Q = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.2.3;
ka, k = f a c t o r s d e f i n e d i n 3.2.4.2.
3.2.4.4 T h e p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s , s e c t i o n m o d u l u s a n d
cross-sectional area o f b e a m s a n d longitudinals o f m o
vable decks shall be determined i n accordance
w i t h 3.2.4.1, 3.2.4.2 a n d 3.2.4.3. W h e r e b e a m s a n d
longitudinals are freely supported b y girders a n d trans
verses, t h e f a c t o r m s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
m
(3.2.4.4)
k (2-l /l)
a
w h e r e k = f a c t o r d e f i n e d i n 3.2.4.2;
Otherwise, t h efactor m shall be determined as f o r

beams a n d longitudinals o f permanent cargo decks
according t o 3.2.4.2.
3.2.4.5 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f l o n g i t u d i n a l s W,
i n c m , s u p p o r t i n g f i x e d r a i l s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
o b t a i n e d f r o m 1.6.4.1 w i t h :
Q = as defined i n 3.2.3.7;
m t o be determined b y the f o r m u l a
3
m = 1
5,85
kêi/l
(3.2.4.5)
where
ks
for
e
ks = 0 w i t h = 1 ;
= 0,5m w i t h 1 > 2 ;
m , r e f e r t o 3.2.3.7;
= m e a n spacing o f centres o f wheels arranged within the
design member span, i n m ;
k = 0,7/;
k = f a c t o r d e t e r m i n e d b y 3.2.4.1.
2
3.2.4.6 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f d e e p m e m b e r s o f s i d e s
a n d p e r m a n e n t cargo decks, as w e l l as o f pillars shall
be derived b y direct c a l c u l a t i o n u s i n g t h e procedures
approved b y t h e Register.
3.2.4.7 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f t h e g i r d e r s a n d
t r a n s v e r s e s o f m o v a b l e d e c k s W, i n c m , s h a l l n o t b e
less t h a n o b t a i n e d f r o m 1.6.4.1 w i t h :
Q = as defined i n 3.2.3.9;
m = 12 f o rfixed members;
m = 8 f o rfreely supported members;
= 0,7.
3.2.5.1 A s i d e f e n d e r p r o t e c t i n g t h e s h i p s i d e a n d
stern f r o m damage during m o o r i n g operations shall
be f i t t e d a t t h e l o w e r cargo deck level o f ferries.
3.2.5.2 A l o n g i t u d i n a l s h a l l b e f i t t e d u n d e r e a c h
rail o n t h e cargo decks o f t r a i n ferries.
3.2.5.3 W h e r e t r a i n d e c k s w i t h r a i l s w h i c h a r e
flush w i t h t h e deck p l a t i n g a r e p r o v i d e d o n ships
3
carrying r a i l w a y carriages, t h e actual section m o d

ulus a n d sectional area o f deck transverses shall be
d e t e r m i n e d f o r t h e s e c t i o n l o c a t e d i n t h e r a i l recess.
Structural c o n t i n u i t y o f t h e effective flange o f t h e
deck transverse, w h e r e i t intersects t h e rail, shall be
ensured. I n a n y case, t h e i n t e r s e c t i o n s o f t h e f i x e d
rails w i t h deck transverses shall be specially agreed
3.2.5.4 W h e r e r a i l s f o r t h e t r a n s p o r t o f r a i l w a y
carriages are welded t o t h e deck plating t h r o u g h o u t
the entire length, t h e rail butts shall be welded w i t h
full penetration.
3.3 B U L K C A R R I E R S A N D O I L O R B U L K D R Y C A R G O
CARRIERS
3.3.1 G e n e r a l .
b u l k carriers a n d c o m b i n a t i o n carriers f o r t h e car
riage o f b u l k cargoes a n d crude o i l ( o i l products) i n
b u l k o f less t h a n 9 0 m i n l e n g t h .
B u l k carriers o f 9 0 m i n length a n d upwards,
contract f o r construction o f w h i c h w a s signed
o n A p r i l 1 , 2006 a n d after, shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e
requirements o f Part X I X " C o m m o n Structural
R u l e s f o r B u l k C a r r i e r s " (refer also t o 1.1.1.1).
3.3.1.2 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s
b o u n d i n g t h e cargo r e g i o n shall be d e t e r m i n e d as
required b y Sections 1 a n d 2 o n assumption o f the
carriage o f b u l k o r Uquid cargo (water ballast) i n the
holds p r i m a r i l y designed f o r t h e purpose concerned.
The value t o be adopted is t h e greater o f t h e appro
priate strength characteristics o f the i t e m .
3.3.1.3 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e s t r u c t u r e s n o t
m e n t i o n e d i n t h i s C h a p t e r s h a l l b e as g i v e n i n Sec
tions 1 a n d 2.
I n a n y case, t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e h u l l a n d i t s
s t r u c t u r e s s h a l l n o t b e less s t r i n g e n t t h a n t h o s e s t a t e d
in Sections 1 a n d 2.
3.3.1.4 T h e b a s i c s t r u c t u r a l t y p e o f s h i p s i s c o n
sidered t o be a single-deck ship w i t h m a c h i n e r y aft,
having a flat ( o r nearly a flat) double b o t t o m i nthe
holds (permissible slope o f the i n n e r b o t t o m f r o m t h e
s i d e t o t h e c e n t r e U n e i s n o t o v e r 3), h o p p e r s i d e a n d
t o p s i d e t a n k s , single o r d o u b l e s k i n sides, t r a n s v e r s e
h o l d bulkheads o f plane, corrugated o r cofferdam
type, w h i c h is p r i m a r i l y intended f o rb a l k cargoes.
3.3.1.5 I n c o m b i n a t i o n c a r r i e r t h e l e n g t h o f t h e h o l d s
shaU n o t exceed 0 , l L . H o l d s o f a greater l e n g t h require
s p e c i a l c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
It is assumed that w h e n carrying heavy b u l k
cargo, certain holds r e m a i n empty, their numbers
shall be indicated i n line " O t h e r characteristics" i n
Classification Certificate as stated i n 2.3, P a r t I
"Classification".
See 794c
134
Rules
3.3.1.6 D e s c r i p t i v e n o t a t i o n a n d d i s t i n g u i s h i n g
mark (ESP).
3.3.1.6.1 T h e d e s c r i p t i v e n o t a t i o n B u l k c a r r i e r
a n d t h e distinguishing m a r k ( E S P ) shall be assigned
t o sea g o i n g self-propelled single deck ships w i t h a
d o u b l e b o t t o m , h o p p e r side t a n k s a n d t o p s i d e t a n k s
a n d w i t h single o r d o u b l e s k i n side c o n s t r u c t i o n i n
tended f o r carriage o f d r y cargoes i n bulk. T y p i c a l
m i d s h i p sections a r e given i n F i g . 3.3.1.6.1.
F i g . 3.3.1.6.1
B u l k carrier o f single s k i n side c o n s t r u c t i o n

means a b u l k carrier where o n e o r m o r e cargo holds
are b o u n d b y t h e side shell o n l y o r b y t w o w a t e r t i g h t
b o u n d a r i e s , o n e o f w h i c h is t h e side shell, w h i c h a r e :
less t h a n 7 6 0 m m a p a r t i n b u l k c a r r i e r s , t h e k e e l s
o f w h i c h a r e l a i d o r w h i c h a r e a t a s i m i l a r stage o f
construction before 1 January 2000;
less t h a n 1 0 0 0 m m a p a r t i n b u l k c a r r i e r s , t h e
keels o f w h i c h a r e l a i d o r w h i c h a r e a t a s i m i l a r stage
o f construction o n o r after 1 January 2000.
3.3.1.6.2 T h e d e s c r i p t i v e n o t a t i o n O i l / B u l k / O r e
carrier a n d t h e distinguishing m a r k ( E S P ) shall be
assigned t o single deck ships o f d o u b l e s k i n side
c o n s t r u c t i o n , w i t h a d o u b l e b o t t o m , h o p p e r side
tanks a n d topside tanks fitted below t h e upper deck
intended f o r t h e carriage o f o i l o r d r y cargoes, i n
cluding ore, i n bulk. A typical midship section is gi
v e n i n F i g . 3 . 3 . 1 . 6 . 1 , b.
3.3.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
3.3.2.1 L o n g i t u d i n a l f r a m i n g s h a l l b e a d o p t e d f o r
t h e deck, t h e side shell i n w a y o f topside t a n k s a n d
the sloped bulkheads o f topside tanks. T h e deck
plating between e n d coamings o f adjacent
cargo
hatches shall be additionally strengthened w i t h i n
tercostal transverse stiffeners fitted a t every frame.
T h e double b o t t o m shall be longitudinally
framed. T h e double b o t t o m structure i n w h i c h a l l
b o t t o m a n d inner b o t t o m longitudinals are replaced
b y side girders m a y b e p e r m i t t e d (refer t o 2.4.2.4.2).
T h e single s k i n side b e t w e e n topside a n d h o p p e r
side t a n k s shall b e transversely f r a m e d .
L o n g i t u d i n a l o r transverse f r a m i n g m a y be adopted
f o r t h e d o u b l e s k i n side a n d i n t h e h o p p e r side t a n k s .
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T h e transverse watertight bulkheads m a y be

plane w i t h vertical stiffeners, corrugated w i t h vertical
corrugations o r o fa cofferdam type.
3.3.2.2 A h a t c h s i d e c o a m i n g s h a l l b e f i t t e d w i t h
h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners. A t every alternate f r a m e t h e
c o a m i n g s h a l l b e s t i f f e n e d w i t h v e r t i c a l b r a c k e t s fit
ted between t h e c o a m i n g flange a n d t h e deck.
3.3.2.3 T h e s l o p e a n g l e o f t o p s i d e t a n k w a l l s t o
t h e h o r i z o n t a l a x i s s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n 30.
Inside topside tanks, i n line w i t h h o l d transverse
bulkheads, diaphragms shall be fitted, t h e plating o f
w h i c h m a y g e n e r a l l y h a v e d r a i n a n d access h o l e s o f
m i n i m u m size. T h e p l a t i n g o f t r a n s v e r s e b u l k h e a d s i n
side t o p s i d e t a n k s s h a l l b e s t r e n g t h e n e d w i t h stiffeners.
T h e ends o f vertical stiffeners shall b e bracketed.
I n t o p s i d e t a n k s t r a n s v e r s e b e a m s s h a l l b e fitted
i n line w i t h deck transverses.
T o stiffen t h e plates o f t h e t a n k vertical walls
w h i c h a r e i n l i n e w i t h t h e h a t c h side c o a m i n g ,
brackets shall be placed inside t h e tanks i n line w i t h
every stay o f side c o a m i n g . T h e s e brackets shall b e
extended t o t h e deck a n d t a n k sloped bulkhead
longitudinals nearest t o t h e centreline.
A t every frame, i n t h e lower corner o f t h e tank,
b r a c k e t s s h a l l b e fitted i n l i n e w i t h t h e b r a c k e t s a t
taching t h e h o l d frame t o t h e sloped bulkhead o f t h e
t a n k . T h e s e brackets s h a l l b e c a r r i e d t o t h e ship's side
a n d t a n k sloped b u l k h e a d longitudinals nearest t ot h e
lower corner o f the tanks a n dwelded t o t h e m so as t o
extend beyond t h e brackets o f frames.
3.3.2.4 T h e s l o p e a n g l e o f h o p p e r s i d e t a n k w a l l s
t o t h e h o r i z o n t a l s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n 45. T h e e x
tension o f the t a n k over t h e ship breadth a t t h e inner
b o t t o m l e v e l s h a l l g e n e r a l l y n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 1 2 5
o n o n e side.
T r a n s v e r s e d i a p h r a g m s s h a l l b e fitted i n l i n e w i t h
transverse bulkheads a n d every alternate plate
floor.
T h e d i a p h r a g m s m a y h a v e d r a i n s a n d access h o l e s .
T h e total height o f openings at t h e section o f dia
phragm, i nt h edirection along t h en o r m a l t o the t a n k
plating, f r o m a line d r a w n t h r o u g h t h eopening centre
perpendicularly t o that normal, t o the plating shall
n o t exceed 0,5 o f the height o f t h a t section a n y w h e r e .
T h e o p e n i n g edges shall b e r e i n f o r c e d w i t h face plates
o r stiffeners. T h e d i a p h r a g m p l a t i n g shall be stiffened
a s r e q u i r e d b y 1 . 7 . 3 . 2 f o r t h e floor s t i f f e n e r s .
Inside longitudinally framed tank, brackets shall
be fitted i n line w i t h every f r a m e . These brackets shall
be c a r r i e d t o t h e sloped b u l k h e a d a n d side l o n g
itudinals a n d welded t o t h e m so as t o extend b e y o n d
the brackets o f frames.
A t t h e o u t b o a r d side g i r d e r f o r m i n g t r a n s v e r s e l y
f r a m e d h o p p e r s i d e t a n k w a l l , b r a c k e t s s h a l l b e fitted
i n line w i t h every frame. These brackets shall be
carried t o t h e nearest b o t t o m a n d inner b o t t o m
longitudinals a n d welded t o them.
P a r t II. H u l l
135
3.3.2.5 W i t h i n t h e c a r g o a r e a , t h e s i n g l e - s i d e
structure shall comply w i t h the following require
ments:
. 1 t h e scantlings o f side h o l d f r a m e s i m m e d i a t e l y
adjacent t o t h e collision b u l k h e a d shall be increased i n
o r d e r t o p r e v e n t excessive i m p o s e d d e f o r m a t i o n o n t h e
shell plating. A s a n alternative, supporting structures
shall be fitted w h i c h m a i n t a i n t h e continuity o f fore
peak stringers w i t h i n t h e f o r e m o s t h o l d ;
.2 f r a m e e n d s s h a l l b e a t t a c h e d w i t h b r a c k e t s .
The vertical dimension o f the lower a n d upper
brackets, as measured a t shell plating, shall n o t be
less t h a n 0 , 1 2 5 o f t h e f r a m e s p a n . O n t h e l e v e l o f t h e
frame adjoining t h e bilge a n d underdeck tank, t h e
breadth o f t h e l o w e r a n d upper brackets shall n o t be
less t h a n h a l f t h e w e b h e i g h t ;
.3 f r a m e s s h a l l b e f a b r i c a t e d s y m m e t r i c a l s e c t i o n s
w i t h integral upper a n d l o w e r brackets a n d shall be
arranged w i t h soft toes. T h e e n d brackets a d j o i n i n g
the underdeck a n d bilge tanks shall be blunted, a n d
t h e f l a n g e e n d s s h a l l be sniped. T h e side f r a m e flange
shall be curved a t the connection w i t h the e n d
b r a c k e t s . T h e r a d i u s o f c u r v a t u r e s h a l l n o t b e less
than r, i n m m , determined b y the f o r m u l a
r = 0,4b
where b
s =
br
br
2
br
/s
br
(3.3.2.5.3)
= t h e flange w i d t h , i n m m ;
t h e thickness o fbrackets, i n m m ;
.4 n o r m a l steel f r a m e s m a y be a s y m m e t r i c . T h e
face plates o r flanges o f brackets s h a l l b e sniped a t
b o t h ends. T h e brackets shall be arranged w i t h soft
toes;
.5 w h e r e , a f r a m e b e i n g c o n n e c t e d t o a n u n d e r d e c k
tank, t h e frame o r its bracket overlaps w i t h a h o r i z o n t a l
section o f a n inclined wall, p r o v i s i o n shall be m a d e f o r
the bracket t o g o over t h e bent section, a n d t h e angle
b e t w e e n t h e p l a n e o f t h e face p l a t e ( b r a c k e t ) a n d t h e
i n c l i n e d t a n k w a l l s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 30;
.6 t h e w e b d e p t h t o t h i c k n e s s r a t i o o f f r a m e s s h a l l
n o t exceed t h e f o l l o w i n g values:
6 0 . 0 2 ^ symmetrically flanged frames;
5 0 ^ r | f o r asymmetrically flanged frames;
t h e o u t s t a n d i n g flange shall n o t exceed
lOy/r] t i m e s t h e f l a n g e t h i c k n e s s ;
.8 i n w a y o f t h e f o r e m o s t h o l d , side f r a m e s o f
asymmetrical section shall be fitted w i t h tripping
brackets w h i c h shall be welded t o shell plating, webs
a n d face plates o f f r a m e s ;
.9 d o u b l e c o n t i n u o u s w e l d i n g s h a l l b e a d o p t e d
f o r t h e c o n n e c t i o n s o f f r a m e s a n d b r a c k e t s t o side
shell, h o p p e r w i n g t a n k p l a t i n g a n d w e b t o face
plates. F o r this purpose, t h e strength factor a f o r
w e l d (refer t o 1.7.5.1) i s a d o p t e d e q u a l t o :
0,44 w h e r e f r a m e webs shall be w e l d e d t o shell
plating o n lengths equal t o 0,25 o f t h e f r a m e span as

measured f r o m the upper a n d lower frame end,a n d

where bracket webs shall be welded t o the plating o f
underdeck a n d bilge tanks;
0,4 w h e r e f r a m e webs shall be w e l d e d t o shell
p l a t i n g outside t h e a b o v e e n d sections.
W h e r e t h e h u l l f o r m is such as t o p r o h i b i t a n
effective fillet w e l d , edge p r e p a r a t i o n o f t h e w e b o f
frame a n d bracket m a y be required, i n order t o en
sure t h e same efficiency as t h e w e l d c o n n e c t i o n stated
above.
3.3.2.6 T h e e n d s o f p l a n e b u l k h e a d s t i f f e n e r s
shall be bracketed t o the inner b o t t o m plating a n d t o
deck structures.
3.3.2.7 T h e c o f f e r d a m b u l k h e a d s s h a l l s a t i s f y t h e
.1 t h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f c o f f e r d a m b u l k h e a d s , as
stipulated under 2.7.1.2, shall consist o f t w o tight
platings, diaphragms and/or platforms. T o stiffen the
plating, vertical o r h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners m a y be fitted;
.2 t h e v e r t i c a l o r h o r i z o n t a l s t i f f e n e r s o f b o t h
platings shall be identical, f o r m a ring structure a n d
pass c o n t i n u o u s t h r o u g h t h e p l a t f o r m s o r , accord
ingly, diaphragms. T h e vertical stiffeners o f b o t h
platings shall be fitted i n the same plane parallel t o
the centreUne o f t h e ship; t h e h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners
shall be fitted i n t h e same plane parallel t o t h e base
Une o f t h e ship.
C r o s s ties a r e p e r m i t t e d b e t w e e n t h e v e r t i c a l o r
h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners o fb o t h platings, a t t h e m i d - s p a n
thereof;
.3 t h e d i a p h r a g m s o r p l a t f o r m s s h a l l b e s t i f f e n e d
i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.7.3.2. T h e s m a l l e r side, i n m m ,
o f the panel o fd i a p h r a g m o r p l a t f o r m t o be stiffened
s h a l l n o t e x c e e d I00sy/r]
, where s is t h e thickness o f
diaphragm or platform, i n m m ;
.4 f o r access t o a l l p a r t s o f t h e c o f f e r d a m b u l k
head a n adequate number o f openings (manholes)
shall be provided i n the diaphragms a n d platforms.
T h e t o t a l w i d t h o f openings i n o n e section o f the
d i a p h r a g m o r p l a t f o r m shall n o t exceed 0,6 o f t h e
cofferdam bulkhead thickness.
Openings other t h a n t h e a i r a n d d r a i n scuppers
are generally n o t permitted:
i n t h e p l a t f o r m s , a t a d i s t a n c e n o t less t h a n
1,5 t i m e s t h e c o f f e r d a m b u l k h e a d t h i c k n e s s f r o m t h e
l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s o r side, w h i c h a c t as t h e
p l a t f o r m supports;
i n t h e diaphragms, a t t h e same distance f r o m t h e
inner b o t t o m plating o r the upper point o f the
bulkhead b o t t o m trapezoidal stool, i f any, a n d the
upper deck plating o r the lower p o i n t o f the hor
izontal underdeck stiffener o f rectangular o r trape
zoidal section, being t h e bulkhead t o p stool, i f any,
w h i c h a c t as t h e d i a p h r a g m supports.
Edges o fthe openings c u t i n t h e diaphragms a n d
platforms located w i t h i n / o f the span f r o m their
l
136
Rules
s u p p o r t s s h a l l b e r e i n f o r c e d w i t h face plates o r stiffeners. T h e distance b e t w e e n t h e edges o f adjacent

o p e n i n g s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h e l e n g t h o f t h e s e
openings.
3.3.2.8 T r a n s v e r s e b u l k h e a d s w i t h v e r t i c a l c o r r u g a t i o n s s h a l l h a v e p l a n e areas a t ship's sides n o t
less t h a n 0,081? i n w i d t h . T h e u p p e r e n d s o f t h e s e
bulkheads shall be attached t o the deck b y hori z o n t a l s t i f f e n e r s o f r e c t a n g u l a r o r t r a p e z o i d a l section, complying w i t h the requirements o f 3.3.2.11,
while the lower ends shall be attached directly t o t h e
inner b o t t o m plating o r t o the stools o f trapezoidal
section fitted o n the inner b o t t o m , c o m p l y i n g w i t h
the requirements o f 3.3.2.10. T h e bulkheads i n
heavy cargo holds shall be supported b y trapezoidal
stools.
A t lower e n d o fcorrugations there shall be fitted
v e r t i c a l a n d sloped plates so as t o c o v e r t h e concave
p o r t i o n o f c o r r u g a t i o n s o n e a c h side o f t h e c o r r u gated bulkhead. T h e height o f t h e covering plates i n
o i l o r b u l k d r y c a r g o c a r r i e r s s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 0,1 o f the corrugation span, a n d their thickness
s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h e l o w e r s t r a k e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e
corrugation.
3.3.2.9 W h e r e l o w e r e n d s o f v e r t i c a l c o r r u g a t i o n s
are attached directly t o t h e inner b o t t o m plating,
f l o o r s t h e t h i c k n e s s o f w h i c h s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n
that o f the b o t t o m strake o f the corrugated bulkh e a d s s h a l l b e a l i g n e d w i t h transverse faces (those
directed a t h w a r t t h e ship).
I n t h i s case, w e b plates ( t h o s e directed a l o n g t h e
ship) o f rectangular corrugations shall be i n line w i t h
i n n e r b o t t o m l o n g i t u d i n a l s o r side girders. Side faces
o f trapezoidal corrugations shall be arranged so that
in w a yo f their intersection w i t h inner b o t t o m longitudinals h a r d spots are avoided.
3.3.2.10 T h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f t h e t r a n s v e r s e
bulkhead b o t t o m trapezoidal stool shall comply w i t h
.1 t h e s t o o l is f i t t e d o n t h e i n n e r b o t t o m a t h w a r t
the ship under t h e bulkhead. I t shall consist o fa t o p
h o r i z o n t a l p l a t e h a v i n g a w i d t h n o t less t h a n t h e
height o ft h e bulkhead corrugations a n d t w o sloped
plates resting u p o n t h e plate floors. T h e height o f
the s t o o l shall n o t exceed 0,15D. Stools o f greater
height a r e subject t o special consideration b y t h e
Register;
.2 i n n e r b o t t o m l o n g i t u d i n a l s s h a l l b e c u t a t t h e
floors giving support t o t h e sloped plates o f t h e
b o t t o m stools a n d t o be attached t o t h e m b y brackets. B r a c k e t s h a v i n g a t h i c k n e s s n o t less t h a n t h a t o f
the floors, reinforced w i t h stiffeners shall be fitted
between t h e floors i n line w i t h t h e inner b o t t o m
longitudinals;
.3 d i a p h r a g m s s h a l l b e f i t t e d i n s i d e t h e b o t t o m
s t o o l s i n line w i t h t h e centre g i r d e r a n d side girders.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
D r a i n a n d access h o l e s m a y b e c u t i n t h e d i a p h r a g m s .
Size o f t h e openings, t h e i r r u n f o r c e m e n t as w e l l as
stiffening o f diaphragms shall c o m p l y w i t h similar
r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e d i a p h r a g m s o f h o p p e r side
tanks, as specified i n 3.3.2.4;
.4 t h e h o r i z o n t a l a n d sloped plates inside t h e
b o t t o m stool shall be stiffened t o f o r m a r i n g struct u r e , fitted i n l i n e w i t h t h e i n n e r b o t t o m l o n g itudinals.
3.3.2.11 T h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f t h e c o r r u g a t e d
bulkhead t o p stool o f rectangular o r trapezoidal
section shall c o m p l y w i t h t h efollowing requirements:
. 1 t h e t o p s t o o l s h a l l b e fitted u n d e r t h e d e c k
a t h w a r t the ship, over t h e bulkhead. I t shall consist o f
a b o t t o m h o r i z o n t a l p l a t e h a v i n g a w i d t h n o t less
than theheight o fthe bulkhead corrugations a n d t w o
vertical o r sloped plates. T h eheight o f t h e t o p stool
shall be a p p r o x i m a t e l y equal t o 0,1 o f t h e distance
between thetopside tanks. T h edimensions o fthet o p
s t o o l s h a l l b e s u c h as t o p r o v i d e access i n t o t h a t s t o o l ;
.2 t h e h o r i z o n t a l a n d v e r t i c a l ( s l o p e d ) p l a t e s i n side t h e s t o o l s h a l l b e stiffened.
T h e s t i f f e n e r s m a y b e fitted i n l i n e w i t h t h e d e c k
longitudinals f o r m i n g ring structures w i t h t h e m .
H o r i z o n t a l s t i f f e n e r s m a y b e fitted. I n t h i s c a s e ,
webs g i v i n g intermediate support t o these stiffeners
as w e l l a s b r a c k e t s e n s u r i n g e f f i c i e n t e n d a t t a c h m e n t
o f corrugations shall be provided inside t h et o p stool;
.3 w h e r e a n a n g l e b e t w e e n t h e s l o p e d p l a t e o f t h e
t o p s t o o l a n d a v e r t i c a l a x i s e x c e e d s 30, b r a c k e t s
ensuring efficient upper e n d attachment o f corrugat i o n s s h a l l b e fitted i n s i d e t h e t o p s t o o l i n l i n e w i t h
p l a n e faces o f t r a p e z o i d a l c o r r u g a t i o n s .
3.3.3 D e s i g n l o a d s .
3.3.3.1 T h e d e s i g n l o a d s o n t h e i n n e r b o t t o m
m e m b e r s , sides a n d transverse b u l k h e a d s s h a l l b e
calculated as r e q u i r e d b y 2.2.3, 2.4.3, 2.5.3 a n d 2.7.3
respectively, t a k i n g account o f t h e heaviest o f t h e
anticipated b u l k cargoes, liquid cargo (water ballast)
or e m p t y holds, whichever is appropriate.
3.3.3.2 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e p l a t i n g a n d
f r a m i n g o f t h e h o p p e r side t a n k s l o p e d sides a n d o f
the plates o f t h e transverse b u l k h e a d b o t t o m stools
s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d as r e q u i r e d b y 1.3.4.3 f o r t h e
heaviest o f t h e anticipated b u l k cargoes a n d as r e q u i r e d b y 1.3.4.2 f o r l i q u i d c a r g o , w h i c h e v e r i s a p p r o p r i a t e . I n a n y case, t h e design pressure n e e d n o t
be t a k e n less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (1.3.4.2-4) a n d f o r t h e trapezoidal stools also i n
accordance w i t h 2.7.3.1.
3.3.3.3 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e p l a t i n g a n d
framing o f t h e topside t a n k longitudinal bulkheads
a n d o f t h e plates o f t h e transverse b u l k h e a d t o p
stools o f rectangular o r trapezoidal section shall be
d e t e r m i n e d as r e q u i r e d b y 1.3.4.2 f o r t h e h o l d s
filled
w i t h l i q u i d c a r g o ( w a t e r b a l l a s t ) . I n a n y case, t h e
P a r t II. H u l l
See 797c
137
d e s i g n p r e s s u r e n e e d n o t b e t a k e n less t h a n t h a t d e
termined b y F o r m u l a (1.3.4.2.1-4) a n d f o r t h e t o p
stools also i n accordance w i t h 2.7.3.1.
3.3.3.4 W h e r e t h e h o p p e r s i d e a n d / o r t o p s i d e
tanks, transverse bulkhead b o t t o m and/or t o p stools,
space inside t h e c o f f e r d a m b u l k h e a d s a n d / o r inters k i n space a r e u s e d as tanks, t h e design pressure shall
be d e t e r m i n e d w i t h regard f o r t h e pressure f r o m t h e
i n s i d e a s r e q u i r e d b y 1.3.4.2.
3.3.4.1 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f d o u b l e b o t t o m m e m b e r s
.1 t h e scantlings o f c e n t r e girder, side girders a n d
floors shall b e determined o n t h e basis o f strength
calculation m a d e f o rb o t t o m grillages using design
p r e s s u r e stated i n 3.3.3 a n d t h e f o l l o w i n g p e r m i s s i b l e
stress factors:
for transverse members

k a = 0,65;
.3 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f i n n e r b o t t o m p r i m a r y
members
shall be determined
i n accordance
w i t h 2.4.4.5 a t t h e design pressure i n accordance
w i t h 3.3.3 a n d t h e f o l l o w i n g p e r m i s s i b l e stress fac
tors:
for longitudinals
k = 0,75 a t t h e ship's ends w i t h i n 0 , l L f r o m t h e
fore o r after perpendicular.
above p o r t i o n s o f t h e ship's ends, k shall b e de
termined b y Unear interpolation;
for transverse members
=0,75
3.3.4.2 t h e s c a n t U n g s o f t h e h o p p e r s i d e t a n k
members shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e following require
ments:
.1 t h e thickness o f t h e sloped b u l k h e a d p l a t i n g
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e F o r
m = 15,8;
p = design pressure as defined i n 3.3.3;
k shall be t a k e n as f o r the l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d
plating o f tankers as required b y 2.7.4.1, b u t n o t
m o r e than for the inner b o t t o m plating i n accordance
w i t h 2.4.4.4.1.
T h e b o t t o m strake thickness o f t h e t a n k sloped
b u l k h e a d s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f t h e i n n e r
b o t t o m plate adjacent t o i t . T h e thickness o f other
strakes, i n m m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
B
f o r c e n t r e g i r d e r a n d side girders
= 0,3fcg^0,6 i n t h e midship region, w h e n
d e t e r m i n i n g t h e s h e l l p l a t i n g stresses;
= 0 , 3 5 f c g ^ 0 , 6 i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n , w h e n
d e t e r m i n i n g t h e i n n e r b o t t o m p l a t i n g stresses;
k = 0,6 a t t h e ship's ends w i t h i n 0 , l Lf r o m t h e
above p o r t i o n s o f ship's ends, k shall b e determined
a
for floors
= 0,6;
w h e n t h e strength is verified using t h e shear
stresses,
k = 0,6;
W h e r e combinations o f empty a n d loaded holds
are envisaged, this shall be accounted f o r i n t h e
strength calculation m a d e f o r t h e b o t t o m grillage
w h e n determining t h e r o o t flexibiUty factor o f t h e
centre girder a n d side girders o n t h e b e a r i n g c o n t o u r
Une o fthe grillage. A c c o u n t m a y be t a k e n o fthe e n d
r o o t flexibiUty o f f l o o r s o w i n g t o r o t a t i o n a l stiffness
o f t h e h o p p e r side t a n k s . T h e grillage s h a l l b e t r e a t e d
as a s y s t e m o f c r o s s m e m b e r s ( s t r u c t u r a l i d e a U z a t i o n
using beam models);
.2 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f t h e b o t t o m p r i m a r y
members shall b e determined i n accordance w i t h 2.4.4.5
t a k i n g t h e f o l l o w i n g p e r m i s s i b l e stress factors:
for longitudinals
k = 0,65 a t t h e ship's ends w i t h i n 0 , l L f r o m t h e
above p o r t i o n s o f t h e ship's ends, k shall b e de
termined b y Unear interpolation;
%
smin = ( 7 + 0 , 0 3 5 / ,
(3.3.4.2)
but n o tgreater t h a n t h e b o t t o m strake thickness,

w h e r e n s h a l l b e o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1.1.4.3.
W h e r e t h e h o l d a n d / o r t a n k is used f o r t h e car
riage o f o i l , o i l products o r w a t e r ballast, t h e thick
ness s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n r e q u i r e d b y 3.5.4;
.2 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f p r i m a r y m e m b e r s o f t h e
s l o p e d b u l k h e a d s h a U n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d
i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2 t a k i n g :
m = 1 0f o r transverse stiffeners;
m = 1 2f o r l o n g i t u d i n a l stiffeners;
k shall b e t a k e n as f o r t h e b u l k h e a d stiffeners o f
tankers as specified i n 2.7.4.2, b u t n o t m o r e t h a n f o r
the inner b o t t o m p r i m a r y members i n accordance
w i t h 3.3.4.1.3.
T h e l o n g i t u d i n a l stiffeners shall c o m p l y w i t h buck
l i n g strength r e q u i r e m e n t s , as specified i n 1.6.5.2;
a
138
Rules
.3 t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e d i a p h r a g m p l a t i n g s h a l l
n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f t h e a b u t t i n g p l a t e f l o o r s .
Stiffening o f t h e diaphragms w i t h openings shall
c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements f o r stiffeners o f t h e
floors, as specified i n 1.7.3.1.
T h e thickness o fplating a n d t h e scantUngs o f t h e
stiffening f r a m i n g members o f t h e watertight dia
phragms shall comply w i t h the requirements f o r the
t a n k b u l k h e a d s as specified i n 2.7.4.1 a n d 2.7.4.2.
3.3.4.3 W h e r e t h e f r a m e ends a r e a t t a c h e d d i
rectly t o t h e sloped bulkheads o f tanks ( w i t h o u t
transition h o r i z o n t a l area), t h e section m o d u l u s
a t s u p p o r t s e c t i o n W , i n c m , s h a l l b e n o t less
than:
3
sup
= Vcos a
sup
(3.3.4.3)
where
Wo = s e c t i o n m o d u l u s a t t h e f r a m e s u p p o r t s e c t i o n a s
r e q u i r e d b y 2.5.5.1, i n c m ;
<x = s l o p e a n g l e o f t h e t a n k b u l k h e a d t o t h e b a s e l i n e , i n d e g .
3
3.3.4.4 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f t h e f r a m e s s h a l l b e i n
accordance w i t h t h e requirements o f2.5.4.1 a n d w i t h
. 1 t h e t h i c k n e s s o f f r a m e w e b s j,min, i n m m , s h a l l
s min = W
w
+ 0,03L)
(3.3.4.4.1)
w h e r e k = 1,15 f o r f r a m e w e b s i n w a y o f t h e f o r e m o s t h o l d ;
= 1,0 f o r f r a m e w e b s i n w a y o f o t h e r h o l d s ;
.2 t h e thickness o f t h e b r a c k e t c o n n e c t i n g t h e
l o w e r e n d o f f r a m e t o t h e b i l g e t a n k s h a l l n o t b e less
than that o f the frame w e b o r i
+ 2 mm,
w h i c h e v e r i s greater. T h ethickness o f t h e bracket
connecting the upper end o f frame t o the underdeck
t a n k s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f t h e f r a m e w e b ;
.3 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f t h e f r a m e a n d b r a c k e t
o r integral bracket, a n d associated shell plating, shall
n o t b e less t h a n t w i c e t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s r e q u i r e d
for t h e f r a m e m i d s p a n area.
3.3.4.5 T h e scantUngs o f t h e t o p s i d e t a n k m e m b e r s
shaU c o m p l y w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g requirements:
.1 t h e plating thickness o fthe vertical a n d sloped
b u l k h e a d s o f t h e t o p s i d e t a n k s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
determined b y F o r m u l a (1.6.4.4) taking:
m = 15,8;
k shall be t a k e n as f o r t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d
p l a t i n g o f tankers as specified i n 2.7.4.1.
T h e thickness, i n m m , o f t h e vertical bulkhead
plating a n d o f the adjoining sloped bulkhead plate
w
Jmin = 1 0 + 0 , 0 2 5 L .
(3.3.4.5.1)
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T h e thickness o f o t h e r sloped b u l k h e a d plates shaU

b e n o t less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a ( 2 . 7 . 4 . 1 - 2 ) .
W h e r e t h e h o l d and/or t a n k is used f o r t h e carriage o f
oil, o i l p r o d u c t s o r w a t e r baUast, t h e thickness shaU be
n o t less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d b y 3 . 5 . 4 ;
.2 t h e section m o d u l u s o f l o n g i t u d i n a l stiffeners o f
t h e v e r t i c a l a n d s l o p e d b u l k h e a d s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
t h a t d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2 t a k i n g :
p = design pressure as defined i n 3.3.3, b u t
n o t less t h a n 2 5 k P a ;
m = 12;
k shall be t a k e n as f o r h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners o f
l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s o f t a n k e r s as specified
i n 2.7.4.2.
T h e l o n g i t u d i n a l stiffeners o f t h e vertical a n d
sloped bulkheads shall c o m p l y w i t h buckling strength
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.6.5.2;
.3 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f t h e t r a n s v e r s e w e b o f
t h e s l o p e d b u l k h e a d s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h a t d e
t e r m i n a t e d i n 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2, a n d t h e s e c t i o n a l
a r e a o f t h e w e b p l a t e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e
t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.4.3 t a k i n g :
-Nmax =
0,5pal;
p = d e s i g n l o a d s a s d e f i n e d i n 3 . 3 . 3 , b u t n o t less
than 25 kPa;
m = 10;
k^
k 0,75;
.4 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s a n d s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f t h e
deck transverse w e b inside t h e t a n k shall c o m p l y w i t h
the requirements o f 2.6.4.6.
T h e section m o d u l u s a n d sectional area o f t h e
side t r a n s v e r s e w e b inside t h e t a n k s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h
the requirements o f 2.5.4.5 a t m = 10.
T h e section m o d u l u s a n d sectional area o fvertical
w e b plate o f t h e t a n k vertical b u l k h e a d shaU be calcu
lated as the m e a n o f these values f o r the deck transverse
a n d transverse w e b o f t h e sloped bulkhead;
.5 t h e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s o f b u l k h e a d s i n s i d e t h e
t a n k s fitted i n U n e w i t h t h e h o l d t r a n s v e r s e b u l k h e a d s
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f t h e l a t t e r a t t h e s a m e
distance f r o m t h e inner b o t t o m plating. Stiffening o f
bulkhead plating shall comply w i t h the requirements
o f 2.7.4.2 f o r t h e t a n k p r i m a r y members;
.6 t h e thickness o f brackets stiffening t h e t a n k
vertical bulkhead a n d o f brackets fitted a t t h e l o w e r
c o r n e r o f t h e t a n k s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 1 0 m m .
3.3.4.6 I n a n y case, t h eh o l d b u l k h e a d p l a t i n g a n d
c o r r u g a t i o n s s h a U h a v e a t h i c k n e s s n o t less t h a n 1 0 m m .
T h e height o ftop rectangular (trapezoidal) stool,
b o t t o m trapezoidal stool a n d o f double b o t t o m is n o t
included i n t h e span o f t h e h o l d bulkhead vertical
corrugations.
3.3.4.7 T h e scantlings o f t h e transverse b u l k h e a d
lower trapezoidal stool members shall comply w i t h
a
P a r t II. H u l l
.1 t h e thickness o f the h o r i z o n t a l a n d sloped p l a t e

s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r
m = 15,8;
= 0,9.
T h e thickness o fh o r i z o n t a l plate a n d t o p strake
o f t h e s l o p e d p l a t e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f t h e
corrugation adjoining t h e stool. T h e thickness o f the
b o t t o m s t r a k e o f t h e s l o p e d p l a t e s h a l l n o t b e less
than that o f t h e inner b o t t o m plating. T h e thickness
o f o t h e r s t a k e s o f t h e s l o p e d p l a t e s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n that determined b y F o r m u l a (3.3.4.2). W h e r e
the h o l d and/or stool isused for the carriage o f oil, o i l
products o r w a t e r ballast, t h e thickness shall be
n o t less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d b y 3.5.4;
.2 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f t h e s l o p e d p l a t e s t i f
f e n e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d i n a c
c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2 t a k i n g :
m = 10;
= 0,75.
T h e section m o d u l u s o f t h e h o r i z o n t a l p l a t e stif
f e n e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f t h e s l o p e d p l a t e
stiffeners;
.3 t h e t h i c k n e s s o f d i a p h r a g m s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
t h a t o f side g i r d e r s . S i z e o f t h e o p e n i n g s c u t i n d i a
phragms a n d their reinforcement shall c o m p l y w i t h the
requirements f o r openings a n d reinforcement o f the
h o p p e r side t a n k d i a p h r a g m s a s s p e c i f i e d i n 3 . 3 . 4 . 2 . 3 .
3.3.4.8 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f t h e t r a n s v e r s e b u l k h e a d
top rectangular o r trapezoidal stool members shall
.1 t h e thickness o f t h e h o r i z o n t a l a n d v e r t i c a l ( o r
s l o p e d ) p l a t e s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d
by F o r m u l a (1.6.4.4) taking:
m = 15,8;
k a = 0,9.
T h e thickness o f t h e horizontal plate a n d b o t t o m
strake o f t h e v e r t i c a l ( s l o p e d ) p l a t e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
that o f the corrugation adjoining the top stool. W h e r e t h e
vertical plate is fitted i n line w i t h the hatch e n d coaming,
its t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n that o f this c o a m i n g as
required b y 3.3.4.11. T h e t o p strake o f the sloped plate
shall have t h e same thickness provided that its upper
edge i s a t a distance o f less t h a n 0 , 4 m f r o m t h e h a t c h
e n d c o a m i n g . I n a n y case, t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e v e r t i c a l o r
s l o p e d p l a t e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d b y
F o r m u l a (2.7.4.1-2). W h e r e t h e h o l d and/or interior o f
the top stool is used f o r the carriage o f oil, o i l products o r
w a t e r ballast, t h e t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t
required b y 3.5.4;
.2 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f t h e s t i f f e n e r s o f v e r t i c a l
o r s l o p e d p l a t e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d
a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2 t a k i n g :
139
p = design pressure as defined i n 3.3.3, b u t n o t

less t h a n 2 5 k P a ;
m = 12 f o rh o r i z o n t a l stiffeners;
m = 10 f o r o t h e r stiffeners;
= 0,75.
T h e section m o d u l u s o f t h e stiffeners o f h o r i
z o n t a l p l a t e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f t h e s t i f f e n e r s
o f vertical o r sloped plate;
.3 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f t h e v e r t i c a l o r s l o p e d
plate w e b t o be fitted w h e r e h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners are
p r o v i d e d , a s s t a t e d i n 3 . 3 . 2 . 1 1 . 2 , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
t h a t d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2, w h i l e t h e
s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f t h e w e b p l a t e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.4.3 t a k i n g :
-Nmax =
0,5pal;
than 25 kPa;
m = 10;
k a = K = 0,75.
T h e section scantUngs o f webs fitted o n t h e h o r
i z o n t a l p l a t e a n d u n d e r t h e d e c k s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
those required f o rt h e vertical (sloped) plate web;
.4 t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e b r a c k e t s f i t t e d i n s i d e t h e
top stool t o ensure efficient upper e n d attachment o f
c o r r u g a t i o n s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f t h e s e c o r
rugations i n the upper part o fthe bulkhead.
3.3.4.9 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f t h e c o f f e r d a m b u l k h e a d
members shall c o m p l y w i t h the following require
ments:
.1 t h e thickness o f t h e c o f f e r d a m b u l k h e a d p l a t
i n g s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r
m = 15,8;
k a = 0,9.
T h e p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t
determined b y F o r m u l a (2.7.4.1-2) o r according
t o 3.3.4.6, w h i c h e v e r is t h egreater. W h e r e t h eh o l d o r
interior o f the cofferdam bulkhead is used f o r the
carriage o f o i l , o i l products o r w a t e r ballast, t h e
p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d
b y 3.5.4;
.2 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f p r i m a r y m e m b e r s s t i f
fening the plating o f cofferdam bulkheads shall
n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d f r o m
1.6.4.1
a n d 1.6.4.2 t a k i n g :
p = design pressure as defined i n 3.3.3 b u t n o t
less t h a n 2 5 k P a ;
m = 12;
k a = 0,75;
.3 w h e r e t h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f t h e c o f f e r d a m
bulkhead incorporates only diaphragms o r only
p l a t f o r m s , t h e i r s e c t i o n m o d u l u s s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.2, a n d
t h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a i s n o t less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d
f r o m 1.6.4.3 t a k i n g :
140
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T h e w i d t h o f t h e c o a m i n g face p l a t e s h a l l c o m p l y
-Nmax = 0,5pal f o r p l a t f o r m s ,
w i t h the requirements o f 1.7.3.1.
-Nmax = 0,65pal
for diaphragms;
3.3.4.11 T h e thickness o fsingle-side shell p l a t i n g
than 25 kPa;
located between hopper a n dupper w i n g tanks shall
n o t b e less t h a n j , i n m m , d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r
/ = span, i n m , equal to:
mula
for diaphragms the distance between the deck
plating a n d inner b o t t o m plating, a t the centreUne;
(3.3.4.11)
f o r p l a t f o r m s t h e s h i p ' s b r e a d t h i n w a y o f Jmi = V c o n s t r u c t i o n b u l k h e a d f o r ships h a v i n g single s k i n
side c o n s t r u c t i o n , t h e distance b e t w e e n t h e i n n e r
3.3.5 Special requirements.
s k i n s f o r ships h a v i n g d o u b l e s k i n side c o n s t r u c t i o n ;
3.3.5.1 P r o v i s i o n shaU b e m a d e f o r a n efficient
corrosion protection coating (epoxy coating o r equiva
m = 10;
lent) f o r a U i n t e r n a l surfaces o f t h e cargo h o l d s , e x c l u d
K
= K = 0,75;
ing the flat t a n k t o p areas a n d the hopper tanks sloping
.4 w h e r e t h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f t h e c o f f e r d a m
plating, approximately 300 m m below the toe o f frame
b u l k h e a d consists b o t h t h e diaphragms a n d plat
brackets a n d f o r a U i n t e r n a l a n d e x t e r n a l surfaces o f
forms, their thickness shall be determined o n t h e
h a t c h coamings a n d h a t c h covers. I n t h e selection o f
basis o f t h e c a l c u l a t i o n o f t h e grillage as a system
coating d u e consideration shaU be given t o intended
u s i n g b e a m m o d e l s , w i t h t h e l o a d s specified i n 3.3.3
c a r g o c o n d i t i o n s expected i n service.
b u t n o t less t h a n 2 5 k P a a n d t h e p e r m i s s i b l e stress
factors k a = k = 0,75;
3.3.5.2 A U the b u l k carriers a n d c o m b i n a t i o n car
riers contracted f o r c o n s t r u c t i o n o n o r after 1 J u l y 2003
.5 i n a n y case, t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e c o f f e r d a m
shaU c o m p l y w i t h the f o U o w i n g requirements:
b u l k h e a d d i a p h r a g m s a n d p l a t f o r m s s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n that determined b y F o r m u l a (2.5.4.8.1). W h e r e
.1 t h e ships shall h a v e t h e forecastle located
the interior o f the cofferdam bulkhead is used as a
a b o v e t h e f r e e b o a r d deck. I n case t h e a b o v e r e
fuel o i l o r ballast tank, t h e thickness o f t h e dia
quirement hinders hatch cover operation, thea f t
p h r a g m s a n d p l a t f o r m s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t
b u l k h e a d o f t h e f o r e c a s t l e m a y b e fitted f o r w a r d o f
r e q u i r e d b y 3.5.4;
the f o r w a r d bulkhead o f t h e foremost cargo h o l d
p r o v i d e d t h e f o r e c a s t l e l e n g t h i s n o t less t h a n
.6 stiffening o f t h e d i a p h r a g m s a n d p l a t f o r m s
7 p e r cent o f ship length abaft t h ef o r w a r d perpen
s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.7.3.2.2;
dicular w h e r e t h e ship length - refer t o 1.2.1, P a r t I
.7 t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t i g h t p o r t i o n s o f t h e d i a
"General" o f the Load Line Rules f o r Sea-Going
p h r a g m s a n d p l a t f o r m s a n d their stiffeners shall
Ships. T h e forecastle shall h a v e a t least a s t a n d a r d
c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f2.7.4.1 a n d 2.7.4.2
h
eight according t o the International C o n v e n t i o n o n
for tank bulkheads;
L
o a d Lines, 1966 as amended b ythe P r o t o c o l o f 1988
.8 cross ties b e t w e e n t h e p r i m a r y m e m b e r s
o
r
shall be b y 0,5 m above t h e f o r w a r d hatch-end
strengthening t h e cofferdam bulkhead plating shall
c
o
a
m i n g o f the fore h o l d N o . 1, w h i c h e v e r is greater.
comply w i t h the requirements for the double b o t t o m
I
n
t
h i s case, t h e distance b e t w e e n t h e a f t edge o f t h e
i n t e r m e d i a t e struts, as specified i n 2.4.4.7 w i t h t h e
f
o
r
e
castle deck a n d t h e f o r w a r d hatch-end c o a m i n g
design pressure d e t e r m i n e d according t o 3.3.3, b u t
o
f
t
h
e fore h o l d N o . 1 over the entire breadth o f the
n o t less t h a n 2 5 k P a .
s
h
i
p
'
s
h u l l shall n o t exceed t h e value, i n m , de
W h e r e cross ties are fitted, the section m o d u l u s o f
t
e
r
m
i
n
e
d b y the f o r m u l a
the p r i m a r y m e m b e r s , as specified i n 3.3.4.9.2, m a y
be reduced b y 3 5 p e r cent.
IF = y j H - H
(3.3.5.2.1)
3.3.4.10 T h e thickness o f t h e h a t c h coamings
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r
where H = forecastle height, i n m ;
m u l a (3.3.4.4.1).
H
= height o f the forward hatch-end coaming o f the fore hold
N o . 1, i n m .
T h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e h a t c h side c o a m i n g s , i n m m ,
N o breakwater is a l l o w e d o n the forecastle deck
for protection o f the f o r w a r d hatch-end coaming and
s =
(3.3.4.10)
h a t c h covers o f the fore h o l d N o . 1. H o w e v e r , i f fitted
for other purposes, the breakwater shall be placed a t
where a = vertical distance b e t w e e n horizontal stiffeners o n
a distance o f a t least 2,75 i t s h e i g h t a l o n g t h e cenc o a m i n g plate o r b e t w e e n t h e l o w e r stiffener a n d t h e
deck plating, in m .
terUne f r o m the aft edge o f the forecastle deck;
Stiffening o f t h e c o a m i n g plates shall c o m p l y
.2 a net thickness ( n o w e a r allowance) o f h a t c h c o a m
w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.7.3.2. T h e t h i c k n e s s o f
i n g s s h a U n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
c o a m i n g p l a t e s t i f f e n e r s a n d b r a c k e t s s h a l l n o t b e less
than 10 m m .
s
= 14,9 /1,15^ /0,95^
(3.3.5.2.2)
See 796c
m i n
See 796c
net
See 794c
141
P a r t II. H u l l
w h e r e a = distance b e t w e e n stiffeners, i n m ;
Pcoam
p r e s s u r e e q u a l t o 220 k P a ; i f t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3.5.2.1 a r e
not met, the pressure for the forward hatch-end coaming o f
t h e f o r e h o l d N o . 1 s h a l l b e a s s u m e d e q u a l t o 290 k P a .
=
T h e n e t t h i c k n e s s i n c r e a s e d b y 1,5 m m s h a l l
be t a k e n as t h em i n i m u m c o n s t r u c t i o n thickness.
I n a n y e v e n t , t h e c o a m i n g t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t b e less
than 11 m m ;
.3 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d t r a n s
verse stiffeners o f h a t c h c o a m i n g s a t t h e n e t thickness o f
a l l s e c t i o n e l e m e n t s , i n c m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
determined b y theformula
3
W.
l,l5aPp
J
' coam
.1Q-*
0,95mc R
p
(3.3.5.2.3)
eH
w h e r e f o r a a n d p a m , refer t o 3.3.5.2.2;
/ = stiffener span, m ;
m = coefficientequal to:
16 - f o r s n i p p e d s t i f f e n e r e n d s ;
12 - i n w a y o f h a t c h c o r n e r s ;
c = plastic-to-elastic section m o d u l u s ratio f o r a stiffener
w i t h a n effective flange 4 0 ^ wide, w h e r e s
= net
thickness o f a coaming. I f precise data a r e lacking,
c m a y b e a s s u m e d e q u a l t o 1,16.
C O
The n e t thickness o f a l l cross-section elements

i n c r e a s e d b y 1,5 m m s h a l l b e t a k e n a s t h e m i n i m u m
construction thickness;
.4 s t a y s ( b r a c k e t s ) o f h a t c h c o a m i n g s s h a l l c o m
ply w i t h t h e following requirements:
the section m o d u l u s o f stays (brackets) i n t h e plane
o f beams w i t h a n e t thickness o f a l l section elements
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
(3.3.5.2.4-1)
0,95Re
where a = distance b e t w e e n stays i nthe plane o f beams, i n m ;

f o r Pcoam, refer t o 3.3.5.2.2;
H = height o fa hatch coaming, i n m .
c
I n determination o f the actual section modulus,

t h e face p l a t e o f t h e c o a m i n g stay m a y b e c o n s i d e r e d
only w h e n i t is welded t o t h e deck plating w i t h full
penetration a n d appropriately dimensioned stiffen
ers, knees o r b r a c k e t s a r e f i t t e d i n i t s p l a n e u n d e r t h e
plating. T h e n e t thickness o f a w e b o f stays i n t h e
p l a n e o f b e a m s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d
by theformula
\
0,5hRe
S n e t
(3.3.5.2.4-2)
where h = depth o fa stay w e ba tits attachment t o deck plating,

in m m ;
f o r a a n d H , r e f e r t o F o r m u l a (3.3.5.2.4-1);
f o r Pcoam, refer t o 3.3.5.2.2.
c
The n e t thickness o f a l l cross-section elements

i n c r e a s e d b y 1,5 m m s h a l l b e t a k e n a s t h e m i n i m u m
construction thickness.
S t r e n g t h calculations f o r stays o f f t h e plane o f
b e a m s a r e subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e
R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case. T h e p e r m i s s i b l e stresses i n
those calculations shall be assumed equal t o 0,8

a n d 0 , 4 6 t h e steel y i e l d stress f o r n o r m a l a n d shear
stresses a c c o r d i n g l y .
The stay w e b shall be j o i n e d t o deck plating b y a
double c o n t i n u o u s w e l d h a v i n g a n effective t h r o a t
t h i c k n e s s n o t less t h a n 0 , 4 4 J w h e r e s i s t h e m i n i m u m
c o n s t r u c t i o n thickness o f t h e stay w e b , m m . A t least
15 p e r c e n t o f t h e w e l d l e n g t h t h e r e w i t h b e g i n n i n g a t
the "free" e n d o f t h e stay shall be m a d e w i t h deep
penetration (double-bevel preparation).
The strength o f underdeck structures t a k i n g for
ces f r o m c o a m i n g s t a y s s h a l l b e c h e c k e d a g a i n s t
p e r m i s s i b l e n o r m a l a n d s h e a r stresses e q u a l t o 0 , 9 5
a n d 0 , 5 t h e steel y i e l d stress a c c o r d i n g l y ;
.5 l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d t r a n s v e r s e stiffeners, stays
and plate elements o f cargo hatch coamings shall be
replaced i f t h e actual residual thickness o f t h e
c o a m i n g e l e m e n t i s l e s s t h a n t + 0 , 5 m m .
W h e r e t h e actual residual thickness is greater
than t
+ 0 , 5 m m , b u t less t h a n t
+ 1,0 m m ,
a protective coating instead o f replacement m a y be
applied i n accordance w i t h t h e manufacturer's pro
cedure o r a n n u a l measurements o ft h e actual residual
thickness m a y be conducted. I f the coating is applied,
it shall be maintained i nG O O D technical condition
(refer t o 1.1.2.10, P a r t I I I " A d d i t i o n a l S u r v e y s o f
Ships Depending o n T h e i r Purpose a n d H u l l M a t e
rial" o f the Rules f o r the Classification Surveys o f
Ships i n Service).
et
net
net
3.3.6 S t r e n g t h c o n t r o l d u r i n g s h i p l o a d i n g .
3.3.6.1 O r e c a r r i e r s a n d c o m b i n a t i o n c a r r i e r s o f
150 m length a n d m o r e shall be provided w i t h a n ap
proved L o a d i n g M a n u a l a n d t h e Register-approved
loading instrument o f a n approved type.
3.3.6.2 L o a d i n g M a n u a l i s a d o c u m e n t a p p r o v e d
b y t h e Register, w h i c h describes:
.1 t h e l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s o n w h i c h t h e d e s i g n o f
the ship h a s been based, including permissible limits
o f still w a t e r b e n d i n g m o m e n t s a n d shear forces;
.2 t h e r e s u l t s o f t h e c a l c u l a t i o n s o f s t i l l w a t e r
bending m o m e n t s , shear forces a n d w h e r e applicable,
limitations d u e t o torsional loads;
.3 e n v e l o p e r e s u l t s a n d p e r m i s s i b l e l i m i t s o f s t i l l
w a t e r bending m o m e n t s a n d shear forces i nt h e h o l d
f l o o d e d c o n d i t i o n according t o 3.3.5.2;
.4 t h e c a r g o h o l d s o r c o m b i n a t i o n o f c a r g o h o l d s
that m i g h t be empty a t full draught. I f n o cargo h o l d
is a l l o w e d t o b e e m p t y a t f u l l d r a u g h t , t h i s s h a l l b e
clearly stated i n t h e L o a d i n g M a n u a l ;
.5 m a x i m u m a l l o w a b l e a n d m i n i m u m r e q u i r e d
mass o f cargo a n d double b o t t o m contents o f each
h o l d as a f u n c t i o n o f t h e d r a u g h t a t m i d - h o l d posi
tion;
.6 m a x i m u m a l l o w a b l e a n d m i n i m u m r e q u i r e d
mass o f cargo a n d double b o t t o m contents o f a n y
two adjacent holds as a f u n c t i o n o fthe m e a n draught
See 794c
See 794c
142
Rules
in w a y o f these holds. T h i s m e a n draught m a y be

calculated b y averaging t h e draught o f t h e t w o m i d hold positions;
.7 m a x i m u m a l l o w a b l e t a n k t o p l o a d i n g t o g e t h e r
w i t h specification o f the nature o f the cargo (density o r
stowage factor) f o r cargoes o t h e r t h a n b u l k cargoes;
.8 m a x i m u m a l l o w a b l e l o a d o n deck a n d h a t c h
covers. I f t h e ship is n o t approved t o carry l o a d o n
deck o r hatch covers, this shall be clearly stated i n t h e
Loading Manual;
.9 t h e m a x i m u m r a t e o f b a l l a s t c h a n g e t o g e t h e r
w i t h t h e advice that a l o a d p l a n shall be agreed w i t h
the t e r m i n a l o n t h e basis o f t h e achievable rates o f
change o f ballast.
3.3.6.3 I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s g i v e n
in 1.4.3.1.1, t h e f o l l o w i n g conditions, subdivided i n t o
d e p a r t u r e a n d a r r i v a l c o n d i t i o n s as a p p r o p r i a t e , shall
be included i n t h e L o a d i n g M a n u a l :
.1 a l t e r n a t e l i g h t a n d h e a v y c a r g o l o a d i n g c o n ditions at m a x i m u m draught, w h e r e applicable;
.2 h o m o g e n e o u s l i g h t a n d h e a v y c a r g o l o a d i n g
conditions at m a x i m u m draught;
.3 b a l l a s t c o n d i t i o n s . F o r s h i p s h a v i n g b a l l a s t
holds adjacent t o double b o t t o m tanks, i t shall be
strengthwise acceptable that t h e ballast holds are
filled w h e n double b o t t o m tanks are empty;
.4 s h o r t v o y a g e c o n d i t i o n s w h e r e t h e v e s s e l s h a l l
be loaded t o m a x i m u m d r a u g h t b u t w i t h limited
amount o f bunkers;
.5 m u l t i p l e p o r t l o a d i n g / u n l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s ;
.6 d e c k c a r g o c o n d i t i o n s , w h e r e a p p l i c a b l e ;
.7 t y p i c a l l o a d i n g s e q u e n c e s w h e r e t h e v e s s e l i s
loaded f r o m commencement o f cargo loading t o
reaching full deadweight capacity, f o r h o m o g e n e o u s
conditions, relevant part l o a d conditions a n d alternate conditions w h e r e applicable. Typical u n l o a d i n g
sequences f o r these conditions shall also be included.
T h e typical l o a d i n g / u n l o a d i n g sequences shall also be
developed t o n o t exceed applicable strength l i m i t a tions. T h e typical l o a d i n g sequences shall also be
developed paying d u e attention t o loading rate a n d
the deballasting capability;
.8 t y p i c a l sequences f o r c h a n g e o f ballast a t sea,
where applicable.
3.3.6.4 A l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t i s a n a p p r o v e d d i g i t a l
s y s t e m a s d e f i n e d i n 1.4.9.4. I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s i n 1.4.9.4, i t s h a l l a s c e r t a i n a s a p p l i c a b l e t h a t :
.1 t h e m a s s o f c a r g o a n d d o u b l e b o t t o m c o n t e n t s
i n w a y o f each h o l d as a f u n c t i o n o f t h e d r a u g h t a t
mid-hold position;
.2 t h e m a s s o f c a r g o a n d d o u b l e b o t t o m c o n t e n t s
o f a n y t w o adjacent h o l d s as a f u n c t i o n o f t h e m e a n
draught i n w a y o f these holds;
.3 t h e s t i l l w a t e r b e n d i n g m o m e n t a n d s h e a r
forces i n t h e h o l d flooded conditions according
to 3.3.5.2;
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
are w i t h i n permissible values.

3.3.6.5 C o n d i t i o n s o f a p p r o v a l o f l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t s , a s s t a t e d i n 1.4.9.4, s h a l l i n c l u d e t h e f o l l o w i n g :
.1 a c c e p t a n c e o f h u l l g i r d e r b e n d i n g m o m e n t
limits f o rall read-out points;
.2 a c c e p t a n c e o f h u l l g i r d e r s h e a r f o r c e l i m i t s f o r
all read-out points;
.3 a c c e p t a n c e o f l i m i t s f o r m a s s o f c a r g o a n d d o u b l e
b o t t o m contents o f each h o l d as a f u n c t i o n o f d r a u g h t ;
.4 a c c e p t a n c e o f l i m i t s f o r m a s s o f c a r g o a n d
d o u b l e b o t t o m contents i n a n y t w o adjacent h o l d s as
a function o f draught.
3.4 O R E C A R R I E R S A N D O R E O R O I L C A R R I E R S
3.4.1 G e n e r a l .
ships f o r t h e carriage o f o r e a n d other b u l k cargoes,
as w e l l as t o c o m b i n a t i o n c a r r i e r s f o r t r a n s p o r t a t i o n
of ore a n d oil (petroleum products).
3.4.1.2 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r s t r u c t u r e s n o t
m e n t i o n e d i n t h i s C h a p t e r s h a l l b e as stated i n Sect i o n s 1 a n d 2 , h a v i n g r e g a r d t o t h o s e c o n t a i n e d i n 3.3
as r e g a r d s s t r u c t u r e s e x p o s e d t o t h e l o a d s f r o m h e a v y
dry b u l k a n d liquid cargoes.
I n a n y case, t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e h u l l a n d i t s
s t r u c t u r e s s h a l l n o t b e less s t r i n g e n t a s t h o s e o f Sections 1 a n d2.
3.4.1.3 T h e b a s i c s t r u c t u r a l t y p e o f a s h i p i s c o n sidered t o b e a single deck ship, w i t h m a c h i n e r y aft,
having longitudinal bulkheads separating the centre o r e
compartment f r o m the wing tanks a n da double b o t t o m
t h r o u g h o u t t h e entire breadth o fthe ship o r t h e centre
part between the longitudinal bulkheads.
mark (ESP).
3.4.1.4.1 T h e d e s c r i p t i v e n o t a t i o n O r e c a r r i e r
to sea-going self-propelled single deck ships h a v i n g
two longitudinal bulkheads a n d a double b o t t o m
t h r o u g h o u t t h e cargo region a n d intended f o r t h e
carriage o f o r e cargoes i n t h e center holds only.
A typical m i d s h i p section is given i n F i g . 3.4.1.4.1.
F i g . 3.4.1.4.1
P a r t II. H u l l
143
3.4.1.4.2 C o m b i n a t i o n c a r r i e r i s a g e n e r a l t e r m
applied t o ships i n t e n d e d f o rt h e carriage o f b o t h o i l
a n d d r y cargoes i n b u l k ; these cargoes a r e n o t carried
simultaneously, w i t h the exception o f o i l retained i n
slop tanks.
3.4.1.4.3 T h e d e s c r i p t i v e n o t a t i o n O r e / O i l c a r r i e r
t o sea-going self-propelled single deck ships h a v i n g
two longitudinal bulkheads a n d a double b o t t o m
t h r o u g h o u t t h e cargo region a n d intended f o r the
carriage o f o r e cargoes i n t h e centre holds o r o f o i l
cargoes i n centre holds a n d w i n g tanks. T y p i c a l
m i d s h i p sections a r e given i n F i g . 3.4.1.4.3.
3.4.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
3.4.2.1 T h e d e c k a n d b o t t o m ( d o u b l e b o t t o m ) s h a l l
be l o n g i t u d i n a l l y f r a m e d . T h e side shell a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l
bulkheads m a y , i n general, be f r a m e d either l o n g itudinally o r transversely. D e c k plating between e n d
coamings o f adjacent cargo hatches shall be strengthened
b y transverse stiffeners as r e q u i r e d b y 3.3.2.1.
Transverse bulkheads m a y be plane w i t h stiffeners a r r a n g e d v e r t i c a l l y , c o r r u g a t e d w i t h v e r t i c a l corrugations o r o f a cofferdam type.
3.4.2.2 F l o o r s i n t h e c e n t r e h o l d a n d i n t h e w i n g
tanks shall be aligned a n d t o form, i n conjunction
w i t h side transverses, v e r t i c a l w e b s o f l o n g i t u d i n a l
bulkheads a n d deck transverses, a single transverse
ring structure.
3.4.2.3 W h e r e t r a n s v e r s e b u l k h e a d s i n t h e w i n g
tanks are n o t aligned w i t h centre h o l d bulkheads,
transverse ring structures shall be fitted i n line w i t h
the latter bulkheads.
I n t h i s case, p r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e i n t h e w i n g
tanks f o r a s m o o t h tapering o fthe sloped bulkheads o f
trapezoidal stools fitted under centre h o l d bulkheads.
3.4.2.4 L o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s s h a l l , i n g e n e r a l ,
be plane w i t h h o r i z o n t a l o r v e r t i c a l stiffening.
L o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads m a y be slightly sloped o r
to have a knuckle.
3.4.2.5 W h e r e a d o u b l e b o t t o m i n w i n g t a n k s i s
omitted, floors shall be backed b y substantial knees
o r b r a c k e t s fitted i n l i n e w i t h t h e i n n e r b o t t o m p l a t ing o f t h e centre h o l d .
3.4.2.6 D i a p h r a g m s s h a l l b e fitted i n l i n e w i t h t h e
longitudinal bulkheads inside t h e b o t t o m trapezoidal
stools a n d t o p stools o f rectangular o r trapezoidal
// /
sections. T h e d i a p h r a g m s o f t h e b o t t o m stools shall

c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 3.3.2.10.3, t h e diaphragms o f t h e t o p stools w i t h t h e requirements
f o r t h e topside t a n k b u l k h e a d s as specified i n 3.3.2.3.
3.4.3 D e s i g n l o a d s .
3.4.3.1 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n t h e c e n t r e h o l d
boundary structures shall be determined according
t o 1.3.4.3 a s s u m i n g t h a t t h e c e n t r e h o l d i s l o a d e d
w i t h ore o r other heavy b u l k cargo.
3.4.3.2 S t r u c t u r e s w h i c h a r e l i k e l y t o b e s u b j e c t e d
to one-sided pressure o f a Uquid cargo (ballast water)
shall be e x a m i n e d f o r t h e design pressure o fthe Uquid
c a r g o as r e q u i r e d b y 1.3.4.2.
3.4.4.1 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s o f t h e
c a r g o spaces i n t e n d e d o n l y f o r t h e c a r r i a g e o f b u l k c a r goes o r b u l k cargoes a n d oil, o i l products o r w a t e r ballast
shaU c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f S e c t i o n 2 a n d 3.3.4.
T h e scantlings o f structural m e m b e r s o f the cargo
spaces i n t e n d e d o n l y f o r t h e carriage o f o i l , o i l p r o ducts o r w a t e r ballast shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirem e n t s o f Section 2 a n d 3.5.4.
3.4.4.2 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d
m e m b e r s shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.7.4
at t h e design pressure defined i n 3.4.3.
I n a n y case, t h e t h i c k n e s s o f l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d p l a t i n g s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d
by F o r m u l a (3.3.4.5.1) o r , where o i l , o i l products o r
water ballast is carried i n a n yc o m p a r t m e n t bounded
b y t h a t b u l k h e a d , i t s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d b y 3.5.4, w h i c h e v e r is t h e greater.
3.4.4.3 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f s t r u c t u r a l i t e m s o f d i a phragms o f transverse bulkhead b o t t o m trapezoidal
stool, fitted i n Une w i t h t h e longitudinal bulkheads,
shaU c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3.4.7.3.
3.4.4.4 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f s t r u c t u r a l i t e m s o f d i a phragms o f transverse bulkhead t o p stool, fitted i n
Une w i t h l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads, shall c o m p l y w i t h
the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3.4.5.5 f o r t h e transverse
bulkheads inside t h e topside tanks.
3.4.5.1 A U o r e c a r r i e r s s h a U h a v e t h e f o r e c a s t l e l o cated a b o v e t h e freeboard deck. T h e forecastle arrangement a n d dimensions, as w e U as t h e thickness a n d
scantUngs o f stiffeners a n d plate elements o f cargo h a t c h
c o a m i n g s shaU m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3.5.2.
J.
F i g . 3.4.1.4.3
144
Rules
3.5 T A N K E R S
3.5.1 G e n e r a l .
3.5.1.1 T h e requirements o f t h i s C h a p t e r a p p l y t o
tankers, c h e m i c a l tankers, as w e l l as t o o i l recovery ships
a n d gas carriers, as applicable, w i t h m a c h i n e r y a f t ,
h a v i n g a single o r a d o u b l e b o t t o m a r r a n g e m e n t a n d
one, t w o o r three longitudinal bulkheads. H u l l structural
members o f tankers n o t covered b y this Chapter shall
c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f Sections 1 a n d 2.
Double hull o i ltankers o f 150 m a n d over i n
length, w h i c h contract f o r construction is signed o n
1 A p r i l 2006 o r later, shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e require
ments o f o f Part X V I I I " C o m m o n Structural Rules
f o r D o u b l e H u l l O i l T a n k e r s " (refer also t o 1.1.1.1).
mark (ESP).
3.5.1.2.1 T h e d e s c r i p t i v e n o t a t i o n O i l t a n k e r a n d t h e
distinguishing m a r k ( E S P ) shall be assigned t o sea-going
self-propelled ships h a v i n g i n t e g r a l t a n k s a n d i n t e n d e d
for t h e carriage o f o i l i n bulk. T h e above m e n t i o n e d
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
descriptive n o t a t i o n a n d distinguishing m a r k shall be

assigned t o t a n k e r s o f b o t h single a n d d o u b l e s k i n side
c o n s t r u c t i o n , as w e l l as t a n k e r s w i t h alternative struc
t u r a l a r r a n g e m e n t s , e.g. m i d - d e c k designs. T y p i c a l m i d
ship sections a r e g i v e n i n F i g . 3.5.1.2.1.
3.5.1.2.2 T h e d e s c r i p t i v e n o t a t i o n C h e m i c a l t a n k e r
a n d t h e distinguishing m a r k ( E S P ) shall be assigned t o
sea-going self-propelled ships h a v i n g i n t e g r a l t a n k s i n
tended f o r t h e carriage o f chemicals i n bulk. T h i s de
scriptive n o t a t i o n shall be assigned t o tankers o f b o t h
single o r d o u b l e s k i n side c o n s t r u c t i o n , as w e l l as t a n k e r s
w i t h alternative structural arrangements. Typical m i d
ship sections a r e g i v e n i n F i g . 3.5.1.2.2.
3.5.2 S t r u c t u r a l c o n f i g u r a t i o n .
3.5.2.1 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f t h e c o f f e r d a m s s h a l l b e
determined according t o 2.7.5.2.
3.5.2.2 L o n g i t u d i n a l c o r r u g a t e d b u l k h e a d s a r e
p e r m i t t e d i n ships u n d e r 1 8 0m i n length.
Longitudinal corrugated bulkheads shall have
horizontally arranged corrugations, a n d their upper
and l o w e r strakes f o r 0 , l D f r o m t h e deck a n d bot
t o m , respectively, shall be plane.
F
"1
i
~1
I
I
I
I
L_..J
A
F i g . 3.5.1.2.2
P a r t II.
Hull
145
I n w a y o f connections between longitudinal and

transverse b u l k h e a d s , c o n t i n u i t y o f s t r e n g t h s h a l l be
m a i n t a i n e d at the t o p a n d b o t t o m strakes o f the
longitudinal bulkheads.
3.5.2.3 T h e deck a n d b o t t o m i n the cargo t a n k
r e g i o n s h a l l be f r a m e d l o n g i t u d i n a l l y , f o r t h e side
shell a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads, l o n g i t u d i n a l o r
transverse f r a m i n g m a y be adopted. T h e deck a n d
b o t t o m o f ships u n d e r 80 m i n l e n g t h m a y be transversely f r a m e d . I t is r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t l o n g i t u d i n a l
f r a m i n g be used f o r side shell a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l
bulkheads o f ships o v e r 180 m i n length. W h e r e the
l o n g i t u d i n a l f r a m i n g is adopted, spacing o f transverse m e m b e r s shall correspond t o t h a t o f b o t t o m
transverses (refer to 2.3.2.4 a n d 2.4.2.5).
3.5.2.4 T h e l o n g i t u d i n a l scantUngs o f deck, b o t t o m , side shell a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s w i t h i n t h e
midship p o r t i o n o f the ship shall n o t vary. Structural
c o n t i n u i t y o f the a b o v e l o n g i t u d i n a l s shall be ensured
w i t h i n 0,1 .D f r o m d e c k a n d b o t t o m .
I n ships o f 150 m i n l e n g t h a n d m o r e , the above
longitudinals shall pass t h r o u g h the transverse b u l k heads w i t h o u t cutting.
3.5.2.5 T h e p r i m a r y supporting m e m b e r s ( b o t t o m
c e n t r e U n e girder, side girders, v e r t i c a l w e b s o n b u l k heads, deck centreUne girder, c o n t i n u o u s deck girders,
side a n d b o t t o m transverses, side stringers a n d b u l k head h o r i z o n t a l girders) i n w a y o f cargo tanks shaU
f o r m a transverse r i n g structure, w h e n e v e r possible.
3.5.2.6 H u l l s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s shall be interc o n n e c t e d as r e q u i r e d b y 1.7.2. T h e w e b s o f p r i m a r y
s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s shall be s u p p o r t e d b y h o r i z o n t a l
o r v e r t i c a l stiffeners i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.7.3.2. T h e
i n e r t i a m o m e n t o f stiffeners s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h 1.6.5.6.
U n l e s s p r o v i d e d o t h e r w i s e i n this C h a p t e r , t h e design loads o n h u U structures o f t a n k e r s shaU be t a k e n
a c c o r d i n g t o 1.3 a n d r e l e v a n t c h a p t e r s o f S e c t i o n 2 .
T h e scantUngs o f structural m e m b e r s o f tankers
shall be d e t e r m i n e d i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h S e c t i o n 2,
having regard to the provisions o f this Chapter.
T h e thickness s m-, i n m m , o f structural m e m bers, f o r m i n g the b o u n d a r i e s o f cargo a n d ballast
t a n k s as w e l l as m e m b e r s f i t t e d i n s i d e these t a n k s
m
Jmin = 5,5 + 0 , 0 3 5 L f o r L < 8 0 m ;

(3.5.4)
Jmin = 6,7 + 0 , 0 2 L f o r L > 8 0 m .
W h e r e L > 2 9 0 m , L s h a l l be t a k e n as e q u a l
t o 2 9 0 m . I n t h i s case, t h e m i n i m u m t h i c k n e s s o f t h e
p r i m a r y m e m b e r s n e e d n o t exceed 11,5 m m .
3.5.5 S p e c i a l requirements.
3 . 5 . 5 . 1 T h e n u m b e r o f o p e n i n g s f o r access t o
cofferdams, p u m p r o o m s , cargo and ballast tanks
s h a l l be k e p t t o t h e m i n i m u m r e q u i r e d . T h e y s h a l l be
as f a r d i s t a n t as p r a c t i c a b l e f r o m e n d b u l k h e a d s o f
superstructures. Hatches to w i n g tanks i n Une w i t h a
centre t a n k h a t c h i n the a t h w a r t direction are n o t
permitted.
H a t c h openings shall be either circular o r elUptical i n shape, the elUptical openings h a v i n g the m a j o r
axis fore a n d aft. S t r u c t u r a l c o n t i n u i t y o f deck girders
a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l s shall be m a i n t a i n e d . T h e thickness
o f c a r g o h a t c h c o a m i n g s less t h a n 7 5 0 m m h i g h s h a l l
be 10 m m , w h i l e c o a m i n g s 7 5 0 m m a n d m o r e i n
height shall h a v e a thickness equal t o 12 m m .
Coamings m o r e than 750 m m i n height, provided
t h e y a r e m o r e t h a n 1,25 m l o n g , s h a l l b e s t i f f e n e d .
3.5.5.2 G u a r d rails, b u l w a r k , g a n g w a y o r a n
e q u i v a l e n t a r r a n g e m e n t shall be fitted i n c o m p U a n c e
w i t h 8.6, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t , A r r a n g e m e n t s a n d
Outfit".
T h e gangway, i f fitted, shall n o t contribute t o
hull longitudinal bending.
3.6 V E S S E L S O F D R E D G I N G
F L E E T
3.6.1 General.
3.6.1.1 T h e requirements o f this Chapter apply t o
t h e h u U s o f t h e vessels o f d r e d g i n g fleet a n d f l o a t i n g
cranes. A r e a s w h e r e such ships operate a n d / o r transp o r t s p o i l are called w o r k areas. T h e transfer o f the
ship f r o m o n e w o r k area t o a n o t h e r is called a voyage.
3.6.1.2 A s t o t h e i r p u r p o s e , vessels o f d r e d g i n g
fleet s h a l l be d e f i n e d as f o l l o w s .
D r e d g e r s are self-propelled o r non-self-propelled ships designed t o operate f o r the purpose o f
r a i s i n g t h e soil (silt, sand, g r a v e l , clay, etc.) u s i n g a n y
d r e d g i n g gear (buckets, s u c t i o n pipes, grabs, etc.) a n d
h a v i n g n o spaces w h e r e t h e soil m a y be s t o r e d o r
transported.
H o p p e r dredgers
are self-propelled ships
having dredging gear f o r raising the soil and one o r
t w o hoppers w h e r e the s p o i l m a y be stored o r
transported.
H o p p e r b a r g e s are self-propelled o r n o n propelled ships designed o n l y f o r t r a n s p o r t a t i o n o f
the soil, b u t h a v i n g n o dredging gear. T h e y c a n be
single-hulled or double-hulled capable o f opening.
F l o a t i n g cranes and crane ships
refer t o the definitions i n 1.1, P a r t I "Classification".

3.6.1.3 T h e basic s t r u c t u r a l c o n f i g u r a t i o n o f a
vessel o f d r e d g i n g fleet, considered i n t h i s C h a p t e r , is
a single-deck vessel w i t h o r d i n a r y ship Unes o r o f a
p o n t o o n shape, h a v i n g a ladder well o r other h u l l cutouts.
T h e p o n t o o n h u l l s h a p e m a y be u s e d o n l y i n vessels
o f restricted service R 2 , R 2 - R S N , R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) , R 3 - R S N
and R3.
146
Rules
Use o f a p o n t o o n h u l l i n vessels o f r e s t r i c t e d
service R l a n d o f u n r e s t r i c t e d service s h a l l be spe
cially considered b y the Register.
3.6.1.4 T h e requirements o f this C h a p t e r apply t o
dredgers, single-hulled a n d o p e n i n g double-hulled
h o p p e r dredgers a n d h o p p e r barges, floating cranes
a n d crane ships.
3.6.1.5 I n o p e n i n g h o p p e r dredgers a n d h o p p e r
barges, subject t o the Register supervision are deck
a n d d e c k h o u s e hinges, h y d r a u l i c presses a n d t h e i r
h u l l c o n n e c t i o n s as w e l l as l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d t r a n s
verse structures between the hulls a n d deckhouses.
3.6.1.6 F o r the purpose o f this C h a p t e r the fol
di = m a x i m u m d r e d g i n g d r a u g h t , i n m , a t w h i c h
the vessel is designed t o o p e r a t e ;
d = d r a u g h t d u r i n g sea v o y a g e , i n m ;
A = d i s p l a c e m e n t at t h e d r a u g h t d o r d, i n t;
/ = l i g h t - s h i p d i s p l a c e m e n t w i t h o u t s p o i l m i x
ture, i n m ;
Q = mid-section area corresponding to the
d r a u g h t d\ o r d , i n m ;
l = full length o f the hopper, i n m ;
h i = depth o f a hopper l o w e r cross-member, i n m ;
l
= hopper lower cross-member span measured
at mid-depth between longitudinal bulkheads o f the
hopper, i n m ;
Hi = distance f r o m the m i d - d e p t h o f the hopper
l o w e r c r o s s - m e m b e r t o t h e deck at side, i n m ;
H = distance f r o m the base line t o the upper
edge o f the c o a m i n g , i n m ;
h = c o a m i n g h e i g h t a b o v e t h e d e c k l i n e at side, i n m ;
B = distance b e t w e e n t h e side shell a n d t h e
longitudinal b u l k h e a d at m i d - d e p t h o f a hopper
lower cross-member, i n m ;
B = distance b e t w e e n t h e side shell a n d t h e
longitudinal b u l k h e a d at the deck level, i n m ;
Q = m a x i m u m mass o f the spoil mixture i n the
hopper, i n t;
p = d e n s i t y o f s p o i l m i x t u r e , d e f i n e d as a r a t i o
of the spoil mass i n the hopper at the m a x i m u m
d r a u g h t d\ t o t h e h o p p e r v o l u m e u p t o t h e l e v e l o f
o v e r f l o w o r t o the upper edge o f the h o p p e r c o a m i n g
w h e r e t h e r e is n o o v e r f l o w , i n t / m ; i t s h a l l n o t be
t a k e n m o r e t h a n 1,8;
A , A
= areas e n v e l o p e d i n t h e c o n t o u r o f t h e
centre line b o x keel, hopper l o w e r cross-member, re
spectively, i n m ; w h e r e the centre line k e e l and/or a
h o p p e r l o w e r c r o s s - m e m b e r are a n o r d i n a r y girder ( w e b
w i t h a face plate), i t is a s s u m e d that A
= A
= 0;
b
= c e n t r e l i n e b o x k e e l w i d t h at l o w e r p o r t i o n , i n m ;
b = b o t t o m b r e a d t h f r o m t h e side shell t o t h e
point o f intersection o f the hopper longitudinal
bulkhead w i t h the b o t t o m , i n m ;
2
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
bf = w i d t h o f t h e c o a m i n g u p p e r f a c e p l a t e , i n m ;
a = spacing o f f r a m e s , h o p p e r side stiffeners,
longitudinals, i n m ;
b = spacing o f transverse ring structures, i n m ;
h,l
= l e n g t h o f t h e u p p e r a n d l o w e r face p l a t e o f
the h o p p e r l o w e r cross-member, m e a s u r e d f r o m the
hopper longitudinal b u l k h e a d to the centre line b o x
keel, i n m ;
R p.cr, Ri.cr
axial force acting o n the hopper
upper a n d lower cross-member, respectively, i n k N ;
N = design axial force, i n k N .
As = c o r r o s i o n a l l o w a n c e , i n m m , f o r p l a t e
thickness (refer t o 1.1.5.1);
crjfc = f a c t o r t a k i n g c o r r o s i o n a l l o w a n c e i n t o a c
count w i t h regard to the section m o d u l u s o f members
(refer t o 1.1.5.3).
S o m e o f the s y m b o l s are s h o w n i n F i g . 3.6.1.6.
p
hp
>
Rup.cr
c r
Lcr
5
l
\\ ,
'
h.cr
bb.k^
PY
i
/
/
- J
x
CL
F i g . 3.6.1.6:
1 centre line b o x keel; 2 h o p p e r lower cross m e m b e r ;
3 hopper upper cross member;
4 stay o f coaming; 5 diaphragm
b k
L c r
b k
bk
L c r
3.6.2 Construction.
3.6.2.1 M a i n hull structures shall c o m p l y w i t h the
requirements o f Section 2, h a v i n g regard t o the p r o
visions and additions given i n this Chapter.
R e f e r r e d t o t h e p a r t i c u l a r s t r u c t u r e s o f vessels o f
d r e d g i n g fleet are:
hopper longitudinal and transverse bulkheads;
hopper lower and upper cross-members;
centre line b o x keels, h o p p e r coamings;
diaphragms and transverse ring structures i n
b u o y a n c y spaces (refer t o 3.6.2.11).
Part I I Hull
147
F o r floating c r a n e s s t r e n g t h e n i n g s h a l l b e p r o
vided o f t h e p o n t o o n hull beneath t h efixed crane
tower supporting t h e upper crane structure, this
strengthening including t h e crane tub, t h e bulkhead
cross a n d t h ebearing c o n t o u r ( F i g . 3.6.2.1). O t h e r
construction o f the p o n t o o n strengthening i nw a y o f
the t o w e r shall b e specially considered b y the Register.
>-
CL
1/
1
Fig. 3.6.2.1:
1 b u l k h e a d o f t h e cross; 2 fixed crane t o w e r ; 3
4 upper deck; 5 b o t t o m ;
6 bulkheads o f the bearing contour
tub;
3.6.2.2 Shell plating.

3.6.2.2.1 Corners o f hopper a n d well openings i n
the b o t t o m p l a t i n g shall b e r o u n d e d a n d insert plates,
the dimensions o f w h i c h shall b e approved b y t h e
R e g i s t e r , s h a l l b e fitted a t t h e c o r n e r s .
3.6.2.2.2 T h e c u t t i n g o f o v e r f l o w discharge t r u n k
openings i n the sheerstrake shall be avoided wherever
practicable. W h e r e such openings c a n n o t b e dis
pensed w i t h , their u p p e r edge shall n o t b e w i t h i n
800 m m o f t h e deck line a t side. T h e y shall h a v e
c o r n e r r a d i i o f n o t less t h a n 1 5 0 m m .
3.6.2.2.3 A n g u l a r c o n n e c t i o n o f t h e side shell
plating o rlongitudinal bulkhead o f the well w i t h the
b o t t o m plating shall be m a d e b y means o f section
steel ( r o d , b a r ) .
3.6.2.3 Single b o t t o m .
3.6.2.3.1 T h e b o t t o m centre girder i n w a y o f the
h o p p e r a n d w e l l o f h o p p e r d r e d g e r s s h a l l n o t b e fitted.
3 . 6 . 2 . 3 . 2 T h e d e p t h o f floors a b r e a s t o f h o p p e r s
i n hopper dredgers a n d barges w i t h transverse
f r a m i n g a n d abreast o f dredging wells i n hopper
d r e d g e r s s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n V i s B\T h e breadth B is taken:
in w a y o f the hopper, equal t o the breadth o f the
vessel after d e d u c t i n g t h e b r e a d t h o f the h o p p e r a t
b o t t o m , b u t n o t less t h a n 0 , 6 5 ;
x
in w a y o fthe well, equal t o t h ebreadth o f the

vessel after d e d u c t i n g the b r e a d t h o f the well.
3 . 6 . 2 . 3 . 3 S i d e g i r d e r s s h a l l b e fitted i n s i d e
b u o y a n c y tanks o f hopper dredgers a n d hopper
barges w h e r e t h e t a n k w i d t h b e t w e e n t h e vessel's side
a n d t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d exceeds 3,5 m i n
t r a n s v e r s e l y f r a m e d vessels, a n d 4 m i n l o n g i t u d i n a l l y
f r a m e d vessels.
Side girders i n opening hopper barges m a y b e
omitted.
3.6.2.3.4 I n the p u m p r o o m s o f hopper dredgers,
the b o t t o m framing shall b e identical t o that o f the
engine r o o m .
I n t h earea w h e r e soil p u m p s a r e located, t h e
d e p t h o f floors a n d s i d e g i r d e r s m a y b e r e d u c e d w i t h
the required section m o d u l u s a n d w e b area being
maintained. Otherwise a calculation proving t h e
strength o f t h e b o t t o m grillage i n t h eregion con
cerned shall b e submitted t othe Register.
3 . 6 . 2 . 3 . 5 I n floating c r a n e s p l a t e floors s h a l l b e
fitted
at every frame within 0 , 2 L f r o m t h e forward
perpendicular over the entire breadth o f the hull and
additional b o t t o m transverses o r longitudinals spaced
n o t m o r e t h a n 0 , 3 5 m a p a r t s h a l l b e fitted.
3.6.2.4 D o u b l e b o t t o m .
3.6.2.4.1 I n lieu o f the b o t t o m centre girder, t w o
s i d e g i r d e r s m a y b e fitted o n e a c h s i d e o f s h i p ' s c e n t r e
line a t a distance n o t exceeding 1 m f r o m each other
and passing into the webs o f the centre line b o x keel
o r i n t o t h e w e l l sides ( F i g . 3.6.2.4.1).
<7 m
Not less than 3 frame spaces
Not less than\

3 frame spaces
F i g . 3.6.2.4.1:
1 after peak; 2 centre line b o x keel;
3 fore peak; 4 h o p p e r space
3.6.2.4.2 A d d i t i o n a l side girders e x t e n d i n g o v e r a

d i s t a n c e o f n o t less t h a n t h r e e s p a c i n g s f r o m t h e e n d
o f t h e b r a c k e t s h a l l b e fitted i n t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m
under the lower brackets o f longitudinal bulkheads o f
the h o p p e r space o r the w e l l a n d u n d e r the brackets
o f the centre line b o x keel.
148
Rules
3.6.2.5 S i d e f r a m i n g :
3.6.2.5.1 I n f l o a t i n g c r a n e s , h o p p e r d r e d g e r s d e s i g n e d
t o w o r k i n c o n j u n c t i o n w i t h h o p p e r barges, a n d i n
h o p p e r barges, t h e side f r a m i n g s h a l l b e r e i n f o r c e d as
follows:
t w o r o w s o f efficient fenders, o n e fitted a t t h e deck
level o r 2 0 0 m m b e l o w i t , t h e other 2 0 0 t o 3 0 0 m m
above the lowest operating waterline amidships;
the upper a n d l o w e r fenders i n h o p p e r dredgers
shall be connected b y vertical fenders fitted i n line
w i t h frames;
i t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t a side stringer r e q u i r e d
b y 2.5.4.4 w h i c h shall be t a k e n i n t o account i n det e r m i n i n g t h e scantlings o f t h e frames o r a n intercostal
side s t r i n g e r b e f i t t e d a t a l e v e l o f t h e l o w e r fenders.
3.6.2.5.2 I n f l o a t i n g c r a n e s t h e s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f
t h e side f r a m i n g w i t h i n 0 , 2 1 . f r o m t h e f o r w a r d perpendicular shall comply w i t h the requirements
o f 3.6.2.8. W e b f r a m e s shall be spaced n o t m o r e t h a n
f o u r spacings apart.
3.6.2.5.3 I n f l o a t i n g c r a n e s , i n t e r m e d i a t e f r a m e s
o f t h e same scantUngs as t h e m a i n f r a m e s s h a l l be
fitted i nt h e fore peak a n di nareas extending f o r w a r d
f o r 0 , 1 1 . f r o m t h e s t e r n t r a n s o m a n d i n b o a r d f o r 0,11?
over the entire depth. T h e extension a n d e n d attachments o f intermediate frames shall comply w i t h
the requirements o f 3.10.
3.6.2.6 D e c k s a n d p l a t f o r m s .
3.6.2.6.1 C o r n e r s o f o p e n i n g s i n t h e d e c k p l a t i n g
in w a y o f the hopper a n d the well shall be rounded.
Insert plates, t h e dimensions o f w h i c h shall be approved b y t h e Register, shall be fitted at t h e corners.
3.6.2.6.2 I n h o p p e r s i d e b u o y a n c y s p a c e s , t h e h o p p e r
l o w e r cross m e m b e r s shaU be fitted i n Une w i t h t h e w e b
frames unless p a r t i a l bulkheads are fitted.
3.6.2.7 W a t e r t i g h t b u l k h e a d s .
3.6.2.7.1 B u l k h e a d s f o r m i n g t h e e n d s o f t h e
h o p p e r s h a l l e x t e n d f r o m side t o side.
3.6.2.7.2 I n b u c k e t d r e d g e r s , p r o t e c t i v e b u l k h e a d s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d p a r a l l e l t o t h e w e l l sides a t a
d i s t a n c e o f n o t less t h a n 6 0 0 m m f r o m t h e m .
T h e extension o f protective bulkheads shall be
such as t o p r e v e n t t h e ship f r o m f l o o d i n g i n case o f
damage t o t h e shell p l a t i n g b y objects b r o u g h t u p i n
the dredge buckets.
A protective b u l k h e a d shaU be also p r o v i d e d a t t h e
e n d o f t h e w e U . T h e scantUngs o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s a n d
the plating thickness o f the protective bulkheads shaU be
determined as f o r p e r m a n e n t watertight bulkheads o f
d r y cargo ships. T h e f r a m i n g inside t h e c o f f e r d a m
f o r m e d b y t h e w e U side a n d t h e p r o t e c t i v e b u l k h e a d m a y
consist o f brackets w i t h openings c u t therein. Cofferd a m s s h a U h a v e access o p e n i n g s f o r m a i n t e n a n c e .
3.6.2.7.3 B u l k h e a d s f o r m i n g t h e l a d d e r w e l l i n
hopper dredgers shall be protected against possible
damage b y the ladder w h e n m o v e d .
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
3.6.2.7.4 L o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s o f t h e h o p p e r a n d
w e U sides s h a U t e r m i n a t e a t d e c k a n d b o t t o m i n b r a c k e t s .
T h e l e n g t h o f t h e a r m s o f t h e b r a c k e t s s h a U n o t b e less
t h a n 0 , 2 5 D a n d t h e i r t h i c k n e s s s h a U n o t b e less t h a n t h e
plating thickness o f t h e longitudinal bulkhead. T h e
brackets shaU b e strengthened w i t h stiffeners a n d t o h a v e
a face p l a t e o v e r t h e free edge. T h e t o p b r a c k e t shaU b e
e x t e n d e d b y a d e c k girder, t h e b o t t o m b r a c k e t b y a side
girder f o r a t least three spacings b e y o n d t h e b r a c k e t e n d .
3.6.2.7.5 I n f l o a t i n g c r a n e s t h e b u l k h e a d s f o r m i n g t h e cross shall be rigidly connected w i t h t h e
bulkheads forming the bearing contour. These bulkheads shall be carried t o t h e nearest transverse a n d
l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s (sides, t r a n s o m s ) .
3.6.2.8 I n s h i p s w i t h a p o n t o o n s h a p e o f t h e
f o r w a r d a n d after ends, t h e f o l l o w i n g s t r u c t u r a l r e quirements shall be fulfilled:
.1 t h e f o r e a n d after p e a k b u l k h e a d s s h a l l b e
fitted a t a distance o f0,11. f r o m t h e f o r w a r d a n d after
t r a n s o m s , b u t n o t less t h a n o n e s p a c i n g f r o m t h e U n e
connecting t h e raked part a n d flat o f t h e b o t t o m ;
.2 f r a m e s p a c i n g i n p e a k s s h a l l b e n o t m o r e
than 550 m m ;
.3 t h e b o t t o m f r a m i n g w i t h i n 0 , 1 5 1 . f r o m t h e
f o r w a r d a n d after perpendiculars shall consist o f
p l a t e f l o o r s fitted a t e v e r y f r a m e , w i t h s i d e g i r d e r
spaced n o tm o r e t h a n 1 m apart.
T h e scantlings o f f l o o r s a n d side girders s h a l l b e
determined as f o r t h e m i d s h i p region;
.4 t h e s i d e f r a m i n g w i t h i n 0 , 2 1 . f r o m t h e f o r w a r d
and after perpendiculars shall be strengthened w i t h
w e b f r a m e s a n d side stringers.
T h e w e b f r a m e s s h a l l b e fitted n o t m o r e t h a n
three o r f o u r spacings.
T h e side stringers s h a l l b e fitted so t h a t t h e distance b e t w e e n t h e side stringers m e a s u r e d o v e r t h e
vessel's side i n w a y o f t h e f l o o r nearest t o t h e f o r e
p e a k b u l k h e a d , t h e distance f r o m t h e side s t r i n g e r t o
t h e u p p e r edge o f t h e f l o o r , as w e l l as f r o m t h e side
stringer t o t h e deck is n o tm o r e t h a n 2 m .
T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f m a i n f r a m e s fitted b e t w e e n t h e
web frames shall comply w i t h the requirements
o f 3.6.4.7 as f o r t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n w h e r e side stringers a r e n o t p r o v i d e d .
T h e side stringers s h a l l h a v e t h e same scantUngs
as t h e w e b f r a m e s a n d t e r m i n a t e a t t h e b u l k h e a d o r a t
the w e b frame (refer t o 2.5.4.7.2).
Construction a n d end attachments o f the w e b
frames shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.5.5;
.5 t h e t r a n s o m b u l k h e a d s s h a l l b e s t r e n g t h e n e d
w i t h vertical stiffeners spaced n o t m o r e t h a n 0,5 m
apart, a n d w i t h h o r i z o n t a l girders arranged at t h e
side s t r i n g e r level.
V e r t i c a l w e b s s h a l l b e fitted i n U n e w i t h s i d e
girders. T h e scantlings o f t h e vertical webs a n d h o r i z o n t a l girders s h a l l be t h e same as those o f w e b
P a r t II. H u l l
f r a m e s a n d side stringers i n t h e f o r e p e a k . T h e
scantlings o f vertical stiffeners shall be t h e same as
those o f the frames. T h e attachments o f stiffener ends
w i t h brackets shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements
o f 2.7.2 f o rw a t e r t i g h t bulkheads.
3.6.2.9 S t r u c t u r a l r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r h u l l m e m b e r s
o f o p e n i n g vessels.
3.6.2.9.1 O p e n i n g v e s s e l s c o n s i s t o f t w o s e p a r a t e
semihulls w i t h a s y m m e t r i c a l lines, connected b y
hinges positioned above the deck at t h e ends o fthe
hopper. W h e n discharging t h e spoil, t h e semi-hulls
are opened a b o u t a c o m m o n longitudinal axis o nthe
centreUne o f t h e ship b y m e a n s o f h y d r a u U c devices.
T h e structure o f each semi-hull shall c o m p l y w i t h
the requirements o f Section 2 w i t h due regard
for 3.6.2; transverse o r l o n g i t u d i n a l o r b o t h f r a m i n g
systems m a y b e a d o p t e d . I n h o p p e r side b u o y a n c y
tanks transverse ring structures spaced as required
by 3.6.2.11.1 shall be fitted.
3.6.2.9.2 W h e r e h i n g e s a r e i n s t a l l e d i n o p e n i n g
h o p p e r dredgers a n dh o p p e r barges, deck p l a t i n g a n d
f r a m i n g shall be strengthened. H i n g e eyes shall pierce
the decks.
3.6.2.9.3 S t o p s s h a l l b e f i t t e d i n t h e o p e n i n g
vessels b e t w e e n s e m i - h u l l s f o r w a r d a n d a f t f r o m t h e
h o p p e r space. T h e stops shall be a r r a n g e d a t t h e l e vels o fthe b o t t o m a n d t h e deck a n d shall prevent t h e
hulls f r o m displacement relative t o o n e another.
3.6.2.9.4 S c a n t U n g s o f b r a c k e t s c o n n e c t i n g
framing members o f each semi-hull shall c o m p l y w i t h
the requirements o f 3.6.2.11.3.
3.6.2.9.5 L o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s a n d c o a m i n g s
o f t h e h o p p e r shall be extended w i t h brackets as r e quired b y 3.6.2.7.4 a n d 3.6.2.11.7.
3.6.2.10 F i x i n g o f d r e d g i n g g e a r .
3.6.2.10.1 H u l l f r a m i n g s h a l l b e s t r e n g t h e n e d i n
w a y o f the m a i n a n d ladder gallows.
T h e stanchions o f t h e ladder g a l l o w s m a y term i n a t e a t t h e deck. I n s u c h case, p i l l a r s , v e r t i c a l w e b s
or other equivalent structures shall be provided under
the stanchions o r longitudinal a n d transverse bulkheads shall be fitted.
T h e stanchions o f t h e m a i n gallows shall extend
to t h eb o t t o m a n d be efficiently connected w i t h longitudinal a n d transverse framing, otherwise transverse
bulkheads shall be fitted under the stanchions.
3.6.2.10.2 I n w a y o f g r a b c r a n e , s p u d s a n d o t h e r
dredging gear adequate strengthening shaU be provided.
3.6.2.11 S p e c i f i c s t r u c t u r e s .
3.6.2.11.1 W h a t e v e r t h e h u l l f r a m i n g o f s i n g l e h u l l hopper dredgers a n d barges i n w a y o f the hopper
is a d o p t e d , t r a n s v e r s e r i n g s t r u c t u r e s c o n s i s t i n g o f t h e
following items shall be fitted:
soUd p l a t f o r m s o r r i n g structures i n t h e side
b u o y a n c y spaces a n d centre Une b o x keel;
149
a l o w e r cross m e m b e r i n t h e b o t t o m p a r t o ft h e
hopper, connecting t h e centre Une b o x keel w i t h
longitudinal bulkheads o fthe hopper;
a n upper cross m e m b e r inside t h e h o p p e r a t a
level o f the m a i n deck a n d u p p e r edge o f the c o a m i n g
where its height m o r e than 0,2 m (where the requirements o f 3.6.4.11.10 are c o m p l i e d w i t h , upper
cross m e m b e r s need n o t be fitted);
vertical webs o n the hopper coaming.
T h e m a x i m u m distance between transverse ring
s t r u c t u r e s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n b = ( 0 , 0 1 2 L + 2 , 9 ) m .
3.6.2.11.2 T h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f d i a p h r a g m s s h a l l
c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.5.2.2. D i a p h r a g m s
w h i c h are m o r e t h a n 1 m i n w i d t h shall be strengthened b y vertical a n d h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners. W h e r e
longitudinal f r a m i n g is adopted, h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners
shall b e fitted i n line w i t h side a n d b u l k h e a d l o n g itudinals. I n lieu o f the diaphragms watertight (nontight) bulkheads c o m p l y i n g w i t h the requirements
o f 2.7.2 m a y be used.
3.6.2.11.3 T h e t r a n s v e r s e r i n g s t r u c t u r e i n t h e s i d e
b u o y a n c y space, fitted i n U e u o f t h e d i a p h r a g m , shall
consist o f side shell, b u l k h e a d , b o t t o m a n d d e c k
transverses. T h e l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d a n d side shell
transverses shall be connected b y m e a n s o f cross ties
w h i c h shall be so positioned t h a t t h e distance bet w e e n t h e m , between a cross tie a n d a b o t t o m o r deck
transverse is n o t m o r e t h a n 3 m . I n Ueu o f t h e cross
ties, u s e m a y b e m a d e o f braces c o n n e c t i n g a b u l k head transverse w i t h a bilge o r deck transverse
b r a c k e t . W h e r e p l a t f o r m s a r e fitted i n side b u o y a n c y
spaces a t t h e s a m e distance as cross ties, cross ties a n d
braces m a ybe o m i t t e d .
T h e brackets connecting transverse ring structure
i t e m s i n t h e side b u o y a n c y space shall h a v e t h e l e n g t h
o f t h e a r m s n o t less t h a n o n e - t w e l f t h o f t h e g r e a t e r
span o f the connected m e m b e r s . T h e free edge o f t h e
b r a c k e t shall h a v e a face p l a t e o f t h e s a m e w i d t h as
t h a t o f t h e face plate o f t h e greater m e m b e r c o n nected. T h e bracket thickness shall be equal t o t h e
w e b thickness o f the greater m e m b e r connected.
3.6.2.11.4 H o p p e r l o w e r c r o s s m e m b e r s m a y c o n s i s t
o f a w e b w i t h o p e n i n g s a n d face plates p r o v i d e d o n t h e
u p p e r a n d l o w e r edges o r m a y t a k e t h e f o r m o f a h o U o w
b o x , generaUy o f t r i a n g u l a r cross-section.
T h e w e b thickness o f t h e h o p p e r l o w e r cross
m e m b e r shall be t a k e n equal t o t h e plating thickness
o f the hopper longitudinal bulkheads at the corresponding level.
A cross m e m b e r w e b shall be strengthened w i t h
stiffeners spaced 9 0 0m m apart.
T h e u p p e r face plate o f t h e h o p p e r l o w e r cross
m e m b e r shall be m a d e o f a tube, section, r o u n d o r
flat b a r , t h e l o w e r face p l a t e shall b e fabricated o f a
f l a t b a r h a v i n g a t h i c k n e s s n o t less t h a n t h a t o f t h e
bottom plating.
150
Rules
T h e h o p p e r l o w e r cross m e m b e r s shall be c o n nected w i t h the hopper longitudinal bulkhead a n d

centre Une b o x keel b y brackets h a v i n g length o f t h e
a r m s equal t o o n e - t e n t h o f t h e l e n g t h o f t h e cross
m e m b e r u p p e r face plate. T h e thickness o f brackets
shall be t a k e n equal t o t h e thickness o f t h e cross
m e m b e r w e b . W h e r e t h e d e p t h o f t h e cross m e m b e r
and centre Une b o x keel is t h e same, brackets o n the
centre keel need n o t be fitted. T h e structure o f boxtype cross m e m b e r s is similar t o t h a t o f the centre b o x
keel. W h e r e cross m e m b e r s a r e o f a b o x shape, their
l o w e r a n d u p p e r face plates shall be w e l d e d t o t h e
p l a t i n g o f t h e b u o y a n c y spaces a n d centre U n e b o x
keel.
3.6.2.11.5 T h e c e n t r e U n e b o x k e e l f i t t e d i n t h e
h o p p e r is generally fabricated as a closed b o x struct u r e . T h e p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s o f t h e sides s h a l l b e e q u a l
to that o fhopper longitudinal bulkheads at t h e corr e s p o n d i n g l e v e l , b u t n o t less t h a n 8 m m f o r vessels
o f 6 0 m i n l e n g t h a n d less t h a n 1 0 m m f o r vessels o f
m o r e t h a n 6 0 m i n length. T h e thickness o f the centre
U n e k e e l b o t t o m s t r a k e s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h a t o f
the plate keel. W h e r e t h e transverse f r a m i n g is
adopted, t h e stiffeners i n t h e upper part o fthe centre
Une b o x keel shall be connected w i t h brackets, t h e
t h i c k n e s s o f w h i c h s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h a t o f t h e
f l o o r a n d h e i g h t n o t less t h a n 2 , 5 t i m e s t h e d e p t h o f
the stiffener web.
W h e r e t h e breadth o f t h e centre Uneb o x keel a t
b o t t o m exceeds 1 m , b u t n o t m o r e t h a n 2 m , a bott o m longitudinal shall be fitted o n centre Une b o x
keel b o t t o m , t h edepth o f w h i c h shall be equal t o half
the floor depth. W h e r e t h e breadth o fthe centre Une
k e e l i s m o r e t h a n 2 m , a n i n t e r c o s t a l side g i r d e r
h a v i n g t h e same scantUngs as t h e floor shall be fitted
in U e uo f t h e above longitudinal. T h e scantlings o f
f l o o r s a r e a s s u m e d t h e same as those o f f l o o r s fitted
i n c o r r e s p o n d i n g l y f r a m e d b u o y a n c y spaces.
O n the top, the centre Une b o x keel shaU terminate
i n a bar, o r a n angle, o r a cover plate, t h e thickness o f
w h i c h shaU be equal t o that o f the centre Une b o x keel.
T h e c e n t r e l i n e b o x k e e l sides s h a l l e x t e n d b e y o n d
the hopper transverse bulkheads b y brackets, t h e a r m
lengths o f w h i c h shall be equal t o t h e depth o f the
centre Une b o x keel, a n dt h ethickness equal t o that o f
t h e centre Une b o x k e e l side.
3.6.2.11.6 T h e u p p e r c r o s s m e m b e r s o f t h e h o p per space m a y consist o f a w e b w i t h o p e n i n g s a n d
face plates o n t h e u p p e r a n d l o w e r edges o r b e fabricated i n the f o r m o f a h o l l o w b o x generally o f a
triangular o r a n o t h e r cross-section.
I t is r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t t h e upper cross m e m b e r s
be attached t o t h e h o p p e r l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d b y
brackets t h e a r mlengths o f w h i c h shall be equal t o
the d e p t h o f t h e upper cross m e m b e r , a n d t h e thickness t o i t s w e b thickness.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T h e upper cross m e m b e r s shall be connected t o

the centre Une b o x keel b y pillars, w h e r e such a keel is
fitted.
3.6.2.11.7 T h e h o p p e r c o a m i n g m a y b e t r a n s versely o r l o n g i t u d i n a l l y f r a m e d . T h e u p p e r edge o f
the c o a m i n g shall b e stiffened w i t h a face p l a t e h a v i n g
a w i d t h n o t less t h a n o n e - t e n t h o f t h e c o a m i n g h e i g h t
a n d a t h i c k n e s s n o t less t h a n a c o a m i n g t h i c k n e s s .
I n case o f l o n g i t u d i n a l f r a m i n g , t h e c o a m i n g shall
be strengthened b y l o n g i t u d i n a l s spaced n o t m o r e
than 9 0 0 m m apart.
I n case o f transverse f r a m i n g , v e r t i c a l stiffeners
shall be fitted b e t w e e n stays a t every f r a m e .
T h e h o p p e r side c o a m i n g s shall b e e x t e n d e d bey o n d t h e hopper ends b y t h e brackets f o ra distance
e q u a l t o 1,5 t i m e s t h e c o a m i n g h e i g h t . D e c k g i r d e r s
e x t e n d i n g n o t less t h a n t h r e e f r a m e spaces f r o m a
bracket e n d shall be fitted under t h e brackets.
3.6.2.11.8 I n f l o a t i n g c r a n e s , t h e t u b p l a t i n g s h a l l
n o t be c u ta t t h eupper deck. N o h o r i z o n t a l welds are
permitted i nthe t u bplating w i t h i n thearea extending
for 0,2A u p a n d d o w n f r o m the upper deck ( w h e r e h is
the distance between t h e b o t t o m a n d t h e upper deck
in w a y o f the t u b position).
3.6.2.11.9 D i a p h r a g m s s h a l l b e f i t t e d i n s i d e t h e
crane t u b i n line w i t h t h e upper deck a n d platform.
3.6.2.11.10 F o r o u t e r p l a t i n g o f s p e c i f i c s t r u c tures 2 0 m m a n d m o r e i n thickness i n w a y o f the
h o p p e r steel o f n o t l o w e r t h a n grade D shall be u t i Uzed. U s e o f plates h a v i n g a thickness 5 0 m m a n d
m o r e is subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e
Register.
3.6.3 D e s i g n l o a d s .
3.6.3.1 D e s i g n l o a d s o n t h e m a i n h u l l s t r u c t u r e s
shall be determined i n compUance w i t h Sections 1
a n d 2 a t d r a u g h t s d\ a n d d a n d t h e w a v e c o e f f i cient c under dredging conditions a n d d u r i n g voyage. F o r d r e d g i n g c o n d i t i o n s , t h e w a v e c o e f f i c i e n t c
shall n o t be t a k e n greater t h a n 2 ( D + h d \ ) .
3.6.3.2 T h e m a x i m u m v a l u e o f t h e d e s i g n l o a d f o r
vessel's e x t r e m i t i e s d u r i n g v o y a g e s shall b e o b t a i n e d
as r e q u i r e d b y 2 . 8 . 3 u s i n g t h e d r a u g h t a t t h e section 0 , 1 L f r o m the forward perpendicular. F o r the
t r a n s o m b u l k h e a d angles a = 0 a n d
= 90 a r e
assumed.
3.6.3.3 T h e d e s i g n b e n d i n g m o m e n t s a n d s h e a r
forces i n vessels o f d r e d g i n g fleet h a v i n g > 6 0 m
shall be determined f o r voyage a n d f o r dredging
conditions.
F o r v o y a g e t h e h o p p e r space i s considered t o b e
filled w i t h w a t e r u p t o t h e effective waterUne ( o r e m p t y
i f s u c h case i s possible), stores a n d o u t f i t a r e t a k e n as
100 p e r cent, a l l gear b e i n g s t o w e d f o r sea.
F o r t h e case o f d r e d g i n g o p e r a t i o n s , t h e h o p p e r
space is considered t o be filled w i t h h o m o g e n e o u s soil
u p t o the upper overflow level (coaming), there aren o
2
P a r t II.
Hull
151
s t o r e s o n b o a r d , t h e d r a u g h t i s e q u a l t o d\, g e a r b e i n g
s t o w e d f o r sea.
W a v e b e n d i n g m o m e n t s a n d shear forces shall be
d e t e r m i n e d as r e q u i r e d b y 1.4.4.
3.6.3.4 O p e n i n g v e s s e l s .
3.6.3.4.1 I n o p e n i n g v e s s e l s , s t i l l w a t e r a n d w a v e
b e n d i n g m o m e n t is created b o t h b y v e r t i c a l a n d h o r
i z o n t a l f o r c e s . B e n d i n g m o m e n t s a r e c a l c u l a t e d first i n
vGu c o o r d i n a t e s y s t e m a n d t h e n r e - c a l c u l a t e d f o r t h e
basic inertia axes x a n d o f each semi-hull
( F i g . 3.6.3.4.1). A f u l l y l o a d e d h o p p e r space a t t h e
m a x i m u m d r a u g h t o f t h e v e s s e l i s t a k e n as a d e s i g n
case. B e n d i n g o f e a c h s e m i - h u l l h o p p e r is c o n s i d e r e d
separately. D e c k hinges a n d h y d r a u l i c cylinders are
assumed t o be supports located at the h o p p e r ends.
Besides, t h e f o l l o w i n g cases are c o n s i d e r e d :
sailing i n the w o r k area w i t h soil i n the hopper,
d r e d g i n g g e a r s t o w e d f o r sea;
v o y a g e w i t h w a t e r i n the h o p p e r space o r i n the
b a l l a s t c o n d i t i o n ( t h e h o p p e r is e m p t y , w h e r e v e r
practicable). Stores a n d outfit are t a k e n i n full, all
g e a r s t o w e d f o r sea.
i z o n t a l force c a l c u l a t i o n is m a d e a s s u m i n g t h a t a
s e m i - h u l l is r i g i d l y r e s t r a i n e d at e a c h h o p p e r e n d .
O t h e r w i s e a s e m i - h u l l is c o n s i d e r e d t o be f r e e l y
supported.
3.6.3.4.3 V e r t i c a l l o a d s .
T h e v e r t i c a l b e n d i n g m o m e n t at a n y s e c t i o n M ,
i n k N - m , acting o n each s e m i - h u l l shall be determined b y
the f o r m u l a
v
where M
(3.6.3.4.3)
= still w a t e r b e n d i n g
integration o f the vessel
conditions referred to in
wave bending moment
hulls, to be determined
= M
h i
t-
+ M
m o m e n t to be obtained b y load
with connected hulls for loading
3.6.3.4.1, i n k N - m ;
for the vessel with connected
a s r e q u i r e d b y 1.4.4., i n k N - m .
h i
where M
t-
S W X
V e r t i c a l m o m e n t s are considered p o s i t i v e i n case

o f h o g g i n g a n d n e g a t i v e i n case o f sagging.
3.6.3.4.4 H o r i z o n t a l l o a d s .
The horizontal bending m o m e n t M , i n k N / m ,
acting o n each s e m i - h u l l at the sections t a k e n i n the
m i d d l e a n d at ends o f the h o p p e r space shall be de
termined by the f o r m u l a
M
= 0,5(M
+ M
S W h i
(3.6.3.4.4-1)
W h i
. a n d M . = h o r i z o n t a l still w a t e r a n d w a v e b e n d i n g
m o m e n t s at the section u n d e r consideration, respectively,
in k N - m .
S W h
W h
H o r i z o n t a l m o m e n t s are considered positive w h e r e

t h e o u t e r side o f o n e s e m i - h u l l is subjected t o tensile
stresses.
T h e h o r i z o n t a l m o m e n t a c t i n g o n a s e m i - h u l l de
p e n d s o n t h e f i x i n g u s e d a t t h e e n d s o f t h e h o p p e r space.
W h e r e a s e m i - h u l l is considered r i g i d l y f i x e d at
the ends o f the h o p p e r space, the h o r i z o n t a l m o m e n t
shall be d e t e r m i n e d u s i n g the f o l l o w i n g f o r m u l a e :
i n still water:
at the section t a k e n i n the middle o f the
space
M
= 0,10/?&
s w h
(3.6.3.4.4-2)
at the hopper end
F i g . 3.6.3.4.1:
1 hinges; 2 hopper space
M'
sections
= -0,10/4
(3.6.3.4.4-3)
w h e r e p = 0 , 5 g ( p # 2 pdf)
kN/m;
3.6.3.4.2 T h e t y p e o f s u p p o r t i n g s t r u c t u r e s a n d
the clearance between t w o semi-hulls i n the fore a n d
aft ends o f the h o p p e r space d e t e r m i n e t h e c o n d i t i o n s
o f horizontal moments calculation.
W h e r e s u p p o r t i n g s t r u c t u r e s fitted a t t h e d e c k o r
b o t t o m level f o r w a r d o r aft o f t h e h o p p e r space
p r o v i d e the absence o f a n y clearance between the
semi-hulls, a n d the length o f the supporting struc
tures creates adequate fixing against the h o r i z o n t a l
forces a c t i n g a t h w a r t the h o p p e r space, the h o r
in waves:
at the section t a k e n i n the middle o f the
space
M
= M
4 - M ,
+ ^ j-);
~M WX
sections
(t
w h e r e v|/i = 0 , 6 1 4 / L 0,103;
v|/ = 0 , 5 0 4 / L 0 , 1 0 0 ;
v|/ = 0 , 8 5 4 / L 0 , 1 1 2 ;
2
hopper
(3.6.3.4.4-4)
at the hopper end

M'
hopper
+ t
-)
(3.6.3.4.4-5)
152
Rules
\ | r = 0,31l /L
4
0,050;
E =
x ( C + 0,7)[l,38 0 , 1 2 8 (
4
300100
; )
/2
i n still water:
= 0,15^;
g(0,Sp H -l,5p h -0,lpH e)

s
where \|r =
(3.6.3.4.4-6)
(3.6.3.4.4-7)
0 +
+ M
(3.6.3.8)
L c r
bmk
l.cr
f o r t h e u p p e r face p l a t e
+ M
' = \
(3.6.3.9-1)
SPAcr'
s w h
o p
w h
= M
3.6.3.9 T h e h o r i z o n t a l d e s i g n l o a d p , i n k P a , d u e
t o t h e d r e d g e d s p o i l pressure o n face plates o f t h e
hopper l o w e r cross m e m b e r shall be determined b y
the formulae:
o p
n >
T h e still w a t e r a n d w a v e h o r i z o n t a l bending
m o m e n t s a t t h e h o p p e r e n d sections are equal t o zero.
T h e sign o f M
shall be t a k e n i n t o account i n
determination o fM
andM' .
It is assumed that M
and M'
are equal t o
zero during voyage whatever the fixing conditions
are.
3.6.3.5 B e n d i n g m o m e n t s a c t i n g o n t h e h u l l o f t h e
floating crane shall be determined f o r operating
conditions i n t h e w o r k area a n d a voyage.
F o r t h e o p e r a t i o n i n t h e w o r k area t h e design
vertical bending m o m e n t M , i n k Nm , shall be de
M
(3.6.3.7)
Pi = g[p H2-(pdi + 0 , 5 p c ) P (kcrb . )A

l,5psA
bl l.cr
1,23(4/1,-0,5).
waves:
= M
Ships
3.6.3.8 T h e v e r t i c a l d e s i g n l o a d p , i n k P a , d u e t o
soil pressure, h a v i n g regard t o t h e counterpressure o f
the w a t e r o n t h e l o w e r cross m e m b e r o f t h e hopper
space shall be d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
where e = 0 for
fl<4m;
e = 0,20-0,8 when ^/0^0,75 \
e = 0 , 4 0 - 1 , 6 w h e n dJD > 0 , 7 5 J
W h e r e t h e semi-hull is n o t fixed a t t h e hopper

ends, t h e h o r i z o n t a l m o m e n t a t t h e section a t t h e
m i d d l e o f the h o p p e r space shall be d e t e r m i n e d b yt h e
following formulae:
of Sea-Going
] ;
= 1,35Z,/100 0 , 2 1 5 .
and Construction
(3.6.3.5)
where M
= s t i l l w a t e r b e n d i n g m o m e n t a c c o r d i n g t o 1.4.3, i n k n ;
M = bending m o m e n t due to the weight o fthe load suspended
o n the crane h o o k , i nk N m ;
for a v o y a g e M is assumed to b e equal to zero.
M
= w a v e bending m o m e n t for w o r k areas a n d a voyage tob e
determined using a procedure approved b y the Register
for a specified length a n d height o f the wave.
m
3.6.3.6 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e p , i n k P a , o n t h e
b u l k h e a d s b o u n d i n g t h e h o p p e r space, o n t h e struc
tures o f t h e enclosed w a t e r t i g h t centre line b o x keel
f o r t h e l o w e r face p l a t e
" =
(3.6.3.9-2)
\sPAcr-
3.6.3.10 T h e d e s i g n l o a d p , i n k P a , o n t h e
framing members a n d o n the plating o f the hopper
coaming shall be determined b y the f o r m u l a
4
gp h
s
(3.6.3.10)
T h e v a l u e p s h a l l b e t a k e n n o t less t h a n 1 5 k P a .
3.6.3.11 T h e d e s i g n a x i a l f o r c e N , i n k N , a c t i n g a t
the mid-height level o f t h e hopper l o w e r cross m e m
ber o n a d i a p h r a g m o r a transverse r i n g structure o f
t h e side b u o y a n c y space s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formula
4
(3.6.3.6)
where z = distance o f the load application point from the upper
weir level (upper edge o f the coaming), i n m .
t
3.6.3.7 T h e d e s i g n l o a d p \ , i n k P a , o n a p a r t i a l
bulkhead (diaphragm) o r a transverse r i n g structure o f
t h e side b u o y a n c y space a t a l e v e l o f t h e m i d - h e i g h t o f
the h o p p e r l o w e r cross m e m b e r d u e t o soil pressure,
having regard t o t h e outer counterpressure, shall be
N = gbH^WpsHi
+ 0,63pA-0,03ptf!m]
where m = 0 for ^3,5m ;

m = 1 f o r > 3,5 m ,
dJD^0,75;
m = ( 9 - 3 1 , 5 ) ( - 0 , 7 5 ) f o r > 3 , 5 m , dJD
(3.6.3.11)
> 0,75.
3.6.3.12 T h e d e s i g n a x i a l f o r c e R , i n k N , a c t i n g
o n t h e l o w e r cross m e m b e r o f t h e h o p p e r space shall
be d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
L c r
= 0,163 ^ - [ p ^
i
-p{d -0,5c f{3D-d
l c r
(SD-H )2
(3.6.3.12)
+ 0,5c )].
w
3.6.3.13 T h e d e s i g n a x i a l f o r c e R . r,
i nk N ,
acting o n t h e upper cross m e m b e r s o f t h e hopper
space shall be d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o l l o w i n g f o r m u l a e :
up C
P a r t II. H u l l
153
.1 f o r the upper cross m e m b e r fitted a t the deck

level
[ ~
c f l 2
Ab
\ < i
- s
A -
8QJ>j\
(3.6.3.16-1)
=
Rup.cr
/^2R 3
R\
R 4
(3.6.3.13.1)
where R \ = pressure o f dredged soil o n the u p p e r cross m e m b e r

determined a s
R
Ps
tf^
2 H
2~
3 h
where = n u m b e r o f hydraulic presses;

F = horizontal force o f water pressure o n the hull, deter
mined b y the formula
h
0,5 1 (^-0,5) ;
F
R2 =
F =
l.cr)l
external hydrostatic pressure o n the upper cross m e m b e r

determined a s
= horizontal force o f dredged soil pressure o n the hull,

F =
0,5
_
R
=
2
0,0826î 8P
0,5c )
j
( i- w-Ui.cr);
2 d
P s
P
^
bll
12#! '
gl (H -c) ;
b
f o r c, r e f e r t o F i g . 3 . 6 . 3 . 4 . 1 ;
a \ , a , , b\, b , 63 = f o r c e a r m s , i n m ( r e f e r t o F i g . 3.6.3.16).
/? = r e a c t i o n d u e t o s u p p o r t i n g b e n d i n g m o m e n t a t t h e
junction o fthe d i a p h r a g m with the lower cross m e m b e r
determined a s
F o r design force F ^ , t h e m a x i m u m pressure

value achieved b y t h e h y d r a u l i c press is adopted,
with F
^F .
T h e h o r i z o n t a l static force i n each h i n g e F , i n k N ,
d e s
h n
R4 = force resulting f r o m supporting reactions o fthe hopper

lower cross m e m b e r determined b y the formula
p
_ bk b
cr
, gp Q,5A .
4.
Fnn = 2 [ F
.2 f o r t h e u p p e r cross m e m b e r f i t t e d a t t h e u p p e r
face plate o f t h e h o p p e r c o a m i n g
Rup.cr = gp bh
s
(3.6.3.13.2)
F i g . 3.6.3.16
- F
- ^ {F^-Fn)]
(3.6.3.16-2)
w h e r e a = a r m o fthe force acting u p o n the stop, i n m .

4
T h e h o r i z o n t a l static force acting u p o n each stop

F
3 . 6 . 3 . 1 4 T h e d e s i g n l o a d o n d e c k s h a l l b e n o t less
than 20 kPa.
3.6.3.15 T h e design loads o n t h e structures o f
each s e m i - h u l l o f o p e n i n g vessels s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d
i n compliance w i t h 3.6.3.1 t o 3.6.3.14.
3.6.3.16 I n opening hopper dredgers a n d hopper
barges, f o r each h y d r a u l i c press, t h e h o r i z o n t a l statical
force F , i n k N , necessary t o keep t h e h u l l closed i s
determined b y the f o r m u l a (refer also t o F i g . 3.6.3.16)
+ n
7^
{
4
^- ^
(3.6.3.16-3)
where n = n u m b e r o f stops.
2
T h e vertical c o m p o n e n t s o f static forces i n hinges

are assumed equal t o zero.
3.6.3.17 T h e d y n a m i c forces acting o n h y d r a u l i c
cylinders a n d deck hinges shall be determined b y
c a l c u l a t i o n s o f vessel's m o t i o n s i n a seaway, w i t h
v a r i o u s course angles, i n light-ship a n d f u l l - l o a d
conditions. Based o n these calculations, m a x i m u m
vertical a n d h o r i z o n t a l forces acting o n the h y d r a u l i c
presses are d e t e r m i n e d . T h e c a l c u l a t i o n shall b e m a d e
using a procedure approved b y the Register.
3.6.4 Scantlings o f structural members.
3.6.4.1 Scantlings o f structural members shall be
determined i n compliance w i t h Sections 1 a n d 2 ,
having regard t o the provisions o f this Chapter.
3.6.4.2 T h e required h u l l section m o d u l u s o f a
singlehull vessel o f 60 m i n l e n g t h a n do v e r shall b e
d e t e r m i n e d a s r e q u i r e d b y 1.4.6 f o r d e c k , b o t t o m ,
upper edge o f the hopper c o a m i n g , h a v i n g regard t o
specified w o r k areas a n d voyages. T h e greater v a l u e
o b t a i n e d f o r t h e w o r k area o r v o y a g e (refer t o 3.6.3.3
a n d 3.6.3.4) shall b e taken.
F o r opening hopper dredgers a n d hopper barges
the required section m o d u l u s shall be determined for
t h e case w h e n b o t h s e m i - h u l l s a r e c o n n e c t e d (refer
t o 3.6.3.4).
3.6.4.3 W h e n calculating t h e actual section
m o d u l u s o f the h u l l i n w a y o f the h o p p e r space as
r e q u i r e d b y 1.4.8, a c c o u n t s h a l l b e t a k e n o f a l l c o n -
154
Rules
tinuous longitudinals, longitudinalbulkheads a n d the

h o p p e r space c o a m i n g s w i t h l o n g i t u d i n a l s , 8 5 p e r
cent o f the total area o f centre line b o x keel long
itudinal members, provided they are properly inter
connected w i t h the longitudinal framing members
beyond t h ehopper a n d fitting o ftransverse members
regulated b y t h e Rules, inside t h e hopper.
T h e continuous deck plating longitudinally framed
a b o v e t h e h o p p e r space a n d a w a s h b u l k h e a d i n t h e
hopper m a y be included i n t h e actual section m o d u l u s
calculation using a procedure approved b y the Register.
3.6.4.4 L o n g i t u d i n a l s t r e n g t h o f e a c h s e m i - h u l l o f
o p e n i n g hopper dredgers a n d hopper barges shall b e
checked f o rvertical a n d longitudinal bending moments
i n asymmetrical bending (refer t o F i g . 3.6.3.4.1).
3.6.4.4.1 N o r m a l s t r e s s e s a r i s i n g i n c r o s s - s e c t i o n
points under conditions o f asymmetrical bending
shall be determined amidships a n d a t t h e e n d bulk
h e a d sections o f t h e h o p p e r space ( f r o m inside t h e
hopper), provided the hulls at this position are rigidly
restrained.
Stresses a , i n M P a , s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formula
" = ( M -
where M
= M
) -10-
cos a M
(3.6.4.4.1-1)
sin a;
My = M s i n a + M c o s a ;
v
for M
a n d M , r e f e r t o 3.6.3.4.3 a n d 3.6.3.4.4;
<x = r o t a t i o n a n g l e o f m a i n i n e r t i a a x e s ( p o s i t i v e v a l u e o f a
rotation G u axis counter-clockwise), it shall b e deter
mined b ythe formula
v
tg2a = 2 / / ( W J
(3.6.4.4.1-2)
w h e r e /, = v dS, = c e n t r i f u g a l i n e r t i a m o m e n t a b o u t a x e s G u ,
Gv w i t h n o r e g a r d f o r w e a r a l l o w a n c e , i n m ;
, v = d i s t a n c e o f t h e c e n t r e o f g r a v i t y o f '-th m e m b e r a r e a f r o m
t h e a x e s G u , Gv, i n m ;
dSj = '-th m e m b e r a r e a , i n m ;
lu, h i n e r t i a m o m e n t s o f t h e s e m i - h u l l c r o s s - s e c t i o n a b o u t a x e s
G u , Gv w i t h n o r e g a r d f o r w e a r a l l o w a n c e , i n m ;
x, = coordinates o fthe section point u n d e r consideration a b o u t
m a i n a x e s Gx, Gy ( r e f e r t o F i g . 3.6.3.4.1), i n m ;
Ix, ly i n e r t i a m o m e n t s o f t h e s e m i - h u l l c r o s s - s e c t i o n a b o u t t h e
m a i n axes with n o regard f o r wear allowance, i n m .
t
3.6.4.4.2 N o r m a l s t r e s s e s a c t i n g i n t h e s e m i - h u l l
cross-section ( f o r n o r m a l s t r e n g t h s t r u c t u r a l steel)
shall n o t exceed:
150 M P a f o rt h e l o w e r edge o f the deck stringer;
145 M P a f o rt h e u p p e r edge o f t h e plate keel;
165 M P a i n t h e face p l a t e o f the h o p p e r c o a m i n g .
3.6.4.4.3 P e r m i s s i b l e s h e a r s t r e s s e s f o r m e m b e r s
m a d e o f n o r m a l s t r e n g t h s t r u c t u r a l steel a n d p a r t i c i
pating i n the longitudinal bending are assumed equal
t o 1 1 5 M P a . E q u i v a l e n t s t r e s s e s a = / + a t
t h e sections w h e r e s u b s t a n t i a l n o r m a l stresses a n d
shear stresses ( a t t h e h o p p e r ends) a c t s h a l l b e n o t
more than 170 M P a .
3.6.4.4.4 B u c k l i n g s t r e n g t h o f c o m p r e s s e d m e m
bers a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.5 s h a l l b e e n s u r e d .
2
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
3.6.4.5 B o t t o m f r a m i n g .
3.6.4.5.1 W h e n t h e b o t t o m i s t r a n s v e r s e l y f r a m e d ,
t h e m o m e n t o f i n e r t i a a n d scantlings o f f l o o r s i n side
b u o y a n c y spaces s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d as r e q u i r e d
b y 2 . 3 . 4 . 1 . 1 ; i n t h i s case, t o b e t a k e n as B \ i s d o u b l e d
b r e a d t h o f t h e b u o y a n c y space o v e r t h e b o t t o m .
3.6.4.5.2 W h e r e a s i n g l e b o t t o m i s l o n g i t u d i n a l l y
framed, t h e section m o d u l u s o f b o t t o m longitudinals
i n b u o y a n c y spaces s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h a t d e
termined i n compliance w i t h 2.3.4.2.1. T h e floors shall
b e fitted i n l i n e w i t h t r a n s v e r s e r i n g s t r u c t u r e s , t h e i r
section m o d u l u s a n d cross sectional area shall be n o t
less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 2 . 3 . 4 . 2 . 3 a n d 2 . 3 . 4 . 2 . 4 . T h e
section m o d u l u s a n d d e p t h o f a side g i r d e r s h a l l b e n o t
less t h a n t h o s e r e q u i r e d f o r t h e f l o o r . T h e f l o o r w e b
d e p t h s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 1 3 ^ ( r e f e r t o 3 . 6 . 4 . 5 . 1 ) .
3.6.4.5.3 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f t h e b o t t o m f r a m i n g
m e m b e r s i n each s e m i - h u l l o f o p e n i n g vessels s h a l l b e
d e t e r m i n e d as r e q u i r e d b y 2.3.4.2; t o be t a k e n as
breadth B \ is t h e breadth o f o n e semi-hull a t the
section under consideration. T h e r e is n o b o t t o m
centre g i r d e r i n o p e n i n g vessels.
3.6.4.5.4 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f d o u b l e b o t t o m m e m
bers i nw a y o f the h o p p e r space a r e d e t e r m i n e d as f o r
d r y cargo ships h a v i n g d o u b l e s k i n c o n s t r u c t i o n ac
c o r d i n g t o 2 . 4 w i t h regard t o 3.6.2.4; b e y o n d t h e
h o p p e r as f o r d r y cargo ships w i t h single s k i n c o n
struction i ncompUance w i t h the requirements o f the
same paragraphs.
T h e plate f l o o r spacing shall n o t exceed t h e
m a x i m u m spacing o f transverse r i n g structures, spe
cified i n 3.6.2.11.1.
3.6.4.5.5 F o r f l o a t i n g c r a n e s t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s
o f b o t t o m transverses s h a l l be as r e q u i r e d b y 2.3, a n d
additional b o t t o m longitudinals shall have the same
section m o d u l u s as f o rm a i n longitudinals.
3.6.4.5.6 I n c a l c u l a t i n g t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s a n d
the d e p t h o f f l o o r s i n accordance w i t h 2.3, B \ is as
s u m e d t o be t h e f l o o r s p a n b e t w e e n t h e side shell a n d
the longitudinal bulkhead o r between t h e long
i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s , b u t n o t less t h a n 0 , 4 o f t h e f u l l
breadth o f t h e ship.
3.6.4.5.7 I n c a s e o f l o n g i t u d i n a l l y f r a m e d b o t t o m ,
the scantlings o f floors a n d b o t t o m longitudinals o f
floating cranes b e y o n d t h e double b o t t o m area shall
be d e t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h 2.3.4.2.
3.6.4.6 S h e l l p l a t i n g .
3.6.4.6.1 S h e l l p l a t e s c a n t U n g s a r e d e t e r m i n e d i n
accordance w i t h 2.2.4.
T h e thickness o f t h e b o t t o m strakes t o w h i c h
h o p p e r l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s o r w e l l sides a r e
connected shall be increased b y 15 p e r cent as against
that o f the b o t t o m plating. W h e r e there is n o centre
Une b o x keel, t h e thickness o f t h e b o t t o m strakes
abutting o n the hopper longitudinal bulkhead shall
be increased b y 5 0 p e r cent.
P a r t II. H u l l
155
3.6.4.6.2 T h e s i d e s h e l l p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s a t t h e
h o p p e r e n d s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n r e q u i r e d b y 1.4.7.
3.6.4.6.3 I n v e s s e l s w i t h p o n t o o n h u l l s , t h e t h i c k n e s s
o f the b o t t o m a n d side shell p l a t i n g w i t h i n 0 , 1 5 L f r o m
t h e f o r w a r d a n d after perpendiculars s h a l l n o t b e less
than t h e plating thickness w i t h i n t h e midship region.
3.6.4.6.4 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e w e l l s i d e p l a t i n g
s h a l l b e e q u a l t o t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e side s h e l l p l a t i n g
i n a r e a c o n c e r n e d , b u t n o t less t h a n 8 m m .
3.6.4.6.5 I n o p e n i n g v e s s e l s t h e s h e l l p l a t i n g
t h i c k n e s s s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d w i t h r e g a r d f o r 3.6.4.4.
T h e thickness o f the b o t t o m strakes a t the hopper
longitudinal b u l k h e a d need n o t be increased.
3.6.4.6.6 I n f l o a t i n g c r a n e s t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e
b o t t o m p l a t i n g w i t h i n 0 , 2 L f r o m t h e f o r w a r d perpendicular shall be increased over t h e entire breadth
o f t h e h u l l b y 3 0 p e r cent as against t h e m i n i m u m
thickness required b y 2.2.4.8.
I n t h e fore peak a n d t h e areas extending f o r w a r d
for 0,1 L f r o m t h e stern t r a n s o m corners a n d i n b o a r d
f o r 0,1 B , t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e s i d e s h e l l p l a t i n g s h a l l
be increased o v e r t h e entire d e p t h b y 3 0 p e r cent as
compared t o t h e m i n i m u m thickness required
b y 2.2.4.8 (refer also t o 3.6.2.5.2).
I n other regions along the hull length, the m i n i m u m thickness o f the shell plating shall be increased
b y 10 p e r cent as against t h a t prescribed b y 2.2.4.8.
3.6.4.6.7 T h e p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s o f t h e b o w a n d
s t e r n t r a n s o m s i n f l o a t i n g c r a n e s s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n r e q u i r e d b y 3.6.4.6.3.
3.6.4.7 S i d e f r a m i n g .
T h e scantUngs o f t h e side f r a m i n g m e m b e r s s h a l l
be d e t e r m i n e d i n c o m p U a n c e w i t h 2.5, h a v i n g regard
t o 3.6.2.5, 3.6.2.11 a n d t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s g i v e n b e l o w :
.1 t h e section m o d u l u s o f f r a m e s i n t r a n s v e r s e l y
f r a m e d side b u o y a n c y spaces s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d
f r o m 2.5.4.1 as f o r d r y cargo ships.
W h e r e a side s t r i n g e r is f i t t e d a t a level o f fenders,
m a i n frame span m a y be determined i n compUance
w i t h 2.5.1.2 as f o r side transverses o f t a n k e r s , p r o v i d e d t h e s t r u c t u r e o f t h e side s t r i n g e r m e e t s t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.6.4.7.2. W h e r e n o transverse r i n g
structures are fitted, braces m a y be p r o v i d e d i n Une
w i t h h o r i z o n t a l girders o f l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads;
.2 t h e s c a n t U n g s o f s i d e s t r i n g e r s s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d as r e q u i r e d b y 2.5.4.4 as f o r t h e case o f f i t t i n g
w e b f r a m e s . T h e w i d t h o f t h e side s t r i n g e r s h a l l n o t b e
less t h a n 0 , 0 8 / ( / = s t r i n g e r s p a n a s m e a s u r e d b e t w e e n
w e b frames o r between those a n d tight transverse
bulkheads) o r 2,5 times the frame depth, whichever is
the greater. Side stringers shaU be aUgned w i t h cross
ties o f t h e transverse r i n g structures;
.3 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f s i d e l o n g i t u d i n a l s s h a l l
be d e t e r m i n e d as r e q u i r e d b y 2.5.4.3 w i t h k values
t a k e n as f o r d r y cargo ships;
a
.4 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s a n d c r o s s - s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f
w e b frames w h i c h are a part o f a transverse ring
s t r u c t u r e s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h o s e r e q u i r e d
i n 2.5.4.5 f o r side transverses o f t a n k e r s .
A w e b frame span shaU be measured between t h e
i n n e r edges o f t h e f l o o r a n d a n i n n e r edge o f t h e b e a m .
T h e d e p t h o f t h e w e b f r a m e s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 0 , 1 / o r 2,5 times the width o f longitudinals
(whichever is t h e greater) a n d m a y b e assumed v a r y i n g
w i t h reduction at the upper end a n d increase at the l o w e r
e n d b y 1 0 p e r cent as against t h e average v a l u e ;
.5 t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f w e l l l o n g i t u d i n a l
b u l k h e a d s t i f f e n e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n r e q u i r e d f o r
side f r a m e s ;
.6 i n f l o a t i n g c r a n e s , t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f m a i n
and intermediate frames i n the fore peak shall be
increased b y 2 0 p e r cent as c o m p a r e d t o t h a t required
b y 2.8.4.2.2;
.7 t h e section m o d u l u s o f w e b f r a m e s i n f l o a t i n g
c r a n e s W, i n c m , w i t h i n t h e r e g i o n s p e c i f i e d
i n 3 . 6 . 2 . 5 . 3 s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
3
120
W = 0,95(300 + ^
bpFfrc
(3.6.4.7.7)
where / = web frame span measured between the deck a n d the

u p p e r edge o f the floor, i n m ;
p = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.6.3, b u t n o t l e s s t h a n 0 , 5 p g / , i n k P a ;
.8 t h e s c a n t U n g s o f t h e f r a m i n g m e m b e r s o f t h e
b o w a n d s t e r n t r a n s o m s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n r e q u i r e d b y 3.6.4.7.2 t o 3.6.4.7.4 a n d 3.6.4.7.6.
3.6.4.8 D e c k s .
3.6.4.8.1 T h e p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s o f t h e s t r e n g t h
d e c k w i t h i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n s h a l l b e t a k e n n o t less
t h a n t h e sheerstrake thickness.
T h e m i n i m u m thickness o f the deck plating i n
vessels o f d r e d g i n g fleet s h a l l be d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d ing t o 2.6.4.2 as f o r t h e strength deck. F o r f l o a t i n g
cranes t h em i n i m u m thickness o f the upper deck shall
be increased b y 10 p e r cent as against t h a t prescribed
b y 2.6.4.2 as f o r t h e strength deck.
3.6.4.8.2 C o m p r e s s i v e s t r e s s e s i n d e c k s h a l l b e
determined under the action o f bending m o m e n t
c o m p o n e n t s according t o 3.6.3. T h e b u c k U n g
s t r e n g t h r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.6.5 s h a l l b e m e t .
3.6.4.8.3 T h e d e p t h o f d e c k t r a n s v e r s e s i n b u o y a n c y spaces w h i c h f o r m a p a r t o f t h e transverse r i n g
structure shall be equal t o two-thirds o f the floor
d e p t h , w h i l e t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e w e b p l a t e a n d sizes
o f the face p l a t e s h a l l be e q u a l t o t h o s e o f t h e v e r t i c a l
webs. T h e depth o f t h e deck transverse shall be n o t
less t h a n 2 , 5 t i m e s t h e h e i g h t o f t h e d e c k l o n g i t u d i n a l .
3.6.4.8.4 F o r f l o a t i n g c r a n e s t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s
o f deck girders shall be determined as required
b y 1.6.4.1 w i t h k = 0 , 6 a n d m = 1 2 .
3.6.4.8.5 T h e d e c k p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s u n d e r t h e
s e a t s o f s p e c i a l a r r a n g e m e n t s fitted o n t h e d e c k ( c a t
cranes o f suction tubes, transfer appUances, grab
a
156
Rules
cranes, etc.) a n d w h e r e special m e t a l structures pass

t h r o u g h the deck (main a n d ladder gallows) shall be
increased b y 2 5 p e r cent.
3.6.4.9 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f s i d e a n d d e c k f r a m i n g
members, t h e thicknesses o f deck plating, b u l k h e a d
f r a m i n g a n d p l a t i n g , a n d c o a m i n g s o f o p e n i n g vessels
shall b e d e t e r m i n e d w i t h regard f o r 3.6.4.4.
W h e r e vertical webs a n d w e b frames are con
nected b y cross ties o r braces, t h e scantUngs o f ver
tical webs, w e b frames a n d braces shall be submitted
to the Register f o rreview.
3.6.4.10 I n v e s s e l s w i t h p o n t o o n h u l l s , t h e s c a n
tUngs o f side stringers a t t h e f o r w a r d e n d o f t h e vessel
shall be prescribed as required b y 2.8.4.5, t h e height
and thickness o fvertical webs a n dw e b frames shall
be t h e same as t h e w i d t h a n d thickness o f the stringer.
3.6.4.11 S p e c i f i c s t r u c t u r e s o f v e s s e l s o f d r e d g i n g
fleet.
3.6.4.11.1 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W, i n c m , o f t h e
d i a p h r a g m o f t h e b u o y a n c y space after d e d u c t i o n o f
openings, o r t h e total section m o d u l u s o f a vertical
w e b a n d a w e bframe o fthe transverse ring structure
at t h e section o f a m i d - p o i n t o f t h e hopper l o w e r
c r o s s m e m b e r d e p t h s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
(3.6.4.11.3-3)
w h e r e m = 12;
k(j = 0,45;
k,=
p =
Ricr =
f o r Aft,
0,45;
a s d e f i n e d i n 3.6.3.8;
a s d e f i n e d i n 3.6.3.12;
r e f e r t o 3.6.4.11.2.
3.6.4.11.4 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f t h e f a c e p l a t e s
o f t h e h o p p e r l o w e r c r o s s m e m b e r s W, i n c m , a b o u t
t h e h o r i z o n t a l a x i s a n d s e c t i o n a l a r e a ff_ , i n c m ,
f o r t h e u p p e r face p l a t e
3
* -
1 -
_ 2,5ft,.,//,
+ l 2 )
*
w
(36.4.11.4.,)
4.
f o r t h e l o w e r face p l a t e
W =
^ 2
m k^n
(3.6.4.11.4-3)
- co ;
c
\0 \
(3.6.4.11.1)
w h e r e f o r H r e f e r t o F i g . 3.6.1.6;
m = 12;
= 0,6;
P \ = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.6.3.7.
l
3.6.4.11.2 T h e c r o s s - s e c t i o n a l a r e a / , i n c m , o f
the diaphragm, o rthe total sectional area o f a vertical
w e b a n d a w e bframe o fthe transverse ring structure
at a level o f a m i d - p o i n t o f t h e h o p p e r l o w e r cross
m e m b e r d e p t h s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n
/=^+0,1/;.
where
Aft
bt
(3.6.4.11.2)
N = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.6.3.11;
= 0,65;
= Asbf,
= typical m e m b e r scantlings (half-breadth o f deck, w e b
h e i g h t o f l o n g i t u d i n a l , etc.), i n c m .
T h e scantlings o f t h e transverse ring structure

m e m b e r s ( b o t t o m transverse, vertical w e b , side a n d deck
transverses) s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n r e q u i r e d b y t h e r e
levant paragraphs o fthis Chapter for such members.
3.6.4.11.3 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W, i n c m , s e c t i o n a l
a r e a o f t h e h o p p e r l o w e r c r o s s m e m b e r w e b /,, i n c m ,
after deducting openings, sectional area o ft h e floor
w i t h face p l a t e s / , i n c m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
3
W =
L c r
;
2
(3.6.4.11.3-1)
ff- =
P
h c r h
^
'
P
(3.6.4.11.4-4)
'
w h e r e f o r l\ a n d h , r e f e r t o F i g . 3.6.1.6;
m = 24;
mi = 12;
= 0,6;
= 0,45;
P i , p ' i = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.6.3.9;
A f = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.6.4.11.2.
3.6.4.11.5 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f b u l k h e a d v e r
tical webs, h o r i z o n t a l girders, vertical stiffeners a n d
longitudinals o f the hopper longitudinal bulkheads
s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d as f o r side f r a m i n g a c c o r d i n g
t o 3.6.4.7 w i t h s u b s t i t u t i o n o f p according t o 2.5.3
b y p according t o 3.6.3.6. F o r t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l
b u l k h e a d stiffeners m = 1 1 a n d k = 0,75.
T h e d e p t h o f t h e v e r t i c a l w e b s h a l l b e n o t less
than 0,12/ a n d m a y be assumed varying w i t h reduc
t i o n a t t h eupper e n d a n d increase a t t h e l o w e r e n d b y
10 p e r cent as c o m p a r e d t o t h e average v a l u e .
T w o upper longitudinals shall be taken the same
as t h e t h i r d l o n g i t u d i n a l f r o m t h e d e c k .
Besides, three upper a n d three l o w e r l o n g
i t u d i n a l s s h a l l b e c h e c k e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.5.4.
T h e w i d t h o f the h o r i z o n t a l girder shall be equal
to that o fthe bulkhead vertical web.
3.6.4.11.6 T h e p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s o f t h e h o p p e r
longitudinal a n de n dbulkheads shall be determined
as r e q u i r e d b y 1.6.4.4 a s s u m i n g p = p ( w h e r e p s h a l l
be o b t a i n e d f r o m 3.6.3.6), k = 0,1, m = 15,8.
T h e upper strake thickness o fthe hopper longi
t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d a t 0,1-D b e l o w t h e d e c k s h a l l n o t b e
s
(P2
+ 0,1
(3.6.4.11.3-2)
P a r t II. H u l l
157
less t h a n t h e s h e e r s t r a k e t h i c k n e s s . T h e l o w e r s t r a k e
thickness o f t h e longitudinal bulkhead at 0,1D f r o m
t h e b a s e l i n e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e b o t t o m p l a t i n g
thickness.
3.6.4.11.7 T h e m i n i m u m t h i c k n e s s o f h o p p e r
b u l k h e a d p l a t i n g s h a l l b e e q u a l t o 8 m m f o r vessels
h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L < 6 0 m a n d 10 m m f o r vessels
having t h e length L ^ 80 m . F o rintermediate values
o f L , t h e m i n i m u m thickness shall be determined b y
linear interpolation.
3.6.4.11.8 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W, i n c m , o f
vertical stiffeners a n d stanchions o f t h e hopper
c o a m i n g s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formula
3.6.4.11.9 T h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f t h e u p p e r c r o s s
m e m b e r s spanning h o p p e r space a t deck level and/or
c o a m i n g level f
, i n c m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
2
+ /;-
= o,os5Rup.
fup.cr
cr
(3.6.4.11.9-1)
w h e r e A f = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.6.4.11.2.
W h e r e a l o a d from b o t t o m c l o s i n g a p p l i a n c e s i s
applied t o t h e upper cross members, their strength shall
be checked u s i n g t h e e q u i v a l e n t stress g i v e n b e l o w
C T
Geq = V m a x + 3 T
(3.6.4.11.8-1)
(3.6.4.11.9-2)
^0,75CJ
where a
= \0R . /f .
+ (M /W)\0 ;
x =
\0N /f ;
M
a n dN = m a x i m u m bending m o m e n t , i n k N . m , a n dshear
force, i nk N , d u e t o transverse load;
W = actual section m o d u l u s o fthe upper cross m e m b e r , i n c m ;
fup.cr, fw
full sectional area o f t h e u p p e r cross m e m b e r a n d
sectional area o fthe cross m e m b e r web, i n c m .
m
up cr
s h
s h
\0 ahlp
W = mk a
up cr
w h e r e p = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.6.3.10;
m = 15 f o r s t a n c h i o n s w h e r e u p p e r c r o s s m e m b e r s a r e f i t t e d
i n l i n e w i t h t r a n s v e r s e ring s t r u c t u r e s a t t h e c o a m i n g t o p ;
m = 6 for stanchionswhere n o u p p e r cross m e m b e r s are fitted
at the coaming top;
m = 15,6 f o r v e r t i c a l s t i f f e n e r s w h e r e t r a n s v e r s e f r a m i n g i s
adopted;
k = 0,6.
4
3.6.4.11.10 W h e r e n o u p p e r c r o s s m e m b e r s a r e
fitted a t a deck level i n line w i t h transverse ring
structures, a part o ft h e c o a m i n g structure w i t h t h e
u p p e r p o r t i o n o f t h e side b u o y a n c y space located
a t 0 , l Z > b e l o w t h e deck line ( F i g . 3.6.4.11.10) shall
h a v e a s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W, i n c m , a b o u t a h o r i z o n t a l
a x i s n o t less t h a n
3
T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W, i n c m , o f h o r i z o n t a l
stiffeners a n d face plate o f t h e c o a m i n g s h a l l n o t b e
less t h a n
w
l O b f t W
mk G h
a
_
W =
550R Alh-bf
bey*
U P
(3.6.4.11.10-1)
(3.6.4.11.8-2)
where z = distance between t h e coaming t o p a n d horizontal

stiffeners, b u t n o t less t h a n h a l f the c o a m i n g height, i n m ;
m = 12;
k = 0,2.
(
T h e sectional area f o ft h e coaming

i n c m , a t d e c k s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
st
stanchion,
T h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e d e c k p l a t i n g s, i n m m , s h a l l
s
U U R ^ A k - b )

(3.6.4.11.10-2)
w h e r e f o r B , r e f e r t o F i g . 3.6.4.11.10.
3
(3.6.4.11.8-3)
w h e r e k = 0,45;
A f i = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.6.4.11.2.
x
T h e plate thickness o f t h e side ( e n d ) c o a m i n g

shall b e determined as f o r t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l ( e n d )
b u l k h e a d o f t h e h o p p e r p according t o 3.6.3.6 as
measured a t t h e deck level, b u ti t shall be taken n o t
less t h a n t h e u p p e r s t r a k e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e l o n g
itudinal bulkhead.
T h e depth o f t h e stanchion a t deck shall ben o t
l e s s t h a n 0,12/ a n d t h e t h i c k n e s s n o t l e s s t h a n t h e
c o a m i n g thickness.
T h e plate thickness o f t h e coaming a n d m o m e n t
o f i n e r t i a o f t h e h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners a n d face plate o f
the coaming shall meet t h e buckling strength re
q u i r e m e n t s a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.5.
s
^ o r stanchions b is substitutedfor a.
F i g . 3.6.4.11.10
158
Rules
3.6.4.11.11 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f h u l l s t r u c t u r a l i t e m s
i n places w h e r e hinges a n d h y d r a u l i c presses a r e ar
ranged shall be d e t e r m i n e d b y direct c a l c u l a t i o n as
regards t h e a c t i o n o f statical a n d d y n a m i c a l forces i n
compliance w i t h 3.6.3.16.
T h e calculations shall be submitted t o the
Register f o r review.
3.6.4.11.12 H y d r a u l i c p r e s s e s s h a l l b e p o s i t i o n e d
i n special spaces a t t h e h o p p e r ends. T h e s t r e n g t h
calculation o f foundations a n d attachments o fh y
d r a u l i c presses s h a l l b e m a d e as regards t h e a c t i o n o f
forces d e t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h 3.6.4.11.11 a n d
shall be submitted t o t h e Register f o r review.
3.6.4.12 S p e c i f i c s t r u c t u r e s o f f l o a t i n g c r a n e s .
3.6.4.12.1 T h e d i a m e t e r o f t h e t u b D , i n m , a t t h e
upper deck beneath t h e fixed tower supporting t h e
u p p e r s t r u c t u r e o f t h e c r a n e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
0
= 0,31 M / P
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
F o r c r a n e s h a v i n g a safe w o r k i n g l o a d m o r e
t h a n 100 t, t h e stressed c o n d i t i o n o f f r a m i n g m e m
bers a n d plating o f bulkheads f o r m i n g t h e cross u n
der t h e loads transferred f r o m t h e fixed supporting
t o w e r i n case o f u s i n g t h e design safe w o r k i n g l o a d a t
the m a x i m u m outreach shall be checked according t o
the procedure approved b y t h e Register.
3.6.4.12.5 T h e p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s o f t h e u p p e r d e c k
a n d t h e b o t t o m s', i n m m , i n w a y o f t h e c r a n e t u b
s' = a s
(3.6.4.12.5)
w h e r e s = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.6.4.12.2;
a = 0,6 a n d 0,4 f o r t h e u p p e r d e c k p l a t i n g a n d b o t t o m
plating, respectively.
T h e dimensions o f t h e plates o f increased thick

ness shall be t a k e n i n accordance w i t h F i g . 3.6.4.12.5.
(3.6.4.12.1)
where M = total bending m o m e n t d u eto load a n d weight o f t h e

movable upper structure o f t h e crane, applied t o t h e
supporting tower, i nk N . m ;
P = total vertical force d u e t o load a n d weight o fthe m o v a b l e
upper structure o f t h e crane, applied t o t h e supporting
tower, i n k N .
3.6.4.12.2 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e t u b p l a t i n g , i n c m ,
at t h e upper deck shall be determined b y calculation
based o n t h e total bending m o m e n t
according
t o 3.6.4.12.1 a n d a h o r i z o n t a l c o m p o n e n t o f t h e l o a d
f o r t h e case w h e n a d e s i g n safe w o r k i n g l o a d o f t h e
crane w i t h t h e lifting height f r o m t h e water level at t h e
m a x i m u m o u t r e a c h is used.
P e r m i s s i b l e stresses f o r n o r m a l s t r e n g t h steel s h a l l
not be m o r e than: a = 140M P a a n d z = 80 M P a .
T h e buckling strength o f the tub plating over its
entire height shall be ensured t o the value a = 2 , 5 R .
T h e calculations shall be submitted t o the Register f o r
review.
3.6.4.12.3 T h e i n e r t i a m o m e n t I ^ n , i n c m , o f t h e
t u b v e r t i c a l s t i f f e n e r s ( i f a n y ) s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
cr
c r
e H
c^2D
m i n
= (l,03/-l,80j)5
(3.6.4.12.3)
where / = stiffener s p a n m e a s u r e d b e t w e e n t h e b o t t o m a n d t h e
platform or between the platform a n d the deck,
whichever is t h e greater, i n m . W h e r e t h e platform is
omitted, the distancebetween the b o t t o m a n d the deck is
measured;
= s p a c i n g o f stiffeners, m e a s u r e d a l o n g t h e c h o r d line, i n m ;
s = t u b plating thickness a t the stiffener m i d - s p a n , i n m m .
3.6.4.12.4 T h e p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s o f t h e b u l k h e a d s
f o r m i n g a cross a n d t h e b e a r i n g c o n t o u r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g to 2 . 7 . 4 . 1 , a s s u m i n g k = 0 , 7 0 ,
A s > 4 m m f o r bulkheads f o r m i n g t h e cross a n d
As ^ 2 m m f o r those f o r m i n g t h e bearing contour.
u
F i g . 3.6.4.12.5:
1 thickened plate; 2 t u b
3.6.5.1 W h e r e v e s s e l s a r e i n t e n d e d t o g r o u n d
d u r i n g t h e course o f n o r m a l service, t h e b o t t o m o f
s u c h vessels s h a l l b e s u i t a b l y s t r e n g t h e n e d , as f o l l o w s :
.1 t h e thickness o f t h e b o t t o m shell p l a t i n g s h a l l
be increased b y 2 0 p e r cent over t h e m i n i m u m re
quirement;
.2 w h e r e t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m i s o m i t t e d a n d
transverse f r a m i n g system is adopted, t h e b o t t o m
shell p l a t i n g b e t w e e n t h e b o t t o m side girders s h a l l b e
strengthened b y h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners.
I n line w i t h h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners vertical stiffeners
shall be fitted. T h e h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners shall pass
P a r t II. H u l l
through openings i n the floors a n d be welded t o

them;
.3 w h e r e d o u b l e b o t t o m i s o m i t t e d a n d l o n g i - t u dinal f r a m i n g system is adopted, t h e b o t t o m shell
plating shall be strengthened b y additional floors, the
d e p t h o f w h i c h s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 2 , 5 t i m e s t h e
depth o f t h e b o t t o m longitudinal a n d a thickness
equal t o that o fthe m a i n floors. T h e m a i n floors shall
be strengthened b y v e r t i c a l stiffeners fitted i n line
w i t h b o t t o m longitudinals. Side girders shall n o t be
spaced m o r e t h a n 2,2 m apart. T h e scantUngs o f bilge
l o n g i t u d i n a l s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h o s e r e q u i r e d f o r
the b o t t o m ;
.4 i n transversely f r a m e d d o u b l e b o t t o m plate
f l o o r s s h a l l b e fitted a t e v e r y f r a m e , s i d e g i r d e r s s h a l l
be spaced n o t m o r e t h a n 2,5 m apart, t h e y shall be
also fitted i n b o a r d o r f r o m l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkheads a t
a distance n o t exceeding 2,5 m . T h e b o t t o m shell
plating shall be strengthened b y h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners
fitted b e t w e e n t h e s i d e g i r d e r s . V e r t i c a l s t i f f e n e r s s h a l l
b e fitted i n U n e w i t h h o r i z o n t a l s t i f f e n e r s a t e v e r y
floor a n d be welded t o them.
In longitudinally framed double b o t t o m floors
s h a l l b e fitted a t e v e r y s e c o n d f r a m e , a n d s i d e g i r d e r s
shall be spaced 2,5 m apart;
.5 i n w a y o f a r e c e s s f o r v e r t i c a l g i r d e r s o f s u c t i o n
tubes, t h e f o l l o w i n g h u l l strengthening shall be p r o
vided:
side f r a m i n g s h a l l b e r e i n f o r c e d b y a t least t h r e e
w e b frames, t h e scantUngs o fw h i c h shall be t h e same
as t h o s e r e q u i r e d f o r t h e e n g i n e r o o m , a n d b y n o t less
t h a n t h r e e i n t e r c o s t a l side stringers e x t e n d i n g f o r
three spacings f r o m t h e e x t r e m e w e b frames w h i c h
s h a l l b e f i t t e d n o t less t h a n 5 0 m m f r o m t h e e d g e o f
t h e recess;
side s h e l l p l a t i n g i n w a y o f t h e recess s h a l l b e
made o f a curved welded-in plate, t h e vertical butt
j o i n t o f t h i s p l a t e s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 1 0 0 m m f r o m
t h e edge o f t h e recess;
the thickness o f the deck stringer i n w a y o f the recess
shall b e increased b y 6 0 p e r cent over t h e length equal t o
o n e spacing f o r w a r d a n d abaft o f w e b frames.
3.6.5.2 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3 . 6 . 5 . 1 s h a l l n o t a p
p l y t o f l o a t i n g cranes f o r w h i c h deep sea service is
specified a n d w h i c h a r e n o t likely t o g r o u n d u n d e r
any conditions o fheel a n d trim.
3.6.5.3 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f m a i n s t r u c t u r a l i t e m s
w h i c h are p a r t i c u l a r l y subjected t o abrasive w e a r d u e
t o t h e effect o f s p o i l / w a t e r m i x t u r e ( i n p a r t i c u l a r , i n
case o f special d r e d g i n g m e t h o d s used) s h a l l b e i n
creased. These i t e m s m a y be m a d e o f special wearresistant m a t e r i a l s subject t o special agreement w i t h
the Register.
3.6.5.4 D r e d g i n g p u m p s s h a l l b e l o c a t e d i n s p e
cial spaces b o u n d e d b y w a t e r t i g h t b u l k h e a d s .
159
3.6.5.5 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f d e c k f r a m i n g m e m b e r s
o n deck portions where heavy dredging (cargo
h a n d l i n g ) gear is installed, as w e l l as w h e r e large
heavy cargoes m a y be carried o n decks o f floating
cranes o r hopper dredgers shall be determined b y
calculation f o rthe following conditions:
b e a m s a r e c o n s i d e r e d t o b e r i g i d l y fixed t o t h e
supporting structure;
a load (concentrated, partially distributed, etc.)
shall be taken into account;
e q u i v a l e n t stresses f o r i t e m s m a d e o f n o r m a l
strength steel a , i n M P a , shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e
condition
e q
e g
= V *
+ < 170
(3.6.5.5)
w h e r e a n d = n o r m a l a n d s h e a r d e s i g n s t r e s s e s a t t h e s e c t i o n
under consideration.
T h e results o f t h e calculation shall be specially

considered b y t h e Register.
3.7 F I S H I N G V E S S E L S A N D S P E C I A L P U R P O S E S H I P S
U S E D F O RP R O C E S S I N G O FS E A L I V I N G R E S O U R C E S
fishing v e s s e l s h a v i n g a s t e r n t r a w U n g a r r a n g e m e n t o r
a side t r a w U n g a r r a n g e m e n t a n d t o special p u r p o s e
ship intended f o r processing, storage and/or trans
p o r t a t i o n o f catch.
3.7.1.2 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r h u U s t r u c t u r e s n o t
referred t o i n this Chapter are given i n Sections 1 a n d 2.
I n n o case s h a l l t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r h u U structures b e
less s t r i n g e n t t h a n t h o s e c o n t a i n e d i n S e c t i o n s 1 a n d 2 .
3.7.1.3 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h i s C h a p t e r , t h e f o l
b = breadth o f stern ramp, i n m ;
G\ = g r e a t e s t s p e c i f i e d m a s s o f c a t c h w h i c h c a n
be h a n d l e d b y a special w h e e l e d device o r a n o t h e r
transport means, i n t;
G = mass o f m o v i n g p a r t o f special w h e e l e d
device o r a n o t h e r t r a n s p o r t means, i n t;
G = mass o fprocessing equipment, i n t;
S = factory deck area, i n m ;
a = spacing o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s under con
sideration, i n m ;
/ = span o f m e m b e r under consideration (refer
t o 1.6.3.1);
b = height o fdesign load distribution o n a member;
As = c o r r o s i o n a n d w e a r a l l o w a n c e a d d e d t o
plate thickness, i n m m (refer t o 1.1.5.1);
(Djt = f a c t o r t a k i n g a c c o u n t o f c o r r o s i o n a l l o w
ance t o t h e section m o d u l u s o f t h e t o f r a m i n g m e m
ber (refer t o 1.1.5.3).
sr
160
Rules
3.7.1.4 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r s h i p s m o o r i n g a t s e a
provide f o r a damping protection o f the hull for
w h i c h purpose p n e u m a t i c fenders o r other equivalent
d a m p i n g arrangements m a y be used. These require
m e n t s are based o n t h e a s s u m p t i o n t h a t ships w o u l d
be m o o r e d a t a sea state n o t a b o v e 6.
N o side o r s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s t r e n g t h e n i n g a r e r e
q u i r e d w h e n ships a r e m o o r e d a t a sea force b e l o w 4 ,
p r o v i d e d t h e above d a m p i n g p r o t e c t i o n is used.
3.7.1.5 T h e r e g i o n s o f s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f f i s h i n g
vessels a n d special p u r p o s e ships m o o r i n g a t sea.
3.7.1.5.1 D e p t h d i m e n s i o n :
region A lying between t h eline d r a w n lower t h a n
the ballast waterline b y t h e value o f h a n d the Une
drawn higher than the summer load waterUne b y the
value o f h. T h evalue o f h shall be determined f r o m
Table 3.7.1.5.1;
T a b l e
Sea forceN o .
h, i n m
4
5
6
0,8
1,2
2,0
3.7.1.5.1
region lying between the upper boundary o f

region A a n d upper deck;
region lying between t h e upper deck a n d the
first tier superstructure deck, forecastle a n d p o o p
included.
3.7.1.5.2 L e n g t h w i s e , r e g i o n A U e s b e t w e e n s e c
tions i n w h i c h the ship breadth a t s u m m e r load w a
terUne level is equal t o ( B 3m ) .
I n special purpose ships, r e g i o n A shall extend
f o r a t least 0 , 3 6 L f o r w a r d a n d a f t f r o m t h e m i d s h i p
section.
3.7.1.5.3 F o r s p e c i a l p u r p o s e s h i p s , o n e o r m o r e
fender areas shall be a d d i t i o n a l l y estabUshed t h e
boundaries o f w h i c h a r e f o r m e d b y sections lying
within 0,05L forward a n d aft o fthe forward a n daft
edges a c c o r d i n g l y o f a g r o u p o f f l o a t i n g fenders
p r o v i d i n g o n em o o r i n g place f o r a l l specified variants
o f m o o r i n g . T h eboundaries o f fender areas shall be
determined a t extreme positions o ffenders a n d f o r a l l
specified v a r i a n t s o f m o o r i n g .
3.7.1.6 F i s h i n g v e s s e l s i n t e n d e d f o r s y s t e m a t i c
operation i n ice conditions.
3.7.1.6.1 F i s h i n g v e s s e l s i n t e n d e d f o r s y s t e m a t i c
operation i niceconditions shall have a n ice category
n o t l o w e r t h a n Ice3 i n accordance w i t h t h e require
m e n t s o f 3.10.
3.7.1.6.2 F i s h i n g v e s s e l s i n t e n d e d f o r s y s t e m a t i c
o p e r a t i o n i n ice c o n d i t i o n s , w h i c h h a v e t h e ice cate
g o r y Ice3, shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 3.10,
as w e l l as w i t h a d d i t i o n a l r e q u i r e m e n t s c o n t a i n e d
i n 3.7.1.6.4, 3.7.2.6, 3.7.3.4 a n d 3.7.4.5.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
3.7.1.6.3 N o a d d i t i o n a l r e q u i r e m e n t s a r e p u t
f o r w a r d w i t h regard t o t h e ice strengthening o f ca
tegory A r c 4 o r above.
3.7.1.6.4 I f t h e l o a d l i n e e n t r a n c e o f a f i s h i n g
vessel o f category A r c 3 exceeds 0 , 2 5 L , a n inter
mediate region o f ice strengthening m a y be estab
Ushed t h e b o u n d a r i e s o f w h i c h s h a l l be d e t e r m i n e d as
i n t h e case o f a c a t e g o r y A r c 4 vessel.
3.7.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
3.7.2.1 S t e r n r a m p c o n s t r u c t i o n .
3.7.2.1.1 T h e a f t e r e n d s t r u c t u r e o f v e s s e l s h a v i n g
a stern r a m p and/or stern trawUng arrangements
shall be strengthened b y fitting additional long
itudinal a n dtransverse m e m b e r s (girders, transverses,
cross ties, b u l k h e a d s a n d p a r t i a l b u l k h e a d s ) .
T h e stern r a m p shall be so constructed as t o
avoid flat o f b o t t o m i n w a y o f stern counter.
T h e c o n n e c t i o n o f s t e r n r a m p sides t o t r a n s o m
plating a n d o fthe r a m p deck t o b o t t o m plating shall
h a v e a r a d i u s o f r o u n d i n g n o t less t h a n 2 0 0 m m . T h i s
c o n n e c t i o n m a y b e m a d e b y u s i n g a b a r n o t less t h a n
70 m m i n diameter.
3.7.2.1.2 S t e r n r a m p s i d e s s h a l l , i n g e n e r a l , b e
carried d o w n w a r d s t o t h e shell plating a n d f o r w a r d
to t h e after peak bulkhead a n d shall be s m o o t h l y
tapered i n t o deck girders a n d transverses.
3.7.2.1.3 W h e r e t h e c a t c h i s d r a g g e d o n t o t h e
deck, i t is r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t t h e stern r a m p be
longitudinally f r a m e d w i t h transverses fitted a ti n
tervals n o t exceeding f o u r f r a m e spacings. T h e stern
r a m p longitudinals shall be spaced n o t m o r e t h a n
600 m m apart.
I n vessels w h e r e special t r a n s p o r t m e a n s a r e u s e d
t o carry t h e catch o n t o t h e deck, t h e stern r a m p shall
be f r a m e d transversely.
3.7.2.2 T h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f s h i p s h a v i n g a s i d e
trawUng arrangement.
3.7.2.2.1 I t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t v e s s e l s m o r e
t h a n 3 0 m i n length be fitted u p w i t h a forecastle.
3.7.2.2.2 W i t h i n t h e l o c a t i o n o f e a c h g a l l o w , d e
t e r m i n e d as t h e distance between sections a t three
spacings f o r w a r d a n d a f t o f t h e g a l l o w ends, t h e
s t r e n g t h e n i n g s h a l l be as f o l l o w s :
intermediate frames shall be fitted extending f r o m
t h e u p p e r d e c k d o w n t o a l e v e l n o t less t h a n 0 , 5 m
b e l o w t h e baUast waterUne a n d h a v i n g a section m o d
u l u s n o t less t h a n 7 5 p e r c e n t o f t h a t r e q u i r e d b y 2 . 5 . 4 . 2
f o r t h e f r a m e s i n t h e ' t w e e n deck space concerned;
the upper a n d l o w e r ends o fintermediate frames
shall be secured t o t h e decks, p l a t f o r m s a n d l o n g
i t u d i n a l i n t e r c o s t a l m e m b e r s fitted b e t w e e n t h e m a i n
frames; longitudinal intercostal members shall have
the s a m e section as i n t e r m e d i a t e f r a m e s a n d be
aligned w i t h them; the upper longitudinal intercostal
m e m b e r s h a l l b e fitted n o t m o r e t h a n 3 5 0 m m b e l o w
the u p p e r deck;
P a r t II. H u l l
b u l w a r k stays shall be fitted a t every frame.

3.7.2.3 S t r u c t u r e s i n p r o c e s s i n g s h o p s .
3.7.2.3.1 W h e r e t h e n u m b e r o f b u l k h e a d s i n t h e
processing shops located above t h e bulkhead deck is
less t h a n s p e c i f i e d i n 2 . 7 . 1 . 3 a n d w h e r e t h e d i s t a n c e
between the bulkheads forming the boundaries o f
t h a t space exceeds 3 0 m , p a r t i a l b u l k h e a d s e x t e n d i n g
i n b o a r d f o r n o t less t h a n 0 , 5 m o f t h e ' t w e e n d e c k
height shall be fitted o n t h e bulkhead deck at each
side o f t h e vessel i n line w i t h w a t e r t i g h t b u l k h e a d s .
T h e thickness o fthe partial b u l k h e a d plating shall be
n o t less t h a n t h a t o f t h e t o p s t r a k e o f t h e c o r r e sponding watertight bulkhead below the deck where
the considered processing shop is located.
Partial bulkheads shall be strengthened w i t h
h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.7.3.2.
Strengthening w i t h vertical stiffeners is p e r m i t t e d
w i t h f i t t i n g t h e h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners b e t w e e n t h e side
shell a n d t h e nearest vertical stiffener i n compliance
w i t h 3.7.2.5.4.
Partial bulkheads shall be interconnected w i t h
deck transverses supported b y pillars i n a required
number. A l t e r n a t i v e structural arrangements m a y be
used i fa p p r o v e d b y t h e Register as equivalent.
3.7.2.3.2 W h e r e m u l t i - t i e r d e c k h o u s e s a r e a r ranged above t h e processing shops, t h e requirements
o f 2.12.5.2 f o r rigid m e m b e r s (bulkheads, partial
b u l k h e a d s ) t o b e fitted i n s u c h spaces s h a l l b e c o m plied with.
3.7.2.4 I n f i s h i n g v e s s e l s , b u l w a r k s t a y s s h a l l b e
fitted at intervals equal t o n o t m o r e t h a n t w o frame
spacings.
3.7.2.5 S t r u c t u r a l s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f s h i p s m o o r i n g
a t sea.
3.7.2.5.1 I n r e g i o n s s t r e n g t h e n e d f o r m o o r i n g a t
sea, t r a n s v e r s e f r a m i n g s h a l l b e a d o p t e d f o r t h e v e s sel's sides. I n s i n g l e - d e c k s h i p s , t h e d e c k a n d b o t t o m
i n t h eabove regions shall also be framed transversely.
I n m u l t i - d e c k ships, transverse f r a m i n g shall be
adopted f o r t h e deck located o n t h e fender level.
L o n g i t u d i n a l f r a m i n g o f sides i s p e r m i s s i b l e i n t h e
u p p e r ' t w e e n d e c k space o n l y . I n t h i s case, t h e spacing o f w e b frames shall n o t exceed three f r a m e
s p a c i n g s o r 2 , 4 m , w h i c h e v e r i s less.
3.7.2.5.2 I n t h e r e g i o n A , i n t e r m e d i a t e f r a m e s a r e
recommended through the region length i n fishing
vessels a n d w i t h i n f e n d e r areas i n special p u r p o s e
ships.
3.7.2.5.3 I n a n y c a s e , i t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t
s y m m e t r i c a l sections be used a n d t h e m i n i m u m possible w e b d e p t h be ensured f o r t h e p a r t i c u l a r section
modulus.
3.7.2.5.4 B e t w e e n t h e s h i p ' s s i d e a n d v e r t i c a l s t i f fener nearest t o i t , transverse bulkheads shall h a v e hori z o n t a l stiffeners w i t h a s e c t i o n h e i g h t n o t less t h a n
75 p e r cent o f t h e vertical stiffener height. I n ships
161
w i t h L < 8 0 m , h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners shall be spaced

n o t m o r e t h a n 6 0 0m m apart, a n d w i t h L > 1 5 0 m ,
n o t m o r e t h a n 8 0 0m m apart. F o r ships o f intermediate lengths, Unear interpolation m a y be used t o
d e t e r m i n e t h i s distance. T h e ends o f h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners shall be w e l d e d t o vertical stiffeners a n d sniped
a t t h e ship's sides.
3.7.2.5.5 T h e b u l w a r k s h a l l b e i n c U n e d t o w a r d s
t h e c e n t r e U n e o f t h e s h i p a t n o t less t h a n o n e - t e n t h o r
be f i t t e d i n b o a r d o f t h e s h i p ' s side a t n o t less t h a n
one-tenth o fits height.
3.7.2.5.6 B i l g e k e e l s o f s h i p s w i t h t h e l e n g t h
L < 8 0 m shall be, as f a r as practicable, so arranged
that a tangent d r a w n t o the frame a n d passing
t h r o u g h t h e o u t e r free edge o f t h e bilge k e e l w o u l d
f o r m a n a n g l e o f n o t less t h a n 1 5 d e g w i t h t h e v e r t i c a l
a x i s . F o r s h i p s w i t h t h e l e n g t h L~$> 1 5 0 m , t h i s a n g l e
m a y be zero. F o r ships o f intermediate lengths, t h e
above angle shall be obtained b y Unear interpolation.
3.7.2.5.7 T h e l o w e r e n d a t t a c h m e n t s o f h o l d
frames shall be as required b y 2.5.5.1.
I n ' t w e e n decks, t h e attachments o f f r a m e l o w e r
ends shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.5.5.3.
T h e frame ends shall be welded t o the deck plating.
U p p e r ends o fframes shall be carried t o t h e deck
plating a n dwelded thereto. Beams shall be carried t o
the i n n e r edges o f f r a m e s w i t h a m i n i m a l g a p . B e a m
knees s h a l l h a v e a face p l a t e o r flange.
T h e ends o f intermediate frames shall be attached
to longitudinal intercostals, decks o r platforms.
3.7.2.5.8 S i d e l o n g i t u d i n a l s s h a l l b e a t t a c h e d t o
transverse bulkheads w i t h knees. T h e height a n d
w i d t h o f t h e k n e e s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h 1.7.2.2.
3.7.2.5.9 B u l w a r k s t a y s w e l d e d t o s h e e r s t r a k e
shall be so constructed as t o prevent deck p l a t i n g
d a m a g e i n case o f b u m p i n g .
3.7.2.6 B e s i d e s t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3 . 1 0 , t h e
i c e - s t r e n g t h e n i n g s t r u c t u r e o f f i s h i n g vessels o f category Ice3 intended f o r systematic operation i n ice
conditions shall comply w i t h the following requirements:
.1 f o r t h e case o f transverse m a i n f r a m i n g , a t least
o n e l o a d d i s t r i b u t i n g side s t r i n g e r s h a l l b e fitted i n
e a c h grillage i n w a y o f r e g i o n o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g A I ,
A I, B I ,C I ;
.2 b u l b o u s f o r e b o d y i s n o t r e c o m m e n d e d ;
.3 i n t h e f o r e p e a k , t h e s p a c i n g o f s t r i n g e r s a n d
their d i m e n s i o n s , as w e l l as s t e m d i m e n s i o n s , s h a l l be
i n accordance w i t h t h e requirements o f 3.10 f o r ships
o f category Arc4;
.4 i n t h e a f t e r b o d y , p r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e f o r
an appendage (ice knife) a f t o f the rudder t o protect
the latter o n t h e sternway.
3.7.3 D e s i g n l o a d s .
3.7.3.1 D e s i g n l o a d s o n r a m p s t r u c t u r e s s h a l l b e
determined as follows:
X
162
Rules
6,5b
Factor a
R e g i o n o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g
Region A
(3.7.3.1.1)
sl
of Sea-Going
T a b l e
.1 t h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e p , i n k P a , o n t h e r a m p sides
a n d d e c k i nvessels w h e r e t h e c a t c h is d r a g g e d i n shall
p -
and Construction
2 7
Fishing vessel
Special purpose
ship
1,00
0,8
1
3.7.3.2 F o r f a c t o r y d e c k s , t h e d e s i g n p r e s
sure p , i nkPa, shall be determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
1/3
1
0,22z + 0,6
1 + 0,05
0,22z + 0,6
1
0 , 1 2 z + 1,28
1 + 0,05
0,12z + 1,28
1/3
Region
n n u m b e r o f moorings, during a voyage, along the ship
whose displacement is adopted f o r t h edesign value i n F o r m u
l a e (3.7.3.3-1) a n d (3.7.3.3-2).
N o t e . I n t h e r e g i o n s a n d o f s p e c i a l p u r p o s e s h i p s , 012 i s
a s s u m e d b e t w e e n 1,1 a n d 1,4.
(3.7.3.1.2)
where n = n u m b e r o f the wheel axes o fthe arrangement.
Region
3.7.3.3-2
Region A within fender area
W h e r e t h e breadth o f the r a m p varies along its

length, t h e m i n i m u m b r e a d t h shall be t a k e n as t h e
design value;
.2 i n v e s s e l s e q u i p p e d w i t h a s p e c i a l w h e e l e d
catch-transport arrangement, t h e design load p , i n
k N , f o rr a m p deck plating shall be determined b y the
formula
Ships
(3.7.3.2)
s .
3.7.3.3 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e p , i n k P a , o n t h e s i d e s
a n d s u p e r s t r u c t u r e sides o f ships m o o r e d a t sea s h a l l
be d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o l l o w i n g f o r m u l a e :
in the region A
J
p = (190 + 5 l V A z - 1 0 " - 0 , 4 6 4 ) ;
(3.7.3.3-1)
3.7.3.4 F o r f i s h i n g v e s s e l s o f c a t e g o r y I c e 3 w h i c h
are i n t e n d e d f o r s y s t e m a t i c o p e r a t i o n i n i c e c o n d i
tions, the ice load parameters shall be determined o n
the basis o f t h e f o l l o w i n g provisions:
.1 i n t h e f o r w a r d r e g i o n o f i c e s t r e n g t h e n i n g A ,
the l o a d p a r a m e t e r s shall be d e t e r m i n e d i n ac
cordance w i t h t h e requirements o f 3.10 f o rt h e ice
c a t e g o r y Ice3. I n t h e case o f a b u l b o u s f o r e b o d y , t h e
rake angle o f frame shall be determined as stipulated
i n 3.10.3.2.1 f o r ships o f category Arc4;
.2 i n t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e r e g i o n o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g A
t h e i c e l o a d p a r a m e t e r s s h a l l b e t a k e n e q u a l to:
b
^ A , I = 0,75/?AI
P A ^ I = 0,75/?AII
in the regions a n d
J
p = (129 + 5 9 V A z - 1 0 " - 0 , 4 6 4 )
=
(3.7.3.3-2)
w h e r e <xi s h a l l b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.7.3.3-1 d e p e n d i n g o n t h e
ship displacement a n d t h e s e a conditions specified f o r
m o o r i n g a t sea;
<*2 s h a l l b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.7.3.3-2 d e p e n d i n g o n t h e
ship purpose a n d the region o f strengthening;
design ship displacement, i nt. F o r a fishing vessel A
displacement t o the s u m m e r load waterline. F o r a special
purpose ship A displacement o f t h e largest ship
mooring alongside. I n a n ycase A shall n o t b e taken
g r e a t e r t h a n 7500 t a n d s m a l l e r t h a n 464 t ;
n u m b e r o fm o o r i n g s , during a voyage, alongside the ship
whose displacement has been adopted a sthe design value
i n F o r m u l a e (3.7.3.3-1) a n d (3.7.3.3-2);
distance i n m , f r o m the mid-span o f m e m b e r calculated
to t h es u m m e r l o a d waterline.
W h e r e a special purpose ship has the freeboard depth h
greater than thefreeboard depth h o f the ship whose
displacement h a sbeen adopted a s the design value i n
F o r m u l a e (3.7.3.3-1) a n d (3.7.3.3-2), t h e v a l u e o f z s h a l l
be reduced b y the difference o f (h h ).
I n a n y c a s e , z > l , 0 ; i n t h e r e g i o n A , z = 1,0.
(3.7.3.4.2)
/ _ , H
'Aj
' A
w h e r e PA,1 PAJI',
\ FA = i c e l o a d p a r a m e t e r s f o r t h e f o r w a r d
region A , a sdetermined i n accordance with the require
m e n t s o f 3.10, w i t h d u e r e g a r d f o r 3 . 7 . 3 . 4 . 1 ;
.3 i n t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n o f i c e s t r e n g t h e n i n g B ,
the ice-load intensity, i n k P a , is d e t e r m i n e d b yt h e
formula
Pv/i
(3.7.3.4.3)
w h e r e pm
iceload intensity i n midship region according t o

3.10.3.2.3;
& = 2 k i , b u t n o t l e s s t h a n 1 ;
r
k
(yr-0,18);
VA/1000
T a b l e
3.7.3.3-1
17,4Pj
Sea state N o .
1,00
0,82
1,15
1,00
1,60
1,16
/3
A = displacement, i nt, t o s u m m e r l o a d waterline;

P = shaft power, i n k W , determined with d u e regard f o r
power take-off in the trawling condition;
l = distance, i n m , f r o m forward perpendicular t o a section
aft where t h e reduction o f s u m m e r load waterline
breadth begins.
k
^2000
> 2000
a 1/2 _
57,3P^
F a c t o r oil
Ship displacement,
in t
/ 2
P a r t II. H u l l
163
T h e h e i g h t a n d l e n g t h ( 6 a n d /) t o w h i c h t h e
midship region is covered b y the ice load shall be de
t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h 3.10.3.3.3 a n d 3.10.3.4.3;
.4 t h e i c e l o a d i n t e n s i t y , i n k P a , i n t h e a f t r e g i o n
o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g i s d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
B
Pc\
(3.7.3.4.4)
Pcikc
w h e r e pa = i c e p r e s s u r e i n t h e a f t r e g i o n a c c o r d i n g t o 3.10.3.2.4;
k 2,5&i, b u t n o t less t h a n 1;
f o r k r e f e r t o 3.7.3.4.3.
c
T h e h e i g h t a n d l e n g t h ( b a n d /) t o w h i c h t h e a f t
region is covered b y t h e ice l o a d shall be determined
i n accordance w i t h 3.10.3.3.4 a n d 3.10.3.4.4.
3.7.4.1 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e s c a n t l i n g s o f s t e r n
ramp framing.
3.7.4.1.1 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f l o n g i t u d i n a l s ,
beams a n d deck transverses o f the stern r a m p shall be
determined according t o 1.6.4.1, t a k i n g :
p = as d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a e (3.7.3.1.1)
o r (3.7.3.1.2);
m = as o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 3.7.4.1.1 f o r vessels
where t h e catch is dragged i n ;
m = 9 , 3 / ^ / ^ f o r vessels w h e r e t h e c a t c h i s c a r r i e d
o n t o t h e deck b y a special w h e e l e d arrangement;
= 0,6.
B
T a b l e
3.7.4.1.1
Factor m
Stern ramp framing
Fishing vessels
Special purpose
ship
D e c k longitudinals
B e a m s a n ddeck trans
verses
11,3
12,6
7,9
8,8
3.7.4.1.2 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s , i n c m , o f s t e r n
r a m p side s t i f f e n e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d
b y F o r m u l a (1.6.4.1) w i t h t h e design l o a d p as de
t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a ( 3 . 7 . 3 . 1 . 1 ) , Jc = 0 , 9 , m = 1 7 , 0 ,
o r 2 2 , 6 f o r f i s h i n g vessels a n d special p u r p o s e ships
respectively. T h e stiffener span / shall be adopted
equal t o t h e m a x i m u m distance between t h e r a m p
deck a n d t h e nearest deck above o r t o t h e distance
b e t w e e n t w o decks a d j o i n i n g t h e r a m p side, b u t s h a l l
n o t b e less t h a n 2 , 6 m .
a
I n vessels engaged i n pelagic f i s h i n g , t h e s e c t i o n

stiffener,
in cm
modulus
of
r a m p side
0,5,, 820
W = 45,5(1
" /
oK
3.7.4.1.3 T h e l e n g t h o f t h i c k e n e d r a m p d e c k p l a t i n g
sections a l o n g t h e r a m p l e n g t h shall be e q u a l t o :
the r a m p w i d t h a t least, i f m e a s u r e d f o r w a r d o f
the r a m p edge, i n w a y o f b o t t o m r o u n d i n g ;
d o u b l e r a m p w i d t h a t least i n w a y o f t o p
rounding.
3.7.4.1.4 W h e r e t h e c o n n e c t i o n o f t h e r a m p s i d e
w i t h t r a n s o m plating is rounded, t h e thickness o f the
p l a t i n g s t r a k e n o t less t h a n 7 0 0 m m b r o a d , i f m e a
s u r e d f r o m t h e r a m p d e c k p l a t i n g , s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 2 0 m m . D o u b l i n g plates are also permitted.
I f a w e l d e d h a l f - r o u n d b a r n o t less t h a n 7 0 m m i n
diameter is fitted t o the j u n c t i o n o fthe r o u n d i n g a n d
t h e flat p a r t o f t h e side, b u t n o t f a r t h e r t h a n 2 0 0 m m
f r o m t h e transom, t h e plating thickness m a y be
adopted i n accordance
with the requirements
o f 3.7.4.1.6.
3.7.4.1.5 F o r v e s s e l s n o t e n g a g e d i n p e l a g i c f i s h
i n g , t h e p l a t i n g s t r a k e s o f r a m p sides s h a l l b e t h i c k
ened, i n w a y o f connection w i t h t h e t r a n s o m a n d
a l o n g t h e r a m p d e c k , t o a v a l u e n o t less t h a n r e q u i r e d
u n d e r 3.7.4.1.6.
T h e t h i c k e n e d side p l a t i n g strakes f i t t e d a l o n g t h e
r a m p l e n g t h s h a l l h a v e a b r e a d t h n o t less t h a n 0 , 4 o f
t h e r a m p b r e a d t h , o r 1,0 m , w h i c h e v e r i s g r e a t e r . T h e
l o w e r edge o f those strakes shall coincide w i t h t h e
r a m p d e c k i n vessels w h e r e t h e c a t c h is d r a g g e d i n
a n d b e l e v e l w i t h t h e c a t c h s t o w a g e surface i n vessels
where t h ecatch is carried o n t o the deck b y a wheeled
arrangement.
I f measured f o r w a r d o f the rounding-to-flat-sidej u n c t i o n line, t h e length o f thickened section o f t h e
side p l a t i n g i n w a y o f t r a n s o m s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
0,5 o f t h e r a m p b r e a d t h .
3.7.4.1.6 F o r v e s s e l s w h e r e t h e c a t c h i s d r a g g e d
i n , t h e p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s o f r a m p d e c k a n d sides,
i n m m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r
m u l a (1.6.4.4), taking:
m , As = t o b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3 . 7 . 4 . 1 . 6 ;
p = as determined b y F o r m u l a (3.7.3.1.1);
T a b l e
Ramp
struc
ture
Deck
(3.7.4.1.2)
I n n o case shall t h e section m o d u l u s o f s t e r n

r a m p side s t i f f e n e r s b e less t h a n r e q u i r e d i n 2 . 5 . 4 . 2
f o r t h e frames o f u p p e r ' t w e e n deck a n d super
structure.
Sides
Location along
r a m p length
Fishing vessel
3.7.4.1.6
Special purpose
ship
As, in m m
Ajjin m m
Bottom roun
ding a n d sterncounter plating
26,8
10,0
26,8
10,0
Mid-region
26,8
5,5
26,8
5,5
T o p rounding
26,8
9,5
26,8
5,5
I n w a y o f fric
tion
25,9
5,5
21,9
5,5
Elsewhere o n deck
25,9
4,5
21,9
4,5
164
Rules
= 0,8;
= 1,0.
3.7.4.1.7 W h e r e d o u b l i n g p l a t e s a r e f i t t e d o n t h e
r a m p deck i n w a y o f b o t t o m r o u n d i n g o r t o p
r o u n d i n g o r w h e r e devices t o p r e v e n t excessive w e a r
o f stern r a m p plating w i t h w i r e ropes are installed,
the plating thickness m a y be adopted as f o rt h e m i d region.
3.7.4.1.8 I n v e s s e l s e n g a g e d i n p e l a g i c f i s h i n g , t h e
l o w e r s t r a k e o f t h e side h a v i n g a w i d t h f r o m t h e s t e r n
r a m p p l a t i n g t o a p o i n t a t least 1 0 0 m m a b o v e t h e
u p p e r h a l f - r o u n d b a r s h a l l h a v e a t h i c k n e s s s, i n m m ,
n o t less t h a n
4
2-10 ^ + l
(3.7.4.1.8)
where a = distance, i n m , between adjacent edges o f half-round

bars.
s
3.7.4.1.9 W h a t e v e r t h e m o d e o f c a r r y i n g t h e c a t c h
along t h e stern r a m p , t h e thickness o fr a m p plating i n
vessels o f a l l types s h a l l b e 2 m m greater t h a n r e q u i r e d
b y 2.2.4.8 f o r t h e shell p l a t i n g . T h i s thickness shall be
m a i n t a i n e d o n t h e length f r o m the stern r a m p e n dt o a
Une a t least 6 0 0 m m above t h e b u l k h e a d deck w i t h i n
the particular section o f t h e vessel length. F o r w a r d o f
this region t h e thickness o fstern r a m p plating shaU be
2 m m greater t h a n required u n d e r 2.6.4.1.5 f o r t h e
upper deck p l a t i n g a t ends.
3.7.4.1.10 O n a l e n g t h a t l e a s t 1,0 m f o r w a r d o f t h e
stern r a m p edge a n d at least o v e r t h e w h o l e r a m p
breadth, t h e stern-counter plating shall be 1 m m thicker
than stipulated under 2.2.4.1.
3.7.4.2 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e m e m b e r s c a n t U n g s
o f vessels h a v i n g a side t r a w U n g a r r a n g e m e n t .
3.7.4.2.1 I n vessels o v e r 3 0 m i n l e n g t h , t h e side
plating a n d sheerstrake thickness between t h e gal
lows, determined as t h e distance between t h e section
three spacings f o r w a r d o f t h e fore e n d o f f o r w a r d
g a l l o w a n d t h e section three spacings abaft t h e after
end o f after g a l l o w , shall be 1 m m greater t h a n sti
pulated under 2.2.4.1.
3.7.4.2.2 W i t h i n t h e l o c a t i o n o f e a c h g a l l o w , t o b e
d e t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h 3.7.2.2.2, p r o v i s i o n
shall be m a d e f o r strengthening as follows:
sheerstrake thickness t o be increased b y 2 m m ;
thickness o f strake adjacent t o sheerstrake t o be
increased t o equal that o f t h e sheerstrake between
gallows;
deck stringer thickness t o be increased b y 3 m m
as c o m p a r e d t o t h a t r e q u i r e d b y 2 . 6 . 4 . 1 ;
b u l w a r k plate thickness t o be increased b y 2 m m
as c o m p a r e d t o t h a t r e q u i r e d b y 2 . 1 4 . 4 . 1 .
3.7.4.3 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r m e m b e r s c a n t U n g s o f
h o l d s a n d f i s h h a n d U n g spaces.
3.7.4.3.1 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f f a c t o r y d e c k
b e a m s a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l s shall be d e t e r m i n e d as r e
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
quired b y 2.6.4 w i t h t h e design pressure according

t o 3.7.3.2 w h e r e i t exceeds t h a t required b y 2.6.3.
3.7.4.3.2 I n h o l d s a n d f i s h h a n d U n g s p a c e s i n
w h i c h n o n - p a c k e d salted catch o r salt is stored o r
w h i c h a r e exposed t o t h e d e t r i m e n t a l effect o f catch
wastes a n d sea w a t e r , t h e p l a t i n g thickness shall be
increased b y 1 m m as c o m p a r e d t o that required b y
the relevant sections o f t h e Rules. W h e r e t h e struc
t u r e i s s o i n f l u e n c e d f r o m b o t h sides, r e l e v a n t t h i c k
ness shall be increased b y 2 m m .
3.7.4.3.3 T h e v e r t i c a l w e b p l a t e t h i c k n e s s o f
c o a m i n g s n o t a c t i n g a s d e c k g i r d e r s s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n t h e deck plating thickness, o r 7 m m , whichever
is greater.
3.7.4.4 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r m e m b e r s c a n t U n g s o f
ships m o o r i n g a t sea.
3.7.4.4.1 T h e s i d e p l a t i n g a n d s h e e r s t r a k e t h i c k
ness o f ships b e l o w 8 0 m i n l e n g t h shall be b y 1 m m
greater t h a n required u n d e r 2.2.4.8.
3.7.4.4.2 I n s t r e n g t h e n e d r e g i o n s , t h e s i d e p l a t i n g
a n d s h e e r s t r a k e t h i c k n e s s , i n m m , s h a l l n o t b e less
than
s = 2 1 , laJ'
0 , 2 4 2 + As
(3.7.4.4.2)
where a = frame spacing, i n m m . I fpanting frames are provided,

a is t h edistance b e t w e e n m a i n a n d p a n t i n g frames;
p = a s d e f i n e d u n d e r 3.7.3.3;
* = 1,1;
A s = 4,0 m m f o r r e g i o n A i n c a s e t r a w l i n g i s e f f e c t e d f r o m t h e
vessel side;
A s = 1,2 m m f o r r e g i o n s a n d C ;
A s = 3,0 m m e l s e w h e r e .
3.7.4.4.3 I n r e g i o n A , t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f
f r a m e s , i n c m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
3
pab(2l-b)a
l Q
(3.7.4.4.3)
e H
w h e r e p = a s d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (3.7.3.3-1);
a = spacing, i n m , o fm a i n frames;
b = 1,5 m ;
m = 20,4 k f a i l + &3&4);
k\, a n d 3 s h a l l b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.7.4.4.3 p r o c e e d i n g f r o m
t h e n u m b e r o f l o a d distributing side stringers fitted;
fci = 0 w h e r e n o p a n t i n g f r a m e s a r e f i t t e d ;
k = 0,69 i f p a n t i n g f r a m e e n d s t e r m i n a t e a t l o n g i t u d i n a l
intercostal members;
k = 1,0 i f t h e e n d a t t a c h m e n t s o f m a i n a n d p a n t i n g f r a m e s a r e
similar;
* , = 1,1;
/ = frame span, i nm , a smeasured along thechord between
the upper edge o finner b o t t o m plating o rfloor face plate
a n d t h el o w e r e d g e o f d e c k a t side (side stringer w h e r e
w e b f r a m e s are fitted).
4
3.7.4.4.4 I n r e g i o n s a n d C , t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s
o f f r a m e s , i n c m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d
by F o r m u l a (3.7.4.4.3). T h e value o f p shall be de
termined b y F o r m u l a (3.7.3.3-2). W h e r e t h e actual
shell plating thickness is greater t h a n 8 m m , p m a y be
reduced b y the value
3
165
P a r t II. H u l l
T a b l e
Factor
O n e load distributing side

stringer
N o load distributing side stringers
3.7.4.4.3
T w o load distributing side

stringers o r m o r e
1,0
1,12 + 0,038 -
ki
1 + 6 , 8 V / / / ( / / / + 0,28) - 1 2 , 5 / 1 / /
1,0
W
=
W
1,27 + 0,039 - o3
1,0 + 7,0 / - 8 , 0
0,75
0,65
section m o d u l u s ratio o f l o a d distributing side stringer a n d frame;
f =
distance, i nm ,between a section a t the lower support o fframe a n d a tangent t o the frame contour i nw a y o fthe section a t the
u p p e r s u p p o r t , a s m e a s u r e d n o r m a l t o t h e t a n g e n t ( r e f e r t o F i g . 3.7.4.4.3);
fx = m a x i m u m d e f l e c t i o n o f f r a m e a c c o r d i n g t o F i g . 3.7.4.4.3, i n m .
= 1 where n o pantig frames are
k!
= -(1 + Q,5k\k? )
fitted;
where panting frames are
fitted;
t h e f a c t o r kf i s d e t e r m i n e d i n t h e s a m e w a y a s k w i t h a
equal t o the spacing o fm a i n a n d panting frames;
k =l,l.
3
3.7.4.4.5 I f l o n g i t u d i n a l f r a m i n g s y s t e m is a p p l i e d
f o r ' t w e e n d e c k spaces, t h e section m o d u l u s , i n c m ,
o f side l o n g i t u d i n a l s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
3
W = 2 4
paal
(3.7.4.4.5)
eH
w h e r e p = a s d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (3.7.3.3-2);
a = spacing, i nm , o f longitudinals;
a = web frame spacing, i n m .
p
F i g . 3.7.4.4.3
(3.7.4.4.4)
where s = actual shell plating thickness, i n m m , b u t n o t greater
t h a n 20 m m ;
/ = frame span, i n m ;
R H(o)
= yield stress, i n M P a , o f shell plating material;
a = m a i n frame spacing, i n m ;
b = 2,2 m ;
e
m = 25,0
~Pk ;
4
k = 1,3 f o r r e g i o n o f s p e c i a l p u r p o s e s h i p s ;
ki = 1 e l s e w h e r e ;
k = 1 where n o load distributing stringers are
x
fitted;
k =
1,12 + ^ 7 - w i t h o n e l o a d d i s t r i b u t i n g s t r i n g e r ;
a(8,6 I)
k =
5,06
1,15 + - 7 ^ - w i t h t w o l o a d d i s t r i b u t i n g s t r i n g e r s o r m o r e ;
a(S,6-l)
fi
= section m o d u l i ratio o f load distributing stringer a n d

frame;
k = 2a f o r t h e f e n d e r a r e a s o f s p e c i a l p u r p o s e s h i p s a n d w i t h i n
(0 0 , 2 5 ) L o f f o r w a r d p e r p e n d i c u l a r i n fishing v e s s e l s ;
k = 2a 0,1 w i t h i n (0 0 , 2 0 ) L o f a f t p e r p e n d i c u l a r i n
fishing
vessels;
k = 2a 0,2 e l s e w h e r e ;
W
3.7.4.4.6 W h e r e superstructure sides o f ships

m o o r i n g a t sea are i n c l i n e d t o t h e centre l i n e at n o t less
t h a n V i o or f i t t e d i n b o a r d a t n o t l e s s t h a n V i o o f t h e i r
h e i g h t , n o a d d i t i o n a l s t r e n g t h e n i n g a s p e r 3.7 A A i s r e
quired.
W h e r e t h e i n c l i n a t i o n o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e sides t o
the vessel side o r t h e distance b e t w e e n t h o s e a n d t h e
vessel side i s less t h a n specified a b o v e , t h e s t r e n g t h
ening o f their frames a n d shell plating shall be de
termined b y linear interpolation proceeding f r o m t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.7.4.4, 2.2.4.1 a n d 2.5.4.2.
3.7.4.5 T h e m e m b e r scantlings i n t h e ice
s t r e n g t h e n e d r e g i o n s o f fishing vessels o f the ice ca
tegory Ice3 w h i c h are intended f o r systematic o p
eration i n ice conditions shall be determined i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.4 w h e r e t h e ice l o a d p a r a m e t e r s
are as stipulated i n 3.7.3.4, b e a r i n g t h e f o l l o w i n g
specification i n m i n d . W h e n determining shell plating
thickness i n t h e intermediate region o f ice strength
ening i n accordance w i t h 3.10.4.1, the annual average
thickness reduction o f shell plating as a result o f
corrosion wear a n d abrasion shall be adopted
as = 0,25 m m / y e a r .
3.7.5 Special requirements.
3.7.5.1 Stern r a m p structure.
3.7.5.1.1 T r a n s o m plating shall be protected f r o m
excessive w e a r w i t h h a l f - r o u n d steel bars o f a t least
166
Rules
70 m m i n diameter, w h i c h shall be fitted inclined a n d

secured b y w e l d i n g .
3.7.5.1.2 H a l f - r o u n d s t e e l b a r s o f a t l e a s t 7 0 m m
in diameter shall be welded along the j u n c t i o n line o f
r o u n d i n g a n d f l a t side, b u t n o t f a r t h e r t h a n 2 0 0 m m
from the transom.
3.7.5.1.3 I n v e s s e l s e n g a g e d i n p e l a g i c f i s h i n g ,
s t e r n r a m p sides s h a l l b e s t i f f e n e d w i t h l o n g i t u d i n a l
h a l f - r o u n d steel bars o f a t least 7 0 m m i n d i a m e t e r ,
w e l d e d t o t h e sides a n d spaced n o t m o r e t h a n
200 m m apart. T h e edge o f the upper b a r shall ben o t
less t h a n 6 5 0 m m a b o v e t h e r a m p d e c k p l a t i n g .
3.7.5.1.4 S u i t a b l e d e v i c e s a r e r e c o m m e n d e d t o
p r e v e n t excessive w e a r o f r a m p p l a t i n g w i t h w i r e
ropes w h e n dragging t h e catch. W h e r e t h e rated
w i n c h p u l l exceeds 3 0 k N o n each w i r e rope, such
devices a r e c o m p u l s o r y .
D e v i c e s p r e v e n t i n g excessive w e a r o f p l a t i n g m a y
be substituted b y d o u b l i n g plates i n t h e t h i c k e n e d
areas o f t o p a n d b o t t o m r o u n d i n g over t h e full
b r e a d t h o f t h e r a m p , a n d d o u b l i n g strips a t least
400 m m w i d e m a y b e f i t t e d a t t h e sides o v e r t h e rest
of the r a m p length.
3.7.5.2 W i t h i n t h e l o c a t i o n o f e a c h g a l l o w c o m p l y i n g w i t h 3.7.2.2.2, b u l w a r k , sheerstrake a n d shell
plating above ballast waterline shall be protected
w i t h h a l f - r o u n d steel bars fitted i n c l i n e d a n d secured
by welding.
3.7.5.3 I n w a y o f h e a v y i t e m s o f m a c h i n e r y a n d
e q u i p m e n t i n s t a l l e d i n fish h a n d U n g spaces, e x t r a
s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f ' t w e e n d e c k sides m a y b e r e q u i r e d
by t h e Register where t h e 'tween deck height exceeds 3,5 m .
3.7.5.4 W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r s t e m frame scantlings o f ships h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L < 6 0 m , t h e
design length and w i d t h o f a soUd rectangular propeller post
shall b e those stipulated u n d e r 2.10.4.3, as increased
b y 10 per cent
3.8 S U P P L Y
VESSELS
3.8.1 G e n e r a l .
The requirements o f this Chapter apply t o supply
vessels. S t r u c t u r a l i t e m s n o t c o v e r e d b y t h i s C h a p t e r
shaU c o m p l y w i t h the requirements o f Sections 1 a n d 2.
3.8.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
3.8.2.1 P r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e f o r l o n g i t u d i n a l
fenders. A t t h e fore e n d sloped fenders shall be fitted
between t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l fenders.
3.8.2.2 I n n e r b u l w a r k s ( c o a m i n g s ) a n d o t h e r s i m i l a r structures protecting deck cargoes shall be
p r o p e r l y secured t o deck f r a m i n g m e m b e r s . T h e
scantlings o f the above structures shall be agreed w i t h
the Register.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
3.8.2.3 S h e l l i n w a y o f s t e r n r o l l e r s a n d i n o t h e r
h i g h load areas shall be suitably reinforced.
3.8.2.4 I n d e c k a r e a s w h e r e c o n c e n t r a t e d l o a d s
are appUed (e.g. d r i l U n g r i g anchors),
extra
strengthening o f decks shall be provided.
3.8.2.5 T h e s i d e s o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s a n d t h e b u l w a r k shall be incUned t o t h e centre Une o f the vessel a t
n o t less t h a n o n e - t e n t h o r t o b e f i t t e d i n b o a r d f r o m t h e
v e s s e l ' s s i d e a t n o t less t h a n o n e - t e n t h o f t h e i r h e i g h t .
3.8.2.6 T h e l o w e r e n d s o f s t i f f e n e r s o f t h e f i r s t tier front bulkheads shall be connected t o t h e u n derdeck f r a m i n g members b y brackets. T h e l o w e r
ends o f o t h e r stiffeners shall be w e l d e d t o t h e decks.
The upper ends o fstiffeners shall be connected t o t h e
deck beams b y means o f brackets.
3.8.2.7 T h e s t a y o f t h e b u l w a r k w e l d e d t o t h e
sheerstrake shall be so constructed as t o prevent d a m a g e o f deck p l a t i n g is case o f b u m p i n g .
3.8.2.8 E x t r a s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f a f l a t p o r t i o n o f
the b o t t o m i n w a y o f t h e stern m a y be required t o
take u p loads induced b y slamming.
3.8.3 D e s i g n l o a d s .
D e s i g n l o a d s o n h u l l s t r u c t u r e s o f s u p p l y vessels
shall be taken i n compUance w i t h Sections 1 a n d 2.
3.8.4.1 T h e thickness o f t h e side s h e l l p l a t i n g s h a l l
be 1 m m greater t h a n required b y 2.2.4. I n n o case is t h e
t h i c k n e s s o f t h e side s h e l l p l a t i n g t o b e t a k e n less
than 9,0 m m .
3.8.4.2 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f o p e n c a r g o d e c k p l a t i n g
s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d f r o m 2 . 6 . 4 , b u t i t s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 8,0 m m .
3.8.4.3 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f o p e n cargo d e c k f r a m i n g
m e m b e r s s h a l l b e o b t a i n e d as r e q u i r e d b y 2 . 6 . 4 w i t h a
design load corresponding t o t h e specified value b u t
not less t h a n 3 5 k P a .
3.8.4.4 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f g i r d e r s a n d p i U a r s s u p p o r t i n g these girders shaU be suitable f o r t h e w e i g h t o f
the deck cargo, as w e U as f o r loads induced b y t o w i n g
winches, supports o f separate cargo p l a t f o r m s a n d other
concentrated loads. A c c o u n t shaU be also t a k e n o f a
vertical a n d a h o r i z o n t a l c o m p o n e n t s o f i n e r t i a forces
d u e t o t h e vessel's m o t i o n s . A s t h e first a p p r o x i m a t i o n ,
a c c e l e r a t i o n s d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.3.3 m a y b e u s e d .
3.8.4.5 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f h o l d , ' t w e e n d e c k
a n d f o r e c a s t l e f r a m e s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 3.7.4.4.4 w i t h p t o b e det e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a ( 3 . 7 . 3 . 3 - 1 ) , oci = 1 , 1 6 , a = 1 , 0 .
3.8.4.6 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f s t i f f e n e r s o f t h e
f r o n t s , sides a n d a f t e r e n d s o f t h e d e c k h o u s e s s i t u a t e d
o n t h e f o r e c a s t l e d e c k s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h a t r e quired b y 2.12.4.5.2. T h e assumed head p , i n k P a ,
s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n less t h a n g i v e n i n T a b l e 3 . 8 . 4 . 6 .
3.8.4.7 T h e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e f r o n t s , sides a n d
a f t e r e n d s s h a l l b e t a k e n n o t less t h a n 6 , 5 m m f o r t h e
first-tier front b u l k h e a d a n d 6,0 m m f o r other b u l k 2
P a r t II. H u l l
167
T a b l e
3.8.4.6
p, in k P a
D e c k h o u s e tier
First
Second and above
Front
bulkhead
Side
bulkhead
After
bulkhead
90
75
60
50
25
25
heads. T h e s e v a l u e s a r e applicable i n case o f stiffener

spacing 0,6 m . F o r stiffener spacings exceeding 0,6 m
the thickness shall be increased i n p r o p o r t i o n t o the
increased spacings.
3.8.4.8 T h e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e b u l w a r k s h a l l
be a t least 7 m m , a n d t h e w i d t h o f t h e stiffener l o w e r
e n d m e a s u r e d a l o n g t h e w e l d s h a l l b e n o t less
t h a n 3 6 0 m m . T h e distance b e t w e e n stays shall
n o t e x c e e d t w o s p a c i n g s o r 1,3 m , w h i c h e v e r i s t h e lesser.
3.8.5.1 I n v e s s e l s h a v i n g a d o u b l e s k i n c o n s t r u c tion, structures a n d scantUngs o f t h e inner skin
f r a m i n g shall c o m p l y w i t h 2.5. W h e r e t h e forces
acting o n t h e frames m a y be directly transmitted t o
the i n n e r s k i n f r a m i n g , t h e scantlings o f these m e m bers shall be specially considered b y t h e Register.
3.8.5.2 S c a l l o p s a n d o n e - s i d e d w e l d s s h a l l n o t b e
used i n framing-to-side-shell-plating connections.
3.9 T U G S
all tugs irrespective o f p u r p o s e o r service area.
3.9.1.2 S t r u c t u r a l i t e m s n o t c o v e r e d b y t h i s
C h a p t e r s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f Sections 1 a n d 2.
b = w i d t h o f stem cross section, i n m m ;
4 = l e n g t h o f s t e m cross section, i n m m .
3.9.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
3.9.2.1 P l a t e f l o o r s s h a l l b e f i t t e d a t e a c h f r a m e .
W h e r e t h e double b o t t o m is omitted, t h e floors
shall h a v e a s y m m e t r i c a l face plate.
3.9.2.2 W h e r e a m a i n f r a m e s p a n e x c e e d s 3 , 0 m ,
l o a d d i s t r i b u t i n g side stringers s h a l l b e f i t t e d a l o n g
the l e n g t h o f t h e ship except f o r t h e engine r o o m .
3.9.2.3 I n t h e e n g i n e r o o m , w e b f r a m e s s h a l l b e
f i t t e d b e t w e e n t h e i n n e r b o t t o m ( f l o o r face plates)
a n d t h e upper deck a t a distance n o t exceeding four
spacings. W e b frames shall be fitted a t m a i n engine
ends.
3.9.2.4 A f e n d e r s h a l l b e f i t t e d a t u p p e r d e c k a n d
l o n g forecastle deck level.
s
3.9.2.5 A r e a s t o w h i c h c o n c e n t r a t e d l o a d s a r e
applied (e.g. d u e t o t o w i n g winches) shall be a d ditionally strengthened.
3.9.2.6 T h e s t e m s o f h a r b o u r t u g s s h a l l h a v e
rounded shape above t h e s u m m e r load waterUne.
3.9.3 D e s i g n l o a d s .
Design loads o n hull structures o f tugs shall be
assumed i n compUance w i t h the requirements o f
Sections 1 a n d 2.
3.9.4.1 T h e m i n i m u m p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s o f s h e l l
a n d u p p e r deck as w e l l as o f w a t e r t i g h t b u l k h e a d s
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 5 m m .
3.9.4.2 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f s h e l l p l a t i n g a d j a c e n t t o
t h e s t e m s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n s t i p u l a t e d
u n d e r 2.2.4.6.
T h e shell plating thickness i n w a yo f t h e engine
r o o m , w h e n l o c a t e d a f t , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n r e quired f o rthe midship region.
3.9.4.3 W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f
the w e b frames i n accordance w i t h 2.5.4.5, t h e distance measured f r o m t h e inner b o t t o m plating (floor
u p p e r edge) a n d t h e u p p e r d e c k a t side s h a l l b e t a k e n
as t h e d e s i g n s p a n .
3.9.4.4 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f l o a d d i s t r i b u t i n g s i d e
stringers shall b e determined i n accordance w i t h 2.8.2.7.
3.9.4.5 W i t h i n t h e r e g i o n f r o m t h e k e e l t o t h e
s u m m e r l o a d w a t e r U n e , t h e cross-section o f a rect a n g u l a r s o U d b a r s t e m s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
4 = 1,61. + 100;
(3.9.4.5-1)
b = 0,5L+ 25.
(3.9.4.5-2)
T h e scantlings a n d location o f brackets f o r

strengthening t h e stem shall be determined proceeding f r o m 2.10.4.1.3.
T h e stem shall be extended abaft the fore peak
b u l k h e a d f o r n o t less t h a n t h r e e s p a c i n g s .
Ship-handling tugs are n o t p e r m i t t e d t o have
reduced cross-section a n d scantUngs o f t h e stem
( i f c o n s t r u c t e d o f steel plates) a b o v e t h e s u m m e r l o a d
waterline.
T h e steel plates o f t h e s t e m s h a l l be strengthened
over their length w i t h h o r i z o n t a l brackets spaced
n o t m o r e than 0,6 m apart, theplate thickness o f the
stem determined i n accordance w i t h 2.10.4.1.2 being
n o t reduced.
3.9.4.6 R e c t a n g u l a r s o U d p r o p e l l e r p o s t s s h a l l
h a v e s c a n t l i n g s f r o m t h e k e e l t o t h e c o u n t e r n o t less
than:
4 = 1,51. + 100;
(3.9.4.6-1)
b = 1,8L + 25.
(3.9.4.6-2)
168
Rules
The
sternframe shall be attached
according
to 2.10.2.2.4 t o t w o floors, w h a t e v e r t h e length o f the
tug m a y be.
3.9.4.7 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e b u l w a r k p l a t i n g s h a l l
be t a k e n a c c o r d i n g t o 2 . 1 4 . 4 . 1 , b u t n o t less
than 4 m m .
T h e section m o d u l u s o f b u l w a r k stays shall be de
t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2 . 1 4 . 4 . 2 w h e r e m = 1,5.
B u l w a r k stays shall be fitted n o t farther t h a n a t alter
n a t e frames. B u l w a r k stays w e l d e d t o t h e sheerstrake
plate m a y have a flexible element i n their structure.
The b u l w a r k shall be inclined t o t h ecentre Une o f
t h e v e s s e l a t n o t l e s s t h a n 7.
F o r unrestricted service tugs a b o v e 4 0 m i n
length, t h e n u m b e r o f watertight bulkheads shall be
n o t less t h a n f o u r .
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
safe o p e r a t i o n i n ice d e p e n d i n g o n t h e i c e c a t e g o r y
m a r k , t h e ship's specific features, ice c o n d i t i o n s a n d
icebreaker support.
3.10.1.2 R e q u i r e m e n t s t o h u l l c o n f i g u r a t i o n .
3.10.1.2.1 T h e h u l l c o n f i g u r a t i o n p a r a m e t e r s a ,
a , P, , i n d e g . , s h a l l b e m e a s u r e d i n c o n f o r m i t y w i t h
Figs 3.10.1.2-1 t o 3.10.1.2-4.
0
F i g . 3.10.1.2-1:
a slope o f s u m m e r load waterline
at t h e s e c t i o n c o n s i d e r e d , i n d e g .
3.10 S T R E N G T H E N I N G O F I C E S H I P S A N D I C E B R E A K E R S
3.10.1 G e n e r a l a n d r e q u i r e m e n t s .
3.10.1.1 A p p U c a t i o n .
See circular 812
3.10.1.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s C h a p t e r a p p l y
to self-propelled ice ships a n d icebreakers, as w e l l as
to ships w h i c h m a y be given t h e same status p r o
ceeding f r o m t h e conditions o f their ice navigation.
R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r p o l a r class ships (refer t o 2 . 2 . 3 . 1 ,
Part I "Classification") are specified i n Section 1 ,
Part X V I I "Distinguishing M a r k s a n d Descriptive N o t a
tions i n t h e Class N o t a t i o n Specifying Structural a n d
Operational Particulars o f Ships".
3.10.1.1.2 S e l f - p r o p e l l e d i c e - s t r e n g t h e n e d
ships
w h i c h c o m p l y w i t h the requirements o f this Chapter are
assigned a n ice c a t e g o r y m a r k i n t h e i r class n o t a t i o n i n
accordance w i t h 2.2.3, P a r t I "Classification".
3.10.1.1.3 R e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s C h a p t e r a r e
supplementary w i t h regard t o those o fother chapters
o f t h e R u l e s w h i c h apply t o a particular ship, a n d
they establish t h e m i n i m u m strength level necessary
to w i t h s t a n d ice loads, as w e l l as h u l l structure,
p r o c e e d i n g f r o m t h e ice m a r k i n t h e class n o t a t i o n .
3.10.1.1.4 T h e c a l c u l a t i o n p r o c e d u r e s o f t h i s
C h a p t e r a r e directly appUcable t o those ice ships a n d
icebreakers o n l y w h i c h have a standard h u l l f o r m a n d
w h i c h c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 3.10.1.2.
The possibility o f departing f r o m the requirements
o f 3.10.1.2, as w e l l as o f u s i n g b o w Unes ( s p o o n - U k e ,
m u l t i - p l a n e ) o t h e r t h a n standard ones, is subject t o
3.10.1.1.5 I n t h e R u l e s , a n a s s u m p t i o n i s m a d e
t h a t d u r i n g service t h e s h i p o w n e r w i l l be guided t h e
recommendations contained i n the Ice Navigation
Ship Certificate issued b y t h e Register u p o n ship
owner's request a n d specifying the conditions o f ship
P
CL
F i g . 3.10.1.2-2:
P slope o f frame o n t h e level o f s u m m e r load waterline
at t h e s e c t i o n c o n s i d e r e d , i n d e g .
F i g . 3.10.1.2-3:
slope o f s u m m e r load waterline
at t h e fore p e r p e n d i c u l a r , i n deg.;
1 shell plating; 2 stem
F i g . 3.10.1.2-4:
slope o f stem o n the level o f s u m m e r load waterline, i n deg.
P a r t II. H u l l
169
3.10.1.2.2 T h e h u l l c o n f i g u r a t i o n p a r a m e t e r s o f
ice class ships s h a l l b e w i t h i n t h e l i m i t s stated i n
T a b l e 3.10.1.2.2.
T a b l e
3.10.1.2.2
Hull configuration
Category o f ice strengthening
parameter
Arc8, Arc9 7, A r c 5 A r c 4 tel. I c e l Ice3
n o tgreater than
<xo n o t g r e a t e r t h a n
P w i t h i n 0,051, f r o m
fore perpendicular,
minimum
P amidships, m i n i m u m
25
30
45=
30
30
40
15
45=
40
25
60
40
20
50
I n t h e f o r w a r d a n d intermediate region o f ice

strengthening o fArc4, Arc5, Arc6, Arc7, Arc8, Arc9
category ships a n d icebreakers, there shall be n o
areas o f shell plating w i t h i n w h i c h t h e c o n f i g u r a t i o n
parameters a a n d P w o u l d simultaneously take the
values P = 0 a n d a > 0.
3.10.1.2.3 T h e v a l u e s o f h u l l c o n f i g u r a t i o n p a r a
meters i nicebreakers shall c o m p l y w i t h the following
requirements.
A t 0 0 , 2 5 L f r o m f o r e p e r p e n d i c u l a r a t service
draughts, straight a n d convex waterlines shall be
used. T h e entrance angle f o r above waterlines shall
b e 22 t o 30.
A t service draughts, t h e angle shall n o t exceed:
30 f o r I c e b r e a k e r 6 , I c e b r e a k e r 7 c a t e g o r y i c e b r e a k e r s ;
25 f o r I c e b r e a k e r s , I c e b r e a k e r 9 c a t e g o r y i c e b r e a k e r s .
T h e cross section o f stem shall be executed i n t h e
f o r m o f a t r a p e z o i d w i t h a b u l g i n g f o r w a r d face.
F o r icebreakers w i t h standard b o w lines, slope
angles o f frames shall be adopted f r o m T a
ble 3 . 1 0 . 1 . 2 . 3 - 1 . I n case o f d e p a r t u r e f r o m t h e r e
quirements o f Table 3.10.1.2.3-1, t h e ice load values
shall be specially considered b y t h e Register.
T a b l e
Distance from
section to fore
perpendicular
0,11,
0,2
0,251,
Permissible
ran 40 55 23 _
ge o f t h e angle
variation p, i n
deg.
0,4 0,61,
32 15= _
T a b l e
Clearance,
in m m
3.10.1.2.3-1
0,8 1,01,
Icebreaker9
Icebreaker8
Icebreaker7
Icebreaker6
1500
1250
750
500
3.10.1.2.5 N o t r a n s o m s t e r n ( w i t h t h e t r a n s o m
c o m i n g i n t h e region o f ice strengthening) is per
mitted f o r icebreakers a n d Arc6, Arc7, Arc8, Arc9
category ships. F o r A r c 4 a n d A r c 5 category ships
h a v i n g a t r a n s o m stern, t h e value o f ice loads u p o n
the t r a n s o m is subject t o t h e special consideration b y
the Register.
3.10.1.2.6 F o r i c e b r e a k e r s a n d A r c 6 , A r c 7 , A r c 8 ,
A r c 9 category ships, there shall be a step i n t h e l o w e r
p a r t o f t h e s t e m . T h e h e i g h t o f t h e s t e p s h a l l b e 0,ld
at least. T h e t r a n s i t i o n f r o m t h e step t o t h e l o w e r p a r t
o f t h e stem shall be s m o o t h .
3.10.1.2.7 I n s h i p s o f c a t e g o r i e s A r c 5 , A r c 6 , A r c 7 ,
Arc8, Arc9, bulbous b o wis n o t permitted. I n ships o f
category Arc4, this k i n d o f b o w is subject t o special
consideration b y t h e Register.
3.10.1.3 R e g i o n o f i c e s t r e n g t h e n i n g .
3.10.1.3.1 T h e r e a r e i c e s t r e n g t h e n i n g r e g i o n s
lengthwise as follows:
forward region A ;
intermediate region A i ;
midship region B ;
aft region C .
There are ice strengthening regions transversely
as f o l l o w s :
region o f alternating draughts a n d similar regions I ;
region f r o m t h e l o w e r edge o f r e g i o n I t o t h e
u p p e r edge o f bilge strake I I ;
bilge strake I I I ;
r e g i o n f r o m t h e l o w e r edge o f bilge strake t o t h e
centre Une I V .
3.10.1.3.2 T h e l e n g t h o f r e g i o n s o f i c e s t r e n g t h
e n i n g i n ice class ships s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e
basis o f F i g . 3.10.1.3.2 a n d T a b l e 3.10.1.3.2.
T a b l e
20 A p p r o x i m a
tely c o i n c i d i n g
with the angles
P o f within 0
0,21,
Parameter
Are7,
Arc8, Arc9
Arc5,
Arc6
0,75
*i,
in
m
0,5B
w h e r e > 20
m
Arc4
Ice3
0,60
+ 8
24
0,5B
Ice2
Icel
0,50
0,50
+ 8 0,5B + 8
30
36
2, i n m
1,4
0,8
0,6
* , in m
1,6*!
l,35Ai
l,20Ai
L2, i n m
0,151,
0,11,
0,051,
L^, i n m
0,061,
0,051,
0,0451,
0,041,
ki
0,84
0,69
0,55
0,53
3.10.1.3.2
Ice category
where B ^ 2 0 m
I n w a y o f construction w a t e r line, frames shall

have a straight-lined o r m o d e r a t e l y c o n v e x shape.
T h e design w a t e r line shall cover t h e blade tips o f
side p r o p e l l e r s .
T h e t i p c l e a r a n c e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n s t a t e d
i n T a b l e 3.10.1.2.3-2.
3.10.1.2.4 I n t h e a f t e r b o d y o f i c e b r e a k e r s a n d A r c 4 ,
A r c 5 , A r c 6 , A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 category ships, there
shall be a n appendage (ice knife) a f t o ft h e rudder t o
protect the latter o n the sternway.
3.10.1.2.3-2
Category o f icebreaker
0,2
*1
1,10*1
0,021,
0,021,
0,50
170
Rules
Region
Region
"FT
Region
and Construction
A for I c e l , I c e 2 , I c e 3 category
Region
Boundaries
of
regions,
as measured
along
the
cross-sectional
perimeterj
/
of Sea-Going
Ships
ships
Position
of the point
i n the case of bulbous
A
hull
shape
IV A A
I ice strake i n theregion o f alternating draughts

II f r o m thelower boundary o f region I to the upper boundary o fregion I I I
I I I bilge strake
I V flat b o t t o m
b distance f r o m t h epoint o f the iceloadline a n d stem intersection t o t h e section

the ice loadline is t h ewidest, b u t n o tgreater t h a n 0,4L
where
N o t e s : 1. F o r I c e l c a t e g o r y s h i p s , t h e l o w e r b o u n d a r y o f t h e r e g i o n A i s b y h
f r o m t h eballast waterline.
2. P o i n t s h a l l n o t b e f u r t h e r t h a n t h e a f t b o u n d a r y o f t h e r e g i o n A
distant
F i g . 3.10.1.3.2
R e g i o n s o f ice strengthening o f ice class ships
T a b l e
A n ice l o a d l i n e shall b e d e t e r m i n e d as a l o a d l i n e
enveloping all t h e ship loadlines (heel a n dmass o f ice
i n case o f i c i n g disregarded) possible d u r i n g ice n a
vigation.
F o r I c e l , Ice2, Ice3 category ships n o inter
m e d i a t e r e g i o n o f ice strengthening w i l l be estab
lished. I n t h i s case, i t s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d t h a t t h e a f t
b o u n d a r y o f t h e f o r w a r d region o f ice strengthening
coincides w i t h t h e f o r w a r d b o u n d a r y o f t h e m i d s h i p
region o f ice strengthening.
3.10.1.3.3 T h e l e n g t h o f r e g i o n s o f i c e s t r e n g t h
e n i n g i n icebreakers shall b e d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e basis
o f F i g . 3.10.1.3.3 a n d T a b l e 3.10.1.3.3.
3.10.1.3.4 P r o c e e d i n g f r o m t h e i c e c a t e g o r y , t h e
requirements o f t h e Chapter apply t o t h e regions o f
Parameter
Icebreaker9
where 5 < 20 m
1,00
hi,
in
0,5B + 12
m where > 20
22
m
h , in m
2
h , in m
3
3.10.1.3.3
Icebreakers
Icebreaker7
0,80
0,5B
0,75
+ 7,6
22
1,7
Icebreaker6
0,5.8 + 8
24
1,4
1,1
1,9+l,6fti > 3,5 1,72+1,6*!^ 3,0 1,6+1,6/^2,8 0,4 + l , t t i > 1,6
ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g m a r k e d w i t h " + " i n T a

ble 3.10.1.3.4. F o r t h e purpose o f T a b l e 3.10.1.3.4,
the absence o f this m a r k means that t h e particular
region o f ice strengthening is n o t covered b y t h e re
quirements o fthe Chapter.
P a r t II. H u l l
171
Region
Region
0.20L
Region
0.40L
Region
0.15L
0.15L
I c e load
Ballast
line
waterline
rmilllllllHIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIUIIIIIIIIIII
0,1L
3XC
Region I
Region I I
Region HIP
Region I V I
F i g . 3.10.1.3.3
R e g i o n s o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f icebreakers
T a b l e
Ice
category
3.10.1.3.4
Vertical regioning
I
II
III
IV
Horizontal regioning
A
Icebreaker*),
Icebreakers,
Icebreaker7,
Arc9, Arc8
Ax
Ax
Ax
Ax
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Arc7
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Icebreakerf,
Arc6
+ + + + + + + + + + + + + +
Arc5
+ + + + + + + + + + +
+ +
Arc4
+ + + + + + +
+ +
Ice3
+ + +
Ice2
+ +
Icel
+ +
3.10.2 Structure.
3.10.2.1 Side grillage structure
transversely
framed.
3.10.2.1.1 A grillage m a yinclude vertical girders
o f m a i n f r a m i n g w h i c h a r e denoted as c o n v e n t i o n a l
frames, vertical w e b m e m b e r s w h i c h are denoted as
deep frames, a n d longitudinals w h i c h are denoted as
stringers.
Conventional frames are subdivided into:
m a i n frames i n plane o f floors o r bilge brackets;
intermediate frames n o t i n plane as floors o r bilge
brackets.
The intermediate frames are n o t mandatory
w i t h i n a side grillage.
N o t m o r e than o n e intermediate frame m a y be

fitted between m a i n frames.
Stringers are subdivided into:
intercostal stringers b y w h i c h j o i n t taking-up o f
local ice loads b y t h e frames is ensured. I t is re
c o m m e n d e d that t h e stringers shall be inter-costal;
side stringers b y w h i c h a t r a n s i t i o n o f forces i s
ensured f r o m conventional frames w h i c h directly take
u p t h e ice l o a d t o deep frames o r t o transverse
bulkheads.
Side grillage structures a r e p e r m i t t e d as follows:
grillage w i t h transverse m a i n frames w h i c h is
formed b y conventional frames o f t h e same section
a n d b y intercostal stringers;
grillage w i t h transverse w e b frames w h i c h is
f o r m e d b y c o n v e n t i o n a l f r a m e s , side stringers a n d
deep frames. Intercostal stringers m a y be fitted t o
gether w i t h side stringers.
W i t h a double-bottom structure available, the
functions o f deep frames are taken over b y vertical
d i a p h r a g m s , a n d t h o s e o f t h e side stringers, b y h o r
izontal diaphragms.
3.10.2.1.2 I n icebreakers a n d A r c 5 , A r c 6 , A r c 7 ,
A r c 8 , A r c 9 category ships, frames shall be attached
to decks a n d p l a t f o r m s w i t h brackets; i f a frame is
i n t e r c o s t a l i n w a y o f deck, p l a t f o r m o r side stringer,
brackets s h a l l b e fitted o n b o t h sides o f i t .
3.10.2.1.3 T h e e n d attachments o f m a i n frames
shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.5.5. I n ice
breakers solid floors shall be fitted o n each m a i n
frame. I n A r c 8 , A r c 9 category ships, solid f l o o r s shall
be fitted o n every o t h e r m a i n f r a m e .
The e n dattachments o f intermediate frames shall
comply with the following requirements.
I n A r c 4 , A r c 5 , A r c 6 , A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 category
ships a n d icebreakers, t h e b o t t o m ends o f inter
m e d i a t e f r a m e s s h a l l b e secured a t m a r g i n plate stif-
172
Rules
fened w i t h a lightened m a r g i n bracket ( o r a system o f

stiffeners) reaching u p t o l o n g i t u d i n a l stiffeners o r
intercostal
members
and
welded
thereto
(Fig. 3.10.2.1.3-1).
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
case, t h e w e b a r e a a n d plastic m o d u l u s o f t h e a b o v e
side s t r i n g e r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n r e q u i r e d f o r a
stringer fitted i n region I .
a)
V
b)
F i g . 3.10.2.1.3-1:
a lightened margin bracket;
b s y s t e m o f stiffeners
W h e r e there is n o double b o t t o m , t h e intermediate frames shall extend as f a r as l o n g i t u d i n a l

stiffeners o r intercostal structure a n d w e l d e d thereto.
T h e particular l o n g i t u d i n a l stiffener o r intercostal
structure shall b e f i t t e d n o t h i g h e r t h a n t h ef l o o r faceplate level.
I n I c e l , Ice2, Ice3 category ships h a v i n g m o n o tonic m a i n framing, the b o t t o m ends o f intermediate
frames m a y be secured a t intercostal longitudinal
fitted 1000 m m beneath the lower boundary o f
region I .
I n I c e l , I c e 2 , I c e 3 c a t e g o r y s h i p s w i t h d e e p framing, i t is permitted t o secure t h e b o t t o m ends o f interm e d i a t e frames, e x c e p t f o r t h e r e g i o n A o f c a t e g o r y I c e 3 ,
at a longitudinal (which m a y be intercostal) fitted
1000 m m b e l o w t h e side stringer l y i n g b e n e a t h t h e
l o w e r b o u n d a r y o fregion I ( F i g . 3.10.2.1.3-2). I n this
Region
F i g . 3.10.2.1.3-2
Permissible m e t h o d f o rsecuring theends o f intermediate frames i n
I c e l , Ice2, Ice3 c a t e g o r y ships w i t h d e e p f r a m i n g :
1 upper boundary o fregion I ; 2 lower boundary o fregionI ;
3 side stringer; 4 intercostal longitudinal;
5 m a i n frames; 6 intermediate frames;
7 deep frames
I n icebreakers a n d A r c 4 , A r c 5 , A r c 6 , A r c 7 , A r c 8 ,
A r c 9 category ships, t h e u p p e r ends o f i n t e r m e d i a t e
frames shall be secured o n a deck o r p l a t f o r m lying
above t h e upper b o u n d a r y o f region I . I n I c e l , Ice2,
Ice3 category ships h a v i n g m o n o t o n i c m a i n f r a m i n g ,
the upper ends o f intermediate frames m a ybe secured
in w a y o f a n intercostal longitudinal fitted 500 m m
above the upper boundary o fregion I .
I n I c e l , Ice2, Ice3 category ships w i t h deep
framing, the upper ends o f intermediate frames m a y
be secured i n w a y o f a l o n g i t u d i n a l ( w h i c h m a y b e
i n t e r c o s t a l ) f i t t e d 5 0 0 m m h i g h e r t h a n t h e side
P a r t II. H u l l
stringer lying above t h eupper boundary o fregion I

(refer t o F i g . 3.10.2.1.3-2). I n t h i s case, t h e w e b area
( a n d t h e u l t i m a t e section m o d u l u s o f t h e a b o v e side
s t r i n g e r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h o s e r e q u i r e d f o r a
stringer fitted i nregion I .
3.10.2.1.4 I n r e g i o n s I a n d I I o f i c e b r e a k e r s a n d
A r c 4 , A r c 5 , A r c 6 , A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 category ships,
i n t e r c o s t a l a n d / o r side stringers s h a l l b e fitted t h e
distance between w h i c h o r t h e stringer-to-deck o r
p l a t f o r m distance shall n o t exceed 2 m , as m e a s u r e d
o n a c h o r d a t side.
F o r r e g i o n I o f I c e l , Ice2, Ice3 category ships,
this distance shall n o t exceed 3 m .
Side stringers shall be fitted i n t h e loadline a n d
ballast water line regions. I fthere is a deck o r plat
f o r m l y i n g o n t h e s a m e level, t h e side s t r i n g e r m a y b e
omitted. Stringers shall be attached t o bulkheads b y
means o f brackets.
3.10.2.2 D e t e r m i n i n g t h e s u p p o r t i n g s e c t i o n s o f
frames i n grillages w i t h transverse f r a m i n g .
3.10.2.2.1 T h e s u p p o r t i n g s e c t i o n s o f c o n v e n
tional a n d deep frames shall be f o u n d i n supporting
structures only.
F o r frames, h o r i z o n t a l grillages (decks, p l a t f o r m s ,
b o t t o m ) a r e considered t o be supporting structures.
A s u p p o r t i n g structure consists o f p l a t i n g (decks, plat
forms, double b o t t o m ) a n dframing connected thereto
(beams, half-beams, floors, tank-side brackets). W h e r e
there is n o double b o t t o m , t h e formulae t o be f o u n d
below shall be used o n t h e assumption that t h e plating
lies level w i t h f l o o r face plates.
3.10.2.2.2 T h e s u p p o r t i n g s e c t i o n o f a c o n v e n
tional frame is considered t o be fixed, i fo n e o f t h e
f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s i s m e t a t least:
the f r a m e is connected t o t h e f r a m i n g o f a sup
porting structure;
the f r a m e crosses t h e p l a t i n g o f a s u p p o r t i n g
structure.
A supporting section is considered t o be simply
supported, i fa conventional frame is n o t connected
to supporting structure framing a n d is terminated o n
the structure plating.
Where a conventional frame terminates o n a n
intercostal longitudinal (intercostal stringer), i t s e n d
is c o n s i d e r e d t o b e f r e e , i . e . w i t h n o s u p p o r t i n g sec
tion.
3.10.2.2.3 T h e p o s i t i o n o f a s u p p o r t i n g s e c t i o n o f
a frame (conventional o rdeep frame) isdetermined i n
the following way.
W h e r e the frame is connected t o t h e supporting
structure plating only, t h e supporting section coin
cides w i t h t h e p l a t i n g surface.
W h e r e the frame is connected t o t h e supporting
structure f r a m i n g , t h e supporting section:
coincides w i t h t h e face p l a t e surface o f t h e sup
p o r t i n g s t r u c t u r e f r a m e i n case o f bracketless j o i n t ;
173
lies a t b r a c k e t e n d w h e r e b r a c k e t s w i t h a s t r a i g h t
o r r o u n d e d a n d stiffened edge a r e concerned;
lies i n t h e m i d d l e o f t h e b r a c k e t side w h e r e
brackets w i t h a r o u n d e d free edge a r e concerned.
3.10.2.2.4 W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e c o n d i t i o n s o f
fixation a n d t h e p o s i t i o n o f supporting sections i n
typical structures, o n e shall be guided b y T a
ble 3.10.2.2 ( t h e p o s i t i o n o f a supporting section is
indicated w i t h a n a r r o w i n t h e sketches o f the T a b l e ) ,
as w e l l a s b y t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3 . 1 0 . 2 . 2 . 2
a n d 3.10.2.2.3.
3.10.2.3 S i d e g r i l l a g e s t r u c t u r e w h e r e l o n g i t u d i n a l
f r a m i n g is used.
3.10.2.3.1 A l o n g i t u d i n a l l y f r a m e d s i d e g r i l l a g e
structure is p e r m i t t e d w h i c h consists o f longitudinals
and web frames. Intercostal additional frames m a y be
fitted between deep frames (refer t o 3.10.2.3.3).
I n a double-side structure, t h efunctions o f deep
frames aretaken over b yvertical diaphragms. W h e r e
a double-side structure includes h o r i z o n t a l dia
phragms, they are considered t o be platforms, a n d
the requirements o f 3.10.2.4 a n d 3.10.4.9 f o r plat
forms apply t o them. L o n g i t u d i n a l framing system is
n o t r e c o m m e n d e d f o r i c e b r e a k e r s a n d A r c 5 , ,
A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 category ships.
3.10.2.3.2 L o n g i t u d i n a l s w h i c h a r e i n t e r c o s t a l i n
w a y o f plate structures (refer t o 3.10.2.4) shall be
secured w i t h b r a c k e t s o n b o t h sides o f t h e p l a t e
structure, a n dt h ewebs o fthe longitudinals shall be
welded t o the plate structure.
3.10.2.3.3 I n i c e b r e a k e r s a n d 4, 5, ,
A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 category ships w h e r e t h e spacing o f
frames is greater t h a n 2 m , a d d i t i o n a l frames shall b e
fitted.
T h e e n dfixation m e t h o d shall be t h e same as i n
the case o f i n t e r m e d i a t e f r a m e s o f I c e l , Ice2, Ice3
category ships w i t h transverse m a i n f r a m i n g i n ac
c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.2.1.3, irrespective o f t h e ice cate
gory.
3.10.2.4 P l a t e s t r u c t u r e s .
3.10.2.4.1 B y p l a t e s t r u c t u r e s , t h e s e c t i o n s o f
deck, p l a t f o r m a n ddouble b o t t o m plating, o f trans
verse b u l k h e a d plating, deep f r a m e plates, stringers
o f side a n d b o t t o m , c e n t r e - p l a n e girder, s o l i d a n d
lightened plate floors a n d bilge brackets w h i c h adjoin
the shell plating are meant.
3.10.2.4.2 F o r h u l l m e m b e r s m e n t i o n e d u n
der 3 . 1 0 . 2 . 4 . 1 , t h e areas t o b e c o v e r e d b y t h e require
m e n t s f o r plate structures s h a l l b e established as f o l l o w s :
fore peak a n d after peak bulkheads o f icebreakers
a n d 5, , A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 c a t e g o r y s h i p s
t h r o u g h o u t their breadth; f o r ships o f o t h e r categories,
o n a b r e a d t h o f 1,2 m f r o m t h e s h e l l p l a t i n g ;
o t h e r b u l k h e a d s i n regions I a n d I I o f ice
b r e a k e r s a n d A r c 4 , A r c 5 , , A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9
category ships, decks a n d p l a t f o r m s o f icebreakers
174
T a b l e
Type o f joint in way
o f the supporting
section o f the frame
Type of
supporting
section
Intersection o f sup
porting structure
73
X
E
Securing o n suppor
ting structure w i t h
connection t o its
framing
Securing o n suppor
ting
structure
without connection
to its f r a m i n g
Ships
3.10.2.2
Sketch s h o w i n g structure and the position o f supporting section therein
43
>>
Securing o n inter
costal longitudinal
N o supporting section
a n d A r c 4 , A r c 5 , , A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 c a t e g o r y
s h i p s , o n a b r e a d t h o f 1,2 m f r o m t h e s h e l l p l a t i n g ;
o t h e r h u l l m e m b e r s o n a b r e a d t h o f 0,6 m
f r o m the shell plating.
3.10.2.4.3 I n t h e areas o f plate structures m e n
t i o n e d under 3.10.2.4.2, corrugated structures w i t h
corrugations arranged along t h e shell plating
(i.e. v e r t i c a l c o r r u g a t i o n s o n transverse b u l k h e a d s
a n d longitudinal corrugations o n decks o r platforms)
are n o t permitted.
3.10.2.4.4 T h e plate structures o f icebreakers,
A r c 5 , , A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 c a t e g o r y s h i p s a n d r e
g i o n I o f A r c 4 category ships shall b e p r o v i d e d w i t h
stiffeners fitted a t r i g h t angles a p p r o x i m a t e l y t o t h e
shell plating. T h e stiffeners shall b e spaced n o t far
ther apart t h a n stipulated i n T a b l e 3.10.2.4.4.
T h e plate structures o f I c e l , Ice2, Ice3, Ice4
(except r e g i o n I ) category ships m a y b e p r o v i d e d w i t h
stiffeners fitted i n parallel a p p r o x i m a t e l y t o the shell
plating.
3.10.2.4.5 T h e intersections o f plate structures w i t h
m a i n f r a m i n g shall b e executed i n accordance w i t h
T a b l e 3.10.2.4.5. T h e stiffeners b y w h i c h t h e plate
structure is strengthened a n d w h i c h lie o n t h e same
plane as the m a i n f r a m i n g girders shall b e secured t o
the above girders. O t h e r m e t h o d s o f attaching the webs
T a b l e
3.10.2.4.4
Orientation o f
M a x i m u m spacing o f stiffeners
m a i n f r a m i n g fitted
a t s h e l l p l a t i n g I c e b r e a k e r s , A r c 5 ( r e g i o n I ) , A r c 5 ( e x c e p t r e g i o n ),
Arc4 (regionI )
, A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9
M a i n f r a m i n g l i e s a, b u t n o t g r e a t e r t h a n 0,5 m 2a, b u t n o t g r e a t e r
across a plate
t h a n 1,0 m
structure
M a i n f r a m i n g lies
0,6 m
0,8 m
parallel t o a plate
structure
N o t e , a is the spacing o f m a i n f r a m i n g girder, as measured
o n the shell plating.
o f m a i n f r a m i n g girders t o the plate structure m a y b e

applied, i f f o u n d equivalent b y the Register.
3.10.2.4.6 W h e r e m a i n f r a m i n g girders a r e inter
costal i n w a y o f the plate structure, brackets shall be
f i t t e d o n b o t h sides o f t h e s t r u c t u r e o n t h e s a m e p l a n e
as e a c h o f t h e g i r d e r s , a n d t h e g i r d e r w e b s s h a l l b e
welded t o the plate structure.
3.10.2.4.7 T h ef o l l o w i n g requirements a r e p u t
f o r w a r d additionally f o r t h e intersections (connec
tions) o f the plate structures o f decks and platforms
with main framing.
P a r t II. H u l l
175
T a b l e
Ice
category
3.10.2.4.5
Sketch o f structure
1
Icebreaker!), F o r e p e a k , after p e a k , r e g i o n I ,
Icebreaker8 region I I with longitudinal f r a m i n g
Regions II, AIII, A J I I , CIII, A I V , A J V
O t h e r r e g i o n s a s p e r T a b l e 3.10.1.3.4
Icebreaker7, F o r e p e a k , after p e a k , regions I , I I R e g i o n s I a n d I I(except fore p e a k a n d

Icebreakert with longitudinal framing
after peak), A I I I , A j I I I , C I I I
Ditto
Arc9, Arc8, F o r e peak, region I with longitudinal R e g i o n s I a n d I I (except fore peak), A I I I ,

Arc7
framing
AIV, AjIV, AjIII
Ditto
, A r c 5 F o r e p e a k , r e g i o n A I , A j l , B I w i t h R e g i o n s I ( e x c e p t f o r e p e a k ) , I I , A I I I ,
AjIII
longitudinal framing
Ditto
Arc4
Ice3, Ice2,
Icel
N o t e .
Regions I ,A l l ,AjII, AIII,
AjIII
Ditto
All regions
S t i f f e n e r s o f p l a t e s t r u c t u r e a n d b r a c k e t s s t i p u l a t e d i n 3.10.2.4 a r e n o t s h o w n s c h e m a t i c a l l y i n t h e s k e t c h e s .
W h e r e t r a n s v e r s e f r a m i n g i s u s e d f o r sides, t h e
frames shall be attached t o t h e beams w i t h brackets.
I n A r c 5 ( r e g i o n I o n l y ) , , A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 c a t e
g o r y ships, t h e girders shall b e fitted o n t h e same plane
as e a c h o f t h e f r a m e s (refer also t o T a b l e 3.10.2.4.4).
I n A r c 5 (except region I ) a n d A r c 4 (region I )
category ships, t h e f r a m e o n w h o s e plane n o b e a m is
fitted shall be secured t o t h e plate structure w i t h
brackets w h i c h shall terminate o n t h e intercostal
stiffener.
W h e r e l o n g i t u d i n a l f r a m i n g i s u s e d f o r sides, t h e
beams shall be attached t o t h e shell plating w i t h
b r a c k e t s r e a c h i n g as f a r as t h e nearest side l o n g i t u d i n a l .
3.10.2.4.8 T h e d i s t a n c e f r o m t h e e d g e o f o p e n i n g
o r m a n h o l e t o t h e s h e l l p l a t i n g s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
0,5 m i n a p l a t e s t r u c t u r e . T h e distance f r o m t h e edge
o f o p e n i n g o r m a n h o l e i n a plate structure t o t h e edge
o f opening f o r t h e passage o f a girder t h r o u g h t h e
p l a t e s t r u c t u r e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e h e i g h t o f t h a t
girder.
3.10.2.5 F o r e p e a k a n d a f t e r p e a k s t r u c t u r e .
3.10.2.5.1 A l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d w e l d e d t o t h e
stem o r sternframe shall be fitted o n t h ecentreUne o f
the ship i n t h efore peak a n d after peak o f icebreakers
a n d A r c 8 , A r c 9 category ships, a n d t h e l o w e r ends o f
all frames shall be connected t o floors o r brackets.
3.10.2.5.2 I n t h e f o r e p e a k o f i c e b r e a k e r s a n d
A r c 5 , , A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 c a t e g o r y s h i p s , p l a t
forms w i t h lightening holes shall be fitted instead o f
stringers a n d p a n t i n g beams (refer t o 2.8.2.3), t h e
distance between p l a t f o r m s measured along a c h o r d

at side, s h a l l n o t exceed 2 , 0 m . T h i s s t r u c t u r e i s r e
c o m m e n d e d f o rA r c 4 category ships as well.
3.10.2.5.3 I n t h e a f t e r p e a k o f i c e b r e a k e r s a n d
A r c 5 , , A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 c a t e g o r y s h i p s ( r e f e r
to 2.8.2.10), side stringers a n d p a n t i n g b e a m s s h a l l b e
fitted so t h a t t h e distance between t h e stringers as
m e a s u r e d a l o n g a c h o r d a t side, w o u l d n o t b e greater
than 2,0m . T h e dimensions o f stringer webs shall
n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a e :
height h = 5 L+ 400 m m ;
thickness s = 0,05L + 7 m m .
Platforms w i t h lightening holes are recommended
instead o f p a n t i n g beams a n d stringers.
3.10.2.5.4 I n i c e b r e a k e r s a n d , A r c 7 , A r c 8 ,
A r c 9 c a t e g o r y ships, t h e side stringers i n t h e f o r e
peak a n d after peak shall generally be a c o n t i n u a t i o n
o f those fitted i n t h e regions A a n d (refer
to 3.10.2.1.4).
3.10.2.5.5 I n t h e c a s e o f A r c 4 c a t e g o r y s h i p s , t h e
area a n d inertia m o m e n t o fpanting beams shall be
increased b y 2 5 p e r cent as compared t o those r e
quired b y 2.9.4. T h e dimensions o f stringer webs shall
n o t b e less t h a n g i v e n b y t h e f o r m u l a e :
height h = 3 L+ 400 m m ;
thickness s = 0,04L + 6,5 m m .
3.10.2.5.6 I n t h e f o r e p e a k a n d a f t e r p e a k , t h e f r e e
edges o f side stringers s h a l l b e stiffened w i t h face
p l a t e s h a v i n g a t h i c k n e s s n o t less t h a n t h e w e b
t h i c k n e s s a n d a w i d t h n o t less t h a n t e n t h i c k n e s s e s .
176
Rules
T h e i n t e r c o n n e c t i o n s o f f r a m e s w i t h side stringers
shall be i n accordance w i t h T a b l e 3.10.2.4.5, a n d
brackets s h a l l b e c a r r i e d t o t h e face plates o f t h e
stringers.
3.10.2.6 S t e m a n d s t e r n f r a m e c o n s t r u c t i o n .
3.10.2.6.1 , A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 c a t e g o r y s h i p s
shall h a v e a s o l i d section s t e m m a d e o f steel (cast steel
is r e c o m m e n d e d ) . T h e stems a n d s t e r n f r a m e s o f ice
b r e a k e r s , a s w e l l a s t h e s t e r n f r a m e s o f A r c 5 , ,
A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 category ships, shall be m a d e o f
f o r g e d o r cast steel. S t e m s a n d sternframes w e l d e d o f
cast o r forged parts a r e admissible.
3.10.2.6.2 I n I c e l , I c e 2 , I c e 3 , A r c 4 , A r c 5 c a t e g o r y
ships, a stem o f c o m b i n e d structure ( a b a r w i t h
thickened plates welded thereto) o r plate structure
m a y be used, a n d w h e r e t h e ship length is
under 150 m w i t h a sharp-lined b o w , t h e stem design
s h o w n i n F i g . 3.10.2.6 m a y be used ( t h e value o f s
shall be as d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (3.10.4.10.1-3).
I n I c e l , Ice2, Ice3, A r c 4 category ships, stern
frames o f c o m b i n e d structure m a y be used.
F i g . 3.10.2.6
3.10.2.6.3 I n I c e l , I c e 2 , I c e 3 , A r c 4 , A r c 5 , ,
A r c 7 category ships, t h e s t e m shall, w h e r e practic
able, be strengthened b y a centre Une w e b h a v i n g i t s
section d e p t h e q u a l t o h a t least (refer t o T a
ble 3.10.4.10.1) w i t h a face p l a t e a l o n g its free edge o r
a l o n g i t u d i n a l bulkhead fitted o n t h e ship centreUne,
o n t h e entire stem length f r o m t h e keel plate t ot h e
nearest deck o r p l a t f o r m situated above t h elevel
referred t o i n3.10.4.10 a n d i n T a b l e 3.10.4.10.1. T h e
t h i c k n e s s o f t h i s p l a t e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f
the brackets w i t h w h i c h t h e stem is strengthened
(refer t o 3.10.2.6.4). I n icebreakers a n d A r c 8 , A r c 9
category ships, a l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d m a y be sub
stituted f o rt h e centre Une web.
v
3.10.2.6.4 W i t h i n t h e v e r t i c a l e x t e n t d e f i n e d
i n 3.10.2.6.3, t h e stem shall b e strengthened b y horizontal
w e b s a t least 0 , 6 m i n depth a n d spaced n o t m o r e t h a n
0 , 6 m apart. T h e w e b s s h a l l b e c a r r i e d t o t h e n e a r e s t f r a m e s
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
a n d connected thereto. W h e r e i n line w i t h side stringers, t h e

w e b s s h a l l b e a t t a c h e d to t h e m . I n s t e m s o f c o m b i n e d o r
plate type, t h e webs shall b e extended b e y o n d t h e w e l d e d
butts o f t h e stem a n d shell plating. A b o v e t h e deck o r
p l a t f o r m located, b y t h e v a l u e o f a t least (refer
t o 3.10.4.10.1 a n d T a b l e 3.10.4.1), higher t h a n t h e u p
per b o u n d a r y o f region I , t h e spacing o fh o r i z o n t a l
w e b s m a y g r a d u a U y i n c r e a s e t o 1,2 m i n i c e b r e a k e r s
a n d A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 c a t e g o r y s h i p s , a n d t o 1,5 m i n
ships o f o t h e r categories.
T h e w e b t h i c k n e s s s h a l l b e a d o p t e d n o t less t h a n
h a l f t h e stem plate thickness. I n icebreakers a n d
A r c 4 , A r c 5 , , A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 c a t e g o r y s h i p s ,
t h e free edges o f w e b s s h a l l b e s t r e n g t h e n e d w i t h face
plates w e l d e d t o t h e f r a m e s a t t h e i r ends. T h e side
stringers o f t h e fore peak shall be connected t ot h e
webs fitted i nline w i t h t h e m .
I n case o f a f u l l b o w , v e r t i c a l stiffeners m a y b e
required a d d i t i o n a l l y t o be fitted t o t h estem plates.
3.10.2.6.5 W h e r e t h e s t e r n f r a m e h a s a n a p p e n
dage (ice k n i f e ) , t h e clearance b e t w e e n t h e l a t t e r a n d
the r u d d e r plate shall n o t exceed 1 0 0m m . T h e a p
pendage shall be reUably connected t o t h e stern
frame. Securing t h eappendage t o plate structures is
not permitted.
3.10.2.6.6 I n i c e b r e a k e r s , t h e l o w e r e d g e o f s o l e p i e c e s h a l l b e c o n s t r u c t e d w i t h a s l o p e o f 1:8 b e g i n
ning f r o m t h e propeller post.
3.10.2.7 B o t t o m s t r u c t u r e .
3.10.2.7.1 I n i c e b r e a k e r s a n d A r c 5 , , A r c 7 ,
A r c 8 , A r c 9 category ships, d o u b l e b o t t o m shall be
provided between t h e fore peak bulkhead a n d t h e
after peak bulkhead.
3.10.2.7.2 I n i c e b r e a k e r s , p r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e
for soUd floors a t each m a i n frame, a n di n Arc8, A r c 9
category ships, a t every o t h e r m a i n f r a m e .
3.10.2.7.3 I n r e g i o n s o f i c e s t r e n g t h e n i n g i n w a y
o f b o t t o m , as estabUshed i n accordance w i t h T a
ble 3.10.1.3.4, bracket floors a r e n o t permitted.
3.10.2.7.4 I n i c e b r e a k e r s a n d A r c 8 , A r c 9 c a t e g o r y
s h i p s t h e c e n t r e - U n e g i r d e r h e i g h t s h a l l n o t b e less
than determined by the formula
h = <p(9L + 8 0 0 )
(3.10.2.7.4)
w h e r e cp = 0,8 f o r A r c 8 c a t e g o r y s h i p s ;
= 0,9 f o r A r c 9 c a t e g o r y s h i p s ;
cp = 1 f o r i c e b r e a k e r s .
3.10.2.7.5 I n i c e b r e a k e r s a n d A r c 8 , A r c 9 c a t e g o r y
ships, t h e spacing o f b o t t o m stringers shall n o t e x
ceed 3,0 m .
3.10.2.8 S p e c i a l r e q u i r e m e n t s .
3.10.2.8.1 I n i c e b r e a k e r s , d o u b l e s i d e s t r u c t u r e
shall generally be provided between t h e fore peak
b u l k h e a d a n dt h eafter peak bulkhead.
3.10.2.8.2 I n A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 c a t e g o r y s h i p s
d o u b l e side s t r u c t u r e i s necessary f o r e n g i n e r o o m ,
P a r t II. H u l l
a n d f o r t h e region m e n t i o n e d i n 3.10.2.8.1 i t is r e
commended.
3.10.2.8.3 W h e r e t h e w e b p l a t e o f a g i r d e r o r a
plate structure is considerably inclined t o t h e shell
p l a t i n g ( t h e a n g l e b e t w e e n t h e m b e i n g l e s s t h a n 50),
the f r a m i n g n o r m a l t o t h e shell plating o r a n inclined
plate structure is r e c o m m e n d e d ( F i g . 3.10.2.8.3).
O t h e r w i s e , special measures shall b e t a k e n t o prevent
the collapsing o f the girder o r t h ebulging o f the plate
structure.
a)
111
T h e ice l o a d is solely intended t o determine t h e

scantlings o f s t r u c t u r a l c o m p o n e n t s o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g
o n t h e basis o f t h e f o r m u l a e included i n this Chapter.
U s i n g t h e iceload parameters f o rstrength estimation
o n t h e basis o fo t h e r procedures a n d p r o g r a m s is n o t
permitted w i t h o u t p r i o r consent o f the Register.
T h e ice-load parameters t o be determined ac
c o r d i n g t o 3.10.3.2 t o 3.10.3.7 apply o n l y t o ice ships
a n d icebreakers w i t h hull shape c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e
requirements o f 3.10.1.2.2 a n d 3.10.1.2.3. T h e ice
l o a d f o r iceships a n d icebreakers o f other h u l l shapes
is subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r .
3.10.3.2 F o r i c e c l a s s s h i p s , t h e i c e p r e s s u r e , i n k P a ,
shall be determined b y the following formulae:
.1 i n r e g i o n A I
p
A I
2 5 0 0 ^ 7 ^
where a
(3.10.3.2.1)
= f a c t o r t o b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.10.3.2.1 p r o c e e d i n g
from the ice category;
A = displacement t o s u m m e r l o a d waterline, i n t;
v = v a l u e o f t h e s h a p e f a c t o r v, w h i c h i s t h e m a x i m u m o n e
f o r t h e r e g i o n , a s d e t e r m i n e d a t s e c t i o n s w i t h i n x = 0;
0,05L; 0,1L, etc. f r o m t h e f o r w a r d p e r p e n d i c u l a r o n t h e
ice loadline level (as f a r a s I c e l , Ice2, Ice3 c a t e g o r y ships
are concerned,design sections where
0,586 s h a l l o n l y
b e c o n s i d e r e d ; f o r b, r e f e r t o F i g . 3.10.1.3.2). T h e v a l u e
shall b edetermined b yt h e formulae:
x
b)
v =
(0,278 +
^ptf/^
v = (0,343-^)\/
where ^ 0 , 2 5 ;
w h e r e -f- > 0,25;
x = t h e distance between t h e considered section a n d t h e

forward perpendicular, i n m ;
a = angles o fs u m m e r load waterline inclination which shall
b e m e a s u r e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h F i g s 3.10.1.2-1 a n d
3.10.1.2-3 ( w h e r e x = 0), i n d e g . ;
P = angles o f frame inclination o n s u m m e r load waterline
level w h i c h shall b e m e a s u r e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h
F i g . 3.10.1.2-2, i n d e g . ; w h e r e t h e f r a m e i s c o n c a v e i n a
section, a m i n i m a l angle shall b ec h o s e n for i n the case o f
A r c 4 , A r c 5 , , A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 c a t e g o r y s h i p s w h i c h
is m e a s u r e d o n t h e level o f c o n t i n g e n t service w a t e r l i n e s .
F i g . 3.10.2.8.3:
a f r a m i n g n o r m a l t o shell plating; b inclined plate structure;
1 shell plating
T a b l e
Factor
3.10.3 I c e l o a d .
3.10.3.1 I c e l o a d i s t h e a p p r o x i m a t e d e s i g n
l o a d u p o n t h e h u l l d u e t o ice forces, b y w h i c h t h e
level o f requirements f o r scantlings is determined
proceeding f r o m t h e ice category m a r k , hull shape
and ship displacement.
T h e ice load depends o n three parameters:
p ice pressure being a characteristic o f t h e
m a x i m u m pressure i n t h e area o f d y n a m i c contact
b e t w e e n t h e h u l l a n d ice, i n k P a ;
b vertical d i s t r i b u t i o n o f ice pressure char
acterizing t h e m a x i m u m transverse dimension o f t h e
d y n a m i c c o n t a c t area b e t w e e n t h e h u l l a n d ice, i n m ;
l h o r i z o n t a l d i s t r i b u t i o n o f ice pressure char
acterizing t h e m a x i m u m longitudinal dimension o f t h e
d y n a m i c c o n t a c t a r e a b e t w e e n t h e h u l l a n d ice, i n m .
p
3.10.3.2.1
Ice category
Icel
Ice2
Ice3
Arc4
Arc5
0,36
0,49
0,61
0,79
1,15
1,89
2,95
5,3
0,80
1,17
1,92
3,06
5,75 8,95
A r c 7 A r c 8 A r c 9
7,9
0.22
0.33
0,50
0,78
1,2
1,84
3,7
5,6
0,5
0,63
0,75
0,87
I f a > 0 a n d (3 = 0 i n a s e c t i o n u n d e r c o n s i d e r a
t i o n o f I c e l , Ice2, Ice3 category ships, i t shall b e
considered that v = 0,72 i nthis section.
I f t h e a n g l e o f a i s less t h a n 3 i n a s e c t i o n o f I c e l ,
Ice2, Ice3, A r c 4 , A r c 5 category ships, such a section
m a y be omitted w h e n calculating v ;
m
178
Rules
.2 i n r e g i o n A i l
(3.10.3.2.2)
= 2500a vjJ^ l
1000
A l I
w h e r e 2 f a c t o r t o b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.10.3.2.1 p r o c e e d i n g
f r o m theice category;
v s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e m e t h o d d e s c r i b e d i n 3.10.3.2.1;
f o r A , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.2.1;
m
C \ k \ u
1000 '
p = 1 2 0 0 a V1^0 i0 0
1 ;
3,5;
f o r A , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.2.1;
u = m a x i m u m value o fthe shape factor for the region, to b e
d e t e r m i n e d i n s e c t i o n s w i t h i n x = 0; 0,051,; 0,11., e t c .
f r o m f o r w a r d perpendicular a t t h e ice loadline level (as
far a s I c e l , Ice2, Ice3 c a t e g o r y ships a r e c o n c e r n e d ,
s e c t i o n s w h e r e x =$0,586 s h a l l o n l y b e c o n s i d e r e d ; f o r b,
r e f e r t o F i g . 3.10.1.3.2). T h e v a l u e s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y
the formulae:
(3.10.3.2.3)
w h e r e = f a c t o r t o b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.10.3.2.1 p r o c e e d i n g
f o r A , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.2.1;
.4 i n r e g i o n C I o f I c e 2 , I c e 3 , A r c 4 , A r c 5 ,
category ships
= fc (0,635 + ^ * j f ^ ) y f ^
= ^ ( 0 , 8 6 2 - ^ ) ^ / ^ w h e r e - j r - > 0,25;
where ^-0,25;
(3.10.3.2.4-1)
P a ~
where a
(3.10.3.3.1)
w h e r e C\ = f a c t o r t o b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.10.3.3.1 p r o c e e d i n g
.3 i n r e g i o n B I
m
Ships
in m , shall be determined b y t h e following formulae:

.1 i n r e g i o n s A I , A l l , A I I I , A I V
A
f o r P i , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.2.3.
4
{- 1i1 ,ww1hn5ee -rr 0ee , 1p5>|7/w h e r e
F o r A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 category ships, t h eice

pressure i n region C I is determined b y the f o r m u l a
A 1
T a b l e
(3.10.3.2.4-2)
Pci ~ 0,75/?AI
where for p
Factor
3.10.3.3.1
Ice category
, r e f e r t o 3.10.3.2.1;
.5 i n r e g i o n s I I , I I I a n d I V , t h e i c e p r e s s u r e i s
d e t e r m i n e d as a p a r t o f t h e ice pressure i n region I a t
the appropriate section o f t h e ship length
Pki ~
P < 7
f o r x , a , P , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.2.1.
(3.10.3.2.5)
a /p i
k!
w h e r e = , , C ;
/ = II, III, IV;
a = f a c t o r t o b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.10.3.2.5.
Icel
Ice2
Ice3
Arc4
Arc5
0,38
0,42
0,44
0,49
0,6
A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9
0,62
0,64
0,55
0,7
0,73
0,75
0,27
0,30
0,34
0,40
0,47
0,50
k t
3.10.3.3 T h e v e r t i c a l d i s t r i b u t i o n o f i c e p r e s s u r e ,
T a b l e
Ice
category
3.10.3.2.5
R e g i o n lengthwise
forward a n d interme m i d s h i p region
diate regions ( A a n d A I )
(B)
aft r e g i o n ( C )
I f a > 0 a n d P = 0 i n a section o f I c e l , Ice2, Ice3

category ships, i t shall b e considered t h a t = 0,92 f o r
this section.
I f t h e a n g l e o f i s l e s s t h a n 3 i n a s e c t i o n o f I c e l ,
Ice2, Ice3, A r c 4 , A r c 5 category ships, such a section
m a y be omitted when calculating u ;
.2 i n r e g i o n s A i l , A i I I , A i I I I , A i I V
m
R e g i o n vertically
= C k u , b u t n o t greater than
Ai
II
Ice3
0,4
Arc4
0,5
III
IV
II
0,4
0,35
0,4
III
IV
II
III
IV
where C
for k ,
u
A
Arc5
0,65
0,65
0,45
0,5
0,4
0,5
0,65
0,65
0,5
0,5
0,45
0,5
0,35
0,15
Arc7
0,65
0,65
0,5
0,5
0,45
0,5
0,4
0,2
Arc8
0,7
0,65
0,5
0,55
0,45
0,25
0,55
0,4
0,3
Arc9
0,7
0,65
0,5
0,55
0,45
0,3
0,55
0,4
0,35
for b ,
for p , a ,
for p ,
A
A l l
l^bAPAi/PAji
(3.10.3.3.2-1)
r e f e r t o 3.10.3.3.1;
shall b e determined b y t h e procedure described
i n 3.10.3.3.1;
r e f e r t o 3.10.3.3.1;
r e f e r t o 3.10.3.2.1;
r e f e r t o 3.10.3.2.2.
I n a n y case, t h e v e r t i c a l d i s t r i b u t i o n b shall b e
n o t less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
Ai
A l
~PBI
-!^
where for p
A l l
, r e f e r t o 3.10.3.2.2;
(3.10.3.3.2-2)
P a r t II. H u l l
179
f o r P B I , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.2.3;
f o r 6 B , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.3.3;
3.10.3.5 F o r icebreakers, t h e ice pressure shall be

determined b y the following formulae:
.1 i n region A I
.3 i n r e g i o n s B I , B I I , B i l l , B I V
= ^
(3.10.3.3.3)
where C
f r o m the ice category;
C = f a c t o r t o b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.10.3.3.3 p r o c e e d i n g f r o m
the m i n i m a l side inclination angle with regard t o n o r m a l i n
the midship region o fice strengthening o n s u m m e r load
waterline level;
fork ,
r e f e r t o 3.10.3.3.1;
3
PAI
= V A I
where p%i = icepressure i n region A I , t o b edetermined i n accor

d a n c e w i t h 3.10.3.2.1 a s i n t h e c a s e o f a s h i p w h o s e i c e
category n u m b e r coincides with the category n u m b e r o f
the icebreaker;
f 1 where
" ~ I (
W
T a b l e
Factor
3.10.3.3.3
(3.10.3.5.1)
N ^ N o ;
f where
>N ;
0
iVj; = p r o p e l l e r s h a f t o u t p u t , i n M W ;
N o s h a l l b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.10.3.5.1;
A n g l e o fside slope amidships, i n deg.

T a b l e
10
12
14
16
18
1,00
0,81
0,68
0,54
0,52
0,47
0,44
.4 i n r e g i o n s C I , , C I I I ,
JV , i n M W
lcebreakei-6
Icebreaker7
Icebreakers
Icebreaker9
10
20
40
60
CIV
3.10.3.5.1
= 0 , 8 6 f o r c a t e g o r i e s I c e 2 , I c c 3 , A r c 4 , A r c 5 , ;
bc
.2 i n r e g i o n s A i l , B I a n d C I
f o r c a t e g o r i e s A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 @-.3.3.4)
Pki = cikPAi
w h e r e f o r 6 , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.3.1;
f o r 6 , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.3.3.
(3.10.3.5.2)
w h e r e f o r p , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.5.1;
a = f a c t o r t o b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.10.3.5.2 p r o c e e d i n g
f r o m t h eregion o f the ship length a n d t h ecategory o f
icebreaker;
= , ;
A 1
3 . 1 0 . 3 . 4 H o r i z o n t a l distribution o f ice pressure, i n m ,

shall b e determined b y t h e f o l l o w i n g formulae:
.1 i n regions A I , A l l , A I I I , A I V
= l l , 3 ^ / 6 s i n P m , b u t n o t less t h a n
3,5yjk&
(3.10.3.4.1)
w h e r e f o r 6, k , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.3.1;
= angle P i nt h edesign section o fregion A f o r which t h e
value o f the parameter is m a x i m u m
(refer
t o 3.10.3.3.1);
T a b l e
Region
.2 i n r e g i o n s A i l , A i I I , A i I I I ,
Z , = ll,3^/6
A
where for 6
A l
AiIV
A l
s i n p ^ , b u t n o t less t h a n /&
(3.10.3.4.2)
, r e f e r t o 3.10.3.3.2;
( = a n g l e P i n t h e d e s i g n s e c t i o n o f r e g i o n A i f o r w h i c h t h e
value o f the parameter is m a x i m u m
(refer
t o 3.10.3.3.1);
f o r k , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.3.1;
1
Icebreaker6
Icebreaker7
Icebreaker8
Icebreaker9
0,65
0,6
0,75
0,75
0,65
0,75
0,85
0,7
0,75
0,85
0,75
0,75
Ajl
BI
CI
.3 i n r e g i o n s I I , I I I a n d I V , t h e i c e p r e s s u r e s h a l l
be d e t e r m i n e d a s a p a r t o f the ice p r e s s u r e i n r e g i o n I
for the appropriate region o f ship length.
Pmn = a ^ >
m
(3.10.3.5.3)
m l
w h e r e m = A , A i , , C ;
n = II, III, IV;
dmn = f a c t o r t o b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.10.3.5.3.
.3 i n r e g i o n s B I , B I I , B i l l , B I V
T a b l e
= 6b , b u t n o t l e s s t h a n 3^/^ ( 3 . 1 0 . 3 . 4 . 3 )
B
3.10.3.5.3
R e g i o n vertically a n d region lengthwise
Fac
tor
All
f o r f c \ , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.3.1;
3.10.3.5.2
AIII AIV A ^ I AÎI A!iV
BII Bill BIV
C I I I C I V
.4 i n r e g i o n s C I , , C I I I ,
0,7 0,65 0,5
f o r f c , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.3.1.
C
0,55
0,45 0,55 0,45 0,35 0,55 0,40 0,30
CIV
Zg = 6 6 , b u t n o t l e s s t h a n 3 j k
c
0,6
(3.10.3.4.4)
3.10.3.6 A s f a r as icebreakers a r econcerned, t h e

vertical distribution o f ice pressure shall be adopted
equal f o r a l lregions a n d shall be determined i n ac-
180
Rules
cordance w i t h 3.10.3.3.1, i.e. as f o r t h e f o r w a r d r e

g i o n o f t h e ship w h o s e ice category n u m b e r coincides
w i t h the category n u m b e r o f the icebreaker. W h e n
determining u , the values o f shall be calculated f o r
those sections o n l y w h i c h are included i n t h e f o r w a r d
region o f ice strengthening o f t h e icebreaker.
3.10.3.7 A s f a r a s i c e b r e a k e r s a r e c o n c e r n e d , t h e
h o r i z o n t a l d i s t r i b u t i o n o f ice pressure s h a l l b e a d o p t e d
equal f o r a l l regions a n d shall be d e t e r m i n e d i n ac
c o r d a n c e w i t h 3 . 1 0 . 3 . 4 . 1 , i.e. as f o r t h e f o r w a r d r e g i o n
o f t h e ship w h o s e ice category n u m b e r coincides w i t h
the category n u m b e r o f t h e icebreaker. W h e n de
t e r m i n i n g p^,, o n l y t h o s e s e c t i o n s s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d
w h i c h are included i n t h e f o r w a r d r e g i o n o f ice
strengthening o f t h e icebreaker.
3.10.4 S c a n t l i n g s o f i c e - s t r e n g t h e n i n g s t r u c t u r e s .
3.10.4.1 S h e l l p l a t i n g .
I n regions o f ice strengthening, t h e shell plating
t h i c k n e s s s , i n m m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e
and Construction
of Sea-Going
T a b l e
Ice category
Ships
3.10.4.1
u, i n m m p e r y e a r
Region lengthwise
forward a n d inter
mediate ( A a n dA j )
midship a n d after
(B a n d C )
Icel
0,2
Ice2
0,25
Ice3
0,3
Arc4
0,36
0,26
Arc5
0,38
0,28
, A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9
0,4
0,3
Icebreaker6
0,4
0,3
Icebreaker7
0,5
0,35
Icebreakers
0,6
0,4
Icebreaker9
0,7
0,4
In accordance
w i t h 1.1.5.2
sp
^sp
^spO
As^spO
(3.10.4.1)
where
15,8eiv
As
sp0
= 0,757 ;
1 + 0,5?
p = ice pressure i n theregion under consideration according
t o 3.10.3.2 o r 3.10.3.5, i n k P a ;
= b w h e r e t h e grillage is transversely f r a m e d i n t h e region
u n d e r consideration. I n this case, shall n o t b e greater
than t h e spacing o f intercostal stringers o r t h e distance
between plate structures;
= I w h e r e t h e grillage is longitudinally f r a m e d i n t h e region
under consideration;
b = vertical distribution o f ice pressure i n the region u n d e r
c o n s i d e r a t i o n a c c o r d i n g t o 3.10.3.3 o r 3.10.3.6, i n m ;
/ = distance between adjacent transverse members, i nm ;
a = spacing o f m a i n direction girders, i nm ;
T = p l a n n e d s h i p life, i n y e a r s ;
= a n n u a l reduction o f shell plating thickness a s a result o f
corrosion wear a n d abrasion, i n m m p e r year, to b e
a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.10.4.1. W h e n t a k i n g m e a s u r e s t o
protect t h e shell plating f r o m corrosion wear a n d
a b r a s i o n ( b y a p p l y i n g s p e c i a l c o a t s , c l a d steels, etc.),
the magnitude o f t h e value is subject to special
consideration b y the Register.
3.10.4.2 P r o c e d u r e f o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e r e q u i r e d
a n d actual geometrical characteristics o f girder
structures.
3.10.4.2.1 T h e f o r m u l a e , a s g i v e n i n 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 3
t o 3.10.4.8, f o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e required geometrical
characteristics o f girder structure cross sections, such
as t h e u l t i m a t e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W a n d t h e w e b
area A , are based o n the ultimate strength criterion.
T h e r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s o f 3.10.4.2.2 t o 3.10.4.2.6 shall
preferably be considered w h e n determining the values
of W and A .
3.10.4.2.2 T h e r e q u i r e d v a l u e o f t h e u l t i m a t e
section m o d u l u s W is proportionate t o the factor
w h i c h varies o n t h e basis o f t h e dependence between

the required w e b area A a n d the actual w e b area A
(adopted w h e n choosing t h e section)
W =
W k;
0
where W
= k(y); = A / A
(3.10.4.2.2-1)
= r e q u i r e d v a l u e o f W, w e b a r e a m a r g i n d i s r e g a r d e d , t o
b e d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.4.3.1, 3.10.4.4.1,
3.10.4.5.1, 3.10.4.6.1, 3.10.4.7.1.
I n t h e a b s e n c e o f a w e b a r e a m a r g i n (A = A ,
= 1 ) , t h e v a l u e o f W i s m a x i m u m (k = 1 ) . T h e i n
crease o f t h e a c t u a l w e b area as c o m p a r e d w i t h t h e
r e q u i r e d o n e (y < 1 ) m a k e s i t p o s s i b l e t o r e d u c e t h e
v a l u e o f W(assuming
= 0 , 9 0 , 8 ; = 0,1 0 , 6 3 ) .
Thus, the application o f a flexible procedure f o r
choosing a profile is ensured t o a v o i d redundant
margins o f m a t e r i a l w i t h several a p p r o x i m a t i o n s
d u r i n g t h e c a l c u l a t i o n . B y w a y o f t h e first a p p r o x
imation, the following assumptions shall be made
in F o r m u l a e (3.10.4.3-1), (3.10.4.4-1), (3.10.4.5-1),
(3.10.4.6-1), (3.10.4.7-1):
a
~y = 0 , 9 , i . e . t h e a c t u a l g i r d e r w e b a r e a s h a l l b e a t
least b y 10 p e r cent greater t h a n t h e required
one;
1
kV~
f = F +, 0, 1i 5r / - f o r c o n v e n t i o n a l f r a m e s ;
ki = 0 , 6 3 f o r o t h e r g i r d e r types
t
<
(3.10.4.2.2-2)
w h e r e i = g i r d e r t y p e i n d e x (f f o r f r a m e , ,s f o r s t r i n g e r , wf f o r w e b
frame, / for longitudinal);
f o r f , ; , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1.
3.10.4.2.3 F o r g r i l l a g e s c o m p r i s i n g d e e p f r a m e s , a
procedure is i m p l e m e n t e d t o take account o f the re-
P a r t II. H u l l
181
dundant margins o f material w h i c h emerge w h e n

c h o o s i n g girder sections as a result o f t h e actual
section m o d u l u s W a n d t h eactual w e b area A ex
ceeding t h e required values o f W a n d A . R e d u n d a n t
margins are accounted f o rb y applying t h e factors
a
,<1;*,
3 ^
= %?<,
(3.10.4.2.3)
w h e r e f o r k W , r e f e r t o F o r m u l a (3.10.4.2.2-1);
f o r i, r e f e r t o F o r m u l a (3.10.4.2.2-2).
h
0i
I f t h e actual geometrical characteristics o f a

c o n v e n t i o n a l f r a m e exceed t h e required ones ( y / < 1 ,
v|/y > kj) i n a t r a n s v e r s e l y f r a m e d g r i l l a g e , t h e r e
quired geometrical characteristics o f t h e supporting
stringer a n d deep f r a m e ( i n t h e case o f t h e latter,
redundant margins, i f a n y , o f t h e bearing stringer
(y < 1 , ty k ) a r e a l s o c o n s i d e r e d ) a r e l o w e r e d d u e
t o t h i s . S i m i l a r l y , case o f a l o n g i t u d i n a l l y f r a m e d
grillage f o rl o w e r i n g t h e requirements f o rt h e deep
frame where longitudinals have redundant margins
( Y , < 1 , , > ki).
ef
>
3.10.4.2.4 W h e r e t h e p r o f i l e s e l e c t i o n p r o c e d u r e s
i n accordance w i t h 3.10.4.2.2 a n d t h e procedures f o r
considering the redundant margins o f materials i n
accordance w i t h 3.10.4.2.3 appear t o o complicated,
a simplified calculation c a n be carried o u t ,
assuming
Yi = 0,9;
k =
Kf f
1
F+0,\5j
for conventional frames;
sections included i nthe actual w e b area A
(3.10.4.2.4)
F i g . 3.10.4.2.5
ki = 0,63 f o rother types o f girders;
ki.
Precise instructions concerning t h e simplified

calculation procedure
shall be f o u n d directly
i n 3.10.4.3 t o 3.10.4.7.
N o simplified calculation is allowed i fflat b a r
profile is used f o rconventional frames.
T h e simplified calculation results i n increase o f
girder scantinds. Therefore, t h e simplified calculation
is n o t r e c o m m e n d e d f o r icebreakers a n d A r c 4 , A r c 5 ,
, A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 c a t e g o r y s h i p s .
3.10.4.2.5 W h e n s e l e c t i n g p r o f i l e s , t h e f a c e p l a t e
a n d effective flange sections w h o s e b r e a d t h is equal
to t h e w e b thickness ( F i g . 3.10.4.2.5) shall bei n
cluded i nt h eactual w e b area A , i n c m .
I f there are cutouts i n girder webs, they m a ybe
i g n o r e d i n t h e case o f side stringers o n l y p r o v i d e d t h e
openings aren o t made i n t h evicinity o f supporting
sections. T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h earea o f f r a m e webs
( b o t h c o n v e n t i o n a l a n d deep frames) shall be verified
o n t h ebasis o f n e t sections.
3.10.4.2.6 T o d e t e r m i n e t h e a c t u a l v a l u e o f t h e
ultimate section m o d u l u s o f t h e girders o f ice
2
strengthening structures i tis recommended t ouse t h e

formula
W
= h(f
s e c
e /
ifsec-M
(3.10.4.2.6-1)
where = 0 with/ >/

c
-0,5f -Q ,in cm
s e (
,;
thfef<fse<
= girder sectional area m i n u s effective flange o f shell

plating, i nc m ;
f = 0,1[-0,05( + t )]s, i n c m ;
h = section height measured from the mid-thickness o f
effective flange t o t h e mid-thickness o f face plate
( F i g . 3.10.4.2.5), i n c m ;
s = section w e b thickness, i nm m ;
ff
= 0,\b jt f
effective flange area o fshell plating, i nc m ;
t f = effective flange thickness, i nm m , o f shell plating, t o b e
a d o p t e d equal t o t h e average shell plating thickness i n
w a y o feffective flange breadth;
tf = f a c e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s , i n m m , (tf = 1,5s t o b e a d o p t e d f o r
b u l b steel sections);
b f = effective flange breadth, i nc m , t o b ea d o p t e d e q u a l to:
conventional frame spacing, for conventional a n d deep
frames where transverse framing is used;
longitudinals spacing, f o r longitudinals where long
itudinal framing is used;
1/6 o f d e e p f r a m e s p a n b e t w e e n d e c k s o r p l a t f o r m s , o r o f
f r a m e spacing, w h i c h e v e r i s less, f o r d e e p f r a m e s w h e r e
longitudinal framing is used;
s e c
eJ
182
Rules
1/6 o f f r a m e s p a c i n g , f o r s t r i n g e r s w h e r e w e b f r a m i n g i s
used;
half the s u m o fspacings o ft w o adjacent girders o f the
s a m e d i r e c t i o n o r 1/6 o f g i r d e r s p a n , w h i c h e v e r i s l e s s , i n
all other cases.
F o r rolled profiles where f f^f

sumed that
e
s e c
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
j = factor equal to:

the n u m b e r o f fixed supporting sections o f t w o adjacent
f r a m e s j=sS4 a s f a r a s g r i l l a g e s w i t h t r a n s v e r s e m a i n
framing are concerned,
in t h e case o f grillages with w e b framing, refer
t o T a b l e 3.10.4.3.1-2;
i t m a y be as
Ar
f o r A r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.2;
f o r A , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.3;
f i
=f
s e c
(y
+ 0,05t ), i n c m ,
(3.10.4.2.6-2)
e f
w h e r e yo = d i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e g r a v i t y c e n t r e o f t h e p r o f i l e c r o s s
section, m i n u s effective flange, a n d t h e shell plating,
i n c m ( F i g . 3.10.4.2.5).
3.10.4.3 C o n v e n t i o n a l f r a m e s w h e r e t r a n s v e r s e
f r a m i n g is used.
The requirements o f this paragraph apply t o
c o n v e n t i o n a l frames i n grillages w i t h transverse m a i n
f r a m i n g a n d i n grillages w i t h deep frames w h e r e
transverse f r a m i n g is used.
I n t h e case o f grillages w i t h transverse m a i n
f r a m i n g , t h e requirements shall b e applied t o a single
span o f a c o n v e n t i o n a l f r a m e w h i c h lies b e t w e e n t h e
s u p p o r t i n g sections o f t h e f r a m e o n t h e u p p e r a n d
lower supporting structures.
I n t h e case o f grillages w i t h deep f r a m e s , t h e r e
quirements shall be applied t o a l l t h e spans o f a
c o n v e n t i o n a l f r a m e , i . e . b e t w e e n t h e s u p p o r t i n g sec
tions o fthe upper supporting structure a n d the upper
side stringer, b e t w e e n side stringers ( m 1 s e c t i o n
w h e r e m i s t h e n u m b e r o f side stringers), b e t w e e n t h e
l o w e r side s t r i n g e r a n d t h e s u p p o r t i n g section o f t h e
lower supporting structure.
3.10.4.3.1 T h e u l t i m a t e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s Wf, i n c m ,
o f a c o n v e n t i o n a l f r a m e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e
250
W,'jo-
pbalYkÊwfi
p = ice pressure i n t h e region under consideration i n

a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.3.2 o r 3.10.3.5, i n k P a ; w h e r e t h e
lower b o u n d a r y o fregion I is included i nthe grillage a n d
the requirements o f t h e Chapter cover region o f ice
s t r e n g t h e n i n g I a n d I I ( r e f e r t o 3.10.1.3.4), t h e f o l l o w i n g
values o fp shall b e adopted:
P Pm, i fthe distance f r o m t h e plating o fthe u p p e r supporting
structure o fthe grillage t o the lower b o u n d a r y o f region I
i s g r e a t e r t h a n 1,26, o t h e r w i s e p = p m ,
P m
i p r e s s u r e i n r e g i o n s I a n d I I ( r e f e r t o 3.10.3.2);
6 = vertical distribution o fice pressure, i nm , i nt h e region
u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.3.3
o r 3.10.3.6; i f b > I, b = I s h a l l b e a d o p t e d f o r t h e
p u r p o s e o f d e t e r m i n i n g Wjo a n d Afi
a = c o n v e n t i o n a l f r a m e spacing, i n m , a s m e a s u r e d a t side;
/ = design frame span, i nm , t ob e determined i n accordance
w i t h T a b l e 3.10.4.3.1-1 i n t h e c a s e o f t r a n s v e r s e m a i n
f r a m i n g a n d w i t h T a b l e 3.10.4.3.1-2 i n t h e c a s e o f w e b
framing;
Y = 10,5B ;
=
= j , b u t n o t greater t h a n = 1;
= f a c t o r e q u a l t o 0,9 f o r c o n v e n t i o n a l f r a m e s j o i n e d w i t h
knees t o bearing stringers i n a side grillage with deep
f r a m e s , a n d e q u a l t o 1,0 i n o t h e r c a s e s ;
T a b l e
3.10.4.3.1-2
W=
kfWjo
(3.10.4.3.1)
f = F + W5]J\-k.$'
^ _
1
F =
F =
=
k =
YToASj ~
f o r
o n e e n d s u p p o r t e d , b o t h ends free
the other free
(attached t o a n
(attached t o a n
intercostal
intercostal member)
member)
3
s i d e Distance between side

stringers
Between
upper Half the s u m o f
+ 2
(lower) supporting d i s t a n c e s
b e t w e e n w h e r e j =%2 i s t h e
structure a n d t h esupporting sections o n n u m b e r o f f i x e d
n e a r e s t
s i d e supporting structure supporting sections
a n d t h e nearest side o n t h e s u p p o r t i n g
stringer
s t r i n g e r f o r t w os t r u c t u r e f o r t w o
adjacent frames
adjacent frames
0
E = factor equal to:
3.10.4.3.1-1
T y p e o f intermediate frame e n d fixation

both ends
supported
Between
stringers
c a s e
o f t h e s i m p l i f i e d c a l c u l a t i o n i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.4.2.4;
f 1 f o r plate sections;
I 0,8 i n o t h e r c a s e s ;
1 w i t h k = A;
0,5 w i t h & < 4 ;
factor equal to:
as f a r a s grillages with transverse m a i n f r a m i n g a r e
c o n c e r n e d , r e f e r t o T a b l e 3.10.4.3.1-1;
4 f o r grillages with deep frames;
T a b l e
Para
meter
Position o f
conventional frame
zone under
consideration
Half the s u m o f Distance between t h e supporting

distances between sections o f m a i n frame
the
supporting
sections o f t w o
adjacent frames
E = Urjr
w i t h /, < 0,5/;
E = 1 with /,>0,5/
w h e r e l = s e c t i o n o f t h e s p a n l e n g t h /, i n m , o v e r l a p p e d b y t h e
region o f ice strengthening;
t
Wf=
Sqf =
f o r As,
k =
k =
c
1 + k -j^-, for the purpose o f simplified calculation

i n a c c o f f i a n c e w i t h 3.10.4.2.4. / = 1,15 m a y
be adopted;
actual frame w e b thickness, i nm m ;
r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1;
0,9 f o r r o l l e d p r o f i l e ;
0,85 f o r w e l d e d p r o f i l e .
c
3.10.4.3.2 T h e w e b a r e a /, i n c m , o f a c o n v e n t i o n a l
f r a m e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
P a r t II. H u l l
183
tf = f a c e p l a t e b r e a d t h o f a c o n v e n t i o n a l f r a m e , i n m m ( f o r
beams m a d e o f bulbs, t = 1 , 5 ^shall b e adopted);
f o r hf, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.2;
= actual shell plating thickness, i n m m ;
f o r a , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
4 = t h e greatest spacing, i n m , o fadjacent stringers crossing
the f r a m e s p a n o r the greatest distance, i nm , between the
stringer a n d t h e supporting section.
(3.10.4.3.2)
w h e r e = ^ ;

1
l + z+\/2lB 2
= 0 , 7 , w h i c h e v e r i s g r e a t e r ;
2
z=^(/0 ;
for
a , b, l, , B , r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 3 . 1 , t h e v a l u e s o f b a n d / a d o p t e d
shall n o texceed the distance between bracket ends;
(l w h e r e n o s i d e s t r i n g e r i s p r o v i d e d ;
J o , 9 where there i s a side stringer i n t h e span;
i0,8 w h e r e there i s a side stringer i n t h e f r a m e s p a n f o r
w h i c h effective flange continuity i s ensured;
_
*
hf = f r a m e w e b h e i g h t , i n c m ; hf = 0 , 8 9 A f o r s y m m e t r i c b u l b
a n d hf = 0,84A f o r a s y m m e t r i c b u l b ;
h = rolled profile height, i n cm;
f o r A s , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
s
3.10.4.3.3 T h e a c t u a l w e b a r e a A , i n c m , s h a l l
be d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.4.2.5. W h e n a
simplified calculation is performed i n accordance
w i t h 3.10.4.2.4, t h e value o f A shall be a t least
by 1 0 per cent greater than t h e required w e b area.
3.10.4.3.4 T h e w e b t h i c k n e s s Sf, i n m m , o f a
c o n v e n t i o n a l f r a m e s h a l l b e a d o p t e d n o t less t h a n t h e
greater o f t h e f o l l o w i n g values:
a
S f = 5-^-
s =
f
A = 2 3 , 4 (
/
w h e r e s.
- r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.5;
of
A distance b e t w e e n side stringers o r a side strin

ger a n d a s u p p o r t i n g s t r u c t u r e f o r c o n v e n t i o n a l
f r a m e s w i t h o u t face p l a t e s s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 1,3 m .
3.10.4.4 S i d e a n d i n t e r c o s t a l s t r i n g e r s a s p a r t o f
transverse framing w i t h deep frames.
3.10.4.4.1 T h e u l t i m a t e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s
i n cm ,
o f a b e a r i n g s i d e s t r i n g e r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e
3
(3.10.4.4.1)
(3.10.4.3.4-2)
As
125
= -5k%pdibQw ;
(3.10.4.3.6)
- A J ) / V ^ ,eH
A s = r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
where W
w h e r e k. = 1,4
(3.10.4.3.4-1)
pa + As ;
0 , 0 1 1 4 / 1 ^ ^ +
I n t h e case o f f r a m e s m a d e o f s t a n d a r d profiles,
c o m p l i a n c e w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e face p l a t e
breadth m a y n o t be verified where a simplified calcu
l a t i o n i n accordance w i t h 3.10.4.2.4 is carried o u t .
3.10.4.3.6 W h e r e t h e f a c e p l a t e i s l a c k i n g , t h e
h e i g h t o f a c o n v e n t i o n a l f r a m e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
b u t n o t l e s s t h a n k, = 1,0;
af
for
W, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
Waf = a c t u a l u l t i m a t e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s , i n c m , o
tional frame, to b e determined i n
w i t h 3.10.4.2.6 ( a s a f i r s t a p p r o x i m a t i o n
purpose o f t h e simplified calculation i n
w i t h 3.10.4.2.4, Wf= W s h a l l b e a d o p t e d ) ;
f o r p , a , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
for h ,
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.2;
f o r A s , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
1 + VI-0,8tf
for thepurpose o fsimplified calculation

i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.4.2.4 k = 0 , 6 3 ,
s h a l l b e a d o p t e d ; w = 1,15;
f a conven
accordance
or for the
accordance
w =
1+ 0,95^ I
3.10.4.3.5 T h e f a c e p l a t e b r e a d t h /, i n m m , o f a
conventional frame m a d e o f bulb o r T-sections shall
n o t b e less t h a n t h e g r e a t e r o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g v a
lues:
Cf=
c=
f
0 , 0 1 4 5 ^ ^ / ^ ^ - 0 , 9 8 ) ;
2,5?/;
(3.10.4.3.5-1)
(3.10.4.3.5-2)
c = 69,6vV-^(P2->
f
0 0 2 9
(3.10.4.3.5-3)
*?=
k*=
f o r l",
forp,
b,
i =
0,82-0,55a // '>0,6 with l > a

0,82l"/ -0,55
^./' w i t h / < a
r e f e r t o 3.10.3.4;
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
d e e p f r a m e spacing, i n m , a sm e a s u r e d a l o n g t h e side;
1
ai
Q = C
C f +
2 l
|| + ^
3
1 +
where P
^ ~J? ,
b u t n o t l e s s t h a n p = 0,055;
.2
a = (fsC )
2i
* f = W
+ o,01
b u t n o t less t h a a = 1;
6i
'jo
\ | r = l,4fc
r
f o r W, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
f o r
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.4;
Sqf = a c t u a l w e b t h i c k n e s s o f a c o n v e n t i o n a l f r a m e , i n m m ;
f
* ;
C21J',
fi
l s
i = factor taking u p thefollowing values:

i = 1 w i t h m = 1;
i = 2 with m > 2 ;
m = n u m b e r o fside stringers i n a grllage;
for C, C
C , r e f e r t o T a b l e 3.10.4.4;
f o r /, y r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 3 . 1 ;
\|fy = f a c t o r t o b e a d o p t e d e q u a l t o t h e l e s s e r o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :
u
+ C
for t h e purpose o f simplified calculation i n accordance

w i t h 3.10.4.2.4,
f o r Wfo, k
fi
/;
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
184
Rules
for \
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.4;
and Construction
of Sea-Going
c = 0 , 0 1 6 5 / U ^ y / t s S a s 2,6);
(3.10.4.4.7-1)
for
for
Sas
for
A
,
A ,
=
As,
a
>
(3.10.4.4.7-2)
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.4.2;
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.4.3;
actual w e b thickness o f a side stringer, i nm m ;
r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
T a b l e
w h e r e f o r W , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.4.1;
Wf = a c t u a l u l t i m a t e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s , i n c m , o f a s i d e
s t r i n g e r , t o b e d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.4.2.6
(in first a p p r o x i m a t i o n o r f o r t h e p u r p o s e o f s i m p l i f i e d
c a l c u l a t i o n i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.4.2.4, W = W s h a l l
be adopted);
t = face plate thickness, i n m m , o f a bearing stringer;
f o r p r e f e r t o 3.10.4.4.1;
f o r h , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.4.2.
s
3.10.4.4
Ships
3i
5i
6i
0,003
0,132
0,398
0,584
-0,785
0,320
0,363
0,11
-0,078
0,186
-0,202
0,358
3.10.4.4.2 T h e w e b a r e a A , i n c m , o f a s i d e
s t r i n g e r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formula
s
8,7k%pab
n
B e a r i n g stringer w i t h o u t face p l a t e (flat b a r ) i s

not permitted.
3.10.4.4.8 T h e w e b h e i g h t h ^ , i n c m , o f a n i n t e r
costal stringer i n w a y o fa conventional frame shall
n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
(3.10.4.4.8)
= 0.8/
i s
(3.10.4.4.2)
Q n + 0,1/
K-eH
w h e r e f o r p , a , b, r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 3 . 1 ;
n = n u m b e r o f frames fitted between t w oadjacent
frames;
f o r * ? , Q, r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 4 . 1 ;
h = w e b height o f a bearing side stringer, i n c m ;
f o r A s , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
w h e r e f o r h , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.2.
f
deep
3.10.4.4.3 T h e a c t u a l w e b a r e a A , i n c m , o f a
side s t r i n g e r s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e
w i t h 3.10.4.3.3.
3.10.4.4.4 T h e w e b t h i c k n e s s s , i n m m , o f a s i d e
formula
a
3.10.4.4.9 T h e w e b t h i c k n e s s o f a n i n t e r c o s t a l
s t r i n g e r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f a c o n v e n t i o n a l
frame, as required i naccordance w i t h 3.10.4.3.4.
3.10.4.5 D e e p f r a m e s a s p a r t o f t r a n s v e r s e f r a m i n g .
3.10.4.5.1 T h e u l t i m a t e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W f, i n c m ,
o f a d e e p f r a m e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formula
3
= W k,
wf
wj0
where W
s = 2,63ci
s
eH
5,34 +
4(g)
+ As
(3.10.4.4.4)
k f =
w h e r e c\, = t h e s h o r t e r a n d l o n g e r s i d e , i n m , o f t h e p a n e l s i n t o
w h i c h t h e stringer w e b i sdivided b y its stiffeners;
f o r a n u n s t i f f e n e d w e b , c\ = 0 , 0 1 ( A 0 , 8 A / ) , = a \ ,
f o r h , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.4.2;
f o r h , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.2;
f o r i a n d y , r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 4 . 1 ;
f o r As, r e f e r t o l . 1 . 5 . 1 .
S
=- ^ - ^ ^ -
wJ0
(3.10.4.5.1)
wf
^/_ 8
>&
+ k G)w /,
m
2 0 ( 1 ), f p u r p o s e o f a
simplified calculation i n accordance with

k f = 0,63 s h a l l b e a d o p t e d ; G = n Q ;
f o r n , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.4.2;
f o r k , r e f e r t o T a b l e 3.10.4.5.1-1;
W
3.10.4.2.4;
T a b l e
3.10.4.5.1-1
3.10.4.4.5 T h e w e b h e i g h t h , i n c m , o f a s i d e
formula
km
1,0
1,33
2,0
2,4
3,0
3,43
h = 2hf
(3.10.4.4.5)
R =
0,572\|/ -(\|/ i) w i t h i l r ,
0,5/ 1 w i t h
^-pr\
Isl
1wf =
w h e r e f o r h , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.2.
f
3.10.4.4.6 T h e f a c e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s o f a s i d e
s t r i n g e r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n i t s a c t u a l w e b t h i c k n e s s .
3.10.4.4.7 T h e f a c e p l a t e b r e a d t h c , i n m m , o f a
side s t r i n g e r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e g r e a t e r o f t h e
following values:
s
7
si '
factor t ob e adopted a s t h egreater o f the following:
k
d
= 0,7;
k = 1 w i t h =%2.
d
with m > 2,f o r the p u r p o s e o fa simplified calculation
P a r t II. H u l l
185
f o r p , a , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
Ci, c = t h e s h o r t e r a n d t h e l o n g e r side, i n m , o f p a n e l s i n t o w h i c h
the w e b o f a deep f r a m e i sd i v i d e d b y its stiffeners;
f o r A s , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.4.2.4, k = 1,2 s h a l l b e a d o p t e d ,
w i t h m > 2;
= Q w i t h m = 1 ; 2;
d
= C
C \,
+ ^ ( 0 , 5 ^ x 1 ^ 0 , 5 ) - ^ ) w i t h m = 3; 4 ; 5; 6;
= f a c t o r s t o b e d e t e r m i n e d f r o m T a b l e 3.10.5.1-2;
T a b l e
3.10.4.5.1-2
C\
0,5
0,417
0,333
0,292
C i
0,25
0,167
0,111
0,083
3.10.4.5.5 T h e f a c e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s o f a d e e p
f r a m e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e a c t u a l t h i c k n e s s o f its
web.
3.10.4.5.6 T h e f a c e p l a t e b r e a d t h c f, i n m m , o f a
deep f r a m e shall n o t b e less t h a n t h e greater o f t h e f o l
lowing values:
w
= A , R
^ ^ t
{ ^ - A
A
awf
w f=
1 + 0,95 , f o r t h e p u r p o s e o f a s i m p l i f i e d c a l c u l a t i o n
$awf
i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.4.2.4, = 1,15 m a y b e a d o p t e d ;
f o r p , a , 6, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
f o r m , I, Q, ty, Wso, Y r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 4 . 1 ;
/,/ = s p a n l e n g t h , i n m , o f a d e e p f r a m e , e q u a l t o t h e d i s t a n c e
between s u p p o r t i n g sections;
W
wf~
) ;
(3.10.4.5.6-2)
A\ tyyf
3
where for
f o r W^f,
t f =
f o r Sawf,
for h ,
A\ =
(3.10.4.5.6-1)
awf
W , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.5.1;
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.5.4;
face plate thickness, i n m m , o f a deep frame;
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.5.1;
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.5.2;
0,0039; A = 1,4; A = 5, i f t h e d e e p f r a m e w e b i s p r o v i d e d
w i t h stiffeners fitted a p p r o x i m a t e l y n o r m a l t o t h e shell
plating;
= 0,0182; A = 2,6; = 10, i f t h e d e e p f r a m e w e b i s
p r o v i d e d w i t h stiffeners fitted approximately n o r m a l
to t h eshell plating o r i fit i s unstiffened.
wf
w f
Kf=
0,82(1-aj/O^0,6 with
k%f=
0,1 '/ -l)>0,3l 'la
ai
l >2
a i
with l < 2 a ;
f o r F , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.4;
f o r r e f e r t o 3.10.4.4.1;
f o r Ayf, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.5.2;
f o r A r e f e r t o 3.10.4.5.3;
Sawf a c t u a l t h i c k n e s s , i n m m , o f a d e e p f r a m e w e b ;
f o r A s , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
3.10.4.5.2 T h e w e b a r e a A f , i n c m , o f a d e e p
f r a m e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r
mula
w
ZJpabCf
( 1
(3.10.4.5.2)
D e e p f r a m e w i t h o u t face p l a t e (flat b a r ) i s
not permitted.
3.10.4.6 S i d e a n d b o t t o m l o n g i t u d i n a l s a s p a r t
of longitudinal framing.
3.10.4.6.1 T h e u l t i m a t e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W i n c m ,
o f a l o n g i t u d i n a l s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y
the f o r m u l a
3
W, = Wok,
(3.10.4.6.1)
KeH
w h e r e f o r p , a , b , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
form,
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.4.1;
125
w h e r e / =
pbil(l-Q,5d)c
f o r kP , G, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.5.1;
wf
hyj = d e e p f r a m e w e b d e p t h , i n c m ;
f o r A s , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
ki =
. ,
i , _ u 2 > k i = 0,63; f o r t h e p u r p o s e o f s i m p l i f i e d
1 -r
3.10.4.5.3 T h e a c t u a l w e b a r e a A , i n c m , o f a
deep frame shall be determined i n accordance
w i t h 3.10.4.3.3.
3.10.4.5.4 T h e w e b t h i c k n e s s s f, i n m m , s h a l l b e
a d o p t e d n o t less t h a n t h e g r e a t e r o f t h e f o l l o w i n g
values:
K Ji
s
calculation i n accordance
t o 3.10.4.3.1;
w i t h 3.10.4.2.4, f o r k ,
s
refer
= 1 for b o t t o m longitudinals a n d for side longitudinals

w h e r e n op a n t i n g f r a m e s are fitted;
b\
(3.10.4.5.4-1)
^
1 + 0,25
b =
62=
2
e =
s = 2,63ci
p
yj
JwfReH
5,34 +
w h e r e k, =
4(g)
+ As
(3.10.4.5.4-2)
2,
' 6'
As
; = 1 + k
; ; = 1,15; m a y b e a d o p t e d f o r t h e p u r p o s e o f
Sal
1,25^^-0,75
Wwf
f o r V a n d ywfi r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 5 . 1 ;
Wawf a c t u a l u l t i m a t e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s , i n c m , o f a d e e p frame, t o
b e d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.4.2.6 ( i n t h e first
approximation o r for the purpose o f the simplified calcula
t i o n i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.4.2.4, W
- = W f shall b e
adopted);
6 ( 1 - 0 , 2 5 6 ) w i t h b < 2;
awith6>2;
6 + 1;
6 .
, b u t n o t l e s s t h a n k = 1,0;
- for side longitudinals where panting frames

are fitted;
the simplified calculation
in accordance
f o r p , 6, r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 3 . 1 ;
a
= s p a c i n g , i nm , o f l o n g i t u d i n a l s ;
/ = s p a c i n g , i nm , o fd e e p f r a m e s o r f l o o r s ;
Al
f o r p r e f e r t o 3.10.4.6.2;
f o r A , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.6.3;
a
w i t h 3.10.4.2.4;
186
Rules
for
Sas
for
4
Sat a c t u a l w e b t h i c k n e s s , i n m m , o f a l o n g i t u d i n a l ;
f o r A s , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1;
f o r p r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1.
a,
=
h
3.10.4.6.2 T h e w e b a r e a A i n c m , o f a l o n g i t u d i n a l
a n d Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.6.2;
actual shell plating thickness, i nm m ;
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.6.1;
m a x i m u m spacing, in m , o fadjacent transverse members
crossing the span o fa longitudinal.
8,7
-pb\lck\
e H
(3.10.4.6.2)
+ /
w h e r e f o r p , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
f o r I, c, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.6.1;
k\ = f a c t o r t o b e a d o p t e d a s t h e g r e a t e r o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :
1
o r k = 0,i
1 + 0,76^
*i =
f o r do, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.1;
h = w e b height, i nc m , o fa longitudinal;
f o r A s , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
at
3.10.4.6.3 T h e a c t u a l w e b a r e a A , i n c m , o f a l o n g
itudinal shall b e determined i n accordance w i t h 3.10.4.3.3.
3.10.4.6.4 T h e w e b a r e a s i n m m , o f a l o n g
i t u d i n a l s h a l l b e a d o p t e d n o t less t h a n t h e g r e a t e r o n e
o f the following values:
a
57 =
eH
- pb\
A s f a r as longitudinals m a d e o f standard profiles

are concerned, c o n f o r m a n c e w i t h t h e requirements
f o r t h e face p l a t e b r e a d t h m a y n o t b e verified i n case
o f carrying o u t a simplified calculation i n accordance
w i t h 3.10.4.2.4.
3.10.4.6.6 W h e r e t h e f a c e p l a t e i s l a c k i n g , t h e h e i g h t
o f a l o n g i t u d i n a l s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e v a l u e
determined b y F o r m u l a (3.10.4.3.6) where s f shall be
a s s u m e d equal t o s refer t o 3.10.4.6.5. A distance
between deep frames o r a deep frame a n d a sup
p o r t i n g s t r u c t u r e f o r l o n g i t u d i n a l s w i t h o u t face plates
s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 1,3 m .
3.10.4.7 D e e p f r a m e s a s p a r t o f l o n g i t u d i n a l
framing.
3.10.4.7.1
T h e ultimate
section
modulus
W , i n c m , o f a d e e p f r a m e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e
3
(3.10.4.6.4-1)
+ As;
S , = 0,0 /
1
w h e r e k . = 1,4
Wi
Wal
W ok
(3.10.4.7.1)
(3.10.4.6.4-2)
+ As
where W
= ^ pabk% /(1 +
kgXQ-â
b u t n o t l e s s t h a n k = 1,0;
s
f o r W,, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.6.1;
Wi a c t u a l u l t i m a t e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s , i n c m , o f a l o n g
i t u d i n a l , t o b e d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.4.2.6
(in t h e first a p p r o x i m a t i o n o r f o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h e
s i m p l i f i e d c a l c u l a t i o n i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.4.2.4,
W i = W, s h a l l b e a d o p t e d ) ;
f o r p , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
f o r 6 r e f e r t o 3.10.4.6.1;
f o r h r e f e r t o 3.10.4.6.2;
f o r A s , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
"*
1+V1-0,8
'
Q= 2 - N ;
N =
V2xWB-(x|, )^withxW<^;
N = j ^
withxW>^;
VWw) +
j^Jifiai
-0,98);
(3.10.4.6.5-2)
/ = 2 , 5 ? / ;
c, =
69,6
(3.10.4.6.5-1)
J a / 4
/|-'(p -0,0029)
(3.10.4.6.5-3)
'
F o r the purpose o f a simplified calculation in accordance

w i t h 3.10.4.2.4, k = 0,63, N = 1,16, R = 0,33B s h a l l b e
adopted;
3.10.4.6.5 T h e f a c e p l a t e b r e a d t h c i n m m , o f a
l o n g i t u d i n a l o f b u l b o r T - b a r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
the greater o f the following values:
, = 0,05
forp, b, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
f o r a , I, b\, e, yi, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.6.1;
f o r k%, w r e f e r t o 3.10.4.5.1;
kg = f a c t o r t o b e a d o p t e d a s t h e l e s s e r o f t h e f o l l o w i n g :
m
*, = 0 , 5 ( f - l ) ;
fc = 0 , 5 ( f c - 0 , 2 5 ( e + 1));
= n u m b e r o flongitudinals i n a deep frame span;
g
where
= ^
Wal.
Wi
, b u t n o t l e s s t h a n = 0,055;
<x ( ^ r ) +
^
âsr
u*al
f o r W,, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.6.1;
f o r Wa,, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.6.4;
Sai a c t u a l w e b t h i c k n e s s ,
= face plate thickness, i
t u d i n a l s o f b u l b , ti =
n o t l e s s t h a n a = 1;
f o r Wai, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.6.4;
f o r W , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.6.1;
K
_ .
i nm m , o fa longitudinal;
nm m , o fa longitudinal (for longi
\,5s i s h a l l b e a d o p t e d ) ;
a
A>
a
f o r r e f e r t o 3.10.4.7.2;
f o r A , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.7.3.
n
P a r t II. H u l l
187
3.10.4.7.2 T h e w e b a r e a A f , i n c m , o f a d e e p
f r a m e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r
mula
w
a n d c e n t r e g i r d e r s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n s \, i n m m , t o b e
ps
ps\
= ^ - p b K l Q +
w h e r e s o = / i f t h e p l a t e s t r u c t u r e i s s t i f f e n e d a p p r o x i m a t e l y
n o r m a l t o t h eshell plating;
V o Sp&2, i f t h e p l a t e s t r u c t u r e i s u n s t i f f e n e d a p p r o x i m a t e l y
n o r m a l t o the shell plating (permitted for I c e l , Ice2, Ice3
category ships);
ps
p , b,
refer
refer
deep
refer
(3.10.4.9.2)
+ Ay
(3.10.4.7.2)
0,lh As
K H
where for
f o r /,
f o r Q,
hyj =
for As,
~ ps0
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
t o 3.10.4.6.1;
t o 3.10.4.7.1;
frame web height, i n cm;
t o 1.1.5.1.
Vo: = H0,8^-0,0045fe[l
3.10.4.7.3 T h e a c t u a l w e b a r e a A , i n c m , o f a d e e p
frame shall b e determined i n accordance w i t h 3.10.4.3.3.
3.10.4.7.4 T h e w e b t h i c k n e s s o f a d e e p f r a m e s h a l l
n o t b e less t h a n t h e g r e a t e r o f t h e v a l u e s d e t e r m i n e d
by F o r m u l a e (3.10.4.5.4-1), (3.10.4.5.4-2) w h i l e
W
shall b e i n accordance w i t h 3.10.4.7.1 a n d a shall b e
i n accordance w i t h 3.10.4.6.1.
T h e requirements o fthis p a r a g r a p h apply t o t h e
vertical d i a p h r a g m s o f the d o u b l e side as w e l l .
3.10.4.7.5 T h e w e b h e i g h t o f a d e e p f r a m e s h a l l
n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
4 ( - ^ - )
] ( - ^ - f
_ 0,95piZ>
S P S 0 2
~
ReH '
P\=
hp
f o r k r e f e r t o T a b l e 3.10.4.9.2;
u
= k sjkp
wf
K f = 2h,
(3.10.4.7.5)
1 / 6
k
k
= 0,17A
, b u t n o t l e s s t h a n 1,0;
= s h a l l b e i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.3.5.1 a s f a r a s i c e
breakers are concerned;
k = 1 for ice ships;
f o r A , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.2.1;
foip,
b, r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 3 . 1 ;
sp
spacing, i n m , o f stiffeners i n a plate structure o r
distance, i n m , between other f r a m i n g m e m b e r s fitted
approximately n o r m a l t o t h eshell plating;
f o r s^, r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 1 ;
f o r As, r e f e r t o 1 . 1 . 5 . 1 .
T
w h e r e f o r hi, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.6.2.
T a b l e
3.10.4.7.6 T h e f a c e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s o f a d e e p
f r a m e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n i t s a c t u a l w e b t h i c k n e s s .
3.10.4.7.7 T h e f a c e p l a t e b r e a d t h o f a d e e p f r a m e
shall b e determined i n accordance w i t h 3.10.4.5.6 w h i l e
W f shall be i n accordance w i t h 3.10.4.7.1. T h e deep
f r a m e w i t h o u t face plate (flat bar) i s n o t permitted.
3.10.4.8 A d d i t i o n a l f r a m e s a n d h o r i z o n t a l d i a
phragms as part o f longitudinal framing.
3.10.4.8.1 T h e w e b h e i g h t o f a n a d d i t i o n a l f r a m e
had.fi
c m , (refer t o 3.10.2.3) i n w a y o f a l o n g i t u d i n a l
Ice category
Icel, Ice2, Ice3, Arc4, Arc5

, I c e b r e a k e r 6
Arc7, Icebreaker7
Are8, Icebreaker8, Are9, Icebreaker9
1,3
1,2
1,1
1,0
3.10.4.9.2
3.10.4.9.3 I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 9 . 2 ,
the thickness o f plate structures i n decks a n d platforms,
w h e r e t h e s i d e i s t r a n s v e r s e l y f r a m e d , s h a l l n o t b e less
than s , i n m m , t o b e determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
ps2
S2
SPSQ
ps
a d
.f=0Mi
(3.10.4.9.3)
As
(3.10.4.8.1)
he)
10//
w h e r e hi = w e b h e i g h t , i n c m , o f a l o n g i t u d i n a l .
for p
3.10.4.8.2 T h e w e b t h i c k n e s s o f a n a d d i t i o n a l
f r a m e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t o f a l o n g i t u d i n a l ,
as r e q u i r e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 6 . 4 .
3.10.4.8.3 T h e c r o s s - s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f a h o r i z o n t a l
diaphragm forming part o f double-side structure
w h e r e t h e o u t b o a r d side is l o n g i t u d i n a l l y
framed
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e w e b a r e a o f a d e e p f r a m e
(vertical d i a p h r a g m ) i n accordance w i t h 3.10.4.7.2.
3.10.4.9 P l a t e s t r u c t u r e s .
3.10.4.9.1 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f p l a t e s t r u c t u r e s
f o r m i n g p a r t o fw e b f r a m i n g o f side grillages (deep
frames, side stringers) shall b e d e t e r m i n e d i n ac
cordance w i t h 3.10.4.4.4, 3.10.4.5.4, 4.10.4.7.4.
3.10.4.9.2 T h e p l a t e s t r u c t u r e t h i c k n e s s o f d e c k s a n d
platforms, as w e l l as o f d o u b l e b o t t o m , b o t t o m stringers
1,5
i J'
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.9.2;
< x = 1 - 02.
h,h
distance, i n m , f r o m the plate structure u n d e r considera

tion t o the nearest plate structures (decks, platforms, side
stringers, inner b o t t o m plating) o nb o t h sides;
spacing, i n m , o f plate structure stiffeners fitted
approximately n o r m a l t o shell plating a n d welded
thereto;
cross-sectional area o fstiffener, i n c m , w i t h o u t effective
fst
flange; where stiffeners a r efitted parallel t o t h e shell
plating o rsnipped, f = 0 shall b e adopted;
f o r b, a, Wf, r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 3 . 1 ;
f o r
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.4;
f o r hf,
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.2;
2 l e n g t h , i n m , o f u n s t i f f e n e d s e c t i o n o f o p e n i n g i n p l a t e
structure f o r t h e passage o f a conventional frame,
as m e a s u r e d o nt h eshell plating;
f o r As, r e f e r t o 1 . 1 . 5 . 1 .
2
s t
188
Rules
where s
for p
ps0
k,
kg =
a =
f o r b,
f o r Sspo,
for As,
l
{ l , 8 ^ -
-0,009[l +
( f ^ )
'
Ships
(3.10.4.9.4)
3.10.4.9.7 T h e i n t e r t i a m o m e n t i, i n c m , o f s t i f
feners b y w h i c h the plate structures are strengthened a n d
w h i c h are fitted approximately n o r m a l t o the shell plating
shall n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
} ;
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.9.2;
0, , b u t n o t g r e a t e r t h a n k = a;
spacing, i nm , o fside (bottom) longitudinals;
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.1;
r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
2
of Sea-Going
i = 4 where t h e shorter side o f plate structure panel adjoins

the shell plating;
c\, c =
t h eshorter a n d longer sides, i nm , o f panels into w h i c h
a plate structure i s divided b y its stiffeners;
f o r i , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.3.1;
a = spacing, i nm , o f m a i n f r a m i n g girders o fshell plating;
f o r A s , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
ps3
and Construction
thickness
floor and
is long
nmm, to
3.10.4.9.4 T r a n s v e r s e b u l k h e a d p l a t i n g
w h e r e t h e side i s longitudinally framed a n dthe
bilge bracket thickness where t h e bottom
i t u d i n a l l y f r a m e d shall n o t b e less t h a n s , i
Spa = V o + *
i = 0,0lR
l\l0s a +f )
e H
p s
(3.10.4.9.7)
where / = s p a n length, i nm , o fstiffener, n o t greater t h a n / = 6a;

s=
thickness, i n m m , o f plate structure being strengthened;
a = spacing, i nm , o f stiffeners;
f = sectional area o f stiffener, i n c m , w i t h o u t effective
flange.
ps
3.10.4.9.5 T h e p l a t e s t r u c t u r e t h i c k n e s s o f t r a n s
verse b u l k h e a d s i n a t r a n s v e r s e l y f r a m e d side, a n d o f
f l o o r s i n a t r a n s v e r s e l y f r a m e d b o t t o m s h a l l n o t b e less
3.10.4.9.8 A h o r i z o n t a l g r i l l a g e a d j o i n i n g t h e s h e l l
than s , i n m m , t o be determined b y the formula
p l a t i n g i n a n r e g i o n o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g , b u t n o t r e a c h i n g
f r o m side t o side (deck o r platform i n w a y o f large
Sp* = V o + *
(3.10.4.9.5)
o p e n i n g s , h o r i z o n t a l d i a p h r a g m o f d o u b l e side, etc.) m a y
be considered a p l a t f o r m i f t h e sectional area o f i t s
where s
= {l,8^-0,009[l + ( ^ K ^ ) ' } ;
p l a t i n g ( o n o n e s i d e ) i s n o t l e s s t h a n F, i n c m , t o b e
kg = 0, , b u t n o t g r e a t e r t h a n k = c ;
ps4
pM
sp
f o r b, r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 3 . 1 ;
f o r k , c , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.9.2;
f o r p , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.9.4;
a = spacing, i n m , o f conventional frames (for plate
structures o f bulkheads) o r floors (forplate structures
o f floors);
f o r s^, r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 1 ;
f o r A s , r e f e r t o 1.1.5.1.
2
sp
F=
pbl^ _b^
(3.10.4.9.8)
w h e r e f o r p , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.2;
f o r b, r e f e r t o 3.10.3.3;
/* = d e s i g n d i s t r i b u t i o n l e n g t h , i n m , f o r t h e l o a d t a k e n u p b y
the transverse m a i n f r a m i n g o f side, t o b e a d o p t e d e q u a l
to l, o r t o V o r 2 a w h i c h e v e r i s less, i n t h e case
o f f r a m i n g (transverse o r longitudinal) including deep
frames;
f o r / , r e f e r t o 3.10.3.4;
f o r a r e f e r t o 3.10.4.4.1;
f o r /, r e f e r t o 3.10.4.9.3.
p
3.10.4.9.6 I n a n y c a s e , t h e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s
o f decks a n dplatforms, transverse bulkheads, inner
b o t t o m , floors a n d bilge brackets, b o t t o m stringers
a n d c e n t r e g i r d e r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n s , i n m m ,
to be determined b y the formula
ps
ps
= s
where s
+ As,
ps0
ps0
(3.10.4.9.6)
= \J^
with
q^qi,
V o = 0.455"[-^ + V ( j Q ' +
q = OfipiMl'^^ )
~^W^
] with
9 l
<
< q,
2
f o rplate structures o f decks a n d
platforms, inner b o t t o m , b o t t o m stringers a n d centre

girder i n a longitudinally f r a m e d side o r b o t t o m ;
q = 0,89p f o r t h e r e s t o f p l a t e s t r u c t u r e s w h e r e t h e b o t t o m
is t r a n s v e r s e l y f r a m e d a n d f o r all plate structures w h e r e
the b o t t o m a n d side are f r a m e d transversely;
f o r k , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.9.2;
f o r p , r e f e r t o 3.10.4.9.4;
2
= 0,353J*B-;
n
4,9?
?2 =
,.
0-294,
Otherwise, such a structure shall be considered

a b e a r i n g side stringer.
A structure considered t o be a p l a t f o r m shall
c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f3.10.4.9 for t h e plate
structures o f platforms, a n d o n e considered t o be
a stringer, w i t h t h e requirements o f 3.10.4.4.
3.10.4.10 S t e m s a n d s t e r n f r a m e s .
3.10.4.10.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s p a r a g r a p h f o r
the area, section m o d u l u s a n d plate thickness o f s t e m
shall b e c o m p l i e d w i t h o n t h e s t e m span f r o m the keel t o
a level extending above the upper boundary o f the ice
strake b y a value o f H i (refer t o T a b l e 3.10.4.10.1). I n
the case o f icebreakers, this s t e m shall e x t e n d u p t o
the nearest deck o r p l a t f o r m lying higher t h a n this
level. O u t s i d e t h e b o r d e r s o f t h e area considered, t h e
stem scantlings m a y gradually reduce a n d t h e crosss e c t i o n a l a r e a o f t h e b a r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n r e
quired i n 2.10.4 while t h e plate thickness o fa c o m
b i n e d o r p l a t e s t e m s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n k ( w h e r e s
is t h e shell p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s i n w a y o f i c e s t r a k e i n
r e g i o n A I , f o r k, r e f e r t o T a b l e 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 1 0 . 1 ) .
s
C ?
= [l
'
+ (j^) ]
2
where the longer side o f plate structure
panel adjoins t h e shell plating,
P a r t II. H u l l
189
T a b l e
Parameter
Ice ships
3.10.4.10.1
Icebreakers
I c e l I c e 2 I c e 3 A r c 4 A r c 5 A r c 7 A r c 8 A r c 9 I c e b r e a - I c e b r e a I c e b r e a I c e b r e a ker?
kers
ker9
S e c t i o n H \ , i n m , f r o m t o p o f i c e b e l t t o u p p e r b o u n d a r y o f 0,5
ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g o ft h e s t e m
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,0
1,1
1,2
1,0
1,5
1,75
2,0
F a c t o r o f s t e m p l a t e t h i c k e n i n g a b o v e t h e u p p e r b o u n d a r y 1,25 1,2 1,15 1,1

of strengthening
1,1
1,05
1,43
1,75
1,96
2,17
F a c t o r k f r o m t h e F o r m u l a (3.10.4.10.1-1)
0,30 0,34 0,4 0,54 0,66 1,02 1,25 1,4 1,55
D e p t h o f centreline vertical w e b h , i n m , b y w h i c h the stem

is s t r e n g t h e n e d
0,5
T h e c r o s s - s e c t i o n a l a r e a S, i n c m , o f s t e m i r r e
s p e c t i v e o f c o n f i g u r a t i o n s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e
0,5
0,5
0,6
1,0
1,3
1,5
Longitudinal b u l k h e a d i n fore
centreline
w h e r e = f a c t o r t o b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.10.4.10.2;
s = sectional area o fpropeller post o rrudder post, i nc m , a s
required for a ship without a n ice category i n accordance
w i t h 2.10.4.
2
T a b l e
(3.10.4.10.1-1)
where
= factor whose values shall b e obtained

T a b l e 3.10.4.10.1;
/ 0 , 0 3 1 + 137 w i t h A < 5 0 0 0 t\
) - \ / w i t h A > 5 0 0 0 t;
A = displacement, i n t.
k
from
peak
Strengthening
factor
3.10.4.10.2
Ice category
Icel Ice2 Ice3 Arc4 A r t f
P r o p e l l e r p o s t 1,1
1,1 1,15 1,25 1,5
Arc8,
,
Arc7,
Arc9,
Icebrea- Icebrea Icebrea Icebrea
kerf
ker?
ker
kers
1,75
2,5
2,5
3,5
T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W, i n c m , o f t h e s t e m c r o s s sectional area about a n axis perpendicular t o t h e centre

l i n e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
W =
where
(3.10.4.10.1-2)
\,\6pb
f o r p , b, r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 3 . 1 a s f a r a s r e g i o n
strengthening A I is concerned.
o fice
T o be included i nt h e design cross-sectional area

o f a c o m b i n e d o r plate stem areareas o fshell plates
and centreUne girder o r o f longitudinal bulkhead
o n t h e centreUne o n a breadth n o t exceeding t e n
times t h e thickness o f relevant plates.
T h e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s s, i n m m , o f c o m b i n e d a n d p l a t e
stems, as w e U as o f the structure s h o w n i n F i g . 3.10.2.6,
s h a U n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
, _ J R ? H
= 1,2(' o a
7 ^
sp
(3.10.4.10.1-3)
S B
w h e r e f o r s , As
r e f e r t o 3.10.4.1 a s f a r a s t h e r e g i o n
strengthening A I is concerned;
4 = s p a c i n g , i n m , o f t r a n s v e r s e b r a c k e t s o f s t e m ;
= m a i n f r a m i n g s p a c i n g , i n m , i n w a y o f s h e l l p l a t i n g
r e g i o n o fice strengthening A I , w h i c h w a s a d o p t e d
determining i ;
tensile strength, i n M P a , o fshell plating material,
RTH
was adopted when determining s ;
tensile strength, i nM P a , o fs t e m plate material.
ReH
sp
R u d d e r p o s t 1,15 1,15 1,25 1,5 1,8

and
solepiece
sPo
o f ice
F o r t h e sternframes o f single-screw ships o f cate

gories I c e l , Ice2, Ice3 h a v i n g n o rudder post o r fitted u p
w i t h a r u d d e r axle f o r S i m p l e x rudders, the greatest v a l u e
o u t o f those stipulated b y 2.10.4.2.5 (account being t a k e n
o f 2.2.2.2, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t , A r r a n g e m e n t s a n d
O u t f i t " ) shaU b e a d o p t e d f o r t h e scantUngs o f t h e solepiece cross section, o r t h e y shaU b e d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r
m u l a (3.10.4.10.2), w h i c h e v e r i s greater.
W h e r e t h esternframe has a h o r n for a semi-spade
rudder, t h e scantlings o f t h e rudder h o r n shall be
determined according t o 2.10.4.4 w i t h d u e regard f o r
the requirements o f 2.2.2.2, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t ,
Arrangements and Outfit".
T h e sternframe sectional area o f twin-screw ice
s h i p s o r i c e b r e a k e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e r u d d e r
post area stipulated i n 3.10.4.10.2.
i n the
when
j p 0
which
3.11 I C E S T R E N G T H E N I N G O F T U G S
sp0
3 . 1 0 . 4 . 1 0 . 2 S t e r n f r a m e . T h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a S, i n c m ,
o f propeUer post a n d rudder post shaU b e as given b y t h e
formula
S = kS
(3.10.4.10.2)
3.11.1 G e n e r a l r e q u i r e m e n t s .
3.11.1.1 T u g s p r o v i d e d w i t h i c e s t r e n g t h e n i n g i n
compUance w i t h t h e requirements stated b e l o w a r e
provided w i t h o n e o f t h e following ice-category
m a r k s i n t h e i r class n o t a t i o n : Ice2, Ice3, A r c 4 , A r c 5 .
190
Rules
3.11.1.2 T h e h u l l f o r m o f i c e - s t r e n g t h e n e d t u g s
shall be i n accordance w i t h t h e requirements
o f 3.10.1.2 f o r t h e h u l l f o r m o f ice ships o f t h e r e
spective category.
3.11.1.3 R e g i o n s o f i c e s t r e n g t h e n i n g .
3.11.1.3.1 F o r t u g s , t h e b o u n d a r i e s o f r e g i o n s
o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g s h a l l be established i n ac
c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.10.1.3 as i n t h e case o f ice ships,
unless specifically p r o v i d e d otherwise below.
3.11.1.3.2 I n t u g s w i t h a s m a l l l e n g t h o f l o a d l i n e
f o r e r u n (b + L < 0 , 3 5 L , r e f e r t o 3 . 1 0 . 1 . 3 ) , t h e i n
t e r m e d i a t e r e g i o n o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g ( o r t h e f o r w a r d
region w h e r e n o intermediate region is established)
shall be extended aft so that t h e f o r w a r d b o u n d a r y
o f t h e m i d s h i p r e g i o n w o u l d be a t least 0 , 3 5 L a w a y
f r o m the f o r w a r d perpendicular.
3.11.1.3.3 T h e p a r a m e t e r s h i ; A ; L ( r e f e r t o
F i g . 3.10.1.3.2) shall b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.11.1.3.3.
3.11.1.3.4 I n t u g s o f I c e 2 a n d I c e 3 c a t e g o r i e s ,
a n i n t e r m e d i a t e r e g i o n o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g m a y also
be established, a n dits b o u n d a r i e s shall be d e t e r m i n e d
o n t h e basis o f t h e same regulations as f o r tugs
o f higher categories.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
.1 i n r e g i o n A I
=
(3.11.3.1.1)
kpp%i
w h e r e p%j = i c e p r e s s u r e i n r e g i o n A I , a s d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e
w i t h 3.10.3.2.1 a s i n t h e c a s e o f a t r a n s p o r t s h i p w h o s e i c e
category n u m b e r coincides with the icecategory n u m b e r
o f the tug;
/ 1
with jVsîVo;
" ~ X /iVo) w i t h N z > N ;
N-E. = t o t a l s h a f t p o w e r o f t u g , i n k W ;
N = C A ' ;
C=
f a c t o r t o b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.11.3.1.1;
A = d i s p l a c e m e n t t o s u m m e r l o a d waterline, i n t;
k
0 , 4
T a b l e
Factor
3.11.3.1.1
Ice category o f tug
Ice2
Ice3
Arc4
Arc5
14
16
18
20
T a b l e
3.11.1.3.3
.2 i n r e g i o n s , B I a n d C I
Pki
(3.11.3.1.2)
kPAI
w h e r e f o r p A I , r e f e r t o 3.11.3.1.1;
a = f a c t o r t o b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 3.11.3.1.2 p r o c e e d i n g
f r o m the r e g i o n o fice strengthening a n d the icec a t e g o r y
of tug;
= , ;
k
Parameter, i n m
Ice category
T a b l e
hi
Ice2, Ice3
Are4, Arc5
0,3
0,6
0,101,
0,5
0,8
0,151,
Values o f factor a
Ice category o f t u g
Region
Ajl
BI
CI
3.11.1.3.5 T h e r e g i o n s o f i c e s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f t u g s
to w h i c h the requirements o f this Chapter apply shall
be d e t e r m i n e d proceeding f r o m T a b l e 3.10.1.3.4 as i n
t h e case o f a t r a n s p o r t ship o f t h e respective ice ca
tegory, w i t h d u e regard f o r 3.11.1.3.4.
3.11.2 S t r u c t u r e .
3.11.2.1 T h e i c e - s t r e n g t h e n i n g s t r u c t u r e o f t u g s
shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 3.10.2 f o r t h e
c o n s t r u c t i o n o f ice ships o f respective categories.
3.11.2.2 T h e h u l l a t t a c h m e n t s o f i c e - p r o t e c t i o n
components o f t h e screw-rudder system shall ensure
their reliable connection t o m a i n a n d w e b f r a m i n g
a n d , as f a r as practicable, t o t h e s t e r n f r a m e a n d t o
l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d transverse b u l k h e a d s so as t o r u l e
o u t t h e p o s s i b i l i t y o f c r a c k f o r m a t i o n as a r e s u l t o f ice
impacts o n the stern.
3.11.3 I c e l o a d .
3.11.3.1 T h e i c e p r e s s u r e s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y
3.11.3.1.2
Ice2
Ice3
Arc4
Arc5
0,55
0,4
0,65
0,6
0,5
0,7
0,65
0,55
0,75
0,65
0,6
0,75
.3 i n r e g i o n s I I , I I I a n d I V , a n i c e p r e s s u r e s h a l l
be t a k e n as r e q u i r e d b y 3.10.3.2.5 as i n t h e case
o f t r a n s p o r t ships w i t h respective ice categories.
3.11.3.2 F o r t u g s t h e v e r t i c a l e x t e n s i o n o f i c e l o a d
shall be adopted equal i n a l l regions a n d shall be
determined i n accordance w i t h 3.10.3.3.1 as i n t h e
case o f t h e f o r w a r d r e g i o n o f a t r a n s p o r t ship w h o s e
ice c a t e g o r y n u m b e r coincides w i t h t h a t o f t h e t u g .
W h e n determining u , t h e values o f shall be f o u n d
for those sections o n l y w h i c h a r e included i n t h e
f o r w a r d r e g i o n o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f t h e t u g .
3.11.3.3 F o r t u g s t h e h o r i z o n t a l e x t e n s i o n o f i c e l o a d
shall be adopted equal i n a l l regions a n d shall be
d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3 . 1 0 . 3 . 4 . 1 as i n t h e case
o f t h e f o r w a r d region o f a transport ship w h o s e ice
category n u m b e r coincides w i t h that o f t h e tug. W h e n
determining p , o n l y those sections shall be c o n
sidered w h i c h a r e included i n t h e f o r w a r d region
o f ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f t h e t u g .
m
P a r t II. H u l l
191
3.11.4 S c a n t l i n g s o f i c e - s t r e n g t h e n i n g s t r u c t u r e s .
3.11.4.1 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f i c e - s t r e n g t h e n i n g s t r u c
tures i n tugs shall b e determined i n accordance
w i t h 3 . 1 0 . 4 as i n t h e case o f t r a n s p o r t ships o f t h e cor
responding category, unless expressly p r o v i d e d other
wise below.
3.11.4.2 W h e n e s t a b l i s h i n g t h e s h e l l p l a t i n g t h i c k
ness i n regions o f ice strengthening i n accordance
w i t h 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 1 , t h e w e a r a l l o w a n c e AS
a y be
reduced o n agreement w i t h t h e Register, i f special
measures are t a k e n t o protect t h e shell plating f r o m
c o r r o s i o n w e a r a n d a b r a s i o n , b u t i n a n y case,
k.S
s h a l l b e a d o p t e d n o t less t h a n 2 m m .
3.11.4.3 I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3 . 1 0 . 4 . 1 0 ,
the s t e m a n d sternframe shall h a v e a sectional area
not less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
m
sp0
sp0
S = kS
(3.11.4.3)
w h e r e & = f a c t o r w h o s e v a l u e s s h a l l b e f o u n d i n T a b l e 3.11.4.3;
S o = area o fthe t u g s t e m o rsternframe without ice strengthening,
t o b e d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.9.4.5 o r 3.9.4.6.
B a l l a s t w a t e r is sea w a t e r p u m p e d i n t o
ballast compartments i n order t o change dock's
draught a n d trim.
B a l l a s t c o m p a r t m e n t is a c o m p a r t m e n t
in a p o n t o o n o r wing wall o f the dock, bounded
by w a t e r t i g h t structures a n d intended f o r p u m p i n g
ballast water.
D o c k w i n g w a l l is a part o f floating d o c k
hull structurally connected t o a p o n t o o n o r pontoons
and intended t o provide stability w h e n the dock
is l o w e r e d a n d l i f t e d ; a w i n g w a l l i s d i v i d e d b y d e c k s ,
p l a t f o r m s , b u l k h e a d s i n t o spaces a n d c o m p a r t m e n t s
for arranging d o c k e q u i p m e n t a n d ballast.
A i r c u s h i o n is a n area o f a higher a i r pres
sure between t h e t o p o f c o m p a r t m e n t a n d a level
o f ballast water therein.
D e p t h o f t h e d o c k D is a vertical distance
m e a s u r e d a t t h e m i d s h i p section f r o m t h e base U n e
to t h e m o u l d e d surface o f t h e t o p deck a t t h e outer
w a l l side.
P o n t o o n d e p t h D i s a distance measured a t
the centreUne f r o m t h e base U n e t o t h e m o u l d e d
surface o f t h e p o n t o o n deck.
L i f t i n g c a p a c i t y o f t h e d o c k A ,i n t, is
mass o f t h e heaviest ship o r ships t h a t t h e d o c k shall
Uft i n n o r m a l service.
Length
o f dock
at the
p o n t o o n
deck L
is t h e distance measured along t h e p o n
t o o n deck parallel t o t h e base Unebetween m o u l d e d
surfaces o f t h e p o n t o o n e n d bulkheads.
L e n g t h o f k e e l b l o c k s t r a c k Z, is a
distance measured at t h e centreline parallel t o t h e base
line between outer ends o f keel blocks.
S h i p w e i g h t f o r d o c k i n g A ^ , i n t, is
weight o f t h e light ship t o b e docked w i t h necessary
stores a n d ballast t o p r o v i d e t h e ship's draught a n d t r i m
as r e q u i r e d f o r d o c k i n g .
D e s i g n w a t e r l i n e is a waterline o f a float
ing d o c k c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o its d r a u g h t w i t h full stores,
a ship o f a design weight a n d a required q u a n t i t y
o f ballast.
C r i n o l i n e s are cantilever structures o f the
dock, fitted at the e n d bulkheads o f t h e dock p o n
t o o n a t t h e p o n t o o n deck level, a i m i n g t o increase
an area available f o rd o c k i n g operations a t t h e ship's
ends projecting b e y o n d t h e p o n t o o n deck.
L i g h t d r a u g h t rf/isa v e r t i c a l d i s t a n c e m e a
sured a t t h e m i d s h i p section f r o m t h e base line t o t h e
waterline corresponding t o the dock displacement
w i t h n o stores, d o c k e d ship a n d ballast.
R e s t w a t e r b a l l a s t is ballast water w h i c h
p u m p s c a n n o t discharge.
S a f e t y d e c k is a watertight deck i nw i n g walls
o f t h e dock, forming a b o u n d a r y o f t h e ballast
compartments f r o m above.
p
T a b l e
Structural
item
Stem
Sternframe
3.11.4.3
Icel
Ice3
Arc4
Arc5
1,2
1,1
1,3
1,2
1,4
1,3
1,5
1,4
3.12 F L O A T I N G
DOCKS
3.12.1 G e n e r a l .
3.12.1.1 A p p l i c a t i o n .
The requirements o f this Chapter apply t o hull
s t r u c t u r e s o f w i n g - w a l l e d ( c a i s s o n , p o n t o o n , sec
tional) docks.
Caisson dock is a structure fitted w i t h a solid
p o n t o o n a n d t w o wings continuous along the entire
length a n d structurally inseparable (including caisson
docks w i t h e n d p o n t o o n s f o r docking a centre p o n
toon).
P o n t o o n dock is a structure fitted w i t h t w o wings
continuous a l o n g t h e entire length a n d several p o n
toons connected t o t h ewings b y bolts, rivets, welding.
Sectional dock is a structure consisting o f several
sections, each section being a caisson o r a p o n t o o n
dock, connected b y bolts, welded plates, hinges.
The requirements apply t o the docks having a ratio
o f the length over the p o n t o o n deck t o the breadth m o r e
than 3,5.
Other structural configurations o f docks a n d
their proportions require individual consideration.
3.12.1.2 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h i s C h a p t e r , t h e f o l
l o w i n g definitions have been adopted.
f c
192
Rules
M a x i m u m
s u b m e r s i o n
depth
d
is a v e r t i c a l distance m e a s u r e d a t t h e m i d s h i p s e c t i o n
f r o m t h e base Une t o t h e w a t e r U n e t o w h i c h t h e d o c k
m a y theoretically be lowered.
P o n t o o n is a part o f t h e dock hull intended
to m a i n t a i n buoyancy o f t h e d o c k w h i c h is defined
by v o l u m e s o fits compartments.
C o m p e n s a t i n g b a l l a s t w a t e r is ballast
water p u m p e d into ballast tanks i n order t o reduce
transverse and/or longitudinal bending m o m e n t s a n d
deflections o f p o n t o o n and/or w i n g w a l l structures.
D e s i g n d r a u g h t d is a vertical distance
measured f r o m t h e base Une t o t h e design waterline.
P o n t o o n d e c k is a deck o n w h i c h keel blocks
o r bilge blocks are fitted.
D r y c o m p a r t m e n t is a c o m p a r t m e n t b e l o w
the safety deck ( o r b e l o w t h e m a r g i n Une w h e r e safety
deck is o m i t t e d ) n o t intended f o r p u m p i n g baUast water.
T o p d e c k is a uppermost deck o f dock w i n g
walls.
W a l l b r e a d t h a t t o p d e c k b is a dis
tance measured n o r m a l t o t h e centreUne between t h e
m o u l d e d surfaces o f t h e i n n e r a n d o u t e r w a l l sides a t
the level o f t h e m o u l d e d surface o f t h e t o p deck.
W a l l b r e a d t h a t p o n t o o n d e c k b is
a
distance measured n o r m a l t o t h e centreUne between
t h e m o u l d e d surfaces o f t h e i n n e r a n d o u t e r w a l l sides
at t h e level o f t h e m o u l d e d surface o f t h e p o n t o o n
deck.
B r e a d t h o f t h e d o c k 1? i s a d i s t a n c e m e a
sured n o r m a l t o t h e centre Une between t h e m o u l d e d
surfaces o f t h e o u t e r w a l l sides.
P o n t o o n deck breadth B
is a distance
m e a s u r e d n o r m a l t o t h e centre line b e t w e e n t h e Unes
o f intersection o f m o u l d e d surfaces o f t h e i n n e r w a l l
sides a n d t h e p o n t o o n deck.
3.12.1.3 M a t e r i a l s .
3.12.1.3.1 W h e n s e l e c t i n g s t e e l f o r h u l l s t r u c t u r e s
o f f l o a t i n g d o c k s , p r o v i s i o n s o f 1.2 s h a l l b e a p p U e d ,
ms
ud
pd
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
having regard t o subdivision o f structural members

into groups according t o Table 3.12.1.3.1.
3.12.1.3.2 P l a t e a n d b e a m i t e m s o f c r i n o l i n e s ,
w a l k w a y s a n d other secondary structures o f a float
i n g d o c k m a y be fabricated f r o m steel h a v i n g l o w e r
strength characteristics t h a n specified i n 1.2.2.1,
provided their w e l d i n g is guaranteed a t t h e shipyard.
3.12.1.4 E s t i m a t i o n o f w e a r . M i n i m u m t h i c k n e s s e s .
3.12.1.4.1 T h e e f f e c t o f w e a r o n t h e s c a n t U n g s
o f structures is estimated o n t h e basis o f specification
o f s t r e n g t h t o t h e e n d o f t h e d o c k service Ufe. C o r
rosion allowances shall p e r m i t operation o fthe dock
d u r i n g t h e full specified service Ufe w i t h average
c o r r o s i o n rates o f structural items.
3.12.1.4.2 S c a n t l i n g s a n d s t r e n g t h c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f
structures w i t h d u e regard f o r w e a r and c o r r o s i o n shall b e
d e t e r m i n e d i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h 1.1.5, w i t h a c o r r o s i o n
a l l o w a n c e As, i n m m , b e i n g d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r
mula
(3.12.1.4.2)
As = k u T
where = factor taking into account zone conditions o f floating

d o c k s e r v i c e a n d e q u a l t o : 1,0 f o r B a l t i c b a s i n ; 1,1 f o r
Northern, Black-and-Azov and Caspian-and-Volga b a
s i n s ; 1,2 f o r P a c i f i c b a s i n ;
= average annual reduction i n thickness o fstructural m e m b e r s
a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3.12.1.4.2, i n m m / y e a r ;
T = d e s i g n service life o f d o c k ; w h e r e service life i s n o t
s p e c i f i e d , i t s h a l l b e t a k e n a s T = 50 y e a r s .
3.12.1.4.3 A v e r a g e a n n u a l t h i c k n e s s r e d u c t i o n o f
d o c k structures plates a n d beams, given i n T a
ble 3.12.1.4.2, shall be used w h e n d o c k structures
have appropriate protective paint coatings.
Specified c o r r o s i o n rates m a y b e r e d u c e d i f spe
cial protective arrangements are made o n agreement
3.12.1.4.4 T h i c k n e s s o f p r i m a r y m e m b e r s ( i n
c l u d i n g c o r r o s i o n a l l o w a n c e ) s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
given i n T a b l e 3.12.1.4.4 a n d determined depending
o n t h e assumed spacing a.
T a b l e
3.12.1.3.1
Group o f members
Dock members
T h i c k e n e d t o pdeck plates i n w a y o f openings; b o t t o m plating o f p o n t o o n deck w i n g walls

a n d plate strengthenings o f p o n t o o n structures i n p o n t o o n docks a t sections between
pontoons a n d i nadjacent regions, plate m e m b e r s o fsectional dock structures i n w a y o f dock
section connections
within midship
region
outside midship
r e g i o n ( r e f e r t o 1.1.3)
III
II
II
II
II
P o n t o o n deck plating a n d b o t t o m plating o f p o n t o o n (pontoons); transverse a n d longitudinal

framing m e m b e r s o f p o n t o o n deck a n d bottom; plate structures o f primary transverse m e m b e r s
(non-tight a n d tight bulkheads) o f p o n t o o n (pontoons);b o t t o m strakes o f wing walls a n d adjacent
strakes o f shell plating, longitudinal b u l k h e a d plating o f p o n t o o n d o c k s
Plating strakes, framing m e m b e r s o f t o p deck, safety deck, w i n g walls a n d p o n t o o n shell
plating; plates a n d framing m e m b e r s o f wing wall interior structures (other than dock
s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s r e f e r r e d t o i n 1 a n d 2)
P a r t II. H u l l
193
T a b l e
Nos.
3.12.1.4.2
Structure
T o p deck plating a n d w i n g w a l l plating a b o v e m a r g i n line
0,04
Safety deck plating
0.08
W i n g wall bottom o f pontoon docks
0,08
Inner a n d outer wing wall plating f r o m p o n t o o n deck t o t h em a r g i n line
0,08*
5
5.1
5.2
P o n t o o n deck plating:
in themiddle portion
at ends over a length
0,10
0,12
6
6.1
6.2
Side plating a n d outer transverse wall plating o f pontoon

t o p (=$1,0 m ) a n d b o t t o m (=$0,5 m ) s t r a k e s
other strakes
7
8
8.1
8.2
0,lLp.d
Bottom plating o f pontoon
(pontoons):
0,09*
0,08*
(pontoons)
0,08
1 , 2
Interior bulkheads o f ballast compartments:

b o t t o m s t r a k e (=$0,5 m )
other strakes
0,09
0,08*
F r a m i n g members, dock truss items i n ballast compartments
00
10
Plates a n d framing m e m b e r s o f internal wing structures above safety deck, t o p deck a n dwing wall
framing
0,04
' i n w a y o f c o m p a r t m e n t s h e a t e d i n w i n t e r b y l i v e s t e a m , s h a l l b e i n c r e a s e d b y 10 p e r c e n t .
F o r b o t t o m p l a t i n g i n w a y o f b a l l a s t s y s t e m s u c t i o n s a n d d i s c h a r g e s s h a l l b e i n c r e a s e d b y 15 p e r c e n t .
T a b l e
Structure
Smin, i n m m
Note
Plating o f outer structures other t h a n p o n t o o n deck; structural

items i n ballast compartments a n d tanks, including framing
members
7,5
7,5 + 1 0 ( a - 0 , 6 )
8,0 + 6 , 5 ( a - 0 , 6 )
a < 0,6 m
a^0,75m
a > 0,75 m
Pontoon deck plating
9,0
9,0 + 1 3 ( a - 0 , 6 )
10,0 + 6 ( a - 0 , 6 )
a < 0,6 m
a^0,75m
a > 0,75 m
T o p deck plating; plates a n d b e a m s o f structures above safety deck
3.12.1.5 Guidelines o n design o f floating d o c k

structures.
W h e n designing floating dock structures, t h e fol
l o w i n g sequence is recommended:
.1 execution o f structural layout o f p o n t o o n
( p o n t o o n s ) a n d w i n g walls (refer t o 3.12.2);
.2 d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f d e s i g n l o a d s r e s u l t i n g i n l o c a l
and longitudinal deflection o f d o c k h u l l structures
(refer t o 3.12.3);
.3 d e s i g n o f p l a t e i t e m s a n d f r a m i n g m e m b e r s
o f d o c k structures o n t h e basis o f local strength a n d
buckling, having regard t o m i n i m u m thickness re
strictions;
6,5 + 8 ( a - 0 , 6 )
6,5
3.12.1.4.4
a>0,6 m
< 0,6 m
.4 d e s i g n o f s t r u c t u r e s w h i c h p r o v i d e b o t h t r a n s
verse a n d longitudinal strength o f d o c k p o n t o o n .
Values o f structural parameters obtained i n i m
p l e m e n t a t i o n o f 3.12.1.5.3 a r e used here as i n i t i a l data;
.5 d e s i g n o f d o c k h u l l s t r u c t u r e s w h i c h p r o v i d e
dock longitudinal strength under design operating
conditions (docking operations). Values o f structural
p a r a m e t e r s o b t a i n e d i n i m p l e m e n t a t i o n o f 3.12.1.5.3
and 3.12.1.5.4 a r e used here as initial data;
.6 design o f structures, h a v i n g r e g a r d t o t h e r e
quirements f o r strengthening (e.g. w i n g w a l l decks
a n d sides i n w a y o f o p e n i n g s , engine r o o m , etc.);
194
Rules
.7 c h e c k c a l c u l a t i o n s o f b o t h l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d
transverse, as w e l l as l o c a l s t r e n g t h o f h u l l structures
under conditions o f real ship docking;
.8 c h e c k c a l c u l a t i o n s o f b o t h l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d
t r a n s v e r s e , as w e l l as l o c a l s t r e n g t h o f d o c k structures
during passage f r o m a place o f b u i l d t o a place
o f operation. Development o f recommendations
o n dock structure strengthening.
3.12.2 C o n s t r u c t i o n .
3.12.2.1 F r a m i n g s y s t e m s o f p o n t o o n ( p o n t o o n s )
and wing walls.
F o r p o n t o o n (pontoons) o f caisson, p o n t o o n a n d
sectional docks transverse f r a m i n g is preferable.
W i n g w a l l sides a n d decks o f p o n t o o n d o c k s
w i t h lifting capacities o f 1 0 0 0 0 t a n d above shall be
l o n g i t u d i n a l l y f r a m e d ; docks h a v i n g lifting capacities
below 10000 t m a y be framed transversely.
W i n g w a l l sides a n d decks o f c a i s s o n d o c k s a b o v e
the safety deck shall be l o n g i t u d i n a l l y f r a m e d , w i n g
w a l l sides b e l o w t h e safety d e c k m a y b e t r a n s v e r s e l y
framed.
F o r p o n t o o n b o t t o m plating portions o f caisson
docks i n w a y o f wing walls a longitudinal framing
m a y be adopted.
F o r transverse a n d longitudinal bulkheads o f
the p o n t o o n a n d w i n g walls structures w i t h hori z o n t a l a n d vertical stiffeners a r e permitted.
Truss arrangements m a ybe used i n t h e p o n t o o n
(pontoons) a n d wing walls.
3.12.2.2 S t r u c t u r a l l a y o u t o f p o n t o o n s .
Plate a n d b e a m structures o f t h e p o n t o o n shall
maintain local strength o f the appropriate p o n t o o n strucures ( p o n t o o n deck, b o t t o m , l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d transverse
b u l k h e a d s , etc.), as w e l l as t r a n s v e r s e s t r e n g t h o f t h e
pontoon.
Spacing o f p r i m a r y longitudinal a n d transverse
framing members o f the p o n t o o n shall be determined
a c c o r d i n g t o 1.1.3 w i t h L = L .
P r i m a r y transverse structures o f t h e p o n t o o n
(pontoons), i.e. non-tight bulkheads, shall be fitted
i n 3 t o 7 spacings, b u t t h e y shall n o t be spaced m o r e
than (Bb . )/6 apart.
A centreline bulkhead shall b e fitted under t h e keel
blocks. A b o x structure f o r m e d b y t w o longitudinal
bulkheads arranged s y m m e t r i c a l l y o n each side o f t h e
centre line m a yb e used i n lieu o f the centre line b u l k head.
Bulkheads o r girders shall be aligned w i t h inner
w a l l sides.
W h e r e transverse f r a m i n g is adopted f o r a p o n t o o n
(pontoons), additional primary longitudinal supporting
members m a y be fitted t o limit a span o f transverse
m e m b e r s o f the b o t t o m a n d p o n t o o n deck. T h e y shall
be spaced n o t m o r e t h a n 3 t o 5 spacings apart.
p
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
3.12.2.3 S t r u c t u r a l l a y o u t o f w i n g w a l l s .
Spacing o f p r i m a r y longitudinal a n d transverse
framing members o f w i n g walls shall be determined
as r e q u i r e d b y 1.1.3.
W h e r e w a l l sides a n d decks are l o n g i t u d i n a l l y
framed, deck transverses and w e b frames shall b e aligned
w i t h p r i m a r y transverse structures o f t h e p o n t o o n
(pontoons) (refer t o 3.12.2.2).
W h e r e w a l l sides a r e t r a n s v e r s e l y f r a m e d , side
stringers shall be fitted. Spacing o f stringers a n d
distance between stringers a n d deck shall, i n general,
n o t exceed 3,5m .
W h e r e transverse f r a m i n g is adopted f o r w i n g
walls b e l o w t h e safety deck i t is advisable t o p r o v i d e
w e b f r a m e s o n w a l l sides i n l i n e w i t h p r i m a r y t r a n s verse structures o f the p o n t o o n , a n d deck transverses
o n t h e safety deck plating.
Primary supporting members o f outer a n d inner
w a l l sides b e l o w t h e safety d e c k ( w e b f r a m e s w i t h
l o n g i t u d i n a l f r a m i n g a n d side stringers w i t h t r a n s verse f r a m i n g ) s h a l l b e c o n n e c t e d b y cross ties w h i c h
shall be fitted i n line w i t h each p r i m a r y transverse
o f the p o n t o o n (refer t o 3.12.2.2).
3.12.2.4 A d d i t i o n a l p r o v i s i o n s .
Use o f butt-lap connections f o r girders a n d
transverses o f p o n t o o n ( p o n t o o n s ) a n d w i n g walls is
permitted.
W h e r e proper quality c o n t r o l o f welding joints is
provided, assembling j o i n t s aligned o n plate structures a n d f r a m i n g members are permitted.
H o l l o w s q u a r e a n d t u b u l a r c r o s s ties a n d s t r u t s s h a l l
n o t be used i n ballast c o m p a r t m e n t s a n d other tanks.
3.12.3 D e s i g n l o a d s .
3.12.3.1 L o a d s f o r s t r u c t u r e d e s i g n b a s e d o n l o c a l
strength.
3.12.3.1.1 D e s i g n p r e s s u r e p , i n k P a , f o r p l a t e a n d
b e a m b o t t o m structures shall b e determined b y t h e formulae:
in way o fdry compartments
p=\0d . ;
(3.12.3.1.1-1)
nicated w i t h wing walls
not commu-
p = I0(d . -D ),
(3.12.3.1.1-2)
m s
and communicated with wing walls

p = W(d . -z .
m s
s d
+ Az)
(3.12.3.1.1-3)
where z
= distance o f t h e safety d e c k f r o m the b a s e line, i n m ;
A z = thickness o f air cushion, i n m .
J i r f
P a r t II. H u l l
195
b e a m structures o fthe p o n t o o n deck i n w a y o f d r y
and ballast compartments shall be determined b y
F o r m u l a (3.12.3.1.1-2).
b e a m s t r u c t u r e s o f p o n t o o n sides a n d e n d b u l k h e a d s
shall be determined b y t h e following formulae:
b e a m structures o ffuel oil, lubricating oil, water a n d
other tanks is determined b y the following formulae:
w h e n i n t e r n a l pressure is calculated
p=lO
P l
(z _ -zi)
a
(3.12.3.1.9)
p=\0{d . -z}
(3.12.3.1.3-1)
m s
where p i= density o fliquid contained i n the tank, i n t / m ;

z
= distance o fthe upper edge o fthe air pipe f r o m the base
line, i n m ;
ap
where z = distance o f t h e lower edge o f the plate o r mid-span

o f the f r a m i n g m e m b e r f r o m t h e b a s e line, i n m ;
t
p = ^-Dp)
(3.12.3.1.3-2)
w h e r e do = d e p t h o f t h e d o c k c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o f i l l i n g o f a s i d e
ballast c o m p a r t m e n t u p t o the safety deck, i n m ;
do s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n m o r e t h a n d , .
A s t h e first a p p r o x i m a t i o n , w h e r e n o s p e c i a l i n f o r m a t i o n i s
a v a i l a b l e , i t m a y b e a s s u m e d t h a t do = D +
G\2L b ,dP\
G = m a s s o f dock without rest water a n d compensating
ballast;
p = s e a w a t e r d e n s i t y ( r e f e r t o 1.1.3).
m s
pi
3.12.3.1.4 D e s i g n p r e s s u r e p , i n k P a , f o r p l a t e
a n d b e a m s t r u c t u r e s o f w a l l sides a n d e n d b u l k h e a d s
shall be determined b y t h e following formulae:
in w a y o f d r y compartments, using F o r
m u l a (3.12.3.1.3-1);
=\>-
where z
(3.12.3.1.4)
do = a s d e f i n e d a b o v e .
3.12.3.1.5 D e s i g n p r e s s u r e p , i n k P a , f o r p l a t e
a n d b e a m structures o fthe safety deck i n w a y o f d r y
compartments shall be taken equal t o 5 kPa; i n w a y
o f ballast compartments p shall be determined b y the
formula
p = W(d . -z .
m s
where z
J i r f
s d
+ Az)
(3.12.3.1.5)
, A z = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.12.3.1.1.
b e a m structures o f inner watertight bulkheads o f ballast
compartments shall be determined b y the formula
p = W ^ - z , + Az)
w h e n external pressure is calculated, F o r

m u l a (3.12.3.1.3-1) shall be used.
F o r plate structures a r r a n g e d p a r a l l e l t o t h e base
U n e , zi i s a d i s t a n c e o f t h e p l a t e s t r u c t u r e f r o m t h e
base Une.
3.12.3.1.10 D e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n c r i n o U n e s t r u c
tures is assumed t o be equal t o 5 kPa.
3.12.3.1.11 D e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n w a l k w a y s t r u c
tures is assumed t o be equal t o 3,5 k P a .
3.12.3.1.12 D e s i g n p r e s s u r e o n s t r u c t u r e s o f
safety deck, i n t e r m e d i a t e deck a n d p l a t f o r m s w h e r e
e q u i p m e n t o f the electric generating p l a n t is arranged
are assumed equal t o 18 k P a ; i n w a y o f accom
m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces, 5 k P a .
3.12.3.2 L o a d s f o r s t r u c t u r e d e s i g n b a s e d o n b o t h
transverse a n d longitudinal strength o f p o n t o o n
(pontoons).
3.12.3.2.1 D e s i g n l o a d s t o b e u s e d i n d e s i g n o f
p o n t o o n structures o f caisson, p o n t o o n a n d sectional
docks shall b e calculated for the condition w h e n the ship
o f length L a n d weight equal t o t h e m a x i m u m lifting
capacity o f t h e dock is supported o n t h e keel blocks
symmetrically about t h e midship section o f the dock.
T h e draught o fthe dock shall correspond t o t h e design
one (refer t o 3.12.1.2); ballast w a t e r is considered e v e n l y
distributed over the length a n d breadth o f the dock.
3.12.3.2.2 F o r p o n t o o n a n d s e c t i o n a l d o c k s
an additional condition shall be considered f o r pon
t o o n s loaded b y b u o y a n c y forces t h e value o f w h i c h
corresponds t o t h e c o n d i t i o n specified i n 3.12.3.2.1
corrected f o r rest-water counterpressure a n d grav
itational forces o f Ught-dock w e i g h t components,
opposite i n direction.
W h e r e n o initial data are available, buoyancy
force p , i nk P a , m a ybe determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
(3.12.3.1.6)
w h e r e z, = d i s t a n c e o f b a l l a s t c o m p a r t m e n t t o p f r o m t h e b a s e
line, i n m ;
A z = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.12.3.1.1.
b e a m structures o fm a i n watertight bulkheads shall
be d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (3.12.3.1.3-1).
3.12.3.1.8 D e s i g n p r e s s u r e f o r p l a t e a n d b e a m
structures o fthe t o p deck shall be equal t o 5 k P a .
p = gA/[BL _ -(n-l)Ba ]
p
(3.12.3.2.2)
where n = n u m b e r o f p o n t o o n s o f p o n t o o n docks o r sections

o f sectional docks;
do = d i s t a n c e b e t w e e n p o n t o o n s o r s e c t i o n s , i n m .
3.12.3.2.3 D e s i g n l e n g t h o f t h e s h i p L s h a l l b e
assumed equal t o t h e length o f t h e shortest ship
whose docking weight is equal t o t h e m a x i m u m Ufting capacity o fthe dock, b u t n o tm o r e t h a n 0 , 9 L .
c
p d
196
Rules
F o r docks having lifting capacity m o r e t h a n 4 0000 t,

t h e d e s i g n l e n g t h o f t h e s h i p s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n less
than 0,9^.*
3.12.3.2.4 T h e w e i g h t c u r v e o f t h e s h i p s h a l l b e
t a k e n as a rectangle w i t h a superimposed p a r a b o l a
o f h a l f t h e area o f the rectangle. L i n e a r d o c k i n g l o a d q,
in k N / m , a t t h e section distant a t x f o r w a r d a n d a f t
f r o m t h e midship section shall be determined b y the
formula
x
T^T
[ 1
-^/
(3.12.3.2.4)
w h e r e cp = b l o c k c o e f f i c i e n t o f s h i p w e i g h t c u r v e .
F o r d o c k s o f 4 0 0 0 0 t l i f t i n g c a p a c i t y a n d less
block coefficient o f t h e ship weight curve shall be
assumed depending o n a design ship type according
t o T a b l e 3.12.3.2.4.
T a b l e
T y p e o f ship
Icebreakers
Ships with engine r o o m amidships
Ships with engine r o o m afto r semi-aft
3.12.3.2.4
0,67
0,75 0,8
1,0
F o r docks above 4 0 0 0 0 t lifting capacity,

= 0,8 shall be assumed.
3.12.3.2.5 W h e r e i t i s i n t e n d e d t o l i f t s h i p s s i
m u l t a n e o u s l y o n k e e l a n d side b l o c k s , as w e l l as
w h e r e d i f f e r e n t cases o f s i m u l t a n e o u s d o c k i n g o f
several ships are expected, they shall be t a k e n i n t o
account i n design o f structures w h i c h provide b o t h
longitudinal a n d transverse strength o f the p o n t o o n .
Design loads shall be determined using the proce
dures approved b y t h e Register.
3.12.3.2.6 D e s i g n l o a d s o n e n d p o n t o o n s o f p o n t o o n
and sectional docks o r o n t h e e n d portions o f caisson
docks a n d w h e n ships w i t h o v e r h u n g ends are docked
shall b e specially considered b y t h e Register.
3.12.3.3 L o a d s f o r d e s i g n o f s t r u c t u r e s b a s e d o n
longitudinal strength.
3.12.3.3.1 D e s i g n l o a d s s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d f o r
the following conditions:
dock's sagging w h e n a ship h a v i n g t h e shortest
length L expected a n d a w e i g h t equal t o t h e m a x
i m u m Hfting capacity o f t h e d o c k A is lifted;
dock's hogging w h e n a ship h a v i n g t h e largest
length L expected a n d a w e i g h t equal t o t h e m a x
i m u m lifting capacity o fthe d o c k A is lifted, o r t w o o r
m o r e ships installed i n line a n d h a v i n g a t o t a l w e i g h t
equal t o A are docked.
s
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
Ballast w a t e r is considered t o be evenly dis

tributed over the entire length o f the dock.
3.12.3.3.2 T h e f o r m o f s h i p w e i g h t c u r v e i s d e
termined b y F o r m u l a (3.12.3.2.4).
3.12.3.3.3 T h e d e s i g n l e n g t h o f t h e s h o r t e s t s h i p
shall be as required b y 3.12.3.2.3.
T h e design l e n g t h o f t h e largest ship o r a t o t a l
length o f several ships installed i n line o v e r t h e l e n g t h
o f t h e d o c k s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 1 , 3 ^ ^ .
3.12.3.3.4 T h e d e s i g n b l o c k c o e f f i c i e n t o f t h e s h i p
weight
curve
shall
be
assigned
according
t o 3 . 1 2 . 3 . 2 . 4 ; f o r h o g g i n g , cp = 1 , 0 s h a l l b e t a k e n ,
unless expressly p r o v i d e d otherwise.
3.12.4.1 T h e t h i c k n e s s r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r p l a t e
structures based o n local strength.
T h e plating thicknesses o f p o n t o o n (pontoons),
w a l l sides, i n t e r i o r a n d o u t e r w a t e r t i g h t b u l k h e a d s ,
decks a n d platforms shall be determined b y F o r
m u l a ( 1 . 6 . 4 . 4 ) w i t h m = 2 2 , 4 a n d Jc = 0 , 8 . A c o r r o
sion allowance shall be obtained according t o the
r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s given i n 3.12.1.4. T h e design
transverse pressure p is specified i n 3.12.3.1.
3.12.4.2 S c a n t l i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r f r a m i n g
members based o n local strength.
3.12.4.2.1 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s o f p r i m a r y
m e m b e r s shall be determined as required b y 1.6.4.1.
3.12.4.2.2 T h e n e t s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f g i r d e r s a n d
transverses, as w e l l as sectional area o f b e a m s a n d
longitudinals having a relationship / / A < 1 0 (where
/ = design span, i n m ; h = w e b depth o f a b e a m o r
l o n g i t u d i n a l , i n c m ) s h a l l b e o b t a i n e d f r o m 1.6.4.3.
3.12.4.2.3 T h e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e p s h a l l b e d e
t e r m i n e d a t a m i d - s p a n o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s as r e
quired b y 3.12.3.1.
3.12.4.2.4 T h e d e s i g n s p a n / o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s
shall b e selected i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.6.3.1.
3.12.4.2.5 C o e f f i c i e n t s o f p e r m i s s i b l e n o r m a l a n d
s h e a r stresses specified i n 1.6.4.1 a n d 1.6.4.3 s h a l l b e
a s s u m e d e q u a l t o Jc = 0 , 8 a n d k = 0 , 8 .
3.12.4.2.6 T h e f a c t o r c o w h i c h t a k e s a c c o u n t
o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r w e a r as g i v e n i n 1.1.5.3 s h a l l b e
t a k e n w i t h A âccording t o 3.12.1.4.
3.12.4.2.7 F a c t o r s o f d e s i g n b e n d i n g m o m e n t s m
a n d shear forces n shall be assumed as follows:
m = 1 2 a n d n = 0,5 f o r b o t t o m transverse a n d
longitudinal members, beams and longitudinals o fthe
p o n t o o n deck; f o r stiffeners o f watertight transverse
bulkheads w i t h longitudinally framed b o t t o m a n d pon
t o o n deck; f o r stiffeners o f interior watertight l o n g
itudinal bulkheads w i t h transversely framed b o t t o m a n d
p o n t o o n deck; f o r l o n g i t u d i n a l f r a m i n g m e m b e r s o f w a l l
sides a n d decks; f o r safety deck b e a m s w i t h transversely
f r a m e d w a l l sides b e l o w t h e safety deck; f o r girders a n d
transverses o f b o t t o m a n d p o n t o o n deck a n d side strin
gers o f o u t e r a n d i n n e r w a l l sides;
a
P a r t II. H u l l
197
m = 8 a n d n = 0,5 f o r stiffeners o f w a t e r t i g h t
transverse bulkheads w i t h transversely framed bot
t o m a n d p o n t o o n deck; f o r stiffeners o f i n t e r i o r
longitudinal bulkheads with longitudinally framed
b o t t o m a n dp o n t o o n deck; f o r h o r i z o n t a l stiffeners
o f watertight transverse bulkheads o f w i n g walls w i t h
t r a n s v e r s e l y f r a m e d w a l l sides; f o r s a f e t y d e c k b e a m s
w i t h l o n g i t u d i n a l l y f r a m e d w a l l sides;
m = 13 a n dn = 0,5 f o r w a l l deck a n dp l a t f o r m
b e a m s w i t h t r a n s v e r s e l y f r a m e d w a l l sides b e l o w
the considered deck o r p l a t f o r m ; t o pdeck o r safety
deck transverses;
m = 11 a n dn = 0,6 f o r frames a n dw e b frames
of the pontoon (pontoons), outer a n d inner wall
sides.
3.12.4.2.8 T h e s c a n t U n g s a n d s t r u c t u r e s o f g i r d e r s
a n d transverses o f t h e p o n t o o n a n d w i n g walls shall
satisfy t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.7.3.3. F o r girders a n d
transverses o f t h e w i n g w a l l s above t h e safety deck
the requirements f o r similar structures o f d r y cargo
ships m a y be appUed.
3.12.4.3 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r c r o s s t i e s , s t r u t s a n d
braces.
3.12.4.3.1 T h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f c r o s s t i e s a n d
s t r u t s S, i n c m , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y a
successive a p p r o x i m a t i o n m e t h o d u s i n g F o r m u l a (2.9.4.1)
w i t h a d e s i g n l o a d P = 0,5(P\ + P ) , i n k N , a n d f a c t o r
k = 1,15 ( w h e r e P i = P \ a c , P = p a c are m a x i m u m
compressive forces acting at t h e ends o f stmts a n d cross
t i e s ; p \ a n d p a r e d e s i g n p r e s s u r e s ( r e f e r to 3 . 1 2 . 3 . 1 ) ,
i n k P a ; a = distance b e t w e e n m e m b e r s supported b y stmts
o r cross ties, i n m ; i s h a l f - s u m o f s p a n l e n g t h s o n e a c h
side o f t h e s t r u t o r cross t i e u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n , i n m ) .
2
F o r cross ties o f f a b r i c a t e d sections o r I sections

cross ties, t h e r a t i o o f t h e b r e a d t h t o t h e t h i c k n e s s
o f f a c e p l a t e s s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 28// o r 2 5 , w h i c h e v e r
is t h e greater.
T h e thickness o f cross t i e o r stay i t e m s shall
n o t b e less t h a n 7 , 5 m m .
3.12.4.3.3 T h e s c a n t U n g s o f t r u s s e s s h a U b e d e
termined according t o a procedure approved b y t h e
Register.
3.12.4.4 A d d i t i o n a l l o c a l s t r e n g t h r e q u i r e m e n t s
for plates a n d beams.
I f h u l l structures o fthe d o c k are subjected t o t h e
loads n o t covered b y 3.12.3.1, t h e scantlings o f plates
and beams shall be determined using the procedures
3.12.4.5 S c a n t l i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r p r i m a r y
transverse a n d longitudinal members o f p o n t o o n
(pontoons).
3.12.4.5.1 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W, i n c m , o f t h e
p r i m a r y transverse a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l m e m b e r s o f t h e
p o n t o o n (pontoons) shaU be determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
3
W = W
where
+ A W
(3.12.4.5.1-1)
W = required section modulus o f the e n d o f the dock

service life t o b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
3
W ' = M10 /k cr
(3.12.4.5.1-2)
where
M = design b e n d i n g m o m e n t , i n k N - m (refer also

t o 3.12.4.5.6);
A W = corrosion allowance t o t h e section modulus to b e
A W = 100A[A/ + ^ ( 2 - P ) ]
(3.12.4.5.1-3)
r f
w h e r e h = w e b d e p t h o fm e m b e r s o fthe section u n d e r considera

tion, i n m ;
Af , Af = a d d i t i o n s t o t h e u p p e r f l a n g e a n d w e b a r e a o f m e m b e r s ,
respectively, including corrosion allowances a s b a s e d
o n t h e entire service life o f t h e d o c k , i n c m , d e t e r m i n e d
by the formulae:
A s a first a p p r o x i m a t i o n , S m a y be t a k e n as
S =
0,lli>
a n d t h e r a d i u s o f g y r a t i o n i = y/l/S, i n c m , m a y
be estimated f o r a suitable section h a v i n g this area
(where / = m i n i m u m central m o m e n t o f inertia, cm ).
I f the area determined b y F o r m u l a (2.9.4.1-1) using this
radius o f g y r a t i o n differs b y m o r e t h a n 10 p e r cent
f r o m t h e first a p p r o x i m a t i o n , a second a p p r o x i m a
tion calculation shall bemade. T h e radius o f gyration
shall correspond t o t h e m e a n area o f t h e first a n d
second a p p r o x i m a t i o n .
3.12.4.3.2 T h e w e b p l a t e s o f c r o s s t i e s a n d s t m t s o f
channel o r I sections shall b e s o selected that t h e ratio o f
t h e b r e a d t h t o t h e t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 42// o r 4 0 ,
w h i c h e v e r is t h e greater ( w h e r e / is l e n g t h o f a cross
tie o r strut, i n m ) .
F o r o r d i n a r y angle o r c h a n n e l sections, t h e r a t i o
o f t h e breadth t o t h e thickness o f t h e flanges shall
n o t e x c e e d 14// o r 1 3 , w h i c h e v e r i s t h e g r e a t e r .
4
A f = 1 0 A s b f + Af ;
Af =
\0AsJi;
Asrf(w) Ua\w)T r e d u c t i o n , i n m m , o f t h e p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s o f t h e
p o n t o o n deck ( m e m b e r web) d u e t o w e a r during service
life o f t h e d o c k T (years) w i t h c o r r o s i o n rate
a\w).
m m / y e a r , a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3.12.1.4.2;
b f = w i d t h o f t h e e f f e c t i v e f l a n g e ( r e f e r t o 3.12.4.5.5), i n m ;
Aff = a d d i t i o n t o t h e f l a n g e a r e a o f t h e m e m b e r a l l o w i n g f o r
corrosion wear o fframing members, t o b etaken as:
for f r a m i n g m e m b e r s o ftee sections o r flat
d
fr
Af
fr
= 0,1(6 + h o ) u T ;
0
(3.12.4.5.1-4)
fr
for f r a m i n g m e m b e r s o f b u l b flat
Af
fr
= 0,86/ M r/i ;
0
/r
(3.12.4.5.1-5)
w h e n a d d i t i o n Afp. i s d e t e r m i n e d , r e s u l t s o b t a i n e d i n
d e s i g n o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s b a s e d o nlocal strength (refer
t o 3.12.4.2) a r e u s e d . W h e r e t h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f m e m
b e r s d o e s n o t i n c l u d e p r i m a r y m e m b e r s , Aff = 0;
n u m b e r o f p r i m a r y m e m b e r s o v e r t h e b r e a d t h /,
= face plate width a n d w e b depth o f T - b e a m , respectively
( f o r m e m b e r s o f f l a t , bo 0 ) , i n c m ;
area o f isolated section;
w e b t h i c k n e s s o f b u l b flat;
T
n =
b a n d ho
0
fo =
s =
0
198
Rules
Uf = s p e c i f i e d c o r r o s i o n r a t e f o r f r a m i n g m e m b e r s o f b a l l a s t
c o m p a r t m e n t s ( r e f e r t o T a b l e 3.12.1.4.2), i n m m / y e a r ;
P = factor dependent o n w e bareas / i o f the upper f ' a n d
lower f ' face plates, h a v i n g r e g a r d t o w e a r t o t h e e n d
o f t h e service life, t o b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
r
M
M
and Construction
of Sea-Going
= q(B-b . )c d ;
= q(B-b Jc d
p d
Ships
(3.12.4.5.6-1)
(3.12.4.5.6-2)
where q = qA/L = average value o f the Unear load o f the dock,

i n k N / m ( L , A a s d e f i n e d i n 3.12.3.2);
bp.d b r e a d t h o f t h e d o c k a n d w i n g w a l l a t t h e p o n t o o n d e c k
level;
c, c = d i s t a n c e b e t w e e n p r i m a r y t r a n s v e r s e a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l
m e m b e r s o f t h e pontoon, respectively, a s s h o w n
i n F i g . 3.12.4.5.6-1, i n m ;
8\, 8 2 = f a c t o r s t o b e o b t a i n e d f r o m t h e d i a g r a m s g i v e n
i n F i g . 3.12.4.5.6-2 a n d 3.12.4.5.6-3 a s d e p e n d e n t o n
p a r a m e t e r s L / L . , n = L . \ { B b.
a n d cp.
s
P = Wd
+fwWfd+fw)\
(3.12.4.5.1-6)
a s a f i r s t a p p r o x i m a t i o n , i t m a y b e a s s u m e d t h a t P = 1,0.
3.12.4.5.2 T h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f t h e w e b f , i n c m ,
o f primary transverse members o f the p o n t o o n
(pontoons) shall be determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
w
fw = f ' w + A /
where f '
(3.12.4.5.2-1)
-82-82
n = 2;3
p d)
n = L J(B
b,)
p d
where N
f o r Af ,
= specified sectional area, i n c m , o f the w e bt o t h e e n d

o f t h e service life o f t h e d o c k , t o b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formula
f' =\0N IKx

w
(3.12.4.5.2-2)
= d e s i g n e d s h e a r f o r c e ( r e f e r t o 3.12.4.5.7), i n k N ;
r e f e r t o 3.12.4.5.1.
3.12.4.5.3 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f t h e t r u s s ( s t r u t s a n d
braces) o fthe p o n t o o n (pontoons) shall be adequate
t o take shear forces arising i n longitudinal bending
of the pontoon.
3.12.4.5.4 T o b e i n c l u d e d i n t h e d e s i g n s e c t i o n
o f primary transverse members o f t h e p o n t o o n
(pontoons) are a l l structural items which are con
t i n u o u s b e t w e e n t h e p o n t o o n sides; d e s i g n s e c t i o n o f
p r i m a r y longitudinal m e m b e r s shall include a l l
structural items which are continuous between the
end bulkheads o fthe pontoon.
3.12.4.5.5 T h e w i d t h o f t h e e f f e c t i v e f l a n g e s o f t h e
p r i m a r y t r a n s v e r s e m e m b e r s b j, i n m , o f t h e b o t t o m
a n d p o n t o o n deck plating shall be t a k e n as
e
= m i n { ( 5 - y / 6 ; c}
(3.12.4.5.5)
where = average distance between the m e m b e r under consideration

a n d m e m b e r s o n t h e right a n d o n t h e l e f t t h e r e o f , i n m .
3.12.4.5.6 T h e d e s i g n b e n d i n g m o m e n t s M a n d
My, i n k N - m , acting i n transverse a n d longitudinal
members at themiddle o fa continuous pontoon o f a
c a i s s o n d o c k ( F i g . 3.12.4.5.6-1) f o r t h e cases r e f e r r e d
t o i n 3.12.3.2, shall be d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e formulae:
F i g . 3.12.4.5.6-2
F o r p o n t o o n a n d sectional docks, t h e design

bending m o m e n t i n design o f primary transverse
m e m b e r s M , i n k N - m , shall be equal t o t h e greater
o f t h e t w o values:
x
= Q,25q^{B-b J{\-^
2^ =*)',
(3.12.4.5.6-3)
or
M
= 0,\25pc (B-b J
x
(3.12.4.5.6-4)
w h e r e p = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.12.3.2.2,
3.12.4.5.7 T h e d e s i g n s h e a r f o r c e N , i n k N , t a k e n
by a transverse m e m b e r o f the dock (primary transverse m e m b e r , o r struts a n d braces o f t h e p o n t o o n
truss) shall be determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
x
F i g . 3.12.4.5.6-
P a r t II. H u l l
- 5 - 5
2
199
n = 4;5;6
n =
quirements under t h e action o f shear a n d n o r m a l

stresses arising i n t r a n s v e r s e b e n d i n g o f t h e p o n t o o n
(pontoons).
T h e plating thickness o f t h e p o n t o o n deck a n d
b o t t o m shall meet t h e requirements f o r buckling
s t r e n g t h u n d e r t h e a c t i o n o f c o m p r e s s i v e stresses
arising i n transverse bending o f t h e p o n t o o n (pon
toons).
3.12.4.5.10 B u c k l i n g s t r e n g t h c o n d i t i o n s s h a l l
c o m p l y w i t h 1.6.5.2 a n d 1.6.5.3. F a c t o r i n F o r
m u l a (1.6.5.2-1) is t a k e n e q u a l t o 0,75.
W h e n E u l e r ' s stresses a r e d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g
t o t h e f o r m u l a e g i v e n i n 1.6.5.5 i t s h a l l b e t a k e n t h a t
s' = s As, w h e r e As i s o b t a i n e d i n c o m p l i a n c e
w i t h 3.12.1.4.
3.12.4.6 T h e s c a n t l i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r s t r u c t u r e s
based o n strength a n d buckling conditions i n long
itudinal bending.
3.12.4.6.1 T h e a s s u m e d s c a n t l i n g s o f d o c k l o n g
itudinal structures (with regard t o t h e provisions
o f 3.12.4.6.2) shall p r o v i d e t h e required h u l l section
m o d u l u s o fthe floating dock.
T h e h u l l s e c t i o n m o d u l u s W, i n c m , o f a f l o a t i n g
d o c k s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
L J(B-b , )
p
W = W G >
(3.12.4.6.1-1)
w h e r e W = r e q u i r e d s e c t i o n m o d u l u s t o t h e e n d o f t h e s e r v i c e Ufe
of the dock, i n c m , determined b y the formula
3
= M-l0 /k a
a
(3.12.4.6.1-2)
where M = m a x i m u m bending moment determined b y F o r m u

l a (3.12.4.6.3), i n k N - m ;
co = f a c t o r w h i c h t a k e s a c c o u n t o f c o r r o s i o n a l l o w a n c e t o t h e
section m o d u l u s for wear determined b y t h e formula
c
where = distance o f t h e section under consideration f r o m t h e

centreUne o f the dock, i n m ;
= distance between the m e m b e r s u n d e r consideration, in m .
co = ( l - J ^ Z A / t o ) -
(3.12.4.6.1-3)
where
I n design o f t h e primary transverse members

o r struts a n d braces o f t h e p o n t o o n trusses o f p o n
t o o n a n d sectional docks, t h e design shear force N ,
i n k N , s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n less t h a n
F = sectional area o f t h e floating d o c k hull, i nc m ,

corresponding t o the required section m o d u l u s ;
Afi = a d d i t i o n t o t h e s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f t h e '-th p l a t e s t r a k e ,
which takes account o f corrosion allowance to be
Afi=lOAsibi
(3.12.4.6.1-4)
w h e r e As = t h i c k n e s s r e d u c t i o n o f t h e '-th p l a t e m e m b e r
d u e t o w e a r d u r i n g service life (years), w i t h a c o r r o s i o n
r a t e iij, i n m m / y e a r , t a k e n a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3.12.1.4.2,
in m m ;
bi = w i d t h o f t h e '-th m e m b e r , i n m .
t
N =pcy
x
(3.12.4.5.7-2)
w h e r e p = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.12.3.2.2.
3.12.4.5.8 T h e c o e f f i c i e n t s o f p e r m i s s i b l e s t r e s s e s
i n F o r m u l a e (3.12.4.5.1-2) a n d (3.12.4.5.2-2) i n design
o f primary transverse members o f the p o n t o o n
( p o n t o o n s ) shall b e t a k e n as f o l l o w s : k = 0,85,
=
0,8.
Guidelines o n t h eselection o f permissible n o r m a l
stresses i n p r i m a r y l o n g i t u d i n a l m e m b e r s o f t h e
p o n t o o n o f caisson-type docks a r e given i n 3.12.4.6.5.
3.12.4.5.9 T h e w e b t h i c k n e s s o f p r i m a r y t r a n s
verse m e m b e r s shall meet t h e buckling strength rea
Additions t o t h e sectional area o f t h e floating

dock hull which take account o f corrosive wear
o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h o s e d e
termined b y the following formulae:
for framing m e m b e r s o f tee sections o r flat
Afi = O M Q o i + h ) u T
0 l
(3.12.4.6.1-5)
f r
w h e r e = n u m b e r o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s o f t h e '-th g r o u p ;
bou h = f a c e p l a t e w i d t h a n d w e b d e p t h o f T - b e a m , r e s p e c t i v e l y ,
i n c m ( f o r m e m b e r s o f f l a t , b = 0);
0 i
0i
200
Rules
of Sea-Going
W M z'/r
o- =
for framing members o fbulb flat
and Construction
Ships
(3.12.4.6.5-3)
w h e r e M = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.12.4.5.6;
z! = d i s t a n c e o f t h e p o i n t u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n f r o m t h e n e u t r a l
axis o f the section o f the p r i m a r y longitudinal, i n m ;
T = inertia m o m e n t o fp r i m a r y longitudinal, determined with
r e g a r d t o the w e a r o f the m e m b e r s t o the e n d o f the service
l i f e o f t h e d o c k a n d p r o v i s i o n s o f 3.12.4.5.4, i n c m .
y
Afi = 0 , % 6 n f u T / s i
0 i
f r i
(3.12.4.6.1-6)
w h e r e fot = s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f b u l b f l a t s e c t i o n p r o p e r , i n c m ;
up. = c o r r o s i o n r a t e o f f r a m i n g m e m b e r s o f t h e '-th g r o u p ,
in mm/year;
Sot = w e b t h i c k n e s s o f b u l b f l a t ;
/ = m u l t i p l i e r t a k i n g a c c o u n t o f t h e e f f e c t o f c h a n g i n g
s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f t h e '-th m e m b e r o n t h e s e c t i o n
m o d u l u s W, t o b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
= ?
(3.12.4.6.1-7)
where / = hull inertia m o m e n t , i n c m / m , o f t h e dock, corre

sponding t o the required section m o d u l u s ;
z , Ci = d i s t a n c e o f t h e p o i n t a t t h e l e v e l o f w h i c h s e c t i o n
m o d u l u s isdetermined a n d centre o f gravity o f sectional
a r e a o f t h e '-th m e m b e r ('-th g r o u p o f l o n g i t u d i n a l
members) f r o m t h e neutral axis, t h e position o f which
c o r r e s p o n d s t o W a n d /; i n d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f z a n d c
their sign shall b e taken into account: positive d o w n
w a r d s a n d negative u p w a r d s f r o m the neutral axis.
0
3.12.4.6.2 W i n g w a l l a n d p o n t o o n l o n g i t u d i n a l s
continuous i n t h e middle region o f t h e dock shall be
included i n t h e design cross-section o f a caisson-type
floating dock.
T o be included i nthe design section o f a p o n t o o n
dock are wing w a l l longitudinals continuous i n t h e
middle region o f the dock.
3.12.4.6.3 T h e d e s i g n b e n d i n g m o m e n t M , i n k N - m ,
s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d f o r t h e cases r e f e r r e d t o i n 3.12.3.3,
by the formula
3.12.4.6.6 I n d e s i g n o f t h e d o c k h u l l , t h e r e
quirements f o rbuckling strength under t h e action
o f longitudinal bending o f plate structures, girders
a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l s , s u c h as w a l l sides a n d d e c k p l a t
ing, shell plating, l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d plating
o f the p o n t o o n a n d p o n t o o n deck plating o f caissontype docks, b o t t o m shell o f p o n t o o n d o c k wings shall
be m e t i n t h e m i d d l e r e g i o n w i t h i n 0 , 4 L .
T h e scantUngs o f t o p deck beams where trans
verse f r a m i n g i s a d o p t e d , t o p d e c k transverses i n case
o f longitudinal framing shall be adequate t o provide
buckUng strength o fdeck structure portions between
d e c k girders, d e c k girders a n d w a l l sides o r b e t w e e n
w a l l sides w h e r e d e c k g i r d e r s a r e o m i t t e d .
3.12.4.6.7 T h e d e s i g n c o m p r e s s i v e s t r e s s e s a ,
in M P a , obtained i n estimation o f the buckUng
s t r e n g t h s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n :
p
" - = ^ z / 1 0
(3.12.4.6.7-1)
w h e r e M = d e s i g n b e n d i n g m o m e n t c a u s i n g t h e c o m p r e s s i o n o f t h e '-th
m e m b e r u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n ( r e f e r t o 3.12.4.6.3), i n k N - m ;
/ = actual central inertia m o m e n t o fthe hull girder with regard
t o w e a r t o t h e e n d o f t h e service life, i n c m .
A s a first a p p r o x i m a t i o n , / value, i n c m , m a y b e
4
M = -0,l25gAL
( l-
(3.12.4.6.3)
R e c o m m e n d a t i o n s o nt h echoice o fdesign values

o f a n d L a r egiven i n 3.12.3.3.2.
3.12.4.6.4 T h e c o e f f i c i e n t o f p e r m i s s i b l e s t r e s s e s
due t o longitudinal bending referred t o i n F o r
m u l a ( 3 . 1 2 . 4 . 6 . 1 - 2 ) s h a l l b e t a k e n a s Jc = 1 , 0 .
3.12.4.6.5 F o r c a i s s o n - t y p e d o c k s t h e f o l l o w i n g
condition shall be fulfilled:
s
o"j + <
(3.12.4.6.5-1)
w h e r e CTI = s t r e s s e s i n p r i m a r y l o n g i t u d i n a l m e m b e r s o f t h e p o n t o o n
due t o longitudinal bending o fthe dock;
= s t r e s s e s i n p r i m a r y l o n g i t u d i n a l m e m b e r s o f t h e p o n t o o n
d u e t o longitudinal b e n d i n g o fthe p o n t o o n .
2
S t r e s s e s
formula
i n M P a , shall b e determined b y t h e
o"j = 1 0 M z / / '
(3.12.4.6.5-2)
w h e r e M = a s d e f i n e d i n 3.12.4.6.3;
z = d i s t a n c e o f t h e p o i n t u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n from t h e n e u t r a l
axis o f the dock, i n m ;
/ = inertia m o m e n t o f t h e d o c k t o t h e e n d o f t h e service
life, i n c m .
4
S t r e s s e s , i n M P a , s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formula
= W a i D o - e ) -10
(3.12.4.6.7-2)
where W
= required section m o d u l u s o fthe hull girder a ta level

of the lower edge o f t h e t o p deck plating determined
a c c o r d i n g t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.12.4.6.1, i n c m ;
Z>o d e p t h o f w i n g w a l l s ( f o r p o n t o o n d o c k s ) , i n m ;
D = D for caisson-type docks;
e = distance o f the n e u t r a l axis f r o m the b a s e line f o r caissontype docks; distance o f the neutral axis f r o m the abutment
line o f the p o n t o o n d e c k t o the inner wall sides f o r p o n t o o n
docks, i n m .
A s a first a p p r o x i m a t i o n , i t m a y b e a s s u m e d that
e = 0 , 3 2 0 f o r c a i s s o n - t y p e d o c k s ; e = 0,5Z>o f o r p o n t o o n
docks;
z = distance o f t h e m e m b e r under consideration f r o m t h e
n e u t r a l a x i s , i n m ( i s m e a s u r e d f r o m t h e e d g e m o s t
distant f r o m the neutral axis for a plate structure; f r o m the
m i d d l e o f the thickness o fthe effective flange for a b e a m
m e m b e r o fthe deck a n d b o t t o m ; f r o m the middle o f the
thickness o fthe b e a m w e b f o r a b e a m o f the w a l l side, side
plating a n d longitudinal bulkhead o f the pontoon).
d
3.12.4.6.8 T h e b u c k U n g s t r e n g t h c o n d i t i o n s s h a l l
c o m p l y w i t h 1.6.5.2 a n d 1.6.5.3. F a c t o r i n F o r
m u l a (1.6.5.2-1) shall b e t a k e n equal t o 0,8 f o r t h e
t o p d e c k p l a t i n g a n d w a l l sides; f o r t h e b o t t o m a n d
side p l a t i n g o f the p o n t o o n a n d p o n t o o n d e c k p l a t i n g
o f caisson-type docks, girders a n d longitudinals.
3.12.4.6.9 E u l e r s t r e s s e s f o r p l a t e s t r u c t u r e s s h a l l
be d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.6.5.5, a n d f o r g i r d e r s
P a r t II. H u l l
201
a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l s a s r e q u i r e d b y 1.6.5.4 t a k i n g
s' = sAs w h e r e As i s o b t a i n e d a s g i v e n i n 3 . 1 2 . 1 . 4 .
3.12.4.6.10 T h e i n e r t i a m o m e n t o f b e a m s o f t h e
transversely framed t o pdeck shall meet the require
m e n t s o f 2.6.4.3.
T h e inertia m o m e n t o f t o p deck transverses shall
be as r e q u i r e d b y 2.6.4.9.
3.12.4.6.11 T h e a s s u m e d s c a n t l i n g s o f w i n g w a l l
structures shall provide buckling strength i n simple
b e n d i n g o f t h e w i n g w a l l i n design cases o f d o c k sag
ging. T h e procedure o f supporting buckling strength
i n simple bending shall be agreed w i t h t h e Register.
3.12.4.7 D e f l e c t i o n c o n t r o l s y s t e m .
Deflection o f t h e dock hull shall be controlled
according t ot h eprocedure approved b yt h e Register.
I n docks o v e r 8 0 m i n l e n g t h a t least t w o meters
o f different types t o m o n i t o r t h e deflection o f t h e
dock shall be provided.
T h e m a x i m u m deflection stated i n t h e D o c k i n g
M a n u a l shall be agreed w i t h t h e Register. T h e de
flections shall n o t exceed t h e values d e t e r m i n e d b y
the formula
3.12.4.8.3 S e a s t a t e c o n s i d e r e d p e r m i s s i b l e f o r
voyage i n t o w isthat corresponding t o a wave height
o f 3 p e r cent probability o fexceeding level A o , i n m ,
() = ( 0 , 6 + 0 , 0 0 3 T)a
A / = 0 , 7 7 - 1 0 L p $ /|
(3.12.4.7)
where
T = service life o f t h e d o c k t o t h e d a t e o f m o n i t o r i n g ,
in years;
rs = a s d e f i n e d i n 1.1.4.3.
n
3.12.4.8 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r d o c k t o w i n g .
3.12.4.8.1 T h e m i n i m u m s e c t i o n m o d u l u s 1 ^ ,
i n c m , required t o ensure t h e strength o ft h e d o c k
during towing shall be determined b y the formula
3
(3.12.4.8.3-1)
% = % + ( ^ ? 1 - 1 )
where
/ o
= rated wave height, i nm ,permissible for voyage o f a

f l o a t i n g d o c k , w i t h a r e l a t i o n s h i p L j B = 4,25, d e t e r
mined b y the formulae:
p d
h % = 0,313 + 0 , 0 4 3 8 Z , . f o r L, < 130 m ;

h % = 3,10 + 0 , 0 2 2 3 1 ^ f o r 130 ^ L
^ 260 m ;
h%% = 0,422 + 0,0326 L
f o r L. > 2 6 0 m ;
%
r f
(3.12.4.8.3-2)
m = factor determined b y the formulae:

m = 0,483 + 0,021 SL, f o r L , < 130 m ;
d
m = 2,42 + 0 , 0 0 6 8 5 I , . f o r 1 3 0 ^ 1 ^ 2 6 0 m ;
m = 0,356 + 0,0148 L, f o r L, > 2 6 0 m .
p
(3.12.4.8.3-3)
rf
Factors \\ a n d X are determined b y the formulae:

2
X\ = M/M;
\ = 1,276-0,065(1.,^
(3.12.4.8.3-4)
where A / = basic bending moment, i nk N - m , determined b y the

formula
0
- 2
(3.12.4.8.3-5)
w h e r e f o r |, r e f e r t o 1.1.4.3;
M = bending moment, i nk N - m , corresponding t o the actual
section m o d u l u s o f t h e floating d o c k hull, determined
by the formula
M=k a W-lOa
where
W = actual m i n i m u m section m o d u l u s o f t h e dock hull

to the m o m e n t o f voyage;
k a = 0,8 = f a c t o r o f p e r m i s s i b l e n o r m a l s t r e s s e s ;
rs = a s d e f i n e d i n 1.1.4.3.
n
(3.12.4.8.1-1)
(-7
mm
^perm
where M = design bending moment, i nk N - m , determined b y the
formula
M =
5kJiaBLl
where k
(3.12.4.8.1-2)
= factor o f wave bending m o m e n t determined b y t h e

formula
k = 7 , 9 3 - K T
+ 4,13-W\L JB)-0,125(d
p
t m
, I L J (3.12.4.8.1-3)
tow
1 0
> -(
3 0 0 - Z , , , , , >
100
)
f o r
.d
<
T a b l e
Permissible sea state
, i n m
5
6
7
8
9
2,0-3,5
3,5-6,0
6,0-8,5
8,5-11,0
11,0
3.12.4.8.4
where d
= dock draught amidships during voyage i ntow, i n m ;
h = design wave height, i n m , determined depending o n the
length o fthe dock:
3.12.4.8.4 C o r r e s p o n d e n c e b e t w e e n p e r m i s s i b l e
sea state d u r i n g v o y a g e a n d w a v e s h e i g h t s o f 3 p e r
cent probability o f exceeding level shall be de
t e r m i n e d according t o T a b l e 3.12.4.8.4.
(3.12.4.8.1-4)
h = 10,9 f o r L , ^ 3 0 0 m ;
d
fperm permissible n o r m a l stresses i n l o n g i t u d i n a l b e n d i n g o f the

dock, i nM P a , taken equal to:
150 f o r d o c k s u n d e r 100 m i n l e n g t h ;
150 + 0 , 7 5 ( Z , . - 1 0 0 ) f o r d o c k s b e t w e e n 100 a n d 2 0 0 m
in length;
225 f o r d o c k s o v e r 2 0 0 m i n l e n g t h .
p
r f
3.12.4.8.2 T h e s t i l l w a t e r b e n d i n g m o m e n t M ,
in k N - m , i n t h emidship section o ft h e dock during
the voyage i n t o w shall be reduced t o t h e m i n i m u m
possible level b y suitable ballasting.
3.12.4.8.5 A p o s s i b i l i t y o f v o y a g e o f a d o c k i n
t o w whose architecture a n d relationships o f the d i
mensions differ f r o m those referred t o i n 3.12.1.1
shall be supported using the procedure approved b y
the Register.
3.12.4.8.6 V o y a g e o f a d o c k i n t o w w i t h i n t h e
limits o f o n e a n d t h e same sea is p e r m i t t e d w h e n t h e
e n v i r o n m e n t a l c o n d i t i o n s (sea state) c o r r e s p o n d i n g
t o t h e requirements o f 3.12.4.8.3 t o 3.12.4.8.5 a r e
expected.
202
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
A P P E N D I X
TESTING PROCEDURES OF WATERTIGHT COMPARTMENTS

1
G E N E R A L
T h e s e test procedures shall c o n f i r m the watertightness o f compartments and watertight boundaries, the
structural adequacy o f tanks and weathertightness o f
structures/shipboard outfitting. T h e tightness o f tanks
and tight boundaries of:
n e w ships p r i o r t o delivery; a n d
structures involved i n , o r affected by, m a j o r
conversions o r repairs shall be c o n f i r m e d b y these
test procedures.
2.2 T h e t e s t i n g o f t h e c a r g o c o n t a i n m e n t s y s t e m s
o f l i q u e f i e d gas c a r r i e r s s h a l l be i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h
standards deemed appropriate by the classification
society.
2.3 T e s t i n g o f s t r u c t u r e s n o t l i s t e d i n T a b l e 1 o r 2
shall be specially considered.
3 TYPES O F TESTS A N D DEFINITION O F TESTS
2 APPLICATION
2.1 A l l g r a v i t y t a n k s a n d o t h e r b o u n d a r i e s r e q u i r e d
to b e w a t e r t i g h t o r w e a t h e r t i g h t s h a l l b e t e s t e d a n d p r o v e n
t i g h t a n d s t r u c t u r a l l y a d e q u a t e as f o l l o w s :
gravity tanks for their tightness a n d structural
adequacy;
watertight boundaries other than tank boundaries
for their watertightness; and
weathertight boundaries for their weathertightness.
filling
3.1 T h e f o l l o w i n g t w o t y p e s o f t e s t a r e s p e c i f i e d
in this requirement:
s t r u c t u r a l test is a test t o v e r i f y t h e s t r u c t u r a l
adequacy o f the construction o f the tanks. This m a y
be a h y d r o s t a t i c test or, w h e r e the s i t u a t i o n w a r r a n t s ,
a h y d r o p n e u m a t i c test;
l e a k test i s a t e s t t o v e r i f y t h e t i g h t n e s s o f t h e b o u n d a r y .
U n l e s s a specific test is indicated, t h i s m a y be a h y d r o s t a t i c / h y d r o p n e u m a t i c test o r a i r test. L e a k test w i t h
F o o t n o t e 3 i n T a b l e 1 i n c l u d e s h o s e t e s t as a n a c c e p t a b l e
m e d i u m o f t h e test.
3.2 D e f i n i t i o n o f e a c h t y p e o f t e s t i s a s f o l l o w s :
Hydrostatic Test:
(Leak a n d structural)
A test b y
the space with a liquid to a specified head.
Hydropneumatic Test:
(Leak a n d structural)
A t e s t w h e r e i n t h e s p a c e i s p a r t i a l l y filled w i t h l i q u i d a n d a i r p r e s s u r e a p p l i e d o n t o p o f t h e
liquid surface.
Hose Test:
(Leak)
A test to verify t h e tightness o f the j o i n t b y a j e t o f water.
Air Tests:
(Leak)
A test to verify the tightness b y m e a n s o f a i r pressure differential a n d l e a k detection

solution. I t includes t a n k a i r tests a n d j o i n t a i r tests s u c h as a c o m p r e s s e d a i r test a n d
Compressed A i r Fillet W e l d Test:

(Leak)
v a c u u m b o x test.
V a c u u m B o x Test:
(Leak)
A n a i r t e s t o f a fillet w e l d e d t e e j o i n t w i t h a l e a k i n d i c a t i n g s o l u t i o n a p p l i e d o n t h e
welds.
Ultrasonic Test:
(Leak)
A b o x o v e r a j o i n t w i t h l e a k i n d i c a t i n g s o l u t i o n a p p l i e d o n t h e fillet o r b u t t w e l d s . A v a c u u m
is c r e a t e d inside t h e b o x to detect a n y leaks.
Penetration Test:
(Leak)
A test to verify t h e tightness o f a sealing b y m e a n s o f u l t r a s o u n d .
' M a j o r repair m e a n s a repair affecting structural integrity.

G r a v i t y t a n k m e a n s a t a n k t h a t i s s u b j e c t t o v a p o u r p r e s s u r e n o t g r e a t e r t h a n 70 k P a .
fillet
P a r t II.
Hull
203
4 T E S T
PROCEDURES
4.1 G e n e r a l .
Tests shall be carried o u t i n the presence o f the
s u r v e y o r t o the Register at a stage sufficiently close t o
the c o m p l e t i o n o f the w o r k w i t h all hatches, doors,
w i n d o w s , etc., i n s t a l l e d a n d a l l p e n e t r a t i o n s i n c l u d i n g
pipe connections fitted, and before any ceiling
a n d c e m e n t w o r k is a p p l i e d o v e r t h e j o i n t s . Specific
test r e q u i r e m e n t s are g i v e n i n 4.4 a n d T a b l e 1. F o r
the timing o f application o f coating and the provision
o f safe access t o j o i n t s , r e f e r t o 4 . 5 , 4 . 6 a n d T a b l e 3.
4.2 S t r u c t u r a l test p r o c e d u r e s .
4.2.1 T y p e a n d t i m e o f test.
W h e r e a s t r u c t u r a l test is specified i n T a b l e 1 o r
T a b l e 2, a h y d r o s t a t i c test i n accordance w i t h 4.4.1
w i l l be acceptable. W h e r e practical l i m i t a t i o n s
( s t r e n g t h o f b u i l d i n g b e r t h , density o f l i q u i d , etc.)
p r e v e n t t h e p e r f o r m a n c e o f a h y d r o s t a t i c test, a h y d r o p n e u m a t i c test i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 4.4.2 m a y be
a c c e p t e d as a n e q u i v a l e n t m e t h o d .
P r o v i d e d the results o f a l e a k test are c o n f i r m e d
satisfactory, a h y d r o s t a t i c test f o r c o n f i r m a t i o n
o f s t r u c t u r a l a d e q u a c y m a y be carried o u t w h i l e the
ship is a f l o a t .
4.2.2 N u m b e r o f s t r u c t u r a l tests.
4.2.2.1 A s t r u c t u r a l test shall be carried o u t f o r at
least o n e t a n k o f the same c o n s t r u c t i o n (i.e. t a n k s
o f the same structural design a n d configuration a n d
s a m e g e n e r a l w o r k m a n s h i p as d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e attending surveyor to the Register) o n each ship provided a l l subsequent tanks are tested f o r leaks b y a n
air test.
However, where structural adequacy o f a tank
w a s verified b y s t r u c t u r a l testing required i n T a b l e 1,
t h e s u b s e q u e n t ships i n t h e series (i.e. sister ships b u i l t
i n the s a m e shipyard) m a y be e x e m p t e d f r o m such
testing for other tanks w h i c h have the structural
similarity t o the tested t a n k , p r o v i d e d t h a t the watertightness i n a l l boundaries o f exempted tanks are
v e r i f i e d b y l e a k tests a n d t h o r o u g h i n s p e c t i o n . F o r
sister ships b u i l t several years after t h e last ship o f the
series, s u c h e x e m p t i o n m a y be r e c o n s i d e r e d . I n a n y
case, s t r u c t u r a l testing s h a l l be c a r r i e d o u t f o r a t least
one t a n k for each ship i n order to verify structural
fabrication adequacy.
4.2.2.2 F o r w a t e r t i g h t b o u n d a r i e s o f spaces o t h e r
t h a n t a n k s ( e x c l u d i n g c h a i n l o c k e r s ) , s t r u c t u r a l testing m a y be e x e m p t e d , p r o v i d e d t h a t the w a t e r tightness i n a l l b o u n d a r i e s o f e x e m p t e d spaces are
verified b y l e a k tests a n d t h o r o u g h inspection.
4.2.2.3 T h e s e subsequent t a n k s m a y require
structural testing i f f o u n d necessary after the structural testing o f the first tank.
4.2.2.4 T a n k s f o r s t r u c t u r a l test s h a l l be selected

so t h a t a l l representative s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s are
tested f o r the expected t e n s i o n a n d compression.
4.3 L e a k test p r o c e d u r e s .
F o r the l e a k test specified i n T a b l e 1, a t a n k ai r
test, c o m p r e s s e d a i r fillet w e l d test, v a c u u m b o x test
i n accordance w i t h 4.4.3 t o 4.4.6, o r their c o m b i n a t i o n w i l l be acceptable. A h y d r o s t a t i c o r h y d r o p n e u m a t i c test m a y a l s o be a c c e p t e d as t h e l e a k test
p r o v i d e d 4.5 a n d 4.6 are c o m p l i e d w i t h . A hose test
w i l l a l s o be a c c e p t a b l e f o r t h e l o c a t i o n s as specified i n
T a b l e 1 w i t h F o o t n o t e 3.
A j o i n t a i r test m a y be c a r r i e d o u t i n t h e b l o c k stage
p r o v i d e d a l l w o r k o n the b l o c k t h a t m a y affect the
t i g h t n e s s o f t h e j o i n t i s c o m p l e t e d b e f o r e t h e test. R e f e r
also t o 4.5.1 f o r the application o f final coating a n d 4.6
f o r safe access t o t h e j o i n t a n d t h e i r s u m m a r y i n T a b l e 3 .
4.4 Details o f tests.
4.4.1 H y d r o s t a t i c test.
U n l e s s o t h e r l i q u i d is a p p r o v e d , the h y d r o s t a t i c
t e s t s h a l l c o n s i s t o f filling t h e s p a c e b y f r e s h w a t e r o r
sea w a t e r , w h i c h e v e r is a p p r o p r i a t e f o r t e s t i n g o f t h e
space, t o the level specified i n T a b l e 1 o r T a b l e 2.
I n case a t a n k f o r cargoes w i t h h i g h e r d e n s i t y
s h a l l be t e s t e d w i t h f r e s h w a t e r o r sea w a t e r , t h e
testing pressure h e i g h t shall be specially considered.
4.4.2 H y d r o p n e u m a t i c test.
A h y d r o p n e u m a t i c test w h e r e a p p r o v e d shall be
such t h a t the test c o n d i t i o n i n c o n j u n c t i o n w i t h the
approved Uquid level and air pressure w i l l simulate
t h e a c t u a l l o a d i n g as f a r as p r a c t i c a b l e . T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s a n d r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s f o r t a n k a i r tests
i n 4.4.4 w i l l also a p p l y t o t h e h y d r o p n e u m a t i c test.
4.4.3 H o s e test.
A hose test shall be carried o u t w i t h the pressure
i n the hose nozzle m a i n t a i n e d at least at 2 x 1 0 P a
d u r i n g t h e test. T h e n o z z l e s h a l l h a v e a m i n i m u m
inside d i a m e t e r o f 12 m m a n d be at a distance t o the
j o i n t n o t e x c e e d i n g 1,5 m .
W h e r e a h o s e test is n o t practical because o f possible
damage t o machinery, electrical equipment insulation
or outfitting items, i t m a y be replaced b y a careful v i s u a l
examination o f welded connections, supported where
n e c e s s a r y b y m e a n s s u c h as a d y e p e n e t r a n t t e s t o r
u l t r a s o n i c l e a k test o r a n e q u i v a l e n t .
4.4.4 T a n k a i r test.
A U boundary welds, erection joints and penetrations
i n c l u d i n g pipe connections shall be e x a m i n e d i n
accordance w i t h the approved procedure a n d under
a p r e s s u r e d i f f e r e n t i a l a b o v e a t m o s p h e r i c p r e s s u r e n o t less
t h a n 0,15 x 1 0 P a w i t h a leak i n d i c a t i o n s o l u t i o n appUed.
I t is r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t t h e a i r pressure i n t h e t a n k
be raised t o a n d m a i n t a i n e d a t a b o u t 0,20 x 1 0 P a f o r
approximately one hour, w i t h a m i n i m u m number o f
personnel a r o u n d the tank, before being lowered t o the
test pressure o f 0,15 x 1 0 P a .
5
204
Rules
A U - t u b e w i t h a height sufficient t o h o l d a head

o f w a t e r c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e r e q u i r e d test pressure
shall be arranged. T h e cross sectional area o f t h e
U - t u b e i s n o t t o b e less t h a n t h a t o f t h e p i p e s u p plying a i rt o thetank. I naddition t o U-tube, a master
gauge o r other approved means t o verify t h e pressure
shall be approved.
4.4.5 C o m p r e s s e d a i r f i l l e t w e l d t e s t .
I n t h i s a i r test, c o m p r e s s e d a i r is injected f r o m
one e n d o f a fillet w e l d e d j o i n t a n d t h e pressure
verified a t t h e other e n d o f t h e j o i n t b y a pressure
g a u g e o n t h e o p p o s i t e side.
Pressure gauges shall be arranged so that a n a i r
pressure o f a t least 0,15 x 1 0 P a c a n b e verified a t each
e n d o f a l l passages w i t h i n t h e p o r t i o n being tested.
5
N o t e . W h e r e a leak test o f partial penetration w e l d i n g is

r e q u i r e d a n d t h e r o o t f a c e i s s u f f i c i e n t l y l a r g e (i.e., 6 m m t o 8 m m ) ,
the c o m p r e s s e d a i r test shall b e applied i n the s a m e m a n n e r a s f o r a
fillet w e l d .
4.4.6 V a c u u m b o x t e s t .
A b o x ( v a c u u m tester) w i t h a i r connections, gauges
and inspection w i n d o w is placed over the j o i n t w i t h leak
indicator applied. T h e air w i t h i n t h e b o x is r e m o v e d
b y a n ejector t o create a v a c u u m o f 0,20 x 1 0
to 0,26 x 1 0 P a inside t h e b o x .
4.4.7 U l t r a s o n i c t e s t
A n a r r a n g e m e n t o f a n ultrasonic echoes t r a n s m i t t e r
placed inside o f a c o m p a r t m e n t a n d a receiver outside.
A l o c a t i o n w h e r e t h e s o u n d is detectable b y t h e receiver
displays a leakage i n t h e sealing o f t h e c o m p a r t m e n t .
5
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
4.4.8 P e n e t r a t i o n t e s t .
A test o f b u t t w e l d s b y a p p l y i n g a l o w surface
t e n s i o n l i q u i d t o o n e side o f a c o m p a r t m e n t b o u n d ary. W h e n n o l i q u i d i s detected o n t h e o p p o s i t e side
o f t h e b o u n d a r y after expiration o f a definite time,
the verification o f tightness o f t h e compartments
boundary c a n be assumed.
4.4.9 O t h e r t e s t s .
Other methods o f testing m a y be considered
u p o n submission o f full particulars prior t o commencement o f t h e testing.
4.5 A p p l i c a t i o n o f c o a t i n g .
4.5.1 F i n a l c o a t i n g .
F o r butt j o i n t s b y a u t o m a t i c process, final coating m a ybe applied anytime before completion o f the
l e a k test o f t h e space b o u n d e d b y t h e j o i n t .
F o r all other joints, final coating shall be applied
after t h e c o m p l e t i o n o f the l e a k test o f the j o i n t . R e f e r
also t o T a b l e 3.
T h e s u r v e y o r t o t h e Register reserves t h e r i g h t
to require a l e a k test p r i o r t o t h e a p p l i c a t i o n o f t h e
final coating over automatic erection butt welds.
4.5.2 T e m p o r a r y c o a t i n g .
A n y t e m p o r a r y coating w h i c h m a y conceal defects o r leaks s h a l l b e a p p l i e d a t a t i m e as specified f o r
final coating. T h i s requirement does n o t apply t o
shop primer.
4.6 S a f e a c c e s s t o j o i n t s .
F o r l e a k tests, a safe access t o a l l j o i n t s u n d e r
e x a m i n a t i o n shall be p r o v i d e d . R e f e r also t o T a b l e 3.
T a b l e
Test requirements for tanks and boundaries

Nos.
1
T a n k o r b o u n d a r y to b e tested
Double bottom tanks
Test type
Test head o r pressure
Leak and
structural
T h e greater of:
top o f the overflow,
t o 2,4 m a b o v e t o p o f t a n k , o r
to b u l k h e a d d e c k
Double bottom voids
D o u b l e side tanks
Leak
R e f e r t o 4.4.4 t h r o u g h 4.4.6, a s a p p l i c a b l e
Leak and
structural
2
T h e greater of:
to b u l k h e a d d e c k
3
D o u b l e side voids
D e e p tanks other than those listed

elsewhere i n this table
Cargo oil tanks
Leak
Leak and
structural
2
Leak and
structural
2
T h e greater of:
top o f the overflow, o r
t o 2,4 m a b o v e t o p o f t a n k
T h e greater of:
to t o p o f t a n k p l u s setting o f a n y pressure
relief valve
3
Ballast hold o f b u l k carriers
Leak and
structural
2
T h e greater of:
top o f cargo hatch coaming
Remarks
P a r t II. H u l l
205
Table 1
T a n k o r b o u n d a r y to b e tested
Nos.
8
Test type
Leak and
structural
Peak tanks
Test head o r pressure

T h e greater of:
After p e a k to b e tested after

installation o f stern tube
3
a. F o r e p e a k v o i d s
Leak
b. A f t p e a k voids
Leak
10
Cofferdams
Leak
11
a. W a t e r t i g h t b u l k h e a d s
Leak
b. Superstructure e n d b u l k h e a d
Leak
12
Watertight doors below freeboard

or bulkhead deck
13
Double plate rudder blade
Leak
6 , 7
continued
Remarks
After p e a k to b e tested after

installation o f stern tube
Leak
14
Shaft tunnel clear o f deep tanks
Leak
15
Shell doors
Leak
Hatch covers closed b y

tarpaulins a n d battens
excluded
In addition to structural
test i n i t e m 6 o r 7
16
Weathertight hatch covers a n d

closing appliances
Leak
7 , 8
17
Dual purpose
hatch cover
Leak
7 , 8
18
Chain locker
Leak and
structural
T o p o fchain pipe
19
Independent tanks
Leak and
structural
T h e greater of:
Leak and
structural
T h e greater of:
ballast p u m p m a x i m u m pressure, o r
setting o f a n y pressure relief valve
Leak and
structural
T h e greater of:
1,25 m o f t h e s h i p ' s d e p t h , o r
pressure i n the blowing system
tank/dry
cargo
20
Ballast ducts
21
Sea chests a n d ice boxes
W h i l e testing s e a chests w i t h
steam heating system, i nall
cases t h e test w a t e r h e a d shall
n o t b e less t h a n t h e d e s i g n
pressure i n the heating
system. I f air pipes are fitted
in the sea chests they shall b e
tested b y filling w i t h w a t e r u p
to the t o p o f overflow.
i n c l u d i n g t a n k s a r r a n g e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h ep r o v i s i o n s o f S O L A S r e g u l a t i o n II-1/9.4.
S t r u c t u r a l t e s t s h a l l b e c a r r i e d o u t f o r a t l e a s t o n e t a n k o f t h e s a m e c o n s t r u c t i o n (i.e., s a m e d e s i g n a n d s a m e w o r k m a n s h i p ) o n
e a c h s h i p p r o v i d e d all s u b s e q u e n t t a n k s a r e tested f o r l e a k s b y a n a i r test. H o w e v e r , w h e r e s t r u c t u r a l a d e q u a c y o f a t a n k w a s verified
b y s t r u c t u r a l t e s t i n g , t h e s u b s e q u e n t s h i p s i n t h e s e r i e s (i.e., s i s t e r s h i p s b u i l t i n t h e s a m e s h i p y a r d ) m a y b e e x e m p t e d f r o m s u c h t e s t i n g
for other tanks which have the structural similarity to the tested tank, provided that the watertightness i n all boundaries o f exempted
t a n k s a r e verified b yl e a k tests a n d t h o r o u g h inspection is carried o u t . I n a n y case, structural testing shall b e carried o u t f o r a tleast o n e
t a n k f o r e a c h s h i p i n o r d e r t o v e r i f y s t r u c t u r a l f a b r i c a t i o n a d e q u a c y . R e f e r t o 4.2.2.1.
T o p o f t a n k is deck forming t h et o po f the t a n k excluding a n y hatchways.
" i n c l u d i n g d u c t k e e l s a n d d r y c o m p a r t m e n t s a r r a n g e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f S O L A S r e g u l a t i o n II-1/9.4.
W h e r e a h o s e t e s t i s n o t p r a c t i c a b l e , o t h e r t e s t i n g m e t h o d s l i s t e d i n 4.4.7 t h r o u g h 4.4.9 m a y b e a p p l i c a b l e s u b j e c t t o a d e q u a c y
of such testing m e t h o d s being verified. R e f e r t o S O L A S regulation I I - l / l l . l .
W h e r e w a t e r tightness o f w a t e r t i g h t d o o r h a s n o tb e e n c o n f i r m e d b y p r o t o t y p e test, testing b y filling w a t e r t i g h t spaces w i t h
w a t e r s h a l l b e c a r r i e d o u t . R e f e r t o S O L A S r e g u l a t i o n II-1/16.2 a n d M S C / C i r c . 1 1 7 6 .
A s a n a l t e r n a t i v e t o t h e h o s e t e s t i n g , o t h e r t e s t i n g m e t h o d s l i s t e d i n 4 . 4 . 7 t h r o u g h 4.4.9 m a y b e a p p l i c a b l e s u b j e c t t o t h e
adequacy o f such testing m e t h o d s being verified. R e f e r t o S O L A S regulation I I - l / l l . l .
H o s e t e s t m a y a l s o b e c o n s i d e r e d a s a m e d i u m o f t h e t e s t . R e f e r t o 3.2.
3
206
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T a b l e
Additional test requirements f o r special service ships/tanks

Nos.
Type o f ship/tank
Structures to b e tested
T y p e o f test
Liquefied g a s carrier
Cargo containment
s y s t e m s (refer t o r e m a r k s )
R e f e r t o 4.4.1
Edible liquid tanks
Chemical tanker
Independent tanks
Integral or independent
cargo tanks
Test head or pressure
Remarks
R e f e r t o 4.4.1
Leak and
structural
Refer also to T a b l e 1
for other tanks a n d
boundaries
T h e greater of:
top o f the overflow, or
Leak and
structural
T h e greater of:
to t o p o f t a n k plus setting o f a n y
pressure relief valve
1
T o p o f t a n k is deck f o r m i n g the t o p o f the t a n k excluding a n y hatchways.
T a b l e
Application o f l e a k test, coating a n d provision o f safe access f o r type o f welded joints
T y p e o f welded joints
Coating
L e a k test
Safe access
B e f o r e l e a k test A f t e r l e a k test a n d
before structural
test
Butt
Fillet
Automatic
Not required
Allowed
L e a k test
S t r u c t u r a l test
N/A
N o t required
Not required
M a n u a l or semiautomatic
Required
Not
allowed
Allowed
Required
Not required
Boundary including penetrations
Required
Not
allowed
Allowed
Required
Not required
b o a t i n g refers to internal (tank/hold coating), where applied, a n d external (shell/deck) painting. I t does n o t refer to s h o p primer,
t e m p o r a r y m e a n s o f access f o r verification o f t h e l e a k test.
P a r t II.
Hull
207
APPENDIX
REQUIREMENTS TO SHIP LOADING INSTRUMENTS
G E N E R A L
1.1 T h e p r e s e n t R e q u i r e m e n t s s h a l l b e a p p l i e d
together w i t h those o f Part I I , " H u l l " o f the Rules
and Rules for Technical Supervision during Construction o f Ships and Manufacture o f Materials and
Products for Ships w h e n approving the loading i n struments o f ships w h o s e i n s t r u m e n t s are n o t yet
approved.
1.2 T h e R e q u i r e m e n t s a p p l y t o l o a d i n g i n s t r u ments representing a computer-based system consisting o f software for ship l o a d calculation a n d o f
h a r d w a r e f o r its realization. Requirements pertinent
t o t h e p r o g r a m a n d its f u n c t i o n a l capabilities s h a l l be
f o u n d i n 3.1 a n d S e c t i o n 4 o f this A p p e n d i x respectively. Requirements pertinent to type approval for
h a r d w a r e s h a l l b e f o u n d i n 1.8 a n d 3 . 2 o f t h i s A p pendix.
1.3 A l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t s h a l l n o t s u b s t i t u t e f o r
an approved Loading Manual.
1.4 T h e l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t b e l o n g s t o s p e c i a l
equipment carried onboard, a n d the calculation results o b t a i n e d b y using i t apply o n l y t o the ship f o r
which it was approved.
1.5 S h i p s u n d e r g o i n g m a j o r m o d i f i c a t i o n s o r m o d e r n i z a t i o n , s u c h as l e n g t h e n i n g o r d e c k r e m o v a l
affecting t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l s t r e n g t h o f h u l l , s h a l l be
considered n e w ships f o r the p u r p o s e o f the R e quirements.
1.6 F o r e a c h s h i p , t h e l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t a p proval procedure shall include the following:
basic data verification a n d loading conditions
a p p r o v a l w i t h issuing o f a R e p o r t ( F o r m 6.3.29) f o r
subsequent testing o f the p r o g r a m ;
hardware approval w i t h issuing o f a Certificate
( F o r m 6.5.30) w h e r e necessary;
h a n d o v e r tests w i t h a subsequent issuing o f a
R e p o r t ( F o r m 6.3.10).
1.7 T h e p r o g r a m f o r t h e l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t s h a l l
be t y p e - a p p r o v e d b y the Register w h i c h shall be c o n firmed by issuing a T y p e A p p r o v a l Certificate for
C o m p u t e r P r o g r a m ( F o r m 6.8.5). I n s u c h cases, c e r t a i n
stages m a y be o m i t t e d i n t h e basic d a t a v e r i f i c a t i o n
procedure for a particular ship (refer t o 2.1.7).
1.8 H a r d w a r e s h a l l b e a p p r o v e d , i f t h e r e i s a
single c o m p u t e r f o r w h i c h a T y p e A p p r o v a l C e r t i ficate ( F o r m 6.3.8) was issued i n accordance w i t h
the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.2 o f this A p p e n d i x , o r there
are t w o c o m p u t e r s specially i n s t a l l e d f o r the case
one o f t h e m fails. I f there are t w o computers, n o
t y p e a p p r o v a l is necessary f o r t h e m b u t i n t h i s case,
e a c h c o m p u t e r s h a l l pass h a n d o v e r tests. Besides,
computers being a part o f the shipboard net shall
be a p p r o v e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r w h i c h s h a l l be c o n firmed by issuing a Certificate ( F o r m 6.5.30) i n
accordance w i t h the relevant requirements o f the
Rules Rules for Technical Supervision during
Construction o f Ships and Manufacture o f M a t e rials a n d Products for Ships.
1.9 A R e p o r t ( F o r m 6 . 3 . 1 0 ) s h a l l b e i s s u e d f o r t h e
p r o g r a m o n the basis o f the satisfactory results o f
h a n d o v e r tests o f t h e l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t c a r r i e d o u t
o n b o a r d the ship i n accordance w i t h the requirem e n t s o f 2.3 o f t h i s A p p e n d i x .
2 A P P R O V A L
P R O C E D U R E
2.1 B a s i c d a t a v e r i f i c a t i o n a n d a p p r o v a l . L o a d i n g
conditions approval for p r o g r a m testing.
2.1.1 C a l c u l a t i o n r e s u l t s a n d t h e a c t u a l s h i p d a t a
u s e d f o r t h e p r o g r a m s h a l l be v e r i f i e d o n b o a r d t h e
ship f o r w h i c h the p r o g r a m is i n t e n d e d .
2.1.2 O n r e c e i p t o f a n a p p l i c a t i o n f o r d a t a v e r ification, the Register shall offer to the applicant four
l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s as a m i n i m u m , b o r r o w e d f r o m a n
a p p r o v e d S h i p L o a d i n g M a n u a l a n d t o be used f o r
p r o g r a m testing. These loading conditions shall ensure the l o a d i n g o f each ship c o m p a r t m e n t f o r one
t i m e a t least. T h e s e l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s s h a l l g e n e r a l l y
cover the w h o l e range o f possible ship draughts f r o m
the greatest one i n the loaded c o n d i t i o n to the
smallest one i n the ballasted condition.
2.1.3 C o n t r o l p o i n t s s h a l l g e n e r a l l y b e p o s i t i o n e d
o n transverse bulkheads o r other obvious compartm e n t boundaries. A d d i t i o n a l c o n t r o l p o i n t s m a y be
necessary between the bulkheads o f l o n g holds or
tanks, o r b e t w e e n c o n t a i n e r stacks.
2.1.4 I f t h e t o r q u e o n c a l m w a t e r s h a l l b e d e termined, the software shall demonstrate it o n a
single test l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n o f the ship.
2.1.5 I t i s i m p o r t a n t t h a t t h e b a s i c d a t a i n c l u d e d
i n the p r o g r a m are i n agreement w i t h those contained
in the approved L o a d i n g M a n u a l . Special attention
shall be p a i d t o the f i n a l m a s s v a l u e o f the ship i n the
light c o n d i t i o n a n d the p o s i t i o n o f its gravity centre
a d o p t e d o n the basis o f i n c l i n i n g test o r proceeding
f r o m the results o f the light ship c o n d i t i o n verification.
208
Rules
2.1.6 T h e f o l l o w i n g b a s i c d a t a s h a l l b e s u b m i t t e d t o
the Register by the applicant i n order to verify whether
they are i n agreement w i t h the ship constructed:
p r i n c i p a l dimensions, coefficients o f fineness o f
the lines and, where necessary, the lateral projection
o f the ship;
position o f f o r w a r d and aft perpendiculars and,
w h e r e necessary, the procedure f o r d e t e r m i n i n g the
f o r w a r d and stern draughts at actual draught m a r k
locations;
light ship displacement and its distribution
t h r o u g h the ship length;
lines d r a w i n g a n d / o r tables o f offsets, o r B o n j e a n
scales i n c l u d i n g 21st s e c t i o n o n t h e l e n g t h b e t w e e n
perpendiculars;
c o m p a r t m e n t s description i n c l u d i n g spacing, v o l u m e centres a n d v o l u m e tables ( t a n k capacity tables/
tables s h o w i n g the mass o f U q u i d i n a t a n k filled t o
different levels) w h e r e necessary;
deadweight c o m p o s i t i o n for each loading condition.
Identification details o f the p r o g r a m including
the v e r s i o n n u m b e r shall be verified also.
2.1.7 T h e b a s i c d a t a v e r i f i c a t i o n p r o c e d u r e m a y
be considered t o be c o m p l e t e d , if:
the requirements o f 3.1 o f this A p p e n d i x are
fulfilled i n respect o f the p r o g r a m ;
the p u r p o s e o f t h e p r o g r a m is c l e a r l y f o r m u l a t e d
and the calculation m e t h o d s w i t h the a l g o r i t h m are i n
accordance w i t h the requirements o f the Rules and
for Ships;
the requirements o f Section 4 o f this A p p e n d i x
are fulfilled w i t h regard t o the functional capabiUties
o f the program;
the precision o f calculations m a d e o n the basis o f
t h e p r o g r a m is w i t h i n t h e tolerances s t i p u l a t e d b y 2.5
o f this Appendix;
ship particulars are i n accordance w i t h the req u i r e m e n t s o f 2.1.5 o f this A p p e n d i x ;
the p r o g r a m user's m a n u a l is clear a n d b r i e f a n d
compUes w i t h the requirements o f 2.4 o f this A p p e n d i x a n d is checked a n d d u l y n o t e d b y the Register;
data are given concerning the m i n i m a l requirements for hardware;
ship loading conditions intended for the p r o g r a m
testing are a p p r o v e d w h i c h is c o n f i r m e d by the R e p o r t ( F o r m 6.3.29).
2.1.8 T y p e A p p r o v a l C e r t i f i c a t e f o r C o m p u t e r
P r o g r a m ( F o r m 6.8.5) shall be issued o n the basis o f
the requirements o f 2.2 o f this A p p e n d i x . W h e r e the
p r o g r a m is t y p e a p p r o v e d , t h e basic d a t a v e r i f i c a t i o n
procedure m a y be considered t o be c o m p l e t e d , if:
i t is f o u n d t h a t t h e t y p e - a p p r o v e d p r o g r a m is
applicable to the ship i n question;
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
information contained
in vaUd
Certificate
( F o r m 6.8.5) is i n compUance w i t h the p r o g r a m being
identified a n d its version n u m b e r ;
the p r o g r a m is w i t h i n t h e tolerances s t i p u l a t e d i n 2.5
o f this Appendix;
ship particulars are i n accordance w i t h the req u i r e m e n t s o f 2.1.5 o f this A p p e n d i x ;
the p r o g r a m user's m a n u a l is clear a n d b r i e f a n d
compUes w i t h the requirements o f 2.4 o f this A p p e n d i x a n d is c h e c k e d a n d d u l y n o t e d b y t h e Register;
data are given concerning the m i n i m a l requirements for hardware;
ship loading conditions intended for the p r o g r a m
testing are a p p r o v e d a n d there is a
Report
( F o r m 6.3.29) o n the p r o g r a m o p e r a t i o n testing.
2.1.9 A p p r o v e d l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s g i v e n i n S h i p
L o a d i n g M a n u a l a n d the R e p o r t ( F o r m 6.3.29) are
sent t o the B r a n c h Office b y the R S H e a d Office
n o t i n g the necessity o f h a n d o v e r tests t o be held.
W h e r e t h e ship is i n service, the a p p r o v e d l o a d i n g
conditions a n d the R e p o r t ( F o r m 6.3.29) are sent t o
the shipowner w h o shall ensure that they are delivered o n b o a r d a n d t h a t h a n d o v e r tests are h e l d w i t h
the Register surveyor participating.
2.2 T y p e a p p r o v a l .
2.2.1 A p r o g r a m f o r t h e l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t m a y
be type a p p r o v e d according t o the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f
this C h a p t e r . I f the tests are c o m p l e t e d satisfactorily,
Type A p p r o v a l Certificate for C o m p u t e r P r o g r a m
( F o r m 6.8.5) shall be issued f o r the p r o g r a m .
2.2.2 T h e C e r t i f i c a t e ( F o r m 6 . 8 . 5 ) s h a l l b e v a U d
for an identified version o f the p r o g r a m only.
2.2.3 A f t e r t h e a p p l i c a t i o n f o r t h e t y p e a p p r o v a l o f
a p r o g r a m has been submitted, the Register w i U provide the appUcant w i t h data for its testing f o r t w o ship
types a t least. W h e r e p r o g r a m s u s i n g basic d a t a o n
h u l l shape are concerned, the p r o g r a m test data shaU
be p r o v i d e d f o r three ship types. T h e s e d a t a shaU be
used b y the appUcant f o r r u n n i n g the p r o g r a m i n respect o f t h e tested ships. T h e results ( i n c l u d i n g t h e
data-of-the-Unes-plan curve and the interpolation
curve output, i f appUcable) obtained by using the
p r o g r a m s h a l l be s u b m i t t e d t o t h e R e g i s t e r i n o r d e r
t h e p r e c i s i o n o f c a l c u l a t i o n s m i g h t be assessed. T h e
Register shall m a k e paraUel calculations using the
same basic data a n d c o m p a r e their results w i t h those
obtained by means o f the p r o g r a m submitted.
2.2.4 T h e C e r t i f i c a t e ( F o r m 6 . 8 . 5 ) m a y b e i s s u e d i f :
the requirements o f 3.1 o f this A p p e n d i x are
fulfilled i n respect o f the p r o g r a m ;
the p u r p o s e o f the p r o g r a m is clearly f o r m u l a t e d
a n d the calculation methods w i t h the a l g o r i t h m are i n
accordance w i t h the requirements o f the Rules and Rules
for Technical Supervision during Construction o f Ships
a n d M a n u f a c t u r e o f Materials a n d Products for Ships;
P a r t II.
Hull
the requirements o f Section 4 o f this A p p e n d i x

are fulfilled w i t h regard t o the functional capabilities
of the program;
t h e p r o g r a m is w i t h i n t h e tolerances s t i p u l a t e d i n 2.5
of this Appendix;
the P r o g r a m U s e r ' s M a n u a l is clear a n d brief,
a n d is s u b m i t t e d t o the Register f o r review;
data are given concerning the m i n i m a l requirements for hardware.
2.2.5 T h e C e r t i f i c a t e ( F o r m 6 . 8 . 5 ) s h a l l i n c l u d e a
detailed description o f calculations for w h i c h the prog r a m is a p p r o v e d a n d o f l i m i t a t i o n s i m p o s e d u p o n the
program.
2.2.6 T h e C e r t i f i c a t e ( F o r m 6 . 8 . 5 ) s h a l l b e i s s u e d
for a m a x i m u m period o f 5 years. T h e Certificate m a y
be extended after the developer has c o n f i r m e d t h a t
t h e a l g o r i t h m is u n c h a n g e d i n the p r o g r a m .
2.2.7 A v a l i d C e r t i f i c a t e ( F o r m 6 . 8 . 5 ) w i l l b e i n validated, i f t h e a l g o r i t h m is changed i n the p r o g r a m b y
the developer w i t h o u t p r i o r agreement w i t h the Register.
I n s u c h a case, t h e revised p r o g r a m s h a l l be c o n s i d e r e d a
n e w one.
2.3 H a n d o v e r t e s t s .
2.3.1 H a n d o v e r t e s t s s h a l l b e h e l d s o o n a f t e r t h e
loading i n s t r u m e n t installation aboard the ship.
2.3.2 D u r i n g h a n d o v e r t e s t s , t h e u s e r , o n e o f t h e
senior officers shall use the i n s t r u m e n t f o r calculating
a test l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n o f the ship. T h e o p e r a t i o n
shall be c o n f i r m e d b y a s u r v e y o r t o the Register.
D a t a obtained b y means o f the i n s t r u m e n t shall agree
w i t h those stated f o r the a p p r o v e d test l o a d i n g c o n ditions. W h e r e the numerical output data given by
the i n s t r u m e n t d o n o t agree w i t h those stated i n the
a p p r o v e d test l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s , the
Report
( F o r m 6.3.10) s h a l l n o t be issued.
2.3.3 H a n d o v e r t e s t s s h a l l a l s o b e c a r r i e d o u t i n
respect o f the second c o m p u t e r specially installed t o
be used i f the first o n e fails. D a t a o b t a i n e d b y m e a n s
o f t h e l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t s h a l l agree w i t h those stated f o r the a p p r o v e d tests l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s . W h e r e
the output numerical data o f the loading instrument
do n o t agree w i t h those stipulated f o r the approved
tests l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s , n o R e p o r t ( F o r m 6.3.10)
shall be issued. I f h a n d o v e r tests are effected u s i n g a
computer for w h i c h a T y p e A p p r o v a l Certificate
( F o r m 6.8.3) w a s issued, the second specially installed
c o m p u t e r need n o t be tested.
2.3.4 W h e r e h a r d w a r e i s n o t a p p r o v e d , i t s h a l l b e
d e m o n s t r a t e d t h a t h a n d o v e r tests results f o r the
p r o g r a m are satisfactory for b o t h the first a n d the
second specially installed computer, subsequent t o
w h i c h a R e p o r t ( F o r m 6.3.10) o n the p r o g r a m
h a n d o v e r tests m a y be issued.
2.3.5 A f t e r s a t i s f a c t o r y c o m p l e t i o n o f h a n d o v e r
tests, t h e R e g i s t e r s u r v e y o r s h a l l a t t a c h t h e a p p r o v e d
209
test l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s f o r t h e s h i p , as w e l l as t h e
P r o g r a m Test R e p o r t ( F o r m 6.3.29), t o the P r o g r a m
User's M a n u a l f o r m e r l y d u l y noted by the Register.
T h e n , the R e p o r t ( F o r m 6.3.10) o n h a n d o v e r tests o f
the p r o g r a m w i l l be issued b y the Register.
2.4 P r o g r a m U s e r ' s M a n u a l .
2.4.1 T h e M a n u a l s h a l l b e s u b m i t t e d t o t h e
R e g i s t e r f o r r e v i e w . I n case o f satisfactory results o f t h e
consideration, the M a n u a l shall be d u l y n o t e d b y t h e
Register.
2.4.2 T h e M a n u a l s h a l l b e d r a w n u p i n a b r i e f
a n d clear w a y a n d shall be p r o v i d e d preferably w i t h
drawings and block diagrams.
2.4.3 T h e M a n u a l s h a l l i n c l u d e t h e f o l l o w i n g i n formation:
general description o f the p r o g r a m w i t h indicat i o n o f its version identification n u m b e r ;
a copy o f Type A p p r o v a l Certificate for C o m puter P r o g r a m ( F o r m 6.8.5);
data o n m i n i m a l required hardware properties
necessary f o r p r o g r a m operation;
description o f error messages a n d w a r n i n g rep o r t s t h a t c a n be issued b y c o m p u t e r a n d clear i n structions c o n c e r n i n g the user's s u b s e q u e n t steps i n
t h i s case;
light ship displacement a n d gravity centre o f the
ship coordinates;
full d e a d w e i g h t c o m p o s i t i o n f o r each test l o a d i n g
c o n d i t i o n o f the ship;
values o f permissible shearing forces a n d bending
moments i n calm water given or taken into consideration by the Register;
values o f permissible cargo torque, w h e r e applicable;
c o r r e c t i o n factors f o r shearing forces, w h e r e applicable;
local permissible limitations o n the loading o f
particular holds a n d t w o adjacent holds proceeding
f r o m the m a x i m u m cargo mass for each h o l d i n relation t o the relevant ship draught, where applicable;
example o f ship loading conditions determination
w i t h illustrations and computer data out;
e x a m p l e o f each display screen d a t a o u t w i t h
explanations.
2.5 A l l o w a n c e f o r c a l c u l a t i o n a c c u r a c y .
The accuracy o f calculations m a d e using the
p r o g r a m shall be w i t h i n the range o f acceptable a l lowances given i n T a b l e 2.5. T h e accuracy o f calculations c a n be d e t e r m i n e d b y c o m p a r i n g , at each
c o n t r o l point, the results o f calculations m a d e using
T a b l e
Range of allowancesfor calculation accuracy
Design value
A l l o w a n c e(percentage
of permissible value)
S h e a r i n g f o r c e o n still w a t e r N
B e n d i n g m o m e n t o n still w a t e r M
T o r q u e o n still w a t e r M
t
5
5
5
2.5
210
Rules
the p r o g r a m to those obtained by using a n i n dependent p r o g r a m o f the Register o r a n approved

loading m a n u a l containing the similar basic data.
2.6 H a r d w a r e a p p r o v a l .
T h e h a r d w a r e o f a l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t shall be i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.8 a n d 3 . 2 o f
this A p p e n d i x i f i t is t y p e - a p p r o v e d b y the Register.
3 REQUIREMENTS T O T H E S Y S T E M
3.1 P r o g r a m .
3.1.1 I t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t t h e d e v e l o p m e n t
a n d release o f t h e p r o g r a m be c a r r i e d o u t i n accordance w i t h the relevant international quality
standards (for instance, I S O 9000-3 o r equivalent).
3.1.2 S o f t w a r e s h a l l b e d e v e l o p e d s o a s t o r e n d e r
i t i m p o s s i b l e f o r t h e user t o m o d i f y d a t a files o f t h e
ship containing the following i n f o r m a t i o n :
lightweight displacement o f the ship, lightweight
ship m a s s d i s t r i b u t i o n a n d the r e l e v a n t g r a v i t y centres;
structural restrictions imposed by the Register;
data essential f o r h u l l geometry;
hydrostatic data;
description o f c o m p a r t m e n t s including spacing,
v o l u m e centres a n d v o l u m e tables ( t a n k capacity tables/tables s h o w i n g the v o l u m e o f l i q u i d i n a t a n k
w h e n filled t o different levels) w h e r e necessary.
3.1.3 A n y c h a n g e s t o s o f t w a r e t h a t c a n i n f l u e n c e
l o n g i t u d i n a l s t r e n g t h s h a l l be i n t r o d u c e d b y t h e developer o r his appointed representative, a n d the
Register shall be i m m e d i a t e l y n o t i f i e d accordingly.
The absence o f a n o t i f i c a t i o n o f a n y changes to the
p r o g r a m m a y render the Certificate ( F o r m 6.8.5) issued b y the Register invalid. W h e n the Certificate ( F o r m 6.8.5) is f o u n d t o be i n v a l i d b y t h e Register,
the m o d i f i e d p r o g r a m w i l l be considered a n e w i n
accordance w i t h the requirements o f this Appendix.
3.2 H a r d w a r e o f a n i n d e p e n d e n t c o m p u t e r .
3.2.1 T y p e A p p r o v a l C e r t i f i c a t e ( F o r m 6 . 8 . 3 ) a n d
H a r d w a r e A p p r o v a l Certificate ( F o r m 6.5.30) shall
be issued b y the Register o n c o n d i t i o n the h a r d w a r e
is i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s c o n t a i n e d
i n 3.2.2 o f t h i s A p p e n d i x , as w e l l as w i t h t h e r e quirements o f the Rules and Rules for Technical
Supervision during Construction o f Ships
and
M a n u f a c t u r e o f Materials and Products for Ships.
3.2.2 T h e d e v e l o p e r s h a l l s u b m i t t h e d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n o n the h a r d w s h a l l be installed o n b o a r d .
T h e f o l l o w i n g i n f o r m a t i o n shall be s u b m i t t e d t o the
Register for review:
hardware specification;
the relevant design drawings w i t h indicated m a terials, catalogues, d a t a sheets, calculations a n d
functional descriptions;
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
test p r o g r a m suggested f o r d e m o n s t r a t i o n , c o n firming

that the operational requirements o f the
a b o v e standards c a n be fulfilled;
certificates a n d the r e l e v a n t test reports o b t a i n e d
for the p r o d u c t earlier.
3.2.3
W h e n considering the
documentation
m e n t i o n e d i n 3.2.2, the Register m a y recognize the
validity o f certificates a n d reports issued b y another
certification b o d y o r accredited laboratory.
3.2.4 T h e o p e r a t i o n a l a n d c l i m a t i c t e s t s s h a l l b e h e l d
i n the presence o f the Register representative u n d e r the
s t a n d a r d test c o n d i t i o n s so t h a t a t y p e a p p r o v a l c o u l d be
issued i n accordance w i t h P a r t X V " A u t o m a t i o n " o f the
present Rules a n d P a r t I V "Technical Supervision d u r i n g
Manufacture o f Products" o f Rules for Technical Supervision during Construction o f Ships and M a n u f a c t u r e
o f Materials a n d Products f o r Ships. T h e following i n spections a n d tests s h a l l be c o m p l e t e d satisfactorily:
external examination;
f u n c t i o n a l tests;
disturbance i n electric p o w e r supply;
t h e r m a l resistance testing;
m o i s t u r e resistance testing;
v i b r a t i o n tests;
testing by oscillating and prolonged tilting m o tion conditions;
testing o f i n s u l a t i o n electric strength, i n s u l a t i o n
resistance m e a s u r e m e n t ;
c o l d resistance tests;
e l e c t r o m a g n e t i c c o m p a t i b i l i t y tests.
3.2.5 T h e R e g i s t e r s h a l l b e n o t i f i e d o f a n y m o d ifications to hardware specification.
4 REQUIREMENTS CONCERNING
CAPABILITIES
FUNCTIONAL
4.1 G e n e r a l .
4.1.1 T h e c o m p u t a t i o n a l f u n c t i o n s i n h e r e n t i n t h e
p r o g r a m will depend o n the requirements contained
in the present Rules and i n Rules for Technical Supervision during Construction o f Ships and M a n u facture o f Materials and Products for Ships.
4.1.2 T h e p r o g r a m s h a l l b e c o n v e n i e n t f o r t h e
u s e r a n d be d e v e l o p e d so as t o m i n i m i z e t h e p o s s i bility o f incorrect i n i t i a l data i n p u t b y the user.
4.1.3 C a l c u l a t i o n s o f t h e f o r e , m i d l e n g t h a n d
after d r a u g h t s at relevant perpendiculars shall be
submitted i n a f o r m easily understandable for the
u s e r b o t h i n files a n d a s h a r d c o p i e s .
4.1.4 F o r t h e c a s e o f t h e a c t u a l s h i p l o a d l i n e
positions o f the, the fore, m i d l e n g t h a n d after
d r a u g h t s s h a l l be d e t e r m i n e d a n d s u b m i t t e d i n a f o r m
e a s i l y u n d e r s t a n d a b l e f o r t h e u s e r b o t h i n files a n d a s
h a r d copies. P r o v i s i o n shall be m a d e f o r s u b m i t t i n g
the sagging/hogging data for the hull.
P a r t II.
211
Hull
4.1.5 D i s p l a c e m e n t s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d f o r t h e
particular loading c o n d i t i o n o f the ship a n d the
c o r r e s p o n d i n g v a l u e o f t h e d r a u g h t , a n d s h a l l be
s u b m i t t e d t o t h e u s e r b o t h i n file a n d as a h a r d c o p y .
4.1.6 T h e l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t s h a l l i s s u e p r i n t o u t s
containing output data b o t h i n digital and graphic
f o r m . T h e o u t p u t d a t a i n d i g i t a l f o r m shall be re
p r e s e n t e d b o t h i n t h e a b s o l u t e v a l u e s a n d as p e r c e n t a g e
o f permissible values. P r i n t o u t s shall c o n t a i n descrip
t i o n o f the relevant loading c o n d i t i o n o f the ship.
4.1.7 A l l t h e e l e c t r o n i c a n d h a r d c o p y d a t a s h a l l
be represented i n a f o r m easily understandable f o r the
user w i t h indication o f the identification n u m b e r o f
the p r o g r a m version.
4.2 F o r c e s a n d m o m e n t s o r i g i n a t i n g i n t h e h u l l .
4.2.1 T h e p r o g r a m s h a l l e n s u r e a n a n a l y s i s o f t h e
f o l l o w i n g forces a n d m o m e n t s i n t h e ship h u l l i n ac
cordance w i t h the requirements o f P a r t I I " H u l l " :
shearing force N i n still water, w i t h a correction
where applicable;
bending m o m e n t M
i n still water, w i t h a cor
rection where applicable;
torque M
i n still water, w h e r e applicable.
I n case o f o p e n ships, p a r t i c u l a r a t t e n t i o n s h a l l be
paid to loads under w h i c h h u l l t w i s t i n g occurs.
4.2.2 D a t a t o b e s u b m i t t e d t o o r d u l y n o t e d b y
the Register are included i n T a b l e 4.2.2.
s w
t s w
T a b l e
Design value
Shearing force
o n still w a t e r
5 P E R F O R M A N C E
1. C o n t r o l p o i n t s ( f r a m e n u m b e r s ) f o r N
determination. S u c h points shall generally b e
chosen o n transverse bulkheads or other
obvious boundaries of compartments.
Additional control points m a y be indicated
between the bulkheads o f long holds or tanks,
as w e l l as b e t w e e n c o n t a i n e r stacks.
s
1. C o n t r o l p o i n t s ( f r a m e n u m b e r s ) f o r
determination. S u c h points shall generally b e

chosen o n transverse bulkheads, at hold centres
or other o b v i o u s boundaries o f compartments.
2. P e r m i s s i b l e v a l u e s [ o f M ] , a t s e a a n d i n
p o r t , f o r c o n t r o l p o i n t s m e n t i o n e d i n i t e m 1.
Where necessary, a n additional range of
permissible values [of ]
c a n be specified.
TEST
D a t a to be submitted
to o r d u l y n o t e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r
s w
Torque M
o n still w a t e r
(where
applicable)
4.3 P e r m i s s i b l e l o a d s , l o a d i n g a n d c a p a c i t y .
4.3.1 T h e p r o g r a m u s e r s h a l l b e t i m e l y , c l e a r l y
and unambiguously i n f o r m e d about the following
restrictions imposed by the Register, concerning:
all permissible shearing forces a n d bending m o
m e n t s i n still water;
permissible torques i n still water, w h e r e applic
able;
all local l o a d i n g restrictions pertinent t o b o t h the
loading o f a particular h o l d a n d o f the one adjacent
thereto, where applicable;
mass o f cargo contained i n the hold;
ballast tanks a n d holds capacity;
restrictions o n filling.
4.3.2 V i o l a t i o n o f a n y o f t h e r e s t r i c t i o n s i m p o s e d
shall be easily detectable b y the p r o g r a m user.
4.2.2
2. C o r r e c t i o n f a c t o r s f o r s h e a r i n g f o r c e s a n d
their application procedure.
3. P e r m i s s i b l e v a l u e s [ o f JVm,], a t s e a a n d i n
p o r t , f o r c o n t r o l p o i n t s m e n t i o n e d i n i t e m 1.
Where necessary, a n additional range of
permissible values [of i V j J c a n b e specified.
Bending
moment M
o n still w a t e r
4.2.3 F o r c e s a n d m o m e n t s s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d i n
a b s o l u t e v a l u e s a n d as p e r c e n t a g e o f p e r m i s s i b l e v a
lues, a n d s h a l l be s u b m i t t e d b o t h i n g r a p h i c a l a n d
tabulated f o r m . T h e forces a n d m o m e n t s determined,
as w e l l as t h e i r p e r m i s s i b l e v a l u e s f o r e a c h o f t h e
c o n t r o l p o i n t s indicated, shall be s u b m i t t e d b o t h i n
files a n d as h a r d c o p i e s . A n y l i m i t a t i o n s c o n c e r n i n g
h u l l bending i n the vertical direction i n still w a t e r o r
h u l l t w i s t i n g , f o r instance, m a y be considered o n the
basis o f the requirements o f the Rules.
1. C o n t r o l p o i n t s ( f r a m e n u m b e r s ) f o r M
determination.
2. P e r m i s s i b l e v a l u e s [ o f M ] f o r c o n t r o l
p o i n t s m e n t i o n e d i n i t e m 1.
a
5.1 G e n e r a l .
W h e n a l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t shall be installed o n
b o a r d a n d R e p o r t ( F o r m 6.3.10) o r a report o n its
p r e v i o u s testing b y the R e g i s t e r is n o t a v a i l a b l e , the
Register surveyor shall notify the Register H e a d
Office accordingly.
5.2 E x t e n t o f s u r v e y .
W h e n a l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t is tested, t h e results
o b t a i n e d o n the basis o f the p r o g r a m shall be i d e n
tical t o those g i v e n i n the a p p r o v e d test l o a d i n g
conditions o f the ship. I f the n u m e r i c a l o u t p u t data
obtained using the l o a d i n g i n s t r u m e n t d o n o t agree
w i t h those t o be f o u n d i n the a p p r o v e d test l o a d i n g
c o n d i t i o n s , t h e class a s s i g n m e n t r e q u i r e m e n t s s h a l l be
applied t o the ship a n d the o w n e r shall be n o t i f i e d
accordingly. T h e p r o g r a m shall be tested o n a l l the
computers intended f o r i t (those w h i c h are type ap
p r o v e d o r specially designed f o r the p r o g r a m ) .
See 796c
See 797c
P A R T III. E Q U I P M E N T , A R R A N G E M E N T S A N D O U T F I T
1 GENERAL
1.1
APPLICATION
1.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t P a r t o f t h e
Rules apply to equipment, arrangements and outfit
o f sea-going ships n a v i g a t i n g i n a displacement c o n
dition. T o h y d r o f o i l boats, air c u s h i o n vehicles, h y drogliders a n d o t h e r similar ships, unless expressly
provided otherwise below, the requirements o f this
P a r t are applicable t o the extent t h a t is practicable
and reasonable, and the equipment, arrangements
a n d o u t f i t o f these ships are subject t o special c o n
s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
1.1.2 S h i p ' s e q u i p m e n t , a r r a n g e m e n t s a n d o u t f i t
designed f o r special p u r p o s e s ( s u c h as special a n c h o r
a r r a n g e m e n t s o f dredgers, a deep-sea a n c h o r arrange
m e n t f o r special p u r p o s e ships a n d similar arrange
m e n t s ) are n o t subject t o the Register supervision.
R u l e s a p p l y , as f a r as p r a c t i c a b l e a n d r e a s o n a b l e , t o
floating metallic w i n g - w a l l e d docks, unless expressly
p r o v i d e d otherwise. T h e R u l e s d o n o t specify c o n d i
tions for m o o r i n g o f floating docks i n a particular
place o f o p e r a t i o n a n d selection o f types a n d char
acteristics o f the e q u i p m e n t , arrangements a n d o u t f i t
( a n c h o r , m o o r i n g , etc.) used f o r t h i s p u r p o s e .
T h e definitions and explanations relating to the

general t e r m i n o l o g y o f the Rules are given i n P a r t I
"Classification".
F o r the purpose o f the present P a r t o f the Rules
the following definitions have been adopted:
1.2.1 W a t e r l i n e s .
D a m a g e w a t e r l i n e s are the waterlines o f a
d a m a g e d ship after f l o o d i n g o f c o r r e s p o n d i n g sepa
r a t e c o m p a r t m e n t s o r t h e i r c o m b i n a t i o n s as p r o v i d e d
in Part V "Subdivision".
S u m m e r l o a d w a t e r l i n e is t h e w a t e r l i n e
i n d i c a t e d b y t h e u p p e r edge o f t h e Une w h i c h passes
t h r o u g h the centre o f the ring o f the l o a d Une m a r k
for a ship i n upright position.
S u m m e r t i m b e r l o a d w a t e r l i n e is the
waterline indicated b y the u p p e r edge o f the assigned
s u m m e r t i m b e r load line.
D e e p e s t l o a d w a t e r l i n e is the w a t e r U n e
indicated b y the u p p e r edge o f the assigned upper
m o s t regional o r seasonal l o a d line, including fresh
w a t e r l o a d Unes.
Deepest s u b d i v i s i o n load w a t e r l i n e
is t h e u p p e r m o s t w a t e r U n e a t w h i c h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f P a r t V " S u b d i v i s i o n " are still fulfilled.
M a r g i n l i n e a t d o c k i n g is the e n v e l o p e o f
the waterUnes corresponding t o the m a x i m u m per
m i t t e d t r i m s o f the floating docks a n d d o c k U f t ships
w h e n carrying o u t the docking operations.
1.2.2 D i m e n s i o n s a n d d r a u g h t o f t h e s h i p .
L e n g t h o f s h i p L is t a k e n as 9 6 p e r c e n t o f
the total length o n a waterUne at 85 per cent o f the
least m o u l d e d d e p t h o r as t h e l e n g t h f r o m t h e f o r e
side o f t h e s t e m t o t h e axis o f t h e r u d d e r s t o c k o n t h a t
waterline, i f t h a t be greater.
W h e r e t h e s t e m c o n t o u r is c o n c a v e a b o v e t h a t
waterline, the l e n g t h o f the ship shall be m e a s u r e d
f r o m the vertical projection to that waterUne o f the
aftermost point o f the stem contour (above that w a
terUne).
I n ships designed w i t h a r a k e o f keel the w a t e r U n e
o n w h i c h t h i s l e n g t h is m e a s u r e d s h a l l be p a r a l l e l t o
the design waterline.
L e n g t h o f f l o a t i n g d o c k L is t h e dis
tance measured a l o n g the p o n t o o n deck a n d parallel
t o t h e base Une, b e t w e e n t h e i n n e r sides o f t h e p o n
toon end bulkheads.
M o u l d e d d r a u g h t d is t h e v e r t i c a l d i s t a n c e
measured amidships f r o m the top o f the plate keel or
f r o m the p o i n t w h e r e the i n n e r surface o f the shell
(outer surface i n a ship w i t h a n o n - m e t a l shell) abuts
u p o n the bar keel, to the s u m m e r load waterline.
M o u l d e d d e p t h D is t h e v e r t i c a l distance
measured amidships f r o m the top o f the plate keel, or
f r o m the p o i n t w h e r e the i n n e r surface o f the shell
abuts u p o n the bar keel, to the top o f the freeboard
d e c k b e a m a t side.
I n ships h a v i n g r o u n d e d gunwales, the m o u l d e d
d e p t h shall be m e a s u r e d t o the p o i n t o f intersection
o f t h e m o u l d e d Unes o f t h e f r e e b o a r d d e c k a n d side,
t h e Unes e x t e n d i n g as t h o u g h t h e g u n w a l e w e r e o f
angular design.
W h e r e t h e f r e e b o a r d d e c k is stepped i n t h e l o n g
i t u d i n a l direction a n d the raised p a r t o f the deck ex
tends over the p o i n t at w h i c h the m o u l d e d depth shaU
be d e t e r m i n e d , the m o u l d e d d e p t h shall be m e a s u r e d t o
a Une o f reference extending f r o m the l o w e r p a r t o f the
deck a l o n g a Une parallel w i t h the raised part.
M o u l d e d
breadth
is t h e m a x i m u m
breadth measured amidships f r o m outside o f frame
to outside o f frame i n a ship w i t h a m e t a l shell a n d t o
the o u t e r surface o f the h u l l i n a ship w i t h a shell o f
any other material.
1.2.3 S u p e r s t r u c t u r e s , d e c k h o u s e s .
S u p e r s t r u c t u r e is a d e c k e d s t r u c t u r e o n the
f r e e b o a r d deck, e x t e n d i n g f r o m side t o side o f t h e
ship o r w i t h t h e side p l a t i n g n o t b e i n g i n b o a r d o f t h e
shell p l a t i n g m o r e t h a n 4 per cent o f the breadth B .
P a r t III. Equipment,
Arrangements
and
Outfit
T h e s u p e r s t r u c t u r e m a y be e i t h e r c o m p l e t e , i.e.
extending over the entire ship's length L , o r detached,
i.e. e x t e n d i n g o n l y o v e r a d e f i n i t e p a r t o f t h i s l e n g t h .
B o t h c o m p l e t e a n d d e t a c h e d superstructures m a y be
arranged either i n a single o r several tiers.
D e c k h o u s e
is a d e c k e d s t r u c t u r e o n the
f r e e b o a r d o r s u p e r s t r u c t u r e d e c k w h i c h is set i n f r o m
t h e sides o f t h e s h i p f o r m o r e t h a n 4 p e r c e n t o f t h e
breadth and has doors, w i n d o w s or other similar
openings i n the outer bulkheads. T h e deckhouses
m a y be a r r a n g e d i n a single o r several tiers.
T r u n k is a decked structure o n the freeboard
d e c k w h i c h i s set i n f r o m t h e sides o f t h e s h i p f o r
m o r e t h a n 4 per cent o f the breadth and has n o
doors, w i n d o w s or other similar openings i n the outer
bulkheads.
1.2.4 T i g h t n e s s .
Tight under pressure
head up to...
is t h e t e r m p e r t a i n i n g t o c l o s i n g appliances o f o p e n
ings, w h i c h m e a n s t h a t u n d e r specified pressure the
Uquid w i l l n o t penetrate t h r o u g h the openings inside
the ship.
W e a t h e r t i g h t is t h e t e r m p e r t a i n i n g t o closing
appUances o f openings i n the above-water h u U , w h i c h
m e a n s t h a t i n a n y sea c o n d i t i o n s w a t e r w i U n o t p e n e
trate t h r o u g h the openings inside the ship. T h e above
c l o s i n g appUances s h a U u n d e r g o tests a c c o r d i n g t o t h e
requirements o f 2.3, A p p e n d i x 1 t o P a r t I I " H u U " .
I t is a l l o w e d t h a t the specialized o r g a n i z a t i o n s
r e c o g n i z e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r c a r r y o u t tests b y m e a n s o f
t h e u l t r a s o n i c e q u i p m e n t as w e l l as o t h e r test
methods approved by the Register.
1.2.5 D e c k s .
U p p e r d e c k is t h e u p p e r m o s t c o n t i n u o u s
deck extending f o r the full length o f the ship.
T h e u p p e r deck m a y be stepped.
R a i s e d q u a r t e r d e c k is the after u p p e r
part o f a stepped deck, the f o r w a r d l o w e r p a r t o f
w h i c h is t a k e n as a p o r t i o n o f t h e f r e e b o a r d d e c k .
F r e e b o a r d d e c k is t h e d e c k f r o m w h i c h the
f r e e b o a r d is m e a s u r e d .
I n a ship having a discontinuous deck the lowest
Une o f this deck a n d the c o n t i n u a t i o n o f that Une
p a r a l l e l t o u p p e r p a r t o f t h e d e c k i s t a k e n as a free
b o a r d deck.
Superstructure
deck,
deckhouse
t o p o r t r u n k d e c k is the deck f o r m i n g the t o p
o f a superstructure, deckhouse o r t r u n k , respectively.
Superstructure deck or
deckhouse
t o p o f t h e f i r s t , s e c o n d , e t c . t i e r s is the
deck f o r m i n g the top o f the superstructure o r deck
h o u s e o f t h e first, second, etc. tiers, c o u n t i n g f r o m t h e
freeboard deck.
B u l k h e a d d e c k is the deck u p t o w h i c h the
m a i n transverse w a t e r t i g h t subdivision bulkheads are
carried.
213
T h e b u l k h e a d d e c k m a y be d i s c o n t i n u o u s , i.e.
w i t h a step o r steps f o r m e d b o t h b y m a i n transverse
watertight bulkheads reaching the keel a n d transverse
watertight bulkheads n o t reaching the keel.
L o w e r d e c k s are the decks b e l o w the upper
deck.
W e a t h e r d e c k is t h e deck w h i c h is c o m
pletely exposed to the weather f r o m above a n d f r o m
a t least t w o sides.
P o n t o o n d e c k o f the d o c k is t h e deck o n
w h i c h the ship t o be d o c k e d is fitted.
T o p d e c k o f t h e d o c k is t h e u p p e r m o s t
deck o f the dock (the uppermost deck o f the w i n g
walls).
1.2.6 P e r p e n d i c u l a r s a n d a m i d s h i p s .
A m i d s h i p s is at t h e m i d d l e o f t h e ship's
length L .
F o r w a r d and after
perpendiculars
are t h e v e r t i c a l Unes passing i n t h e centreUne a t t h e f o r e
a n d after ends o f the ship's l e n g t h L , respectively.
1.2.7 S h i p s .
T y p e " A " s h i p is a ship designed t o c a r r y
only Uquid cargoes i n bulk, and i n w h i c h cargo tanks
h a v e o n l y s m a l l access o p e n i n g s closed b y g a s k e t e d
covers tight under a n appropriate inner pressure o f
U q u i d w h i c h is c a r r i e d i n the t a n k s . F u r t h e r m o r e , a
t y p e " A " s h i p s h a l l h a v e s o m e o t h e r features, as de
fined i n the L o a d L i n e Rules for Sea-Going Ships
w h i c h p e r m i t this ship t o be assigned a freeboard
based o n Tables 4.1.2.3, 6.4.2.2 o r 6.4.3.2 o f the
above Rules.
T y p e " B " s h i p is a ship w h i c h does n o t
comply w i t h the requirements regarding type " A "
ships a n d w h i c h is assigned a f r e e b o a r d based o n
T a b l e 4.1.3.2, 6.4.2.3 o r 6.4.3.3 o f t h e L o a d L i n e
Rules for Sea-Going Ships.
A t y p e " B " ship m a y n o t be classified as a
t y p e " A " s h i p e v e n t h o u g h , as a r e s u l t o f h e r f e a t u r e s
detailed i n the L o a d L i n e Rules, a reduction i n tabular
freeboard is p e r m i t t e d u p t o the t o t a l difference
between the values g i v e n i n Tables 4.1.2.3, 6.4.2.2,
6.4.3.2 a n d those i n T a b l e s 4.1.3.2, 6.4.2.3, 6.4.3.3,
respectively, o f the above Rules.
D o c k l i f t s h i p is a d r y cargo ship adapted t o
carry o u t cargo handUng operations using the dock
i n g p r i n c i p l e i n p o r t s a n d protected w a t e r areas.
1.2.8
A c t i v e means
o f the
ship's
s t e e r i n g ( A M S S ) are special p r o p u l s i o n a n d
steering units a n d any c o m b i n a t i o n o f t h e m o r w i t h
the m a i n p r o p u l s i o n devices, capable o f p r o d u c i n g
thrust o r traction force b o t h at a fixed angle to the
centreUne o f the ship a n d at a variable angle, either
under all running conditions or part thereof including
s m a l l a n d zero speed.
T h e active means o f the ship's steering comprise
steerable propellers i n c l u d i n g retractable u n i t s o f a l l
214
Rules
types, active rudders, vertical-axis propellers, waterjets, propellers i n transverse t u n n e l ( a t h w a r t s h i p

thrusters), separate steering nozzles a n d o t h e r devices
o f similar purpose.
1.2.9 S t e e r i n g g e a r .
M a i n
s t e e r i n g g e a r is the machinery,
rudder actuators, steering gear p o w e r units, i f any,
ancillary equipment a n d the means o f applying torq u e t o t h e r u d d e r s t o c k (e.g. tiller o r q u a d r a n t ) n e cessary f o reffecting m o v e m e n t o f the r u d d e r f o r t h e
p u r p o s e o f steering t h e ship u n d e r n o r m a l service
conditions.
A u x i l i a r y s t e e r i n g g e a r is the equipment
o t h e r t h a n a n y p a r t o f the m a i n steering gear necessary t o steer t h e s h i p i n t h e e v e n t o f f a i l u r e o f t h e
m a i n steering gear, b u t n o t i n c l u d i n g t h e tiller,
quadrant o r components serving t h e same purpose.
Steering gear power unit is:
i n t h e case o f electric steering gear a n electric
m o t o r a n d i t s associated electrical equipment;
i n t h e case o f e l e c t r o h y d r a u l i c steering gear a n
electric m o t o r a n d i t s associated e q u i p m e n t a n d
connected p u m p ;
i n t h e case o f o t h e r h y d r a u l i c steering gear a
driving engine a n d connected p u m p .
P o w e r a c t u a t i n g s y s t e m is the hydraulic
equipment provided f o rsupplying power t o turn the
rudder stock, c o m p r i s i n g a steering gear p o w e r u n i t
o r units, together w i t h t h e associated pipes a n d fittings, a n d a rudder actuator. T h e p o w e r actuating
systems m a y share c o m m o n mechanical components,
i.e. tiller, q u a d r a n t a n d r u d d e r s t o c k , o r c o m p o n e n t s
serving t h e same purpose.
S t e e r i n g g e a r c o n t r o l s y s t e m is the
equipment b y w h i c h orders are transmitted f r o m the
navigation bridge t o t h e steering gear p o w e r units.
Steering gear c o n t r o l systems comprise transmitters,
receivers, h y d r a u l i c c o n t r o l p u m p s a n d their associated m o t o r s , m o t o r c o n t r o l l e r s , p i p i n g a n d cables.
1.3 S C O P E O F S U R V E Y
1.3.1 G e n e r a l p r o v i s i o n s o n s u r v e y o f s h i p ' s
equipment, arrangements a n d outfit are given i n
General Regulations for theClassification a n d Other
Activity a n d i nPart I "Classification".
1.3.2 T h e f o l l o w i n g i t e m s i n c l u d e d i n t o s h i p ' s
e q u i p m e n t , arrangements a n do u t f i t a r e subject t o t h e
survey b y the Register during their manufacture.
1.3.2.1 R u d d e r a n d s t e e r i n g g e a r :
.1 r u d d e r stocks;
.2 r u d d e r b l a d e ;
.3 s t e e r i n g n o z z l e s ;
.4 r u d d e r a x l e s ;
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
.5 p i n t l e s o f r u d d e r s a n d s t e e r i n g n o z z l e s ;
.6 b u s h e s o f p i n t l e s ;
.7 f a s t e n i n g s o f r u d d e r s t o c k s , r u d d e r s t o c k w i t h
rudder blade o r steering nozzle, a n d also o f rudder
axle w i t h sternframe ( m u f f couplings, keys, bolts,
n u t s , etc.);
.8 p a r t s o f t h e s y s t e m o f r u d d e r s t o p s ;
.9 r u d d e r s t o c k b e a r i n g s ;
.10 a c t i v e m e a n s o f t h e s h i p ' s s t e e r i n g ( o n l y i n t h e
case specified i n 2.1.3.2).
1.3.2.2 A n c h o r a r r a n g e m e n t :
.1 a n c h o r s ;
.2 c h a i n c a b l e s o r r o p e s ;
.3 a n c h o r s t o p p e r s ;
.4 d e v i c e s f o r s e c u r i n g a n d r e l e a s i n g t h e i n b o a r d
end o f c h a i n cable o r rope;
.5 a n c h o r h a w s e p i p e s .
1.3.2.3 M o o r i n g a r r a n g e m e n t :
.1 m o o r i n g ropes;
.2 m o o r i n g b o l l a r d s , b e l a y i n g c l e a t s , f a i r l e a d e r s ,
chocks, rollers a n d stoppers.
1.3.2.4 T o w i n g a r r a n g e m e n t :
.1 t o w Unes;
.2 t o w i n g b o l l a r d s , b i t t s , f a i r l e a d e r s , c h o c k s a n d
stoppers;
.3 t o w h o o k s a n d t o w i n g r a i l s w i t h f a s t e n i n g s f o r
their securing t o ship's hull;
.4 t o w i n g s n a t c h - b l o c k s .
1.3.2.5 M a s t s a n d r i g g i n g :
.1 m e t a l , w o o d e n a n d glass-reinforced plastic
spars;
.2 s t a n d i n g r o p e s ;
.3 p e r m a n e n t a t t a c h m e n t s t o m a s t s a n d d e c k s
(eyeplates, h o o p s , etc.);
.4 l o o s e g e a r o f m a s t s a n d r i g g i n g ( s h a c k l e s ,
t u r n b u c k l e s , etc.).
1.3.2.6 C l o s i n g a p p U a n c e s o f o p e n i n g s i n h u l l ,
superstructures a n d deckhouses:
.1 side a n d d e c k scuttles;
.2 d o o r s o f b o w , s i d e a n d s t e r n o p e n i n g s i n t h e
shell plating;
.3 d o o r s i n s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s a n d d e c k h o u s e s ;
.4 c o m p a n i o n h a t c h e s , s k y U g h t s a n d v e n t i l a t i n g
trunks;
.5 v e n t i l a t o r s ;
.6 m a n h o l e s t o d e e p a n d o t h e r t a n k s ;
.7 h a t c h w a y c o v e r s i n d r y c a r g o s h i p s a n d t a n k e r s ;
.8 c a r g o t a n k h a t c h w a y c o v e r s i n t a n k e r s ;
.9 d o o r s i n s u b d i v i s i o n b u l k h e a d s .
1.3.2.7 E q u i p m e n t o f s h i p ' s s p a c e s :
.1 ceiUng a n d battens i n c a r g o h o l d s ;
.2 e x i t d o o r s f r o m s h i p ' s s p a c e s i n e s c a p e r o u t e s ;
.3 s t a i r w a y s a n d v e r t i c a l l a d d e r s ;
.4 g u a r d r a i l s , b u l w a r k a n d g a n g w a y s ;
.5 c e l l u l a r g u i d e m e m b e r s i n t h e h o l d s o f c o n tainer ships.
Arrangements
and
Outfit
1.3.2.8 E m e r g e n c y o u t f i t :
.1 c o l l i s i o n m a t s ;
.2 t o o l s ;
.3 m a t e r i a l s .
1.3.3 T h e R e g i s t e r s u r v e y o f t h e m a n u f a c t u r e o f
i t e m s s p e c i f i e d i n 1 . 3 . 2 . 1 . 7 , 1 . 3 . 2 . 1 . 8 , 1.3.2.5, 1 . 3 . 2 . 7 . 1 ,
1.3.2.7.5, 1.3.2.8.2 a n d 1.3.2.8.3 i s c o n f i n e d t o c o n
sideration o f the relevant technical documentation.
1.3.4 F o r i t e m s s p e c i f i e d i n 1 . 3 . 2 t h e f o l l o w i n g
d o c u m e n t s shall be s u b m i t t e d t o the Register:
.1 a s s e m b l y d r a w i n g ;
.2 c a l c u l a t i o n s ( n o a p p r o v a l s t a m p s a r e n e e d e d ) ;
.3 d e t a i l d r a w i n g s i f p a r t s o r a s s e m b l i e s a r e n o t
manufactured i n accordance w i t h standards and
specifications approved by the Register.
1.3.5 M a t e r i a l s u s e d f o r i t e m s s p e c i f i e d i n
1.3.2.1.1 t o 1.3.2.1.5, 1.3.2.2.1, 1.3.2.2.2, 1.3.2.4.3,
1.3.2.6.2 a n d 1.3.2.6.7 t o 1.3.2.6.9 are subject t o t h e
Register survey during manufacture.
1.3.6 T h e f o l l o w i n g e q u i p m e n t , a r r a n g e m e n t s
a n d outfit are subject t o the Register survey w h e n the
ship is u n d e r c o n s t r u c t i o n :
.1 r u d d e r a n d s t e e r i n g g e a r ;
.2 a n c h o r a r r a n g e m e n t ;
.3 m o o r i n g a r r a n g e m e n t ;
.4 t o w i n g a r r a n g e m e n t ;
.5 m a s t s a n d r i g g i n g ;
.6 o p e n i n g s i n h u l l , s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s a n d d e c k
houses a n d their closing appUances;
.7 a r r a n g e m e n t a n d e q u i p m e n t o f ship's spaces;
.8 e m e r g e n c y o u t f i t ;
.9 c e l l u l a r guide m e m b e r s i n t h e h o l d s o f c o n
tainer ships;
.10 a c t i v e m e a n s o f t h e s h i p ' s s t e e r i n g ( r e f e r
to 2.1.3).
1.4
GENERAL
1.4.1 I n s h i p s i n t e n d e d t o c a r r y i n b u l k f l a m
m a b l e U q u i d s w i t h t h e f l a s h p o i n t 6 0 C a n d b e l o w n o
d e c k m a c h i n e r y s h a l l b e fitted d i r e c t l y o n t h e d e c k s
b e i n g t h e t o p o f c a r g o a n d f u e l t a n k s . I n t h i s case, t h e
d e c k m a c h i n e r y s h a l l b e fitted o n s p e c i a l f o u n d a t i o n s ,
the c o n s t r u c t i o n o f w h i c h p r o v i d e s f o r free circula
tion o f air underneath the machinery.
1.4.2 T o w i n g a n d m o o r i n g a r r a n g e m e n t s p l a n
c o n t a i n i n g the relevant i n f o r m a t i o n shall be available
on board for the guidance o f the master. T h e i n
f o r m a t i o n p r o v i d e d o n the p l a n i n respect o f ship
board equipment shall include:
type a n d location o n the ship;
safe w o r k i n g l o a d ( S W L ) ;
purpose ( m o o r i n g / h a r b o u r t o w i n g / e s c o r t service);
m a n n e r o f applying t o w Une o r m o o r i n g line load
i n c l u d i n g l i m i t i n g fleet angles.
215
A l s o the n u m b e r o f m o o r i n g Unes together w i t h

the b r e a k i n g strength o f each m o o r i n g Une shall be
indicated o n the plan.
T h i s i n f o r m a t i o n shall be i n c o r p o r a t e d i n t o the
pilot card i n order to provide the pilot w i t h the proper
i n f o r m a t i o n o n h a r b o u r operations/escort service.
1.5 W O R K I N G A N D A L L O W A B L E
STRESSES
1.5.1 W h e r e v e r t h e w o r k i n g s t r e s s e s a r e m e n
tioned i n the text o f the present P a r t o f the Rules,
t h e y m e a n e q u i v a l e n t stress(es) a , i n M P a , de
termined by the f o r m u l a
e q
= 1<5 +
where
(1.5.1)
= n o r m a l stresses i n the section u n d e r consideration,

in M P a ;
x = shear stresses i n the section u n d e r consideration,
in M P a .
T h e strength c o n d i t i o n s shall be checked against

these stresses.
1.5.2 A l l o w a b l e s t r e s s e s w i t h w h i c h t h e c o m b i n e d
stresses s h a l l be c o m p a r e d w h e n v e r i f y i n g t h e
strength c o n d i t i o n s are specified i n the present P a r t i n
fractions o f t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress o f t h e m a t e r i a l
used; t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress s h a l l n o t be t a k e n as m o r e
t h a n 0,7 t i m e s the tensile strength o f this m a t e r i a l ,
unless expressly p r o v i d e d otherwise.
1.6 M A T E R I A L S A N D W E L D I N G
1.6.1 S t e e l f o r g i n g s a n d c a s t i n g s , s t e e l p l a t e s , sec
t i o n s a n d b a r s a n d a l s o c h a i n steel u s e d f o r i t e m s spe
cified i n 1.3.2.1.1 t o 1.3.2.1.5, 1.3.2.1.7, 1.3.2.2.1,
1 . 3 . 2 . 2 . 2 , 1 . 3 . 2 . 4 . 3 , 1 . 3 . 2 . 6 . 2 , 1 . 3 . 2 . 6 . 7 a n d 1.3.2.6.9 s h a U
meet the relevant requirements o f Part X I I I "Materi
als". M a t e r i a l s f o r o t h e r i t e m s o f e q u i p m e n t , arrange
m e n t s a n d o u t f i t shaU m e e t the r e q u i r e m e n t s specified
i n the design d o c u m e n t a t i o n approved b y the Register,
unless expressly p r o v i d e d otherwise i n the Rules.
1.6.2 T h e g r a d e s o f s t e e l p l a t e s a n d s e c t i o n s ( r e f e r
to Tables 3.2.2-1 a n d 3.2.2-2, P a r t X I I I " M a t e r i a l s " )
for i t e m s specified i n 1.3.2.1.2 a n d 1.3.2.1.3 s h a l l be
selected a c c o r d i n g t o 1.2.3.1, P a r t I I " H u l l " i n the
s a m e m a n n e r as f o r h u l l s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s o f ca
t e g o r y I I ; i n t h i s case, f o r ships o f ice categories A r c 4
a n d h i g h e r a n d f o r icebreakers steel n o t l o w e r t h a n
G r a d e shall be adopted, a n d f o r r u d d e r blades o f
icebreakers, n o t l o w e r t h a n G r a d e D . F o r items
specified i n 1.3.2.6.2 t h e grades o f steel plates a n d
sections o f the m a i n c a r r y i n g f r a m i n g m e m b e r s a n d
p l a t i n g o f c o v e r s t r u c t u r e s e n s u r i n g fixing o f i t e m s
w h e n s t o w e d f o r sea, as w e l l as e s s e n t i a l p a r t s o f
d r i v e r s i n t e n d e d f o r o p e n i n g a t sea s h a l l be selected
216
according t o 1.2.3.1, P a r t I I " H u l l " as f o r h u l l

structural members o fcategory II.
1.6.3 W e l d i n g o f s t r u c t u r a l e l e m e n t s o f s h i p ' s
equipment, arrangements a n d outfit shall be per
formed i n accordance w i t h t h e requirements o f
P a r t X I V " W e l d i n g " ; besides, w e l d e d structures a n d
j o i n t s o f i t e m s specified i n 1.3.2.6.2, 1.3.2.6.7 a n d
1.3.2.6.9 s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e a p p l i c a b l e r e q u i r e
m e n t s o f 1.7, P a r t I I " H u l l " .
a does n o t include t h e c o m p o n e n t o f t h e static

weight.
1.7.3 T h e d i m e n s i o n l e s s a c c e l e r a t i o n a d u e t o
transverse displacement, y a w a n d r o l l n o r m a l t o t h e
centreline o f the ship shall b e determined b y t h ef o r m u l a
z
+ (5,3 -
4") (4-
0,45) (
(1.7.3-1)
k\ =
coefficient o f stability t o b e determined b y t h e

formula
13GM
'
kv
(1.7.3-2)
I f k\ a s d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (1.7.3-2), i s b e l o w 1,0,
k\ = 1,0 s h a l l b e a s s u m e d f o r c a l c u l a t i n g ay,
G M = transverse metacentric height o f loaded ship when
the v o l u m e a n d distribution o f stores are such a s t o
yield m a x i m u m G M , i n m ;
3=
ship's breadth, i n m ;
z = vertical distance, i n m , f r o m the s u m m e r load waterline
to the centre o f gravity o fequipment, arrangement o r
batch o fcargo items i n question; z is positive a b o v e
a n d negative b e l o w the s u m m e r load waterline.
a includes t h e c o m p o n e n t o f the static w e i g h t i n

the transverse direction d u e t o rolling.
1.7.4 T h e d i m e n s i o n l e s s a c c e l e r a t i o n a d u e t o l o n g i
tudinal displacement a n d pitch n o r m a l t o t h e midship
section plane shall b e determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
y
a=
x
aoV>
where
where
+ 0,6^ J )
(1.7.2-1)
V_
34 6 0 0 / 1 . .
a o = 0,2; +
>
yjL
L
+ 2 , 5 ( J - 0 , 4 5 ) + k {\
0>
SEA
1.7.1 T h e d i m e n s i o n l e s s , g r a v i t y r e l a t e d , d e s i g n
accelerations d u e t o heave o f t h e sea as described i n
this Chapter shall be applied w h e n determining t h e
loads u p o n equipment, arrangements a n d batches o f
cargo i t e m s carried b y ships o f unrestricted service
and those o f restricted area o f navigation R l .
W i t h regard t o ships o f o t h e r areas o f n a v i g a t i o n ,
accelerations m a y be applied different f r o m those
required herein w h i c h shall be substantiated b y cal
culations approved b y t h e Register.
1.7.2 T h e d i m e n s i o n l e s s a c c e l e r a t i o n a d u e t o
heave, pitch a n d roll n o r m a l t o the water planes o f
the ship shall be determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
a = aoy/l
a =a JOfi
where
1.7 D E S I G N A C C E L E R A T I O N S D U E T O H E A V E O F T H E
Ships
0 6
+ * 2 0,25k
(1.7.4-1)
k = factor determined from the formula

2
(1.7.2-2)
(1.7.4-2)
V = m a x i m u m ahead speed, i nknots, with t h eship o n

s u m m e r l o a d w a t e r l i n e o n still w a t e r ;
L = ship's length, i n m ;
x = longitudinal distance from thecentre o f gravity o f
equipment, arrangement o r batch o f cargo items i n
question t othe aft perpendicular;
C block coefficient.
B
a includes t h e c o m p o n e n t o f the static w e i g h t i n

the longitudinal direction due t o pitching.
1.7.5 W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g l o a d s i t s h a l l b e c o n
sidered t h a t t h e accelerations calculated using a, a
and a act independently o feach other.
x
2 RUDDER AND STEERING GEAR

2.1
G E N E R A L
2.1.1 E v e r y s h i p , e x c e p t f o r s h i p b o r n e b a r g e s ,
shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h a reliable device ensuring h e r
steering a n d course-keeping facilities (refer t o 2.10).
S u c h devices m a y b e rudder, steering nozzle, etc.,
I n t h e r e q u i r e m e n t o f t h e case o f n o n - p r o p e l l e d
vessels o f t h e d r e d g i n g f l e e t w i t h r e g a r d t o t h e a r e a o f
n a v i g a t i o n a n d service c o n d i t i o n s t h e R e g i s t e r m a y a l l o w
t o o m i t such device o r p r o v i d e o n l y stabilizers. T h e area
o f n a v i g a t i o n a n d service c o n d i t i o n s t a k e n i n t o a c c o u n t
w h e n i t is a l l o w e d t o o m i t such device o r t o p r o v i d e o n l y
stabilizers a r e subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e
2.1.2 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t S e c t i o n a p p l y
o n l y t o o r d i n a r y streamlined rudders o r steering nozzles
w i t h streamlined profiles a n d rigidly fixed stabilizers.
U n o r d i n a r y rudders, steering nozzles w i t h steerable
s t a b i l i z e r s , V o i t h - S c h n e i d e r p r o p e l l e r s , etc. a r e s u b j e c t t o
s p e c i a l c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
2.1.3 A c t i v e m e a n s o f t h e s h i p ' s s t e e r i n g .
2.1.3.1 T h e a c t i v e m e a n s o f t h e s h i p ' s s t e e r i n g
m a y be b o t h the means supplementary t o t h e regu-
Part
III. Equipment,
Arrangements
and
Outfit
217
lated m i n i m u m (refer t o 2.1.1) a n d t h em a i n m e a n s o f

the ship's steering.
2.1.3.2 T a k i n g i n t o a c c o u n t t h e s h i p ' s p u r p o s e ,
design features a n d i n t e n d e d service c o n d i t i o n s i t
m a y be permitted, o n agreement w i t h t h e Register,
that t h e regulated steerability o f t h e ship shall be
p r o v i d e d a t t h e l o w speed b y simultaneous o p e r a t i o n
o f t h e devices specified i n2.1.1 a n d t h e active m e a n s
o f t h e ship's steering.
I n case w h e r e t h e A M S S a r e t h e m a i n m e a n s o f
the ship's steering t h e regulated steerability shall be
ensured under those r u n n i n g conditions o f the ship
for w h i c h the means are intended.
I n a n y case, i t s h a l l b e d e m o n s t r a t e d b y t h e m e t h o d
recognized b y t h e Register that t h e steerability w i l l n o t
t h e n b e a t least w o r s e t h a n t h a t ensured i n case o f
fulfilment o f t h e requirements o f 2.10.
2.1.3.3 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r A M S S c o n s t r u c t i o n a n d
design, exclusive o f t h e separate steering nozzles a n d
rudder section o f t h e active rudders a r e outlined i n
Part V I I "Machinery Installations". Requirements
for A M S S used i nthe d y n a m i c positioning systems o f
m o b i l offshore drilling units shall be fulfilled w i t h
consideration f o r Rules f o r t h e Classification a n d
Construction o f M o b i l e Offshore Drilling Units.
2.1.4 T h e n u m b e r o f r u d d e r p i n t l e s s u p p o r t i n g
the rudder is n o t regulated b y t h e Register, except f o r
icebreakers a n d ships o f ice categories A r c 4 a n d
h i g h e r f o r w h i c h t h i s n u m b e r s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n
t h a t g i v e n i n T a b l e 2.1.4.
T a b l e 2.1.4
Categories o f icebreakers
and icestrengthening i n ships
2.1.6 W h e n c h e c k i n g t h e r u d d e r o r s t e e r i n g n o z
zle p i n t l e s a n d r u d d e r s t o c k b e a r i n g s f o r s u r f a c e
pressure, t h e latter shall n o t exceed t h e values i n
dicated i n T a b l e 2.1.6.
T a b l e 2.1.6
Surface pressure p , i nM P a
Materials
W a t e r l u b r i c a t i o n Oil lubrication
2,4
Stainless steel o r b r o n z e against
l i g n u m vitae
S t a i n l e s s steel o r b r o n z e a g a i n s t O n special agreement
with the Register
textolite o r synthetic materials
Stainless steel against b r o n z e o r
6,9
vice versa
Steel against white metal
4,4
2.1.7 I n s h i p s o f i c e c a t e g o r y A r c 5 , t h e a r
r a n g e m e n t o f t w o steering nozzles ( i n case o f t w i n screw ships) is subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e
2.1.8 I n s h i p s o f i c e c a t e g o r i e s A r c 4 a n d h i g h e r
the structural measures f o r ice protection o f steering
nozzles a r e subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e
2.1.9 F o r p a s s e n g e r s h i p s a n d s p e c i a l p u r p o s e
ships c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 6 0 persons h a v i n g l e n g t h
o f 120 m o r m o r e o r having three o r m o r e m a i n
vertical zones, t h e steering gear shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e
requirements o f 2.2.6.8, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n "
(refer also t o 2.2.6.7.2 o f t h e above P a r t ) .
Number o f rudder
pintles
Icebreaker!), Icebreakers
Icebreaker?, Icebreaker6, Arc7, Arc8, Arc9
, A r c 5
Arc4
4
3
2
1
I n e x c e p t i o n a l cases, i n icebreakers a n d ships o f

ice c a t e g o r y A r c 7 , A r c 8 , A r c 9 t h e n u m b e r o f r u d d e r
p i n t l e s i n d i c a t e d i n T a b l e 2.1.4, m a y b e r e d u c e d t o
two o n agreement w i t h t h e Register; t h e conditions
under w h i c h this reduction m a y be permitted are
I n icebreakers a n d ships o f ice category A r c 7 ,
A r c 8 , A r c 9 t h e steering nozzles shall n o t be fitted.
I n s h i p s o f i c e c a t e g o r i e s A r c 4 , A r c 5 , t h e
arrangement o f t h e steering nozzle w i t h o u t t h e l o w e r
p i n t l e i n t h e solepiece i s n o t p e r m i t t e d .
2.1.5 W h e r e v e r t h e u p p e r y i e l d s t r e s s R
o f the
m a t e r i a l used enters i n t o t h e f o r m u l a e o f this Section,
t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 1.5.2 s h a l l b e t a k e n i n t o a c c o u n t ,
b u t i n a l l c a s e s t h e u p p e r y i e l d s t r e s s Re o f t h e
material shall n o t be taken m o r e than 390 M P a .
e
2.2 I N I T I A L D E S I G N
DATA
2.2.1 T h e i n i t i a l d e s i g n d a t a s p e c i f i e d i n t h i s
C h a p t e r are v a l i d o n l y f o r t h e choice o f scantUngs o f
o r d i n a r y rudders a n d steering nozzles w i t h rigidly
fixed stabiUzers a n d c a n n o t be used f o r d e t e r m i n a t i o n
o f steering gear o u t p u t characteristics. M e t h o d s o f
d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f these characteristics a r e n o t regu
lated b y t h e Register, a n d t h e relevant calculations
are n o t subject t o a p p r o v a l b y t h e Register. T h e
steering gear is checked b y t h e Register d u r i n g sea
trials o ft h e ship t o m a k e sure t h a t t h e steering gear
o u t p u t characteristics c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements
o f 2.9.2, 2.9.3a n d 2.9.8.
2.2.2 R u d d e r f o r c e a n d r u d d e r t o r q u e .
2.2.2.1 T h e r u d d e r b l a d e f o r c e F , i n k N , f o r t h e
ahead condition shall be determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
F=F
+ F
(2.2.2.1-1)
w h e r e F j = 5,59-10%fc (6,5 + ) ^ C ) A V;
(2.2.2.1-2)
(2.2.2.1-3)
= 0 , 1 7 7 ^ ( 6 , 5 + XyL.A
where
k\ = f a c t o r e q u a l t o :
218
Rules
1,0 f o r r e c t a n g u l a r a n d t r a p e z o i d a l r u d d e r s , e x c e p t
for rudders b e h i n d the r u d d e r post;
0,95 f o r s e m i s p a d e r u d d e r s ( r u d d e r s o f t y p e s I , I I ,
V I I a n d V I I I i n F i g . 2.2.4.1);
0,89 f o r r u d d e r s b e h i n d t h e r u d d e r p o s t ( r u d d e r s o f
t y p e s I V , X a n d X I I I i n F i g . 2.2.4.1);
ki = f a c t o r e q u a l t o :
1,0 f o r r u d d e r s o p e r a t i n g d i r e c t l y b e h i n d t h e
propeller;
1,25 f o r r u d d e r s n o t o p e r a t i n g d i r e c t l y b e h i n d t h e
propeller;
X = value determined b ythe formula
-ti/A
where
= m e a n height o f t h e rudder blade part abaft t h e

centreline o fthe r u d d e r stock, i n m ;
A , = s u m o fthe rudder area a n d lateral area o fthe rudder
h o r n o r rudder post, i f a n y , within t h e height
hr, i n m . I n c a s e o f n o r u d d e r h o r n o r r u d d e r p o s t ,
the value o f A , is taken a sA i nthe calculations;
A = rudder area, i n m ;
A = portion o fthe r u d d e r area i n the w a k e o fthe propeller
w h e n the r u d d e r i si n the non-reversed position, i n m ;
b\ = v a l u e e q u a l t o :
2,2 f o r r u d d e r s s i t u a t e d a t t h e c e n t r e l i n e o f t h e s h i p ;
2,32 f o r s i d e r u d d e r s ;
C = b l o c k coefficient with t h eship o n t h es u m m e r l o a d
waterline;
V = m a x i m u m a h e a d speed with the ship o nthe s u m m e r
load waterline, i n knots;
T = p r o p e l l e r t h r u s t a t t h e s p e e d V, i n k N , ( r e f e r
t o 2.2.2.6);
D = propeller diameter, i n m .
r
of Sea-Going
Ships
negative v a l u e o f the area f o r m e d b y t h e leading edge o f

the r u d d e r blade a n d t h e rudder stock centre line.
F o r icebreakers a n d ships o f ice categories A r c 4 ,
A r c 5 , , A r c 7 , A r c 8 a n d A r c 9 t h e r u d d e r t o r
que M , i n l c N m , d u e t o t h e force F specified i n 2.2.2.2,
s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
t
M,=0,35F b
3
where
(2.2.2.3-2)
b = distance f r o m t h e centre line t o t h e rear edge o f the

r u d d e r blade at the level o fthe m i d h e i g h t o f the r u d d e r
blade, i n m .
T
(2.2.2.1-4)
and Construction
2.2.2.4 F o r t h e a s t e r n c o n d i t i o n t h e r u d d e r t o r
que
> k N m , s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n less t h a n d e
m
,= * 4 ^ ( o , 7 - ^ ) i 4
(2.2.2.4)
where
foi=
factor equal to:

0,185 f o r r u d d e r s o p e r a t i n g d i r e c t l y b e h i n d t h e
propeller;
0,139 f o r r u d d e r s n o t o p e r a t i n g d i r e c t l y b e h i n d
the propeller;
m a x i m u m specification speed o f t h e ship f o r t h e
a s t e r n c o n d i t i o n , b u t n o t l e s s t h a n 0,5f, i n k n o t s .
v=
as
2.2.2.5 F o r t h e a s t e r n c o n d i t i o n t h e r u d d e r b l a d e
f o r c e Fas > k N , s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
m
2.2.2.2 T h e v a l u e o f t h e f o r c e F s p e c i f i e d
i n 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n less t h a n F , i n k N ,
3
F = k A
3
(2.2.2.5)
(2.2.2.2)
where
F, = M
fc>
factor equal to:

171 f o r i c e b r e a k e r s o f c a t e g o r y I c e b r e a k e r 9 ;
110 f o r i c e b r e a k e r s o f c a t e g o r y I c e b r e a k e r 6 a n d
f o r s h i p s o f ice c a t e g o r y A r c 9 ;
95 f o r s h i p s o f i c e c a t e g o r y A r c 8 ;
75 f o r s h i p s o f i c e c a t e g o r y ;
18 f o r o t h e r s h i p s .
W h e n determining the bending moments a n d

reactions o fthe supports according t o t h e provisions
o f 2.2.4 t o 2.2.7 f o r t h e a s t e r n c o n d i t i o n , t h e force
shall be considered as t h e force F \ , a n d t h e value
of F is then taken equal t o zero.
2.2.2.6 I n c a s e r e l i a b l e d a t a a r e n o t a v a i l a b l e o n t h e
value o f t h e propeller thrust m e n t i o n e d i n 2.2.2.1, t h e
v a l u e o f T, i n k N , m a y b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a e :
2
for fixed-pitch
W h e n t h e value o f t h e force F is greater t h a n
t h a t o f t h e force F specified i n2.2.2.1, i n subsequent
c a l c u l a t i o n s t h e v a l u e o f F i s t a k e n i n s t e a d o f F, a n d
the value F is t a k e n equal t o zero.
2.2.2.3 F o r t h e a h e a d c o n d i t i o n t h e r u d d e r t o r
q u e M , i n k N m , s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n less t h a n d e
propellers
T = 0,0441 (
J ^ ' a ^ g -n D y,
2
(2.2.2.6-1)
for controllable-pitch propellers
110JV,
T = 0,0441 ( -
v(b
< = 4 ( '
(2.2.2.3-1)
- )
where
C)
B
\j-
n D$)
(2.2.2.6-2)
N = n o m i n a l total output o f the propulsion plant o f the

ship divided b y the n u m b e r o fthe propellers, i n k W ;
n = n u m b e r o fpropeller revolutions per second, i n s ;
H i = propeller pitch a t t h ezero thrust, i n m , determined
b y the formula
e
_ 1
where
A - part o f the rudder blade

centreline, i n m .
x
area
forward
o fits
F o r single-plate solid-cast rudders w i t h t h e leading

edge a f t o f the r u d d e r stock centre line A \ i s t a k e n as t h e
0 055 .
?
9 + 0,3'
design propeller pitch, i n m ;
(2.2.2.6-3)
9=
z=
Arrangements
and
Outfit
blade area ratio;

n u m b e r o fpropeller blades.
219
where
2.2.3 S t e e r i n g n o z z l e r u d d e r f o r c e a n d t o r q u e .
2.2.3.1 T h e t o t a l f o r c e F, i n k N , a c t i n g o n t h e
s t e e r i n g n o z z l e a n d s t a b i l i z e r s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n less
than determined b y the formula
F=F
+ F
where
(2.2.3.1-1)
s t
F = force acting o n the steering nozzle, i n k N ;

F = force acting o n the stabilizer, i n k N ;
n
6 = 0,796 0,01 \ { C
F' a n d F a r e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a e :
(2.2.3.1-2)
(2.2.3.1-3)
s t
inner m i n i m u m steering nozzle bore, i n m ;

steering nozzle length, i n m ;
area o f steering nozzle stabilizer, i n m ;
speed, i nknots, determined b y the formula
2
v = v ( l W)
(2.2.3.1-4)
where
W = average w a k e factor. I ncase reliable experimental

data a r e n o tavailable, t h ew a k e factor m a y b e
^ = 065?,
yJl/A/D
= b l o c k coefficient o f the ship;

A = volume displacement, i n m ,with t h e ship o n
s u m m e r load waterline;
n = n u m b e r o f propellers;
D = propeller diameter, i n m ;
v = m a x i m u m ahead speed, i n knots, with t h e ship o n
s u m m e r l o a d waterline; this speed shall n o t b e t a k e n
less than:
17 k n o t s f o r s h i p s o f i c e c a t e g o r y A r c 5 a n d ;
14 k n o t s f o r s h i p s o f i c e c a t e g o r y A r c 4 ;
11 k n o t s f o r o t h e r s h i p s ;
p , q = coefficients determined b y the formulae:
B
p = 78,4 5 5 , 6 ^ +
? = 7 , 4 3 5,12\
CHB
C
(44,0 3 3 A ^ X
) C
( 2 , 8 2 2,2X)C
(2.2.3.1-7)
HB>
= 9,3STftl? iib
(2.2.3.1-8)
T = p r o p e l l e r t h r u s t a t s p e e d v, i n k N ;
D = propeller diameter, i n m ;
X is determined b y the formula
p
K = UD,;
m=
(2.2.3.1-9)
coefficient d e t e r m i n e d b y the f o r m u l a
2
m = 4 , 5 0,12Q. 5,43) ;
X
ST
2.2.3.3 T h e t o t a l t o r q u e M i n k N m , f o r t h e
steering nozzle shall b edetermined b y t h e f o r m u l a
M =M
where
where
(2.2.3.1-11)
h = height o f steering nozzle stabilizer, i n m ;

lst= length o f steering nozzle stabilizer, in m .
r = l {bk
where
(2.2.3.3-1)
M = torque o f force F i n k N m ;
M = torque o f force F , i n k N m ;
M a n d M are determined b y the formulae:
n
s t
M = F ( l ^ r );
M =F (a + r )
n
where
(2.2.3.3-2)
(2.2.3.3-3)
s t
s t
a = distance between the centre line o f the r u d d e r stock

a n d the leading edge o f the stabilizer, i n m .
I n a n y case, t h e t o t a l t o r q u e M f o r t h e steering
n o z z l e s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n less t h a n t h e m i n i m u m v a l u e
of torque M ^ , i n k N m , determined b y the formula
t
m i n
=^^(0,72/-/ ,) + ^
( n ~ l r ,
+ 0,5/ ).
am
(2.2.3.3-4)
2.2.4 B e n d i n g m o m e n t s a n d r e a c t i o n s o f s u p p o r t s
f o r r u d d e r s o f t y p e s I I V , V I a n d s t e e r i n g
n o z z l e s o f t y p e V ( F i g . 2.2.4.1).
2.2.4.1 T h e d e s i g n v a l u e s o f t h e b e n d i n g m o m e n t s
and reactions o f supports shall b e determined f r o m
the f o r m u l a e o f this C h a p t e r depending o n t h e types
o f t h e rudders s h o w n i n Fig. 2.2.4.1 h a v i n g regard t o
the provisions o f T a b l e 2.2.4.1 as w e l l as t h e type a n d
l o c a t i o n o f t h e steering gear as specified i n 2.2.4.2.
T a b l e
Design value
of load Q
Type o f rudder
( r e f e r t o F i g . 2.2.4.1)
2.2.4.1
Design value
of load Qi
st
2.2.3.2 A p o i n t s i t u a t e d a t t h e l e v e l o f t h e l o n
g i t u d i n a l a x i s o f t h e s t e e r i n g n o z z l e a t t h e d i s t a n c e r f r o m
the steering n o z z l e leading edge shall b e considered as a
p o i n t o f a p p l i c a t i o n o f f o r c e F. T h e d i s t a n c e r, i n m ,
n
(2.2.3.1-10)
is determined b y the f o r m u l a
\s,=h ,ll ,
(2.2.3.2-5)
s t
(2.2.3.1-6)
being determined b y the f o r m u l a
where
st
r =Q,25l .
s t
where
(2.2.3.2-4)
A p o i n t situated a t t h e level o fthe steering nozzle

longitudinal axis a t t h e distance r f r o m t h e stabilizer
leading edge shall b econsidered a s a p o i n t o f appli
cation o fforce F . T h e distance r , i nm , shall n o t be
less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
(2.2.3.1-5)
(2.2.3.2-3)
c = 0,1585 0 , 0 9 1 6 7 C ^ .
s t
D =
l =
A =
V\ =
s t
F = 9,SVW pDJ^:
F = 9,81-W qmA ii>T;
where
7,18) ;
2
st
s t
s t
k = Ul
(2.2.3.2-2)
/,.,= distance between the centre line o f the r u d d e r stock
a n d the leading edge o f the steering nozzle, i n m ;
b, c = c o e f f i c i e n t s d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a e
+ c)
k= c o e f f i c i e n t d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
(2.2.3.2-1)
I, I I , V I I , V I I I
Q i = F - Q
III V I and
IX X I I
= 0
N o t e s : 1. T h e value o fA \ i st h eportion t h e semispade

rudder area below t h e lower pintle (below section 4
i n F i g . 2.2.4.1), i n m .
2. F o r s t e e r i n g n o z z l e s o f t y p e V t h e d e s i g n v a l u e o f t h e r a t i o
I J I is t a k e n equal t o zero.
3. T h e f o r c e F i s t a k e n i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e p r o v i s i o n s
o f 2.2.2 f o r r u d d e r s a n d o f 2.2.3 f o r s t e e r i n g n o z z l e s .
2
Arrangements
and
221
Outfit
2.2.4.2 T h e transverse force P , i n k N , created o n

the rudder stock b y steering gear (quadrant steering
gears, steering gears w i t h single-arm tillers a n d simi
lar steering gears) is d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
P = M jr
t
where
(2.2.4.2)
= r u d d e r t o r q u e , i n k N - m , s p e c i f i e d i n 2.2.2.3
a n d 2.2.3.3. W h e n c o n s i d e r i n g t h e a s t e r n r u n n i n g
of t h e ship, t h e rudder torque M is taken a st h e
v a l u e M s p e c i f i e d i n 2.2.2.4;
Y\ = r a d i u s o f t h e s t e e r i n g g e a r q u a d r a n t o r t i l l e r r e s u l t a n t
force a r mm e a s u r e d f r o m t h e centre line o f t h e
rudder stock, i n m .
t
D e p e n d i n g o n t h e l o c a t i o n o f t h e steering gear
quadrant o r tiller indicated i n F i g . 2.2.4.2 t h e value P
f o r C a s e I is t a k e n as P i a n d t h e v a l u e P is t a k e n
equal t o zero. F o r Case I I t h e v a l u e o f P is t a k e n
a s a n d t h e v a l u e o f P i i s t a k e n e q u a l t o z e r o .
T h e values o f P i o r P are assumed t o be positive
w h e n t h e quadrant o r tiller are located f o r w a r d o f the
rudder stock centre line a n d they are assumed t o be
negative w h e n t h e quadrant o r tiller are located aft o f
the rudder stock centre line.
F o r steering gears t h e r u d d e r t o r q u e o f w h i c h is
transmitted t o the rudder stock b y a pair ( o r pairs) o f
forces ( f o u r - p i s t o n , r o t a r y v a n e steering gears o r simi
lar) the values o f P i a n d P are taken equal t o zero.
n
those specified i n 2.2.4.1 o n c o n d i t i o n t h a t t h e de

tailed c a l c u l a t i o n is s u b m i t t e d w h e r e d u e considera
t i o n is given t o t h e flexibility o f t h e rudder supports
and t o the n o n - u n i f o r m i t y o f the force distribution
over t h e rudder blade area.
2.2.4.6 F o r Case I o f t h e quadrant steering gear
or tiller l o c a t i o n (refer t o F i g . 2.2.4.2) t h e design
value o f bending m o m e n t M \ , i n k N * m , i n section 1
o f the rudder stock (at the upper bearing) shall be
determined by the formula
M
= Pih
(2.2.4.6)
w h e r e f o r P a n d /7, r e f e r t o 2.2.4.2 a n d 2.2.4.4.

l
F o r Case I I o fthe steering gear quadrant o r tiller

l o c a t i o n M is t a k e n e q u a l t o zero.
2.2.4.7 T h e design value o f the bending m o
ment M , i n k N * m , acting i n section 2 o f the rudder
stock (at the l o w e r bearing f o r rudders o f types I - V I ;
i n the rudder stock a n d rudder blade coupling for rudders
o f types V I I - X I I ) shall be determined b y the f o r m u l a
x
(2.2.4.7-1)
w h e r e Q $ 2 = l o a d s d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h T a b l e 2.2.4.1;
Pi ,
f o r c e s d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2.2.4.2;
h, c, /7 , / = l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n s ( r e f e r t o 2.2.4.4);
k , k , k , k , k = factors determined b y t h e formulae:
h
Case
r \
Y//A
* " (D (3 + 0
I 1
0 +*
- 2(|) (3 + s ) +
"
+ D (l
+ 6
+
4 f a
+ 3f ) - 6 ( l
A
+ k) -
+
+ 3 ^ ,
(^.4.7-2)
(2.2.4.7-3)
(2.2.4.7-4)
* = hlllh ;
(2.2.4.7-5)
k =-^(l-jf)
(2.2.4.7-6)
F i g . 2.2.4.2
I < 1 + >
w h e r e e, /1 a n d l = l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n s ( r e f e r t o 2.2.4.4);
I = m e a n m o m e n t o f inertia o f the rudder stock crosssection, i nc m ;
I = m e a n m o m e n t o f inertia o f the r u d d e r cross-section a t
the portion between sections 3 4 (rudder types
I V I ) o r between sections 2 4 (rudder types
VII XII), in cm ;
oc = c o e f f i c i e n t d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e p r o v i
s i o n s o f 2.2.4.17 t o 2 . 2 . 4 . 2 1 d e p e n d i n g o n t h e t y p e o f
the rudder, i n m / c m .
2
2.2.4.3 I n t h e f o r m u l a e o f t h e present Chapter t h e

n u m e r i c a l indices o f s y m b o l s o f t h e bending m o m e n t s
( A f M , M , M ) a n d r e a c t i o n s o f s u p p o r t s ( P R , R4)
correspond t o t h en u m b e r o f the support o r section given
i n Figs 2.2.4.1 a n d 2.2.4.2 f o r t h e relevant type o f t h e
rudder.
2.2.4.4 Unless expressly p r o v i d e d otherwise, i n
the f o r m u l a e o f the present Chapter t h e linear d i
mensions s h o w n i n Figs 2.2.4.1 a n d 2.2.4.2 shall be
t a k e n i n metres, a n d t h e forces, i n k N .
2.2.4.5 T h e design values o fthe bending m o m e n t s
a n d r e a c t i o n s o f s u p p o r t s m a y b e t a k e n less t h a n
b
2.2.4.8 T h e design value o f t h e bending m o

m e n t M , i n k N * m , acting i n section 3 o f the rudder
stock (in the rudder stock a n d rudder blade coupling
for rudders o f types I V I ) shall be determined b y
the f o r m u l a
3
222
Rules
= M j - + Qicj
- 1 Q h j.
(2.2.4.8)
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
2.2.4.15 T h e d e s i g n v a l u e o f t h e b e n d i n g m o
m e n t M , i n k N m , acting i n the section o f the
rudder axle near its flange shall be determined b y the
formula
-
ra
m e n t M , i n k N m , acting i n section 4 o f t h e rudder
blade f o r rudders o f types I , I I , V I I a n d V I I I shall be
-
= R t l l w ^ k ^ d + , 2 4 ^
/4
+ 0,15( ]
*4 *s
'4
(2.2.4.9)
(2.2.4.15)
F o r rudders o f these types t h e value o f M is

t a k e n as t h e bending m o m e n t acting i n a n y rudder
cross-section above support 4 o f t h e rudder.
F o r other rudders the value o f the bending m o
m e n t M is taken equal t o zero.
2.2.4.10 T h e d e s i g n v a l u e o f t h e r e a c t i o n R \ , i n k N ,
o f support 1 o f the rudder ( o f the upper bearing) shall
w h e r e /3, /4 = l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n s ( r e f e r t o 2.2.4.4);
I = m e a n m o m e n t o finertia o fthe rudder axle o r rudder
post cross-section, i n c m ;
/ , = m e a n m o m e n t o f inertia o f t h e solepiece crosssection, i n c m .
= Q c.
Ri = ^ -
(1 + f) ~ P n ( l - ( ) -
(2.2A10)
r p
2.2.4.16 F o r C a s e I I o f t h e s t e e r i n g g e a r q u a d r a n t
o r tiller location (refer t o F i g . 2.2.4.2) t h e design
value o fthe bending m o m e n t M , i n k N m , acting i n
the section o f the rudder stock i n w a y o f the quadrant
o r tiller l o c a t i o n shall be determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
-
M
2.2.4.11 T h e d e s i g n v a l u e o f t h e r e a c t i o n R , i n k N ,
o f support 2 o f the rudder ( o f the lower bearing f o r
rudder types I V I , o f t h e upper bearing o f t h e
rudder axle for rudder type X I , o fthe upper pintle o f
rudders f o r types V I I X a n d X I I ) shall be de
2
R i = -
+ I ) + - -
l\
+ p k l
l\
PX.
= Ril .
(2.2.4.16)
F o r Case I o f the steering gear q u a d r a n t o r tiller

location M is taken equal t o zero.
2.2.4.17 T h e c o e f f i c i e n t 0C4, i n m / c m , f o r r u d d e r s
o f types I a n d V I I ( f o rt h e h o r n o f t h e semispade
rudder) shall be determined b y the f o r m u l a
s
a , = ?
ill
(4 _ ) +
3
b \'
h
%b ' bo
h0
l\
(2.2.4.11)
(2.2.4.17-1)
/ 5 = l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n ( r e f e r t o 2.2.4.4);
I\ = m o m e n t o f inertia o fthe rudder h o r n cross-section a t
its r o o t a b o u t the axis parallel t o the centreline o f the
ship, i n c m ;
= m a x i m u m w i d t h o f t h e h o r i z o n t a l s e c t i o n o f t h e
rudder horn a t t h e lower pintle (section 4
i n F i g . 2.2.4.1), i n m ;
b \ = m a x i m u m width o f the horizontal section o f the
r u d d e r h o r n a t its root, i n m ;
I = polar m o m e n t o f inertia o f the rudder h o r n crosssection a t its root, i nc m , determined b y the f o r m u l a
where
2.2.4.12 T h e d e s i g n v a l u e o f t h e r e a c t i o n R 4 , i n k N ,
o f support 4 o f the rudder ( o f the lower pintle) shall
R* = f
- Q (l
2
(2.2.4.12)
m e n t M , i n k N m , acting i n the considered section o f
the l o w e r part o f t h e semispade rudder body (below
section 4 s h o w n i n F i g . 2.2.4.1 f o rrudder types I , I I ,
V I I a n d V I I I ) shall be determined b y the f o r m u l a
-
AA
(2.2 A M ' - 2 )
r h
i=l
where A
= area enclosed b y t h e centre line o f t h e r u d d e r h o r n

plating (with the cross-section at the h o r n root), i n c m ;
lot= length o f the centre line o f the r u d d e r h o r n plating
(in t h e c r o s s - s e c t i o na t t h e h o r n root) o f t h e given
thickness, i n c m ;
s=
thickness o f the considered portion o f t h e rudder
horn plating with the length Jg , i n cm;
n = n u m b e r o fportions o f the rudder horn plating with
the length l a n d thickness s .
r J l
= \
(2.2.4.13)
oi
w h e r e y, l = l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n s ( r e f e r t o 2.2.4.4).
m e n t M , i n k N m , acting i n a n ycross-section o f t h e
rudder blade f o rrudders o f types I I I , I V , V I a n d I X
X I I shall be determined b y the f o r m u l a
oi
o i
2.2.4.18 T h e c o e f f i c i e n t 0C4, i n m / c m , f o r r u d d e r s
o f types I I I , V a n d I X ( f o rt h e solepiece) shall be
(2.2.4.18)
(2.2.4.14)
where
Arrangements
and
Outfit
223
/ i = m o m e n t o finertia o fthe solepiece cross-section a t its

root a b o u t the vertical axis, i n c m ;
bso
width o f t h e solepiece cross-section a t t h e rudder
stock o r steering nozzle pintle, i n c m ;
b\ = w i d t h o f t h e s o l e p i e c e c r o s s - s e c t i o n a t i t s r o o t , i n c m .
s
=F c
where F F
(2.2.6.2)
= forces determined according t o t h e provisions o f

2 . 2 . 2 . 1 , 2.2.2.2 a n d 2.2.2.5, i n k N ;
Cj, c = l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n s ( r e f e r t o 2.2.4.4), i n m .
h
+ F c
2.2.4.19 T h e c o e f f i c i e n t a , i n m / c m , f o r r u d d e r s
of types I V a n d X (for t h e rudder post w i t h t h e so
lepiece) shall b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
stock (in t h erudder stock a n d rudder blade coupling)
a = ^ | ( 0 , 0 7 5 ^ - + 0,334^).
(2.2.4.19)
4
51
Irp
=^(
3
2.2.4.20 T h e c o e f f i c i e n t a , i n m / c m , f o r r u d d e r s
o f type X I ( f o r r u d d e r axle w i t h the solepiece) shall be
where
- e) + F ( c
- e)
(2.2.6.3)
e = l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n ( r e f e r t o 2.2.4.4), i n m .
m e n t M , i n k N m , acting i n the considered section o f
the rudder blade shall bedetermined b y t h e formulae:
-
a = | ( 0 , 0 7 5 -+
4
31
x[l,55f
L
( / 4
/3
+ 0,053(^)
'3
0,334 4) 0,282
2
fe)
/4
+ *=-\.
'3
'4
l r p
for sections w i t h < h \
(2.2.4.20)
i
2.2.4.21 T h e c o e f f i c i e n t a f o r r u d d e r s o f t y p e s I I ,
V I , V I I I a n d X I I is taken equal t o zero.
f o r r u d d e r o f t y p e ( F i g . 2.2.4.1).
2.2.5.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2 . 2 . 4 . 2 t o 2 . 2 . 4 . 6 a n d
2.2.4.16 a r e also applicable t o t h e rudders o f
type X I I I .
m e n t acting i nw a y o fthe rudder stock a n d rudder
blade coupling shall be taken equal t o zero.
m e n t M , i n k N m , acting i n a n ycross-section o f t h e
rudder blade shall be determined b ythe f o r m u l a
'=2-(
F >
- - - " )
for sections w i t h > h \
F l ( y
~ \
(2.2.6.4-2)
w h e r e h , h \ a n d y = l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n s ( r e f e r t o 2.2.4.4), i n m .
T
2.2.6.5 T h e d e s i g n v a l u e o f t h e r e a c t i o n R
in k N , o f support 1 o f t h e rudder ( o f t h e upper
bearing) shall be determined b y the f o r m u l a
u
= 0,lFhj/h
where
(2.2.5.3)
F =force d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o t h e p r o v i s i o n s
o f 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 , 2.2.2.2 a n d 2.2.2.5, i n k N ;
ht, h = l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n s ( r e f e r t o 2.2.4.4); i n t h i s c a s e , t h e
greater o f t h e v a l u e Aj shall b e t a k e n a s t h e d e s i g n v a l u e .
r
2.2.5.4 T h e d e s i g n v a l u e o f t h e r e a c t i o n R i o f
support 1 o f the rudder ( o f the upper bearing) shall
be t a k e n e q u a l t o zero.
2.2.5.5 T h e d e s i g n v a l u e o f t h e r e a c t i o n R ,
in k N , o fsupport 2 o f the rudder ( o f any pintle) shall
Rx=F % + F
l
where
f - P t ( l + k ) - ( 1 - (2.2.6.5)
l\ = l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n ( r e f e r t o 2.2.4.4), i n m .
2.2.6.6 T h e d e s i g n v a l u e o f t h e r e a c t i o n R ,
in k N , o f support 2 o f t h e rudder ( o f t h e lower
bearing) shall be determined b y the f o r m u l a
2
R = F , ( l + + F ( l + - p k + PA. ( 2 . 2 . 6 . 6 )
l\
n
l\
n
2
= Fhilh .
(2.2.5.5)
f o r r u d d e r o f t y p e X I V ( F i g . 2.2.4.1).
2.2.6.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2 . 2 . 4 . 2 t o 2 . 2 . 4 . 6
and 2.2.4.16 a r e also applicable t o t h e rudders
of type X I V .
stock ( a tthe lower bearing) shall be determined b y
the f o r m u l a
-
f o r s t e e r i n g n o z z l e s o f t y p e X V ( F i g . 2.2.4.1).
2.2.7.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2 . 2 . 4 . 2 t o 2 . 2 . 4 . 4 ,
2.2.4.6 a n d 2.2.4.16 are also applicable t o t h e steering
nozzle o f type X V .
stock ( a tthe lower bearing) shall be determined b y
the f o r m u l a
-
= Fc
(2.2.7.2)
where
F = force determined according to t h e provisions

o f 2.2.3.1, i n k N ;
C\ = l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n ( r e f e r t o 2.2.4.4), i n m .
224
Rules
stock ( a t t h e rudder stock a n d steering nozzle cou
pling) shall be determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
where
= F(c, -
e)
(2.2.7.3)
e = l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n ( r e f e r t o 2.2.4.4), i n m .
2.2.7.4 T h e d e s i g n v a l u e o f t h e r e a c t i o n R i , i n k N ,
o f support 1 ( o f t h e upper bearing) shall be de
Rx=F^where
P i ( l + f)
~ Pn(
~ jf)
{22.1 A)
Ships
of Sea-Going
M = bending m o m e n t acting i n the considered section o f

the rudder stock ( A f M
o r M ) determined
a c c o r d i n g t o t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 2.2.4 t o 2 . 2 . 7 f o r t h e
appropriate type o f the rudder, i n k N m ;
d\ = d i a m e t e r o f t h e r u d d e r s t o c k i n t h e c o n s i d e r e d s e c t i o n ,
in cm.
where
and Construction
2.3.3 T h e c h a n g e i n t h e r u d d e r s t o c k d i a m e t e r b e
t w e e n t h e adjacent sections specified i n 2.3.1 a n d 2.3.2
shall n o t be m o r e sudden t h a n t h a t p e r m i t t e d b y t h e
linear law.
W h e r e t h e change o f the rudder stock diameter is
stepped, t h e steps shall b e p r o v i d e d w i t h fillets h a v i n g
as l a r g e r a d i u s a s p r a c t i c a b l e . T h e t r a n s i t i o n o f t h e
rudder stock into t h e flange shall be carried o u t w i t h
a r a d i u s o f f i l l e t o f n o t less t h a n 0 , 1 2 t i m e s t h e d i a
meter o f t h e rudder stock i n w a y o f t h e flange.
l\ = l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n ( r e f e r t o 2.2.4.4), i n m .
2.2.7.5 T h e d e s i g n v a l u e o f t h e r e a c t i o n R , i n k N ,
o f support 2 ( o f t h e lower bearing) shall be de
2.4 R U D D E R B L A D E A N D S T E E R I N G
+ f )
R = F(l
2
p V _i_ p k
(2.2.7.5)
2.2.8 T h e d e s i g n v a l u e s o f b e n d i n g m o m e n t s a n d
reactions o f supports f o r t h e steering gears w h i c h
differ f r o m those indicated i n F i g . 2.2.4.1 are subject
to special consideration b y t h e Register.
2.4.1 R u d d e r b l a d e .
2.4.1.1 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e s t r e a m l i n e d r u d d e r
b l a d e s i d e p l a t i n g s, i n m m , s h a l l b e n o t l e s s t h a n
+ k
s=akny
where
2.3 R U D D E R
N O Z Z L E
STOCK
( \ +
R
*i3
F \
%
2
- + 1,5 (2.4.1.1-1)
eH
- d r a u g h t o f the ship, i n m ;
f o r c e s a c c o r d i n g t o 2.2.2.1 a n d 2.2.2.2, k N ;
f o r A a n d A, r e f e r t o 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 ;
a = distance between horizontal o r vertical w e b plates,
w h i c h e v e r i s the less, i n m ;
k factor determined b y the formula
n
2.3.1 T h e d i a m e t e r o f t h e r u d d e r s t o c k h e a d do, i n c m ,
s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h e g r e a t e r v a l u e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formula
do =
ki y/M /R
where
k\ = f a c t o r e q u a l t o :
26,1 f o r t h e a h e a d c o n d i t i o n ;
23,3 f o r t h e a s t e r n c o n d i t i o n ;
M , = t o r q u e a c c o r d i n g t o 2.2.2.3,2.2.2.4 o r 2.2.3.3, i n k N - m ;
R = u p p e r yield stress o f t h e rudder stock mate
rial, i n M P a .
e H
(2.3.1)
= 10,85 2 , 5 1 6 ( g ) ;
R
(2.4.1.1-2)
= u p p e r yield stress o f t h e rudder blade plating

material, i n M P a ;
b = distance between horizontal o r vertical w e b plates
whichever is the greater, i n m ;
k\2= factor equal to:
18,6 f o r t h e r u d d e r b l a d e p l a t i n g w i t h i n 0,35 o f t h e
r u d d e r b l a d e l e n g t h f r o m its l e a d i n g edge;
8,0 f o r t h e r u d d e r b l a d e p l a t i n g w i t h i n 0,65 o f t h e
r u d d e r l e n g t h f r o m its r e a r edge;
k i = factor equal to:
1 f o rthe rudder blade plating i n t h ew a k e o fthe
propeller (when rudder is i n the non-reversed
position);
0 for the rudder blade plating b e y o n d the w a k e o f the
p r o p e l l e r ( w h e n r u d d e r is i n the n o n - r e v e r s e d position).
e H
2.3.2 U n d e r c o m b i n e d a c t i o n o f t h e t o r q u e a n d
b e n d i n g m o m e n t t h e w o r k i n g stresses (refer t o 1.5.1)
a c t i n g i n r u d d e r s t o c k s e c t i o n s 1 , 2 or 3 s h o w n
i n F i g . 2.2.4.1 f o rt h e appropriate type o f the rudder
shall n o t exceed 0,5 t i m e s t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress f o r
the ahead condition a n d 0,7 times t h e upper yield
stress o f t h e m a t e r i a l f o r t h e a s t e r n c o n d i t i o n (refer
t o 1.5.2 a n d 2.1.5). I n this case, t h e n o r m a l stress a
a n d t h e s h e a r s t r e s s , i n M P a , s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y
the formulae:
3
=10,2-10 /^;
6
2.4.1.2 I n a n y c a s e , t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e s t r e a m
l i n e d r u d d e r b l a d e s i d e p l a t i n g s^n, i n m m , s h a l l b e
n o t less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a e :
f o r s h i p s o f less t h a n 8 0 m i n l e n g t h
^ = 2 1 , 5 ^ + ^ ;
(2.3.2-1)
for ships o f 8 0 m i n length a n d over
x=
5,l-10 M /4
f
(2.3.2-2)
(2.4.1.2-1)
where
Arrangements
and
Outfit
225
- - - - *
L = length o f the ship, i n m .
2.4.1.3 F o r i c e s h i p s t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e r u d d e r
b l a d e side p l a t i n g i n w a y o f t h e ice belt s h a l l b e n o t
less t h a n t h a t o f t h e i c e b e l t o f t h e s h e l l p l a t i n g i n t h e
after p a r t o f t h e ship, specified i n 3.10.4.1, P a r t I I
" H u l l " , w i t h t h e frame spacing being equal t o t h e
distance between t h e vertical w e b plates o f the rudder
blade.
T h e t h i c k n e s s s, i n m m , o f t h e r u d d e r b l a d e s i d e
p l a t i n g f o r t h e i c e b r e a k e r s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n d e
blade shall be rounded off. T h e radius o f curvature

s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 2 t i m e s t h e side p l a t i n g t h i c k
ness i n t h i s area, a n d t h e free edge o f t h e r u d d e r side
plating shall be t h o r o u g h l y stripped.
2.4.1.7 N e a r t h e r o t a t i o n a x i s o f t h e s t r e a m U n e d
rudder o n e o r several vertical w e b plates shall be
provided ensuring the general strength o f the rudder
blade. T h e section m o d u l u s o f these w e b plates, i n
cluding t h e effective flanges, shall be such t h a t t h e
n o r m a l stresses i n t h e c o n s i d e r e d s e c t i o n a r e n o t m o r e
t h a n 0,5 t i m e s t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress o f t h e m a t e r i a l o f
t h e r u d d e r b l a d e side p l a t i n g (refer t o 1.5.2).
T h e n o r m a l stresses a , i n M P a , s h a l l b e calcu
lated b y the f o r m u l a
a=l000M /W
(2.4.1.7)
s = 9,2k aJ^-
+ 6
l6
(2.4.1.3-1)
where
M = bending m o m e n t i n the considered section o f the

rudder blade (Af o rAf ) determined according to the
p r o v i s i o n s o f 2.2.4 t o 2.2.6 f o r t h e a p p r o p r i a t e t y p e o f
the rudder, i n k N m ;
W = sectionmodulus o fthe considered section o fthe w e b
plates, including the effective flanges, about the axis
o f s y m m e t r y o f the rudder blade profile, i n c m .
b
where
a = distance between horizontal o r vertical w e b plates,

w h i c h e v e r i s the less, f o r s t r e a m l i n e d w e l d e d r u d d e r s ;
distance b e t w e e n r u d d e r a r m s f o rsingle-plate steel
solid-cast rudders, m . I n a n y case, i nthe calculations
t h e v a l u e a s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n l e s s t h a n 0,6 m ;
p = intensity o fice pressure i n the C I r e g i o n determined
a c c o r d i n g t o 3.10.3.5.2, P a r t I I " H u l l " , i n k P a ;
ReH u p p e r y i e l d s t r e s s o f t h e m a t e r i a l o f t h e r u d d e r b l a d e
plating, i n M P a ;
&i6 = f a c t o r d e t e r m i n e d f o r s t r e a m l i n e d w e l d e d r u d d e r s b y
the formula
a
1 0,38(a/6)
16
where
(2.4.1.3-2)
b = distance between horizontal o r vertical w e b plates,

whichever is the greater, i n m .
F o r single-plate steel solid-cast rudders t h e v a l u e

o f k\ s h a l l b e t a k e n i n t h e c a l c u l a t i o n s e q u a l t o 1 .
2.4.1.4 T h e s t r e a m l i n e d r u d d e r b l a d e s i d e p l a t i n g
shall be stiffened f r o m t h e inside b y h o r i z o n t a l a n d
vertical w e b plates. T h e thickness o f t h e w e b plates
s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h a t o f t h e r u d d e r b l a d e side
plating.
T h e side p l a t i n g a n d w e b plates s h a l l b e w e l d e d
together b y fillet o r p l u g welds w i t h slots o f Unear
f o r m . D i m e n s i o n s o f e l e m e n t s o f p l u g w e l d s a r e se
lected a c c o r d i n g t o 1.7.5.13, P a r t I I " H u l l " .
T h e h o r i z o n t a l a n d vertical w e b plates shall be
p r o v i d e d w i t h sufficient n u m b e r o f openings f o r free
drainage o f water w h i c h m a y penetrate inside the
rudder blade.
T h e rear edge o fthe rudder blade shall be rigidly
fixed i n the proper way.
2.4.1.5 T h e s t r e a m l i n e d r u d d e r b l a d e s h a l l b e
p r o v i d e d w i t h t o p a n d b o t t o m plates, t h e thickness o f
w h i c h s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 1,2 t i m e s t h e g r e a t e r
v a l u e o f t h e side p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s
according
to 2.4.1.1. T h et o p a n d b o t t o m plates shall be fitted
w i t h drain plugs o fcorrosion-resistant metal.
2.4.1.6 T h e c o r n e r s o f t h e o p e n i n g s ( i n w a y o f t h e
pintles) i n t h e side p l a t i n g o f t h e semispade r u d d e r
6
T h e dimensions o f the effective flanges o f the w e b

plates shall be as follows:
the thickness equal t o that o f t h e rudder blade
side p l a t i n g ;
t h e w i d t h e q u a l t o 1/6 o f t h e r u d d e r b l a d e h e i g h t
o r 1/2 o f t h e distance b e t w e e n t h e nearest w e b plates
l o c a t e d o n b o t h sides o f t h e c o n s i d e r e d w e b p l a t e ,
w h i c h e v e r i s t h e less.
2.4.1.8 S p e c i a l c a r e s h a l l b e g i v e n t o t h e r e U a b l e
securing t o the rudder blade o f t h e flange f o r c o u pUng t h e rudder blade a n d the rudder stock a n d o f
the gudgeons f o r pintles.
2.4.1.9 A t t h e l e a d i n g e d g e o f t h e s i n g l e - p l a t e
steel soUd-case r u d d e r s o f the ice-breakers t h e r u d d e r
piece s h a l l be p r o v i d e d o v e r t h e entire h e i g h t o f t h e
rudder blade.
T h e e q u i v a l e n t stress , i n M P a , d e v e l o p e d i n
a n y h o r i z o n t a l section o f t h e r u d d e r piece a n d de
t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a given b e l o w shall n o t exceed
0,5 t i m e s t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress o f t h e r u d d e r blade
material
^=007
where
2
+
(^)
(2.4.1.9)
M = bending moment determined according to the

p r o v i s i o n s o f 2.2.5.3, i n k N " m ;
M , = t o r q u e a c c o r d i n g t o 2.2.2.3, i n k N m ;
h = height o f the rudder m e a s u r e d o n t h erudder stock
centre line, i n m ;
y= d i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e c o n s i d e r e d s e c t i o n a n d t h e
l o w e r e d g e o f t h e r u d d e r ( F i g . 2.4.1.9), i n m ;
W = section modulus o f the considered cross-section o f
t h e r u d d e r p i e c e a b o u t t h e a x i s 0\ O2 , i g n o r i n g
the rudder blade plating (the rudder piece section
t a k e n i n t o a c c o u n t i n t h e c a l c u l a t i o n o f Wis h a t c h e d
i n s e c t i o n I I o f F i g . 2.4.1.9), i n c m ;
r
226
Rules
for the C l a s s i f i c a t i o n
S = area o f t h e considered cross-section o f t h e rudder

piece (refer t o h a t c h e d a r e a i n s e c t i o n I I o f
F i g . 2.4.1.9), i n c m ;
p = distance between the centroid o fthe area S a n dt h e
r u d d e r b l a d e centre line, i n c m .
Ships
h = distance between transverse w e bplates o r between

the transversew e b plate a n d the nearest edge o f the
steering nozzle, i n m . This distance shall n o t
e x c e e d 600 m m .
2.4.2.2 T h ethickness s , i n m m , o ft h e steering

nozzle inside plating, except f o r i t sm i d d l e belt, shall
be n o t less t h a n
in
Rudder
piece
yy
Section
\ n^Rudder
I /
stock
Section
centreline
Sin
I I I I
where
where
1000hiX F
(2.4.1.10)
F = force determined according t o t h e provisions o f

2.2.2.2, k N ;
A = rudder area, i n m ;
h i = l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n , i n m ( r e f e r t o F i g . 2.4.1.9);
x = distance between the considered section a n d the rear
e d g e o f t h e r u d d e r , m ( r e f e r t o F i g . 2.4.1.9);
R H u p p e r yield stress o fthe rudder material, i nM P a .
2
2.4.2 Steering nozzle rudder.

2.4.2.1 T h e thickness s, i n m m , o f t h e steering
n o z z l e o u t s i d e p l a t i n g s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n d e
0
9SD l d + 20F
D l R
n
so
where
+ 2
(2.4.2.1-1)
e H
D =
/ =
d=
F =
n
inner m i n i m u m nozzle bore, i n m ;

length o fthe steering nozzle, i n m ;
d r a u g h t o fthe ship, i n m ;
force acting o n t h e steering nozzle according
t o 2.2.3.1, i n k N ;
u p p e r yield stress o f t h e material o f t h e steering
nozzle outside plating, i n M P a ;
= factor determined b y the formula
=
k\
l4
where
T = p r o p e l l e r t h r u s t a t s p e e d v, i n k N .
7 , 3 4 | y r
(2.4.2.2-1)
2.4.1.10 T h e single-plate steel solid-case r u d d e r

shall b e stiffened b y the rudder arms founded o n b o t h
sides o f t h e r u d d e r blade a t t h e level o f e a c h g u d g e o n
(refer t o F i g . 2.4.1.9).
T h e section m o d u l u s o f t h e c o n s i d e r e d cross-sec
t i o n o f t h e r u d d e r a r m s W, i n c m , ( i n c l u d i n g t h e b o d y
o f t h e rudder blade w i t h i n t h e d i m e n s i o n h , refer t o
section I I I I i n F i g . 2.4.1.9) a b o u t the axis 0 0
s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
AR
T h e thickness s , i n m m , o f the middle belt o f the

s t e e r i n g n o z z l e i n s i d e p l a t i n g s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n
F i g . 2.4.1.9
W=
6,39
= 7,885 2 , 2 2 1 ( / / w )
1
(2.4.2.1-2)
= distance between the longitudinal w e bplates mea

sured a l o n g the l e n g t h o fthe steering nozzle outside
plating, i n m . This distance shall n o t e x
c e e d 1000 m m ;
where
0 ,
l !
(2.4.2.2-2)
=distance between transverse w e bplates situated i n

w a y o fthe m i d d l e belt o fthe inside plating, i n m .
I n case o f a p p l i c a t i o n o f stainless o r clad steel t h e

value o fs m a y be reduced o n agreement w i t h t h e
Register.
2.4.2.3 I n a n y case, t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e o u t s i d e
and inside plating o f the steering nozzle shall be n o t
less t h a n t h a t g i v e n i n 2 . 4 . 1 . 2 .
2.4.2.4 T h e m i d d l e belt o f the steering nozzle i n
s i d e p l a t i n g s h a l l e x t e n d n o t l e s s t h a n 0,05Z> f o r w a r d
a n d n o t l e s s t h a n 0,1Z> a f t o f t h e p r o p e l l e r b l a d e t i p s .
Its b r e a d t h shall b e a t least e q u a l t o t h e m a x i m u m
b r e a d t h o f t h e side p r o j e c t i o n o f t h e p r o p e l l e r blade.
2.4.2.5 T h e outside a n d inside p l a t i n g o f t h e
steering nozzle shall b e stiffened f r o m t h einside b y
transverse a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l w e b plates. T h e spacing
o f the w e b plates shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements
o f 2.4.2.1. A t least f o u r l o n g i t u d i n a l w e b plates shall
be p r o v i d e d w h i c h a r e equally spaced a r o u n d t h e
circumference o fthe steering nozzle.
T h e thickness o f w e b plates, except those situated
in w a y o f the middle belt o f the steering nozzle inside
p l a t i n g , s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e
outside p l a t i n g according t o 2.4.2.1 a n d 2.4.2.3.
T h e transverse a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l w e bplates shall
be w e l d e d t o t h e steering nozzle inside p l a t i n g b y
d o u b l e side c o n t i n u o u s w e l d s w i t h f u l l p e n e t r a t i o n o n
the inside o f the steering nozzle. W h e n t h e thickness
o f the w e b plates is 10m m a n d m o r e , edge prepara
tion shall be carried out.
T h e outside plating a n d w e b plates shall b e
connected b y p l u g w e l d i n g w i t h slots o f linear f o r m
or b y backing welding. T h e dimensions o f elements o f
p l u g w e l d s w i t h slots o f l i n e a r f o r m a r e selected a c
c o r d i n g t o 1.7.5.13, P a r t I I " H u l l " .
T h e transverse a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l w e bplates shall
be p r o v i d e d w i t h sufficient n u m b e r o f openings f o r
free drainage o f w a t e r w h i c h m i g h t penetrate inside
m
Arrangements
and
the steering nozzle, a n d i n t h e l o w e r a n d upper parts

o f t h e outside p l a t i n g t h e d r a i n plugs o f stainless
m e t a l shall be fitted. T h edistance f r o m t h e opening
edge t o t h e inside a n d outside p l a t i n g o f t h e steering
n o z z l e s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 0 , 2 5 t i m e s t h e w e b p l a t e
height.
I t is n o t a l l o w e d t o w e l d o n d o u b l i n g plates t o t h e
inside plating o f t h e steering nozzle.
2.4.2.6 I n w a y o f t h e m i d d l e b e l t o f t h e s t e e r i n g
nozzle inside p l a t i n g a t least t w o c o n t i n u o u s transverse
w e b plates shall b e fitted. T h e thickness o f these w e b
p l a t e s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e i n s i d e
plating o f f its m i d d l e belt as p e r F o r m u l a (2.4.2.2-1).
2.4.2.7 S p e c i a l c a r e s h a l l b e g i v e n t o t h e r e l i a b l e
securing o f t h e nozzle flange, welded-in bush a n d
other steering nozzle welded-in parts f o r connecting
the steering nozzle welded-in parts for connecting t h e
steering nozzle w i t h its stock a n d pintle.
2.4.2.8 T h e t h i c k n e s s s o f t h e s t a b i l i z e r p l a t i n g ,
i n m m , s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r
mula
st
s =k u l J *
st
V
where
2
R
K e
221
Outfit
+ 2
= 1 3 9 0 ^ A r / ^
where
(2.4.2.10)
= force acting o n t h e stabilizer a c c o r d i n g t o F o r

m u l a (2.2.3.1-3), i n k N ;
h = stabilizer height, i n m ;
R e H = u p p e r yield stress o fthe material used, i n M P a .
s t
s t
T h e effective flange dimensions shall be as fol

lows: thickness equal t o t h e stabilizer plating thick
ness; w i d t h e q u a l t o 1/5 o f t h e s t a b i l i z e r h e i g h t .
2.4.2.11 T h e s t e e r i n g n o z z l e a n d s t a b i l i z e r s h a l l b e
s o c o n n e c t e d t h a t rigid f i x a t i o n o f t h e l a t t e r i s e n
sured.
T h e force F determined f r o m F o r m u l a (2.2.3.1-3)
a n d u n i f o r m l y distributed w i t h t h e height o f the stabi
lizer shall b e t a k e n i n strength calculations as a force
acting o n t h e stabilizer. D e p e n d i n g o n t h e type o f
connection a torque o f force F acting o n this con
nection shall be considered w i t h regard t o t h e p o i n t o f
application o f this force (refer t o F o r m u l a (2.2.3.2-3)).
I n t h i s case, stresses d e v e l o p e d i n t h e c o n n e c t i o n ( r e
fer t o 1.5.1) s h a l l n o t exceed 0 , 4 t i m e s t h e u p p e r y i e l d
stress o f t h e m a t e r i a l .
s t
s t
(2.4.2.8)
2.5 C O U P L I N G S
2
A
F
= area o fthe steering nozzle stabilizer, i n m ;

= force acting o n t h e stabilizer according t o F o r m u
l a (2.2.3.1-3), i n k N ;
k u = f a c t o r a c c o r d i n g t o 2.4.2.1 w h e n t h e d i s t a n c e
b e t w e e n h o r i z o n t a l w e b p l a t e s e q u a l s t o , i n m ;
h distance between vertical w e b plates o r betweent h e
w e b plate a n d fore o r aft e d g e o fthe stabilizer, i n m ;
R
u p p e r yield stress o f material o f t h e stabilizer
plating, i n M P a .
a
s t
2.5.1 H o r i z o n t a l f l a n g e c o u p l i n g .
2.5.1.1 T h e d i a m e t e r o f t h e c o u p l i n g b o l t s d\, i n c m ,
s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n
2.4.2.9 T h e s t e e r i n g n o z z l e s t a b i l i z e r p l a t i n g s h a l l
be stiffened f r o m t h einside b y h o r i z o n t a l a n d v e r t i c a l
w e b p l a t e s h a v i n g t h e t h i c k n e s s n o t less t h a n t h a t o f
the p l a t i n g i n accordance w i t h 2.4.2.8.
T h e stabilizer b o d y shall terminate i n t o p a n d
b o t t o m plates. T h e thickness o f t o p a n d b o t t o m
p l a t e s s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n 1,5 t i m e s t h e t h i c k n e s s o f
the plating according t o 2.4.2.8. V e r t i c a l w e b plates
shall b e securely connected t o t o p a n d b o t t o m plates.
The plating a n d horizontal a n d vertical w e b
plates shall b e w e l d e d together b y fillet o rp l u g welds.
T h e types o fp l u g welds w i t h slots o f linear f o r m a r e
selected a c c o r d i n g t o 1.7.5.13, P a r t I I " H u l l " .
T h e h o r i z o n t a l a n d vertical w e b plates shall be
provided w i t h sufficient n u m b e r o f openings, a n d t o p
a n d b o t t o m plates shall be fitted w i t h d r a i n plugs o f
corrosion-resistant material.
2.4.2.10 I n w a y o f a t t a c h m e n t o f t h e s t a b i l i z e r t o
the steering nozzle o n e o r several vertical w e b plates
shall be provided ensuring general strength o f t h e
stabilizer. T h e section m o d u l u s W , i n c m , o f these
w e b plates, t h e effective flange included, shall be n o t
less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
3
st
=0 , 6 2
V
where
^
Zir R H
2
(2.5.1.1-1)
2
d = diameter o f t h e rudder stock a t t h e coupling

flange, i n c m ;
zi = n u m b e r o fcoupling bolts;
r = m e a n distance from t h e centre o f t h ebolts t o t h e
centre o fthe s y s t e m o fthe flange b o l t holes, i n c m ;
Rem = u p p e r y i e l d s t r e s s o f t h e r u d d e r s t o c k m a t e r i a l , i n M P a ;
Rem u p p e r y i e l d s t r e s s o f t h e b o l t m a t e r i a l , i n M P a .
2
The coupling bolt diameter a t t h e b o t t o m o f

t h r e a d s d , i n c m , s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y
the f o r m u l a
3
^3 = 7 6 , 8 4 ^ / ^
where
(2.5.1.1-2)
M = b e n d i n g m o m e n t acting i n t h erudder stock section

a t t h e f l a n g e ( M o r ) d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o t h e
p r o v i s i o n s o f 2.2.4 t o 2 . 2 . 7 f o r t h e a p p r o p r i a t e t y p e
of the rudder, i n k N m ;
r = m e a n distance from t h e centre o f t h ebolts t o t h e
longitudinal axis o fs y m m e t r y o fthe flange, i n c m .
b
T h e n u m b e r o f b o l t s z s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 6 .
T h e m e a n distance f r o m t h ecentre o f the bolts t o
the centre o f the system o fthe flange bolt holes shall
be n o t less t h a n 0 , 9 t i m e s t h e r u d d e r s t o c k d i a m e t e r
x
228
Rules
according t o 2.3.1. W h e n the coupling is under the

action o f t h e bending m o m e n t , t h e m e a n distance
f r o m t h ecentre o fthe bolts t o t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l axis o f
s y m m e t r y o f t h e f l a n g e s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 0 , 6 t i m e s
the rudder stock diameter a t t h e flange.
2.5.1.2 O n l y f i t t e d b o l t s s h a l l b e e m p l o y e d , e x c e p t
t h e cases o f a k e y setting w h e n i t i s s u f f i c i e n t t o h a v e
o n l y t w o fitted b o l t s . T h e n u t s s h a l l h a v e s t a n d a r d
sizes. T h e b o l t s a n d n u t s s h a l l b e e f f i c i e n t l y s e c u r e d .
2.5.1.3 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e c o u p l i n g f l a n g e s s h a l l
n o t b e less t h a n t h e d i a m e t e r o f t h e b o l t s . T h e c e n t r e s
o f the holes for bolts shall be distant f r o m the outside
e d g e s o f t h e f l a n g e b y n o t less t h a n 1,15 t i m e s
the diameter o f the bolts.
2.5.1.4 W h e n c o u p l i n g f l a n g e s o f s t e e r i n g n o z z l e s
are n o t built into t h e steering nozzle b o d y b u t con
nected t o i t b y t h e s t r u c t u r e f o r m e d o f sheets, t h e
strength o f this structure shall be equivalent t o that o f
the rudder stock i n accordance w i t h 2.3.2. I n this
case, t h e c a l c u l a t e d e q u i v a l e n t stress s h a l l n o t exceed
0,4 t i m e s t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress o f t h e m a t e r i a l used.
2.5.2 K e y e d c o n e c o u p l i n g .
2.5.2.1 T h e c o n e l e n g t h o f t h e r u d d e r s t o c k f i t t e d
t o t h e r u d d e r b l a d e o r s t e e r i n g n o z z l e s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 1,5 t i m e s t h e d i a m e t e r o f t h e r u d d e r s t o c k a c
cording t o 2.3.2; t h e cone o n t h e diameter shall
be 1:15. T h e c o n e s h a l l c h a n g e i n t o c y l i n d r i c a l p o r
t i o n w i t h o u t a n y step i n t h e diameter.
2.5.2.2 A k e y s h a l l b e s e t o n t h e c o n e g e n e r a t r i x .
T h e ends o f the k e y shall be fairly rounded.
T h e w o r k i n g sectional area o fthe key A (product o f
t h e k e y l e n g t h b y i t s w i d t h ) , i n c m , s h a l l b e n o t less
t h a n t h e greater value determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
tively. T o prevent self-unscrewing, t h e n u t shall be

securely fastened a t least b y t w o w e l d e d - o n strips o r
one welded-on strip a n d a split p i n .
2.5.3 K e y l e s s c o n e c o u p l i n g .
2.5.3.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2 . 5 . 3 a r e a p p l i c a b l e
t o a k e y l e s s fitting o f t h e r u d d e r s t o c k t o t h e r u d d e r
blade o r steering nozzle w h i c h is m a d e b y o i linjection
method.
2.5.3.2 T h e c o n e l e n g t h o f t h e r u d d e r s t o c k f i t t e d
t o t h e r u d d e r b l a d e o r s t e e r i n g n o z z l e s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 1,5 t i m e s t h e d i a m e t e r o f t h e r u d d e r s t o c k a c
cording t o 2.3.2; t h e cone o n t h e diameter shall
be 1:15.
2.5.3.3 T h e r u d d e r b l a d e o r s t e e r i n g n o z z l e b o s s
s h a l l b e a g o o d fit o n t h e r u d d e r s t o c k c o n e . D u r i n g
t h e fit u p , a n d b e f o r e t h e p u s h - u p l o a d i s a p p l i e d , a n
area o f contact o f a t least 7 0 p e r cent o f t h e theore
tical area o f contact shall be achieved, a n d this shall
be d i s t r i b u t e d evenly.
T h e relationship o f t h e rudder stock a n d boss
cones a t w h i c h this occurs shall be m a r k e d , a n d push
up length then measured from that point.
I n w e l l - f o u n d e d cases a n o t h e r m e t h o d o f d e
termining the original position o f the rudder stock
a n d boss cones relationship c a n be used.
2.5.3.4 T o e n s u r e t h e r e q u i r e d i n t e r f e r e n c e i n t h e
cone coupling the push-up length o fthe rudder stock
( r e f e r t o 2 . 5 . 3 . 3 ) d u r i n g i t s fitting s h a l l b e n o t l e s s
than determined by the formula
where
A =
(2.5.2.2)
s\ = p u s h - u p l e n g t h o f t h e r u d d e r s t o c k , i n m m ;
d = m e a n diameter o f the rudder stock cone, i nm m ;
d = outer diameter (or m i n i m u m outer dimension) o f
r u d d e r blade b o s s o r steering nozzle (in t h e m e a n
section), i n m m ;
E = m o d u l u s o f elasticity o frudder stock material, i n M P a ;
K = taper o fconical coupling, o n the diameter;
q = required contact pressure applied to mating surfaces
during the push-up, i n M P a , determined b y the
formula
m
where
k \ $ =factor equal to:

6920 f o r r u d d e r s f o r t h e a h e a d c o n d i t i o n a n d f o r
steering nozzles;
4950 f o r r u d d e r s f o r t h e a s t e r n c o n d i t i o n ;
M , = t o r q u e a c c o r d i n g t o 2.2.2.3, 2.2.2.4 o r 2.2.3.3, i n k N - m ;
d = diameter o fthe cone section a tthe middle o fthe k e y
length, i n cm;
ReH u p p e r y i e l d s t r e s s o f t h e k e y m a t e r i a l , i n M P a .
m
T h e h e i g h t o f t h e k e y s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n h a l f
its w i d t h .
T h e k e y w a y o fthe rudder stock shall be confined
to the cone coupling.
2.5.2.3 T h e e x t e r n a l d i a m e t e r o f t h e r u d d e r s t o c k
t h r e a d e d p o r t i o n s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 9 t i m e s t h e
m i n i m u m diameter o f t h e cone. T h e thread shall be
fine. T h e o u t e r d i a m e t e r a n d h e i g h t o f t h e n u t s h a l l
n o t b e l e s s t h a n 1,5 a n d 0 , 8 t i m e s t h e e x t e r n a l d i a
m e t e r o f t h e r u d d e r stock t h r e a d e d p o r t i o n , respec
4,25-loW,
/5-^
(.
(2.5.3.4-2)
where
M , = m a x i m u m value o f design torque according

t o 2.2.2.3, 2.2.2.4 o r 2.2.3.3, i n k N - m ;
M = m a x i m u m bending m o m e n t i n w a y o f cone coupling d e
termined
a c c o r d i n g to 2.2.4.8, 2.2.6.3 o r 2.2.7.3, i n k N - m ;
Q = m a s s o f rudder blade o r steering nozzle, i n k g ;
L = actual length o f the contact part o f cone, excluding
the oil distribution grooves a n d similar devices, i n m m ;
n = safety factor against friction slip u n d e r t h e action
of rated torque.
b
P a r t III. E q u i p m e n t , Arrangements
and
Outfit
The spade rudders a n d steering nozzles o f t y

pes X I V a n d X V (refer t o F i g . 2.2.4.1) t h e v a l u e n
s h a l l b e t a k e n n o t less t h a n 2 , 5 ; f o r o t h e r t y p e s o f
rudders a n d steering nozzles this value shall be n o t
less t h a n 2 , 0 .
I f t h e contact pressure q determined b y F o r
m u l a ( 2 . 5 . 3 . 4 - 2 ) i s less t h a n 4 0 M P a , t h e n q = 4 0 M P a
shall be taken i n the calculations.
2.5.3.5 T h e s t r e n g t h o f t h e m a x i m u m l o a d e d p a r t
o f t h e c o u p l i n g s h a l l b e checked: t h e c o m b i n e d stress
on t h e inside o ft h e rudder blade o r steering nozzle
boss s h a l l n o t exceed 0 , 8 5 o f t h e y i e l d stress o f t h e
boss m a t e r i a l . T h e c o m b i n e d stress
o n t h e inside
o f the boss shall be determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
o - c ^ V ' ^ ! z?
0
02
a f
3
+ 0-3
(2.5.3.5-1)
where
r j = c o m b i n e d stress, i n M P a ;
dl
-ft
+ d\
d l - d \ >
(2.5.3.5-2)
6
Af -10
9 i =- 9 + S , 7 3 - i ^ z - ;
(2.5.3.5-3)
02 =
(2.5.3.5-4)
0-3
qu
n(d
dj)+
(2.5.3.5-5)
Y-
contact pressure b e t w e e n mating cone surfaces i n w a y o f

m a x i m u m diameter o f t h e rudder stock cone under
c o m b i n e d a c t i o n o f torque a n d b e n d i n g m o m e n t s , i n M P a ;
<? = m a x i m u m d i a m e t e r o f r u d d e r s t o c k c o n e , i n m m ;
L = length o frudder stock cone, i n m m .
s
2.5.3.6 T h e v a l u e o f o i l p r e s s u r e a p p l i e d t o t h e
m a t i n g cone surfaces o f the r u d d e r stock a n d rudder
blade boss d u r i n g m o u n t i n g a n d d i s m o u n t i n g o f t h e
c o u p l i n g shall n o t exceed ,
i nM P a , determined
by the formula
P m i i x
= 0,55R [l e H
( ff]
(2.5.3.6)
where B ^ u = yield stress o f material o f t h e r u d d e r blade o r

steering nozzle boss, i n M P a .
2.5.3.7 T h e d e s i g n a n d d i m e n s i o n s o f t h e s t o c k
tail a n d t h en u t , as w e l l as t h em e a n s f o r securing t h e
nut shall b e a subject o f special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e
Register.
2.5.4 W h e r e t h e r u d d e r s t o c k i s n o t m a d e o f a
solid piece, i t s p a r t s s h a l l b e j o i n e d b y m e a n s o f a
m u f f coupling o r b y other m e t h o d w h i c h will be
specially c o n s i d e r e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
229
2.6 R U D D E R
PINTLES
2.6.1 T h e d i a m e t e r d , i n c m , o f p i n t l e s w i t h o u t
liners, as well as o f pintles w i t h liners, b u t before their
s e t t i n g , s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r
mula
4
d =l%jRjR^
4
where
(2.6.1)
= design value o fthe reaction o fthe considered pintle

( o r
determined according to the provisions
o f 2.2.4 a n d 2.2.5 f o r t h e a p p r o p r i a t e t y p e o f t h e
rudder, i nk N ;
R e H = u p p e r yield stress o fthe pintle material, i n M P a .
t
2.6.2 T h e l e n g t h o f t h e c o n e p a r t o f t h e p i n t l e i n
rudder gudgeon, i n welded-in bush o f t h e steering
n o z z l e o r i n t h e s o l e p i e c e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e
diameter o fthe pintle according t o 2.6.1; thecone o n
the d i a m e t e r shall n o t exceed 1:10. T h e cone shall
change i n t o c y l i n d r i c a l p o r t i o n w i t h o u t a n y step i n
the diameter.
The external diameter o f t h e pintle threaded
p o r t i o n s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 8 t i m e s t h e m i n i m u m
diameter o fthe cone. T h e outer diameter a n d height
o f t h e n u t s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n 1,5 a n d 0 , 6 t i m e s t h e
external diameter o f the pintle threaded portion, re
spectively.
2.6.3 T h e r a t i o o f b e a r i n g h e i g h t t o d i a m e t e r
measured outside t h e pintle liners, where fitted, shall
n o t b e less t h a n 1 , n o r m o r e t h a n 1,3.
2.6.4 T h e w i d t h o f m a t e r i a l i n t h e r u d d e r g u d
geons a n d welded-in bushes o f t h e steering nozzle
measured outside t h ehole f o r t h epintle bush shall
n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 5 t i m e s t h e d i a m e t e r o f t h e p i n t l e
w i t h o u t liner.
For rudder pintles o f2 0 0 m ma n d over i n dia
m e t e r i t i s a l l o w e d t o reduce t h e specified w i d t h o f the
gudgeon f r o m 0,5 times the diameter o f the gudgeon
d o w n t o 0,35 times t h e d i a m e t e r o f the p i n t l e w i t h o u t
liner i n case t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.6.2 a n d 2.6.3 a r e
met, the following relation is obtained:
k >
where
(2.6.4)
/7 = h e i g h t o f t h e p i n t l e b u s h , i n c m ;
<= d i a m e t e r o f t h e p i n t l e , i n c m , i n c l u d i n g i t s l i n e r ,
w h e r e fitted;
R H(p)
u p p e r yield stress o fthe pintle material, i n M P a ;
ReH(g) = u p p e r y i e l d s t r e s s o f t h e g u d g e o n m a t e r i a l , i n M P a .
=
2.6.5 T o p r e v e n t s e l f - u n s c r e w i n g , t h e n u t s h a l l b e
securely fastened b y m e a n s o fa t least t w o w e l d e d - o n
strips o r o n e w e l d e d - o n strip a n d a split p i n , a n d t h e
pintles shall b e securely fastened i n gudgeons o f t h e
rudder o r sternframe.
230
Rules
2.6.6 T h e chosen dimensions o f the pintles shall

be checked b y t h e surface l o a d i n g p , i n M P a , this
being t a k e n as
p = \QR l{d l )
i
where for R
di=
(2.6.6)
r e f e r t o 2.6.1;
diameter o f t h e pintle, i n c m , including its liner,
w h e r e fitted;
/ = height o f the pintle bush, i n c m .
h
T h i s surface l o a d i n g shall n o t exceed t h e values

specified i n T a b l e 2.1.6. U s e o f t h e m a t e r i a l s different
f r o m those specified i n this T a b l e f o r r u b b i n g parts w i l l
be specially c o n s i d e r e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
2.7 R U D D E R
A X L E
2.7.1 T h ediameter o f the rudder axle directly at

t h e f l a n g e d s h a l l b e s u c h t h a t t h e n o r m a l stresses a
developed i n i t s sections d o n o t exceed 0,5 times t h e
u p p e r y i e l d stress o f t h e r u d d e r a x l e m a t e r i a l . T h e
n o r m a l stress a , i n M P a , s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formula
5
a=l0 M . /4
r
where M
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
n o t less t h a n 0 , 7 , a n d t o t h e v e r t i c a l a x i s o f s y m m e t r y
o f t h e f l a n g e p l a n e , n o t less t h a n 0 , 6 t i m e s t h e d i a meter d o f the rudder axle given i n 2.7.1.
2.7.4 O n l y fitted bolts shall be employed, except
t h e cases o f a k e y setting w h e n i t i s s u f f i c i e n t t o h a v e
o n l y t w o fitted b o l t s . T h e n u t s s h a l l h a v e s t a n d a r d
sizes, a n d t h e y s h a l l b e s e c u r e l y f a s t e n e d b y s p l i t p i n s
o r w e l d - o n strips.
2.7.5 T h e thickness o f t h e coupling flange shall
n o t b e less t h a n t h e d i a m e t e r o f t h e b o l t s . T h e c e n t r e s
o f the holes for bolts shall be distant f r o m the outside
e d g e s o f t h e f l a n g e b y n o t less t h a n 1,15 t i m e s t h e
diameter o f the bolts.
2.7.6 W h e r e the diameter o f t h e rudder axle
changes, sufficient fillets shall be p r o v i d e d . A t t r a n s i t i o n f r o m t h e r u d d e r a x l e t o t h e f l a n g e a fillet s h a l l
be p r o v i d e d w i t h a r a d i u s o f n o t less t h a n 0 , 1 2 t i m e s
the rudder axle diameter.
2.7.7 T o prevent self-unscrewing, t h e n u t o f t h e
r u d d e r axle shall be securely fastened a t least b y t w o
w e l d - o n strips o r o n e w e l d - o n strip a n d a split p i n .
2.7.8 T h e requirements o f 2.6.6 f o r pintles are a p plicable t o t h e rudder blade bearings o n t h e rudder axle.
5
(2.7.1)
= d e s i g n value o f the bending m o m e n t determined

a c c o r d i n g t o t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 2.2.4.15, i n k N " m ;
d = diameter o f the rudder axle a t the flange, i n c m .
2.8 R U D D E R S T O C K
BEARINGS
r a
T h e diameter o f the rudder axle i n w a y o f the

r u d d e r b e a r i n g s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h e d i a m e t e r d .
T h e diameter o f the rudder axle between the rudder
blade bearings m a y be reduced b y 10 p e r cent.
2.7.2 A s regards the cone a n d threaded portions
o f t h e rudder axle a n d also its nut, t h e requirements
are as stipulated i n 2.6.2 f o r t h e pintles.
2.7.3 T h e diameter o f bolts o f t h e rudder axle
f l a n g e c o u p l i n g cfa , i n c m , s h a l l b e n o t l e s s t h a n d e termined by the formula
5
+ (o.n
o . 6 g y
(2.7.3)
where
R = design value o f the reaction o f the rudder axle upper

b e a r i n g d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 2.2.4.11, i n k N ;
M
= design value o f t h e bending m o m e n t acting i nt h e
rudder axle section near its flange determined
a c c o r d i n g t o 2.2.4.15, i n k N m ;
r = m e a n distance from t h e centre o f t h e bolts to the
centre o f the system o f the flange bolt holes, i n m ;
r = distance f r o m the centre line o f the r u d d e r stock t o
the contact plane o f the rudder axle flanges a n dt h e
sternframe, i n m ;
z = number o f the bolts o f the flange coupling;
R
= u p p e r yield stress o f the bolt material, i n M P a .
2
2.8.1 T h e requirements o f 2.6.6 f o r pintles are

applicable t o the rudder stock bearings taking lateral
load.
2.8.2 A rudder carrier shall be installed t o take
the mass o f t h e rudder blade o r steering nozzle a n d
rudder stock. T h e deck shall be efficiently strengthened i n w a y o f t h e rudder carrier.
M e a s u r e s shall be t a k e n against axial displacem e n t o f t h e rudder blade o r steering nozzle a n d
rudder stock upwards b y a value exceeding that
p e r m i t t e d b y t h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f t h e steering gear;
furthermore, f o r steering nozzle measures shall be
taken t o provide f o r guaranteed clearance between
propeller blades a n d n o z z l e u n d e r service c o n d i t i o n s .
2 . 8 . 3 A s t u f f i n g b o x s h a l l b e fitted i n w a y o f
passage o f t h e rudder stock t h r o u g h t h e t o p o f a
r u d d e r t r u n k w h i c h is o p e n t o sea t o p r e v e n t w a t e r
f r o m e n t e r i n g t h e ship's space. T h e s t u f f i n g b o x s h a l l
b e fitted i n a p l a c e a c c e s s i b l e f o r i n s p e c t i o n a n d
maintenance at all times.
2.9 S T E E R I N G
G E A R
T h e n u m b e r o f t h e b o l t s z s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 6 .
T h e distance f r o m t h e centre o f a n y b o l t t o t h e
centre o f t h e system o f t h e flange bolt holes shall be
2
2.9.1 Ships shall be provided w i t h a m a i n steering

gear a n d a n a u x i l i a r y steering gear, unless expressly
provided otherwise.
Arrangements
and
Outfit
2.9.2 T h e m a i n s t e e r i n g g e a r a n d r u d d e r s t o c k
shall be capable o f putting t h e rudder o r t h e steering
n o z z l e o v e r f r o m 35 o n o n e s i d e t o 35 o n t h e o t h e r
side, a t m a x i m u m o p e r a t i o n a l d r a u g h t a n d m a x i m u m
o p e r a t i o n a l ahead speed o f t h e ship a n d u n d e r t h e
s a m e c o n d i t i o n s f r o m 35 o n o n e s i d e t o 30 o n t h e
o t h e r s i d e i n n o t m o r e t h a n 2 8 s.
2.9.3 T h e a u x i l i a r y s t e e r i n g g e a r s h a l l b e c a p a b l e
o f p u t t i n g t h e r u d d e r o r s t e e r i n g n o z z l e o v e r f r o m 15
o n o n e s i d e t o 15 o n t h e o t h e r s i d e i n n o t m o r e
than 60 s at m a x i m u m operational draught and half
o f t h e m a x i m u m o p e r a t i o n a l ahead speed o r 7 k n o t s ,
2 . 9 . 4 I n o i l t a n k e r s , o i l t a n k e r s ( > 6 0 C), c o m b i n a t i o n carriers, gas carriers a n d chemical tankers o f
10000 gross t o n n a g e a n d u p w a r d s , i n a l l nuclear ships
a n d i n o t h e r ships o f 7 0 000 gross tonnage a n d u p w a r d s t h e m a i n steering gear shall comprise t w o o r
m o r e identical p o w e r units satisfying the requirem e n t s o f 2.9.5 (refer also t o 6.2.1.8 a n d 6.2.1.9,
Part I X "Machinery").
2.9.5 W h e r e t h e m a i n s t e e r i n g g e a r c o m p r i s e s t w o
o r m o r e p o w e r units, a n a u x i l i a r y steering gear need
n o t be fitted if:
.1 i n passenger a n d n u c l e a r ships as w e l l as i n
special purpose ships h a v i n g m o r e t h a n 2 4 0 persons
o n b o a r d t h e m a i n steering gear is capable o f opera t i n g as required i n 2.9.2 w h i l e a n y o n e o f t h e p o w e r
units is o u t o f operation;
.2 i n c a r g o s h i p s a s w e l l a s i n s p e c i a l p u r p o s e
s h i p s h a v i n g 2 4 0 o r less p e r s o n s o n b o a r d t h e m a i n
steering gear is capable o f o p e r a t i n g as r e q u i r e d
i n 2.9.2 while a l l p o w e r units are i n operation;
.3 t h e m a i n s t e e r i n g g e a r i s s o a r r a n g e d t h a t a f t e r
a single failure i n its p i p i n g system o r i n a n y o n e o f
the p o w e r u n i t s t h e defect c a n be isolated so t h a t
steering capability c a n be m a i n t a i n e d o r speedily regained.
2.9.6 W h e r e a c c o r d i n g t o 2 . 3 . 1 t h e d i a m e t e r o f
the rudder head is required t o be over 2 3 0 m m , excluding strengthening f o rn a v i g a t i o n i n ice, p r o v i s i o n
shall be m a d e f o r a n additional source o f electrical
p o w e r as prescribed i n 5.5.6, P a r t X I " E l e c t r i c a l
E q u i p m e n t " sufficient t o ensure operation o f the
steering gear p o w e r u n i t i n compliance w i t h the requirements o f 2.9.3.
2.9.7 T h e m a i n s t e e r i n g g e a r m a y b e h a n d - o p e r a t e d
p r o v i d e d i t meets t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 6.2.3.2, P a r t L X
" M a c h i n e r y " a n d t h e rudder stock a n d steering nozzle
d i a m e t e r specified i n 2 . 3 . 1 does n o t exceed 1 2 0 m m
(excluding strengthening f o r n a v i g a t i o n i n ice).
I n a l l o t h e r cases, t h e m a i n s t e e r i n g gear s h a l l be
operated b y power.
2.9.8 T h e a u x i l i a r y s t e e r i n g g e a r m a y b e h a n d operated
provided i t meets the requirements
o f 6.2.3.3, P a r t I X " M a c h i n e r y " a n d t h e r u d d e r stock
231
o r steering nozzle d i a m e t e r specified i n 2.3.1 does n o t

exceed 2 3 0 m m (excluding strengthening f o r n a v i g a t i o n i n ice).
I n a l l o t h e r cases, t h e a u x i l i a r y s t e e r i n g g e a r s h a l l
be operated b y p o w e r .
2.9.9 T h e m a i n a n d a u x i l i a r y steering gears s h a l l
act o n t h e rudder stock independently o fone another,
b u t i t is a l l o w e d that t h e m a i n a n d a u x i l i a r y steering
gears h a v e s o m e c o m m o n p a r t s ( s u c h as tiller,
q u a d r a n t , gear b o x , c y l i n d e r b l o c k , etc.) p r o v i d e d t h e
respective scantUngs o f these parts a r e increased i n
accordance w i t h 6.2.8.2, P a r t I X " M a c h i n e r y " .
2.9.10 T h e r u d d e r t a c k l e m a y b e c o n s i d e r e d a s a n
a u x i l i a r y s t e e r i n g g e a r o n l y i n t h e f o l l o w i n g cases:
.1 i n s e l f - p r o p e l l e d s h i p s o f less t h a n 5 0 0 g r o s s
tonnage;
.2 i n n o n - p r o p e l l e d s h i p s .
I n o t h e r cases, t h e r u d d e r t a c k l e is n o t c o n s i d e r e d
as a s t e e r i n g g e a r a n d s h a l l n o t n e c e s s a r i l y b e f i t t e d i n
ships.
2.9.11 T h e r u d d e r s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a s y s t e m
o f stops p e r m i t t i n g t o p u t t h e r u d d e r o v e r e i t h e r side
o n l y t o a n a n g l e P
o
(o + l ) < p < ( a + 1,5)

where
(2.9.11-1)
<x = m a x i m u m h a r d - o v e r a n g l e t o w h i c h t h e s t e e r i n g g e a r
c o n t r o l s y s t e m i s a d j u s t e d b u t n o t o v e r 35; t h e
greater hard-over angle is subject to special consideration b y theRegister i n each case.
A U t h e parts o f t h e system o f stops, i n c l u d i n g those

w h i c h a r e a t t h e same t i m e t h e parts o f t h e steering gear,
shaU be calculated t o t a k e forces c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o a n
u l t i m a t e reverse t o r q u e M
i n k N - m , f r o m the rudder
o f n o t less t h a n
A
M / f
where
=l,135*
e / /
4-10-
(2.9.11-2)
do = a c t u a l d i a m e t e r o f t h e r u d d e r s t o c k h e a d , i n c m ;
R e H = u p p e r yield stress o f the rudder stock material, i n M P a .
T h e stresses i n these p a r t s s h a l l n o t exceed

0,95 t i m e s t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress o f t h e i r m a t e r i a l . T h e
rudder stops o f t h e system m a y be fitted o n t h e
sternframe, deck p l a t f o r m , b u l k h e a d o r other struct u r a l m e m b e r s o f t h e ship's h u l l .
W h e r e t h e active rudder is p r o v i d e d a n d there is a
need t o p u t the rudder over t o a n angle exceeding the
m a x i m u m o n e , a r r a n g e m e n t o f stops s h a l l be specially c o n s i d e r e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
2.9.12 C o n t r o l o f t h e m a i n s t e e r i n g g e a r s h a l l b e
provided b o t h o n the navigation bridge a n d i n the
steering gear c o m p a r t m e n t .
2.9.13 W h e n t h e m a i n s t e e r i n g g e a r i s a r r a n g e d
according t o 2.9.4 o r 2.9.5, t w o independent steering
gear c o n t r o l systems shall be provided, each o f w h i c h
shall be operable separately f r o m the n a v i g a t i o n
bridge. These systems m a y have a c o m m o n steering
w h e e l o r level. I f t h e c o n t r o l system comprises a h y -
232
Rules
draulic telemotor, the Register m a y waive the require

m e n t f o r a second independent c o n t r o l system o ft h e
steering gear f o r t h e ship ( w i t h t h e exception o f o i l
t a n k e r s , o i l t a n k e r s ( > 6 0 C), c o m b i n a t i o n c a r r i e r s , g a s
carriers a n d chemical tankers o f 1 0 0 0 0 gross tonnage
a n d u p w a r d s , o f o t h e r ships o f 7 0 0 0 0 gross t o n n a g e
a n d u p w a r d s a n d o f nuclear ships).
2.9.14 T h e a u x i l i a r y s t e e r i n g g e a r c o n t r o l s h a l l b e
p r o v i d e d i n t h e steering gear c o m p a r t m e n t .
F o r t h e auxiliary steering gear w h i c h is p o w e r
operated, c o n t r o l shall also be provided f r o m t h e
navigation bridge a n d shall be independent o f the
c o n t r o l s y s t e m f o r t h e m a i n steering gear.
2.9.15 A r u d d e r o r s t e e r i n g n o z z l e a n g l e i n d i c a t o r
shall be fitted i n t h evicinity o f each c o n t r o l station o f
the m a i n a n d auxiliary steering gears a n d i n t h e
steering gear c o m p a r t m e n t . T h e difference between
the indicated a n d actual positions o f the rudder o r
steering nozzle shall be n o tm o r e than:
1 w h e n t h e r u d d e r o r s t e e r i n g n o z z l e i s i n t h e
centre Une o r parallel t o it;
1,5 f o r r u d d e r o r s t e e r i n g n o z z l e a n g l e s f r o m 0 t o 5;
2,5 f o r r u d d e r o r s t e e r i n g n o z z l e a n g l e s f r o m 5
t o 35.
The rudder o r steering nozzle angle indication
shall be independent o f t h e steering gear c o n t r o l
system.
2.9.16 I n a l l o t h e r r e s p e c t s t h e s t e e r i n g g e a r s h a l l
meet the requirements o f Part I X "Machinery" a n d
Part X I "Electrical Equipment".
2.10 E F F I C I E N C Y O F R U D D E R S A N D S T E E R I N G
N O Z Z L E S
2.10.1 G e n e r a l .
2.10.1.1 T h e c h o i c e o f t h e s h i p ' s m a i n c h a r a c t e r
istics affecting t h e steerabiUty a n d t h e characteristics o f
the rudder a n d steering nozzle is m a d e a t t h e discretion
o f t h e designer a n d s h i p o w n e r considering t h e necessity
to ensure t h e proper steerabiUty o f t h e ship according
to i t s p u r p o s e a n d service c o n d i t i o n s a n d t o ensure
the correspondence between relative areas o f rudders
a n d steering nozzles o f t h e ship u n d e r design a n d t h e
p r o t o t y p e ship p r o v i d e d t h e t o t a l efficiency o f t h e
c h o s e n r u d d e r s a n d / o r s t e e r i n g n o z z l e s i s n o t less t h a n
that required i n t h e present Chapter.
2.10.1.2 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t C h a p t e r
apply t o stern rudders a n d steering nozzles (refer
to 2.1.2) p r o v i d e d according t o 2.1.1 i n self-propelled
ships ( o t h e r t h a n icebreakers) o f 2 0 m a n d o v e r i n
l e n g t h o f unrestricted service a n d restricted area o f
navigation R l saiUng i n t h e displacement condition.
F o r ships o frestricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 a n d R 3
the standards set f o r t h i n 2.10.3 shall be considered as
recommendations.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
For
ships o f river-sea n a v i g a t i o n R 2 - R S N ,
R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) a n d R 3 - R S N t h e standards set f o r t h
i n 2.10.3 shaU also b e considered as r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s ,
a n d t h e fulfilment o f these standards does n o t give t h e
grounds for exemption f r o m the fulfilment o f the current
standards o f steerabiUty f o r ships o f i n l a n d n a v i g a t i o n .
apply t o ships h a v i n g t h e geometric characteristics o f
the h u l l w i t h i n t h e following Umits:
ii/5=3,2 8,0;
/d = 8 , 3 2 8 , 6 ;
B / d = 1,5 3 , 5 ;
where
for C,
= 0,45 0,85;
C = 0,55 0,85;
a = 0 , 8 0 0,99
B = breadth o f the ship, i n m ;

d, L
C a n d r j , r e f e r t o 2.2.2.1, 2.4.1.1 a n d 2.10.3.3,
respectively.
Application o f t h e requirements o f t h e present

C h a p t e r t o o t h e r ships is subject t o special agreement
apply t o catamarans w i t h t w oidentical hulls (sym
metric about the centreUne o f the hulls), each h a v i n g
geometric characteristics according t o t h e provisions
o f 2.10.1.3, a n d w i t h t w o identical rudders and/or
steering nozzles arranged i n t h e centre plane o f each
hull.
2.10.1.5 T h e a c t i v e m e a n s o f t h e s h i p ' s s t e e r i n g
w h i c h a r e n o t t h e m a i n means o f t h e ship's steering
(thrusters, active rudders, etc.) a r e considered as
means supplementing the required m i n i m u m a n dare
not taken into account w h e n meeting the require
ments o f t h e present Chapter (refer also t o 2.1.3.2).
2.10.2 E s t i m a t i o n o f e f f i c i e n c y o f r u d d e r s a n d
steering nozzles.
2.10.2.1 T h e e f f i c i e n c y o f t h e c h o s e n r u d d e r E ,
other t h a n rudders o f types I V , X a n d X I I I (refer t o
Fig. 2.2.4.1), shall be determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
r
^ ) { \
(2.10.2.1-1)
where
^1=
W=
^~
(2.10.2.1-2)
coefficient:
for r u d d e r a r r a n g e d i n t h ecentreline b e h i n d t h e
propeller
^=0,3C ;
B
(2.10.2.1-3)
for rudder arranged i n t h e centreline with n o

propeller fitted f o r w a r d o fit
W=0;
(2.10.2.1-4)
P a r t III. E q u i p m e n t , Arrangements
and
Outfit
233
for side steering nozzle
for side r u d d e r s
W = 0,4C
A
0,13;
W=0,1C
(2.10.2.1 -5)
(2.10.2.3-4)
>
= lateral underwater area a tthe s u m m e r load waterline

draught, i n m ;
f o r A , A , h , C , r e f e r t o 2.2.2.1;
C H B v a l u e d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (2.2.3.1-8) w i t h r e g a r d
t o F o r m u l a (2.2.3.1-4) a t W a s s p e c i f i e d i n t h e
p r e s e n t s u b - p a r a g r a p h w i t h r e g a r d t o 2.2.2.6; f o r
rudders n o toperating directly behind t h e propeller
t h e t h r u s t i s t a k e n a s T = 0.
= outside diameter o fthe steering nozzle i n the plane o f

the p r o p e l l e r d i s k , i n m ;
f o r C , D, l a n d A , r e f e r t o 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 , 2 . 2 . 3 . 1 a n d 2 . 1 0 . 2 . 1 , r e s p e c
tively;
C H B v a l u e d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (2.2.3.1-8) w i t h r e g a r d
t o F o r m u l a (2.2.3.1-4) a t W a s s p e c i f i e d i n t h e
p r e s e n t s u b - p a r a g r a p h w i t h r e g a r d t o 2.2.2.6.
2.10.2.2 T h e e f f i c i e n c y o f t h e c h o s e n r u d d e r E o f
t y p e s , X o r X I I I ( r e f e r t o F i g . 2 . 2 . 4 . 1 ) s h a l l b e
2.10.3 S t a n d a r d s f o r e f f i c i e n c y o f r u d d e r s a n d
steering nozzles.
2.10.3.1 T h e t o t a l e f f i c i e n c y o f a l l r u d d e r s a n d
steering nozzles (refer t o 2.10.2) fitted i n t h e ship
( o t h e r t h a n c a t a m a r a n ) s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e
greater o fthe values E ,E \ o r E given below.
2.10.3.2 T h e e f f i c i e n c y o f t h e s i n g l e r u d d e r o r
steering nozzle fitted i n t h ec a t a m a r a n w h i c h is de
t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 2 . 1 0 . 2 s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e
greater o f the values E \ , E o r 3 estimated according
to t h e p r o v i s i o n s specified b e l o w considering each
h u l l o fthe c a t a m a r a n as a n independent single-screw
ship. W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e lateral windage area, a l l
the above-water structures o fthe catamaran a n d t h e
deck cargo ( i fintended t o be carried) are considered
as b e l o n g i n g t o o n e h u l l .
2.10.3.3 F o r a l l s h i p s , o t h e r t h a n t u g s , r e s c u e a n d
f i s h i n g vessels, t h e v a l u e o f E \ i s d e t e r m i n e d d e pending o nthe values o f C a n d a :
for
single-screw
ships
according
to
Fig. 2.10.3.3-1;
for t w i n - s c r e w a n d triple-screw ships according
to F i g . 2.10.3.3-2.
For intermediate values o fC t h e value o f E \ is
determined b y Unear interpolation between the curves
for t w o nearest values o fC given i n Figs 2.10.3.3-1
a n d 2.10.3.3-2 w h e r e C is prismatic coefficient o f the
r r
.= 1 , 4 1 Wf
(
(2.10.2.2-1)
A
where u =
where
%,
1 +..'
A,
1 + 0,5
' \ l /
(2.10.2.2.-2)
b = breadth o fthe rudder, i n m ;

b , = total b r e a d t h o fthe r u d d e r a n d r u d d e r post, i n m ;
f o r A , r e f e r t o 2.2.2.1;
f o r A , CHB, W, r e f e r t o 2 . 1 0 . 2 . 1 .
r
2.10.2.3 T h e e f f i c i e n c y o f t h e c h o s e n s t e e r i n g
n o z z l e E w i t h o r w i t h o u t a s t a b i l i z e r s h a l l b e d e
termined b ythe formula
= 2 , 8 6 ^ 3 ^ ( 1 Wf
(2.10.2.3-1)
A2
where
= (0,175 + 0 , 2 7 5 % 1 + 0,25(1 + J\
+ C f\
HB
0 , 2 5 ^ ^ ;
(2.10.2.3-2)
W = coefficient:
for steering nozzle a r r a n g e d i n the centreline o f the

ship
W=0,2C ;
B
(2.10.2.3-3)
F i g . 2.10.3.3-1
234
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
0,10
0,08
0,06
0,04
0,02
0,78
0,80
0,82
0,84
0,86
0,88
0,90
0,92
0,94
0,96
0,98
F i g . 2.10.3.3-2
underwater part o f the hull at the summer load w a

terline d r a u g h t as d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
2.10.3.5 T h e value
3
C =C /C
P
where
(2.10.3.3-1)
= coefficient o f fineness o f m i d s h i p section a t t h e

s u m m e r load waterline draught;
<y = afterbody lateral area coefficient a t the s u m m e r load
waterline draught a s determined b y the formula
m
E2= -^(l
x(V
is determined b y the f o r m u l a
- 0 , 0 6 6 7 ^ ) { l + (K-
7,5)] -
5 ^ - }
1)[0,33+0,015 x
(2.10.3.5-1)
=1
where
2(/-/o)
where
(2.10.3.3-2)
L = length o f the ship measured o n the summer load

waterline f r o m the fore side o f the stem t o t h e after
side o f the after e n d o f the ship, i n m ;
/ = area o f side projection o f the stern counter, i n m ,
calculated a s t h earea o f the figure b o u n d e d b y t h e
extension line o f t h e keel lower edge, b y t h e
perpendicular t o this line f r o m t h e p o i n t o f intersec
tion o fthe s u m m e r load waterline a n d the outline o f
the centreline section o f the ship's after e n d a n db y
the sternframe after edge line d r a w n ignoring t h e
rudder post, solepiece o rr u d d e r h o r n , i f a n y ;
f = f o r twin-screw ships area o f the side projection o f the
propeller cone (or its part) superimposed o n t h e area o f
t h e figure/ i n m . I n a l l o t h e r c a s e s f s h a l l b e t a k e n a s
zero;
f o r r f , r e f e r t o 2.4.1.1.
= lateral windage area a t such a m i n i m u m draught a t

which t h e r u d d e r blade o r steering nozzle is fully
i m m e r s e d (at the u p r i g h t position o f t h e ship), i nm ,
t o b e d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.4.6, P a r t I V
"Stability";
A = lateral underwater area a t such a m i n i m u m draught
at w h i c h t h e r u d d e r b l a d e o r steering n o z z l e i s fully
i m m e r s e d (att h e u p r i g h t position o fthe ship), i n m ;
xo = h o r i z o n t a l d i s t a n c e f r o m t h e m i d s h i p f r a m e ( m i d d l e
of the length L ) to the centroid o fthe area A , in m .
The value o f x is taken to b e positive i n case t h e
centroid is forward o f the midship frame, a n d
negative i ncase o f aft position;
\ =
coefficient determined b y the formulae:
for all rudders, other t h a n r u d d e r s o f types I V , X
a n d X I I I ( r e f e r t o F i g . 2.2.4.1)
(2.10.3.5-2)
K=hllA;
f o r r u d d e r s o f t y p e s I V , X , X I I I ( r e f e r t o F i g . 2.2.4.1)
K = hllA,;
2 . 1 0 . 3 . 4 F o r tugs, rescue ships a n d f i s h i n g vessels

the value E \ is determined according t o F i g . 2.10.3.4
depending o n t h e value a.
for steering nozzles
0,78
0,80
0,82
0,8f
0,86
0,88
0,90
(2.10.3.5-3)
K = Dll
0,92
F i g . 2.10.3.4
0,94
0,96
(2.10.3.5^)
0,98
where
Arrangements
and
Outfit
235
f o r V, h , A , A r e f e r t o 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 ;
r
f o r D , l , r e f e r t o 2.2.3.1.
n
2.10.3.6 F o r s h i p s o f 7 0 m i n l e n g t h a n d m o r e t h e
value is determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
3
t o 35 o n e i t h e r s i d e i s n o t l e s s t h a n f o u r l e n g t h s o f
the ship;
.2 t h e s t e a d y s p o n t a n e o u s t u r n i n g d i a m e t e r o f t h e
ship w i t h non-reversed rudder (rudders) o r steering
nozzle (rudders) D determined b y the formula
s
D = (D
S
= 0 , 0 3 + 0
where
1) + 0 , 0 1 ^ ( l -
(2..3.6)
= lateral windage area o f the ship a t the s u m m e r load

waterline draught, i nm , t o b e determined according
t o 1.4.6, P a r t I V " S t a b i l i t y " ;
x = horizontal distance f r o m the midship frame (middle o f the
length L \ ) t o the centroid o fthe area A , i n m . T h e value
o f x i s taken t o b e positive i n case the centroid is forward
o f the midship frame a n d negative i n case o f aft position.
where D
F o r s h i p s o f less t h a n 7 0 m i n l e n g t h 3 = 0 i s
taken i n the calculations.
2.10.3.7 F o r a l l s h i p s ( o t h e r t h a n r e s c u e a n d
f i s h i n g vessels a n d tugs, w i t h a > 0 , 8 6 5 ) i t is perm i t t e d i n t h e calculations t o take E \ as zero ( i f t h e
value o f E \ is greater t h a n a n y o f t h e values o f
o r 3 ) p r o v i d e d i t i s p r o v e d b y t h e test o f a selfp r o p e l l e d m o d e l n o t less t h a n 2 m i n l e n g t h ( a t t h e
s p e e d o f t h e m o d e l c o n f o r m i n g t o t h e s h i p ' s s p e e d V,
refer t o 2.2.2.1) that:
.1 t h e steady t u r n i n g d i a m e t e r o f t h e s h i p w i t h t h e
rudder (rudders) o r steering nozzle (rudders) p u t over
a
s s
(2.10.3.7)
s p
is n o t less t h a n 3 , 3 5 ( D
+ D )/2
S S
t s
+ D
t p
and D
= steady turning diameter o f the ship with the
r u d d e r o r s t e e r i n g n o z z l e p u t o v e r t o 35 o n
s t a r b o a r d o r port side, respectively;
a n d D = diameter o fsteady spontaneous turning starboard o r
port, respectively, with t h e non-reversed rudder o r
steering nozzle.
a
If, f o r technical reasons, t h e requirement o f t h e

present sub-paragraph is n o t feasible, departure f r o m
this r e q u i r e m e n t is subject t o special consideration b y
the Register.
2.10.3.8 F o r s h i p s w i t h t h e d i s p l a c e m e n t e x c e e d i n g 6 0 0 0 0 1 a n d b l o c k coefficient exceeding 0,75 a t t h e
summer load waterline draught, thecompliance w i t h
the requirements o f 2.10.3.7.1 a n d 2.10.3.7.2 shall be
p r o v e d b y t e s t i n g a s e l f - p r o p e l l e d m o d e l o f n o t less
t h a n 2 m i n l e n g t h ( a t t h e speed o f t h e m o d e l c o n f o r m i n g t o t h e s h i p ' s s p e e d V, r e f e r t o 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 ) , n o t withstanding the fulfilment o f the requirements
o f 2.10.3.1.
3 ANCHOR ARRANGEMENT
3.1
G E N E R A L
3.1.1 E a c h s h i p s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a n c h o r
e q u i p m e n t a n d also w i t h c h a i n stoppers f o r securing t h e
b o w e r a n c h o r s i n h a w s e pipes, devices f o r securing a n d
releasing t h e i n b o a r d ends o f t h e c h a i n cables a n d
machinery f o r dropping a n d hoisting the bower anc h o r s as w e l l as f o r h o l d i n g t h e ship a t t h e b o w e r a n chors dropped.
Besides, i n cases specified i n 3.6.1.1 e a c h b o w e r
a n c h o r c h a i n cable shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h a stopper
for riding the ship at anchor.
3.1.2 I f a s h i p i n a d d i t i o n t o t h e a n c h o r a r r a n g e m e n t
o r e q u i p m e n t specified i n 3.1.1 is p r o v i d e d w i t h s o m e
other anchor arrangement o r equipment (for example,
special a n c h o r s a n d w i n c h e s o n dredgers, m o o r i n g a n c h o r s o n lightships, etc.), s u c h a n c h o r a r r a n g e m e n t o r
e q u i p m e n t is regarded as special o n e a n d is n o t subject t o
the Register survey. T h e use o f anchor arrangement
specified i n 3.1.1 as a w o r k i n g special a r r a n g e m e n t f o r
m o v i n g the dredgers a n d also f o r h o l d i n g t h edredgers i n
place i n t h e course o f dredging carried o u t b y grabs is
subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e Register i n each
case; i t i s n e c e s s a r y t o s u b m i t t o t h e R e g i s t e r t h e r e q u i r e d
data characterizing the conditions o f w o r k o f anchor
a r r a n g e m e n t elements (the v a l u e a n d degree o f d y n a m i c s
o f acting forces, the degree o f intensity o f w o r k a n d w e a r
r a t e o f t h e a n c h o r a r r a n g e m e n t elements, etc.).
3.1.3 F o r a l l s h i p s , e x c e p t f i s h i n g v e s s e l s , t h e a n c h o r e q u i p m e n t s h a l l be selected f r o m T a b l e 3.1.3-1,
f o r f i s h i n g vessels f r o m T a b l e 3.1.3-2 a c c o r d i n g t o
Equipment N u m b e r determined i n compliance
w i t h 3.2 i n t h e case o f ships o f u n r e s t r i c t e d service a n d
o f restricted area o f navigation R l a n d according t o
E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r reduced:
b y 15 p e r cent i n t h e case o f ships o f restricted
areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 , R 2 - R S N , R2-RSN(4,5) a n d
R3-RSN;
b y 2 5 p e r cent i n t h e case o f ships o f restricted
area o f navigation R 3 , taking account o f the provisions specified i n 3.1.4, 3.3.1, 3.3.2, 3.4.1, 3.4.2, 3.4.3,
3.4.7 a n d 3.4.10.
3.1.4 F o r n o n - p r o p e l l e d s h i p s t h e a n c h o r e q u i p m e n t s h a l l be selected a c c o r d i n g t o E q u i p m e n t N u m ber increased b y 2 5 p e r cent as against that calculated
i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h p r o v i s i o n s specified i n 3.1.3.
236
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
T a b l e
Equipment
Number N
St
Bower
anchors
f is
.
St
.
C h a i n cables for bower

anchors
M s
110
137,5
165
3.1.3-1
Mooring ropes
T o w line
Diameter
a
0
a
^

6 &
Stream wire
or chain
Ships
3 -
8-3
$
10
1|
IS

3
-t-
<*
12
13
IS
14
g.9

3
-t-
<*
14
15
",16
2
2
2
30
30
40
29
29
29
10
15
20
15
20
25
2
2
2
35
50
65
25
30
40
30
40
50
2
2
2
80
105
135
35
45
165
192,5
192,5
11,0
11,0
12,5
55
70
55
60
120
150
65
81
2
2
2
50
50
60
29
29
29
50
70
90
70
90
2
2
2
180
240
300
60
80
100
220
220
247,5
14
16
17,5
12,5
14
16
80
85
85
65
74
81
180
180
180
98
98
98
3
3
3
80
100
34
37
39
130
150
130
150
175
2
2
2
360
420
480
120
140
165
247,5
275
275
19
20,5
22
17,5
17,5
19
90
90
90
89
98
108
180
180
180
98
98
98
3
3
3
120
120
44
49
54
175
205
240
205
240
280
2
3
3
570
660
780
190
302,5
302,5
330
24
26
28
20,5
22
24
90
118
20,5
22
180
180
180
112
129
150
3
4
4
120
120
120
59
64
69
280
320
360
320
360
400
3
3
3
900
1020
1140
357,5
357,5
385
30
32
34
26
28
30
24
24
26
180
180
180
174
207
224
4
4
4
140
140
140
74
78
88
400
450
500
450
500
550
3
3
3
1290
1440
1590
385
412,5
412,5
36
38
40
32
34
34
28
30
30
180
180
190
250
276
306
4
4
4
140
140
160
98
108
123
550
600
660
600
660
720
3
3
3
1740
1920
2100
440
440
440
42
44
46
36
38
40
720
780
840
780
840
910
3
3
3
2280
2460
2640
467,5
467,5
467,5
48
50
52
910
980
1060
980
1060
1140
3
3
3
2850
3060
3300
495
495
495
1140
1220
1300
1220
1300
1390
3
3
3
3540
3780
4050
1390
1480
1570
1480
1570
1670
3
3
3
4230
4590
4890
1670
1790
1930
1790
1930
2080
3
3
3
5250
5610
6000
2080
2230
2380
2230
2380
2530
3
3
3
6450
6900
7350
1)
32
34
36
190
190
190
338
371
406
4
4
4
160
160
160
132
145
157
42
44
46
36
38
40
190
190
190
441
480
518
4
4
4
170
170
170
172
186
201
54
56
58
48
50
50
42
44
46
190
200
200
559
603
647
4
4
4
170
180
180
216
230
250
522,5
522,5
522,5
60
62
64
52
54
56
46
48
50
200
200
200
691
738
786
4
4
4
180
180
180
270
284
309
550
550
550
66
68
70
58
60
62
50
52
54
200
220
220
836
888
941
4
5
5
180
190
190
324
324
333
577,5
577,5
577,5
73
76
78
64
66
68
56
58
60
220
220
220
1024
1109
1168
5
5
5
190
190
190
353
378
402
605
605
605
81
84
87
70
73
76
62
64
66
240
240
240
1259
1356
1453
5
5
5
200
200
200
422
451
480
Arrangements
and
Outfit
237
Table 3.1.3-1
Equipment
Number N
8
g
i
i
.a
St
.
eo
St
Bower
anchors
*s
f is

anchors
M s
a
^

a
a
.a
8
a ^ P .
2530
2700
2870
2700
2870
3040
3
3
3
7800
8300
8700
3040
3210
3400
3210
3400
3600
3
3
3
9300
9900
10500
3600
3800
4000
3800
4000
4200
3
3
3
4200
4400
4600
4400
4600
4800
4800
5000
5200
a
a
.a
A.
if
_s
S a J J
5
10
632,5
632,5
632,5
90
92
95
78
81
84
68
70
73
660
660
660
97
100
102
84
87
90
11100
11700
12300
687,5
687,5
687,5
105
107
111
3
3
3
12900
13500
14100
715
715
715
5000
5200
5500
3
3
3
14700
15400
16000
5500
5800
6100
5800
6100
6500
3
3
3
16900
17800
18800
6500
6900
7400
6900
7400
7900
3
3
3
20000
21500
23000
7900
8400
8900
8400
8900
9400
3
3
3
24500
26000
27500
770
770
770
9400
10000
10700
10000
10700
11500
3
3
3
29000
31000
33000
770
770
770
11500
12400
13400
14600
12400
13400
14600
16000
3
3
3
3
35500
38500
42000
46000
1|
PI
11
a"
$12
|S
g.9
oo
3
-t- oj
M
<*13 s
IS
0)
J5
14
14
a-s
g
15
g.9
M oo
3
-t- oj
<*16s
1471
1471
1471
6
6
6
200
200
200
480
490
500
280
280
280
1471
1471
1471
6
6
6
200
200
200
520
554
588
300
300
300
1471
1471
1471
6
6
7
200
200
200
618
647
647
87
90
92
300
300
300
1471
1471
1471
7
7
7
200
200
200
657
667
677
107
111
111
95
97
97
300
300
300
1471
1471
1471
7
8
8
200
200
200
686
686
696
114
117
120
100
102
107
300
300
1471
1471
8
9
9
200
200
200
706
706
716
124
127
132
111
114
117
0
10
11
200
200
200
726
726
726
137
142
147
122
127
132
11
11
13
200
200
200
736
736
736
152
132
137
142
76
78
78
92
95
97
81
84
87
114
117
120
100
102
105
742,5
742,5
742,5
122
124
127
742,5
742,5
742,5
130
132
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
260
260
260
Mooring ropes
T o w line
on J P 3
Diameter
Stream wire
or chain
continued
147
152
157
162
T o w lines
are n o t re
quired when
ship's length
e x c e e d s 180 m
14
15
16
200
200
200
736
736
736
17
18
19
21
200
200
200
200
736
736
736
736
^ C h a i n c a b l e s o r w i r e r o p e s m a y b e u s e d , c h a i n c a b l e b r e a k i n g l o a d o r a c t u a l b r e a k i n g s t r e n g t h o f w i r e r o p e b e i n g n o t l e s s t h a n 44 k N .
F o r self-propelled ships h a v i n g t h e m a x i m u m ahead

speed n o t m o r e t h a n 6 k n o t s a t t h e d r a u g h t t o t h e
s u m m e r l o a d waterline, t h e anchor equipment shall be
selected as i n t h e case o f n o n - p r o p e l l e d ships.
T h e anchor arrangement o fshipborne barges a n d
berth-connected ships shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e require
m e n t s o f Section 3, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t , A r r a n g e
ments a n d Outfit" o fRules f o rthe Classification a n d

Construction o f Inland Navigation Ships. F o r the
case o f sea passage o f b e r t h - c o n n e c t e d ships h a v i n g
n o permanent anchor arrangement, provision shall
be m a d e f o r a n c h o r s a n d a n c h o r chains t o be ar
ranged o n board.
238
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T a b l e
Equipment Number N
Bower anchors
3.1.3-2
Mooring ropes
anchors
Diameter
Exceeding
Not
exceeding
Number
M a s s per.
anchor,
in k g
Total
length,
in m
g r a d e 1,
in m m
Number
Length o f
each rope,
in m
Actual
breaking
strength,
inkN
10
g r a d e 2,
in m m
2
2
2
30
30
40
29
29
29
2
2
2
50
50
60
29
29
29
60
80
100
29
29
34
10
15
20
15
20
25
1
1
1
30
40
50
55
55
82,5
25
30
40
30
40
50
1
2
2
60
80
100
82,5
165
192,5
11,0
11,0
50
60
70
60
70
80
2
2
2
120
140
160
192,5
192,5
220
12,5
12,5
14
12,5
2
2
2
80
90
100
90
100
110
2
2
2
180
210
240
220
220
220
14
16
16
12,5
14
14
2
2
2
100
110
110
37
37
39
110
120
130
120
130
140
2
2
2
270
300
340
247,5
247,5
275
17,5
17,5
19
16
16
17,5
2
2
2
110
110
120
39
44
44
140
150
175
150
175
205
2
2
2
390
480
570
275
275
302,5
19
22
24
17,5
19
20,5
2
2
2
120
120
120
49
54
59
205
240
280
240
280
320
2
2
2
660
780
900
302,5
330
357,5
26
28
30
22
24
26
2
3
3
120
120
140
64
71
78
320
360
400
360
400
450
2
2
2
1020
1140
1290
357,5
385
385
32
34
36
28
30
32
3
3
3
140
140
140
86
93
100
450
500
550
500
550
600
2
2
2
1440
1590
1740
412,5
412,5
440
38
40
42
34
34
36
3
4
4
140
160
160
108
113
118
600
660
660
720
2
2
1920
2100
440
440
44
46
38
40
4
4
160
160
123
128
i)
i)
C h a i n c a b l e s o r w i r e r o p e s m a y b e u s e d , c h a i n c a b l e b r e a k i n g l o a d o r a c t u a l b r e a k i n g s t r e n g t h o f w i r e r o p e b e i n g n o t less t h a n 44 k N .
3.2 E Q U I P M E N T
3.1.5 F o r r e m o t e c o n t r o l systems o f t h e a n c h o r
arrangements, i fany, the type, extent o f automated
control a n d scope o f r e m o t e c o n t r o l operations are
determined b y the shipowner.
The additional requirements f o rthe remote-con
trolled a n c h o r a r r a n g e m e n t s a r e g i v e n i n 3.6.5, t h e
present P a r t , 6.3.6, P a r t I X " M a c h i n e r y " , a n d also
i n 5.1.3, P a r t X I "Electrical E q u i p m e n t " .
N U M B E R
3.2.1 T h e E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r N f o r a l l ships,
except floating cranes a n d tugs, is determined b y t h e
formula
e
N = A
e
where
2 / 3
+ 2 B h + 0,
(3.2.1-1)
3
A = volume displacement, i n m , to t h e s u m m e r load

waterline;
B = b r e a d t h o f the ship, i n m ;
h = height, m ,f r o m the s u m m e r load waterline to the top
of the uppermost deckhouse, which is determined b y
the formula
Arrangements
and
Outfit
h = a + TA,
where
239
(3.2.1-2)
a = distance, i n m , f r o m t h e s u m m e r l o a d waterline
a m i d s h i p s t o t h e t o p o f t h e u p p e r d e c k p l a t i n g a t side;
h t = height, i n m , a t t h e centreline o f e a c h tier o f
superstructures o r deckhouses having a breadth
g r e a t e r t h a n 0,25.
In case o f ships with t w oo rm o r e superstructures o r
deckhouses along the length, only one superstructure
o r d e c k h o u s e o f the considered tier w i t h t h e greatest
breadth is taken into account.
F o r t h e l o w e s t tier h \ shall b e m e a s u r e d a t t h e
centreline f r o m t h e upper deck o r , i n case o f a
stepped u p p e r deck, f r o m a notional line w h i c h i s a
continuation o fthe u p p e r deck.
W h e n calculating h,sheer a n d trim shall b e ignored.
R e f e r a l s o t o 3.2.3.
= area, i n m , i n profile v i e w o f t h e hull, super
structures a n d deckhouses a b o v e t h e s u m m e r load
waterline which are within the ship's length L a n d also
h a v e a b r e a d t h g r e a t e r t h a n 0,25-B ( r e f e r a l s o t o 3.2.3).
2
3.2.2 T h e E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r N f o r tugs i s de
e
N =A
2 / 3
+ 2 { B a + + 0,lA
(3.2.2)
w h e r e A , B , a , h , a n d A a r e t a k e n a c c o r d i n g t o 3.2.1;
b = b r e a d t h o ft h e a p p r o p r i a t e tier o fsuperstructure o r
deckhouse, i nm . I ncase o fships w i t h t w o o r m o r e
superstructures o r deckhouses along the length, the
r e l e v a n t p r o v i s i o n s o f 3.2.1 s h a l l b e f o l l o w e d .
t
3.2.3 C o n t a i n e r s o r o t h e r s i m i l a r cargoes carried

o n decks a n d o n h a t c h w a y covers, masts, derrick
b o o m s , rigging, guard rails a n d other similar struc
tures m a y be ignored w h e n determining h a n d A ;
b u l w a r k s a n d h a t c h c o a m i n g s l e s s t h a n 1,5 m i n
h e i g h t m a y also b e i g n o r e d . Screens, b u l w a r k s a n d
h a t c h c o a m i n g s m o r e t h a n 1,5 m i n h e i g h t s h a l l b e
regarded as deckhouses o r superstructures.
M a i n gallows, ladders a n d pile drivers f o r lifting
the ladders o f dredgers m a y be ignored w h e n de
t e r m i n i n g h; w h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e v a l u e A , t h e a r e a
i n p r o f i l e v i e w o f these structures shall b e calculated
as t h e a r e a l i m i t e d b y t h e c o n t o u r o f t h e s t r u c t u r e .
3.2.4 T h e E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r N f o r f l o a t i n g
cranes is determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
e
JV =l,5A
e
2 / 3
+ 2 B h + 2S + 0,lA
(3.2.4)
w h e r e A , B , h a n d A a r e t a k e n a c c o r d i n g t o 3.2.1; w h e n d e t e r m i n i n g
the value o f A , a c c o u n t shall b e t a k e n o fthe area i n
side profile view o f t h e u p p e r structure o f floating
crane (stowed f o r sea) w h i c h is calculated a s the area
limited b y t h eouter c o n t o u r o fthe structure;
S = p r o j e c t i o n o n t h e m i d - s e c t i o n o f t h e front a r e a , i n m , o f
t h e u p p e r s t r u c t u r e o f t h e floating c r a n e ( s t o w e d f o r s e a )
situated a b o v e t h e deck o f the uppermost deckhouse
t a k e n into a c c o u n t i n determination o f A, t h e f r o n t a r e a
being determined, i n this case, a s the area limited b y
the outer c o n t o u r o fthe structure.
2
3.3 B O W E R A N D S T R E A M
ANCHORS
3.3.1 I f the n u m b e r o f b o w e r anchors determined i n

accordance w i t h p r o v i s i o n s o f 3.1.3 a n d 3.1.4 i s 3, o n e o f
t h e m i s supposed t o b e a spare anchor. O n agreement

w i t h t h e Register, t h e t h i r d (spare) a n c h o r m a y b e stored
ashore. T h e t h i r d , i.e. t h e spare a n c h o r , i s n o t r e q u i r e d
for ships o f restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R l , R 2 ,
R2-RSN, R2-RSN(4,5), R 3 - R S N and R3.
S h i p s w i t h E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r o f 2 0 5 a n d less
m a y have t h e second b o w e r a n c h o r as a spare o n e o n
condition that provision ismade f o ritsquick getting
ready f o r use.
Ships o f restricted area o f navigation R 3 w i t h
E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r o f 3 5 a n d less, i f t h e y a r e n o t
passenger ships, m a y h a v e o n l y o n e b o w e r anchor.
F o r ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3 a
stream anchor m a y be omitted.
O n ships assigned t o restricted n a v i g a t i o n areas
R 2 - R S N and R 3 - R S N and having Equipment N u m
ber i n excess o f 2 0 5 except t h e v a l u e s stated i n
Table 3.1.3-1, provision should be made f o ra stream
a n c h o r w i t h a mass e q u a l t o a t least 7 5 p e r cent.
3.3.2 F o r a d m i r a l t y stocked anchors t h e a n c h o r
mass includes t h e mass o f the stock.
T h e mass o feach b o w e r o r stream anchor m a y
differ b y 7 p e r cent f r o m t h e values determined
according t o Tables 3.1.3-1 o r 3.1.3-2 p r o v i d e d t h a t
t h e t o t a l m a s s o f b o w e r a n c h o r s i s n o t less t h a n t h e
prescribed total mass thereof.
I f h i g h h o l d i n g p o w e r anchors are used, t h e mass
o f each anchor m a y a m o u n t t o 7 5 p e r cent o f that
d e t e r m i n e d according t o Tables 3.1.3-1 o r 3.1.3-2.
W h e r e anchors o f super h i g h h o l d i n g p o w e r a r e
u s e d t h e m a s s o f e a c h a n c h o r s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n
50 per cent o f t h e anchor mass determined according
t o Tables 3.1.3-1 o r 3.1.3-2.
3.3.3 A n c h o r s o f t h e f o l l o w i n g types a r e per
m i t t e d t o be used i n ships:
.1 Hall's;
.2 G r u s o n ' s a n c h o r ;
.3 a d m i r a l t y a n c h o r .
T h e mass o f the head o fHall's o r Gruson's a n
c h o r s i n c l u d i n g p i n s a n d f i t t i n g s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n
60 p e r cent o f t h e total anchor mass.
F o r admiralty stocked anchors t h e mass o f t h e
stock shall a m o u n t t o 2 0 per cent o fthe total anchor
mass including t h e anchor shackle.
T h e e q u i p m e n t o f ships w i t h anchors o f o t h e r
types is subject t o special consideration b y t h e R e g
ister i n e a c h case.
I n order t o recognize t h e a n c h o r as a h i g h h o l d
ing p o w e r anchor, i t i s necessary t o carry o u t c o m
p a r a t i v e tests o f t h i s a n c h o r a n d H a l l ' s o r G r u s o n ' s
anchor i n pair o n various types o f b o t t o m ; i n this
case, t h e h o l d i n g p o w e r o f t h e a n c h o r s h a l l b e a t least
twice as m u c h as t h a t o fH a l l ' s o r G r u s o n ' s a n c h o r o f
the same mass.
T o recognize a n anchor as a super h i g h h o l d i n g
p o w e r a n c h o r c o m p a r a t i v e tests s h a l l b e m a d e o f
240
Rules
such anchor i n pair w i t h a Hall's or Gruson's anchor

o n different types o f b o t t o m to prove that a h o l d i n g
p o w e r o f the a n c h o r is at least f o u r t i m e s t h a t o f a
Hall's o r Gruson's anchor o f the same mass. Similar
c o m p a r a t i v e tests w i t h a h i g h h o l d i n g p o w e r a n c h o r
m a y be m a d e , i n w h i c h case a h o l d i n g p o w e r o f the
super h i g h h o l d i n g p o w e r a n c h o r shall be at least t w o
times that o f the high holding power anchor.
T h e scope a n d p r o c e d u r e o f such tests are subject
t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
3.3.4 S u p e r h i g h h o l d i n g p o w e r a n c h o r s are s u i table f o r use i n ships o f restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n
R2, R 2 - R S N , R2-RSN(4,5), R 3 - R S N and R3. The
super h i g h holding p o w e r anchor mass shall n o t
generally exceed 1500 k g .
3.4 C H A I N C A B L E S A N D R O P E S F O R B O W E R
ANCHORS
3.4.1 S h i p ' s w i t h t h e E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r 2 0 5 a n d
less, i n w h i c h t h e s e c o n d b o w e r a n c h o r i s p e r m i t t e d
t o be a spare one, a n d also ships w i t h the E q u i p m e n t
N u m b e r 35 a n d less a n d p r o v i d e d a c c o r d i n g t o 3 . 3 . 1
w i t h o n l y o n e b o w e r a n c h o r m a y be equipped w i t h
o n l y o n e c h a i n cable the l e n g t h o f w h i c h is t w o t i m e s
less t h a n t h a t r e q u i r e d i n t h e r e l e v a n t E q u i p m e n t
T a b l e f o r t w o c h a i n cables. F o r ships o f restricted
area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3 chain cables o r w i r e ropes for a
s t r e a m a n c h o r m a y be o m i t t e d .
3.4.2 F o r s h i p s h a v i n g " s u p p l y v e s s e l " n o t a t i o n
added t o the character o f classification the total length
o f b o t h c h a i n cables f o r b o w e r anchors shall be t a k e n
165 m greater t h a n the v a l u e specified i n T a b l e 3.1.3-1,
a n d the d i a m e t e r o f these c h a i n cables shall be t a k e n
n o t less t h a n t h a t g i v e n i n T a b l e 3 . 1 . 3 - 1 t w o U n e s b e l o w
the E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r for the considered ship (having
r e g a r d t o t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 3.1.3 a n d 3.1.4).
F o r s u p p l y vessels h a v i n g t h e E q u i p m e n t N u m ber over 720 at the specification depth o f the anchorage over 250 m and for those having the
E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r 7 2 0 a n d less a t t h e s p e c i f i c a t i o n
depth o f the anchorage over 200 m , the length and
d i a m e t e r o f c h a i n cables f o r b o w e r a n c h o r s s h a l l be
increased t a k i n g account o f the specification depths
and conditions o f the anchorage.
3.4.3 F o r h o p p e r b a r g e s a n d d r e d g e r s n o t h a v i n g
hoppers t o transport spoil, the diameter o f c h a i n cables
f o r b o w e r a n c h o r s s h a U b e t a k e n n o t less t h a n t h a t
specified i n T a b l e 3.1.3-1 t w o Unes b e l o w the E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r o f the considered ship, a n d f o r dredgers
h a v i n g hoppers t o transport spoil, one Une b e l o w
( t a k i n g a c c o u n t o f t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 3.1.3 a n d 3.1.4).
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
3.4.4 C h a i n c a b l e s o f b o w e r a n c h o r s s h a l l b e
g r a d e d d e p e n d e n t o n t h e i r s t r e n g t h as specified i n 7 . 1 ,
Part X I I I "Materials".
3.4.5 T a b l e s 3 . 1 . 3 - 1 a n d 3 . 1 . 3 - 2 specify t h e d i a meters o f c h a i n cables o n the a s s u m p t i o n t h a t the
Unks o f these c h a i n cables are p r o v i d e d w i t h studs,
w i t h t h e e x c e p t i o n o f t h e c h a i n c a b l e s less t h a n
15 m m i n d i a m e t e r w h i c h a r e a s s u m e d t o h a v e n o
studs.
3 . 4 . 6 T h e c h a i n c a b l e s s h a l l b e c o m p o s e d o f sep a r a t e c h a i n l e n g t h s , e x c e p t f o r t h e c h a i n s less t h a n
15 m m i n d i a m e t e r w h i c h n e e d n o t be d i v i d e d i n t o
chain lengths.
T h e lengths o f chains shall be interconnected
w i t h j o i n i n g links. T h e use o f j o i n i n g shackles instead
o f j o i n i n g l i n k s shall be specially considered b y the
D e p e n d i n g o n their l o c a t i o n i n the c h a i n cable
the lengths are divided into:
anchor length fastened to the anchor;
intermediate lengths;
i n b o a r d end c h a i n l e n g t h secured t o the c h a i n
cable releasing device.
3.4.7 T h e a n c h o r l e n g t h o f c h a i n s h a l l c o n s i s t o f a
swivel, a n end U n k and a m i n i m u m quantity o f
c o m m o n and enlarged Unks required to f o r m an i n dependent length o f chains.
T h e anchor length o f chains m a y consist o n l y o f a
swivel, a n end U n k and a joining U n k provided the
relation between the dimensions o f the c h a i n cable
parts a l l o w s t o f o r m such a length. I n c h a i n cables
w h i c h are n o t divided i n t o lengths o f chains the
s w i v e l s h a l l be i n c l u d e d i n t o e a c h c h a i n cable as n e a r
t o t h e a n c h o r as p r a c t i c a b l e . I n a l l cases, t h e p i n s o f
swivels s h a l l face t h e m i d d l e o f t h e c h a i n cable.
T h e a n c h o r l e n g t h s h a l l be c o n n e c t e d w i t h t h e
anchor shackle w i t h the aid o f a n end shackle the p i n
o f w h i c h shall be inserted i n t o the a n c h o r shackle.
3.4.8 T h e i n t e r m e d i a t e l e n g t h s o f c h a i n s s h a l l b e
n o t less t h a n 2 5 m a n d n o t o v e r 2 7 , 5 m , t h e c h a i n s
consisting o f the o d d n u m b e r o f Unks. T h e total length
o f t w o c h a i n cables g i v e n i n the E q u i p m e n t Tables is a
s u m o f intermediate lengths o f chains o n l y w i t h o u t the
anchor a n d i n b o a r d end lengths o f chains.
I f t h e n u m b e r o f i n t e r m e d i a t e lengths o f c h a i n s is
odd, the starboard c h a i n cable shall have one intermediate length o f chains m o r e t h a n the p o r t chain
cable.
3.4.9 T h e i n b o a r d e n d l e n g t h o f c h a i n s s h a l l
c o n s i s t o f a special U n k o f e n l a r g e d size ( p r o v i d e d ,
h o w e v e r , t h a t t h i s U n k is c a p a b l e o f passing freely
t h r o u g h the wildcat o f the anchor machinery) being
secured t o the c h a i n cable releasing device, a n d o f
Arrangements
and
241
Outfit
m i n i m u m n u m b e r o f c o m m o n and enlarged links

required for forming an independent chain length.
The i n b o a r d end length o f chains m a y consist o f one
end Unk only provided the relation between the dimensions o f the c h a i n cable parts a n d the c h a i n cable
releasing device a l l o w s t o f o r m such a length.
3.4.10 I n a l l o t h e r respects, the c h a i n cables f o r
bower anchors shall comply w i t h the requirements
of 7.1, Part X I I I "Materials".
3 . 4 . 1 1 F o r f i s h i n g vessels u n d e r 3 0 m i n l e n g t h
a n d f o r o t h e r ships h a v i n g the E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r 2 0 5 a n d less t h e c h a i n c a b l e s m a y b e r e p l a c e d
w i t h w i r e ropes; f o r f i s h i n g vessels b e t w e e n 3 0 a n d 4 0
m i n l e n g t h o n e o f c h a i n cables m a y be replaced w i t h
a wire rope. T h e actual breaking strength o f such
r o p e s s h a l l n o t be less t h a n t h e b r e a k i n g l o a d o f t h e
c o r r e s p o n d i n g c h a i n cables, a n d the l e n g t h shall be at
l e a s t 1,5 t i m e s t h e l e n g t h o f t h e c h a i n c a b l e s .
W i r e ropes o f t r a w l winches c o m p l y i n g w i t h this
r e q u i r e m e n t m a y be u s e d as a n c h o r cables.
O n agreement w i t h the Register, ships h a v i n g the
e q u i p m e n t n u m b e r 1 3 0 a n d less m a y be e q u i p p e d
w i t h synthetic fibre ropes instead o f c h a i n cables o r
w i r e ropes.
3.4.12 T h e e n d o f each w i r e rope shall be spUced
into a thimble, clamp o r socket a n d connected to the
a n c h o r b y m e a n s o f a c h a i n cable section h a v i n g a
length equal t o the distance between the anchor
( i n s t o w e d f o r sea p o s i t i o n ) a n d t h e a n c h o r m a c h i n ery o r 1 2 , 5 m , w h i c h e v e r is t h e less; a b r e a k i n g l o a d o f
t h e a b o v e c h a i n s e c t i o n s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h e
actual breaking strength o f the wire rope. T h e chain
cable section shall be secured t o the w i r e r o p e fitting
a n d the anchor shackle b y means o f j o i n i n g shackles
being equal to the wire ropes i n strength.
T h e l e n g t h o f t h e c h a i n cable sections m a y be
i n c l u d e d i n t o 1,5 t i m e s t h e l e n g t h o f w i r e r o p e s s p e cified i n 3.4.11.
3.4.13 T h e w i r e ropes f o r anchors shall h a v e at
l e a s t 1 1 4 w i r e s a n d o n e n a t u r a l fibre c o r e . T h e w i r e s
o f the ropes shall have a zinc coating according to
recognized standards.
I n a l l o t h e r respects, the w i r e ropes f o r anchors
shall m e e t the requirements o f 3.15, P a r t X I I I " M a terials".
3.5 C H A I N C A B L E O R W I R E R O P E F O R S T R E A M
A N C H O R
3.5.1 Stream-anchor chain cables shall meet the

applicable r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.4.
Ships assigned to restricted n a v i g a t i o n areas
R2-RSN, R2-RSN(4,5) and R 3 - R S N and having
E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r i n excess o f 2 0 5 s h a l l be e q u i p -
p e d w i t h a s t r e a m - a n c h o r c h a i n cable w h o s e l e n g t h is
at least 60 per cent o f t h a t r e q u i r e d f o r a b o w e r a n c h o r c h a i n cable. T h e c h a i n cable d i a m e t e r shall be
t a k e n n o t less t h a n t h a t m e n t i o n e d i n T a b l e 3 . 1 . 3 - 1
t w o Unes a b o v e the E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r o f the ship i n
q u e s t i o n ( b e a r i n g t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 3.1.3 a n d 3.1.4 i n
mind).
Ships having E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r below 205 m a y
be equipped w i t h studless c h a i n cables.
3.5.2 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.4.12 a n d 3.4.13 are
applicable to the wire rope for the stream anchor.
3.6 A N C H O R
APPLIANCES
3.6.1 Stoppers.
3.6.1.1 E a c h bower-anchor c h a i n cable o r rope
a n d each stream-anchor c h a i n cable h a v i n g a mass
o f 2 0 0 k g a n d a b o v e shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h a stopper
holding the anchor i n the hawse pipe w h e n stowed for
sea o r , i n a d d i t i o n , i n t e n d e d f o r r i d i n g t h e s h i p a t
anchor.
I n ships h a v i n g n o a n c h o r m a c h i n e r y o r h a v i n g
the a n c h o r m a c h i n e r y , w h i c h is n o t i n compUance
w i t h the requirements o f 6.3.2.3.2, P a r t I X " M a chinery" p r o v i s i o n o f stoppers f o r riding the ship at
a n c h o r is o b l i g a t o r y .
3.6.1.2 W h e r e t h e stoppers is i n t e n d e d o n l y f o r
securing the anchor i n the hawse pipe w h e n stowed
f o r sea, i t s p a r t s s h a l l b e c a l c u l a t e d t o w i t h s t a n d t h e
chain cable strain equal t o twice the w e i g h t o f the
a n c h o r , t h e stresses i n t h e s t o p p e r p a r t s n o t exceeding
0,4 t i m e s the u p p e r y i e l d stress o f t h e i r m a t e r i a l .
W h e r e the stopper comprises a c h a i n cable o r rope,
this shall have safety factor 5 i n r e l a t i o n t o the
b r e a k i n g l o a d o f the c h a i n cable o r actual b r e a k i n g
strength o f the rope under the action o f a force equal
to twice the weight o f the anchor.
3.6.1.3 W h e r e the stopper is i n t e n d e d f o r r i d i n g
the ship at anchor, its parts shall be calculated o n
a s s u m p t i o n t h a t the stopper w i l l be subjected t o a
force i n the c h a i n cable e q u a l t o 0,8 t i m e s its b r e a k i n g
l o a d . T h e stresses i n t h e s t o p p e r p a r t s s h a l l n o t exceed 0,95 t i m e s the u p p e r y i e l d stress o f t h e i r m a t e rial. W h e r e the stopper comprises a c h a i n cable o r
rope, they shall have strength equal to that o f the
c h a i n cable f o r w h i c h they are intended.
3.6.1.4 I n glass-reinforced plastic ships the stoppers s h a l l be fastened b y b o l t s w i t h t h e use o f steel
gaskets o r w o o d e n pads o n the deck a n d under deck
flooring between the framing. Bolt connections shall
c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.7.4, P a r t X V I
" H u l l Structure and Strength o f Glass-Reinforced
Plastic Ships and Boats".
242
Rules
3.6.2 D e v i c e f o r securing a n d releasing the i n b o a r d

end o f the chain cable.
3.6.2.1 T h e parts o f the device f o r securing a n d
releasing t h e i n b o a r d e n d o f t h e c h a i n cable s h a l l be
calculated for strength under the force acting o n the
device w h i c h is equal t o 0,6 times the c h a i n b r e a k i n g
l o a d , stresses i n these p a r t s n o t exceeding 0,95 t i m e s
t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress o f t h e i r m a t e r i a l .
3.6.2.2 I n ships w i t h E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r o f m o r e
t h a n 205 the device f o r securing a n d releasing the
i n b o a r d e n d o f the c h a i n cable shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h
a drive f r o m the deck o n w h i c h the anchor machinery
is f i t t e d o r f r o m o t h e r deck, i n a place w h i c h gives
q u i c k a n d r e a d y access a t a l l t i m e s . T h e s c r e w o f t h e
drive shall be self-braking.
3.6.2.3 T h e design o f the device f o r securing a n d
releasing the i n b o a r d end o f the c h a i n cable shall
ensure the efficiency o f its o p e r a t i o n b o t h under the
action o f a n d w i t h o u t the strain o f the c h a i n cable
referred to i n 3.6.2.1.
3.6.2.4 I n glass-reinforced plastic ships the device
for securing a n d releasing the i n b o a r d end o f the
c h a i n cable shall be fastened b y bolts w i t h the use o f
steel gaskets o n b o t h sides o f t h e b u l k h e a d . B o l t
connections shall comply w i t h the requirements
o f 1.7.4, P a r t X V I " H u l l S t r u c t u r e a n d S t r e n g t h o f
Glass-Reinforced Plastic Ships and Boats".
3.6.3 L a y i n g o f c h a i n cables.
3.6.3.1 L a y i n g o f chain cables shall provide
f o r t h e i r free r u n w h e n d r o p p i n g o r h o i s t i n g the a n chors.
I n ships w i t h a b u l b o u s b o w l a y i n g o f c h a i n
cables shall c o m p l y w i t h the requirements o f 2.8.2.4,
Part I I "Hull".
3.6.3.2 T h e a n c h o r s h a n k shall easily enter the
hawse pipe u n d e r the m e r e a c t i o n o f the c h a i n cable
tension and shall readily take o f f the hawse pipe w h e n
t h e c h a i n cable is released.
3.6.3.3 T h e thickness o f the h a w s e pipe shall n o t
be less t h a n 0 , 4 t i m e s t h e d i a m e t e r o f t h e c h a i n c a b l e
passing t h r o u g h the hawse pipe.
3.6.3.4 I n glass-reinforced plastic ships galvan i z e d o r stainless steel plates s h a l l be fitted o n the
outside p l a t i n g u n d e r the h a w s e pipes; the plates shall
be fastened b y c o u n t e r s u n k bolts.
Bolt connections shall comply w i t h the requirem e n t s o f 1.7.4, P a r t X V I " H u l l S t r u c t u r e a n d
Strength o f Glass-Reinforced Plastic Ships and
Boats".
3.6.4 C h a i n lockers.
3.6.4.1 F o r stowage o f each b o w e r anchor chain
lockers shall be p r o v i d e d .
W h e n o n e c h a i n locker is designed f o r t w o
chains, i t shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h a n i n t e r n a l p e r m e able o r w a t e r t i g h t d i v i s i o n so t h a t separate s t o w a g e
o f each c h a i n is ensured.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
3.6.4.2 T h e c h a i n l o c k e r shall be o f shape, capacity a n d d e p t h adequate t o p r o v i d e a n easy direct

lead o f the cables t h r o u g h the c h a i n pipes, a n easy
self-stowing o f the cables a n d t h e i r free v e e r i n g a w a y
w h e n dropping the anchors.
3 . 6 . 4 . 3 T h e c h a i n l o c k e r d e s i g n , as w e l l as c h a i n
a n d h a w s e pipes shall be w a t e r t i g h t u p t o the w e a t h e r
deck. U p p e r openings o f such pipes shall be fitted
w i t h the p e r m a n e n t b u c k l e r plates. T h e s e m a y be
m a d e b o t h o f steel w i t h t h e r e l e v a n t c u t o u t s f o r a
c h a i n cable diameter a n d o f canvas w i t h the relevant
fastenings t o keep the plate closed d o w n .
T h e o p e n i n g s f o r access t o t h e c h a i n l o c k e r s h a l l
be fitted w i t h covers secured w i t h closely spaced
bolts.
3.6.4.4 D r a i n a g e o f c h a i n lockers shall c o m p l y
w i t h the requirements i n 7.12.1, Part V I I I "Systems
and Piping", and lighting - w i t h the requirements
o f 6.7, P a r t X I " E l e c t r i c a l E q u i p m e n t " .
3.6.5 A d d i t i o n a l requirements f o r r e m o t e - c o n trolled anchor appliances.
3.6.5.1 Stoppers and other anchor appUances for
w h i c h r e m o t e c o n t r o l is p r o v i d e d (refer t o 3.1.5)
shall also be fitted w i t h m e a n s o f l o c a l m a n u a l c o n trol.
3.6.5.2 T h e a n c h o r appUances a n d the associated
m e a n s o f l o c a l m a n u a l c o n t r o l s h a l l be so designed
t h a t n o r m a l o p e r a t i o n is e n s u r e d i n case o f f a i l u r e o f
separate elements o r the w h o l e o f the remote c o n t r o l
system (refer also t o 5.1.3, P a r t X I " E l e c t r i c a l
Equipment").
3.7 A N C H O R
M A C H I N E R Y
3.7.1 A n c h o r m a c h i n e r y shall be fitted o n the

deck i n the fore part o f the ship for dropping and
h o i s t i n g t h e a n c h o r s , as w e l l as f o r h o l d i n g t h e s h i p
w i t h the bower anchors dropped i f the mass o f the
a n c h o r exceeds 35 k g .
Ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 - R S N ,
R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) a n d R 3 - R S N shall be fitted w i t h the
anchor machinery for dropping and hoisting the
s t r e a m a n c h o r i f its m a s s exceeds 200 k g .
S h i p s h a v i n g E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r 2 0 5 a n d less
m a y be fitted w i t h h a n d - o p e r a t e d a n c h o r m a c h i n e r y
a n d m a y also use o t h e r deck m a c h i n e r y f o r d r o p p i n g
and hoisting the anchors.
T h e requirements f o r the design a n d p o w e r o f
a n c h o r m a c h i n e r y are g i v e n i n 6.3, P a r t I X " M a chinery".
I n glass-reinforced plastic ships fastening o f the
anchor machinery shall comply w i t h the requirements
o f 3.6.1.4.
Arrangements
3.8 S P A R E
and
Outfit
PARTS
3.8.1 E a c h s h i p c a r r y i n g a s p a r e a n c h o r a n d e q u i p p e d w i t h a c h a i n cable (cables) f o r b o w e r a n c h o r ( a n chors) accordance w i t h t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 3.3.1 a n d 3.4

shall have: spare a n c h o r l e n g t h o f c h a i n 1 pc, spare
j o i n i n g l i n k 2 pes, spare e n d shackle 1 pc.
4 MOORING
4.1
GENERAL
243
3.8.2 E a c h s h i p e q u i p p e d w i t h a s p a r e a n c h o r a n d
w i r e rope (ropes) f o r b o w e r a n c h o r (anchors) i n accordance w i t h t h e provisions o f 3.3.1 a n d 3.4.11 shall
h a v e a spare set o f p a r t s f o r j o i n i n g t h e w i r e r o p e a n d
anchor shackle.
ARRANGEMENT
i ^ = 0,07425 i?
/ y
(4.1.6)
where
4.1.1 E a c h s h i p s h a l l b e s u p p l i e d w i t h m o o r i n g
arrangement f o r w a r p i n g t o coastal o r floating berths
and f o r reliable fastening o f the ship t o t h e m .
F o r shipborne barges the m o o r i n g arrangement
shall c o m p l y w i t h the requirements o f Section 4,
Part I I I "Equipment, Arrangements and Outfit" o f
the Rules f o r the Classification a n d Construction o f
I n l a n d N a v i g a t i o n Ships.
4.1.2 F o r a l l s h i p s , e x c e p t f i s h i n g v e s s e l s , t h e
number, length a n d actual breaking strength o f
m o o r i n g ropes s h a l l be selected f r o m T a b l e 3.1.3-1,
a n d f o r f i s h i n g vessels f r o m T a b l e 3.1.3-2 according to Equipment N u m b e r determined i n compUance w i t h 3.2.
4.1.3 I n case t h e r a t i o A / N f o r a s h i p i s m o r e
t h a n 0,9, t h e n u m b e r o f m o o r i n g ropes shall be i n creased as against t h a t prescribed i n T a b l e 3.1.3-1 b y :
1 p c f o r ships h a v i n g 0,9 < A / N ^ 1,1;
2 p e s f o r s h i p s h a v i n g 1,1 < A / N ^ 1,2;
3 p e s f o r s h i p s h a v i n g A / N > 1,2
e
where
a n dA = E q u i p m e n t N u m b e r a n darea i n profile view

s p e c i f i e d i n 3.2, r e s p e c t i v e l y .
4.1.4 F o r i n d i v i d u a l m o o r i n g r o p e s w i t h b r e a k i n g
strength a b o v e 4 9 0 k N according t o T a b l e 3.1.3-1 t h e
latter m a y be reduced w i t h corresponding increase o f
the n u m b e r o f m o o r i n g ropes, p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e total
breaking strength o f aU m o o r i n g ropes aboard t h e ship
is n o t less t h a n t h e v a l u e s e l e c t e d f r o m T a b l e 3 . 1 . 3 - 1
w i t h regard t o paragraphs 4.1.3 a n d 4.1.6. T h e n u m b e r
o f r o p e s s h a U b e n o t less t h a n 6 a n d n o n e o f t h e r o p e s
s h a U h a v e t h e b r e a k i n g s t r e n g t h less t h a n 4 9 0 k N .
4.1.5 T h e l e n g t h o f i n d i v i d u a l m o o r i n g r o p e s m a y
be reduced b y u p t o 7 p e r cent as against t h e prescribed value p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e total l e n g t h o f a l l
m o o r i n g r o p e s i s n o t less t h a n t h a t s p e c i f i e d i n T a ble 3.1.3-1 a n d 4.1.3 o r T a b l e 3.1.3-2.
4.1.6 I n c a s e m o o r i n g r o p e m a d e o f s y n t h e t i c f i b r e
m a t e r i a l is used, its actual breaking strength F , i n k N ,
s
8 = m e a n elongation a t breaking o f a synthetic fibre rope,

i n p e r c e n t , b u t n o t l e s s t h a n 30 p e r c e n t . W h e r e n o
data o n 8 are available, it shall b e a s s u m e d equal to:
45 p e r c e n t f o r p o l y a m i d e r o p e s ;
35 p e r c e n t f o r p o l y p r o p y l e n e r o p e s ;
F,= actual breaking strength o f the mooring rope
s p e c i f i e d i n T a b l e 3 . 1 . 3 - 1 o r 3.1.3-2, i n k N .
m
4.2 M O O R I N G
ROPES
4.2.1 M o o r i n g r o p e s m a y b e o f steel w i r e , n a t u r a l
f i b r e o r s y n t h e t i c fibre m a t e r i a l , w i t h t h e e x c e p t i o n o f
the ropes intended f o r ships c a r r y i n g i n b u l k f l a m m a b l e U q u i d s w i t h t h e f l a s h p o i n t 6 0 C a n d b e l o w . I n
these ships t h e o p e r a t i o n s w i t h steel w i r e ropes are
a l l o w e d o n l y o n t h e superstructure decks w h i c h are
not the t o p o f liquid cargo tanks a n d o n condition
that n o pipeUnes f o rloading a n d u n l o a d i n g t h e cargo
are carried t h r o u g h these decks.
N o t w i t h s t a n d i n g t h e b r e a k i n g strength specified
i n Tables 3.1.3-1 o r 3.1.3-2 o r d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
F o r m u l a (4.1.6), the diameter o f the m o o r i n g rope
m a d e f r o m n a t u r a l o r s y n t h e t i c fibre m a t e r i a l s h a l l
n o t b e less t h a n 2 0 m m .
4.2.2 S t e e l w i r e r o p e s s h a l l h a v e a t l e a s t 1 4 4 w i r e s
a n d n o t l e s s t h a n 7 fibre c o r e s . T h e e x c e p t i o n i s m a d e
for w i r e ropes f o r a u t o m a t i c m o o r i n g winches w h i c h
m a y h a v e o n l y o n e fibre c o r e b u t t h e n u m b e r o f w i r e s
i n s u c h r o p e s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 2 1 6 . T h e w i r e s o f
the ropes shall have a zinc coating according t o recognized standards.
I n a l l o t h e r respects, t h e steel w i r e ropes s h a l l
m e e t t h e requirements o f 3.15, P a r t X I I I " M a t e r i a l s " .
4.2.3 N a t u r a l fibre r o p e s s h a l l b e e i t h e r m a n i l l a
or sizal. T h e ships h a v i n g e q u i p m e n t n u m b e r 2 0 5 a n d
less a r e p e r m i t t e d t o u s e h e m p r o p e s .
I n a l l o t h e r r e s p e c t s , t h e n a t u r a l fibre r o p e s s h a l l
m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 6.6, P a r t X I I I " M a t e r i a l s " .
4.2.4 T h e s y n t h e t i c fibre r o p e s s h a l l b e m a n u factured f r o m approved homogeneous materials
( p o l y p r o p y l e n e , c a p r o n , n y l o n , etc.).
244
Rules
C o m b i n a t i o n s o f synthetic fibres o f a p p r o v e d
different materials are subject t o special considerat i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n each case.
I n a l l o t h e r respects, the ropes o f synthetic fibre
m a t e r i a l shall m e e t the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 6.6, P a r t X I I I
"Materials".
4.3 M O O R I N G
APPLIANCES
4.3.1 T h e n u m b e r a n d p o s i t i o n o f m o o r i n g b o l lards, fairleaders a n d o t h e r m o o r i n g appUances depend o n the constructional features, purpose a n d

general arrangement o f the ship.
4.3.2 B o l l a r d s m a y b e o f s t e e l o r c a s t i r o n . S m a l l
ships equipped o n l y w i t h n a t u r a l fibre o r synthetic
fibre ropes are p e r m i t t e d t o use the bollards m a d e o f
Ught alloys. A s to the m e t h o d o f manufacture, the
b o l l a r d s m a y be w e l d e d o r cast.
I t is n o t p e r m i t t e d t o use b o l l a r d s c u t d i r e c t l y i n
t h e deck w h i c h is t h e t o p o f c a r g o t a n k s i n t e n d e d f o r
carriage or stowage o f f l a m m a b l e liquids w i t h the
f l a s h p o i n t 6 0 C a n d b e l o w .
4.3.3 T h e o u t s i d e d i a m e t e r o f t h e b o l l a r d c o l u m n
s h a l l be n o t less t h a n 1 0 d i a m e t e r s o f t h e steel w i r e
r o p e , n o t less t h a n 5,5 d i a m e t e r s o f t h e s y n t h e t i c f i b r e
r o p e , a n d n o t less t h a n o n e c i r c u m f e r e n c e o f t h e
n a t u r a l f i b r e r o p e f o r w h i c h t h e b o l l a r d is designed.
The distance between the axes o f b o l l a r d c o l u m n s
s h a l l n o t be less t h a n 2 5 d i a m e t e r s o f t h e steel w i r e
rope or 3 circumferences o f the natural fibre rope.
4.3.4 L o a d - b e a r i n g m e m b e r s o f t h e m o o r i n g a r r a n g e m e n t shall be located o n deck stringers, b e a m s
a n d o t h e r stiffeners w h i c h are a p a r t o f the deck
structure t o assure effective l o a d distribution.
T h e design l o a d appUed t o m o o r i n g arrangements
as w e U as t h e i r s u p p o r t i n g h u l l s t r u c t u r e s s h a l l be
1,25 times t h e b r e a k i n g s t r e n g t h o f t h e m o o r i n g U n e
chosen according t o T a b l e 3.1.3-1 considering 4.1.6.
The design load appUed t o supporting h u l l
s t r u c t u r e s f o r w i n c h e s s h a l l b e 1,25 t i m e s t h e i n t e n d e d
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
m a x i m u m brake h o l d i n g load and, f o r capstans,

1,25 t i m e s t h e m a x i m u m h a u l i n g - i n f o r c e .
4.3.5 A l l o w a b l e s t r e s s e s i n s u p p o r t i n g h u l l s t r u c tures u n d e r the design l o a d c o n d i t i o n s specified
i n 4 . 3 . 4 , s h a l l be as f o l l o w s :
n o r m a l stresses 100 p e r c e n t o f t h e specified
m i n i m u m yield point o f the material;
s h e a r i n g stresses 6 0 p e r c e n t o f t h e specified
m i n i m u m yield point o f the material.
N o stress c o n c e n t r a t i o n f a c t o r s b e i n g t a k e n i n t o
a c c o u n t . N o r m a l stress is t h e s u m o f b e n d i n g stress
a n d a x i a l stress w i t h t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g s h e a r i n g
stress a c t i n g p e r p e n d i c u l a r t o t h e n o r m a l stress.
The total corrosion addition, i n m m , for both
sides o f t h e h u l l s u p p o r t i n g s t r u c t u r e s h a l l n o t be less
t h a n the following values:
ships covered b y P a r t X V m " C o m m o n S t r u c t u r a l
Rules for Double H u l l O i l Tankers" and Part X L X
" C o m m o n Structural Rules f o r B u l k Carriers" according t o the requirements o f the above Parts o f the Rules;
o t h e r ships 2 m m .
4.3.6 S a f e W o r k i n g L o a d ( S W L ) o f d e t a i l s o f m o o r i n g appUances shall n o t exceed 0,8 design l o a d d e t e r m i n e d
i n accordance w i t h 4.3.4. A U details o f the m o o r i n g appUances shaU be m a r k e d w i t h the v a l u e o f S W L b y m e a n s
o f welding o r other equivalent method.
4.4 M O O R I N G
M A C H I N E R Y
4.4.1 S p e c i a l m o o r i n g m a c h i n e r y ( m o o r i n g c a p s t a n s ,
m o o r i n g w i n c h e s , e t c . ) a s w e U as o t h e r d e c k m a c h i n e r y
(windlasses, c a r g o w i n c h e s , etc.) fitted w i t h m o o r i n g
d r u m s m a y be used f o r w a r p i n g the hawsers.
4.4.2 T h e c h o i c e o f t h e n u m b e r a n d t y p e o f
m o o r i n g m a c h i n e r y is w i t h i n t h e o w n e r ' s a n d designer's discretion, h o w e v e r , the rated p u l l o f the
m a c h i n e r y s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 1/3 o f t h e a c t u a l b r e a k i n g
strength o f the m o o r i n g ropes used i n the ship
a n d , besides, the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 6.4, P a r t I X
" M a c h i n e r y " shall be satisfied.
5 TOWING ARRANGEMENT
5.1
G E N E R A L
5.1.1 E a c h s h i p s h a U b e p r o v i d e d w i t h t o w i n g a r r a n g e m e n t w h i c h satisfies t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 5 . 2 a n d 5.3.

Besides, the ships h a v i n g the descriptive n o t a t i o n
Tug added to the character o f classification shall
c o m p l y w i t h the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 5.4 t o 5.6.
5.1.2 O i l t a n k e r s , o i l t a n k e r s ( > 6 0 C), c o m b i n a t i o n c a r r i e r s , gas c a r r i e r s a n d c h e m i c a l t a n k e r s o f
20 0 0 0 t d e a d w e i g h t a n d o v e r shall c o m p l y w i t h the
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 5.7.
5.1.3 T h e t o w i n g a r r a n g e m e n t s o f b e r t h - c o n nected ships shall c o m p l y w i t h the requirements
o f 5.3, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t , A r r a n g e m e n t s a n d
Outfit" o f Rules for the Classification and C o n struction o f I n l a n d N a v i g a t i o n Ships.
Arrangements
and
Outfit
245
5.2 T O W L I N E
5.2.1 T h e l e n g t h a n d t h e a c t u a l b r e a k i n g s t r e n g t h
o f t h e t o w U n e shaU b e selected f r o m T a b l e 3.1.3-1 ac
cording t o Equipment N u m b e r determined i n com
pUance w i t h 3.2.
F o r shipborne barges t h e actual b r e a k i n g strength o f
the t o w Une F , i n k N , shaU be calculated b y t h e f o r m u l a
b
F = \6nBd
(5.2.1)
where
n = number o f barges intended to be towed i n the wake

of the t u g i n tandem;
= breadth o f the barge, i nm ;
d = draught o f the barge, i nm .
The breaking strength o f the t o w line is used i n

the strength calculations o f the t o w i n g appUances o f
the shipborne barges. A t t h e discretion o f t h e ship
o w n e r t h e t o w Unes o f t h e s h i p b o r n e barges m a y be
stored i n the barge carrier o r tug, a n d they d o n o t
f o r m a p a r t o f t h e e q u i p m e n t o f t h e shipborne barge.
5.2.2 T h e t o w U n e s m a y b e o f s t e e l w i r e , n a t u r a l
fibre o r synthetic fibre material. T h e requirements
o f 4.1.6, 4.2.1 t o 4.2.4 f o r m o o r i n g ropes are also
applicable t o t h e t o w Une.
S W L o f each shipboard fitting shall be m a r k e d

by w e l d bead o r equivalent o n the deck fittings used
for t o w i n g .
5.4 S P E C I A L A R R A N G E M E N T F O R T U G S
5.4.1 T h e n u m b e r a n d t y p e o f e q u i p m e n t a n d
outfit f o r m i n g special a r r a n g e m e n t f o r tugs w h i c h
ensures t o w i n g o p e r a t i o n s u n d e r different service
conditions are determined by the Shipowner con
sidering t h a t such e q u i p m e n t a n d outfit shall satisfy
the requirements o f the present Chapter.
5.4.2 T h e m a i n d e t e r m i n i n g f a c t o r i n p r o v i d i n g
the tugs w i t h a special a r r a n g e m e n t is t h e rated
towing pull F acting o n the t o w h o o k . T h e rated
t o w i n g p u l l s h a l l be t a k e n as:
for tugs o f unrestricted service a n d o f restricted
areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R l a n d R 2 , t h e p u l l o n t h e t o w
h o o k required f o r t o w i n g the prescribed t o w at a
prescribed speed, b u t n o t exceeding 5 k n o t s ;
for tugs o f restricted area o f navigation R 3 , the
b o l l a r d p u l l , b u t i n n o c a s e t h e r a t e d t o w i n g p u l l F,
i n k N , s h a l l b e t a k e n less t h a n
F=0,l33P
5.3 T O W I N G
(5.4.2)
APPLIANCES
where
5.3.1 T h e n u m b e r a n d l o c a t i o n o f t o w i n g b o l l a r d s
a n d chocks depend o n t h e constructional features,
purpose a n d general arrangement o f t h e ship.
5.3.2 R e q u i r e m e n t s o f 4 . 3 . 2 a n d 4 . 3 . 3 i n t r o d u c e d
for t h e m o o r i n g bollards also apply t o t o w i n g boUards.
5.3.3 S h i p b o a r d f i t t i n g s f o r t o w i n g s h a l l b e l o
cated o n longitudinals, w h i c h are part o f the deck
c o n s t r u c t i o n so as t o faciUtate efficient d i s t r i b u t i o n o f
the t o w i n g load.
5.3.4 T h e d e s i g n l o a d a p p l i e d t o t o w i n g a r
r a n g e m e n t s s h a l l be as f o l l o w s :
.1 f o r n o r m a l t o w i n g o p e r a t i o n s 1,25 t i m e s t h e
bollard pull;
.2 f o r e s c o r t s e r v i c e t h e b r e a k i n g s t r e n g t h o f
the t o w Une according t o T a b l e 3.1.3-1 f o r t h e ship's
corresponding equipment number.
5.3.5 U n d e r t h e d e s i g n l o a d c o n d i t i o n s s p e c i f i e d
i n 5.3.4, t h e a l l o w a b l e stresses i n s u p p o r t i n g h u l l
structures as w e l l as t h e t o t a l c o r r o s i o n a d d i t i o n shall
be d e t e r m i n e d according t o 4.3.5.
5.3.6 S W L o f t h e s h i p b o a r d f i t t i n g s f o r t o w i n g
shall n o t exceed:
0,8 o f t h e design l o a d d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g
to 5.3.4.1 f o r n o r m a l t o w i n g operations;
the design l o a d d e t e r m i n e d according t o 5.3.4.2
for escort service.
F o r fittings used f o r b o t h n o r m a l t o w i n g opera
t i o n s a n d escort service, t h e greater o f t h e design
loads according t o 5.3.4.1 a n d 5.3.4.2 shall be used.
P=
e
total p o w e r o f the tug's m a i n engines, i n k W .
5.4.2.1 T h e n u m e r i c a l v a l u e o f t h e r a t e d t o w i n g p u l l
u n d e r o p e r a t i n g c o n d i t i o n s specified i n 5.4.2 is w i t h i n t h e
o w n e r ' s a n d designer's discretion, a n d a U calculations
pertaining t o the determination o f this value are n o t
subject t o a p p r o v a l b y t h e Register. Nevertheless, d u r i n g
m o o r i n g a n d sea trials o f t h e t u g , t h e Register w i l l c h e c k
this value, a n d , i f t h e parts o f t h e special a r r a n g e m e n t
prove t o be calculated f r o m a smaller value, t h e Register
m a y require t h e strengthening o f these parts o r m a y i n
troduce restriction o f power during t o w i n g operations.
5.4.2.2 T h e a c t u a l b r e a k i n g s t r e n g t h o f t h e t o w
Une F \ , i n k N , f o r t o w i n g o p e r a t i o n s o n t h e h o o k
F = kF
x
where
(5.4.2.2)
F = r a t e d t o w i n g p u l l , i n k N , a c c o r d i n g t o 5.4.2;
k = safety factor equal to:
5,0 f o r r a t e d t o w i n g p u l l 9 8 , 1 k N a n d l e s s ;
3,0 f o r r a t e d t o w i n g p u l l 2 9 4 k N a n d o v e r .
For intermediate values o f the rated t o w i n g pull

the safety factor is o b t a i n e d b y linear i n t e r p o l a t i o n .
The length o f the t o w line f o r t o w i n g operations o n
t h e h o o k s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 1 5 0 m .
The t o w Une for towing operations o n the h o o k
m a y be o f steel w i r e , n a t u r a l fibre o r s y n t h e t i c fibre
material. T h e requirements o f 4.2 f o r m o o r i n g ropes
are also appUcable t o t h e t o w line f o r t o w i n g opera
tions o n the hook.
5.4.3 A l l stressed p a r t s o f t h e t o w i n g a r r a n g e m e n t
( s u c h as t h e t o w h o o k , t o w i n g rails, etc.) as w e l l as
246
Rules
the fastenings f o r securing these parts t o the ship's

h u l l s h a l l be designed t o t a k e t h e a c t u a l b r e a k i n g l o a d
o f t h e t o w Une. T h e stresses i n these p a r t s s h a l l n o t
exceed 0,95 t i m e s t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress o f t h e i r m a terial.
5.4.4 T h e c r a m p i r o n o f t h e t o w h o o k s h a l l b e
c a l c u l a t e d as a c u r v i U n e a r b a r . W h e r e s u c h c a l c u l a t i o n s are n o t c a r r i e d o u t , i.e. t h e f o r m u l a e f o r a rect i U n e a r b a r s are used, p e r m i s s i b l e stresses s h a l l be
reduced b y 35 per cent.
5.4.5 A l l p a r t s o f t h e t o w i n g a r r a n g e m e n t w h i c h
are subjected t o tension o r bending u n d e r the h u l l o f
the t o w line shall n o t be m a n u f a c t u r e d o f cast i r o n .
5.4.6 T h e c r a m p i r o n o f t h e t o w h o o k s h a l l b e
either solid forged o r manufactured o f a solid rolled
blank. Percentage elongation o f the cramp i r o n m a t e r i a l s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 18 p e r c e n t o n 5 D .
5.4.7 T o w h o o k s s h a l l b e o f s l i p - t y p e a n d h a v e a
t o w Une releasing device operating efficiently i n the
range o f loads o n the t o w h o o k f r o m zero to three
times the rated t o w i n g pull and at any practically
possible deflection o f the t o w line f r o m the centreUne
o f the ship.
T h e device s h a l l be c o n t r o l l e d b o t h a t t h e t o w
h o o k and f r o m the n a v i g a t i o n bridge. W h e r e the ship
is f i t t e d w i t h a s p s h a l l w h o o k , i n a d d i t i o n t o t h e m a i n
one, this h o o k need n o t be o f sUp-type a n d h a v e a
device f o r releasing the t o w Une.
5.4.8 W h e n a p p l y i n g t o w h o o k s w i t h s h o c k a b s o r b e r s , t h e i r u l t i m a t e d a m p i n g l o a d s h a l l n o t be less
t h a n 1,3 t i m e s t h e r a t e d t o w i n g p u l l .
5.4.9 P r i o r t o i n s t a l l a t i o n o n b o a r d t h e s h i p t h e
t o w h o o k s shall be tested b y a p p U c a t i o n o f a p r o o f
load equal to twice the rated t o w i n g pull.
5.4.10 T h e w i r e s t o p p e r a n d i t s f a s t e n i n g s s h a l l b e
s u c h t h a t t h e i r b r e a k i n g l o a d i s n o t l e s s t h a n 1,5 t i m e s
the rated t o w i n g pull.
5.4.11 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3 . 7 , P a r t I V " S t a b i U t y " shall be t a k e n i n t o c o n s i d e r a t i o n w h e n assigning
the position o f the t o w h o o k and t o w i n g winch.
5.5 T O W I N G
and Construction
of Sea-Going
5.6 T O W L I N E F O R T O W I N G
Ships
WINCH
5.6.1 T h e l e n g t h o f t o w U n e f o r t o w i n g w i n c h s h a U
n o t b e less t h a n 7 0 0 m i f t h e p o w e r o f t h e t u g ' s m a i n
engines is 2 2 0 0 k W a n d over, a n d a t least 5 0 0 m i f t h a t
p o w e r i s 1 4 7 0 k W o r less. I n t h e t u g s w i t h t h e m a i n
engines h a v i n g the p o w e r i n the range f r o m 1470
t o 2200 k W the l e n g t h o f t o w Une f o r the t o w i n g w i n c h
shaU be d e t e r m i n e d b y Unear i n t e r p o l a t i o n .
I t is a l l o w e d t o reduce the l e n g t h o f t o w Une f o r
t o w i n g w i n c h according t o the tug's area o f navigation, magnitude o f the w a v e height i n the area o f
n a v i g a t i o n , o v e r a l l i m p e d a n c e o f t h e t o w e d o b j e c t , as
w e l l as t h e c o e f f i c i e n t o f t h e cable elastic t e n s i o n ,
p r o v i d i n g the Register agrees u p o n the relative calculations.
5.6.2 I n a l l o t h e r r e s p e c t s , t h e t o w U n e f o r t o w i n g
w i n c h s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s set f o r t h i n
5.4.2.2.
5.7 E M E R G E N C Y T O W I N G A R R A N G E M E N T S O N
SHIPS
5.7.1 S h i p s r e f e r r e d t o i n 5 . 1 . 2 s h a l l b e f i t t e d w i t h
emergency t o w i n g arrangements f o r w a r d and aft o f
t h e ship. T h e a r r a n g e m e n t s s h a l l be c a p a b l e o f r a p i d
d e p l o y m e n t i n the absence o f m a i n p o w e r o n the ship
t o be t o w e d a n d easy c o n n e c t i o n t o the t o w i n g ship.
A t least o n e o f the emergency t o w i n g a r r a n g e m e n t s
shall be pre-rigged ready f o r r a p i d d e p l o y m e n t .
5.7.2 T h e c o m p o n e n t s o f t h e e m e r g e n c y t o w i n g
a r r a n g e m e n t are Usted i n T a b l e 5.7.2.
T a b l e
Components of
emergency towing
arrangement
Pick-up gear
Towing pennant
Chafing gear
Fairlead
Strongpoint
Roller pedestal
5.7.2
N o n pre-rigged
Pre-rigged
Optional
Optional
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Depending o n design
Yes
Yes
Depending o n design
WINCHES
5.5.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e d e s i g n o f t o w i n g
w i n c h e s are specified i n 6.5, P a r t I X " M a c h i n e r y " .
5.5.2 P r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e f o r o p e r a t i n g t h e
t o w i n g w i n c h f r o m a site a t t h e w i n c h ; i t is recommended to allow for operating the t o w i n g w i n c h
f r o m the navigation bridge.
W h e n placing the c o n t r o l station o n the navigation bridge at the t o w i n g w i n c h a n d having possibility
o f s u p e r v i s i o n f o r its o p e r a t i o n , i t is a l l o w e d n o t t o
provide for operating the t o w i n g w i n c h directly f r o m
the place o f its installation.
5.7.3 E x c e p t t h e p i c k - u p g e a r a n d r o l l e r p e d e s t a l ,
the components o f the emergency t o w i n g arrangem e n t specified i n T a b l e 5.7.2 shall h a v e a w o r k i n g
s t r e n g t h o f a t least:
1000 k N f o r ships o f 2 0 0 0 0 t deadweight a n d
o v e r , b u t less t h a n 5 0 0 0 0 t d e a d w e i g h t ,
2000 k N f o r ships o f 5 0 0 0 0 t deadweight a n d
over.
U n d e r t h e a b o v e forces, t h e stresses s h a l l n o t
exceed 0,5 o f t h e u l t i m a t e strength.
T h e strength shall be sufficient f o r a l l r e l e v a n t
a n g l e s o f t o w U n e , i . e . u p t o 90 f r o m t h e s h i p ' s c e n -
Arrangements
and
Outfit
247
t r e l i n e t o p o r t a n d s t a r b o a r d a n d 30 v e r t i c a l l y
downwards.
5.7.4 T h e t o w i n g p e n n a n t s h a l l h a v e a l e n g t h o f
at least t w i c e the lightest seagoing ballast freeboard at
the fairlead plus 50 m . T h e t o w i n g p e n n a n t shall have
a hard eye-formed termination allowing connection
to a standard shackle.
T h e b o w a n d stern strongpoints a n d fairleads shall
b e l o c a t e d so as t o f a c i l i t a t e t o w i n g f r o m e i t h e r side o f
t h e b o w o r s t e r n a n d m i n i m i z e t h e stress o n t h e t o w i n g
system.
T h e i n b o a r d end fastening shall be a stopper or
bracket or other fitting o f equivalent strength. T h e
s t r o n g p o i n t c a n be designed integral w i t h the fairlead.
5.7.5 F a i r l e a d s s h a l l h a v e a n o p e n i n g l a r g e e n o u g h t o pass the largest p o r t i o n o f the chafing gear,
t o w i n g pennant or t o w i n g line.
T h e fairlead shall give adequate support for the
towing pennant during towing operation which
m e a n s b e n d i n g 90 t o p o r t a n d t o s t a r b o a r d s i d e
a n d 30 v e r t i c a l l y d o w n w a r d s . T h e b e n d i n g r a t i o
( t o w i n g p e n n a n t bearing surface diameter t o t o w i n g
p e n n a n t d i a m e t e r ) s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 7 t o 1 .
T h e f a i r l e a d s h a l l be l o c a t e d as close as p o s s i b l e
t o t h e d e c k a n d , i n a n y case, i n s u c h a p o s i t i o n t h a t
t h e c h a f i n g c h a i n is a p p r o x i m a t e l y p a r a l l e l t o t h e
d e c k w h e n i t is u n d e r s t r a i n b e t w e e n t h e s t r o n g p o i n t
and the fairlead.
5.7.6 T h e c h a f i n g g e a r s h a l l b e f i t t e d a t t h e f o r w a r d and, depending o n design, aft ends o f the ship.
A chafing chain or another design approved b y the
R e g i s t e r m a y be u s e d as t h e c h a f i n g gear. T h e c h a f i n g
c h a i n shall be a stud l i n k chain.
T h e chafing c h a i n shall be l o n g e n o u g h t o ensure
that the t o w i n g pennant remains outside the fairlead
during the t o w i n g operation. A chain extending f r o m
t h e s t r o n g p o i n t t o a p o i n t at least 3 m b e y o n d the
fairlead shall meet this criterion.
5.7.7 O n e e n d o f t h e c h a f i n g c h a i n s h a l l b e s u i t a b l e
for connection t o the strongpoint. T h e other end shall be
Chafing
fitted w i t h a standard pear-shaped open link a l l o w i n g

connection t o a standard b o w shackle.
T h e chafing chain shall be s t o w e d i n such a w a y
that it can be rapidly connected t o the strongpoint.
5.7.8 T h e e m e r g e n c y t o w i n g a r r a n g e m e n t s h a l l b e
pre-rigged a n d be capable o f being deployed i n a
controlled manner i n harbour conditions i n not more
t h a n 15 m i n .
T h e pre-rigged pick-up gear shall be designed f o r
m a n u a l operation by one person taking into account
the absence o f p o w e r a n d the potential f o r adverse
environmental conditions that m a y prevail during
such emergency t o w i n g operations. T h e pick-up gear
shall be protected against the w e a t h e r a n d o t h e r adverse conditions that m a y prevail.
5.7.9 T h e n o n p r e - r i g g e d e m e r g e n c y t o w i n g a r rangement shall be capable o f being deployed i n
harbour conditions i n n o t m o r e t h a n 1 h. T o facilitate
connection o f the t o w i n g pennant t o the chafing gear
and to prevent chafing o f the pennant, a suitably
positioned pedestal roller m a y be used.
Pre-rigged emergency t o w i n g arrangements at
b o t h ends o f the ship m a y be accepted.
A t y p e e m e r g e n c y t o w i n g a r r a n g e m e n t is s h o w n
i n F i g . 5.7.9.
5.7.10 A l l e m e r g e n c y t o w i n g a r r a n g e m e n t s s h a l l
be c l e a r l y m a r k e d t o f a c i l i t a t e safe a n d effective use
even i n darkness and p o o r visibility.
5.7.11 S h i p s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a s h i p - s p e c i f i c
emergency t o w i n g procedure. Such a procedure shall
be carried a b o a r d the ship f o r use i n emergency situations a n d shall be based o n existing arrangements
a n d equipment available o n b o a r d the ship.
T h e procedure shall include:
drawings o f fore a n d aft deck s h o w i n g possible
emergency t o w i n g arrangements;
i n v e n t o r y o f e q u i p m e n t o n b o a r d t h a t c a n be
used for emergency t o w i n g ;
means and methods o f communication; sample
procedures to facilitate the preparation for and conducting o f emergency t o w i n g operations.
gear
Towed
vessel
Towing
Strongpoint
pennant
Pick-up
Towing
connectii
Fairlead
Fig.
5.7.9
gear
248
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
6 SIGNAL MASTS
6.1 G E N E R A L
6.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s g i v e n i n t h e p r e s e n t S e c t i o n refer o n l y t o t h e s i g n a l m a s t s , i.e. t h e m a s t s

w h i c h are intended for carrying the signal means:
n a v i g a t i o n l i g h t s , d a y signals, aerials, etc. W h e r e t h e
masts or their parts carry derrick booms or other
cargo h a n d U n g gear i n a d d i t i o n t o the signal means,
such masts o r their parts shall c o m p l y w i t h the requirements o f Rules for the Cargo H a n d U n g Gear o f
Sea-Going Ships.
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 6.2 t o 6.4 d o n o t a p p l y t o
berth-connected ships. T h e signal masts o f b e r t h connected ships shall be designed t o c a r r y prescribed
signal means.
6.1.2 A r r a n g e m e n t , h e i g h t a n d p r o v i s i o n o f s i g nal means o n the signal masts shall c o m p l y w i t h the
requirements o f Part I I I "Signal Means" o f Rules for
the E q u i p m e n t o f Sea-Going Ships.
6.1.3 I f i n s h i p s o f r e s t r i c t e d a r e a s o f n a v i g a t i o n
R 2 - R S N , R2-RSN(4,5) and R 3 - R S N the signal masts
are collapsible, special m a c h i n e r y s h a l l be i n s t a l l e d
for t h e i r o p e r a t i o n o r p r o v i s i o n shall be m a d e f o r
appropriate connection w i t h other deck machinery.
T h e d r i v e o f the m a c h i n e r y m a y be h a n d - o p e r a t e d
p r o v i d e d t h e m a c h i n e r y is s e l f - b r a k i n g a n d t h e l o a d
o n the h a n d l e is n o t m o r e t h a n 160 N at a n y m o m e n t
of jackknifing or hoisting the mast.
6.2 S T A Y E D
MASTS
6.2.1 T h e o u t s i d e d i a m e t e r d a n d t h e p l a t e
t h i c k n e s s t, i n m m , a t t h e h e e l o f t h e m a s t s m a d e o f
steel h a v i n g t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress f r o m 2 1 5 u p t o
2 5 5 M P a a n d stayed b y t w o s h r o u d s o n e a c h side o f
t h e s h i p , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
d=22l;
(6.2.1-1)
?= 0,2/ + 3
(6.2.1-2)
where
/ = mast length, in m , f r o m the heel to the

eyeplates.
.1 h o r i z o n t a l d i s t a n c e a, i n m , f r o m t h e d e c k
(or b u l w a r k ) stay eyeplate t o the transverse plane
t h r o u g h t h e m a s t s t a y e y e p l a t e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
a=0,l5h
where
(6.2.1.1)
h = vertical distance, i n m , f r o m the m a s t stay eyeplate to
the d e c k (or b u l w a r k ) stay eyeplate;
.2 h o r i z o n t a l d i s t a n c e b, i n m , f r o m t h e d e c k ( o r
b u l w a r k ) stay eyeplate t o the l o n g i t u d i n a l plane
t h r o u g h t h e m a s t s t a y e y e p l a t e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
b = 0,30h;
(6.2.1.2)
.3 t h e v a l u e a s h a l l n o t e x c e e d t h e v a l u e b.
6.2.2 T h e a c t u a l b r e a k i n g s t r e n g t h F o f t h e r o pes, i n k N , u s e d f o r t h e m a s t s h r o u d s as specified
i n 6 . 2 . 1 s h a l l n o t be less t h a n
J
F=0,49(/
+ 10/ + 25).
(6.2.2)
I n o t h e r respects, t h e ropes f o r s h r o u d s h a l l
c o m p l y w i t h the requirements o f 3.15, P a r t X I I I
"Materials".
The loose gear o f shrouds (shackles, t u r n b u c k l e s , etc.) s h a l l be s u c h t h a t t h e i r safe w o r k i n g
l o a d i s n o t less t h a n 0 , 2 5 t i m e s t h e a c t u a l b r e a k i n g
strength o f the ropes referred to above.
6.2.3 W h e r e :
t h e m a s t is m a d e o f h i g h tensile steel, U g h t a l l o y s ,
glass-reinforced plastics o r w o o d (the w o o d shall be
o f t h e 1st grade);
t h e m a s t is stayed i n a w a y o t h e r t h a n t h a t specified i n 6.2.1;
i n a d d i t i o n t o a y a r d a r m , lights a n d d a y signals,
the m a s t is fitted w i t h o t h e r e q u i p m e n t h a v i n g c o n siderable w e i g h t , s u c h as r a d a r r e f l e c t o r s w i t h p l a t f o r m s f o r t h e i r servicing, " c r o w ' s nests", etc., p r o c e e d
as s p e c i f i e d i n 6.4.
6.2.4 T h e w i r e s o f s h r o u d s s h a l l h a v e a z i n c
coating according t o recognized standards.
6.3 U N S T A Y E D
M A S T S
shroud
T h e d i a m e t e r o f the m a s t m a y be g r a d u a l l y dec r e a s e d u p w a r d s t o a v a l u e o f 0,15d a t t h e s h r o u d

eyeplates, w h i l e t h e thickness o f t h e m a s t plates is
m a i n t a i n e d c o n s t a n t t h r o u g h o u t t h e l e n g t h /.
The m a s t length f r o m the s h r o u d eyeplates t o the
t o p s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 1/3 o f /.
T h e m a s t s h a l l be s t a y e d b y t h e s h r o u d s as f o l lows:
6.3.1 T h e o u t s i d e d i a m e t e r d a n d t h e p l a t e
t h i c k n e s s t, i n m m , a t t h e h e e l o f m a s t s m a d e o f s t e e l
h a v i n g t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress f r o m 2 1 5 t o 2 5 5 M P a
s h a l l n o t be less t h a n :
<rf 0,674/
(
+ f l +
13)x(l
1V(0,6^1 13)>
+
1 0
"
2 ;
(6.3.1-1)
Arrangements
and
t = ^ d
where
Outfit
(6.3.1-2)
/ = length o f the mast f r o m heel to top, in m ;
a= e l e v a t i o n o f t h e m a s t h e e l a b o v e c e n t r e o f g r a v i t y o f
the ship, i n m .
T h e o u t s i d e d i a m e t e r o f t h e m a s t m a y be grad u a l l y d e c r e a s e d u p w a r d s t o a v a l u e 0,5d a t t h e d i s tance 0,75/ f r o m the heel.

I n n o case is t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e m a s t p l a t e t o be
less t h a n 4 m m .
T h e m a s t heel shall be rigidly fixed i n a l l directions.
6.3.2 W h e r e :
t h e m a s t is m a d e o f h i g h tensile steel, l i g h t a l l o y s ,
glass-reinforced plastics o r w o o d ( t h e w o o d s h a l l be
o f t h e 1st grade);
i n a d d i t i o n t o a y a r d a r m , lights a n d d a y signals,
the m a s t is fitted w i t h o t h e r e q u i p m e n t h a v i n g c o n siderable w e i g h t , s u c h as r a d a r r e f l e c t o r s w i t h p l a t f o r m s f o r t h e i r s e r v i c i n g , " c r o w ' s nests", etc. p r o c e e d
as p r o v i d e d i n 6.4.
6.4 M A S T S O F S P E C I A L
CONSTRUCTION
6.4.1 I n t h e c a s e s s p e c i f i e d i n 6 . 2 . 3 a n d 6 . 3 . 2 a s
w e l l as w h e r e b i p o d , t r i p o d a n d o t h e r s i m i l a r m a s t s
are installed, detailed strength calculations o f these
m a s t s s h a l l be c a r r i e d o u t . T h e s e c a l c u l a t i o n s s h a l l be
submitted to the Register for review.
249
6.4.2 T h e c a l c u l a t i o n s s h a l l b e p e r f o r m e d o n t h e
a s s u m p t i o n t h a t each p a r t o f t h e m a s t is affected b y a
horizontal force F i n k N ,
b
-I
4jr2
[
t
Y$z
+ rsinO) + m ^ s i n O + / ^ c o s O J l O
(6.4.2)
where
m , = mass o f each part, in kg;

z,= elevation o f the centre o f gravity o f each part above
that o f the ship, i n m ;
A , = projected lateral area o f each part, i n m ;
T = r o l l i n g o r p i t c h i n g p e r i o d , i n s;
9 = amplitude o f roll o r pitch, i n rad;
r= w a v e h a l f - h e i g h t , i n m ;
g = 9,81 m / s a c c e l e r a t i o n d u e t o g r a v i t y ;
p = 1960 P a s p e c i f i c w i n d p r e s s u r e .
2
T h e calculations shall be carried o u t b o t h f o r

r o l l i n g a n d p i t c h i n g o f t h e s h i p , r b e i n g t a k e n as e q u a l
t o L / 4 0 w h e r e L is t h e ship's l e n g t h , i n m , a n d 0,
i n r a d . , a s c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o a n a n g l e o f 40 a t r o l l
a n d o f 5 a t p i t c h .
6.4.3 U n d e r t h e l o a d s s p e c i f i e d i n 6 . 4 . 2 , t h e
stresses i n t h e p a r t s o f t h e m a s t s h a l l n o t exceed
0,8 t i m e s t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress o f t h e i r m a t e r i a l w h e r e
they are m a d e o f m e t a l , a n d 12 M P a w h e r e they are
m a d e o f w o o d . T h e safety factor o f the standing
r o p e s u n d e r t h e s a m e l o a d s s h a l l n o t be less t h a n 3.
F o r glass-reinforced plastic masts under the loads
specified i n 6.4.2 t h e stresses i n t h e p a r t s o f t h e m a s t
s h a l l n o t exceed t h e a l l o w a b l e stress v a l u e i n d i c a t e d
i n T a b l e 3 o f A p p e n d i x 3, P a r t X V I " H u l l S t r u c t u r e
and Strength o f Glass-Reinforced Plastic Ships and
B o a t s " f o r t h e case o f s h o r t - t i m e a c t i o n o f the l o a d
for the relevant type o f deformation.
7 OPENINGS IN HULL, SUPERSTRUCTURES AND DECKHOUSES

AND THEIR CLOSING APPLIANCES
7.1
G E N E R A L
7.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t S e c t i o n a p p l y
t o ships o f u n r e s t r i c t e d service as w e l l as t o ships o f
restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R l , R 2 , R 2 - R S N ,
R2-RSN(4,5) a n d R 3 - R S N engaged o n international
voyages. T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r ships o f restricted areas o f
navigation R l , R 2 , R 2 - R S N and R 3 - R S N n o t engaged
o n i n t e r n a t i o n a l v o y a g e s , as w e l l a s f o r s h i p s o f r e s t r i c t e d
area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3 m a y be relaxed, the extent o f rel a x a t i o n w i l l be specially considered b y the Register i n
e a c h case, unless expressly p r o v i d e d o t h e r w i s e .
7.1.2 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t S e c t i o n
a p p l y t o ships t o w h i c h a m i n i m u m f r e e b o a r d is assigned. D e p a r t u r e s f r o m these r e q u i r e m e n t s m a y be
p e r m i t t e d f o r the ships t o w h i c h a greater t h a n
m i n i m u m f r e e b o a r d is assigned o n c o n d i t i o n t h a t the
R e g i s t e r is satisfied w i t h safety c o n d i t i o n s p r o v i d e d .
7.1.3 T h e a r r a n g e m e n t o f o p e n i n g s a n d t h e i r
closing appUances i n the hull, superstructures and
deckhouses shall also c o m p l y w i t h the requirements
of Part V I "Fire Protection" and Part X I "Electrical
Equipment".
7.1.4 A s f a r a s d e c k o p e n i n g s a r e c o n c e r n e d , t h e
f o l l o w i n g t w o positions are distinguished i n the present Section:
7.1.4.1 P o s i t i o n 1 :
U p o n exposed freeboard a n d raised quarter
decks, a n d u p o n exposed superstructure decks situated f o r w a r d o f a p o i n t located a quarter o f the
ship's l e n g t h f r o m the f o r w a r d perpendicular.
7.1.4.2 P o s i t i o n 2 :
U p o n exposed superstructure decks situated
abaft a quarter o f the ship's l e n g t h f r o m the f o r w a r d
perpendicular a n d located at least at o n e s t a n d a r d
height o f superstructure above the freeboard deck.
250
U p o n exposed superstructure decks situated f o r w a r d

o f a p o i n t located a quarter o f the ship's length f r o m
the f o r w a r d perpendicular a n d located a t least t w o
standard heights o f superstructure a b o v e t h e freeb o a r d deck.
7.1.5 T h e h e i g h t o f c o a m i n g s s p e c i f i e d i n t h e
present Section is m e a s u r e d f r o m the upper surface o f
t h e steel d e c k p l a t i n g o r f r o m t h e u p p e r surface o f the
w o o d o r other sheathing, i f fitted.
7.1.6 I n s u p p l y v e s s e l s t h e a c c e s s t o t h e s p a c e s
situated below t h e open cargo deck shall preferably
be p r o v i d e d f r o m t h e l o c a t i o n inside t h e enclosed
superstructure o r deckhouse o r f r o m t h e location
above t h e superstructure deck o rdeckhouse top. T h e
arrangement o f c o m p a n i o n o r other hatches o n t h e
o p e n c a r g o deck l e a d i n g t o t h e spaces b e l o w t h i s d e c k
is subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n
each case, t a k i n g a c c o u n t o f t h e degree o f p r o t e c t i o n
o f these hatches f r o m possible d a m a g e d u r i n g cargo
h a n d U n g o p e r a t i o n s as w e l l as t h e v o l u m e o f spaces
f l o o d e d i n case o f d a m a g e t o t h e h a t c h .
7.1.7 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t S e c t i o n f o r
floating docks apply t o openings a n d their closing
appliances arranged above t h e m a r g i n line a t docking. Openings a n d their closing appliances arranged
b e l o w t h e m a r g i n U n e a t d o c k i n g a r e subject t o special consideration b y t h e Register.
7.1.8 I n d o c k U f t s h i p s , r e g a r d l e s s o f t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 7.4 t o 7.7, i t i s n o t p e r m i t t e d t o a r r a n g e
openings f o r doors, c o m p a n i o n hatches, skyUghts,
v e n t i l a t i n g t r u n k s a n d o t h e r h a t c h e s i n sides a n d
b o u n d a r y b u l k h e a d s o f h o l d s i f t h e i r l o w e r edges a r e
below t h e m a r g i n line a t docking, w i t h t h e exception
o f t h e o p e n i n g s t o t h e w a t e r t i g h t spaces o f a r e stricted v o l u m e n o t c o m m u n i c a t i n g w i t h o t h e r spaces
b e l o w t h e level o f t h e m a r g i n Une a t docking.
7.1.9 D o o r s a n d h a t c h w a y s i n sides a n d b o u n d a r y
b u l k h e a d s o f h o l d s i n d o c k h f t s h i p s , i f t h e i r siUs a r e
a b o v e t h e m a r g i n U n e a t d o c k i n g b y less t h a n 6 0 0 m m
o r 0 , 0 5 times t h e d i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e o p e n i n g s a n d t h e
centreUne w h i c h e v e r is the greater, shaU be p r o v i d e d w i t h
the Ught signalUng system comprising t h e indicators i n staUed i n t h e c o n t r o l p o s t o f t h e ship's d o c k i n g operations. T h e Ught indicators shaU clearly s h o w the p o s i t i o n
o f the d o o r o r h a t c h cover (secured o r open).
7.1.10 T h e U g h t s i g n a l s s p e c i f i e d i n 7 . 1 . 9 n e e d n o t
be p r o v i d e d f o r d o o r s a n d h a t c h w a y s t o t h e w a t e r t i g h t spaces o f a restricted v o l u m e n o t c o m m u n i c a t i n g w i t h o t h e r spaces b e l o w t h e level w h i c h
is b y 6 0 0 m m o r 0,05 t i m e s t h e distance b e t w e e n t h e
o p e n i n g a n d t h e centreUne, w h i c h e v e r is t h e greater,
above t h e m a r g i n Une a t docking.
7.1.11 I n c a r g o s h i p s c o v e r e d b y t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f P a r t V " S u b d i v i s i o n " , t h e o p e n i n g s f o r access,
piping, v e n t i l a t i o n , electric cables, etc. i n w a t e r t i g h t
internal bulkheads a n d decks shall be provided w i t h
Ships
watertight doors o r hatch covers n o r m a l l y closed

w h e n a t sea w h i c h , i n their t u r n , shall be p r o v i d e d
w i t h i n d i c a t i o n m e a n s , p o s i t i o n e d i n t h e i r close
p r o x i m i t y a n do n t h e bridge, t o indicate whether such
doors o r h a t c h covers a r e o p e n o r closed. O n each
side o f s u c h a d o o r o r h a t c h c o v e r t h e r e s h a l l b e a n
i n s c r i p t i o n t o t h e effect t h e c l o s u r e shaU n o t b e left
open.
7.1.12 I n s h i p s m e n t i o n e d u n d e r 7 . 1 . 1 1 , a l l e x ternal openings w h i c h d o n o t ,b y their location,
c o n f o r m t o t h er e q u i r e m e n t s o f3.4.4, P a r t V " S u b division" shall be fitted w i t h strong enough watertight closures f o r w h i c h , except cargo h a t c h covers,
provision shall be made f o rbridge indication.
T h e watertight closures o f shell openings located
b e l o w t h e b u l k h e a d deck shall be p e r m a n e n t l y closed
at sea shall b e fitted w i t h devices p r e v e n t i n g t h e i r
uncontrolled opening. Plates shall be attached t o
such closures w i t h inscriptions t o t h e effect t h e
o p e n i n g s s h a l l b e p e r m a n e n t l y closed a t sea.
7.1.13 I n d r y c a r g o s h i p s n o t c o v e r e d b y t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7.1.11 a n d 7.1.12 a l l t h e d o o r s o f
sUding o rhinged type i n watertight bulkheads should
be fitted u p w i t h i n d i c a t i o n m e a n s p o s i t i o n e d o n t h e
bridge t o indicate whether such doors a r e open o r
closed. S i m i l a r indicators shall b e p r o v i d e d f o r shell
doors a n d o t h e r closing appUances w h i c h , i f left o p e n
o r n o t p r o p e r l y secured, c a n lead t o soUd f l o o d i n g o f
the ship.
7.1.14 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f S e c t i o n 7 d o n o t a p p l y t o berth-connected ships. F o r these ships, t h e
following provisions apply:
the coaming height o f openings o f c o m p a n i o n
hatches, skyUghts, v e n t i l a t i o n t r u n k s a n d v e n t i l a t i o n
h e a d s s h o u l d n o t b e less t h a n 1 0 0 m m ;
weathertight hatch covers shall be provided;
the external doors o f superstructures shall be
watertight, b u t w h e r e t h el o w e r edge o f a n e x t e r n a l
d o o r i s n o t less t h a n 6 0 0 m m a w a y f r o m t h e w a t e r U n e
corresponding t o the m a x i m u m draught, such doors
m a y be weathertight;
t h e l o w e r e d g e o f a side U g h t s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 150 m ma w a y f r o m t h e waterUne corresponding
to the m a x i m u m draught;
o n t h e freeboard deck, t h e superstructure a n d
deckhouse w i n d o w s shall be watertight.
7.2 S I D E
SCUTTLES
7.2.1 P o s i t i o n o f s i d e s c u t t l e s .
7.2.1.1 T h e n u m b e r o f s i d e s c u t t l e s i n t h e s h e l l
plating below the freeboard deck shall be reduced t o
a m i n i m u m compatible w i t h t h e design a n d proper
w o r k i n g o f t h e ship.
Arrangements
and
Outfit
F i s h i n g vessels m o o r i n g a l o n g s i d e e a c h o t h e r o r
o t h e r ships a t sea s h a l l n o t h a v e side scuttles u n d e r
freeboard deck i n the m o o r i n g zone, w h e r e v e r possible.
I f i n t h i s z o n e side scuttles are fitted i n t h e shell p l a t i n g ,
t h e y shall be so p o s i t i o n e d t h a t t h e p o s s i b i l i t y
o f their damage d u r i n g m o o r i n g operations is excluded.
N o side scuttles are p e r m i t t e d w i t h i n t h e
b o u n d a r i e s o f t h e ice belt o f t h e shell p l a t i n g specified
i n P a r t I I " H u l l " i n icebreakers a n d ships w i t h ice
strengthening.
7.2.1.2 N o side scuttle shall be fitted i n a p o s i t i o n
so t h a t its sill is b e l o w a Une d r a w n p a r a l l e l t o the
f r e e b o a r d d e c k a t side a n d h a v i n g its l o w e s t p o i n t
located 0,025 o f the ship's b r e a d t h o r 500 m m ,
w h i c h e v e r is the greater, above the s u m m e r l o a d
waterline or above the summer timber load waterUne
w h e r e t i m b e r l o a d Unes are assigned t o the ship.
R 2 - R S N , R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) , R 3 - R S N a n d R 3 n o t engaged
o n i n t e r n a t i o n a l voyages the specified distance
500 m m m a y be disregarded.
I f t h e l e n g t h o f t h e s h i p is less t h a n 2 4 m , t h e
specified distance m a y be reduced t o 3 0 0 m m f o r
ships o f restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 , R 2 - R S N ,
R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) a n d R 3 - R S N a n d t o 150 m m f o r ships
o f restricted area o f navigation R 3 .
7.2.1.3 Side scuttles i n the shell p l a t i n g b e l o w the
freeboard deck, i n f r o n t bulkheads o f enclosed su
perstructures a n d deckhouses o f the first tier a n d also
in front bulkheads o f enclosed superstructures a n d
d e c k h o u s e s o f t h e s e c o n d t i e r w i t h i n 0,25 f r o m t h e
f o r w a r d perpendicular shall be o f a h e a v y type a n d
fitted w i t h efficient deadlights h i n g e d inside (refer
also to 2.4.5, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n " ) .
I n tugs o f restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 a n d R 3
t h e side scuttles fitted b e l o w t h e b u l k h e a d d e c k shaU be
n o t o n l y o f h e a v y b u t also o f n o n - o p e n i n g type.
R 2 - R S N , R2-RSN(4,5) and R 3 - R S N having the length
b e l o w 2 4 m a n d i n ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n
R 3 i t is a U o w e d t o f i t side scuttles o f n o r m a l t y p e i n stead o f those o f h e a v y type.
7.2.1.4 I n ships t o w h i c h the requirements
o f P a r t V " S u b d i v i s i o n " a p p l y t h e side scuttles o u t side a f l o o d a b l e c o m p a r t m e n t o r a specified g r o u p o f
c o m p a r t m e n t s , f i t t e d i n a p o s i t i o n so t h a t t h e i r sills
a r e b y l e s s t h a n 0 , 3 m o r ( 0 , 1 + ^^Q)
> whichever
is less, a b o v e t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g d a m a g e w a t e r U n e
a n d t h e side scuttles i n t h e f l o a t i n g cranes t h e sills o f
w h i c h a r e b y less t h a n 0,3 m a b o v e t h e w a t e r U n e
corresponding to the actual m a x i m u m statical heel i n
case t h e h o o k is u n d e r l o a d , shall be n o t o n l y o f
heavy b u t also o f n o n - o p e n i n g type.
R2-RSN,
R2-RSN(4,5)
and
R3-RSN
having
251
the l e n g t h b e l o w 24 m a n d i n ships o f restricted area

o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3 i t is a l l o w e d t o f i t side scuttles o f
n o r m a l non-opening type instead o f those o f heavy
non-opening type.
7.2.1.5 Side scuttles i n enclosed superstructures
a n d deckhouses o f the first tier, except those i n t h e i r
f r o n t b u l k h e a d s , a n d also side scuttles i n enclosed
superstructures a n d deckhouses o f the second tier
w i t h i n 0,25 o f the ship's l e n g t h L f r o m the f o r w a r d
perpendicular, except those i n their front bulkheads,
m a y be o f n o r m a l type.
R 2 - R S N , R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) and R 3 - R S N having the
length b e l o w 24 m a n d i n ships o f restricted area o f
n a v i g a t i o n R 3 i t is a l l o w e d t o f i t side scuttles o f l i g h t
type instead o f those o f n o r m a l type. Side scuttles
shall be fitted w i t h efficient deadUghts h i n g e d inside.
7.2.1.6 Side scuttles i n enclosed superstructures
a n d deckhouses o f the second tier, except those fitted
i n a p o s i t i o n w i t h i n 0,25 o f the ship's l e n g t h f r o m the
f o r w a r d p e r p e n d i c u l a r s h a l l be as r e q u i r e d i n 7.2.1.5,
p r o v i d e d these side scuttles g i v e d i r e c t access t o a n
o p e n s t a i r w a y l e a d i n g t o spaces s i t u a t e d b e l o w .
I n cabins a n d s i m i l a r spaces o f enclosed superstructures a n d deckhouses o f t h e second tier i t is a l l o w e d t h a t i n s t e a d o f side scuttles specified i n 7.2.1.5,
t h e s i d e s c u t t l e s o r w i n d o w s c o u l d b e fitted w i t h o u t
deadlights.
7.2.1.7 O n n o a c c o u n t shall t h e side scuttles be
fitted i n t h e o u t e r w a l l s i d e s o f t h e f l o a t i n g d o c k s a n d
i n t h e sides o f t h e d o c k l i f t ships so t h a t t h e i r sills are
below the m a r g i n Une at docking.
I n t h e i n n e r w a l l sides o f t h e f l o a t i n g d o c k s a n d i n
the b o u n d a r y bulkheads o f the docklift ships i n s t a l l a t i o n o f t h e side scuttles is n o t p e r m i t t e d .
7 . 2 . 1 . 8 I n t h e o u t e r w a U sides o f t h e f l o a t i n g d o c k s
a n d i n t h e sides o f t h e d o c k h f t s h i p s t h e s i d e s c u t t l e s , t h e
siUs o f w h i c h a r e a b o v e t h e m a r g i n U n e a t d o c k i n g b y less
t h a n 300 m m o r 0,025 times the ship's breadth, w h i c h ever is the greater, shaU be o f h e a v y type, fitted w i t h
hinged inside deadUghts, a n d o f n o n - o p e n i n g type.
7.2.1.9 I n t h e o u t e r w a U sides o f t h e f l o a t i n g d o c k s
t h e side scuttles, t h e sills o f w h i c h a r e a b o v e t h e m a r g i n
Une at d o c k i n g b y 300 m m o r m o r e , shall be o f n o r m a l
type a n d fitted w i t h hinged inside deadUghts.
7.2.1.10 Ships w i t h distinguishingm a r k s F F 1 and
F F 2 i n t h e class n o t a t i o n shall be fitted w i t h side
scuttles h a v i n g deadUghts p e r m a n e n t l y attached t o
their p r i m a r y structure, w h e e l h o u s e w i n d o w s shall be
fitted w i t h d e t a c h a b l e s c r e e n s , e x c e p t s i d e s c u t t l e s a n d
w i n d o w s i n the w h e e l h o u s e , a n d search a n d rescue
operation control station.
7.2.2 Construction a n d attachment o f side scuttles
and windows.
7.2.2.1 T h e R u l e s d i s t i n g u i s h three types o f side
scuttle construction:
252
Rules
.1 h e a v y t y p e w i t h t h e glass t h i c k n e s s o f n o t less
than 10m m for inner diameter o f 200 m m a n d below,
n o t less t h a n 1 5 m m f o r i n n e r d i a m e t e r f r o m 3 0 0 m m
t o 3 5 0 m m a n d n o t less t h a n 1 9 m m f o r i n n e r d i a m e t e r o f 4 0 0 m m . T h e i n n e r diameter shall n o t exceed
400
m m . F o r intermediate
inner
diameters
(from 200 m m to 300 m m and from 350 m m to
4 0 0 m m ) t h e glass t h i c k n e s s s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y
l i n e a r i n t e r p o l a t i o n . I n a d d i t i o n , h e a v y side scuttles i f
they are o fthe opening type shall have a n u t (instead
o f o n e o f t h e ear-nuts securing their frame) being
screwed o f f w i t h t h e a i d o f a special w r e n c h ;
.2 n o r m a l t y p e w i t h t h e g l a s s t h i c k n e s s o f n o t l e s s
than 8 m mfor inner diameter o f250 m ma n d below,
a n d n o t less t h a n 1 2 m m f o r i n n e r d i a m e t e r
o f 350 m m a n d over, however, t h e inner diameter
shall n o t exceed 4 0 0 m m . F o r i n t e r m e d i a t e i n n e r
d i a m e t e r s t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e glass s h a l l b e d e termined b y Unear interpolation;
.3 U g h t t y p e w i t h t h e g l a s s t h i c k n e s s o f n o t l e s s
than 6 m m f o r inner diameter o f250 m m a n d below
a n d n o t less t h a n 1 0 m m f o r i n n e r d i a m e t e r
o f 400 m m a n d over, however, the inner diameter
shall n o t exceed 4 5 0 m m . F o r i n t e r m e d i a t e i n n e r
d i a m e t e r s t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e glass s h a l l b e d e termined b y Unear interpolation.
7.2.2.2 N o r m a l a n d h e a v y s i d e s c u t t l e s m a y b e o f
n o n - o p e n i n g t y p e , i.e. w i t h t h e glass f i x e d i n t h e m a i n
f r a m e , o r o f o p e n i n g t y p e , i.e. w i t h t h e glass f i x e d i n
the glazing bead efficiently hinged o n t h e m a i n frame.
E x c e p t i o n s h a l l b e m a d e f o r t h e cases specified
i n 7.2.1.3, 7.2.1.4 a n d 7.2.1.8 w h e r e t h e side scuttles
shall be o fnon-opening type only.
T h e glasses o f side scuttles s h a U b e r e U a b l y a n d
w e a t h e r t i g h t secured b y m e a n s o f a m e t a l r i n g p r o v i d e d
w i t h screws o r b y o t h e r equivalent device a n d a gasket.
7.2.2.3 T h e m a i n f r a m e , g l a z i n g b e a d a n d d e a d U g h t
o f side scuttles s h a l l h a v e sufficient s t r e n g t h . T h e glazi n g bead a n d deadUght shall b e fitted w i t h gaskets a n d
shaU be capable o fbeing effectively closed a n d secured
weathertight b y means o f ear-nuts o r nuts being
screwed o f f w i t h t h e a i d o f a special w r e n c h .
7.2.2.4 T h e m a i n f r a m e , g l a z i n g b e a d , d e a d U g h t
a n d r i n g f o r securing t h e glass s h a l l b e m a n u f a c t u r e d
f r o m steel, brass o r o t h e r m a t e r i a l a p p r o v e d b y t h e
Register.
T h e ear-nuts a n d nuts being screwed o f fb y a
special w r e n c h shall be m a d e o f corrosion-resistant
material.
G l a s s u s e d f o r t h e side scuttles s h a l l b e h a r d e n e d .
7.2.2.5 I n g l a s s - r e i n f o r c e d p l a s t i c s h i p s s i d e
scuttles shall be attached t o t h e outside p l a t i n g a n d t o
the bulkheads o f superstructures a n d deckhouses i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.7.4, P a r t X V I
" H u l l Structure a n d Strength o f Glass-Reinforced
Plastic Ships a n d Boats".
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
7.2.2.6 T h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f t h e w i n d o w s s h a U
c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 7.2.2.2 t o 7.2.2.4,
except f o r t h e requirements f o r t h e deadUghts.
T h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e w i n d o w g l a s s t, i n m m , s h a l l
be n o t less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
t = 0,32kb /p
(7.2.2.6-1)
where
b = lesser clear size o f t h e w i n d o w , i n m ;

p = p r e s s u r e h e a d , i n k P a , c a l c u l a t e d a c c o r d i n g t o 2.12.3,
Part I I "Hull"; distance z j being taken u p to t h e
middle o f the w i n d o w height;
k = factor determined b y the formula
fc= 13,42 5 , 1 2 5 ( 6 / a )
where
(7.2.2.6-2)
a = greater clear size o f the w i n d o w , i n m .
7.3 F L U S H D E C K
SCUTTLES
7.3.1 F l u s h d e c k s c u t t l e s i n p o s i t i o n s 1 a n d 2 s h a l l
be p r o v i d e d w i t h deadUghts h i n g e d o r attached b y
other m e t h o d (for example, b y means o fa chain) a n d
c a p a b l e o f b e i n g e a s i l y a n d e f f i c i e n t l y c l o s e d a n d secured.
7.3.2 T h e l a r g e s t o f c l e a r d i m e n s i o n s o f t h e f l u s h
d e c k scuttles s h a l l n o t b e o v e r 2 0 0 m m , w i t h t h e glass
being a t least 15 m m t h i c k . T h e f l u s h deck scuttles
shall be attached t o the m e t a l deck plating b y means
o f frames.
7.3.3 W h e n s e c u r e d , t h e d e a d U g h t s o f t h e f l u s h
deck scuttles shall be w e a t h e r t i g h t . T h e tightness
shall be ensured b y a rubber o r o t h e r suitable gasket.
F o r t h e same purpose, along their contour the
glasses o f t h e f l u s h d e c k scuttles s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d
w i t h a gasket made o f rubber o r other suitable m a terial.
7.3.4 T h e s t r e n g t h a n d m a t e r i a l s o f t h e f l u s h d e c k
scuttles parts a r e g o v e r n e d b y appUcable requirem e n t s specified i n 7.2.2.3 a n d 7.2.2.4. A s regards a t t a c h m e n t o f flush deck scuttles i n glass-reinforced
plastic ships, refer t o r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7.2.2.5.
7.4 O P E N I N G S I N S H E L L P L A T I N G A N D T H E I R
APPLIANCES
CLOSING
7.4.1 G e n e r a l .
7.4.1.1 T h i s C h a p t e r c o n t a i n s r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r
t h e a r r a n g e m e n t o f b o w , side a n d s t e r n d o o r s i n t h e
shell plating, strength o f structural elements o f t h e
d o o r s , securing, l o c k i n g a n d s u p p o r t i n g devices.
7.4.1.2 T h e n u m b e r o f d o o r s s h a l l b e r e d u c e d t o a
m i n i m u m consistent w i t h t h e structure a n d n o r m a l
operational conditions o f the ship.
7.4.1.3 W h e n c l o s e d a n d s e c u r e d , d o o r s i n t h e s h e U
plating shall be weathertight. Weathertightness shaU be
ensured w i t h a rubber o r other suitable packing.
Arrangements
and
Outfit
7.4.1.4 T h e p l a t i n g t h i c k n e s s o f t h e d o o r s m a d e
o f steel, irrespective o f t h e f u l f i l m e n t o f t h e r e q u i r e
m e n t s g i v e n i n 7 . 4 . 1 . 1 0 , s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h e
thicknesses referred t o i n 2.2.4.8 a n d 2.12.4.1, P a r t I I
" H u l l " f o rthe appropriate position o fthe door; the
m i n i m u m plating thickness o f t h e doors made o f
o t h e r materials is subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y
t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h p a r t i c u l a r case.
7.4.1.5 D o o r s w i t h a c l e a r a r e a o f 1 2 m a n d m o r e
shall be secured b y means o f a p o w e r system o r b y a
h a n d gear used f o r securing t h e d o o r f r o m a readily
accessible p o s i t i o n . S t e r n , b o w a n d side d o o r s o f
large dimensions, w h e n m a n u a l devices w o u l d n o t be
r e a d i l y accessible, s h a l l b e n o r m a l l y secured b y m e a n s
o f p o w e r systems. A l t e r n a t i v e means o f securing shall
also b e p r o v i d e d f o r e m e r g e n c y u s e i n case o f failure
o f the p o w e r systems.
2
7.4.1.6 W h e n p o w e r - o p e r a t e d s e c u r i n g d e v i c e s o r
devices w i t h a h a n d gear a r e used, i t is necessary t o
ensure t h a t the doors shall r e m a i n tight i n t h e secured
p o s i t i o n a n d s h a l l r e m a i n secured i n case o f failure o f
any part o f t h e p o w e r system o r h a n d gear o f t h e
securing device.
H y d r a u l i c a l l y o p e r a t e d securing devices shall b e
m a n u a l l y o r mechanically lockable i n t h e secured p o
sition.
7.4.1.7 W h e n p o w e r - o p e r a t e d s e c u r i n g d e v i c e s o r
devices w i t h a h a n d gear a r e used, p r o v i s i o n shall be
made f o r the indicators w h i c h clearly show whether
the d o o r i s totally secured o r n o t .
These indicators shall be fitted i na position f r o m
w h i c h t h e securing operation is performed, a n d i n
case o f t h e p o w e r - o p e r a t e d securing device, also o n
the n a v i g a t i o n bridge.
7.4.1.8 I f , d u e t o t h e s h i p ' s p u r p o s e , i t i s s p e c i a l l y
p r o v i d e d t o o p e n a n d close t h e d o o r s n o t o n l y i n p o r t s
b u t a l s o a t sea, a r r a n g e m e n t s a p p r o v e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r
shall be m a d e ( w i t h regard t o t h e operational condi
tions) t o e n s u r e c l o s u r e a n d c o m p l e t e s e c u r i n g o f t h e
o p e n d o o r , e v e n i n case o f f a i l u r e o f t h e d o o r gear a n d
securing device gear, o r o t h e r a r r a n g e m e n t s a p p r o v e d
by the Register shall be made t oprevent penetration o f
w a t e r i n t o t h e s h i p spaces w h e n t h e d o o r i s o p e n .
P r o v i s i o n shall b e m a d e f o r devices e n s u r i n g
proper locking o fthe door i n the open position.
T h e drives o f such doors shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e
requirements o fPart I X "Machinery" a n dPart X I
"Electrical Equipment".
7.4.1.9 T h e r e s h a l l b e a r e a d i l y s e e n n o t i c e p l a t e
near each door, indicating that t h e d o o r shall be
closed a n d secured before t h e ship leaves t h ep o r t ; f o r
d o o r s referred t o i n 7.4.1.8 p r o v i s i o n shall b e also
m a d e f o r a n o t i c e plate i n d i c a t i n g t h a t a t sea o n l y t h e
master is allowed t o open the door.
7.4.1.10 W h e n d o o r s a r e u n d e r t h e a c t i o n o f t h e
design loads determined i n accordance w i t h 7.4.2
253
a n d 7 . 4 . 3 , e x c e p t 7 . 4 . 2 . 5 , stresses, i n M P a , i n t h e p r i m a r y
m e m b e r s o f the d o o r s as w e l l as o f securing, l o c k i n g a n d
s u p p o r t i n g devices s h a l l n o t exceed t h e f o l l o w i n g values:
b e n d i n g stress
o-=120/fc;
(7.4.1.10-1)
shear stress
= 80/:;
(7.4.1.10-2)
e q u i v a l e n t stress
2
Geq = sfo
+ 3-c =l50/k
(7.4.1.10-3)
where =
1,0 f o r s t e e l w i t h u p p e r y i e l d s t r e s s o f t h e m a t e r i a l
=235 M P a ;
= 0,78 f o r s t e e l w i t h
= 315 M P a ;
= 0,72 f o r s t e e l w i t h ^ = 3 3 5 M P a .
7.4.2 B o w d o o r s .
7.4.2.1 B o w d o o r s s h a l l b e s i t u a t e d a b o v e t h e
freeboard deck.
7.4.2.2 W h e r e t h e b o w d o o r l e a d s t o a c o m p l e t e
o r l o n g f o r w a r d enclosed superstructure a weather
tight inner d o o r shall be installed as part o f the col
lision b u l k h e a d above t h e freeboard deck o f the ship.
B o w a n d inner doors shall be so arranged as t o
preclude the possibility o f the b o w d o o r causing structural
damage t o the inner d o o r o r t o t h e collision bulkhead i n
case o f d a m a g e t o o r d e t a c h m e n t o f t h e b o w d o o r .
7.4.2.3 T h e d e s i g n e x t e r n a l p r e s s u r e P , i n k P a ,
for t h e scantUngs o f p r i m a r y m e m b e r s , securing,
l o c k i n g a n d s u p p o r t i n g devices o f t h e b o w d o o r s is
determined b y the following formula:
e
= ,6
where
+ 0,41tga)(0,4vsinp + 0,6^/T)
(7.4.2.3)
is a coefficientequal to:
0,01251, f o r s h i p s l e s s t h a n 80 m i n l e n g t h ;
= 1 , 0 f o r s h i p s 80 m a n d m o r e i n l e n g t h ;
v = contractual ship's forward speed, i n knots;
<x a n d P = a n g l e s t o b e o b t a i n e d f r o m F i g . 7.4.2.3.
C
C
Section
A-A
F i g . 7.4.2.3
T h e design external pressure m a y be reduced

b y 2 0 p e r cent f o r ships o f restricted service R 2 - R S N ,
R2-RSN(4,5) a n d R 3 - R S N a n d b y 4 0 p e r cent f o r
ships o f restricted service R 3 .
I n a n y case, t h e design e x t e r n a l pressure P s h a l l
n o t b e t a k e n less t h a n t h e v a l u e s d e t e r m i n e d a c e
254
Rules
c o r d i n g t o 1.3.2.2 o r 2.8.3.3, P a r t I I " H u l l " , w h i c h

ever is t h e greater.
7.4.2.4 T h e d e s i g n i n t e r n a l p r e s s u r e P i n k P a , f o r
scantlings o f p r i m a r y members, securing, locking a n d
s u p p o r t i n g devices o f inner d o o r s shall be d e t e r m i n e d
by the formula
u
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
P = P A , inW
(7.4.2.7-6)
where A = area o fthe transverse vertical projection o f the d o o r
( r e f e r t o F i g . 7.4.2.7), i n m ;
P = P A , inkN
(7.4.2.7-7)
w h e r e A = a r e a o f h o r i z o n t a l p r o j e c t i o n o f t h e d o o r (refer t o
F i g . 7.4.2.7), i n m ;
P = PtAx, i n k N
(7.4.2.7-8)
w h e r e f o r P , r e f e r t o 7.4.2.4;
A = area o fthe longitudinal vertical projection o fthe d o o r
( r e f e r t o F i g . 7.4.2.7), i n m ;
a = vertical distance, i nm , f r o m visor pivot t o the centroid
o f t h e transverse vertical projected area o f the visor
d o o r ( r e f e r t o F i g . 7.4.2.7);
b = vertical distance, i nm , f r o m visor pivot t o the centroid
o f the h o r i z o n t a l p r o j e c t e d a r e a o fthe v i s o r d o o r (refer
t o F i g . 7.4.2.7);
= horizontal distance, i n m , f r o m visor pivot t ot h e
centre o f gravity o f t h e visor mass
(refer
t o F i g . 7.4.2.7);
? = v e r t i c a l d i s t a n c e , i n m , f r o m v i s o r p i v o t t o t h e b o t t o m
o f t h e d o o r ( r e f e r t o F i g . 7.4.2.7);
V = inner v o l u m e o fthe door, i n m ,
x
x i
P,=
(7.4.2.4)
10z
where
z = vertical distance f r o m the centre o fgravity o fthe d o o r

area t o t h edeck above, i n m .
I n a l l cases, t h e v a l u e o f t h e d e s i g n i n t e r n a l
p r e s s u r e Pi s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n 2 5 k P a .
7.4.2.5 T h e s c a n t l i n g s o f p r i m a r y m e m b e r s o f
visor doors shall be chosen i n accordance w i t h t h e
requirements o f2.8.5.1, P a r t I I " H u l l " .
7.4.2.6 S e c u r i n g a n d l o c k i n g d e v i c e s o f b o w d o o r s
shall be designed t o w i t h s t a n d t h e forces F o r
F, i n k N , t o b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o l l o w i n g f o r m u l a e :
for thedoors opening inwards
F = AP
e
+ pl;
(7.4.2.6-1)
p p
for thedoors opening outwards

Fi = APi + 1 0 0 + P l
(7.4.2.6-2)
P P
where A =
for P ,
for P,,
p =
clear area o fthe door, i n m ;

r e f e r t o 7.4.2.3;
r e f e r t o 7.4.2.4;
pressure o fthe packing when it is compressed for the
m a x i m u m depth possible, i n k N / m , is assumed i n
calculations equal t o a tleast 5 k N / m ;
l = length o fthe packing, i n m ;
0 m a s s o f the door, i n t.
e
Front
view
7.4.2.7 S e c u r i n g a n d l o c k i n g d e v i c e s , a s w e l l a s
supports o f t h e visor doors shall be designed t o
w i t h s t a n d forces Fp F , F a n d F, i n k N .
T h e forces acting i n t h e longitudinal direction
shall be determined b y t h efollowing formulae:
bow
x
xa
lOQc + i V z -
(7.4.2.7-1)
CL
stern
F =
lOQc-P
,a
(7.4.2.7-2)
T h e force acting i n t h etransverse direction

F
=P A
shall
(7.4.2.7-3)
T h e force acting i nt h evertical direction shall be

^ = ^ - 1 0 0
(7.4.2.7-4)
or
F =10(V-Q)
Z
w h e r e f o r Q, r e f e r t o 7.4.2.6;
f o r P , r e f e r t o 7.4.2.3;
e
(7.4.2.7-5)
Plan
view
F i g . 7.4.2.7
7.4.2.8 F o r s i d e - o p e n i n g d o o r s , t h r u s t b e a r i n g
shall be provided i nw a y o fgirder ends a t t h e closing
o f t w o leaves t o prevent o n e leaf shifting t o w a r d s t h e
o t h e r o n e u n d e r effect o f u n s y m m e t r i c a l pressure
(refer t o F i g . 7.4.2.8). E a c h p a r t o f the t h r u s t b e a r i n g
shall be kept secured o n t h e other p a r t b y m e a n s o f
securing devices.
7.4.2.9 L i f t i n g a r m s o f t h e v i s o r d o o r s a n d t h r u s t
bearing shall b e designed t o w i t h s t a n d static a n d d y n a m i c
loads arising w h e n t h e d o o r is opened a n d closed w i t h
d u e r e g a r d t o t h e m i n i m u m w i n d p r e s s u r e 1,5 k N / m .
2
Arrangements
and
Outfit
255
w h e r e f o r A , p a n d l , r e f e r t o 7.4.2.6;
f o r P , r e f e r t o 7.4.3.4
F = a n accidental force due toloose cargo, tob e uniformly
distributed over t h earea A a n d t o b e taken n o t less
t h a n 300 k N o r 5 A , i n k N , w h i c h e v e r i s t h e g r e a t e r .
F o r small doors, such a sbunker doors o rpilot doors,
the value o f F m a y b e reduced u p o n special
consideration b y the Register. I n case the second
(inner) d o o r i s installed, w h i c h i s c a p a b l e t o protect
the external d o o r f r o m accidental forces due t o loose
c a r g o e s , F = 0.
f o r Q, r e f e r t o 7.4.2.6.
p
Supporting structures o f doors shall be designed

t o w i t h s t a n d forces F a n d F , i n k N , d e t e r m i n e d b y
the formulae:
3
for doors opening inwards
F i g . 7.4.2.8 T h r u s t b e a r i n g
F = AP;
(7.4.3.5-3)
7.4.3 S i d e a n d s t e r n d o o r s .
7.4.3.1 T h e l o w e r e d g e o f t h e d o o r o p e n i n g s s h a l l
n o t be lower t h a n t h e Une w h i c h is parallel t o the
freeboard deck a n d has its lowest point at the u p permost cargo waterline.
T h e deviation f r o m this requirement m a y bea l l o w e d i n e x c e p t i o n a l cases f o r side d o o r s o f t h e ships
w h i c h a r e n o t passenger ships, p r o v i d e d i t is p r o v e d
t o t h e Register t h a t safety w i l l n o t be thus i m p a i r e d .
I n s u c h cases, p r o v i s i o n s h a U b e m a d e f o r : t h e
second (inner) doors, strength a n d tightness o f w h i c h is
equivalent t o those o f the o u t e r doors; a device enabUng
t o d e t e r m i n e w a t e r presence i n t h e space b e t w e e n t h e
d o o r s ; w a t e r drainage f r o m this space t o bilges o r d r a i n
wells, c o n t r o U e d b y a r e a d i l y accessible v a l v e o r o t h e r
arrangements approved b y t h e Register.
7.4.3.2 T h e d o o r s s h a l l o p e n o u t w a r d s s o t h a t
forces acting u n d e r t h e effect o f the sea press t h e d o o r
against t h e s u p p o r t i n g c o n t o u r o f the sill. I n s t a l l a t i o n
o f t h e d o o r s o p e n i n g inside is subject t o special
c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h p a r t i c u l a r case.
7.4.3.3 T h e n u m b e r o f s e c u r i n g d e v i c e s o n e a c h
e d g e o f t h e d o o r s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t w o ; a s e c u r i n g
device shall be p r o v i d e d i n t h e vicinity o f each d o o r
corner. T h e distance b e t w e e n securing devices shall
n o t exceed 2,5 m .
7.4.3.4 T h e d e s i g n e x t e r n a l p r e s s u r e P , i n k P a , f o r
structural members o f doors shaU be determined i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.3.2, P a r t I I
" H u l l " . I n a n y case, t h e v a l u e o f P shaU n o t b e t a k e n
less t h a n 2 5 k P a .
7.4.3.5 S e c u r i n g a n d l o c k i n g d e v i c e s s h a l l b e d e signed t o w i t h s t a n d t h e forces F \ o r F , i n k N , determined by the formulae:
for doors opening inwards
2
FÂP+Pplp,
(7.4.3.5-1)
for doors opening outwards

F = F + 1 0 0 + Pplp
2
(7.4.3.5-2)
for doors opening outwards

F =F
4
+ 10Q.
(7.4.3.5-4)
7.5 S U P E R S T R U C T U R E S A N D D E C K H O U S E S
7.5.1 C o n s t r u c t i o n , o p e n i n g s a n d c l o s i n g a p p l i a n c e s .
7.5.1.1 O p e n i n g s i n t h e f r e e b o a r d d e c k o t h e r t h a n
those defined i n 7.3, 7.6 t o 7.11 a n d 7.13 shall be
protected b y t h e enclosed superstructure o r enclosed
deckhouse. T h e similar openings i n t h e deck o f enclosed superstructure o r enclosed deckhouse shall be
protected b y enclosed deckhouse o f t h e second tier.
7.5.1.2 S u p e r s t r u c t u r e s a n d d e c k h o u s e s a r e c o n sidered enclosed if:
their construction compUes w i t h the requirements
o f 2.12, P a r t I I " H u l l " ;
a l l access o p e n i n g s c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f 7.5.2 a n d 7.7;
all other openings i n their outside contour c o m ply w i t h requirements o f 7.2 t o 7.4 a n d 7.7 t o 7.10.
7.5.2 D o o r s i n e n c l o s e d s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s a n d e n closed deckhouses.
7.5.2.1 A l l a c c e s s o p e n i n g s i n t h e e n d b u l k h e a d s
o f enclosed superstructures a n d outside bulkheads o f
enclosed deckhouses shall be fitted w i t h doors (refer
to 2.4.4, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n " ) .
7.5.2.2 T h e h e i g h t o f t h e s i l l s t o a c c e s s o p e n i n g s
specified i n 7.5.2.1 shall b e a t least 3 8 0 m m . H o w e v e r ,
the bridge o r p o o p shall n o t be regarded as enclosed
u n l e s s access i s p r o v i d e d f o r t h e c r e w t o m a c h i n e r y a n d
o t h e r w o r k i n g spaces inside these superstructures f r o m
a n y place i n t h e u p p e r m o s t c o n t i n u o u s o p e n deck o r
above i tb y alternative means w h i c h are available a t aU
times w h e n b u l k h e a d openings a r e closed; t h e height o f
t h e sills o f t h e o p e n i n g s i n t h e b u l k h e a d s o f s u c h b r i d g e
o r p o o p shaU be a t least 6 0 0 m m i n p o s i t i o n 1 a n d a t
least 380 m m i n p o s i t i o n 2 .
256
Rules
I n ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3 h a v i n g

the length o f 24 m a n do v e r (except f o r passenger ships)
t h e specified h e i g h t o f t h e sills t o access o p e n i n g s m a y
be reduced f r o m 6 0 0 m m d o w n t o 4 5 0 m m a n d f r o m
380 m m d o w n t o 230 m m , respectively.
R 2 - R S N , R2-RSN(4,5), R 3 - R S N a n d R 3 having the
l e n g t h b e l o w 2 4 m t h e h e i g h t o f t h e a b o v e sills m a y
be reduced t o 2 3 0m m f o r a l l o p e n decks.
7.5.2.3 T h e d o o r s s h a l l b e s o d e s i g n e d a s t o
w i t h s t a n d t h e pressure head p calculated according
t o 2 . 1 2 . 3 , P a r t I I " H u l l " , t h e d i s t a n c e zx b e i n g t a k e n u p
t o t h e m i d d l e o f t h e d o o r height. U n d e r t h e pressure
h e a d p t h e stresses i n t h e d o o r e l e m e n t s s h a l l n o t e x c e e d
0,8 t i m e s t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress o f t h e m a t e r i a l .
W h a t e v e r t h e stresses, t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e steel
d o o r p l a t e s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h a t s p e c i f i e d
i n 2.12.4.4, P a r t I I " H u l l " . F o r steel d o o r s m a n u factured b y stamping t h e m i n i m u m thickness o fthe
d o o r plate m a ybe reduced b y 1 m m .
T h e m i n i m u m thickness o f the door plate made
o f o t h e r materials is subject t o special consideration
by t h e Register.
7.5.2.4 T h e d o o r s s h a l l b e p e r m a n e n t l y a n d
strongly attached t o t h e bulkhead a n d fitted w i t h
c l a m p i n g devices o r o t h e r e q u i v a l e n t m e a n s f o r e x peditiously opening, closing a n d securing t h e m
w e a t h e r t i g h t ; such devices shall be so a r r a n g e d t h a t
t h e y c a n b e o p e r a t e d f r o m b o t h sides o f t h e b u l k h e a d .
T h e doors shall open outside, opening o f doors inside
t h e s u p e r s t r u c t u r e o r d e c k h o u s e space s h a l l b e specially c o n s i d e r e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
7.5.2.5 T h e d o o r s s h a l l b e w e a t h e r t i g h t w h e n s e cured. T h e tightness shall be ensured b y a rubber o r
o t h e r suitable gasket.
7.5.2.6 T h e d o o r s s h a l l b e m a d e o f s t e e l o r o t h e r
material approved b y t h e Register.
7.5.2.7 I n g l a s s - r e i n f o r c e d p l a s t i c s h i p s t h e d o o r s
shall be attached t o t h e bulkheads o f superstructures
a n d d e c k h o u s e s i n t h e s a m e m a n n e r as t h e side scuttles,
i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7.2.2.5.
7.5.2.8 I n f l o a t i n g d o c k s t h e h e i g h t o f t h e s i l l s t o
access o p e n i n g s i n s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s a n d d e c k h o u s e s o f
t h e t o p d e c k s h a l l b e a t least 2 0 0 m m i f access i s
p r o v i d e d f r o m these superstructures a n d deckhouses
i n t o t h e spaces situated b e l o w .
7.6 E N G I N E A N D B O I L E R
CASINGS
7.6.1 E n g i n e a n d b o i l e r s p a c e o p e n i n g s i n p o s i tions 1 a n d 2 shall be efficiently enclosed b y casings

o f ample strength raised above decks t o t h e extent,
w h i c h is reasonable a n d practicable, a n d being i n
their t u r n decked o r terminated i n skylights. T h e
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
construction o f t h e casings shall m e e t t h e requirem e n t s o f 2.13, P a r t I I " H u l l " , a n d i n case o f glassreinforced plastic ships, w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f
Part X V I " H u l l Structure a n d Strength o f GlassReinforced Plastic Ships a n d Boats".
7.6.2 C a s i n g s s h a l l b e m a d e w e a t h e r t i g h t .
7.6.3 C a s i n g s s h a l l b e m a d e o f s t e e l o r o t h e r
materials approved b y t h e Register (refer also
to 2.1.1.2, P a r t V I " F i r e Protection").
7.6.4 T h e a c c e s s o p e n i n g s i n t h e c a s i n g s s h a l l b e
fitted w i t h permanently attached doors c o m p l y i n g w i t h
t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7.5.2.3 t o 7.5.2.6. T h e h e i g h t o f t h e
sills t o t h e access o p e n i n g s s h a l l b e a t least 6 0 0 m m i n
p o s i t i o n 1 a n d a t least 3 8 0 m m i n p o s i t i o n 2 .
I f t h e l e n g t h o f t h e s h i p i s less t h a n 2 4 m , t h e specified height o f the sills m a y b e reduced d o w n t o 3 0 0 m m
f o r ships o f restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 , R 2 - R S N ,
R2-RSN(4,5), R 3 - R S N a n d R3.
I n ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3 h a v ing t h e length o f 2 4 m a n d over (except passenger
ships) t h e specified h e i g h t o f t h e sills m a y b e r e d u c e d
from 600m m down to 450m m and from 380 m m
d o w n t o 2 3 0m m , respectively.
7.6.5 I n t y p e " A " s h i p s a n d a l s o i n t y p e " B " s h i p s
which are permitted t o have the tabular freeboard
less t h a n t h a t p r e s c r i b e d b y T a b l e 4 . 1 . 3 . 2 , 6.4.2.3
o r 6.4.3.3 o f t h e L o a d L i n e R u l e s f o r S e a - G o i n g S h i p s ,
the engine a n d boiler casings shall be protected b y
enclosed p o o p o r bridge o f a t least s t a n d a r d height, o r
by a deckhouse o f equal height a n d equivalent
strength. H o w e v e r , engine a n d boiler casings m a y be
e x p o s e d i f t h e r e a r e n o o p e n i n g s g i v i n g d i r e c t access
f r o m t h e f r e e b o a r d deck t o t h e m a c h i n e r y space.
A d o o r c o m p l y i n g w i t h r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7.5.2.3
t o 7.5.2.6 m a y , h o w e v e r , be p e r m i t t e d i n t h e m a c h i n ery casing p r o v i d e d t h a t i t leads t o a space o r passageway w h i c h is as strongly constructed as t h e casing
a n d is separated f r o m t h e stairway t o t h e engine a n d
boiler r o o m b y a second similar door. T h e opening for
the outside d o o r shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h a sill a t
least 6 0 0 m m i n height, a n d t h a t f o r t h e inside d o o r
w i t h a sill o f a t least 2 3 0 m m i n height.
7.6.6 I n s u p p l y v e s s e l s t h e d o o r s i n t h e c a s i n g s
g i v i n g access t o t h e e n g i n e o r b o i l e r r o o m s s h a l l b e
located, w h e r e possible, inside t h e enclosed superstructure o r deckhouse. T h e d o o r i n t h e casing f o r access t o t h e e n g i n e o r b o i l e r r o o m m a y b e f i t t e d d i r e c t l y
o n the open cargo deck provided that, i n addition t o t h e
first outside door, t h e second inside d o o r is fitted; i n
t h i s case, t h e o u t s i d e a n d i n s i d e d o o r s s h a l l satisfy t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7.5.2.3 t o 7.5.2.6, t h e h e i g h t o f t h e
outside d o o r sill s h a l l b e a t least 6 0 0 m m , a n d o f t h e
inside d o o r sill, a t least 2 3 0 m m .
7.6.7 I n f l o a t i n g d o c k s t h e h e i g h t o f s i l l s t o t h e
t o p d e c k access o p e n i n g s i n t h e e n g i n e a n d b o i l e r
casings shall be a t least 2 0 0 m m .
Arrangements
and
Outfit
257
7.7 C O M P A N I O N H A T C H E S , S K Y L I G H T S
AND VENTILATING TRUNKS
7.7.1 D e s i g n a n d securing.
7.7.1.1 D e c k openings i n positions 1 a n d 2 i n t e n d e d f o r s t a i r w a y s t o t h e ship's spaces l o c a t e d bel o w , as w e l l as U g h t a n d a i r o p e n i n g s t o these spaces
shall be protected b y strong c o m p a n i o n hatches,
skylights o r ventilating trunks.
W h e r e theopenings intended f o rstairways t othe
ship's spaces l o c a t e d b e l o w a r e p r o t e c t e d b y superstructures o r deckhouses instead o f c o m p a n i o n hatches, these superstructures a n d deckhouses shall
c o m p l y w i t h the requirements o f 7.5. H a t c h covers
i n t e n d e d f o r emergency escape t o t h e Ufeboat a n d
Uferaft e m b a r k a t i o n deck (refer t o 8.5.1), shall be
constructed i n such a m a n n e r that t h e securing devices shall be o f a type w h i c h c a n be o p e n e d f r o m
b o t h sides o f t h e h a t c h c o v e r , a n d t h e m a x i m u m force
needed t o open the hatch cover shall n o t exceed 1 5 0 N . T h e use o f a spring equalizing, counterbalance o r o t h e r suitable device o n t h e h i n g e side t o
reduce t h e force needed f o ropening is acceptable.
7.7.1.2 H e i g h t o f coamings o f c o m p a n i o n hatches,
s k y l i g h t s a n d v e n t i l a t i n g t r u n k s shaU b e at least 6 0 0 m m
i n p o s i t i o n 1 a n d at least 4 5 0 m m i n p o s i t i o n 2 . I n ships o f
restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3 h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h o f 2 4 m
and o v e r (except passenger ships) t h e specified height o f
c o a m i n g s m a y b e r e d u c e d f r o m 6 0 0 m m d o w n to 4 5 0 m m
a n d from 4 5 0 m m d o w n to 3 8 0 m m , r e s p e c t i v e l y . I f t h e
l e n g t h o f t h e s h i p i s less t h a n 2 4 m , t h e h e i g h t o f t h e
c o a m i n g s m a y b e r e d u c e d d o w n to 3 8 0 m m f o r s h i p s o f
r e s t r i c t e d areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 , R 2 - R S N , R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 )
a n d R 3 - R S N a n d d o w n t o 3 0 0 m m f o r ships o f r e stricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3 .
Construction o f coamings shall comply w i t h the
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.6.5.2, P a r t I I " H u l l " a n d i n case o f
glass-reinforced plastic ships, w i t h t h e requirements
o f Part X V I " H u l l Structure a n d Strength o f GlassReinforced Plastic Ships a n d Boats".
7.7.1.3 A l lt h e c o m p a n i o n hatches, skyUghts a n d
ventilating trunks shall be provided w i t h covers made
o f steel o r o t h e r m a t e r i a l a p p r o v e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r
and being permanently attached t o the coamings.
W h e r e t h e covers a r e m a d e o f steel, t h e thickness
o f their plate shall be e q u a l t o a t least 0 , 0 1 times t h e
s p a c i n g o f s t i f f e n e r s , b u t n o t less t h a n 6 m m .
The m i n i m u m required thickness o f 6 m m m a y be
reduced i f t h e cover is m a d e b y stamping i n accordance w i t h F i g . 7.7.1.3 a n d T a b l e 7.7.1.3.
I n s m a l l s h i p s h a v i n g t h e d e c k t h i c k n e s s less t h a n
6 m m t h e required m i n i m u m thickness 6 m m m a y be
reduced d o w n t o t h e deck thickness regardless o f
w h e t h e r t h e c o v e r is m a d e b y s t a m p i n g , b u t i n n o case
t h e p l a t e t h i c k n e s s s h a l l b e less t h a n 4 m m .
lb
^
F i g 7.7.1.3
T a b l e
Clear
sizes o f
hatches
/ x 4, i n m m
Material o f cover
Minimum
t h i c k n e s s s,
in m m
25
28
Steel
450 x 600
7.7.1.3
Height o f
stamping h,
in m m
Light alloy
Steel
600 x 600
Light alloy
4
Steel
700 x 700
40
Light alloy
Steel
800 x 800
55
Light alloy
Steel
800x1200
5
55
Light alloy
1000x1400 S t e e l
6
90
7.7.1.4 C o v e r s o f c o m p a n i o n hatches, skyUghts a n d

v e n t i l a t i n g t r u n k s shaU h a v e securing devices w o r k a b l e
a t least f r o m outside o f t h e h a t c h . H o w e v e r , w h e r e t h e
hatches a r e used as emergency exits i n a d d i t i o n t o their
p r i m a r y appUcation, t h e securing device shall be capable
o f b e i n g o p e r a t e d f r o m e a c h side o f t h e c o v e r .
W h e n secured, t h e covers shall be w e a t h e r t i g h t .
The tightness shall be provided b y a rubber o r other
suitable gasket.
7.7.1.5 T h e glass f o r w i n d o w s i n t h e covers o f
skyUghts shall be h a r d e n e d a n d a t least 6 m m t h i c k i f
the inner diameter is 1 5 0 m m a n d below, a n d at
least 1 2 m m w i t h t h e i n n e r d i a m e t e r o f 4 5 0 m m . F o r
i n t e r m e d i a t e i n n e r d i a m e t e r s , t h e thickness o f glass
shall be determined b y Unear interpolation. H o w e v e r ,
w h e r e w i r e - r e i n f o r c e d glass is used, i t s thickness m a y
be 5 m m , a n d t h e r e q u i r e m e n t r e l a t i n g t o i t s h a r d ening w i l l n o t be appUcable.
Glass shall be efficiently attached t o t h e covers b y
means o f a frame a n d have o n its contour a weathertight gasket o frubber o r other equivalent material.
S k y l i g h t s i n s t a l l e d i n t h e m a c h i n e r y spaces o f
category A , shall comply w i t h the requirements
o f 2.1.4.2, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n " .
7.7.1.6 E a c h w i n d o w o r g r o u p o f adjacent w i n d o w s shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h p o r t a b l e shields o ft h e
s a m e m a t e r i a l as t h e c o v e r being a t least 3 m m i n
258
thickness a n d capable o f being efficiently fastened

outside thecover b y means o fear-nuts; such portable
shields shall be s t o w e d adjacent t o t h e skylights.
7.7.1.7 I n floating docks t h e height o f coamings o f
c o m p a n i o n hatches, skylights a n d ventilating t r u n k s
situated o n t h e t o p deck shall be a t least 2 0 0 m m .
T h e p o r t a b l e shields m e n t i o n e d i n 7.7.1.6 need
n o t be provided f o r covers o f skylights situated o n
the t o p deck o f t h e floating docks.
7.7.2 Design a n d securing o f s m a l l hatches o n t h e
exposed f o r deck.
7.7.2.1 T h e requirements o f 7.7.2 apply t o hatches
generally h a v i n g a n area o f n o t m o r e t h a n 2,5 m located
o n t h e exposed deck a t a distance o f 0 , 2 5 L f r o m t h e fore
perpendicular o f ships o f 8 0 m i n l e n g t h a n d m o r e , w h e r e
t h e h e i g h t o f t h e e x p o s e d d e c k i n w a y o f t h e h a t c h i s less
than 0 , 1 L o r 2 2 m above the summer load waterline,
2
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
w h i c h e v e r i s less. T h e s h i p l e n g t h L i s d e t e r m i n e d a c
c o r d i n g t o 1.1.3, P a r t I I " H u l l " .
7.7.2.2 F o r r e c t a n g u l a r o r square steel h a t c h
covers, t h eplate thickness, stiffener arrangement a n d
scantlings shall be i n accordance w i t h T a b l e 7.7.2.2
a n d F i g . 7.7.2.2. Stiffeners, w h e r e fitted, shall be
T a b l e
Nominal
size,
m m x m m
630 x 6 3 0
630 x 8 3 0
830 x 6 3 0
830x830
1 0 3 0 x 1030
1 3 3 0 x 1330
7.7.2.2
Secondary
C o v e r plate P r i m a r y stiffeners
thickness, i n
stiffeners
m m
Flat bar, m mx m m ; n u m b e r
8
8
8
8
8
8
100x8;
100x8;
100x10;
120x12;
150x12;
1
1
1
1
2
80x8; 2
100x10; 2
0
")
c)
d)
e)
f)
&
F i g . 7.7.2.2
N o m i n a l sizes o f h a t c h covers
a = 630 x 630 m m ; b = 630 x 830 m m ; = 830 x 830 m m ; d = 8 3 0 x 630 m m ; e = 1030 x 1030 m m ; / = 1330 x 1330 m m
S y m b o l s :
I
I
hinge;
securing device/metal-to-metal contact;

_ _ _
p r i m a r y stiffener;
^
secondary stiffener
Arrangements
and
Outfit
aligned w i t h contact p o i n t s o f the h a t c h cover edge w i t h

the welded pad (metal-to-metalcontact points) required
i n accordance w i t h 7.7.2.6 (refer t o F i g . 7.7.2.2).
P r i m a r y stiffeners shall be c o n t i n u o u s . A l l stiffeners
shall be w e l d e d t o the i n n e r edge stiffener (refer t o
F i g . 7.7.2.8).
7.7.2.3 T h e h a t c h w a y c o a m i n g shall be suitably
reinforced by a h o r i z o n t a l flat bar, n o r m a l l y n o t
m o r e t h a n 170 t o 190 m m f r o m the upper edge o f the
coaming.
7.7.2.4 F o r h a t c h covers constructed o f materials
o t h e r t h a n steel, t h e r e q u i r e d scantUngs s h a l l p r o v i d e
equivalent strength.
7.7.2.5 W e a t h e r t i g h t n e s s o f h a t c h covers s h a l l be
ensured b y securing devices o f the f o l l o w i n g types:
butterfly nuts tightening onto forks (clamps); quick
a c t i n g cleats; c e n t r a l l o c k i n g device. D o g s ( t w i s t
tightening handles) w i t h wedges are n o t acceptable.
W h e r e t h e h a t c h c o v e r s a r e a l s o u s e d as e m e r gency exits, t h e y shall be also fitted w i t h the c e n t r a l
quick acting l o c k i n g device designed f o r h a n d l i n g o n
b o t h sides.
7.7.2.6 T h e h a t c h cover shall be fitted w i t h a
gasket o f elastic m a t e r i a l . T h i s shall be designed t o
a l l o w a contact o f the h a t c h cover edge t o the w e l d e d
pad (metal-to-metal contact) at a designed compression a n d to prevent over compression o f the gasket
b y g r e e n sea f o r c e s t h a t m a y c a u s e t h e s e c u r i n g de-
259
vices t o be loosened o r dislodged. T h e contacts o f the

h a t c h cover edge t o the w e l d e d p a d ( m e t a l - t o - m e t a l
c o n t a c t ) s h a l l be a r r a n g e d close t o each securing device i n accordance w i t h F i g . 7.7.2.2, a n d shall be o f
sufficient capacity t o w i t h s t a n d the bearing force.
7.7.2.7 T h e p r i m a r y securing device s h a l l be designed a n d m a n u f a c t u r e d so t h a t the designed c o m p r e s s i o n pressure is achieved b y o n e p e r s o n w i t h o u t
the need o f any tools.
7 . 7 . 2 . 8 W h e r e b u t t e r f l y nuts are used i n the p r i m a r y
securing device, the forks (clamps) shall be o f the robust
design, w h i c h m i n i m i z e s the risk o f the butterfly nuts
b e i n g dislodged w h i l e i n use. I t is ensured b y c u r v i n g the
forks u p w a r d , a raised surface o n the free end, o r a s i m i l a r m e t h o d (refer to F i g . 7.7.2.8). T h e plate thickness
o f u n s t i f f e n e d steel f o r k s ( c l a m p s ) s h a l l n o t b e less
than 16 m m .
7.7.2.9 F o r h a t c h covers located o n the exposed
deck f o r w a r d o f the fore-most cargo hatch, the hinges
shall be fitted such t h a t the p r e d o m i n a n t d i r e c t i o n o f
g r e e n sea w i l l c a u s e t h e c o v e r t o close, w h i c h m e a n s
t h a t the hinges are n o r m a l l y t o be located o n the f o r e
edge.
7.7.2.10 O n hatches located between the cargo
hatches, the hinges shall be placed o n the f o r e edge o r
o u t b o a r d edge, w h i c h e v e r is practicable f o r protect i o n f r o m g r e e n w a t e r i n b e a m sea a n d b o w q u a r tering conditions.
M20
"4..
F i g . 7.7.2.8:
1 - butterfly nut; 2 - bolt; 3 - p i n ; 4 - centre o f pin; 5 - fork (damp) plate; 6 - h a t c h cover; 7 - gasket; 8 - hatch coaming;
9 - b e a r i n g p a d w e l d e d o n t h e b r a c k e t f o r m e t a l - t o - m e t a l c o n t a c t ; 10 - s t i f f e n e r ; 11- i n n e r e d g e s t i f f e n e r
260
Rules
7.7.2.11 Hatches, excepting those w h i c h m a y also

be u s e d as e m e r g e n c y exits, s h a l l be f i t t e d w i t h a n
i n d e p e n d e n t s e c o n d a r y s e c u r i n g d e v i c e l i k e , e.g. a
sliding bolt, a hasp o r a backing bar o f slack fit,
w h i c h is c a p a b l e o f k e e p i n g t h e h a t c h c o v e r i n place,
even i n the event t h a t the p r i m a r y securing device
b e c a m e loosened o r dislodged. I t shall be fitted o n the
side o p p o s i t e t o t h e h a t c h c o v e r hinges.
and Construction
Ships
P a r t i c u l a r a t t e n t i o n shall be g i v e n t o the a r r a n g e m e n t
o f ventilators o f the engine and boiler r o o m s for
w h i c h t h e l o c a t i o n is preferable a b o v e the deck level
o f the first tier o f superstructures o r deckhouses.
7.8.5 I n floating docks the height o f coamings o f
ventilators situated o n the t o p deck shaU be a t least
200 m m .
7.9
7.8
of Sea-Going
M A N H O L E S
VENTILATORS
7 . 8 . 1 V e n t i l a t o r s t o spaces b e l o w f r e e b o a r d d e c k o r
deck o f enclosed superstructures a n d deckhouses shall be
fitted w i t h coamings efficiently connected t o the deck.
T h e c o a m i n g s o f v e n t i l a t o r s shall be at least
900 m m i n height i n p o s i t i o n 1 a n d at least 760 m m i n
position 2.
I n ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3 h a v ing the length o f 24 m a n d over (except passenger
ships) t h e specified h e i g h t o f t h e c o a m i n g s m a y be
reduced f r o m 900 m m d o w n to 760 m m and f r o m
760 m m d o w n t o 600 m m , respectively.
R 2 - R S N , R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) ,R 3 - R S N and R 3 having the
length below 24 m the height o f the coamings m a y
be reduced d o w n t o 3 0 0 m m f o r a l l o p e n decks.
Construction o f coamings shall c o m p l y w i t h the
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.6.5.2, P a r t I I " H u l l " a n d i n case o f
glass-reinforced plastic ships, w i t h the requirements
o f Part X V I " H u l l Structure and Strength o f GlassReinforced Plastic Ships and Boats".
The strength o f ventilators, connections o f ventilators to coamings and connections o f ventilator
parts, i f a n y , shall be e q u i v a l e n t t o t h a t o f the
coaming.
7.8.2 V e n t i l a t o r s i n p o s i t i o n 1 the coamings o f
w h i c h extend to m o r e than 4500 m m above the deck
and i n position 2 the coamings o f w h i c h extend to
m o r e t h a n 2 3 0 0 m m a b o v e the deck need n o t be fitted
w i t h c l o s i n g appliances. I n a l l o t h e r cases, e a c h v e n t i l a t o r s h a l l be fitted w i t h a s t r o n g c o v e r m a d e o f steel
or other m a t e r i a l approved by the Register.
I n s h i p s o f less t h a n 2 0 0 m i n l e n g t h , t h e c o v e r s
shall be p e r m a n e n t l y attached; i n ships o f 100 m
i n l e n g t h a n d o v e r t h e y m a y be c o n v e n i e n t l y s t o w e d
near the v e n t i l a t o r s t o w h i c h t h e y shall be fitted.
7.8.3 W h e n secured, the covers o f v e n t i l a t o r s
s h a l l be w e a t h e r t i g h t . T h e tightness s h a l l be p r o v i d e d
b y a rubber o r o t h e r suitable gasket.
7.8.4 I n s u p p l y vessels, i n o r d e r t o m i n i m i z e t h e
p o s s i b i l i t y o f f l o o d i n g o f the spaces situated b e l o w ,
the v e n t i l a t o r s shall be p o s i t i o n e d i n the protected
locations where the probability o f their damage by
cargo is e x c l u d e d d u r i n g c a r g o h a n d U n g o p e r a t i o n s .
7.9.1 T h e height o f coamings o f manholes for

deep a n d other tanks, except f o r those indicated
i n 2.4.5.3, P a r t I I " H u l l " , a i r spaces, c o f f e r d a m s , etc.
is n o t r e g u l a t e d b y t h e Register.
7.9.2 C o v e r s o f m a n h o l e s s h a l l be m a d e o f steel
or other material approved by the Register.
T h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e c o v e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
that o f the plating o n w h i c h they are fitted. I n sound
cases, t h e R e g i s t e r m a y p e r m i t t o decrease t h e
thickness o f the covers where the thickness o f plating
is greater t h a n 12 m m .
7.9.3 T h e covers o f m a n h o l e s shall be efficiently
attached to the coaming or doubUng ring by means o f
bolts or pins w i t h nuts.
7.9.4 W h e n secured, the covers shaU be t i g h t b o t h
f o r w a t e r a n d U q u i d cargoes o r stores f o r w h i c h the t a n k s
are intended u n d e r the i n n e r pressure corresponding t o
t h e test pressure o f t h e t a n k u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n .
T h e tightness shall be p r o v i d e d b y a r u b b e r o r
o t h e r suitable gasket. T h e gasket shall be resistant t o
the liquids referred to above.
7.10 H A T C H W A Y S O F D R Y C A R G O
HOLDS
7.10.1 General.
T h e deck openings t h r o u g h w h i c h cargoes o r
ship's stores are l o a d e d a n d u n l o a d e d shall be p r o tected b y strong hatchways. I f these h a t c h w a y s are
situated i n positions 1 and 2, the h a t c h w a y covers
shall be w e a t h e r t i g h t . T h e tightness shall be p r o v i d e d
by one o f the following t w o methods:
. 1 b y p o r t a b l e c o v e r s a n d t a r p a u l i n s as w e l l as
b a t t e n i n g devices;
.2 b y w e a t h e r t i g h t covers m a d e o f steel o r o t h e r
equivalent m a t e r i a l fitted w i t h rubber o r other suitable gaskets a n d c l a m p i n g devices.
7.10.2 Coamings.
7.10.2.1 T h e height o f hatchway coamings i n positions 1 a n d 2 shaU be a t least 600 m m a n d 4 5 0 m m ,
respectively.
I f t h e l e n g t h o f t h e s h i p i s less t h a n 2 4 m , t h e h e i g h t
o f the c o a m i n g s m a y be reduced d o w n t o 380 m m f o r
Arrangements
and
Outfit
ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 , R 2 - R S N ,

R2-RSN(4,5) and R 3 - R S N and d o w n to 300 m m for
ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3 . I n fishing
vessels t h e h e i g h t o f c a r g o h a t c h w a y c o a m i n g s i n p o sition 2 m a y be reduced d o w n t o 300 m m .
I n ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3 h a v ing the length o f 24 m a n d over (except passenger
ships) the specified h e i g h t o f cargo h a t c h w a y c o a m ings m a y be reduced f r o m 600 m m d o w n t o 4 5 0 m m
a n d f r o m 4 5 0 m m d o w n t o 380 m m , respectively.
7.10.2.2 T h e height o f coamings o f the hatchways
specified i n 7.10.1.2 m a y be decreased i n r e l a t i o n t o
t h a t prescribed b y 7.10.2.1 o r t h e c o a m i n g s m a y be
o m i t t e d entirely w h e r e the efficiency o f the cover
tightness a n d securing m e a n s w i l l satisfy the Register.
7.10.3 M a t e r i a l s .
7 . 1 0 . 3 . 1 F o r s t e e l o f h a t c h w a y c o v e r s , r e f e r t o 1.6.
7.10.3.2 T h e w o o d o f h a t c h w a y covers s h a l l be o f
good quality and o f the type and grade w h i c h proved
to be satisfactory f o r this purpose. W e d g e s shall be o f
hard wood.
7.10.3.3 C a n v a s used f o r m a k i n g t a r p a u l i n s shall be
impregnated t o m a k e t h e m moisture-resistant a n d shall
not contain jute thread. M a s s o f 1 m o f canvas before
i m p r e g n a t i o n s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 0 , 5 5 k g . B r e a k i n g
s t r e s s o f i m p r e g n a t e d c a n v a s b a n d 2 0 0 x 5 0 m m i n size
shall be a t least 3 k N a n d 2 k N i n l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d
transverse directions, respectively. W h e n tested f o r w a tertightness, the i m p r e g n a t e d canvas shall n o t get w e t
u n d e r w a t e r h e a d o f 0,15 m acting f o r 2 4 h o u r s .
7.10.3.4 T h e rubber f o r packing gaskets o f
h a t c h w a y covers s h a l l be elastic, s t r o n g , a n d resistant
to atmospheric changes. T h e rubber shall be o f sufficient hardness.
7.10.3.5 A l l i n t e r n a l a n d e x t e r n a l surfaces o f steel
h a t c h covers i n b u l k carriers (except inaccessible
spaces i n b o x t y p e covers) s h a l l h a v e effective e p o x y
o r o t h e r e q u i v a l e n t p r o t e c t i v e c o a t i n g a p p U e d i n accordance w i t h the recommendations o f the m a n u f a c t u r e r (refer t o 1.1.4.7 a n d 3 . 3 . 5 . 1 , P a r t I I " H u l l " ) .
H a t c h w a y covers shall be designed t o sustain
deck cargoes w h i c h are i n t e n d e d t o be carried o n
these covers. W h e r e o p e r a t i o n o f the cargo h a n d U n g
cars o n h a t c h w a y s covers is a n t i c i p a t e d i n the course
o f the ship's service, d u r i n g cargo h a n d U n g operations, the loads i n d u c e d b y such cars shall be t a k e n
into consideration. F o r hatchway covers i n posit i o n s 1 a n d 2 the design l o a d shall be calculated i n
accordance w i t h 3.2.5.2 o f the L o a d L i n e R u l e s f o r
Sea-Going Ships; design o f h a t c h covers shall c o m p l y
w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.2.5.3 t o 3.2.5.5 o f the
above Rules.
2
F o r s h i p s o f less t h a n 2 4 m i n l e n g t h o f r e s t r i c t e d
area o f navigation engaged o n international voyages
a n d f o r a l l ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n n o t
261
engaged o n international voyages the load intensity

r e d u c e d b y t h e f o l l o w i n g v a l u e s m a y be u s e d i n s t e a d
o f l o a d intensity specified i n 3.2.5.2 o f the L o a d L i n e
Rules for Sea-Going Ships:
15 per cent f o r ships o f restricted areas o f n a v i gation R 2 , R 2 - R S N , R2-RSN(4,5)and R 3 - R S N ;
30 per cent f o r ships o f restricted area o f n a v i gation R 3 .
7.10.5 D e s i g n o f h a t c h c o v e r s specified i n 7.10.1.1.
7.10.5.1 D e s i g n o f these h a t c h covers shall meet
the requirements o f 3.2.4 o f the L o a d L i n e R u l e s f o r
Sea-Going Ships.
7.10.6 S t r u c t u r e o f h a t c h c o v e r s indicated i n
7.10.1.2.
7.10.6.1 Structure o f these covers shall meet the
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.2.5 o f the L o a d L i n e R u l e s f o r SeaG o i n g Ships.
7 . 1 0 . 6 . 2 P r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s a n d seco n d a r y stiffeners o f h a t c h covers shall be c o n t i n u o u s
o v e r t h e b r e a d t h a n d l e n g t h o f h a t c h c o v e r s , as f a r as
practical. W h e n t h i s is i m p r a c t i c a l , sniped e n d c o n nections shall n o t be used a n d a p p r o p r i a t e arrangem e n t s shall be a d o p t e d t o p r o v i d e sufficient l o a d
carrying capacity.
7.10.6.3 T h e spacing o f p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g
m e m b e r s p a r a l l e l t o t h e d i r e c t i o n o f s e c o n d a r y stiff e n e r s s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 1/3 o f t h e s p a n o f p r i m a r y
s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s . W h e n s t r e n g t h c a l c u l a t i o n is
carried o u t by F E analysis using plane strain o r shell
elements, this r e q u i r e m e n t c a n be w a i v e d .
S e c o n d a r y stiffeners o f h a t c h c o a m i n g s shall be
continuous over the breadth and length o f hatch
coamings.
7.10.6.4 U n l e s s o t h e r w i s e quoted, the thickness t
o f t h e f o l l o w i n g sections is t h e n e t thickness.
N e t t h i c k n e s s is t h e m e m b e r thickness necessary t o o b t a i n the m i n i m u m net scantUngs. T h e
required gross thicknesses are obtained b y adding
c o r r o s i o n a d d i t i o n s , t. S t r e n g t h c a l c u l a t i o n s u s i n g
b e a m t h e o r y , grillage analysis o r F E M shall be perf o r m e d w i t h net scantUngs.
7.10.6.5 S t r u c t u r a l assessment o f h a t c h covers
a n d h a t c h c o a m i n g s shall be carried o u t u s i n g the
design loads, defined i n this Chapter a n d the foll o w i n g d e f i n i t i o n s shall be used:
L - l e n g t h o f s h i p , i n m , as d e f i n e d i n 1.1.3,
Part I I "Hull";
L
- l e n g t h o f s h i p , i n m , as d e f i n e d i n t h e
present Part;
x - l o n g i t u d i n a l c o o r d i n a t e o f m i d p o i n t o f assessed s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r m e a s u r e d f r o m a f t e n d o f
l e n g t h L o r L L L , as a p p U c a b l e ;
TJJ, - d r a u g h t , i n m , c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e a s signed s u m m e r l o a d Une;
h - standard superstructure height, i n m ;
s
A J V = 1,05 + 0 , 0 1 ^ , a n d
1,8<AJV<2,3.
262
Rules
7.10.6.6 T h e p r e s s u r e p , i n k N / m , o n t h e h a t c h
cover panels is given i n T a b l e 7.10.6.6. T h e vertical
weather design load needs n o t t o be c o m b i n e d w i t h
cargo loads. I n F i g . 7.10.6.6 positions 1 a n d 2 are
illustrated f o r a n example ship.
7.10.6.7 W h e r e a n i n c r e a s e d f r e e b o a r d i s a s
signed, t h e design l o a d f o r h a t c h covers according
to T a b l e 7.10.6.6 o n t h e actual freeboard deck m a y
be as r e q u i r e d f o r a superstructure deck, p r o v i d e d t h e
s u m m e r freeboard is such that t h e resulting draught
will n o t be greater t h a n that corresponding t o the
m i n i m u m freeboard calculated f r o m a n assumed
freeboard deck situated a t a distance a t least e q u a l t o
the standard superstructure height h b e l o w t h e ac
tual freeboard deck (refer t o F i g . 7.10.6.6).
H
and Construction
of Sea-Going
covers a n d o f h a t c h coamings shall be determined b y

the formula
acipcjf-z)
where
(7.10.6.8)
/ = L / 2 5 + 4,1 f o r L < 90 m ;
300-1, ,,
/ = 10,75-(
)
f o r 90 m ^ L < 300 m ;
100
1 , 5
/ = 10,75
/ = 10,75-(
f o r 300
L
~ ^
1 , 5
L < 350 m ;
f o r 3 5 0 m ^ L S 500 m ;
c=
V ^ / 9 0 f o r L < 90;
c=
1
f o r L > 90;
a = 20 + I , i / 1 2 f o r u n p r o t e c t e d f r o n t c o a m i n g s a n d h a t c h
cover skirt plates;
a = 10 + I , i / 1 2 f o r u n p r o t e c t e d f r o n t c o a m i n g s a n d h a t c h
cover skirt plates, where t h e distance f r o m t h e actual
freeboard d e c k t o t h e s u m m e r l o a d line exceeds t h e
m i n i m u m non-corrected tabular freeboard according to
the International C o n v e n t i o n o n L o a d L i n e s b y a t least
one standard superstructure height h ;
L
7.10.6.8 T h e h o r i z o n t a l w e a t h e r d e s i g n l o a d
p i n k N / m , f o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e scantUngs o f outer
edge girders (skirt plates) o f w e a t h e r deck h a t c h
A
T a b l e
Design load p
Position
7.10.6.6
o fweather deck hatch coveres

Design load p
x / L
Ships
, in kN/m
0,75 < x / L
^ , 1 5
L L
<
1,0
f o r 2 4 m ^ L L L ^ 100 m
o n freeboard deck:
^ - ( 1 , 5 ^ + 116)
^
[ ( 4 , 2 8 1 , ^ + 28)
-1,1\L
L L
+ 95]
u p o n exposed superstructure decks located a tleast o n e superstructure s t a n d a r d height

above the freeboard deck:
^ - ( 1 , 5 ^ + 116)
f o r L L L > 100 m
9,81x3,5
on freeboard deck f o rtype ships according to t h e International Convention o n

L o a d Lines:
9 , 8 l [ ( 0 , 0 2 9 6 Z , i + 3,04)
- 0,02221,1 + 1 , 2 2 ]
L
LL
o n f r e e b o a r d d e c k f o r ships w i t h less f r e e b o a r d t h a n type a c c o r d i n g t o t h e

International Convention o n L o a d Lines:
9 , 8 l [ ( 0 , 1 4 5 2 Z , i + 8 , 5 2 ) - 0 , 1 0 8 9 1 , 1 + 9,89]
L
LL
L i = L L L b u t n o t m o r e t h a n 340 m
u p o n exposed superstructure decks located a tleast o n superstructure s t a n d a r d height
above the freeboard deck:
9,81x3,5
2
f o r 24 m ^ L
^ 100 m
9,81
^ - ( 1 , 1 X ^ + 87,6)
f o r L L L > 100 m
9,81 x 2,6
u p o n exposed superstructure decks located a t least o n esuperstructure s t a n d a r d height a b o v e t h e lowest position 2 deck:
9,81x2,1
Arrangements
and
Outfit
263
Positions
Positions
1 and 2
1 and 2 for a n increased
freeboard
F i g . 7.10.6.6
N o t e s : * reduced load u p o n exposed superstructure decks located a tleast o n e superstructure s t a n d a r d height above the freeboard
deck.
** r e d u c e d l o a d u p o n e x p o s e d s u p e r s t r u c t u r e d e c k s o f s h i p s w i t h L
above thelowest position 2 deck.
> 100 m l o c a t e d a t l e a s t o n e s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s t a n d a r d h e i g h t
length L . W h e n determining side c o a m i n g s o r side

hatch cover skirt plates, t h e side is t o b e subdivided
into parts o f approximately equal length, n o t exceed
i n g 0,151, e a c h , a n d x' i s t o b e t a k e n a s t h e d i s t a n c e
between aft e n d o f the length L a n d the centre o f each
part considered;
vertical distance, i n m , f r o m t h e s u m m e r l o a d line t o
the m i d p o i n t o f stiffener span, o r t o t h e m i d d l e o f the
plate field;
a = 5 + Z,i/15 f o r s i d e a n d p r o t e c t e d f r o n t c o a m i n g s a n d
hatch cover skirt plates;
a = 7 + L J l O O Sx'IL
f o r aft ends o f coamings a n d aft
hatch cover skirt plates abaft amidships;
a = 5 + I,i/1004x'IL f o r a f t ends o f coamings a n d a f t
hatch cover skirt plates forward o f amidships;
L i = L , n e e d n o t b e t a k e n g r e a t e r t h a n 300 m ;
b = l,0 + (
x'/L-0A5
:
+ 0,2
f o r x ' / Z , < 0,45;

=
b= 1,0+1,5(
4
X / 1 ,
'l
+ 0,2
'
for
x'/L>0,45
w h e r e 0,6 ^ C ^ 0,8 w h e n d e t e r m i n i n g s c a n t l i n g s o f a f t e n d s o f
coamings a n d a f thatch cover skirt plates f o r w a r d o f
a m i d s h i p s , C n e e d n o t b e t a k e n l e s s t h a n 0,8;
x' = d i s t a n c e , i n m , b e t w e e n t h e t r a n s v e r s e c o a m i n g o r
hatch cover skirt plate considered a n d a f te n do ft h e
s
where
0,3 + 0,7
V_
V = breadth o f coaming, i n m , a t theposition considered;

= actual m a x i m u m b r e a d t h o f ship, i nm , o n the e x p o s e d
weather deck a t t h eposition considered;
b'jB
s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n l e s s t h a n 0,25.
264
Rules
T h e d e s i g n l o a d p s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n less t h a n
the m i n i m u m values given i n T a b l e 7.10.6.8.
A
T a b l e
7.10.6.8
M i n i m u m d e s i g n l o a d
i nk N / m , f o r
unprotected fronts
elsewhere
30
15
<50
of Sea-Going
Ships
(container lashing). I f different assumptions a r e m a d e f o r M

a n d h , the designer h a s t o verify that, i nthe calculation m o d e l ,
the h a t c h cover structure i s n o t l o a d e d less t h a n b y those values
recommended.
W h e n strength o fthe hatch cover structure isassessed b y F E
analysis using shell o rplane strain elements, h m a y b etaken a s
the designed height o fcentre o f gravity o fstack above the hatch
cover t o p plate.
Values o fM a n d h applied for the assessment o fthe hatch
cover strength shall be s h o w n i n the drawings o fthe hatch covers.
I n case o f container stacks secured t o lashing bridges o r carried
i n cell guides, t h e forces a c t i n g o n t h e h a t c h c o v e r m a y b e specially
considered b y the Register.
m
PArnin,
and Construction
>50
2 5 +
<250
3*250
12,5+
20
To
50
25
7.10.6.9 T h e l o a d o n h a t c h c o v e r s d u e t o c a r g o
loads p , i n k N / m , resulting f r o m heave a n d pitch
shall be determined b y t h ef o r m u l a
2
= p (l+a )
(7.10.6.9)
where p = uniform cargo hold, i n k N / m ;

a = acceleration addition a s follows:
a = Fm
c
where
^=0,11
m = m 5{m \)
0
where
f o r 0<;,<0,2;
m=
1 f o r 0,2<;,<0,7;
m=
1 + ^ y( " Y
' )
f o r
0,7
1,0
mo=l,5
+ F;
v = m a x i m u m speed a ts u m m e r l o a d line draught;
v shall n o t b et a k e n less t h a n J L , i n k n o t s .
0
7.10.6.10 T h e l o a d s d u e t o s i n g l e f o r c e s P , i n k N ,
r e s u l t i n g f r o m h e a v e a n d p i t c h (e.g. i n case o f c o n
tainers) shall be determined b y the f o r m u l a
F i g 7.10.6.11 F o r c e s d u e t o c o n t a i n e r l o a d s
7.10.6.12 T h e l o a d c a s e s s p e c i f i e d i n 7 . 1 0 . 6 . 9 t o
7.10.6.112.3 shall be also considered f o r p a r t i a l n o n w h e r e P = single force, i n k N ;
homogeneous loading, w h i c h m a y occur i n practi
a = a c c e l e r a t i o n a d d i t i o n a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.9.
ce, e . g . w h e r e s p e c i f i e d c o n t a i n e r s t a c k p l a c e s a r e
e m p t y . T h e l o a d case p a r t i a l l o a d i n g o f c o n t a i n e r
7.10.6.11 W h e r e c o n t a i n e r s a r e s t o w e d o n h a t c h
hatch covers c a nbe evaluated using a simplifiedap
covers, t h efollowing loads, i nk N , d u e t oheave, pitch
proach, where t h ehatch cover is loaded w i t h o u tt h e
a n d t h e ship's rolling m o t i o n shall b e also considered,
o u t e r m o s t stacks, refer t o F i g . 7.10.6.12.
refer t o F i g . 7.10.6.11:
7.10.6.13 H a t c h c o v e r s , w h i c h i n a d d i t i o n t o t h e
A = 9 , 8 1 - ( l +
fl )(0,45-0,42^);
(7.10.6.11-1)
loads according t o 7.10.6.6, 7.10.6.7 a n d 7.10.6.11 a r e
loaded i n t h e ship's transverse d i r e c t i o n b y forces d u e
= 9 , 8 1 - ( l + fl )(0,45 + 0 , 4 2 ^ ) ;
(7.10.6.11-2)
t o elastic d e f o r m a t i o n s o f t h e ship's h u l l , shall be
d e s i g n e d s u c h t h a t t h e s u m o f stresses d o e s n o t exceed
B = 2,AM
(7.10.6.11-3)
the permissible values given i n 7.10.6.14.
w h e r e a = a c c e l e r a t i o n a d d i t i o n a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.9;
7.10.6.14 T h e e q u i v a l e n t stress a i n s t e e l h a t c h c o v e r
M = m a x i m u m d e s i g n e d m a s s o f container stack, i n t;
structures related t o t h e n e t thickness shall n o t exceed
h = designed height o f centre o f gravity o f stack above
hatch cover supports, i n m ;
0,8, w h e r e <y i s t h e m i n i m u m y i e l d stress, i n N / m m ,
b = distance between foot points, i n m ;
o f the material. F o r design loads according t o 7.10.6.8 t o
A , B = support forces i n z-direction a t t h e forward a n d a f t
7 . 1 0 . 6 . 1 3 , t h e e q u i v a l e n t stress a r e l a t e d t o t h e n e t
stack corners;
By = s u p p o r t f o r c e i n ^ - d i r e c t i o n a t t h e f o r w a r d a n d a f t t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 0 , 9 o > w h e n t h e stresses a r e
stack corners.
a s s e s s e d b y m e a n s o f F E M , u s i n g p l a n e stress o r s h e l l
elements.
N o t e . F o r M a n d h it is recommended t o apply those
P=Ps(l +a )
(7.10.6.10)
values, which a r eused f o r t h e calculations o f cargo
securing
Arrangements
and
Outfit
265
7 . 1 0 . 6 . 1 6 T h e l o c a l n e t p l a t e t h i c k n e s s , t, i n m m ,
o f t h e h a t c h c o v e r t o p p l a t i n g s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
t = F l5,Ss / ^p
(7.10.6.16)
y u
a n d s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 1 p e r c e n t o f t h e s p a
cing o f t h e stiffener o r 6 m m i f t h a t be greater
w h e r e F = 1,5 i n g e n e r a l ;
F = 1,9/ , f o r / >0,8 f o r t h e a t t a c h e d p l a t e f l a n g e o f
primary supporting members;
j: = s t i f f e n e r s p a c i n g , i n m ;
p = p r e s s u r e p a n d p , i n k N / m ; a s d e f i n e d i n 7.10.6.6
a n d 7.10.6.9;
rj = n o r m a l stress, i n N / m m , o f h a t c h c o v e r t o p p l a t i n g ;
rj = 0 , 8 o > , i n N / m m .
p
F i g . 7.10.6.12 P a r t i a l l o a d i n g o f a c o n t a i n e r h a t c h c o v e r
F o r steels w i t h a m i n i m u m y i e l d stress o f m o r e
than 355 N / m m , the value o f o > t o be appUed
t h r o u g h o u t this r e q u i r e m e n t is subject t o t h e i n
dividual classification society b u t is n o t t o be m o r e
t h a n t h e m i n i m u m y i e l d stress o f t h e m a t e r i a l .
F o r b e a m element calculations a n d grillage ana
lysis, t h e e q u i v a l e n t stress m a y b e t a k e n as f o l l o w s :
2
a =
v
where
J(j
+ 3z
, in N/mm ,
F o r flange plates under compression sufficient

buckUng strength according t o 7.10.6.24 shall be de
monstrated.
T h e n o r m a l stress a o f t h e h a t c h c o v e r p l a t i n g m a y
be d e t e r m i n e d i n a distance s f r o m w e b s o f adjacent
p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s p e r p e n d i c u l a r t o sec
o n d a r y s t i f f e n e r s a n d i n a d i s t a n c e s/2 f r o m t h e w e b
o f a n adjacent p r i m a r y supporting m e m b e r parallel
to secondary stiffeners, refer t o F i g . 7.10.6.16. T h e
g r e a t e r o f b o t h stresses s h a l l b e t a k e n .
F o r t h e d i s t r i b u t i o n o f n o r m a l stress a b e t w e e n
t w o parallel girders, refer t o 7.10.6.29.
r j = max [<J i(y
(7.10.6.14-1)
r j = n o r m a l stress, i n N / m m ;
x = shear stress, i n N / m m .
2
F o r F E M c a l c u l a t i o n s , t h e e q u i v a l e n t stress m a y
be t a k e n as follows:
2
a =
a l - G G y + +-
, inN/mm ,
where a
a
(7.10.6.14-2)
l_
l_
1
1
1
1
l_
X1
= n o r m a l stress, i n N / m m , i n ^-direction;
= n o r m a l stress, i n N / m m , i n j-direction;
x = s h e a r s t r e s s , i n N / m m , i n x-y p l a n e .
Indices x a n d a r e coordinates o f a two-dimensional Cartesian
system i n t h e plane o f t h e considered structural
element.
x
s)]
1
1
I"
L
r1
_L
u <
- L
y2
I n case o f F E M c a l c u l a t i o n s u s i n g shell o r p l a n e
s t r a i n e l e m e n t s , t h e stresses s h a l l b e r e a d f r o m t h e
centre o fthe i n d i v i d u a l element. W h e r e shell elements
are used, t h e stresses s h a l l b e e v a l u a t e d a t t h e m i d
plane o f the element.
7.10.6.15 T h e vertical deflection o f p r i m a r y sup
porting m e m b e r s due t o the vertical weather design
l o a d according t o 7.10.6.6 a n d 7.10.6.7 shall n o t be
m o r e t h a n 0,0056/^ w h e r e l is t h e greatest span o f
primary supporting members.
W h e r e hatch covers are arranged f o r carrying
containers a n d m i x e d stowage is aUowed, i.e., a 40-foot
container stowed o n t o p o f t w o 2 0 - f o o t containers, mea
sures shaU b e t a k e n t o p r e v e n t deflection o f h a t c h covers
and their contact w i t h i n - h o l d cargo.
= s/2); rs (x
i_
J.
r ~
L
1
T
_ _
F i g . 7.10.6.16
7.10.6.17 T h e thickness o f l o w e r p l a t i n g o f double

skin hatch covers a n d b o x girders shall fulfill the
strength requirements a n d shall be obtained f r o m the
calculation according t o 7.10.6.21 under considera
t i o n o f p e r m i s s i b l e stresses a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.14.
T h e n e t t h i c k n e s s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e l a r g e r
o f the following values w h e n t h e l o w e r plating is t a
k e n i n t o account as a strength m e m b e r o f t h e h a t c h
cover:
t = 6,5s, i n m m ;
*min = 5 m m
where
,s = s t i f f e n e r s p a c i n g , i n m .
(7.10.6.17)
266
Rules
7.10.6.18 T h e n e t s e c t i o n m o d u l u s Z a n d n e t
shear a r e a A o f u n i f o r m l y l o a d e d h a t c h c o v e r stif
f e n e r s c o n s t r a i n t s a t b o t h e n d s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
4 ,
.
/.=
si p , i n c m ;
(7.10.6.18-1)
s
lOslp
.
2
,incm ,
(7.10.6.18-2)
/ o= > s e c o n d a r y s t i f f e n e r s p a n , i n m , t o b e t a k e n a s t h e
spacing, i nm , o f p r i m a r y supporting m e m b e r s o r t h e
distance between a primary supporting m e m b e r a n d
the edge support, a s applicable;
,s = s e c o n d a r y s t i f f e n e r s p a c i n g , i n m ;
p = p r e s s u r e p a n d p , i n k N / m , a s d e f i n e d i n 7.10.6.6
a n d 7.10.6.9.
where
T h e n e t section m o d u l u s o f t h e s e c o n d a r y stif
feners shall be determined based o n a n d attached
plate w i d t h assumed equal t o t h estiffener spacing.
F o r flat b a r secondary stiffeners a n d b u c k l i n g
s t i f f e n e r s , t h e r a t i o h/t
shall n o t be greater
t h a n 15A; ' , w h e r e h = h e i g h t o f t h e stiffener;
t = n e t thickness o f t h e stiffener;
= 235/o>.
Stiffeners parallel t o p r i m a r y supporting m e m
bers a n d arranged w i t h i n t h e effective breadth ac
cording t o 7.10.6.22 shall be c o n t i n u o u s a t crossing
primary supporting m e m b e r a n dm a y be regarded f o r
calculating t h ecross sectional properties o f p r i m a r y
supporting members. I t is t o be verified that t h e
c o m b i n e d stress o f t h o s e stiffeners i n d u c e d b y t h e
bending o fp r i m a r y supporting members a n d lateral
pressures d o e s n o t exceed t h e p e r m i s s i b l e stresses
w
of Sea-Going
Ships
For a l l components o f primary supporting

m e m b e r s sufficient safety against b u c k U n g shall b e
verified according t o 7.10.6.24 t o 7.10.6.32. F o r
biaxial compressed flange plates this shall be verified
w i t h i n t h e effective w i d t h s according t o 7.10.6.29.
T h e n e t thickness, i n m m , o f webs o f p r i m a r y
s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
t = 6,5s, i n m m ;
tmin =
5 m m
where
7.10.6.20 S c a n t U n g s o f e d g e g i r d e r s a r e o b t a i n e d
f r o m t h e calculations according t o 7.10.6.22 a n d
7.10.6.23 u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n o f p e r m i s s i b l e stresses
T h e n e tthickness, i nm m , o ft h e o u t e r edge gir
d e r s e x p o s e d t o w a s h o f s e a s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e
largest o f t h e f o l l o w i n g values:
t=l5,SsJp /0,95a
A
(7.10.6.20-1)
t = 8,5,s, i n m m ;
where
tmin
5 m m ;
= h o r i z o n t a l p r e s s u r e a s d e f i n e d i n 7.10.6.8;
T h e stiffness o f edge girders shall be sufficient t o

m a i n t a i n adequate sealing pressure between securing
d e v i c e s . T h e m o m e n t o f i n e r t i a /, i n c m , o f e d g e
g i r d e r s s h a l l n o t t o b e less t h a n
4
1 = 6qs% ,
D
where
S
F o r h a t c h cover stiffeners u n d e r compression

sufficient safety against lateral a n d t o r s i o n a l b u c k l i n g
according 7.10.6.28 t o 7.10.6.32 shall be verified.
F o r h a t c h c o v e r s subject t o w h e e l l o a d i n g stif
fener scantlings shall be determined b y direct calcu
l a t i o n s u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n o f t h e p e r m i s s i b l e stresses
7.10.6.19 S c a n t U n g s o f p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g
members are obtained f r o m calculations according
to 7.10.6.22 a n d 7.10.6.23 u n d e r consideration o f
p e r m i s s i b l e stresses a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.14.
and Construction
i ncm ,
(7.10.6.20-2)
q = p a c k i n g l i n e p r e s s u r e , i n N / m m , <?, = 5 N / m m ;
SD spacing, i n m , o fsecuring devices.
7.10.6.21 S t r e n g t h c a l c u l a t i o n f o r h a t c h c o v e r s
m a y be carried o u t b y either, using b e a m theory,
grillage analysis o r F E M .
7.10.6.22 C r o s s - s e c t i o n a l p r o p e r t i e s s h a l l b e d e
t e r m i n e d considering t h e effective breadth. Cross
sectional areas o f secondary stiffeners parallel t o t h e
primary supporting member under consideration
w i t h i n t h e effective b r e a d t h c a n be included, refer
to F i g . 7.10.6.29-1.
T a b l e
7.10.6.22
E f f e c t i v e b r e a d t h e o f p l a t i n g o f p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s
Ve
>8
ei/e
0,36
0,64
0,82
0,91
0,96
0,98
1,00
1,00
0,37
0,52
0,75
0,84
0,89
0,90
e /e
m2
0,20
0,65
e\
shall b e applied where p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s a r el o a d e d b y u n i f o r m l y distributed l o a d s o r else b y n o t less
than 6 equally spaced single loads.
e
shall b e a p p l i e d w h e r e p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s a r e l o a d e d b y 3 o rless single l o a d s I n t e r m e d i a t e values m a y b e o b t a i n e d
b y direct interpolation.
/ = length o fzero-points o fbending m o m e n t curve.
I = lo f o r s i m p l y s u p p o r t e d p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s .
/ = 0,6/o f o r p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s w i t h b o t h e n d s c o n s t r a i n t , w h e r e lo i s t h e u n s u p p o r t e d l e n g t h o f t h e p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g
member.
e = w i d t h o f plating s u p p o r t e d , m e a s u r e d f r o m centre t o centre o fthe adjacent u n s u p p o r t e d fields.
m
m2
Arrangements
and
Outfit
T h e effective b r e a d t h o f p l a t i n g e o f p r i m a r y
supporting m e m b e r s shall be determined according t o
Table 7.10.6.22, considering t h e type o f loading.
Special calculations m a y be required f o r determining
the effective b r e a d t h o f one-sided o r n o n - s y m m e t r i c a l
flanges.
T h e effective cross sectional area o f plates shall
n o t b e less t h a n t h e c r o s s s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f t h e face
plate.
F o r f l a n g e p l a t e s u n d e r c o m p r e s s i o n w i t h sec
o n d a r y stiffeners perpendicular t o t h e w e b o f t h e
p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r , t h e effective w i d t h shall
be d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.29.
7.10.6.23 F o r s t r e n g t h c a l c u l a t i o n s o f h a t c h c o v e r s
by m e a n s o f finite elements, the cover geometry shall be
i d e a l i z e d a s realistically a s p o s s i b l e . E l e m e n t size s h a l l
be a p p r o p r i a t e t o a c c o u n t f o r effective b r e a d t h . I n n o
case e l e m e n t w i d t h shall b e larger t h a n stiffener spacing.
I n w a y o f force transfer points a n dcutouts t h e m e s h
shall b e refined, w h e r e applicable. T h e ratio o f element
length t o w i d t h shall n o t exceed 4 .
The element height o f webs o f primary support
ing m e m b e r shall n o t exceed one-third o f t h e w e b
height. Stiffeners, s u p p o r t i n g plates against pressure
loads, shall be included i n t h e idealization. Buckling
stiffeners m a y b e d i s r e g a r d e d f o r t h e stress c a l c u l a
tion.
7.10.6.24 F o r h a t c h c o v e r s t r u c t u r e s s u f f i c i e n t b u c k l i n g
strength shall b e demonstrated (refer t o F i g . 7.10.6.24).
Definitions i n7.10.6.24 t o 7.10.6.32:
a = l e n g t h o f t h e l o n g e r side o f a single plate
field, i n m m (x-direction);
b = b r e a d t h o f t h e s h o r t e r side o f a single p l a t e
field, i n m m (y-direction);
a = a s p e c t r a t i o o f s i n g l e p l a t e f i e l d ; a = a/b;
n = n u m b e r o f single plate field breadths w i t h i n
the partial o r total plate
field;
t = n e t plate thickness, i n m m ;
a = m e m b r a n e stress, i n N / m m , i n x - d i r e c t i o n ;
a = m e m b r a n e stress, i n N / m m , i n j - d i r e c t i o n ;
m
267
= s h e a r s t r e s s , i n N / m m , i n t h e x-y p l a n e ;
E = m o d u l u s o f elasticity, i n N / m m , o f t h e
material;
E = 2,06 x 1 0 , i n N / m m , f o r steel;
o > = m i n i m u m y i e l d stress, i n N / m m o f t h e
material.
C o m p r e s s i v e a n d shear stresses shall b e t a k e n
positive, t e n s i o n stresses shall b e t a k e n n e g a t i v e .
I f stresses i n t h e x - a n d v - d i r e c t i o n a l r e a d y c o n
tain t h e Poisson-effect (calculated using F E M ) , t h e
f o l l o w i n g m o d i f i e d stress v a l u e s m a y b e used. B o t h
stresses a * a n d a * shall b e c o m p r e s s i v e stresses, i n
o r d e r t o a p p l y t h e stress r e d u c t i o n a c c o r d i n g t o t h e
following formulae:
2
o = (** - 0 , 3 o - / ) / 0 , 9 1 ;
(7.10.6.24-1)
<jy = ( a * - 0,-**)/0,91
(7.10.6.24-2)
where a * , a * = stresses containing the Poisson-effect.

W h e r e compressive stress fulfils t h e condition
<j * < 0,, t h e n <j = 0 a n d <J = <J *.
W h e r e compressive stress fulfils t h e condition
o y * < 0 , 3 a , , * , t h e n <J = 0 a n d <y = <y *.
F i = correction factor f o r b o u n d a r y condition at t h e long
i t u d i n a l s t i f f e n e r s a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 7.10.6.24.
y
T a b l e
Correction factor F
Stiffeners sniped a t b o t h
ends
1
Guidance values
where
b o t h e n d s a r e effectively
connected to adjacent
structures
7.10.6.24
1,00
1,05 f o r
1,10 f o r
1,20 f o r
1,30 f o r
of high
flat b a r s
bulb sections
angle a n d tee-sections
U-type sections a n d girders
rigidity
2
^ x a c t values m a y b edetermined b y direct calculations.

H i g h e r value m a y b et a k e n i fit is verified b y a buckling
strength check o fthe partial plate field u s i n g non-linear F E A
a n d d e e m e d appropriate b y the individual classification society
b u t n o t g r e a t e r t h a n 2,0.
2
N o t e . A naverage value o f F \ shall b e used f o r plate

panels h a v i n g different edge stiffeners.
longitudinal
stiffener
single
field
p a r t i a l field
<y = r e f e r e n c e s t r e s s , i n N / m m , t a k e n e q u a l t o
a = 0,9E(t/bf ;
\|f = e d g e s t r e s s r a t i o t a k e n e q u a l t o
^ = /
CTI = m a x i m u m c o m p r e s s i v e s t r e s s ;
o~2 m i n i m u m c o m p r e s s i v e s t r e s s o r t e n s i o n s t r e s s ;
S = safety factor (based o nnet scantling approach), taken
equal to:
5 = 1,25 f o r h a t c h c o v e r s w h e n s u b j e c t e d t o t h e v e r t i c a l
w e a t h e r d e s i g n l o a d a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.6;
5 = 1,10 f o r h a t c h c o v e r s w h e n s u b j e c t e d t o l o a d s
a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.8 a n d 7.10.6.14;
X = reference degree o fslenderness, t a k e n equal t o
e
transverse
stiffener
F i g . 7.10.6.24 G e n e r a l a r r a n g e m e n t o f p a n e l
K =
b u c k l i n g f a c t o r a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.26.
7.10.6.25 P r o o f s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e f o l l o w i n g
c o n d i t i o n i s c o m p l i e d w i t h f o r t h e s i n g l e p l a t e f i e l d ab:
268
Rules
Ships
T h e first t w o terms a n d the last t e r m o f the above

c o n d i t i o n s h a l l n o t exceed 1,0.
T h e reduction factors k, k k a r e given i n T a
ble 7.10.6.26.
W h e r e a ^ 0 ( t e n s i o n stress), k = 1,0.
W h e r e a ^ 0 ( t e n s i o n stress), k = 1,0.
T h e e x p o n e n t s e\, e , e , a s w e l l a s t h e f a c t o r
shall b e t a k e n as given i n T a b l e 7.10.6.25.
x
Coefficients e
T a b l e
e, e a n d factor
2
7.10.6.25
E x p o n e n t s e\, , a n d f a c t o r
Plate panel
1+
e\
k*
4
1 + ky
1 +
rs a n d rs
stress)
x
rs
k kyZz
x
{kxky)
y
positive
(compression
Y
1
a n d rs n e g a t i v e ( t e n s i o n s t r e s s )
y
F i g . 7.10.6.29-1 S t i f f e n i n g p a r a l l e l t o w e b o f p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g
member
b<e ;
e' =
nb ;
n = integer n u m b e r o f stiffener spacings b inside t h e effective
b r e a d t h e a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.22.
m
'
e
e
Ill
7.10.6.26 B u c k l i n g a n d r e d u c t i o n factors f o r
plane elementary plate panels a r e given i n T a
ble 7.10.6.26.
7.10.6.27 F o r n o n - s t i f f e n e d w e b s a n d flanges o f
p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s n o t s u p p o r t e d b y stif
feners, sufficient b u c k l i n g strength as f o r t h e h a t c h
cover t o p a n d lower plating shall be demonstrated
7.10.6.28 I t s h a l l b e d e m o n s t r a t e d t h a t t h e c o n
t i n u o u s l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d transverse stiffeners o f
p a r t i a l a n d t o t a l plate fields c o m p l y w i t h t h e c o n d i
tions seto u ti n 7.10.6.30 a n d 7.10.6.31.
7.10.6.29 F o r d e m o n s t r a t i o n o f b u c k l i n g s t r e n g t h
according t o 7.10.6.30 a n d 7.10.6.31, t h e effective
width o f plating may be determined b ythe following
formulae:
b = kb f o r l o n g i t u d i n a l stiffeners; (7.10.6.29-1)
a = k a f o r transverse stiffeners;
(7.10.6.29-2)
refer also t o F i g . 7.10.6.24.
T h e effective w i d t h o f p l a t i n g shall n o t b e t a k e n
greater t h a n t h e value obtained f r o m 7.10.6.22.
T h e effective w i d t h e o f stiffened flange plates o f
p r i m a r y supporting members m a y be determined as
follows:
F i g . 7. .0.6.29-2 S t i f f e n i n g p e r p e n d i c u l a r t o w e b o f
supporting member
= 2 , 7 ^ ^ 1 ;
a
e = w i d t h o f p l a t i n g s u p p o r t e d a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.22.
F o r bê
o r a < e , respectively, b a n da shall b e
exchanged.
a a n d b for flange plates shall be in general determined for
= 1.
m
Arrangements
and Outfit
269
T a b l e
7.10.6.26
Buckling a n dreduction factors f o rplane elementary plate panels

Buckling-load
case
E d g e stress ratio
considering
unevenness o f plate
edge compression
Buckling factor A depending o n the

plate loading a n d side ratio
<x = a / 6
l>\|f>0
<x^l
Reduction factor k
k = \ for X ^ X
\|r+l,l
=
k = c(l/X-0,22/X )
0>\|f> - 1
ya
for X>X
A=7,63-\K6,26-10\|0
c = (l,25-0,12\|r)s;l,25
\ K - i
2
A=(l-\|0 5,975
2
l>\|f>0
<x^l
-
>
m 11111111 I T , wi-n
t
a
i m m
0>\|f> - 1
c = (l,25-0,12\|r)s;l,25
l^<x^l,5
l L l
a -*
1,1
= (1-/) f o r X < X
-^(13,9-10i|0]
= 0,22 f o r
<x>l,5
^
, 8,6
,
^ (5,87 + 1 , 8 7 a + -4r - 1 0 \ | r ) l
or
or
A/0,91-
X = X -0,5for
\ K - i
1 ^
d = (l-f!/a)>0
- *
>
; *
4
- + )
4
K=Fi(
- ) 5,975
a

2X
^
HA. c ( J + V n
r - 4 ) ^ /v
2
AT=f [(^
1
L
a
^) 3,9675 +
= \ + 14/15\+1/3
4
+ 0 , 5 3 7 5 ( - ^ ) + l,87]
4(0,425+ l / a )
l>\|f>0
K
c
<*x
t
"
ab
3*+l
<x>0
A = l
0>\|f>-l
x = ,,
f o r X > 0,7
a. +0,51
n
t
C
forXÔJ
A = 4(0,425 + l / a ) ( l + \ | 0 -5\1-3,42)
i > \ | r > - i
<x>0
A = (0,425 +
l/a )^-
a b
=
t
/3
k = \ f o r 1^0,84
<x>l
A = [5,34 + 4 / a ]
0<<x<l
K , = [A + 5 , 3 4 / a ]
k = 0,84/X
T
!<
>
N o t e .
Explanation f o rboundary conditions: "

" plate edge free;
"
" plate edge simply supported.
for
X>0,84
270
Rules
Scantlings o f plates a n d stiffeners shall be i n

general determined according t o t h e m a x i m u m
s t r e s s e s o (y) a t w e b s o f p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r
and stiffeners, respectively. F o r stiffeners w i t h spa
cing b under compression arranged parallel t o pri
m a r y s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s , n o v a l u e less t h a n 0 , 2 5 o >
s h a l l b e i n s e r t e d f o r a (y = b).
T h e stress d i s t r i b u t i o n b e t w e e n t w o p r i m a r y
supporting members c a nbe obtained b y the follow
ing formulae:
>
{ l - \ [ 3 + ci - 4 C 2 - 2 - J - (1 + a - 2 c ) ] } ;
ci = o /o u
x2
62 = ^ ( ^ 1 + ^ - 0 , 5
n o m i n a l lateral load, i n N / m m , o f t h e stiffener d u e

t o <y , rs a n d x ;
z x
t
izb n
i
( c t X ~~a~) + 2 c O y + ^ J l i i )
X
f o r longitudinal
stiffeners;
A
Pzy = ( 2 c a i + a ( j f i ) ( 1 + -jjf-)
.
+ ^ 2 x ! ) f o r transverse
stiffeners
where r s = cr (l+
a
A
-gf-);
ml
c , =^
Ax, A
net sectional area, i n m m , o f t h e longitudinal o r

transverse stiffener, respectively, w i t h o u t a t t a c h e d plating;
ti=
CT
for\|K0;
m2
CT
at'
12xl0 '
w h e r e e" \ = p r o p o r t i o n a t e e f f e c t i v e b r e a d t h e
o r proportionate
e f f e c t i v e w i d t h eî o f p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r 1
w i t h i n t h e d i s t a n c e e, a s a p p r o p r i a t e ;
e'm2 = p r o p o r t i o n a t e e f f e c t i v e b r e a d t h e
o r proportionate
effective width
o f primary supporting member 2
w i t h i n t h e d i s t a n c e e, a s a p p r o p r i a t e ;
xi> x2 n o r m a l s t r e s s e s i n f l a n g e p l a t e s o f a d j a c e n t p r i m a r y
s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r 1 a n d 2 w i t h s p a c i n g e, b a s e d o n
cross-sectional properties considering the effective b r e a d t h
( eno) o r e f f e c t i v e w i d t h (eî, 4>a)> a s a p p r o p r i a t e ;
= distance o fconsidered location f r o m primary support
ing m e m b e r 1.
m
12xl0
c , Cy = f a c t o r s t a k i n g i n t o a c c o u n t t h e s t r e s s e s p e r p e n d i c u l a r
to t h e stiffener's axis a n d distributed variable along
the stiffener's length;
c , Cy = 0,5(1
for 0 ^ \ K 1 ;
0<ci<l;
p =
Ships
bt
I
o-*(y) = a
[-/^/ + / ^ ^ ;
for longitudinal stiffeners:

a/b > 2,0:
m = 1 , 4 1 m = 0,49;
a l b < 2,0:
m = 1 , 9 6 m = 0,37;
for transverse stiffeners:
/6>0,5:
m i =0,37
m = 1,96/ ;
a/nb < 0 , 5 :
m =0,49
m = 1,47/ ;
w = wo + w\;
Wo = a s s u m e d i m p e r f e c t i o n , i n m m ;
w^
m i n ( a / 2 5 0 , 6/250, 10) f o r l o n g i t u d i n a l s t i f f e n e r s ;
w o j , ^ m i n ( a / 2 5 0 , /250, 10) f o r t r a n s v e r s e s t i f f e n e r s .
F o r stiffeners sniped a t b o t h ends w shall n o tb e t a k e n less
t h a n t h edistance f r o m t h em i d p o i n t o fplating t o t h eneutral axis
o f the profile including effective w i d t h o f plating;
W\ = d e f o r m a t i o n o f s t i f f e n e r , i n m m , a t m i d p o i n t o f
stiffener s p a n d u e t o lateral (transverse) l o a d p .
In case o f uniformly distributed load t h e following
v a l u e s f o r w\ m a y b e u s e d :
x
S h e a r stress d i s t r i b u t i o n i n t h e flange plates m a y

be a s s u m e d l i n e a r l y .
7.10.6.30 L a t e r a l b u c k l i n g o f s e c o n d a r y s t i f f e n e r s
shall be t h e following:
0x
"
*<1
o>
(7.10.6.30)
2
where a
= u n i f o r m l y distributed compressive stress, i nN / m m , i n

the direction o fthe stiffener axis;
Ga
<3x f o r l o n g i t u d i n a l s t i f f e n e r s ;
< y = rs f o r t r a n s v e r s e s t i f f e n e r s ;
o"j = b e n d i n g s t r e s s , i n N / m m , i n t h e s t i f f e n e r ;
a
&
7^
3 8 4T17 0v 7
f longitudinal stiffeners;
" Z
5ap(nbf
where M = bending moment, i n N - m m , duetothe deformation w o f

stiffener, t a k e n e q u a l t o
0
= F
P w
c -p
z
Mi
with
384 ,
for transverse stiffeners;
Cf =
elastic s u p p o r t p r o v i d e d b y t h e stiffener, i n N / m m .
F o r l o n g i t u d i n a l stiffeners:
(c/-p )>0;
z
( i + Cpx);
= bending moment, i nN - m m , d u e t o thelateral load p

equal to:
2
pba
24 x 1 0
pa(nb)
f o r longitudinal stiffeners;
0 , 9 1 ( 1 ^ - 1 )
1 +
for transverse stiffeners
c8xl0
s
where
n shall b e e q u a l t o 1 f o r o r d i n a r y transverse stiffeners;
p = lateral load, i n N / m m ;
F - ideal b u c k l i n g force, i n N , o fthe stiffener;
Tt
4~EIx x 1 0 f o r l o n g i t u d i n a l s t i f f e n e r s ;
2
xa
= [a/2b + 2 b / a ]
f o r a > 2b;
K i
xa
= [1 + (a/2b) ]
for a < 2b.
Fktv , , > - E / v x f o r t r a n s v e r s e s t i f f e n e r s
(nb)
z
where I , I = net m o m e n t s o finertia, i n c m , o f the longitudinal o r

transverse stiffener, including effective w i d t h o f
a t t a c h e d p l a t i n g a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.29. I a n d I s h a l l
c o m p l y w i t h t h e following criteria:
x
F o r transverse stiffeners:
Cfy ~ Cs Kiy
0 +
py)>
py
and
Outfit
271
0 , 9 1 ( 1 2 ^ - 1 )
1 +
= [ n b j l a + 2a/nb]
ya
ya
where
Arrangements
bi
f o r n b > 2a;
J
2
= [l +
(nb/2a) f f o r nb < 2a
c = factor accounting for the b o u n d a r y conditions o f the

transverse stiffener;
c = 1,0 f o r s i m p l y s u p p o r t e d s t i f f e n e r s ;
c = 2,0 f o r p a r t i a l l y c o n s t r a i n t s t i f f e n e r s ;
Z
= n e t section m o d u l u s o f stiffener (longitudinal o r
transverse), i n c m , including effective w i d t h o f plating
a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.29.
e f = h w +
tfj2
F i g . 7.10.6.31 D i m e n s i o n s o f s t i f f e n e r
s t
1 + 10
[
where h
Ub/t
4h /3tl)
w
= web height, i n m m ;
I f n o lateral l o a d p i s a c t i n g , t h e b e n d i n g stress a
t = net web thickness, i n m m ;
shall b e calculated a t t h e m i d p o i n t o f t h e stiffener
bf = f l a n g e b r e a d t h , i n m m ;
tf = n e t f l a n g e t h i c k n e s s , i n m m ;
s p a n f o r t h a t fibre, w h i c h results i n t h e largest stress
A = n e t w e b a r e a e q u a l t o
A =h t ;
v a l u e . I f a lateral l o a d p i s a c t i n g , t h e stress c a l c u l a
Af = n e t f l a n g e a r e a e q u a l t o Aj= bftfi
ef = f^ + tjjl , i n m m .
t i o n shall b e c a r r i e d o u t f o r b o t h fibres o f t h e stif
fener's cross sectional area ( i f necessary f o r t h e
7.10.6.32 F o r transverse secondary stiffeners
b i a x i a l stress field a t t h e p l a t i n g side).
l o a d e d b y c o m p r e s s i v e stresses, w h i c h a r e n o t s u p
p o r t e d b y longitudinal stiffeners, sufficient torsional
7.10.6.31 T h e longitudinal secondary stiffeners
buckling strength shall be demonstrated according
shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g criteria:
to 7.10.6.31.
(7.10.6.31)
<1,0
7.10.6.33 Securing a n d a r r a n g e m e n t o f containers
o n t h e h a t c h covers shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e Technical
where k = coefficient t a k e n e q u a l t o :
Requirements f o r t h e Arrangement a n dSecuring o f
k=
1,0
f o r .-^0,2;
the International S t a n d a r d C o n t a i n e r s o n B o a r d t h e
k =
f o r X > 0,2
Ships Intended f o r Container
Transportation.
<tn-J< -X
Structures u n d e r container load shall be calculated
where
= 0,5(1 + 0,21(X - 0,2) + X );
according t o 7.10.6.5 t o 7.10.6.13 using t h e permis
X reference degree o fslenderness t a k e n equal t o
sible stresses as p e r 7.10.6.14.
7.10.6.34 T o ensure w e a t h e r tightness, t h e p r o
X T
yj o > /
CSKIT
visions o f I A C S R e c o m m e n d a t i o n N o . 14 applicable
w h e r e =^-(
^ * e + 0 , 3 8 5 / r ) , i n N / m m ,
to h a t c h covers shall be m e t .
P
a
T h e packing material o f h a t c h covers gaskets
w h e r e I , I , I , r e f e r t o F i g . 7.10.6.31 a n d T a b l e 7 . 1 0 . 6 . 3 1 ;
I = n e t p o l a r m o m e n t o f inertia o f t h e stiffener, i n c m ,
shall b e suitable f o r all expected service c o n d i t i o n s o f
related t o the point C ;
the ship a n d shall be c o m p a t i b l e w i t h t h e cargoes t o
I T n e t S t . V e n a n t ' s m o m e n t o f inertia o f t h e stiffener,
in cm ;
be t r a n s p o r t e d . T h e p a c k i n g m a t e r i a l shall b e selected
1 = net sectorial m o m e n t o finertia o f the stiffener, i n c m ,
w i t h regard t odimensions a n delasticity i n such a w a y
related t o the point C ;
that expected deformations c a n be carried. Forces
e = degree o f fixation taken equal t o
shall b e carried b y t h e steel structure o n l y .
w
w w
T a b l e
7.10.6.31
M o m e n t s of inertia
Section
3xl0
Sections with
bulb o r flange
Flat bar
0,63-^-)
36 x 1 0
for b u l b a n d angle sections:

(^^
+Ajt$)10-
- ^ ( 1 - 0 , 6 3 ) +
Afejb
, Af+
2,6A .
1 2 x 1 0 " v Af+A
>
W
3 x 10
z-^(l-0,63tjjbj)
for
tee-sections:
b}t e}
f
12xl0
272
Rules
T h e packings shall be compressed so as t o give

the necessary tightness effect f o r a l l expected operating conditions. Special consideration shall be given
t o t h e p a c k i n g a r r a n g e m e n t i n ships w i t h large r e lative m o v e m e n t s between hatch covers a n d coamings o r b e t w e e n h a t c h cover sections.
7.10.6.35 F o r h a t c h c o v e r s o f c a r g o h o l d s s o l e l y
for the transport o f containers, a t t h e shipowner's
request a n d subject t o c o m p l i a n c e w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g
conditions, t h e fitting o f w e a t h e r tight gaskets m e n tioned i n 7.10.6.34 m a y be dispensed w i t h :
t h e h a t c h w a y c o a m i n g s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n
600 m m i n height;
the exposed deck, o n w h i c h t h eh a t c h covers are
located is situated above a depth H(x).
H(x) shall be s h o w n t o comply w i t h the following
criteria:
H ( x ) > Tjb + f
+ h, in m ,
(7.10.6.35)
w h e r e 7}z>= d r a u g h t , i n m , c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e a s s i g n e d s u m m e r
l o a d line;
f = m i n i m u m required freeboard, i n m , determined i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h R e g u l a t i o n 28 o f t h e I n t e r n a t i o n a l
L o a d Line Convention,asamended, where applicable;
h = 4,6 f o r
xlL^0,75;
h = 6,9 f o r X I L L L > 0 , 7 5 .
b
Labyrinths, gutter bars o r equivalents shall be

fitted p r o x i m a t e t o t h e edges o f each p a n e l i n w a y o f
the c o a m i n g s . T h e clear p r o f i l e o f these openings
shall be kept as s m a l l as possible.
W h e r e a h a t c h is covered b y several hatch cover
panels, t h e clear o p e n i n g o f t h e g a p i n between t h e
panels shall be n o t wider t h a n 5 0 m m .
T h e labyrinths a n d gaps between h a t c h cover
panels shall be considered as unprotected openings
w i t h respect t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f i n t a c t a n d d a m a g e
stability calculations.
Bilge alarms shall be provided i neach h o l d fitted
w i t h non-weathertight covers.
Furthermore, Chapter 3 o f I M O M S C / C i r c . 1087
s h a l l b e r e f e r r e d t o c o n c e r n i n g t h e s t o w a g e a n d segregation o f containers containing dangerous goods.
7.10.6.36 C r o s s - j o i n t s o f m u l t i - p a n e l c o v e r s s h a l l
be p r o v i d e d w i t h efficient drainage arrangements.
7.10.6.37 T h e n e t t h i c k n e s s o f w e a t h e r d e c k h a t c h
c o a m i n g s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h a t d e t e r m i n e d b y
t = 1 4 , 2 s ^ / p V 0 , 9 5 C T , i n m m , t h e r e w i t h a t least
(7.10.6.37-1)
*min = 6 + i/100, i n m m ,
(7.10.6.37-2)
and Construction
,s = s t i f f e n e r s p a c i n g , i n m ;
L \ = L , n e e d n o t b e t a k e n g r a t e r t h a n 300 m .
S t r e n g t h aspects o f l o n g i t u d i n a l h a t c h c o a m i n g s
s h a l l m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.6.5, P a r t " H u l l " .
7.10.6.38 T h e s t i f f e n e r s s h a l l b e c o n t i n u o u s a t t h e
c o a m i n g stays. F o r stiffeners w i t h b o t h ends C o n -
Ships
straint, t h e elastic n e t section m o d u l u s Z , i nc m , a n d

n e t shear area A , i n c m , calculated o n t h e basis o f
n e t t h i c k n e s s , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n :
2
Z=^-sfp
A
where
(7.10.6.38-1)
(7.10.6.38-2)
/ = secondary stiffener span, i n m , t o b e taken a s t h e

spacing o f c o a m i n g stays;
F o r sniped stiffeners a t c o a m i n g corners section

m o d u l u s a n d shear area a t t h efixed support shall be
increased b y 35 p e r cent. T h e thickness o f t h e
c o a m i n g plate a t t h e sniped stiffener e n d shall n o tbe
less t h a n t h o s e d e f i n e d a s p e r t h e f o r m u l a
t = l9,6y/p s(l-0,5s)/cs ,
A
in mm.
(7.10.6.38-3)
H o r i z o n t a l stiffeners o n h a t c h coamings, w h i c h
are p a r t o f t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l h u l l structure, shall be
d e s i g n e d a c c o r d i n g t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s i n 1.6.5,
Part I I "Hull".
7.10.6.39 C o a m i n g s t a y s s h a l l b e d e s i g n e d f o r t h e
loads transmitted t h r o u g h t h e m a n d permissible
stresses a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.14.
T h e n e t section m o d u l u s Z , i n c m , o f c o a m i n g
s t a y s w i t h a h e i g h t o f h < 1,6 m a n d w h i c h s h a l l b e
d e s i g n e d f o r t h e l o a d p , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
s
Z = ^-eh p ,
s
where
i ncm ,
(7.10.6.39)
e = spacing o f c o a m i n g stays, i n m .
C o a m i n g stays o f c o a m i n g s h a v i n g a height o f
1,6 m o r m o r e s h a l l b e d e s i g n e d u s i n g d i r e c t c a l c u l a t i o n s u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n o f t h e p e r m i s s i b l e stresses
according t o 7.10.6.14. T h e effective breadth o f t h e
c o a m i n g plate shall n o t be larger t h a n t h e effective
plate breadth according t o 7.10.6.22.
C o a m i n g stays shall be s u p p o r t e d b y a p p r o p r i a t e
substructures. Face plates m a y o n l y be included i n
the calculation i f a n appropriate substructure is
provided a n dwelding provides a n adequate joint.
7.10.6.40 W e b g r o s s t h i c k n e s s a t t h e r o o t p o i n t
t
= ^
F
where h
t
^ + t
W
(7.10.6.40)
= w e bheight o f c o a m i n g stay a t itslower end, i n m ;

c o r r o s i o n a d d i t i o n , i n m m , a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.52.
C o a m i n g stays shall be connected t o t h edeck b y

fillet w e l d s o n b o t h sides w i t h a t h r o a t t h i c k n e s s
of a=
0,44t .
7.10.6.41 H a t c h c o a m i n g s w h i c h a r e p a r t o f t h e
longitudinal h u l l structure shall be designed accordi n g t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.6.5, P a r t I I " H u l l " .
Longitudinal hatch coamings with a length exc e e d i n g 0,1 L s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h t a p e r e d b r a c k e t s
or equivalent transitions a n d a corresponding subw
where
of Sea-Going
Part
III. Equipment,
Arrangements
and
Outfit
structure at b o t h ends. A t the e n d o f the brackets

t h e y shall be connected t o the deck b y full penetration welds o f m i n i m u m 300 m m i n length.
7.10.6.42 H a t c h coamings a n d s u p p o r t i n g structures s h a l l be a d e q u a t e l y stiffened t o a c c o m m o d a t e
the loading f r o m hatch covers, i n longitudinal,
transverse and vertical directions. Structures under
deck shall be checked against the l o a d t r a n s m i t t e d b y
the stays.
Structures u n d e r deck shall be checked against
the l o a d t r a n s m i t t e d b y the stays.
Unless otherwise stated, w e l d connections shall
b e d i m e n s i o n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.7, P a r t I I " H u l l " a n d
m a t e r i a l s s h a l l be selected a c c o r d i n g t o 2.2, P a r t X I V
"Welding".
7.10.6.43 O n ships c a r r y i n g cargo o n deck, such
as t i m b e r , c o a l o r c o k e , t h e stays s h a l l be spaced n o t
m o r e t h a n 1,5 m a p a r t .
C o a m i n g plates shall extend t o the l o w e r edge o f
the deck beams; t h e y shall be flanged o r fitted w i t h
face b a r s o r h a l f - r o u n d bars (refer t o F i g . 7.10.6.43).
273
I f a c o n t i n u o u s o u t e r steel c o n t a c t b e t w e e n c o v e r
a n d ship s t r u c t u r e is a r r a n g e d , d r a i n a g e f r o m the
space b e t w e e n t h e steel c o n t a c t a n d t h e gasket s h a l l
be also p r o v i d e d .
7.10.6.45 Securing devices b e t w e e n cover a n d
c o a m i n g a n d at cross-joints shall be installed t o
provide weathertightness.
Securing devices shall be a p p r o p r i a t e t o bridge
displacements between cover and coaming due to hull
d e f o r m a t i o n s . T h e s e devices s h a l l be o f reliable c o n struction a n d effectively attached to the h a t c h w a y
c o a m i n g s , decks o r covers. I n d i v i d u a l securing devices o n each cover shall h a v e a p p r o x i m a t e l y the
same stiffness characteristics.
Sufficient n u m b e r o f securing devices shall be
p r o v i d e d a t e a c h side o f t h e h a t c h c o v e r c o n s i d e r i n g
the requirements o f 7.10.6.20; this applies also t o
hatch covers consisting o f several parts.
7.10.6.46 W h e r e r o d cleats are fitted, resilient
w a s h e r s o r c u s h i o n s s h a l l be i n c o r p o r a t e d .
W h e r e h y d r a u l i c c l e a t i n g is a d o p t e d , p o s i t i v e
m e a n s s h a l l be p r o v i d e d so t h a t i t r e m a i n s m e c h a n i cally locked i n the closed position i n the event o f
failure o f the hydraulic system.
7.10.6.47 T h e gross sectional area, i n c m , shall
n o t be less t h a n t h a t d e f i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
2
A = 0,28qs Dki
(7.10.6.47)
where q = packing line pressure, i n N / m m ,m i n i m u m 5 N / m m ;

SSD s p a c i n g b e t w e e n s e c u r i n g d e v i c e s , i n m , b u t n o t l e s s
than 2 m;
k , = (235/o>)
where o > = m i n i m u m yield strength o f the material, i n N / m m ,
b u t n o t g r e a t e r t h a n 0 , 7 c r , w h e r e rs i s t h e t e n s i l e
strength o f the material, in N / m m .
e = 0,75 f o r o > > 2 3 5 N / m m ;
e = 1,00 f o r o > ^ 2 3 5 N / m m .
e
F i g . 7.10.6.43
F o r hatchways exceeding 5 m , rods a n d bolts

s h a l l h a v e a g r o s s d i a m e t e r n o less t h a n 19 m m .
S e c u r i n g devices o f special design i n w h i c h sign i f i c a n t b e n d i n g o r s h e a r stresses o c c u r m a y be designed as a n t i - l i f t i n g devices a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.48.
A s l o a d the packing line pressure q multiplied by the
spacing b e t w e e n securing devices s
s h a l l be appUed.
7.10.6.48 T h e securing devices o f h a t c h covers, o n
w h i c h c a r g o is lashed, s h a l l be designed f o r t h e Ufting
forces resulting f r o m loads according t o 7.10.6.11 t o
7.10.6.13, refer t o F i g . 7.10.6.48. U n s y m m e t r i c a l
loadings, w h i c h m a y occur i n practice, shall be c o n sidered. U n d e r these l o a d i n g s t h e e q u i v a l e n t stress i n
the securing devices shall n o t exceed
SD
7.10.6.44 I f d r a i n channels are p r o v i d e d inside

the line o f gasket by means o f a gutter bar o r vertical
e x t e n s i o n o f t h e h a t c h side a n d e n d c o a m i n g , d r a i n
openings shall be p r o v i d e d at a p p r o p r i a t e p o s i t i o n s
o f the drain channels.
D r a i n openings i n h a t c h c o a m i n g s shall be arr a n g e d w i t h sufficient distance t o areas o f stress
c o n c e n t r a t i o n (e.g. h a t c h corners, t r a n s i t i o n s t o crane
posts).
D r a i n openings shall be a r r a n g e d at the ends o f
d r a i n channels a n d shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h n o n - r e t u r n
valves t o p r e v e n t ingress o f w a t e r f r o m outside. I t is
unacceptable t o connect fire hoses t o the d r a i n
openings for this purpose.
o > = 150/fc/, i n N / m m .
(7.10.6.48)
C h a p t e r 5.6 o f I A C S R e c o m m e n d a t i o n N o . 14 shaU
be referred t o f o r t h e o m i s s i o n o f anti-Ufting devices.
7.10.6.49 F o r the design o f the securing devices
a g a i n s t s h i f t i n g , t h e h o r i z o n t a l m a s s f o r c e s F = ma
shall be calculated w i t h the f o l l o w i n g accelerations:
h
274
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
Irrespective o f t h e arrangement o f stoppers, t h e

supports shall be able t o t r a n s m i t t h e following force
P i n t h e longitudinala n d transverse directions:
h
P = \yP
h
Y>
B J
t *
Lifting
force
F i g . 7.10.6.48 L i f t i n g f o r c e s a t a h a t c h c o v e r
a = 0,2g i n l o n g i t u d i n a l d i r e c t i o n ;
a = 0,5g i n t r a n s v e r s e d i r e c t i o n ;
m = s u m o f mass o f cargo lashed o n t h e hatch
cover a n d mass o fhatch cover.
7.10.6.50 F o r t h e transmission o f t h e support
forces r e s u l t i n g f r o m t h e l o a d cases specified
i n 7.10.6.5 t o 7.10.6.13 a n d o f t h e h o r i z o n t a l mass
forces specified i n 7.10.6.49, supports shall be p r o
vided w h i c h are t o be designed such that t h en o m i n a l
surface pressures i n general d o n o t exceed t h e fol
lowing values:
x
. = dp, i n N / m m ,
where d
dmax
cU
*4iin
p
n
=
=
=
=
=
where P
(7.10.6.50-1)
3,75-0,0151,;
3,0;
1,0 i n g e n e r a l ;
2,0 f o r p a r t i a l l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s , r e f e r t o 7.10.6.12;
r e f e r t o T a b l e 7.10.6.50.
(7.10.6.50-3)
lyjd
vertical supporting force;

= f r i c t i o n a l c o e f f i c i e n t , i n g e n e r a l e q u a l t o 0,5.
v
F o r non-metallic, low-friction support materials

o n steel, t h e f r i c t i o n coefficient m a y b e reduced b u t
n o t t o b e less t h a n 0 , 3 5 .
Supports as w e l l as t h e adjacent structures a n d
substructures shall be designed such that t h e per
m i s s i b l e stresses a c c o r d i n g t o 7.10.6.14 a r e n o t e x
ceeded.
7 . 1 0 . 6 . 5 1 H a t c h c o v e r s s h a l l b e s u f f i c i e n t l y se
cured against h o r i z o n t a l shifting. Stoppers shall be
provided f o r hatch covers, o n w h i c h cargo is carried.
T h e greater o f t h e loads resulting f r o m 7.10.6.8
a n d 7.10.6.49 shall be appUed f o r the d i m e n s i o n i n g o f
the stoppers a n d their substructures.
T h e p e r m i s s i b l e stress i n stoppers, t h e i r sub
structures, i n the cover, a n d o fthe coamings shall be
determined according t o 7.10.6.14; i n addition, t h e
provisions i n 7.10.6.50 shall be observed.
7.10.6.52 C o r r o s i o n a d d i t i o n s t, i n m m , f o r h a t c h
covers a n d hatch coamings are given i n T a
ble 7.10.6.52.
7.10.6.53 F o r single s k i n hatch covers a n d f o r t h e
plating o f double s k i n h a t c h covers, steel r e n e w a l is required
w h e r e t h e g a u g e d t h i c k n e s s i s less t h a n t + 0 , 5 m m W h e r e
s
m t
F o r m e t a l l i c s u p p o r t i n g surfaces n o t subjected t o
relative displacements, t h e n o m i n a l surface pressure
shall be calculated b y t h e f o r m u l a
T a b l e 7.10.6.52
Corrosion additions ts for hatch covers a n d hatch coamings
Application
Pmu* = 3p , i n N / m m .
(7.10.6.50-2)
T a b l e
P e r m i s s i b l e n o m i n a l s u r f a c e p r e s s u r e p
Support material
H u l l structural steel
H a r d e n e d steel
Plastic materials o n
steel
7.10.6.50
Structure
Weather deck hatches Hatch covers

of container ships, c a r
carriers, paper carriers, H a t c h c o a m i n g s
passenger vessels
p , i nN / m m , when loaded b y
n
vertical force
horizontal force
(on stoppers)
25
35
50
40
50
W h e r e large relative displacements o f the support

i n g surfaces a r e expected, t h e u s e o f m a t e r i a l h a v i n g l o w
wear a n d frictional properties is recommended.
I f necessary, sufficient abrasive strength m a y be
s h o w n b y tests d e m o n s t r a t i n g a n a b r a s i o n o f s u p p o r t
surfaces o f n o t m o r e t h a n 0,3 m m p e r y e a r i n service
at a total distance o f shifting o f 15 0 0 0 m/year.
T h e substructures o f the supports shall be o f such
a design, t h a t a u n i f o r m pressure d i s t r i b u t i o n is
achieved.
t, i n m m
s
1,0
According to
1.1.5.1,
Part I I "Hull"
Weather deck hatches Hatch covers i n general

of all other ship types
W e a t h e r
exposed
plating a n d bottom
plating o f double skin
hatch covers
2,0
Internal structure o f
double skin
hatch
covers a n dclosed b o x
girders (hollow beams)
1,0
Hatch coamings n o t
part o f the longitudinal
hull structures
1,5
1,5
Hatch coamings part o f According to

t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l h u l l 1.1.5.1,
structures
Part I I "Hull"
Coaming
stiffeners
stays a n d
1,5
Arrangements
and
Outfit
t h e g a u g e d t h i c k n e s s i s w i t h i n t h e r a n g e t^ + 0,5 m m a n d
t +1,0
m m , coating (applied i n accordance w i t h the
coating manufacturer's requirements) o r annual gauging
m a y b e a d o p t e d a s a n a l t e r n a t i v e t o steel r e n e w a l .
C o a t i n g shall be m a i n t a i n e d i n G O O D condition, as
d e f i n e d i n 1.2, I A C S U R Z 1 0 . 2 .
For the internal structure o f double skin hatch
covers, thickness gauging is required w h e n hatch
cover t o p o r b o t t o m plating renewal shall be carried
out o r w h e n this is deemed necessary, a t t h e discret i o n o f t h e surveyor t o t h e Register, o n t h e basis o f
the plating corrosion o r deformation condition. I n
these cases, steel r e n e w a l f o r t h e i n t e r n a l structures i s
r e q u i r e d w h e r e t h e g a u g e d t h i c k n e s s i s l e s s t h a n t^.
F o r c o r r o s i o n a d d i t i o n r = 1,0 m m , t h e t h i c k n e s s
for steel r e n e w a l is t a n d t h e thickness f o r c o a t i n g
or annual gauging is w h e n gauged thickness is bet w e e n t^ a n d t n e t + 0 , 5 m m .
275
7.12 O P E N I N G S I N W A T E R T I G H T S U B D I V I S I O N
BULKHEADS A N D THEIR CLOSING APPLIANCES
et
net
7.11 H A T C H W A Y S O F C A R G O T A N K S I N T Y P E " A " S H I P S
7.11.1 O p e n i n g s f o r h a t c h w a y s o f t h e c a r g o t a n k s
on tankers shall be o fr o u n d o r oval form. Height o f
the coamings o f cargo t a n k hatchways w i l l n o t be
regulated b y t h e Register. C o n s t r u c t i o n o f the
coamings o fcargo tank hatchways shall c o m p l y w i t h
the requirements o f 3.5.5.1, P a r t I I " H u l l " .
7.11.2 C o v e r s o f h a t c h e s a n d t a n k c l e a n i n g
o p e n i n g s s h a l l be m a d e o f steel, b r o n z e o r brass. U s e
o f o t h e r materials is subject t o special consideration
b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n each case.
I n ships c a r r y i n g f l a m m a b l e liquids i n b u l k use o f
Ught alloys f o r covers o f hatches a n d t a n k cleaning
openings is n o t permitted.
7.11.3 C o v e r s o f t h e c a r g o t a n k h a t c h w a y s s h a l l
be p e r m a n e n t l y attached a n d tight, w h e n secured,
under the inner pressure o f liquid carried i n tanks t o a
h e a d o fa t least 2,5 m . T i g h t n e s s shall be p r o v i d e d b y
a rubber o r other suitable gasket being resistant t o
the liquids w h i c h are carried i n t h e cargo tanks.
7.11.4 T h e p l a t e o f t h e c a r g o t a n k h a t c h w a y
covers shall be a t least 1 2 m m i n thickness i fi t is o f
steel. T h e c o v e r p l a t e s h a l l b e r e i n f o r c e d b y stiffeners
m a d e o f f l a t b a r s n o t less t h a n 8 0 x 1 2 m m i n size,
and spaced a t every 6 0 0m m o f t h e cover length, o r
the cover shall be o f spherical shape.
7.11.5 T h e h a t c h w a y c o v e r s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h
a sighting port having a n inner diameter o f 150 m m
and closed b y a cover o f similar construction.
7.11.6 M a t e r i a l s a n d d e s i g n s o f c a r g o t a n k
h a t c h w a y covers i n ships i n t e n d e d t o carry f l a m m a b l e
U q u i d s s h a l l b e so selected as t o preclude s p a r k f o r m a t i o n d u r i n g opening a n d closing t h e covers.
7.12.1 G e n e r a l .
7.12.1.1 U n l e s s e x p r e s s l y p r o v i d e d o t h e r w i s e , t h e
present C h a p t e r covers ships t o w h i c h t h e requirements o fPart V "Subdivision" apply.
F o r o t h e r ships, t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f this C h a p t e r
apply t o bulkheads only, provided i n accordance
w i t h 2.7.1.3, P a r t I I " H u l l " ; f o r these ships, t h e r e quirements m a y be relaxed, a n d t h e degree o f r e l a x a t i o n w i l l be specially considered b y t h e Register
i n e a c h case.
I n ships indicated i n 7.12.6.1, t h e requirements
o f 7.12.2 t o 7.12.5 m a y be relaxed f o r d o o r s fitted i n
watertight subdivision bulkheads dividing a cargo
space f r o m a n a d j o i n i n g cargo space p r o v i d e d t h e
requirements o f 7.12.6 are m e t .
7.12.1.2 T h e n u m b e r o f o p e n i n g s i n w a t e r t i g h t
bulkheads shall be reduced t o a m i n i m u m compatible
w i t h t h e design a n d n o r m a l service c o n d i t i o n s o f t h e
ship.
7.12.1.3 W h e r e p i p i n g a n d e l e c t r i c c a b l e s a r e
carried through watertight subdivision bulkheads, the
requirements o f5.1, Part V I I I "Systems a n d Piping"
a n d o f 16.8.6, P a r t X I "Electrical E q u i p m e n t " shall
be t a k e n i n t o c o n s i d e r a t i o n .
7.12.2 D o o r s i n w a t e r t i g h t s u b d i v i s i o n b u l k h e a d s .
General.
7.12.2.1 T h e d o o r s s h a l l b e m a d e o f s t e e l . T h e u s e
o f other materials w i l l be specially considered b y t h e
7.12.2.2 D o o r s s h a U w i t h s t a n d t h e p r e s s u r e o f a
w a t e r h e a d o f t h e h e i g h t m e a s u r e d f r o m t h e l o w e r edge
o f a d o o r w a y a t t h e place o f its l o c a t i o n t o t h e underside
o f bulkhead deck plating, t h e freeboard o r t h e m o s t
adverse d a m a g e waterUne, w h i c h e v e r is greater.
7.12.2.3 U n d e r t h e e f f e c t o f w a t e r h e a d s p e c i f i e d
i n 7.12.2.2, t h e stresses i n t h e d o o r f r a m e a n d d o o r
plate s h a l l n o t exceed 0 , 6 t i m e s t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress
of their material.
7.12.2.4 W h e n c l o s e d , t h e d o o r s s h a l l b e t i g h t
under t h e pressure o f a w a t e r head o f t h e height
specified i n 7.12.2.2.
7.12.2.5 E a c h m e a n s o f o p e r a t i o n o f t h e d o o r s
shall alone ensure closure o f t h e d o o r w i t h t h e ship
U s t e d 15 e i t h e r w a y a n d w i t h a t r i m u p t o 5. D o o r s
closed b y d r o p p i n g o r b y t h e effect o f a d r o p p i n g
w e i g h t a r e n o t p e r m i t t e d . P o r t a b l e plates secured b y
bolts only are n o t permitted.
7.12.3 R e g u l a t i o n s c o n c e r n i n g t h e p o s i t i o n i n g
of doors.
7.12.3.1 N o d o o r s a r e p e r m i t t e d i n :
colUsion b u l k h e a d b e l o w t h e b u l k h e a d deck o f ships
h a v i n g a s u b d i v i s i o n d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k i n t h e class
n o t a t i o n a n d b e l o w t h e f r e e b o a r d deck o f aU o t h e r ships;
276
Rules
w a t e r t i g h t subdivision bulkheads d i v i d i n g a cargo space f r o m a n a d j o i n i n g cargo space except w h e r e

the Register is satisfied t h a t such d o o r s are essential.
I n t h i s case, t h e d o o r s m a y b e h i n g e d , s l i d i n g o r o f
another equivalent type, b u t they shall n o t be remotely controlled.
I n passenger ships a n d special-purpose ships, as
w e l l as i n ships w i t h s u b d i v i s i o n d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k
i n t h e class n o t a t i o n , t h e o u t b o a r d v e r t i c a l edges
o f t h e d o o r s s h a l l n o t b e l o c a t e d a t less t h a n 0 , 2 o f
the ship breadth. T h i s distance shall be measured a t
right angles t o t h e centreUne o f the ship a t t h e level o f
the deepest subdivision loadUne.
7.12.3.2 I n a d d i t i o n t o d o o r s a t e n t r a n c e s t o
propeller shaft tunnels, n o t m o r e t h a n o n e d o o r m a y
be p r o v i d e d i n each w a t e r t i g h t s u b d i v i s i o n b u l k h e a d
w i t h i n spaces c o n t a i n i n g m a i n engines, b o i l e r s a n d
auxiliary machinery.
W h e r e t w o o r m o r e propeller shafts a r e fitted,
their tunnels shall be connected b y a passageway. I n a
twin-screw ship, there shall o n l y be o n ed o o r between
t h e e n g i n e r o o m a n d t u n n e l spaces, a n d i f t h e p r o pellers are m o r e t h a n t w o , o n l y t w o doors shall be
provided. A l l t h e doors shall be located as h i g h as
practicable.
H a n d gear f o r operating t h e doors f r o m above
the bulkhead deck a n d f o r operating doors at entrances t o shaft tunnels shall be fitted outside t h e
engine r o o m .
7.12.4 D o o r s i n c a r g o s h i p s .
7.12.4.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7 . 1 2 . 4 a p p l y t o
doors fitted i n t h e subdivision bulkheads o f cargo
ships except t h e d o o r s o f special purpose ships a n d
those m e n t i o n e d under 7.12.6.
7.12.4.2 T h e d o o r s s h a l l b e s U d i n g d o o r s w i t h
horizontal o r vertical motion, they shall be b o t h
hand- a n d power-operated.
I f hand-operated, i t shall be possible t o open a n d
close t h e d o o r f r o m b o t h sides o f t h e b u l k h e a d .
I f power-operated, closing o fthe doors f r o m the
control station o n t h e n a v i g a t i o n bridge shall be
possible.
7.12.4.3 A t t h e d o o r c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s , v i s u a l i n dicators shall be provided t o show whether the doors
are o p e n o r closed. A n a l a r m shall be p r o v i d e d t o
control the door closing.
P o w e r source, c o n t r o l station a n d indicators shall
be o p e r a b l e i n t h e case o f m a i n p o w e r source failure.
Special a t t e n t i o n shall be p a i d t o m i n i m i z i n g t h e effects o f t h e c o n t r o l s y s t e m f a i l u r e .
7.12.5 D o o r s i n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s a n d s p e c i a l p u r pose ships.
doors fitted i n t h e subdivision bulkheads o f passenger
ships a n d special purpose ships except those m e n tioned i n 7.12.6.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
7.12.5.2 T h e d o o r s s h a l l b e s U d i n g d o o r s w i t h
horizontal o r vertical motion, they shall be b o t h
hand- a n d power-operated.
T h e m a x i m u m w i d t h o f the door aperture shall
n o t exceed 1,2 m . F i t t i n g o f d o o r s w i t h t h e a p e r t u r e
w i d t h i n excess o f 1,2 m i s s u b j e c t t o s p e c i a l c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
7.12.5.3 I f t h e d o o r i s h a n d - o p e r a t e d , i t s h a U b e
possible t o m a n u a U y o p e n a n d close t h e d o o r f r o m b o t h
sides i n t h e c l o s e p r o x i m i t y o f t h e d o o r a n d , i n a d d i t i o n ,
close t h e d o o r f r o m a n assessable place a b o v e t h e
bulkhead deck b y means o f a h a n d wheel, handle o r a n y
o t h e r s i m i l a r gear e n s u r i n g t h e s a m e degree o f safety.
I f the door is n o t visible f r o m t h e position above
the b u l k h e a d deck where t h e gear is fitted, indicators
shall be provided showing t h e positions o f t h e h a n d
wheel, k n o b a n d similar gear a t w h i c h t h e d o o r is
o p e n o r closed.
W h e n hand-operated, t h e t i m e necessary f o r a
complete closure o f t h e d o o r shall n o t exceed 9 0 s
w i t h the ship upright.
7.12.5.4 D o o r c o n t r o l k n o b s s h a l l b e f i t t e d o n
either side o f t h e b u l k h e a d a t a m i n i m u m h e i g h t
o f 1,6 m a b o v e d e c k p l a t i n g a n d s o a r r a n g e d a s t o
enable persons passing t h r o u g h t h e d o o r w a y t o h o l d
b o t h the k n o b s i n a position preventing d o o r closure.
T h e direction o fm o v e m e n t o fthe handles i n opening
and closing t h e d o o r shall be i n t h e direction o f d o o r
m o v e m e n t a n d shall be clearly indicated.
7.12.5.5 T h e p o w e r g e a r s h a l l b e c o n t r o l l a b l e
(i.e. d o o r o p e n i n g a n d c l o s i n g s h a l l b e possible) b y
l o c a l c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s o n e i t h e r side o f t h e b u l k h e a d .
Besides being c o n t r o l l e d directly a t t h e d o o r , t h e
p o w e r gear shall also be controllable ( f o rd o o r closure) f r o m t h e m a i n c o n t r o l station.
Remote opening o f a n y door from the m a i n
c o n t r o l station shall n o t be possible.
T h e m a i n control station f o r doors shall bel o cated i n the wheelhouse.
7.12.5.6 T h e p o w e r g e a r s h a l l e n s u r e d o o r c l o s u r e
i n n o t m o r e t h a n 4 0 s a n d n o t less t h a n 2 0 s w i t h t h e
ship upright, as w e l l as a simultaneous closure o f a l l
d o o r s w i t h i n n o t m o r e t h a n 6 0 s.
7.12.5.7 T h e p o w e r g e a r o f t h e d o o r s s h a l l h a v e
either:
a centraUzed hydraulic system w i t h t w o i n dependent p o w e r sources each consisting o f a m o t o r
and p u m p capable o f simultaneously closing a l l
doors. I n addition, there shall be f o r the w h o l e i n stallation hydrauUc accumulators o f sufficient capacity t o operate a l lt h e d o o r s a t least three times, i.e.
closed open closed a t u n f a v o u r a b l e conditions
o f h e e l u p t o 15; o r
an independent hydrauUc system f o r each d o o r
w i t h each p o w e r source consisting o f a m o t o r a n d
p u m p capable o f opening a n d closing the door.
Arrangements
and
Outfit
I n addition, there shall be a hydraulic accumulator

o f sufficient capacity t o operate t h e d o o r a t least
three times, i.e. closed o p e n closed a t u n f a v o u r a b l e c o n d i t i o n s o f h e e l u p t o 15; o r
a n independent electrical system a n d m o t o r f o r
each d o o r w i t h each p o w e r source consisting
o f a m o t o r capable o f opening a n d closing the door.
T h e p o w e r source shall be capable o f being automatically supplied b y a transitional emergency source
o f electrical p o w e r , as required b y 19.1.2.7, P a r t X I
"Electrical E q u i p m e n t " i n the event o f failure o f
either t h e m a i n o r emergency source o f electrical
p o w e r a n d w i t h sufficient capacity t o operate the
d o o r a t least three times, i.e. closed o p e n closed
a t u n f a v o u r a b l e c o n d i t i o n s o f h e e l u p t o 15.
7.12.5.8 D o o r c o n t r o l s , i n c l u d i n g h y d r a u l i c p i p i n g
a n d electric cables, shall be k e p t as close as practicable
to t h e b u l k h e a d i n w h i c h t h e doors are fitted, i n order
to m i n i m i z e the likelihood o f t h e m being involved i n
a n y damage w h i c h t h e ship m a y sustain.
7.12.5.9 E a c h d o o r s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a n a u dible a l a r m , distinct f r o m a n y o t h e r a l a r m i n t h e area,
w h i c h w i l l sound whenever t h e d o o r is closed remotely
b y p o w e r a n d w h i c h s h a l l s o u n d f o r a t l e a s t f i v e seconds, b u t n o t m o r e t h a n t e n seconds, before t h e d o o r
begins t o m o r e , a n d shall continue s o u n d i n g u n t i l t h e
d o o r i s c o m p l e t e l y closed. I n t h e case o f r e m o t e h a n d
operation i tis sufficient for the audible a l a r m t o sound
only w h e n the d o o r is m o v i n g .
I n passenger areas a n d areas o f h i g h a m b i e n t
noise the Register m a y require the audible a l a r m t o
be s u p p l e m e n t e d b y a n i n t e r m i t t e n t v i s u a l signal a t
the door.
7.12.5.10 T h e c e n t r a l o p e r a t i n g c o n s o l e a t t h e
navigation bridge shall have a switch w i t h t w o modes
of control:
a "local control" m o d e w h i c h shall allow a n y
d o o r t o be locally opened a n d closed w i t h o u t automatic closure a n d
a "doors closed" m o d e w h i c h shall allow doors t o
be o p e n e d l o c a l l y a n d shall a u t o m a t i c a l l y reclose t h e
d o o r s u p o n release o f t h e l o c a l c o n t r o l m e c h a n i s m .
T h e switch shall n o r m a l l y be i n the "local
control" position. T h e "doors closed" position shall
only be used i n a n emergency o r f o rtesting purposes.
7.12.5.11 T h e c e n t r a l o p e r a t i n g c o n s o l e a t t h e
navigation bridge shall be provided w i t h a diagram
showing the location o f each door, w i t h visuali n dicators t o s h o w w h e t h e r each d o o r is o p e n o r closed.
A red Ught shall indicate a door fully open a n d a
green Ught shall indicate a d o o r fully closed. W h e n a
d o o r is closed remotely, t h e r e d Ught shall indicate
the intermediate position b y flashing. T h e indicating
circuit shall be independent o f the c o n t r o l circuit f o r
each door. I t shall n o t be possible t o r e m o t e l y o p e n
any d o o r f r o m the central operating console.
211
7.12.5.12 W h e r e t r u n k w a y s o r t u n n e l s f o r a c c e s s
from crew accommodation t o the stokehold, for
piping, o r f o r a n y other purpose are carried through
m a i n transverse watertight bulkheads, they shall be
w a t e r t i g h t . T h e access t o a t least o n e e n d o f e a c h s u c h
t u n n e l o r t r u n k w a y , i f used as a passage a t sea, s h a l l
be t h r o u g h a t r u n k e x t e n d i n g w a t e r t i g h t t o a h e i g h t
s u f f i c i e n t t o p e r m i t access a b o v e t h e m a r g i n l i n e . T h e
access t o t h e o t h e r e n d o f t h e t r u n k w a y o r t u n n e l m a y
be t h r o u g h a w a t e r t i g h t d o o r o f t h e type r e q u i r e d b y
its l o c a t i o n i n t h e ship. S u c h t r u n k w a y s o r tunnels
shall n o t extend t h r o u g h first subdivision b u l k h e a d
abaft the colUsion bulkhead.
7.12.5.13 W h e r e v e n t i l a t i n g t r u n k s i n c o n n e c t i o n
w i t h refrigerated cargo a n d ventilation o r forced
draught trunks are carried t h r o u g h m o r e than one
watertight bulkhead, the means o f closure at such
openings shall be operated b y p o w e r a n d be capable
o f being closed f r o m t h e m a i n c o n t r o l station situated
above t h e b u l k h e a d deck.
7.12.5.14 I f t h e R e g i s t e r i s s a t i s f i e d t h a t s u c h
doors are essential, w a t e r t i g h t d o o r s o f satisfactory
construction m a y be fitted i n watertight bulkheads
d i v i d i n g c a r g o b e t w e e n d e c k spaces. S u c h d o o r s m a y
be h i n g e d , r o l l i n g o r sUding d o o r s b u t shall n o t be
remotely controlled. T h e y shall be fitted at the
h i g h e s t level a n d as f a r f r o m t h e shell p l a t i n g as
practicable, b u t i n n o case s h a l l t h e o u t b o a r d v e r t i c a l
edges be situated a t a distance f r o m t h e shell p l a t i n g
w h i c h i s less t h a n 0 , 2 o f t h e b r e a d t h o f t h e s h i p , as
defined i n 7.12.3.1.
S h o u l d a n y such d o o r s be accessible d u r i n g t h e
v o y a g e , t h e y s h a l l b e fitted w i t h a d e v i c e , w h i c h
prevents unauthorized opening. W h e n i t is proposed
to f i tsuch doors, the n u m b e r a n d arrangements are
subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e Register i n
e a c h p a r t i c u l a r case.
7.12.5.15 P o r t a b l e p l a t e s o n b u l k h e a d s s h a l l n o t
be p e r m i t t e d except i n m a c h i n e r y spaces. T h e R e g ister m a y p e r m i t n o t m o r e t h a n o n e power-operated
sUding watertight d o o r i n each watertight b u l k h e a d
larger t h a n those specified i n 7.12.5.2 t o be substituted f o r these p o r t a b l e plates, p r o v i d e d these
doors are intended t o r e m a i n closed d u r i n g navigat i o n except i n case o f u r g e n t necessity a t t h e discretion o f the master. These doors need n o t meet the
requirements o f 7.12.5.3 regarding c o m p l e t e closure
b y h a n d - o p e r a t e d g e a r i n 9 0 s.
7.12.5.16 F o r p a s s e n g e r s h i p s a n d s p e c i a l p u r p o s e
ships c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 6 0 persons h a v i n g l e n g t h
o f 120 m o r m o r e o r having three o r m o r e m a i n
vertical zones, t h e p o w e r operated doors shall c o m p l y
w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.2.6.8, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o tection" (refer also t o 2.2.6.7.3 o f t h e above P a r t ) .
278
Rules
7.12.6 D o o r s i n s h i p s d e s i g n e d f o r t h e c a r r i a g e o f
vehicles.
d o o r s f i t t e d i n w a t e r t i g h t s u b d i v i s i o n b u l k h e a d s se
p a r a t i n g a cargo space f r o m a n adjacent cargo space
i n ships designed f o r t h e carriage o f vehicles a n d
covered b ytherequirements o f Part V "Subdivision",
if the total n u m b e r o fpersons o n board (excluding
the master a n d t h e members o f the crew o r other
persons employed o r engaged i n a n y capacity o n
b o a r d a ship o n t h ebusiness o f t h a t ship, a n dalso a
child under o n eyear o fage) is n o t greater t h a n t h e
value N determined b y the formula
N = 1 2 + 0,04
where
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
at each corner o f the d o o r o rd o o r section (if any) the

securing devices shall b e fitted.
T h e securing devices o f such d o o r s shall b e de
signed t o w i t h s t a n d t h ef o l l o w i n g forces, i nk N :
F \ f o rsecuring devices fitted a t t h e l o w e r edge o f
the door;
F i f o r securing devices fitted a t t h e u p p e r edge o f
the door;
F f o r s e c u r i n g d e v i c e s fitted a t t h e v e r t i c a l e d g e
o f the door.
These forces shall be d e t e r m i n e d b y t h ef o r m u l a e :
3
_9,8/#!
( f - * )
\
(7.12.6.1)
29,42;
(7.12.6.6-1)
29,42;
(7.12.6.6-2)
A = total deck area, i n m , o f spaces available f o r t h e

stowage o f vehicles where t h eclear height a t t h e
stowage position a n d a tthe entrances t o such spaces
is n o t less t h a n 4 m .
7.12.6.2 T h e d o o r s s p e c i f i e d i n 7 . 1 2 . 6 . 1 m a y b e
fitted a t a n y level i f the Register is satisfied t h a t such
doors a r e essential f o r t h em o v e m e n t o ft h e vehicles
i n t h e ship.
T h e n u m b e r a n d a r r a n g e m e n t o f these d o o r s a r e
7.12.6.3 T h e d o o r s s p e c i f i e d i n 7 . 1 2 . 6 . 1 s h a l l b e
fitted as f a r f r o m t h e shell p l a t i n g as practicable, b u t
i n n o case s h a l l t h e o u t b o a r d v e r t i c a l edge o f the d o o r
be situated a t a distance f r o m t h e shell p l a t i n g t h a t is
less t h a n 0 , 2 o f t h e b r e a d t h o f t h e s h i p , s u c h d i s t a n c e
being measured a t r i g h t angles t o t h ecentreUne o f the
ship a t t h e level o f the subdivision loadline.
7.12.6.4 T h e d o o r s s p e c i f i e d i n 7 . 1 2 . 6 . 1 m a y b e o f
the f o l l o w i n g types: hinged, sliding o rrolling b u t they
should n o t becontrolled remotely. T h e doors shall be
fitted w i t h devices e n s u r i n g watertightness, securing
and locking.
W h e n t h e sealing m a t e r i a l o f t h e d o o r is n o t
classed as n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e (refer t o 1.6.3.1, P a r t V I
"Fire Protection"), t h e gasket shall be suitably pro
tected f r o m t h e effects o f fire b y a m e t h o d a p p r o v e d
by t h e Register.
T h e d o o r s shall be fitted w i t h a device w h i c h
prevents unauthorized opening.
7.12.6.5 T h e d o o r s s p e c i f i e d i n 7 . 1 2 . 6 . 1 s h a l l b e s o
designed that they c o u l d be opened a n dclosed b o t h
i n case o f u n l o a d e d a n d l o a d e d decks, t h e deck d e
flections u n d e r t h e effect o f t h e s t o w e d cargo b e i n g
taken into account.
T h e securing devices o ft h e d o o r shall be so de
signed t h a t account is t a k e n o f t h e deck deflections
u n d e r t h e effect o f t h e s t o w e d cargo r e s u l t i n g i n r e
lative displacement o fthe structural elements o f the
bulkhead a n d the door.
7.12.6.6 W h e r e w a t e r t i g h t n e s s i s e n s u r e d b y
r u b b e r o r o t h e r suitable gaskets a n d securing devices,
*(
_ * )
\) + F - i n i 1 ) ( A hi)] ( 7 . 1 2 . 6 . 6 - 3 )
where
A = clear area o fthe door, i nm ;

Hi = v e r t i c a l d i s t a n c e f r o m t h e l o w e r e d g e o f t h e d o o r
opening to t h e lower edge o f t h e plating o f t h e
b u l k h e a d deck a tthe centreline o fthe ship, i nm , b u t
n o t less t h a n 5 m ;
h= c l e a r h e i g h t o f t h e d o o r , i n m ;
ht= v e r t i c a l d i s t a n c e f r o m t h e s e c u r i n g d e v i c e c o n s i d e r e d
to the upper edge o fthe door, i n m ;
a = half t h e s u m o f t h e vertical distances f r o m t h e
securing device considered t o the nearest upper a n d
lower securing devices, i n m ;
ri\= n u m b e r o f the securing devices fitted o n t h e lower
edge o fthe door;
rt2= n u m b e r o f the securing devices fitted o n t h e u p p e r
edge o fthe door.
W h e n t h e securing device i s u n d e r t h e effect o f t h e

d e s i g n f o r c e F\, F o r F , t h e s t r e s s e s i n i t s p a r t s s h a l n o t
exceed 0 , 5 t i m e s t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress o f m a t e r i a l .
7.12.6.7 T h e o p e r a t i o n o f t h e d o o r s s p e c i f i e d
i n 7.12.6.1 shall b e b y m e a n s o f l o c a l c o n t r o l o n l y .
O n t h e bridge indicators shall be provided t o s h o w
automatically that each d o o r is closed a n d a l l d o o r
fastenings a r e secured.
7.12.6.8 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7 . 1 2 . 2 . 1 t o 7 . 1 2 . 2 . 4
are also appUcable t o d o o r s specified u n d e r 7.12.6.1.
7.12.7 M a n h o l e s i n w a t e r t i g h t s u b d i v i s i o n b u l k h e a d s .
7.12.7.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7.9 r e l a t i n g t o t h e
m a n h o l e s located o n t h e freeboard deck, raised
quarter deck o r t h e first tier o f superstructures are
g e n e r a l l y a p p l i c a b l e t o t h e m a n h o l e s fitted i n t h e
watertight subdivision bulkheads.
N o manholes are permitted:
.1 i n t h e c o l U s i o n b u l k h e a d b e l o w t h e b u l k h e a d
deck f o r ships h a v i n g s u b d i v i s i o n distinguishing
m a r k i n t h eclass n o t a t i o n , a n d b e l o w t h e f r e e b o a r d
deck f o ro t h e r ships;
.2 i n w a t e r t i g h t s u b d i v i s i o n b u l k h e a d s s e p a r a t i n g
a cargo space f r o m a n adjacent cargo space o r a fuel
oil tank.
2
Arrangements
and
Outfit
7.13 C A R G O H A T C H C O V E R S O F B U L K C A R R I E R S , O R E
CARRIERS A N D COMBINATION CARRIERS
7.13.1 T h e d e s i g n o f c a r g o h a t c h c o v e r s f o r b u l k
carriers, o r e carriers a n d c o m b i n a t i o n carriers shall
c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements i n 7.10.1, 7.10.2,
7.10.3.4, 7.10.3.5 a n d 7.10.4.
7.13.2 C a r g o h a t c h c o v e r s s h a l l b e m a d e o f s t e e l .
U s e o f o t h e r materials is subject t o special c o n
s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
7.13.3 T h e p r e s s u r e P , i n k P a , o n t h e h a t c h c o v e r
panels located o n t h efreeboard deck is determined b y
the formulae:
for ships o f 100 m i n l e n g t h a n d above
PWP
P = 34,3 +
where P
P
where
F P
44 4
25;
7.13.5 T h e e f f e c t i v e f l a n g e a r e a A , i n c m , o f t h e
attached plating, t o be considered f o r the yielding
and buckling checks o fp r i m a r y supporting members
or grillages, is o b t a i n e d as t h e s u m o f t h e effective
flange areas o f e a c h side o f t h e g i r d e r w e b
F
A =m0b
F
2 5
- j ) > 34,3
where
t)
(7.13.5)
nf = 2 i f a t t a c h e d p l a t e f l a n g e e x t e n d s o n b o t h s i d e s o f a
girder web;
nf = 1 i f a t t a c h e d p l a t e f l a n g e e x t e n d s o n o n e s i d e o f a
girder w e b only;
t = thickness o f attached plate, m m ;
b f = effective breadth, i n m , o f attached plate flange o n
e a c h side o f a girder w e b a s s u m e d e q u a l t o b, b u t n o t
m o r e t h a n 0,165/;
bp = h a l f d i s t a n c e , i n m , b e t w e e n t h e c o n s i d e r e d p r i m a r y
supporting m e m b e r a n d the adjacent one;
/ = span, i nm , o fprimary supporting members.
e
(7.13.3-1)
nf
= pressure a t the fore perpendicular to b e determined

by the formula
= 49,1 +
(-\
a = 0,0726 - f o r t y p e " B " f r e e b o a r d s h i p s ;
a = 0,356 - f o r s h i p s w i t h r e d u c e d f r e e b o a r d ;
L = s h i p ' s l e n g t h , b u t n o t m o r e t h a n 340 m ;
X = distance, i n m , o f the midlength o f the hatch cover
under consideration from the forward e n d o f L .
F
279
7.13.6 T h e n e t t h i c k n e s s t, i n m m , o f t h e h a t c h
c o v e r t o p p l a t i n g s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n
t = F l5,Zsy/^Z^
(7.13.6)
where F
factor equal to:

1,9 i f r a t i o / >0,8;
1,5 i n o t h e r c a s e s ;
stiffener spacing, i n m ;
p r e s s u r e , i n k P a , a c c o r d i n g t o 7.13.3;
a c c o r d i n g t o 7.13.8;
a c c o r d i n g t o 7.13.4
W h e r e a p o s i t i o n 1 h a t c h w a y is located a t least
one superstructure standard height higher t h a n the
freeboard deck, t h e pressure P m a y be t a k e n equal
to 34,3 k P a ;
f o r s h i p s less t h a n 1 0 0 m i n l e n g t h
T
P=
15,8 + | ( l - ^ ) - 3 , 6 ^
> 0,195^+14,9.
(7.13.3-2)
W h e r e t w o o r m o r e panels are connected b y

h i n g e s , e a c h i n d i v i d u a l p a n e l s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d se
parately.
7.13.4 T h e n o r m a l a a n d s h e a r z s t r e s s e s i n t h e
h a t c h cover structures shall n o t exceed t h e p e r m i s
sible values:
a
o" = 0 , % R H ,
a
w h e r e Re
= u p p e r yield stress o f the hatch c o v e r material.
T h e n o r m a l stressing c o m p r e s s i o n o f t h e attached
flange o f p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s shall n o t exceed
0,8 t i m e s t h e c r i t i c a l b u c k l i n g stress o f t h e s t r u c t u r e a c
c o r d i n g t o t h e calculations given i n 7.13.9 t o 7.13.11.
T h e stresses i n h a t c h c o v e r s t h a t a r e d e s i g n e d as a
grillage o f l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d transverse p r i m a r y sup
porting members shall be determined b y a grillage o r
a finite element analysis.
W h e n a b e a m o r a grillage analysis is used, t h e
secondary stiffeners shall n o t be included i n t h e at
tached flange area o f the p r i m a r y members.
W h e n c a l c u l a t i n g t h e s t r e s s e s a a n d , t h e n e t
scantlings ( n o allowance f o r c o r r o s i o n a n d w e a r ) o f
hatch cover structure elements shall be used.
j: =
p =
=
<y =
a
a n d n o t less t h a n 1 p e r c e n t o f t h e s t i f f e n e r s p a
cing o r 6 m m , w h i c h e v e r is greater.
7.13.7 T h e r e q u i r e d m i n i m u m s e c t i o n m o d u l u s Z ,
i n c m , o f s e c o n d a r y stiffeners o f t h e h a t c h c o v e r t o p plates,
based o n stiffener n e t m e m b e r thickness, are g i v e n b y
3
lOOOfsp
(7.13.7)
12owhere
/ =
secondary stiffener span, i n m , t o b e t a k e n a s the spacing

o f primary supporting m e m b e r s o r the distance b e t w e e n a
primary supporting m e m b e r a n d the edge support, a s
a p p l i c a b l e . W h e n b r a c k e t s a r e fitted a t b o t h e n d s o f a l l
secondary stiffener spans, the secondary stiffener s p a n m a y
b e r e d u c e d b y a n a m o u n t e q u a l to 2/3 o f t h e m i n i m u m
b r a c k e t s a r m l e n g t h , b u t n o t g r e a t e r t h a n 10 p e r c e n t o f t h e
gross span, for each bracket;
,s = s e c o n d a r y s t i f f e n e r s p a c i n g , i n m ;
p = p r e s s u r e , i n k P a , a c c o r d i n g t o 7.13.3;
<y = a c c o r d i n g t o 7.13.4.
a
T h e n e t section m o d u l u s o f t h e s e c o n d a r y stif
feners shall be d e t e r m i n e d based o n a n attached plate
w i d t h assumed equal t o t h e stiffener spacing.
7.13.8 T h e s e c t i o n m o d u l u s v a l u e a n d w e b
thickness o f p r i m a r y supporting members, based o n
m e m b e r n e t thickness, shall be such that t h e n o r m a l
stress i n b o t h flanges a n d t h e shear stress i n t h e
w e b d o n o t exceed t h e permissible values a a n d z,
respectively, defined according t o 7.13.4.
The width o f the primary supporting members
f l a n g e s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 4 0 p e r c e n t o f t h e i r d e p t h
for laterally u n s u p p o r t e d spans greater t h a n 3,0 m .
a
280
Rules
T r i p p i n g brackets attached t o t h e flange m a y be

considered as a lateral support f o rp r i m a r y support
ing members.
T h e flange o u t s t a n d shall n o t exceed 15times t h e
flange thickness.
7.13.9 T h e c o m p r e s s i v e s t r e s s a i n t h e h a t c h
cover plate panels, induced b yt h ebending o f p r i m a r y
s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s p a r a l l e l t o t h e d i r e c t i o n o f seco n - d a r y stiffeners, shall n o t exceed 0,8 times t h e cri
t i c a l b u c k l i n g s t r e s s a \, t o b e e v a l u a t e d a s f o l l o w s :
where
<y
where o >=
<*
where
I ,
m i n i m u m u p p e r yield stress o f the material, i n N / m m ;

3,6(
CP
6
w h e r e =
lOOOi
-10 ;
= n u m b e r o fh a l f waves, given b y the following table:
E = m o d u l u s o f elasticity, i n N / m m ; t o b e a s s u m e d
2,06-10 f o r steel;
t = n e t thickness o fplate panel, i n m m ;
,s = s p a c i n g o f s e c o n d a r y s t i f f e n e r s , i n m .
5
0 < K ^ 4
4<:^36
m = 1
T h e m e a n c o m p r e s s i v e stress a i n e a c h o f t h e
hatch cover plate panels, induced b y t h ebending o f
primary supporting members perpendicular t o the
direction o f secondary stiffeners, shall n o t exceed 0,8
t i m e s t h e critical b u c k l i n g stress O c i t o b e e v a l u a t e d
as f o l l o w s :
o"c2 = , w h e n a m < ^ y ; o r
10"
36
ftbfhw
0,9mE(
f o r flat b a r secondary stiffeners;
10"
f o r T-section secondary stiffeners;
[tj(b
12(*/+ h j
2
+ 2b h
f
+ Ah )
+ 3tJ} h ]m
for angles
a n d b u l b s e c o n d a r y stiffener;
=
lOOOi
hw tw
h =
2
m being determined
according to value
m i n i m u m u p p e r yield stress o f the material, i n N / m m ;
= 3
b hl
o>
> -
,3 3
nw tw
where o >=
= 2
{m-Yfm <K^m {m+\f
(7.13.9-2)
o"c2 = O > [ 1 - O > / ( 4 O \ E 2 ) ] , w h e n
36<^144
/, = s e c t i o n a l m o m e n t o f i n e r t i a , i n c m , o f t h e s e c o n d a r y
stiffener a b o u t its c o n n e c t i o n w i t h the plating;
36~
am
E = m o d u l u s o felasticity, i n N / m m ;
= m o m e n t o finertia, i nc m , o fthe secondary stiffener,
including a neffective flange e q u a l t o t h e spacing o f
secondary stiffeners;
A = cross-sectional area, i nc m , o fthe s e c o n d a r y stiffener,
including a neffective flange e q u a l t o t h e spacing o f
secondary stiffeners;
/ = s p a n , i nm , o fthe s e c o n d a r y stiffener;
?1
t
where
> -o >y
EX
Ships
o > = m i n i m u m u p p e r yield stress o f the material, i n N / m m ;

ideal elastic b u c k l i n g stress, i n N / m m , o f t h e
secondary stiffener t o b e a s s u m e d a s t h e m i n i m u m
b e t w e e n a n d v a l u e s ;
0,00
(7.13.9-1)
o " c i = >[1->/(4-2)], w h e n
of Sea-Going
ES
o " c i = \ w h e n \ < ^ ; o r
and Construction
10"
,3
where m = [1 + ]
'j
;
s
'
'
E = m o d u l u s o felasticity, i n N / m m ;
t = n e t thickness o fplate panel, i n m m ;
s = length o fthe shorter side o fthe plate panel, i n m ;
4 = length o fthe longer side o fthe plate panel, i n m ;
ty = r a t i o b e t w e e n t h e s m a l l e s t a n d l a r g e s t c o m p r e s s i v e s t r e s s ;
= factor equal to:
1,3 w h e n p l a t i n g i s s t i f f e n e d b y p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g
members;
1,21 w h e n p l a t i n g i s s t i f f e n e d b y s e c o n d a r y s t i f f e n e r s
of angle o rT type;
1,1 w h e n p l a t i n g i s s t i f f e n e d b y s e c o n d a r y s t i f f e n e r s o f
b u l b type;
1,05 w h e n p l a t i n g i s s t i f f e n e d b y f l a t b a r .
polar m o m e n t o f inertia, i n c m , o f t h e secondary

stiffener a b o u t its c o n n e c t i o n w i t h the plating;
Hw tw
= (
for flat b a r s e c o n d a r y stiffeners;
2
+ h bftf)\0
-4
f o r flanged secondary stiffeners;
m o m e n t o finertia, i nc m , o fthe s e c o n d a r y stiffener

w i t h o u t a n effective flange;
7.13.10 T h e c o m p r e s s i v e s t r e s s i n t h e t o p f l a n g e
o f secondary stiffeners, i n d u c e d b y t h e b e n d i n g o f
primary supporting members parallel t o the direction
o f secondary stiffeners, shall n o texceed 0,8 times t h e
c r i t i c a l b u c k l i n g s t r e s s a s, t o b e e v a l u a t e d a s f o l
lows:
hw tw
= 1 0 for flat b a r secondary stiffeners;
= [h P
w
where h
+bfij{\
0,63-^-)]10"* f o r
flanged
s e c o n d a r y stiffeners
= height a n d n e t thickness, i nm m , o fthe secondary

stiffener, respectively;
bf, tf = w i d t h a n d n e t t h i c k n e s s , i n m m , o f t h e s e c o n d a r y
s t i f f e n e r b o t t o m flange, r e s p e c t i v e l y ;
,s = s p a c i n g o f s e c o n d a r y s t i f f e n e r s , i n m ;
m
C=
10-
341 +
where
1,33*4
1000J4
= 1 tip b u t n o t less t h a n z e r o . F o r
flanged
secondary
o"cs = &ES , w h e n a
<
ES
o"cs = > [ 1 - > / ( 4 - 5 ) ] , w h e n a
(7.13.10)
or
E
> o>
w h e r e f o r,r e f e r t o 7 . 1 3 . 8 ;
for
CT I,
r e f e r t o 7.13.9;
t = net thickness, i nm m , o fthe hatch cover plate panel.
Arrangements
and
Outfit
281
F o r flat b a r s e c o n d a r y s t i f f e n e r s a n d b u c k l i n g s t i f
f e n e r s , t h e r a t i o h/t s h a l l n o t b e g r e a t e r t h a n 1 5 A ; '
0
w h e r e h, t = height a n d n e t thickness o fthe stiffener, respectively;

= 235/o>;
o > = m i n i m u m u p p e r yield stress o fthe material, i n N / m m .
w
7.13.11 T h e s h e a r s t r e s s i n t h e h a t c h c o v e r p r i
m a r y s u p p o r t i n g m e m b e r s w e b panels shall n o t exceed
0,8 t i m e s t h e c r i t i c a l b u c k l i n g stress z , t o b e d e
termined as follows:
c
7.13.14 W h e r e t h e p a c k i n g g a s k e t i s c o m p r e s s e d
to t h e m a x i m u m depth possible a n d i t spressure ex
ceeds 5 0 0 0 N / m , t h e area o f securing devices as d e
termined i n accordance w i t h 7.13.13, shall be
increased i na relevant p r o p o r t i o n .
7.13.15 T h e s t i f f n e s s o f t h e c o v e r c o r n e r s s h a l l b e
sufficient t o m a i n t a i n a n adequate pressure o f t h e
p a c k i n g gasket b e t w e e n t h e securing devices. T h e
cross-sectional inertia m o m e n t o f the corner members
o f t h e c o v e r s /, i n c m , s h a l l b e n o t l e s s t h a n t h a t
determined b y theformula
4
tc=
=
where
(7.13.11)
1E, whenx <y;

-1FI(4IE)],
when i
>
I=6pa*xl0~
o > = m m i m u m u p p e r yield stress o fthe material, i n N / m m ;

x
>/3;
w h e r e E = m o d u l u s o felasticity, i n N / m m ,
t o 2,06-10 f o r s t e e l ;
tprn =
thickness, in m m , of primary
k, = 5,35 + 4,/(/0 ;
a = greater dimension, i n m , o f w
supporting member;
d = smaller dimension, i n m , o f w
supporting member.
t ob ea s s u m e d equal
n e t
supporting member;
e bpanel o f primary
e bpanel o f primary
For p r i m a r y supporting members perpendicular

to t h e direction o f secondary stiffeners o r f o r h a t c h
covers built w i t h o u t secondary stiffeners, a presumed
square panel o f d i m e n s i o n d shall be t a k e n f o r t h e
d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h e stress z. I n s u c h a case, t h e
average shear stress z b e t w e e n t h e v a l u e s c a l c u l a t e d
at t h e ends o f this panel shall be considered.
7.13.12 T h e v e r t i c a l d e f l e c t i o n o f p r i m a r y s u p
p o r t i n g m e m b e r s shall be n o t m o r e t h a n 0,0056/,
w h e r e / is t h e greatest span o f p r i m a r y s u p p o r t i n g
members.
7.13.13 T h e f r e e s e c t i o n a l a r e a A , i n c m , o f t h e
s e c u r i n g d e v i c e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n d e t e r m i n e d b y
the f o r m u l a
c
= 1,4a//
where
(7.13.13-1)
a = distance b e t w e e n securing devices, i nm , w h i c h i n a n y

case shall n o t b e a d o p t e d less t h a n 2 m ;
/ = factor determined b y the formula
7.13.16 W h e r e h y d r a u U c s e c u r i n g d e v i c e s a r e
applied, t h e securing devices shall b e m e c h a n i c a l l y
lockable i n closed p o s i t i o n i n t h e event o f loss o f t h e
hydraulic fluid.
7.13.17 H a t c h c o v e r s s h a l l b e f i t t e d w i t h s t o p p e r s
designed f o r l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d transverse design loads
o f 175 k P a .
W h e r e t h e design a n d arrangement o f t h e fore
castle o n a ship d o n o t m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s i n
3.3.5.2.1, P a r t I I " H u l l " , t h e stoppers o f the foremost
hatch cover
(hatch N o . 1) shall be designed f o r a
longitudinal load o f2 3 0 k P a acting o n the f o r w a r d
end o f the N o . 1 hatch cover.
7.13.18 T h e s t r e s s e s i n s t o p p e r s a n d t h e i r a d
jacent structures shall n o t exceed t h epermissible v a
lues equal t o 0,8o>, w h e r e o > i s m i n i m u m u p p e r yield
stress o f t h e m a t e r i a l .
7.13.19 F o r t h e p l a t i n g a n d s t i f f e n e r s o f a l l t y p e
hatch covers, excepting the double skin, the corrosion
addition shall be assumed equal t o 2 m m . F o r double
skin hatch covers, t h e corrosion addition shall
b e 2 m m f o r t h e t o p a n d b o t t o m p l a t i n g a n d 1,5 m m
for t h e i n t e r n a l structures.
7.13.20 I n b u l k c a r r i e r s o f 1 5 0 m i n l e n g t h a n d
upwards, carrying soUd b u l k cargoes h a v i n g a density
o f 1000 k g / m a n dabove, contracted for construction
before 1 A p r i l 2006, theprotection o f the structure o f
cargo holds f r o m grab wire damage during loading
and unloading operations shall be achieved b y
structural design features:
wire rope grooving i nw a y o f cargo holds openings
is t o b e p r e v e n t e d b y f i t t i n g s u i t a b l e p r o t e c t i o n s u c h a s
h a l f - r o u n d b a r o n t h e h a t c h side girders (i.e. u p p e r
p o r t i o n o f t o p side t a n k p l a t e s ) / h a t c h e n d b e a m s i n
cargo h o l d o r upper p o r t i o n o fhatch coamings.
Such
ships
shall have
the distinguishing
m a r k G R A B ( X ) i n t h e class n o t a t i o n (refer t o 2.2.28,
Part I "Classification").
3
/ = ( J ^
where
(7.13.13-2)
/235)*
R e H = t h e upper yield strength o f t h e securing device

material, i n M P a , a n d shall n o tb e adopted greater
t h a n 0,7 o f t h e t e n s i l e s t r e n g t h o f t h e m a t e r i a l ;
e = index equal to:
0,75 f o r R > 2 3 5 M P a ;
1,00 f o r
^ 235 M P a .
e
F o r h a t c h covers a n d h a t c h cover sections h a v i n g

a n area i n excess o f 5 m , t h e active d i a m e t e r o f bars
a n d b o l t s o f t h e s e c u r i n g devices s h a l l n o t b e less
than 19 m m .
2
(7.13.15)
where p = pressure o f the packing gasket w h e n compressed to the

m a x i m u m depth possible f o r t h e accepted design,
i n N / m , b u t n o t l e s s t h a n 5000 N / m ;
a = distance b e t w e e n securing devices, i n m .
282
Rules
l . U A C C E S S T OS P A C E S T H EC A R G O A R E A
O F O I LT A N K E R S A N DB U L K C A R R I E R S
7.14.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7 . 1 4 a p p l y t o o i l
tankers o f 5 0 0 gross tonnage a n d above a n d t o b u l k
carriers o f 2 0 0 0 0 gross tonnage a n d above.
7.14.2 M e a n s o f a c c e s s a n d p a s s a g e s o n s h i p s r e
See circular 819
ferred t o i n 7.14.1 shall c o m p l y w i t h the requirements o f
I M O resolutions M S C . 1 3 4 ( 7 6 ) , M C S . 1 5 1 ( 7 8 ) a n d
M S C . 1 5 8 ( 7 8 ) \ as w e l l as I A C S U I S C 1 9 1 ( R e v . 5
M a y 2 0 1 3 ) , set o u t i n t h e S u p p l e m e n t t o rules o f R u s s i a n
Maritime Register o f Shipping " I A C S Unified Inter
pretations a n d R e c o m m e n d a t i o n s " (published i n elec
t r o n i c f o r m as a separate e d i t i o n ) .
7.15 A D D I T I O N A L R E Q U I R E M E N T S F O R O P E N I N G S
A N D T H E I R C L O S I N G A P P L I A N C E S I NR O - R O S H I P S
7.15.1 W h e r e v e h i c l e r a m p s a r e i n s t a l l e d t o g i v e
access t o spaces b e l o w t h e b u l k h e a d deck, t h e i r o p e n i n g s
shall b e able t o b e closed weathertight t o prevent ingress
o f water below, alarmed a n d indicated t o t h e navigation
bridge.
7.15.2 T h e R e g i s t e r m a y p e r m i t t h e f i t t i n g o f
p a r t i c u l a r accesses t o spaces b e l o w t h e b u l k h e a d d e c k
p r o v i d e d they are necessary f o r t h e essential w o r k i n g
o f t h e s h i p , e. g . t h e m o v e m e n t o f m a c h i n e r y a n d
stores, subject t o s u c h accesses b e i n g m a d e w a t e r
tight, alarmed a n dindicated t o the n a v i g a t i o n bridge.
7.15.3 S u b j e c t t o p r o v i s i o n s o f p a r a g r a p h s 7 . 1 5 . 1
a n d 7 . 1 5 . 2 a l l accesses t h a t l e a d t o spaces b e l o w t h e
bulkhead deck shall have a lowest p o i n t w h i c h is
n o t less t h a n 2 , 5 m a b o v e t h e b u l k h e a d d e c k .
7.15.4 I n d i c a t o r s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d o n t h e n a v i
gating bridge f o r a l l shell doors, loading doors a n d
o t h e r closing appliances w h i c h , i f left o p e n o r n o t
p r o p e r l y secured, c o u l d lead t o f l o o d i n g o f a special
c a t e g o r y space o r r o - r o cargo space. T h e i n d i c a t o r
s y s t e m s h a l l b e d e s i g n e d o n t h e f a i l safe p r i n c i p l e a n d
shall show b y light alarms i f t h e d o o r is n o t fully
closed o r i f a n y o f the securing arrangements is n o t i n
place a n d fully locked, a n d b y audible a l a r m s i f such
d o o r o r c l o s i n g a p p l i a n c e s b e c o m e o p e n o r t h e se
curing arrangements become unsecured.
T h e indicator panel o n t h e navigation bridge shall
be equipped w i t h a m o d e selection f u n c t i o n " h a r b o u r /
sea v o y a g e " s o a r r a n g e d t h a t a n a u d i b l e a l a r m i s g i v e n
o n t h e n a v i g a t i o n bridge i f t h e ship leaves h a r b o u r w i t h
the b o w doors, inner doors, stern r a m p o r a n y other
side s h e l l d o o r s n o t closed o r a n y c l o s i n g device n o t i n
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
the correct position. T h e p o w e r supply f o r the indicator

system shall be independent o f the power supply f o r
operating a n d securing t h e doors.
7.15.5 T e l e v i s i o n s u r v e i l l a n c e a n d a w a t e r l e a k a g e
system shall be arranged t o provide a n indication t o
the n a v i g a t i o n bridge a n d t o t h e engine c o n t r o l sta
tion o f a n y leakage t h r o u g h inner a n d outer b o w
doors, stern doors o r a n y other shell doors w h i c h
c o u l d lead t o f l o o d i n g o f special c a t e g o r y spaces o r
r o - r o c a r g o spaces.
7.15.6 S p e c i a l c a t e g o r y s p a c e s a n d r o - r o c a r g o
spaces s h a l l b e c o n t i n u o u s l y p a t r o l l e d o r m o n i t o r e d
b y effective means, such as television surveillance, so
that a n y m o v e m e n t o f vehicles i n adverse weather
c o n d i t i o n s a n d u n a u t h o r i z e d access o f p a s s e n g e r s
thereto c a n be detected whilst t h e ship is u n d e r w a y .
7.15.7 D o c u m e n t e d o p e r a t i n g p r o c e d u r e s f o r
closing a n d securing a l l shell doors, loading doors
a n d o t h e r closing appUances w h i c h , i f left o p e n o r n o t
p r o p e r l y secured c o u l d lead t o f l o o d i n g o f special
c a t e g o r y space o r r o - r o cargo space, s h a l l be k e p t o n
b o a r d a n d posted a t a n appropriate place.
7.15.8 B e s i d e s s p e c i f i e d i n 7 . 1 5 . 7 t h e M a n u a l o n
operation a n d repair o f doors i n shell plating shall be
kept onboard containing the following information:
m a i n particulars a n d structural drawings o f
doors;
d o o r o p e r a t i o n safety precautions;
ship characteristics;
d o o r design loads;
manufacturer's recommendations for equipment
testing;
d e s c r i p t i o n o f e q u i p m e n t o f b o w , side a n d s t e r n
doors, internal b o w doors, central power station,
indication panel o n navigation bridge, c o n t r o l panel
in engine r o o m ;
operating characteristics: permissible angles o f
h e e l / t r i m w i t h / w i t h o u t cargo as w e l l as permissible
angles o f h e e l / t r i m d u r i n g use o f doors;
door operating instruction;
d o o r o p e r a t i n g i n s t r u c t i o n i n case o f e m e r g e n c y ;
operation a n d repair o f doors: description a n d
deadlines o f current repair, occuring failures a n d
their acceptable e l i m i n a t i o n , manufacturer's instruc
tions f o roperation a n d repair o f doors;
record b o o k o fexaminations including survey o f
securing, l o c k i n g a n d s u p p o r t i n g devices, repair a n d
replacement.
T h e above m a n u a l o n operation a n d repair o f
doors i n shell plating shall be submitted f o r the
Register approval.
* R e f e r t o C o l l e c t i o n o f I M O R e s o l u t i o n s P e r t a i n i n g t o t h e R S A c t i v i t y , N o . 7 , 2004, a n d N o . 8 , 2 0 0 5 .
Arrangements
and
Outfit
283
8 ARRANGEMENT AND EQUIPMENT OF SHIP'S SPACES, VARIOUS

EQUIPMENT, ARRANGEMENTS AND OUTFIT
8.1
G E N E R A L
8.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e a r r a n g e m e n t a n d
e q u i p m e n t o f m a c h i n e r y spaces are specified i n
P a r t V I I " M a c h i n e r y Installations" and those relati n g t o r e f r i g e r a t i n g m a c h i n e r y spaces, r e f r i g e r a n t
s t o r e r o o m s , as w e l l as r e f r i g e r a t e d c a r g o spaces are
set f o r t h i n P a r t X I I " R e f r i g e r a t i n g P l a n t s " .
8.1.2 I n b e r t h - c o n n e c t e d s h i p s , t h e a r r a n g e m e n t
a n d e q u i p m e n t o f spaces, v a r i o u s devices a n d
equipment must comply w i t h the relevant requirem e n t s o f 8.5 a n d 8.6.
F u r t h e r m o r e , berth-connected ships w h i c h are
u s e d as h o t e l s o r h o s t e l s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s set o u t i n 8.5 as i n t h e case o f p a s s e n g e r
ships.
Besides, a berth-connected ship shall h a v e at least
t w o c o m p a n i o n l a d d e r s f i t t e d as f a r a w a y f r o m e a c h
o t h e r as possible. T h e c o m p a n i o n l a d d e r s s h a l l be
n o t less t h a n 0 , 2 m w i d e w h e r e t h e t o t a l o f p a s s e n g e r s
a n d c r e w o n b o a r d does n o t exceed 50.
F o r each 10 persons above 50, the c o m p a n i o n
ladder b r e a d t h shall be increased b y 5 c m .
8.2 L O C A T I O N O F S P A C E S
8.2.1 T h e c h a r t r o o m s h a l l b e l o c a t e d i n a s p a c e
adjacent to the wheelhouse. T h e chart r o o m a n d the
w h e e l h o u s e m a y be s i t u a t e d i n a c o m m o n space.
8.2.2 N o a c c o m m o d a t i o n s p a c e s s h a l l b e a r ranged f o r w a r d o f the collisionbulkhead and abaft o f
the afterpeak b u l k h e a d b e l o w the b u l k h e a d deck.
S3
8.3.1
NAVIGATION
BRIDGE
General.
8.3.1.1 T h e s h i p ' s c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s h a l l b e l o c a t e d
i n a n enclosed space o f the w h e e l h o u s e o n the n a v i g a t i o n bridge. T h e n a v i g a t i o n bridge shall be located
so as t o e n s u r e :
proper visual c o n t r o l o f the ship's r u n n i n g ;
g o o d visibility w i t h m a x i m u m v i e w o f w a t e r surface;
g o o d a u d i b i l i t y o f s o u n d signals o f the app r o a c h i n g ships;
for tugs, possibility o f visual c o n t r o l o f t o w Une
during towing operations.
I t is r e c o m m e n d e d t o a r r a n g e the steering c o n t r o l
station at the ship's centreline.
8.3.1.2 V i s i b i l i t y f r o m t h e n a v i g a t i o n b r i d g e s h a l l
c o m p l y w i t h r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.2, P a r t V " N a v i g a tional E q u i p m e n t " o f Rules for the E q u i p m e n t
o f Sea-Going Ships.
8.4 E Q U I P M E N T O F D R Y C A R G O
HOLDS
8.4.1 W h e n i n s h i p s n o t h a v i n g d o u b l e b o t t o m
w o o d e n ceiling is placed o n t o p o f the f l o o r s , i t s h a l l
be soUd a n d s h a l l e x t e n d u p t o t h e bilge. T h e ceiUng is
r e c o m m e n d e d t o be m a d e o f p o r t a b l e sections o f such
d i m e n s i o n s a n d so c o n s t r u c t e d as t o a l l o w o f t h e i r
ready r e m o v a l at a n y place.
T h e t h i c k n e s s o f a ceiUng s h a l l be:
a t l e a s t 4 0 m m f o r s h i p s o f 3 0 m i n l e n g t h a n d less;
at least 60 m m f o r ships o v e r 30 m i n length;
at least 7 0 m m u n d e r cargo h a t c h w a y s .
8.4.2 W h e n i n s h i p s h a v i n g d o u b l e b o t t o m w o o d e n
ceiUng is fitted, i t shaU h a v e a thickness as f o U o w s :
at least 50 m m f o r ships o f 60 m i n l e n g t h a n d
less;
at least 65 m m f o r ships o v e r 60 m i n length.
T h e appUcation o f the ceiUng made f r o m synthetic m a t e r i a l is subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y
t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
8.4.3 W h e r e c a r g o i s d i s c h a r g e d b y g r a b s o r o t h e r
mechanisms, the thickness o f the w o o d e n ceiUng fitted u n d e r cargo h a t c h w a y s shall be d o u b l e d .
8.4.4 I n h o l d s i n t e n d e d f o r c a r r i a g e o f g r a i n a n d
other b u l k cargoes the w o o d e n ceiUng o n the inner
b o t t o m o r , i n case t h e l a t t e r is o m i t t e d , o n t h e t o p o f
f l o o r s , s h a l l b e fitted s o a s t o p r e v e n t w e l l s , b i l g e s a n d
suction pipes o f the bilge system f r o m clogging.
8.4.5 T h e w o o d e n c e i l i n g s h a l l n o t b e l a i d d i r e c t l y
o n the i n n e r b o t t o m m e t a l p l a t i n g , b u t shall be e m bedded i n a b i t u m i n u o u s o r epoxy c o m p o s i t i o n approved by the Register, o r placed o n battens
o f 25 to 30 m m i n thickness along the floors. T h e
w o o d e n c e i U n g o v e r t h e bilges s h a l l be p l a c e d so as t o
be readily r e m o v a b l e (refer also t o 7.6.9, P a r t V I I I
"Systems and Piping").
8.4.6 I t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t t h e c a r g o b a t t e n s
m a d e o f w o o d o r m e t a l s h a l l b e fitted o n s i d e s i n
h o l d s a n d spaces i n t e n d e d f o r carriage o f g e n e r a l
c a r g o e s . T h e t h i c k n e s s o f w o o d e n b a t t e n s s h a l l be as
follows:
284
Rules
a t l e a s t 4 0 m m f o r s h i p s o f 7 0 m i n l e n g t h a n d less;
at least 5 0m m f o r ships o fl e n g t h exceeding 7 0 m .
The distance between adjacent battens shall n o t
exceed 3 0 5 m m .
T h e b a t t e n s s h a l l b e a t t a c h e d t o side f r a m i n g so
as t o b e r e a d i l y r e m o v a b l e a n d replaceable.
8.4.7 A l l p r o j e c t i n g p a r t s o f v a r i o u s e q u i p m e n t i n
the h o l d s ( m a n h o l e s , a i r pipes, s o u n d i n g pipes, etc.)
shall be p r o t e c t e d w i t h w o o d e n screens, grids, chutes,
etc. i n places subject t o i m p a c t s o f cargoes, g r a b s o r
o t h e r h o i s t i n g devices. R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r l a y i n g pipe
lines i n cargo h o l d s a r e given i n 5.3, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n dPiping".
8.4.8 C e l l u l a r g u i d e m e m b e r s f o r t h e c a r r i a g e o f
containers i n holds.
8.4.8.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 8 . 4 . 8 a p p l y t o t h e
cellular guide members used f o rt h e carriage o f containers, manufactured i n accordance w i t h Rules f o r
the Construction o fContainers, i ntheholds o f cargo
ships.
8.4.8.2 C e l l u l a r g u i d e m e m b e r s c o m p r i s e u p r i g h t s
a n d h o r i z o n t a l shores arranged breadthwise a n d
lengthwise. I n the holds, t h e cellular guide members
may be removable o r permanent.
8.4.8.3 C e l l u l a r g u i d e m e m b e r s s h a l l n o t b e i n tegrated i n the hull structure. T h e y shall be so designed t h a t n o stresses a r e e x e r t e d o n t h e m w h e n t h e
hull comes under bending o r torsion.
8.4.8.4 C e l l u l a r g u i d e m e m b e r s s h a l l b e d e s i g n e d
t o w i t h s t a n d stresses d u e t o t h e forces F a n d F a f fecting t h e gravity centre o f each container, w h i c h
shall be determined b y t h e formulae:
lengthwise
x
F = mga ,
x
i nN ;
(8.4.8.4-1)
breadthwise
F = mga ,
y
where
i nN ,
(8.4.8.4-2)
m = m a x i m u m gross m a s s o f container, i nk g ;
g = g r a v i t y a c c e l e r a t i o n , g = 9,81 m / s ;
a , a = dimensionless accelerations to b e determined i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.7, t h e c o o r d i n a t e s o f x a n d z
being determined u p t o t h e gravity centre o f each
container volume.
2
The forces F a n dF shall be d e t e r m i n e d f o r each

container, a n d t h r o u g h t h e f o u r relevant corner fittings o f t h e e n d o r side w a l l t h e y a r e u n i f o r m l y distributed
among
the uprights.
By way of
simplification, m a x i m u m F a n d F values m a y be
adopted f o reach container. W h e r e a n u m b e r o f adjoining containers are supported b y a pair o f u p rights, t h e F a n d F values f o r t h e particular
container tier shall be s u m m e d u p a n d distributed
a m o n g t h e respective uprights.
x
F r i c t i o n forces arising w h e r e t h e corner fittings o f

containers t o u c h each other o r t h e inner b o t t o m shall
be i g n o r e d .
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
8.4.8.5 T h e f o r c e s r e s u l t a n t f r o m l o a d s t o b e d e t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h 8.4.8.4, w h e r e t h e c o n t a i n e r

c o r n e r fittings rest u p o n t h e u p r i g h t s , shall n o t e x ceed 1 5 0 k N p e r fitting b r e a d t h w i s e o r 7 5 k N p e r fitting
lengthwise.
8.4.8.6 W h e r e t h e a t t a c h m e n t o f u p r i g h t s t o t h e
h u l l structures is n o t considered as f i r m fixing (free
resting, flexible fixing, etc.), t h e cellular guide m e m bers shall be calculated as three-dimensional frames.
Where the attachment o f uprights t o the hull
s t r u c t u r e s c a n b e c o n s i d e r e d a s f i r m fixing, p a r t i c u l a r
vertical surfaces o f cellular guide m e m b e r s m a y be
calculated as plane frames.
T h e stresses i n t h e c e l l u l a r g u i d e m e m b e r c o m p o n e n t s shall n o t exceed 0,8 t i m e s t h e u p p e r yield
stress o f t h e i r m a t e r i a l .
The terms o f calculating the stability o f cellular
guide m e m b e r components shall be f o u n d u n der 8.4.8.14.
8.4.8.7 I n v i e w o f t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s u n d e r 8 . 4 . 8 . 6 ,
the displacement o f t h e resting points o f corner fittings u p o n t h e u p r i g h t s shall n o t exceed 2 5 m m
breadthwise o r 4 0 m m lengthwise.
8.4.8.8 W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e t h i c k n e s s o f t h e
u p r i g h t s c o m p o n e n t s , t h e thickness o f t h o s e especially subject t o w e a r shall be increased b y 5 m m a n d
equal t o a t least 1 2 m m .
8.4.8.9 W h e r e t h e u p r i g h t s c o m p r i s e s e p a r a t e
a n g u l a r s e c t i o n s , t h e y s h a l l b e firmly s e c u r e d t o e a c h
other w i t h h o r i z o n t a l plates a t t h e resting points o f
c o n t a i n e r c o r n e r fittings a n d a t l e a s t h a l f w a y b e t w e e n
those points.
8.4.8.10 A t t h e u p p e r e n d s o f t h e u p r i g h t s , d e v i c e s s h a l l b e fitted t o f a c i l i t a t e t h e i n s e r t i o n o f c o n tainers into t h e stowage frames.
8.4.8.11 U p r i g h t s s h a l l , s o f a r a s p o s s i b l e w i t h o u t
notches, be attached t o transverse a n d longitudinal
bulkheads b y m e a n s o f shear- a n d bend-stiff m e m bers.
8.4.8.12 T h e t o t a l m a r g i n b e t w e e n t h e e x t e r n a l
scantlings o f containers a n d t h e i n t e r n a l uprights
surfaces shall n o t exceed 2 5 m m breadthwise o r
40 m m lengthwise.
W h e n fitting t h e u p r i g h t s , t h e d e v i a t i o n f r o m t h e
straight U n e shall n o t exceed 5 m m .
8.4.8.13 T r a n s v e r s e h o r i z o n t a l a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l
h o r i z o n t a l shores serve t o c o n n e c t t h e stand-alone
uprights t o each o t h e r a n d t o secure t h e m t o vertical
h u l l structures. T h e h o r i z o n t a l shores shall, as f a r as
p o s s i b l e , b e fitted o n t h e l e v e l o f t h e c o r n e r fitting r e s t
points a n dbe torsion- a n dbend-stiff connected t o the
uprights.
8.4.8.14 T h e s t a b i U t y o f t r a n s v e r s e h o r i z o n t a l a n d
l o n g i t u d i n a l h o r i z o n t a l shores a n d , w h e r e necessary,
that o f uprights shall be checked b y a procedure
Arrangements
and
Outfit
285
W h e n determining the permissible buckling

stresses, t h e r e l e v a n t safety f a c t o r m a y b e a d o p t e d
equal t o 2,0.
T h e free l e n g t h o f b u c k l i n g shall be a d o p t e d
span-equal i n t h e case o f a b o l t e d j o i n t o r 0 , 7 t i m e s
t h e shore o r u p r i g h t s span i n t h e case o f a w e l d e d
j o i n t . T h eflexibility shall n o t exceed 2 5 0 .
F o r o t h e r types o f bar-end fixing, t h e free l e n g t h
shall be established o n agreement w i t h t h e Register.
8.4.8.15 T h e c o n t a i n e r r e s t p o i n t s o n t h e i n n e r
b o t t o m a n d areas containing t h e connections a n d
attachments o f container stowage frames i n w a y o f
h u l l structures shall be strengthened i n c o n f o r m i t y
w i t h the requirements o fPart I I "Hull".
8.4.9 M o v a b l e d e c k s , p l a t f o r m s , r a m p s a n d o t h e r
similar structures.
8.4.9.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 8 . 4 . 9 a p p l y t o t h e
m o v a b l e decks, p l a t f o r m s , r a m p s a n d o t h e r similar
structures designed t o be installed i n t w o positions:
i n w o r k i n g p o s i t i o n w h e n they are used f o r carriage, l o a d i n g o r u n l o a d i n g o f vehicles o r o t h e r cargoes;
in n o n - w o r k i n g position w h e n they are n o t used
for carriage, loading o r u n l o a d i n g o fvehicles o r other
cargoes.
8.4.9.2 T h e m o v a b l e d e c k s , p l a t f o r m s , r a m p s a n d
other similar structures a n d also their supporting
e l e m e n t s a t ship's sides, d e c k s a n d b u l k h e a d s , t h e
pillars o r suspensions f o r decks a n d p l a t f o r m s e n suring their proper installation i n the w o r k i n g posit i o n shall be designed i n accordance w i t h t h e
requirements o fPart I I "Hull".
8.4.9.3 A r r a n g e m e n t s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d f o r r e l i a b l e
securing o f t h e m o v a b l e decks, p l a t f o r m s r a m p s a n d
other similar structures i n t h e n o n - w o r k i n g position.
8.4.9.4 W h e n t h e m o v a b l e d e c k s , p l a t f o r m s , r a m p s
a n d o t h e r s i m i l a r structures a r e secured i n t h e n o n w o r k i n g position, t h e hoisting gear a n d elements
thereof shall n o t generally be kept under t h e load.
I t is n o t p e r m i t t e d t o secure t h e m o v a b l e decks,
platforms, ramps a n d other similar structures b y
suspending t h e m o n ropes.
8.4.9.5 T h e s t r u c t u r a l e l e m e n t s o f t h e a r r a n g e m e n t s
m e n t i o n e d i n 8.4.9.3 a n d a l s o t h e a s s o c i a t e d s u p p o r t i n g
structures shall b e designed t o w i t h s t a n d t h e forces r e sulting f o r m t h e application o f t h e loads P , P , P , as
determined b y t h e f o r m u l a e given below, t o t h e centres o f g r a v i t y o f t h e considered section o f t h e deck,
p l a t f o r m , r a m p o r other similar structures:
x
P = mga ;
(8.4.9.5-1)
P = mga ;
(8.4.9.5-2)
P = mg{\
+ a )
where
(8.4.9.5-3)
P = horizontal load parallel t o thecentrelineo fthe ship,

in N . C o n s i d e r a t i o n shall b e given t o t h ecases w h e n
the l o a d P is directed b o t h f o r w a r d a n d aft;
x
P =
horizontal load parallel to t h e midstation plane,

in N . Consideration shall b e given to the cases w h e n
the l o a d P is directedb o t h t o t h enearest ship's side
a n d t o t h e o p p o s i t e side;
P = vertical l o a d directed d o w n w a r d , i nN ;
m = mass o fthe considered section o fthe deck, platform,
r a m p o r other similar structure, i nk g ;
g = a c c e l e r a t i o n d u e t o g r a v i t y e q u a l t o 9,81 m / s ;
a , a , a = dimensionless accelerations to b e determined i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.7.
y
8.4.9.6 W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e f o r c e s a f f e c t i n g t h e
structural elements o f t h e arrangements
specified
i n 8.4.9.3 a n d t h e associated s u p p o r t i n g structures
w i t h regard t o t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 8.4.9.5, t h e loads P ,
P a n d P a r e regarded as separately appUed, i.e. n o
account is taken o f their combined action a n d o f the
frictional forces o r i g i n a t i n g o n t h e surfaces o f t h e
considered sections o f decks, p l a t f o r m s , r a m p s o r
other similar structures w h i c h are i ncontact w i t h the
associated supporting structures.
x
8.4.9.7 W h e n t h e s t r u c t u r a l e l e m e n t s o f t h e a r r a n g e m e n t s specified i n 8.4.9.3 a n d t h e associated

s u p p o r t i n g structures a r e u n d e r t h e effect o f t h e loads
d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 8.4.9.5
a n d 8.4.9.6, t h e stresses i n t h e i r p a r t s s h a l l n o t exceed
0,8 t i m e s t h e u p p e r y i e l d stress o f m a t e r i a l .
U n d e r t h e effect o f these loads t h e safety factor o f
the w i r e ropes i n relation t o their actual breaking
s t r e n g t h s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 4 ; t h e s a f e t y f a c t o r o f
the c h a i n cables i n r e l a t i o n t o t h e p r o o f l o a d o ft h e
c h a i n s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 2 ; t h e m a r g i n o f s a f e t y
against b u c k U n g o f t h e elements subjected t o t h e
c o m p r e s s i o n stress s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 2 .
8.4.9.8 W i r e r o p e s u s e d i n t h e a r r a n g e m e n t s
specified i n 8.4.9.3 s h a l l satisfy t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f 3.15 a n d c h a i n cables, those o f 7 . 1 , P a r t X I I I
"Materials".
8.5 E X I T S , D O O R S , C O R R I D O R S , S T A I R W A Y S
AND VERTICAL LADDERS
8.5.1 G e n e r a l .
8.5.1.1 L o c a t i o n a n d a r r a n g e m e n t o f e x i t s , d o o r s ,
corridors, stairways a n d vertical ladders shall ensure t h e
p o s s i b i l i t y o f q u i c k , safe a n d free access f r o m spaces t o
the places o f e m b a r k a t i o n into lifeboats a n d liferafts.
A d d i t i o n a l m e a n s f o r o u t d o o r escape shall be
clearly m a r k e d , w h e r e necessary, t o ensure accessibiUty, a n d be provided w i t h a proper design t o be
used i n emergency.
8.5.2 E x i t s a n d d o o r s .
8.5.2.1 I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s a n d i n s p e c i a l p u r p o s e
ships each w a t e r t i g h t c o m p a r t m e n t o r s i m i l a r l y r e stricted space o r g r o u p o f spaces situated b e l o w t h e
b u l k h e a d deck s h a l l h a v e a t least t w o m e a n s o f escape, i n a n y case o n e o fw h i c h shall b e i n d e p e n d e n t o f
the d o o r i n t h e subdivision bulkhead.
286
Rules
T w o m e a n s o f escape s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d f r o m t h e
m a i n machinery c o n t r o l r o o m located w i t h i n a m a c h i n e r y space, a t least o n e o f w h i c h w i l l p r o v i d e c o n t i n u o u s
f i r e s h e l t e r t o a safe p o s i t i o n o u t s i d e t h e m a c h i n e r y s p a c e
(refer t o 2.1.4.5 P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n " ) .
8.5.2.2 I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s a n d i n s p e c i a l p u r p o s e
ships above t h e b u l k h e a d deck each m a i n vertical fire
z o n e (refer t o 2.2.1.2, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n " ) o r sim i l a r l y restricted space o r g r o u p o f spaces s h a l l h a v e a t
least t w o m e a n s o f escape o n e o f w h i c h s h a l l g i v e access
t o a s t a i r w a y f o r m i n g a v e r t i c a l m e a n s o f escape t o t h e
places o f e m b a r k a t i o n i n t o lifeboats a n d liferafts.
8.5.2.3 I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s t h e n u m b e r a n d l o c a t i o n o f m e a n s o f escape f r o m special c a t e g o r y spaces
( r e f e r t o 1.5.9, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n " ) a r e s u b j e c t
t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e Register, a n d t h e degree o f safety f o r escape f r o m these spaces t o t h e
places o f e m b a r k a t i o n i n t o lifeboats a n d liferafts
shall a t least c o r r e s p o n d t o t h a t specified i n 8.5.2.1
a n d 8.5.2.2.
F o r c a r g o ships i n a l l r o - r o c a r g o spaces w h e r e t h e
c r e w is n o r m a l l y e m p l o y e d the n u m b e r a n d locations o f
escape r o u t e s t o t h e o p e n deck a r e subject t o special
c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e Register, b u t s h a l l i n n o case b e
less t h a n t w o a n d s h a l l b e w i d e l y s e p a r a t e d .
8.5.2.4 I n c a r g o s h i p s o f 5 0 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e a n d
u p w a r d s a t each level o f a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces there
s h a l l b e a t least t w o m e a n s o f escape, as w i d e l y sep a r a t e d as possible, f r o m each restricted space o r
g r o u p o f spaces; f r o m t h e spaces s i t u a t e d b e l o w t h e
o p e n deck t h e m a i n m e a n s o f escape shall be f o r m e d
b y a s t a i r w a y , t h e o t h e r m e a n s o f escape m a y be
f o r m e d b y a casing w i t h a vertical ladder o r b y a
s t a i r w a y ; f r o m t h e spaces situated a b o v e t h e o p e n
deck t h e m e a n s o f escape shall be f o r m e d b y d o o r s o f
stairways leading t o the open deck o r c o m b i n a t i o n
thereof.
8.5.2.5 E x c e p t i o n a l l y , t h e R e g i s t e r m a y d i s p e n s e
w i t h o n e o f t h e m e a n s o f escape specified i n 8.5.2.1
o r 8.5.2.4, d u e regard being p a i d t o t h e p u r p o s e a n d
l o c a t i o n o f spaces a n d t o t h e n u m b e r o f persons w h o
n o r m a l l y m i g h t be quartered o r e m p l o y e d there.
8.5.2.6 S t a i r w a y s s e r v i n g o n l y a s p a c e a n d a
b a l c o n y i n t h a t space, as w e l l as lifts s h a l l n o t be
considered as m e a n s o f escape specified i n 8.5.2.1
t o 8.5.2.4.
8.5.2.7 E a c h c i n e m a h a l l s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a t
least t w o m e a n s o f escape. B o t h exits s h a l l b e spaced
f r o m each o t h e r as w i d e as practicable. A r e a d i l y seen
inscription " E x i t " o r "Emergency exit" shall be provided above every such exit.
8.5.2.8 T h e w h e e l h o u s e s h a l l h a v e t w o e x i t s , o n e
t o e a c h side o f t h e n a v i g a t i o n bridge, w i t h a passag e w a y t h r o u g h t h e h o u s e f r o m side t o side.
8.5.2.9 T h e t o t a l w i d t h o f e x i t s f r o m c i n e m a h a l l s
shall b e d e t e r m i n e d o n t h e basis o f 0,8 m p e r 5 0 per-
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
s o n s , h o w e v e r , t h e w i d t h o f e a c h e x i t s h a l l b e n o t less
t h a n 1,1 m , w h e n t h e n u m b e r o f s e a t s i s m o r e t h a n 5 0 ,
a n d n o t less t h a n 0 , 8 m w h e n t h e n u m b e r o f s e a t s i s n o t
more than 50.
T h e w i d t h o feach exit f r o m a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d
s e r v i c e s p a c e s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 0 , 6 m . T h e sizes
o f t h e l a d d e r w a y s f r o m c a r g o h o l d s s h a l l b e n o t less
t h a n 0,6 x 0,6 m .
8.5.2.10 T h e e x i t d o o r s a n d l a d d e r w a y c o v e r s
shall be so arranged that they c a n be operated f r o m
b o t h sides.
D o o r s shall o p e n as f o l l o w s :
.1 d o o r s o f a c c o m m o d a t i o n , e x c l u d i n g p u b l i c ,
a n d service spaces g i v i n g access t o a c o r r i d o r i n s i d e
the spaces;
.2 d o o r s o f p u b l i c r o o m s , o u t s i d e o r e a c h s i d e ;
.3 d o o r s i n t h e e n d b u l k h e a d s o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s
and i n external transverse bulkheads o f deckhouses,
o u t s i d e i n t h e d i r e c t i o n o f t h e nearest side;
.4 d o o r s i n t h e e x t e r n a l l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k h e a d s o f
deckhouses, outside i n t h e f o r w a r d direction.
I n cargo ships t h e i n n e r d o o r s duplicating t h e
d o o r s specified i n 8.5.2.10.3 a n d 8.5.2.10.4 m a y o p e n
inside t h e space.
I n s h i p s o f 3 1 m i n l e n g t h a n d less t h e d o o r s i n dicated i n 8.5.2.10.1 m a y o p e n outside ( t o the c o r r i d o r )
if they are situated a t the e n do f blind corridors a n d d o
n o t h i n d e r t h e exits f r o m o t h e r spaces.
N o sUding doors shall be fitted a t exits a n d means
o f escape, except f o r d o o r s o f t h e w h e e l h o u s e .
T h e doors referred t o i n 8.5.2.10.1 shall n o t be
provided w i t h h o o k s for holding t h e d o o r open. I tis
permitted that such doors be fitted w i t h buffers a n d
spring catchers t o f i x t h e d o o r i n t h e o p e n p o s i t i o n
and t o allow f o r its closure w i t h o u t entering the
space.
8.5.2.11 D o o r s o f a c c o m m o d a t i o n s p a c e s s p e c i f i e d
i n 1.5.2.1 a n d 1.5.2.2, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n " s h a U
have i n their l o w e r portions detachable
panels
0,4 x 0 , 5 m i n size, these p a n e l s o f t h e p a s s e n g e r c a b i n
doors shaU be provided w i t h t h efollowing inscription:
" M e a n s o f escape k n o c k o u t i n case o f emergency".
T h e detachable panels need n o t be fitted where
t h e spaces a r e p r o v i d e d w i t h o p e n i n g t y p e side scuttles o f a t least 4 0 0 m m i n d i a m e t e r o f w i n d o w s t h e
s m a l l e r side o f w h i c h b e i n g a t least 4 0 0 m m a n d o n
condition that persons m a y get t o t h e corridor o r
o p e n d e c k t h r o u g h these side scuttles o r w i n d o w s .
T h e a p p r o p r i a t e m e a n s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d , i f necessary, t o facilitate e x i t t h r o u g h side scuttles o r w i n dows.
8.5.2.12 I n a r r a n g e m e n t a n d d i s p o s i t i o n o f e x i t s
a n d d o o r s i n d a n g e r o u s zones, spaces a n d areas o f o i l
t a n k e r s a n d o i l r e c o v e r y ships, as w e l l as o f ships
carrying dangerous goods requirements shall be
considered w i t h respect t o t h e safe-type electrical
Arrangements
and
Outfit
e q u i p m e n t t o b e u s e d i n spaces adjacent t o d a n g e r o u s
z o n e s w i t h t h e d o o r s o p e n i n t o such spaces (refer
t o 19.2 a n d 1 9 . 1 1 , P a r t X I "Electrical E q u i p m e n t " ) .
8.5.3 C o r r i d o r s a n d p a s s a g e w a y s .
8.5.3.1 A l l c o r r i d o r s a n d p a s s a g e w a y s s h a l l e n sure free m o v e m e n t o f p e r s o n s a l o n g t h e m . O n passenger ships a n d special p u r p o s e ships c a r r y i n g m o r e
t h a n 6 0 persons, a lobby, corridor o r part o f a corr i d o r shall h a v e m o r e t h a n o n e m e a n s o f escape.
C a r g o ships a n d special p u r p o s e ships c a r r y i n g
n o t m o r e than 60 persons shall have n o dead-end
corridors more than 6 m long. B y a dead-end corridor, a corridor o r part o f a corridor is meant w h i c h
has o n l y o n e m e a n s o f escape.
C o r r i d o r s used as m e a n s o f escape o n c a r g o ships
shall be a t least 700 m m w i d e a n d shall be fitted w i t h
a h a n d r a i l o n e i t h e r side. C o r r i d o r s w i t h a w i d t h
o f 1800 m m a n d m o r e shall be fitted w i t h handrails
o n e a c h side. W i d t h o f a c o r r i d o r i s d e t e r m i n e d as a
distance between a h a n d r a i l a n d opposite b u l k h e a d
o r as a distance b e t w e e n h a n d r a i l s .
8.5.3.2 T h e w i d t h o f m a i n c o r r i d o r s i n w a y o f p a s s e n g e r s ' a n d c r e w ' s a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 0 , 9 m , a n d that o f side corridors s h a l l b e at least
0,8 m . W h e r e t h e n u m b e r o f passengers a n d c r e w u s i n g
the corridor surpasses 5 0 persons, t h e w i d t h s referred t o
above shall b e increased b y 0,1 m .
I n ships ( i n c l u d i n g t h e tugs) b e l o w 5 0 0 gross
t o n n a g e a n d i n t u g s o f less t h a n 3 7 0 k W t h e w i d t h o f
t h e m a i n c o r r i d o r s a n d side c o r r i d o r s m a y b e r e d u c e d
d o w n t o 0,8 a n d 0,6 m , respectively.
8.5.3.3 T h e w i d t h s o f p a s s a g e w a y s i n t h e c i n e m a
h a l l a n d i n t h e e n t r a n c e h a l l s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 1,1 m a n d 1,4 m , r e s p e c t i v e l y .
T h e w i d t h o f t h e m a i n p a s s a g e w a y s i n t h e restaurant o r dining r o o m a n d also t h e m e s s r o o m shall
n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 9 m a n d t h a t o f t h e side p a s s a g e w a y s s h a l l b e a t least 0 , 6 5 m . I n ships o f less t h a n
500 gross tonnage t h e w i d t h o fm a i n passageways i n
the m e s s r o o m m a y be reduced d o w n t o 0,65 m .
8.5.3.4 T h e w i d t h o f t h e m a i n p a s s a g e w a y i n t h e
seating passenger space shall be a t least 1 m w i t h
n u m b e r o f passengers u p t o 5 0 a n d a t least 1 , 1 m w i t h
n u m b e r o f passengers i n excess o f 50.
8.5.3.5 I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s t h e m a i n c o r r i d o r s a d j a c e n t t o e n g i n e a n d b o i l e r c a s i n g s s h a l l b e a t l e a s t 1,2 m
i n w i d t h , h o w e v e r , i n s h i p s o f less t h a n 5 0 0 g r o s s t o n nage this w i d t h m a y be reduced d o w n t o 0,9 m .
8.5.3.6 T h e w i d t h o f p a s s a g e w a y o n t h e b r i d g e
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 8 m i n ships o f 5 0 0 t o n s g r o s s
t o n n a g e a n d o v e r a n d a t least 0 , 6 m i n ships o f less
t h a n 5 0 0 gross tonnage.
8.5.3.7 I n p a s s e n g e r ships a n d special p u r p o s e
ships t h e w i d t h o f t h e deck passageways p r o v i d i n g
access t o t h e l i f e b o a t a n d l i f e r a f t e m b a r k a t i o n d e c k
287
0,9 m i f t h e n u m b e r o f seats i n lifeboats is n o t

m o r e t h a n 5 0 o n e a c h side o f ship;
1,0 m i f t h e n u m b e r o f s e a t s i n l i f e b o a t s i s 5 0 a n d
o v e r , b u t less t h a n 1 0 0 o n e a c h side o f ship;
1,2 m i f t h e n u m b e r o f s e a t s i n l i f e b o a t s i s 1 0 0
a n d o v e r , b u t less t h a n 2 0 0 o n e a c h side o f s h i p .
I f n u m b e r o f seats i n lifeboats i s 2 0 0 a n d o v e r o n
e a c h side o f ship, t h e w i d t h o f t h e p a s s a g e w a y s w i l l b e
specially c o n s i d e r e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
I n o t h e r ships t h e w i d t h o f t h e passageways r e f e r r e d t o a b o v e s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 8 m .
8.5.4 S t a i r w a y s a n d v e r t i c a l l a d d e r s .
8.5.4.1 A l l b e t w e e n d e c k s t a i r w a y s s h a l l b e o f
steel f r a m e c o n s t r u c t i o n o r o f e q u i v a l e n t m a t e r i a l o n
a g r e e m e n t w i t h t h e R e g i s t e r (refer t o 1.2, P a r t V I
" F i r e Protection"). Special requirements f o r arrangement o f stairway enclosures a n d protection o f
m e a n s o f escape a r e specified i n 2.1.4.3, 2.1.4.5,
2.2.2.4, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n " .
8.5.4.2 O n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s a n d s p e c i a l p u r p o s e
ships c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 6 0 persons, t h e f o l l o w i n g
conditions shall be met:
.1 t h e w i d t h o f s t a i r w a y s s h a l l b e n o t less
t h a n 9 0 0 m m , w i t h h a n d r a i l s o n e a c h side. T h e
m i n i m u m w i d t h o f stairways shall be increased b y
10 m m f o r e v e r y o n e p e r s o n i n excess o f 9 0 persons.
T h e m a x i m u m w i d t h between handrails w h e r e stairways are wider than 900 m m shall be 1800 m m . T h e
total n u m b e r o f persons t o be evacuated b y such
stairways shall be assumed t o be two-thirds o f the
crew a n d t h e t o t a l n u m b e r o f passengers i n t h e areas
served b y such stairways;
.2 a l l s t a i r w a y s s i z e d f o r m o r e t h a n 9 0 p e r s o n s
shall be aligned fore a n d aft;
.3 t h e d o o r w a y s , c o r r i d o r s a n d i n t e r m e d i a t e
landings i n c l u d e d i nm e a n s o f escape shall be sized i n
the s a m e m a n n e r as stairways;
.4 s t a i r w a y s s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 3 , 5 m i n v e r t i c a l r i s e
w i t h o u t the provision o f a landing a n d shall not have
a n a n g l e o f i n c l i n a t i o n g r e a t e r t h a n 45;
.5 w i t h t h e e x c e p t i o n o f i n t e r m e d i a t e l a n d i n g s ,
t h e l a n d i n g s a t e a c h d e c k l e v e l s h a l l n o t b e less
t h a n 2 m i n area a n d shall increase b y 1 m f o r every
10 p e r s o n s p r o v i d e d f o r i n excess o f 2 0 p e r s o n s b u t
need n o t exceed 16 m , except f o r those landings
s e r v i c i n g p u b l i c spaces h a v i n g d i r e c t access o n t o t h e
stairway enclosure;
.6 i n a n y case, t h e s t a i r w a y w i d t h s h a l l b e i n accordance w i t h the requirements o f the Appendix 1
to the present Part.
8.5.4.3 S t a i r w a y s u s e d a s m e a n s o f e s c a p e o n
cargo ships shall be a t least 7 0 0 m m w i d e a n d
s h a l l b e f i t t e d w i t h a h a n d r a i l o n e i t h e r side. S t a i r ways w i t h a w i d t h o f 1800 m m a n d m o r e shall be
f i t t e d w i t h h a n d r a i l s o n e a c h side. A n g l e o f
s l o p e o f l a d d e r s s h a l l b e u s u a l l y 45 b u t n o t g r e a t e r
2
288
Rules
t h a n 50, i n t h e m a c h i n e r y a n d i n s m a l l s p a c e s
n o t g r e a t e r t h a n 60. T h e s i z e o f d o o r s p r o v i d i n g a n
access t o a n y s t a i r w a y s h a l l b e o f t h e s a m e size a s t h e
stairway.
8.5.4.4 V e r t i c a l l a d d e r s a n d l a d d e r s t e p s i n c a r g o
holds, t a n k s , etc. shall be a t least 3 0 0 m m w i d e .
8.5.5 L o w l o c a t i o n l i g h t i n g ( L L L ) o n p a s s e n g e r
s h i p s c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 36 p a s s e n g e r s a n d s p e c i a l
p u r p o s e s h i p s c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 240 p e r s o n s .
8.5.5.1 I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e e m e r g e n c y l i g h t i n g s t i pulated b y 19.1.2, P a r t X I "Electrical E q u i p m e n t " ,
t h e m e a n s o f escape, i n c l u d i n g s t a i r w a y s a n d exits, o f
passenger ships c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 3 6passengers a n d
special purpose ships c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 240 persons
shall be m a r k e d b y L L L a t a l l p o i n t s o f t h e escape
r o u t e i n c l u d i n g angles a n d intersections.
8.5.5.2 P r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g
L L L systems:
.1 p h o t o l u m i n e s c e n t s y s t e m w h i c h uses p h o t o luminescent material containing a chemical (example:
zinc sulfide) that h a s t h e quality o f storing p o w e r
w h e n i l l u m i n a t e d b y visible Ught;
.2 e l e c t r i c a l l y p o w e r e d s y s t e m s w h i c h u s e i n candescent bulbs, light e m i t t i n g diodes, electroluminescent strips o r lamps,
electrofluorescent
lamps, etc. (refer also t o 19.1.4, P a r t X I "Electrical
Equipment").
8.5.5.3 T h e L L L s y s t e m s h a U f u n c t i o n a t a U t i m e s
f o r a t least 1 h o u r after i t s a c t i v a t i o n . A l l systems, i n cluding those automticaUy activated o r continuously
operating, shaU be capable o f being m a n u a U y activated
b y a single a c t i o n f r o m t h e m a i n c o n t r o l station.
8.5.5.4 I n a l l p a s s a g e w a y s , t h e L L L s h a l l b e
c o n t i n u o u s except as i n t e r r u p t e d b y corridors a n d
cabin doors i n order t o provide a visible deUneation
a l o n g t h e escape r o u t e . T h e L L L s h a l l b e installed a t
least o n o n e side o f t h e c o r r i d o r , e i t h e r o n t h e b u l k head w i t h i n 3 0 0 m m o f t h e deck, o r o n t h e deck
within 150 m m o f the bulkhead. I n corridors m o r e
t h a n 2 m w i d e , L L L s h a U b e i n s t a l l e d o n b o t h sides.
I n dead-end corridors, L L L shall have arrows placed
at intervals o f n o m o r e than 1 m , o r equivalent d i rection indicators, pointing a w a y f r o m t h e dead-end.
8.5.5.5 I n a l l s t a i r w a y s , L L L s h a l l b e i n s t a l l e d o n
a t l e a s t o n e side a t a h e i g h t less t h a n 3 0 0 m m a b o v e
t h e steps. L L L s h a l l b e i n s t a l l e d o n b o t h sides i f t h e
w i d t h o fthe stairway is t w o metres o r more. T h e t o p
a n d b o t t o m o feach set o f stairs shall be identified t o
s h o w t h a t there a r e n o f u r t h e r steps.
8.5.5.6 I n a l l p a s s e n g e r c a b i n s , a p l a c a r d e x plaining the L L L system shall be installed o n the
inside o fthe cabin door. I t shall also have a d i a g r a m
showing the location of, a n d the w a y to, the t w o
closest exits w i t h respect t o t h e cabin.
Materials used i n t h e manufacture o f L L L products shall n o t contain radioactive o r toxic materials.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
8.5.5.7 L L L s h a l i n d i c a t e t h e e x i t d o o r h a n d l e ;
other doors shall n o t be indicated so.
SUding, f i r e - p r o o f a n d w a t e r t i g h t doors shaU be
p r o v i d e d w i t h L L L sign s h o w i n g t h e w a y o f t h e d o o r
opening.
L L L signs s h a l l b e also p r o v i d e d a t a l l d o o r s a n d
m e a n s o f escape. T h e signs s h a l l b e located a t a h e i g h t
o f 300 m m above t h e deck o r t h e b o t t o m o fthe d o o r
and be contrast i n colour t o the background o n
which they are marked.
A l l e x i t d o o r a n d escape r o u t e signs s h a l l b e o f
photoluminescent materials o r marked appropriately
by lighting.
8.5.5.8 P h o t o l u m i n e s c e n t ( P L ) m a t e r i a l s t r i p s
s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 7 5 m m w i d e . T h e s t r i p s h a v i n g a
w i d t h less t h a n t h a t s t a t e d h e r e i n s h a l l b e u s e d o n l y i f
their luminance is increased p r o p o r t i o n a l l y t o c o m pensate for their w i d t h . P Lmaterials shall provide a t
least 15 m c d / m m e a s u r e d 1 0 m i n after r e m o v a l o f a l l
external i l l u m i n a t i n g sources. T h e system shall ensure
l u m i n a n c e values greater t h a n 2,0 m c d / m f o r 1 h .
A n y P L s y s t e m s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h n o t less t h a n
the m i n i m u m level o f a m b i e n t Ught necessary t o
charge t h e P L material t o meet t h e above luminance
requirements.
2
8.5.5.9 E l e c t r i c a l l y p o w e r e d L L L s y s t e m s h a l l
c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.2.8.6.6, P a r t V I
"Fire Protection".
F o r ships h a v i n g length o f 120 m o r m o r e o r h a v i n g
three o r m o r e m a i n vertical zones t h e electrically p o w ered L L L system shall also c o m p l y w i t h the requirements
o f 2.2.7.4.3, Part V I "Fire Protection".
8.5.6 A d d i t i o n a l r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r m e a n s o f e s c a p e
on ro-ro passenger ships.
8.5.6.1 H a n d r a i l s o r o t h e r h a n d h o l d s s h a l l b e
p r o v i d e d i n a l l c o r r i d o r s a l o n g entire escape r o u t e ,
so t h a t a f i r m h a n d h o l d is a v a i l a b l e e v e r y step o f t h e
w a y , w h e r e possible, t o t h e assembly stations a n d
e m b a r k a t i o n stations. Such handrails shall be prov i d e d o n b o t h sides o f l o n g i t u d i n a l c o r r i d o r s m o r e
t h a n 1,8 m i n w i d t h a n d t r a n s v e r s e c o r r i d o r s m o r e
t h a n 1 m i n w i d t h . Particular attention shall be paid
to t h e need t o be able t o cross lobbies, a t r i u m s a n d
o t h e r large o p e n spaces a l o n g escape routes. H a n d rails a n d o t h e r h a n d h o l d s shall be o fsuch s t r e n g t h as
to withstand a distributed horizontal load o f 750 N / m
applied i n t h e direction o f t h e centre o f t h e corridor
o r space, a n d a d i s t r i b u t e d v e r t i c a l l o a d o f 7 5 0 N / m
applied i n d o w n w a r d direction. There is n o need t o
apply t h e t w o loads simultaneously.
8.5.6.2 M e a n s o f e s c a p e s h a l l n o t b e o b s t r u c t e d
b y f u r n i t u r e a n d o t h e r obstructions, w i t h t h e except i o n o f tables a n d chairs w h i c h m a y be cleared a w a y
t o p r o v i d e o p e n space. C a b i n e t s a n d o t h e r h e a v y
pieces o f f u r n i t u r e i n p u b U c spaces a n d a l o n g escape
routes shall be secured i n place t o prevent shifting i f
Arrangements
and
Outfit
t h e ship r o o l s o r lists. F l o o r c o v e r i n g s s h a l l also be

secured i n place. W h e n t h e ship is u n d e r w a y , m e a n s
o f escape shall be k e p t clear o f obstructions.
8.5.6.3 M e a n s o f e s c a p e s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d f r o m
every n o r m a l l y occupied space o n t h e ship. T h e s e
m e a n s o f escape shall be a r r a n g e d so as t o p r o v i d e
the shortest route possible t o t h e assembly stations
a n d survival craft e m b a r k a t i o n stations a n d shall be
marked with appropriate symbols.
8.5.6.4 W h e r e e n c l o s e d s p a c e s a d j o i n a n o p e n
deck, o p e n i n g s f r o m t h e enclosed space t o t h e o p e n
deck shall, where i tis practicable, be capable o f being
used as a n emergency exit.
8.5.6.5 D e c k s s h a l l b e s e q u e n t i a l l y n u m b e r e d ,
starting w i t h " 1 " a t t h e t a n k t o p o r t h e l o w e s t deck.
These numbers shall be prominently displayed at
stair landings a n d lifts i n t h e lobbies. D e c k s m a y also
be n a m e d , b u t t h e deck n u m b e r shall a l w a y s be displayed along with the name.
8.5.6.6 S i m p l e a n d c l e a r p l a n s s h o w i n g t h e " y o u
are h e r e " p o s i t i o n a n d m e a n s o f escape m a r k e d b y
arrows shall be p r o m i n e n t l y displayed o n t h e inside
o f e a c h c a b i n d o o r a n d i n p u b l i c spaces.
8.5.6.7 C a b i n a n d s t a t e r o o m d o o r s s h a l l n o t r e quire keys t o be u n l o c k e d f r o m t h e inside. N e i t h e r
shall there be a n y d o o r s a l o n g a n y designed escape
route w h i c h require keys t o be unlocked.
8.5.6.8 T h e l o w e s t 0 , 5 m o f b u l k h e a d s a l o n g e s cape routes shall be able t o sustain a l o a d o f 750 N / m
t o a l l o w t h e m t o be used as w a l k i n g surfaces w i t h t h e
ship a t large angles o f heel.
8.5.6.9 T h e e s c a p e r o u t e s f r o m c a b i n s t o s t a i r w a y
enclosures s h a l l be as direct as possible, w i t h a
m i n i m u m n u m b e r o f direction changes. I tshall n o t be
necessary t o cross f r o m o n e side o f t h e ship t o t h e
o t h e r t o r e a c h m e a n s o f escape. I t s h a l l n o t be n e cessary t o c l i m b m o r e t h a n t w o decks u p o r d o w n t o
reach a n assembly station o r open deck f r o m a n y
passenger space.
8.5.6.10 E x t e r n a l m e a n s o f e s c a p e t o t h e s u r v i v a l
craft e m b a r k a t i o n stations shall be provided f r o m all
o p e n decks, r e f e r r e d t o i n 8.5.6.9.
289
8.6.2 T h e h e i g h t o f t h e b u l w a r k o r g u a r d r a i l s
a b o v e t h e d e c k s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 1 m . H o w e v e r ,
where this height w o u l d interfere w i t h the n o r m a l
o p e r a t i o n o f t h e s h i p , a lesser h e i g h t m a y b e a p p r o v e d
p r o v i d e d t h e adequate p r o t e c t i o n o f passengers a n d
crew is ensured t o t h e satisfaction o f t h e Register.
8.6.3 T h e d i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e s t a n c h i o n s o f t h e
g u a r d r a i l s s h a l l b e n o t m o r e t h a n 1,5 m . A t l e a s t
every t h i r d stanchion shall be supported b y a stay.
R e m o v a b l e a n d hinged stanchions shall be capable o f being locked i n t h e u p r i g h t position.
I t i s a l l o w e d t o use flat steel s t a n c h i o n s w i t h i n creased breadth a t t h e stanchion w e l d t o t h e deck.
Fig. 8.6.3 shows t h e installation d i a g r a m a n d t h e
spacing between t h e stanchions depending o n t h e
b r e a d t h o f the l o w e r edge t o be w e l d e d t o t h edeck. I n
places o f such stanchions w e l d t o t h e deck, t h e deck
s h a l l b e s u p p o r t e d b y a m i n i m u m 100 x 1 2 m m stiffener. F o r deck p l a t i n g exceeding 2 0 m m t h e s u p p o r t
m a y be omitted.
min 5 0 0 mm
F i g . 8.6.3
1 . W h e r e to > 2,96 a t l e a s t e v e r y t h i r d s t a n c h i o n s h a l l b e o f
increased breadth;
2. W h e r e 2,46 = g t o < 2 , 9 b a t l e a s t e v e r y s e c o n d s t a n c h i o n s h a l l b e
of increased breadth;
3. W h e r e l , 9 6 ^ t o < 2 , 4 6 a t l e a s t e v e r y s t a n c h i o n s h a l l b e o f
increased breadth.
T h e s t a n c h i o n b r e a d t h , b, s h a l l b e c h o s e n a c c o r d i n g t o t h e d e s i g n
standards
8.6 G U A R D R A I L S , B U L W A R K A N D G A N G W A Y S
8.6.1 A l l e x p o s e d p a r t s o f t h e f r e e b o a r d d e c k s ,
superstructure decks a n d deckhouse tops shall be
provided w i t h efficient guard rails o r bulwarks; i n
case o f ships i n t e n d e d f o r carriage o f t i m b e r d e c k
cargo collapsible railing o r s t o r m rails shall be fitted
o n this cargo.
Non-self-propelled u n m a n n e d shipborne barges
m a y n o t have t h e b u l w a r k o r guard rails i n cargo
area, i f t h e i r presence i m p e d e safe c a r g o o p e r a t i o n s .
8.6.4 T h e g u n w a l e , h a n d r a i l s a n d g u a r d r a i l s
shall be generally o f rigid construction; wire ropes
m a y o n l y be accepted i n lieu o f g u a r d rails i n special
circumstances a n d then o n l y i n limited lengths; wire
ropes shall be made taut b y means o f turn-buckles.
L e n g t h s o f chains m a y o n l y be accepted i n lieu o f
rigid g u a r d r a i l s i f t h e y a r e f i t t e d b e t w e e n t w o f i x e d
stanchions o r between t h e fixed stanchion a n d b u l w a r k .
8.6.5 T h e o p e n i n g b e l o w t h e l o w e s t c o u r s e o f t h e
g u a r d rails shall n o t exceed 2 3 0 m m . T h e o t h e r
courses o f rails shall n o t be m o r e t h a n 380 m m apart.
290
Rules
A n exception is m a d e f o r the g u a r d rails a b o v e the

t i m b e r deck cargo w h e r e the height f r o m the base t o
the lowest course a n d other course spacings shall n o t
exceed 3 3 0 m m . I n t h e case o f ships w i t h r o u n d e d
g u n w a l e , the g u a r d r a i l supports shall be placed o n
the flat o f the deck.
8.6.6 T y p e " A " s h i p s w i t h b u l w a r k s a s w e l l a s
type " B " ships w i t h a freeboard reduced t o t h a t req u i r e d f o r type " A " ships shall h a v e o p e n rails fitted
f o r at least h a l f the l e n g t h o f the exposed parts o f the
w e a t h e r deck, o r o t h e r effective w a t e r freeing arrangements. T h e upper edge o f the sheerstrake shall
be k e p t as l o w as p r a c t i c a b l e .
W h e r e superstructures are connected by t r u n k s ,
o p e n rails shall be fitted f o r the w h o l e l e n g t h o f the
exposed parts o f the freeboard deck.
8.6.7 T h e b u l w a r k , i f a r r a n g e d , s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h
the requirements o f 2.14, P a r t I I " H u l l " .
8.6.8 S a t i s f a c t o r y m e a n s ( i n t h e f o r m o f U f e U n e s ,
g a n g w a y s , u n d e r d e c k passages, etc.) s h a l l be p r o vided for the protection o f the crew i n getting to and
f r o m t h e i r quarters, the m a c h i n e r y space a n d a l l
other parts used i n the necessary w o r k o f the ship.
8.6.9 A f o r e a n d a f t p e r m a n e n t g a n g w a y s h a l l b e
p r o v i d e d o n type " A " ships a t the level o f the superstructure deck between the p o o p a n d the m i d s h i p superstructure o r deckhouse, where fitted, o r equivalent
m e a n s o f access s h a U b e p r o v i d e d t o c a r r y o u t t h e
p u r p o s e o f t h e g a n g w a y , s u c h as u n d e r d e c k passages.
T h e w i d t h o f t h e p a s s a g e s s h a U b e n o t less t h a n 1 m .
T h e gangways over the entire length o f the plating o n
e i t h e r side s h a U be f i t t e d w i t h l o n g i t u d i n a l g u a r d i n g
bars. ReUable g u a r d rails, the d i m e n s i o n s o f w h i c h shaU
c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 8 . 6 . 2 , 8.6.3 a n d 8 . 6 . 5
o f this P a r t , a n d 3.5.5.2, P a r t I I " H u U " shaU be p r o vided.
T h e g a n g w a y s shall be constructed o f a fire-resist i n g m a t e r i a l , a n d the p l a t i n g shall be m a d e , i n add i t i o n , o f a n o n - s l i p m a t e r i a l . W h e n t h e p l a t i n g is
m a n u f a c t u r e d o f fibre reinforced plastic, the m a t e r i a l
shall possess the l o w f l a m e spread characteristics, a n d
shall n o t generate excessive q u a n t i t i e s o f s m o k e a n d
toxic products at elevated temperatures i n c o m p U a n c e w i t h 1.6, P a r t V I " F i r e P r o t e c t i o n "
I n ships n o t h a v i n g a m i d s h i p superstructure arr a n g e m e n t s t o t h e s a t i s f a c t i o n o f t h e R e g i s t e r s h a l l be
made to safeguard the crew i n reaching all parts o f
t h e s h i p w h i l e a t sea.
8.6.10 S a f e a n d c o n v e n i e n t l a d d e r s f r o m t h e l e v e l
o f the g a n g w a y s t o the deck shall be p r o v i d e d ; t h e y
shall n o t be spaced m o r e t h a n 4 0 m apart.
W h e r e the l e n g t h o f the deck is m o r e t h a n 7 0 m ,
special t r i p a r t i t e shelters ( b o w sides) s h a l l be
p r o v i d e d a l o n g t h e g a n g w a y s o r o t h e r m e a n s o f access f o r p r o t e c t i o n o f t h e c r e w f r o m b a d w e a t h e r .
S u c h shelters shall be designed f o r at least o n e p e r s o n
and Construction
of Sea-Going
a n d shall be spaced n o t m o r e t h a n 45 m apart.

o r o t h e r d e c k e q u i p m e n t s h a l l n o t i m p e d e safe
sage.
8.6.11 R e q u i r e m e n t s o f 8 . 6 . 1 t o 8 . 6 . 5 a n d
are n o t appUed t o the shipborne barges. I n such
at least g u a r d rails shall be p r o v i d e d .
8.7 H O I S T I N G G E A R O F S H I P B O R N E
Ships
Pipes
pas8.6.9
case,
BARGES
8.7.1 T h e e l e m e n t s o f t h e h o i s t i n g g e a r o f t h e
shipborne barges t o be Ufted b y the crane o n b o a r d the
barge carrier (lugs, eye plates,
rings,
shackles,
grips, etc.) s h a l l be designed t o w i t h s t a n d t h e forces
resulting f r o m Ufting the shipborne barge u n i f o r m l y
loaded w i t h the specification cargo and gripped i n t w o
p o i n t s d i a g o n a l l y positioned. U n d e r these forces the
stresses i n t h e e l e m e n t s o f t h e h o i s t i n g g e a r s h a U
n o t e x c e e d 0,7 t i m e s t h e u p p e r y i e l d s t r e s s o f m a t e r i a l .
8.8 P I L O T T R A N S F E R A R R A N G E M E N T S , M E A N S
OF EMBARKATION A N D DISEMBARKATION
8.8.1 S h i p s e n g a g e d o n v o y a g e s i n t h e c o u r s e o f
w h i c h p i l o t s are l i k e l y t o be e m p l o y e d s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d
w i t h pilot transfer arrangements. Construction and posit i o n o f pilot transfer arrangements shall c o m p l y w i t h the
requirements specified i n regulation V / 2 3 o f the Intern a t i o n a l C o n v e n t i o n S O L A S - 7 4 , as a m e n d e d ( h e r e i n after, S O L A S ) , a n d I M O r e s o l u t i o n A . 1 0 4 5 ( 2 7 ) .
Interpretation: sub-paragraphs 1 and 2 o f S O L A S regu l a t i o n V / 2 3 . 3 . 3 address t w o different and distinct
arrangements the f o r m e r w h e n o n l y a p i l o t ladder is
used; the latter w h e n a c o m b i n e d arrangement o f "an
accommodation ladder used i n conjunction w i t h the p i l o t
ladder" is used.
S O L A S regulation V/23.3.3.1 Umits the cUmb to
n o t m o r e t h a n 9 m o n a single ladder relative t o the
still w a t e r Une w h i c h is c o n s i d e r e d a n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n
for the p i l o t to b o a r d the ship. I n such instances w h e n
o n l y a p i l o t ladder is used, "due a l l o w a n c e " f o r adv e r s e l i s t o f 15 a p p l i e s t o a n e m e r g e n c y c o n d i t i o n
and permits a pilot cUmb m o r e than 9 m by a n additional length o f p i l o t ladder.
S O L A S regulation V/23.3.3.2 and Section 3 o f
I M O r e s o l u t i o n A . 1045(27) apply t o a c o m b i n e d arrangement o f "an a c c o m m o d a t i o n ladder used i n
c o n j u n c t i o n w i t h the p i l o t ladder" f o r "safe a n d
c o n v e n i e n t access t o , a n d egress f r o m , t h e s h i p " f o r
w h i c h a 15 U s t r e q u i r e m e n t d o e s n o t a p p l y .
8.8.2 T h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f m e a n s o f e m b a r k a t i o n
and disembarkation shall comply w i t h the requirements o f I M O circular M S C . 1/Circ. 1331.
Arrangements
and
Outfit
291
9 EMERGENCY OUTFIT
9.1
G E N E R A L
9.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s S e c t i o n a p p l y t o
ships flying t h e flag o f t h e R u s s i a n F e d e r a t i o n .
F o r ships f l y i n g t h e flags o f o t h e r states, t h e r e quirements o f this Section are optional. T h e shipo w n e r , a t h i s discretion, shall determine t h e necessity
and completeness o f emergency outfit o n board,
considering i t s service area, d i m e n s i o n s as w e l l as
n a t i o n a l s t a n d a r d s o f t h e flag state.
9.1.2 T h e i t e m s l i s t e d i n T a b l e s 9 . 2 . 1 , 9 . 2 . 2 - 1 ,
9.2.2-2 a n d 9.2.3 available i n t h e ship, b u t intended
for other purposes m a y be included into the emer-
gency outfit, p r o v i d e d these items have corresponding m a r k i n g s a n d their p e r m a n e n t storage places are
situated above t h e b u l k h e a d deck.
9.2 I T E M S
REQUIRED
9.2.1 A l l s h i p s e x e p t t h o s e s p e c i f i e d i n 9 . 2 . 4
a n d 9.2.6 shall h a v e e m e r g e n c y o u t f i t i n t h e scope n o t
less t h a n listed i n T a b l e 9 . 2 . 1 .
F o r t h e u n m a n n e d non-self-propelled ships n o
emergency outfit is required. T h e m a n n e d non-selfpropelled ships shall be supplied w i t h t h e emergency
T a b l e
9.2.1
Quantity f o rships o f length L , i n m

Item, unit
Nos.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
A r m o u r e d collision mat, p c
L i g h t e n e d collision mat, p c
T h r u m m e d collision mat, p c
Thrummed pad, pc
Set o f rigging tools
S e t o f fitter's tools
Pine bar, pc
Pine bar, pc
Pine plank, pc
Pine plank, pc
Pine wedge, p c
Birch wedge, p c
P i n e p l u g s f o rships w i t h side scuttles, p c
Pine plugs, p c
Unbleached canvas, m
C o a r s e felt, m
R u b b e r plate, m
Tarred tow, k g
W i r e ( l o w - c a r b o n steel), p c
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Construction shackles, p c
H e x a g o n - h e a d bolt, p c
H e x a g o n - h e a d bolt, p c
Hexagonal nut, p c
W a s h e r for bolt, p c
Construction nails, k g
Construction nails, k g
C e m e n t (quick setting), k g
Sand, natural, k g
Accelerator for concrete setting, k g
Minium, k g
Technical fat, k g
Carpenter's axe, p c
S a w , cross-cut, p c
Hack-saw, pc
Shovel, p c
Bucket, p c
Sledge hammer, p c
L a n t e r n o f explosion-proof type, p c
S t o p o f telescopic type, p c
E m e r g e n c y screw clamp, p c
Size
4,5x4,5 m
3,0 x 3,0 m
2,0x2,0 m
0,4x0,5 m
a s p e r T a b l e 9.2.3
a s p e r T a b l e 9.2.3
150 x 150 x 4000 m m
8 0 x 1 0 0 x 2000 m m
50 x 200 x 4000 m m
50 x 2 0 0 x 2 0 0 0 m m
30 x 2 0 0 x 2 0 0 m m
60 x 2 0 0 x 4 0 0 m m
side scuttle diameter
10 x 3 0 x 150 m m
10 m m i n t h i c k n e s s
5 m mi n thickness
3 m mi n dia, coils,
50 m e a c h
12 m m i n d i a
M16x400 m m
M 1 6 x 260 m m
M16
M16
70 m m l o n g
150 m m l o n g
1200 m m i n l e n g t h
600 m m i n l e n g t h
5 kg
W h a t e v e r t h e ship length, iceclass a n d n a v i g a t i o n area are.
150 a n d
over
f r o m 150
t o 70 i n c l .
f r o m 70
t o 24 i n c l .
4
1
1
8
2
8
4
10
8
6
10
10
3
2
50
2
3
1
1
6
2
6
2
6
6
4
6
6
2
1
30
2
12
10
4
16
32
4
6
400
400
20
15
15
2
1
1
3
3
1
1
3
2
8
6
2
10
20
3
4
300
300
15
10
10
2
1
1
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
4
2
2
4
4
2
4
4
1
0,5
20
1
4
2
2
6
12
2
2
100
100
5
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Quantity
for
b e l o w 24 t a n k e r s
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
2
2
10
2
4
8
1
1
100
100
5
5
2
4
4
4
4
0,5
5
1
4
1
1
100
100
5
5
5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
292
Rules
outfit i n accordance w i t h 9.2.10 like floating docks

w i t h n o permanent direct c o m m u n i c a t i o n w i t h the
shore.
9.2.2 A d d i t i o n a l s e t o f e m e r g e n c y o u t f i t , a b o v e
that listed i n Table 9.2.1, shall be provided:
in accordance w i t h T a b l e 9.2.2-1 f o r passenger
a n d special purpose ships, o f7 0 m i n l e n g t h a n d over,
except those o f glass-reinforced plastics;
i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h T a b l e 9.2.2-2 f o r glass-re
inforced plastic ships.
T a b l e 9.2.2-1
Nos.
Item
Quantity
Portable autogenous cutting torch complete

with seto f fully charged g a s cylinders
H a n d jack, hydraulic
Blacksmith's sledge h a m m e r
F o r g e chisel with haft
Crowbar
J a c k 9,8 k N
J a c k 19,6 k N
2
3
4
5
6
7
1
1
1
2
1
1
T a b l e 9.2.2-2
Item
Nos.
1
2
3
Quantity
2
25 m
3 kg
5 kg
Glass fabric
Glass roving
Resin binder with hardener
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
9.2.3 T h e s e t s o f r i g g i n g a n d f i t t e r ' s t o o l s s p e c i
fied i n T a b l e 9.2.1 shall be completed according t o
T a b l e 9.2.3.
9.2.4 F o r s h i p s o f r e s t r i c t e d a r e a s o f n a v i g a t i o n R l ,
R 2 - R S N , R2-RSN(4,5) a n d R 3 - R S N except those
specified i n 9.2.5, e q u i p m e n t w i t h emergency o u t f i t
a n d m a t e r i a l s m a y be l a i d d o w n as f o r t h e nearest
l o w e r g r o u p o f ship's division depending o n their
length according t o Table 9.2.1.
The m i n i m u m a m o u n t o f emergency outfit f o r
ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3 w i l l b e spe
cially c o n s i d e r e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
9.2.5 F o r s h i p s w i t h i c e s t r e n g t h e n i n g o f A r c 5 ,
, A r c 7 , A r c 8 a n d A r c 9 c a t e g o r i e s , e q u i p m e n t
w i t h emergency outfit a n d materials shall be estab
lished as f o r t h e nearest h i g h e r g r o u p o f ship's d i v i
sion according t o t h e i r l e n g t h as p e r T a b l e 9.2.1.
9.2.6 F o r g l a s s - r e i n f o r c e d p l a s t i c s h i p s p r o v i s i o n
o f emergency outfit listed u n d e r 6, 9, 17, 2 1 t o 2 4 ,2 6
to 2 9 , 3 1 ,35, 36, 39, a n d 4 0 o f T a b l e 9.2.1 is n o t
required.
9.2.7 I n s h i p s i n t e n d e d t o c a r r y f l a m m a b l e a n d
explosive cargoes tools o f emergency outfit shall be
made o f non-sparking materials wherever practic
able.
9.2.8 T h e t u g s o f r e s t r i c t e d a r e a o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3
need n o t be equipped w i t h emergency outfit, except
f o r t h e sets o f r i g g i n g a n d f i t t e r ' s t o o l s r e q u i r e d i n
accordance w i t h T a b l e 9.2.3.
T a b l e
Item
Nos.
Quantity perset
Size
rigging
1
2
3
4
5
6
Tape measure
Bench hammer
Sledge h a m m e r
Rigger's mallet
Puncher ( d u m b iron)
Chisel
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Marline spike
Carpenter's chisel
Screw auger
Tongs
Hollow punch
Hollow punch
T r i a n g u l a r file
H a l f - r o u n d file
Multi-purpose tongs
Screw driver
Adjustable wrench
Wrench
Rigger's knife
Hack-saw frame
Hack-saw blade
Kit-bag
1
1
fitter's
2000 m m l o n g
0,5 k g
3,0 k g
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
20 m m w i d e ,
200 m m l o n g
300 m m l o n g
20 m m w i d e
18 m m i n d i a
200 m m l o n g
18 m m i n d i a
25 m m i n d i a
300 m m l o n g
300 m m l o n g
200 m m l o n g
10 m m w i d e
J a w w i d t h u p t o 36 m m
J a w w i d t h o f 24 m m
9.2.3
P a r t III.
Equipment,
Arrangements
and
Outfit
9.2.9 F o r tugs o f unrestricted service a n d restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R l w i t h ice s t r e n g t h e n i n g

o f A r c 5 and higher category equipment w i t h emerg e n c y o u t f i t a n d m a t e r i a l s s h a l l be e s t a b l i s h e d as f o r
the nearest higher g r o u p according t o T a b l e 9.2.1.
9.2.10 T h e f l o a t i n g docks w h i c h are n o t i n perm a n e n t direct c o m m u n i c a t i o n w i t h the shore shall
h a v e e m e r g e n c y o u t f i t as i n d i c a t e d u n d e r i t e m s 5, 6,
19 t o 2 6 , 3 2 t o 3 4 a n d 37 o f T a b l e 9 . 2 . 1 , l e n g t h o f t h e
f l o a t i n g d o c k L b e i n g t a k e n i n t h i s case i n s t e a d o f t h e
ship's l e n g t h L .
T h e f l o a t i n g docks w h i c h are i n p e r m a n e n t direct
c o m m u n i c a t i o n w i t h the shore need n o t be p r o v i d e d
w i t h emergency outfit.
9.2.11 F o r berth-connected ships, the emergency
o u t f i t shall be chosen b y the o w n e r .
9.2.12 Ships h a v i n g a distinguishing m a r k F F 1 ,
F F 1 W S , F F 2 , F F 2 W S a n d F F 3 W S i n the class n o t a t i o n
shall have t w o searchlights capable o f p r o v i d i n g an
efficient horizontal and vertical range o f i l l u m i n a t i o n o f a
surface n o t less t h a n 10 m i n d i a m e t e r at a distance u p t o
2 5 0 m at the m i n i m u m i l l u m i n a t i o n i n t e n s i t y u p t o 5 0 l x
at d a r k t i m e a n d clear atmosphere.
9.3 S T O R A G E O F E M E R G E N C Y
OUTFIT
9.3.1 T h e e m e r g e n c y o u t f i t i n d i c a t e d i n 9.2 s h a l l
be stored at least i n t w o emergency stations, o n e o f
w h i c h s h a l l be s i t u a t e d i n t h e m a c h i n e r y space.
E m e r g e n c y s t a t i o n s m a y be special spaces, b o x e s o r
places a l l o c a t e d o n t h e d e c k o r i n spaces.
I n the emergency s t a t i o n o f the m a c h i n e r y space
the outfit necessary for carrying o u t the emergency
o p e r a t i o n s inside the space shall be stored; the rest o f
the emergency o u t f i t shall generally be stored i n the
emergency stations located above the b u l k h e a d deck;
i n s h i p s o f less t h a n 4 5 m i n l e n g t h i t is a l l o w e d t o
locate the emergency station below the bulkhead
d e c k o n c o n d i t i o n t h a t free access t o t h i s s t a t i o n is
provided at all times.
I n ships o f 3 1 m i n l e n g t h a n d b e l o w i t is a l l o w e d
to store the emergency outfit o n l y i n one emergency
station.
9.3.2 A free passage shall be p r o v i d e d i n f r o n t o f
the emergency station; the passage w i d t h shall be
selected d e p e n d i n g o n t h e o v e r a l l d i m e n s i o n s o f t h e
o u t f i t s t o r e d i n t h e s t a t i o n b u t n o t l e s s t h a n 1,2 m .
I n s h i p s o f less t h a n 7 0 m i n l e n g t h t h e p a s s a g e w i d t h
is a l l o w e d t o be r e d u c e d t o 0,8 m a n d i n ships o f 3 1 m
i n l e n g t h a n d b e l o w t o 0,6 m .
T h e passages t o the emergency stations shall
be as s t r a i g h t a n d s h o r t as p r a c t i c a b l e .
293
9.4
MARKING
9 . 4 . 1 I t e m s o f t h e e m e r g e n c y o u t f i t a n d cases f o r
their storage (apart f r o m c o l l i s i o n m a t s ) shall be
p a i n t e d b l u e e i t h e r e n t i r e l y o r i n a stripe. T h e cases
for emergency e q u i p m e n t storage shall have the distinct inscription to indicate the name o f the material,
weight a n d w a r r a n t e d storage period.
9.4.2 T h e emergency stations shall be p r o v i d e d
w i t h distinct inscriptions "Emergency Station".
M o r e o v e r , i n the passages a n d o n the decks notices
shall be posted s h o w i n g l o c a t i o n o f the emergency
stations.
9.5 C O L L I S I O N
M A T S
9.5.1 C o l l i s i o n m a t s shall be m a d e o f water-resistant canvas o r o t h e r e q u i v a l e n t fabric a n d be

p r o v i d e d w i t h either a soft o r w i r e i n t e r l a y e r depending o n the type o f the collision mat. T h e collision
m a t s shall be edged b y a leech rope w i t h f o u r t h i m bles fitted i n t o its corners. M o r e o v e r , cringles s h a l l be
p r o v i d e d according t o the n u m b e r o f ropes specified
in Table 9.5.1.
Basic data o n the collision m a t s are given
i n T a b l e 9.5.1 a n d F i g . 9.5.1.
Fig.
9.5.1
9.5.2 T h e pads shall be m a d e o f n a t u r a l fibre rope

strands a n d be t h r u m m e d w i t h n a t u r a l fibre s p u n
y a r n . A c a n v a s s h a l l be s e w n o n t h e b o t t o m side o f
the pad.
9.5.3 Sheets a n d guys o f a r m o u r e d c o l l i s i o n m a t s
shall be m a d e o f flexible steel w i r e ropes, c o n t r o l
lanyards o f n a t u r a l fibre ropes a n d h o g g i n g lines
f o r a l l c o l l i s i o n m a t s o f flexible steel w i r e ropes o r
chains h a v i n g suitable diameter.
W i r e s o f steel ropes s h a l l h a v e h e a v y z i n c c o a t i n g
in accordance w i t h the n a t i o n a l standards.
T h e l e n g t h o f t h e sheets s h a l l be c h o s e n so t h a t a
h o l e m a y be shut u p i n a n y place o f the shell p l a t i n g
a n d the ends o f the ropes m a y be efficiently secured
o n the deck.
294
Rules
for
T h e a c t u a l b r e a k i n g l o a d o f the w h o l e sheets shall

exceed t h a t o f t h e l e e c h r o p e s b y n o t less t h a n
25 per cent.
the Classification
and
Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
9.5.4 T h e b l o c k s o f e m e r g e n c y o u t f i t m a y h a v e h o o k s
as h a n g e r s . T h e p e r m i s s i b l e l o a d o f t h e s h a c k l e s j o i n i n g
t h e r o p e s s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0,25 t i m e s t h e a c t u a l
breaking load o f the w h o l e ropes referred to above.
T a b l e
Quantity
Nos.
Item
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Canvas layers
Interlayer
F a s t e n i n g o f stiffeners
Sheets
H o g g i n g lines
Guys
Control lanyard with marking
Shackles
T a c k l e s (safe w o r k i n g l o a d )
10
S n a t c h b l o c k s (safe w o r k i n g l o a d )
Armoured
collision mat,
4,5x4,5 m
Lightened
collision mat,
3,0 x 3,0 m
Thrummed
collision mat,
2,0x2,0 m
4
1 wire net with leech rope
2
1 felt p a d d i n g
I n p o c k e t s (pieces o f wire r o p e o r pipes)
2
2
2
1
9
2
(9,8 k N )
2
(9,8 k N )
2
1 pad
2
3
2
1
12
4
(14,7
kN)
4
(14,7
kN)
2
2
1
6
2
(9,8
kN)
2
(9,8
kN)
9.5.1
P a r t HI. Equipment,
Arrangements
and
Outfit
295
APPENDIX
CALCULATION O FT H E WIDTH O FSTAIRWAYS FORMING MEANS O F ESCAPE
O N PASSENGER SHIPS A N D O NSPECIAL P U R P O S E SHIPS C A R R Y I N G
M O R E T H A N 60 P E R S O N S
1. T h e calculation m e t h o d considers evacuation

f r o m enclosed spaces w i t h i n each m a i n v e r t i c a l z o n e
individually a n d takes into account all o fthe persons
using t h e stairway enclosures i n each zone, even i f
they enter that stairway f r o m another m a i n vertical
zone.
2. F o r each m a i n vertical zone t h e calculation
s h a l l d b e c o m p l e t e d f o r t h e n i g h t t i m e (case 1 ) a n d
d a y t i m e (case 2 ) a n d t h e largest d i m e n s i o n f r o m e i
t h e r case used f o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e s t a i r w a y w i d t h f o r
each deck under consideration.
3. F o r m u l t i - d e c k ships, t h e t o t a l s t a i r w a y
w i d t h W, i n m m , w h i c h a l l o w s f o r t h e t i m e l y f l o w o f
persons evacuating f r o m adjacent decks is determined
using the following calculation method:
w h e n j o i n i n g t w o decks
W=(N
+ N
w h e n j o i n i n g f o u r decks
W=(N
+ N + 0,5N
stafion
N=263
Deck
+ 0,25/V )-10
N=4fS
Deck
5
N = 425
Deck
4
N^158
3
N=50
Deck
Deck
(3-2)
+ 0,5/V )-10;
4 x~
Muster
Deck
w h e n j o i n i n g three decks
W=(N
(3-1)
+ /V )-10;
N=200
Deck
N=200
(3-3)
F i g . 3.1 M i n i m u m s t a i r w a y w i d t h c a l c u l a t i o n e x a m p l e :
where
N \ = t h e n u m b e r o fpersons t o b eevacuated f r o m deck

with t h e largest n u m b e r o f persons using t h e
stairway;
N = t h en u m b e r o f persons t ob e evacuated f r o m the deck
w i t h the next largest n u m b e r o f persons directly entering
t h e s t a i r w a y etc., i.e. N i > N > N > N .
2
W h e n j o i n i n g five o rm o r e decks, t h e t o t a l stair

w a y w i d t h shall be determined b y F o r m u l a (3-3) w i t h
regard f o r t h e n u m b e r o f tiers a n dtheir capacity
(refer t o F i g . 3.1).
T h e calculated value o f W m a y bereduced where
available landing area is provided i n stairways a t t h e
deck level (refer t o F i g . 3.2).
T h e doors t o t h e muster station shall have a n
aggregate w i d t h o f a t least D = 900 + 9355 = 10255.
4. T h e s t a i r w a y shall n o t decrease i n w i d t h i n t h e
direction o f evacuation t o t h e muster station, except
i n t h e case o f several m u s t e r s t a t i o n s i n o n e m a i n
vertical zone t h e s t a i r w a y w i d t h shall n o t decrease i n
the direction o f the evacuation t o the most distant
muster station.
5. W h e r e t h epassengers a n d c r e w a r e h e l d a t
a muster station w h i c h is n o t a t t h e survival craft
embarkation position t h e dimensions o f stairway
w i d t h a n d doors f r o m the muster station t othis p o -
D e c k 1: ^ = 200,
W = 200-10 = 2000;
D e c k 2: ^ = 2 0 0 , i V = 50,
= ( 2 0 0 + 50)-10 = 2500;
D e c k 3: N = 2 0 0 , N = 158, N = 50,
W = ( 2 0 0 + 158 + 0,5-50)-10 = 3830;
D e c k 4: i V j = 4 2 5 , N = 2 0 0 , N = 158, N = 50,
^ = ( 4 2 5 + 200 + 0,5-158 + 0,25-50)10 = 7165;
D e c k 5: i V j = 4 2 5 , N = 4 1 9 , N = 158, N = 50,
^ = ( 4 2 5 + 419 + 0,5-158 + 0,25-50)-10 = 9355;
D e c k 7: ^ = 2 0 0 ,
W=900.
2
sition shall bebased o n the n u m b e r o f persons i n t h e

c o n t r o l l e d groups. T h e w i d t h o f these stairways a n d
d o o r s need n o t exceed 1 5 0 0 m m unless larger d i
m e n s i o n s a r e r e q u i r e d f o r e v a c u a t i o n f r o m these
spaces u n d e r n o r m a l c o n d i t i o n s .
6. T h e calculations o f s t a i r w a y w i d t h shall b e
based u p o n t h e crew a n d passenger l o a d o n each
deck. F o r t h e purpose o ft h e calculation t h e m a x
i m u m capacity o f a p u b l i c space shall b e defined b y
either o f t h e following t w o values: t h en u m b e r o f
seats o r s i m i l a r a r r a n g e m e n t s , o r t h e n u m b e r o b
tained b y assigning 2 m o f gross deck surface area t o
each person.
2
296
Ships
25 m
Fig. 3.2 L a n d i n g c a l c u l a t i o n f o r s t a i r w a y w i d t h r e d u c t i o n :
1 h a n d r a i l o n b o t h sides o f t h e s t a i r w a y ;
2 intermediate landing;
3 necessary f l o w area f o r accessing the f l o w o nthe stairs;
4 door area
P = Sx 3 p e r s o n s / m = t h e n u m b e r o f p e r s o n s t a k i n g r e f u g e o n
the landing t o a m a x i m u m o f P = 0,25Z;
N = Z P
= t h e n u m b e r o f persons directly entering t h e
stairway f l o w f r o m a given deck;
Z = t h en u m b e r o fpersons t o be evacuated f r o m t h e deck
considered;
5 = available l a n d i n g area, i n m , after subtracting the surface
area necessary f o r m o v e m e n t a n d subtracting the space t a k e n b y the
d o o r s w i n g area;
D = w i d t h o f exit doors t o the s t a i r w a y l a n d i n g area, i n m m .
2
Fig. 7 Occupant loading calculation example:

1 p u b l i c space;
2 l a n d i n g credit area;
3 d o o r area;
D O W N , U P = stairway flow path
for u p p e r space:
25 m * 8 m
Z ( p e r s >
2 m
^(pers.)= 100-0,75 = 75;
for l o w e r space:
25 m * 10 m
Z(pe s.) =
r
Y^2=
1 2 5
' ^( ers.)= 125'0,75 = 93.

P
m e m b e r s o f the c r e w i n p u b l i c spaces occupied

t o 1/3 o f m a x i m u m c a p a c i t y ;
7. T h e d i m e n s i o n s o f the m e a n s o f escape shall b e
s e r v i c e s p a c e s o c c u p i e d b y 1/3 o f t h e c r e w ;
calculated o n the basis o f the t o t a l n u m b e r o f persons
c r e w a c c o m m o d a t i o n o c c u p i e d b y 1/3 o f t h e c r e w .
expected t o escape b y t h e s t a i r w a y a n d t h r o u g h
8. T h e m a x i m u m n u m b e r o f p e r s o n s c o n t a i n e d i n
d o o r w a y s , corridors a n d l a n d i n g (refer t o F i g . 7).
a vertical zone including persons entering stairways
f r o m another m a i n vertical zone shall n o t be assumed
Calculations shall be m a d e separately for the t w o
to be higher t h a n the m a x i m u m n u m b e r o f persons
cases o f o c c u p a n c y o f t h e spaces specified b e l o w . F o r
each c o m p o n e n t p a r t o f t h e escape r o u t e , t h e d i a u t h o r i z e d t o b e carried o n b o a r d f o r the calculation
of the stairway w i d t h only.
m e n s i o n t a k e n s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e l a r g e s t d i
m e n s i o n d e t e r m i n e d f o r e a c h case:
Case 1 :
passengers i n cabins w i t h m a x i m u m berthing
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
capacity fully occupied;
members o fthe crew i n cabins occupied t o 2/3
o f m a x i m u m berthing capacity;
1. T h e aggregate w i d t h o f s t a i r w a y exit d o o r s t o
s e r v i c e s p a c e s o c c u p i e d b y 1/3 o f t h e c r e w ;
t h e m u s t e r s t a t i o n s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h e a g g r e g a t e
w i d t h o f stairways serving this deck.
Case 2 :
passengers i n p u b l i c spaces occupied t o 3 / 4
2. M e a n s o f escape p l a n s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d i n
o f m a x i m u m capacity;
dicating the following:
Arrangements
and
Outfit
.1 the n u m b e r o f crew a n d passengers i n a l l

n o r m a l l y o c c u p i e d spaces;
.2 t h e n u m b e r o f c r e w a n d passengers expected t o
escape b y the s t a i r w a y a n d t h r o u g h d o o r w a y s , corridors and landing;
.3 m u s t e r s t a t i o n s a n d s u r v i v a l c r a f t e m b a r k a t i o n
positions;
297
.4 p r i m a r y a n d secondary m e a n s o f escape;
.5 w i d t h o f s t a i r w a y s , d o o r s , c o r r i d o r s a n d
l a n d i n g areas.
3. M e a n s o f escape p l a n s s h a l l be a c c o m p a n i e d
by detailed calculations for determining the w i d t h o f
escape stairways, d o o r s , c o r r i d o r s a n d l a n d i n g areas.
PART IV. STABILITY

1 GENERAL
1.1
APPLICATION
1.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e present P a r t o f the

Rules apply to decked ships sailing i n displacement
c o n d i t i o n . A s t o sailing ships n a v i g a t i n g u n d e r sails
t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t P a r t a p p l y t o t h e m as
f a r as i t is r e a s o n a b l e a n d p r a c t i c a b l e .
1.1.2 U n l e s s expressly p r o v i d e d o t h e r w i s e , t h e
requirements o f the present P a r t apply t o ships i n
service as f a r as i t is r e a s o n a b l e a n d p r a c t i c a b l e , b u t i t
is, h o w e v e r , c o m p u l s o r y f o r ships w h i c h u n d e r g o
reconstruction, m a j o r repair, alteration o r modificat i o n i f t h e i r s t a b i l i t y is i m p a i r e d as a result.
Stability o f ships u n d e r 24 m i n l e n g t h after
reconstruction, m a j o r repair, alteration o r modification shall c o m p l y either w i t h the requirements o f this
P a r t o r w i t h the requirements appUed t o such ships
before reconstruction, m a j o r repair, alteration o r
modification.
1.1.3 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s set f o r t h i n t h e p r e s e n t
P a r t do n o t extend to the Ught-ship condition, except
for the provisions given i n 2.3.1.
1
1.2.1 D e f i n i t i o n s a n d e x p l a n a t i o n s c o n c e r n i n g the
general t e r m i n o l o g y o f the R u l e s are given i n P a r t I
"Classification".
F o r the purpose o f the present P a r t the following
definitions a n d explanations have been adopted.
A m p l i t u d e o f r o l l is a n a s s u m e d r a t e d
ampUtude o f roll.
M o u l d e d d e p t h is the v e r t i c a l distance
measured amidships f r o m the top o f plate keel or
f r o m the p o i n t w h e r e the i n n e r surface o f shell p l a t i n g
abuts u p o n the bar keel to the top o f the b e a m o f the
u p p e r m o s t c o n t i n u o u s deck, i.e. o f t h e deck b e l o w
w h i c h t h e v o l u m e o f the ship's h u l l is t a k e n i n t o
account i n stability calculations. I n ships h a v i n g a
r o u n d e d g u n w a l e , t h e m o u l d e d d e p t h is m e a s u r e d t o
the p o i n t o f i n t e r s e c t i o n o f m o u l d e d Unes o f the
u p p e r m o s t c o n t i n u o u s deck a n d side, t h e Unes
e x t e n d i n g so as i f t h e g u n w a l e w e r e o f a n g u l a r
design. I f t h e u p p e r m o s t c o n t i n u o u s deck is stepped
and the raised part o f the deck extends over the p o i n t
'in Section 1 o f the present Part the term "ship" also includes a
floating crane, crane ship dock, transport pontoon a n d berthconnected ship, unless expressly provided otherwise.
at w h i c h the m o u l d e d d e p t h shall be d e t e r m i n e d , the

m o u l d e d d e p t h shall be m e a s u r e d t o a line o f
reference extending f r o m the l o w e r p a r t o f the deck
along a Une parallel w i t h the raised part.
H y d r o s t a t i c c u r v e s are curves o f the
ship's Unes p l a n particulars.
W i n d p r e s s u r e is a n a s s u m e d r a t e d pressure
of wind.
D i a g r a m o f l i m i t i n g m o m e n t s is a
d i a g r a m o f U m i t i n g statical m o m e n t s , o n the abscissa
o f w h i c h ship's displacement, deadweight o r d r a u g h t
is p l o t t e d a n d o n t h e o r d i n a t e , U m i t i n g v a l u e s o f t h e
vertical statical m o m e n t s o f masses meeting the
complex o f various requirements o f the present P a r t
for ship's stabiUty.
L e n g t h o f s h i p i s t h e l e n g t h as d e f i n e d i n t h e
L o a d Line Rules for Sea-Going Ships.
L i q u i d c a r g o e s are all liquids o n board,
including t a n k e r cargo, the ship's l i q u i d stores,
ballast water, water i n the antirolUng tanks and i n
t h e s w i m m i n g p o o l , etc.
S t o r e s are fuel, fresh water, p r o v i s i o n , o i l ,
e x p e n d a b l e suppUes, etc.
G r a i n means wheat, maize (corn), oats, rye,
b a r l e y , rice, pulses, seeds a n d p r o c e s s e d f o r m s t h e r e o f
w h o s e b e h a v i o u r is s i m i l a r t o t h a t o f g r a i n i n its
n a t u r a l state.
I n f o r m a t i o n is I n f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i U t y .
W e l l is a n o p e n space o n the u p p e r deck n o t
longer t h a n 30 per cent o f the length o f the ship,
bounded by superstructures and a continuous bulw a r k provided w i t h freeing ports.
Heeling m o m e n t due to w i n d
press u r e is a n a s s u m e d r a t e d m o m e n t caused b y w i n d
pressure.
A m i d s h i p s is at t h e m i d d l e o f t h e ship's
length.
B u l k c a r g o is g r a i n a n d n o n - g r a i n cargo
constituted by separate particles a n d loaded w i t h o u t
packaging.
S u p e r s t r u c t u r e is a d e c k e d s t r u c t u r e o n the
u p p e r m o s t c o n t i n u o u s deck, e x t e n d i n g f r o m side t o
side o f t h e ship o r w i t h t h e side p l a t i n g n o t b e i n g
inboard o f the shell plating m o r e t h a n 4 per cent o f
the greatest b r e a d t h o f the ship. A raised quarter deck
is r e g a r d e d as a s u p e r s t r u c t u r e .
H o m o g e n e o u s
cargo
is c a r g o h a v i n g
constant stowage rate.
C a p s i z i n g m o m e n t is a n a s s u m e d r a t e d
m i n i m u m h e e U n g m o m e n t b y w h i c h t h e ship is
capsized.
Part IV.
Stability
299
O p e n i n g s c o n s i d e r e d t o b e o p e n are
o p e n i n g s i n t h e u p p e r d e c k o r h u l l sides, as w e l l as i n
decks, sides a n d b u l k h e a d s o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s a n d
deckhouses whose closures do n o t c o m p l y w i t h the
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f S e c t i o n 7, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t ,
A r r a n g e m e n t s a n d O u t f i t " as t o t h e i r s t r e n g t h ,
weathertightness a n d efficiency. S m a l l openings such
as t h o s e f o r p a s s i n g w i r e s o r c h a i n s , t a c k l e a n d
anchors, a n d also holes o f scuppers, discharge a n d
s a n i t a r y pipes s h a l l n o t be c o n s i d e r e d as o p e n i f t h e y
s u b m e r g e a t a n a n g l e o f i n c l i n a t i o n m o r e t h a n 30. I f
t h e y s u b m e r g e a t a n a n g l e o f 30 o r l e s s , t h e s e
openings shall be a s s u m e d o p e n i f the Register
considers this t o be a source o f significant f l o o d i n g .
the ship's centre o f g r a v i t y ) a l o n g the axis o f

ordinates f o r constructing straight half-Unes determ i n i n g the weight stabiUty.
B r e a d t h o f s h i p is the m a x i m u m b r e a d t h
measured o n the s u m m e r l o a d Une f r o m outside o f
frame t o outside o f frame i n a ship w i t h m e t a l shell
a n d t o the o u t e r surface o f the h u l l i n a ship w i t h the
shell o f a n y other m a t e r i a l .
V a r i o u s symbols used i n the present are given i n
the Table at the end o f the present Part.
D e c k t i m b e r cargo
is a t i m b e r cargo
carried o n open parts o f the freeboard deck o r
superstructure. T h e said t e r m does n o t apply t o the
w o o d - p u l p o r similar cargo.
P a s s a g e is n a v i g a t i o n o f a ship o u t s i d e the
prescribed area o f navigation.
V o y a g e is n a v i g a t i o n o f a ship b e l o n g i n g t o the
technical fleet w i t h i n the prescribed area o f navigation.
W i n d a g e a r e a is t h e p r o j e c t e d l a t e r a l area o f
the above-water p o r t i o n o f the ship (except f o r a
floating crane o r crane ship) o n the centreUne w i t h
the ship i n the upright position.
C o r r e c t i o n f o r f r e e s u r f a c e s is a correction a l l o w i n g f o r a decrease i n the ship's stability
due t o the effect o f free surfaces o f U q u i d cargoes.
D e c k h o u s e is a decked s t r u c t u r e o n the u p p e r
deck o r superstructure deck w i t h its side p l a t i n g , o n
o n e side a t least, b e i n g i n b o a r d o f t h e shell p l a t i n g b y
m o r e t h a n 4 per cent o f the greatest b r e a d t h o f the
ship measured amidships to the outside o f frames a n d
having doors, w i n d o w s and other similar openings i n
external bulkheads.
S i s t e r s h i p s are ships b u i l t at the same y a r d
according to the same drawings.
A s p e c i a l f a c i l i t y is a system p e r m a n e n t l y
installed i n the ship f o r rapid estimation o f her initial
stabiUty (e.g. h e e U n g t a n k s w i t h a n g l e - o f - i n c U n a t i o n
indicators) a n d approved by the Register for measurem e n t o f angles o f i n c U n a t i o n d u r i n g t h e i n c U n i n g test.
L i g h t s h i p i s a f u l l y r e a d y s h i p less d e a d w e i g h t . W a t e r ballast is i n c l u d e d i n t h e d e a d w e i g h t .
A n g l e o f f l o o d i n g is t h e angle o f h e e l a t
w h i c h t h e ship's i n t e r i o r spaces are f l o o d e d b y w a t e r
t h r o u g h openings considered t o be o p e n o r openings
w h i c h m a y be o p e n e d as r e q u i r e d b y o p e r a t i o n
conditions o f the ship i n w o r k i n g position.
U n i v e r s a l d i a g r a m is a d i a g r a m o f ship's
stability w i t h a n o n - u n i f o r m scale o f abscissae
p r o p o r t i o n a l t o t h e h e e U n g a n g l e sines, a set o f
cross-curves o f stabiUty f o r v a r i o u s displacements
a n d a scale o f m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t s ( o r o f h e i g h t s o f
1.3.1 G e n e r a l p r o v i s i o n s p e r t a i n i n g t o t h e p r o c e d u r e o f c l a s s i f i c a t i o n a n d s u r v e y s , as w e l l as t h e
requirements f o r the technical d o c u m e n t a t i o n subm i t t e d t o the Register f o r r e v i e w a n d a p p r o v a l are
contained i n G e n e r a l Regulations for the Classification and Other Activity and i n Part I "Classification".
1.3.2 F o r e v e r y s h i p s u b j e c t t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f the present Part, the Register shall carry o u t the
following:
.1 p r i o r t o t h e c o m m e n c e m e n t o f ship's c o n s t r u c tion and conversion:
consideration and approval o f technical docum e n t a t i o n relating to ship's stabiUty;
.2 d u r i n g s h i p ' s c o n s t r u c t i o n , c o n v e r s i o n a n d
trials:
supervision o f the i n c U n i n g test a n d U g h t - w e i g h t
check;
consideration and approval o f the I n f o r m a t i o n
on StabiUty;
consideration and approval o f GuideUnes o n the
Safe B a l l a s t W a t e r E x c h a n g e a t Sea;
.3 d u r i n g s p e c i a l s u r v e y s f o r t h e p u r p o s e o f c l a s s
renewal a n d after repair o r modernization:
inspections to check for changes i n the light-ship
condition i n order to conclude whether the I n f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i U t y is still appUcable;
for passenger ships a n d f i s h i n g vessels,
determination o f light-ship weight experimentally
a n d s u p e r v i s i o n o f the i n c U n i n g test a n d U g h t - w e i g h t
check.
1.4 G E N E R A L T E C H N I C A L
REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1 A l l c a l c u l a t i o n s s h a l l b e m a d e b y t h e
methods generally accepted i n n a v a l architecture.
W h e n using a computer, the methods o f computation
a n d p r o g r a m m e s h a l l be a p p r o v e d b y t h e Register.
1.4.2 C a l c u l a t i o n o f c r o s s - c u r v e s o f s t a b i l i t y .
1.4.2.1 C r o s s - c u r v e s o f s t a b i U t y s h a l l b e c a l c u lated for the waterline parallel to the design waterUne.
300
Rules
F o r ships o p e r a t i n g w i t h p e r m a n e n t considerable
initial t r i m , cross-curves o f stabiUty shall be calculated w i t h d u e regard f o r this t r i m u p o n agreement
Cross-curves o f stabiUty shall be calculated w i t h
due regard t o the accompanying trim.
I n t h e presence o f port-starboard a s y m m e t r y
( i n c l u d i n g deck spaces), t h e m o s t u n f a v o u r a b l e
righting lever curve shall be used.
1.4.2.2 W h e n c a l c u l a t i n g t h e c r o s s - c u r v e s o f
s t a b i l i t y , f u l l a c c o u n t m a y b e t a k e n o f t h o s e tiers o f
superstructure which:
.1 m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7 . 5 , P a r t I I I " E q u i p ment, A r r a n g e m e n t s a n d O u t f i t " f o rt h e first tier o f
superstructure (counting f r o m t h e freeboard deck);
side scuttles as c o n c e r n s t h e efficiency o f t h e i r
closures shall be i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h 7.2.1.3
to 7.2.1.5 o f t h e said P a r t ;
.2 h a v e a n a c c e s s f o r t h e c r e w f r o m t h e a b o v e
deck t o t h e w o r k i n g spaces inside these superstructures, as w e l l as t o t h e engine r o o m b y o t h e r
means during the whole period w h e n theopenings i n
the superstructure bulkheads are closed.
I f a midship bridge o r p o o p compUes w i t h the
requirements o f 7.5, Part I I I "Equipment, Arrangements a n d Outfit", b u t the doors i n their bulkheads
p r o v i d e t h e o n l y exits t o t h e deck, a n dt h e u p p e r edge
o f t h e sills o f t h e s u p e r s t r u c t u r e d o o r s i n a f u l l y
l o a d e d s h i p i m m e r s e s a t a h e e U n g a n g l e l e s s t h a n 60,
the effective height o f superstructures shall be
assumed t o be half their actual height a n d the
superstructure d o o r s assumed t o be closed. I f t h e
u p p e r edge o f t h e d o o r sills o f a f u l l y l o a d e d s h i p
i m m e r s e s a t a h e e l i n g a n g l e e q u a l t o o r o v e r 60, i t s
effective h e i g h t above t h e freeboard deck is t a k e n t o
be i t s actual height.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
r e q u i r e m e n t s set f o r t h i n 7 . 5 , P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t ,
Arrangements a n d Outfit" shall n o t be considered i n
calculations o f the cross-curves o fstability. A n y deck
openings inside t h e m a r e regarded as closed o n l y i f
their coamings a n dmeans o fclosing c o m p l y w i t h the
requirements o f7.3, 7.7 t o 7.10, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t ,
Arrangements a n d Outfit".
Deckhouses o n decks above t h e freeboard deck
shall n o t be taken into account w h e n calculating the
cross-curves o f stability.
1.4.2.4 I n s h i p s w i t h h a t c h c o v e r s m e e t i n g t h e
requirements o f Section 7, Part I I I "Equipment,
A r r a n g e m e n t s a n d Outfit", t h e v o l u m e s o f hatches
located o n t h e freeboard deck m a y be taken into
account.
1.4.2.5 T h e c r o s s - c u r v e s o f s t a b i U t y s h a l l h a v e a
small-scaled scheme o f superstructures a n d deckhouses t a k e n into account, specifying t h e openings
considered t o be open.
The p o i n t shall be indicated i n relation t o w h i c h
the cross-curves o f stability are calculated.
1.4.3 A r r a n g e m e n t o f c o m p a r t m e n t s .
A drawing o f watertight compartments shall
c o n t a i n data necessary t o calculate t h e positions o f
the centres o fg r a v i t y f o r individual tanks filled w i t h
U q u i d cargoes a n dvalues o f corrections f o rt h e effect
o f free surfaces o f U q u i d cargoes o n stabiUty.
1.4.4 D e c k p l a n .
1.4.4.1 D e c k p l a n s s h a l l i n c l u d e a l l d a t a n e c e s s a r y
to d e t e r m i n e t h e centres o f g r a v i t y o f deck
cargoes.
1.4.4.2 T h e d e c k p l a n s f o r p a s s e n g e r s h i p s s h a l l
indicate t h e deck area o n w h i c h passengers c a n w a l k
freely a n d m a x i m u m permissible c r o w d i n g o f passengers o n free areas o f t h e deck, w i t h passengers
m o v i n g t o o n e side o f t h e ship (refer t o 3.1.2).
1.4.2.3 W h e n c a l c u l a t i n g t h e c r o s s - c u r v e s o f
1.4.5 A r r a n g e m e n t o f d o o r s , c o m p a n i o m v a y s a n d
stabiUty, account m a y also be t a k e n o f those tiers
side scuttles. A n g l e o f flooding.
of deckhouse which:
1.4.5.1 T h e a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n o f d o o r s a n d
.1 m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7 . 5 , P a r t I I I " E q u i p companionways shall include a l ldoors a n d compament, A r r a n g e m e n t s a n d O u t f i t " f o rt h e first tier o f
n i o n w a y s t o exposed decks, as w e l l as p o r t s a n d
d e c k h o u s e ( c o u n t i n g f r o m t h e f r e e b o a r d d e c k ) ; side
hatches i n t h e shell p l a t i n g w i t h appropriate referscuttles as concerns t h e efficiency o f t h e i r closures
ences t o t h e i r design.
shall be i n c o m p U a n c e w i t h 7.2.1.3 t o 7.2.1.5 o f t h e
1.4.5.2 T h e a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n o f s i d e s c u t t l e s
said Part;
shall i n c o r p o r a t e a l l side scuttles l o c a t e d b e l o w t h e
u p p e r m o s t c o n t i n u o u s deck, as w e l l as t h e side
.2 h a v e a n a d d i t i o n a l e x i t t o t h e d e c k a b o v e .
scuttles i n t h e superstructures a n d deckhouses t a k e n
W i t h t h e aforesaid c o n d i t i o n s satisfied, account is
i n t o account w h e n calculating t h e cross-curves o f
taken o f full height o f t h e deckhouses. I fthey meet
stability.
the requirements o f 7.5, P a r t I I I "Equipment,
Arrangements a n dOutfit", b u tthere is n o additional
1.4.5.3 A c u r v e o f a n g l e s o f f l o o d i n g f o r t h e l o w e s t
exit t o t h e deck above, such deckhouses shall n o tbe
o p e n i n g i n t h e ship's side, d e c k o r s u p e r s t r u c t u r e ,
t a k e n i n t o account i n calculations o fthe cross-curves
assumed t o be open, shall be appended t o the
o f stabiUty, however, a n y deck openings inside such
calculations o f cross-curves o f stabiUty f o r each ship.
deckhouses a r e assumed as closed, irrespective o f
O p e n i n g s f o r v e n t i l a t i o n o f m a c h i n e r y spaces, o p e n i n g s
w h e t h e r t h e y a r e f i t t e d w i t h c l o s u r e s o r n o t . T h e f o r v e n t i l a t i o n o f passenger spaces a n d o t h e r o p e n i n g s ,
deckhouses whose closures d o n o t c o m p l y w i t h t h e
w h i c h shaU be open t o a l l o w a i r inside t h e ship w h e n
Part IV.
Stability
301
navigating i n r o u g h weather, shall be assumed open

even i f fitted w i t h weathertight covers.
1.4.6 C a l c u l a t i o n o f w i n d a g e a r e a o f a s h i p ( e x c e p t
for a floating crane o rcrane ship).
1.4.6.1 T h e w i n d a g e a r e a s h a l l i n c l u d e t h e
projections o f a l l c o n t i n u o u s surfaces o f t h e ship's
hull, superstructures a n d deckhouses o n t h e centreUne, as w e l l as projections o f masts, v e n t i l a t o r s ,
boats, deck machinery, a l l tents that m i g h t be
stretched i n s t o r m y w e a t h e r as also t h e projections
o f side surfaces o f d e c k cargoes, i n c l u d i n g t i m b e r
cargo, i f t h e ship design makes t h e carriage o f i t
possible.
F o r ships h a v i n g a u x i U a r y sails, t h e p r o j e c t e d
l a t e r a l areas o f r o l l e d u p sails s h a l l b e t a k e n i n t o
account separately according t o t h e ship's profile
plan and included i n the total projected lateral area o f
t h e c o n t i n u o u s surfaces.
I t is r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t projected lateral areas o f
d i s c o n t i n u e d surfaces o f rails, spars (except f o r m a s t s )
a n d rigging o f s h i p s h a v i n g n o s a i l s a n d t h o s e o f v a r i o u s
s m a l l objects be t a k e n i n t o account b y increasing t h e
t o t a l projected l a t e r a l area o f c o n t i n u o u s surfaces
c a l c u l a t e d f o r d r a u g h t dmm b y 5 p e r c e n t a n d t h e
statical m o m e n t o f this area b y 1 0 p e r cent w i t h respect
t o t h e base plane.
T h e projected lateral areas o f discontinued
surfaces o f ships subjected t o i c i n g is t a k e n i n t o
account b y increasing t h e projected lateral area a n d
its statical m o m e n t o f c o n t i n u o u s surfaces calculated
for draught d under icing conditions b y 10 a n d
20 p e r cent o r 7,5 a n d 15 p e r cent, respectively,
depending u p o n the rates o f icing stated i n 2.4. I n this
case, t h e v a l u e o f t h e p r o j e c t e d l a t e r a l area o f
d i s c o n t i n u e d surfaces a n d t h e p o s i t i o n o f i t s centre
o f g r a v i t y w i t h respect t o t h ebase plane a r e assumed
to be constant for all loading conditions.
m
F o r container ships t h e projected lateral area shaU

be t a k e n i n t o a c c o u n t as a c o n t i n u o u s surface h a v i n g
n o regard t o t h eclearances between containers.
1.4.6.2 T h e a p p U c a t i o n o f t h e s a i d a p p r o x i m a t e
methods for taking into account t h e projected lateral
areas o f d i s c o n t i n u e d surfaces a n d s m a l l objects is
n o t obUgatory. These components o f windage area
c a n be d e t e r m i n e d i n a m o r e precise w a y , i f d e e m e d
necessary b y t h e designer.
F o r this purpose w h e n calculating t h e projected
l a t e r a l a r e a o f r a i l s , c r a n e trusses o f l a t t i c e t y p e , etc.,
the o v e r a l l areas t a k e n i n t o consideration, shall be
Filling factor
N o icing
Icing
F o r rails c o v e r e d w i t h m e s h e d
wire
F o r rails without m e s h e d wire
F o r crane trusses o flattice type
0,6
0,2
0,5
1,2
0,8
1,0
m u l t i p U e d b y filling factors w h o s e values a r e t a k e n as

follows:
F o r spars, tackle a n d shrouds o f ships w i t h n o
sails, v a l u e s o f t h e f i n i n g factors s h a l l be a d o p t e d i n
c o m p U a n c e w i t h T a b l e 1.4.6.2 d e p e n d i n g u p o n t h e
r a t i o z /b
where z is the height o f the point o f
shrouds fastening t o t h e mast over t h eb u l w a r k ; b is
the distance between t h e shrouds a t b u l w a r k .
T h e projections o f the hull above the waterUne,
deckhouses a n d superstructures shall be taken into
a c c o u n t w i t h a f l o w c o e f f i c i e n t 1,0. T h e p r o j e c t i o n s o f
circular section structures located separately o n t h e
deck (funnels, ventilators, masts) shall be assumed t o
h a v e a f l o w coefficient o f 0,6. W h e n calculating i n
detail, t h e projected lateral areas o f s m a l l objects,
d i s c o n t i n u e d s u r f a c e s , s p a r s , rigging, r a i l s , s h r o u d s ,
t a c k l e , etc., a f l o w c o e f f i c i e n t s h a l l b e t a k e n e q u a l t o
1,0. I f t h e p r o j e c t i o n s o f i n d i v i d u a l c o m p o n e n t s o f
the windage area overlap one another fully o r i n part,
the areas o f o n l y o n e o f t h e overlapping projections
shall be included i n t h e calculation.
0
I f the overlapping projections have different flow

coefficients, those w i t h higher coefficients shall be
taken for the calculation.
1.4.6.3 T h e a r m o f w i n d a g e a r e a z f o r d e t e r m i n ing t h e heeUng m o m e n t d u e t o w i n d pressure i n
accordance w i t h 2.1.4 shall be defined as a distance,
i n metres, between the centre o f the windage area a n d
the actual waterline plane f o r a n upright ship i n
s m o o t h water. T h e position o fthe centre o f windage
area is determined b y a m e t h o d generally appUed for
determining t h e coordinates o f t h e centre o f gravity
for a plane figure.
1.4.6.4 T h e w i d n a g e a r e a a n d i t s s t a t i c a l m o m e n t
shall be calculated f o r t h e ship's d r a u g h t 4mn- These
components f o r other draughts are determined b y
calculation. T h e use o f linear interpolation is
permissible i f t h e second p o i n t is assumed a t t h e
d r a u g h t corresponding t o t h e s u m m e r l o a d Une.
1.4.7 C a l c u l a t i o n o f t h e l i q u i d c a r g o e f f e c t .
1.4.7.1 F r e e s u r f a c e e f f e c t s w i l l e x i s t w h e n e v e r t h e
f i n i n g l e v e l i n a t a n k i s less t h a n 1 0 0 p e r c e n t o f i t s
T a b l e
1.4.6.2
Filling factors
z
oA)
Filling factors:
n o icing
icing
10
11
12
13
14
0,14
0,27
0,18
0,34
0,23
0,44
0,27
0,51
0,31
0,59
0,35
0,66
0,4
0,76
0,44
0,84
0,48
0,91
0,52
1,0
0,57
1,0
0,61
1,0
302
Rules
capacity. W h e r e t h e t o t a l free surface effects o f

n o m i n a l l y full (i.e. 9 8 p e r cent o r above) tanks is
small i n relation t o the initial metacentric height o f
the ship, w i t h t h e agreement o f t h e Register t h e
effects f o r s u c h t a n k s m a y b e i g n o r e d . F r e e surface
effects s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d w h e n e v e r t h e f i l l i n g level i n
a t a n k i s less t h a n 9 8 p e r c e n t ( c o n s i d e r i n g 1.4.7.7).
1.4.7.2 T h e t a n k s t o b e c o n s i d e r e d a t d e t e r m i n i n g
the c o r r e c t i o n f o r free surfaces m a y b e referred t o o n e
o f t h e t w o categories, n a m e l y :
tanks w i t h a permanent filling level (for example,
cargo t a n k w i t h liquid cargo, water ballast tank).
C o r r e c t i o n s f o rfree surfaces shall b e d e t e r m i n e d f o r
actual filling level prescribed f o r each tank;
tanks w i t h a variable filling level ( f o r example,
consumable liquids, such as fuel, o i l , fresh w a t e r as
well as liquid cargo a n d ballast a t reception,
consumption a n d transfer operations). Except f o r
t h e cases s t i p u l a t e d i n 1.4.7.4, c o r r e c t i o n s f o r free
surfaces shall h a v e t h e m a x i m u m values specified
w i t h i n t h el o w e r a n d upper filling boundaries o f each
tank, p r o v i d e d b y t h e r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s f o r ship's
operation.
1.4.7.3 T a n k s f o r e v e r y t y p e o f U q u i d c a r g o a n d
ballast, i n w h i c h according t o t h e operational
c o n d i t i o n s m a y s i m u l t a n e o u s l y b e free surfaces, as
w e l l as anti-heeUng t a n k s a n dt a n k s o f r o l l stabiUzing
system regardless o f t h e t a n k s categories shall be
included i n t h e n u m b e r o f tanks t o be considered a t
c a l c u l a t i o n o f t h e U q u i d cargo effect o n stabiUty. F o r
c o n s i d e r a t i o n o f t h e free surfaces effect, i t is
necessary t o c o m p i l e t h e design c o m b i n a t i o n o f single
tanks o r their combinations per each type o f Uquid
c a r g o . I t i s n e c e s s a r y t o select t a n k s , w h i c h h a v e t h e
m a x i m u m free surfaces effect, o u t o f possible
operational c o m b i n a t i o n s o f tanks p e r t h e separate
types o f U q u i d cargoes a n d ballast, o r single tanks.
T h e obtained design c o m b i n a t i o n o ftanks applies t o
all loading conditions, except docking, irrespective o f
the a c t u a l a v a i l a b i U t y o f free surfaces, i n c l u d i n g t h e
ship w i t h full stores. A t that, angles o f heel, f o r w h i c h
the m a x i m u m corrections are determined, shall be
selected w i t h respect t o t h e stabiUty c r i t e r i a a p p U e d t o
the ship (considering the requirements f o r subdivi
sion, damage t r i m a n d stabiUty, i f applicable).
1.4.7.4 F o r a s h i p e n g a g e d i n U q u i d s t r a n s f e r
o p e r a t i o n , c o r r e c t i o n f o r free surfaces a t a n y stage o f
the operation m a y be determined for the actual fining
level o f t h e t a n k a t a g i v e n stage o f transfer.
1.4.7.5 C o r r e c t i o n s t o t h e i n i t i a l m e t a c e n t r i c
height a n d t h e righting lever curve shall be calculated
separately as f o l l o w s .
1.4.7.5.1 C o r r e c t i o n s t o t h e i n i t i a l m e t a c e n t r i c
height A m shall be determined as a product o f U q u i d
cargoes densities b y intrinsic transverse m o m e n t s o f
i n e r t i a o f free surfaces i n t a n k s , calculated f o r a ship's
h
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
p o s i t i o n w i t h o u t heel i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h t h e cate
gories o f t a n k s specified i n 1.4.7.2.
1.4.7.5.2 C o r r e c t i o n s t o t h e r i g h t i n g a r m s A M o n
agreement w i t h the Register m a y be determined b y
one o ft w o following methods:
.1 c o r r e c t i o n c a l c u l a t i o n b a s e d o n u s i n g t h e
actual heeUng m o m e n t due t o t h e Uquid flow i n
t a n k s f o r each angle o f ship's heel u n d e r considera
tion;
.2 c o r r e c t i o n c a l c u l a t i o n b a s e d o n u s i n g t h e
intrinsic transverse m o m e n t o f i n e r t i a o f free surfaces
i n t a n k s f o ra ship's p o s i t i o n w i t h o u t heel corrected
for each angle o f ship's heel 0 u n d e r consideration b y
m u l t i p l y i n g b y s i n 0.
1.4.7.6 I n f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i l i t y s h a l l c o n t a i n
only a m e t h o d used f o rt h e calculation o f corrections
to the righting arms. I f instructions o n m a n u a l
assessment o f stabiUty f o r a n o n - t y p i c a l l o a d i n g case
provide f o r a n alternative method, the instructions
shall include a n e x a m p l e o f c o r r e c t i o n f o r free
surfaces c a l c u l a t i o n w i t h e x p l a n a t i o n o f reasons o f
different results o f m a n u a l correction calculation a n d
o f calculations b y the adopted method.
1.4.7.7 T h e t a n k s c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g
condition m a yn o tbe included i n the calculation
e
AM
< 0 , 0 1 ^ ;
(1.4.7.7-1)
for f l o a t i n g cranes, t h e tanks c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e

following condition m a y n o t be included i n the
calculation
AM
< OWA^
where A M
3 0
(1.4.7.7-2)
, A M
= heeUng m o m e n t s d u eto liquids flow a t
a n g l e s o f h e e l e q u a l t o 30 a n d 15.
1
Aggregate correction A M i for tanks not included

i n t h e c a l c u l a t i o n s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 0,05, . O t h e r
wise, appropriate corrections shall be considered i n
the calculation.
U s u a l residues o f liquids i n emptied tanks shall
n o t be considered i n t h e calculations provided, that
the t o t a l n u m b e r o f these residues shall n o tresult i n
considerable increase o f t h e free surfaces effect o n
ship's stabiUty.
1.4.8 L o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n .
1.4.8.1 S t a b i l i t y s h a l l b e c h e c k e d u n d e r a l l
l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s specified i n Sections 3 a n d 4 f o r
v a r i o u s types o f ships.
1.4.8.2 F o r t h e t y p e s o f s h i p s w h i c h a r e n o t
covered b y special provisions o f Section 3, t h e
loading conditions t o be e x a m i n e d shall be as follows:
.1 s h i p i n f u l l y l o a d e d c o n d i t i o n w i t h f u l l stores;
.2 s h i p i n f u l l y l o a d e d c o n d i t i o n w i t h 1 0 p e r c e n t
o f stores;
.3 s h i p w i t h o u t c a r g o , w i t h f u l l s t o r e s ;
.4 s h i p w i t h o u t c a r g o , w i t h 1 0 p e r c e n t o f s t o r e s .
5
Part IV.
Stability
1.4.8.3 I f t h e l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s a n t i c i p a t e d i n
n o r m a l service o f a s h i p as r e g a r d s s t a b i U t y a r e less
f a v o u r a b l e t h a n t h o s e Usted i n 1.4.8.2 o r specified i n
Section 3, stabiUty shall also be checked f o r these
conditions.
1.4.8.4 I f t h e r e i s s o l i d b a l l a s t o n b o a r d , i t s m a s s
shall be included i n the light-ship condition.
1.4.8.5 I n a l l c a s e s o f l o a d i n g w h i c h m i g h t o c c u r
i n t h e ship's service, except those specified i n 1.4.8.2.1
and expressly p r o v i d e d i n Section 3, t h ew e i g h t o f ballast
water m a y be included i n t h e deadweight o f t h e ship,
w h e r e necessary.
1.4.9 C u r v e s o f s t a b i l i t y .
1.4.9.1 S t a b i l i t y c u r v e s c a l c u l a t e d w i t h d u e
a l l o w a n c e f o r t h e corrections o f free surfaces shall
be p l o t t e d f o r a l l l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s u n d e r consideration.
1.4.9.2 I f t h e r e a r e o p e n i n g s c o n s i d e r e d t o b e
o p e n i n t h e ship's sides, u p p e r d e c k o r s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s
t h r o u g h w h i c h water c a n penetrate inside thehull, the
stabiUty curves a r e considered effective u p t o t h e
angle o f flooding. A t t h e incUnations o f t h e ship
exceeding t h e angle o f flooding, t h e ship m a y be
regarded t o have entirely lost h e r stabiUty a n d the
curves o fstability a t this angle are cutting short.
1.4.9.3 I f t h e s p r e a d o f w a t e r c o m i n g t o a
superstructure t h r o u g h openings considered t o be
open is Umited only b y this superstructure o r a part
thereof, such superstructure o r its part shall be
considered as non-existent a t t h e angles o f heel
exceeding t h e angle o f f l o o d i n g . I n t h i s case, t h e
righting lever curve becomes stepped a n d that o f
dynamical stabiUty broken.
1.4.10 D e s i g n d a t a r e l a t i n g t o s t a b i l i t y c h e c k i n g
and s u m m a r y tables.
1.4.10.1 F o r s h i p s u n d e r i n v e s t i g a t i o n , a l l d e s i g n
data relating t o stabiUty checking (calculations o f
loading, initial stabiUty, curves o f stability, windage
area, amplitudes o f roll, heeUng d u e t o c r o w d i n g o f
passengers o n o n e side, h e e l i n g w h e n t u r n i n g as also
that due t o icing, etc.) shall be submitted t o the
1.4.10.2 F o r a U d e s i g n l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s , s u m m a r y tables presenting t h e results o f calculations o f
displacement, position o f t h e centre o f gravity, initial
t r i m a n d stabiUty, as w e U as s u m m a r y tables o f results
o f stabiUty checking f o r t h e compUance w i t h t h e
requirements o ft h e present P a r t shaU be d r a w n u p .
1.4.11 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r I n f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i l i t y .
1.4.11.1 T o p r o v i d e a d e q u a t e s t a b i U t y o f s h i p s i n
service, t h e I n f o r m a t i o n o n Stability a p p r o v e d b y t h e
Register a n d containing t h e following data shall be
issued f o reach ship:
.1 p a r t i c u l a r s o f ship;
.2 i n f o r m a t i o n o n h o w t h e s h i p c o n f o r m s t o
stabiUty criteria a n d directions based o n t h e Register
303
requirements f o r stability, t o prevent t h e ship

capsizing;
.3 r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s c o n c e r n i n g s t a b i l i t y a n d
o t h e r i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r safe service;
.4 s t a b i U t y d a t a f o r t y p i c a l , p r e d e t e r m i n e d l o a d ing conditions;
.5 a d v i c e a n d d o c u m e n t s n e c e s s a r y t o e s t i m a t e
t r i m a n d s t a b i U t y o f t h e s h i p f o r a n y cases o f f u l l a n d
partial l o a d i n g w h i c h m i g h t occur i n t h e ship's
service.
T h e t r i m a n d stability o f the ship shall be
determined b y calculation;
.6 i n s t r u c t i o n s c o n c e r n i n g t h e o p e r a t i o n o f crossflooding arrangements.
T h e Information o n Stability shall be d r a w n u p
in accordance w i t h the provisions o f A p p e n d i x 1 t o
the present Part.
1.4.11.2 T h e I n f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i U t y s h a l l b e
c o m p i l e d w i t h regard t o t h e ship's i n c U n i n g test data.
F o r ships w h e r e t h e inclining test m a y be
substituted b y the Ught-weight check i n compUance
w i t h 1.5.2.1, t o be used i n t h e I n f o r m a t i o n a r e t h e
Ught-ship displacement a n d longitudinal center o f
gravity derived f r o m the light-weight check i n
conjunction w i t h t h e Ught-ship vertical center o f
g r a v i t y d e r i v e d f r o m t h e i n c U n i n g test.
F o r ships, w h o s e Ught-ship properties d e v i a t i o n is
w i t h i n t h e l i m i t s specified i n 1.5.2.2, t o b e u s e d i n t h e
Information are the light-ship displacement a n d
longitudinal center o f gravity derived f r o m t h e
Ught-weight check i n conjunction w i t h t h e higher o f
either t h e lead ship's ( p r e v i o u s sister ship's) v e r t i c a l
center o f gravity o r t h e calculated value.
F o r ships, w h o s e Ught-ship properties d e v i a t i o n is
w i t h i n t h e U m i t s specified i n 1.5.3, t o b e u s e d i n t h e
Information are the light-ship displacement a n d
longitudinal center o f gravity derived f r o m t h e
Ught-weight check i n conjunction w i t h t h e higher o f
either t h e Ught-ship vertical center o fgravity derived
f r o m t h e i n c U n i n g test p r i o r t o c o n v e r s i o n o r t h e
design vertical center o f gravity following the
conversion.
F o r ships w h e r e i n c U n i n g test m a y be o m i t t e d i n
c o m p U a n c e w i t h 1.5.7, t o b e u s e d i n t h e I n f o r m a t i o n
are t h e Ught-ship displacement a n d l o n g i t u d i n a l
center o fgravity derived f r o m t h e Ught-weight check
i n conjunction w i t h t h e Ught-ship vertical center o f
g r a v i t y d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.5.7. I t s h a l l b e
stated i n t h e I n f o r m a t i o n that t h e ship h a s been
subjected t o Ught-weight check instead o f i n c U n i n g
test, a n d t h e U g h t - s h i p v e r t i c a l center o f g r a v i t y h a s
b e e n c a l c u l a t e d i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h 1.5.7.
1.4.11.3 W h e r e b u l k c a r g o e s o t h e r t h a n g r a i n a r e
carried, special I n f o r m a t i o n o n StabiUty a n d S t r e n g t h
during Loading, Unloading a n d Stowage o f Bulk
Cargoes Other T h a n G r a i n shall be available o n
304
Rules
board, w h i c h shall be d r a w n i n accordance

w i t h 1.4.9.7, P a r t I I " H u l l " .
1.4.12 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r o n b o a r d s t a b i l i t y i n s t r u ment
W h e r e t h e ship t r i m a n d stability is determined
by using software, t h elatter shall be approved b y the
Register i n accordance w i t h t h e requirements o f
Section 12, Part I I "Dechnical D o c u m e n t a t i o n " o f
the Rules f o r Technical Supervision D u r i n g C o n struction o f Ships a n dManufacture o f Materials a n d
Products f o r Ships; requirements relating t o hardw a r e a r e set o u t i n A p p e n d i x 2 , P a r t I I " H u l l " o f the
present Rules.
Availability o f the software approved b y the
Register o n board t o c o n t r o l t h e ship' t r i m a n d
stability shall n o t be considered as a g r o u n d f o r
deleting a n ysection o fthe I n f o r m a t i o n o n Stability.
T h e procedure o f using software shall be
specified i n t h euser m a n u a l f o r t h e o n b o a r d stability
instrument. T h e m a n u a l shall be compiled i n the user
native language a n d translated i n t o English. T h e
m a n u a l shall c o n t a i n a statement t h a t t h e serviceability o f t h e o n b o a r d stability instrument shall be
checked b y t h ecrew prior t o its use.
1.4.13 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e B a l l a s t W a t e r M a n agement Plan.
W h e n ships i n service call p o r t s w h i c h require
ballast w a t e r exchange a t sea i n advance, they shall
have the Ballast W a t e r M a n a g m e n t P l a n developed
according t o the Instruction f o rthe Development o f
Ballast W a t e r M a n a g m e n t Plans.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
substituted b y the light-weight check i n accordance

w i t h 1.5.14.
Depending o n t h e seasonal conditions during t h e
deUvery o f the ship a n d subject t o special agreement
w i t h the Register, the i n c l i n i n g test o f the n e x t ship o f
t h e series m a y b e p e r m i t t e d i n s t e a d o f t h e s h i p t o b e
deUvered. Beginning f r o m t h e twelfth ship o f t h e
series, t h e R e g i s t e r m a y r e q u i r e t h e i n c l i n i n g o f t h e
smaller n u m b e r o f ships i f i t is d e m o n s t r a t e d t o t h e
satisfaction o f t h e Register that i n t h e process o f
c o n s t r u c t i n g t h e ships o f t h e series s t a b i U t y o f t h e i r
mass a n dcentre o f gravity position is ensured w i t h i n
t h e l i m i t s stated i n 1.5.2.2;
.2 a s e r i e s - b u i l t s h i p i f s t r u c t u r a l a l t e r a t i o n s
t h e r e i n c o m p a r e d w i t h t h e first s h i p o f t h e series, as
s h o w n b y t h ecalculation, result i n :
.2.1 t h e c h a n g e s o f t h e l i g h t - s h i p d i s p l a c e m e n t :
for L < 50 m exceeding 2 p e r cent, f o r L > 160 m
exceeding 1 p e r cent (for intermediate length t h e
acceptable deviation is determined b y Unear interpolation); o r
.2.2 t h e d e v i a t i o n o f t h e U g h t - s h i p l o n g i t u d i n a l
centre o f gravity exceeding 0,5 p e r cent o f t h e
subdivision length L o fthe lead ship; o r
.2.3 t h e i n c r e a s e o f t h e U g h t - s h i p v e r t i c a l c e n t r e o f
gravity exceeding simultaneously 4 c m (10 c m i n t h e
case o f f l o a t i n g cranes a n dcrane ships) a n d t h e v a l u e
determined b y the formulae:
s
8z = 0,l ^ - U ;
(1.5.2.2.3-1)
8z = 0,05^h
(1.5.2.2.3-2)
1.5 I N C L I N I N G T E S T S A N D L I G H T - W E I G H T
Ships
CHECKS
where
1.5.1 T o b e i n c l i n e d a r e :
.1 s e r i e s - b u i l t ships a s p e r 1.5.2;
.2 e v e r y s h i p o f n o n - s e r i e s c o n s t r u c t i o n ;
.3 s h i p s a f t e r r e p a i r , a l t e r a t i o n o r m o d i f i c a t i o n a s
p e r 1.5.3;
.4 s h i p s a f t e r i n s t a l l a t i o n o f p e r m a n e n t s o l i d
b a l l a s t as p e r 1.5.4;
.5 s h i p s w h o s e s t a b i U t y i s u n k n o w n o r g i v e s r i s e
to doubts;
.6 passenger ships i n service a t intervals n o t
e x c e e d i n g f i v e y e a r s i f s t i p u l a t e d b y 1.5.5.
.7 f i s h i n g vessels i n service ( o f 30 m i n l e n g t h a n d
less) a t i n t e r v a l s n o t e x c e e d i n g f i f t e e n y e a r s a n d
f i s h i n g vessels o v e r 3 0 m i n l e n g t h i f s t i p u l a t e d
b y 1.5.5.
1.5.2 O u t o f t h e s e r i e s o f s h i p s u n d e r c o n s t r u c t i o n
at each s h i p y a r d t h ef o l l o w i n g ships shall be incUned:
.1 t h e first ship, t h e n e v e r y f i f t h s h i p o f t h e series
(i.e. s i x t h , e l e v e n t h , etc.). F o r o t h e r ships o f t h e series,
u p o n agreement w i t h the M a r i t i m e A d m i n i s t r a t i o n
(for each p a r t i c u l a r ship), t h e i n c U n i n g test m a y be
A o = l i g h t - s h i p d i s p l a c e m e n t , i n t;
A i = ship's displacement under t h e m o s t unfavourable
l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n as r e g a r d s t h e v a l u e o f h o r 4 ^ , i n t;
'max m a x i m u m r i g h t i n g a r m u n d e r t h e m o s t u n f a v o u r a b l e
design loading condition a s regards its value;
h = corrected metacentric height under the m o s t unfav o u r a b l e design l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o nas regards its value,
w h i c h e v e r i s t h e less;
.2.4 v i o l a t i o n o f t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t P a r t
f o r d e s i g n l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s w i t h z = l,2z
0,2z ,
where z\ ( z ) is design Ught-ship vertical centre o f
gravity p r i o r t o (after) structural changes; z is a n
assumed Ught-ship vertical centre o f gravity.
S u c h ship shall be considered t h e first ship o f a
n e w series as r e g a r d s s t a b i U t y , a n d t h e i n c U n i n g test
procedure o f the subsequent ships shall c o m p l y w i t h
the requirements o f 1.5.2.1.
1.5.3 A f t e r r e p a i r , a l t e r a t i o n a n d m o d i f i c a t i o n t o
be i n c U n e d a r e ships, i n w h i c h s t r u c t u r a l changes, as
s h o w n b y calculation, result i n :
.1 c h a n g e o f l o a d ( t o t a l m a s s o f l o a d r e m o v e d
and added) b y m o r e t h a n 6 p e r cent o fthe light-ship
displacement; o r
g
g2
gi
g 2
Part IV.
Stability
305
.2 c h a n g e i n t h e l i g h t - s h i p d i s p l a c e m e n t b y m o r e
t h a n 2 per cent o r 2 t, w h i c h e v e r is greater; o r ;
.3 t h e d e v i a t i o n o f t h e l i g h t - s h i p l o n g i t u d i n a l
centre o f gravity exceeding 1 per cent o f the ship's
subdivision length L ; or
.4 i n c r e a s e i n t h e l i g h t - s h i p v e r t i c a l c e n t r e o f g r a v i t y
b y m o r e t h a n t h e v a l u e o b t a i n e d as p e r 1.5.2.2.3; o r
.5 v i o l a t i o n o f t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t
P a r t f o r d e s i g n l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s as s p e c i f i e d
i n 1.5.2.2.4.
I f n o i n c U n i n g test is r e q u i r e d u p o n results o f the
calculation, the l i g h t - w e i g h t check shall be carried
o u t i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.5.14.
Irrespective o f the calculations submitted, the
R e g i s t e r m a y r e q u i r e i n c o m p U a n c e w i t h 1.5.1.5 t h e
i n c U n i n g test o f the ship t o be p e r f o r m e d , proceeding
f r o m the technical c o n d i t i o n o f the ship.
1.5.4 A f t e r i n s t a l l a t i o n o f t h e p e r m a n e n t s o U d
ballast each ship shall be incUned.
T h e i n c U n i n g test o f the ship m a y be o m i t t e d i f
t h e R e g i s t e r is satisfied t h a t w h e n i n s t a l l i n g the
ballast, efficient c o n t r o l is effected t o ensure the
design values o f mass a n d centre o f gravity position,
o r these v a l u e s c a n be p r o p e r l y c o n f i r m e d b y
calculation.
1.5.5 L i g h t - w e i g h t c h e c k ( e x p e r i m e n t a l d e t e r m i
nation o f the Ught-ship displacement and the long
i t u d i n a l centre o f g r a v i t y ) shall be effected p e r i o d i
c a l l y f o r f i n d i n g w h e t h e r a c c o r d i n g t o t h e 1.5.1.6
a n d 1.5.1.7 t h e i n c U n i n g test is r e q u i r e d f o r :
.1 passenger ships;
.2 f i s h i n g v e s s e l s o v e r 3 0 m i n l e n g t h a f t e r 1 0 y e a r s
i n service f r o m t h e d a t e o f b u i l d o r last i n c U n i n g test.
L i g h t - w e i g h t check s h a l l be c a r r i e d o u t at
intervals n o t m o r e t h a n five years.
I f a change i n the Ught-ship displacement by
m o r e t h a n 2 per cent o r i n longitudinal centre o f
gravity by m o r e t h a n 1 per cent o f the ship's
s u b d i v i s i o n l e n g t h L as c o m p a r e d t o t h e a p p r o v e d
I n f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i U t y is f o u n d o u t as a r e s u l t o f
the U g h t - w e i g h t check t h e n the ship shall be incUned.
1.5.6 W h e r e t h e i n c U n i n g t e s t r e s u l t s f o r t h e s h i p
built s h o w that the light-ship vertical centre o f gravity
exceeds design v a l u e t o the extent t h a t i n v o l v e s the
violation o f the requirements o f the present Part,
calculations w i t h explanation o f the reasons o f such
differences shall be attached t o the I n c U n i n g T e s t
Report.
Based o n the investigation analysis o f the
d o c u m e n t s s u b m i t t e d , o r i n case such d o c u m e n t s
are n o t available, the Register m a y require the
repeated (check) i n c l i n i n g test o f t h e s h i p t o be
p e r f o r m e d . I n t h i s case, b o t h I n c U n i n g T e s t R e p o r t s
shall be s u b m i t t e d t o the Register f o r r e v i e w .
1.5.7 E x c e p t f o r t h e s h i p s e n g a g e d o n i n t e r n a
tional voyages, at the shipowner's w i s h the Register
s
m a y substitute the i n c U n i n g test o f a n e w l y b u i l t ship

b y the Ught-weight check p r o v i d e d a n increase o f a
U g h t - s h i p v e r t i c a l c e n t r e o f g r a v i t y b y 2 0 p e r c e n t as
against the design value will n o t result i n the violation
o f the requirements o f the present Part.
I f the Ught-weight check results s h o w t h a t the
d e v i a t i o n o f the Ught-ship displacement exceeds
2 per cent o f the design value o r the deviation o f
the light-ship l o n g i t u d i n a l center o f g r a v i t y exceeds
1 per cent o f the ship's s u b d i v i s i o n l e n g t h L , the
e x p l a n a t o r y c a l c u l a t i o n o f such difference shall be
attached to the L i g h t - W e i g h tCheck Report.
1.5.8 S h i p ' s l o a d i n g d u r i n g t h e i n c U n i n g t e s t s h a l l
be as f a r as p r a c t i c a b l e close t o t h e l i g h t - s h i p
displacement. T h e m a s s o f m i s s i n g loads shall be
n o t m o r e t h a n 2 per cent o f the light-ship displace
m e n t , a n d t h e m a s s o f s u r p l u s l o a d s less i n c U n i n g
b a l l a s t a n d b a l l a s t a c c o r d i n g t o 1.5.9, 4 p e r c e n t .
1.5.9 T h e m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t o f t h e s h i p i n t h e
process o f the i n c l i n i n g test shall be at least 0,20 m .
F o r this p u r p o s e necessary ballast m a y be t a k e n .
W h e n w a t e r ballast is t a k e n , t h e t a n k s s h a l l be
carefully pressed up.
1.5.10 T o d e t e r m i n e a n g l e s o f i n c l i n a t i o n d u r i n g
t h e i n c U n i n g t e s t n o t less t h a n t h r e e p e n d u l u m s o f a t
least 3 m i n l e n g t h shall be p r o v i d e d o n b o a r d . F o r
ships u n d e r 30 m i n l e n g t h o n l y t w o p e n d u l u m s o f at
least 2 m i n l e n g t h m a y be used.
O n e o r m o r e p e n d u l u m s m a y be substituted b y
o t h e r m e a s u r i n g devices a p p r o v e d b y the Register.
1.5.11 I n w e l l p e r f o r m e d i n c l i n i n g t e s t t h e v a l u e o f t h e
metacentric height obtained m a y be used i n calculations
w i t h n o d e d u c t i o n f o r p r o b a b l e e r r o r o f t h e test.
T h e i n c U n i n g test is c o n s i d e r e d t o be satisfactory
performed, provided:
.1 f o r each m e a s u r e m e n t t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n
is fulfilled:
s
\ ^ l < 2 ^ /
where
^ ~ y
(1.5.11.1)
h = metacentric height obtained b y individual measurement;

^= i s m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t o b t a i n e d i n i n c l i n i n g t h e s h i p ;
n = number of measurements.
t
Measurements n o t meeting the above condition

are excluded w h e n treating the results w i t h appro
priate change o f the total n u m b e r n and repeated
calculation o f the metacentric height h .
N o m o r e t h a n o n e m e a s u r e m e n t is excluded f r o m
the calculation (greater n u m b e r o f measurements
m a y be e x c l u d e d o n l y i n w e l l - g r o u n d e d cases o n
agreement w i t h the Register);
.2 p r o b a b l e e r r o r o f t h e t e s t
k
306
Rules
fulfils t h e c o n d i t i o n
W^fr^rH
'
2 ( 1
^ )
>
0-5.112-1)
and
^
Factor
0 , 0 1 ( 4
^ )
(1-5-11.2-2)
is t a k e n f r o m T a b l e 1.5.11;
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T h e U g h t - w e i g h t check is carried o u t w i t h the a i m t o :

.1 d e t e r m i n e t h e necessity o f c o n d u c t i n g t h e
i n c U n i n g test i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.5.5;
.2 c o r r e c t t h e I n f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i l i t y f o r s h i p s o f
the series a n d after c o n v e r s i o n as specified i n 1.4.11.2;
.3 d e t e r m i n e t h e U g h t - s h i p p r o p e r t i e s o f t h e s h i p
e x e m p t e d f r o m t h e i n c U n i n g test i n accordance
w i t h 1.5.7.
1.6 D E P A R T U R E S F R O M T H E R U L E S
Table
1.5.11
F a c t o r r
n
t<m
8
9
10
11
12
5,4
5,0
4,8
4,6
4,5
13
14
15
16
4,3
4,2
4,1
4,0
.3 t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n i s f u l f i l l e d c o n s i d e r i n g
h a n d /max u n d e r t h e m o s t u n f a v o r a b l e d e s i g n l o a d i n g
conditions:
^V ifa_Y
>
i o /
' x,
(1.5.11.3)
w h i c h e v e r i s less, b u t n o t less t h a n 4 c m ;
.4 t o t a l n u m b e r o f s a t i s f a c t o r y m e a s u r e m e n t s i s
n o t less t h a n 8.
1.5.12 W h e r e t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1 . 5 . 1 1 a r e n o t
f u l f i l l e d , t h e v a l u e o f t h e m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t less t h e
p r o b a b l e e r r o r o f t h e test o b t a i n e d as p e r 1.5.11.2
m a y be taken f o rcalculations u p o n agreement w i t h
the Register.
1.5.13 T h e i n c U n i n g t e s t s h a l l b e p e r f o r m e d i n
accordance w i t h t h e Instructions o n IncUning Test
(refer t o 2.17, P a r t V "Technical Supervision D u r i n g
Construction o f Ships" o f t h e Rules f o r Technical
Supervision during Construction o f Ships a n d
Manufacture o f Materials a n d Products f o r Ships)
and shall be witnessed b y a surveyor t o t h e Register.
Other methods o f experimentally determining the
Ught-ship w e i g h t a n d t h e coordinates o fits centre o f
gravity m a y be permitted, provided that i t is
demonstrated t o t h esatisfaction o fthe Register that
the accuracy o f t h e i n c U n i n g test results meets t h e
present requirements.
1.5.14 T h e U g h t - w e i g h t c h e c k s h a l l b e c a r r i e d o u t
in accordance w i t h theInstructions o nIncUning Test
(refer t o 2.17, P a r t V "Technical Supervision D u r i n g
Construction o f Ships" o f Rules f o r Technical
Supervision D u r i n g Construction o f Ships a n d
Manufacture o f Materials a n d Products f o r Ships)
i n t h e presence o f the Register attending Surveyor.
1.6.1 I f d o u b t s a r i s e w i t h r e g a r d t o s t a b i U t y o f
any ship w h e n t h e requirements o f t h e present P a r t
are f o r m a l l y c o m p U e d w i t h , t h e Register m a y require
checking o f t h e ship's stabiUty against a d d i t i o n a l
criteria.
I n case w h e r e t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s set f o r t h i n t h e
p r e s e n t P a r t a r e c o n s i d e r e d t o b e t o o severe, t h e
Register m a ypermit, o n a well-grounded statement
o f design a n d service bodies, a p p r o p r i a t e departures
f r o m these requirements f o r t h e ship concerned.
1.6.2 W h e n a s h i p n a v i g a t i n g i n a p a r t i c u l a r a r e a
does n o t c o m p l y w i t h the requirements o f the present
P a r t , t h e R e g i s t e r m a y , i n e a c h p a r t i c u l a r case, either
restrict t h e ship's area o f n a v i g a t i o n o r place other
l i m i t a t i o n s depending u p o n t h e ship's stability
characteristics, service c o n d i t i o n s a n d p u r p o s e t h e
ship is intended for.
1.7 C O N D I T I O N S
O F SUFFICIENT
STABILITY
1.7.1 U n d e r t h e m o s t u n f a v o u r a b l e l o a d i n g
conditions w i t h regard t o stability, t h e ship's
stabiUty, except f o r f l o a t i n g cranes, crane ships,
p o n t o o n s , f l o a t i n g docks a n d berth-connected ships
shall comply w i t h t h e following requirements:
.1 t h e s h i p s h a l l w i t h s t a n d , w i t h o u t c a p s i z i n g ,
s i m u l t a n e o u s l y the effect o f d y n a m i c a l l y appUed w i n d
pressure a n d rolling t h e parameters o f w h i c h are
determined i ncompUance w i t h Section 2;
.2 n u m e r i c a l v a l u e s o f t h e p a r a m e t e r s o f t h e
righting lever curve f o r the ship o n still w a t e r a n d t h e
values o f the corrected initial metacentric height shall
n o t b e b e l o w those specified i n Section 2 ;
.3 t h e e f f e c t o f c o n s e q u e n c e s o f p r o b a b l e i c i n g
u p o n stability shall be taken into account i n
compUance w i t h Section 2;
.4 s t a b i U t y o f a s h i p s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h a d d i t i o n a l
requirements o fSection 3.
1.7.2 T h e s t a b i l i t y o f f l o a t i n g c r a n e s , c r a n e s h i p s ,
transport pontoons, floating docks a n d berth-connected
ships shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f S e c t i o n 4 .
Part IV.
Stability
307
1.7.3 F o r s h i p s t o w h i c h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f
Part V "Subdivision" are applicable, t h e intact
stability shall be sufficient t omeet these requirements
in damaged condition.
1.7.4 S t a b i l i t y o f s h i p s w h i c h h a v e d i s t i n g u i s h i n g
m a r k f o r ships c a r r y i n g e q u i p m e n t f o r fire f i g h t i n g
a b o a r d o t h e r ships i n t h e i r class n o t a t i o n s h a l l b e
c o n s i d e r e d t o b e s u f f i c i e n t i n t h e c o u r s e o f fire
fighting
o p e r a t i o n s , i f i n case w h e n a l l t h e m o n i t o r s
operate simultaneously w i t h t h e m a x i m u m supply
rate i n t h edirection corresponding t o t h e m i n i m u m
stability o f t h e ship, t h e static heeling angle does
n o t e x c e e d 5.
I n determining t h eheeling m o m e n t , t h evertical
distance between t h e m o n i t o r axis a n d t h e m i d p o i n t
o f t h e m e a n draft is assumed t o b e t h e heeling lever.
W h e r e t h e s h i p i s fitted w i t h a t h r u s t e r , t h e d e s i g n
heeling m o m e n t shall be increased b y a value o ft h e

m o m e n t w h i c h occurs d u r i n g operation o f t h e
thruster, i n r e l a t i o n t o t h e m i d p o i n t o f t h e ship's
draft.
1.8 P A S S A G E O F S H I P S F R O M O N E P O R T T O A N O T H E R
1.8.1 W h e n passing f r o m o n e p o r t t o a n o t h e r , t h e
ship's stability shall meet t h e requirements i m p o s e d
u p o n ships n a v i g a t i n g i n a region t h r o u g h w h i c h t h e
passage is expected t o b e u n d e r t a k e n .
1.8.2 T h e R e g i s t e r m a y p e r m i t t h e passage o f a
ship w h i c h stability cannot be raised u p t o that
r e q u i r e d b y 1.8.1 p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e w e a t h e r r e s t r i c
tions correspond t o itsstability.
2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS F O R STABILITY

2.1 W E A T H E R
CRITERION
b y a r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e /(9), a h o r i z o n t a l s t r a i g h t l i n e
corresponding t o t h e heeling lever l a n dt h e heeling
angle 9
50 , o r t h e angle o f f l o o d i n g 9/ o r t h e
heeling angle 9 , corresponding t o t h e second p o i n t
o f intersection between t h e straight line l
and the
r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e , w h i c h e v e r a n g l e i s less.
T h e area a is f o r m e d b y t h e righting lever curve,
s t r a i g h t line l a n d h e e l i n g angle e q u a l t o 9 i 9i ;
.5 t h e s h i p s t a b i l i t y i s c o n s i d e r e d s u f f i c i e n t b y t h e
w e a t h e r c r i t e r i o n K=b/a, p r o v i d e d t h e a r e a b i s e q u a l
t o o r g r e a t e r t h a n t h e a r e a a, i . e . K^\.
For
m e t e o r o l o g i c a l ships, t h e w e a t h e r c r i t e r i o n is
specially c o n s i d e r e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case; i t
i s r e c o m m e n d e d t h i s v a l u e s h a l l b e n o t l e s s t h a n 1,5.
2 . 1 . 3 T h e static h e e l i n g angle 9 i d u e t o steady w i n d
s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 16 o r a n a n g l e e q u a l t o 0,8 o f t h e
o p e n d e c k e d g e i m m e r s i o n a n g l e , w h i c h e v e r i s less.
T h e requirements f o r t h e static heeling angle o f
t i m b e r c a r r i e r s a n d c o n t a i n e r s h i p s a r e g i v e n i n 3.3
a n d 3.10.
w2
2.1.1 T h e requirements f o r stability set f o r t h i n

the present P a r t a r e differentiated depending u p o n
the ship's area o f n a v i g a t i o n .
D e f i n i t i o n s o f restricted areas o fn a v i g a t i o n a r e
g i v e n i n 2.2.5, P a r t I " C l a s s i f i c a t i o n " .
2.1.2 S t a b i l i t y o f ships o f unrestricted service a n d
o f restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R l , R 2 , R 2 - R S N ,
R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 ) a n d R 3 - R S N shall be considered
s u f f i c i e n t a s t o w e a t h e r c r i t e r i o n K, i f t h e r e q u i r e
m e n t s o f 2.1.2.5 a r e m e t u n d e r t h e a s s u m e d e f f e c t s o f
w i n d a n d seas m e n t i o n e d b e l o w , a n d :
.1 t h e ship i s u n d e r t h e effect o f a w i n d o f steady
speed a n d direction perpendicular t o t h e ship's
centerline, t o w h i c h t h e lever l
o f w i n d heeling
m o m e n t c o r r e s p o n d s ( r e f e r t o F i g . 2.1.2.1);
.2 b y t h e static heeling angle 9 i r e s u l t i n g f r o m
s t e a d y w i n d a n d c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e first p o i n t o f
intersection between t h e h o r i z o n t a l straight line l
a n d t h e c u r v e o f r i g h t i n g l e v e r s /(9), t h e s h i p h e e l s t o
t h e w e a t h e r side u n d e r t h e effect o f w a v e s , t o a n angle
e q u a l t o t h e r o l l a m p l i t u d e 9 i ( r e f e r t o F i g . 2.1.2.1);
.3 t h e s h i p i s t h e n s u b j e c t e d t o a g u s t w i n d
p r e s s u r e w h i c h r e s u l t s i n a g u s t w i n d h e e l i n g l e v e r l ',
.4 t h e areas a a n d b are d e t e r m i n e d a n d c o m p a r e d ,
w h i c h a r e s h a d e d i n F i g . 2.1.2.1. T h e a r e a b i s f o r m e d
wX
wX
w 2
w2
w2
Lever
w2
W h e n calculating the weather criterion, the results o f m o d e l

tests m a y b e u s e d carried o u t i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h the requirements
of Interim Guidelines for Alternative Assessment o fthe Weather
Criterion (refer t o Collection o f R e g u l a t i n g D o c u m e n t s , b o o k
e i g h t e e n , 2008).
F i g . 2.1.2.1
Rules
308
(2.1.4.1-1)
p , = wind pressure, i n P a , t o b e determined from

T a b l e 2.1.4.1 p r o c e e d i n g f r o m t h e a r e a o f n a v i g a t i o n ;
z = a r m o f windage area to b e adopted equal to t h e
vertical distance between the windage area centre A ,
a n d t h e centre o f the underwater hull lateral area
projected o n t h ecentreline o r , approximately, t h e
half o fthe ship draught;
A = windage area, in m , t ob edetermined in accordance
w i t h 1.4.6;
A = s h i p d i s p l a c e m e n t , i n t;
g = g r a v i t a t i o n a l a c c e l e r a t i o n , e q u a l t o 9,81 m / s .
Ships
dimensionless factor to b e adopted from T a

b l e 2.1.5.1-1 p r o c e e d i n g f r o m t h e b r e a d t h - t o d r a u g h t (Bid) r a t i o ;
X = dimensionless factor to b e adopted from T a
b l e 2.1.5.1-2 p r o c e e d i n g f r o m t h e b l o c k c o e f f i c i e n t
C o f t h e s h i p ;
r = 0,73 + 0,6(zgd)ld,
while r shall n o t b e adopted
greater t h a n 1;
5 = dimensionless factor to b e adopted from T a
b l e 2.1.5.1-3 p r o c e e d i n g f r o m t h e a r e a o f n a v i g a t i o n
a n d t h e roll period t o b e determined b y t h e
formula
wi
Avi=/vW1000gA
of Sea-Going
X\ =
2.1.4 C a l c u l a t i o n o f h e e l i n g l e v e r d u e t o w i n d
pressure.
2.1.4.1 T h e h e e U n g l e v e r l , i n m , s h a l l b e
adopted constant f o rall heeUng angles a n d shall be
where
and Construction
T=2cB/Jh
where
c = 0,373 + 0 , 0 2 3 B / d - 0 , 0 4 3 L J l 0 0 ;
h = metacentric h e i g h t corrected f o r t h e effect o f free
surfaces o fliquid cargoes;
L i = length o fship o n the waterline.
T a b l e
T h e heeUng lever l
formula
w2
w 2
=l,5/
W l
Factor
shall be determined b ythe
Bid <2,4 2,6 2,8 3,0 3,2 3,4 3,5 3,6
(2.1.4.1-2)
T a b l e
W i n d pressure p
2.1.5.1-1
4,0 4,5 5,0 5,5 6,0 >6,5
Xx 1,00 0,96 0,93 0,90 0,86 0,82 0,80 0,79 0,78 0,76 0,72 0,68 0,64 0,62
2.1.4.1
T a b l e
2.1.5.1-2
Factor X
Area o f navigation
W i n d pressure
p , in P a
v
504
353
252
Unrestricted
Restricted R l
R e s t r i c t e d R 2 , R 2 - R S N , R2-RSN(4), R 3 - R S N
0,45
0,50
0,55
0,60
0,65
>0,70
0,75
0,82
0,89
0,95
0,97
1,00
T a b l e
2.1.5.1-3
Factor S
2.1.4.2 F o r f i s h i n g v e s s e l s h a v i n g a l e n g t h
between 2 4 m a n d 4 5 m , t h e w i n d pressure value i n
F o r m u l a (2.1.4.1-1) m a y be ascertained f r o m T a ble 2.1.4.2 p r o c e e d i n g f r o m t h e distance Z b e t w e e n
the w i n d a g e area centre a n d t h e waterline.
T a b l e
2.1.4.2
Z, in m
>6
P i n P a
316
386
429
460
485
504
2.1.4.3 A t t h e d i s c r e t i o n o f t h e R e g i s t e r , t h e s h i p s
w h o s e stabiUty w i t h respect t o t h e w e a t h e r criterion
does n o t c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements f o r t h e ships
o f restricted area o f navigation R 2 , m a y be allowed t o
operate as ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3
w i t h additional restrictions, taking into account t h e
pecuUarities o f t h e area a n d t h e n a t u r e o f service.
The requirements f o r stability o f floating cranes
and crane ships a r e stipulated i n 4.1.
2.1.5 C a l c u l a t i o n o f r o l l a m p l i t u d e .
2.1.5.1 T h e r o l l a m p U t u d e , i n d e g . , f o r a r o u n d bilged ship shall be determined b y t h e formula
Qi =kXiX JrS
r
where
Area o f
naviga
tion
Unre
stricted
T, i n s
5
10
12
14
16
18
^20
0,100 0,100 0,098 0,093 0,079 0,065 0,053 0,044 0,038 0,035
R e s t r i c t e d 0,100 0,093 0,083 0,073 0,053 0,040 0,035 0,035 0,035 0,035
R1.R2,
R2-RSN,
5),
R3-RSN
2.1.5.2 F o r s h i p s w i t h b i l g e k e e l s o r b a r k e e l , o r
b o t h , t h e factor shaU be a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e 2.1.5.2
proceeding f r o m the A / L B ratio i nwhich A denotes
the total area, i n m , o f bilge keels o r t h e lateral
projected area o f the b a r keel, o r t h e s u m o f b o t h areas.
T h e bilge keels f o r ships h a v i n g t h e A r c 4 t o A r c 9
ice c a t e g o r y m a r k i n t h e i r class n o t a t i o n s h a l l b e
ignored.
k
w !
T a b l e
2.1.5.2
Factor
4/%
1,0
1,5
2,0
2,5
3,0
3,5
>4,0
1,00
0,98
0,95
0,88
0,79
0,74
0,72
0,70
(2.1.5.1)
= factor t a k i n g into a c c o u n t the effects o fbilge a n d / o r

b a r k e e l s a n d d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2.1.5.2;
shall b e adopted equal t o 1 where the keels are not
mounted;
2.1.5.3 W h e n c a l c u l a t i n g t h e r o l l a m p U t u d e b y
F o r m u l a (2.1.5.1), coefficient f o rsharp-bilged ships
s h a l l b e a d o p t e d e q u a l t o 0,7.
Part IV.
Stability
309
2.1.5.4 T h e r o l l a m p l i t u d e s o f s h i p s e q u i p p e d
w i t h a n t i - r o l l i n g devices shall be d e t e r m i n e d w i t h o u t
regard f o rt h e operation o f the latter.
2.1.5.5 I n T a b l e s 2 . 1 . 5 . 1 - 1 t o 2 . 1 . 5 . 2 t h e i n t e r
mediate values shall be determined b y Unear inter
polation. T h e calculated roll ampUtude values shall
be r o u n d e d t o integer degrees.
2.1.5.6 T h e t a b l e s a n d f o r m u l a s u s e d i n c a l c u l a
t i o n o f r o l l a m p U t u d e a r e o b t a i n e d f o r ships h a v i n g
t h e f o l l o w i n g p a r a m e t e r s : B/d^6,5;
0,7<z /d<
1,5;
7 < 2 0 J . F o r ships w i t h parameters outside o f t h e
above Umits the roll amplitude m a y be determined
w i t h m o d e l experiments according t o t h e procedure
described i n C o l l e c t i o n o f R e g u l a t i n g D o c u m e n t s ,
b o o k eighteen, 2008.
n a v i g a t i o n m a y be p e r m i t t e d as f o r ships o f restricted
area o f navigation depending u p o n t h evalue o f w i n d
pressure endured w h e n checking stabiUty f o r c o m
pUance w i t h t h e weather criterion.
2.2.5 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e r i g h t i n g l e v e r
curve o f floating cranes a n d crane ships, refer t o 4 . 1 .
2.3 M E T A C E N T R I C H E I G H T
2.2 R I G H T I N G L E V E R C U R V E
2.2.1 T h e a r e a u n d e r t h e r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e s h a l l
n o t b e l e s s t h a n 0,055 m - r a d u p t o t h e h e e U n g a n g l e
o f 30 a n d n o t l e s s t h a n 0,09 m - r a d u p t o t h e h e e U n g
a n g l e o f 40, o r u p t o t h e a n g l e o f f l o o d i n g 0 / ,
w h i c h e v e r i s t h e less. A d d i t i o n a l l y , t h e a r e a b e t w e e n
t h e h e e l i n g a n g l e s o f 30 a n d 40, o r b e t w e e n 30
a n d 0 / , i f 0 / < 40, s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n 0,03 m - r a d .
The m a x i m u m righting a r m 1
s h a l l b e n o t less
t h a n 0,25 m f o r s h i p s w i t h L < 8 0 m a n d 0,20 m f o r
s h i p s w i t h L ~ $ > \ 0 5 m a t t h e h e e U n g a n g l e 0 >3O.
F o r intermediate values o f L , t h ea r m value shall be
determined b y Unear interpolation.
O n agreement w i t h t h e Register, t h e angle
corresponding t o the m a x i m u m o f t h e righting lever
c u r v e m a y b e r e d u c e d t o 25.
W h e r e t h e righting lever curve h a s t w o m a x i m a
due t otheinfluence o f superstructures o r deckhouses,
the first m a x i m u m f r o m t h e u p r i g h t p o s i t i o n shall
o c c u r a t t h e a n g l e o f h e e l n o t l e s s t h a n 25.
2.2.2 S h i p s w i t h r a t i o B / D > 2 a r e a l l o w e d t o
navigate h a v i n g t h e angle corresponding t o t h e
m a x i m u m righting a r m , reduced as compared t o that
r e q u i r e d u n d e r 2.2.1 b y a v a l u e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formula

A0 = 40 ( ^ 2){K
1)0,5.
(2.2.2)
W h e r e B / D > 2,5 a n d K > 1,5, t h e r a t i o B / D = 2,5

a n d K = 1,5 s h a l l b e a d o p t e d . T h e v a l u e o f , s h a l l
be r o u n d e d o f f t o t h e nearest integer.
2.2.3 A s h i p s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e a f o r e s a i d
r e q u i r e m e n t s w h e n t h e c o r r e c t i o n f o rfree surfaces is
taken into account i n righting lever curves i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 1.4.7.
2.2.4 T h e a n g l e o f f l o o d i n g s h a l l b e n o t l e s s
t h a n 50. F o r s h i p s h a v i n g a l e s s e r a n g l e t h e
2.3.1 F o r a U s h i p s u n d e r a U l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s ,
except f o r the Ught-ship c o n d i t i o n , the value o f corrected
i n i t i a l m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t s h a U b e n o t less t h a n 0 , 1 5 m .
The m i n i m u m corrected initial metacentric height
m a y h a v e o t h e r v a l u e i n cases specified i n S e c t i o n 3.
F o r a l l ships, except f o r f i s h i n g vessels, w h a l e
factory ships, fish f a c t o r y ships a n d o t h e r ships used
for processing t h e living resources o f the sea a n d n o t
engaged i n catching t h e same, negative initial
metacentric height f o r a Ught ship is subject t o special
c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
2.3.2 I n i t i a l s t a b i U t y o f w e l l - d e c k s h i p s s h a l l b e
checked f o r t h e case o f w a t e r p e n e t r a t i o n i n t o t h e
well.
A m o u n t o f w a t e r i n t h e w e l l a n d i t s free surface
shall correspond t o t h e water level u p t o t h e l o w e r
edge o f the freeing p o r t s f o r a ship i n u p r i g h t p o s i t i o n
allowing f o rthe deck camber.
I f a ship h a st w o o r m o r e wells, stabiUty shall be
checked f o r t h e case o f f l o o d i n g o f t h e largest o n e .
2.4 A L L O W A N C E F O R I C I N G
2.4.1 F o r s h i p s i n t e n d e d f o r w i n t e r n a v i g a t i o n
w i t h i n w i n t e r seasonal zones set u p b y L o a d L i n e
Rules f o r Sea-Going Ships, stabiUty w i t h d u e regard
for icing, as specified i n this Chapter, shall be
checked i n addition t o t h em a i n loading conditions.
I n t h e calculation, account shall be t a k e n o f increase
in displacement, height o f the centre o fgravity a n d
windage area d u e t o icing. T h e stabiUty calculation
under icing shall be carried o u tfor the worst loading
condition as t o stability. W h e n checking stability
under icing, t h emass o f t h e ice is considered as a n
o v e r l o a d a n dis n o t included i n t h e ship's deadweight.
W h e n verifying t h e stabiUty o f floating cranes
a n d crane ships, t h ea l l o w a n c e f o r icing shall b e m a d e
in accordance w i t h 4 . 1 , a n d o f timber carriers
i n accordance w i t h 3.3.7.
2.4.2 W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e h e e l i n g a n d c a p s i z i n g
m o m e n t s f o r ships n a v i g a t i n g i n w i n t e r seasonal zones t o
t h e n o r t h o f l a t i t u d e 6630' N a n d t o t h e s o u t h o f
l a t i t u d e 6600' S , a s a l s o i n w i n t e r i n t h e B e r i n g S e a ,
310
Rules
the Sea o f O k h o t s k a n d i n t h e Tatarski Strait, the

a s s u m e d rates o f i c i n g s h a l l be as specified i n 2.4.3
a n d 2.4.4.
2.4.3 T h e m a s s o f i c e p e r s q u a r e m e t r e o f t h e t o t a l
area o f h o r i z o n t a l projection o f exposed weather
decks shall be assumed t o be 3 0 k g . T h e total
h o r i z o n t a l p r o j e c t i o n o f decks shall include h o r i z o n tal projections o f a l l exposed decks a n d gangways,
irrespective o f t h e availability o f awnings. T h e
vertical m o m e n t d u e t o this loading is determined
for heights o f the centre o f gravity o f the corresponding areas o f decks a n d gangways.
The deck machinery, arrangements, hatch covers,
etc. a r e i n c l u d e d i n t h e p r o j e c t i o n o f decks a n d n o t
taken i n t o account separately.
F o r ships w i t h f r a m i n g fitted above o p e n deck
sections, a l l o w a n c e shall be m a d e f o ra n a d d i t i o n a l
m a s s o f ice h a v i n g t h e t h i c k n e s s e q u a l t o t h e m a i n
framing height.
2.4.4 T h e m a s s o f i c e p e r s q u a r e m e t r e o f t h e
windage area shall be assumed t o be 15 kg. I n this
case, t h e w i n d a g e area a n d t h e h e i g h t o f t h e centre
and Construction
SHIPS
Ships
o f g r a v i t y s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d f o r a d r a u g h t dm,
as s p e c i f i e d i n 1.4.6, b u t w i t h o u t t h e a l l o w a n c e f o r
icing.
2.4.5 I n o t h e r a r e a s o f t h e w i n t e r s e a s o n a l z o n e ,
the rates o f icing f o r w i n t e r t i m e shall be assumed t o
be e q u a l t o h a l f those specified i n 2.4.3 a n d 2.4.4,
except f o r t h e areas where, o n agreement w i t h t h e
Register, icing m a y n o t be taken into account.
2.4.6 T h e m a s s o f i c e a n d v e r t i c a l m o m e n t
calculated i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h 2.4.3 t o 2.4.5 cover
all loading conditions w h e n d r a w i n g u p the I n f o r m a tion.
2.4.7 F o r t h e r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e s p l o t t e d w i t h t h e
allowance f o r icing the m a x i m u m righting a r m f o r ships
o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n shall b e at least 0 , 2 m
a t a n a n g l e o f h e e l i n g 25.
2.4.8 F o r s h i p s n a v i g a t i n g i n w i n t e r i n t h e r e g i o n s
o f t h e B l a c k a n d A s o v Seas n o r t h w a r d s o f t h e
p a r a l l e l o f l a t i t u d e 4400' N , a s w e l l a s i n t h e r e g i o n
of the Caspian Sea northwards o f the parallel o f
l a t i t u d e 4200' N t h e i c i n g s h a l l b e t a k e n i n t o a c c o u n t
i n compliance w i t h 2.4.5.
3 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS F O R STABILITY

3.1 P A S S E N G E R
of Sea-Going
as f o r n o r m a l s e r v i c e c o n d i t i o n s o f t h e s h i p . S t a b i l i t y
w i t h a n allowance for icing shall be checked w i t h n o
passengers o n exposed decks.
3.1.2 T h e s t a b i U t y o f p a s s e n g e r s h i p s s h a l l b e s u c h
t h a t i n t h e e v e n t u a l case o f c r o w d i n g o f passen-gers
to o n e side o n t h e u p p e r deck accessible f o r
passengers, as near the b u l w a r k as possible, the angle
o f s t a t i c h e e l d o e s n o t e x c e e d 10.
3.1.3 T h e a n g l e o f h e e l o n a c c o u n t o f t u r n i n g
s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 10. I n a d d i t i o n , t h e a n g l e o f h e e l o n
a c c o u n t o f c r o w d i n g o f passengers t o o n e side o f t h e
p r o m e n a d e decks n o r m a l l y a t their disposal o n
t u r n i n g s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 12.
3.1.4 T h e h e e l i n g m o m e n t o n t u r n i n g c i r c l e ,
in k N - m , shall be determined b y t h e formula
3.1.1 S t a b i U t y o f p a s s e n g e r s h i p s s h a l l b e c h e c k e d
for the following loading conditions:
.1 s h i p i n t h e f u l l y l o a d e d c o n d i t i o n , w i t h f u l l
n u m b e r o f class a n d u n b e r t h e d passengers a n d t h e i r
effects, a n d f u l l stores w i t h o u t l i q u i d ballast;
.2 s h i p i n t h e f u l l y l o a d e d c o n d i t i o n , w i t h t h e f u l l
n u m b e r o f class a n d u n b e r t h e d passengers a n d t h e i r
effects, b u t w i t h 1 0 p e r cent o f stores;
.3 s h i p w i t h o u t c a r g o , b u t w i t h t h e f u l l n u m b e r o f
class a n d u n b e r t h e d passengers a n d t h e i r effects a n d
w i t h full stores;
.4 s h i p i n t h e s a m e l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n a s i n 3 . 1 . 1 . 3 ,
b u t w i t h 1 0 p e r cent o f stores;
.5 s h i p w i t h o u t c a r g o a n d p a s s e n g e r s , b u t w i t h
full stores;
(3.1.4)
where V = ship's service speed, i n m / s ;
A = d i s p l a c e m e n t , i n t;
L ) = length o fship o nthe waterline.
b u t w i t h 5 0 p e r cent o f stores.
W h e n checking stability for the compUance w i t h
3.1.5 W h e n c a l c u l a t i n g s h i p ' s s t a b i U t y o n t u r n i n g
t h e w e a t h e r c r i t e r i o n , class passengers s h a l l b e
assumed t o be i n their a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d u n - a n d f o r heeUng caused b y c r o w d i n g o f passengers t o
berthed passengers o n their decks. T h e stowage o f
o n e side, n o a c c o u n t s h a l l b e t a k e n o f w i n d a n d
cargo i n holds, 'tween decks a n d o ndecks is assumed
r o l U n g effects.
0
' F o r a d d i t i o n a l r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r s h i p s u n d e r 24 m i n l e n g t h , r e f e r t o 3.9.
Part IV.
Stability
311
3.1.6 W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g a d m i s s i b l e d i s t r i b u t i o n
o f passengers c r o w d i n g t o o n e side o n t h e i r p r o m e
n a d e decks, i t shall be assumed t h a t the ship's n o r m a l
operating conditions are duly observed w i t h a n
allowance for the position o f the equipment and
arrangements and the regulations concerning the
access o f p a s s e n g e r s t o a p a r t i c u l a r d e c k area.
3.1.7 W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e a r e a w h e r e c r o w d i n g
o f passengers m a y be p e r m i t t e d , the passages b e t w e e n
benches shall be i n c l u d e d i n the c a l c u l a t i o n w i t h
factor 0,5. T h e area o f n a r r o w e x t e r n a l passages
between the deckhouse and the b u l w a r k o r railing u p
to 0,7 m w i d e shall be i n c l u d e d w i t h factor 0,5.
3.1.8 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h e
angle o f heel caused by c r o w d i n g o f passengers to one
side, t h e m a s s o f e a c h passenger s h a l l be a s s u m e d t o
be 75 k g . T h e assumed density o f d i s t r i b u t i o n o f
passengers is 4 persons per square m e t r e o f the free
area o f the deck. T h e height o f the centre o f g r a v i t y
for s t a n d i n g passengers s h a l l be a s s u m e d e q u a l
t o 1,0 m a b o v e t h e d e c k l e v e l ( a c c o u n t m a y b e t a k e n ,
i f necessary, o f c a m b e r a n d sheer o f deck) a n d t h a t
f o r s i t t i n g p a s s e n g e r s 0,3 m a b o v e t h e seats.
3.1.9 A l l c a l c u l a t i o n s o f t h e s t a t i c h e e l i n g a n g l e
caused b y passengers c r o w d i n g t o o n e side a n d b y
t u r n i n g shall be carried o u t t a k i n g n o a c c o u n t o f
icing, b u t w i t h a c o r r e c t i o n f o r free surfaces o f U q u i d
c a r g o e s as s p e c i f i e d i n 1.4.7.
3.2 D R Y C A R G O
SHIPS
3.2.1 S t a b i l i t y o f c a r g o s h i p s s h a l l b e c h e c k e d f o r
the following loading conditions:
.1 s h i p h a v i n g a d r a u g h t t o t h e s u m m e r l o a d U n e
w i t h homogeneous cargo fining cargo holds, 'tween
decks, c o a m i n g spaces a n d t r u n k s o f cargo hatches,
w i t h full stores, b u t w i t h o u t U q u i d ballast;
.2 s h i p i n t h e s a m e c o n d i t i o n a s i n 3 . 2 . 1 . 1 , b u t
w i t h 10 per cent o f stores and, w h e r e necessary, w i t h
Uquid ballast;
.3 s h i p w i t h o u t c a r g o , b u t w i t h f u l l s t o r e s ;
.4 s h i p i n t h e s a m e c o n d i t i o n a s i n 3 . 2 . 1 . 3 , b u t
w i t h 10 per cent o f stores.
3.2.2 W h e r e c a r g o h o l d s o f a s h i p i n t h e l o a d i n g
c o n d i t i o n s as u n d e r 3.2.1.3 a n d 3 . 2 . 1 . 4 a r e u s e d t o
additionally take U q u i d ballast, ship's stabiUty w i t h
U q u i d b a l l a s t i n these h o l d s s h a l l be checked. T h e
effect o f free surfaces i n ship's store t a n k s is t a k e n
into account i n compliance w i t h the provisions o f
1.4.7 a n d t h a t i n h o l d s w i t h l i q u i d b a l l a s t i n
accordance w i t h their actual fining.
3.2.3 W h e r e s h i p s a r e n o r m a l l y e n g a g e d i n
c a r r y i n g deck cargoes, t h e i r stabiUty shall be checked
for the following additional conditions:
.1 s h i p h a v i n g a d r a u g h t t o t h e s u m m e r l o a d U n e
( w i t h regard t o 3.2.1.1); w i t h holds a n d 'tween decks
filled b y h o m o g e n e o u s cargo, w i t h deck cargo, full
stores a n d U q u i d ballast, i f necessary;
b u t w i t h 10 per cent o f stores.
3.2.4 T h e c o r r e c t e d i n i t i a l m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t o f
r o - r o ships i n the l o a d e d c o n d i t i o n , w i t h icing
d i s r e g a r d e d , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 2 m .
3.2.5 I f , d u r i n g s t a b i U t y v e r i f i c a t i o n , i t i s f o u n d o u t t h a t
t h e v a l u e o f o n e o f t h e p a r a m e t e r s y/h/B a n d B / d at least
e x c e e d s 0 , 0 8 a n d 2 , 5 , r e s p e c t i v e l y , t h e ship's s t a b i U t y s h a U b e
c h e c k e d a d d i t i o n a U y o n t h e basis o f t h e a c c e l e r a t i o n c r i t e r i o n
K* i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3 . 1 2 . 3 . I n s o d o i n g , i f t h e
calculated acceleration value a
( i n f r a c t i o n s o f g) i s
i n excess o f t h e m a x i m u m p e r m i s s i b l e o n e , t h e p o s s i b i U t y
o f operating the ship under appropriate loading condi
t i o n s shaU be speciaUy considered b y t h e Register.
P a r t i c u l a r l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s u n d e r w h i c h the ship is
p e r m i t t e d t o p r o c e e d t o sea w i t h a > 0 , 3 0 s h a U
be specified i n t h e I n f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i l i t y .
c a l
c a /
I n t h e case o f a ship i n t h e b a l l a s t c o n d i t i o n n o
check o f the acceleration c r i t e r i o n m a y be effected.
3.2.6 I n t r a n s p o r t i n g n o n - c o h e s i v e b u l k c a r g o e s
U k e g r a i n h a v i n g a n a n g l e o f r e p o s e less t h a n o r e q u a l
t o 30 a s s p e c i f i e d i n t h e C o d e o f S a f e P r a c t i c e f o r
S o U d B u l k C a r g o e s ( C o d e ) t h e s t a b i U t y s h a l l
comply w i t h the provisions o f Rules for the Carriage
of G r a i n and the requirements o f M a r i t i m e A d m i n
istration.
3.2.7 B u l k c a r r i e r s o f l e s s t h a n 1 5 0 m i n l e n g t h
shall be fitted w i t h the o n b o a r d stability i n s t r u m e n t
c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.4.12.
3.3 T I M B E R C A R R I E R S
3.3.1 S t a b i U t y o f t i m b e r c a r r i e r s s h a l l b e c h e c k e d
for the following loading conditions:
.1 s h i p c a r r y i n g t i m b e r c a r g o w i t h a p r e s c r i b e d
s t o w a g e rate ( i f s t o w a g e rate o f t i m b e r cargo is n o t
specified, the c a l c u l a t i o n o f stabiUty shall be m a d e
assuming = 2,32 m / t ) i n holds and o n deck and
h a v i n g a d r a u g h t t o the s u m m e r t i m b e r l o a d Une,
w i t h o u t ballast ( t a k i n g account o f 3.2.1.1), w i t h full
stores;
b u t w i t h 10 per cent o f stores a n d , w h e r e necessary,
w i t h Uquid ballast;
.3 s h i p w i t h t i m b e r c a r g o , h a v i n g t h e g r e a t e s t
stowage rate specified, i n h o l d s a n d o n deck, w i t h full
stores, w i t h o u t ballast;
b u t w i t h 10 per cent o f stores a n d , w h e r e necessary,
w i t h Uquid ballast;
3
312
3.3.2 T h e s t o w a g e o f t i m b e r c a r g o i n t i m b e r
carriers shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f t h e
L o a d L i n e Rules f o r S e a - G o i n g Ships as w e l l as w i t h
the provisions o f t h e I n f o r m a t i o n o n StabiUty o r
special instructions.
3.3.3 W h e n c a l c u l a t i n g t h e c r o s s - c u r v e s o f
stability f o r t i m b e r carrier, t h e v o l u m e o f timber
cargo o n deck m a y beincluded i n the calculation w i t h
full breadth a n d height a n d permeabiUty o f 0,25
corresponding t o the stowed lumber.
3.3.4 I n f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i U t y s h a l l i n c l u d e d a t a t o
enable the m a s t e r t o estimate the ship's stabiUty w h e n
carrying a timber cargo o n deck t h epermeabiUty o f
w h i c h differs substantially f r o m 0,25. W h e r e t h e
a p p r o x i m a t e p e r m e a b i U t y i s n o t k n o w n , a t least three
values shaU b e adopted, n a m e l y , 0,25, 0,4 a n d 0,6. T h e
latter t w o values specify t h e p e r m e a b i U t y range f o r t h e
stowed r o u n d timber where t h e larger log diameter
corresponds t o the higher permeabiUty.
3.3.5 T h e c o r r e c t e d i n i t i a l m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t o f
t i m b e r c a r r i e r s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 0 , 1 m a U t h r o u g h
the voyage w i t h loading conditions as mentioned under
3 . 3 . 1 . 1 t o 3 . 3 . 1 . 4 , a n d n o t less t h a n 0 , 1 5 m w i t h l o a d i n g
c o n d i t i o n s as m e n t i o n e d i n 3.3.1.5 a n d 3.3.1.6.
W i t h l o a d i n g conditions as m e n t i o n e d u n d e r 3.3.1.1
to 3.3.1.4, the r i g h t i n g lever curve o f t i m b e r carriers shall
be i n compliance w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g specific requirements:
the area under the righting lever curve shall n o t
b e l e s s t h a n 0 , 0 8 m - r a d u p t o t h e h e e U n g a n g l e o f 40,
o r u p t o t h e a n g l e o f f l o o d i n g 0/, w h i c h e v e r i s t h e l e s s ;
t h e m a x i m u m r i g h t i n g a r m s h a l l b e n o t less
t h a n 0,25 m .
T h e static heeUng angle due t o steady w i n d shall
n o t e x c e e d 16; c r i t e r i o n o f 0 , 8 o f t h e d e c k e d g e
i m m e r s i o n angle i s n o t appUcable t o t i m b e r carriers.
3.3.6 S t a b i U t y c a l c u l a t i o n s f o r a s h i p c a r r y i n g d e c k
timber cargo for the m o s t unfavorable loading condit i o n o u t o f those specified i n 3.3.1.1 t o 3.3.1.4 shall b e
p e r f o r m e d w i t h regard t o possible increase i n m a s s o f
the deck timber cargo due t o absorption o f water.
W h e r e n o appropriate data o n the extent o f water
absorption b y different kinds o f w o o d are available,
it is necessary t o increase a mass o fdeck cargo b y
10 per cent i n the calculations. T h i s a d d i t i o n i n mass
shall be considered as a n overload and shall n o t be
included i n the ship's deadweight.
3.3.7 F o r s h i p s c a r r y i n g d e c k t i m b e r c a r g o ,
intended f o r o p e r a t i o n i n t h e areas w h e r e icing is
required t o be considered, as w e l l as navigating i n
winter within w i n t e r seasonable zones stability
calculations shall be carried o u t w i t h regard t o
possible icing. W h e n calculating icing t h e upper
Ships
surface o f the deck t i m b e r cargo shall b e considered

as i f i t w e r e t h e d e c k , w h i l e i t s side surfaces a b o v e t h e
b u l w a r k shall beconsidered as i f they were part o f the
design w i n d a g e area. I c i n g rate f o r these surfaces
shall b e three t i m e s t h a t specified i n 2.4.
3.3.8 I f a t i m b e r c a r r i e r i s u s e d f o r t h e c a r r i a g e o f
other kinds o f cargo, its stability shall be checked i n
c o m p U a n c e w i t h t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f S e c t i o n 2 a n d 3.2.
Cross-curves o f stabiUty shall becalculated taking n o
account o f deck timber cargo.
3.3.9 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s C h a p t e r a p p l y t o
o t h e r types o f ships w h e n they a r e used f o r t h e
carriage o f deck timber cargo.
I n case t h e s t o w a g e o f deck t i m b e r cargo does n o t
c o m p l y w i t h 3.3.2 w i t h respect t o fulfillment o f the
requirements o f L o a d Line Rules f o r Sea-Going
Ships, the buoyancy o f timber deck cargo shall n o t be
taken into consideration i n t h e calculations o f
stability, w h i l e t h e ship stabiUty shall c o m p l y w i t h
the requirements o f 2.1 t o 2.3.
3.3.10 D o u b l e b o t t o m t a n k s o f t i m b e r c a r r i e r s
where fitted w i t h i n the midship half-length o f the ship
shall have adequate watertight longitudinal subdivision.
3.4
T A N K E R S
3.4.1 S t a b i U t y o f t a n k e r s c a r r y i n g U q u i d c a r g o e s
shall bechecked for the following loading conditions:
.1 ship h a v i n g d r a u g h t u p t o s u m m e r l o a d l i n e ( w i t h
r e g a r d t o 3.2.1.1), fuUy l o a d e d a n d w i t h f u U stores;
.2 s h i p f u l l y l o a d e d , b u t w i t h 1 0 p e r c e n t o f
stores;
A c c o u n t o f the free surface effect i n ship's stores
t a n k s s h a l l b e t a k e n a s s p e c i f i e d i n 1.4.7 a n d i n c a r g o
tanks according t o the extent o f their actual fining.
W h e r e coamings a r efitted o n the open parts o f
the tanker's decks f o r p r e v e n t i o n o f cargo spillage
f o r m i n g a n enclosed space (well), such space shall b e
considered as filled w i t h sea w a t e r a n d i t shall be
taken i n t o account i n calculation o f correction t o the
initial metacentric height.
3.4.2 F o r r e f u e l U n g t a n k e r s , s t a b i l i t y s h a l l b e
checked for additional loading condition: a ship w i t h
75 per cent o f cargoes a n d free surfaces i n t a n k s f o r
each k i n d o f cargo, a n d 50 per cent o f stores w i t h o u t
Uquid ballast.
3.4.3 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3 . 4 . 2 a p p l y t o o i l
recovery ships as well.
3.4.4 S t a b i l i t y o f t a n k e r s h a v i n g c a r g o t a n k o r
ballast t a n k breadths m o r e t h a n 6 0 p e rcent o f the
ship's b r e a d t h shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g
Part I V .
Stability
additional requirements during cargo loading/unl o a d i n g o p e r a t i o n s , i n c l u d i n g t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e stages

thereof.
3.4.4.1 W h e n t h e c a r g o l o a d i n g / u n l o a d i n g o p e r a tions are performed i n p o r t the corrected initial
m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 0 , 1 5 m a n d
t h e e x t e n t o f p o s i t i v e i n t a c t s t a b i l i t y s h a l l b e n o t less
t h a n 20.
3.4.4.2 W h e n t h e c a r g o l o a d i n g / u n l o a d i n g o p e r a tions a r e p e r f o r m e d a t sea a n d o n roadstead a l l
requirements o f this Part o f the Rules shall be m e t .
3.4.4.3 W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g c o r r e c t i o n f o r t h e
effect o f free surfaces o f l i q u i d s a n a l l o w a n c e shall
be s i m u l t a n e o u s l y m a d e f o r m a x i m u m free surface
effects i n a l l c a r g o , ballast a n d c o n s u m a b l e t a n k s .
3.4.4.4 I f t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3 . 4 . 4 . 1 a n d 3 . 4 . 4 . 2
are n o t m e t , d u e t o application o f t h e requirements
o f 3.4.4.3, instructions covering t h e o p e r a t i o n a l
restrictions t o satisfy t h e said requirements m a y be
included into the I n f o r m a t i o n o n Stability upon
agreement w i t h t h e Register.
3.4.4.5 I n s t r u c t i o n s r e f e r r e d t o i n 3 . 4 . 4 . 4 s h a l l b e
formulated with consideration f o rthe following:
they shall be i n a language understood b y the
crew m e m b e r i n charge o f loading/unloading operations a n d shall be translated into English;
they shall n o t require m o r e complicated mathematical calculations than those provided i n t h e other
sections o f t h e I n f o r m a t i o n o n StabiUty;
they shall indicate t h e Ust o f cargo a n d ballast
t a n k s w h i c h m a y s i m u l t a n e o u s l y h a v e free surfaces a t
a n y stage o f l o a d i n g / u n l o a d i n g operations;
they shaU include typical versions o f loading/
u n l o a d i n g operations t o satisfy t h e stabiUty requirem e n t s u n d e r a n y l o a d c o n d i t i o n specified i n t h e
I n f o r m a t i o n o n StabiUty. T h e versions shall contain
Usts o f c a r g o a n d baUast t a n k s w h i c h m a y s i m u l t a n e o u s l y h a v e free surfaces d u r i n g v a r i o u s stages o f
loading/unloading operations;
they shall provide instructions necessary f o r
independent pre-planning loading/unloading operations, including:
m a x i m u m heights o f t h e ship's centre o f g r a v i t y
in graphical and/or tabular f o r m w h i c h enables
control o f compliance with the requirements
o f 3.4.4.1 a n d 3.4.4.2;
the m e t h o d o f expeditious assessment o f effect
produced o n t h e stabiUty b y t h e n u m b e r o f tanks
w h i c h s i m u l t a n e o u s l y h a v e free surfaces a t a n y stage
o f loading/unloading operations;
description o f means available o n board f o r
control a n d m o n i t o r i n g loading/unloading operat i o n s f r o m t h e v i e w p o i n t o f t h e effects o n stabiUty;
the m e t h o d used t o m o n i t o r loading/unloading
operations a n d t o give early w a r n i n g o f possible
impeding t h e stabiUty criteria;
313
description o f means available t o suspend

loading/unloading operations i fthe stabiUty criteria
are u n d e r t h e threat o f being impeded;
information o n the possibiUty a n d procedure o f
using shipboard computer a n d various automated
systems t o m o n i t o r loading/unloading operations
(including systems o f m o n i t o r i n g t a n k fining, shipboard computer software b y w h i c h calculations o f
t r i m a n d s t a b i l i t y a r e p e r f o r m e d , etc.);
they shall provide f o r corrective actions t o be
t a k e n i n case o f u n e x p e c t e d t e c h n i c a l difficulties
w h i c h c a n emerge i n t h ecourse o f loading/unloading
o p e r a t i o n s a n d i n case o f emergency.
3.4.4.6 P r o v i s i o n s o f t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r m u l a t e d i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.4.4.5 s h a l l b e specified i n t h e
I n f o r m a t i o n o n StabiUty a n d also i n t h e computer
software available o n board, b y w h i c h t r i m a n d stabiUty
calculations are performed. A copy o f the instructions
shall be kept a t t h e loading/unloading c o n t r o l station.
3.4.5 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s b e l o w a r e a p p U e d t o o i l
tankers o f deadweight 5000 a n d more. T h e requirem e n t s o f 3.4.4 a r e n o t applicable t o t h e a b o v e ships.
3.4.5.1 E a c h o i l t a n k e r s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h
requirements set f o r t h i n 3.4.5.1.1 t o 3.4.5.1.2
(considering i n s t r u c t i o n s i n 3.4.5.1.3 a n d 3.4.5.1.4)
for a n y o p e r a t i o n draught under t h e w o r s t possible
loading a n dballasting conditions (in accordance w i t h
good operation practice) including intermediate
stages o f o p e r a t i o n s w i t h l i q u i d s . U n d e r a l l c o n d i t i o n s i t i s considered t h a t there is a free surface o f
Uquid i n ballast tanks.
3.4.5.1.1 A t p o r t t h e c o r r e c t e d i n i t i a l m e t a c e n t r i c
h e i g h t s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 0 , 1 5 m .
3.4.5.1.2 A t s e a :
.1 c o r r e c t e d i n i t i a l m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t s h a l l b e
n o t less t h a n 0 , 1 5 m ;
.2 t h e r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e
requirements o f 2.2.1.
3.4.5.1.3 W h i l e c a l c u l a t i n g s t a b i U t y , e a c h c a r g o
t a n k is considered t o be filled u p t o t h elevel, a t w h i c h
the s u m o f the cargo v o l u m e m o m e n t i n relation t o
the m a i n p l a i n a n d t h e i n e r t i a m o m e n t o f free surface
a t t h e h e e l o f 0 r e a c h e s i t s m a x i m u m . T h e d e n s i t y o f
cargo shall correspond t o the available cargo deadweight a t t h e displacement a t w h i c h t h e transverse
metacentre over t h e m a i n p l a i n reaches its m i n i m u m
at 1 0 0 p e r cent o f stores a n d 1 p e r cent o f t h e t o t a l
water ballast capacity. I n calculations shall be
accepted t h e m a x i m u m value o f inertia m o m e n t o f
the U q u i d free surface i n ballast t a n k s . I n calculations
o f the initial metacentric height, the correction f o r
free surface o f l i q u i d s shall be based o n t h e respective
i n e r t i a m o m e n t s o f t h e free surfaces a t u p r i g h t ship
position. T h erighting arms m a ybe corrected o n the
basis o f a c t u a l corrections f o r t h e free surface effect
for each angle o f heeUng.
314
Rules
3.4.5.1.4 A s a n a l t e r n a t i v e t o t h e l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n specified b y 3.4.5.1.3, stabiUty is p e r m i t t e d t o be

checked at a l l possible c o m b i n a t i o n s o f cargo a n d
ballast t a n k loading. I n so doing, t h e following shall
be suggested:
w h e n m a k i n g calculations, t h e mass, centre o f
gravity co-ordinates a n d heeUng m o m e n t s due t o
Uquid overflow shall correspond t o the real contents
of all tanks;
the calculations shall be m a d e considering t h e
following assumptions:
the draughts shall be varied between the Ughtship d r a u g h t a n d scantUng d r a u g h t specified;
consideration shall be given t o the ship loading
conditions with consumables including b u t n o t
restricted t o fuel o i l , diesel o i l a n d fresh w a t e r
corresponding t o 9 7 p e r cent, 5 0 p e r cent a n d
10 p e r c e n t c o n t e n t ;
for each draught, distribution a n d a m o u n t o f t h e
ship's consumables, t h e available deadweight shall
comprise ballast water a n d cargo such that a l l
c o m b i n a t i o n s between t h e m a x i m u m baUast a n d
m i n i m u m c a r g o a n d v i c e v e r s a a r e c o v e r e d . I n a l l cases,
the n u m b e r o f baUast a n d cargo tanks loaded shall be
chosen t o reflect t h e w o r s t c o m b i n a t i o n o f centre o f
g r a v i t y appUcate a n d c o r r e c t i o n f o r free surfaces f r o m
the stabiUty standpoint. Operational Umits o n the
n u m b e r a n d Ust o f t a n k s , s i m u l t a n e o u s l y h a v i n g free
surfaces, o r t h e i r e x c l u s i o n are n o t p e r m i t t e d . A U baUast
t a n k s shall h a v e a t least 1 p e r cent content;
consideration shall be given t o cargo densities
between t h e lowest a n d highest values intended t o be
carried;
w h e n checking a l l t h e c o m b i n a t i o n s o f t h e ship's
loading, the interval o f the parametric variation shaU be
such that t h e w o r s t conditions f r o m t h e stabiUty
standpoint shall be checked. A m i n i m u m o f
20 intervals f o rt h e range o f cargo a n d ballast content,
between 1 p e r cent a n d 9 9 p e r cent o f total capacity,
shall be e x a m i n e d . M o r e closely spaced intervals near
critical parts o f t h e range m a y be necessary.
3.4.5.2 I m p l e m e n t a t i o n o f t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f 3.4.5.1 shall be ensured b y design measures. F o r
the c o m b i n a t i o n carriers additional simple operation
instructions m a y be allowed. T h i s instructions shall:
.1 b e a p p r o v e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r ;
.2 c o n t a i n t h e U s t o f c a r g o a n d b a U a s t t a n k s w h i c h
m a y h a v e free surfaces d u r i n g a n y o p e r a t i o n s w i t h
Uquids a n d i n t h e range o f possible densities o f cargo,
stiU t h e a b o v e m e n t i o n e d stabiUty c r i t e r i a a r e m e t ;
.3 b e e a s i l y u n d e r s t a n d a b l e f o r t h e o f f i c e r
responsible f o roperations w i t h Uquids;
.4 p r o v i d e p o s s i b i U t y o f p l a n n i n g t h e s e q u e n c e o f
operations w i t h cargo a n d ballast;
.5 e n a b l e t o c o m p a r e r e a l s t a b i U t y f i g u r e s w i t h
the required criteria presented i n graphics a n d tables;
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
.6 d o n o t r e q u i r e c o m p r e h e n s i v e m a t h e m a t i c a l
calculations f r o m t h e officer responsible f o r operations w i t h liquids;
.7 c o n t a i n i n s t r u c t i o n s i n r e s p e c t o f c o r r e c t i v e
actions t o be fulfilled b y t h e officer responsible f o r
the o p e r a t i o n s w i t h l i q u i d s i n case o f d e v i a t i o n s f r o m
r e c o m m e n d e d figures a n d i n c a s e o f a c c i d e n t s ;
.8 be h i g h h g h t e d i n I n f o r m a t i o n o n StabiUty a n d
hang o u t i n thecargo operations control station a n d p u t
i n t o t h e ship software p e r f o r m i n g stabiUty calculations.
3.5 F I S H I N G
VESSELS
3.5.1 S t a b i U t y o f f i s h i n g v e s s e l s s h a l l b e c h e c k e d
i n service f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s :
.1 d e p a r t u r e f o r f i s h i n g g r o u n d s w i t h f u l l s t o r e s ;
.2 a r r i v a l a t a p o r t f r o m f i s h i n g g r o u n d s w i t h f u l l
catch i n holds a n d o n deck, i f p r o v i s i o n is m a d e f o r
the deck cargo i n t h e design, a n d w i t h 10 p e r cent o f
stores;
.3 a r r i v a l a t a p o r t f r o m f i s h i n g g r o u n d s w i t h
20 p e r cent o f catch i n holds o r o n deck ( i f p r o v i s i o n is
m a d e i n t h e design f o r stowage o f cargo o n deck), 7 0 p e r
cent o f ice a n d salt r a t i n g a n d 1 0 p e r cent o f stores;
.4 d e p a r t u r e f r o m f i s h i n g g r o u n d s w i t h f u l l c a t c h
a n d a m o u n t o f stores ensuring t h e ship's d r a u g h t u p
to t h e l o a d Une.
3.5.2 T h e a m o u n t o f f u l l c a t c h i s d e t e r m i n e d
d e p e n d i n g o n t h e ship's type, capacity o f cargo spaces
a n d stabiUty characteristics. I t shall correspond t ot h e
load Une p o s i t i o n approved b y t h e Register a n d shall
be specified i n stabiUty calculations, as w e l l as i n t h e
Information.
3.5.3 F o r n e t fishing v e s s e l s , a l l o w a n c e s h a l l b e
m a d e f o r w e t fishing n e t s o n d e c k i n t h e s e c o n d , t h i r d
and fourth loading conditions.
3.5.4 S t a b i l i t y o f a s h i p , w h i l e b e i n g o n
fishing
grounds, shaU be checked f o r compUance w i t h t h e
weather criterion f o r the foUowing loading conditions:
a vessel engaged i n fishing, w i t h n o c a t c h i n h o l d s a n d
the hatches o f the holds open, catch a n d w e t nets stowed
o n deck, 2 5 p e r cent o f stores a n d f u U a m o u n t o f ice a n d
s a l t . F o r vessels w h e r e n e t s a n d c a t c h a r e h a u l e d i n w i t h
the help o f cargo b o o m s , account shaU also be t a k e n o f
cargo w h i c h is hoisted, w i t h t h e cargo weight equal t o
t h e b o o m safe w o r k i n g l o a d . T h e a m o u n t o f c a t c h
a U o w e d t o b e s t o w e d o n deck shaU b e specified b o t h i n
t h e vessel's d e s i g n a n d t h e I n f o r m a t i o n .
3.5.5 T h e s h i p ' s a m p U t u d e o f r o l l i n t h e l o a d i n g
c o n d i t i o n s p e c i f i e d i n 3 . 5 . 4 i s a s s u m e d t o b e 10 a n d
the angle o f heel a t w h i c h the c o a m i n g o f a cargo
h a t c h i m m e r s e s is regarded as t h e angle o f t h e ship's
flooding t h r o u g h openings considered open. W i n d
pressure i n t h i s l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n f o r vessels o f
unrestricted service is a s s u m e d as t h a t f o r ships o f
P a r t IV.
Stability
315
restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R l , t h e w i n d pressure f o r

vessels o f r e s t r i c t e d a r e a o f n a v i g a t i o n R l as t h a t f o r
ships o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 , t h e w i n d
pressure f o r vessels o f restricted area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 as
that f o r these ships reduced b y 3 0 p e r cent.
F o r ships h a v i n g a l e n g t h between 2 4 m
and 4 5 m , t h e initial w i n d pressure shall be adopted
f r o m Table 2.1.4.1.
3.5.6 T h e r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e f o r s h i p s i n t h e
loading c o n d i t i o n o f 3.5.4 limited b y the angle o f
flooding cutting i t short o n agreement with the
Register need n o t c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s set
forth i n 2.2.1.
F o r ships, f o r w h i c h t h e r i g h t i n g lever curve
r e q u i r e m e n t s c a n n o t be m e t i n case w h e n r e l e v a n t
fish holds partially o r fully flooded, t h e heeling angle
at w h i c h progressive flooding o ffish holds m a y occur
t h r o u g h hatches remaining open during
fishing
o p e r a t i o n s s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n 20.
3.5.7 T h e c o r r e c t e d i n i t i a l m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t
u n d e r t h e U g h t s h i p l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n , s h a l l b e n o t less
t h a n 0 , 0 5 m o r 0,0031?, w h i c h e v e r i s t h e greater.
F o r single-deck ships, t h e corrected initial m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 3 5 m . H o w e v e r ,
i n case o f ships w i t h c o n t i n u o u s superstructures a n d
those w h i c h l e n g t h exceeds 7 0 m , t h e corrected initial
metacentric height m a y be reduced t o 0,15m .
3.5.8 U n d e r a U l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s , t h e s h i p ' s
stabiUty shaU c o n f o r m t o 3.1.2 t o 3.1.5, 3.1.7 t o 3.1.9
w h e r e t h e ships are used f o r processing fish a n d o t h e r
U v i n g resources o f t h e sea a n d h a v e a c r e w o n b o a r d o f
m o r e t h a n 12 persons engaged i n catching a n d processing only. F r o m t h e p o i n t o f the above requirements t h e
c r e w m e m b e r s i n q u e s t i o n a r e regarded as passengers.
3.5.9 I n t h e case o f i c i n g t h e p a r a m e t e r s o f t h e
righting lever curve shall be i n c o n f o r m i t y w i t h 2.2.
3.5.10 T h e c a t c h s h a l l b e d u l y s e c u r e d i n o r d e r t o
prevent its shifting w h i c h m a y cause the dangerous
heel o r t r i m o f t h e ship. T h e detachable bulkheads o f
fish h o l d s , i f fitted, s h a l l b e o f a p p r o v e d t y p e .
3.5.11 S t a b i U t y o f s e a fishing v e s s e l s o f l e s s t h a n
24 m i n l e n g t h shall be checked w i t h regard t o t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s set o u t i n 3.9 o f t h i s P a r t o f t h e R u l e s
and Part I V "StabiUty and Freeboard" o f the Rules
for the Classification a n d C o n s t r u c t i o n o f S m a l l Sea
F i s h i n g Vessels.
3.6 S P E C I A L P U R P O S E
SHIPS
3.6.1 T h e s t a b i U t y o f w h a l e f a c t o r y s h i p s ,
fish
factory ships a n d o t h e r ships used f o r processing t h e
U v i n g resources o f t h e sea a n d n o t engaged i n
catching the same shall be checked f o r the following

loading conditions:
.1 s h i p w i t h s p e c i a l p e r s o n n e l , f u l l s t o r e s , a n d f u l l
cargo o f tare a n d salt o n b o a r d ;
.2 s h i p w i t h s p e c i a l p e r s o n n e l , 1 0 p e r c e n t o f
stores, a n d full cargo o f its p r o d u c t i o n o n b o a r d ;
but w i t h 2 0 per cent o fp r o d u c t i o n a n d 80 per cent o f
tare a n d salt o n board;
b u t w i t h 2 5 p e r cent o f stores a n d t h e cargo being
processed o n board.
3.6.2 T h e s t a b i U t y o f r e s e a r c h , e x p e d i t i o n a r y ,
h y d r o g r a p h i c , t r a i n i n g a n d similar ships shall be
checked f o r the loading conditions below:
.1 s h i p w i t h s p e c i a l p e r s o n n e l a n d f u l l s t o r e s o n
board;
b u t w i t h 5 0 p e r cent o f stores o n b o a r d ;
b u t w i t h 10 p e r cent o f stores o n b o a r d ;
.4 s h i p i n t h e s a m e l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s a s i n 3 . 6 . 2 . 1 ,
3.6.2.2 a n d 3.6.2.3, b u t w i t h full cargo o n board i f the
carriage o f the latter is envisaged.
3.6.3 T h e s t a b i l i t y o f s p e c i a l p u r p o s e s h i p s s h a l l
be i n accordance w i t h 3.1.2 t o 3.1.5, 3.1.7 t o 3.1.9.
F r o m the point o f view o f the above requirements
special p e r s o n n e l s h a l l be r e g a r d e d as passengers.
3.6.4 F o r s p e c i a l p u r p o s e s h i p s t h a t a r e s i m i l a r t o
s u p p l y vessels, o n a g r e e m e n t w i t h t h e R e g i s t e r , t h e
requirements f o r the righting lever curve m a y be
reduced, as stated i n 3.11.5.
3.6.5 F o r w h a l e f a c t o r y s h i p s , fish f a c t o r y s h i p s
a n d other ships used f o r processing t h e living
resources o f t h e sea, t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3 . 5 . 7
concerning the initial metacentric height apply.
3.6.6 F o r w h a l e f a c t o r y s h i p s , fish f a c t o r y s h i p s
a n d other ships used f o r processing t h e living
resources o f t h e sea, t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.5.9 f o r
the r i g h t i n g lever c u r v e i n t h e case o f i c i n g a p p l y .
3.7 T U G S
3.7.1 G e n e r a l .
3.7.1.1 S t a b i U t y o f t u g s s h a l l b e c h e c k e d f o r t h e
following loading conditions:
.1 s h i p w i t h f u l l s t o r e s ;
.2 s h i p w i t h 1 0 p e r c e n t o f s t o r e s a n d f o r t u g s
provided w i t h cargo holds, additionally;
.3 s h i p w i t h f u l l c a r g o i n h o l d s a n d f u l l s t o r e s ;
.4 s h i p w i t h f u l l c a r g o i n h o l d s a n d 1 0 p e r c e n t o f
stores.
' S t a b i U t y r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r e s c o r t t u g s r e f e r t o S e c t i o n 2, P a r t X V I I " D i s t i n g u i s h i n g M a r k s a n d D e s c r i p t i v e N o t a t i o n s i n t h e C l a s s
316
Rules
3.7.1.2 I n a d d i t i o n t o c o m p l i a n c e w i t h t h e
requirements o f Section 2 , t h e tugs shall have
sufficient d y n a m i c stabiUty t o w i t h s t a n d t h e heeUng
effect o f a n a s s u m e d transverse j e r k o f t h e t o w U n e
under t h e same loading conditions, that i s t h e angle
o f dynamic heeUng Q d u et o assumed j e r k o f the t o w
Une shall n o t exceed t h e U m i t s g i v e n b e l o w .
3.7.2 T u g s f o r i n n e r a n d o u t e r r o a d .
3.7.2.1 T h e a n g l e o f d y n a m i c h e e l f o r t u g s s h a l l
n o t be greater t h a n t h e angle o f f l o o d i n g o r capsizing,
w h i c h e v e r i s less.
T o meet this requirement, t h e following condi
t i o n shall b e satisfied:
d i
K l = yjldcapslldh
where l
>1,00
(3.7.2.1)
= a x m o fdynamical stability defined a sa nordinate o f

the d y n a m i c stability curve f o r a t u g a tthe angle o f
h e e l e q u a l t o t h e a n g l e o f f l o o d i n g ( r e f e r t o 3.7.2.3)
or capsizing Q
determined disregarding roll,
whichever i s less, i n m ;
= d y n a m i c heeling a r mcharacterizing the a s s u m e d jerk
effect o f t h e t o w line, i n m .
d c a p s
caps
dh
3.7.2.2 T h e d y n a m i c h e e U n g a r m l ,
dh
ldh = l'v (
5 ) ( 1 +
2 ) ( l + 24.fc2)
i nm , shall
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
structures, aswell as t h e doors o fall c o m p a n i o n w a y s

t o t h e spaces b e l o w t h e u p p e r deck, irrespective o f
their design, a r e open.
3.7.2.4 W h e n c h e c k i n g s t a b i l i t y o f t u g s f o r t h e
t o w line j e r k effect, n o a c c o u n t s h a l l b e t a k e n o f i c i n g
a n d free surfaces o f U q u i d cargoes.
3.7.2.5 I f s p e c i a l a p p l i a n c e s a r e a v a i l a b l e f o r
shifting t h e t o wh o o k d o w n w a r d s o rabaft, w i t h t h e
t o w U n e a t h w a r t s h i p s , t h e a s s u m p t i o n o f xH a n d zH
differing f r o m values g i v e n a b o v e i s subject t o special
c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h p a r t i c u l a r case.
3.7.3 T u g s f o r o c e a n t o w a g e .
3.7.3.1 T h e a n g l e o f h e e l f o r t u g s d u e t o t h e t o w
Une j e r k u n d e r r o l U n g shall n o t exceed t h e angle
corresponding t ot h e m a x i m u m o ft h e righting lever
c u r v e o r t h e a n g l e o f f l o o d i n g , w h i c h e v e r i s less.
T o satisfy this c o n d i t i o n t h e f o l l o w i n g require
m e n t shall be met:
K =Jl mJldh
2
- >1,0
(3.7.3.1-1)
where W a x ordinate o fthe d y n a m i c a l stability curve a ta n angle

of heel corresponding t o t h e m a x i m u m o f t h e
righting lever curve o r t h eangle o f flooding,
w h i c h e v e r i s less, i n m - r a d ;
ldh
dynamic heeling a r m determined i n compliance
w i t h 3 . 7 . 2 . 2 , w i t h l' a s s u m e d t o b e 0 , 2 0 m ;
&K = c o m p o n e n t o f K u s e d t o a l l o w f o r t h e e f f e c t o f
rolling o n resultant angle o fheel a n d determined b y
the formula
=
(3.7.2.2-1)
where
l' = t h e h e i g h t o f t h e v e l o c i t y h y d r a u l i c p r e s s u r e h e a d , i n m .
T h e v a l u e s o f a r e o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 3.7.2.2
depending o n the p o w e r N o fthe ship's m a i n engines;
v
-0,0304 -^- \ { a - | ) ]
( - -
- >
c = A,55x /L;
(3.7.2.2-2)
Jz /B)
H
- a
(3.1.2.2-3)
where a a n d e are determined b ythe formulae:

-
'
2+
'
(3.7.2.2-4)
e = 0,145 + 0 , 2 - ^ + 0 , 0 6 ^ .
(3.7.2.2-5)
T a b l e
H e i g h t o f v e l o c i t y h y d r a u l i c p r e s s u r e h e a d l'
3.7.2.2
inkW
in m
in k W
in m
0 150
300
450
600
750
0,0862
0,0903
0,096
0,104
0,122
900
1050
1200
1350
1500 a n d o v e r
0,147
0,18
0,22
0,268
0,319
3.7.2.3 W h e n c h e c k i n g s t a b i l i t y o f t u g s f o r t h e
t o w line j e r k effect, t h e angle o f f l o o d i n g s h a l l b e
determined assuming that all doors leading t o engine
a n d boiler casings a n d t o t h e upper deck super
0 A0i i n d e g . ;
k, Q i a r e d e t e r m i n e d i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h 2 . 1 . 5 ;
, b, a , e a r e d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3 . 7 . 2 . 2 .
where
2 r
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.7.2.3 a r e n o t appUcable t o
tugs f o r ocean towage.
3.7.3.2 W h e n c h e c k i n g s t a b i U t y o f t u g s :
.1 3.7.2.5 i s v a U d ;
.2 f o r r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e s w i t h t w o m a x i m a o r
an extended h o r i z o n t a l region, t h evalue o f t h e angle
at t h e first m a x i m u m o r that corresponding t o t h e
middle o fthe horizontal region shall betaken as the
angle o f m a x i m u m specified i n3.7.3.1;
.3 s t a b i U t y f o r t h e t o w U n e j e r k e f f e c t s h a l l b e
checked t a k i n g n o a c c o u n t o f t h e free surfaces o f
Uquid cargoes.
3.7.3.3 W h e n c h e c k i n g s t a b i l i t y o f t u g s f o r
compUance w i t h the requirements o f Section 2 a n d
this Chapter, t h e icing rates a r e assumed t o be:
.1 f o r t u g s specially d e s i g n e d f o r salvage o p e r a
tions, twice as m u c h those given i n 2.4;
.2 f o r o t h e r t u g s , i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2 . 4 .
3.7.3.4 W h e r e a t u g f o r o c e a n t o w a g e m a y b e
used f o r inner a n d outer r o a d operations as well,
compUance o f such a t u g w i t h 3.7.2 i s subject t o
Part I V .
Stability
317
3.8 V E S S E L S O F D R E D G I N G
F L E E T
3.8.1 W o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n s .
"Working conditions" means operation o f a
vessel according t o i t s purpose w i t h i n t h e prescribed
operation zones:
.1 Z o n e 1 c o a s t a l z o n e u p t o 2 0 m i l e s f r o m t h e
coast;
.2 Z o n e 2 z o n e i n c l u d i n g t h e p r e s c r i b e d a r e a o f
n a v i g a t i o n o f a vessel.
3.8.2 L o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s .
D e p e n d i n g o n t h e type o f a vessel o f dredging
fleet a n d i t s d r e d g i n g gear t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s o f
loading shall be considered.
3.8.2.1 F o r v e s s e l s o f d r e d g i n g f l e e t o f a l l t y p e s
during voyages:
.1 vessel w i t h f u l l stores, w i t h o u t spoil, d r e d g i n g
gear b e i n g secured f o r sea;
.2 v e s s e l i n t h e s a m e l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n a s
i n 3.8.2.1.1, b u t w i t h 10 p e r cent o f stores.
3.8.2.2 I n o p e r a t i n g c o n d i t i o n s f o r h o p p e r
dredgers a n d h o p p e r barges:
.1 vessel w i t h f u l l stores, w i t h s p o i l i n t h e h o p p e r ,
d r e d g i n g gear b e i n g secured f o r sea;
F o r hopper dredgers equipped w i t h grab cranes
a d d i t i o n a l l o a d i n g conditions, such as w i t h grab
cranes o p e r a t i n g f r o m o n e side a n d c r a n e b o o m b e i n g
in t h e athwartship plane, w i t h spoil i n t h e grab, w i t h
m a x i m u m loading m o m e n t a n d also w i t h t h e highest
position o f the b o o m w i t h due regard t o initial heel
shall be considered. These conditions shall be
considered f o r a vessel w i t h 10 p e r cent o f stores
a n d full stores, b o t h w i t h spoil a n d w i t h o u t i t .
N o t e s : 1 . T h e m a s s o f s p o i l i n t h e g r a b i s t a k e n t o b e 1,6 F t
w h e r e Vis t h e v o l u m e o f t h e g r a b , i n m .
2. T h e q u a n t i t y o f s p o i l i n t h e h o p p e r a n d t h e p o s i t i o n o f t h e
centre o f gravity shall b e determined assuming that thehopper is
filled w i t h h o m o g e n e o u s spoil u p t o the level o fthe u p p e r discharge
holes o r theupper coaming edge, i f the discharge holes a r e n o t
provided, w i t h t h e vessel h a v i n g a d r a u g h t u p t o t h e l o a d line
permitted when dredging.
3
3.8.2.3 I n o p e r a t i n g c o n d i t i o n s f o r d r e d g e r s
equipped w i t h bucket ladder:
.1 vessel w i t h f u l l stores, w i t h s p o i l i n buckets,
l a d d e r b e i n g secured f o r sea;
N o t e . Spoil is taken into the buckets o fthe upper part o f the
ladder (from upper t o lower drum). T h e m a s s o fspoil i neach bucket
is t a k e n t o b e 2 V t w h e r e V i s t h efull v o l u m e o f t h e b u c k e t , i n m .
3
3.8.2.4 I n o p e r a t i n g c o n d i t i o n s f o r d r e d g e r s ,
other t h a n those equipped w i t h bucket ladder:
.1 vessel w i t h f u l l stores, w i t h d r e d g i n g gear i n t h e
highest p o s i t i o n possible i n n o r m a l operation;
F o r dredgers equipped w i t h grab cranes t h e
additional loading conditions shall be considered i n
compliance w i t h 3.8.2.2.
N o t e s : 1. S p o i l pipeline within the vessel is a s s u m e d t o b e
f i l l e d w i t h s p o i l h a v i n g d e n s i t y e q u a l t o 1,3 t / m .
2. T h e m a s s o f s p o i l i n t h e g r a b ( b u c k e t ) i s a s s u m e d t o b e 1,6 F t
where F is t h ev o l u m e o f the grab (bucket), i n m .
3
3.8.3 C a l c u l a t i o n o f c r o s s - c u r v e s o f s t a b i l i t y a n d
inclining test.
3.8.3.1 W h e n c a l c u l a t i n g c r o s s - c u r v e s o f s t a b i l i t y f o r
vessels o f d r e d g i n g f l e e t , t h e m a n h o l e s o f a i r s p a c e s m a y
be considered closed irrespective o f the c o a m i n g h e i g h t i f
t h e y a r e f i t t e d w i t h c o v e r s c o n f o r m i n g t o 7 . 9 , P a r t 1
3.8.3.2 H o p p e r b a r g e s , d r e d g e r s a n d o t h e r v e s s e l s
in which the watertight integrity o f their hoppers
cannot be achieved due t o t h e structural peculiarities
m a y be incUned w i t h water i n the hoppers w h i c h
c o m m u n i c a t e s easily w i t h sea water.
3.8.4 C h e c k i n g o f s t a b i l i t y i n w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n s
and during voyages.
3.8.4.1 S t a b i l i t y o f v e s s e l s o f d r e d g i n g f l e e t d u r i n g
voyages shall be calculated h a v i n g regard t o t h e area
o f n a v i g a t i o n prescribed t o t h e vessel concerned. T o
be stated b o t h i n t h e specification a n d i n t h e
Information o n Stability are the conditions o f
voyages, i f a n y (ballast water available, extent t o
w h i c h t h e dredging gear is dismantled, theposition o f
the ladder, t h e possibiUty o f spoil t r a n s p o r t a t i o n i n
the hopper beyond the limits o f 20-mile coastal
z o n e , etc.). T h e dredgers e q u i p p e d w i t h a ladder m a y
undertake voyages i n the unrestricted area o f
navigation only with the bucket chain dismantled.
3.8.4.2 W h e n c a l c u l a t i n g s t a b i U t y o f v e s s e l s o f
dredging fleet u n d e r w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n s , t h e f o l l o w
ing is assumed:
.1 i n Z o n e 1 w i n d pressure s h a l l b e t a k e n : f o r
vessels o f u n r e s t r i c t e d service as f o r ships o f r e s t r i c t e d
area o f n a v i g a t i o n R l ; f o r vessels o f restricted area o f
n a v i g a t i o n R l as f o rthis area, b u t reduced b y 2 5 p e r
cent; f o r o t h e r areas o f n a v i g a t i o n , as f o r restricted
area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 ; a m p U t u d e o f roll, as f o r
restricted areas o f navigation;
.2 i n Z o n e 2 w i n d p r e s s u r e a n d a m p l i t u d e o f r o l l
shall be taken i n accordance w i t h area o fnavigation
prescribed f o r t h e vessel concerned.
3.8.4.3 A m p l i t u d e o f r o l l o f t h e d r e d g e r s s h a l l b e
determined i n compUance w i t h 2.1.5.
F o r restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R l a n d R 2
ampUtude o froll determined b y t h eF o r m u l a (2.1.5.1)
shall be m u l t i p U e d b y factor X , the value o fw h i c h is
t a k e n f r o m T a b l e 3.8.4.3.
F o r hopper dredges a n d hopper barges h a v i n g
b o t t o m recesses f o r f l a p s f a c t o r X \ i s a d o p t e d f r o m t h e
3
318
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T a b l e
3.8.4.3
Factor X
0,04
1,27
0,05
0,06
0,07
0,08
0,09
0,11
0,12
0,13
0,14
0,15
0,16
0,17
0,18
0,19
0,2
1,23
1,16
1,08
1,05
1,04
1,03
1,02
1,01
1,0
1,0
1,01
1,03
1,05
1,07
1,10
1,13
T a b l e 2 . 1 . 5 . 1 - 1 f o r t h e r a t i o B/d, m u l t i p l i e d b y
coefficient ( V + V ) / V , where V is t h e v o l u m e
displacement o f t h e vessel w i t h n o r e g a r d t o b o t t o m
recess, i n m ; V i s t h e v o l u m e o f b o t t o m recess, i n m .
3.8.4.4 S t a b i U t y o f d r e d g e r s a n d h o p p e r d r e d g e r s
equipped w i t h grab cranes w h e n additional loading
conditions (refer t o 3.8.2.2) a r e considered shall m e e t
the requirements o f 4.1.
3.8.4.5 S t a b i U t y o f h o p p e r d r e d g e r s a n d h o p p e r
barges w h o s e construction o f b o t t o m flaps a n d their
drive does n o t prevent t h e possibility o f spoil
discharge f r o m o n e side s h a l l b e c h e c k e d w i t h d u e
regard t o such discharge o n l y f o r compliance w i t h
w e a t h e r c r i t e r i o n as specified i n 3.8.4.6 a n d 3.8.4.7
for the most unfavourable loading condition o u t o f
first a n d second (refer t o 3.8.2.2):
. 1 w h e r e t h e s p o i l i n t h e h o p p e r h a s a d e n s i t y less
t h a n 1,3 t / m w i t h t h e a m p l i t u d e o f r o l l o f 10 w i t h
regard t o t h e static heeUng angle equal t o t h e s u m o f
the static heeUng d u e t o spoil discharge Q a n d t h e
static heeling resulting f r o m steady w i n d 0 i i n
accordance w i t h 2.1.2.2;
.2 w h e r e t h e s p o i l i n t h e h o p p e r h a s a density
e q u a l t o , o r m o r e t h a n 1,3 t / m , w i t h d u e r e g a r d t o
the d y n a m i c character o f discharge, w i t h a n a m p U
t u d e o f r o l l e q u a l t o t h e s u m o f 10 a n d t h e m a x i m u m
a m p U t u d e o f vessel's r o l l i n g 0 w i t h respect t o static
heeUng w h i c h , i n its t u r n , is equal t o the s u m o f
heeUng d u e t o spoil discharge Q a n d t h e heeUng
resulting f r o m steady w i n d 0 i i n accordance w i t h
2.1.2.2.
h = I
y cos 0
(3.8.4.7)
s p
3 r
s p
The value o f 0
formula
0
3 r
3 r
, i n deg., is determined b y the

(3.8.4.5.2)
= 0 , 2 0 .sp-
3.8.4.6 T h e v a l u e o f h o r i z o n t a l s h i f t i n g o f t h e
vessel's centre o f g r a v i t y y, i n m , w h e n d i s c h a r g i n g
h a l f t h e s p o i l f r o m o n e side o u t o f f u l l y l o a d e d
hopper, is determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
g
y = Py/(2A)
g
where
(3.8.4.6-1)
P = total m a s s o f spoil i n the h o p p e r , i nt;

= distance f r o m t h e centre o f gravity o f spoil
charged f r o m o n eside to the centreline, i n m ;
A
w h e r e A
A m a x - P / 2
dis
(3.8.4.6-2)
vessel's displacement prior t o spoil discharge, i nt.
3.8.4.7 T h e v e s s e l ' s c u r v e o f s t a t i c a l s t a b i U t y i s
calculated b y t h e f o r m u l a
where
/ = a r m o f statical stability with t h e vessel's displace

ment A
calculated assuming that t h e vessel's
centre o f gravity coincides with the centreline.
m
3.8.4.8 W h e n s p o i l i s d i s c h a r g e d b y l o n g c h u t e o r
conveyor methods, stabiUty o f a dredger shall be
checked f o r t h e case o f statical a c t i o n o f t h e m o m e n t
due t o the m a s s forces o f the l o n g chute o r the c o n v e y o r
(in t h e athwartship plane) filled w i t h spoil ( w i t h n o
r e g a r d t o t h e w a v e s a n d w i n d effects). I n t h i s case, t h e
vessel's s t a b i U t y i s c o n s i d e r e d t o b e a d e q u a t e , i f
m a x i m u m statical heel is n o t m o r e t h a n t h e angle o f
flooding o r t h e angle a t w h i c h t h e freeboard becomes
e q u a l t o 3 0 0 m m , w h i c h e v e r i s less.
3.8.5 E f f e c t o f l i q u i d c a r g o e s .
W h e n c a l c u l a t i n g t h e effect o f U q u i d cargoes as
specified i n 1.4.7 f o r h o p p e r dredgers a n d h o p p e r
barges, i t shall be assumed that:
. 1 f o r a v e s s e l w i t h s p o i l h a v i n g d e n s i t y o v e r 1,3 t / m ,
the spoil is regarded as soUd n o n - o v e r f l o w i n g cargo;
the lever o f statical a n d dynamical stability is
determined f o r the constant displacement a n d posi
t i o n o f t h e spoil centre o f gravity i n t h e hopper;
.2 f o r a vessel w i t h spoil h a v i n g density e q u a l t o , o r
less t h a n 1,3 t / m t h e s p o i l i s r e g a r d e d a s U q u i d c a r g o ;
t h e lever o f statical a n d d y n a m i c a l stabiUty i s deter
m i n e d at the variable displacement a n d position o f the
spoil centre o f gravity, t a k i n g account o f t h e spoil
f l o w i n g o v e r b o a r d a n d r e d u c t i o n o f t h e vessel's d r a u g h t .
N o such c a l c u l a t i o n is carried o u t i f the vessel is
provided w i t h a longitudinal bulkhead i nthe hopper,
the s p o i l i n t h e latter case b e i n g regarded as soUd
cargo;
.3 f o r a v e s s e l w i t h o u t s p o i l , t h e h o p p e r i s i n c o m
m u n i c a t i o n w i t h sea w a t e r , t h a t i s flaps o r valves a r e
open. T h elever o f statical a n d d y n a m i c a l stability is
determined f o r t h e constant displacement (as f o r a
d a m a g e d vessel).
3.8.6 E f f e c t o f d r e d g i n g g e a r i c i n g .
W h e n e s t i m a t i n g t h e effect o f i c i n g o f vessels o f
dredging fleet, t h e h o r i z o n t a l p r o j e c t i o n o f dredging
gear is added t o t h e area o f h o r i z o n t a l projection o f
decks (the centreUne projection being included i n the
windage area). T h e vertical m o m e n t d u e t o this
additional ice load is determined b y t h e centre o f
gravity elevation o f the projection o f the dredging
gear i n i t s w o r k i n g o r secured f o r sea p o s i t i o n t o t h e
centreUne.
3
Part IV.
Stability
319
3.8.7 R i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e .
3.8.7.1 T h e r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e o f h o p p e r
dredgers a n d hopper barges during voyages a n d
under w o r k i n g conditions shall meet t h e require
m e n t s o f 2.2.
3.8.7.2 T h e r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e o f d r e d g e r s
equipped w i t h bucket ladder f o rall loading conditions
specified i n 3.8.2, as w e l l as w h e n t a k i n g a c c o u n t o f
icing, shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e following requirements:
.1 t h e angle o f v a n i s h i n g stabiUty % s h a l l b e
n o t l e s s t h a n 50;
.2 t h e m a x i m u m r i g h t i n g a r m w i t h a n g l e 0 o f
n o t l e s s t h a n 25 s h a l l b e :
w h e n vessels a r e o p e r a t i n g i n Z o n e 1 , n o t less
than 0,25 m ;
d u r i n g voyages, passages a n dw h e n operating i n
Z o n e 2 , n o t less t h a n 0 , 4 m .
3.8.7.3 F o r b u c k e t d r e d g e r s h a v i n g B / D > 2 , 5 0 ,
angles % a n d 0 m a ybe reduced as compared t o
those required u n d e r 3.8.7.2 b y t h e f o l l o w i n g values:
.1 f o r t h e angle o f v a n i s h i n g stabiUty, b y t h e
v a l u e A0 t o b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o l l o w i n g f o r m u l a
depending o n t h e B / D ratio a n d t h e weather
c r i t e r i o n a n d p r o v i d e d t h e r e d u c t i o n b y e v e r y 1
is a c c o m p a n i e d w i t h a n increase o f Z
b y 0,01 m as
compared t o itsnormative value:
m
m a x
0 = 2 5 % ) - 2 , 5 ) : - 1 ) .
(3.8.7.3.1)
W h e r e B / D > 3 , 0 , B / D = 3,0 shall b e a d o p t e d ,

a n d w h e r e > 1 , 5 , = 1,5 s h a l l b e a d o p t e d . T h e
v a l u e o f , i s r o u n d e d o f f t o t h e n e a r e s t i n t e g e r ;
.2 f o r t h e a n g l e c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e m a x i m u m
lever o f t h e curve, b y a value equal t o h a l f t h e
reduction value o f t h e angle o f vanishing stability;
.3 f o r d r e d g e r s o f u n r e s t r i c t e d s e r v i c e t h e r e d u c
t i o n o f angles 0 a n d % is n o t permitted.
m
3.9 S H I P S U N D E R 2 4 M I N L E N G T H
3.9.1 W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e c r o s s - c u r v e s o f s t a b i l i t y ,
it is possible t o take into consideration deckhouses o f the
first t i e r o n l y w h i c h c o n f o r m t o 1 . 4 . 2 . 3 . 1 a n d f r o m w h i c h
there is either a n additional exit t o the deck above o r exits
t o b o t h t h e sides.
3.9.2 S t a b i U t y a s t o w e a t h e r c r i t e r i o n s h a l l n o t b e
checked. H o w e v e r , f o r t h e o p e r a t i o n o f t h e ships,
restrictions o n t h edistance t o t h e p o r t o f refuge a n d
the sea state shall be introduced.
F o r s m a l l ships, restrictions o n t h e area a n d
conditions o f n a v i g a t i o n shall be set d o w n a n d
included i nthe I n f o r m a t i o n o n Stability:
.1 f o r ships o f less t h a n 1 5 m i n l e n g t h a n d
p a s s e n g e r ships o f less t h a n 2 0 m i n l e n g t h r e s t r i c t e d
area o f n a v i g a t i o n R 3 m a y be prescribed.
F o r ships 15 m t o 2 0 m i n length, o t h e r t h a n
passenger ships, a n area o f n a v i g a t i o n n o t h i g h e r
t h a n R 2 m a ybe prescribed.
F o r ship 2 0 t o 2 4 m i n length, other t h a n
passenger ships, a n area o f n a v i g a t i o n n o t h i g h e r
t h a n R l m a ybe prescribed;
2 n o n - p a s s e n g e r s h i p s o f less t h a n 1 5 m i n l e n g t h
m a y p r o c e e d t o sea a n d b e e n r o u t e a t sea state n o t m o r e
t h a n 4 , ships 15 m t o 2 0 m i n l e n g t h n o t m o r e t h a n 5;
ships 2 0 t o 2 4 m n o t m o r e t h a n 6;
.3 p a s s e n g e r s h i p s o f l e s s t h a n 2 0 m i n l e n g t h m a y
proceed t o sea a n d b e e n r o u t e a t sea state n o t m o r e
t h a n 3; ships 2 0 t o 2 4 m n o t m o r e t h a n 4 ;
.4 h a v i n g r e g a r d t o s t a b i l i t y a n d s e a w o r t h i n e s s o f
ships a n d depending o n t h e reUable p r o v i s i o n o f t h e
area o fn a v i g a t i o n concerned w i t h forecasts, as w e l l
as o n t h e o p e r a t i n g e x p e r i e n c e f o r s h i p s o f s i m i l a r
type a n d t h e same o r approximately t h e same
dimensions, available f o r this area o f navigation,
the Register m a ychange t h erestrictions o n t h e area
o f n a v i g a t i o n a n d p e r m i s s i b l e sea state specified
i n 3.9.2.1 t o 3.9.2.3;
.5 w h e n d e t e r m i n i n g m a x i m u m p e r m i s s i b l e s e a
state f o r s m a l l craft carried o n d e p o t ships ( f o r example,
s m a l l fishing b o a t s c a r r i e d o n m o t h e r s h i p s ) , i n a d d i t i o n
t o t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 3.9.2.2 a n d 3.9.2.3, m a x i m u m sea
state a t w h i c h t h e craft c a n b e safely Ufted o n b o a r d t h e
depot ship shall be taken into account;
.6 a t t h e discretion o f t h e Register, a d d i t i o n a l
restrictions shall b e i n t r o d u c e d i nzones o f special sea
conditions.
Referred t o such zones are:
zones o f surf (breaking) waves;
zones o flocal abrupt increase i nw a v e height a n d
steepness (bars i n estuaries, tossing, etc.).
Z o n e s o f special sea c o n d i t i o n s a r e set o n t h e
basis o f t h e data o f local h y d r o m e t e o r o l o g i c a l a n d
h y d r o g r a p h i c offices.
3.9.3 T h e a n g l e o f f l o o d i n g s h a l l b e n o t l e s s
t h a n 40.
3.9.4 T h e r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e o f a fishing v e s s e l ,
w h e n o n fishing g r o u n d s , u n d e r t h e l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s
stated i n 3.5.4 m a y n o t c o n f o r m t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f 2.2.1 f o r t h e m a x i m u m a r m . U n d e r those loading
c o n d i t i o n s , t h e m a x i m u m r i g h t i n g a r m s h a U b e n o t less
than 0,2 m .
3.9.5 U n d e r a l l l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s , t h e c o r r e c t e d
i n i t i a l m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t s h a U b e n o t less t h a n 0 , 5 m ,
except f o r t h e Ught ship c o n d i t i o n (refer t o 2.3.1) a n d
t h e fishing v e s s e l s w h e n u n d e r l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s s t a t e d
i n 3 . 5 . 4 f o r w h i c h i t s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 0 , 3 5 m .
3 . 9 . 6 T h e i n i t i a l s t a b i U t y o f fishing v e s s e l s h a u U n g
in t h e nets a n d catch w i t h cargo b o o m s shall be
sufficient (under loading conditions stated i n 3.5.4
as w e l l ) t o e n s u r e t h a t t h e static h e e l a n g l e o f t h e s h i p
w h e n handUng t h e nets a n d operating t h e cargo b o o m
320
Rules
a t i t s m a x i m u m o u t r e a c h w o u l d n o t e x c e e d 10 o r t h e
a n g l e a t w h i c h t h e d e c k i s i m m e r s e d ( w h i c h e v e r i s less).
3.9.7 O p e r a t i o n o f t h e s h i p s u n d e r c o n d i t i o n s o f
eventual icing shall n o t ,i n general, be permitted.
W h e r e due t o themode o foperation a n d purpose
the possibility o f sailing into regions where icing
might occur cannot be completely rulled o u t f o r a
ship, t h e values o f initial metacentric height a n d other
parameters o f righting lever curves d r a w n t a k i n g
i c i n g i n t o c o n s i d e r a t i o n s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n t h o s e
stated i n 2 . 2 , 3.9.3a n d 3.9.5.
3.9.8 I n f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i l i t y s h a l l i n c l u d e
indications o f t h e permissible speed a n d angle o f
rudder shifting i n turning. T h e permissible values o f
initial t u r n i n g speed a n d angle o frudder shifting shall
be d e t e r m i n e d b y tests d u r i n g acceptance t r i a l s o f t h e
leading ship assuming that t h e Ust o f the ship i n
steady t u r n i n g s h a l l n o t exceed:
.1 f o r n o n - p a s s e n g e r ships, t h e a n g l e a t w h i c h t h e
f r e e b o a r d d e c k i s i m m e r s e d o r 12, w h i c h e v e r i s l e s s ;
.2 f o r p a s s e n g e r s h i p s , t a k i n g a c c o u n t a d d i t i o n ally o f the effect o f the s i m u l a t e d heeUng m o m e n t d u e
t o passengers c r o w d i n g t o o n e side ( t o b e d e t e r m i n e d
i n accordance w i t h 3.1.2), t h e angle a t w h i c h t h e
f r e e b o a r d d e c k i s i m m e r s e d o r 15, w h i c h e v e r i s l e s s .
T h e Register m a y apply t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 3.9.8.2
to t h e stability o f non-passenger ships ( f o r instance,
w h e n persons n o tbelonging t o t h e ship's crew a r e o n
board).
T h e requirements o f 3.1.3 a n d 3.1.4 are n o t
a p p l i c a b l e t o s h i p s o f less t h a n 2 4 m i n l e n g t h .
3.9.9 T h e i n i t i a l s t a b i U t y o f p a s s e n g e r s h i p s s h a l l
be checked f o r c o n f o r m i t y w i t h 3.1.2. T h e angle o f
h e e l d u e t o passengers c r o w d i n g t o o n e side s h a l l n o t
be greater t h a n t h e angle c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o 0 , 1 m
f r e e b o a r d b e f o r e t h e d e c k i s i m m e r s e d o r 12,
w h i c h e v e r i s less.
I f necessary, t h e Register m a yapply t h e requirem e n t s o f 3.1.2 t o t h e stabiUty o f non-passenger ships
(for instance, w h e n persons are o n b o a r d w h o are n o t
m e m b e r s o f t h e r e g u l a r c r e w ) . I n t h i s case, t h e h e e l is
determined o n the assumption that all persons c r o w d
t o o n e side w h o a r e n o t e n g a g e d i n h a n d U n g t h e ship.
3.9.10 I n t h e I n f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i l i t y i t s h a l l b e
specified t h a t w h e n t h e ship is u n d e r w a y i n f o l l o w i n g
seas, w i t h t h e w a v e l e n g t h e q u a l t o , o r e x c e e d i n g t h e
l e n g t h o f t h e ship, i t s speed v, i n k n o t s , s h a l l n o t be
greater t h a n determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
s
v,=
\Ay[L
(3.9.10)
where L = length o f the ship, i n m .
3.9.11 A p p U c a t i o n o f t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3 . 7 t o
the stabiUty o f tugs u n d e r 2 4 m i n l e n g t h is subject t o
special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
3.10 C O N T A I N E R S H I P S
3.10.1 I n c a l c u l a t i n g s t a b i U t y o f c o n t a i n e r s h i p s ,
the vertical centre o f gravity position o f each
container shall be taken equal t o half the height o f
the container o fthe type concerned.
3.10.2 S t a b i l i t y o f c o n t a i n e r s h i p s s h a l l b e
checked f o rt h e following loading conditions:
.1 s h i p w i t h m a x i m u m n u m b e r o f c o n t a i n e r s ,
each loaded container h a v i n g the mass equal t o o n e
a n d t h e same p a r t o f t h e m a x i m u m gross m a s s f o r
each type o f containers, w i t h full stores a t t h e
d r a u g h t u p t o t h e s u m m e r l o a d Une;
.2 s h i p i n t h e s a m e l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n a s i n 3 . 1 0 . 2 . 1 ,
.3 s h i p w i t h m a x i m u m n u m b e r o f c o n t a i n e r s ,
each loaded container h a v i n g themass equal t o 0,6 o f
the m a x i m u m gross mass f o r each type o f containers,
w i t h full stores;
.5 s h i p w i t h c o n t a i n e r s , e a c h l o a d e d c o n t a i n e r
h a v i n g t h e m a s s equal t o t h e m a x i m u m gross m a s s
for each type o f containers, w i t h full stores a t t h e
d r a u g h t u p t o t h e s u m m e r l o a d Une;
.6 s h i p i n t h e s a m e l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n as i n 3 . 1 0 . 2 . 5 ,
.7 s h i p w i t h m a x i m u m n u m b e r o f e m p t y c o n t a i n ers, b u t w i t h f u l l stores;
.9 s h i p w i t h n o c a r g o , b u t w i t h f u l l s t o r e s ;
b u t w i t h 1 0 p e r cent o f stores.
W h e n determining thearrangement o f containers
on board under the loading conditions mentioned
above, t h e allowable loads u p o n the hull structures
shall be considered.
3.10.3 I f o t h e r l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s d i f f e r e n t f r o m
those Usted i n 3.10.2 a r e p r o v i d e d i n t h e technical
assignment, stabiUty calculations shaU also be m a d e f o r
such c o n d i t i o n s w i t h f u U stores a n d 1 0 p e r cent o f stores.
3.10.4 S t a b i U t y o f c o n t a i n e r s h i p s f o r a n y l o a d i n g
condition w i t h containers shall be such that a heeUng
angle o n steady t u r n i n g o r u n d e r t h e effect o f
c o n t i n u o u s b e a m w i n d as determined f r o m t h e
statical stabiUty curve does n o t exceed h a l f t h e angle
a t w h i c h t h e f r e e b o a r d d e c k i m m e r s e s ; i n a n y case,
t h e h e e U n g a n g l e s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 16.
W h e r e the deck cargo o fcontainers is located o n
cargo hatch covers only, o n agreement w i t h the
Register, t h e angle a t w h i c h t h e h a t c h c o a m i n g edge
o r a c o n t a i n e r i s i m m e r s e d , w h i c h e v e r a n g l e i s less,
m a y be adopted instead o f t h e angle a t w h i c h the
upper deck edge is i m m e r s e d ( p r o v i d e d t h e containers
protrude beyond the coaming i n question).
Part IV.
321
Stability
3.10.5 T h e h e e U n g m o m e n t o n s t e a d y t u r n i n g , i n
k N m , is determined b y t h e formula
-
0,037Av?
M = j
' ( v
where
(3.10.5)
2>
v = ship's speed before entering into steady turning, i n

knots;
s
t e c h n i c a l a s s i g n m e n t i n t h e m o s t u n f a v o u r a b l e case
o f d i s t r i b u t i o n o f the rest o f the cargo ( w h e n pipes a r e
carried as deck cargo t a k i n g t h ew a t e r entering t h e
pipes i n t o consideration);
.2 s h i p i n t h e s a m e l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n a s
u n d e r 3.11.3.1, b u tw i t h 1 0 p e r cent o f stores.
3.11.4 T h e v o l u m e o f w a t e r V l i n g e r i n g i n t h e p i p e s
carried o n deck shall b e determined b y F o r m u l a (3.11.4)
proceeding f r o m the total v o l u m e o f the pipe pile V
and the ratio o f the freeboard amidships / t o the
ship's l e n g t h L
a
AT
3.10.6 T h e m o m e n t l e v e r d u e t o w i n d p r e s s u r e
used t o determine t h e heeling angle according
to 3.10.4 shall be d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (2.1.4.1-1)
in w h i c h p is t a k e n equal t o that f o r ships o f
unrestricted service g i v e n i n T a b l e 2.1.4.1.
3.10.7 A l l c a l c u l a t i o n s o f s t a t i c a l h e e U n g a n g l e
u n d e r t h e effect o f b e a m w i n d o r t u r n i n g shall be
made w i t h n o regard for icing, b u t h a v i n g regard f o r
the free surface effect o f U q u i d cargoes as r e q u i r e d
b y 1.4.7.
3.10.8 W h e r e t h e r e q u i r e m e n t o f 3 . 1 0 . 4 t o t h e
value o ft h e angle o fheel a t steady t u r n i n g o f a ship
at o p e r a t i o n a l speed c a n n o t be c o m p l i e d w i t h ,
Information o n StabiUty shall contain the m a x i m u m
permissible ship's speed p r i o r t o steady t u r n i n g ,
determined a t a c o n d i t i o n o fn o t exceeding t h e angle
o f heel specified i n 3.10.4.
3.10.9 C o n t a i n e r s h i p s s h a l l b e e q u i p p e d w i t h
t a n k s o r o t h e r specific facilities a p p r o v e d b y t h e
Register, w h i c h p e r m i t t o check t h einitial stability o f
the ship, b e a r i n g i n m i n d t h e R e g i s t e r a p p r o v e d
r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e i n - s e r v i c e i n c U n i n g test.
3.10.10 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s P a r t a r e a p p U c able t o ships o f o t h e r types a p p r o p r i a t e d f o rt h e
carriage o fcargoes i ncontainers o n deck.
W h e r e , acting i n Une w i t h 3.10.2.1 a n d 3.10.2.5, i t
is n o t p o s s i b l e t o l o a d t h e s h i p t o t h e s u m m e r l o a d
Une t h e s h i p m a y b e c o n s i d e r e d f o r t h e r e l e v a n t
loading conditions a t t h e m a x i m u m draft possible.
0,3Vat
3.11 S U P P L Y
VESSELS
3.11.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s p r e s e n t C h a p t e r
a p p l y t o s u p p l y vessels 2 4 t o 1 0 0 m i n l e n g t h . I f t h e
l e n g t h o f t h e supply vessel is o v e r 1 0 0 m , t h e
requirements f o r i t s stability shall be specially
considered b y t h e Register.
3.11.2 T h e s t a b i U t y o f s u p p l y v e s s e l s s h a l l b e
checked considering t h e t r i m that accompanies the
incUnation.
3.11.3 I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s U s t e d
i n 1.4.8.2, t h e s t a b i U t y o f s u p p l y vessels s h a l l b e
checked f o rt h efollowing loading conditions:
.1 s h i p w i t h f u l l s t o r e s a n d f u l l d e c k c a r g o h a v i n g
the greatest v o l u m e p e r w e i g h t u n i t , prescribed b y t h e
if^<0,015;
.40/),
if 0,015 < ^ < 0,03;

3L'
(3.11.4)
^0,\V
i f ^_ > 0 , 0 3 .
The v o l u m e o f a pipe pile shall be regarded as t h e
s u m o f t h e i n n e r v o l u m e s o f t h e pipes a n d spaces
between them.
Reducing o f t h e design value f o rt h e v o l u m e o f
w a t e r i n t h e pipes, w h e r e they are plugged o r w h e r e
the p i p e p i l e i s h i g h e r t h a n 0 , 4 o f t h e d r a u g h t , s h a l l b e
determined o n agreement w i t h t h e Register.
3.11.5 I n t h e c a s e o f s u p p l y v e s s e l s h a v i n g B / D > 2 ,
the angle c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o t h e m a x i m u m r i g h t i n g
a r m m a y b e r e d u c e d t o 25; t h e m a x i m u m l e v e r l^^,
in m , a n d t h e weather criterion values shall be
n o t less t h a n t h e g r e a t e s t v a l u e s d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
following formulae:
V =.
(o,5
at
/max > 0 , 2 5 + 0,005(60 - 9 ) ;

e
or
lmax> 0,25 + 0 , 0 1 ( 3 0 - 0 ) ;
M
(3.11.5-1)
>1 + 0,1(30-ej;
or
K>I+0,05(60 -e ).
e
(3.11.5-2)
3.11.6 W h e n t h e e f f e c t o f i c i n g i s c o m p u t e d , t h e
u p p e r surface o f t h e deck cargo shaU b e considered as
the deck, a n d i t s l a t e r a l area p r o j e c t i o n a b o v e t h e
b u l w a r k as a p a r t o f t h e design w i n d a g e area. T h e
icing aUowance shall b e assumed i n accordance w i t h 2.4.
3.11.7 F o r s u p p l y v e s s e l s o p e r a t i n g i n a r e a s
w h e r e icing is possible, t h e ice a n d w a t e r i n t h e pipes
should be considered simultaneously w h e n m a k i n g
stability calculations f o r t h e carriage o f pipes o n
deck. T h e icing o f pipes carried o n deck shall be
the m a s s o f ice M
inside t h e pipe pile is
i c e
X ice ni
t
i=\
(3.11.7)
Rules
322
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T a b l e
3.11.7
Pipe diameter, i n m
0,05
0,1
0,2
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
Ice m a s s p e r o n e pipe, i n k g
0,2
2,1
26,7
125
376
899
1831
N o t e .
where m
F o r p i p e s o f i n t e r m e d i a t e diameters, t h em a s s o f ice i s d e t e r m i n e d b y interpolation.
= m a s s o f i c e p e r o n e p i p e , o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 3.11.7;
= q u a n t i t y o f p i p e s o f t h e '-th d i a m e t e r ;
= n u m b e r o f s t a n d a r d pipe sizes with regard to
diameter.
i c e
W h e n calculating t h e mass o f ice o n t h e outer

surfaces o f a pipe pile, t h e area o f t h e u p p e r a n d t h e
side surfaces s h a l l be d e t e r m i n e d t a k i n g t h e c u r v a t u r e
o f the pipe surface i n t h e pile i n t o consideration. T h e
rate o f icing is adopted i n accordance w i t h 2.4.
3.11.8 A m i n i m u m freeboard a t t h e stern o f a t
least 0 , 0 0 5 Z shall be m a i n t a i n e d i n a l l o p e r a t i n g
conditions.
3.11.9 S u p p l y vessels w h i c h m a y b e e n g a g e d i n
t o w i n g operations as w e l l shall c o m p l y w i t h 3.7.
Besides, arrangements f o r q u i c k releasing o f t h e
t o w line shall be provided o n board.
3.11.10 S u p p l y vessels w h i c h m a y b e e n g a g e d i n
operation o f hfting the anchors o f mobile offshore
drilling u n i t s as w e l l shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e require
ments o f4.1.
3.11.11 T h e requirements o f t h e present Chapter
are a p p l i c a b l e t o o t h e r types o f vessels f i t f o r c a r r y i n g
pipes as deck cargo.
3.12 S H I P S O F R I V E R - S E A
NAVIGATION
3.12.1 Stability o f ships o f river-sea n a v i g a t i o n

(restricted areas o f n a v i g a t i o n R 2 - R S N , R 2 - R S N ( 4 , 5 )
a n d R 3 - R S N according t o 2.2.5, P a r t I "Classifica
tion") shall meet the requirements o f Sections 1
a n d 2 , as w e l l as a d d i t i o n a l r e q u i r e m e n t s o f S e c t i o n 3
(depending o n t h e purpose o f t h e ship).
Besides, t h e stabiUty o f d r y cargo ships shall be
checked b y acceleration criterion i n compUance w i t h
3.12.3 T h e stabiUty as concerns t h e acceleration

c r i t e r i o n K* i s c o n s i d e r e d s a t i s f a c t o r y i f i n t h e
loading condition under consideration the calculated
a c c e l e r a t i o n ( i n f r a c t i o n s o f g) d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e
permissible value, i.e. t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n is
fulfilled:
K* = 0 , 3 / a
where
c a l
>l
(3.12.3)
= calculated value o f acceleration (in fractions o f g)

a =0,0105
k $
ml
where
Bid
0 = calculated amplitude o f roll determined i n accor

d a n c e w i t h 2.1.5, i n d e g . ;
= inertia coefficient determined i n accordance with
2.1.5.1;
ho = i n i t i a l m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t r e g a r d l e s s o f t h e c o r r e c t i o n
for the liquid c a r g o free surfaces;
&e = c o e f f i c i e n t , t a k i n g a c c o u n t o f t h e p e c u l i a r i t i e s o f r o l l
for ships o f river-sea navigation, adopted f r o m t h e
T a b l e 3.12.3.
T a b l e 3.12.3
Coefficient Ae
r
2,5
3,0
3,5
4,0
4,5
5,0
5,5
6,0
>6,5
1,0
1,08
1,11
1,11
1,20
1,30
1,45
1,56
1,61
3.12.4 I n c e r t a i n cases, u p o n w e l l - g r o u n d e d
presentation b y the shipowner, Register m a y a l l o w
t h e o p e r a t i o n o f t h e s h i p w i t h t h e t h e c r i t e r i o n K* < 1 .
I n t h i s case, a n a d d i t i o n a l w a v e h e i g h t r e s t r i c t i o n
shall be introduced. T h e permissible wave height w i t h
3 per cent probabiUty o f exceeding level is estimated
p r o c e e d i n g f r o m t h e v a l u e o f t h e c r i t e r i o n K* a s g i v e n
i n T a b l e 3.12.4. T h e specific l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s w i t h
K* < 1 s h a l l b e s t a t e d i n t h e I n f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i U t y .
T a b l e
3.12.4
3.12.3.
3.12.2 T h e stabiUty o f d r y cargo ships o f t h e

restricted area o fn a v i g a t i o n R 2 - R S N shaU be checked
for t h e l o a d i n g conditions Usted i n 3.2, as w e l l as f o r
t h e c a s e o f h o l d s p a r t l y filled w i t h h e a v y c a r g o e s ( o r e ,
scrap m e t a l , etc.) a t t h e d r a u g h t t o t h e l o a d Une.
K*
Permissible w a v e height with 3 per cent
probability o f exceeding level, i n m
1,0
0,75
0,75
a n d less
5,0
4,0
Part I V .
Stability
323
4 REQUIREMENTS F O RTHE STABILITY OF FLOATING CRANES,

CRANE SHIPS, T R A N S P O R T PONTOONS, DOCKS
AND BERTH-CONNECTED SHIPS
4.1 F L O A T I N G C R A N E S A N D C R A N E
SHIPS
4.1.1 G e n e r a l .
4.1.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e C h a p t e r c o v e r
floating cranes a n d crane ships f o r w h i c h t h e h o o k
l o a d m a s s exceeds 0,02A, i n t , u n d e r o n e type o f
l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s a t least, as s t i p u l a t e d i n 4 . 1 . 3 . 1 , o r
at least o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g c o n d i t i o n s is m e t :
\y \>0,05h;
g
(4.1.1.1-1)
or
\x -x \>0,025H.
g
(4.1.1.1-2)
CompUance w i t h the requirements o fthe Chapter

m a y be demanded b y the Register even where the
above conditions are n o t met.
4.1.1.2 A s f a r a s u n i q u e ( s i n g l e - t i m e , e p i s o d i c a l )
cargo-handUng operations are concerned, particular
requirements f o r t h e stabiUty o f floating cranes a n d
crane ships m a y be o m i t t e d o r l o w e r e d , i f a project o f
the operations is developed a n di tis demonstrated t o
the satisfaction o f t h e Register t h a t special technical
and organizational measures have been taken t o
a v o i d c e r t a i n d a n g e r o u s s i t u a t i o n s ( l o a d d r o p , etc.).
4.1.1.3 T h e d e s i g n c e n t r e o f g r a v i t y p o s i t i o n o f
the load o n t h eh o o k is assumed t o be at t h epoint o f
its s u s p e n s i o n f r o m t h e b o o m i s t o b e considered. I f
cargo-handUng operations are carried o u t using a
c o m p o u n d catenary suspension, i.e. t w o h o o k s
(bifilar suspension), three h o o k s (trifilar suspension),
etc., o r t h e c r a n e s t r u c t u r e h a s a n a n t i - s w a y i n g
device, o r t h e m o v e m e n t o f suspended cargo is
Umited w i t h i n t h e considered range o f t h e floating
crane/crane ship i n c U n a t i o n angles, t h e stabiUty shall
be v e r i f i e d bearing i n m i n d t h e actual shift o f t h e
cargo mass centre a t inclination.
B o o m radius is t h e distance between a vertical
Une d r a w n t h r o u g h t h e cargo suspension p o i n t w i t h
the floating foundation i n the upright position a n d
t r i m m e d o n a n even keel, a n d determined u pt o :
axis o f t h e slewing crane structure r o t a t i o n ;
axis o f r o t a t i o n j o i n t o f t h e non-slewing crane
structure b o o m .
F o r non-slewing crane structures intended f o r

b o o m operation i n t h e longitudinal plane, the
stability shall be verified w i t h regard f o r the
possibiUty o funsymmetrical loading o n t h e hooks.
4.1.2 D e s i g n c o n d i t i o n s :
.1 w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n ( c a r g o - h a n d l i n g o p e r a t i o n s
and carriage o f cargo i n t h e assigned area o f
n a v i g a t i o n a n d w i t h t h e b o o m n o t secured f o r sea);
.2 v o y a g e ( n a v i g a t i o n a n d l a y - u p w i t h i n a s s i g n e d
area o fnavigation including b o t h w i t h cargo o n deck
and/or i n h o l d a n d w i t h t h e b o o m secured f o r sea);
.3 n o n - w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n ( l a y - u p i n p o r t w i t h
machinery o u to foperation under the most unfavourable l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s i n respect o f stabiUty a n d w i t h
the b o o m positions w h e n there is n o load o n the h o o k ) ;
.4 p a s s a g e ( n a v i g a t i o n o u t s i d e t h e a s s i g n e d a r e a
o f n a v i g a t i o n b y special p e r m i s s i o n o f t h e Register
after conversion o n t h e basis o f t h e Registerapproved project).
4.1.3.1 U n d e r w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n s t a b i l i t y s h a l l b e
verified w i t h o u t regard f o r icing a n d w i t h Uquid
ballasting w h e r e necessary, f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g loading
conditions:
.1 m a x i m u m h o o k l o a d w i t h t h e m a x i m u m j i b
radius f o r t h e l o a d a t t h e specified slewing angle o f
t h e c r a n e s t r u c t u r e cp w i t h r e g a r d t o t h e c e n t r e U n e o f
the f l o a t i n g crane/crane ship:
w i t h full l o a d a n d full stores;
w i t h full l o a d a n d 1 0 p e r cent o f stores;
w i t h o u t l o a d a n d w i t h full stores;
w i t h o u t l o a d a n d w i t h 1 0 p e r cent o f stores;
.2 n o h o o k l o a d , h i g h e s t p o s i t i o n o f t h e c r a n e
structure b o o m a t t h e specified slewing angle o f t h e
b o o m cp:
w i t h full l o a d a n d 1 0 p e r cent o f stores;
w i t h o u t l o a d a n d w i t h 1 0 p e r cent o f stores;
.3 l o a d d r o p , i . e . a q u i c k r e l e a s e o f t h e c r a n e
structure b o o m f r o m the load suspended f r o m the h o o k .
I n case o f l o a d d r o p , t o b e v e r i f i e d a r e t h e m o s t
R e l e v a n t paragraphs o fthe Chapter contain precise instructions concerning the applicability o fthe paragraphs to b o t h floating cranes
a n d c r a n e ships, exclusivelyt o floatingcranes o rexclusively t o c r a n e ships respectively. I n the absence o fs u c h instructions i nthe p a r a g r a p h
headings a n d texts, t h erequirements will b e equally applicable t o floating cranes a n d crane ships.
324
unfavourable loading conditions w i t h regard t o stabiUty,

taking into consideration t h epossibility o f u n s y m m e trical cargo stowage o n deck and/or i n the h o l d .
4.1.3.2 D u r i n g a voyage t h e stability shall b e
verified ( t a k i n g u p liquid ballast w h e r e necessary) f o r
the following loading conditions:
w i t h full l o a d a n d 10 per cent o f stores;
w i t h o u t l o a d a n d w i t h 10per cent o f stores.
W h e r e a deck cargo o f h o l l o w structures o r pipes
is c a r r i e d , t h e m a s s o f w a t e r t h e r e i n s h a l l b e
considered assuming t h e caves i n t h e structures
( t a k i n g account o f their possible icing) a n d the pipes
to b e filled w i t h water, i n accordance w i t h 3.11.4
a n d 3.11.7.
4.1.3.3 U n d e r n o n - w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n stability
shall be verified for t h em o s t unfavourable loading
conditions w i t h regard t o stability o u t o f those
m e n t i o n e d under 4.1.3.1.2.
4.1.3.4 F o r floating cranes/crane ships engaged i n
winter traffic i n w i n t e r seasonal zones established b y
the L o a d Line Rules f o r Sea-Going Ships, stability
during a voyage/passage a n d under n o n - w o r k i n g
condition shall be verified w i t h d u eregard for icing
a n d f o r the m o s t u n f a v o u r a b l e l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s as
regards stability o u t o f those m e n t i o n e d u n
der 4.1.3.1.2 a n d 4.1.3.2. I n t h i s case, t h e a l l o w a n c e
for icing shall b e adopted i n accordance w i t h 4.1.7.
4.1.4 S t a b i l i t y curves c a l c u l a t i o n .
O n agreement w i t h t h e Register, t h e arms o f
stability curves can b e calculated t a k i n g into account
the h o o k load immersing i n water during t h e
inclinations o f the floating crane/crane ship.
4.1.5 Calculation o f windage area.
4.1.5.1 T h e designed windage area c o m p o
n e n t A , i n m , is:
.1 a projected area restricted b y the outline o f a
s t r u c t u r e , i t e m o f m a c h i n e r y , a r r a n g e m e n t , etc. i n t h e
case o f b u l k structures, d e c k m a c h i n e r y , a r r a n g e
m e n t s , etc.;
.2 a p r o j e c t e d a r e a r e s t r i c t e d b y t h e s t r u c t u r e
outline w i t h apertures between girders deducted, i n
case o f a lattice t y p e s t r u c t u r e ;
.3 p r o j e c t e d a r e a o f f o r e b e a m w h e r e t h e b e a m
s p a c i n g i s less t h a n t h e f o r e b e a m h e i g h t , i n t h e case
o f the structure o fa b o o m , crane body frame, etc.
comprising several beams o f equal height located one
after another (refer t o F i g . 4.1.5.1.3); o r
total projected area o f the fore b e a m plus 5 0 per cent
o f the areas o f subsequent beams, i f the b e a m spacing i s
e q u a l t o , o r greater t h a n , t h e b e a m h e i g h t , b u t i s n o t less
than the double height o f the beam; o r
total projected area o f all beams, i ft h e b e a m
spacing is equal to, o r greater than, the b e a m double
height.
Fig.
A.
Ships
4.1.5.1.3
tt^h.
A A A
A ,
h ^ a < 2h: A = A + 0,5(A' + A" + A"\);
a^2h\
A = A + A' + A" + A'"
v
vi
I f the beams are n o t equal i n height, parts o f

subsequent beams n o t overlapped b y those lying i n
front o f t h e m shall be fully taken into account;
.4 f o r a n u m b e r o f r o p e s o f t h e s a m e d i a m e t e r
arranged o n e after another a t t h e distance a (refer
to F i g . 4.1.5.1.4-1), t h e projected area shall be
1-*L
\-K ,
(4.1.5.1.4-1)
where
A = projected area o f a single rope;

N = n u m b e r o f ropes;
K = factor t o b e t a k e n f r o m T a b l e 4.1.5.1.4 o nt h e basis
o f t h e a/d r e l a t i o n s h i p ( w h e r e d i s t h e r o p e
diameter).
v
Fig. 4.1.5.1.4-1
vi
T a b l e
Factor K
a/d
4.1.5.1.4
10
20
30
40
50
0,444 0,492 0,531 0,564 0,592 0,616 0,638 0,657 0,780 0,844 0,883 0,909
W h e r e the angle a between the rope axis a n d t h e

w i n d v e l o c i t y v e c t o r i s n o t e q u a l t o 90 ( r e f e r
to F i g . 4.1.5.1.4-2)
A
v i
= A sin a
v
(4.1.5.1.4-2)
shall be adopted.
4 . 1 . 5 . 2 T h e design a r m s o f w i n d a g e area z , z ' , i n m ,
shall be determined b y the formulae:
u n d e r the effect o f c o n s t a n t w i n d
^kiniA iZi
(4.1.5.2-1)
Ykin A
w
Part IV.
Stability
325
nent o ft h e windage area A

by the formula
v i
lies s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d
3
n i = { V J V f = [1 + 2 , 5 1 n ( / z / 1 0 ) V ( 0 , 7 1 + 0 , 0 7 1 F ) - K T f
(4.1.5.4)
h
where
V = design w i n d velocity, i n m / s (average w i n d velocity

d u r i n g 10 m i n a t a h e i g h t o f 10 m a b o v e s e a s u r f a c e ) ;
V = w i n d velocity, i n m / s , within t h e zone a tt h e
height h above s e a surface;
h = above-water height, i nm , o fthe upper border o f the
z o n e i n w h i c h t h e z'-th c o m p o n e n t o f t h e w i n d a g e
area A
lies (where h < \ 0 m , t h e coefficient
v
hi
v i
F i g . 4.1.5.1.4-2
v i
u n d e r t h e effect o f squall
z
v i
m = 1,00).
- =? H P
(4.1.5.2-2)
where
F o r p a r t i c u l a r w i n d velocities c o r r e s p o n d i n g t o
different service regimes o f f l o a t i n g sea structures, t h e
values o f the coefficient c a n b e f o u n d i n T a b l e 4.1.5.4.
i = n u m b e r o fthe windage area c o m p o n e n t A ;

Zj = e l e v a t i o n o f t h e c e n t r e o f g r a v i t y o f a r e a c o m p o
nent A above waterline, i n m ;
k = a e r o d y n a m i c flow coefficient for c o m p o n e n t A ;
= zone coefficient for c o m p o n e n t A .
T h e v a l u e s o f A , z , z! m a y b e d e t e r m i n e d t a k i n g t r i m i n t o
consideration.
Height above sea

level,
in m
25,8
36,0
51,5
4.1.5.3 F o r s o m e w i n d a g e a r e a c o m p o n e n t s , t h e
a e r o d y n a m i c f l o w coefficients k a r e given i n T a
ble 4.1.5.3.
10
20
30
40
50
1
1,182
1,296
1,379
1,446
1
1,208
1,339
1,435
1,513
1
1,242
1,396
1,510
1,602
60
70
80
90
100
1,502
1,550
1,592
1,630
1,664
1,578
1,633
1,682
1,726
1,766
1,680
1,746
1,805
1,858
1,905
110
120
130
140
150
1,695
1,723
1,750
1,775
1,798
1,802
1,836
1,867
1,896
1,924
1,949
1,990
2,027
2,062
2,095
1,2
0,7
160
170
180
190
200
1,820
1,840
1,860
1,879
1,896
1,949
1,973
1,996
2,018
2,039
2,126
2,155
2,183
2,209
2,235
1,2
1,0
1,4
1,2
210
220
230
240
250
1,913
1,929
1,945
1,960
1,974
2,059
2,078
2,097
2,114
2,131
2,259
2,282
2,304
2,326
2,346
T a b l e
v i
4.1.5.4
H e i g h t (zone) coefficient
v i
v i
v i
T a b l e
A e r o d y n a m i c flow c o e f f i c i e n t
4.1.5.3
Windage area components

Trusses and continuous beams
A b o v e - w a t e r p a r t o fthe hull, superstructures, deckhouses,
rectangular cabins, balance weights o fcrane structure a n d
other b o x structures with s m o o t h outside surfaces
I s o l a t e d truss structures (crane, b o o m ) m a d e of:
beams
tubular components
T u b u l a r structures (depending o n t h e product o f t h e
c a l c u l a t e d d y n a m i c w i n d v e l o c i t y h e a d q, i n P a , a n d b y t h e
square o fthe tube diameter d, i n m ) at:
0<1ON;
2 ^ 1 5 N.
Cargo ropes at:
d ^20
mm;
d > 20 m m .
Deck machinery a n d small items o n deck
C a r g o (if n o data a r eavailable f o rsubstantiated flow
coefficient)
1,4
1,2
1,5
1,3
1,2
N o t e s : 1. T h e d y n a m i c w i n d v e l o c i t y h e a d q i s r e l a t e d t o t h e
w i n d p r e s s u r e p b y t h e r a t i o p = kq w h e r e k i s t h e a e r o d y n a m i c
flow coefficient.
2. F o r i n t e r m e d i a t e v a l u e s o f qdp, t h e k v a l u e s s h a l l b e
determined b y linear interpolation.
3. T h e v a l u e s o f k f o r s t r u c t u r a l e l e m e n t s n o t s p e c i f i e d i n t h e T a b l e
are subject t o special consideration o f the R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
4. T h e v a l u e o f q c o r r e s p o n d s t o t h e d e s i g n c o n d i t i o n o f t h e
floating
c r a n e / c r a n e s h i p u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 4.1.8.6-1 o r
T a b l e 4.1.10.2.
t
V, i n m / s
v
4.1.5.5 F o r e a c h d e s i g n c o n d i t i o n o f t h e f l o a t i n g
crane/crane ship ( w o r k i n g condition, n o n - w o r k i n g con
dition, voyage, passage), i t i s r e c o m m e n d e d that t h e
w i n d a g e area o f n o n - c o n t i n u o u s surfaces (rails, spars,
rigging a n d various miscellaneous surfaces) shall
be t a k e n into account b y increasing t h e m a x i m u m total
w i n d a g e area o f c o n t i n u o u s surfaces b y 2 p e r cent w i t h
regard t o coefficients k a n d n a n d b y increasing t h e
static m o m e n t o f this area b y 5 p e r cent.
U n d e r icing conditions this increase shall b e
taken 4 p e r cent a n d 10 p e r cent o r b y 3 p e rcent a n d
7,5 p e r c e n t , r e s p e c t i v e l y , d e p e n d i n g o n t h e i c i n g r a t e
for areas lying u p t o 3 0 m above t h e waterline.
t
4.1.5.4 T h e h e i g h t ( z o n e ) c o e f f i c i e n t
=( hi/V )
w i t h regard t o t h e increase o f w i n d velocity V , i n m/s,
according t o t h e height o f t h e upper border o f t h e
z o n e a b o v e t h e w a t e r l i n e , i n w h i c h t h e z-th c o m p o
v
ni
326
Rules
T h e values o f n o n - c o n t i n u o u s surface w i n d a g e
areas a n d o f static m o m e n t s o f these areas shall b e
calculated f o r m i n i m a l d r a u g h t a n d , w h e r e necessary,
be recalculated f o r p a r t i c u l a r l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s a n d
the relevant c o n d i t i o n o f t h e floating crane/crane ship.
4.1.5.6 T h e d e s i g n w i n d a g e a r e a o f t h e c a r g o o n
h o o k is determined b y its actual outline w i t h due
regard f o rits aerodynamic coefficient a n d m a x i m u m
hfting height, i.e. as stipulated i n 4.1.5.1 t a k i n g
account o f t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 4.1.5.3 a n d 4.1.5.4.
T h e centre o f t h e w i n d pressure t o t h e cargo o n
the h o o k shall be assumed a t t h epoint o fthe load
suspension t o the b o o m .
W i t h n o actual data available, t h edesign windage
area o f cargo o n t h e h o o k is adopted
from
T a b l e 4.1.5.6.
T a b l e
4.1.5.6
W i n d a g e a r e a o f c a r g o ,-A,,,Cargo mass, i nt
kjAyf,
i nm
12
18
22
26
29
33
38
44
48
53
57
61
64
69
73
77
10
20
30
40
50
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
200
225
250
275
Cargo mass, i n t
300
350
400
500
600
700
800
900
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
5000
kjAyf,
in m
81
88
96
108
120
130
140
150
159
200
235
265
295
322
348
380
N o t e . F o r intermediate values o fcargo mass, the valueso f

k , Ayf s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y l i n e a r i n t e r p o l a t i o n .
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
f r o m T a b l e 4.1.10.2 d u r i n g t h e voyage o r passage

o f a floating crane proceeding f r o m t h e area o f
n a v i g a t i o n assigned.
T h e roll amplitude o f a crane ship during a
voyage o rpassage shall b e determined i n accordance
w i t h 4.1.6.4.
Calculated roll amplitude values determined i n
accordance w i t h 4.1.6 shall be r o u n d e d t o t h e tenth
part o f a degree i nw o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n a n dt o w h o l e
degrees d u r i n g v o y a g e o r passage.
4.1.6.2 T h e r o l l a m p l i t u d e o f a f l o a t i n g c r a n e i n a
w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n , d u r i n g t h e voyage o rpassage o f a
floating crane/crane ship.
4.1.6.2.1 T h e r o l l a m p l i t u d e 0 , i n d e g . , o f a f l o a t i n g
crane i n i t s calculated conditions as m e n t i o n e d u n
der 4 . 1 . 2 . 1 , 4.1.2.2 a n d 4.1.2.4 (i.e. i n w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n ,
d u r i n g v o y a g e a n d passage), a n d o f a crane ship i n
w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n shall, under a l l loading conditions
under consideration, be determined b ythe f o r m u l a
r
0 =0
r
r o
XtX
(4.1.6.2.1)
taking into consideration t h einstructions given

i n 4.1.6.2.2 t o 4.1.6.2.9 a n d 4.1.6.3.
4.1.6.2.2 T h e f u n c t i o n 0 , i n d e g . , s h a l l b e
r o
r o
=(r+50 )Z.
(4.1.6.2.2)
T h e function 0 a n dcalculated roll amplitude

shall be assumed equal t o zero where the parameter
W=h J /C~ Bd^0,l.
4.1.6.2.3 T h e v a l u e s o f t h e f u n c t i o n Y s h a l l b e
adopted f r o m T a b l e 4.1.6.2.3-2 proceeding f r o m t h e
p a r a m e t e r s W a n d K. T h e p a r a m e t e r s h a l l b e
r o
K=[G-0,505(^-2,4)]/^.
(4.1.6.2.3-1)
T h e parameter G shall b e determined b y the formula

4.1.6 R o l l a m p l i t u d e c a l c u l a t i o n .
4.1.6.1 G e n e r a l .
T h e roll amplitude shall be obtained f r o m m o d e l
tests o r d e t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h 4.1.6.2,
4.1.6.3, 4.1.6.4 .
M o d e l tests t o o b t a i n r o l l a m p l i t u d e s shall
be carried o u t a n d t h e i r results shall b e processed
in accordance w i t h t h e Register-approved proce
dures.
W h e r e t h e h o o k l o a d m a s s exceeds 0,1 A f o r
particular loading conditions, t h e Register m a y
require t h e roll amplitude t o be determined w i t h
regard f o r t h e effect o f cargo s w i n g i n g .
W a v e height w i t h 3 p e r cent probability o f
exceeding level A o , i n m , shall be adopted as follows:
f r o m Table 4.1.8.6-2 i n w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n o n t h e
basis o f w a v e intensity a t w h i c h c a r g o - h a n d l i n g
operations are permitted;
1
/ o
=i05-
<4-6-2-3-2)
T h e parameter P shall be adopted f r o m T a

ble 4.1.6.2.3-1 proceeding f r o m t h e values o f expres
sion
{z -d)lyJC Bd.
m
T a b l e
4.1.6.2.3-1
Parameter P
z d
0,3
0,4
0,5
0,6
0,7
0,8
0,9
1,89
1,99
2,07
2,15
2,23
2,30
2,37
2,44 2,56
z d
1,4
1,6
1,8
2,0
2,5
3,0
3,5
4,0
2,96
3,17
3,36
3,52
3,67 3,82
1,0
1,2
JCuBd
4,5
JCsBd
P
Note.
2,67 2,77 2,87

z
= metacentricheight, i n m .
T h e r o l l a m p l i t u d e i s o b t a i n e d f r o m m o d e l t e s t s w i t h 1,1 p e r c e n t p r o b a b i l i t y o f e x c e e d i n g l e v e l .
Part IV.
Stability
327
T a b l e
4.1.6.2.3-2
F u n c t i o n Y, i n d e g .
Parameter
W
Parameter
0,00
0,04
0,08
0,10
0,12
4.1.6.2.5 T h e f u n c t i o n Z s h a l l b e a d o p t e d f r o m
T a b l e 4 . 1 . 6 . 2 . 5 p r o c e e d i n g f r o m t h e p a r a m e t e r s , P
a n d W.
T a b l e
0,14
4.1.6.2.5
Function Z
0,24
2,83
21,60
28,15
30,18
0,1
0,2
0,6
1,0
1,4
0,10
1,58
22,90
37,53
42,31
0,04
0,27
7,71
26,07
45,02
0,05
0,40
13,85
38,73
53,37
0,04
0,23
3,41
12,74
28,05
0,04
0,23
1,14
5,93
13,61
4.1.6.2.4 T h e f u n c t i o n
5 0 , i n deg., shall be
5 0 = {[{ + )+ ]+ }
(4.1.6.2.4-1)
where
X =
Para
meter
W
0,00
0,04
0,08
0,10
0,12
0,14
2,1
0,1
0,2
0,6
1,0
1,4
2,17
2,23
3,44
4,34
2,30
1,59
1,55
1,59
1,73
1,65
1,56
1,35
1,10
1,28
1,25
1,95
1,58
1,08
1,33
1,28
2,71
2,11
1,06
1,28
1,51
4,51
4,38
3,52
2,56
2,05
2,5
0,1
0,2
0,6
1,0
1,4
1,22
1,27
1,32
1,26
1,26
1,21
1,20
1,23
1,27
1,24
1,47
1,28
1,03
1,19
1,16
1,89
1,55
0,97
1,05
1,02
2.36
1,96
1,00
0,72
0,68
3,15
2,81
1,77
1,09
0,51
2,9
0,1-1,4
3,3
0,1
0,2
0,6
1,0
1,4
0,77
0,89
0,84
0,84
0,87
0,85
0,88
0,88
0,81
0,84
0,87
0,91
0,93
0,83
0,87
0,81
0,92
1,03
0,91
0,92
0,68
0,84
1,06
0,94
0,91
0,58
0,62
0,81
0,99
1,02
3,7
0,1
0,2
0,6
1,0
1,4
0,61
0,64
0,70
0,72
0,77
0,77
0,82
0,82
0,69
0,77
0,84
0,94
0,98
0,78
0,84
0,75
0,97
1,21
1,00
1,00
0,49
0,87
1,41
1,13
1,00
0,37
0,49
1,04
1,44
1,46
X = a factor t o b edeterminedb y the formula

10(f+0,813A:-0,195)
(4.1.6.2.4-2)
where the parameter F shall b e determinedb y the formula
F = n ^ y C
where
B d
(4.1.6.2.4-3)
n = factor depending o n t h e slewing angle o f the crane

s t r u c t u r e ( r e f e r t o 4.1.3.1) a n d d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e
formula
0,414
(4.1.6.2.4-4)
2
7l+0,564sin cp
as w e l l a s i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 4 . 1 . 6 . 2 . 9 - 1 .
T h e factors A \ , A , A , A shall be adopted f r o m
T a b l e 4.1.6.2.4 proceeding f r o m t h e parameters W
a n d K.
2
T a b l e
F a c t o r s Alt
Parameter
Para
meter
P
4.1.6.2.4
A2, , A4
4.1.6.2.6 T h e f a c t o r X4 s h a l l b e a d o p t e d f r o m
Table 4.1.6.2.6 proceeding f r o m t h e ratio 0 / ( 0 0 )
w h e r e 00 i s t h e a n g l e r a n g e o f p o s i t i v e s t a t i c s t a b i l i t y .
4.1.6.2.7 T h e f a c t o r X s h a l l b e a d o p t e d f r o m
T a b l e 4.1.6.2.7 proceeding f r o m t h e ratio C L / C L
where C L is t h e lateral area coefficient, a n d C
is
the waterline area coefficient.
r o
Parameter
W
0,1
0,04
0,08
0,10
0,12
0,14
A
A
0,61
0,65
-1,00
-2,30
0,18
0,07
-0,33
-0,53
0,08
0,12
0,51
0,65
0,08
0,07
0,15
0,15
0,09
-0,02
-0,47
-0,65
0,10
0,08
0,09
0,12
Ax
A
2,21
-2,82
2,88
4,66
4,14
-4,83
-31,90
-31,44
1,23
3,62
8,57
7,76
0,61
0,94
2,06
2,19
0,58
-0,14
-3,57
-4,84
0,57
1,02
3,74
5,60
0,6
0,00
0,2
Parameter
A,
22,15
Ax - 1 7 , 5 1 - 0 , 4 8
14,25 - 3 7 , 9 7 - 1 8 , 4 0
A
123,01 6 8 , 0 9 - 1 6 , 9 7
13,24
- 8 3 , 4 9 112,34
A
2
1,0
20,28
16,27
4,90
6,86 - 1 6 , 3 0 19,34
72,58 -204,08 52,58
168,08 -264,50 4 3 , 2 4
51,49
27,78 19,65
Ax - 3 6 , 3 4 - 4 2 , 3 3 - 0 , 8 4
38,54
45,08
-220,45 - 6 1 , 1 1 14,01
-52,77
A
110,50 108,83 - 5 8 , 6 5 -329,54 198,88 -231,50
123,15 -220,03 3 4 8 , 7 1 -390,73 371,65 -200,83
A
2
1,4
Ax - 4 0 , 6 1 - 6 0 , 7 6 - 5 5 , 0 9
50,44 103,44 -185,31
A
170,10
117,86 6 7 , 1 7
194,79 -230,32 2 5 0 , 4 7
A
2
14,98
39,93 2 9 , 5 5
-184,15 -132,82 - 6 6 , 3 3
- 9 , 2 6 -224,91 3 2 , 5 7
247,05 - 3 7 , 8 9 3 5 6 , 5 7
T a b l e
Factor X
4.1.6.2.6
T a b l e
Factor X
0ro
1,0
1,2
1,4
1,6
1,8
2,0
2,2
2,4
2,6
2,8
3,0
4.1.6.2.7
CCL
Xs
CwL
e0
0
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1,000
0,878
0,775
0,668
0,615
0,552
0,449
0,453
0,413
0,379
0,349
0,323
0,300
0,279
0,261
0,245
0,60
0,65
0,70
0,75
0,80
0,85
0,90
0,95
1,00
1,05
1,10
1,15
1,20
1,25
1,30
1,35
0,326
0,424
0,553
0,646
0,756
0,854
0,932
0,983
1,000
0,983
0,932
0,854
0,756
0,646
0,553
0,424
4.1.6.2.8 W h e r e t h e f l o a t i n g c r a n e / c r a n e s h i p h a s
bilge keels, t h e r o l l a m p l i t u d e 0 ' , i n deg., shall b e
r
328
Rules
(4.1.6.2.8-1)
0' K . B I $ r
r
T h e factor K
shall be adopted f r o m T a
b l e 4.1.6.2.8 p r o c e e d i n g f r o m t h e p a r a m e t e r m
,t o
1
A
/(z
+ d) + B
(4.1.6.2.8-2)
2 C LBd
BK
0" = ( 0 + 5 0 ) / 6 ;
r
at
(4.1.6.3-1)
0 <0 <0
6
T a b l e
Factor K
4.1.6.2.8
(4.1.6.3-2)
0" = ( 0 + 50 )/6;
r
Ships
w a t e r t h e d e s i g n r o l l a m p l i t u d e 0" , i n d e g . , s h a l l b e
determined b y the following formulae:
at 0 < 0 < 0
total ( o nb o t h sides) area o fbilge keels, i nm ;

hull length o ffloating crane/crane ship, i n m .
of Sea-Going
where A
and Construction
at 0 > 0 & a n d 0 > 0

r
0" = ( 0 + 0 + 4 0 ) / 6 .
r
(4.1.6.3-3)
4.1.6.4 R o l l a m p l i t u d e o f a c r a n e s h i p d u r i n g
voyage/passage.
0
1,00
T h e roll amplitude o f a crane ship d u r i n g
0,882
0,025
voyage/passage under a n y loading conditions con
0,050
0,779
0,075
0,689
s i d e r e d s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2.1.5.
0,100
0,607
T h e roll amplitude o fa crane ship equipped w i t h
0,125
0,535
0,135 a n d o v e r
0,500
a n t i - r o l l i n g devices shall b e d e t e r m i n e d w i t h o u t
regard f o rtheir operation.
I n t h e case o f crane ships h a v i n g t h e ice c a t e g o r y
4.1.7 A l l o w a n c e f o r i c i n g .
m a r k A r c 4 t o A r c 9 i n t h e i r class n o t a t i o n s , t h e bilge
F o r a r e a s l y i n g u p t o 30 m a b o v e t h e w a t e r l i n e ,
keels shall b e ignored.
allowance f o r icing shall be m a d e o n t h e basis o f t h e
p r o v i s i o n s o f 2.4.1 t o 2.4.6 a n d 2.4.8. F o r a r e a s l y i n g
4.1.6.2.9 I n w e l l - g r o u n d e d c a s e s , t h e p e c u l i a r i t i e s
h i g h e r t h a n 10 m a b o v e t h e w a t e r l i n e , t h e s t a n d a r d o f
o f floating crane/crane ship mass distribution a n d
icing shall be adopted a t h a l f t h e value stated u n d e r
those o fthe area o f navigation m a y be considered o n
2.4.3 a n d 2.4.4.
agreement w i t h t h e Register w h e n determining t h e
roll amplitude:
T h e windage area a n d the height o f the centre o f
.1 w h e r e t h e i n e r t i a coefficient i s k n o w n i n t h e t h e w i n d a g e a r e a a b o v e t h e w a t e r l i n e s h a l l b e
f o r m u l a o f t h e r o l l p e r i o d T = 2cB/yfh,
the value o f
t h e f a c t o r n i n F o r m u l a (4.1.6.2.4-3) c a n b e r e p l a c e d
i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 4.1.3.2 u n d e r l o a d i n g c o n d i
by a value determined as
tions w i t h the smallest draught o u t o f those verified;
i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 4.1.3.3 u n d e r l o a d i n g c o n d i
(4.1.6.2.9.1)
n = l/(4,6c);
tions chosen f o r stability verification purposes.
.2 w h e r e t h e f r e q u e n c y o f t h e m a x i m u m o f w a v e
W h e n pipes o r o t h e r deck cargoes a r e carried, their
s p e c t r a l d e n s i t y c o , i n s" , i n k n o w n , w h i c h i s
i c i n g s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.11.6
characteristic o f a particular area o f n a v i g a t i o n w i t h
a n d 3.11.7 a d o p t i n g t h e i c i n g s t a n d a r d s t a t e d a b o v e .
the specified w a v e h e i g h t w i t h 3 p e r cent p r o b a b i l i t y o f
4.1.8 S t a b i l i t y o f a f l o a t i n g c r a n e / c r a n e s h i p i n
e x c e e d i n g l e v e l hy , t h e r o l l a m p l i t u d e 0 , i n d e g . , w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n .
d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (4.1.6.2.1) c a n b e s p e c i f i e d
4.1.8.1 S t a b i l i t y s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d a d e q u a t e
using the formula
provided that:
.1 t h e h e e l i n g angle 0 ^ , i n d e g . , d u e t o t h e
(4.1.6.2.9.2-1)
0 ,0X4X5 K ,
c o m b i n e d effect o ft h e i n i t i a l h e e l i n g m o m e n t ( f r o m
w h e r e Kc, i n n r s , s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
h o o k l o a d , balance w e i g h t , a n t i - h e e l ballast, etc.) 0 ,
i n d e g . , d u e t o w i n d 0^ ( r e f e r t o 4.1.8.4) a n d r o l l 0 , i n
(4.1.6.2.9.2-2)
K = 0,27 ^ .
deg., does n o t exceed t h e angle o f deck edge
i m m e r s i o n o r t h e m i d d l e o f t h e bilge emergence i n
w h i l e i n T a b l e s 4 . 1 . 6 . Z 3 - 2 , 4 . 1 . 6 . 2 . 4 a n d 4.1.6.2.5,
w a y m i d - s e c t i o n , w h i c h e v e r i s less. I n a n y case, t h e
the value { \ I K ) { h J y l C B d ) = ( l / K ) W shall be
following conditions shall be observed:
used instead o f the value W =
hy/J^jCsBd.
4.1.6.3 C o r r e c t i o n s t o t h e r o l l a m p l i t u d e o f a
f O , 2 ( 0 -0 ) + 2
floating crane during t h e voyage/passage.
(4.1.8.1.1-1)
W h e r e t h e r o l l a m p l i t u d e 0 o r 0' o f a f l o a t i n g
crane d u r i n g t h evoyage/passage, obtained i n accor
O,15(0 -0 )-1
d a n c e w i t h 4.1.6.2 o r 4.1.6.2.8, r e s p e c t i v e l y e x c e e d s
on
.
(4.1.8.1.1-2)
0
r
^
{
the angle o fdeck i m m e r s i o n Q o r t h e emersion angle
o f a b i l g e m i d d l e o n a m i d s h i p f r a m e 0&, a t w h i c h t h e
T h e a b o v e a c c e p t a b l e h e e l a n g l e s s t a t i c ( 0 + 0^)
m i d d l e o f b i l g e a t a m i d s h i p s f r a m e c o m e s o u t o f a n d d y n a m i c (0 ) s h a l l n o t e x c e e d r e l e v a n t a n g l e s a t
Part IV.
Stability
329
w h i c h reliable operation o f t h e crane structure is

ensured. These angles shall be i n c o n f o r m i t y w i t h t h e
delivery specifications o f t h e crane structure and/or
with itsmaintenance manual.
F o r f l o a t i n g cranes/crane ships, w h i c h crane
structure operates reliably a t large angles o f heel,
the acceptable angle o f heel is subject t o special
c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case;
.2 t h e v e r t i c a l d i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t h e l o w e r e d g e s o f
openings b y w h i c h t h e flooding angle is determined i n
operation a n d the waterline corresponding t o the
s t a t i c h e e l a n d t r i m i s n o t l e s s t h a n 0 , 6 m o r 0,025
w h i c h e v e r is greater;
.3 t h e a r e a A , i n m - r a d , o f t h e r i g h t i n g l e v e r
curve, between t h e angles 0 a n d 0 is i n c o n f o r m i t y
w i t h the following conditions:
capacity o f t h e crane structure, t h e cargo-lifting

capacity m a y be limited b y a value a t w h i c h t h e
requirements o f t h e present Section a r e m e t .
4.1.8.4 T h e h e e l i n g a n g l e o f a f l o a t i n g c r a n e /
c r a n e ship 0 ^ d u e t o t h e c o m b i n e d effect o f i n i t i a l
heeling m o m e n t , w i n d a n d roll shall be determined
by F o r m u l a e (4.1.8.4.1-2) o r (4.1.8.4.2-2) proceeding
f r o m t h e critical value o f t h e parameter G t o be
d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a b e l o w w i t h = 1,0:
cr
G=
{[(^-0,34 ,)/ / |-0,34/ -/}//
cr
T a b l e 4.1.8.4-1
F a c t o r fx
Parameter
P
0, i n d e g .
-0,115-0,00075(0 -20)
.4 i f 0 - 0 > 1 O a n d 0 - 0 > 2 O ;
.5 i f m a x i m u m r i g h t i n g a r m /
o f a floating
crane/crane ship equipped w i t h a n a u t o m a t i c antih e e l s y s t e m i s n o t less t h a n 0 , 2 5 m w h e r e t h i s s y s t e m
fails t o operate;
.6 i f capsizing m o m e n t (refer t o 4.1.8.7) d e t e r m i n e d
w i t h r e g a r d t o t h e c o m b i n e d effect o f l o a d d r o p a n d r o l l
is a t least t w i c e t h e h e e l i n g m o m e n t d u e t o w i n d
p r e s s u r e . T h e v a l u e o f gAl
shall be twice as great as
t h e h e e l i n g m o m e n t a t least. I n t h e case o f f l o a t i n g
cranes/crane ships equipped w i t h a n anti-heel system,
the system shall b e considered n o n - w o r k i n g after l o a d
drop, a n d t h e anti-heel ballast shall be considered t o
remain i n the same position i n w h i c h i t w a s a t t h e
m o m e n t o f load drop;
O
2,0
2,2
2,4
2,6
2,8
3,0
3,2
3,4
3,6
3,8
m a x
mso[
w h e r e yp z
0 ^ - > y s i n ^
= the ordinate a n d the applicate, i nm , respectively, o f

the lower edge o f the opening i n question;
? = d r a u g h t a f t e r l o a d d r o p , i n m .
4.1.8.2 I f a f l o a t i n g c r a n e / c r a n e s h i p s h a l l b e
engaged i n handling a submerged cargo having a
mass greater t h a n 0,1 A, i n t , u n d e r particular loading
conditions, t h e Register m a y require calculations t o
be m a d e t o d e m o n s t r a t e t h a t t h e safety o f the f l o a t i n g
crane/crane ship against capsizing is ensured f o r t h e
case o f s u b m e r g e d l o a d d r o p .
4.1.8.3 W h e r e a f l o a t i n g c r a n e / c r a n e s h i p d o e s
not comply w i t h the above requirements w h e n i t has
a h o o k load o f a mass equal t o t h efull cargo-lifting
0,42
0,62
0,92
1,02
1,22
1,43
1,64
1,87
2,09
2,33
0,36
0,47
0,58
0,69
0,80
0,91
1,02
1,13
1,24
1,35
0,27
0,33
0,39
0,46
0,52
0,58
0,64
0,71
0,77
0,83
0,18
0,22
0,26
0,31
0,35
0,39
0,43
0,48
0,52
0,56
Table
Factors
P
Factors
4,0
4,5
5,0
5,5
6,0
6,5
7,0
7,5
8,0
8,5
(4.1.8.1.7)
0,44
0,67
0,96
1,28
1,68
2,06
2,48
2,89
3,30
3,71
0,43
0,64
0,88
1,18
1,53
1,95
2,43
2,99
3,62
4,32
N o t e . T h e intermediate values o f f shall b e determined b y

linear interpolation.
.7 t h e l o w e r edges o f openings considered t o b e

open during t h eoperation o fthe floating crane/crane
s h i p a r e a b o v e t h e w a t e r l i n e b y t h e v a l u e o f hf ( b e i n g
n o t less t h a n 0 , 6 m o r 0,025 w h i c h e v e r i s g r e a t e r )
u n d e r c o n d i t i o n s o f d y n a m i c h e e l Qai, i n d e g . , d u e t o
t h e c o m b i n e d effect o f l o a d d r o p , w i n d a n d r o l l .
T h e h e i g h t hf s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
h = (z -d)cos
10
(4.1.8.1.3)
4),100
m
(4.1.8.4)
w h e r e f , f , / 3 = f a c t o r s t o b e a d o p t e d f r o m T a b l e s 4.1.8.4-1
a n d 4.1.8.4-2.
f ,f
2
/2
/3
0,600
0,625
0,646
0,663
0,682
0,693
0,708
0,720
0,731
0,741
0,027
0,051
0,073
0,095
0,115
0,133
0,152
0,167
0,185
0,198
9,0
9,5
10,0
10,5
11,0
11,5
12,0
13,0
14,0
4.1.8.4-2
Factors
/2
/3
0,750
0,759
0,767
0,774
0,781
0,787
0,792
0,803
0,813
0,214
0,229
0,243
0,256
0,269
0,282
0,295
0,320
0,344
N o t e . T h e intermediate values o f / 2 a n d /3 shall b e determined

4.1.8.4.1 I f t h e p a r a m e t e r
G<0,9G
(4.1.8.4.1-1)
c r
it is inherent i n p o n t o o n cranes; then

O
; C
= O + 0, + 0 , i n d e g . ,
o
(4.1.8.4.1-2)
w h e r e 0, 0 s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a e :
S
Q = 57,3y /h;
0
(4.1.8.4.1-3)
330
Rules
0 = 57,3Af/gA/!
(4.1.8.4.1-4)
w h e r e M , s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (4.1.8.5-1), a n d t h e a n g l e
9 s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 4.1.6.2.
and Construction
T h e heeling angle
adopted, equal t o
before
of Sea-Going
load
drop
G>l,lG
(4.1.8.4.2-1)
it is i n h e r e n t i n crane ships, w h i c h lines a r e

s i m i l a r t o t h o s e o f c o n v e n t i o n a l ships; t h e n
0
; C
= 0 + 0', + 0 , i n deg.,
o
(4.1.8.4.2-2)
where & shall b e determined b y the formula

s
9' =100Af ygA/!

s
(4.1.8.4.2-3)
where M
s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (4.1.8.5-2).
T h e d i r e c t i o n s o f t h e a n g l e s 0 , 0^, 0'^, 0 s h a l l b e
assumed t o coincide. F o ra floating crane/crane ship,
w h i c h shall n o t operate a t r o u g h sea, t h e angle 0
shall be adopted equal t o zero.
O
4.1.8.5 T h e h e e l i n g m o m e n t s M , M ' , i n k N ' m ,

shall be determined by:
.1 F o r m u l a (4.1.8.5-1) w h e r e t h e v a l u e o f t h e
parameter G is i n compliance w i t h condition (4.1.8.4.1-1):
v
= 0,6q(z
+f JC Bd)l,k0 A
l y
.2 F o r m u l a ( 4 . 1 . 8 . 5 - 2 ) w h e r e t h e v a l u e o f t h e
parameter G is i n compliance w i t h condition
(4.1.8.4.2-1):
M i = q[z' -fi{z -d)
w
-fyJC^MPkAvh
4.1.8.8 T h e e f f e c t o f a n c h o r i n g a n d m o o r i n g
u p o n t h e stability o f a floating crane/crane ship i n
w o r k i n g condition m a y be considered using t h e
Register-approved procedure.
4.1.8.9 W h e n t h e c r a n e s t r u c t u r e i s t e s t e d b y t h e
h o o k l o a d w i t h t h e mass exceeding t h e design o n e , t h e
stability o f the floating crane/crane ship shall b e verified
w i t h regard t o t h e actual m a s s o f t h e test load. I t shall
be d e m o n s t r a t e d t o t h e satisfaction o f the Register t h a t
the f l o a t i n g crane/crane ship safety against capsizing is
ensured b y t h e d e v e l o p m e n t o f special procedures a t
least, i n c l u d i n g w e a t h e r restrictions.
4.1.9 S t a b i l i t y o f a f l o a t i n g c r a n e / c r a n e s h i p
during voyage.
4.1.9.1 S t a b i l i t y s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d
sufficient
(bearing 4.1.3.4 i n m i n d ) if:
.1 t h e r a n g e o f r i g h t i n g lever c u r v e b e t w e e n t h e
a n g l e s 0 a n d 0 i s 40 a t l e a s t ;
.2 t h e a r e a o f r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e i s n o t l e s s
than 0,160 m-rad, between t h e angles 0 a n d 0 t h e
latter angle being obtained f r o m t h e f o r m u l a
O
(4.1.8.5-1)
shall be
(4.1.8.7)
9'<c - 0 + Or-
4.1.8.4.2 I f t h e p a r a m e t e r
Ships
(4.1.8.5-2)
(4.1.9.1.2)
9 i > 15+ 0 , 5 ( 9 , - 4 0 ) ;
.3 t h e c a p s i z i n g m o m e n t d e t e r m i n e d w i t h r e g a r d
t o r o l l a n d f l o o d i n g a n g l e i s n o t less t h a n t h e h e e l i n g
m o m e n t , i.e. M >M.
F o r recommendations concerning t h e capsizing
m o m e n t determination procedure during voyage,
r e f e r t o 1.2, A p p e n d i x 2 .
4.1.9.2 T h e h e e l i n g m o m e n t s M , M ' , i n k N ' m ,
shall be detemined by:
.1 F o r m u l a (4.1.9.2-1) w h e r e t h e v a l u e o f t h e
parameter G is i n conformity w i t h condition (4.1.8.4.1-1)
at i t s c r i t i c a l v a l u e d e t e m i n e d b y F o r m u l a ( 4 . 1 . 8 . 4 ) w i t h
= 0,5:
C
.3 e i t h e r o f F o r m u l a e ( 4 . 1 . 8 . 5 - 1 ) o r ( 4 . 1 . 8 . 5 - 2 )
w h i c h yields t h e greater heeling angle, provided t h e
following condition is met:
0,9G
c r
<G<l,lG
(4.1.8.5-3)
4.1.8.6 T h e v a l u e s o f t h e r a t e d w i n d v e l o c i t y h e a d q
and t h e wave height w i t h 3 p e r cent probability o f
exceeding level A o shall be adopted f r o m T a
bles 4.1.8.6-1 a n d 4.1.8.6-2 according t o t h e w e a t h e r
restrictions assigned.
3
/ o
T a b l e 4.1.8.6-1
D e s i g n wind velocity head q
in squall
W i n d restriction
assigned, i n n u m b e r s
q,
in Pa
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
0,02
0,03
0,05
0,09
0,15
0,23
0,35
0,50
T a b l e 4.1.8.6-2
W a v e height with 3 per cent
probability o f exceeding level A
3
W a v e restriction
assigned, i n
in m
numbers
1
2
3
4
5
6
M = 0,6q(z +
v
&/
(4.1.9.2-1)
.2 F o r m u l a ( 4 . 1 . 8 . 5 - 2 ) w h e r e t h e v a l u e o f t h e
parameter G is i n conformity w i t h condition
(4.1.8.4.2-1) a t i t s critical value detemined b y
F o r m u l a (4.1.8.4) w i t h =0,5;
.3 e i t h e r o f t h e F o r m u l a e ( 4 . 1 . 9 . 2 - 1 ) o r ( 4 . 1 . 8 . 5 - 2 )
w h i c h yields t h e greater heeling angle, p r o v i d e d
c o n d i t i o n (4.1.8.5-3) is m e t w i t h C = 0 , 5 .
4.1.9.3 F a c t o r f \ s h a l l b e a d o p t e d
from
Table 4.1.8.4-1 proceeding f r o m t h e value o ft h e
parameter P a n d w i t h regard f o r t h e angle 0 . T h e
values o f factors f a n d / shall be adopted f r o m
Table 4.1.8.4-2.
4.1.9.4 F o r a f l o a t i n g c r a n e , t h e w i n d v e l o c i t y
head q a n d the wave height w i t h 3 per cent
probability o f exceeding level A o shall be adopted
O
4.1.8.7 R e c o m m e n d a t i o n s c o n c e r n i n g t h e c a p s i z i n g
m o m e n t a n d d y n a m i c heeling angle determination for a
floating crane/crane ship i n w o r k i n g condition w i t h
l o a d d r o p a r egiven i n 1.1, A p p e n d i x 2 .
/ o
Part I V .
Stability
331
f r o m Table 4.1.10.2. I f the floating crane is t o operate

i n a p a r t i c u l a r g e o g r a p h i c a l r e g i o n , q a n d h^y m a y b e
specially a d o p t e d f o r t h a t region o n agreement w i t h
the Register.
4.1.9.5 F o r a c r a n e s h i p , t h e w i n d v e l o c i t y h e a d q
shall be adopted f r o m T a b l e 4.1.10.2.
during passage.
4.1.10.1 W h e r e a f l o a t i n g c r a n e / c r a n e s h i p s h a l l
u n d e r t a k e a passage t h r o u g h sea regions l y i n g
beyond t h e prescribed area o f navigation, a p l a n o f
such passage shall be prepared, w h i c h is subject t o
special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e Register i n e a c h case.
4.1.10.2 S t a b i l i t y s h a l l b e c h e c k e d w i t h d u e
regard f o r 4.1.3.4 under loading conditions stipulated
i n 4.1.3.2 a n d t a k i n g i n t o account t h e preparation
arrangements specified i n t h e passage p l a n ( i n c l u d i n g
possible partial o r complete d i s m a n t l i n g o ft h e crane
structure), a n d is considered t o be adequate, i f the
requirements o f4.1.9 f o r conditions o f passage areas
are met.
The design w i n d velocity head q a n d w a v e height
w i t h 3 p e r c e n t p r o b a b i l i t y o f e x c e e d i n g l e v e l hy/
shall t o be adopted f r o m T a b l e 4.1.10.2.
T a b l e 4.1.10.2
W i n d velocity head q a n d wave height with 3 per cent probability
of exceeding level A
3
Area o fnavigation through

q,
which v o y a g e o r passage is m a d e in Pa
Unrestricted
Restricted R l
Restricted R 2
Restricted R 3
1,40
1,00
0,80
0,60
Ass.
in m
11,0
6,0
6,0
A t the Register
discretion i n each case
in non-working condition.
4.1.11.1 S t a b i l i t y i s c o n s i d e r e d a d e q u a t e , i f t h e
c a p s i z i n g m o m e n t i s a t l e a s t 1,5 t i m e s g r e a t e r t h a n t h e
heeling m o m e n t under loading conditions i n accor
dance w i t h 4.1.3.3 a n d i n t h e absence o f r o l l i n g
( 9 = 0) g i v i n g r e g a r d t o 4 . 1 . 3 . 4 .
4.1.11.2 T h e c a p s i z i n g a n d h e e l i n g m o m e n t s s h a l l
b e d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 4 . 1 . 9 f o r q = 1,4 k P a .
I n case m e n t i o n e d u n d e r 4 . 1 . 9 . 2 . 1 , t h e capsizing
m o m e n t s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1.3
o f A p p e n d i x 2 , a n d i n case m e n t i o n e d
under
4.1.9.2.2, i t shall be determined i n accordance w i t h
1.2 o f A p p e n d i x 2 f o r 9 = 0.
r
4.2 P O N T O O N S
4.2.1 T h i s C h a p t e r a p p l i e s t o p o n t o o n s w i t h t h e
ratio B / D ^ 3 a n d t h e block coefficient
C ^0,9.
B
4.2.2.1 S t a b i l i t y o f a p o n t o o n s h a l l b e c h e c k e d f o r
the f o l l o w i n g loading conditions:
.1 w i t h f u l l l o a d :
.2 w i t h o u t l o a d ;
.3 w i t h f u l l l o a d a n d i c i n g .
4.2.2.2 W h e n c a r r y i n g t i m b e r c a r g o , t h e s t a b i l i t y
calculation shall be m a d e w i t h regard t o possible
addition i n mass o f timber cargo due t o water
a b s o r p t i o n as u n d e r 3.3.7.
4.2.2.3 W h e n c a r r y i n g p i p e s , t h e s t a b i l i t y c a l c u l a
tion should be made w i t h regard t o trapped water i n
the pipes as u n d e r 3.11.4.
4.2.3 C a l c u l a t i o n o f c r o s s - c u r v e s o f s t a b i l i t y .
W h e n calculating t h ecross-curves o f stability f o r
a p o n t o o n carrying timber cargo, t h e v o l u m e o f
timber cargo m a y be included i nthecalculation w i t h
full b r e a d t h a n d height a n d p e r m e a b i l i t y o f 0,25.
4.2.4 A l l o w a n c e f o r i c i n g .
4.2.4.1 R a t e s o f i c i n g s h a l l b e a d o p t e d a s u n d e r 2 . 4 .
4.2.4.2 W h e n c a r r y i n g t i m b e r c a r g o , r a t e s o f i c i n g
shall be a d o p t e d as u n d e r 3.3.7.
4.2.4.3 W h e n c a r r y i n g p i p e s , i c i n g i s d e t e r m i n e d
as u n d e r 3 . 1 1 . 7 .
4.2.5 S t a b i l i t y o f a p o n t o o n .
4.2.5.1 S t a b i l i t y o f a p o n t o o n s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d
sufficient:
.1 i f t h e a r e a u n d e r t h e r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e u p t o
t h e a n g l e o f h e e l 0 i s n o t less t h a n 0 , 0 8 m - r a d ;
.2 i f t h e s t a t i c a n g l e o f h e e l d u e t o w i n d h e e l i n g
m o m e n t determined according t o 4.2.5.2 does
n o t exceed h a l f t h e angle o fi m m e r s i o n o f t h e deck;
.3 i f t h e r a n g e o f r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e i s n o t less t h a n :
20 f o r
100 m ;
15 f o r L > 1 5 0 m .
For intermediate values o f L , t h e range o f
stability is determined b y linear interpolation.
4.2.5.2 T h e h e e l i n g m o m e n t M, i n k N - m , i s
m
M =0,001/vV*v
(4.2.5.2)
where p
z
A
=
=
=
w i n d p r e s s u r e e q u a l t o 540 P a ;
a r m o f w i n d a g e a r e a d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 2.1.4.1;
w i n d a g e a r e a , i n m , d e t e r m i n e d a c c o r d i n g t o 1.4.6.
2
4.3 F L O A T I N G
DOCKS
4.3.1 S t a b i l i t y o f f l o a t i n g d o c k s s h a l l b e c h e c k e d
for t h e f o l l o w i n g loading conditions:
.1 f l o a t i n g d o c k w h e n s u p p o r t i n g a s h i p ;
.2 f l o a t i n g d o c k d u r i n g s u b m e r s i o n a n d
emersion.
4.3.2 C a l c u l a t i o n o f l i q u i d c a r g o e f f e c t s h a l l b e
m a d e i n c o n f o r m i t y w i t h 1.4.7. T h e c o r r e c t i o n f a c t o r
for t h e effect o ffree surfaces o f l i q u i d ballast shall b e
332
Rules
calculated a t t a n k filling levels corresponding t o t h e

actual ones under loading condition i n question.
4.3.3 S t a b i l i t y o f a floating dock w h e n supporting
a ship.
4.3.3.1 Stability shall be checked o f fully emersed
dock w i t h a supported ship under conditions o f
m a x i m u m lifting capacity a n d m o m e n t o fsail o f the
dock ship system w i t h o u t icing.
4.3.3.2 Stability is considered t o be adequate
provided:
.1 angle o f heel w i t h d y n a m i c a l l y applied heeling
m o m e n t d u e t o w i n d pressure according t o 4.3.3.5
o r 4.3.3.6 does n o t exceed t h e permissible heeling
angle f o r dock cranes i n non-operating c o n d i t i o n
o r 4, w h i c h e v e r i s l e s s ;
.2 angle o f heel w i t h d y n a m i c a l l y a p p l i e d h e e l i n g
m o m e n t d u e t o w i n d pressure according t o 4.3.4.4
d o e s n o t exceed t h e a n g l e a t w h i c h safe o p e r a t i o n o f
cranes is ensured;
.3 a n g l e o f t r i m w i t h s t a t i c a l l y a p p l i e d t r i m m i n g
m o m e n t due t o crane weight w i t h m a x i m u m load for
t h e m o s t u n f a v o u r a b l e service case o f t h e i r a r r a n g e
m e n t does n o t exceed t h e angle a t w h i c h efficient
operation o f cranes is ensured o r t h e angle o f
p o n t o o n d e c k i m m e r s i o n , w h i c h e v e r i s less.
4.3.3.3 T h e d y n a m i c angle o f heel o f a f l o a t i n g
dock, i n deg., i f i t does n o t exceed t h e angle o f
i m m e r s i o n o f t h e p o n t o o n deck, shall be determined
by the f o r m u l a
2
0 = l,l7-lO- p A z/(Ah)
v
where
(4.3.3.3)
z = distance f r o m the centre o fthe windage area t o the

plane o fthe waterline o f floatation;
p
= wind pressure, in P a ;
v
4.3.3.4 A n angle o f heel o f floating dock, i f i t

exceeds the angle o f i m m e r s i o n o f the p o n t o o n deck, is
determined f r o m statical o r d y n a m i c a l stability curve
w h e n t h e d o c k is affected b y t h e d y n a m i c a l l y applied
heeling moment, i n k N - m , determined b y t h ef o r m u l a
and Construction
= 0,00lp A z.
v
Ships
products f o r a l lheight zones comprising windage

area o f t h e dock ship system is included
in F o r m u l a e (4.3.3.3) a n d (4.3.3.4).
4.3.3.7 W i t h geographical service area o f t h e
floating d o c k prescribed, t h e w i n d pressure m a y be
t a k e n f o r this particular area.
4.3.3.8 W i t h several geographical service areas o f
the floating d o c k prescribed, m a x i m u m w i n d pressure
for these areas shall be taken.
4.3.3.9 T h e angle o f t r i m , i n deg., o f t h e f l o a t i n g
dock shall be determined b y t h ef o r m u l a
= 57, /().
(4.3.3.9)
4.3.4 Stability o f a floating dock during submer

sion o r emersion.
4.3.4.1 Stability o f a floating dock shall be
checked i n t h e process o f submersion o r emersion
f o r t h e m o s t u n f a v o u r a b l e case, as r e g a r d s s t a b i l i t y ,
o f t h e supported ship displacement, m o m e n t o f
windage area o f the d o c k ship system a n d d o c k
ballasting w i t h t h e cranes n o t i n operation, w i t h o u t
icing.
4.3.4.2 Stability is considered t o be adequate i f
the angle o f heel w i t h d y n a m i c a l l y applied heeling
m o m e n t d u e t o w i n d pressure does n o t exceed t h e
permissible heeling angle f o r dock cranes i n n o n o p e r a t i n g c o n d i t i o n o r 4, w h i c h e v e r i s l e s s .
4.3.4.3 T h e angle o f heel o f the f l o a t i n g d o c k shall
be d e t e r m i n e d i n c o n f o r m i t y w i t h 4.3.3.3 a n d 4.3.3.4.
4.3.4.4 Specific w i n d pressure is assumed t o b e 4 0 0 Pa.
4.3.5 T h e a r m o f w i n d a g e area shall b e determined
according t o 1.4.6.3. O n a g r e e m e n t w i t h t h e Register, i n
each p a r t i c u l a r case t h e a r m o f w i n d a g e area z m a y b e
assumed as t h e elevation o fthe windage area centre
o f t h e dock ship system above t h e plane o f t h e
positioning system fastening t o t h e dock.
4.3.6 These requirements apply t o floating docks
having sufficiently reliable positioning system.
4.4 B E R T H - C O N N E C T E D
of Sea-Going
SHIPS
(4.3.3.4)
4.3.3.5 W i n d pressure is assumed t o be 1700 P a .

4.3.3.6 W i n d pressure m a y be t a k e n f r o m T a
ble 4.3.3.6-1 depending u p o n t h e prescribed geogra
phical area o f the floating dock operation according
to F i g . 4.3.3.6.
T o account f o r the increase o f w i n d pressure w i t h
regard t o the elevation o f some top zones o f windage
area i n t h e dock ship system above t h e actual
waterline t h e w i n d pressure values f r o m T a
ble 4.3.3.6-1 a r e m u l t i p l i e d b y t h e relevant zone
coefficients f r o m T a b l e 4.3.3.6-2.
I n t h i s case, t h e v a l u e s o f p , A a n d z a r e
determined f o r each zone separately, the s u m o f their
v
4.4.1 T h estability o f a berth-connected ship is

considered sufficient provided:
.1 the metacentric height complies w i t h the require
ments o f 2.3 w i t h d u e regard f o r t h e distribution o f
passengers a m o n g decks l i k e l y t o occur i n service;
.2 the angle o f heel u n d e r d y n a m i c a l l y applied w i n d
heeling m o m e n t as determined b y F o r m u l a (4.3.3.3)
w i t h d u e regard f o r the p r o v i s i o n s o f 4.3.3.5 t o 4.3.3.8
( f o r t h e case o f a b e r t h - c o n n e c t e d ship) does n o t exceed
the m a x i m u m permissible value.
4.4.2 U n d e r dynamically applied w i n d heeling
m o m e n t , t h e ship stability is checked f o r t h e m o s t
unfavourable loading conditions as regards stability.
Part IV.
333
Stability
F i g . 4.3.3.6
T a b l e 4.3.3.6-1
W i n d p r e s s u r e f o r t o p z o n e o f 0 10 m a b o v e
the actual waterline p , i n P a
v
Geographical area
o f floating d o c k
s e r v i c e ( F i g . 4.3.3.6)
Pressure p , i n P a
v
460
590
730
910
1110
T a b l e
4.3.3.6-2
Z o n e coefficient
Height above the
w a t e r l i n e (zone
boundary), i n m
10
1,0
1,25
1,4
1,55
1,69
Height above the

w a t e r l i n e (zone
boundary), i n m
1300
4.4.3 A s t h em a x i m u m permissible heel, t h e angle

is a s s u m e d a t w h i c h t h e f r e e b o a r d d e c k o r f e n d e r
edge immerses o r t h e m i d d l e o f t h e bilge comes o u t
f r o m w a t e r , w h i c h e v e r i s less.
10
20
30
40
20
30
40
50
50
60
70
80
90
60
70
80
90
100
1,75
1,84
1,94
2,02
2
These angles a r e d e t e r m i n e d considering t h e

i m m e r s i o n o r emergence o f t h e ship w h e n inclined
t o final a n g l e s o f h e e l a n d t h e a c t u a l p o s i t i o n o f d e c k
edge, fenders a n d t h e m i d d l e o f t h e bilge. T h e
m a x i m u m p e r m i s s i b l e a n g l e s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 10.
334
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
APPENDIX 1
INSTRUCTIONS ON DRAWING UP INFORMATION ON STABILITY
1
G E N E R A L
1.1 E a c h s h i p s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h t h e
Information o n Stability
i n o r d e r t o assist t h e
master and the c o n t r o l authorities i n m a i n t a i n i n g
stability o f the ship d u r i n g service i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h
the requirements o f international agreements, M a r itime A d m i n i s t r a t i o n sa n d the present Rules.
F o r m a l observance o f the provisions contained i n
the I n f o r m a t i o n does n o t relieve the M a s t e r o f the
responsibility f o r the stability o f the ship.
1.2 T h e p r e s e n t I n s t r u c t i o n s c o n t a i n p r o v i s i o n s
concerning the f o r m and contents o f the Information.
T h e scope o f the I n f o r m a t i o n m a y v a r y dependi n g o n the type, purpose, stability reserve a n d service
area o f a ship. I t s h a l l be selected m o s t c a r e f u l l y a n d
agreed w i t h the Register.
T h e f o r m o f the I n f o r m a t i o n shall c o m p l y w i t h
the present Instructions.
1.3 T h e I n f o r m a t i o n s h a l l c o n t a i n t h e f o l l o w i n g
sections:
.1 P a r t i c u l a r s o f ship;
.2 G u i d a n c e t o t h e m a s t e r ;
.3 T e c h n i c a l i n f o r m a t i o n ;
.4 R e f e r e n c e i n f o r m a t i o n .
T h e contents o f the sections are given below.
1.4 T h e I n f o r m a t i o n s h a l l h a v e a n i d e n t i f i c a t i o n
number.
1.5 E a c h s h e e t ( p a g e ) o f t h e I n f o r m a t i o n s h a l l b e
m a r k e d w i t h the identification n u m b e r o f the
I n f o r m a t i o n , the n u m b e r o f the sheet (page) a n d
t h e t o t a l n u m b e r o f sheets (pages). T h e n u m b e r i n g o f
sheets (pages) s h a l l be c o n t i n u o u s , i n c l u d i n g plans
and drawings.
Tables, plans a n d drawings are n o t a l l o w e d t o
have identical numbers.
1.6 T h e f r o n t p a g e s h a l l c o n t a i n :
.1 n a m e o f t h e d o c u m e n t : I n f o r m a t i o n o n
Stability;
.2 i d e n t i f i c a t i o n n u m b e r ;
.3 n a m e o f s h i p ;
.4 I M O n u m b e r .
1.7 T h e f r o n t p a g e s h a l l b e s u c c e e d e d b y a t a b l e
o f contents.
1.8 F o r s h i p s e n g a g e d o n i n t e r n a t i o n a l v o y a g e s ,
the I n f o r m a t i o n and the drawings and plans included
shall be translated i n t o E n g l i s h . T h e pages c o n t a i n i n g
the original text and those containing the translation
1
h e r e i n a f t e r referred to as "the Information".
shall alternate. I t is n o t a l l o w e d t o d r a w u p the

t r a n s l a t i o n as a separate v o l u m e .
1.9 T h e I n f o r m a t i o n s h a l l l i s t t h e d o c u m e n t s o n
the basis o f w h i c h i t w a s d r a w n u p .
1.10 T h e I n f o r m a t i o n s h a l l c o n t a i n a R e c o r d o f
Familiarization w i t h the D o c u m e n t .
2 PARTICULARS O F SHIP
2.1 T h e S e c t i o n s h a l l c o n t a i n t h e f o l l o w i n g
information:
.1 ship's n a m e ;
.2 t y p e o f s h i p ( d r y c a r g o s h i p , o i l t a n k e r , e t c . ) ;
.3 p u r p o s e o f s h i p ( f o r w h a t k i n d o f c a r g o t h e
ship is designed a c c o r d i n g t o specification);
.4 n a m e o f b u i l d e r a n d h u l l n u m b e r ;
.5 d a t e o n w h i c h t h e k e e l w a s l a i d , d a t e o f
completion o f construction, date o f conversion;
.6 s h i p ' s class, c l a s s i f i c a t i o n s o c i e t y a n d R S n u m b e r ;
.7 s h i p ' s f l a g ;
.8 p o r t o f r e g i s t r y ;
.9 p r i n c i p a l d i m e n s i o n s ( l e n g t h , b r e a d t h , d e p t h ;
where the bulkhead deck does n o t coincide w i t h the
upper deck, the d e p t h u p to the b u l k h e a d deck shall
be stated);
.10 s e r v i c e a r e a a n d r e s t r i c t i o n s i m p o s e d ( s e a
state, distance t o p o r t o f refuge, seasons, g e o g r a p h i cal service areas, etc.).
F o r dredgers a n d floating cranes, restrictions f o r
b o t h o p e r a t i n g a n d v o y a g e c o n d i t i o n s shall be stated;
.11 d r a u g h t s t o t h e s u m m e r l o a d l i n e a n d s u m m e r
timber l o a d line, d i a g r a m o f the l o a d line m a r k s a n d
the corresponding displacement and deadweight;
.12 s p e e d ;
.13 t y p e o f a n t i - r o l l i n g d e v i c e s ; d i m e n s i o n s o f
bilge keels, i f any;
.14 i n c l i n i n g t e s t d a t a , o n w h i c h t h e I n f o r m a t i o n
is b a s e d ( l i g h t - s h i p d i s p l a c e m e n t a n d center o f g r a v i t y
coordinates f o r light-ship c o n d i t i o n ) , place a n d date
o f the i n c l i n i n g test w i t h the reference t o the I n c l i n i n g
Test R e p o r t approved by the Register B r a n c h Office
or another body. I f the data for the light-ship
c o n d i t i o n have been assumed based o n the results
o f the light-weight check taking into consideration
the results o f the i n c l i n i n g test p e r f o r m e d o n a sister
ship, the data o n the ship light-weight check a n d o n
Part IV.
Stability
335
t h e i n c l i n i n g test p e r f o r m e d o n a sister ship, i n c l u d i n g

t h e n a m e a n d serial n u m b e r o f t h i s ship s h a l l be
stated i n the I n f o r m a t i o n ; the data shall c o n t a i n
reference t o the L i g h t - W e i g h t C h e c k R e p o r t s a n d
Inclining Test Reports approved by the Register
B r a n c h Office o r another body;
.15 a s k e t c h s h o w i n g t h e q u a n t i t y a n d l o c a t i o n o f
solid ballast, i f any, o n board;
.16 s h i p i n e r t i a c o e f f i c i e n t i n t h e f o r m u l a f o r
d e t e r m i n i n g t h e r o l l p e r i o d = CB/y/h
t o be calcu
lated o n the basis o f the r o l l period, i f determined,
d u r i n g t h e i n c l i n i n g test;
.17 o t h e r d a t a d e e m e d n e c e s s a r y b y t h e d e v e l o p e r
o f the I n f o r m a t i o n (for instance, carrying capacity o f
the ship, designed t r i m , stores endurance).
0
.6 e x p l a n a t i o n s o n t h e u s e o f o p t i o n a l i n f o r m a
tion included i n the document at the discretion o f the
s h i p o w n e r . I t shall be stated t h a t such i n f o r m a t i o n
falls u n d e r the responsibility o f the s h i p o w n e r .
3.2 T e r m s , s y m b o l s a n d u n i t s .
3.2.1 T h e C h a p t e r s h a l l c o n t a i n t h e f o l l o w i n g
information:
.1 a table o f s y m b o l s s h o w i n g t h e t e r m s a n d
symbols used i n the Information, relevant explana
tions (where necessary) a n d the units o f measure
m e n t . T h e u n i t system shall be u n i f o r m t h r o u g h o u t
t h e d o c u m e n t a n d i t s h a l l be t h e s a m e as t h e u n i t
system adopted for Information o n D a m a g e T r i m
and Stability.
T h e m a i n s y m b o l s t o be used i n the I n f o r m a t i o n
are given i n T a b l e 3.2.1.1;
T a b l e
3 GUIDANCE T O T H E
3.1 G e n e r a l .
information:
.1 S t a t e m e n t o f t h e p u r p o s e o f t h e d o c u m e n t , i.e.
to provide the necessary i n f o r m a t i o n to the master
for ensuring the ship's t r i m a n d stability d u r i n g
loading, unloading, ballasting and other operations
for w h i c h the ship is intended, a n d t o p r o v i d e
guidance o n and methods for satisfying the require
ments o f normative documents;
.2 l i s t o f n o r m a t i v e d o c u m e n t s ( I M O , I A C S ,
Maritime Administrations, Rules o f R S and other
classification societies) o n the basis o f w h i c h the
Information was d r a w n up;
.3 l i s t o f s t a b i l i t y c r i t e r i a a p p l i c a b l e t o t h e s h i p
w i t h sketches ( w h e r e necessary) a n d i n d i c a t i o n o f
criteria (criterion) limiting the ship's stability, da
m a g e stability criteria included, w h e r e these are
applicable to the ship a n d limiting w i t h regard to
intact stability;
.4 g e n e r a l i n s t r u c t i o n s t o t h e m a s t e r t o exercise
g o o d m a r i t i m e practice, h a v i n g regard t o the season
o f the year, the navigational area and weather
forecasts, a n d t o t a k e t h e a p p r o p r i a t e a c t i o n as t o
speed a n d course w a r r a n t e d by the p r e v a i l i n g
conditions; the i n s t r u c t i o n s shall be developed c o n
sidering the Revised Guidance to the M a s t e r for
Avoiding Dangerous Situations i n Following and
Q u a r t e r i n g Seas (refer t o C o l l e c t i o n o f R e g u l a t i n g
Documents. B o o k Eighteen, 2008);
.5 g e n e r a l i n s t r u c t i o n s t o t h e e f f e c t t h a t t h e
stability criteria (except f o r the criteria relevant t o the
carriage o f grain a n d non-cohesive b u l k cargoes) d o
n o t take possible cargo shifting into consideration
a n d t o p r e v e n t such cargo shifting o n e shall be guided
by approved documents regulating the securing a n d
stowage o f cargo;
3.2.1.1
M a i n symbols
M A S T E R
Nos.
Term
Symbol
International
symbol
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
8.1
8.2
8.3
9
9.1
9.2
10
11
Length
Breadth
Depth
Draught
Freeboard
Displacement volume
Displacement weight
Center o f gravity:
abscissa
ordinate
applicate
Center of buoyancy:
abscissa
applicate
Abscissa o f centre o f flotation
Elevation of metacenter above
b a s e line:
transverse
longitudinal
Metacentric height:
transverse
longitudinal
Righting lever
Cross curve lever
D
d
D
d
f
V
A
f
V
A
11.1
11.2
12
12.1
12.2
13
14
g
y
g
%(XG)
x
z
z
Z M
h
H
I
IK
)>g ( Y G )
K G
X B
K B
*/(XF)
K M T
K M L
G M
G M L
GZ
k ( K L )
.2 a s k e t c h ( r e f e r t o F i g . 3 . 2 . 1 . 2 ) e x p l a i n i n g t h e
m a i n symbols.
3.3 G e n e r a l e x p l a n a t i o n s t o t h e I n f o r m a t i o n .
3.3.1 T h e C h a p t e r s h a l l c o n t a i n e x p l a n a t i o n s a n d
guidance p e r t i n e n t t o a l l the sections o f the I n f o r m a t i o n
concerning the use o f the f o l l o w i n g technical data:
.1 c o o r d i n a t e s y s t e m . T h e c o o r d i n a t e s y s t e m f o r
determining mass moments, volumes, buoyancy,
draughts, shall be u n i f o r m t h r o u g h o u t the I n f o r m a
t i o n , a n d i t s h a l l be t h e s a m e as t h e c o o r d i n a t e s y s t e m
adopted for the I n f o r m a t i o n o n D a m a g e T r i m and
Stability a n d the design documentation;
.2 r u l e s f o r t h e s i g n s o f h e e l a n d t r i m ;
.3 a p p l i c a b i l i t y o f h y d r o s t a t i c d a t a w i t h r e g a r d t o
trim;
336
Rules
.4 applicability o f stability l i m i t s w i t h regard t o t r i m ;

.5 p e r m i s s i b l e w i n d a g e a r e a o f d e c k c a r g o ;
.6 accuracy o f calculations a n d i n t e r p o l a t i o n , a n d
other guidance proceeding f r o m the contents o f the
Information.
3.4 O p e r a t i o n o f the ship.
3.4.1 T h e Chapter shall contain the following
information:
.1 data o n the light ship w i t h regard t o its t r i m ,
stability and strength. I f the light ship has a heel and
a t r i m due to asymmetrical distributiono f equipment,
instructions shall be given o n s t o w i n g the ballast,
s t o r e s a n d c a r g o s o as t o e l i m i n a t e t h e h e e l a n d
reduce the t r i m . I t shall be stated that e l i m i n a t i o n o f
h e e l b y a p p r o p r i a t e s t o w a g e o f s o l i d b u l k c a r g o is n o t
permitted;
.2 principles o n the basis o f w h i c h i n s t r u c t i o n s o n
c o n s u m i n g the stores w e r e d r a w n up; d i s t r i b u t i o n o f
50 per cent a n d 10 per cent o f stores; effect o f stores
c o n s u m p t i o n o n the vertical centre o f gravity o f the
ship; specific i n s t r u c t i o n s o n c o n s u m i n g t h e stores
w i t h indication o f conditions proceeding f r o m w h i c h
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
the c o n s u m p t i o n pattern shall be applied (stability,

t r i m and damage stability requirements);
.3 t h e p r o c e d u r e f o r t a k i n g ballast d u r i n g v o y a g e f o r
t h e c o m p e n s a t i o n o f increase o f t h e vertical centre o f
g r a v i t y due t o stores c o n s u m p t i o n ; instructions o n
w e a t h e r c o n d i t i o n s u n d e r w h i c h b a l l a s t i n g is p e r m i t t e d ;
.4 the p r i n c i p a l ballast patterns f o r the carriage o f
heavy deck cargo, like containers, or light cargo i n
the hold, like ro/ro-vehicles, and explanations to the
patterns;
.5 i n f o r m a t i o n r e g a r d i n g t h e effect o f h o i s t e d
crane b o o m s , filled s w i m m i n g p o o l o r other heavy
t o p masses o n the ship's stability;
.6 o p e r a t i n g l i m i t s c o n c e r n i n g l o a d i n g , u n l o a d ing, ballasting a n d d i s t r i b u t i o n o f cargo shall be listed
a n d e x p l a i n e d , as f o r e x a m p l e :
.6.1 draught limits and, i n particular, statement
t h a t the ship's d r a u g h t shall n o t exceed the v a l u e
corresponding to the freeboard according to the
ship's L o a d L i n e Certificate;
.6.2 statement t h a t the height o f the ship's centre o f
g r a v i t y shall n o t exceed the m a x i m u m a l l o w a b l e value;
Part IV.
Stability
.6.3 s t a t e m e n t t h a t t h e s h e a r f o r c e s a n d b e n d i n g
m o m e n t s shall n o t exceed the m a x i m u m a l l o w a b l e
values;
.6.4 m i n i m u m d r a u g h t f o r w a r d a n d a f t w i t h
regard to seakeeping a n d bridge visibility;
.6.5 n u m e r i c a l v a l u e s o f d e c k c a r g o d i m e n s i o n s
w i t h regard to bridge visibility;
.6.6 m a x i m u m d r a u g h t f o r w a r d d u e t o m i n i m u m
b o w height requirement;
.6.7 m a x i m u m m a s s f o r c o n t a i n e r s t a c k s ;
.6.8 p e r m i s s i b l e l o a d f o r p l a t i n g , d e c k s a n d h a t c h
covers o n w h i c h cargo is stowed;
.6.9 m a x i m u m m a s s p e r h o l d f o r b u l k c a r g o ;
.6.10 s h i p ' s s p e e d o n t h e t u r n ;
.6.11 p e r m i s s i b l e q u a n t i t i e s o f f i s h o n t h e d e c k o f
f i s h i n g vessels;
.6.12 d e c k a r e a s o f p a s s e n g e r s h i p s t o w h i c h t h e
access o f p a s s e n g e r s is p r o h i b i t e d ;
.6.13 r e s t r i c t i o n s t o t h e a p p l i c a t i o n o f a n t i - r o l l i n g
devices;
.6.14 d i r e c t i o n s f o r t h e u s e o f a n t i - h e e l i n g
tanks;
.6.15 o t h e r l i m i t a t i o n s p r o c e e d i n g f r o m t h e s h i p ' s
purpose and construction;
.7 l i s t o f o p e n i n g s w h i c h s h a l l b e c l o s e d w h e n a t
sea t o p r e v e n t t h e f l o o d i n g o f spaces i n h u l l ,
superstructures o r deckhouses w h i c h shall be t a k e n
into consideration for stability calculation purposes.
W h e r e necessary, a d i a g r a m o f t h e o p e n i n g s s h a l l be
attached;
.8 i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r t h e c a s e o f d a m a g e t o b i l g e
keels;
.9 g e n e r a l i n s t r u c t i o n s c o n c e r n i n g t a n k s w h i c h
shall be either e m p t i e d o r pressed u p , except f o r those
t a n k s o u t o f w h i c h o r i n t o w h i c h l i q u i d is t a k e n . A n
i n s t r u c t i o n t o the effect t h a t the n u m b e r o f t a n k s w i t h
free surfaces s h a l l be reduced t o a m i n i m u m ;
.10 g e n e r a l i n s t r u c t i o n s t o t h e e f f e c t t h a t t h e
h e e l i n g o f a ship a d v e r s e l y effects s t a b i l i t y a n d ,
therefore, efforts shall be m a d e t o m a i n t a i n the ship
in the upright position;
.11 i n s t r u c t i o n s t o t h e e f f e c t t h a t t h e c a r g o s h a l l
be secured i n accordance w i t h the a p p r o v e d C a r g o
Securing M a n u a l o r i n accordance w i t h the recomm e n d a t i o n s o f t h e m a s t e r f o r t h e safe m e t h o d s o f
stowing a n d securing the carried cargo (for fishing
vessels);
.12 i n s t r u c t i o n s t o t h e e f f e c t t h a t t r i m m i n g i s
necessary i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h the I n t e r n a t i o n a l C o d e
o f Safe Practice f o r Solid B u l k Cargoes ( d u r i n g
t r a n s p o r t a t i o n o f b u l k cargoes);
.13 m e a s u r e s t o e n s u r e s t a b i l i t y w h e n , d u r i n g a
v o y a g e o r passage, the ships enter a r e g i o n w h e r e the
n a v i g a t i n g c o n d i t i o n s are m o r e severe t h a n those
specified w h e n assigning the area o f n a v i g a t i o n t o the
ship ( p r o v i d e d such measures are necessary);
337
.14 i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r p r e s e r v i n g s h i p ' s s t a b i l i t y
w h e n w a t e r is u s e d f o r fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g ;
.15 r e s t r i c t i o n s a n d i n s t r u c t i o n s a i m e d a t i n s u r i n g
a n intact stability sufficient t o satisfy the damage t r i m
a n d stability r e q u i r e m e n t s o f the Register w h e r e these
are c o m p u l s o r y f o r the ship i n question;
.16 r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s t o t h e m a s t e r w h i c h s h a l l
include recommendations for choosing the direction
a n d speed w i t h regard t o the seaway h a v i n g regard t o
the danger o f parametric resonance o f rolling w h e n
carrying deck cargo and/or at l o w initial stability, for
m i n i m u m draught forward, m a n o e u v r i n g directions
(for instance, permissible speed w i t h regard t o heel o n
the t u r n f o r ships c a r r y i n g containers o n deck),
r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s f o r i c i n g c o n t r o l , scale o f f o r w a r d
a n d a f t d r a u g h t v a r i a t i o n s as a r e s u l t o f t a k i n g c a r g o
o n b o a r d the ship, directions for operating o f heavy
d e r r i c k s ( i f i n s t a l l e d o n b o a r d t h e s h i p ) , etc.
Recommendations to the master for maintaining
sufficient stability, including i n f o r m a t i o n deemed
useful b y the developer. T h e y shall n o t be overburdened with well-known provisions o f good
m a r i t i m e practice.
3.5 T y p i c a l l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s .
information:
.1 p l a n o f t a n k s , c a r g o spaces, m a c h i n e r y space,
spaces i n t e n d e d f o r c r e w a n d passengers; t h e n u m b e r s
a n d n a m e s s h a l l be t h e s a m e as i n t h e s h i p
documentation;
.2 t a b l e s s h o w i n g t h e d i s t r i b u t i o n o f s t o r e s a n d
ballast a m o n g tanks under typical loading conditions
w i t h indication o f mass a n d centre o f gravity coordinates o f t h e t a n k s as w e l l as o f r e l e v a n t m o m e n t s . T h e
n u m b e r s a n d n a m e s o f t h e t a n k s s h a l l be t h e s a m e as
those t o be f o u n d i n p l a n referred t o i n 3.5.1.1. T h e
t a n k s w i t h r e g a r d t o w h i c h corrections f o r free surfaces
were made, taken into consideration for typical loading
c o n d i t i o n s at 100 per cent, 50 per cent a n d 10 per cent
filling, shall be indicated i n t h e tables;
.3 m a s s a n d c e n t r e o f g r a v i t y p o s i t i o n , a d o p t e d
f o r c a l c u l a t i o n p u r p o s e s , o f m a s s g r o u p s , s u c h as
passengers w i t h their luggage a n d crew w i t h their
luggage, mass a n d centre o f gravity p o s i t i o n o f cargo
i t e m s (vehicles, containers, etc.);
.4 t y p i c a l l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s i n c l u d i n g t h e
following:
.4.1 l i g h t - s h i p c o n d i t i o n ;
.4.2 d o c k i n g c o n d i t i o n ;
.4.3 l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s r e q u i r e d b y t h e R u l e s ,
loading conditions for all cargoes m e n t i o n e d i n the
specification; m a r g i n a l conditions o f the ship operat i o n i n accordance w i t h its p u r p o s e t o be e n c o u n t e r e d
i n practice and conditions o f c o m m e n c e m e n t o f
ballasting during the voyage for the purpose o f
maintaining stability;
338
Rules
.5 a s u m m a r y t a b l e o f t y p i c a l l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s .
The s u m m a r y table shall include:
.5.1 n a m e o f t h e l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n ;
.5.2 d i s p l a c e m e n t ;
.5.3 t r i m p a r a m e t e r s o f t h e s h i p ( f o r w a r d a n d a f t
draught, draught at perpendiculars, m e a n draught,
trim);
.5.4 c o o r d i n a t e s o f t h e c e n t r e o f g r a v i t y ;
.5.5 f r e e s u r f a c e c o r r e c t i o n v a l u e t o t h e i n i t i a l
metacentric height;
.5.6 i n i t i a l m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t w i t h r e g a r d t o t h e
free surface c o r r e c t i o n ;
.5.7 h e i g h t o f t h e c e n t r e o f g r a v i t y o f t h e s h i p
w i t h r e g a r d t o t h e free surface effect;
.5.8 p e r m i s s i b l e v a l u e s o f t h e h e i g h t o f t h e s h i p ' s
centre o f gravity;
.5.9 s t a n d a r d i z e d p a r a m e t e r s a n d s t a b i l i t y c r i t e r i a
(weather criterion, static stability curve parameters,
angle o f h e e l d u e t o passengers c r o w d i n g t o o n e side
o r angle o f heel o n the t u r n , etc.) a n d t h e i r
permissible values;
.5.10 a n g l e o f f l o o d i n g t h r o u g h o p e n i n g c o n s i d ered t o be o p e n i n accordance w i t h the present P a r t o f
the Rules.
3.5.2 A s t y p i c a l l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s a r e u s e d t o
assess t h e c a r g o c a r r y i n g c a p a b i l i t i e s o f t h e s h i p , a
l i m i t e d n u m b e r o f c o n d i t i o n s w i t h 50 per cent stores
shall be i n c l u d e d i n the t y p i c a l l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s .
3.5.3 A s a r u l e , t h e s t a b i l i t y c a l c u l a t i o n f o r
t y p i c a l l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s shall be m a d e f o r m e a n
draught w i t h initial t r i m disregarded.
3.5.4 T y p i c a l l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s s h a l l b e p r e s e n t e d
o n special f o r m s . I n o n e a n d the s a m e f o r m , t w o o r m o r e
l o a d i n g conditions m a y be entered w h i c h m a y differ i n
the q u a n t i t y o f stores a n d ballast, characterizing t h e
variations o f loading during the voyage.
3.5.5 A f o r m s h a l l c o n t a i n :
.1 d e s c r i p t i o n ( n a m e ) o f t y p i c a l l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n ;
.2 d r a w i n g s h o w i n g t h e l o c a t i o n o f b a s i c m a s s
g r o u p s o n the ship t h a t shall be i n c l u d e d i n the
displacement; a plan and directions for the stowage
o f deck cargo;
.3 t a b l e f o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e s h i p ' s w e i g h t ,
coordinates o f its centre o f gravity a n d relevant mass
m o m e n t s w i t h regard to coordinate planes including
the w e i g h t m o m e n t s and centre o f gravity positions o f
particular mass groups a n d o f the light ship, a n d
w h e r e i c i n g is c o n c e r n e d , t a k i n g t h e ice w e i g h t i n t o
c o n s i d e r a t i o n ; c o r r e c t i o n f o r the free surface effect o f
l i q u i d stores a n d ballast shall be g i v e n i n the table;
.4 d i s p l a c e m e n t ;
.5 s h i p ' s d r a u g h t a t f o r w a r d a n d a f t p e r p e n d i culars, m e a n draught, draught at centre o f waterline
area, draught at draught m a r k s ; draught statements
s h a l l refer t o b o t t o m o f k e e l , w h i c h s h a l l be c l e a r l y
indicated;
and
Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
.6 m o m e n t t o c h a n g e t r i m o n e u n i t ;
.7 l o n g i t u d i n a l p o s i t i o n o f c e n t r e o f b u o y a n c y ;
.8 l o n g i t u d i n a l p o s i t i o n o f c e n t r e o f g r a v i t y ;
.9 l o n g i t u d i n a l p o s i t i o n o f c e n t r e o f w a t e r l i n e
area;
.10 t r i m o v e r p e r p e n d i c u l a r s ;
.11 t o t a l c o r r e c t i o n f o r t h e e f f e c t o f f r e e s u r f a c e s
o f liquids;
.12 v e r t i c a l p o s i t i o n o f t h e t r a n s v e r s e m e t a c e n t r e
( f o r t r i m m e d c o n d i t i o n i f t r i m e x c e e d s 0,5 p e r c e n t o f
the length o f the ship);
.13 h e i g h t o f t h e s h i p ' s c e n t r e o f g r a v i t y , i t s
c o r r e c t i o n t o free surface effect a n d t h e corrected v a l u e ;
.14 i n i t i a l m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t a d o p t e d w i t h r e g a r d
f o r free surface effect;
.15 p e r m i s s i b l e v a l u e o f t h e h e i g h t o f t h e s h i p ' s
centre o f gravity or o f the metacentric height
determined o n the basis o f the Rules, a n d the
comparison w i t h the corresponding value obtained;
.16 s t a b i l i t y c r i t e r i a r e q u i r e d f o r t h e s h i p i n
question by the Rules (weather criterion for the
particular loading condition, standardized parameres
o f righting lever curve, heel angles due t o passengers
c r o w d i n g t o o n e side, etc.);
.17 t a b l e o f r i g h t i n g a r m s ;
.18 r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e p l o t t e d w i t h r e g a r d f o r
free surface effect, t h e f l o o d i n g angle i n d i c a t e d (the
scales u s e d i n t h e d i a g r a m s s h a l l be t h e s a m e f o r a l l
loading conditions);
.19 s t a t e m e n t o f t h e s h i p ' s s t a b i l i t y u n d e r t h e
particular loading condition;
.20 i n f o r m a t i o n , w h e r e a p p l i c a b l e , w i t h r e g a r d t o
operating limits, ballasting during voyage, water
soaking o f deck cargo, limitations to stowage factor
o f cargo, limitations to average container masses per
tier; restrictions t o the usage o f h e a v y e q u i p m e n t a n d
o f s w i m m i n g pools; a n d a n y o t h e r i m p o r t a n t aspects.
3.5.6 N o t w i t h s t a n d i n g t h e f a c t t h a t f o r t h e
carriage o f grain a ship shall have a separate
Information o n Ship Stability and G r a i n Loading
d r a w n u p i n accordance w i t h the Rules for the
Carriage o f G r a i n , typical loading conditions shall
contain grain loading conditions, w i t h o u t regard to
the shifting (where applicable).
3.6 E v a l u a t i o n o f s t a b i l i t y f o r n o n - t y p i c a l l o a d i n g
conditions.
3.6.1 W h e r e a n a p p r o v e d c o m p u t e r a n d p r o g r a m s
for the evaluation o f stability are available o n board the
ship, general data regarding the computer, the p r o grams and the programmer, and the i n f o r m a t i o n o n the
a p p r o v a l o f the p r o g r a m s shall be given (by w h o m ,
w h e n and for w h a t period they were approved).
3.6.2 N o t w i t h s t a n d i n g a c o m p u t e r b e i n g a v a i l able o n b o a r d the ship, the " m a n u a l " m e t h o d o f
c a l c u l a t i o n a n d e v a l u a t i o n o f s t a b i l i t y s h a l l be
explained i n detail. T h e explanation shall contain a
Part I V .
Stability
339
description o f t h e calculations sequence. A s a rule,

the description shall include six sections.
3.6.2.1 T h e f i r s t S e c t i o n s h a l l c o n t a i n :
.1 c a l c u l a t i o n o f d i s p l a c e m e n t a n d o f t h e
coordinates o f t h e ship's centre o f gravity;
.2 d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f m e a n d r a u g h t a n d c o m p a r
ison w i t h permissible draught according t o load line;
.3 d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f c o r r e c t i o n f o r f r e e s u r f a c e
effect o f l i q u i d stores;
.4 h e i g h t o f the centre o f g r a v i t y corrected f o r free
surface effect o f l i q u i d stores;
.5 c o m p a r i s o n o f t h e v a l u e o b t a i n e d f o r t h e
height o f t h e centre o f gravity w i t h t h e permissible
value a n d condition o f sufficient stability;
.6 a c t i o n s a n d m e a s u r e s t o b e t a k e n i f t h e
c o n d i t i o n o f sufficient stability is n o t fulfilled.
A note shall be m a d e w h e n describing the m e t h o d
o f calculation adopted f o r this Section that the
calculation shall be presented i n t h e f o r m o f a table.
T h e constants adopted (for instance, lightship weight,
crew, etc.) shall be specified a n d entered i n t h e table.
T h e n u m b e r s o f t h e tables, diagrams, etc. f r o m w h i c h
data f o r the calculation are taken shall be indicated i n
the text. T h e recommended table f o r m is given b e l o w
(refer t o T a b l e 3.6.2.1.6).
I f containers, vehicles, etc., a r e carried, a u x i l i a r y
table f o r m s f o r determining t h e weight a n d the
coordinates o f the centre o f gravity o f t h e cargo
a n d explanations w i t h regard t o t h e use o f t h e tables
Instructions concerning allowance f o r icing shall

be given.
3.6.2.2 T h e s e c o n d S e c t i o n s h a l l c o n t a i n :
.1 c a l c u l a t i o n o f t r i m ;
.2 a c t i o n s a n d m e a s u r e s t o b e t a k e n i f t h e t r i m
exceeds permissible values;
.3 c a l c u l a t i o n o f d r a u g h t s a t d r a u g h t m a r k s .
C a l c u l a t i o n s sequence, a d o p t e d f o r m u l a e , tables,
curves, charts, d i a g r a m s a n d references t o t h e i r
numbers shall be given i n the text o f the Section.
3.6.2.3 T h e t h i r d S e c t i o n s h a l l c o n t a i n i n s t r u c
tions f o r the calculation o f t h e righting lever curve,
f o r m u l a e , references t o t h e n u m b e r s o f tables, curves,
charts a n d diagrams.
T h e calculations shall be tabulated. T h e recom
m e n d e d table f o r m is given b e l o w ( T a b l e 3.6.2.3).
/ (GZ),
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
6, d e g
T a b l e
3.6.2.1.6
Stability verificationa n d draught calculation

Type o floading
Nos.
Mass,
in t
Abscissa, x ,
in m
g
Moment, M , Applicate,
i n f m (3) x (4)
in m
x
z,
g
M o m e n t , M , M o m e n t o f free
i n f m (3) x (6) s u r f a c e o f l i q u i d ,
Mfj, i n t m
z
Light ship
X X
X X
Crew
X X
X X
Displacement
A b s c i s s a o f s h i p c e n t r e o f g r a v i t y xg=2,MxIA
C e n t r e o f g r a v i t y e l e v a t i o n a b o v e m o u l d e d b a s e p l a n e , z = E A f / A = (7)/(3)
C o r r e c t i o n f o r f r e e s u r f a c e e f f e c t o f l i q u i d s t o r e s 2,MfJA
Corrected centre o f gravity elevation above m o u l d e d base plane, z
Permitted centre o f gravity elevation above m o u l d e d base plane
B y t h ev a l u e o f M a s p e r d i a g r a m (table) o f f o r w a r d a n d a f t d r a u g h t s :
d r a u g h t a t f o r w a r d p e r p e n d i c u l a r , in
draught a t a f tperpendicular, d
= (5)1(3)
m
g
= (8)j(3)
gcorr
z +Y,MfJA
g
,
,
, ,
draught amidships,
d r + d
d^,=^^
340
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
T a b l e
Ships
3.6.2.3
T a b l e for righting lever curve calculation

A n g l e o f h e e l , 9
10
15
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
Sin0
A r m o f f o r m If
z smQ
gcon
A r m o fstatic stability curve

l=ljz .
sin0
gco
Provision shall be made f o r a f o r m f o rplotting

the r i g h t i n g lever curve ( F i g . 3.6.2.3).
Where a n approved computer a n d programs for
the evaluation o f stability areavailable o nboard the
ship, this Section is o p t i o n a l .
3.6.2.4 T h e f o u r t h S e c t i o n s h a l l c o n t a i n :
explanation, i n t h e text a n d graphic form, f o r
determining the weather criterion;
instructions f o rt h e calculation, f o r m u l a e , references t o t h e n u m b e r s o f tables, curves, charts a n d
diagrams used.
This Section m a y be optional i n the following
cases:
the weather criterion is n o t a limiting one;
an approved computer a n d programs enabling
the calculation o f the weather criterion are available
o n b o a r d t h e ship.
3.6.2.5 T h e f i f t h S e c t i o n s h a l l c o n t a i n i n s t r u c t i o n s
f o r c a l c u l a t i n g t h e angle o f heel d u e t o t h e effect o f
w i n d and/or angle o fheel o n the t u r n ( i f applicable).
T h e formulae a n d n o r m s adopted i n the calculations
shall be given.
3.6.2.6 T h e s i x t h S e c t i o n s h a l l c o n t a i n a c a l c u lated example a n d a detailed explanation o f t h e
calculation a n d the evaluation o f stability f o ra n o n typical loading condition.
3.6.2.7 I f t h e s h i p i s e q u i p p e d w i t h a n a p p r o v e d
i n s t a l l a t i o n f o r p e r f o r m i n g in-service i n c l i n i n g tests, a
guidance f o r p e r f o r m i n g s u c h i n c l i n i n g tests s h a l l b e
given i naccordance w i t h the operation m a n u a l o f the
installation.
G u i d a n c e f o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e ship's stability i n
service s h a l l enable t h e m a s t e r t o d e t e r m i n e t h e a c t u a l
stability o f the ship w i t h adequate accuracy a n d w i t h o u t
u n d u e loss o f t i m e . T h i s S e c t i o n shall c o n t a i n :
.1 i n s t r u c t i o n s o n t h e c o n d i t i o n s a n d p r o c e d u r e
f o r c a r r y i n g o u t t h e in-service i n c l i n i n g test u s i n g t h e
facilities available o n b o a r d t h e ship ( a u t o m a t i c
systems f o r measuring a n d c o n t r o l o f t r i m a n d
stability, equalizing tanks, calibrated tanks f o r
measuring stability a n d heel b y means o fa load t h e
w e i g h t o f w h i c h is k n o w n , etc.);
.2 d a t a t o a s s e s s t h e p r e c i s i o n o f m e a s u r e m e n t s
d u r i n g t h e in-service i n c l i n i n g test a n d t o estimate t h e
q u a l i t y o f t h e test as a w h o l e ;
.3 i n s t r u c t i o n s a n d m a t e r i a l s t o c o n t r o l i n i t i a l
metacentric height b y measuring the roll period;
.4 e x p l a n a t i o n s f o r t h e m a s t e r c o n c e r n i n g t h e
assessment o f t h e ship's stability b y m e a n s o f t h e
above procedures.
3.6.2.8 T h e S e c t i o n s h a l l c o n t a i n f o r m s o n w h i c h
independent calculations c a n be made.
4 TECHNICAL
INFORMATION
4.1 A l l d r a w i n g s , d i a g r a m s , c u r v e s a n d t a b l e s
shall be n a m e d a n d numbered.
T h e Section shall contain the following information:
.1 t h e ship's general a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n ;
.2 c a p a c i t y p l a n .
T h e capacity plan shall s h o w the layout o f cargo
spaces, t a n k s , stores, m a c h i n e r y spaces a n d c r e w a n d
passenger a c c o m m o d a t i o n . C a r g o spaces a n d t a n k s
shall bear names a n d numbers adopted o nboard the
ship. I na d d i t i o n , t h e p l a n shall present:
.2.1 c o o r d i n a t e a x e s ;
.2.2 f r a m e s , f r a m e s p a c i n g a n d n u m b e r i n g ;
.2.3 l o c a t i o n o f d r a u g h t m a r k s ;
.2.4 d i a g r a m o f t h e l o a d l i n e m a r k s s h o w i n g t h e
position o f the deck line relative t o t h e ship, draught t o
the s u m m e r l o a d line, draught t o t h e s u m m e r t i m b e r
load line ( i f a n y ) a n d corresponding freeboards;
.2.5 d e a d w e i g h t s c a l e .
I t is permitted t o incorporate t h e general arrangem e n t p l a n a n d t h e capacity p l a n i n t o a single plan;
.3 c a r g o s p a c e i n f o r m a t i o n .
I n f o r m a t i o n o n each cargo space shall include:
.3.1 n a m e a n d n u m b e r ;
.3.2 l o c a t i o n ( f r a m e s ) ;
.3.3 v o l u m e a t 1 0 0 p e r c e n t f i l l i n g ;
.3.4 c o o r d i n a t e s o f t h e c e n t r e o f v o l u m e ;
.3.5 b a l e c a r g o c a p a c i t y a n d g r a i n c a p a c i t y ;
.3.6 p e r m i s s i b l e l o a d f o r p l a t i n g ;
.3.7 p e r m i s s i b l e c a r g o m a s s f o r b u l k c a r r i e r s ;
.3.8 o n o i l t a n k e r s , v o l u m e a t 9 8 p e r c e n t f i l l i n g
a n d t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g m o m e n t o f i n e r t i a o f t h e free
surface;
Part IV.
Stability
.3.9 f o r d r y c a r g o h o l d s i n t e n d e d f o r t h e c a r r i a g e
o f solid b u l k cargoes, v o l u m e a n d coordinates o f the
centre o f gravity depending o n the level o f filling;
.3.10 o n c o n t a i n e r s h i p s a n d s h i p s e q u i p p e d f o r
the carriage o f containers, container stowage plan
(including deck containers) o n the basis o f w h i c h o n e
can calculate the masses a n d the p o s i t i o n o f the
centre o f gravity o f containers i n the assumed loading
condition. M a x i m u m stack masses a n d m a x i m u m
stack heights o f containers shall be specified i n the
p l a n . A sketch shall be presented t o c o n f i r m t h a t the
r e q u i r e m e n t f o r bridge visibility is fulfilled;
.3.11 o n r o l l - o n / r o l l - o f f s h i p s , v e h i c l e s t o w a g e p l a n ;
.3.12 s t o w a g e p l a n f o r t h e d e c k c a r g o o f t i m b e r
w i t h regard to the stowage factor and the requirements for bridge visibility;
.4 t a n k s p a c e i n f o r m a t i o n .
I n f o r m a t i o n o n each t a n k space, i n c l u d i n g c a r g o
tanks, shall include:
.4.1 n a m e a n d n u m b e r o f t a n k ;
.4.2 l o c a t i o n ( f r a m e s ) ;
.4.3 v o l u m e , v o l u m e t r i c c e n t r e c o o r d i n a t e s a n d
the m o m e n t o f i n e r t i a o f the free surface d e p e n d i n g
o n the level o f filling.
I n t e r v a l s o f 0 , 1 0 m s h a l l , as a r u l e , be a d o p t e d f o r
t h e level o f l i q u i d . I n j u s t i f i e d cases a greater i n t e r v a l
m a y be a d o p t e d ;
.5 h y d r o s t a t i c p a r t i c u l a r s .
H y d r o s t a t i c p a r t i c u l a r s s h a l l be c a l c u l a t e d f o r t h e
ship o n even keel o r design t r i m ( w i t h o u t deflection)
against displacement over a range f r o m light ship to
115 per cent o f the displacement t o the l o a d line. T h e
d r a u g h t i n t e r v a l s s h a l l be 0,05 m . I n j u s t i f i e d cases, a
greater i n t e r v a l m a y be adopted. T h e particulars shall
be presented i n the f o r m o f a table.
I f the ship is i n t e n d e d f o r o p e r a t i o n w i t h a t r i m
e x c e e d i n g 0,5
per cent o f the ship's length,
a d d i t i o n a l tables o f h y d r o s t a t i c p a r t i c u l a r s s h a l l be
presented for a suitable range o f trim. T h e t r i m
interval shall n o t exceed 1 per cent o f the ship's
length.
D r a u g h t statements shall refer t o b o t t o m o f keel;
.6 cross-curves o f stability data.
Cross-curves o f stability data shall be p r o v i d e d
f o r h e e l i n g a n g l e s u p t o 20 a t 5 i n t e r v a l s , a n d
f r o m 20 t o 80 a t 10 i n t e r v a l s . T h e d i s p l a c e m e n t
range shall correspond t o that i n 4.1.5; draught
(displacement) i n t e r v a l s shall be 2 per cent o f the
draught (displacement) range. Cross-curves o f stability values shall be presented i n the f o r m o f a table.
T h e table shall be s u p p l e m e n t e d b y a sketch s h o w i n g
t h e ship's w a t e r t i g h t spaces, w h i c h w e r e t a k e n i n t o
account for the calculation.
a d d i t i o n a l tables o f cross-curves o f s t a b i l i t y s h a l l be
341
presented for the ship w i t h a trim. T h e t r i m interval

shall n o t exceed 1 per cent o f the ship's length.
I f t h e b u o y a n c y o f t h e deck c a r g o is t a k e n i n t o
account w h e n performing stability calculations, an
additional separate cross-curves o f stability table a n d
a relevant sketch shall be d r a w n u p .
Cross-curves o f stability calculations shall be
performed having regard to the accompanying trim;
.7 s o l i d c a r g o i n f o r m a t i o n .
I f s o l i d cargo is s t o w e d o n b o a r d t h e ship, a
sketch shall be presented s h o w i n g the stowage o f the
ballast, w i t h a specification c o n t a i n i n g i n f o r m a t i o n
o n the weight o f each ballast group and the
coordinates o f the centre o f gravity;
.8 i n f o r m a t i o n f o r s t a b i l i t y c o n t r o l .
Information for stability control shall include
permissible values o f the height o f the centre o f
gravity o f the ship (or o f permissible metacentric
heights) depending o n displacement (draught). T h e
i n f o r m a t i o n shall be presented i n the f o r m o f a table.
The information m a y include m o r e than one
table f o r different conditions o f the ship's o p e r a t i o n
(for instance, for operation w i t h o u t deck cargo, w i t h
timber cargo o n b o a r d the ship, w i t h deck cargoes o f
timber having different permeabilities, under conditions o f icing, w h e n c a r r y i n g one o r t w o o r three tiers
o f c o n t a i n e r s o n deck, etc.). T h e permissible values o f
the h e i g h t o f the ship's centre o f g r a v i t y shall be
calculated w i t h regard to subdivision requirements
and damage trim and stability requirements where
such requirements are c o m p u l s o r y f o r a ship.
a d d i t i o n a l tables (diagrams) o f permissible values o f
the height o f the center o f gravity o f the ship w i t h the
t r i m shall be presented. T h e t r i m i n t e r v a l shall n o t
exceed 1 per cent o f the ship's length; the tables
(diagrams) shall specify the t r i m range t h e y a p p l y t o .
W h e r e necessary, a table s h a l l be presented
containing m i n i m u m values o f the height o f the
ship's centre o f g r a v i t y at w h i c h the requirements o f
the R u l e s f o r the acceleration c r i t e r i o n are fulfilled;
.9 i n f o r m a t i o n o n a n g l e s o f f l o o d i n g .
I n f o r m a t i o n o n f l o o d i n g angles i n the f o r m o f a
table (tables) proceeding f r o m displacement o r
d r a u g h t w i t h a p l a n o f openings assumed t o be o p e n .
T h e names o f the openings and their coordinates
shall be indicated. O p e n i n g s f o r v e n t i l a t i o n o f
m a c h i n e r y spaces w h i c h ensure o p e r a t i o n o f m a c h i n ery a n d its m a i n t e n a n c e a n d w h i c h m a y n o t be closed
i n r o u g h w e a t h e r shall be assumed t o be o p e n ;
.10 t a b l e s s h o w i n g f r e e s u r f a c e c o r r e c t i o n v a l u e s
for liquid cargoes.
Free surface correction values t o the initial
metacentric height a n d righting levers f o r liquid
cargoes, i n tabular f o r m ;
342
Rules
.11 a d i a g r a m o f f o r w a r d a n d a f t d r a u g h t s .
A d i a g r a m (or table) o f f o r w a r d and aft draughts
(at perpendiculars) p l o t t e d o n a g r a p h o f displacem e n t versus the l o n g i t u d i n a l static mass m o m e n t o f
the ship. T h e d i a g r a m shall enable the master t o
speedily determine the draughts at f o r w a r d a n d aft
perpendiculars;
.12 a d i a g r a m ( o r t a b l e ) c o r r e l a t i n g t h e d r a u g h t s a t
perpendiculars w i t h the draughts at draught marks;
.13 d a t a f o r d i r e c t c a l c u l a t i o n o f w e a t h e r
criterion o n the basis o f the static o r d y n a m i c
stability curves. I f the w e a t h e r c r i t e r i o n is n o t a
l i m i t i n g o n e , t h e d a t a m e n t i o n e d a b o v e s h a l l be
presented i n the Section 5 o f the A p p e n d i x .
5 R E F E R E N C E
INFORMATION
5.1 T h i s S e c t i o n s h a l l c o n t a i n i n f o r m a t i o n , w h i c h
m a y be useful f o r the master, P o r t A d m i n i s t r a t i o n
and Flag Administration w h e n resolving matters
connected w i t h the ship's stability.
T h e Section shall contain:
.1 a detailed d i a g r a m o f p e r m i s s i b l e h e i g h t s o f the
ship's centre o f gravity, i n c l u d i n g curves f o r each o f
the stability criteria applicable to the ship i n question.
Resulting curves o f permissible heights o f the
ship's centre o f g r a v i t y shall be h i g h l i g h t e d o n the
diagram;
.2 d a t a f o r d i r e c t c a l c u l a t i o n o f w e a t h e r c r i t e r i o n
o n the basis o f the static o r d y n a m i c stability curves
(at the discretion o f the developer);
.3 a c o p y o f t h e I n c l i n i n g T e s t R e p o r t f o r t h e s h i p
o r its p r o t o t y p e a n d a copy o f the L i g h t - W e i g h t
Check Report (if any);
.4 a n y o t h e r d a t a i n c l u d e d i n t h e I n f o r m a t i o n a t
the discretion o f the shipowner.
5.2 I n f o r m a t i o n f o r f l o a t i n g c r a n e s .
5.2.1 F o r f l o a t i n g c r a n e s , t h e I n f o r m a t i o n s h a l l
c o n t a i n d a t a o n t h e i r s t a b i l i t y as r e g a r d s t h e r a t e d
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
criteria for various b o o m radii and various loads o n

the h o o k (by mass a n d windage area) including
loading conditions i n w h i c h the stability becomes
unsatisfactory by any criterion(criteria).
5.2.2 F o r f l o a t i n g c r a n e s w h i c h s t a b i l i t y i n c a s e o f
l o a d d r o p is l i m i t e d b y the angle o f f l o o d i n g i n the
w o r k i n g condition, the I n f o r m a t i o n shall contain
requirements for reliable battening d o w n o f openings
w h i c h are n o t t o be p e r m a n e n t l y o p e n d u r i n g cargohandling operations.
5.2.3 B e c a u s e o f t h e v a r i e t y o f t h e i r l o a d i n g
conditions, data o n the stability o f floating cranes
shall be presented i n a simple a n d o b v i o u s f o r m ( f o r
instance, i n tables a n d diagrams characterizing the
loading and stability o f the floating crane i n each o f
the loading conditions).
5.2.4 I n t h e c a s e o f f l o a t i n g c r a n e s w i t h l u f f i n g
b o o m s , the f o l l o w i n g r u l e shall be applied: i n o r d e r t o
reduce the influence o f external forces u p o n the
floating crane the b o o m shall be l o w e r e d t o the
l o w e s t p o s i t i o n (secured f o r sea) o n c o m p l e t i o n o f
cargo-handling operations.
5.2.5 I n c a s e o f f l o a t i n g c r a n e s w i t h s l e w i n g
cranes a n d a cargo p l a t f o r m o n deck i t is n o t
recommended to perform cargo-handling operations
w h e n u n d e r w a y (e. g. c a r r i a g e o f l o a d s h a n g i n g o n
the h o o k semi-submerged or raised above water:
s m a l l ships, m e t a l structures, etc.). W h e r e t h i s is
performed by floating cranes o f any type, restrictions
o n the area o f n a v i g a t i o n a n d w e a t h e r shall be
specified f o r such a v o y a g e i n each case, a n d
a r r a n g e m e n t s shall be m a d e f o r reliable securing t o
prevent the b o o m , hanger and the hanging load f r o m
swinging. T h e possibility o f a voyage w i t h a load o n
the h o o k shall be c o n f i r m e d b y c a l c u l a t i o n a n d
a p p r o v e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case.
5.3 T h e I n f o r m a t i o n f o r t h e t u g s h a l l i n c l u d e a
direction t o the effect the m a n e u v e r i n g close t o a
s t o p p e d ship w i t h o u t casting o f f a t o w r o p e is
d a n g e r o u s a t t h e c u r r e n t s p e e d a b o v e 1,3 m / s .
Part IV.
Stability
343
APPENDIX
D E T E R M I N A T I O N
O F C A P S I Z I N G
M O M E N T
1.1 D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f capsizing m o m e n t
and the angle o f d y n a m i c a l heel i n w o r k i n g
c o n d i t i o n i n case o f l o a d drop
T o determine t h e capsizing m o m e n t a n d t h e
angle o f d y n a m i c a l heel after l o a d drop, the curve o f
d y n a m i c a l s t a b i l i t y ( t o a r m scale) s h a l l b e c o n s t r u c t e d
for t h e loading condition under consideration, b u t
w i t h o u t l o a d o n h o o k . I n case t h e f l o a t i n g c r a n e
centre o f gravity after the l o a d d r o p does n o t coincide
w i t h t h e c e n t r e l i n e , t h e c u r v e is t o b e c o n s t r u c t e d w i t h
regard t o angle o f heel 0o d u e t o u n s y m m e t r i c a l
l o a d i n g (including also u n s y m m e t r i c a l arrangement
o f cargo o n deck). A p o r t i o n o f t h e curve shall be
constructed i n the negative angle area. T o b e plotted t o
the left f r o m the o r i g i n o f the coordinates is the initial
a n g l e o f h e e l 0 ^ o f t h e floating c r a n e w i t h a l o a d o n t h e
h o o k , equal to the s u m o f the amplitude o f roll 0 i n the
w o r k i n g c o n d i t i o n a n d t h e angle o f statical heel 0
w h e n t h e l o a d i s l i f t e d ( F i g . 1.1).
r
F O R
A F L O A T I N G
C R A N E
l a i d o f f p a r a l l e l t o the axis o f abscissae. F r o m p o i n t N

the perpendicular is erected u p t o its intersection w i t h
t h e s e c a n t a t p o i n t H. S e g m e n t NH i s e q u a l t o t h e
a r m o f t h e capsizing m o m e n t , i n k N ' m , w i t h d u e
regard for damping t o be determined b y the f o r m u l a
M
cX
= gANH
(1.1-2)
where A = displacement, i n t.
F r o m p o i n t N s e g m e n t NK i s l a i d o f f e q u a l t o t h e
a r m o f the heeling m o m e n t , i n m , t obe determined b y
the f o r m u l a
NK=M /gA
(1.1-3)
where M
= heeling m o m e n t d u et o w i n d pressure, i nk N - m .
P o i n t s a n d are connected b ythe straight line,

whose point o f intersection w i t h the curve o f reduced
arms determines t h e angle o f d y n a m i c a l heel Q a t
the i n c l i n a t i o n after l o a d drop.
Stability m a y be checked taking n o account o f
d a m p i n g . I n t h i s case, t h e c u r v e o f r e d u c e d a r m s i s
n o t constructed, b u t t h e tangent is d r a w n f r o m
p o i n t to the curve o f d y n a m i c a l stability. T h e angle
o f dynamical heel d is determined b y t h epoint o f
i n t e r s e c t i o n o f s t r a i g h t l i n e w i t h t h e c u r v e .
d3
d3
1.2 D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f c a p s i z i n g m o m e n t d u r i n g v o y a g e
^^^^
a
0
1.2.1 T h e capsizing m o m e n t M o f t h e
floating
c r a n e u n d e r the effect o f r o l l i n g a n d steady w i n d m a y
be d e t e r m i n e d b o t h b y t h e curve o f d y n a m i c a l
stability a n dt h erighting lever curve, some portions
o f w h i c h a r e constructed f o r negative angles.
W h e n using t h ecurve o fdynamical stability t h e
p o s i t i o n s o f i n i t i a l p o i n t A a n d p o i n t A ( F i g . 1.2.1)
are s o selected t h a t t a n g e n t is p a r a l l e l t o t h e
c
57.3
F i g . 1.1 D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f c a p s i z i n g m o m e n t a n d t h e a n g l e
o f d y n a m i c a l heel a t the indication after l o a d drop
T h e a p p r o p r i a t e p o i n t i s fixed o n t h e c u r v e .
T h e curve o f the reduced arms is plotted t o the right
f r o m the origin o f the coordinates above the curve o f
statical stability, w h o s e ordinates, i n m , a r e deter
m i n e d b y the f o r m u l a
i
U = ld+*k
where
(l.l-l)
5/^ = c o r r e c t i o n t a k i n g i n t o a c c o u n t d a m p i n g f o r c e s t o b e
o b t a i n e d i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h 1.4 o f t h e p r e s e n t
Appendix.
T h e s e c a n t CE i s d r a w n f r o m t h e p o i n t s o t h a t
the p o i n t o f its intersection E w i t h the reduced a r m
c u r v e l i e s o n t h e s a m e v e r t i c a l l i n e w i t h p o i n t E, i n
w h i c h the straight line parallel t o t h esecant touches
t h e c u r v e . F r o m p o i n t s e g m e n t CN e q u a l t o 57,3 i s
>
9s
57,3
F i g . 1.2.1 D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f c a p s i z i n g m o m e n t
o f a floating crane secured for sea f r o m the curve
o f dynamical stability
344
Rules
tangent A \ K a n d t h e difference o f angles o f heel

corresponding t o points A \ a n d A is equal t o the
amplitude o f roll.
A n g l e 0,, o b t a i n e d t h e r e f r o m c o r r e s p o n d s t o t h e
angle o f statical heel d u e t o U m i t i n g w i n d pressure,
and segment B E is equal t o t h e capsizing m o m e n t i f
t h e c u r v e o f d y n a m i c a l s t a b i U t y i s p l o t t e d t o scale o f
m o m e n t s , a n d t o the a r m o fthe capsizing m o m e n t , i f
t h e c u r v e o f d y n a m i c a l s t a b i U t y i s p l o t t e d t o scale o f
arms.
I n t h e l a t t e r case, t h e capsizing m o m e n t , i n k N m ,
and Construction
Ships
1.3 D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f c a p s i z i n g m o m e n t
in non-working condition
T h e capsizing m o m e n t is determined f r o m t h e
righting lever curve ( F i g . 1.3) f o r n o n - w o r k i n g
l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n w i t h d u e regard f o r t h e free surface
effect as w e l l as t h e i n i t i a l angle o fheel % d u e t o t h e
b o o m t u r n i n the plane o f the frame f o r floating
cranes a n d crane ships w i t h slewing cranes.
= .
of Sea-Going
(1.2.1)
1.2.2 W h e n t h e r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e i s u s e d , t h e
capsizing m o m e n t c a n be determined assuming t h e
w o r k o f t h e capsizing m o m e n t a n d that o f t h e
righting m o m e n t t o be equal a n dtaking account o f
the effect o fr o l l i n g a n d statical heel d u e t o U m i t i n g
w i n d pressure ( F i g . 1.2.2). F o r t h i s p u r p o s e , t h e
righting lever curve is continued i n t h e region o f
negative angles f o r such a p o r t i o n t h a t straight
Une M K p a r a l l e l t o t h eaxis o f abscissae cuts o f f t h e
c r o s s - h a t c h e d a r e a s Si a n d S e q u a l t o e a c h o t h e r a n d
the difference o f angles corresponding t o points A \
and A is equal t o theampUtude o f roll.
2
F i g . 1.3 D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f c a p s i z i n g m o m e n t
in non-working condition
Segment C Bis equal t o t h e capsizing m o m e n t i f

t h e c u r v e i s p l o t t e d t o scale o f m o m e n t s , a n d t o t h e
a r m o f t h e capsizing m o m e n t Z
i f the curve is
p l o t t e d t o scale o f a r m s . I n t h e l a t t e r case, t h e
capsizing m o m e n t , i n k N m , shall be determined b y
the f o r m u l a
m a x
/0
lAt
(1.3)
m a x
1.4 D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h e c o r r e c t i o n
to the curve o f dynamical stability,
taking account o f damping forces
J J
9
W\
=gA/
where A = displacement, i n t.
C o r r e c t i o n 5/^, i n m , t a k i n g a c c o u n t o f d a m p i n g
forces shall be determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
F i g . 1.2.2 D e t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h e c a p s i z i n g m o m e n t o f a
floating
crane secured f o r s e af r o m the righting lever curve
= 1 [~ ( % / 5 7 , 3 ) F
O r d i n a t e O M w i U correspond t o t h e capsizing
m o m e n t , i f m o m e n t s a r e plotted along t h e axis o f
ordinates o r t o t h e a r m o f t h e capsizing m o m e n t , i f
righting a r m s are plotted along t h e axis o f ordinates.
1.2.3 I f t h e c u r v e s o f s t a t i c a l a n d d y n a m i c a l
stability are c u t short a t t h e angle o f flooding, t h e
capsizing m o m e n t shall be determined w i t h regard t o
statical heel a n d t h e ampUtudes o f r o l l as specified
i n 1.2.1 a n d 1.2.2, y e t t h e r e s e r v e o f s t a b i U t y S i s
restricted t o t h e angle o f f l o o d i n g 0/.
Capsizing m o m e n t M' is determined similar t o
the m o m e n t M , provided t h e ampUtude o f roll Q
i n F i g . 1.2.2 i s p l o t t e d i n w a y o f negative abscissa
values f r m t h e reference p o i n t .
2
where
(1.4-1)
= breadth o fthe ship, i n m ;

d = m o u l d e d draught o fthe ship, i n m ;
C block coefficient o fthe ship;
Q = double swing value countingfrom the angle equal t o
the initial heel a tthe m o m e n t o f l o a d drop, i ndeg.;
Ix f a c t o r d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
B
( 1
where
-4"
2 )
= centre o fgravity h e i g h t a b o v e t h e b a s e line, i n m ;

i s t a k e n f r o m F i g . 1.4 d e p e n d i n g o n c h a r a c t e r i s t i c F
and P;
F i s d e t e r m i n e d b y F o r m u l a (4.1.6.2.4-3);
F \ , F , F , F a r e t a k e n f r o m T a b l e 1.4-1 d e p e n d i n g o n P ;
F = f a c t o r o b t a i n e d f r o m T a b l e 1.4-2 d e p e n d i n g o n t h e
ratio (Qj+Q'aiWp
where 6 = angle o fdeck immersion.
g
Part IV.
Stability
345
T a b l e
1.4-1
F a c t o r s F t , F , Fx. F,
2
0,20i-
0,15
0,10
0,05-
0,10
0,15
0,20
0,25
*i
2,8
2,9
3,0
3,2
3,3
3,4
3,5
3,6
3,7
1,987
2,087
2,144
2,157
2,138
2,097
2,043
1,982
1,921
1,861
3,435
3,313
3,097
2,823
2,525
2,230
1,955
1,711
1,497
1,312
0,0725
0,0856
0,1007
0,1150
0,1273
0,1357
0,1417
0,1454
0,1474
0,1475
0,021
0,028
0,037
0,047
0,057
0,067
0,076
0,084
0,091
0,097
T a b l e
F i g . 1.4
Factor F
%
1,0
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
^5
0 j + 0 'd
^5
1,0
1,053
1,138
1,253
1,374
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
1,5
1,626
1,747
1,862
1.4-2
346
Rules
and
Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
TABLE OF SYMBOLS FOR T H E VALUES ADOPTED I N PART IV "STABILITY"

Register
IMO
Displacement
Displacement corresponding to the m i n i m u m loading condition o f the ship specified b y the R u l e s
Full-load displacement
Light-ship displacement
Ship's displacement in the m o s t unfavourable loading condition as regards values o f h a n d /max
Density
Windage area
A r e a o f keels
W i n d a g e area component of a floating crane
A m ax
Ao
Ai
Y
A
A
Avi
Ocal
bo
C
C
c b a
c, b
D
C
C
d
dmm
dm
g
v,
G M
ho
GM
AK
k
kg,
k
L
t
I
Anax
IF
IM
Ip
IK
lc
caps
Id.h
4 / m a x > ?df
9/
9/
$caps
C a l c u l a t e d v a l u e o f a c c e l e r a t i o n ( i n f r a c t i o n s o f g)
Breadth o f the ship
Shroud spacing
B l o c k coefficient o f the ship
T a n k block coefficient
T a n k overall length, b r e a d t h , h e i g h t a n d v o l u m e (by b a s e planes)
Relative "dynamic" abscissa and ordinate o f tow h o o k suspension point
Depth, moulded
D r a u g h t o f the ship, m o u l d e d
Draught, moulded, for m i n i m u m practicable ship's loading condition
Draught amidships
Acceleration due to gravity
Corrected metacentric height (with correction for free surfaces)
Initial metacentric height (not corrected for free surfaces)
W a v e height w i t h 3 per cent probability o f exceeding level
C o r r e c t e d l o n g i t u d i n a l m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t o f a floating d o c k , floating c r a n e , c r a n e s h i p ( w i t h c o r r e c t i o n f o r f r e e
surfaces)
Weather criterion
Acceleration criterion
Safety factor w i t h respect to t o w line j e r k for general service a n d ship-handling tugs
Safety factor with respect to tow line jerk for sea-going tugs
C o m p o n e n t o f K allowing f o r effect o f rolling o n resultant angle o f heel
A n g l e o f t r i m o f a floating d o c k
F a c t o r allowing for effect o f bilge keels
Coefficient, taking account o f the peculiarities o f roll for ships o f river-sea navigation
A e r o d y n a m i c flow c o e f f i c i e n t f o r c r a n e s t r u c t u r e s
L e n g t h o f the ship
Subdivision length as defined in Part V "Subdivision"
A r m o f statical stability corrected for free surfaces
M a x i m u m a r m o f statical stability corrected for free surfaces
A r m o f d y n a m i c a l stability corrected f o r free surfaces
Ditto, b u t n o t corrected for free surfaces
A r m s o f statical a n d d y n a m i c a l stability w i t h p e r m a n e n t heeling m o m e n t d u e to load, as corrected f o r free
surfaces
Ditto, b u t n o t corrected for free surfaces
A r m o f f o r m stability with respect to the centre o f b u o y a n c y
A r m o f f o r m stability with respect to metacentre
A r m o f f o r m stability with respect to arbitrary pole
A r m o f f o r m stability with respect to m o u l d e d base line
Capsizing lever corrected for free surfaces o f liquids
A r m o f d y n a m i c a l stability defined as ordinate o f curve o f d y n a m i c a l stability for tug at the angle o f heel
e q u a l t o flooding o r c a p s i z i n g a n g l e , w h i c h e v e r i s l e s s
D y n a m i c heeling lever characterizing a s s u m e d jerk o f t o w line
Ordinate o f curve o f d y n a m i c a l stability at the angle o f heel equal to angle o f the m a x i m u m o f righting
l e v e r c u r v e o r a n g l e o f flooding, w h i c h e v e r i s l e s s
N o n - d i m e n s i o n a l coefficient for d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f free surface correction at heel o f 0
Angle of heel
2
GZ
GZ
I
Value
A n g l e o f heel for a ship due to effect o f a heeling m o m e n t resulting f r o m steady w i n d w i t h lever

Angle of
flooding
A n g l e o f vanishing stability
Angle of deck immersion
A n g l e o f coming out o f water o f bilge middle
A n g l e o f heel corresponding to the m a x i m u m o f the righting lever curve
Capsizing angle
A n g l e o f d y n a m i c a l heel o f tug due to a s s u m e d jerk o f t o w line
l\
w
Part IV.
Stability
347
Table
continued
Register
IMO
Value
9 caps
A n g l e o f t u g capsizing defined as abscissa o f the tangency point o f d y n a m i c a l stability curve a n d tangent

to it passing t h r o u g h origin o f the coordinates
Statical heel after spoil discharge
M a x i m u m amplitude o f dredger rolling with respect to statical inclination immediately after spoil is
discharged f r o m o n e side
Amplitude o f roll o f a floating crane, crane ship
A m p l i t u d e o f roll o f a floating crane/crane ship taking into account bilge keels
C o r r e c t i o n (function) h a v i n g r e g a r d to the effect o f t h e crane centre o f g r a v i t y elevation a b o v e waterline
Initial statical heel o f a floating crane d u e to load h o o k a n d unsymmetrical stowage o f cargo o n deck
Angle o f heel o f a pontoon floating crane due to heeling m o m e n t M caused b y the permanent wind
A n g l e o f h e e l o f a floating c r a n e d u e t o c o m b i n e d e f f e c t o f i n i t i a l h e e l i n g m o m e n t , s t a t i c a l w i n d e f f e c t a n d r o l l i n g
C a l c u l a t e d a n g l e o f h e e l o f a floating c r a n e p r i o r t o l o a d d r o p e q u a l t o t h e s u m o f a n g l e s 9 a n d 0 m i n u s 0
Capsizing moment
Heeling m o m e n t due to wind pressure
Heeling m o m e n t due to turning
T r i m m i n g m o m e n t d u e to crane m a s s with m a x i m u m l o a d f o r the m o s t u n f a v o u r a b l e service case o f crane
a r r a n g e m e n t o n a floating d o c k
Heeling m o m e n t d u e to liquid overflow at ship's heel o f 0
C o r r e c t i o n o f stability coefficient f o r liquid c a r g o effect
Shaft power
Z o n e coefficient taking into account changes i n w i n d velocity h e a d depending o n the height o f w i n d a g e
a r e a c e n t r e o f g r a v i t y o f a floating c r a n e
M a s s o f spoil in the hopper
Rated wind pressure
R a t e d w i n d velocity h e a d
Speed o f straightline m o v e m e n t o f a ship
Longitudinal distance between t o w h o o k suspension point a n d ship's centre o f gravity as measured over
horizontal
Factors for determination o f amplitude o f roll
er
3
e
ev
9^
89
e
e
M R
A M
Am
N
Pv
4
v
x
Pv
X, X \ , X2, X \ 2 ,
X$, X , X5
*
Y
z
z
KG
zo
9"
9'
X
Xg
Ship's centre o f gravity ordinate f r o m centreline

Side shifting o f ship's centre o f gravity f r o m centreline
F a c t o r (function) f o r determination o f amplitude o f roll
A r m o f windage area above the waterline o f
floatation
A r m o f windage area equal to the distance f r o m the centre o f the windage area to the half o f the ship
draught
Centre o f gravity elevation above moulded base plane
Elevation o f tow hook suspension point above moulded base plane
Elevation o f shroud mounting point
H e i g h t o f g e o m e t r i c a l c e n t r e s o f a r e a s w i t h i n a g i v e n z o n e a b o v e t h e a c t u a l w a t e r l i n e o f a floating c r a n e
A r m o f windage area o f a floating crane due to the permanent wind
A r m o f w i n d a g e area o f a floating crane d u e to effect o f squall
Lateral area coefficient o f a floating crane, crane ship
W a t e r - p l a n e c o e f f i c i e n t o f a floating c r a n e , c r a n e s h i p
A m p l i t u d e o f r o l l o f a floating c r a n e d u r i n g v o y a g e / p a s s a g e w i t h r e g a r d t o b i l g e c o m i n g o u t o f w a t e r a t
midsection or deck immersion
A n g l e o f heel o f a crane ship w h i c h hull s h a p e is similar to t h e ship lines, e x p o s e d to heeling m o m e n t M
caused b y squall
Abscissa o f the centre o f buoyancy
Abscissa o f the centre o f ship gravity
X
Xo
B
P A R T V. SUBDIVISION
1 GENERAL
1.1
APPLICATION
1.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t P a r t c o v e r
the f o l l o w i n g types o f ships:
.1 passenger ships;
.2 o i l t a n k e r s ;
.3 f i s h i n g v e s s e l s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L i > 1 0 0 m
and h a v i n g over 100 persons o n board;
.4 t y p e " A " s h i p s a n d t y p e " B " s h i p s w i t h r e d u c e d
f r e e b o a r d as m e n t i o n e d u n d e r 4 . 1 . 2 . 1 a n d 4.1.3.3
o f L o a d L i n e Rules for Sea-Going Ships;
.5 c h e m i c a l t a n k e r s ;
.6 g a s c a r r i e r s ;
.7 s p e c i a l p u r p o s e s h i p s ;
.8 s u p p l y v e s s e l s ;
.9 s h i p s i n t e n d e d f o r t h e c a r r i a g e o f r a d i o a c t i v e
agents;
.10 c a r g o s h i p s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L i > 8 0 m
n o t mentioned above;
.11 d r y c a r g o s h i p s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L i < 8 0 m
( r e f e r t o 1.4.9);
.12 i c e b r e a k e r s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L \ > 5 0 m ;
.13 t u g s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L \ > 4 0 m ;
.14 d r e d g e r s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L \ > 4 0 m , h o p p e r
dredgers having the length L > 60 m ;
.15 s a l v a g e s h i p s ;
.16 d r i l l i n g s h i p s ;
.17 l i g h t s h i p s ;
.18 s h i p s h a v i n g t h e i c e s t r e n g t h e n i n g m a r k s A r c 4 ,
A r c 5 , , A r c 7 , A r c 8 a n d A r c 9 i n t h e c l a s s n o t a
tion;
.19 b e r t h - c o n n e c t e d s h i p s u s e d a s f l o a t i n g h o t e l s
and/or h a v i n g over 100 persons o n board;
.20 b u l k c a r r i e r s , o r e a n d c o m b i n a t i o n c a r r i e r s i n
s e r v i c e , w h i c h c o n s t r u c t i o n d a t e i s s t a t e d i n S e c t i o n 5;
.21 c a r g o s h i p s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L \ < 1 0 0 m o t h e r
t h a n b u l k carriers, a n d a single cargo h o l d o r cargo
holds w h i c h are n o t separated b y a b u l k h e a d m a d e
w a t e r t i g h t u p t o the freeboard deck (refer t o 3.4.13).
1.1.2 F o r s h i p s t o w h i c h t h e p r e s e n t P a r t i s n o t
applicable i t is r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t a l l measures a l
l o w e d b y the type a n d service c o n d i t i o n s o f the ship
be t a k e n t o o b t a i n the best s u b d i v i s i o n characteristics
possible.
However, i f the shipowner wishes a subdivision
d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k t o be i n t r o d u c e d i n the class
n o t a t i o n , the ship shall satisfy a l l the requirements
contained i n the present Part.
T h e applicability o f the present P a r t t o n o v e l ship
shall be d e t e r m i n e d o n a g r e e m e n t w i t h t h e Register.
1.1.3 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f S e c t i o n 4 a r e a p p l i c a b l e
t o type " A " ships a n d type " B " ships w i t h reduced
x
freeboard provided compliance w i t h 4.1 o f the L o a d

L i n e R u l e s f o r S e a - G o i n g S h i p s as r e g a r d s t h e sub
d i v i s i o n o f those ships is c o n f i r m e d . W h e n m a k i n g
c a l c u l a t i o n s r e q u i r e d b y S e c t i o n 4 , c a l c u l a t i o n s as r e
q u i r e d b y Sections 2 a n d 3 m a y be considered.
1.2.1 D e f i n i t i o n s a n d e x p l a n a t i o n s r e l a t i n g t o t h e
general t e r m i n o l o g y o f the Rules are given i n P a r t I
"Classification".
F o r the purpose o f the present P a r t the following
definitions a n d explanations have been adopted.
D a m a g e w a t e r l i n e is the w a t e r l i n e o f a
damaged ship w i t h one o r m o r e adjacent compart
ments flooded.
T h e d e p t h D is t h e least v e r t i c a l distance
measured f r o m the top o f the plate keel o r f r o m the
line w h e r e the i n n e r surface o f shell p l a t i n g abuts
u p o n the bar keel, to the inner line o f bulkhead deck
a b u t t i n g t o t h e side. I n ships h a v i n g r o u n d e d g u n
wales, this distance is m e a s u r e d t o the p o i n t o f i n
tersection o f the c o n t i n u e d i n n e r surfaces o f b u l k h e a d
d e c k steel p l a t i n g a n d t h e side s h e l l p l a t i n g a t side, as
t h o u g h the g u n w a l e were o f angular design. I n n o n m e t a l ships the above-said shall be referred t o the
o u t e r surfaces o f the deck a n d p l a t i n g .
M o u l d e d d e p t h is m e a s u r e d i n the s a m e
w a y as t h e d e p t h D , b u t u p t o t h e t o p o f t h e f r e e
board beam.
S u b d i v i s i o n l o a d l i n e is t h e l o a d line o f
a n i n t a c t ship, w h i c h is used i n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e sub
division o f the ship.
T r i m is t h e difference b e t w e e n t h e d r a u g h t
f o r w a r d a n d the d r a u g h t aft, w h e r e the draughts are
m e a s u r e d at the f o r w a r d a n d aft t e r m i n a l s respec
tively, disregarding any rake o f keel.
Subdivision length L
is the greatest
projected m o u l d e d length o f that part o f the ship at
o r b e l o w deck o r decks limiting the vertical extent o f
f l o o d i n g w i t h the ship at the deepest subdivision
draught.
The ship length L
is t h e ship l e n g t h o n
the waterline corresponding to the draught
d^.
T h e s h i p l e n g t h L i is 96 per cent o f the total
l e n g t h o n a w a t e r l i n e a t 85 p e r cent o f t h e least m o u l d e d
d e p t h o r t h e l e n g t h f r o m t h e f o r e side o f t h e s t e m t o t h e
axis o f r u d d e r stock o n t h a t w a t e r l i n e i f t h a t be greater.
Permeability
index
o f
a
space
( p e r m e a b i l i t y ) is t h e p r o p o r t i o n o f t h e i m s
i c e
P a r t V.
Subdivision
349
m e r s e d v o l u m e o f t h a t space w h i c h c a n be occupied
by water.
A f t t e r m i n a l is the aft l i m i t o f the subdivi
sion length.
F o r w a r d t e r m i n a l is t h e f o r w a r d l i m i t o f
the subdivision length.
K e e l l i n e is a l i n e p a r a l l e l t o the slope o f the
keel passing amidships t h r o u g h :
.1 t h e t o p o f t h e k e e l a t centreline o r l i n e o f intersec
t i o n o f the inside o f shell plating w i t h the keel i f a bar keel
extends b e l o w t h a t line, o n a ship w i t h a m e t a l shell; o r
.2 i n w o o d a n d c o m p o s i t e s h i p s , t h e d i s t a n c e i s
measured f r o m the l o w e r edge o f the keel rabbet.
W h e n the f o r m at the lower part o f the midship
section is o f a h o l l o w character, o r w h e r e t h i c k garb o a r d s are f i t t e d , the distance is m e a s u r e d f r o m the
point where the line o f the flat o f the b o t t o m con
t i n u e d i n w a r d intersects the centreline amidships.
M a c h i n e r y s p a c e s are spaces b e t w e e n the
w a t e r t i g h t b o u n d a r i e s o f a space c o n t a i n i n g the m a i n
and auxiliary propulsion machinery, including boi
lers, generators a n d electric m o t o r s p r i m a r i l y i n
t e n d e d f o r p r o p u l s i o n . I n t h e case o f u n u s u a l
a r r a n g e m e n t s , the l i m i t s o f t h e m a c h i n e r y spaces are
defined o n agreement w i t h the Register.
A m i d s h i p s is at the m i d d l e o f the l e n g t h L \ .
L i g h t s e r v i c e d r a u g h t di i s t h e s e r v i c e
draught corresponding to the lightest anticipated
loading a n d associated tankage, including, h o w e v e r ,
s u c h b a l l a s t as m a y be n e c e s s a r y f o r s t a b i l i t y a n d / o r
i m m e r s i o n . Passenger ships shall include the full
c o m p l e m e n t o f passengers a n d crew o n board.
D r a u g h t d is the vertical distance f r o m the
keel line at mid-length to the waterline i n question.
The ship draught d
is t h e s m a l l e s t s h i p
draught o u t of: a draught corresponding to the waterl i n e s e r v i n g as t h e u p p e r b o u n d a r y o f t h e ice s t r e n g t h
ening o f the hull, or a draught at w h i c h the
r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r ice d a m a g e t r i m a n d s t a b i l i t y are m e t ,
as c o n t a i n e d i n 3.4.10.
D e e p e s t s u b d i v i s i o n d r a u g h t d is the
waterline w h i c h corresponds to the summer load line
draught o f the ship.
A c o m p a r t m e n t is a n i n n e r space l i m i t e d b y
t h e s h i p b o t t o m , sides, b u l k h e a d d e c k a n d t w o a d
jacent transverse watertight bulkheads o r a peak
bulkhead and an extremity.
B u l k h e a d d e c k i n a passenger ship means
the uppermost deck at any p o i n t i n the subdivision
length L t o w h i c h the m a i n bulkheads a n d the ship's
shell are carried w a t e r t i g h t a n d the l o w e r m o s t deck
f r o m w h i c h passenger a n d crew evacuation will n o t
be i m p e d e d b y w a t e r i n a n y stage o f f l o o d i n g f o r
d a m a g e cases d e f i n e d i n S e c t i o n 2. T h e b u l k h e a d
deck m a y be a stepped deck. I n a cargo ship the
f r e e b o a r d d e c k m a y be t a k e n as t h e b u l k h e a d deck.
ice
T h e d e e p e s t s u b d i v i s i o n l o a d l i n e is
the w a t e r l i n e , w h i c h corresponds t o the deepest d r a u g h t
permitted b y applicable subdivision requirements.
M i d - l e n g t h is the m i d - p o i n t o f the subdivi
sion length o f a ship.
E q u a l i z a t i o n o f a s h i p is the process o f
eliminating or reducing heel and/or trim.
r e a d t h fi i s t h e g r e a t e s t m o u l d e d b r e a d t h o f
the ship at o r b e l o w the deepest subdivision draught.
P a r t i a l s u b d i v i s i o n d r a u g h t d is the
light service d r a u g h t plus 60 per cent o f the difference
b e t w e e n the l i g h t service d r a u g h t a n d the deepest
subdivision draught.
1.2.2 I n a l l c a l c u l a t e d c a s e s o f f l o o d i n g o n l y o n e
h o l e i n t h e h u l l is a s s u m e d a n d o n l y o n e free surface
o f sea w a t e r w h i c h p e n e t r a t e d a f t e r t h e accident. I n
this case t h e h o l e is c o n s i d e r e d t o h a v e t h e shape o f a
rectangular parallelepiped.
1.2.3 A l l l i n e a r d i m e n s i o n s u s e d i n t h e p r e s e n t
Section are taken i n meters.
p
1.3.1 T h e p r o v i s i o n s p e r t a i n i n g t o t h e p r o c e d u r e
o f classification, survey o f ships u n d e r c o n s t r u c t i o n
a n d c l a s s i f i c a t i o n s u r v e y s , as w e l l as t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
f o r the technical d o c u m e n t a t i o n t o be s u b m i t t e d t o
the Register f o r review are contained i n G e n e r a l
Regulations for the Classification and Other Activity
and i n P a r t I I "Technical D o c u m e n t a t i o n " o f the
for Ships.
1.3.2 F o r e v e r y s h i p m e e t i n g t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f
the present Part, the Register shall carry o u t the
following:
.1 check o f c o m p l i a n c e o f t h e s t r u c t u r a l m e a s u r e s
taken to ensure subdivision o f the ship w i t h the re
q u i r e m e n t s s p e c i f i e d i n 1.1.6 a n d 2 . 7 , P a r t I I " H u l l " ,
S e c t i o n 7, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t , A r r a n g e m e n t s a n d
O u t f i t " , Sections 2, 4, 5 a n d 7.1 t o 7 . 1 1 , 1 0 . 1 , 10.2,
10.4, 1 2 . 1 , P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d P i p i n g " ;
.2 c o n s i d e r a t i o n a n d a p p r o v a l o f I n f o r m a t i o n o n
Damage T r i m and Stability, Flooding Detection
System M a n u a l (refer t o 3.4.11.4), D a m a g e C o n t r o l
P l a n , as w e l l as c o n s i d e r a t i o n o f I n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e
E f f e c t o f F l o o d i n g ( t o be d u l y n o t e d ) , as s t i p u l a t e d
i n 1.4.9;
.3 c h e c k i n g o f c o r r e c t a s s i g n m e n t a n d m a r k i n g o f
additional load lines corresponding to subdivision
l o a d lines;
.4 e x a m i n a t i o n a n d a p p r o v a l o f the c o m p u t e r i n
stalled o n b o a r d the ship a n d the relevant software w h e r e
i t is used f o r assessing d a m a g e t r i m a n d stability.
350
Rules
1.4 G E N E R A L T E C H N I C A L
REQUIREMENTS
1.4.1 T h e s h i p s u b d i v i s i o n s h a l l b e t h e m o s t e f f e c tive b e a r i n g i n m i n d the service o f the ship. T h e degree

o f subdivision shall v a r y proceeding f r o m the area o f
navigation, ship length a n d n u m b e r o f persons o n
b o a r d so t h a t t h e h i g h e s t s u b d i v i s i o n degree w o u l d be
characteristic o f ships o f the greatest l e n g t h engaged f o r
the m o s t p a r t i n the carriage o f passengers a n d o f those
navigating i n the Arctic and the Antarctic.
1.4.2 I n n o c a s e s h a l l a n y s u b d i v i s i o n l o a d l i n e b e
assigned above the deepest subdivision l o a d line i n
seawater d e t e r m i n e d o n the basis o f the ship h u l l
safety o r i n accordance w i t h the L o a d L i n e R u l e s f o r
Sea-Going Ships.
T h e s u b d i v i s i o n l o a d l i n e assigned t o t h e ship is
m a r k e d o n its sides a n d r e c o r d e d i n the d o c u m e n t s o f
t h e R e g i s t e r as r e q u i r e d b y t h e L o a d L i n e R u l e s f o r
Sea-Going Ships.
1.4.3 T h e v o l u m e s a n d a r e a s s h a l l , i n a l l c a s e s , b e
calculated t o m o u l d e d lines. T h e v o l u m e s a n d free
surfaces o f w a t e r w h i c h penetrates the c o m p a r t m e n t s
o f reinforced-concrete, plastic, w o o d a n d composite
ships shall be calculated t o i n b o a r d h u l l lines.
1.4.4 W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e i n i t i a l m e t a c e n t r i c
h e i g h t o f a d a m a g e d ship, c o r r e c t i o n s f o r the effect o f
free surfaces o f l i q u i d cargoes, ship stores a n d ballast
w a t e r shall be t a k e n i n t o a c c o u n t i n the s a m e m a n n e r
as i n t h e case o f c a l c u l a t i n g t h e i n t a c t s t a b i l i t y o f a
s h i p i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h 1.4.7, P a r t I V " S t a b i l i t y " .
W h e n p l o t t i n g static stability curves f o r a dam a g e d ship, the enclosed superstructures, t r u n k s ,
deckhouses, angles o f f l o o d i n g t h r o u g h openings i n
ship's sides, decks, h u l l a n d s u p e r s t r u c t u r e b u l k h e a d s
c o n s i d e r e d o p e n as w e l l as c o r r e c t i o n s f o r free s u r faces o f l i q u i d c a r g o e s s h a l l be t a k e n i n t o a c c o u n t i n
t h e s a m e m a n n e r as i n t h e case o f p l o t t i n g c u r v e s f o r
a n i n t a c t s h i p i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h 1.4.9, P a r t I V
"Stability".
Superstructures, trunks and deckhouses w h i c h
s u s t a i n d a m a g e m a y o n l y be t a k e n i n t o a c c o u n t w i t h
t h e p e r m e a b i l i t y s p e c i f i e d i n 1.6, o r i g n o r e d . T h e
o p e n i n g s i n s u c h structures l e a d i n g t o spaces, w h i c h
are n o t flooded, are considered open at appropriate
angles o f heel o n l y w h e n regular w e a t h e r t i g h t m e a n s
o f closing are n o t fitted.
1.4.5 W h e n c a l c u l a t i n g d a m a g e t r i m a n d s t a b i l i t y ,
a c c o u n t shall be t a k e n o f changes i n the i n i t i a l ship
loading (intact ship) due to liquid cargoes being rep l a c e d b y sea w a t e r i n d a m a g e d t a n k s , t a k i n g i n t o
consideration that i n the flooded tanks below the
d a m a g e w a t e r l i n e the free surface o f those cargoes
disappears.
1.4.6 S h i p s t o w h i c h t h e p r e s e n t P a r t i s a p p l i c a b l e
shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h a p p r o v e d I n f o r m a t i o n o n
Damage T r i m and Stability with compartments
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
flooded and w i t h Damage C o n t r o l Plan. These

d o c u m e n t s are i n t e n d e d t o p r o v i d e ship's officers
w i t h clear i n f o r m a t i o n o n the ship's w a t e r t i g h t subdivision and equipment related to m a i n t a i n i n g the
b o u n d a r i e s a n d effectiveness o f t h e s u b d i v i s i o n so
that, i n the event o f damage to the ship causing
f l o o d i n g , p r o p e r precautions c a n be t a k e n t o p r e v e n t
progressive flooding t h r o u g h openings therein and
effective a c t i o n c a n be t a k e n q u i c k l y t o m i t i g a t e and,
w h e r e possible, recover the ship's loss o f stability.
Information o n Damage T r i m and Stability and
D a m a g e C o n t r o l P l a n shall be clear a n d easy t o u n derstand. T h e y shall n o t include i n f o r m a t i o n , w h i c h
is n o t d i r e c t l y r e l e v a n t t o d a m a g e c o n t r o l , a n d s h a l l
be p r o v i d e d i n the w o r k i n g language o f the ship. I f
the ship's w o r k i n g languages are n o t R u s s i a n a n d
English, a t r a n s l a t i o n i n t o one o f these languages
shall be included.
1.4.6.1 I n f o r m a t i o n o n D a m a g e T r i m a n d S t a bility shall include the following:
.1 d a t a o n t h e ship, i n c l u d i n g its d i m e n s i o n s a n d
permissible d r a u g h t s o n clear w a t e r a n d i n ice c o n ditions, its l o n g i t u d i n a l section, deck a n d doubleb o t t o m plans, typical cross-sections w i t h i n d i c a t i o n
o f a l l w a t e r t i g h t bulkheads a n d enclosures w i t h
openings therein, means o f their closure a n d drives,
openings o f air a n d v e n t i l a t i o n pipes;
.2 i n f o r m a t i o n n e c e s s a r y t o m a i n t a i n t h e s t a b i l i t y
o f a n i n t a c t ship s u f f i c i e n t t o w i t h s t a n d , i n accordance w i t h the requirements o f the present Part,
the m o s t dangerous extent o f damage; instructions o n
loading a n d ballasting the ship, including recommendations o n distributing cargo i n the holds,
stores a n d b a l l a s t i n a m a n n e r r e a s o n a b l e as r e g a r d s
the subdivision adopted and satisfying at the same
time the requirements for the t r i m , stability and
strength o f the ship; b r i e f list o f requirements f o r
damage t r i m and stability;
.3 c u r v e o f m a x i m u m p e r m i s s i b l e v e r t i c a l p o s i t i o n o f
centre o f g r a v i t y o f the ship ( l i m i t i n g m o m e n t s o r
m i n i m u m metacentric heights) plotted taking i n t o the
account the requirements o f this Part and Part I V
"Stability". F o r ships, w h i c h h a v e t o fulfil the requirements o f Section 2, a curve o f m a x i m u m permissible vertical positions o f centre o f gravity (or
m i n i m u m m e t a c e n t r i c heights) shall be d e t e r m i n e d
f r o m considerations related to the subdivision index,
in the following manner:
m i n i m u m metacentric heights (or m a x i m u m
permissible vertical positions o f centre o f gravity) for
t h e t h r e e d r a u g h t s d , d a n d di a r e e q u a l t o m e t a centric heights (or vertical positions o f centre o f
g r a v i t y ) o f c o r r e s p o n d i n g l o a d i n g cases u s e d f o r t h e
c a l c u l a t i o n o f f a c t o r s;
m i n i m u m m e t a c e n t r i c heights v a r y l i n e a r l y bet w e e n d a n d dp a n d b e t w e e n d a n d d r e s p e c t i v e l y ;
s
P a r t V.
Subdivision
i f t h e s u b d i v i s i o n i n d e x is calculated f o r d i f f e r e n t
trims, the curve o f m a x i m u m permissible vertical
p o s i t i o n s o f centre o f g r a v i t y shall be established
considering the above trims;
.4 list o f results o f s y m m e t r i c a l a n d u n
symmetrical flooding calculations w i t h data o n initial
and damage draught, heel, t r i m and metacentric
height b o t h before a n d after t a k i n g measures for the
equalization o f the ship o r f o r i m p r o v i n g its stability
as w e l l as m e a s u r e s r e c o m m e n d e d f o r t h e s e p r o c e
dures a n d the period o f time required. Parameters o f
static stability curves anticipated u n d e r the w o r s t
f l o o d i n g c o n d i t i o n s shall also be included. W h e r e
necessary, f o r ships w i t h A r c 4 t o A r c 9 ice s t r e n g t h
e n i n g , t h e i n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e characteristics o f ice
u n s i n k a b i l i t y , d a m a g e t r i m a n d stability shall be i n
d i c a t e d w h e n s u s t a i n i n g design ice d a m a g e ;
.5 g e n e r a l i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r c o n t r o l l i n g t h e effects o f
d a m a g e , s u c h as:
immediately closing all watertight and weather
tight closing appliances;
establishing the locations a n d safety o f persons
o n b o a r d , s o u n d i n g t a n k s a n d c o m p a r t m e n t s t o as
certain the extent o f damage a n d repeated soundings
t o determine rates o f f l o o d i n g ;
c a u t i o n a r y advice regarding the cause o f a n y list
a n d o f l i q u i d t r a n s f e r o p e r a t i o n s t o lessen list a n d / o r
t r i m , a n d t h e r e s u l t i n g effects o f c r e a t i n g a d d i t i o n a l
free surfaces a n d o f i n i t i a t i n g p u m p i n g o p e r a t i o n s t o
c o n t r o l the ingress o f seawater;
.6 details o f t h e l o c a t i o n s o f f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n
systems, s o u n d i n g devices, t a n k vents a n d o v e r f l o w s
w h i c h d o n o t extend above the w e a t h e r deck, p u m p
capacities, p i p i n g diagrams, i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r operat
i n g cross-flooding systems, m e a n s o f accessing a n d
escaping f r o m w a t e r t i g h t c o m p a r t m e n t s b e l o w the
b u l k h e a d deck f o r use by d a m a g e c o n t r o l parties, a n d
alerting ship m a n a g e m e n t and other organizations to
stand b y a n d t o co-ordinate assistance, i f required;
.7 l o c a t i o n s o f n o n - w a t e r t i g h t o p e n i n g s w i t h n o n a u t o m a t i c closing devices t h r o u g h w h i c h progressive
f l o o d i n g m i g h t o c c u r as w e l l as g u i d a n c e o n t h e p o s s i
bility o f non-structural bulkheads and doors o r other
obstructions retarding the f l o w o f entering seawater t o
cause a t least t e m p o r a r y c o n d i t i o n s o f u n s y m m e t r i c a l
f l o o d i n g . T h e necessity t o a p p l y this r e q u i r e m e n t is
d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r f o r e a c h specific ship.
1.4.6.2 D a m a g e C o n t r o l P l a n s h a l l be m a d e o n
t h e scale a c c e p t a b l e f o r o p e r a t i o n , b u t n o t less t h e
1:200. F o r p a s s e n g e r ships, t h e D a m a g e C o n t r o l P l a n
shall be p e r m a n e n t l y e x h i b i t e d o r readily available o n
t h e n a v i g a t i o n b r i d g e , as w e l l as i n t h e ship's c o n t r o l
station, safety centre o r equivalent. O n cargo ships
the P l a n shall be p e r m a n e n t l y e x h i b i t e d o r be r e a d i l y
available o n the navigation bridge, i n the cargo
c o n t r o l r o o m , ship's c o n t r o l s t a t i o n etc.
351
T h e necessity t o s u b m i t i s o m e t r i c d r a w i n g s is
d e t e r m i n e d b y the Register f o r each specific ship. T h e
plan shall include inboard profile, plan views o f each
d e c k a n d d o u b l e b o t t o m , as w e l l as t r a n s v e r s e sec
tions t o the extent necessary t o visually a n d u n
ambiguously show the following:
.1 the watertight compartments and
tanks
boundaries;
.2 t h e l o c a t i o n s a n d a r r a n g e m e n t s o f crossflooding systems, b l o w - o u t plugs a n d a n y mechanical
means to correct list due t o f l o o d i n g , together w i t h
the locations o f all valves and remote controls, i f any;
.3 t h e l o c a t i o n s o f a l l i n t e r n a l w a t e r t i g h t c l o s i n g
appliances i n c l u d i n g , o n r o - r o ships, i n t e r n a l r a m p s
o r d o o r s a c t i n g as e x t e n s i o n o f t h e c o l l i s i o n b u l k h e a d
and their controls and the locations o f their local and
remote controls, position indicators and alarms. T h e
locations o f those w a t e r t i g h t closing appliances,
w h i c h are n o t a l l o w e d t o be o p e n e d d u r i n g the n a
v i g a t i o n , shall be clearly indicated;
.4 t h e l o c a t i o n s o f a l l d o o r s i n t h e shell o f the
ship, including p o s i t i o n indicators, leakage detection
a n d surveillance devices;
.5 t h e l o c a t i o n s o f a l l e x t e r n a l w a t e r t i g h t c l o s i n g
appliances i n cargo ships, p o s i t i o n indicators a n d
alarms;
.6 the l o c a t i o n s o f a l l w e a t h e r t i g h t c l o s i n g a p p l i
ances i n local subdivision boundaries above the
bulkhead deck and o n the lowest exposed weather
decks, together w i t h locations o f c o n t r o l s a n d posi
t i o n indicators, i f applicable;
.7 t h e l o c a t i o n s o f a l l b i l g e a n d b a l l a s t p u m p s ,
their c o n t r o l positions a n d associated valves.
1.4.7 I n f o r m a t i o n o n D a m a g e T r i m a n d S t a b i l i t y
shall be c o m p i l e d o n the basis o f the I n f o r m a t i o n o n
Stability. T h e procedure o f extending the validity o f the
Information o n Damage T r i m and Stability f r o m one
ship t o a n o t h e r is s i m i l a r t o t h a t o f e x t e n d i n g t h e v a
l i d i t y o f I n f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i l i t y as
specified
i n 1 . 4 . 1 1 . 2 , P a r t " S t a b i l i t y " . I n f o r m a t i o n o n D a
m a g e T r i m a n d S t a b i l i t y m a y be i n c o r p o r a t e d i n I n
f o r m a t i o n o n I n t a c t S t a b i l i t y as a s e p a r a t e section.
1.4.8 F o r e s t i m a t i o n o f t h e s h i p d a m a g e t r i m a n d
stability i t is r e c o m m e n d e d t o use t h e o n b o a r d c o m
puter. T h e associated software shall have T y p e A p
p r o v a l Certificate issued b y the Register.
A c o m p u t e r is n o t e q u i v a l e n t t o I n f o r m a t i o n o n
Damage T r i m and Stability. I n f o r m a t i o n o n Damage
T r i m a n d S t a b i l i t y a n d D a m a g e C o n t r o l P l a n shall be
kept o n board i n printed form. Onboard damage
stability s o f t w a r e d e v e l o p e d f o r t h e specific ship a n d
a p p r o v e d b y the Register m a y be used b y p r o p e r l y
t r a i n e d ship's officers o n l y as a r a p i d m e a n s t o sup
plement Information o n Damage T r i m and Stability
a n d D a m a g e C o n t r o l P l a n f o r effective d a m a g e
control.
352
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
W h e r e r a p i d access t o s h o r e - b a s e d c o m p u t e r i z e d
support organization, recognized by R S , w h i c h
m a k e s d a m a g e s t a b i l i t y a n d r e s i d u a l s t r e n g t h assess
m e n t s is p r o v i d e d o n b o a r d , t h i s m a y be used t o
supplement I n f o r m a t i o n o n Damage T r i m and Sta
bility. I n such a case t h e c o n t a c t i n f o r m a t i o n f o r
g a i n i n g r a p i d access t o s h o r e - b a s e d c o m p u t e r i z e d
support o r g a n i z a t i o n together w i t h a list o f i n
formation required for m a k i n g damage stability and
residual strength assessments shall be i n c l u d e d i n
Information o n Damage T r i m and Stability.
the t y p e o f ship c o n c e r n e d its s u b d i v i s i o n is c o n

sidered satisfactory according t o 1.5.1, d a m a g e t r i m
a n d s t a b i l i t y c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3
w h e n a n y single ship c o m p a r t m e n t o r a n y adjacent
ship c o m p a r t m e n t s are f l o o d e d t h r o u g h o u t the ship's
length i n accordance w i t h the introduced subdivision
distinguishing m a r k , and the compliance o f structural
measures related to the subdivision o f the ship w i t h
t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.1.6 a n d 2 . 7 , P a r t I I " H u l l " a n d
i n S e c t i o n 7, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t , A r r a n g e m e n t s a n d
O u t f i t " is ensured.
1.4.9 D r y c a r g o s h i p s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L \ < 8 0 m
instead o f I n f o r m a t i o n o n D a m a g e T r i m and Stabi
lity shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h D a m a g e C o n t r o l P l a n a n d
I n f o r m a t i o n o n the Effect o f F l o o d i n g . T h i s I n
f o r m a t i o n shall c o n t a i n data a n d d o c u m e n t a t i o n lis
t e d i n 1.4.6.1 a n d results o f d a m a g e t r i m a n d s t a b i l i t y
calculations w h e n engine r o o m a n d every cargo space
are f l o o d e d . T h e calculations shall be m a d e f o r t w o
d r a u g h t s o n e o f w h i c h shall be the s u m m e r l o a d line
draught. T h e m a x i m u m permissible p o s i t i o n o f ship's
centre o f g r a v i t y shall be t a k e n according t o I n
f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i l i t y . P e r m e a b i l i t i e s o f cargo spaces
shall be t a k e n w i t h regard t o the cargoes i n t e n d e d t o
be carried a n d shall be w i t h i n 0,60 t o 0,90. T h e I n
f o r m a t i o n shall contain a s u m m a r y table o f calcula
t i o n results w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f c r i t i c a l f a c t o r s , as w e l l
as d e t a i l s g i v e n i n 1.4.6.1.5.
W h e n , i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.4 the n u m b e r o f
f l o o d a b l e c o m p a r t m e n t s is c h a n g e d t h r o u g h o u t the
ship length, the l o w e s t v a l u e shall be stated i n the
subdivision distinguishing mark.
1.5.3 A d d i t i o n a l c o n d i t i o n s u n d e r w h i c h a s u b
d i v i s i o n d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k shall be i n t r o d u c e d i n
the class n o t a t i o n are specified i n 3.4.
1.4.10 E v e r y s h i p s h a l l h a v e d r a u g h t s c a l e s p r o m i
nently m a r k e d at b o w a n d stern. W h e r e the draught
scales a r e so p l a c e d t h a t t h e y a r e n o t c l e a r l y v i s i b l e o r
w h e r e service c o n d i t i o n s i m p e d e r e a d i n g t h e i n d i c a t i o n s
o f t h e scale t h e ship s h a l l be p r o v i d e d w i t h a reliable
draught measurement system whereby the f o r w a r d and
aft draughts c a n be easily determined.
1.5 S A T I S F A C T O R Y
SUBDIVISION
1.5.1 T h e s u b d i v i s i o n o f a s h i p c a n b e c o n s i d e r e d
s a t i s f a c t o r y as r e g a r d s t h e p r e s e n t P a r t , i f :
.1 t h e a t t a i n e d s u b d i v i s i o n i n d e x A , d e t e r m i n e d i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2 . 3 , is n o t less t h a n t h e r e q u i r e d
subdivision index R calculated i n accordance w i t h 2.2
a n d if, i n a d d i t i o n , the p a r t i a l indices A , A a n d A are
n o t l e s s t h a n 0,9 f o r p a s s e n g e r s h i p s a n d 0,5 f o r
cargo ships;
.2 t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s u n d e r 1 . 5 . 1 . 1 a r e n o t a p p l i c
able t o ships f o r w h i c h i n Section 2 there are n o i n
structions f o r determining the indices A and/or R\
.3 d a m a g e t r i m a n d s t a b i l i t y a r e i n a c c o r d a n c e
w i t h S e c t i o n 3, c o n s i d e r i n g 3.3.6.
1.5.2 A s u b d i v i s i o n d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k i s i n
t r o d u c e d i n t h e class n o t a t i o n o f t h e s h i p i n ac
cordance w i t h 2.2.4, P a r t I "Classification" p r o v i d e d
under all design loading conditions corresponding t o
s
1.6 P E R M E A B I L I T Y
INDEX
1.6.1 I n t h e c a l c u l a t i o n s o f d a m a g e t r i m a n d
stability the p e r m e a b i l i t y i n d e x o f f l o o d e d space shall
be assumed e q u a l t o :
.1 0,85 f o r spaces o c c u p i e d b y m a c h i n e r y , electric
g e n e r a t i n g sets a n d p r o c e s s i n g e q u i p m e n t o n f i s h i n g
vessels a n d f a c t o r y ships;
.2 0 , 9 5 f o r a c c o m m o d a t i o n s p a c e s a n d e m p t y
spaces i n c l u d i n g e m p t y t a n k s ;
.3 0 , 6 f o r t h e s p a c e s i n t e n d e d f o r d r y s t o r e s .
1.6.2 P e r m e a b i l i t y o f f l o o d e d t a n k s w i t h l i q u i d
cargo o r liquid stores o r w a t e r ballast is d e t e r m i n e d
based o n the a s s u m p t i o n t h a t a l l the cargo is dis
c h a r g e d f r o m t h e t a n k a n d sea w a t e r i s i n g r e s s e d
taking i n t o consideration the permeability index
being equal to 0,95.
1.6.3 T h e p e r m e a b i l i t y i n d e x o f t h e s p a c e s i n
t e n d e d f o r s o l i d cargoes is g i v e n b e l o w i n t h e ap
p r o p r i a t e p a r a g r a p h s o f S e c t i o n s 2 t o 5.
1.6.4 T h e p e r m e a b i l i t y i n d e x o f s p a c e s m a y b e
a s s u m e d l o w e r t h a n specified a b o v e o n l y i n case a
special c a l c u l a t i o n is p e r f o r m e d w h i c h is a p p r o v e d b y
the Register.
W h e n p e r f o r m i n g such special calculations f o r
cargo spaces i n c l u d i n g r e f r i g e r a t i n g ones, t h e per
m e a b i l i t y i n d e x o f n e t cargo shall be assumed e q u a l
to 0,6, a n d t h a t o f the cargo i n containers, trailers,
r o l l trailers a n d lorries shall be assumed e q u a l t o 0 , 7 1 .
1.6.5 W h e r e t h e a r r a n g e m e n t o f s p a c e s o r t h e
service c o n d i t i o n s o f the ship are such t h a t the ex
pediency o f the application o f other permeability i n
dices r e s u l t i n g i n m o r e severe r e q u i r e m e n t s is evident,
the R e g i s t e r is e n t i t l e d t o r e q u i r e t h e a p p l i c a t i o n o f
those permeability indices.
P a r t V.
Subdivision
353
2 PROBABILITY ESTIMATION OF SUBDIVISION

2.1
G E N E R A L
2.3 A T T A I N E D S U B D I V I S I O N I N D E X A
2.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t S e c t i o n
apply t o cargo ships h a v i n g the l e n g t h L \ > 80 m a n d
t o a l l passenger ships regardless o f their l e n g t h except
t h o s e ships, w h o s e types a r e specified i n 1.1.1.2,
1.1.1.3, 1.1.1.5 t o 1.1.1.9, 1.1.1.19, 1.1.1.20, ships
specified i n 1.1.1.4, i f n o t i n t e n d e d f o r t h e c a r r i a g e o f
deck cargo, as w e l l as nuclear ships a n d nuclear
floating facilities.
2.1.1 W h e n c h e c k i n g t h e p r o b a b i l i s t i c r e q u i r e
m e n t s f o r such ships t h e regulations o f E x p l a n a t o r y
Notes t o the S O L A S Chapter II-1 shall be taken into
consideration (refer t o C o l l e c t i o n o f R e g u l a t i n g
Documents, b o o k nineteen, 2010).
2.3.1 T h e a t t a i n e d s u b d i v i s i o n i n d e x A i s o b t a i n e d
b y t h e s u m m a t i o n o f the p a r t i a l indices A , A a n d A
calculated f o r the draughts d, d a n d d i n accordance
w i t h the following f o r m u l a
s
A = 0 , 4 A + 0 , 4 A + 0,2Ais
R = 1-128/(2^+152);
.2 i n t h e c a s e o f c a r g o s h i p s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h
80 < 4 < 100 m
(2.3.1-1)
Each partial index is a s u m m a t i o n o f contribu

t i o n s f r o m a l l d a m a g e cases t a k e n i n c o n s i d e r a t i o n ,
using thefollowing formula
A=Yp
where
2.2 R E Q U I R E D S U B D I V I S I O N I N D E X R
2.2.1 T h e s u b d i v i s i o n o f a s h i p i s c o n s i d e r e d
sufficient i f t h e attained subdivision index A , de
t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2 . 3 , i s n o t less t h a n t h e
required subdivision index R calculated i n accordance
w i t h 2.2.2 a n d if, i n addition, the p a r t i a l indices A , A
a n d A a r e n o t l e s s t h a n 0,9 f o r p a s s e n g e r s h i p s
a n d 0,5 f o r c a r g o s h i p s .
2.2.2 F o r a l l s h i p s t o w h i c h t h e d a m a g e s t a b i l i t y
requirements o f this C h a p t e r apply, t h e degree o f
subdivision t o be provided shall be determined b y the
required s u b d i v i s i o n i n d e x R, as f o l l o w s :
.1 i n t h e case o f c a r g o ships h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h
L >\
m
(2.3.1-2)
f i i
i represents each compartment o rgroup o f compart

ments under consideration;
Pi accounts for the probability that only the compart
ment or group of compartments under consideration
m a y b e flooded, disregarding any horizontal sub
d i v i s i o n , a s d e f i n e d i n 2.4;
Sf a c c o u n t s f o r t h e p r o b a b i l i t y o f s u r v i v a l a f t e r f l o o d
ing t h e compartment o r group o f compartments
u n d e r consideration, a n d includes the effect o f a n y
h o r i z o n t a l s u b d i v i s i o n , a s d e f i n e d i n 2.5.
2.3.2 I n t h e c a l c u l a t i o n o f A , t h e l e v e l t r i m s h a l l
be used f o r t h e deepest s u b d i v i s i o n d r a u g h t a n d t h e
p a r t i a l s u b d i v i s i o n d r a u g h t . T h e a c t u a l service t r i m
shall b e used f o r t h e l i g h t service d r a u g h t . I f i n a n y
service c o n d i t i o n , t h e t r i m v a r i a t i o n i n c o m p a r i s o n
w i t h t h e calculated t r i m i s greater t h a n 0,5 per cent o f
L , one o r m o r e additional calculations o f A aret obe
submitted for t h e same draughts b u t different trims
so t h a t , f o r a l l service c o n d i t i o n s , t h e difference i n
t r i m i n c o m p a r i s o n w i t h t h e reference t r i m used f o r
o n e c a l c u l a t i o n w i l l b e less t h a n 0 , 5 p e r c e n t o f L .
s
2.3.3 W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e p o s i t i v e r i g h t i n g l e
ver o f t h e residual stability curve, t h e constant dis
placement m e t h o d o f calculation shall be used.
2.3.4 T h e s u m m a t i o n i n d i c a t e d b y t h e a b o v e
f o r m u l a shall be t a k e n o v e r t h e ship's s u b d i v i s i o n
l e n g t h L f o r a l l cases o f f l o o d i n g i n w h i c h a single
c o m p a r t m e n t o r t w o o r m o r e adjacent c o m p a r t m e n t s
are i n v o l v e d . I n t h e case o f u n s y m m e t r i c a l arrange
ments, the calculated A value shall be the m e a n value
o b t a i n e d f r o m c a l c u l a t i o n s i n v o l v i n g b o t h sides. A l
ternatively, i t shall be taken as that corresponding t o
t h e side w h i c h e v i d e n t l y gives t h e least f a v o u r a b l e
result.
s
w h e r e =
thevalue R a s calculated i n accordance with the

f o r m u l a i n 2.2.2.1;
.3 i n t h e c a s e o f p a s s e n g e r s h i p s
R = l - 5 0 0 0 / ( ^ + 2,5JV+ 15215)
w h e r e N = Nx + IN^,
N\ = number o f persons for w h o m lifeboatsare provided;
N = n u m b e r o fpersons (including officers a n d crew) the
ship i s permitted t o carry i nexcess o f N \ ;
2
.4 w h e r e t h e c o n d i t i o n s o f service a r e s u c h t h a t
c o m p l i a n c e w i t h 2.2.2.3 o n t h e basis o f N = N \ + 2 N i s
impracticable a n d w h e r e t h e Register considers that a
s u i t a b l y r e d u c e d degree o f h a z a r d exists, a lesser v a l u e
o f N m a y b e t a k e n b u t i n n o c a s e less t h a n N = N \ + N .
2
2.3.5 W h e r e v e r w i n g c o m p a r t m e n t s a r e f i t t e d ,
contribution t o t h e s u m m a t i o n indicated b y F o r
m u l a (2.3.1-2) s h a l l b e t a k e n f o r a l l cases o f f l o o d i n g i n
which wing compartments are involved.Additionally,
cases o f s i m u l t a n e o u s f l o o d i n g o f a w i n g c o m p a r t m e n t
o r group o f c o m p a r t m e n t s a n d t h e adjacent i n b o a r d
compartment o rgroup o f compartments, but excluding
d a m a g e o f transverse extent greater t h a n one h a l f o f the
354
Rules
s h i p b r e a d t h B, m a y b e a d d e d . F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f 2 . 3 ,
t r a n s v e r s e e x t e n t i s m e a s u r e d i n b o a r d f r o m ship's side,
at r i g h t angle t o t h e centreline a t t h e level o f the deepest
subdivision draught.
2.3.6 I n t h e f l o o d i n g c a l c u l a t i o n s c a r r i e d o u t a c
cording t othe regulations, only one breach o f the hull
a n d o n l y o n e free surface need t o b e assumed. T h e
assumed vertical extent o f damage shall extend f r o m
the baseline u p w a r d s t o a n y w a t e r t i g h t h o r i z o n t a l
subdivision above the waterline o r higher. H o w e v e r ,
i f a lesser e x t e n t o f d a m a g e w i l l g i v e a m o r e severe
result, such extent shall be assumed.
2.3.7 I f p i p e s , d u c t s o r t u n n e l s a r e s i t u a t e d w i t h i n
the assumed extent o f damage, arrangements shall be
m a d e t o ensure that progressive flooding cannot
thereby extend t o compartments other t h a n those
assumed flooded. However, t h e Register m a y permit
m i n o r progressive flooding i f i t is demonstrated that
its effects c a n b e easily c o n t r o l l e d a n d t h e safety o f
the ship is n o t impaired.
and Construction
p(xlj,x2j)[r(xlj,x2j,b )
j + l
r(xlj+i^c2j i,bk-i)].
+
I f t h e damage involves three o r m o r e

zones:
i
J + n
+ n
+ n
+ n
j + b
j = the aftmost damage zone number involved i n the

d a m a g e starting w i t h N o . l a tt h e stern;
n = the n u m b e r o fadjacent d a m a g e zones involved i n the
damage;
= isthe n u m b e r o f a particular longitudinal bulkhead
as barrier f o r transverse penetration i n a d a m a g e
zone counted f r o m shell t o w a r d s t h e centreline. T h e
s h e l l h a s = 0;
xl = the distance f r o m the aft terminal o f L t othe aft e n d
of the zone i n question;
xl = t h e distance f r o m t h e a f t terminal o f L t o t h e
f o r w a r d e n d o fthe zone i n question;
b = the m e a n transverse distance i n metres measured a t
right angles t o t h e centreline a tt h e deepest subdivi
sion loadline between t h e shell a n d a n a s s u m e d
vertical plane extended between t h e longitudinal
limits used i ncalculating the factor p a n d which is a
tangent t o , o r c o m m o n with, a l lo r part o ft h e
outermost portion o f the longitudinal bulkhead
under consideration. This vertical plane shall b e s o
orientated that them e a n transverse distance t o the
shell isa m a x i m u m , b u tn o t m o r e t h a n twice the least
distance between the plane a n d t h e shell. I f t h e u p p e r
part o f a longitudinal b u l k h e a d is below the deepest
subdivision loadline t h e vertical plane used f o r
determination o f b is assumed to extend upwards
to t h e deepest subdivision waterline. I n a n y case, b
s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n g r e a t e r t h a n fl/2.
s
+n
Pi=p(x\ ,x2 )[r(x\ ,x2 ,b )-r(x\ ,x2 ,b - )\.

j
I f t h e damage involves t w o adjacent

Pi=P(.xlj,x2j )[r(xlj,x2
+ l
J + 1
,b )
k
zones:
- Kxlj^+Â-i)]
+ 1
+ n
w h e r e r ( x \ , x l , b ) = 0.
0
2.4.1.1 T h e f a c t o r p(xl, x 2 ) s h a l l b e c a l c u l a t e d
according t o t h e following formulae:
overall
normalized
m a x damage
length:
= /33;
knuckle point i n t h e distribution: = 5/33;
cumulative probability a t y : p = 11/12;
m a x i m u m absolute damage length: l
= 60 m ;
l e n g t h w h e r e n o r m a l i z e d d i s t r i b u t i o n ends:
L* = 260 m ;
probability density a t J = 0:
f a
max
= 2(^
- (l-p )l(J
~
When Z-^Z*:
J m i n { . / , lmaJL },
J =JJ2 +
b\ = b .
When L >L * \
y *=min{y
,
l /L*},
k
Jh,))-
m a x
m a x
^
(l-y/lHl^b^+Wbo'Jjybo,
m a x
m a x
J* = J * / 2 + ( l - ^ l - K l - V
k
* + l/4VJ *")/b ,
m
J =J *LVL ,
k
b\ = 2\ - ( l - p ) / ( J - J ) ] ,
b=
4(1- )/[(,-)]-2^,
b=
-2{\-p )l{J -J f,
b=
-b \J ;
the non-dimensional damage length:
/ = (x2x\)/L ;
2
2X
22
the normalized length o fa c o m p a r t m e n t o r group

of compartments:
J s h a l l b e t a k e n a s t h e lesser o f J a n d J .
2.4.1.1.1 W h e r e n e i t h e r l i m i t s o f t h e c o m p a r t m e n t
or group o fcompartments under consideration co
incides w i t h t h e a f t o r f o r w a r d terminals:
n
J<J
{\*2)
J> J :
k
=p
1/6[/(+ )],
12
p(x\,x2)=p
= - + 1/2(- b )f
( -)+
21
I f t h e damage involves a single zone only:
adjacent
p =p(x\j,x2 _ )[r(x\j,x2j _ b ) - r i x l j ^ j + ^ b b ^ ) ] p(x\j,x2j _ )[tix\j,x2j _2,b ) - r i x l j ^ j + ^ b ^ ) ] pixlj+^j+^lrixlj+bxlj+^bbk) - Kxl x2 - ,,_iA_i)]

+p(xlj i^c2j _ )['i ^j+u
x2j ^ .b y-r(xlj ^c2j _ ,b - )]
2.4.1 T h e f a c t o r p f o r a c o m p a r t m e n t o r g r o u p o f
c o m p a r t m e n t s shall be calculated i naccordance w i t h
2 . 4 . 1 . 1 . 1 a n d 2.2 u s i n g t h e f o l l o w i n g n o t a t i o n s :
Ships
- K x b ^ A - i ) ] ~ P(xlj+j,x2 )
[r(xlj+i,x2j+i,bk)
2.4 C A L C U L A T I O N O F T H E F A C T O R p,
of Sea-Going
12
V 2 ( b j - \
2 1
22
- 4 ) + b j(j
22
b JJ 12
- j ).
k
2.4.1.1.2 W h e r e t h e a f t l i m i t o f t h e c o m p a r t m e n t
or group o fcompartments under consideration co
incides w i t h t h e a f t t e r m i n a l o r t h e f o r w a r d l i m i t o f
the c o m p a r t m e n t o r group o f compartments under
consideration coincides w i t h the f o r w a r d terminal:
J^J
P a r t V.
Subdivision
355
{\&)
= l / 2 C p , + J),
J > Jkptxljcl)
= l/2(p
2.5.1.1 T h e f a c t o r s , f o r a n y d a m a g e c a s e a t a n y
i n i t i a l l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n , d, s h a l l b e o b t a i n e d f r o m
the f o r m u l a
t
+ J).
2.4.1.1.3 W h e r e t h e c o m p a r t m e n t o r g r o u p s o f
compartments considered extends o v e r t h e entire sub
division length L :
p ( x l , x2) = 1.
2.4.1.2 T h e f a c t o r r ( x l , j c 2 , b ) s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y
1) = 1 - (1 - Q [ l - G / p ( x l , x 2 ) ]
Sj TDHl(Sintermediatej
where
where = 12/ (- 45J

w h e r e J = Z>/(15fl).
4
X S/no ,()
m
ftnau
mom,i
2.5.2 T h e f a c t o r s ediate,i
i s applicable o n l y t o
p a s s e n g e r s h i p s ( f o r c a r g o s h i p s s ermediate,t s h b e t a
k e n a s u n i t y ) a n d s h a l l b e t a k e n a s t h e l e a s t o f t h e sfactors obtained f r o m a l l f l o o d i n g stages i n c l u d i n g t h e
stage before equalization, i f any, a n d shall b e calculated
as f o l l o w s :
interm
+ 4)
a u
int
2.4.1.2.1 W h e r e t h e c o m p a r t m e n t o r g r o u p s o f
compartments considered extends o v e r t h e entire sub
division length L :
s
G=G =l/2bu4
1
Sintermediate,i = [ { G Z J 0 , 0 5 J R a n g e l l )
buS -
2.4.1.2.2 W h e r e n e i t h e r l i m i t s o f t h e c o m p a r t m e n t o r
group o f compartments under consideration coincides
w i t h the aft o r forward terminals:
G = G = - \ l 3 b j % + (b J2
na
i n t e r m e l l i a t R i
Sfi ij
= the p r o b a b i l i t y t o s u r v i v e a l l i n t e r m e d i a t e
flooding
s t a g e s u n t i l t h e final e q u i l i b r i u m s t a g e , a n d
i s c a l c u l a t e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2.5.2;
t h e p r o b a b i l i t y t o s u r v i v e i n t h e final e q u i l i b r i u m s t a g e
o f flooding. I t i s c a l c u l a t e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2.5.3;
the probability t o survive heeling m o m e n t s , a n d is
c a l c u l a t e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2.5.4.
b yl
12
b JJ
12
w h e r e Jo = ( ) .
2.4.1.2.3 W h e r e t h e a f t l i m i t o f t h e c o m p a r t m e n t o r
group o f compartments under consideration coincides
with theaftterminal o rthe forward limit o f the com
partment o rgroup o f compartments under consideration
coincides w i t h t h e f o r w a r d terminal:
where GZ
m a x
V A
i
s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n a s m o r e t h a n 0,05 m a n d R a n g e a s
n o t m o r e t h a n 7. s
= 0, i f t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e h e e l
a n g l e e x c e e d s 15. W h e r e c r o s s - f l o o d i n g fittings a r e
required, t h e time f o requalization shall n o t e x
c e e d 10 m i n .
i n t e n n e d i a t e
2.5.3 T h e f a c t o r
formula
Sfinau =
shall beobtained f r o m the
K[(GZ
m s x
/0,l2)(Rangen6)]
where GZ
s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n a s m o r e t h a n 0,12 m ;
R a n g e s h a l l n o t b e t a k e n a s m o r e t h a n 16;
m s o l l
= 1 , ^
= 0, 9 ^ 9
;
] ( - ^ - )
G = l / 2 ( G + Gi7).
2
otherwise,
w h e r e 9, i s 7 f o r p a s s e n g e r s h i p s a n d 25 f o r c a r g o s h i p s ;
9 m a x i s 15 f o r p a s s e n g e r s h i p s a n d 30 f o r c a r g o s h i p s .
2.5 C A L C U L A T I O N O F T H E F A C T O R s,
2.5.4 T h e f a c t o r i
is applicable o n l y t o pas
senger ships ( f o r cargo ships
shall be taken as
unity) a n d shall be calculated a tt h e final e q u i h b r i u m
from the formula
M f f l i i
2.5.1 T h e f a c t o r s s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d f o r e a c h
case o f a s s u m e d f l o o d i n g , i n v o l v i n g a c o m p a r t m e n t
or group o fcompartments, i naccordance w i t h t h e
following notations a n d t h e provisions i n this
regulation.
0 i s t h e e q u i l i b r i u m heel angle i n a n y stage o f
f l o o d i n g , i n degrees;
0 i s t h e angle, i n a n y stage o f f l o o d i n g , w h e r e t h e
righting lever becomes negative, o r the angle at w h i c h a n
opening incapable o f being closed weathertight becomes
submerged;
GZmax is the m a x i m u m positive righting lever, i n m ,
up t o t h e angle 0 ;
Range i s t h e range o f positive r i g h t i n g levers,
i n deg., m e a s u r e d f r o m t h e angle 0 . T h e p o s i t i v e
range is t o b e taken u p t o t h e angle 0 ;
F l o o d i n g stage i s a n y discrete step d u r i n g t h e
f l o o d i n g process, i n c l u d i n g t h e stage before e q u a l i z a t i o n
(if a n y ) u n t i l final e q u i l i b r i u m h a s been reached.
t
(GZ
m a x
^DisplacementjM
h e e l
w h e r e Displacement
= t h eintact displacement a tthe subdivision
draught;
Mheei the m a x i m u m a s s u m e dheeling m o m e n t as calculated
i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2.5.4.1;
=
2.5.4.1 T h e h e e l i n g m o m e n t M ^ e i s h a l l b e c a l c u
lated as follows:
Mheel
^^-{A^passengeri
^windi
M-survivalcrafi)'
2.5.4.1.1 Messenger
is t h e m a x i m u m assumed
heeling m o m e n t resulting f r o m m o v e m e n t o f pas
sengers, a n d shall b e o b t a i n e d as f o l l o w s :
Mpassenger
= (0,075^)(0,45)
356
Rules
where
= the m a x i m u m n u m b e r o fpassengers permitted to b e

on b o a r d i n t h eservice condition corresponding to
the d e e p e s t s u b d i v i s i o n d r a u g h t u n d e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n ;
= t h eb e a m o f the ship.
p
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
equivalent means o f sufficient cross-section t o ensure

that the flow o f water into the equalization com
partments is n o t delayed.
2.5.5.2 I n a l l c a s e s , s s h a l l b e t a k e n a s z e r o i n
t h o s e c a s e s w h e r e t h e final w a t e r l i n e , t a k i n g i n t o a c
count sinkage, heel a n d t r i m , immerses:
.1 t h e l o w e r e d g e o f o p e n i n g s t h r o u g h w h i c h
progressive f l o o d i n g m a y take place a n d such f l o o d
i n g i s n o t a c c o u n t e d f o r i n t h e c a l c u l a t i o n o f f a c t o r s.
S u c h openings shall include air-pipes, ventilators a n d
openings w h i c h are closed b y means o f weathertight
doors o r h a t c h covers; a n d
.2 a n y p a r t o f t h e b u l k h e a d d e c k i n p a s s e n g e r
ships considered a h o r i z o n t a l e v a c u a t i o n r o u t e f o r
compliance with Part V I "Fire Protection".
2.5.5.3 T h e f a c t o r s s h a l l b e t a k e n a s z e r o i f ,
taking i n t o account sinkage, heel a n dt r i m , a n yo f the
f o l l o w i n g occur i n a n y i n t e r m e d i a t e stage o r i n t h e
final s t a g e o f f l o o d i n g :
.1 i m m e r s i o n o f a n y v e r t i c a l e s c a p e h a t c h i n t h e
bulkhead deck intended f o r compliance w i t h P a r t V I
"Fire Protection";
.2 a n y c o n t r o l s i n t e n d e d f o r t h e o p e r a t i o n o f
w a t e r t i g h t d o o r s , e q u a l i z a t i o n devices, valves o n
piping o r o n v e n t i l a t i o n ducts intended t o m a i n t a i n
the integrity o fwatertight bulkheads f r o m above the
b u l k h e a d deck become inaccessible o r inoperable;
3 immersion o f a n y part o f piping o r ventilation
ducts carried t h r o u g h a w a t e r t i g h t b o u n d a r y t h a t is
located w i t h i n a n y c o m p a r t m e n t included i n damage
cases c o n t r i b u t i n g t o t h e a t t a i n e d i n d e x A , i f n o t f i t t e d
w i t h watertight means o fclosure a t each boundary.
2.5.5.4 H o w e v e r , w h e r e c o m p a r t m e n t s a s s u m e d
flooded d u e t o progressive flooding are taken i n t o
account i n the damage stability calculations multiple
values o f s
m a y be calculated assuming
equalization i n a d d i t i o n a l f l o o d i n g phases.
2.5.5.5 E x c e p t a s p r o v i d e d i n 2 . 5 . 5 . 3 . 1 , o p e n i n g s
closed b y means o f watertight m a n h o l e covers a n d
flush scuttles, s m a l l w a t e r t i g h t h a t c h covers, r e m o t e l y
o p e r a t e d s l i d i n g w a t e r t i g h t d o o r s , side scuttles o f t h e
n o n - o p e n i n g t y p e as w e l l as w a t e r t i g h t access d o o r s
a n d h a t c h covers r e q u i r e d t o be k e p t closed a t sea
need n o t be considered.
2.5.6 W h e r e h o r i z o n t a l w a t e r t i g h t b o u n d a r i e s a r e
fitted
above the waterline under
consideration
the s-value calculated f o r t h e l o w e r c o m p a r t m e n t o r
group o f compartments shall be obtained b y multi
p l y i n g t h e value as determined i n 2.5.1.1 b y t h e r e
duction factor v
according t o 2.5.6.1, w h i c h
represents t h e p r o b a b i l i t y t h a t t h e spaces a b o v e t h e
horizontal subdivision will n o t be flooded.
2.5.6.1 T h e f a c t o r v s h a l l b e o b t a i n e d f r o m t h e
formula
t
Alternatively, t h e heeling m o m e n t m a y be cal

culated assuming t h e passengers are distributed w i t h
4 persons p e r m o n available deck areas t o w a r d s o n e
side o f t h e ship o n t h e decks w h e r e m u s t e r s t a t i o n s
are located a n d i n such a w a y that they produce t h e
m o s t adverse heeling m o m e n t . I n d o i n g so, a w e i g h t
o f 7 5 k g p e r passenger shall be assumed.
2.5.4.1.2 M
is the m a x i m u m assumed w i n d
force acting i n a damage situation:
2
w i n d
M
where
w i n d
(PAZ)06
P = 120 N / m ;
A = projected lateral area a b o v e waterline;
Z = distance f r o m centre o flateral projected area above
w a t e r l i n e t o /2;
T = s h i p ' s d r a u g h t , d\.
2.5.4.1.3 M
aicraft is t h e m a x i m u m assumed
heeling m o m e n t due t o the launching o f a l l fully
l o a d e d d a v i t - l a u n c h e d s u r v i v a l c r a f t o n o n e side o f
the ship. I t shall be calculated using t h e f o l l o w i n g
assumptions:
all l i f e b o a t s a n d rescue b o a t s f i t t e d o n t h e side
to w h i c h t h e ship h a s heeled after h a v i n g sustained
damage shall be assumed t o be swung o u t fully loa
ded a n d ready f o rlowering;
for lifeboats w h i c h are arranged t o be launched
fully loaded f r o m the stowed position, the m a x i m u m
heeling m o m e n t during launching shall be taken;
a fully loaded davit-launched liferaft attached
to e a c h d a v i t o n t h e side t o w h i c h t h e ship h a s heeled
after h a v i n g sustained damage shall be assumed t o be
swung o u t ready f o rlowering;
persons n o ti n t h e life-saving appliances w h i c h
are s w u n g o u t shall n o t provide either additional
heeling o r righting m o m e n t ;
l i f e - s a v i n g appliances o n t h e side o f t h e s h i p o p
p o s i t e t o t h e side t o w h i c h t h e ship h a s heeled s h a l l be
assumed t o be i n a stowed position.
2.5.5 U n s y m m e t r i c a l f l o o d i n g s h a l l b e k e p t t o a
m i n i m u m consistent w i t h t h e efficient arrangements.
W h e r e i t is necessary t o correct large angles o f heel, t h e
m e a n s adopted shall, w h e r e practicable, be self-acting,
b u t i n a n y case w h e r e c o n t r o l s t o e q u a l i z a t i o n devices
are p r o v i d e d they shall be operable f r o m above t h e
b u l k h e a d deck. These fittings together w i t h their c o n
trols shall be approved b y the Register . Suitable i n
f o r m a t i o n c o n c e r n i n g t h e u s e o f e q u a l i z a t i o n devices
shall be supplied t o t h e master o f t h e ship.
s u r v i V
2.5.5.1 T a n k s a n d c o m p a r t m e n t s t a k i n g p a r t i n
such equalization shall be fitted w i t h a i r pipes o r
^ e f e r t o MSC.245(83).
i n t e r m e d i a t e i i
Vm = v ( H j ^ , d ) ~
v(Hj,,m-l,d)
P a r t V.
Subdivision
where H _
357
- the least height above the baseline, i n m , within the

l o n g i t u d i n a l r a n g e o f 1...2 _1) o f t h e m t h
horizontal b o u n d a r y which is a s s u m e d t o limit the
vertical extent o f flooding f o r the d a m a g e d compart
Hj/i,m-i
the least height above the baseline, i n metres, within the
longitudinal range o f x l g ^ . j ^ + n - i ) o f t h e ( m - l ) t h
horizontal b o u n d a r y which is a s s u m e d t o limit the
vertical extent o f flooding f o r the d a m a g e d compart
j signifies the aft terminal o f the d a m a g e d compartments
under consideration;
m represents each horizontal b o u n d a r y counted u p
wards f r o m the waterline under consideration;
d = t h e d r a u g h t i n q u e s t i o n a s d e f i n e d i n 1.2;
xl a n d x 2represent the terminals o f the compartment or group
o f c o m p a r t m e n t s c o n s i d e r e d i n r e g u l a t i o n 2.4.
J n
2.6.2 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h e s u b d i v i s i o n a n d
damage stability calculations o fthe regulations, the
permeability o f each cargo c o m p a r t m e n t o r part o f a
c o m p a r t m e n t shall be as follows:
Spaces
Permeability Permeability Permeability

a t d r a u g h t d a t d r a u g h t d a t d r a u g h t di
s
Dry cargo spaces

Container spaces
R o - r o spaces
Cargo liquids
0,70
0,70
0,90
0,70
0,80
0,80
0,90
0,80
0,95
0,95
0,95
0,95
T h e f a c t o r s v { H , d) a n d v ( / ^ _ b d) s h a l l b e
obtained from the formulae:
j i n
v ( H , d ) = 0 , 8 ( # - fiO/7,8 i f { H - d ) i s l e s s t h a n , o r
equal to, 7,8 m ;
v(H,d) = 0 , 8 + 0 , 2 [ ( # fi!)-7,8]/4,7
i n all other
cases
m
w h e r e v(Hj, _ , d) s h a l l b e t a k e n a s 1 , i f H c o i n c i d e s w i t h t h e
uppermost watertight boundary o f the ship within
t h e r a n g e ( x l ^ . j ^ + n - i ) , a n d v(fl,; o,d) s h a l l b e
t a k e n a s 0.
m
2.6.3 O t h e r f i g u r e s f o r p e r m e a b i l i t y m a y b e u s e d
if substantiated b y calculations.
2.7 S P E C I A L R E Q U I R E M E N T S C O N C E R N I N G
P A S S E N G E R SHD? S T A B I L I T Y
ni
2.7.1 A p a s s e n g e r s h i p i n t e n d e d t o c a r r y 4 0 0 o r
m o r e persons shall have watertight subdivision abaft
the collision bulkhead so that s = 1 f o rt h e three
loading conditions o n w h i c h is based t h e calculation
of the subdivision index a n dfor a damage involving
all t h e c o m p a r t m e n t s w i t h i n 0,08Z,j m e a s u r e d f r o m
the f o r w a r d perpendicular.
2.7.2 A p a s s e n g e r s h i p i n t e n d e d t o c a r r y 3 6 o r m o r e
persons shall be capable o f withstanding damage along
t h e side shell t o a n e x t e n t specified i n 2.7.3.3. C o m
pliance w i t h this regulation shall be achieved b y de
m o n s t r a t i n g t h a t s a s d e f i n e d i n 2 . 5 , i s n o t less t h a n 0 , 9
for the three loading conditions o n w h i c h is based t h e
calculation o f the subdivision index.
2.7.3 T h e d a m a g e e x t e n t t o b e a s s u m e d w h e n
d e m o n s t r a t i n g compliance w i t h 2.7.2, shall be de
p e n d e n t o n b o t h N as d e f i n e d i n 2.2, a n d L a s d e f i n e d
i n 1.2, s u c h t h a t :
.1 t h e v e r t i c a l e x t e n t o f d a m a g e s h a l l e x t e n d f r o m
the ship's m o u l d e d baseline t o a p o s i t i o n u p t o 12,5 m
above the p o s i t i o n o f the deepest subdivision d r a u g h t
as d e f i n e d i n 1.2, u n l e s s a lesser v e r t i c a l e x t e n t o f
d a m a g e w e r e t o g i v e a l o w e r v a l u e o f s, i n w h i c h c a s e
this reduced extent shall be used;
.2 w h e r e 4 0 0 o r m o r e p e r s o n s s h a l l b e c a r r i e d , a
d a m a g e l e n g t h o f 0 , 0 3 L b u t n o t less t h a n 3 m s h a l l b e
a s s u m e d a t a n y p o s i t i o n a l o n g t h e side shell, i n c o n
j u n c t i o n w i t h a p e n e t r a t i o n i n b o a r d o f 0,1.8 b u t
n o t less t h a n 0,75 m m e a s u r e d i n b o a r d f r o m t h e s h i p
side, a t r i g h t angle t o t h e c e n t r e l i n e a t t h e level o f t h e
deepest subdivision draught;
t
I n n o case s h a l l v b e t a k e n a s less t h a n z e r o o r
more than 1.
2.5.6.2 I n g e n e r a l , e a c h c o n t r i b u t i o n dA t o t h e
i n d e x A i n t h e case o f h o r i z o n t a l s u b d i v i s i o n s i s o b
tained from the formula
m
+ ( V - vOSmirf + - . . +(1 - V m - ^ m i n
dA=p [v S i
i
where
min
Smin
= t h e v - v a l u e c a l c u l a t e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2.5.6.1;
the least j-factor f o r a l l combinations o f damages
o b t a i n e d w h e n t h e a s s u m e d d a m a g e e x t e n d s from t h e
assumed damage height H
downwards.
m
2.6
PERMEABILITY
2.6.1 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h e s u b d i v i s i o n a n d
damage stability calculations o fthe regulations, the
permeability o f each general c o m p a r t m e n t o r part o f
a c o m p a r t m e n t shall be as follows:
Spaces
Appropriated t o stores
Occupied by accommodation
Occupied by machinery
V o i d spaces
Intended for liquids
Permeability
0,60
0,95
0,85
0,95
0 o r 0.95
' w h i c h e v e r results i nthe m o r e severe requirement.
358
Rules
.3 w h e r e l e s s t h a n 4 0 0 p e r s o n s a r e c a r r i e d , d a m a g e l e n g t h s h a l l be a s s u m e d a t a n y p o s i t i o n a l o n g
t h e shell side b e t w e e n t r a n s v e r s e w a t e r t i g h t b u l k heads p r o v i d e d that the distance between t w o adj a c e n t t r a n s v e r s e w a t e r t i g h t b u l k h e a d s is n o t less t h a n
the assumed d a m a g e length. I f the distance between
a d j a c e n t t r a n s v e r s e w a t e r t i g h t b u l k h e a d s is less t h a n
the assumed d a m a g e length, o n l y one o f these b u l k heads shall be considered effective f o r the purpose o f
d e m o n s t r a t i n g compliance w i t h 2.7.2;
.4 w h e r e 3 6 p e r s o n s a r e c a r r i e d , a d a m a g e l e n g t h
o f 0 , 0 1 5 L b u t n o t less t h a n 3 m s h a l l b e a s s u m e d , i n
c o n j u n c t i o n w i t h a p e n e t r a t i o n i n b o a r d o f 0,05.8 b u t
n o t less t h a n 0 , 7 5 m ;
.5 w h e r e m o r e t h a n 3 6 , b u t f e w e r t h a n 4 0 0 p e r sons are carried the values o f d a m a g e length a n d
penetration inboard, used i n the determination o f the
assumed extent o f damage, shall be o b t a i n e d b y l i n ear i n t e r p o l a t i o n between the values o f d a m a g e
length a n d penetration w h i c h apply f o r ships c a r r y i n g
3 6 p e r s o n s a n d 4 0 0 p e r s o n s as s p e c i f i e d i n 2 . 7 . 3 . 2
a n d 2.7.3.4.
2.7.4 P a s s e n g e r ships c a r r y i n g 3 6 o r m o r e p e r s o n s
shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h f l o o d i n g detection systems
giving an audible and visual a l a r m for watertight
spaces b e l o w t h e b u l k h e a d deck. A n y w a t e r t i g h t
spaces t h a t are separately e q u i p p e d w i t h a l i q u i d level
m o n i t o r i n g s y s t e m ( s u c h as f r e s h w a t e r , b a l l a s t w a t e r ,
fuel, etc.), w i t h a n i n d i c a t o r p a n e l o r o t h e r m e a n s o f
m o n i t o r i n g at the n a v i g a t i o n bridge ( a n d the safety
centre i f located i n a separate space f r o m the n a v i g a t i o n bridge), are excluded f r o m these requirements.
S
2.7.4.1 A f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n s y s t e m s h a l l be f i t t e d
i n a l l w a t e r t i g h t spaces b e l o w t h e b u l k h e a d d e c k o f
t h e passenger ship t h a t h a v e a v o l u m e , i n m , t h a t is
m o r e t h a n the ship's m o u l d e d displacement per 1 c m
i m m e r s i o n at deepest subdivision d r a u g h t o r have a
v o l u m e m o r e t h a n 30 m , w h i c h e v e r is greater.
2.7.4.2 T h e n u m b e r a n d l o c a t i o n o f f l o o d i n g detection sensors shall be sufficient t o ensure t h a t a n y
s u b s t a n t i a l w a t e r ingress is detected u n d e r reasonable
angles o f t r i m a n d heel. T o accomplish this, f l o o d i n g
d e t e c t i o n sensors s h a l l g e n e r a l l y be i n s t a l l e d as i n dicated below:
. 1 v e r t i c a l l o c a t i o n sensors s h a l l be i n s t a l l e d as
l o w as p r a c t i c a l i n t h e w a t e r t i g h t space;
.2 l o n g i t u d i n a l l o c a t i o n i n w a t e r t i g h t spaces
located f o r w a r d o f the m i d - l e n g t h , sensors shall
generally be i n s t a l l e d a t t h e f o r w a r d e n d o f t h e space;
a n d i n w a t e r t i g h t spaces l o c a t e d a f t o f t h e m i d - l e n g t h ,
sensors shall generally be installed at the aft e n d o f
t h e space. F o r w a t e r t i g h t spaces l o c a t e d i n t h e v i c i n i t y o f the m i d - l e n g t h , c o n s i d e r a t i o n shall be g i v e n t o
the a p p r o p r i a t e l o n g i t u d i n a l l o c a t i o n o f the sensor.
I n a d d i t i o n , a n y w a t e r t i g h t space o f m o r e t h a n L / 5
in length or w i t h arrangements that w o u l d seriously
3
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
restrict the l o n g i t u d i n a l f l o w o f w a t e r shall be p r o vided w i t h sensors at b o t h the f o r w a r d a n d aft ends;

.3 t r a n s v e r s e l o c a t i o n s e n s o r s s h a l l g e n e r a l l y b e
installed a t the centreline o f the space ( o r a l t e r n a t i v e l y
a t b o t h t h e p o r t a n d s t a r b o a r d sides). I n a d d i t i o n , a n y
w a t e r t i g h t space t h a t extends t h e f u l l b r e a d t h o f t h e
ship o r w i t h arrangements that w o u l d seriously restrict
t h e transverse f l o w o f w a t e r s h a l l be p r o v i d e d w i t h
s e n s o r s a t b o t h t h e p o r t a n d s t a r b o a r d sides.
2.7.4.3 W h e r e a w a t e r t i g h t space e x t e n d s i n
h e i g h t o v e r m o r e t h a n o n e deck, t h e r e s h a l l be a t least
one f l o o d i n g detection sensor at each deck level. T h i s
p r o v i s i o n is n o t a p p l i c a b l e i n cases w h e r e a c o n t i n u o u s f l o o d l e v e l m o n i t o r i n g s y s t e m is i n s t a l l e d .
2.7.4.4 F o r w a t e r t i g h t spaces w i t h u n u s u a l a r r a n g e m e n t s o r i n o t h e r cases w h e r e these guidelines
w o u l d n o t achieve the intended purpose, the n u m b e r
a n d l o c a t i o n o f f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n sensors is subject
to special consideration b y the Register.
2.7.4.5 T h e sensors s h a l l be i n s t a l l e d w h e r e t h e y
are accessible f o r testing, m a i n t e n a n c e a n d repair.
2.7.4.6 O n ships t h e F l o o d i n g D e t e c t i o n S y s t e m
M a n u a l s h a l l be p r o v i d e d , w h i c h i n c l u d e s , as a
minimum:
.1 the f l o o d i n g detection system specification,
i n c l u d i n g a list o f procedures f o r c h e c k i n g the opera b i l i t y , as f a r as p r a c t i c a b l e , o f e a c h e l e m e n t a t a n y
stage o f the ship service;
.2 t h e T y p e A p p r o v a l C e r t i f i c a t e i s s u e d f o r t h e
flooding detection system;
.3 t h e s i n g l e - l i n e d i a g r a m o f t h e f l o o d i n g d e t e c tion system w i t h the location o f equipment indicated
i n the ship's general a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n ;
.4 t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s i n d i c a t i n g t h e l o c a t i o n , s e c u r ing, protection and testing o f the flooding detection
system equipment;
.5 t h e p r o c e d u r e s t o be f o l l o w e d i n case o f f a i l u r e
o f the flooding detection system;
.6 t h e m a i n t e n a n c e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e f l o o d i n g
detection system equipment.
T h e M a n u a l shall be i n the w o r k i n g language o f
t h e s h i p officers, as w e l l as i n E n g l i s h .
2.7.4.7 T h e f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n s y s t e m s h a l l c o m ply w i t h 7.10.3 a n d 7.10.4, P a r t X I " E l e c t r i c a l
Equipment".
2.7.5 Passenger ships h a v i n g the l e n g t h L \ > 120 m
o r h a v i n g three o r m o r e m a i n vertical zones shall be
provided with:
.1 o n b o a r d d a m a g e stability software approved
by R S ; or
.2 r a p i d access t o s h o r e - b a s e d c o m p u t e r i z e d
support organization, recognized by R S , w h i c h
m a k e s d a m a g e s t a b i l i t y a n d r e s i d u a l s t r e n g t h assessments, for the purpose o f providing operational i n f o r m a t i o n t o t h e m a s t e r f o r safe r e t u r n t o p o r t a f t e r
flooding casualty.
P a r t V.
Subdivision
359
2.8 T I M B E R D E C K C A R G O I N T H E C O N T E X T
OF D A M A G E STABILITY REQUIREMENTS
2.8.1 T i m b e r d e c k c a r g o m e a n s t h e f o l l o w i n g c a r g o
carried o n a n uncovered p a r t o f a freeboard o r superstructure deck: s a w n w o o d o r l u m b e r , cants, logs, poles,
p u l p w o o d a n d other types o f t i m b e r i n loose o r packaged f o r m s , except w o o d p u l p o r similar cargo.
2.8.2 T i m b e r d e c k c a r g o s h a l l b e p r o p e r l y s t o w e d
a n d secured.
2.8.3 T h e h e i g h t a n d e x t e n t o f t h e t i m b e r d e c k
cargo shall be at least s t o w e d t o the s t a n d a r d h e i g h t
o f one superstructure.
2.8.4 T h e p e r m e a b i l i t y o f t h e t i m b e r d e c k c a r g o
s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 2 5 p e r c e n t o f t h e v o l u m e o c c u pied by the cargo u p t o one standard superstructure.
2.8.5 T h e I n f o r m a t i o n o n S t a b i l i t y a n d I n f o r m a t i o n
o n D a m a g e T r i m a n d S t a b i l i t y f o r ships w i t h t i m b e r
deck cargoes m a y be supplemented b y a d d i t i o n a l curve
o f m a x i m u m permissible vertical positions o f centre o f
gravity o r m i n i m u m metacentric heights covering the
timber draught range considering m a x i m u m permissible
vertical p o s i t i o n o f centre o f g r a v i t y o r m i n i m u m m e t a centric height a t the deepest t i m b e r subdivision d r a u g h t
and the partial timber subdivision draught. T h e m i n i m u m metacentric heights shall be v a r i e d linearly between
the deepest t i m b e r subdivision d r a u g h t a n d the p a r t i a l
timber subdivision draught, and between the partial
t i m b e r s u b d i v i s i o n d r a u g h t a n d t h e l i g h t service d r a u g h t ,
respectively. W h e r e t i m b e r freeboards are n o t assigned
the deepest a n d p a r t i a l draughts shall relate t o the
s u m m e r l o a d line. T h i s curve shall apply t o ships carrying timber deck cargo only.
2.8.6 W h e n c o n s i d e r i n g t h e v e r t i c a l e x t e n t o f d a m a g e , t h e u p p e r d e c k m a y b e r e g a r d e d as a h o r i z o n t a l
s u b d i v i s i o n . T h u s w h e n c a l c u l a t i n g d a m a g e cases a r e
limited vertically t o the upper deck w i t h the corresponding v-factor, the t i m b e r deck cargo m a y be c o n -
sidered t o
o f 0,25 a t
extending
buoyancy
remain buoyant w i t h a n assumed permeability

the deepest a n d p a r t i a l draught. F o r d a m a g e
above the upper deck the timber deck cargo
i n w a y o f the d a m a g e zone shall be ignored.
2.9 B O T T O M
DAMAGE
2.9.1 A n y p a r t o f a p a s s e n g e r s h i p o r a c a r g o s h i p
t h a t is n o t f i t t e d w i t h a d o u b l e b o t t o m shall be capable o f w i t h s t a n d i n g b o t t o m d a m a g e s , as specified
i n 2.9.3, i n that p a r t o f the ship.
2.9.2 I n t h e c a s e o f u n u s u a l b o t t o m a r r a n g e m e n t s
i n a passenger ship o r a cargo ship, i t s h a l l be dem o n s t r a t e d t h a t t h e ship is c a p a b l e o f w i t h s t a n d i n g
b o t t o m d a m a g e s as specified i n 2.9.3.
2.93 C o m p l i a n c e w i t h 2 . 9 . 1 o r 2 . 9 . 2 s h a l l b e
achieved b y demonstrating that s w h e n calculated i n
a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2 . 5 , i s n o t less t h a n 1 f o r a l l s e r v i c e
c o n d i t i o n s w h e n subject t o a b o t t o m d a m a g e a s s u m e d a t
a n y p o s i t i o n a l o n g the ship's b o t t o m a n d w i t h a n extent
specified i n 2.9.3.2 b e l o w f o r t h e affected p a r t o f t h e ship:
.1 f l o o d i n g o f s u c h spaces s h a l l n o t r e n d e r
emergency power and lighting, internal communicat i o n , signals o r o t h e r emergency devices i n o p e r a b l e i n
other parts o f the ship;
.2 a s s u m e d e x t e n t o f d a m a g e i s s p e c i f i e d i n T a ble 2.9.3.2;
3 i f a n y d a m a g e o f a lesser e x t e n t t h a n t h e m a x i m u m d a m a g e specified i n 2.9.3.2 w o u l d result i n a m o r e
severe c o n d i t i o n , s u c h d a m a g e s h a l l be considered.
2.9.4 I n c a s e o f l a r g e l o w e r h o l d s i n p a s s e n g e r
ships, the Register m a y require a n increased d o u b l e
b o t t o m h e i g h t o f n o t m o r e t h a n .8/10 o r 3 m ,
w h i c h e v e r is less, m e a s u r e d f r o m t h e k e e l l i n e . A l ternatively, b o t t o m d a m a g e s m a y be calculated f o r
these areas, i n accordance w i t h 2.9.3, b u t assuming
an increased vertical extent.
h
T a b l e
F o r 0,3 i j f r o m t h e f o r w a r d p e r p e n d i c u l a r o f t h e s h i p
Longjtudinal extent
Transverse extent
Vertical extent m e a s u r e d f r o m the keel line
1/3 i ' o r 14,5 m , w h i c h e v e r i s l e s s

fl/6 o r 10 m , w h i c h e v e r i s l e s s
2.9.3.2
A n y other part o f the ship

2
1/3 ' o r 14,5 m , w h i c h e v e r i s l e s s

3 DAMAGE TRIM AND STABILITY

3.1
GENERAL
3.1.1 U n d e r a l l l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s t o be enc o u n t e r e d i n service a n d w h i c h are i n a g r e e m e n t w i t h

the purpose o f the ship (icing disregarded), the t r i m
a n d stability o f a n i n t a c t ship shall be sufficient f o r
satisfying damage t r i m a n d stability requirements.
3.1.2 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e ship t r i m a n d stability

s h a l l be c o n s i d e r e d satisfied i f , i n case o f d a m a g e
m e n t i o n e d i n 3.2 a n d 3.4, w i t h t h e n u m b e r o f c o m p a r t m e n t s f l o o d e d as m e n t i o n e d i n 3.4, a n d t h e permeability determined
i n accordance w i t h
1.6,
c a l c u l a t i o n s m a d e i n c o n f o r m i t y w i t h 3.1.3 t o 3.1.7 i n d i c a t e t h a t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3 a n d 3 . 4 a r e s a t i s f i e d .
360
Rules
3.1.3 C a l c u l a t i o n s t o c o n f i r m c o m p l i a n c e w i t h
t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3 a n d 3.4 as r e g a r d s d a m a g e
t r i m a n d stability shall be p e r f o r m e d f o r such a
n u m b e r o f l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n s t o be e n c o u n t e r e d i n
service a n d being the m o s t u n f a v o u r a b l e f r o m the
point o f v i e w o f t r i m and stability (within the range
o f draughts u p t o the deepest subdivision l o a d line
a n d cargo d i s t r i b u t i o n stipulated by the design), such
d i s t r i b u t i o n a n d extent o f damage, t o be d e t e r m i n e d
i n accordance w i t h 3.2 a n d 3.4, that, p r o c e e d i n g f r o m
those calculations, o n e c o u l d assure t h a t i n a l l o t h e r
cases t h e d a m a g e d ship w o u l d be i n a b e t t e r c o n d i t i o n
as regards d a m a g e s t a b i l i t y , t h e r e s i d u a l f r e e b o a r d ,
distance f r o m the damage waterline t o openings
t h r o u g h w h i c h the ship m a y be f l o o d e d a n d heeling
angles. Besides, t h e f o l l o w i n g s h a l l be considered: t h e
actual configuration o f damaged compartments, their
permeabilities, type o f covers, whether intermediate
decks, p l a t f o r m s , d o u b l e sides, l o n g i t u d i n a l a n d
transverse bulkheads are provided sufficiently w a
t e r t i g h t as t o r e n d e r t h e f l o w o f w a t e r t h r o u g h t h e
ship completely o r t e m p o r a r i l y impossible.
3.1.4 W h e r e t h e d i s t a n c e b e t w e e n t w o c o n s e c u t i v e
m a i n t r a n s v e r s e b u l k h e a d s is less t h a n t h e l o n g
itudinal extent o f design damage, the relevant c o m
p a r t m e n t s h a l l , a t t h e d i s c r e t i o n o f t h e designer, be
added to any o f the adjacent compartments w h e n
checking damage stability. F o r non-passenger ships
r e l a x a t i o n f r o m this p r o v i s i o n m a y be g r a n t e d w h e r e
t h e a r r a n g e m e n t o f t h e b u l k h e a d is i n a g r e e m e n t w i t h
the condition A ^ R .
F o r e p e a k a n d a f t e r p e a k a r e c o n s i d e r e d t o b e se
parate c o m p a r t m e n t regardless o f the length.
3.1.5 W h e r e t w o a d j a c e n t c o m p a r t m e n t s a r e s e p a
rated f r o m each o t h e r b y a stepped b u l k h e a d , the
b u l k h e a d shall be h e l d f o r d a m a g e d w h e n the f l o o d i n g
o f a n y o f the t w o c o m p a r t m e n t s is considered.
W h e r e t h e l e n g t h o f t h e step does n o t exceed o n e
f r a m e o r 0 , 8 m , w h i c h e v e r i s less, o r w h e r e t h e s t e p i s
formed by floors o f the double b o t t o m , this requirement
m a y be dispensed w i t h i n case o f non-passenger ships.
3.1.6 I f a n y d a m a g e o f a l e s s e r e x t e n t t h a n s t a t e d
i n 3.2 a n d 3.4 m i g h t result i n a m o r e severe c o n d i t i o n
as r e g a r d s d a m a g e t r i m a n d s t a b i l i t y , s u c h a d a m a g e
s h a l l be c o n s i d e r e d w h e n m a k i n g c h e c k c a l c u l a t i o n s
for damage t r i m and stability.
3.1.7 W h e r e t h e r e a r e p i p e s , d u c t s o r t u n n e l s i n
t h e area o f a s s u m e d d a m a g e , these s h a l l be so de
signed t h a t n o w a t e r enters c o m p a r t m e n t s w h i c h are
considered n o t flooded.
3.1.8 F o r p a s s e n g e r s h i p s , t h e e q u a l i z a t i o n t i m e
w i l l be established o n a g r e e m e n t w i t h the Register
proceeding f r o m the ship type.
3.1.9 T h e a r r a n g e m e n t s f o r r i g h t i n g t h e s h i p a f t e r
d a m a g e shall be a p p r o v e d b y the Register a n d shall
be s e l f - a c t i n g as f a r as p r a c t i c a b l e .
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
W h e r e controllable cross-flooding arrangements

are available, side-valve c o n t r o l stations shall be l o
cated above the b u l k h e a d deck.
3.2 E X T E N T O F D E S I G N
DAMAGE
3.2.1 E x c e p t c a s e s s p e c i a l l y p r o v i d e d f o r , i n
c l u d i n g those stated i n 3.1.6, the f o l l o w i n g extent o f
side d a m a g e s h a l l be a s s u m e d w h e n m a k i n g d a m a g e
t r i m and stability calculations to c o n f i r m compliance
w i t h 3.3 a n d 3.4:
.1 l o n g i t u d i n a l extent: l / 3 L
o r 14,5 m ( w h i c h
ever is less);
.2 t r a n s v e r s e e x t e n t m e a s u r e d i n b o a r d o f s h i p s i d e a t
r i g h t angles t o t h e centreline at t h e l e v e l o f t h e deepest
s u b d i v i s i o n l o a d l i n e : 1/5 o f t h e s h i p b r e a d t h
o r 11,5 m ( w h i c h e v e r is t h e less);
.3 v e r t i c a l e x t e n t : f r o m t h e b a s e l i n e u p w a r d s
without limit.
3.2.2 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3 . 3 s h a l l b e c o m p l i e d
w i t h i n case o f s i m u l t a n e o u s f l o o d i n g o f a l l c o m
partments located f o r w a r d o f collision bulkhead.
2 / 3
3.3 R E Q U I R E M E N T S F O R D A M A G E T R I M
AND STABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
3.3.1 I n t h e f i n a l s t a g e o f f l o o d i n g , t h e i n i t i a l
metacentric height o f a ship i n the upright condition
determined by the constant displacement m e t h o d ,
s h a l l n o t be less t h a n 0 , 0 5 m b e f o r e a p p r o p r i a t e
measures t o increase the metacentric height are taken.
F o r non-passenger ships, a p o s i t i v e m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t
b e l o w 0,05 m m a y be p e r m i t t e d f o r the u p r i g h t c o n d i t i o n
i n t h e f i n a l stage o f f l o o d i n g o n t h e R e g i s t e r a p p r o v a l .
3.3.2 F o r u n s y m m e t r i c f l o o d i n g t h e a n g l e o f h e e l
shall n o t exceed:
20 b e f o r e e q u a l i z a t i o n m e a s u r e s a n d c r o s s flooding fittings being used;
12 a f t e r e q u a l i z a t i o n m e a s u r e s a n d c r o s s - f l o o d
ing fittings being used.
3.3.3 T h e s t a t i c s t a b i l i t y c u r v e o f a d a m a g e d s h i p
shall have a sufficient positive lever a r m section. I n
t h e final s t a g e o f f l o o d i n g , c r o s s - f l o o d i n g f i t t i n g s
disregarded, a n d after the equalization o f the ship, a
length o f positive lever a r m curve, flooding angle
c o n s i d e r e d , s h a l l b e e n s u r e d n o t l e s s t h a n 20. T h e
angle o f submersion o f the openings w h i c h are n o t
equipped w i t h watertight o r weathertight covers
t h r o u g h w h i c h w a t e r m a y spread t o intact compart
m e n t s m a y be t a k e n as f l o o d i n g angle.
T h e m a x i m u m lever a r m shall be at least 0,1 m
w i t h i n t h i s l e n g t h , i.e. w i t h i n t h e h e e l angle e q u a l t o
t h e s t a t i c o n e p l u s 20.
P a r t V.
Subdivision
T h e positive lever a r msection w i t h i n t h e said

e x t e n t s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 0 , 0 1 7 5 m - r a d .
I n t h e i n t e r m e d i a t e stages o f f l o o d i n g , t h e m a x
i m u m lever a r mo f t h e static stability curve shall be a t
least 0,05 m , a n d t h e l e n g t h o f i t s positive section
s h a l l n o t b e l e s s t h a n 7.
3.3.4 B e f o r e , d u r i n g a n d after e q u a l i z a t i o n , t h e d a m a g e
w a t e r l i n e s h a l l b e a t least 0 , 3 m o r 0,\\ 1 0 ) / 1 5 0 m
( w h i c h e v e r i s less) b e l o w t h e o p e n i n g s i n t h e b u l k h e a d s ,
d e c k s a n d sides t h r o u g h w h i c h p r o g r e s s i v e f l o o d i n g
c o u l d t a k e place. S u c h openings include t h e outlets o f air
a n d v e n t pipes a n d those w h i c h are closed b y m e a n s o f
weathertight d o o r s a n d covers.
These d o n o t necessarily include:
.1 n o n - o p e n i n g side a n d d e c k scuttles;
.2 m a n h o l e s h a v i n g c o v e r s w i t h c l o s e l y s p a c e b o l t s ;
.3 c a r g o t a n k h a t c h w a y s i n t a n k e r s ;
.4 r e m o t e l y c o n t r o l l e d s l i d i n g d o o r s , w a t e r t i g h t
d o o r s w i t h i n d i c a t i o n systems (except ships specified
i n 1.1.1.2, 1.1.1.5, 1.1.1.6 a n d 1.1.1.8) a n d access
hatches n o r m a l l y closed a t sea;
.5 o p e n i n g s i n s u b d i v i s i o n b u l k h e a d s i n t e n d e d f o r
the passage o f vehicles d u r i n g cargo h a n d l i n g o p
erations w h i c h a r e permanently closed w i t h strong
w a t e r t i g h t c o v e r s w h i l e a t sea. S u c h o p e n i n g s a r e o n l y
p e r m i t t e d f o r r o - r o ships.
T h e p o s i t i o n a n d arrangement o f closures o f
openings shall meet t h e requirements o f Section 7,
Part III "Equipment, Arrangement and Outfit".
T h e l o c a t i o n o f spaces f o r e m e r g e n c y sources o f
electrical p o w e r shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements
o f 9.2.1, Part X I "Electrical Equipment".
3.3.5 F o r c a r g o s h i p s , i m m e r s i o n o f t h e b u l k - h e a d
deck and, moreover, o f the weather deck is permitted.
3.3.6 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3 . 3 . 1 t o 3 . 3 . 5 a p p l y t o
ships specified i n 3.4 considering t h e a d d i t i o n a l r e
q u i r e m e n t s f o r d a m a g e t r i m a n d stability specific f o r
each ship type.
F o r ships n o t m e n t i o n e d i n 3.4 t h e requirements
o f 3.3.1 t o 3.3.5 apply, if, a t t h e shipowner's request,
the ship's class n o t a t i o n p r o v i d e s f o r t h e s u b d i v i s i o n
distinguishing m a r k .
3.4 A D D I T I O N A L R E Q U I R E M E N T S
FOR DAMAGE TRIM AND STABILITY
3.4.1 R o l l - o n / r o l l - o f f s h i p s s i m i l a r to p a s s e n g e r s h i p s .
W h e r e vehicles accompanied b y personnel o f
m o r e t h a n 12 persons including passengers ( i f a n y )
shall b e carried b y r o l l - o n / r o l l - o f f ships, such ships,
irrespective o f their length, shall be considered equal
t o passenger ships i n respect o f a l l relevant require
ments t o subdivision bearing i n m i n d t h eprovision
o f 3.3.4.5, i f applicable according t o 7.12.1.1, P a r t I I I
"Equipment, Arrangements and Outfit".
361
3.4.2 I c e b r e a k e r s a n d f i s h i n g v e s s e l s .
3.4.2.1 I n T a b l e 3 . 4 . 2 . 1 t h e n u m b e r o f c o m p a r t
ments is indicated after t h e flooding o f w h i c h t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3 f o r d a m a g e s t a b i l i t y c o n s i d e r i n g
d a m a g e as defined i n 3.2 shall b e satisfied. A r c t i c
ships o f ice categories I c e b r e a k e r 6 o r I c e b r e a k e r 7 ,
which perform icebreaking operations periodically,
as d e f i n e d i n 2 . 2 . 3 . 3 . 3 , P a r t I " C l a s s i f i c a t i o n " s h a l l
o n l y c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r d a m a g e sta
bility specified i n 3.4.2.2 a t d a m a g e extent a n d i t s
p o s i t i o n as d e f i n e d i n 3.4.2.3 a n d 3.4.2.4. D a m a g e as
defined i n 3.2is n o t considered f o r t h eabove m e n
t i o n e d ships.
T a b l e
3.4.2.1
T y p e o f ship
Length L\, inm
N u m b e r o f floodable
compartments
Icebreakers
Fishing vessels
h a v i n g o v e r 100
persons o n board
50 a n d u p w a r d s
100 a n d u p w a r d s
1
1
3.4.2.2 D a m a g e s t a b i l i t y o f s h i p s w i t h i c e c a t e
gories Icebreaker6, Icebreaker7, Icebreaker8, Ice
b r e a k e r shall be such that s = 1 f o r a l l loading
conditions i n case o f i c e d a m a g e specified i n 3.4.2.3, i n
positions as defined i n 3.4.2.4.
3.4.2.3 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f d a m a g e t r i m a n d s t a
b i l i t y c a l c u l a t i o n s , t h e f o l l o w i n g e x t e n t o f ice d a m a g e
shall be assumed:
1. l o n g i t u d i n a l e x t e n t 0,045Z, i f t h e c e n t r e o f
d a m a g e lies f o r w a r d o f t h e p o i n t o f m a x i m u m b e a m
o n t h e w a t e r l i n e r e l a t e d t o d r a u g h t c? , a n d 0 , 0 1 5 Z ,
i n o t h e r areas;
2. d a m a g e d e p t h 0 , 7 6 m a s m e a s u r e d a l o n g t h e
n o r m a l t o t h e shell a t a n y p o i n t i n t h e area o f as
sumed damage;
3. v e r t i c a l e x t e n t t h e l e s s e r o f 0 , 2 c? , o r o f
longitudinal extent;
4. l o c a t i o n o fice d a m a g e f r o m t h e base line t ot h e
l e v e l o f 1,2 d a n d w i t h i n L ; a n d
5. t h e v e r t i c a l e x t e n t o f d a m a g e m a y b e a s s u m e d
f r o m t h e base line t o t h e level o f
\,2d .
3.4.2.4 D a m a g e a s d e f i n e d i n 3.4.2.3 s h a l l b e a s
s u m e d a t a n y p o s i t i o n a l o n g t h e side shell i n t h e i c e
d a m a g e area.
3.4.3 S p e c i a l p u r p o s e s h i p s .
3.4.3.1 S p e c i a l p u r p o s e s h i p s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f S e c t i o n 2 related t o passenger ships,
a n d special p e r s o n n e l shall b e considered passengers.
W h e r e t h e s h i p i s c e r t i f i e d t o c a r r y less t h a n 2 4 0 p e r
sons, t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.7 a r e n o t applicable.
3.4.3.2 T h e r e q u i r e d s u b d i v i s i o n i n d e x R s h a l l b e
calculated as follows:
.1 w h e r e t h e s h i p i s c e r t i f i e d t o c a r r y 2 4 0 persons
o r m o r e , t h e -value s h a l l b e a s s i g n e d i n c o m p l i a n c e
w i t h 2.2.2.3;
t
I c e
fce
f c e
fce
ice
i c e
ice
362
Rules
.2 w h e r e t h e s h i p i s c e r t i f i e d t o c a r r y n o t m o r e
t h a n 6 0 p e r s o n s , t h e -value s h a l l b e a s s i g n e d a s 0 , 8 / i
determined i n compliance w i t h 2.2.2.3; a n d
.3 f o r m o r e t h a n 6 0 ( b u t n o t m o r e t h a n 2 4 0 )
p e r s o n s , t h e -value s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d b y l i n e a r
i n t e r p o l a t i o n b e t w e e n t h e -values g i v e n i n 3 . 4 . 3 . 2 . 1
a n d 3.4.3.2.2.
3.4.4 T u g s , d r e d g e r s , s a l v a g e s h i p s a n d l i g h t s h i p s .
3.4.4.1 I f a s i n g l e c o m p a r t m e n t i s f l o o d e d , t h e
requirements o f 3.3 f o r d a m a g e t r i m a n d stability
shall b e satisfied f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g types o f ships:
tugs h a v i n g t h e length L \ > 4 0 m ;
dredgers having t h e length L > 4 0 m ;
rescue ships a n d lightships irrespective o f length;
hopper dredgers having t h e length L \ > 60 m .
3.4.4.2 B u c k e t d r e d g e r s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3 i f a single c o m p a r t m e n t i s f l o o
ded i nw a yo ft h e bucket opening. T h edepth o f the
damage is assumed equal t o 0,76 m .
3.4.4.3 W h e r e h o p p e r d r e d g e r s a n d h o p p e r b a r
ges a r e c o n c e r n e d , d a m a g e c o n d i t i o n s m a y n o t b e
considered corresponding t o ship c o n d i t i o n after
s p o i l discharge f r o m o n e side.
3.4.5 O i l t a n k e r s a n d c h e m i c a l t a n k e r s .
3.4.5.1 T h e d a m a g e t r i m a n d s t a b i l i t y o f o i l
tankers a n d chemical tankers shall satisfy t h e r e
q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3 b o t h f o r t h e case o f side a n d b o t
t o m damage.
3.4.5.2 E x t e n t o f b o t t o m d a m a g e :
.1 t h e l o n g i t u d i n a l e x t e n t s h a l l b e 1/3Z,
o r 1 4 , 5 m ( w h i c h e v e r i s less) w i t h i n 0 , 3 L f r o m t h e
forward perpendicular (from t h e foremost point o f
t h e l e n g t h L ) a n d 1 / 3 Z , o r 5 m ( w h i c h e v e r i s less)
t h r o u g h t h e rest o f t h e ship length;
.2 t h e t r a n s v e r s e e x t e n t s h a l l b e /6 o r 1 0 m
( w h i c h e v e r i s less) w i t h i n 0 , 3 L i f r o m t h e f o r w a r d
p e r p e n d i c u l a r a n d B / 6 o r 5 m ( w h i c h e v e r i s less)
t h r o u g h t h e rest o f t h e ship length;
.3 t h e v e r t i c a l e x t e n t , m e a s u r e d f r o m t h e m o u l d e d
l i n e o f t h e s h e l l a t c e n t r e l i n e , s h a l l b e /15 o r 6 m
( w h i c h e v e r i s less).
3.4.5.3 I n a d d i t i o n t o 3 . 4 . 5 . 2 , b o t t o m s h e l l d a
mage shall be considered f o r o i l tankers w i t h a
deadweight o f20 000t a n dupwards, having touched
the ground, t h e extent o f damage being as follows:
.1 l e n g t h o f 0,6Z,i f r o m t h e f o r w a r d p e r p e n d i c u l a r
f o r ships h a v i n g a deadweight o f 7 5 0 0 0 t a n d u p
wards, a n d0,4L \ f r o m the f o r w a r d perpendicular f o r
ships h a v i n g a d e a d w e i g t h b e l o w 7 50 0 0 t ;
.2 b r e a d t h B/3 a n y w h e r e i n t h e b o t t o m .
3.4.5.4 D a m a g e t r i m a n d s t a b i l i t y r e q u i r e m e n t s
s h a l l b e satisfied f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g l o c a t i o n s o f side
and b o t t o m damage:
.1 o i l t a n k e r s :
where the length L \ > 2 2 5m anywhere along
the ship length;
x
2 / 3
2 / 3
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
where thelength 225 > L \ > 150 m anywhere i n

the ship length except f o r t h e engine r o o m w h e n this
is l o c a t e d a f t . I n t h i s case, t h e engine r o o m s h a l l b e
considered a separate floodable compartment;
where t h elength L \ < 150 m anywhere i n t h e
ship length between consecutive transverse bulkheads
except f o rt h e engine r o o m ;
w h e r e t h e substances o f the Category a r e c a r r i e d
under the provisions o f A n n e x I I t oM A R P O L 73/78,
as f o r c h e m i c a l t a n k e r s 3 ;
.2 c h e m i c a l t a n k e r s :
chemical tanker 1 anywhere along t h e ship
length;
chemical tanker 2 having the length L \> 150 m
anywhere along t h e ship length;
chemical tanker 2 having the length L \ < 150 m
a n y w h e r e i n t h e ship length except f o r t h e engine r o o m
w h e r e this i s located aft. I n t h i s case, t h e e n g i n e r o o m
shall b e considered a separate floodable compartment;
chemical tanker 3 having the length L \ > 225 m
chemical
tanker
3
having
the
length
2 2 5 ^ L \ > 125 m anywhere i n t h e ship length ex
cept f o rt h e engine r o o m where this is located aft. I n
t h i s case, t h e engine r o o m s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d a se
parate floodable compartment;
chemical tanker 3 having the length L \ < 125 m
a n y w h e r e along t h e ship length except f o rt h e engine
r o o m where this is located aft. Nevertheless, damage
t r i m a n d stability calculations f o r t h econditions o f
the engine r o o m flooded shall be submitted t o t h e
3.4.5.5 S h i p s w h i c h d o n o t c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e
quirements f o rdamage t r i m a n d stability w h e n their
engine r o o m is flooded, as stipulated b y 3.4.5.4.1
a n d 3.4.5.4.2, a r e n o tassigned a subdivision distin
guishing m a r k i n their character o f classification.
3.4.5.6 I n t h e final s t a g e o f u n s y m m e t r i c
flooding
before equalization measures a n d cross-flooding
fittings
b e i n g u s e d , t h e a n g l e o f h e e l s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 25 ( o r 30
where t h e bulkhead deck is n o t immersed). After
equalization measures, t h e heeling angle shall n o t
e x c e e d 17.
3.4.6 G a s c a r r i e r s .
F o r gas carriers, t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.4.5 a p p l y
except f o rt h e f o l l o w i n g details:
.1 d a m a g e t r i m a n d s t a b i l i t y r e q u i r e m e n t s s h a l l
be satisfied w h e n side a n d b o t t o m d a m a g e i s sus
tained as stated below:
gas c a r r i e r s 1 G a n y w h e r e a l o n g t h e s h i p l e n g t h ;
gas c a r r i e r s 2 G h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L \ > 1 5 0 m
gas c a r r i e r s 2 G h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L \ < 1 5 0 m o r
b e l o w a n y w h e r e along t h e ship length except the engine
room w h e r e t h i s i s l o c a t e d aft. I n t h i s case t h e e n g i n e room
s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d a s e p a r a t e floodable c o m p a r t m e n t ;
P a r t V.
Subdivision
363
gas c a r r i e r s 2 P G a n y w h e r e i n t h e s h i p l e n g t h
between subdivision bulkheads;
gas c a r r i e r s 3 G h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L \ > 1 2 5 m
anywhere i n t h e ship length between subdivision
bulkheads;
gas c a r r i e r s 3 G h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L \ < 1 2 5 m
anywhere i n t h e ship length between subdivision
bulkheads except t h e engine r o o m w h e r e this is l o
cated aft. H o w e v e r , damage t r i m a n d stability cal
c u l a t i o n s f o r t h e case o f t h e engine r o o m b e i n g
flooded shall be submitted f o r the consideration o f
the Register. N o subdivision distinguishing m a r k
shall be introduced i n thecharacter o f classification i f
damage t r i m a n d stability requirements are n o t met;
.2 t h e v e r t i c a l e x t e n t o f a b o t t o m d a m a g e s h a l l b e
a s s u m e d e q u a l t o B/15 o r 2 m , w h i c h e v e r i s l e s s .
3.4.7 D r i l l i n g s h i p s .
W i t h a n y single c o m p a r t m e n t flooded, drilling
ships shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3, u n
less m o r e s t r i n g e n t r e q u i r e m e n t s a r e p u t f o r w a r d b y
the shipowner.
D r i l l i n g ships shall h a v e sufficient reserve o f d a
mage stability t o withstand thew i n d heeling m o m e n t
produced b y w i n d w i t h a speed o f 25,8 m / s (50 k n o t s )
acting f r o m a n ydirection. U n d e r these conditions t h e
final waterline after f l o o d i n g shall be located b e l o w
the l o w e r edge o f a n y o p e n i n g t h r o u g h w h i c h t h e
i n t a c t c o m p a r t m e n t s m a y b e f l o o d e d b y t h e sea.
3.4.8 S h i p s i n t e n d e d f o r t h e c a r r i a g e o f r a d i o a c t i v e
agents.
D a m a g e t r i m a n d stability o f ships intended f o r
the carriage o f packaged irradiated nuclear fuel,
p l u t o n i u m a n d high-level radioactive wastes w i t h the
t o t a l r a d i o a c t i v i t y b e l o w 4 0 0 0 T B q s h a l l i n each case
T h e requirements for the damage t r i m a n dstability
o f ships c a r r y i n g packaged irradiated nuclear fuel o r
high-level radioactive wastes w i t h t h etotal radioactivity
below 2 x 1 0 T B q o r p l u t o n i u m w i t h the total radio
a c t i v i t y b e l o w 2 x 1 0 T B q shall b e m e t f o r t h e case o f
specified d a m a g e a n y w h e r e a l o n g t h e ship l e n g t h be
tween t h e consecutive transverse bulkheads.
T h e requirements f o r damage t r i m a n d stability
o f the ships c a r r y i n g packaged irradiated nuclear fuel
o r high-level radioactive wastes w i t h t h e total radio
activity above 2 x l 0 T B q o r p l u t o n i u m w i t h the
total radioactivity 2 x l 0 T B qa n d above shall be
m e t i n t h e case o f t h e calculated d a m a g e a n y w h e r e
along t h e ship length.
O n the Register approval t h epossible probability
estimation o f the ship subdivision m a ybe considered
being a n alternative t o the requirements indicated.
F o r ships carrying radioactive agents t h e required
subdivision index R shall b e determined b y t h e Register.
I n a n y case, f o r ships c a r r y i n g r a d i o a c t i v e agents w i t h t h e
total radioactivity above 2 x 1 0 T B q o r p l u t o n i u m w i t h
6
the total radioactivity above 2 x 1 0 T B q , t h e required

s u b d i v i s i o n i n d e x s h a l l b e e q u a l t o + 0 , 2 ( 1 R), b u t
n o t less t h a n 0 , 6 , w h e r e R i s d e t e r m i n e d i n c o m
p l i a n c e w i t h 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 a n d 2 . 2 . 2 . 2 . F o r s h i p s less t h a n
80 m i n length, t h e value o f required subdivision i n
dex R shall be determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
R = 1- [1/(1 + 0 , 8 / V ( l - R ) ]
(3.4.8)
w h e r e i s t h e v a l u e o f , c a l c u l a t e d i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h 2 . 2 . 2 . 1 .
3.4.9 S u p p l y v e s s e l s .
3.4.9.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t P a r t
a p p l y t o a l l s u p p l y vessels h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L \ < 1 0 0 m .
T h e subdivision a n d damage stability o f supply
vessels h a v i n g a l e n g t h o v e r 1 0 0 m s h a l l i n e a c h case
3.4.9.2 T h e e x t e n t o f d a m a g e :
.1 l o n g i t u d i n a l e x t e n t s h a l l b e l / 3 Z , i
f o r ships
w i t h length i i > 8 0 m , 3 m plus 3 p e r cent o f the ship's
l e n g t h f o r s h i p s w i t h t h e l e n g t h {L\) g r e a t e r t h a n
4 3 m . F o r t h o s e w i t h l e n g t h {L{) n o t g r e a t e r t h a n
43 m , 10 p e r cent o f t h e ship's length;
.2 t r a n s v e r s e e x t e n t o f d a m a g e s h a l l b e a s s u m e d
a s 0 , 7 6 m a n d fi/20 ( b u t n o t l e s s t h a n 0 , 7 6 m ) w i t h
l e n g t h L \ > 8 0 m , m e a s u r e d i n b o a r d f r o m t h e side o f
the ship perpendicularly t o t h e centerline a t t h e level
of the summer load waterline;
.3 v e r t i c a l e x t e n t : f r o m t h e u n d e r s i d e o f t h e c a r g o
deck, o r t h ec o n t i n u a t i o n thereof, f o r t h e full d e p t h o f
the ship.
3.4.9.3 A t r a n s v e r s e w a t e r t i g h t b u l k h e a d e x t e n d
i n g f r o m t h e ship's side t o a distance i n b o a r d as
specified i n 3.4.9.2.2 o r m o r e m e a s u r e d perpendicu
larly t o t h e centerline a t t h e level o fthe s u m m e r l o a d
line j o i n i n g l o n g i t u d i n a lwatertight bulkheads m a y be
considered as a transverse w a t e r t i g h t b u l k h e a d f o r
the purpose o f t h e damage t r i m a n d stability calcu
lations.
3.4.9.4 W h e r e a t r a n s v e r s e w a t e r t i g h t b u l k h e a d i s
located w i t h i n t h e transverse extent o f assumed damage
a n d i s stepped i n w a y o f a d o u b l e b o t t o m o r side t a n k
b y m o r e t h a n 3 , 0 m , t h e d o u b l e b o t t o m o r side t a n k s
adjacent t o t h e stepped p o r t i o n o f t h e transverse w a
tertight b u l k h e a d shall be considered as damaged.
3.4.9.5 I n t h e f i n a l s t a g e o f u n s y m m e t r i c a l
f l o o d i n g t h e a n g l e o f h e e l s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 15 b e f o r e
equalization measures are taken a n d cross-flooding
fittings are used. T h i s angle m a y be increased u p
t o 17 i f n o d e c k i m m e r s i o n o c c u r s .
3.4.9.6 N u m b e r o f f l o o d a b l e c o m p a r t m e n t s .
T h e d a m a g e s t a b i l i t y r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3 s h a l l be
m e t i n t h e case o f single c o m p a r t m e n t f l o o d i n g p r o
ceeding f r o m t h e extent o f damage stated u n
der 3 . 2 . 1 . 1 , 3.2.1.3 a n d 3.4.9.2.
3.4.9.7 S h i p s c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f 3.4.9.2 o n l y w i l l receive n o s u b d i v i s i o n distin
guishing m a r k i n the character o f classification.
2 / 3
364
Rules
3.4.9.8 I f p r e f e r r e d b y t h e s h i p o w n e r , a s u p p l y
vessel m a y receive a subdivision distinguishing m a r k
w i t h the number o f floodable compartments i n
d i c a t e d i n t h e class n o t a t i o n . I n this case, t h e t r a n s
verse extent o f d a m a g e shall be assumed i n
accordance w i t h 3.2.1.2. T h e n u m b e r o f c o m p a r t
ments at the flooding o fwhich the damage t r i m a n d
stability requirements shall be m e t shall be de
termined b y the shipowner.
3.4.10 S h i p s w i t h t h e i c e m a r k s A r c 4 , A r c 5 , ,
Arc7, Arc8 a n d Arc9 i n the class notation.
3.4.10.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s p a r a g r a p h a p
ply t o all ice strengthened ships o f categories Arc4,
A r c 5 , , A r c 7 , A r c 8 a n d A r c 9 . T h e d a m a g e t r i m
and stability r e q u i r e m e n t s shall be m e t as f a r as t h e
d r a u g h t d^ i s c o n c e r n e d e x c e p t f o r t h e r e q u i r e m e n t
o f 3.4.10.2.
3.4.10.2 W h e r e t h e e x t e n t o f d a m a g e i s i n a c
c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.2, w i t h i n r a n g e o f t h e s u m m e r l o a d l i n e
d r a u g h t assigned t o t h e ship t h e d a m a g e t r i m a n d sta
bility r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3 shall b e m e t i f a single c o m
p a r t m e n t is flooded i n ships h a v i n g t h e f o l l o w i n g
distinguishing m a r k s i n t h e character o f classification:
ice c a t e g o r y m a r k s A r c 7 , A r c 8 a n d A r c 9 i r r e
spective o f ship length;
i c e c a t e g o r y m a r k s A r c 5 a n d w i t h t h e s h i p
l e n g t h L > 120 m .
T h e subdivision distinguishing m a r k shall be i n
t r o d u c e d i n t h e character o f classification o f s u c h ships.
3.4.10.3 S h i p s w i t h t h e i c e s t r e n g t h e n i n g m a r k s
f o r c a t e g o r i e s A r c 4 , A r c 5 , , A r c 7 , A r c 8 a n d
Arc9 (irrespective o f their length) shall c o m p l y w i t h
the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3 w i t h relevant ice d a m a g e
stated i n 3.4.10.4 a n d t h en u m b e r o f floodable c o m
p a r t m e n t s given i n 3.4.10.5.
W h e r e compliance w i t h the requirements o f other
Sections o f this P a r t also testifies t o 3.4.10 b e i n g
c o m p l i e d w i t h , n o a d d i t i o n a l d a m a g e t r i m a n d sta
bility calculations need be m a d e f o rdamage condi
tions m e n t i o n e d u n d e r 3.4.10.4 a n d 3.4.10.5.
3.4.10.4 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f d a m a g e t r i m a n d
stability calculations, t h e f o l l o w i n g extent o ficed a
mage shall be assumed:
.1 l o n g i t u d i n a l e x t e n t 0,045Z, , i f t h e c e n t r e o f
d a m a g e l i e s w i t h i n QALICE f r o m t h e f o r w a r d p e r p e n
dicular, a n d 0,015Z, i n o t h e r areas;
.2 d a m a g e d e p t h 0 , 7 6 m a s m e a s u r e d a l o n g t h e
n o r m a l t o t h e shell a t a n y p o i n t i n t h e area o f as
sumed damage;
.3 v e r t i c a l e x t e n t
0,2d ;
.4 l o c a t i o n o f d a m a g e f r o m t h e b a s e l i n e t o t h e
l e v e l o f l,2dice w i t h i n Z , .
3.4.10.5 W h e n p e r f o r m i n g d a m a g e t r i m a n d s t a b i
lity calculations, t h e n u m b e r o f floodable compart
m e n t s shall b e determined proceeding f r o m the location
o f the a s s u m e d ice d a m a g e listed i n T a b l e 3.4.10.5.
/ c e
of Sea-Going
Ships
T a b l e
Nos.
10
11
/ c e
and Construction
12
3.4.10.5
T y p e o fship and/or ice

strengthening category
L o c a t i o n o fice d a m a g e
m e n t i o n e d u n d e r 3.4.10.4
Ice-strengthened ships o f
Arc7,
Arc8 a n d Arc9
categories except
fishing
vessels
Passenger ships allowed t o
c a r r y o v e r 400 p a s s e n g e r s
including the crew
Special purpose ships allowed
t o c a r r y o v e r 400 p a s s e n g e r s
including the crew
Ships intended for the carriage
o f radioactive agents
Chemical tankers
Oil tankers
G a s carriers
Drilling ships
Ice-strengthened
salvage
ships with ice categories
Arc5,
, A r c 7 ,
Arc8
and Arc9
Ice-strengthened
fishing
vessels a n d refrigerated fish
carriers with ice categories
Arc7, Arc8 a n d Arc9
Ice-strengthened ships with
ice categories
Arc5 a n d
n o t m e n t i o n e d i n 2 t o 9
Anywhere i n theice
damage area
Ditto
Between
watertight
bulkheads, platforms,
decks and plating
1
Between watertight bulk

heads, platforms, decks a n d
plating . W i t h the hull length
1,1 < 100 m i t i s p e r m i t t e d
n o t to comply with the requi
rements for damage trim a n d
stability w h e r e engine r o o m
located aft i s flooded i n case
o f ice d a m a g e
T h e s a m e refers t o t h e
flooding o f engine rooms
o f t u g s less t h a n 40 m i n
length irrespective o f t h e
engine r o o m location
Ice-strengthened ships with Between watertight bulk
ice c a t e g o r y
A r c 4 n o t heads, platforms, decks a n d
plating . W i t h the hull length
mentioned i n2 to 9
1,1 < 125 m i t i s p e r m i t t e d
n o t to comply with the requi
rements for damage trim a n d
stability w h e r e engine r o o m
located aft i s flooded i n case
o f ice d a m a g e .
T h e s a m e refers t o t h e
flooding o f engine rooms
o f t u g s less t h a n 40 m i n
length irrespective o f t h e
engine r o o m location
1
^ h e r e t h e distance between t w o consecutive

watertight
structures i s less t h a n t h e extent o f d a m a g e , relative adjacent
compartments shall b e considered a single
floodable
c o m p a r t m e n t w h e n checking d a m a g e t r i m a n d stability.
ice
/ c e
3.4.10.6 I n a l l c a s e s , i r r e s p e c t i v e o f t h e r e q u i r e
m e n t s stated i n items 1 1 a n d 12 o f T a b l e 3.4.10.5, t h e
c a l c u l a t i o n s o f d a m a g e t r i m a n d stability f o r t h e case
o f t h e engine r o o m being flooded shall be submitted
for t h e consideration o f the Register.
P a r t V.
Subdivision-
' s
3.4.10.7 F o r o i l t a n k e r s , c h e m i c a l t a n k e r s 2 a n d 3 ,
gas carriers 2 G a n d 3 G b e l o w o r e q u a l t o 1 5 0 m
i n length, t h e necessity o f considering a s i m u l t a n e o u s
flooding o f t h e engine r o o m a n d a n adjacent c o m p a r t m e n t shall be specially considered b y t h e Register.
3.4.10.8 S h i p s c o n f o r m i n g w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f 3.4.10.3 t o 3.4.10.7 o n l y w i l l receive n o s u b d i v i s i o n
distinguishing m a r k i n t h e character o f classification.
3.4.11 B u l k c a r r i e r s , o r e c a r r i e r s a n d c o m b i n a t i o n
carriers.
3.4.11.1 B u l k c a r r i e r s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L \
o f 150m a n d u p w a r d s , w h i c h carry solid b u l k cargoes w i t h density o f 1 0 0 0 k g / m a n d above, shall
meet t h e requirements o f4.4 a t flooding o fa n y cargo
h o l d b o u n d e d b y t h e side shell o n l y o r b e i n g d o u b l e
s i d e s k i n c o n s t r u c t i o n w i t h t h e w i d t h l e s s t h a n B/5
o r 1 1 , 5 m ( w h i c h e v e r i s t h e less) i n a l l cases o f
draught u p t o t h e s u m m e r l o a d line.
3.4.11.2 W h e n c a l c u l a t i n g d a m a g e s t a b i l i t y t h e
following permeabilities shall be taken:
0,90 f o r loaded holds;
0,95 f o r e m p t y holds.
Ships assigned w i t h t h e reduced freeboard i n accordance w i t h Section 4 are regarded o fsatisfying the
requirements o f3.4.11.1.
I n f o r m a t i o n o n compliance w i t h these requirements shall be included i n t h e I n f o r m a t i o n o n Stability a n d Strength f o r the Ship L o a d e d w i t h Solid
B u l k C a r g o e s o t h e r t h a n G r a i n as r e q u i r e d b y 1.4.9.7,
Part I I "Hull".
3.4.11.3 S h i p s a r e f i t t e d w i t h f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n
sensors:
.1 i n e a c h c a r g o h o l d , g i v i n g a u d i b l e a n d v i s u a l
alarms, o n e w h e n t h e water level above t h e inner
b o t t o m i n t h e h o l d reaches a height o f 0,5 m h i g h ,
a n d a n o t h e r a t a h e i g h t n o t less t h a n 1 5 p e r c e n t o f
the cargo h o l d depth b u t n o t m o r e t h a n 2,0 m ; i t is
allowed t o use o n e detector instead o f t w o provided
its d e s i g n a l l o w s t o g i v e a l a r m a t b o t h levels o f h o l d
f l o o d i n g . T h e d e t e c t o r s a r e fitted i n t h e a f t e n d o f t h e
cargo h o l d as close t o t h e centerline, as practicable,
or above its lowest part where the inner b o t t o m is n o t
parallel t o t h e designed waterline. I f detectors cannot
be placed w i t h i n a distance e q u a l t o o n e c o r r u g a t i o n
space o r o n e b u l k h e a d v e r t i c a l stiffener space f r o m
the centerline, they shall be located a t b o t h t h e p o r t
a n d s t a r b o a r d sides o f t h e c a r g o h o l d ;
3
.2 i n a n y b a l l a s t t a n k f o r w a r d o f t h e c o l l i s i o n b u l k h e a d r e q u i r e d i n 1.1.6, P a r t I I " H u l l " g i v i n g a n a u d i b l e

a n d v i s u a l a l a r m w h e n t h e liquid i n t h e t a n k reaches a
level n o t exceeding 10 p e r cent o f t a n k capacity;
.3 i n a n y d r y o r v o i d s p a c e o t h e r t h a n a c h a i n
cable locker, a n y p a r t o f w h i c h extends f o r w a r d o f
the foremost cargo hold, giving a n audible a n d visual
a l a r m a t a w a t e r level o f 0,1 m above t h e deck. S u c h
a l a r m s n e e d n o t b e p r o v i d e d i n enclosed spaces, t h e
v o l u m e o f w h i c h does n o t exceed 0,1 p e r cent o f t h e
ship's m a x i m u m displacement v o l u m e .
Detectors i n cargo holds shall be protected b y a
robust construction f r o m damage b y cargoes o rm e chanical h a n d l i n g e q u i p m e n t associated w i t h b u l k
carrier operations.
3.4.11.4 O n s h i p s t h e F l o o d i n g D e t e c t i o n S y s t e m
M a n u a l shall be p r o v i d e d , w h i c h includes, as a
minimum:
.1 t h e f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n s y s t e m s p e c i f i c a t i o n ,
i n c l u d i n g a list o f procedures f o rc h e c k i n g t h e operability, as f a r as practicable, o f each e l e m e n t a t a n y
stage o f t h e ship service;
.2 t h e T y p e A p p r o v a l C e r t i f i c a t e i s s u e d f o r t h e
flooding detection system;
.3 t h e s i n g l e - l i n e d i a g r a m o f t h e f l o o d i n g d e t e c tion system w i t h the location o fequipment indicated
i n t h e ship's general a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n ;
.4 t h e i n s t r u c t i o n s i n d i c a t i n g t h e l o c a t i o n , s e c u r ing, p r o t e c t i o n a n d testing o f t h e f l o o d i n g detection
system equipment;
.5 l i s t o f c a r g o e s i n w h i c h 5 0 p e r c e n t m i x t u r e
w i t h seawater detectors protected b y guard r e m a i n
operable;
.6 t h e p r o c e d u r e s t o b e f o l l o w e d i n c a s e o f f a i l u r e
of the flooding detection system;
.7 t h e m a i n t e n a n c e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e f l o o d i n g
detection system equipment.
The M a n u a l shall be i n the w o r k i n g language o f
the ship officers, as w e l l as i n E n g l i s h .
3.4.11.5 T h e f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n s y s t e m s h a l l m e e t t h e
requirements o f 7.10, P a r t X I "Electrical E q u i p m e n t " .
3.4.12 B e r t h - c o n n e c t e d s h i p s .
3.4.12.1 D a m a g e s t a b i l i t y r e q u i r e m e n t s s t a t e d
i n 3.3 s h a l l b e c o m p l i e d w i t h i n t h e case o f a n y single
flooded c o m p a r t m e n t lying along the ship periphery
a n d h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h n o t less t h a n t h e l e n g t h o f
d a m a g e given i n 3.4.12.2.2.
3.4.12.2 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f d a m a g e t r i m a n d
stability calculations, t h e following extent o f damage
shall be assumed:
.1 t r a n s v e r s e e x t e n t m e a s u r e d f r o m t h e i n n e r s k i n
at r i g h t angles t o t h e centreline o n t h e level o f t h e
deepest w a t e r l i n e p e r m i t t e d b y t h e l o a d line 0,76 m ;
.2 l o n g i t u d i n a l e x t e n t l / 6 L
o r 7,2 m
( w h i c h e v e r i s less);
.3 v e r t i c a l e x t e n t i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3 . 2 . 1 . 3 .
3.4.12.3 N o s u b d i v i s i o n d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k w i l l
be i n t r o d u c e d i n t h e character o f classification o f
berth-connected ships w h i c h c o m p l y solely w i t h t h e
requirements o f 3.4.12 a n d f o r w h i c h regard
to 3.4.12.2 shall be taken.
3.4.12.4 I f t h e d e p t h o f w a t e r s o n w h i c h t h e
berth-connected ship floats is such that t h e lowerm o s t deck accessible t o passengers c a n n o t be i m 2 / 3
366
Rules
mersed n o t t o m e n t i o n capsizing o f t h e ship,

the requirements o f this Section m a ybe waived.
3.4.13 C a r g o s h i p s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L < 100 m
other than bulk carriers.
3.4.13.1 S i n g l e h o l d c a r g o s h i p s o t h e r t h a n b u l k
carriers shall c o m p l y w i t h the present requirements
n o t later t h a n t h e date o f t h e first intermediate o r
r e n e w a l survey o f t h e ship, w h i c h e v e r comes first,
but, anyway, n o tlater t h a n 3 1 December 2009.
3.4.13.2 S h i p s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L < 8 0 m , o r
L \ < 100 m i f constructed before 1998, a n d a single
cargo h o l d below t h e freeboard deck o r cargo holds
below t h e freeboard deck w h i c h are n o tseparated b y
at least o n e b u l k h e a d m a d e w a t e r t i g h t u p t o t h a t
deck, s h a l l b e fitted i n s u c h space o r spaces w i t h
f l o o d i n g detection sensors, w h i c h give a n audible a n d
visual a l a r m a t t h e navigation bridge w h e n t h e water
level above t h e inner b o t t o m i n t h e cargo h o l d
r e a c h e s a h e i g h t o f n o t less t h a n 0 , 3 m , a n d a n o t h e r
w h e n such level reaches n o t m o r e t h a n 15 p e r cent o f
the m e a n depth o f the cargo hold.
Y
3.4.13.3 F l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n s e n s o r s s h a l l b e f i t t e d
at the aft e n d o f the hold, o r above its lowest part
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
where t h einner b o t t o m is n o t parallel t o t h e designed

waterline. I f sensors c a n n o t be placed w i t h i n a distance e q u a l t o o n e c o r r u g a t i o n space o r o n e b u l k h e a d
vertical stiffener space f r o m t h e centerline, t h e y shall
be l o c a t e d a t b o t h sides o f t h e c a r g o h o l d . W h e r e
webs o r partial watertight bulkheads are fitted above
the inner b o t t o m , t h e Register m a y require t h e fitting
o f a d d i t i o n a l sensors. I t i s a l l o w e d t o use o n e sensor
vertically instead o f t w o provided its design allows
giving a l a r m a t b o t h levels o f h o l d f l o o d i n g .
3.4.13.4 T h e f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n s e n s o r s n e e d n o t b e
fitted i n ships c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e requirements
o f 3.4.11.3, o r i n ships h a v i n g w a t e r t i g h t side c o m p a r t m e n t s e a c h side o f t h e c a r g o h o l d l e n g t h e x t e n d i n g
vertically a t least f r o m i n n e r b o t t o m t o freeboard deck.
3.4.13.5 T h e f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n s y s t e m s h a l l
comply with the requirements o f 7.10, Part X I
3.4.13.6 F l o o d i n g D e t e c t i o n S y s t e m M a n u a l s h a l l
be p r o v i d e d o n b o a r d t h e ship, w h i c h shall be developed i n compliance w i t h the requirements
o f 3.4.11.4.
4 S P E C I A L R E Q U I R E M E N T S F O RT Y P E "B" S H I P S
W I T H R E D U C E D F R E E B O A R D A N D F O RT Y P E "A" S H I P S
4.1
G E N E R A L
4.1.1 T h i s S e c t i o n a p p l i e s t o t y p e " A " a n d

t y p e " B " s h i p s specified i n 1.1.3.
T h e requirements o fthe Section shall be fulfilled
irrespective o f meeting the requirements o f other
Sections b y these ships.
4.1.2 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s a r e c o n s i d e r e d f u l f i l l e d
where i t is demonstrated b y calculations that a ship
being i n assumed l o a d i n g c o n d i t i o n specified i n 4 . 2
after t h e f l o o d i n g o f t h e n u m b e r o f c o m p a r t m e n t s
required b y 4.1.3 t o 4.1.5 caused b y d a m a g e s stipulated i n 4.3 remains afloat a n d i n a condition o f
e q u i h b r i u m i t meets t h e requirements o f 4.4.
4.1.3 F o r t y p e " A " s h i p s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h
L \ > 1 5 0 m , w h e n t h e y a r e a s s i g n e d a f r e e b o a r d less
t h a n t h a t o f the appropriate ships o fthe type " B " t h e
requirements o f this Chapter shall be complied w i t h
i n t h e case o f a n y single c o m p a r t m e n t b e i n g f l o o d e d .
4.1.4 F o r t y p e " B " s h i p s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h L > 1 0 0 m
for w h i c h thepermitted reduction o ftabular freeboard
does n o t exceed 6 0 p e r cent o f the difference b e t w e e n its
values as p e r T a b l e s 4.1.2.3 a n d 4.1.3.2 o f t h e L o a d
L i n e R u l e s f o r S e a - G o i n g S h i p s , t h e f o l l o w i n g cases o f
flooding shall be considered:
x
.1 a n y single c o m p a r t m e n t w i t h t h e e x c e p t i o n o f
the engine r o o m ;
.2 a n y s i n g l e c o m p a r t m e n t i n c l u d i n g t h e e n g i n e
r o o m w h e r e t h e ship length L \ > 150 m .
4.1.5 T y p e " B " s h i p s h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h
L \ > 100 m , for w h i c h t h e permitted reduction i n the
t a b u l a r freeboard exceeds 6 0 p e r cent o f t h e difference b e t w e e n i t s values as p e r Tables 4.1.2.3
and 4.1.3.2 o f t h e L o a d L i n e Rules f o r Sea-Going
S h i p s s h a l l b e c o n s i d e r e d f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g cases o f
flooding:
.1 a n y t w o adjacent c o m p a r t m e n t s , except f o r t h e
engine r o o m ;
.2 a n y t w o a d j a c e n t c o m p a r t m e n t s a n d t h e e n g i n e
r o o m considered separately i n ships h a v i n g t h e l e n g t h
L > 150 m .
4.1.6 T h e f o l l o w i n g p e r m e a b i l i t i e s s h a l l b e a s sumed i n calculations required b y 4.1.2:
0,95 f o r a n y f l o o d a b l e c o m p a r t m e n t s a n d spaces,
except f o rt h e engine r o o m ;
0,85 f o r f l o o d a b l e engine r o o m .
T h e permeability value o f 0,95 is applicable t o
cargo spaces a n d t a n k s as w e l l w h i c h s h a l l b e c o n sidered full w h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e height o f t h e ship
centre o f gravity i n c o n f o r m i t y w i t h 4.2.3.
x
P a r t V.
Subdivision
367
4.1.7 I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 4 . 1 . 4
a n d 4.1.5, ships i n t e n d e d f o r carriage o f deck cargoes
shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f Section 2.
H e i g h t o f t h e centre o f gravity used f o r demonstration o f compliance with the requirements o f 4.4
during t h e deterministic analysis o f damage stability
shall be equal t o t h e height o f t h e centre o f gravity
used f o rcalculation o f damage stability a t probabilistic assessment a t a s s u m p t i o n o f the highest loadline.
T h e d i a g r a m o fu l t i m a t e elevation o f t h e ship centre
of gravity (limiting moments o r m i n i m u m metacentric heights) w i t h deck cargo d r a w n taking into
consideration the fulfilment o f the requirements o f
Section 2 shall be included into the I n f o r m a t i o n o n
Stability and I n f o r m a t i o n o n D a m a g e T r i m and Stability.
4.2 T R I M A N D L O A D I N G C O N D I T I O N
O F T H ES H I P P R I O R T O D A M A G E
4.2.1 A l l c a s e s o f f l o o d i n g s h a l l b e a n a l y z e d u n der o n e assumed initial loading c o n d i t i o n o fthe ship,

as specified i n 4 . 2 . 2 t o 4 . 2 . 4 .
4.2.2 T h e s h i p i s c o n s i d e r e d t o b e l o a d e d b y
homogeneous cargo t o its s u m m e r load line draught
i n sea w a t e r o n a n even keel.
4.2.3 T h e h e i g h t o f t h e c e n t r e o f g r a v i t y o f t h e
ship shall be calculated f o r t h e following assumed
loading condition:
.1 a l l c a r g o spaces, except f o r t h o s e u n d e r 4.2.3.2,
i n c l u d i n g t h e anticipated i n service, p a r t l y filled
spaces a r e c o n s i d e r e d t o b e f u l l y l o a d e d w i t h d r y
cargo a n d t o be 9 8 per cent loaded w i t h liquid cargo;
.2 w h e r e t h e s h i p w h e n l o a d e d t o t h e s u m m e r
l o a d l i n e i s t o o p e r a t e w i t h s o m e spaces n o t l o a d e d o r
filled w i t h d r y o r l i q u i d cargo, s u c h spaces shall be
assumed e m p t y provided that t h eheight o f the centre
o f gravity o f the ship, calculated w i t h regard t o e m p t y
c o m p a r t m e n t s i s n o t less t h a n t h a t c a l c u l a t e d o n t h e
a s s u m p t i o n t h a t a l l t h e spaces a r e o c c u p i e d w i t h
cargoes;
.3 t h e a m o u n t o f e v e r y t y p e o f t h e s h i p ' s s t o r e s
and consumable liquids is taken t o be equal t o 50 p e r
cent o f t h e full capacity. T a n k s , except f o r those
under 4.2.4.2, are assumed t o be e m p t y o r completely
filled, t h e d i s t r i b u t i o n o f t h e stores i n t h e t a n k s r e sulting i n thehighest position o fthe centre o f gravity
o f the ship. T h e centres o f g r a v i t y o f the contents o f
the tanks m e n t i o n e d i n 4.2.4.2 are t a k e n t o be i n t h e
centres o f g r a v i t y o f their v o l u m e s ;
.4 b a l l a s t w a t e r t a n k s s h a l l n o r m a l l y b e c o n sidered t o be e m p t y a n d n o free surface c o r r e c t i o n
shall be made f o r them;
.5 l o a d i n g o f t h e s h i p a s r e g a r d s c o n s u m a b l e l i quids a n d ballast water shall be estimated o n t h e
basis o fthe f o l l o w i n g values o ftheir density, i nt / m :
3
Seawater
Fresh water
Fuel oil
Diesel oil
Lubricating oil
1,025
1,000
0,950
0,900
0,900
4.2.4 I n e s t i m a t i n g t h e h e i g h t o f t h e c e n t r e o f
g r a v i t y o f the ship a c c o u n t shall be t a k e n o f the effect
o f free surfaces o f liquids:
.1 f o r l i q u i d c a r g o , p r o c e e d i n g f r o m l o a d i n g
specified i n 4.2.3.1;
.2 f o r c o n s u m a b l e l i q u i d s , p r o c e e d i n g f r o m t h e
a s - s u m p t i o n t h a t f o r every type o f l i q u i d a t least o n e
centreline t a n k o r o n e transverse pair o f tanks have
free surfaces. T o b e t a k e n i n t o c o n s i d e r a t i o n a r e t h e
t a n k s o r t h e c o m b i n a t i o n o ft a n k s w h e r e t h e effect o f
free surfaces is t h e greatest.
I t is r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t t h e c o r r e c t i o n f o r free
surfaces effect be t a k e n i n t o a c c o u n t i n accordance
w i t h 1.4.7, P a r t I V " S t a b i l i t y . "
4.3 E X T E N T O F D A M A G E
4.3.1 T h e v e r t i c a l e x t e n t o f d a m a g e s h a l l b e a s s u m e d f r o m t h e base line u p w a r d s w i t h o u t limit.

4.3.2 T h e t r a n s v e r s e e x t e n t o f d a m a g e m e a s u r e d
i n b o a r d f r o m t h e ship's side, a t a r i g h t a n g l e t o t h e
centreline a t t h e level o f t h e s u m m e r load waterline
shall be assumed equal t o one-fifth o fthe breadth o f
t h e s h i p , o r 11,5 m , w h i c h e v e r i s t h e less.
4.3.3 I f a n y d a m a g e o f lesser e x t e n t t h a n i n d i c a t e d i n
4.3.1 a n d 4.3.2 w o u l d r e s u l t i n a m o r e severe c o n d i t i o n ,
such damage shall be assumed i n t h e calculations.
4.3.4 T r a n s v e r s e b u l k h e a d s a r e c o n s i d e r e d e f f e c tive i f t h e distance between t h e m o r between t h e
transverse planes passing t h r o u g h t h e nearest portions o f t h e stepped b u l k h e a d s is a t least 1/3Z, ,
o r 1 4 , 5 m , w h i c h e v e r i s t h e less. I n case o f lesser
distance, o n e o r m o r e o f these bulkheads shall be
assumed as non-existent.
4.3.5 W h e n o n e c o m p a r t m e n t i s f l o o d e d , w i t h
due regard f o r provisions o f 4.3.4, m a i n transverse
bulkheads are considered n o t t o be damaged i f they
h a v e n o steps m o r e t h a n 3 m i n l e n g t h .
I n case these b u l k h e a d s a r e p r o v i d e d w i t h steps
m o r e than 3 m i n length, the t w ocompartments adjacent t o such bulkheads shall be considered as flooded.
T h e extent o f damage m a y be limited b y transverse
b u l k h e a d s o f a side t a n k i n case i t s l o n g i t u d i n a l b u l k heads are beyond t h e transverse extent o f damage.
W h e r e a side t a n k o r a d o u b l e b o t t o m t a n k i s d i vided b y a transverse b u l k h e a d located m o r e t h a n 3 m
f r o m a m a i n transverse bulkhead, b o t h tanks divided
b y such b u l k h e a d shall be considered as flooded.
T h e following compartments shall be considered
as f l o o d e d :
2 / 3
368
Rules
A
A
A
A
+
+
+
+
D, B+
D + E,
D, B+
B+D,
E, C + E + F
B+ E, C + F
D + E, C+ F
B+ D + E, C
and Construction
of Sea-Going
( F i g . 4.3.5-1);
( F i g . 4.3.5-2);
(Fig. 4.3.5-3);
+ F ( F i g . 4.3.5-4).
Ships
CL
>3,0m
<3,0m
B/5
rs
1^
boundary
of compartment
^\
F i g . 4.3.5-1
>3,0 m I
M
boundary of
compartment
F i g . 4.3.5-4
ing l i q u i d cargoes, except i n case o f sluice valves

fitted i n bulkheads between tanks a n d where the
valves a r e c o n t r o l l e d f r o m above t h e b u l k h e a d deck.
4.3.7 W h e r e p i p e s , d u c t s o r t u n n e l s a r e l o c a t e d
w i t h i n t h e assumed extent o f damage, satisfactory
arrangements shall be provided t o preclude t h e possibility o f progressive f l o o d i n g t h r o u g h t h e m t o other
spaces b e y o n d t h e l i m i t s a s s u m e d f o r t h e c a l c u l a t i o n s
o f the d a m a g e stability o f the ship.
4.3.8 I n c a s e o f t w o - c o m p a r t m e n t f l o o d i n g t h e
requirements o f 4.3.1 t o 4.3.4, 4.3.6 a n d4.3.7 shall be
met.
4.4 D A M A G E T R I M A N D S T A B I L I T Y
boundary
of compartment
F i g . 4.3.5-3
W h e r e t h e forecastle is arranged above t h e fore

cargo h o l d , subject t o t h e c o n d i t i o n t h a t t h e forecastle
bulkhead is located n o t m o r e t h a n 3 m aft f r o m the
forward bulkhead o f the h o l d a n dwatertightness o f the
stepped deck structure is ensured t h e b u l k h e a d shall be
considered t o be continuous a n d n o tt o be damaged.
4.3.6 W h e r e a s i d e t a n k h a s o p e n i n g s i n t o a h o l d ,
it shall be considered as c o m m u n i c a t i n g w i t h the h o l d
even where such openings are fitted w i t h closing appliances. T h i s p r o v i s i o n is applicable t o ships carry-
4.4.1 T h e m e t a c e n t r i c h e i g h t o f t h e d a m a g e d s h i p
p r i o r t o t a k i n g measures f o r the increase t h e r e o f shall
be positive.
4.4.2 T h e a n g l e o f h e e l d u e t o u n s y m m e t r i c a l
flooding prior t o the beginning o f the equalization o f the
s h i p s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 15. I f n o p a r t o f t h e d e c k i m m e r s e s , t h e i n c r e a s e o f h e e l u p t o 17 m a y b e a l l o w e d .
4.4.3 T h e f i n a l d a m a g e w a t e r l i n e h a v i n g r e g a r d t o
heel a n d t r i m prior t o t h e beginning o fthe equalizat i o n o f t h e ship shall n o t be above t h e l o w e r edge o f
o p e n i n g s i n d i c a t e d i n 3.3.4, t h r o u g h w h i c h p r o gressive f l o o d i n g m a y t a k e place.
4.4.4 W h e n a n y p a r t o f t h e b u l k h e a d d e c k b e y o n d
the limits o f the flooded compartments immerses, o r
the m a r g i n o f damage stability is doubtful, damage
stability a t large angles o f heel shall be investigated. I t
shall be s h o w n that t h e value o f a m a x i m u m a r m o f
t h e r i g h t i n g l e v e r c u r v e o f a d a m a g e d s h i p i s n o t less
t h a n 0 , 1 m w i t h i n t h e r a t e d e x t e n t (20) i n a s s o c i a t i o n
w i t h a range o f the curve w i t h positive arms o f
a t l e a s t 20, t h e a r e a o f t h e p o s i t i v e p o r t i o n o f t h e
c u r v e b e i n g n o t less t h a n 0 , 0 1 7 5 m - r a d .
P a r t V.
Subdivision
369
5 REQUIREMENTS F O RSHIPS IN SERVICE
5.1 B U L K C A R R I E R S , O R E C A R R I E R S
AND COMBINATION C A R R I E R S
5.1.1 B u l k c a r r i e r s w i t h s i n g l e s i d e s h e l l t h e d e s i g n
o f w h i c h complies w i t h the requirements o f 3.3.1.6.1,
P a r t I I " H u l l " , h a v i n g the length L \ > 150 m , carrying
solid b u l k cargoes w i t h a density o f 1000 k g / m a n d
above, constructed o n J u l y 1999 o r after that date,
shall c o m p l y w i t h the requirements o f 4.4 at flooding
o f a n y c a r g o h o l d u n d e r a l l t h e l o a d i n g cases u p t o
the s u m m e r load line. T h e b u l k carrier, w h i c h forw a r d c a r g o h o l d is c o n f i n e d b y t h e o u t e r p l a t i n g o r
d o u b l e side s k i n c o n s t r u c t i o n w i t h a w i d t h less
t h a n 7 6 0 m m w i t h a l e n g t h L\~$> 1 5 0 m b u i l t b e f o r e
1 J u l y 1999 carrying h a r d b u l k cargoes w i t h density
o f 1780 k g / m a n d m o r e , shall c o m p l y w i t h the requirements o f 4.4 w h i l e flooding the fore cargo h o l d
i n a l l cases o f l o a d i n g u p t o t h e s u m m e r l o a d l i n e n o t
later t h a n the date o f survey assigned i n r e l a t i o n t o
t h e s h i p age:
3
.1 f o r ships w h i c h age at 1 J u l y 1998 is 2 0 years

a n d m o r e , t h e d a t e o f t h e f i r s t i n t e r m e d i a t e ( t h e seco n d o r t h e t h i r d a n n u a l s u r v e y ) o r t h e first s p e c i a l
survey, w h i c h s h a l l be c a r r i e d o u t after 1 J u l y 1998 is
accepted, w h i c h e v e r is earlier;
.2 f o r s h i p s w h i c h a g e a t 1 J u l y 1 9 9 8 i s 1 5 y e a r s a n d
m o r e b u t less t h e n 2 0 years, t h e date o f t h e first special
s u r v e y w h i c h shall be carried o u t after 1 J u l y 1 9 9 8 b u t
n o t later t h a n 1 J u l y 2 0 0 2 is accepted;
.3 f o r s h i p s w h i c h a g e a t 1 J u l y 1 9 9 8 i s l e s s
t h a n 15 years, t h e d a t e o f t h e t h i r d special s u r v e y o r
t h e d a t e w h e n the ship's age b e c o m e s e q u a l t o
15 years is accepted, w h i c h e v e r is later.
5.1.2 T h e f o l l o w i n g v a l u e s o f p e r m e a b i l i t i e s s h a l l
be t a k e n f o r the d a m a g e stability calculations:
0,90 f o r loaded holds;
0,95 f o r e m p t y holds.
5.1.3 T h e s h i p s w h i c h d o n ' t c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 5.1.1 m a y be acquitted f r o m this req u i r e m e n t p r o v i d e d the f o l l o w i n g conditions are met:
.1 t h e p r o g r a m m e o f t h e f o r e h o l d a n n u a l s u r v e y
is replaced b y t h e p r o g r a m m e a p p r o v e d at t h e f u l l
scale i n t e r m e d i a t e s u r v e y i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h Sect i o n 2, P a r t I I I " A d d i t i o n a l Surveys o f Ships i n R e lation to their Purpose and H u l l M a t e r i a l " o f the
Rules for the Classifications Surveys o f Ships i n
Service;
.2 t h e v i s u a l a n d a u d i b l e a l a r m s h a l l b e fitted i n
t h e w h e e l h o u s e f o r signalling i n case of:
flooding over t w o metres above the double b o t t o m i n

the stern part o f each cargo hold;
filling o f bilge w e l l o f each h o l d u p t o the upper
level.
Such signalling system shall meet the requirements o f Part X I "Electrical Equipment";
.3 t h e s h i p s h a l l b e s u p p l i e d w i t h d e t a i l e d i n f o r m a t i o n o n the effect o f the p h a s e d f l o o d i n g o f
cargo h o l d and detailed instructions i n accordance
w i t h Section 8 o f International Safety M a n a g e m e n t
Code ( I S M Code).
I n f o r m a t i o n shall include the data a n d docu m e n t a t i o n stated i n 1.4.6.1 a n d t h e results o f damage t r i m a n d stability calculations at stage-by-stage
compartment flooding under all conditions o f loading to the s u m m e r load line o n a n even keel. W h e n
t h e s h i p m e e t s t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 4 . 4 a t a lesser
draught, the document shall contain a diagram o f
m a x i m u m heights o f the centre o f gravity o f the ship
(limiting m o m e n t s or m i n i m u m metacentric heights)
plotted w i t h due regard to the t r i m and ship load.
T h e strength o f the b u l k h e a d shall be t a k e n i n t o
consideration. T h e i n f o r m a t i o n shall contain a summ a r y table o f calculation results w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f
c r i t i c a l f a c t o r s a n d t h e d a t a g i v e n i n 1.4.6.1.5.
5.1.4 T h e s h i p s w h i c h a r e a s s i g n e d w i t h t h e r e duced freeboard i n accordance w i t h Section 4 are
considered compliant w i t h the requirements 5.1.1.
5.1.5 I n f o r m a t i o n o n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 5.1.1 t o 5.1.3 s h a l l be i n c l u d e d i n t h e
B o o k l e t r e q u i r e d b y 1.4.9.7, P a r t I I " H u l l " .
5.1.6 S h i p s b u i l t b e f o r e 1 J u l y 2 0 0 4 s h a l l m e e t t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.4.11.3 t o 3.4.11.5 n o t later t h a n the
d a t e o f t h e first p e r i o d i c a l s u r v e y o f a s h i p c o n d u c t e d
after 1 July 2004.
5.1.6.1 I f f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n s e n s o r s c a n n o t b e
placed i n the aft end o f the cargo h o l d w i t h i n a dist a n c e less t h a n o r e q u a l t o B / 6 f r o m t h e c e n t e r l i n e ,
t h e y shall be located at b o t h the p o r t a n d s t a r b o a r d
sides o f t h e c a r g o h o l d .
5.1.6.2 T h e u p p e r s e n s o r o n l y m a y b e f i t t e d i n
cargo h o l d s o f the ships being subject t o the req u i r e m e n t o f 5.1.3; the ships n o t c o m p l y i n g w i t h the
r e q u i r e m e n t o f 5.1.3.2 o n 1 J a n u a r y 2 0 0 4 shall be
fitted w i t h f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n s e n s o r s i n c a r g o h o l d s
i n accordance w i t h 3.4.11.3.1 (considering 5.1.6.1).
370
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
APPENDIX
Ships
GUIDELINES F O RTHE PREPARATION OF SUBDIVISION AND DAMAGE

STABILITY CALCULATIONS
1
GENERAL
1.1 P u r p o s e o f t h e G u i d e l i n e s
1.1.1 T h e s e G u i d e l i n e s s e r v e t h e p u r p o s e o f s i m plifying the process o f the damage stability analysis,
as e x p e r i e n c e h a s s h o w n t h a t a s y s t e m a t i c a n d c o m plete presentation o f the particulars results i n considerable saving o f t i m e d u r i n g the a p p r o v a l process.
1.1.2 A d a m a g e s t a b i l i t y a n a l y s i s s e r v e s t h e p u r pose t o provide p r o o f o f the damage stability stand a r d required f o r the respective ship type. A t present,
two different calculation methods, the deterministic
concept a n d the probabilistic concept are applied.
1.2 S c o p e o f a n a l y s i s a n d d o c u m e n t a t i o n o n
board
1.2.1 T h e s c o p e o f s u b d i v i s i o n a n d d a m a g e s t a bility analysis is d e t e r m i n e d b y the required damage
stability standard a n d aims at p r o v i d i n g the ship's
master w i t h clear intact stability requirements a n d
l i m i t a t i o n s . I n general, t h i s is achieved b y d e t e r m i n ing .KG-respective G M - l i m i t curves, containing the
a d m i s s i b l e s t a b i l i t y v a l u e s f o r t h e d r a u g h t r a n g e t o be
covered.
1.2.2 W i t h i n t h e s c o p e o f t h e a n a l y s i s t h u s d e fined, all the required damage conditions depending
o n t h e ship's t y p e a n d p u r p o s e as w e l l as p o t e n t i a l
d a m a g e c o n d i t i o n s i n service w i l l be d e t e r m i n e d .
D e p e n d i n g o n t h e t y p e , p u r p o s e a n d size o f s h i p , t h i s
may i n v o l v e a considerable a m o u n t o f analyses.
1.2.3 T h e n e c e s s i t y t o p r o v i d e t h e c r e w w i t h t h e
relevant i n f o r m a t i o nregarding the subdivision o f the
ship is expressed. T h e r e f o r e D a m a g e C o n t r o l P l a n
(refer t o 1.4.6.2) s h a l l be d e v e l o p e d a n d p e r m a n e n t l y
exhibited f o r the guidance o f the officers i n charge. I n
addition, I n f o r m a t i o no n Damage T r i m and Stability
shall be a v a i l a b l e o n b o a r d (refer t o 1.4.6.1).
2.2 G e n e r a l d o c u m e n t s
2.2.1 F o r t h e c h e c k i n g o f t h e i n p u t d a t a , t h e
f o l l o w i n g shall be s u b m i t t e d :
.1 m a i n d i m e n s i o n s ;
.2 l i n e s p l a n , p l o t t e d o r n u m e r i c a l l y ;
.3 h y d r o s t a t i c d a t a a n d c r o s s c u r v e s o f s t a b i l i t y
(including drawing o f the buoyant hull);
.4 d e f i n i t i o n o f s h i p spaces a n d c o m p a r t m e n t s
w i t h m o u l d e d v o l u m e s , centres o f gravity a n d permeability;
.5 l a y o u t p l a n f o r a l l w a t e r t i g h t s t r u c t u r e s a n d
bulkheads w i t h all internal and external opening
p o i n t s i n c l u d i n g t h e i r c o n n e c t e d spaces, a n d reference
to t h e source m a t e r i a l s u s e d i n m e a s u r i n g t h e spaces,
s u c h as g e n e r a l a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n a n d s u b d i v i s i o n
plan. T h e subdivision limits, longitudinal, transverse
a n d vertical, shall be included;
.6 l i g h t s e r v i c e c o n d i t i o n ;
.7 l o a d line d r a u g h t ;
.8 c o o r d i n a t e s o f o p e n i n g p o i n t s w i t h t h e i r level
o f tightness (e.g., w e a t h e r t i g h t o r u n p r o t e c t e d ) ;
.9 w a t e r t i g h t d o o r l o c a t i o n c o o r d i n a t e s w i t h
pressure calculation;
.10 s i d e c o n t o u r a n d w i n d p r o f i l e ;
.11 c r o s s a n d d o w n f l o o d i n g d e v i c e s a n d t h e
calculations thereof according to I M O resolution
MSC.362(92) with information about
diameter,
valves, pipe lengths and coordinates o f inlet/outlet;
.12 p i p e s i n d a m a g e d a r e a w h e n t h e d e s t r u c t i o n
o f these pipes results i n progressive f l o o d i n g ;
.13 d a m a g e e x t e n s i o n s a n d d e f i n i t i o n o f d a m a g e
cases.
2.3 S p e c i a l d o c u m e n t s
T o c o n f i r m damage stability calculation results
the f o l l o w i n g d o c u m e n t a t i o n shall be s u b m i t t e d .
2.3.1 D o c u m e n t a t i o n .
2.3.1.1 I n i t i a l d a t a :
.1 s u b d i v i s i o n l e n g t h L ;
.2 i n i t i a l d r a u g h t s a n d t h e c o r r e s p o n d i n g G M values (operational metacentric height);
.3 r e q u i r e d s u b d i v i s i o n i n d e x R ;
.4 a t t a i n e d s u b d i v i s i o n i n d e x A w i t h a s u m m a r y
table o f a l l contributions for a l l damaged zones.
2.3.1.2 R e s u l t s f o r e a c h d a m a g e c a s e , w h i c h
c o n t r i b u t e s t o t h e i n d e x A:
.1 d r a u g h t , t r i m , h e e l , G M i n d a m a g e d c o n d i t i o n ;
.2 d i m e n s i o n o f t h e d a m a g e w i t h p r o b a b i l i s t i c
v a l u e s p , v a n d r;
s
2 DOCUMENTS F O R SUBMISSION
2.1 G e n e r a l d e t a i l s t o b e i n c l u d e d i n t h e d o c umentation on board

2.1.1 T h e d o c u m e n t a t i o n s h a l l i n c l u d e , a s a
m i n i m u m , the f o l l o w i n g details: principal d i m e n sions, ship type, designation o f intact conditions,
designation o f damage c o n d i t i o n s a n d ^TG-respective
G M - l i m i t curve.
P a r t V.
Subdivision
371
.3
righting
lever curve (including G Z
and
r a n g e ) w i t h f a c t o r o f s u r v i v a b i l i t y s;
A list o f c r i t i c a l w e a t h e r t i g h t a n d u n p r o t e c t e d
openings w i t h their angle o f i m m e r s i o n ;
.5 d e t a i l s o f t h e s h i p spaces a n d c o m p a r t m e n t s
with amount o f in-flooded water/lost buoyancy with
their centres o f gravity.
2.3.1.3 I n a d d i t i o n t o the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.3.1.2,
p a r t i c u l a r s o f n o n - c o n t r i b u t i n g d a m a g e s (s = 0
m a x
a n d pt > 0 , 0 0 ) s h a l l a l s o b e s u b m i t t e d f o r p a s s e n g e r
ships a n d r o - r o ships fitted w i t h l o n g l o w e r h o l d s
including full details o f the calculated subdivision
factors.
2.3.2 Special consideration.
F o r i n t e r m e d i a t e c o n d i t i o n s , as stages b e f o r e
cross-flooding o r before progressive flooding, a n
appropriate scope o f the d o c u m e n t a t i o n covering the
a f o r e m e n t i o n e d items is needed i n a d d i t i o n .
372
Rules for
the Classification
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
APPENDIX
DETERMINATION OF THE MOULDED PENETRATION DEPTH b
CL
bi(^2b )
2
Shell
plating
Shell
plating
CL
bi(=2b )
2
Shell
plating
Shell
plating
Shell
plating
P A R T VI. FIRE P R O T E C T I O N
1 GENERAL
1.1
APPLICATION
R u l e s apply t o ship's structural fire p r o t e c t i o n , fire
extinguishing systems a n d fire detection a n d a l a r m
s y s t e m s , as w e l l as f i r e - f i g h t i n g e q u i p m e n t a n d o u t f i t .
1.1.2 T h e f i r e p r o t e c t i o n r e q u i r e m e n t s r e l a t i n g t o
the structural items o f the ship hull, machinery a n d
parts thereof, electrical equipment, p u m p i n g a n d
piping, ship's arrangements, fuel o i l a n d l u b r i c a t i n g
oil tanks, construction and location o f boilers, ref r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t s , ship's spaces, etc. a r e set o u t i n t h e
relevant parts o f the Rules.
1.2.1 T h e d e f i n i t i o n s a n d e x p l a n a t i o n s r e l a t i n g t o
the general t e r m i n o l o g y o f the Rules are given i n
Part I "Classification".
The following definitions have been adopted i n
this P a r t o f the Rules.
A t r i u m s are p u b l i c spaces w i t h i n a single m a i n
vertical z o n e s p a n n i n g three o r m o r e o p e n decks.
C a b i n b a l c o n y is a n o p e n deck space w h i c h
is p r o v i d e d f o r e x c l u s i v e u s e o f t h e o c c u p a n t s o f
single c a b i n a n d h a s d i r e c t access f r o m s u c h a c a b i n .
F l a m m a b l e l i q u i d s are liquids, o r m i x tures o f liquids, o r liquids c o n t a i n i n g solids i n solut i o n o r suspension (e.g. p a i n t s , varnishes, lacquers,
etc.) w h i c h give o f f f l a m m a b l e v a p o u r s a t o r bel o w 6 0 C c l o s e d c u p t e s t .
S t r u c t u r a l f i r e p r o t e c t i o n is a c o m p l e x
o f the passive m e a n s o f structural fire p r o t e c t i o n i n tended for:
p r e v e n t i o n o f fire;
containment o f flame and smoke
spreading
t h r o u g h o u t the ship;
c r e a t i o n o f c o n d i t i o n s f o r safe e v a c u a t i o n o f
p e o p l e f r o m t h e ship's spaces a n d f r o m t h e s h i p , as
w e l l as f o r effective fire e x t i n c t i o n .
S a f e a r e a i n the c o n t e x t o f a casualty is, f r o m
t h e perspective o f h a b i t a b i l i t y , a n y area(s) w h i c h is
not f l o o d e d o r w h i c h is outside the m a i n vertical zone(s)
i n w h i c h a fire has occurred such t h a t i t can safely
accommodate all persons o n board to protect t h e m
f r o m hazards t o life o r h e a l t h a n d p r o v i d e t h e m w i t h
basic services.
A s t a n d a r d f i r e t e s t is a test i n w h i c h the
relevant specimens are exposed i n a test furnace t o
temperatures corresponding approximately to the

t i m e - t e m p e r a t u r e curve. T h e test m e t h o d s shall
comply w i t h Fire Test Procedures Code.
C o d e o n A l e r t s a n d I n d i c a t o r s means
C o d e o n A l e r t s a n d I n d i c a t o r s , as a d o p t e d b y I M O
resolution A . 1021(26).
F i r e S a f e t y S y s t e m s C o d e means I n t e r n a t i o n a l C o d e f o r F i r e S a f e t y S y s t e m s , as a d o p t e d
by the I M O M a r i t i m e Safety C o m m i t t e e by I M O
resolution MSC.98(73).
F i r e T e s t P r o c e d u r e s C o d e means the
International Code for Application o f Fire Test
P r o c e d u r e s , 2 0 1 0 , as a d o p t e d b y t h e I M O M a r i t i m e
Safety C o m m i t t e e by resolution M S C . 3 0 7 ( 8 8 ) .
N o m i n a l f o a m e x p a n s i o n r a t i o is t h e
ratio o f the v o l u m e o f f o a m to the v o l u m e o f f o a m
solution from which it was made, under non-fire
c o n d i t i o n s , a n d a t a n a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e o f e.g.
a r o u n d 2 0 C.
S e c t i o n m e a n s a g r o u p o f fire detectors a n d
m a n u a l l y o p e r a t e d c a l l p o i n t s as r e p o r t e d i n t h e i n dicating unit(s).
Independent
power
source
o f
a
p u m p m e a n s a p u m p drive p o w e r e d b y a separate
electric m o t o r , h y d r a u l i c o r diesel engine i n t e n d e d o n l y
for this p u m p operation.
C o n t i n u o u s
" B " class ceilings
or
l i n i n g s are those " B " class ceilings o r l i n i n g s w h i c h
t e r m i n a t e at a n " A " o r " B " class division.
L o w e r
f l a m m a b l e
limit
( L F L ) is
m i n i m u m c o n c e n t r a t i o n o f o i l gases a n d v a p o u r s i n
air capable o f i g n i t i n g f r o m a source o f i g n i t i o n a n d
propagating combustion i n the mixture.
Fire-fighting
equipment
and
syst e m s are those active m e a n s o f fire p r o t e c t i o n w h i c h
are intended f o r fire e x t i n c t i o n a n d c o n t a i n m e n t o f
fire spreading t h r o u g h o u t the ship.
spaces
Adjacent c o m p a r t m e n t s
or
are those c o m p a r t m e n t s o r spaces w h i c h are separated f r o m one a n o t h e r b y a b u l k h e a d , deck, platf o r m , or any other fixed division w i t h o u t openings or
w i t h openings provided w i t h means o f closure.
C o m p a r t m e n t s o r spaces c o n t i n u o u s t o o n e a n o t h e r a t t h e c o r n e r s o n l y are n o t c o n s i d e r e d as adjacent.
C o m p a r t m e n t s a n d spaces separated f r o m o n e a n other b y removable divisions (i.e. those removable under
n o r m a l service conditions) or h a v i n g openings n o t fitted
w i t h m e a n s o f c l o s i n g , i n t h e b u l k h e a d o r d e c k t h a t sep a r a t e s t h e m , a r e c o n s i d e r e d as o n e s i n g l e s p a c e .
F o a m d e l i v e r y d u c t s are supply ducts for
introducing high expansion f o a m into the protected
374
Rules
space f r o m f o a m generators located outside the

p r o t e c t e d space.
P r i m a r y d e c k c o v e r i n g is the first l a y e r
o f a floor c o n s t r u c t i o n , w h i c h is applied directly o n
t o p o f t h e deck p l a t i n g a n d is i n c l u s i v e o f a n y p r i m a r y covering, corrosion-resistant c o m p o u n d or adhesive, w h i c h is necessary t o p r o v i d e p r o t e c t i o n o r
adhesion to the deck plating. O t h e r layers o f a floor
construction, w h i c h are applied directly o n t o p o f the
deck plating, constitute floor coverings.
P r o t e c t e d s p a c e is a space e q u i p p e d w i t h
one o f the fire extinguishing systems o r w i t h a n aut o m a t i c fire d e t e c t i o n s y s t e m .
C a s u a l t y t h r e s h o l d , i n the context o f a
fire i n c l u d e s :
.1 loss o f the space o f o r i g i n u p t o the nearest " A "
class b o u n d a r i e s , w h i c h m a y be a p a r t o f t h e space o f
o r i g i n , i f t h e space o f o r i g i n is p r o t e c t e d b y a
fixed
fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m ; o r
.2 l o s s o f t h e s p a c e o f o r i g i n a n d a d j a c e n t s p a c e s
u p to the nearest "A"class boundaries w h i c h are n o t
p a r t o f the space o f o r i g i n .
F i r e c o n t r o l s t a t i o n is a c o n t r o l s t a t i o n
w h e r e i t e m s o f f i r e d e t e c t i o n a n d fire a l a r m s y s t e m s
o r c o n t r o l o f fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s a r e c e n tralized.
R o o m s
c o n t a i n i n g
f u r n i t u r e
and
furnishings o f restricted fire risk for
the purpose
o f application on
ships
c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 3 6 p e r s o n s are the
r o o m s ( w h e t h e r cabins, p u b l i c spaces, offices o r o t h e r
types o f a c c o m m o d a t i o n r e f e r r e d t o i n 1.5.2) i n
which:
a l l f u r n i t u r e , s u c h as desks, w a r d r o b e s , d r e s s i n g
tables, b u r e a u x , dressers, is constructed entirely o f
approved non-combustible materials, except t h a t a
combustible veneer n o t exceeding 2 m m i n thickness
m a y be used o n the w o r k i n g surface o f such articles;
a l l f r e e - s t a n d i n g f u r n i t u r e , s u c h as c h a i r s , sofas,
tables, is c o n s t r u c t e d w i t h f r a m e s o f n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e
materials;
all draperies, curtains a n d other suspended textile
materials h a v e qualities o f resistance t o the f l a m e
spread n o t i n f e r i o r t o those o f w o o l o f m a s s 0,8 k g / m ,
this being determined i n accordance w i t h Fire Test
Procedures Code;
all floor coverings have l o w flame spread characteristics;
all exposed surfaces o f b u l k h e a d s , linings a n d
ceilings have l o w f l a m e spread characteristics;
all upholstered f u r n i t u r e has qualities o f resistance
t o ignition a n d flame spread, this being determined i n
accordance w i t h Fire Test Procedures Code;
all bedding c o m p o n e n t s h a v e qualities o f resistance
to ignition a n d flame spread, this being determined i n
accordance w i t h Fire Test Procedures Code.
2
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
Rated v o l u m e o f a protected
space
is t h e gross v o l u m e o f a space b o u n d e d b y w a t e r t i g h t
o r gastight bulkheads a n d decks w i t h the deduction
for the v o l u m e occupied by m a i n machinery reduct i o n gear, auxiliaries, boilers, condensers, evaporators, t a n k s , v e n t i l a t i o n a n d e x h a u s t gas p i p i n g .
S a u n a is a h o t r o o m w i t h t e m p e r a t u r e s n o r m a l l y v a r y i n g b e t w e e n ( u s u a l l y 8 0 t o 1 2 0 C) w h e r e
t h e h e a t is p r o v i d e d b y a h o t surface (e.g b y electrically-heated oven). T h e h o t r o o m m a y also include
the space w h e r e the o v e n is l o c a t e d a n d adjacent
bathrooms.
W a t e r - s c r e e n s y s t e m s are systems w h i c h
create a w a t e r barrier i n the f o r m o f sufficiently thick
curtain o f water fed t h r o u g h spray nozzles. S u c h
s y s t e m s a r e fitted w h e r e t h e u s e o f " A " c l a s s d i v i s i o n s
is i m p r a c t i c a b l e .
W a t e r
drenching
systems
are those
systems w h i c h supply w a t e r o n t o vertical o r hori z o n t a l ship's structures.
O u t s i d e a i r f o a m s y s t e m is a fixed h i g h
expansion f o a m system w i t h f o a m generators i n stalled outside the protected space t h a t are directly
supplied w i t h fresh air.
I n s i d e a i r f o a m s y s t e m i s a fixed h i g h
e x p a n s i o n f o a m fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m w i t h f o a m
generators located inside the protected space a n d
d r a w i n g a i r f r o m t h a t space.
H i g h
expansion
f o a m fire
exting u i s h i n g s y s t e m s a r e fixed t o t a l f l o o d i n g e x t i n g u i s h i n g systems t h a t use either inside a i r o r
outside air for aeration o f the f o a m solution. A high
expansion f o a m system consists o f b o t h the f o a m
generators a n d the dedicated f o a m concentrate app r o v e d d u r i n g t h e fire t e s t i n g s p e c i f i e d i n 3 . 7 . 3 . 1 . 1 .
F i x e d f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s are
t h o s e s y s t e m s w h i c h a r e i n t e n d e d t o s u p p l y fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m t o t h e p r o t e c t e d spaces o r d i r e c t l y t h e r e i n a n d s t r u c t u r a l l y fixed t o t h e s h i p ' s h u l l .
A system equivalent to a deck f o a m
s y s t e m f o r c a r g o t a n k s is a s y s t e m w h i c h
s h a l l b e c a p a b l e o f e x t i n g u i s h i n g s p i l l fires, p r e c l u d i n g i g n i t i o n o f s p i l l e d o i l n o t y e t i g n i t e d a n d fire e x tinction i n ruptured tanks.
Fire-fighting
outfit
is p o r t a b l e
firefighting
equipment (apparatus, appliances, c o n s u m able materials) intended for:
fire extinction;
ensuring effective
fire-fighting
actions o f the
crew;
e n s u r i n g o p e r a t i o n o f fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s .
C o m b u s t i b l e m e d i u m is f l a m m a b l e l i q u i d s ; f l a m m a b l e gases, c o m p r e s s e d , l i q u e f i e d o r
dissolved u n d e r pressure; solid combustible materials
a n d substances, i n c l u d i n g cargoes, fuel,
finishing
materials, equipment, insulation, furniture.
P a r t VI. Fire
Protection
Steel or other equivalent m a t e r i a l

means any non-combustible material, w h i c h by itself
o r due to insulation provided, has structural a n d i n t e g r i t y p r o p e r t i e s e q u i v a l e n t t o steel a t the e n d o f the
applicable fire exposure d u r i n g a s t a n d a r d fire test
(e.g., a l u m i n u m a l l o y w i t h a p p r o p r i a t e i n s u l a t i o n ) .
C r u d e o i l means any oil occurring naturally
in the earth whether o r n o t treated to render it suitable f o r transportation a n d includes crude o i l f r o m
w h i c h certain distillate fractions m a y have been rem o v e d a n d crude o i l to w h i c h certain distillate fractions m a y have been added.
F l a s h p o i n t is the t e m p e r a t u r e i n degrees
Celsius (closed cup test), at w h i c h liquid w i l l give o f f
e n o u g h f l a m m a b l e v a p o r s t o be i g n i t e d as d e t e r m i n e d
by an approved flash point apparatus.
M o t o r vehicle w i t h o u t fuel in its
t a n k s i s m o t o r v e h i c l e , m o t o r b i k e , t r a c t o r , etc.,
powered w i t h a n internal c o m b u s t i o n engine a n d havi n g e m p t y f u e l s y s t e m a n d f u e l t a n k s , as w e l l as b o t h
battery leads disconnected f r o m the a c c u m u l a t o r .
S u r f a c e e x t i n c t i o n is c o o l i n g , w e t t i n g o r
r e s t r i c t i o n o f o x y g e n access t o b u r n i n g surfaces.
S m o t h e r i n g is filling o f a p r o t e c t e d space
with a m e d i u m not supporting combustion.
F u e l o i l u n i t s r e f e r t o d e f i n i t i o n g i v e n i n 1.2,
Part V I I "Machinery Installations".
S a f e t y c e n t r e is a c o n t r o l s t a t i o n dedicated
to the management o f emergency situations. Safety
systems operation, c o n t r o l and/or m o n i t o r i n g are a n
integral p a r t o f the safety centre.
C e n t r a l c o n t r o l s t a t i o n ( C C S ) is a
control station where the following control and i n dicator functions are centralized:
f i x e d fire d e t e c t i o n a n d fire a l a r m s y s t e m s ;
a u t o m a t i c s p r i n k l e r s y s t e m , fire d e t e c t i o n a n d
a l a r m systems, as w e l l as r e m o t e s t a r t i n g c o n t r o l s o f
o t h e r fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s ;
fire d o o r indicator panels;
fire d o o r closures;
watertight d o o r indicator panels;
w a t e r t i g h t d o o r closures;
v e n t i l a t i o n fans;
general/fire alarms;
ship c o m m u n i c a t i o n systems including telephones;
m i c r o p h o n e s f o r public address systems.
Continuously manned central control station i n
t h e c o n t e x t o f the present P a r t is a c e n t r a l c o n t r o l
s t a t i o n , w h i c h is c o n t i n u o u s l y m a n n e d b y a responsible m e m b e r o f the crew (refer to Section 4).
1.3.1 G e n e r a l r e g u l a t i o n s f o r t h e c l a s s i f i c a t i o n , s u r v e y o f ships u n d e r c o n s t r u c t i o n a n d classification sur-
375
veys, as w e l l as t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e d o c u m e n t a t i o n
t o b e s u b m i t t e d t o t h e R e g i s t e r f o r r e v i e w a r e set o u t i n
General Regulations for the Classification and Other
Activity and i n Part I "Classification".
1.3.2 S u b j e c t t o t h e R e g i s t e r s u r v e y d u r i n g c o n s t r u c t i o n o f a s h i p a r e : s t r u c t u r a l fire p r o t e c t i o n ,
m a t e r i a l s u s e d f o r t h e i n t e r i o r finishing o f s h i p ' s
s p a c e s , a s r e g a r d s fire h a z a r d o u s p r o p e r t i e s t h e r e o f ,
fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g , f i r e d e t e c t i o n a n d a l a r m s y s t e m s
subject t o the p r o v i s i o n s o f the present P a r t .
A s regards f i r e - f i g h t i n g o u t f i t , i t shall o n l y be
checked f o r correct location a n d f o r complete availability
i n accordance w i t h the requirements o f the present Part.
1.3.3 T h e f o l l o w i n g s h a l l b e s u b m i t t e d t o t h e
Register for approval o f active fire-fighting means
a n d p a s s i v e m e a n s o f s t r u c t u r a l fire p r o t e c t i o n a c cording to the requirements o f the present Part:
. 1 d o c u m e n t s o n fire t e s t s r u n b y c o m p e t e n t
b o d i e s , c o n f i r m i n g t h e e f f i c i e n c y o f n e w l y a p p l i e d fire
extinguishing m e d i u m w i t h the recommended stand a r d s o n c o m p o s i t i o n a n d a p p l i c a t i o n rates, as w e l l
as i n f o r m a t i o n o n s t o r a g e life a n d c o n d i t i o n s ;
.2 r e p o r t s o f t h e r e c o g n i z e d l a b o r a t o r i e s o n t h e f i r e
tests o f " A " a n d " B " class f i r e - f i g h t i n g d i v i s i o n s , c l o sures o f openings a n d passages (cutouts) i n such divis i o n s ( " A " a n d " B " c l a s s d o o r s i n c l u d e d ) ( r e f e r t o 1.6);
.3 d r a w i n g s o f
fire-fighting
divisions together
w i t h the protocols o f the recognized laboratories o n
tests, w h i c h c o n f i r m t h e i r c o m p l i a n c e w i t h " A " a n d
" B " class d i v i s i o n s ;
.4 r e p o r t s o f t h e r e c o g n i z e d l a b o r a t o r i e s o n t e s t s
o f t h e fire h a z a r d o u s m a t e r i a l f e a t u r e s ( r e f e r t o 1 . 6 ) ;
.5 d r a w i n g s f o r i n d i v i d u a l s t a n d a r d assemblies
(equipment) o f fire extinguishing systems a n d
firefighting
outfit;
.6 required calculations, w h i c h c o n f i r m the fulfillment
o f the requirements o f the present Part.
1.4 K I R K
PLANS
1.4.1 A t t h e m a i n fire c o n t r o l s t a t i o n , w h e e l h o u s e
o r i n conspicuous positions i n corridors a n d lobbies
o f a n y ship, there shall be e x h i b i t e d general arrangement plans clearly showing the following for
each deck:
.1 l o c a t i o n o f c o n t r o l stations;
.2 a r r a n g e m e n t o f fire-resisting a n d
fire-retarding
divisions;
.3 s p a c e s p r o t e c t e d b y t h e fire d e t e c t i o n a n d
a l a r m system;
.4 s p a c e s p r o t e c t e d b y f i x e d fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g
systems w i t h indication o f the location o f instruments
a n d fittings f o r t h e i r c o n t r o l a n d a l s o t h e d i s p o s i t i o n
o f fire h y d r a n t s ;
376
.5 m e a n s o f a c c e s s t o d i f f e r e n t c o m p a r t m e n t s ,
decks, etc., w i t h i n d i c a t i o n o f escape r o u t e s , c o r r i d o r s
and doors;
.6 v e n t i l a t i o n s y s t e m i n c l u d i n g t h e c o n t r o l s o f
fans a n d s h o w i n g the disposition o f dampers and the
identification numbers o f the fans serving the groups
o f spaces, fenced o f f b y fire-resistant b o u n d a r i e s .
.7 a r r a n g e m e n t o f
fire-fighting
outfit;
.8 l o c a t i o n o f t h e d o c u m e n t s r e f e r r e d t o i n 1.4.6;
.9 l o c a t i o n o f e m e r g e n c y escape b r e a t h i n g devices
specified i n 5.1.23.
1.4.2 I n l i e u o f t h e p l a n s , i n f o r m a t i o n s p e c i f i e d
i n 1.4.1 m a y b e s e t o u t i n a b o o k l e t , a c o p y o f w h i c h
shall b e supplied t o each officer, a n d one c o p y a t a l l t i m e s s h a l l be a v a i l a b l e o n b o a r d i n a n accessible p o s i t i o n .
1.4.3 A d u p l i c a t e s e t o f t h e p l a n s o r t h e b o o k l e t
protected against m a r i n e e n v i r o n m e n t shall b e permanently stowed outside the deckhouse i n a weathertight
enclosure painted r e d a n d m a r k e d as indicated
i n F i g . 1.4.3-1 i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h I M O M S C / C i r c . 4 5 1 .
F i g . 1.4.3-2
1.4.5 A l l a l t e r a t i o n s i n t h e fire p r o t e c t i o n o f a
ship shall b e entered i nthe ship's d o c u m e n t s stated
i n 1.4.1 a n d 1.4.2.
1.4.6 T o b e k e p t i n a s e p a r a t e f i l e i n a n a c c e s s i b l e
position are technical instructions f o r maintenance
a n d u s e o f a l l ship's installations for e x t i n c t i o n a n d
c o n t a i n m e n t o f fire.
1.4.7 I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n
36 passengers, plans a n d b o o k l e t s shall p r o v i d e i n f o r m a t i o n r e g a r d i n g fire p r o t e c t i o n , f i r e d e t e c t i o n
a n d fire e x t i n c t i o n i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 1 . 4 . 1 a n d
considering I M O resolution A.756(18).
1.5 C A T E G O R I E S O F S H I P ' S
F i g . 1.4.3-1
T h e enclosure shall be capable o f being easily

opened, be readily available t o t h e shoreside firefighting personnel, be located i n awell-illuminated
position, i f possible including i l l u m i n a t i o n f r o m a n
emergency source.
I n o i l tankers, chemical tankers a n d gas carriers
the enclosure o f fire c o n t r o l plans shall n o t b e located
o n e x t e r i o r b u l k h e a d s o f superstructures w h i c h face
cargo area a n dt h e surfaces w i t h i n 3 m f r o m t h e m
a l o n g t h e side.
I f the enclosure i s n o t adjacent t o the gangway,
t h e r e s h a l l b e g u i d e signs a s i n d i c a t e d i n F i g . 1.4.3-2
s h o w i n g the w a y thereto. T h e d i m e n s i o n s o f the signs
s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 3 0 0 x 4 0 0 m m .
1.4.4 D e s c r i p t i o n i n s u c h p l a n s a n d b o o k l e t s s h a l l
be i n t h e state language a n d i n t h e E n g l i s h / F r e n c h
l a n g u a g e . T h e s y m b o l s f o r i t e m s l i s t e d i n 1.4.1 s h a l l
be i n agreement w i t h I M O r e s o l u t i o n A . 9 5 2 ( 2 3 )
"Graphical Symbols for Fire C o n t r o l Plans".
F o r ships n o t engaged o ni n t e r n a t i o n a l voyages,
translation into English o r French is not required.
T h e graphical symbols shall be coloured.
Ships
SPACES
1.5.1 C o n t r o l s t a t i o n s :
.1 spaces i n w h i c h t h e ship's r a d i o o r m a i n n a vigational equipment ( i n particular: steering stand,
compass, radar and direction finding equipment), o r
the emergency p o w e r source, (including a c c u m u l a t o r
batteries regardless o f their capacity, according t o
Part X I "ElectricalEquipment"), or i n w h i c h items o f
fire detection a n d fire a l a r m systems o rc o n t r o l o f fire
extinguishing systems a r e centralized. Steering gear
r o o m containing its emergency control is n o t considered as a c o n t r o l station. I f i n t h e present P a r t
there are n o specific r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r the centralization within a control station o f major components o f
the fixed fire extinguishing systems, t h e n such m a j o r
c o m p o n e n t s m a y b e placed i n spaces, w h i c h a r e n o t
considered as c o n t r o l stations;
.2 c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s ( r e f e r t o 1 . 5 . 1 . 1 ) , w h i c h m a y
also b e c o n s i d e r e d a s m a c h i n e r y spaces, s u c h a s
emergency diesel generators r o o m s ;
.3 spaces c o n t a i n i n g e q u i p m e n t f o r t h e c o n t r o l o f
submersion, emersion and heeling;
. 4 c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s f o r fire a n d r e s c u e o p e r a t i o n s
(refer t o 6.6.2).
1.5.2 A c c o m m o d a t i o n s p a c e s :
.1 spaces u s e d a s cabins, c o r r i d o r s , offices, m e d ical rooms, cinema halls, games a n d entertainment
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
halls, barbers shops, pantries w h i c h are n o t used f o r

taking meals a n d do n o t contain equipment for
cooking h o t meals (however such pantries m a y have
the f o l l o w i n g appUances: coffee machines, toasters,
dish washing machines, m i c r o w a v e ovens, induction
heaters a n d similar appUances each c o n s u m i n g n o t
m o r e t h a n 5 k W ; electric stoves a n d k i t c h e n stoves
for food heating consuming n o t more than 2 k W and
h a v i n g a surface
temperature
o f not more
t h a n 1 5 0 C), a n d o t h e r s i m i l a r s p a c e s ;
.2 p u b l i c spaces: t h e a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces u s e d
as halls, d i n i n g r o o m s , lounges a n d s i m i l a r p e r m a n e n t l y enclosed spaces;
.3 s a n i t a r y s p a c e s : t h e p u b U c s p a c e s u s e d a s
shower-rooms, bathrooms, toilets, small laundries,
i n d o o r s w i m m i n g p o o l s , etc.
1.5.3 S e r v i c e s p a c e s :
. 1 s e r v i c e s p a c e s u s e d as g a l l e y s ( s p a c e s c o n t a i n i n g
electric stoves a n d k i t c h e n stoves w i t h a capacity o f m o r e
than 5 k W ) , pantries containing equipment f o r c o o k i n g
hot meals (such pantries m a y have the f o l l o w i n g appliances: toasters, m i c r o w a v e ovens a n d s i m i l a r appliances
each c o n s u m i n g n o t m o r e than 5 k W ; electric stoves a n d
kitchen stoves f o r f o o d heating c o n s u m i n g u p t o 5 k W ) ,
v a r i o u s w o r k s h o p s n o t f o r m i n g part o f m a c h i n e r y spaces
a n d s i m i l a r s p a c e s as w e l l as t r u n k s l e a d i n g t o s u c h
spaces;
.2 service spaces u s e d as s t o r e r o o m s :
.2.1 storerooms f o r explosives;
.2.2 s t o r e r o o m s f o r f l a m m a b l e m a t e r i a l s a n d
substances: p a i n t lockers, spaces f o r f l a m m a b l e U q u i d s , f l a m m a b l e U q u e f i e d a n d c o m p r e s s e d gases,
sheltered garages, fuel d i s t r i b u t i o n systems, etc.;
.2.3 s t o r e r o o m s o t h e r t h a n m e n t i o n e d i n 1.5.3.2.1
a n d 1.5.3.2.2;
.2.4 w o r k i n g spaces d e f i n e d i n 1.5.8;
.3 c a r g o c o n t r o l r o o m s ( r e f e r t o d e f i n i t i o n s i n 1.2,
Part V I I "Machinery Installations").
1.5.4 C a r g o s p a c e s :
.1 cargo tanks intended f o r the carriage o f Uquids
i n bulk, slop tanks included;
.2 spaces f o r d r y cargoes o t h e r t h a n ship stores:
dry cargo a n d refrigerated cargo holds a n d 'tweendecks, i n c l u d i n g those intended also f o r carriage o f
containers a n d portable tanks, dangerous goods i n
packaged f o r m o r i n b u l k , m o t o r vehicles w i t h o u t
fuel i n t h e i r t a n k s ; storage spaces f o r r e a d y p r o d u c e ,
u t i U z a b l e refuse, f i s h i n g e q u i p m e n t , packages, etc., as
w e l l as p r o d u c e discharge t r u n k s , cargo Ufts a n d access t r u n k s l e a d i n g t o s u c h spaces;
.3 r o - r o c a r g o spaces n o t n o r m a l l y s u b d i v i d e d i n
any w a y a n d extending t o either a substantial length
o r t h e e n t i r e l e n g t h o f t h e ship, spaces i n w h i c h m o t o r
vehicles w i t h fuel i n their tanks f o r their o w n p r o pulsion, and/or goods packaged ( i n tare o r i n bulk,
o n r a i l o r r o a d cars, vehicles ( i n c l u d i n g r o a d o r r a i l
377
tanks), trailers, containers, pallets,

demountable
tanks o r similar enlarged units, o r other tanks) are
normally loaded a n d unloaded i n a horizontal dir e c t i o n . S u c h spaces a r e d i v i d e d i n t o :
.3.1 closed r o - r o c a r g o spaces w h i c h a r e n o t
spaces specified i n 1.5.4.3.2 a n d 1.5.4.5;
.3.2 o p e n r o - r o cargo spaces e i t h e r o p e n a t b o t h
ends, o r open at o n e a n d p r o v i d e d w i t h adequate
n a t u r a l v e n t i l a t i o n effective o v e r their entire l e n g t h
t h r o u g h p e r m a n e n t o p e n i n g s i n t h e side p l a t i n g o r
deckhead o r f r o m above while the total square o f
openings shall be a t least 10 per cent o f t h e square o f
side p l a t i n g o f spaces;
.4 vehicle spaces i n t e n d e d f o r carriage o f m o t o r
vehicles w i t h fuel i n their tanks f o r their o w n p r o pulsion, w h i c h divide into:
.4.1 enclosed spaces, f o r vehicles w h i c h a r e n o t
o p e n spaces f o r vehicles n e i t h e r w e a t h e r decks;
.4.2 o p e n v e h i c l e spaces, o p e n s i m i l a r t o 1.5.4.3.2;
.5 w e a t h e r d e c k i s a d e c k f u l l y o p e n f o r e n v i r o n m e n t a l exposure f r o m a b o v e a n d a t least f r o m
t w o sides.
1.5.5 M a c h i n e r y s p a c e s refer t o d e f i n i t i o n
o f 1.2, P a r t V I I " M a c h i n e r y I n s t a l l a t i o n s " .
1.5.6 M a c h i n e r y s p a c e s o f c a t e g o r y A refer t o
d e f i n i t i o n g i v e n i n 1.2, P a r t V I I " M a c h i n e r y
Installations".
1.5.7 P u m p r o o m s o n t a n k e r s a n d c o m b i n a t i o n
carriers:
.1 cargo p u m p r o o m s where cargo p u m p s are
located as w e l l as exits a n d t r u n k s leading t o such
spaces; p u m p r o o m s adjacent t o c a r g o t a n k s a n d
bilge tanks (refer t o 2.4.7);
.2 p u m p r o o m s w h e r e p u m p s t r a n s p o r t i n g w a t e r
and liquid fuel are located.
1.5.8 W o r k i n g s p a c e s a r e spaces o n special p u r p o s e ships, w h i c h are n e i t h e r m a c h i n e r y spaces n o r
p a r t o f t h e m such as w o r k s h o p s , l a b o r a t o r i e s a n d
o t h e r s i m i l a r spaces, as w e l l as t r u n k s l e a d i n g t o s u c h
spaces, w h e r e :
.1 fuel o i l o r flammable Uquids are used o r
combustible materials are processed;
.2 n e i t h e r f l a m m a b l e Uquids a r e used, n o r c o m bustible materials are processed.
W o r k i n g spaces s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e present P a r t f o r service spaces i f n o t
specified otherwise.
1.5.9 S p e c i a l c a t e g o r y s p a c e s a r e e n c l o s e d spaces
located above o r below the bulkhead deck i n t o a n d
o u t o f w h i c h m o t o r vehicles c a n be d r i v e n under their
o w n p r o p u l s i o n a n d t o w h i c h p a s s e n g e r s h a v e access.
T h e s e spaces m a y be l o c a t e d o n m o r e t h a n o n e d e c k
i f t o t a l o v e r a l l clear height f o r the m o t o r vehicles
does n o t exceed 10 m .
1 . 5 . 1 0 S p e c i a l e l e c t r i c a l s p a c e s r e f e r t o 1.2,
378
Rules
1.6 S U B D I V I S I O N A N D T E S T I N G O F M A T E R I A L S
A N D P R O D U C T S A C C O R D I N G T OT H EK I R K T E S T
PROCEDURES CODE
1.6.1 T h e F i r e T e s t P r o c e d u r e s C o d e i s a p p U e d t o
m a t e r i a l s a n d p r o d u c t s s u b j e c t t o t e s t i n g a n d assessm e n t i n accordance w i t h the provisions o f the Code a n d
approved b y t h e Register, as required b y t h e Rules.
1.6.2 W h e r e r e f e r e n c e t o t h e F i r e T e s t P r o c e d u r e s
Code is made i n t h e text o f a n y requirement o f the
present Rules, i t means that t h e material o r product
shall be tested i n compliance w i t h a n appUcable fire
test procedure o r procedures, stipulated b y t h e C o d e ,
except cases specified b y t h e s a m e C o d e .
1.6.3 I n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h a p p U c a b l e p a r t s o f t h e
Fire Test Procedures Code materials a n d products
shall b e tested m e n t i o n e d i n t h e present R u l e s as:
.1 n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e r i a l s ( r e f e r t o 2 . 1 . 1 . 5 , 2 . 1 . 2 ,
2.2.2.5 a n d 2.3.4). N o n - c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e r i a l is a m a t e rial, w h i c h n e i t h e r b u r n s n o r gives o f f f l a m m a b l e v a p o r s
i n t h e a m o u n t sufficient f o r self-ignition w h e n heated
t o 7 5 0 C a p p r o x i m a t e l y . A n y o t h e r m a t e r i a l i s a c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e r i a l . H o w e v e r , p r o d u c t s m a d e o n l y o f glass,
concrete, ceramics, n a t u r a l stone, m a s o n r y units, c o m m o n metals a n d m e t a l aUoys are considered being n o n combustible a n d m a y be instaUed w i t h o u t testing;
.2 n o t g e n e r a t i n g e x c e s s i v e q u a n t i t i e s o f s m o k e
a n d t o x i c products (refer t o 2.1.1.7 a n d 2.1.2.6) o r n o t
hazardous as regards generation o ftoxic o r explosive
products a t elevated temperatures (refer t o 2.1.1.6);
.3 " A " o r " B " c l a s s d i v i s i o n s , s u c h a s : d e c k s ,
bulkheads, doors, c o n t i n u o u s ceilings a n d Unings,
w i n d o w s , fire dampers, places o f p i p i n g a n d cabUng
passage (refer t o 2.1.2 a n d 2.1.3);
.4 f i r e d o o r s c o n t r o l s y s t e m s c a p a b l e o f o p e r a t i n g
i n case o f fire (refer t o 2.2.4.1.15);
.5 l o w f l a m e - s p r e a d surfaces ( r e f e r t o 2.1.1.5,
2.1.1.8, 2.1.2.6 a n d2.1.2.8). L o w flame-spread means
t h a t t h e surface restricts t h e spread o f f l a m e t o a
sufficient extent;
.6 n o t r e a d i l y i g n i t a b l e p r i m a r y d e c k c o v e r i n g s
(refer t o 2.1.1.6);
.7 draperies, c u r t a i n s a n d o t h e r v e r t i c a n y s u p p o r t e d
textile materials, w h i c h meet t h e requirements as r e gards f l a m e spread resistance n o t i n f e r i o r t o those o f
w o o l h a v i n g a mass o f0,8 k g / m (refer t o 2.1.1.9);
.8 u p h o l s t e r e d f u r n i t u r e m e e t i n g t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
as r e g a r d s i g n i t i o n a n d f l a m e - s p r e a d resistance ( r e f e r
to 2.1.1.9);
.9 b e d d i n g c o m p o n e n t s ( b l a n k e t s , covers, p i l l o w s ,
mattresses), w h i c h meet t h e requirements as regards
i g n i t i o n a n dflame-spread resistance (refer t o 2.1.1.9).
1.6.4 W h e n t e s t i n g a n d a p p r o v i n g t h e m a t e r i a l s
and products i n accordance w i t h the Fire Test P r o cedures C o d e a d d i t i o n a l requirements specified i n t h e
appropriate parts o fthe Fire Test Procedures Code.
2
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
1.7 A L T E R N A T I V E D E S I G N A N D A R R A N G E M E N T S
1.7.1 G e n e r a l .
1.7.1.1 F i r e s a f e t y d e s i g n a n d a r r a n g e m e n t s m a y
deviate f r o m t h e requirements o f t h e present Part,
provided, that t h e design a n d arrangements meet t h e
fire safety objectives a n d t h e f u n c t i o n a l requirements.
1.7.1.2 I f t h e d e s i g n a n d a r r a n g e m e n t s d e v i a t e
f r o m t h e prescriptive requirements o f t h e present
Part, engineering analysis, evaluation a n d approval
o f t h e alternative design a n d arrangements shall be
carried o u t i n accordance w i t h the requirements o f
the present Chapter.
1.7.2 E n g i n e e r i n g a n a l y s i s .
1.7.2.1 T h e e n g i n e e r i n g a n a l y s i s s u b m i t t e d t o t h e
Register shall be prepared based o n t h e GuideUnes o n
Alternative Design a n dArrangements f o rFire Safety
(refer t o M S C / C i r c . 1 0 0 2 ) , a n d shall include, as a
m i n i m u m , t h e following elements:
.1 d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h e s h i p t y p e a n d space(s)
concerned;
.2 i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f p r e s c r i p t i v e r e q u i r e m e n t ( s )
w i t h w h i c h t h e ship o r t h e space(s) w i l l n o t c o m p l y ;
.3 i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f t h e f i r e a n d e x p l o s i o n h a z a r d s
o f t h e ship o r t h e space(s) concerned i n c l u d i n g :
.3.1 i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f t h e p o s s i b l e i g n i t i o n s o u r c e s ;
.3.2 i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f t h e p o t e n t i a l f o r t h e s p r e a d
o f fire o f each space concerned;
.3.3 i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f t h e s m o k e a n d t o x i c p r o ducts g e n e r a t i o n p o t e n t i a l f o r each space concerned;
3.4 i d e n t i f i c a t i o n o f t h e p o t e n t i a l f o r t h e s p r e a d
o f fire, s m o k e o r o f t o x i c products generation f r o m
t h e space(s) c o n c e r n e d t o o t h e r spaces;
.4 d e t e r m i n a t i o n o f t h e r e q u i r e d f i r e s a f e t y p e r f o r m a n c e c r i t e r i a f o r t h e ships o r t h e space(s) c o n cerned addressed b y t h e prescriptive requirements),
w h i c h shall:
.4.1 b e b a s e d o n t h e f i r e s a f e t y o b j e c t i v e s a n d o n
the functional requirements o ft h e present Part;
.4.2 p r o v i d e a d e g r e e o f s a f e t y n o t l e s s t h a n t h a t
achieved b y using t h eprescriptive requirements;
.4.3 b e q u a n t i f i a b l e a n d m e a s u r a b l e ;
.5 d e t a i l e d d e s c r i p t i o n o f t h e a l t e r n a t i v e d e s i g n
a n d arrangements, i n c l u d i n g a list o fthe assumptions
used i n t h e design a n d a n yproposed operational restrictions o r conditions;
.6 t e c h n i c a l j u s t i f i c a t i o n d e m o n s t r a t i n g t h a t t h e
alternative design a n d arrangements meet t h e req u i r e d fire s a f e t y p e r f o r m a n c e c r i t e r i a .
1.7.3 E v a l u a t i o n o f t h e a l t e r n a t i v e d e s i g n a n d
arrangements.
1.73.1 T h e e n g i n e e r i n g a n a l y s i s r e q u i r e d i n 1.7.2
shaU be evaluated a n d approved b y t h e Register t a k i n g
into account theGuideUnes developed b y I M O .
1.7.3.2 A c o p y o f t h e d o c u m e n t a t i o n , a s a p p r o v e d
b y t h e Register, indicating t h a t t h e alternative design
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
379
and arrangements comply w i t h therequirements o f the

present C h a p t e r shall be carried o n b o a r d a ship.
1.7.4 R e - e v a l u a t i o n d u e t o c h a n g e o f c o n d i t i o n s .
1.7.4.1 I f t h e a s s u m p t i o n s a n d o p e r a t i o n a l r e -
strictions that were stipulated i n t h e alternative design a n d arrangements are changed, t h e engineering
analysis shall be carried o u tagain under the changed
condition a n d shall be approved b y t h e Register.
2 STRUCTURAL FIRE PROTECTION

2.1
G E N E R A L
2.1.1 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r m a t e r i a l s .
2.1.1.1 T h e h u l l , s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s ,
structural
bulkheads decks a n d deckhouses shall be m a n u f a c t u r e d o f steel o r o t h e r e q u i v a l e n t m a t e r i a l . F o r t h e
p u r p o s e o f u s i n g t h e d e f i n i t i o n o f steel o r o t h e r
equivalent m a t e r i a l , given i n 1.2.1, "appUcable fire
exposure" shall correspond t o t h e standards o f fire
integrity a n d i n s u l a t i o n , specified i n t h e appropriate
bulkheads a n d decks fire i n t e g r i t y tables. F o r exa m p l e , i f f o r s u c h d i v i s i o n s as d e c k s o r side a n d e n d
bulkheads o fdeckhouses fire i n t e g r i t y equal t o " B - 0 "
is a l l o w e d , t h e n "appUcable fire e x p o s u r e " s h a l l be
equal t o half a n hour.
I f a l u m i n u m alloys o r glass-reinforced plastics
are used, t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f2.1.1.3 o r 2.1.1.12 shall
be m e t , respectively.
2.1.1.2 C a s i n g s a n d c r o w n s o f m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s
o f category A shall be o f steel a n d i n s u l a t e d as r e quired b y Tables 2.3.3-1 a n d 2.4.2-1 as appropriate.
2.1.1.3 I f a n y p a r t o f t h e d i v i s i o n i s m a n u f a c t u r e d
o f a l u m i n u m alloys, the following requirements shall
be c o m p U e d w i t h :
.1 p a r t s o f " A " o r " B " class d i v i s i o n s , m a d e o f
a l u m i n u m alloy, except t h e divisions, w h i c h a r en o t
load-bearing, shall be insulated so, that the temperature o f t h e structural core o f t h e specimen does
n o t r i s e m o r e t h a n 2 0 0 C a b o v e t h e a m b i e n t t e m perature a t a n y t i m e d u r i n g t h e appUcable fire exp o s u r e a t t h e s t a n d a r d fire test;
.2 s p e c i a l a t t e n t i o n s h a l l b e g i v e n t o i n s u l a t i o n o f
a l u m i n u m aUoy components o f columns, stanchions
a n d o t h e r s t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s r e q u i r e d t o s u p p o r t Ufe-
b o a t a n d Ufe r a f t s t o w a g e , l a u n c h i n g a n d e m b a r k a t i o n
areas a n d " A " a n d " B " class d i v i s i o n s t o ensure t h a t :
2.1 s u c h m e m b e r s r e q u i r e d t o s u p p o r t l i f e b o a t
and Ufe raft stowage, launching a n d embarkation
areas a n d " A " type divisions c o m p l y w i t h t h e t e m p e r a t u r e rise U m i t a t i o n r e q u i r e m e n t , as specified
in 2.1.1.3.1, at the e n d o fa n hour;
2.2 s u c h m e m b e r s r e q u i r e d t o s u p p o r t " B " c l a s s
divisions c o m p l y w i t h t h e t e m p e r a t u r e rise U m i t a t i o n
r e q u i r e m e n t , as specified i n 2.1.1.3, a t t h e e n d o f h a l f
an hour.
2.1.1.4 I n a c c o m m o d a t i o n s p a c e s , s e r v i c e s p a c e s
a n d c o n t r o l stations o f a l l types o f ships t h e t o t a l
m a s s o f c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e r i a l s o feach enclosed space
shall be calculated based o n the following f o r m u l a :
M
r e l
where
= M /S
(2.1.1.4)
= the total m a s s o f combustible materials per unit area

o f the space, i n k g / m ;
M , = the total m a s s o fcombustible materials o f the space,
in kg;
S = the floor area o f the space, i n m .
2
T h e following combustible materials shall be

included t o t h e calculations:
.1 c o n s t r u c t i o n m a t e r i a l s as cables i n s u l a t i o n ,
plastic pipes, veneers a n d c o m b u s t i b l e materials
permitted t o be used according t o t h e present Part;
.2 o u t f i t t i n g , w h i c h m a y b e i n s t a U e d d u r i n g c o n struction o r provided b y the shipowner o rcrew, including
f u r n i t u r e , b e d d i n g c o m p o n e n t s a n d electrical appUances.
M a x i m u m values for the total mass o f combustible
materials p e r u n i t area ( M ) , i n k g / m , shaU n o t exceed
the values specified i n T a b l e 2.1.1.4. Space categories
shall c o r r e s p o n d t o the ones specified i n 2.2.1.3, 2.2.1.5,
2.3.3 o r 2.4.2, d e p e n d i n g o n t h e ship type.
2
r e /
T a b l e
Ship type
Space category
Stairways, corridors
Control stations
Accommodation spaces
Service spaces surrounded b y " A "class divisions
2.1.1.4
Passenger ship carrying more,

t h a n 36 p a s s e n g e r s
Passenger ship
carrying not more,
t h a n 36 p a s s e n g e r s
C a r g o ships
5
5
15 - m i n o r f i r e r i s k ,
35 - m o d e r a t e a n d g r e a t e r f i r e r i s k
45
5
5
5
5
35
35
45
45
380
Rules
2.1.1.5 I n s u l a t i o n m a t e r i a l s s h a l l b e n o n - c o m bustible, except f o r u s e i n c a r g o spaces, p o s t a l a n d

baggage storerooms a n d refrigerated storerooms o f
service spaces. V a p o r b a r r i e r s a n d adhesives u s e d i n
c o n j u n c t i o n w i t h i n s u l a t i o n , as w e l l as i n s u l a t i o n o f
piping fittings o f cooling systems a n d piping o f
cooling w a t e r o f t h e c o n d i t i o n i n g systems m a y be
combustible, b u t they shall be kept t o the m i n i m u m
as f a r as p r a c t i c a b l e , w h i l e t h e i r e x p o s e d surfaces
shall be l o w flame-spread.
Insulating materials shall n o tc o n t a i n asbestos.
I n t h e spaces w h e r e o i l y p r o d u c t s m a y b e present
the i n s u l a t i o n surface shall be oily v a p o r s - i m p e r m e able, w h i c h m a y be p r o v i d e d b y coating i n s u l a t i o n
w i t h m e t a l l i c f i l m o r glass c l o t h .
2.1.1.6 P r i m a r y d e c k c o v e r i n g s , i f a p p U e d w i t h i n
a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces a n d c o n t r o l stations o r o n cabin balconies o f passenger ships c o n structed o n o r after 1 July 2008 shall be o f a n
approved material, w h i c h has l o w flame spread
characteristics, this being determined i n accordance
w i t h the Fire Test Procedures Code.
W h e r e a floor covering is required t o be l o w
flame-spread; a l l layers shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e req u i r e m e n t o f 1.6.3.5. I f t h e f l o o r c o v e r i n g h a s a
m u l t i l a y e r c o n s t r u c t i o n , t h e tests shall be c o n d u c t e d
for each layer o r combinations o fsome layers o f such
covering. A t that, t h e Register a p p r o v a l is appUcable
to t h e tested c o m b i n a t i o n s o f layers. W h e n a p r i m a r y
deck covering is also t h e exposed surface (refer
to 2.1.1.8), i t shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements
o f 1.6.3.5. H o w e v e r , p r i m a r y d e c k c o v e r i n g , w h i c h
c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.6.3.6, a r e c o n sidered as c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.6.3.5
for floor coverings. P r i m e r o r similar thin film o f
paint o n deck plating need n o t comply w i t h thereq u i r e m e n t s o f 1.6.3.6.
O n passenger ships constructed o n o r after
1 July 2008, p r i m a r y deck coverings o n cabin balconies
shall n o t give rise t o s m o k e , t o x i c o r explosive hazards at
elevated temperatures, this being determined i n accordance w i t h t h e Fire Test Procedures Code.
2.1.1.7 P a i n t s , v a r n i s h e s a n d o t h e r f i n i s h i n g s u s e d
o n exposed surfaces inside service a n d a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces, c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s a n d s t a i r w a y s enclosures
shall n o t generate excessive q u a n t i t y o f s m o k e a n d
toxic vapours, this being determined i n accordance
w i t h Fire Test Procedures Code.
T h i s requirement appUes t o t h e finish materials o f
bulkheads, decks, f l o o r coverings, Unings a n d ceilings, b u tis n o t appUcable t o cables i n s u l a t i o n , plastic
piping a n dfurniture.
Finish materials a n d p r i m a r y deck coverings
(refer t o 2.1.1.6) w i t h t o t a l t h e r m a l emission o f n o t
more than 0,2 M J a n d m a x i m u m value o f thermal
e m i s s i o n f a c t o r n o t m o r e t h a n 1,0 k W ( b o t h v a l u e s
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
are d e t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h P a r t 5 o f the F i r e

Test Procedures C o d e a n d a r e considered as c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.6.3.2 w i t h o u t tests.
O n board o i l tankers, chemical tankers a n d o i l
recovery ships t h e use o f a l u m i n i u m coatings c o n taining greater t h a n 10 p e r cent a l u m i n i u mb y weight
in t h e d r y f i l m is prohibited i n cargo tanks, cargo
t a n k deck area, p u m p r o o m s , cofferdams o r a n y
other area where cargo v a p o u r m a y accumulate.
O n passenger ships constructed o n o r after
1 July 2008, paints, varnishes a n d other finishes used
o n exposed surfaces o f c a b i n balconies, e x c l u d i n g
n a t u r a l h a r d w o o d decking systems, shall n o t be
capable o f p r o d u c i n g excessive q u a n t i t i e s o f s m o k e
a n d toxic products, this being determined i n accordance w i t h the Fire Test Procedures Code.
2.1.1.8 I n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h F i r e T e s t P r o c e d u r e s
C o d e t h e f o l l o w i n g surface shall h a v e l o w f l a m e
spread characteristics:
.1 o n p a s s e n g e r ships:
.1.1 e x p o s e d s u r f a c e s i n c o r r i d o r s a n d s t a i r w a y
enclosures, as w e l l as bulkheads a n d plating, ceiling
Unings i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces (except
saunas) a n d c o n t r o l stations;
.1.2 s u r f a c e s a n d g r o u n d s i n c o n c e a l e d a n d i n accessible spaces i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service
spaces a n d c o n t r o l stations;
.2 o n c a r g o s h i p s w i t h g r o s s t o n n a g e m o r e
t h a n 500:
.2.1 e x p o s e d s u r f a c e s i n c o r r i d o r s a n d s t a i r w a y
enclosures a n d o f ceilings i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d
service spaces (except saunas) a n d c o n t r o l stations;
.2.2 s u r f a c e s a n d g r o u n d s i n c o n c e a l e d a n d i n accessible spaces i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service
spaces a n d c o n t r o l stations;
.3 g l u e s a n d s e a l a n t s u s e d i n t h e " A " a n d " B " c l a s s
divisions;
.4 e x p o s e d s u r f a c e s o f c a b i n b a l c o n i e s , e x c e p t f o r
n a t u r a l h a r d w o o d decking systems;
.5 p r i m a r y d e c k c o v e r i n g s .
The above requirements apply t o finish materials
o f bulkheads, decks, floor coverings, Unings a n d
ceilings, b u t i s n o t a p p l i c a b l e t o p l a s t i c p i p i n g , electrical cables a n d f u r n i t u r e .
2.1.1.9 O n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 3 6
passengers i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces, t h e f u r n i t u r e
a n d furnishings o f w h i c h constitute restricted fire
risk,
upholstered furniture, bedding components,
draperies a n d curtains a n d other vertically supported
textile materials shall be satisfactorily tested i n c o m pUance w i t h t h e F i r e Test Procedures C o d e (refer
t o 1.6.3.7 t o 1.6.3.9). F o r o t h e r types o f ships, t h e
said requirements are r e c o m m e n d e d only.
2.1.1.10 O n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s , " A " , " B " a n d " C "
class d i v i s i o n s i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces
a n d cabin balconies, w h i c h are faced w i t h c o m b u s -
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
381
tible materials, facings, m o u l d i n g s , decorations a n d

veneers shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f t h e
present p a r a g r a p h a n d 2.1.1.6 t o 2.1.1.8. H o w e v e r ,
traditional w o o d e n benches a n d w o o d e n linings o f
bulkheads a n d ceilings are a l l o w e d i n saunas a n d
such materials m a y n o tbe taken into calculation required b y the paragraph.
O n cargo ships, n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e bulkheads,
ceilings a n d linings fitted i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d
service spaces m a y b e faced w i t h c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e rials,
facings, m o u l d i n g s , decorations a n d veneers
p r o v i d e d s u c h spaces a r e b o u n d e d b y n o n - c o m b u s tible bulkheads, ceilings a n d linings i n accordance
w i t h t h e requirements o f t h e present
paragraph
a n d 2.1.1.6 t o 2.1.1.8.
C o m b u s t i b l e m a t e r i a l s used o n t h e surfaces a n d
Unings shall h a v e c a l o r i f i c v a l u e n o t exceeding 4 5 M J / m taking into consideration their thickness. R e q u i r e m e n t s o f this article are n o t applicable
to t h e surfaces o f f u r n i t u r e f i x e d t o l i n i n g s o r bulkheads.
C a l o r i f i c v a l u e Q, i n M J / m , t a k i n g i n t o c o n sideration the thickness o f covering material, is determined by the formula
2
Q=QgPs
where
(2.1.1.10)
Q
= t h e m a x i m u m specific heat o f c o m b u s t i o n determ i n e d o i l i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h I S O 1716 " C o n s t r u c tion Materials. Determination o f t h e Calorific

Potential", i n M J / k g ;
p = thedensity o fmaterial, i n k g / m ;
,s = t h e t h i c k n e s s o f m a t e r i a l , i n m .
g
W h e r e combustible materials are used i n accordance w i t h the present paragraph, they shall
.1 t h e t o t a l v o l u m e o f c o m b u s t i b l e f a c i n g s ,
mouldings, decorations a n d veneers i n a n y accomm o d a t i o n o r service spaces s h a l l n o t exceed a v o l u m e
equivalent t o 2,5 m mveneer o fthe combined area o f
the walls a n d ceiling Unings. T h e furniture fixed t o
Unings, bulkheads o r decks m a y be n o t included i n t o
the calculation o f the total v o l u m e o f combustible
materials;
.2 i n c a s e o f s h i p s f i t t e d w i t h a n a u t o m a t i c
sprinkler system complying w i t h the provisions o f
Fire Safety Systems Code, the above v o l u m e m a y
include some combustible materials used f o r erection
o f " C " class d i v i s i o n s .
O n non-self-propelled ships w i t h o u t regard o f
their gross tonnage i t is permissible t o f i t n o n - c o m bustible bulkheads, Unings a n d ceiUngs w i t h c o m b u s t i b l e c o v e r i n g less t h a n 2 m m t h i c k e x c e p t
c o r r i d o r s , s t a i r w a y enclosures as w e l l as c o n t r o l stations where thickness o f covering shall n o t exc e e d 1,5 m m .
The furnishings specified i n t h e present paragraph a n d appUed o n cabin balconies m a y n o t be
taken into calculation required b y the paragraph.
2.1.1.11 A l l w a s t e r e c e p t a c l e s s h a l l b e c o n s t r u c t e d
of non-combustible materials w i t h n o openings i n the
sides a n d b o t t o m .
Containers constructed o f combustible materials
m a y be used i n galleys, pantries, bars, garbage h a n d U n g
o r storage spaces a n d i n c i n e r a t o r r o o m s p r o v i d e d t h e y
are i n t e n d e d p u r e l y f o r t h e carriage o f w e t w a s t e , glass
bottles o r m e t a l cans a n d are suitably m a r k e d .
2.1.2 F i r e - f i g h t i n g d i v i s i o n s .
2.1.2.1 " A " c l a s s d i v i s i o n s a r e t h o s e d i v i s i o n s
w h i c h a r e f o r m e d b y bulkheads o r decks c o m p l y i n g
.1 t h e y s h a l l b e c o n s t r u c t e d o f steel o r o t h e r
equivalent material;
.2 t h e y s h a l l h a v e r e s p e c t i v e s t i f f e n i n g e l e m e n t s ;
.3 t h e y s h a l l b e s o c o n s t r u c t e d as t o b e c a p a b l e o f
preventing t h e passage o f s m o k e a n d flame u p t o t h e
e n d o f t h e 6 0 - m i n s t a n d a r d fire test;
.4 t h e y s h a l l b e s o i n s u l a t e d w i t h a p p r o v e d n o n combustible m a t e r i a l that t h e average temperature o f
t h e u n e x p o s e d s i d e w i l l n o t rise m o r e t h a n 1 4 0 C
above the original temperature, n o r will the temp e r a t u r e , a t a n y o n e p o i n t , i n c l u d i n g a n y j o i n t , rise
m o r e t h a n 1 8 0 C a b o v e t h e o r i g i n a l t e m p e r a t u r e .
Depending o n the time during w h i c h the abovei n d i c a t e d t e m p e r a t u r e rise i s e n s u r e d i n t h e c o u r s e o f
t h e s t a n d a r d fire test, t h e f o l l o w i n g s y m b o l s a r e g i v e n
to divisions: " A - 6 0 " d u r i n g 6 0 m i n ; " A - 3 0 "
during 3 0 m i n ; " A - 1 5 " during 15 m i n ; " A - 0 "
during 0 min.
2.1.2.2 W h e n a p p r o v i n g t h e s t r u c t u r a l f i r e
protection t h e danger o f heat transfer t h r o u g h joints
a n d ends o finsulation shaU be t a k e n i n t o account. I n s u l a t i o n o f steel a n d a l u m i n i u m decks a n d b u l k h e a d s
shall e x t e n d f o r a t least 4 5 0 m m b e y o n d b o u n d a r i e s o f
structures f o r m i n g t h e g i v e n space. I f a space i s d i v i d e d
b y t h e " A " class d e c k o r b u l k h e a d w i t h a n i n s u l a t i o n o f
d i f f e r e n t size, t h e n a n i n s u l a t i o n o f g r e a t e r size s h a U
e x t e n d o v e r t h e deck a n d b u l k h e a d f o r a t least 4 5 0 m m
f r o m t h e less i n s u l a t e d s t r u c t u r e .
Measures taken t o prevent heat transfer t h r o u g h
joints a n d ends o f i n s u l a t i o n o f decks a n d bulkheads
are s h o w n i n F i g s 2.1.2.2-1 a n d 2.1.2.2-2. T h e R e g ister m a yapprove some other variants o f such m e a sures, p r o v i d e d t h e efficacy o f t h e p r o p o s e d structure
is v e r i f i e d b y t h e r e s u l t s o f t e s t s c o n d u c t e d i n a c cordance w i t h the Fire Test Procedures Code.
W h e r e the lower part o f insulation is c u t o f f t o
provide drainage, t h e structure shall comply w i t h
Fig. 2.1.2.2-3.
2.1.23 L i g h t w e i g h t ( h o n e y c o m b a n d o t h e r ) s t r u c tures m a d e o f steel o r o t h e r e q u i v a l e n t m a t e r i a l m a y b e
used as i n t e r n a l d i v i s i o n s o f " A " class i n t h e a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces, p r o v i d e d t h e y a r e n o t
l o a d - b e a r i n g structures a n d successfuUy passed p r e scribed tests i n accordance w i t h t h e F i r e T e s t P r o c e -
382
Rules
d^450
mm
where d > 4 5 0 mm
1
4 5 0 mm
F i g . 2.1.2.2-1
4 5 0 mm
Bulkhead,
deck, etc
/-Bulkhead,
/ deck, etc
F i g . 2.1.2.2-2
Lining
4 , 1 0 0 mm
if
Deck
4 5 0 mm ^'
F i g . 2.1.2.2-3
No
t e . d height o f the stiffener a t the longitudinal m e m b e r .
dures Code. S u c h lightweight structures shall n o t be

used as t h e c o m p o n e n t s o f t h e m a i n fire p r o t e c t i o n
zones a n d s t a i r w a y s enclosures i n passenger ships.
2.1.2.4 T h e f o l l o w i n g elements m a y be fitted
w i t h o u t tests:
.1 " A - 0 " class b u l k h e a d s , i f m a d e o f steel a n d
h a v i n g t h e d i m e n s i o n s n o t less t h a n t h e f o l l o w i n g :
plate thickness 4 m m ;
stiffeners 6 0x 6 0 x 5 m m located a t a distance
o f 600 m m f r o m each other o r h a v i n g similar construction;
.2 " A - 0 " c l a s s d e c k s i f m a d e o f s t e e l a n d h a v i n g
t h e d i m e n s i o n s n o t less t h a n t h e f o l l o w i n g :
plate thickness 4 m m ;
stiffeners 9 5 x 6 5 x 7 m m located a t a distance
o f 600 m m f r o m each other o r having similar construction.
2.1.2.5 " B " class d i v i s i o n s a r e those d i v i s i o n s
w h i c h a r e f o r m e d b y bulkheads, decks, ceilings o r
Unings w h i c h c o m p l y w i t h t h e following requirements:
.1 they a r e m a d e o f a p p r o v e d n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e
materials.
U s e o f combustible veneer is permitted (refer
to 2.1.1.8 a n d 2.1.1.10);
.2 d i v i s i o n s s h a l l b e s o c o n s t r u c t e d a s t o r e m a i n
capable o f preventing t h e passage o f flame u p t o t h e
e n d o f t h e 3 0 - m i n u t e s t a n d a r d fire test;
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
.3 d i v i s i o n s s h a l l h a v e a n i n s u l a t i o n v a l u e s u c h
t h a t t h e average t e m p e r a t u r e o n t h e u n e x p o s e d side
d u r i n g t h e fire t e s t w i l l n o t r i s e m o r e t h a n 1 4 0 C
above the original temperature, n o r will the temp e r a t u r e a t a n y o n e p o i n t , i n c l u d i n g a n y j o i n t , rise
m o r e t h a n 2 2 5 C a b o v e t h e o r i g i n a l t e m p e r a t u r e
w h e n e i t h e r s i d e i s e x p o s e d t o t h e fire t e s t .
According t o the time during w h i c h the abovem e n t i o n e d temperature rise is ensured i n t h e course o f
t h e s t a n d a r d fire t e s t , t h e f o l l o w i n g s y m b o l s a r e g i v e n
to divisions: " B - 3 0 " d u r i n g 3 0 m i n ; " B - 1 5 "
d u r i n g 15 m i n . ; " B - 0 " d u r i n g 0 m i n .
2.1.2.6 M a t e r i a l s used i n t h e " A " a n d " B " class
divisions, w h i c h according t o t h e present P a r t shall
have particular characteristics (be non-combustible,
l o w f l a m e - s p r e a d o r n o t g e n e r a t i n g excessive q u a n tities o f s m o k e a n d t o x i c agents), shall c o m p l y w i t h
the requirements o f t h e Fire Test Procedures Code
(refer t o 1.6.3.1, 1.6.3.2 a n d 1.6.3.5).
2.1.2.7 C o n t i n u o u s " B " class ceiUngs a n d Unings
w i t h t h e relevant decks o r bulkheads m a y be considered as fully o r p a r t i a l l y ensuring i n s u l a t i o n a n d
fire i n t e g r i t y o f s t r u c t u r e s , a s r e q u i r e d b y t h e r e s p e c t i v e fire i n t e g r i t y t a b l e s .
2.1.2.8 " C " class d i v i s i o n s a r e t h e d i v i s i o n s m a d e
of approved non-combustible materials. T h e y d o
not need meet a n y requirements relative t o t h e passage o f s m o k e a n d f l a m e o r t h e U m i t i n g o f t e m p e r a ture rise. I t is n o t r e q u i r e d t h a t g l u i n g m a t e r i a l s i n
these structures be n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e , h o w e v e r , these
materials shall be l o w flame-spread.
2.1.2.9 D i v i s i o n s consisting o f n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e
core a n d c o m b u s t i b l e veneers m a y be accepted as
" B " o r " C " class d i v i s i o n s , p r o v i d e d t h a t t h e n o n combustible core is tested a n d complies w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.6.3.1, a n d t h e " B " class d i v i s i o n is
tested a n d compUes w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.1.2.4,
a n d t h e veneers, i f appUcable, a r e tested a n d c o m p l y
w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.6.3.2 a n d 1.6.3.5.
2.1.3 Closures o f openings i n fire-fighting divisions.
2 . 1 . 3 . 1 F i r e i n t e g r i t y o f d o o r s shaU be e q u a l t o fire
integrity o f the divisions w h e r e they are instaUed, w h i c h is
determined i n accordance w i t h t h e F i r e Test Procedures
C o d e a n d applicable provisions o f M S C . l / C i r c . 1 3 1 9 f o r
large fire doors. D o o r s a n d d o o r f r a m e s i n " A " class
d i v i s i o n s s h a l l b e m a d e o f steel o r o t h e r e q u i v a l e n t
m a t e r i a l . D o o r s i n " B " class d i v i s i o n s s h a l l b e n o n combustible.
2.1.3.2 T h e doors designed i n compliance w i t h t h e r e quirements o f 7.5.2 a n d 7 . 1 2 , Part H I "Equipment, A r r a n g e m e n t s a n d O u t f i t " a n d fitted a c c o r d i n g t o 7 . 1 2 o f t h e
a b o v e m e n t i o n e d P a r t , a n d , i n c e r t a i n cases (e.g., f o r p r o v i d i n g gastightness), i f specially agreed w i t h t h e Register,
m a y b e fitted i n " A " class b u l k h e a d s . W a t e r t i g h t d o o r s m a y
b e n o t i n s u l a t e d a n d t h e y d o n o t r e q u i r e fire tests i f fitted
b e l o w the b u l k h e a d deck.
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
Doors, which are installed above the bulkhead

deck subject t o fire i n t e g r i t y a n d w a t e r tightness r e quirements, shall be tested i n accordance w i t h t h e
Fire Test Procedures Code.
2.1.3.3 I f t h e " A " c l a s s d i v i s i o n s a r e p e n e t r a t e d ,
t h e n such penetrations (cutouts) shall be tested i n
accordance w i t h t h e Fire Test Procedures Code,
considering t h e provisions o f 2.2.1.4. T h e requirem e n t s o f 12.2.3 a n d 12.2.12, P a r t V I I I " S y s t e m s a n d
P i p i n g " are appUed t o ventilation ducts. Tests m a y
not be conducted i ft h e pipes penetrations are m a d e
o f steel o r o t h e r e q u i v a l e n t m a t e r i a l w i t h a thickness
o f 3 m m o r g r e a t e r a n d a l e n g t h o f n o t less t h a n 9 0 0 m m
( p r e f e r a b l y 4 5 0 m m a t e a c h side o f t h e d i v i s i o n ) a n d
do n o t have a n y openings. S u c h penetrations shall be
i n s u l a t e d s i m i l a r t o t h e d i v i s i o n itself.
I n case w h e r e pipe p e n e t r a t i o n s a n d cable t r a n s i t s
are constructed w i t h o u t structural sockets a n d c o n sist o f r e m o v a b l e sleeves w e l d e d o r b o l t e d t o t h e d i vision and/or o f soft o r intumescent filUng material,
these sleeves s h a l l b e o f m i n i m u m 3 m m t h i c k n e s s
and o f m i n i m u m 6 0 m m length a n d filUng material
shall be adequately secured b y b o n d e d materials o r
mechanical means i n order t o prevent damage o r fall
out. S u c h p e n e t r a t i o n s s h a l l n o t i m p a i r fire i n t e g r i t y
and structural strength o fthe divisions.
2.1.3.4 I f " B " c l a s s d i v i s i o n s a r e p e n e t r a t e d f o r t h e
passage o f electric cables, pipes, ducts, t r u n k s , etc.,
or f o r t h e fitting o ft h e ventilation terminals, Ughting
fixtures a n d s i m i l a r devices, a r r a n g e m e n t s shall be
p r o v i d e d t o ensure fire i n t e g r i t y o f a division. V e n tilation ducts shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements
o f 12.2.5, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d P i p i n g " . Pipes
o t h e r t h a n steel o r c o p p e r t h a t penetrate " B " class
divisions shall be protected b y the following:
.1 f i r e t e s t e d p e n e t r a t i o n d e v i c e , a d e q u a t e t o t h e
fire i n t e g r i t y o f t h e division penetrated a n d t h e type
o f pipes used; o r
.2 s t e e l s l e e v e , h a v i n g a t h i c k n e s s o f n o t l e s s
t h a n 1,8 m m a n d a l e n g t h o f n o t l e s s t h a n 9 0 0 m m f o r
p i p e d i a m e t e r s o f 1 5 0 m m o r g r e a t e r a n d n o t less
t h a n 6 0 0 m m f o r p i p e d i a m e t e r s o f less t h a n 1 5 0 m m
( p r e f e r a b l y e q u a l l y d i v i d e d a t e a c h side o f t h e d i v i sion). Pipes shall be connected t o t h e ends o f the
sleeve b y flanges o r c o u p U n g s ; o r t h e clearance b e t w e e n t h e sleeve a n d t h e p i p e s h a l l n o t e x ceed 2,5 m m ; o r a n y clearance b e t w e e n t h e pipe a n d
t h e sleeve s h a l l b e m a d e t i g h t b y m e a n s o f n o n combustible o r other suitable material.
2.13.5 U n i n s u l a t e d m e t a l U c p i p e s p e n e t r a t i n g " A "
or " B " class d i v i s i o n s shaU b e m a d e o f m a t e r i a l s h a v i n g a
m e l t i n g t e m p e r a t u r e e x c e e d i n g 9 5 0 C f o r " A - 0 " c l a s s
d i v i s i o n s a n d 8 5 0 C f o r " B - 0 " c l a s s d i v i s i o n s .
2.1.3.6 I n s h i p s o t h e r t h a n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s c a r rying m o r e t h a n 3 6 passengers external boundaries,
w h i c h s h a l l be m a d e o f steel o r o t h e r e q u i v a l e n t
383
material, m a y be penetrated f o r the fitting o f w i n d o w s a n d side scuttles, p r o v i d e d t h e r e is n o r e q u i r e m e n t i n thepresent P a r t f o r such boundaries t o beo f
" A " class. I n s u c h b o u n d a r i e s , w h i c h a r e n o t r e q u i r e d
to b e o f " A " class, d o o r s o n a g r e e m e n t w i t h t h e
Register m a y be made o f materials the ventilation
ducts t h a n t h e ones o f t h e boundary.
2.1.3.7 B a l a n c i n g o p e n i n g s o r d u c t s b e t w e e n t w o
enclosed spaces a r e p r o h i b i t e d except f o r t h e o p e n ings p e r m i t t e d b y 2.2.4.3 a n d 2.3.8.
2.1.4 M e a s u r e s f o r p r e v e n t i o n o f s p r e a d o f f i r e
and smoke.
2.1.4.1 F o r m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s p r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e
made t o control the opening a n d closing o fskyUghts,
arrangements f o r closing openings i n funnels, w h i c h
n o r m a l l y ensure exhaust ventilation as w e l l as closing
o f ventilation flaps.
The controls shall be located outside t h e serviced
space w h e r e t h e y w o u l d n o t b e i s o l a t e d i n case o f fire
i n t h e space.
2.1.4.2 F o r t h e p r o t e c t i o n o f o p e n i n g s i n t h e
b o u n d a r i e s o f A c a t e g o r y m a c h i n e r y spaces t h e f o l lowing measures shall be taken:
.1 t h e n u m b e r o f s k y U g h t s , d o o r s , v e n t i l a t i o n
openings, openings i n funnels t o permit exhaust
ventilation a n d other openings shall be reduced t o a
m i n i m u m required f o r ventilation, as w e l l as proper
a n d safe o p e r a t i o n o f ship;
.2 s k y U g h t s s h a l l b e m a d e o f s t e e l a n d s h a l l h a v e
n o glass panels;
.3 p r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e t o c o n t r o l t h e c l o s i n g
o f p o w e r o p e r a t e d d o o r s o r a c t u a t i n g release m e chanism o f doors other t h a n watertight p o w e r operated doors. T h e controls shall be located outside the
serviced space w h e r e t h e y w o u l d n o t be isolated i n
case o f fire i n t h e space;
.4 w i n d o w s s h a l l n o t b e f i t t e d i n m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s
boundaries. H o w e v e r , this does n o t preclude t h euse
o f glass i n c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s w i t h i n t h e m a c h i n e r y
spaces;
.5 i n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2 . 2 . 4 . 1
shall be m e t additionally.
SkyUghts o f cargo p u m p r o o m s , specified
i n 1.5.7.1, s h a l l be m a d e o f steel a n d s h a l l be closed
f r o m a position located outside the p u m p r o o m .
2.1.4.3 I n a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d s e r v i c e s p a c e s , a s
w e l l as i n c o n t r o l stations stairways a n d U f t t r u n k s
shall be protected i n t h e following way:
.1 i n c a r g o s h i p s s t a i r w a y s w h i c h p e n e t r a t e o n l y a
single deck shaU be protected a t least a t o n e level b y a t
least " B - 0 " class d i v i s i o n s a n d self-closing d o o r s . L i f t s
w h i c h penetrate o n l y a single deck shaU be s u r r o u n d e d
by " A - 0 " class d i v i s i o n s w i t h steel d o o r s a t b o t h levels.
Stairways a n d Uft t r u n k s w h i c h penetrate m o r e t h a n a
single d e c k s h a l l b e s u r r o u n d e d b y a t least " A - 0 " class
divisions a n d protected b y self-closing d o o r s a t a U le-
384
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
vels. S t a i r w a y enclosures m a y be arranged so as t o

a l l o w t o g o f r o m o n e stair t o a superimposed stair
w i t h i n such enclosure ( F i g . 2.1.4.3.1-1), o r t o enclose
the stairs o n l y w i t h d o o r s a t each e n d o f t h e stair
( F i g . 2.1.4.3.1-2), o r t o enclose t h e stairs o n l y i n
c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h f u l l y closed steel stairs a n d d o o r s
fitted a t t h e e n d o f e a c h s t a i r ( F i g . 2 . 1 . 4 . 3 . 1 - 3 ) ;
F i g . 2.1.4.3.1-3
F i g . 2.1.4.3.1-2
.2 o n s h i p s h a v i n g a c c o m m o d a t i o n f o r 1 2 p e r s o n s
o r less, w h e r e s t a i r w a y s p e n e t r a t e m o r e t h a n a single
d e c k a n d w h e r e there a r e a t least t w o escapes direct t o
the o p e n deck a t every a c c o m m o d a t i o n level, stairw a y s a n d Uft t r u n k s m a y be p r o t e c t e d b y " B - 0 " class
divisions;
.3 i n p a s s e n g e r ships t h e s t a i r w a y s a n d U f t t r u n k s
shall be protected i n compliance w i t h 2.2.2.4;
.4 t h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f s t a i r w a y s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h
the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 8.5.4, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t , A r rangements a n d Outfit".
2.1.4.4 A i r s p a c e s e n c l o s e d b e h i n d c e i l i n g s , p a nelUngs, o r Unings shall be divided b y close-fitting
draught stops spaced n o tm o r e t h a n 14 m apart.
I n t h e v e r t i c a l d i r e c t i o n , s u c h a i r spaces, i n c l u d ing those behind Unings o r stairways, trunks, etc.
shall be closed a t each deck.
2.1.4.5 I n m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s f r o m w h i c h t w o
stairways
are provided i n accordance w i t h 4.5,
Part V I I "Machinery Installations" o n e o f t h e m shall
be protected b y enclosure a l o n g i t s w h o l e l e n g t h
m e e t i n g r e q u i r e m e n t 2.2.1.3 category ( 2 ) o r r e q u i r e m e n t s 2 . 2 . 1 . 5 , 2 . 3 . 3 o r 2 . 4 . 2 c a t e g o r y (4) a s a p p r o p r i a t e . S e l f - c l o s i n g fire d o o r s o f t h e s a m e t y p e o f
fire i n t e g r i t y s h a l l b e fitted i n t h e e n c l o s u r e .
Stairways shall be arranged t o avoid transfer o f
heat t o t h e enclosure t h r o u g h uninsulated fixing
points.
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
2.1.4.6 I n a d d i t i o n t o w a t e r t i g h t d o o r s e p a r a t i n g
the m a c h i n e r y space o f category A f r o m t h e shaft
t u n n e l , f r o m t h e side o f t h e l a t t e r a U g h t steel firescreen d o o r shall be fitted t o be o p e r a t e d f r o m each
side.
2.1.4.7 P e r m a n e n t o p e n i n g s i n t h e s i d e s h e l l , e n d s
a n d ceiUng o f enclosed spaces f o r t h e carriage o f v e hicles, enclosed r o - r o spaces, as w e l l as special categ o r y spaces s h a l l b e so situated t h a t a fire i n these
spaces does n o t e n d a n g e r s t o w a g e areas a n d e m b a r k a t i o n stations f o r Ufeboats a n d Uferafts, accomm o d a t i o n spaces, service spaces a n d c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s
in superstructures a n d deckhouses above t h e m e n t i o n e d spaces.
2.1.5 A d d i t i o n a l r e q u i r e m e n t s t o s p a c e s o f s e p a rate categories.
I n addition t o the requirements o f Section 2,the
f o l l o w i n g requirements t o structural fire p r o t e c t i o n
shall be compUed with.
2.1.5.1 S a u n a s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g
requirements:
.1 t h e p e r i m e t e r o f t h e s a u n a s h a l l be o f " A - 6 0 "
class b o u n d a r i e s except spaces inside o f the p e r i m e t e r
a n d s p a c e s o f c a t e g o r i e s ( 5 ) , (9) a n d (10) a s s p e c i f i e d
i n 2 . 2 . 1 . 3 , o r s p a c e s o f c a t e g o r i e s (5), (7) a n d (10) a s
specified i n 2 . 2 . 1 . 5 . 1 , 2.3.3 o r 2.4.2, d e p e n d i n g o n t h e
purpose o f ship;
.2 s a u n a s m a y i n c l u d e c h a n g i n g r o o m s , s h o w e r s
a n d t o i l e t s . B a t h r o o m s w i t h d i r e c t access t o s a u n a s
m a y b e c o n s i d e r e d as p a r t o f t h e m . I n s u c h cases, t h e
door between sauna a n d the b a t h r o o m need n o t
c o m p l y w i t h fire safety requirements;
.3 t h e t r a d i t i o n a l w o o d e n U n i n g o n t h e b u l k h e a d s
and ceiUng are permitted i n t h e sauna. T h e ceiling
above the oven shall be Uned w i t h non-combustible
plate w i t h a n a i r g a p o f a t least 3 0 m m . T h e distance
f r o m t h e h o t surfaces t o c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e r i a l s shall
be a t least 500 m m o r t h e c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e r i a l s shall
be p r o t e c t e d (e.g., b y a n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e p l a t e w i t h a n
air g a p o f a t least 3 0 m m ) ;
.4 t h e t r a d i t i o n a l w o o d e n b e n c h e s a r e p e r m i t t e d
i n saunas;
.5 t h e s a u n a d o o r s h a l l h a v e n o l o c k s a n d o p e n
outwards b y pushing;
.6 e l e c t r i c a l l y h e a t e d o v e n s s h a U b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a
timer a n d meet t h e requirements o f Section 15,
P a r t X I "Electrical E q u i p m e n t " , w h i l e cables a n d w i r e s
shall m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 16.8 o f t h e s a m e P a r t .
2.1.5.2 G a l l e y s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g
requirements:
.1 galleys u t i l i z i n g sources o f p o w e r o t h e r t h a n
electricity shall n o t be adjacent t o storerooms f o r
f l a m m a b l e materials a n d substances o r t o fuel o i l a n d
lubricating o i l tanks;
.2 g a l l e y d e c k s s h a l l b e c o v e r e d w i t h c e r a m i c t i l e s
or similar non-combustible covering;
385
.3 e x h a u s t v e n t i l a t i o n d u c t s f r o m g a l l e y r a n g e s
shall m e e t t h e requirements o f 12.2.7 o r 12.3.6,
Part V I I I "Systems a n d Piping".
2.1.5.3 S t o r e r o o m s f o r f l a m m a b l e m a t e r i a l s a n d
substances shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g requirements:
.1 s t o r e r o o m s f o r f l a m m a b l e m a t e r i a l s s h a l l n o t
be generally situated i n c o m m o n w i t h a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces i n superstructure o r deckhouse. Access t o
the storerooms shall be provided f r o m t h e open deck
directly o r t h r o u g h a corridor and/or a stairway
leading o n l y t o these storerooms;
.2 a l l e l e c t r i c a l e q u i p m e n t o f t h e s t o r e r o o m s h a l l
be e x p l o s i o n p r o o f i n c o m p U a n c e w i t h 2 . 9 , P a r t I
2.1.5.4 S p a c e s f o r e l e c t r i c a n d g a s w e l d i n g o p e r a tions shaU c o m p l y w i t h t h e foUowing requirements:
.1 t h e spaces s h a l l b e s e p a r a t e d f r o m adjacent
spaces b y " A - 6 0 " class d i v i s i o n s ;
.2 s p a c e s s h a l l h a v e d i r e c t a c c e s s f r o m t h e o p e n
deck; t h e d o o r s shall o p e n o u t w a r d s a n d be fitted
w i t h locks;
.3 l o c a t i o n a n d a r r a n g e m e n t o f s u c h s p a c e s i n o i l
tankers is subject t o special c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e
Register;
.4 o x y g e n a n d a c e t y l e n e c y U n d e r s f o r e l e c t r i c a n d
gas w e l d i n g o p e r a t i o n s s h a l l b e k e p t i n s e p a r a t e
storerooms, complying w i t h the following requirements:
.4.1 a c e t y l e n e c y U n d e r s s t o r e r o o m s h a l l b e i n dependent o f the oxygen cyUnder storeroom;
.4.2 s t o r e r o o m s s h a l l n o t b e l o c a t e d b e l o w a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces a n d c o n t r o l stations o r b e a d jacent t o t h e m . Besides, s t o r e r o o m s shall n o t be
adjacent t o m a c h i n e r y spaces o f c a t e g o r y A , galleys,
storerooms f o r f l a m m a b l e materials a n d substances,
as w e l l a s t o f u e l o i l a n d l u b r i c a t i n g o i l t a n k s ;
.4.3 d i v i s i o n s s e p a r a t i n g t h e s t o r e r o o m s f r o m
a d j a c e n t spaces s h a l l b e o f " A - 6 0 " class;
.4.4 s u c h s p a c e s s h a l l h a v e d i r e c t a c c e s s f r o m t h e
open deck, t h e doors shall open o u t w a r d s a n d be
fitted w i t h locks p r o v i d i n g their reUable closure t o
p r e v e n t u n a u t h o r i z e d access;
.4.5 t h e w a r n i n g p l a t e s : " D a n g e r o f e x p l o s i o n ! "
a n d " N o s m o k i n g ! " shall be p r o v i d e d o n t h e storerooms doors.
2.1.5.5 C a r g o s p a c e s s p e c i f i e d i n 1 . 5 . 4 . 3 , 1 . 5 . 4 . 4
a n d 1.5.9, i n w h i c h m o t o r v e h i c l e s w i t h f u e l i n t h e i r
tanks are carried, shall c o m p l y w i t h the following
requirements:
.1 entrances t o t h e c a r g o spaces f r o m a c c o m m o d a t i o n , m a c h i n e r y a n d special electrical spaces
shall be equipped w i t h self-closing p e r m a n e n t l y
closed doors. T h e coamings height o f these doors
s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n 4 5 0 m m ;
386
Rules
.2 w a r n i n g p l a t e s p r o h i b i t i n g s m o k i n g s h a l l b e
p r o v i d e d n e a r t h e entrances t o t h e c a r g o spaces;
.3 t h e c a r g o spaces s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e
quirements o f 12.6, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d P i p i n g "
a n d 19.3, P a r t X I "Electrical E q u i p m e n t " .
2.1.5.6 A p o r t i o n o f o p e n d e c k r e c e s s e d i n t o a
deck structure, m a c h i n e r y casing, deck house, etc,
used f o r t h e exclusive storage o f gas bottles shall
.1 s u c h a recess s h a l l h a v e a n u n o b s t r u c t e d
opening, except f o r s m a l l appurtenant structures,
s u c h as o p e n i n g c o r n e r r a d i i , s m a l l sills, p i l l a r s , etc.
T h e opening m a ybe provided w i t h grating walls a n d
doors;
.2 t h e d e p t h o f s u c h a r e c e s s s h a l l n o t b e g r e a t e r
than 1m ;
.3 a p o r t i o n o f t h e o p e n d e c k c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e
requirements o f 2.1.5.6.1 a n d 2.1.5.6.2, is considered
as o p e n d e c k i n a p p l y i n g T a b l e s 2 . 2 . 1 . 3 - 1 , 2.2.1.3-2,
2.2.1.5-1, 2.2.1.5-2, 2.3.3-1, 2.3.3-2, 2.4.2-1, 2.4.2-2.
2.1.5.7 F a n r o o m s s e r v i n g e n g i n e r o o m s s h a l l
meet the following requirements:
.1 a f a n r o o m solely serving t h e engine r o o m o r
m u l t i p l e spaces c o n t a i n i n g a n e n g i n e r o o m m a y b e
treated as m a c h i n e r y space h a v i n g little o r n o fire risk,
i n this case b o u n d a r i e s b e t w e e n t h e f a n r o o m a n d e n
gine r o o m casing shall be o f " A - 0 " fire integrity;
.2 a f a n r o o m s o l e l y s e r v i n g t h e e n g i n e r o o m m a y
be considered as p a r t o f t h e engine r o o m , i n t h i s case
the requirements f o r fire i n t e g r i t y o f t h e h o r i z o n t a l
boundary between f a n r o o m a n d engine r o o m need
not apply;
.3 f o r b o t h o f t h e cases d e s c r i b e d a b o v e , f o r a n y
space(s) adjacent t o t h e f a n r o o m s u p e r s t r u c t u r e , t h e
fire i n t e g r i t y o f t h e separating bulkhead(s) shall m e e t
the appUcable fire i n t e g r i t y requirements c o n t a i n e d i n
the present Rules.
2.2 P A S S E N G E R
and Construction
of Sea-Going
i n t o m a i n v e r t i c a l zones b y " A " class d i v i s i o n s . T h e s e

divisions shall have insulation values i n accordance
w i t h Tables 2.2.1.5-1 a n d 2.2.1.5-2.
A s f a r as practicable, t h e b u l k h e a d s f o r m i n g t h e
boundaries o f the m a i n vertical zones above the
b u l k h e a d deck shall be i n Une w i t h w a t e r t i g h t sub
division bulkheads situated immediately below the
b u l k h e a d deck. T h e l e n g t h a n d w i d t h o f m a i n vertical
zones m a y be extended t o a m a x i m u m o f 4 8 m i n
order t o bring t h e ends o f m a i n vertical zones t o
coincide w i t h subdivision watertight bulkheads o r i n
o r d e r t o a c c o m m o d a t e a large p u b U c space e x t e n d i n g
for the whole length o f the m a i n vertical zone pro
vided that the total area o f t h e m a i n vertical zone is
n o t greater t h a n 1600 m o n a n y deck.
2
I f a s t a i r w a y serves t w o m a i n v e r t i c a l zones, t h e n
m a x i m u m length o f o n e m a i n vertical zone shall be
m e a s u r e d f r o m t h e f a r side o f t h e m a i n v e r t i c a l z o n e
s t a i r w a y e n c l o s u r e . I n t h i s case, a l l b o u n d a r i e s o f t h e
stairway enclosure are t o be insulated as m a i n vertical
z o n e b u l k h e a d s a n d access d o o r s l e a d i n g t o t h e
s t a i r w a y a r e t o be p r o v i d e d f r o m these zones (refer t o
Figs. 2.2.1.2-1 t o 2.2.1.2-4). H o w e v e r , t h e stairway is
n o t t o b e i n c l u d e d i n c a l c u l a t i n g size o f t h e m a i n v e r
tical zone i f i t is treated as its o w n m a i n vertical zone.
Bulkheads forming the boundaries o f m a i n ver
tical zones shall extend f r o m deck t o deck a n d t o the
shell o r o t h e r boundaries.
W h e r e the m a i n vertical zone is divided b y hor
i z o n t a l " A " class d i v i s i o n s i n t o h o r i z o n t a l zones f o r
the purpose o f p r o v i d i n g a n appropriate barrier be
tween sprinklered a n d non-sprinklered zones o f the
SHIPS
F i g . 2.2.1.2-1 E C Sserves o n e M V Z
2.2.1 G e n e r a l .
2.2.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s C h a p t e r a r e a d
d i t i o n a l t o those set o u t i n2 . 1 .
2.2.1.2 F o r s h i p s c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 3 6 p a s s e n
gers, t h e h u l l , s u p e r s t r u c t u r e a n d d e c k h o u s e s s h a l l be
d i v i d e d i n t o m a i n v e r t i c a l zones b y " A - 6 0 " class d i
v i s i o n s . Steps a n d recesses s h a l l b e k e p t t o a m i n i
m u m , b u t w h e r e they are necessary they shall also be
" A - 6 0 " class d i v i s i o n s . W h e r e a class 2.2.1.3 ( 5 ) ,
2 . 2 . 1 . 3 (9) o r 2 . 2 . 1 . 3 (10) s p a c e i s o n o n e s i d e o f t h e
d i v i s i o n t h e class m a y b e reduced t o " A - 0 " .
F o r ships c a r r y i n g n o t m o r e t h a n 3 6 passengers,
the hull, superstructure a n d deckhouses i n w a yo f
a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces s h a l l b e d i v i d e d
Ships
Center
top to
MVZ1
ECS-
stairway
bottom
MVZ2
Option
4
to reverse
boundaries
Option 1: ECS belongs to MVZ1
L2
H
Option 2: ECS belongs to
L
MVZ2
X
Fig. 2.2.1.2-2
E C S s e r v e sL 2t w o M V Z
Part
VI. F i r e
Protection
387
LI
L2
F i g . 2.2.1.2-3
E C S serves t w o M V Z ( E C S belongs to M V Z 2 )
Option 1: ECS belongs to MVZ1
L2
KOption 2: ECS shall be treated as MVZ
F i g . 2.2.1.2-4 E C S s e r v e s t w o M V Z
N o t e s : M K Z : M a i n vertical zone
fiCS: E s c a p e s t a i r w a y
^ > : Direction o f escape.
ship, t h e divisions shall extend between adjacent m a i n

vertical zone bulkheads a n d t o the shell o r exterior
boundaries o f t h e ship a n d shall be insulated i n ac
c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e fire i n s u l a t i o n classes g i v e n
i n T a b l e 2.2.1.5-2.
O n ships designed f o r special purposes, such as
a u t o m o b i l e o r r a i l r o a d car ferries, w h e r e t h e p r o v i
sion o f m a i n vertical zone bulkheads w o u l d defeat the
purpose f o r w h i c h t h e ship is intended, equivalent
m e a n s f o r c o n t r o l l i n g a n d l i m i t i n g a fire, such as
w a t e r screens c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.5,
shall be p r o v i d e d . Service spaces a n d s t o r e r o o m s i f
they are n o t protected i n compliance w i t h the ap
pUcable requirements shall n o t be located o n decks o f
ships specified i n 1.5.4.3.
2.2.1.2.1 P r o t e c t i o n o f a t r i u m s :
.1 a t r i u m s shall be w i t h i n enclosures f o r m e d o f
" A " class d i v i s i o n s h a v i n g a fire r a t i n g d e t e r m i n e d i n
accordance w i t h T a b l e s 2.2.1.3-2 a n d 2.2.1.5-1, as
applicable;
.2 decks s e p a r a t i n g spaces w i t h i n a t r i u m s s h a l l
have a fire r a t i n g d e t e r m i n e d i n accordance w i t h
T a b l e s 2.2.1.3-2 a n d 2.2.1.5-1, as appUcable.
2.2.1.3 T h e m i n i m u m fire integrity o f a l l b u l k

heads a n d decks separating adjacent spaces i n ships
c a r r y i n g 3 6 passengers a n d m o r e shall be as pre
scribed i n Tables 2.2.1.3-1 a n d 2.2.1.3-2.
F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f d e t e r m i n i n g t h e class o f
structures b e t w e e n adjacent spaces, s u c h spaces a r e
classified a c c o r d i n g t o t h e i r fire r i s k as f o l l o w s .
( 1 ) C o n t r o l s t a t i o n s spaces a c c o m m o d a t i n g
emergency sources o f electrical p o w e r a n d Ughting;
w h e e l h o u s e a n d n a v i g a t i o n r o o m ; spaces a c c o m
m o d a t i n g ship r a d i o equipment; fire stations; m a i n
m a c h i n e r y c o n t r o l r o o m i f i t is located outside the
space a c c o m m o d a t i n g s u c h m a c h i n e r y ; spaces ac
c o m m o d a t i n g centraUzed fire a l a r m system; spaces
accommodating central control stations a n d emer
gency l o u d speaking system equipment.
(2) S t a i r w a y s : i n t e r i o r s t a i r w a y s , U f t s , f u l l y e n
closed t r u n k s f o r evacuation a n d escalators f o r pas
sengers a n d c r e w (except those, w h i c h a r e fully
l o c a t e d i n m a c h i n e r y spaces) a n d t h e i r enclosures.
A stairway w h i c h is enclosed a t o n l y o n e level
shall be regarded as p a r t o f t h e space f r o m w h i c h i t is
n o t separated b y a fire door.
(3) Corridors:
corridors a n d lobbies f o r passengers a n d crew.
( 4 ) E v a c u a t i o n stations a n d e x t e r n a l escape
r o u t e s ; s u r v i v a l c r a f t s t o w a g e area; o p e n d e c k spaces
and enclosed promenades f o r m i n g Ufeboat a n dUferaft e m b a r k a t i o n a n d launching stations; muster
stations, i n t e r n a l a n d external; external stairs a n d
o p e n decks u s e d f o r escape r o u t e s ; t h e ship's side t o
the waterUne i n the lightest seagoing condition, su
p e r s t r u c t u r e a n d d e c k h o u s e sides s i t u a t e d b e l o w a n d
adjacent t o t h e Uferaft's a n d e v a c u a t i o n slide's e m
b a r k a t i o n areas.
(5) O p e n d e c k s p a c e s :
o p e n deck spaces a n d enclosed p r o m e n a d e s clear
o f lifeboat a n d Uferaft e m b a r k a t i o n a n d l a u n c h i n g
stations. T o be considered i n this category, enclosed
p r o m e n a d e s shall h a v e n o fire risk. T h i s m e a n s t h a t
furnishings shall be restricted t o deck furniture. I n
a d d i t i o n , such places shall be n a t u r a l l y v e n t i l a t e d b y
permanent openings;
a i r spaces (spaces o u t s i d e superstructures a n d
deckhouses).
( 6 ) A c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces o f m i n o r fire risk: c a
bins, offices, dispensaries a n d p u b U c spaces c o n t a i n i n g
f u r n i t u r e a n d furnishings o f restricted fire risk a n d
h a v i n g a d e c k a r e a o f less t h a n 5 0 m ( r e f e r t o 1 . 2 ) .
(7) A c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces o fm o d e r a t e fire risk:
a c c o m o d a t i o n spaces as i n c a t e g o r y ( 6 ) c o n t a i n
ing furniture a n d furnishings other t h a n o f restricted
fire risk;
p u b l i c spaces c o n t a i n i n g f u r n i t u r e a n d f u r n i s h
ings o f restricted fire risk a n d h a v i n g a deck area
o f 5 0 m a n d greater;
2
388
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T a b l e
2.2.1.3-1
Bulkheads not bounding either m a i n vertical zones o r horizontal zones
(2)
0)
(5)
(<5)
(7)
(*>
(*0
(10)
(11)
(12)
(13)
(14)
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
B-15
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-0
B-15
A-60
A-60
A-15
B-15
A-60
A-60
A-15
B-15
A-60
A-0
A-0
B-15
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-15
A-15
A-60
A-60
A-30
A-30
A-60
A-60
A-15
A-0
A-60
A-60
A-30
A-30
A-60
(.5)
A-0
B-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-30
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-30
Spaces
Control stations
Stairways
Corridors
Evacuation stations a n d
external escape routes
O p e n deck spaces
Accommodation
spaces
o f m i n o r fire risk
Accommodation
spaces
o f m o d e r a t e fire risk
Accommodation
spaces
o f greater fire risk
Sanitary a n d similar
spaces
Tanks, voids a n d auxiliary
machinery spaces having
m i n o r o r n o fire r i s k
Auxiliary machinery spa
ces, c a r g o spaces, special
category spaces,
cargo
and other oil tanks a n d
other similar spaces o f
m o d e r a t e fire r i s k
Machinery spaces a n d
m a i n galleys
Storerooms, workshops,
pantries, etc.
Other spaces i n which
flammable liquids are
stored
B-0
(2)
(<5)
A-0
B-0
B-0
(7)
(*)
(*0
(10)
A-0
B-0
A-0
B-0
A-0
A-15
A-60
A-15
A-60
B-0
A-0
A-30
A-60
A-15
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-15
A-0
A-60
A-0
A-0
(12)
A-0
(13)
A-0
(14)
A-0
A-30
' i f a d j a c e n t s p a c e s m a r k e d w i t h f o o t n o t e 1 h a v e t h e s a m e fire i n t e g r i t y , i t i s n o t n e s s a r y t o d i v i d e s u c h s p a c e s w i t h a b u l k h e a d o r
d e c k . F o r i n s t a n c e f o r s p a c e s o f c a t e g o r y (12) i t i s n o t n e c e s s a r y t o d i v i d e a g a l l e y a n d b u f f e t s w h i c h a r e p a r t t h e r e o f w i t h b u l k h e a d s
p r o v i d e d t h e b u l k h e a d s a n d b u f f e t d e c k s h a v e t h e s a m e fire r e s i s t a n c e e q u a l t o t h a t o f s t r u c t u r e s b o r d e r i n g t h e g a l l e y . H o w e v e r , i t i s
n e c e s s a r y t o e r e c t a b u l k h e a d b e t w e e n t h e g a l l e y a n d m a c h i n e r y s p a c e a l t h o u g h b o t h s p a c e s h a v e t h e s a m e c a t e g o r y (12).
W h e r e p u b l i c toilets are installed completely w i t h i n the s t a i r w a y enclosure, the p u b l i c toilet b u l k h e a d w i t h i n the s t a i r w a y enclosure
c a n b e o f " B " c l a s s fire i n t e g r i t y .
T h e ship's side, t o the waterline i n the lightest seagoing condition, superstructure a n d d e c k h o u s e sides situated b e l o w a n d adjacent
to t h eliferafts a n d evacuation slides m a y b e reduced t o "A-30" class.
" W h e r e s p a c e s o f c a t e g o r i e s (6), (7), (8) a n d (9) a r e l o c a t e d c o m p l e t e l y w i t h i n t h e o u t e r p e r i m e t e r o f t h e m u s t e r s t a t i o n , t h e b u l k h e a d s
o f t h e s e s p a c e s a r e a l l o w e d t o b e o f " B - 0 " c l a s s fire i n t e g r i t y . C o n t r o l p o s i t i o n s f o r a u d i o , v i d e o a n d l i g h t i n s t a l l a t i o n s m a y b e c o n s i d e r e d
as part o f the muster station.
W h e r e ftiel o i l t a n k s a r e l o c a t e d u n d e r a s p e c i a l c a t e g o r y s p a c e , t h e fire i n t e g r i t y o f t h e s e p a r a t i n g d e c k m a y b e r e d u c e d t o " A - 0 " c l a s s .
2
N o t e s : 1 . I n r e s p e c t o f c a t e g o r y (5) s p a c e s , i t i s s u b j e c t t o t h e s p e c i a l c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r w h e t h e r t h e i n s u l a t i o n v a l u e s i n
T a b l e 2.2.1.3-1 s h a l l a p p l y t o e n d s o f d e c k h o u s e s a n d s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s , a n d w h e t h e r t h e i n s u l a t i o n v a l u e s i n T a b l e 2.2.1.3-2 s h a l l a p p l y t o
w e a t h e r d e c k s . I n n o c a s e s h a l l t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f c a t e g o r y (5) o f T a b l e s 2.2.1.3-1 t o 2.2.1.3-2 n e c e s s i t a t e e n c l o s u r e o f s p a c e s w h i c h i n t h e
o p i n i o n o f the Register need n o tb e enclosed.
2. W h e r e , d u e t o a n y p a r t i c u l a r s t r u c t u r a l a r r a n g e m e n t s i n t h e s h i p , d i f f i c u l t y i s e x p e r i e n c e d i n d e t e r m i n i n g f r o m t h e t a b l e s t h e
m i n i m u m fire i n t e g r i t y v a l u e o f a n y d i v i s i o n s , s u c h v a l u e s a r e s u b j e c t t o t h e s p e c i a l c o n s i d e r a t i o n b y t h e R e g i s t e r .
3. W h e r e t h e c o n t e n t s a n d u s e o f a s p a c e a r e s u c h t h a t t h e r e i s a d o u b t a s t o i t s c l a s s i f i c a t i o n , i t s h a l l b e t r e a t e d a s a s p a c e w i t h i n t h e
relevant category having the m o s t stringent boundary requirements.
4. N o t w i t h s t a n d i n g t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 2.2.2 t h e r e a r e n o s p e c i a l r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r m a t e r i a l o r fire i n t e g r i t y o f b o u n d a r i e s w h e r e o n l y a
d a s h appears i n t h e tables.
5. S m a l l e n c l o s e d s p a c e s i n s i d e t h e r o o m a r e t r e a t e d a s s e p a r a t e s p a c e s i f s q u a r e o f d o o r w a y s t o a d j a c e n t s p a c e s i s l e s s t h a n 30 p e r c e n t
o f openings (doorways). Fire integrity o f b u l k h e a d s a n d d e c k s surrounding s u c h spaces shall c o m p l y w i t h the requirements set forth i n tables o f the
paragraph o f the R u l e s .
isolated lockers a n d small storerooms i n accom

m o d a t i o n spaces h a v i n g a r e a s less t h a n
(in w h i c h flammable Uquids are n o t stowed);
cleaning gear lockers, laboratories ( i n w h i c h
flammable liquids are n o t stowed); drying r o o m s
( h a v i n g a d e c k a r e a o f 4 m o r less); d i e t k i t c h e n s
(containing n o open flame);
2
specie r o o m s ;
m o t i o n picture projection rooms a n d film
rooms;
drug-stores;
operating rooms;
spaces a c c o m m o d a t i n g electrical d i s t r i b u t i o n
b o a r d s w i t h a n a r e a less, t h a n 4 m .
2
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
389
T a b l e
2.2.1.3-2
D e c k s n o t forming steps i n m a i n vertical zones n o rbounding horizontal zones

Spaces above
Spaces below
Control stations
Stairways
Corridors
Evacuation stations a n d
external escape routes
Open deck spaces
Accommodation spaces o f
m i n o r fire risk
m o d e r a t e fire risk
greater fire risk
Sanitary a n d similar
spaces
Tanks, voids a n d auxiliary
machinery spaces having
m i n o r o r n o fire risk
Auxiliary machinery spa
ces, c a r g o spaces, special
category spaces, cargo a n d
other oil tanks a n d other
similar spaces o f moderate
fire risk
Machinery spaces a n d
m a i n galleys
Storerooms, workshops,
pantries, etc.
Other spaces in which
flammable liquids are
stored
(2)
(.3)
(5)
(<5)
(7)
(.8)
(.9)
(10)
vn
A-30
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-15
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-30
A-0
A-15
A-0
A-0
A-0
B-0
A-0
A-15
A-0
A-15
A-0
A-30
A-0
A-15
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
(5)
(<5)
A-0
A-60
A-0
A-15
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
(7)
A-60
A-15
A-15
A-60
A-0
A-15
A-15
A-15
(.8)
A-60
A-15
A-15
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-15
(f)
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
(10)
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
(U)
A-60
A-60
A-60
A-60
(12)
A-60
A-60
A-60
(13)
A-60
A-30
(14)
A-60
A-60
(-0
(2)
(3)
(12)
(13)
(14)
A-0
A-0
A-15
A-0
A-60
A-30
A-30
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-30
A-30
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-30
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-15
A-30
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-30
A-60
A-0
A-60
A-60
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-30
A-30
A-0
A-60
A-15
A-60
A-0
A-15
A-30
A-30
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-60
A-60
A-0
A-30
A-60
A-60
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
A-0
^ e f e r t o F o o t n o t e 1 t o T a b l e 2.2.1.3-1.
N o t e . R e f e r t o n o t e s t o T a b l e 2.2.1.3-1.
(8) A c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces o f greater fire risk:

p u b l i c spaces c o n t a i n i n g f u r n i t u r e a n d f u r n i s h
ings o f other t h a n restricted fire r i s k a n d h a v i n g a
d e c k a r e a o f 5 0 m a n d greater, sale shops;
barber shops, beauty parlours a n d saunas.
( 9 ) S a n i t a r y a n d s i m i l a r spaces:
c o m m u n a l sanitary facilities, showers,
baths,
w a t e r closets, etc.;
small laundry rooms;
i n d o o r s w i m m i n g p o o l area;
isolated serving pantries containing n o cooking
a p p l i a n c e s i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces.
I n d i v i d u a l s a n i t a r y spaces s h a l l be considered a
p o r t i o n o f t h e spaces i n w h i c h t h e y a r e located.
(10) Tanks, voids a n d auxiliary machinery
spaces h a v i n g little o r n o fire risk:
w a t e r t a n k s f o r m i n g p a r t o f t h e ship's structure;
voids a n d cofferdams;
a u x i l i a r y m a c h i n e r y spaces w h i c h d o n o t c o n t a i n
machinery having a pressure lubrication system a n d
w h e r e s t o r a g e o f c o m b u s t i b l e s i s p r o h i b i t e d , s u c h as:
ventilation and air-conditioning rooms; windlass
2
r o o m ; steering gear r o o m ; spaces a c c o m m o d a t i n g

stabilizer equipment; electrical p r o p u l s i o n m o t o r
r o o m ; r o o m s containing section switchboards a n d
purely electrical equipment, except o i l transformers
( w i t h capacity over 10 k V A ) ; shaft alleys a n d pipe
t u n n e l s ; spaces f o r p u m p s a n d r e f r i g e r a t i o n m a c h i n
ery ( n o t handUng o r using flammable Uquids);
closed t r u n k s serving t h e spaces Usted a b o v e ;
o t h e r closed t r u n k s s u c h as p i p e a n d c a b l e t r u n k s .
( 1 1 ) A u x i l i a r y m a c h i n e r y spaces, c a r g o spaces,
c a r g o a n d o t h e r o i l t a n k s a n d o t h e r s i m i l a r spaces o f
m o d e r a t e fire risk:
cargo o i l tanks;
cargo holds, trunkways a n d hatchways;
refrigerated chambers;
fuel o i l t a n k s ( w h e r e installed i n a separate space
with no machinery);
shaft alleys a n d pipe tunnels a l l o w i n g storage o f
combustibles;
a u x i U a r y m a c h i n e r y spaces as i n c a t e g o r y
(10)
w h i c h contain machinery h a v i n g a pressure lubrication
system o r where storage o f combustibles is permitted;
390
Rules
fuel o i lfilling stations;

spaces c o n t a i n i n g t u r b i n e a n d r e c i p r o c a t i n g
steam engine driven auxiliary generators a n d small
internal c o m b u s t i o n engines u p t o 110 k W d r i v i n g
generators, sprinkler, drencher o r fire p u m p s , bilge
p u m p s , etc.;
closed t r u n k s s e r v i n g t h e spaces listed a b o v e ;
spaces a c c o m m o d a t i n g o i l t r a n s f o r m e r s ( w i t h
capacity over 10 k V A ) .
( 1 2 ) M a c h i n e r y spaces a n d m a i n galleys:
engine a n d boiler r o o m s (other t h a n electric
propulsion motor rooms);
a u x i l i a r y m a c h i n e r y spaces o t h e r t h a n those i n
c a t e g o r i e s (10) a n d ( 1 1 ) w h i c h c o n t a i n i n t e r n a l c o m bustion machinery o r other oil-burning, heating o r
pumping units;
m a i n galleys a n d annexes;
t r u n k s a n d casings t o t h e spaces listed a b o v e .
(13) S t o r e r o o m s , w o r k s h o p s , pantries, etc.:
m a i n pantries, n o t annexed t o galleys;
main laundry;
large d r y i n g r o o m s ( h a v i n g a deck area o f m o r e
than 4 m ) ;
miscellaneous stores;
m a i l a n d baggage r o o m s ;
garbage rooms;
w o r k s h o p s ( n o t p a r t o f m a c h i n e r y spaces, galleys, etc.);
lockers a n d storerooms having areas o f m o r e
t h a n 4 m a n d n o t h a v i n g provisions f o r t h e storage
o f flammable Uquids.
( 1 4 ) O t h e r spaces i n w h i c h f l a m m a b l e U q u i d s a r e
stowed:
paint rooms;
storerooms containing flammable liquids ( i n c l u d i n g dyes, medicines, etc.);
laboratories ( i n w h i c h f l a m m a b l e Uquids are stowed).
2.2.1.4 O n s h i p s c a r r y i n g n o t m o r e t h a n 3 6 p a s sengers, w h e r e a space is protected b y a n a u t o m a t i c
sprinkler system o r fitted w i t h a c o n t i n u o u s " B " class
ceiling, openings i n decks n o t f o r m i n g steps i n m a i n
vertical zones n o rb o u n d i n g h o r i z o n t a l zones shall be
closed reasonably tight a n d such decks shall meet t h e
" A " class r e q u i r e m e n t s .
2.2.1.5 T h e m i n i m u m f i r e i n t e g r i t y o f a l l b u l k h e a d s a n d decks separating adjacent spaces i n ships
carrying n o t m o r e t h a n 3 6 passengers shall be as
prescribed i n Tables 2.2.1.5-1 a n d 2.2.1.5-2 w i t h r e gard t o the following:
.1 f o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e a p p r o p r i a t e fire i n t e g r i t y
standards t o be appUed t o divisions between adjacent
spaces, s u c h spaces a r e classified a c c o r d i n g t o t h e i r
fire risk a s s h o w n i n c a t e g o r i e s (1) t o ( 1 1 ) b e l o w :
(1) c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s : s p a c e s
accommodating
w h e e l h o u s e a n d n a v i g a t i o n r o o m ; spaces a c c o m 2
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
m o d a t i n g s h i p r a d i o e q u i p m e n t ; fire s t a t i o n s ; m a i n
machinery control r o o m i fi t is located outside m a c h i n e r y spaces; spaces a c c o m m o d a t i n g c e n t r a U z e d
fire a l a r m s y s t e m ;
(2) c o r r i d o r s a n d l o b b i e s ;
(3) a c c o m m o d a t i o n s p a c e s a s d e f i n e d i n 1 . 5 . 2 ,
except corridors;
(4) s t a i r w a y s :
i n t e r i o r s t a i r w a y s , Ufts, t o t a l l y enclosed emergency escape exits t r u n k s a n d escalators ( o t h e r t h a n
those w h o l l y c o n t a i n e d w i t h i n m a c h i n e r y spaces) a n d
enclosures thereto.
I n this c o n n e x i o n , a stairway w h i c h is enclosed
o n l y a t o n e level shall be regarded as p a r t o f t h e space
f r o m w h i c h i t i s n o t s e p a r a t e d b y a fire d o o r ;
( 5 ) s e r v i c e s p a c e s ( l o w risk):
lockers a n d storerooms n o t having provisions
for t h e storage o f f l a m m a b l e liquids a n d h a v i n g
a r e a s less t h a n 4 m , d r y i n g r o o m s a n d l a u n d r i e s ,
spaces
accommodating
electrical
distribution
b o a r d s w i t h a n a r e a less t h a n 4 m ;
(6) m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s o f c a t e g o r y A :
spaces as d e f i n e d i n 1.2, P a r t V I I " M a c h i n e r y
Installations";
(7) o t h e r m a c h i n e r y spaces:
m a c h i n e r y spaces e x c l u d i n g spaces referred t o i n
(6) a n d spaces a c c o m m o d a t i n g electrical e q u i p m e n t
( a u t o m a t i c t e l e p h o n e stations, spaces f o r a i r c o n ditioning ducts);
(8) c a r g o s p a c e s : a l l s p a c e s , w h i c h a r e n o t s p e c i a l
c a t e g o r y spaces u s e d f o r t h e carriage o f c a r g o ( i n c l u d i n g cargo tanks f o r oily products), as w e U as v e n t i l a t i o n
a n d h a t c h t r u n k s s e r v i c i n g s u c h spaces;
(9) s e r v i c e s p a c e s ( h i g h risk): g a l l e y s , p a n t r i e s
containing appUances f o r h o t food preparation, paint
r o o m s , lockers a n d storerooms w i t h a n area o f 4 m
a n d over, spaces f o r storage o f f l a m m a b l e Uquids,
saunas, w o r k s h o p s a n d s i m i l a r spaces, w h i c h a r e n o t
p a r t o f m a c h i n e r y spaces;
(10) o p e n d e c k s :
o p e n deck spaces a n d enclosed
promenades
h a v i n g n o fire risk. T o b e c o n s i d e r e d i n t h i s c a t e g o r y ,
e n c l o s e d p r o m e n a d e s s h a l l h a v e n o fire risk. T h i s
means that furnishings shall be restricted t o deck
f u r n i t u r e . I n a d d i t i o n , s u c h spaces s h a l l b e n a t u r a l l y
ventilated b y means o fpermanent openings;
deckhouses).
(11) special c a t e g o r y spaces as d e f i n e d i n 1.5.9
a n d r o - r o spaces i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h 1.5.4.3;
.2 t h e d o o r s f r o m t h e c a b i n s t o i n d i v i d u a l s a n i t a r y spaces m a y b e o f c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e r i a l s .
2.2.2 A c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d s e r v i c e s p a c e s w i t h i n a
m a i n vertical zone.
2.2.2.1 F o r s h i p s c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 3 6 p a s s e n gers a l l b u l k h e a d s w h i c h a r e n o t r e q u i r e d t o be
2
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
391
< <
<<
<<
<<
<
<
<
<
<4
~*
& --3
<
\ < &
'
5
"
a s
1 2
ft

0J
0) .
392
<
<
<
<
9 8 9 9
< < < < <
<
< < <
<
'
< ^ < < <
<W<
>W
>W
>W
< < <
>W
<w<
_,
>W
< < < ! ; < * <
< < <

>
43
*o
*o
<
<
<
<
*o
<
< < <
< <
ft
< < < <
BI
< < < < < <
< < <
< < < < < < <
<
< <
< <
< < < < < < <
**!
*/l
< < < < < <
6<
S S s S
3
ctj
ft
6<
<
6"
ft
ft
CN
CN
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
" A " class d i v i s i o n s s h a l l b e " B " class o r " C " class

divisions as prescribed i n T a b l e 2.2.1.3-1.
F o r ships c a r r y i n g n o t m o r e t h a n 3 6 passengers
all b u l k h e a d s w i t h i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service
spaces w h i c h a r e n o t r e q u i r e d t o b e " A " class d i v i sions s h a l l b e " B " class o r " C " class d i v i s i o n s as
prescribed i n Table 2.2.1.5-1.
A l l such divisions m a y be faced w i t h combustible
materials i n accordance
with
the provisions
o f 2.1.1.10.
2.2.2.2 F o r s h i p s c a r r y i n g n o t m o r e t h a n 3 6 p a s sengers a l l c o r r i d o r b u l k h e a d s w h e r e n o t r e q u i r e d t o
be " A " class d i v i s i o n s s h a l l be " B " class d i v i s i o n s
w h i c h shall e x t e n d f r o m deck t o deck except:
.1 w h e n c o n t i n u o u s " B " class ceilings o r l i n i n g s a r e
f i t t e d o n b o t h sides o f t h e b u l k h e a d , t h e p o r t i o n o f t h e
b u l k h e a d behind t h e continuous ceiUng o r Uning shaU
be o f m a t e r i a l w h i c h , i n thickness a n d c o m p o s i t i o n , is
acceptable i n t h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f " B " class d i v i s i o n s
b u t w h i c h s h a l l b e r e q u i r e d t o m e e t " B " class i n t e g r i t y
standards o n l y i n so f a r as is reasonable a n d practicable i n t h e o p i n i o n o f the Register;
.2 o n s h i p s e q u i p p e d w i t h a n a u t o m a t i c s p r i n k l e r
system c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e provisions o f Fire Safety
Systems Code, corridor bulkheads m a y e n d b y t h e corridor c e i U n g s p r o v i d e d t h a t s u c h b u l k h e a d s a n d c e i U n g s
are o f " B " class i n accordance w i t h 2.2.1.5. A U d o o r s a n d
d o o r frames i n such bulkheads shaU be m a d e o f n o n combustible materials a n d they shaU h a v e t h e same fire
integrity as t h e b u l k h e a d i n w h i c h they are fitted.
2.2.2.3 B u l k h e a d s r e q u i r e d t o b e " B " c l a s s d i v i sions, except c o r r i d o r bulkheads required b y 2.2.2.2,
shall extend f r o m deck t o deck a n d t o t h e shell o r
o t h e r b o u n d a r i e s unless t h e c o n t i n u o u s " B " class
ceilings o r Unings, h a v i n g a t least t h e same fire i n t e g r i t y a s t h e a d j a c e n t b u l k h e a d , a r e fitted o n b o t h
sides o f i t , i n w h i c h case t h e b u l k h e a d m a y t e r m i n a t e
at the continuous ceiUng o r lining. I f a n a i r gap between t h e cabins results i n a n opening i n t h e cont i n u o u s " B - 1 5 " class ceiUng, t h e b u l k h e a d s o n b o t h
sides o f t h e a i r g a p s h a l l b e o f " B - 1 5 " class.
2.2.2.4 S t a i r w a y s i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d s e r v i c e
spaces s h a l l b e p r o t e c t e d as f o l l o w s :
S t a i r w a y s a n d lifts shall be protected i n t h e following way:
.1 s t a i r w a y s s h a l l b e enclosed b y " A " class d i v i sions w i t h positive closing appliances o f a l l openings,
except t h a t a stairway connecting o n l y t w o decks
need n o t be enclosed, p r o v i d e d t h e integrity o f t h e
deck is ensures b y proper bulkheads o r self-closing
doors. W h e n a s t a i r w a y is enclosed i n 'tween deck,
then this enclosure shall be protected i n compUance
w i t h Tables 2.2.1.3-2 o r 2.2.1.5-2;
.2 s t a i r w a y s i n p u b U c s p a c e s m a y n o t h a v e e n closures, p r o v i d e d they are located w h o l l y w i t h i n t h e
p u b U c space;
393
3 Uft t r u n k s shaU be so fitted as t o prevent t h e penetration o f smoke a n d flame f r o m o n e 'tween-deck

c o m p a r t m e n t t o another a n d shaU be p r o v i d e d w i t h
closing appUances t o prevent d r a u g h t a n d s m o k e penetration. Lifts machinery located w i t h i n stairways enc l o s u r e shaU b e a r r a n g e d i n a separate space, s u r r o u n d e d
b y steel b o u n d a r i e s , except t h a t s m a U passages f o r Uft
cables a r e p e r m i t t e d . L i f t s , w h i c h o p e n i n t o spaces o t h e r ,
t h a n c o r r i d o r s , p u b U c spaces, s p e c i a l c a t e g o r y s p a c e s ,
s t a i r w a y s a n d e x t e r n a l spaces s h a l l n o t o p e n ( s t o p ) i n t o
s t a i r w a y s s e r v i n g as t h e m e a n s o f escape;
.4 s t a i r w a y e n c l o s u r e s s h a l l h a v e d i r e c t c o m m u nications w i t h t h e corridors a n d be o f sufficient area
t o c o m p l y w i t h 8.5.4.2, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t , A r rangements a n dOutfit". W i t h i n the perimeter o f such
stairway, enclosures, o n l y pubUc toilets, lockers o f
non-combustible m a t e r i a l p r o v i d i n g storage f o r
safety e q u i p m e n t a n d o p e n i n f o r m a t i o n counters are
permitted. O n l y corridors, pubUc toilets, special cat e g o r y spaces, o t h e r escape s t a i r w a y s r e q u i r e d b y
Part III "Equipment, Arrangements and Outfit" and
e x t e r n a l areas a r e p e r m i t t e d t o h a v e direct access t o
these s t a i r w a y enclosures. P u b l i c spaces m a y also
h a v e d i r e c t access t o s t a i r w a y e n c l o s u r e s e x c e p t f o r
the backstage o f a theatre;
.5 o n e o f t h e m e a n s o f e s c a p e f r o m a w a t e r t i g h t
c o m p a r t m e n t o r a m a i n fire v e r t i c a l z o n e a s r e q u i r e d
in 8.5.2.1, Part I I I "Equipment, Arrangements a n d
O u t f i t " shall consist o f enclosed stairways w h i c h
provide a c o n t i n u o u s shelter according t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.2.1.3 o r 2.2.1.5;
.6 p r o t e c t i o n o f escape routes f r o m t h e s t a i r w a y s
enclosures t o t h e Ufe b o a t s a n d Ufe rafts e m b a r k a t i o n
stations shall be provided either directly, o r b y prot e c t e d i n t e r i o r p a s s a g e w a y s , h a v i n g fire i n t e g r i t y a n d
i n s u l a t i o n values f o r t h e s t a i r w a y s enclosures as
specified b y Tables 2.2.1.3-1, 2.2.1.3-2, 2.2.1.5-1,
2.2.1.5-2, as appUcable;
.7 o n passenger ships c o n s t r u c t e d o n o r after
1 July 2008, non-load bearing partial bulkheads
w h i c h separate adjacent cabin balconies shall be
capable o f b e i n g o p e n e d b y t h e c r e w f r o m e a c h side
f o r t h e p u r p o s e o f fighting fires.
2.2.2.5 I n a l l s p a c e s , e x c e p t f o r r e f r i g e r a t e d p r o v i s i o n s t o r e r o o m s , c a r g o spaces, m a i l baggage cabins
a n d saunas, t h e ceiUngs, b u l k h e a d s , linings, d r a u g h t
stops a n d g r o u n d s shall be m a d e o f n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e
materials.
2.2.2.5.1 P a r t i a l b u l k h e a d s a n d d e c k s o n p a s s e n ger ships:
.1 p a r t i a l b u l k h e a d s o r decks used t o s u b d i v i d e a
space f o r u t i l i t y o r artistic t r e a t m e n t shall be o f n o n combustible materials;
.2 U n i n g s , c e i U n g s a n d p a r t i a l b u l k h e a d s o r d e c k s
used t o screen o r t o separate adjacent c a b i n balconies
shall be o fnon-combustible materials.
394
Rules
2.2.2.6 I n t h e c a s e o f s h i p s f i t t e d w i t h a n a u t o m a t i c
s p r i n k l e r s y s t e m , c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e r i a l s used f o r erect i o n o f " C " class d i v i s i o n s m a y b e a d d e d t o t h e t o t a l
v o l u m e o f combustible materials m e n t i o n e d i n 2.1.1.10.
2.2.2.7 T h e c o n s t r u c t i o n o f c e i l i n g a n d b u l kheading shall be such that i t w i l l be possible, w i t h out i m p a i r i n g t h e efficiency o f t h e fire p r o t e c t i o n ,f o r
the fire patrols t o detect a n y s m o k e o r i g i n a t i n g i n
concealed a n d inaccessible places, except w h e r e there
i s n o risk o f f i r e o r i g i n a t i n g i n s u c h p l a c e s .
2.2.2.8 T h e f u r n i t u r e i n s t a i r w a y e n c l o s u r e s s h a l l
c o n s i s t o f seats o n l y . I t s h a l l b e f i x e d t o s i x seats o n
each deck i n each stairway enclosure, be o f restricted
f i r e risk d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h F i r e T e s t P r o cedures C o d e a n d shall n o t create obstacles f o r passengers a t t h e r o u t e s o f escape. T h e R e g i s t e r m a y
p e r m i t a d d i t i o n a l seating i n t h e m a i n reception area
w i t h i n t h e stairway enclosure i f i t is fixed, n o n - c o m bustible a n d d o n o t create obstacles f o r passengers a t
t h e r o u t e s o f escape. T h e f u r n i t u r e s h a l l n o t b e perm i t t e d i n passenger a n d c r e w c o r r i d o r s f o r m i n g escape
r o u t e s i n c a b i n areas. I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e a b o v e lockers
o f n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e r i a l , p r o v i d i n g storage f o r firefighting e q u i p m e n t a n d life-saving appliances required
by t h epresent Rules m a y be permitted. D r i n k i n g water
a u t o m a t i o n devices a n d ice cube m a c h i n e s m a y b e
permitted i ncorridors provided they are properly fixed
a n d d o n o t restrict t h e w i d t h o f t h e escape r o u t e s . T h i s
applies as w e l l t o decorative flower o r p l a n t arrangem e n t s , statues o r o t h e r objects o f a r t such as p a i n t i n g
a n d tapestries i n c o r r i d o r s a n d stairways enclosures.
2.2.2.9 L i n i n g s , c e i l i n g s a n d p a r t i a l b u l k h e a d s u s e d
to screen o r t o separate adjacent cabin balconies shall b e
o f non-combustible materials. C a b i n balconies o n passenger ships constructed before 1 J u l y 2 0 0 8 shall c o m p l y
w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s p a r a g r a p h b y t h e first s u r vey after 1 J u l y 2 0 0 8 .
2.2.2.10 F u r n i t u r e a n d f u r n i s h i n g s o n c a b i n b a l conies shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements f o r r o o m s
c o n t a i n i n g furniture a n d furnishings o frestricted fire
risk ( r e f e r t o d e f i n i t i o n s i n 1 . 2 ) u n l e s s s u c h b a l c o n i e s
are protected b y a fixed pressure water-spraying a n d
fixed fire detection a n d fire a l a r m systems c o m p l y i n g
w i t h t h e requirements o f 3.4.1 a n d 4.2.1.1.5.
2.2.3 M o t o r v e h i c l e s s p a c e s , r o - r o s p a c e s , s p e c i a l
category spaces.
2.2.3.1 W h e n t h e s p e c i a l c a t e g o r y s p a c e s c a n n o t
be protected b y m a i n v e r t i c a l fire zones, t h e i r p r o tection shall be ensured b y subdivision into horizontal zones. These zones m a y cover m o r e t h a n o n e
deck, b u t their overall height calculated as a s u m o f
distances between adjacent decks w i t h o u t regard o f
f r a m i n g height shall n o t exceed 10m .
F i r e doors a n d passages (cutouts) i n decks a n d
b u l k h e a d s o f " A " class, f o r m i n g b o u n d a r i e s , w h i c h
separate h o r i z o n t a l areas f r o m each o t h e r as w e l l as
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
the r e m a i n part o f the ship shall meet t h e requirem e n t s appUcable t o fire doors a n d penetrations
(cutouts) i n h o r i z o n t a l areas (refer t o 2.2.4).
2.2.3.2 I n s h i p s c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 3 6 p a s s e n g e r s
the b o u n d a r y b u l k h e a d s a n d decks o f special categ o r y spaces s h a l l be " A - 6 0 " class. H o w e v e r , w h e r e
c a t e g o r y 2 . 2 . 1 . 3 ( 5 ) , 2 . 2 . 1 . 3 ( P ) o r 2 . 2 . 1 . 3 (10) s p a c e i s
o n o n e side o f t h e d i v i s i o n t h e class m a y b e r e d u c e d
to " A - 0 " . I ffuel o i l t a n k s a r e located u n d e r special
c a t e g o r y spaces, t h e fire i n t e g r i t y o f decks b e t w e e n
s u c h spaces m a y b e o f " A - 0 " class.
I n ships c a r r y i n g n o tm o r e t h a n 3 6 passengers t h e
b o u n d a r y b u l k h e a d s o f special c a t e g o r y spaces s h a l l
be as r e q u i r e d f o r c a t e g o r y ( 1 1 ) spaces i n 2.2.1.5-1
a n d t h e h o r i z o n t a l b o u n d a r i e s as r e q u i r e d f o r categ o r y ( / / ) spaces i n T a b l e 2.2.1.5-2.
I n passenger ships c a r r y i n g n o t m o r e t h a n
36 passengers, t h e b u l k h e a d s a n d decks f o r m i n g
b o u n d a r i e s o f enclosed a n d o p e n r o - r o spaces s h a l l
h a v e f i r e i n t e g r i t y r e q u i r e d f o r s p a c e s o f c a t e g o r y (8)
according t o 2.2.1.5-1, while t h e h o r i z o n t a l boundaries s h a l l h a v e fire i n t e g r i t y r e q u i r e d f o r spaces o f
c a t e g o r y (8) a c c o r d i n g t o 2 . 2 . 1 . 5 - 2 .
2.2.3.3 I n d i c a t o r s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d o n t h e n a v i gating bridge w h i c h shall indicate w h e n a n yfire d o o r
o f special c a t e g o r y spaces i s closed.
2.2.3.4 S p e c i a l c a t e g o r y s p a c e s s h a l l h a v e m e a n s
o f escape leading t o t h e lifeboat a n d liferaft e m b a r k a t i o n places c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e requirements
o f 8.5.1, 8.5.2.3, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t , A r r a n g e m e n t s a n d O u t f i t " as well as t h e requirements
o f 2.1.4.7 a n d 2.2.2.4.1 o f this Part.
O n e o f escape r o u t e s f r o m m a c h i n e r y spaces
where the crew is n o r m a l l y engaged shall n o thave a
d i r e c t access t o t h e special c a t e g o r y spaces.
2.2.4 D o o r s , w i n d o w s a n d s i d e s c u t t l e s .
2.2.4.1 E x c e p t h a t c h e s b e t w e e n t h e c a r g o s p a c e s ,
special c a t e g o r y spaces, s t o r e r o o m s a n d baggage
r o o m s , as w e l l as b e t w e e n s u c h spaces a n d o p e n
decks, a l l openings shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h p e r m a n e n t
closing appliances, h a v i n g a t least such fire i n t e g r i t y
as t h e d i v i s i o n s , i n w h i c h t h e y a r e f i t t e d .
Construction o f doors a n d doorframes i n the
b u l k h e a d s o f " A " class w i t h l o c k i n g devices s h a l l
p r o v i d e t h e same fire i n t e g r i t y a n d s m o k e a n d f l a m e
tightness as t h e bulkheads, i n w h i c h those d o o r s are
fitted a s d e t e r m i n e d i n c o m p U a n c e w i t h t h e F i r e T e s t
P r o c e d u r e s C o d e s . D o o r s a p p r o v e d w i t h o u t t h e sill
being part o f the frame, which are installed o n o r
after 1 J u l y 2010, shall be installed such t h a t t h e g a p
u n d e r t h e d o o r does n o t exceed 12 m m . A n o n c o m b u s t i b l e sill shall be installed u n d e r t h e d o o r such
that floor coverings d o n o textend beneath t h e closed
d o o r . E a c h d o o r fitted i n " A " c l a s s d i v i s i o n s h a l l b e
capable o f being opened a n d closed m a n u a l l y f r o m
b o t h sides o f t h e b u l k h e a d b y o n e p e r s o n o n l y .
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
F i r e doors i n m a i n vertical bulkheads, galley

boundaries a n d stairway enclosures other t h a n p o w e r operated watertight doors a n d those w h i c h are norm a l l y locked, shall satisfy t h e f o l l o w i n g requirements:
.1 t h e d o o r s s h a l l b e self-closing a n d b e capable
o f c l o s i n g w i t h a n a n g l e o f i n c l i n a t i o n o f u p t o 3,5
opposing closure;
.2 t h e a p p r o x i m a t e t i m e o f c l o s u r e f o r h i n g e d f i r e
d o o r s s h a l l b e n o m o r e t h a n 4 0 s a n d n o less t h a n 1 0 s
f r o m the beginning o f their m o v e m e n t w i t h the ship
in the upright position. T h e approximate uniform
rate o f closure f o r sUding fire d o o r s shall be n o m o r e
t h a n 0 , 2 m / s a n d n o less t h a n 0 , 1 m / s f r o m t h e b e ginning o f their m o v e m e n t w i t h t h e ship i n t h eu p right position;
.3 t h e d o o r s s h a l l b e c a p a b l e o f r e m o t e r e l e a s e
f r o m t h e c o n t i n u o u s l y m a n n e d c e n t r a l c o n t r o l station, either simultaneously o r i n groups a n d shall be
capable o f release also i n d i v i d u a l l y f r o m a p o s i t i o n a t
b o t h sides o f t h e d o o r . Release s w i t c h e s s h a l l h a v e a n
on-off function t o prevent automatic resetting o f the
system;
.4 h o l d - b a c k h o o k s n o t s u b j e c t t o m a i n f i r e
c o n t r o l s t a t i o n release a r e p r o h i b i t e d ;
.5 a d o o r c l o s e d r e m o t e l y f r o m t h e m a i n f i r e
control station shall be capable o f being re-opened a t
b o t h sides o f t h e d o o r b y l o c a l c o n t r o l . A f t e r s u c h
local o p e n i n g , t h e d o o r shall a u t o m a t i c a l l y close
again;
.6 i n d i c a t i o n shall be p r o v i d e d a t t h e fire d o o r
indicator panel i n t h ec o n t i n u o u s l y m a n n e d m a i n fire
control station whether each o f the remote-released
d o o r s is closed;
.7 t h e release m e c h a n i s m s h a l l b e so designed t h a t
t h e d o o r w i l l a u t o m a t i c a l l y close i n case o f d i s r u p t i o n
o f the c o n t r o l system o r m a i n source o f power;
.8 l o c a l p o w e r a c c u m u l a t o r s f o r p o w e r - o p e r a t e d
doors shall be provided i n the immediate vicinity o f
the doors t o enable t h e doors t o be operated after
disruption o f t h e c o n t r o l system o r m a i n source o f
electrical p o w e r a t least t e n t i m e s (fully o p e n e d a n d
closed) using t h e local controls;
.9 d i s r u p t i o n o f t h e c o n t r o l s y s t e m o r m a i n
source o f electrical p o w e r o f o n e d o o r shall n o ti m p a i r t h e safe f u n c t i o n i n g o f o t h e r d o o r s ;
.10 r e m o t e - r e l e a s e d s U d i n g o r p o w e r - o p e r a t e d
doors shall be equipped w i t h a n a l a r m that sounds
for a t least 5 s b u t n o m o r e t h a n 10 s after t h e d o o r is
released f r o m the m a i n fire c o n t r o l s t a t i o n a n d before
the d o o r begins t o m o v e a n d continues sounding u n t i l
the d o o r is completely closed;
.11 a d o o r d e s i g n e d t o r e - o p e n u p o n c o n t a c t i n g
a n object i nits p a t h shall re-open n o t m o r e t h a n 1 m
far f r o m t h e p o i n t o f contact;
.12 d o u b l e - l e a f d o o r s e q u i p p e d w i t h a l a t c h n e cessary t o their fire integrity shall h a v e a latch t h a t is
395
automatically activated b y t h e operation o f the doors

w h e n released b y t h e c o n t r o l system;
.13 d o o r s g i v i n g d i r e c t a c c e s s t o s p e c i a l c a t e g o r y
spaces w h i c h a r e p o w e r - o p e r a t e d a n d a u t o m a t i c a U y
closed need n o t be equipped w i t h t h e alarms a n dremote-release
mechanisms
required
i n 2.2.4.1.3
a n d 2.2.4.1.10;
.14 t h e c o m p o n e n t s o f t h e l o c a l c o n t r o l s y s t e m
shall be accessible f o r m a i n t e n a n c e a n d adjusting;
and
.15 p o w e r - o p e r a t e d d o o r s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h
a control system o f a n approved type w h i c h shall be
able t o o p e r a t e i n case o f fire, t h i s b e i n g d e t e r m i n e d
in accordance w i t h Fire Test Procedures Code. This
system shall satisfy t h e f o l l o w i n g requirements:
the c o n t r o l system shall be able t o operate t h e
d o o r a t t h e t e m p e r a t u r e o f a t l e a s t 2 0 0 C f o r a t l e a s t
60 m i n , served b y t h e p o w e r supply;
the p o w e r supply f o ra l l o t h e r d o o r s n o t subject
to fire shall n o t be impaired;
a t t e m p e r a t u r e s e x c e e d i n g 2 0 0 C t h e c o n t r o l
system shall be automatically isolated f r o m the p o w e r
supply a n d shall be capable o f keeping the door
c l o s e d u p t o a t l e a s t 9 4 5 C.
2.2.4.2 E x c e p t w a t e r t i g h t d o o r s , w e a t h e r t i g h t
doors (semi watertight doors), doors leading t o the
o p e n decks, a n d d o o r s required t o be adequately
gastight, a l l " A " class d o o r s l o c a t e d i n s t a i r w a y s ,
p u b l i c spaces a n d m a i n v e r t i c a l z o n e b u l k h e a d s i n
escape routes shall be e q u i p p e d w i t h a self-closing
hose p o r t o f m a t e r i a l , c o n s t r u c t i o n a n d fire integrity
w h i c h is equivalent t o t h e d o o r into w h i c h i tis fitted,
a n d shall be 150 x 150 m m square opening w i t h t h e
d o o r closed a n d shall be inset i n t o t h e l o w e r edge o f
t h e d o o r , o p p o s i t e t h e d o o r hinges, o r i n t h e case o f
sUding doors, nearest t h e opening.
2.2.4.3 D o o r s a n d d o o r f r a m e s i n " B " c l a s s d i v i sions a n d their l o c k i n g devices shall ensure t h e same
fire integrity as t h e divisions w h e r e they a r e installed
in accordance w i t h the Fire Test Procedures Code,
except that v e n t i l a t i o n openings m a y be p e r m i t t e d i n
the lower p o r t i o n o f such doors. I fsuch ventilation
openings are located i n the door o r under i t , their
t o t a l n e t area shall n o t exceed 0,05 m . A l t e r n a t i v e l y ,
pressure-balancing ventilation duct made o f n o n combustible m a t e r i a l is allowed t o be arranged between the cabin a n d the corridor, a n d located below
sanitary r o o m i f a n area o fits cross section does n o t
exceed 0,05 m . A l l such openings shall be fitted w i t h
grills m a d e o fn o n - c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e r i a l . D o o r s shall
be n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e . D o o r s a p p r o v e d w i t h o u t t h e sill
being part o f the frame, w h i c h are installed o n o r
after 1 J u l y 2010, shall be installed such t h a t t h e g a p
u n d e r t h e d o o r does n o t exceed 2 5 m m . C a b i n d o o r s
i n " B " class d i v i s i o n s s h a l l b e o f t h e self-closing t y p e
and shall have n o hold-backs.
2
396
Rules
2.2.4.4 W i n d o w s f a c i n g l i f e - s a v i n g a p p l i a n c e s , e m b a r k a t i o n a n d m u s t e r areas, e x t e r n a l stairs a n d o p e n

decks used f o r escape routes, a n d w i n d o w s situated b e l o w liferaft a n d escape slide e m b a r k a t i o n areas s h a l l h a v e
t h e fire i n t e g r i t y a s r e q u i r e d i n T a b l e 2 . 2 . 1 . 3 - 1 . W h e r e
automatic dedicated sprinkler heads are p r o v i d e d f o r
w i n d o w s , " A - 0 " class w i n d o w s m a y b e accepted as
equivalent. Sprinklers shall b e located above w i n d o w s i n
addition t o sprinklers o f ceilings; alternatively these m a y
b e s p r i n k l e r s o f c e i l i n g s fitted i n s u c h m a n n e r t h a t a
w i n d o w i s p r o t e c t e d b y w a t e r flow w i t h a f e e d o f a t l e a s t
5 1 / m i n - m , the square o f a w i n d o w shall b e included into
calculation o f t h e area covered b y t h e sprinkler; altern a t i v e l y these m a y b e w a t e r - m i s t nozzles c o m p l y i n g w i t h
the requirements o f I M O resolution A.800(19). W i n d o w s
located i n t h e ship's side b e l o w t h e lifeboat e m b a r k a t i o n
a r e a s s h a l l h a v e t h e fire i n t e g r i t y a t l e a s t e q u a l t o
" A - 0 " class.
2
A l l w i n d o w s a n d side scuttles i n b u l k h e a d s w i t h i n
a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces, a n d c o n t r o l stations, except those subject t o p r o v i s i o n s o f 2.2.4.5
a n d 2.2.4.8, shall be fitted so as t o ensure t h a t fire i n tegrity o f t h e bulkheads they are fitted i n is n o t i m paired, w h i c h is determined i n accordance w i t h the F i r e
Test Procedures Code. Despite the requirements o f
Tables 2.2.1.3-1, 2.2.1.3-2, 2.2.1.5-1 a n d 2.2.1.5-2, w i n d o w s a n d side scuttles i n t h e o u t e r b u l k h e a d s o f a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces, service spaces a n d c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s
shall h a v e f r a m e s m a d e o f steel o r o t h e r e q u i v a l e n t
m a t e r i a l a n d m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7.2.2.4, P a r t I I I
2.2.4.5 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r " A " c l a s s f i r e i n tegrity o f ship external boundaries d o n o t apply t o
glassed b u l k h e a d s , w i n d o w s a n d side scuttles, p r o vided that 2.2.4.4 does n o t c o n t a i n t h e requirement
t h a t s u c h b o u n d a r i e s s h a l l b e o f " A " class. T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r " A " class fire i n t e g r i t y o f t h e o u t e r
boundaries o f a ship shall n o t apply t o exterior doors,
except f o r those i n superstructures a n d deckhouses
facing life-saving appliances, e m b a r k a t i o n a n d ext e r n a l m u s t e r s t a t i o n areas, e x t e r n a l stairs a n d o p e n
decks used f o r escape routes. S t a i r w a y enclosure
doors need n o tmeet this requirement.
2.2.4.6 I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s c a r r y i n g n o t m o r e t h a n
36 passengers, i t is a l l o w e d t o use combustible m a terials f o r m a n u f a c t u r e o f doors separating cabins
f r o m i n t e r n a l i n d i v i d u a l s a n i t a r y spaces s u c h as
showers.
2.2.4.7 D o o r s t o m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s o f c a t e g o r y A ,
other t h a n power-operated watertight doors shall be
arranged t o ensure their positive closing b y p o w e r
o p e r a t e d c l o s i n g s a r r a n g e m e n t s o r b y f i t t i n g selfclosing doors capable o f being closed w i t h a n angle o f
i n c l i n a t i o n o f u p t o 3,5 o p p o s i t e t o t h e d o o r c l o s u r e
a n d equipped w i t h l o c k i n g device a n d r e m o t e l y c o n t r o l l e d release m e c h a n i s m . D o o r s f o r t h e e m e r g e n c y
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
escape t r u n k s m a y n o t t o be equipped w i t h l o c k i n g
devices a n d r e m o t e l y c o n t r o l l e d release m e c h a n i s m s .
D o o r s closure controls, required b y 2.1.4.2.3,
shall be located i no n eplace o r centralized a t possibly
less n u m b e r o f places. T h e s e p l a c e s s h a l l h a v e f r e e
access f r o m t h e o p e n deck.
2.2.4.8 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r " B " c l a s s f i r e i n tegrity o f ship external boundaries d o n o t apply t o
glassed b u l k h e a d s , w i n d o w s a n d side scuttles. S u c h
r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r " B " class fire i n t e g r i t y d o n o t a p p l y
to exterior doors i n superstructures a n d deckhouses.
2.2.5 E x t e r n a l a r e a s o n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s .
2.2.5.1 F i r e r i s k o f e x t e r n a l a r e a s o n p a s s e n g e r
ships is evaluated i n accordance w i t h t h e p r o v i s i o n s
of MSC.l/Circ.1274.
2.2.6 C a s u a l t y t h r e s h o l d , s a f e r e t u r n t o p o r t a n d
safe areas.
2.2.6.1 P a s s e n g e r s h i p s h a v i n g l e n g t h , a s d e f i n e d
i n 1.2.1 o f L o a d L i n e R u l e s f o r S e a - G o i n g Ships,
o f 120 m o r m o r e o r h a v i n g three o r m o r e m a i n
vertical zones, shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements
o f 2.2.6 i n order t o meet f u n c t i o n a l requirements a n d
p e r f o r m a n c e s t a n d a r d s f o r safe a r e a s i n case o f c a sualty t h a t does n o t exceed t h e casualty threshold.
2.2.6.2 W h e n f i r e d a m a g e d o e s n o t e x c e e d t h e
casualty threshold, t h e ship shall be capable o fret u r n i n g t o p o r t w h i l e p r o v i d i n g a safe a r e a as d e f i n e d
i n 1.2. T o b e d e e m e d c a p a b l e o f r e t u r n i n g t o p o r t t h e
fixed fire extinguishing systems, i n c l u d i n g t h e fire
m a i n system, a n d t h e fire detection a n d fire a l a r m
system shall remain operational i n theremaining part
o f the ship n o t affected b y fire.
2.2.6.3 T h e f i r e m a i n s y s t e m s h a l l r e m a i n o p e r a t i o n a l i n a l l m a i n vertical zones n o t directly affected
b y t h e casualty. W a t e r feed f o r fire-fighting purposes
shall be available t o a l l areas o f t h e ship.
2.2.6.4 T h e a u t o m a t i c s p r i n k l e r s y s t e m o r a n y
o t h e r fixed fire extinguishing system designed t o
p r o t e c t a n entire space shall be o p e r a t i o n a l i n a l l
spaces n o t d i r e c t l y affected b y t h e casualty.
2.2.6.5 T h e f i r e d e t e c t i o n a n d f i r e a l a r m s y s t e m ,
including smoke detection system, shall be operational
i n a l l spaces n o t d i r e c t l y affected b y t h e casualty.
2.2.6.6 M e a n s o f a c c e s s t o l i f e - s a v i n g a p p U a n c e s
s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d f r o m e a c h safe area, t a k i n g i n t o
account that a m a i n vertical zone m a yn o t be available f o r i n t e r n a l transit.
2.2.6.7 I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2 . 2 . 6 . 2 ,
the f o l l o w i n g systems, m a c h i n e r y a n d e q u i p m e n t
shall r e m a i n operational i n the remaining part o f the
ship n o t affected b y fire:
.1 p r o p u l s i o n a n d essential a u x i l i a r y m a c h i n e r y ;
.2 s t e e r i n g s y s t e m s a n d s t e e r i n g - c o n t r o l s y s t e m s ;
.3 p o w e r - o p e r a t e d w a t e r t i g h t d o o r s ;
.4 f u e l o i l s y s t e m s f o r p r o p u l s i o n a n d e s s e n t i a l
auxiliary machinery;
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
.5 b a l l a s t a n d b i l g e s y s t e m s ;
.6 i n t e r n a l c o m m u n i c a t i o n b e t w e e n t h e b r i d g e ,
e n g i n e e r i n g spaces, safety centre, f i r e - f i g h t i n g a n d
d a m a g e c o n t r o l teams, a n d as required f o r passenger
and crew notification a n d mustering; internal comm u n i c a t i o n shall be p r o v i d e d b y effective fixed o r
portable means;
.7 f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n systems;
.8 n a v i g a t i o n l i g h t s i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e r e quirements o f International Regulations f o r Preventing Collisions a t Sea;
.9 G M D S S r a d i o e q u i p m e n t ( r a d i o c o m m u n i c a tion b y G M D S S radio equipment shall be provided
or, i f the m a i n G M D S S radio equipment is o u to f
service d u e t o casualty, t h e distress alert i n i t i a t i n g
shall be p r o v i d e d o n t h e V H F frequencies i n c l u d i n g
two-way V H F radiotelephone apparatus f o r communications w i t h aircrafts);
.10 n a v i g a t i o n a l e q u i p m e n t e s s e n t i a l f o r n a v i g a t i o n , i n d i c a t i n g t h e s h i p l o c a t i o n a n d c o l l i s i o n risk
assessment.
2.2.6.8 T h e s y s t e m s , m a c h i n e r y a n d e q u i p m e n t
specified i n 2.2.6.2 a n d 2.2.6.7 shall r e m a i n operat i o n a l i n case o f f l o o d i n g o f a n y w a t e r t i g h t c o m partment.
2.2.6.9 I f s y s t e m s a r e n e e d e d t o f i g h t w i t h fire a n d
f l o o d i n g w h i c h a r e n o t specified i n 2.2.6.2 a n d 2.2.6.7
they shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t o f 2.2.6.7.
2.2.6.10 V e n t i l a t i o n o f s a f e a r e a ( - s ) s h a l l c o m p l y
w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.2.6.7 a n d 2.2.6.8.
V e n t i l a t i o n d e s i g n s h a l l r e d u c e t h e risk t h a t s m o k e
a n d h o t gases c o u l d affect t h e u s e o f t h e safe area(s).
2.2.6.11 P o w e r s u p p l y o f e l e c t r i c a l e q u i p m e n t
specified i n 2.2.6.7 a n d 2.2.6.13 shall be p r o v i d e d t o
ensure their simultaneous operation.
2.2.6.12 T h e s a f e a r e a ( s ) s h a l l g e n e r a l l y b e i n t e r n a l space(s); h o w e v e r , t h e u s e o f a n e x t e r n a l space as
a safe a r e a m a y b e a l l o w e d t a k i n g i n t o a c c o u n t a n y
restriction due t o the area o f operation a n d relevant
expected e n v i r o n m e n t a l conditions.
2.2.6.13 T h e s a f e a r e a ( s ) s h a l l p r o v i d e a l l o c c u p a n t s w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g basic services t o ensure t h a t
the h e a l t h o f passengers a n d crew is maintained:
.1 s a n i t a t i o n ;
.2 f r e s h w a t e r ;
.3 f o o d ;
.4 a l t e r n a t e s p a c e f o r m e d i c a l c a r e ;
.5 s h e l t e r f r o m t h e w e a t h e r ;
.6 m e a n s o f p r e v e n t i n g h e a t s t r e s s a n d h y pothermia;
7 U g h t ;
.8 v e n t i l a t i o n .
2.2.7 S y s t e m s t o r e m a i n o p e r a t i o n a l a f t e r a f i r e
casualty.
2.2.7.1 P a s s e n g e r s h i p s h a v i n g l e n g t h , a s d e f i n e d
i n 1.2.1 o f L o a d L i n e R u l e s f o r S e a - G o i n g Ships,
397
o f 120 m o r more, o r having three o r m o r e m a i n

vertical zones shall comply w i t h the requirements
o f 2.2.7 t o provide t h e systems operabiUty i f t h e casualty threshold is exceeded.
2.2.7.2 I n c a s e a n y o n e m a i n v e r t i c a l z o n e i s u n serviceable d u e t o fire, t h e fire m a i n system shall be so
arranged a n d segregated as t o r e m a i n o p e r a t i o n a l f o r a t
least 3 h based o n t h e a s s u m p t i o n o f n o d a m a g e outside
the unserviceable m a i n vertical zone. I n particular, t h e
fire m a i n system shaU r e m a i n o p e r a t i o n a l i n a U m a i n
vertical zones n o t directly affected b y t h e casualty. T h e
fire m a i n system is n o t required t o r e m a i n o p e r a t i o n a l
w i t h i n t h e unserviceable m a i n vertical zones.
2.2.7.3 C a b l i n g a n d p i p i n g w i t h i n a t r u n k c o n structed t o a n " A - 6 0 " class s h a l l r e m a i n i n t a c t a n d
serviceable w h i l e passing t h r o u g h t h e unserviceable
m a i n vertical zone. A n equivalent degree o f protect i o n f o rcabling a n d piping m a y be approved b y t h e
Register.
2.2.7.4 I n a d d i t i o n t o 2 . 2 . 7 . 2 t h e f o l l o w i n g systems, machinery a n d equipment shall be so arranged
a n d segregated as t o r e m a i n o p e r a t i o n a l f o r a t
least 3 h based o n t h e a s s u m p t i o n o f n o d a m a g e
outside the unserviceable m a i n vertical zone:
. 1 b i l g e s y s t e m s f o r r e m o v a l o f fire-fighting w a t e r ;
.2 U g h t i n g a l o n g e s c a p e r o u t e s , a t a s s e m b l y s t a tions a n d a t e m b a r k a t i o n stations o f Ufe-saving appUances;
.3 l o w l o c a t i o n U g h t i n g o f e s c a p e r o u t e s w i t h
electrical p o w e r supply;
. 4 i n t e r n a l c o m m u n i c a t i o n s ( i n s u p p o r t o f firefighting
as r e q u i r e d f o r p a s s e n g e r a n d c r e w n o t i f i c a tion a n d evacuation); internal c o m m u n i c a t i o n shall
b e p r o v i d e d b y e f f e c t i v e fixed o r p o r t a b l e m e a n s ;
.5 G M D S S r a d i o e q u i p m e n t ( r a d i o c o m m u n i c a tion b y G M D S S radio equipment shall be provided
or, i f the m a i n G M D S S radio equipment is o u to f
service d u e t o casualty, t h e distress alert i n i t i a t i n g
shall be p r o v i d e d o n t h e V H F frequencies i n c l u d i n g
two-way V H F radiotelephone apparatus f o r communications w i t h aircrafts).
2.2.7.5 T h e s y s t e m s , m a c h i n e r y a n d e q u i p m e n t
specified i n 2.2.7.4 a r e n o t r e q u i r e d t o r e m a i n operational w i t h i n t h e unserviceable m a i n vertical zones.
2.2.7.6 P o w e r s u p p l y o f e l e c t r i c a l e q u i p m e n t f o r
evacuation f r o m ship including Ufe-saving appUances,
as w e l l a s o f s y s t e m s , m a c h i n e r y a n d e q u i p m e n t
specified i n 2.2.7.4 shall be p r o v i d e d t o ensure t h e i r
simultaneous operation.
2.2.8 S a f e t y c e n t r e o n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s ( r e f e r a l s o
to MSC.l/Circ.1368).
2.2.8.1 P a s s e n g e r s h i p s s h a l l h a v e o n b o a r d a
safety centre, as d e f i n e d i n 1.2, c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e
requirements o f 2.2.8.
2.2.8.2 T h e s a f e t y c e n t r e s h a l l e i t h e r b e a p a r t o f
the n a v i g a t i o n bridge o r be located i n a separate
398
Rules
r o o m a d j a c e n t t o a n d h a v i n g d i r e c t access t o t h e
navigation bridge.
2.2.8.3 M e a n s o f c o m m u n i c a t i o n b e t w e e n t h e
safety centre, t h e storage r o o m ( s ) f o r fire extin
guishing system(s) a n dfire equipment lockers shall be
provided.
2.2.8.4 A c c o r d i n g t o M S C . l / C i r c . 1 3 6 8 t h e f u n c
tionality, i.e. activation, control, m o n i t o r i n g o r
c o m b i n a t i o n thereof, o f t h e f o l l o w i n g safety systems
shall be available f r o m t h e safety centre: fire detec
t i o n a n d fire a l a r m system, sprinkler a n d equivalent
systems, w a t e r - b a s e d systems f o r m a c h i n e r y spaces,
fixed fire-fighting local application systems as w e l l as
fire p u m p s a n d emergency fire p u m p s .
2.2.8.5 I n a d d i t i o n t o 2 . 2 . 8 . 3 m e a n s o f c o m m u
n i c a t i o n between t h e safety centre, t h ecentral c o n t r o l
station, t h e navigation bridge, t h e engine c o n t r o l
r o o m shall be provided.
2.2.8.6 A c c o r d i n g t o M S C . l / C i r c . 1 3 6 8 i n a d d i t i o n
t o 2.2.8.4 t h e functionality, i.e. activation, c o n t r o l ,
m o n i t o r i n g o r c o m b i n a t i o n thereof, o f t h e safety systems
listed b e l o w shall be available f r o m t h e safety centre:
.1 a l l p o w e r e d v e n t i l a t i o n systems;
.2 a t r i u m s m o k e e x t r a c t i o n s y s t e m ;
.3 i n d i c a t i o n o f c l o s i n g w a t e r t i g h t a n d f i r e d o o r s ;
.4 g e n e r a l e m e r g e n c y a l a r m s y s t e m ;
.5 p u b l i c a d d r e s s s y s t e m ;
.6 l o w l o c a t i o n l i g h t i n g o f e s c a p e r o u t e s w i t h
electrical p o w e r supply;
.7 i n d i c a t o r s f o r shell d o o r s , l o a d i n g d o o r s a n d
other closing appUances;
.8 f l o o d i n g d e t e c t i o n s y s t e m .
2.3 C A R G O
SHIPS
2.3.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s C h a p t e r a r e a d
d i t i o n a l t o those set o u t i n 2 . 1 a n d a p p l y t o c a r g o
ships o f 5 0 0 gross t o n n a g e a n d u p w a r d s .
2.3.2 I n w a y o f a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d s e r v i c e
spaces a n d c o n t r o l stations o n e o f t h e f o l l o w i n g
methods o fprotection shall be adopted:
M e t h o d 1: c o n s t r u c t i o n o f i n t e r n a l s u b d i v i s i o n
b u l k h e a d s o f n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e " B " o r " C " class d i v i
sions, generally w i t h o u t instaUation i n t h e accom
m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces o f t h e a u t o m a t i c s p r i n k l e r
fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g system a n d fire detection a n d fire
a l a r m system;
Method H C : the fitting o fa n automatic sprinkler
s y s t e m a n d f i r e d e t e c t i o n a n d fire a l a r m s y s t e m i n a l l
s p a c e s i n w h i c h fire m i g h t b e e x p e c t e d t o o r i g i n a t e ,
generally w i t h n o restriction o n the type o f internal
bulkheads; o r
M e t h o d I I I C : t h e fitting o f a fixed fire d e t e c t i o n
a n d fire a l a r m s y s t e m o f a p p r o v e d t y p e c o m p l y i n g
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
w i t h r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 4 . 1 a n d 4 . 2 i n s p a c e s w h e r e fire
m i g h t develop, generally w i t h n o restriction o n the
class o f i n t e r n a l s u b d i v i s i o n b u l k h e a d s , except t h a t i n
n o case s h a l l t h e a r e a o f a n y a c c o m m o d a t i o n space
b o u n d e d b y " A " o r " B " class d i v i s i o n exceeds 5 0
Consideration m a y be given b y the Register t o i n
creasing t h i s a r e a f o r p u b U c spaces.
The requirements o n using non-combustible
materials f o r the construction a n d insulation o f
b u l k h e a d s b o u n d i n g m a c h i n e r y spaces, c o n t r o l sta
t i o n s , service spaces, etc, as w e l l as p r o t e c t i o n o f
above m e n t i o n e d t r u n k s a n d stairways enclosures are
c o m m o n f o ra l l three methods described above.
2.3.3 T h e m i n i m u m fire i n t e g r i t y o f t h e b u l k
h e a d s a n d decks s e p a r a t i n g adjacent spaces s h a l l b e
as p r e s c r i b e d i n T a b l e s 2 . 3 . 3 - 1 a n d 2.3.3-2.
F o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e appropriate fire integrity
standards t o be applied t o divisions between adjacent
s p a c e s , t h e s p a c e s a r e c l a s s i f i e d a c c o r d i n g t o t h e i r fire
risk as follows:
(1) c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s : s p a c e s a c c o m m o d a t i n g e m e r
gency sources o f electrical p o w e r a n d Ughting; w h e e l h o u s e a n d n a v i g a t i o n r o o m ; spaces a c c o m m o d a t i n g
ship r a d i o equipment; fire stations; m a i n m a c h i n e r y
c o n t r o l r o o m i f i t i s l o c a t e d o u t s i d e m a c h i n e r y space;
spaces a c c o m m o d a t i n g c e n t r a U z e d fire a l a r m s y s t e m ;
(2) corridors a n d lobbies;
(3) a c c o m m o d a t i o n s p a c e s i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h
1.5.2, e x c e p t c o r r i d o r s ;
(4) s t a i r w a y s :
i n t e r i o r s t a i r w a y s , Ufts, t o t a l l y enclosed emer
gency escape t r u n k s a n d escalators ( o t h e r t h a n those
w h o l l y c o n t a i n e d w i t h i n t h e m a c h i n e r y spaces) a n d
enclosures thereto.
A stairway w h i c h is enclosed o n l y a t o n e level
shall be r e g a r d e d as p a r t o f t h e space f r o m w h i c h i t is
n o t s e p a r a t e d b y a fire d o o r ;
(5) service spaces ( l o w r i s k ) :
storerooms n o th a v i n g provisions f o r t h e storage
o f f l a m m a b l e U q u i d s a n d h a v i n g a r e a s less t h a n 4 m ,
drying rooms, laundries a n d refrigerated provision
storerooms insulated with non-combustible materi
als; spaces a c c o m o d a t i n g electrical d i s t r i b u t i o n
b o a r d s h a v i n g a n a r e a o f less t h a n 4 m ;
(6) m a c h i n e r y spaces o f c a t e g o r y A :
Installations";
m a c h i n e r y spaces e x c l u d i n g t h o s e specified i n ( 6 )
a n d spaces a c c o m m o d a t i n g electrical e q u i p m e n t
( a u t o m a t i c t e l e p h o n e stations, spaces f o r a i r c o n
ditioning ducts);
(8) c a r g o s p a c e s :
a l l spaces u s e d f o r carriage o f cargoes ( i n c l u d i n g
cargo tanks f o r oily products) as w e l l as t r u n k w a y s
a n d h a t c h w a y s t o s u c h spaces;
2
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
399
<J

<;
^3
!-3
<N
Jn,
-:
,(
"
cd
1 W &
ft
"
ft
400
Rules for
< < < <
<W<
>W
>W
>W
>W
< C < C < C < C < C
<w<
<
ft
>W
| ; < C *
<
< < < < <
<
< < < < <<
< < <
<W<
>W
<
>
S3
>W
>W
>W
>W
< * * < * <<<<*
<c
'4
'3
BI
<
<
t
BI
I
9
<
9
<
< < < <
<
< <
< ^ < < <
<
< <
<
9
<
~
<
< < <
<
<
<
<
>
ft
6"
ft
6
(
the Classification
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
(P) service spaces (greater fire r i s k ) : galleys a n d

pantries containing appliances f o r h o t f o o d prepara
t i o n , saunas, p a i n t lockers a n d s t o r e r o o m s w i t h a n area
o f 4 m a n d o v e r , spaces f o r storage o f f l a m m a b l e l i
q u i d s , w o r k s h o p s a n d s i m i l a r spaces, w h i c h are n o t p a r t
o f m a c h i n e r y spaces; r e f r i g e r a t e d p r o v i s i o n s t o r e r o o m s
insulated w i t h combustible materials;
(10) o p e n d e c k s :
o p e n deck spaces a n d enclosed
promenades
h a v i n g n o fire risk. T h i s m e a n s t h a t their furnishings
shall be restricted t o deck f u r n i t u r e . I n a d d i t i o n , such
spaces s h a l l be n a t u r a l l y v e n t i l a t e d b y p e r m a n e n t
openings:
deckhouses);
(11) r o - r o c a r g o spaces a n d m o t o r vehicles spaces
as d e f i n e d i n 1.5.4.3 a n d 1.5.4.4.
2.3.4 L i n i n g s , ceiUngs, d r a u g h t stops a n d t h e i r
associated g r o u n d s shall be m a d e o f n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e
materials:
i n a c c o m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces, a n d i n c o n
t r o l s t a t i o n s , i f p r o t e c t i o n method 1 i s u s e d ;
i n c o r r i d o r s a n d s t a i r w a y enclosures s e r v i n g ac
c o m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces, a n d c o n t r o l stations,
i f p r o t e c t i o n methods IIC a n d a r e u s e d .
2.3.5 W i t h i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces
b u l k h e a d s n o t r e q u i r e d t o be " A " o r " B " class d i v i
sions s h a l l be:
. 1 a t l e a s t " C " c l a s s d i v i s i o n i n method
1 f i r e
protection;
.2 n o t subject t o a n y r e s t r i c t i o n s , except i n cases
w h e r e " C " class b u l k h e a d s are r e q u i r e d i n accordance
w i t h T a b l e 2 . 3 . 3 - 1 i n method IIC f i r e p r o t e c t i o n ;
.3 n o t subject t o a n y r e s t r i c t i o n s e x c e p t t h a t i n n o
case s h a l l t h e area o f a n y a c c o m m o d a t i o n space o r
spaces b o u n d e d b y " A " o r " B " class d i v i s i o n s ex
ceed 5 0 m (except i n cases w h e r e " C " class b u l k
heads are required i n accordance w i t h T a b l e 2.3.3-1),
i n method f i r e p r o t e c t i o n .
C o n s i d e r a t i o n m a y be g i v e n b y the Register t o
i n c r e a s i n g t h i s a r e a f o r p u b U c spaces.
I f t h e 1 method
o f protection has
been
used while ship construction, appUcation o f c o m
bustible m a t e r i a l s m a y be a l l o w e d f o r d o o r s separ
a t i n g c a b i n s f r o m i n t e r n a l s a n i t a r y spaces s u c h as
showers.
2.3.6 T h e d o o r s installed i n the bulkheads
b o u n d i n g m a c h i n e r y spaces o f c a t e g o r y A s h a l l be
self-closing a n d adequately gastight. " A " class d o o r s
a p p r o v e d w i t h o u t the sill b e i n g p a r t o f the f r a m e ,
w h i c h are i n s t a l l e d o n o r after 1 J u l y 2 0 1 0 , s h a l l be
installed such that the gap under the d o o r does
n o t exceed 12 m m , a n d a n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e sill shall
be installed u n d e r the d o o r such t h a t f l o o r coverings
do n o t extend beneath the closed door.
2
401
" B " class d o o r s a p p r o v e d w i t h o u t t h e sill b e i n g

part o f the frame, w h i c h are installed o n o r after
1 J u l y 2010, shall be installed such t h a t the gap u n d e r
the d o o r does n o t exceed 25 m m .
2.3.7 T h e d o o r s r e q u i r e d t o be self-closing shall
n o t be e q u i p p e d w i t h l o c k i n g devices. H o w e v e r ,
l o c k i n g devices m a y be used equipped w i t h r e m o t e l y
c o n t r o l l e d release m e c h a n i s m s .
2.3.8
I n the corridor bulkheads ventilation
openings m a y be p e r m i t t e d i n a n d u n d e r the d o o r s o f
cabins a n d p u b l i c spaces. V e n t i l a t i o n o p e n i n g s are
also p e r m i t t e d i n " B " class d o o r s l e a d i n g t o s a n i t a r y
r o o m s , studies, pantries, lockers a n d s t o r e r o o m s .
E x c e p t f o r the p e r m i t t e d b e l o w , openings shall be
provided i n the lower p o r t i o n o f such doors only. I f
s u c h v e n t i l a t i o n o p e n i n g is l o c a t e d i n o r u n d e r the
door, the total net area o f such opening shall
n o t exceed 0,05 m . A l t e r n a t i v e l y , balancing duct
made o f non-combustible material and located below
s a n i t a r y r o o m is a l l o w e d t o be a r r a n g e d b e t w e e n the
cabin a n d the c o r r i d o r i f a n area o f its cross section
does n o t exceed 0,05 m . V e n t i l a t i o n openings except
the ones located u n d e r the d o o r s h a l l be fitted w i t h
grills m a d e o f n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e r i a l .
2
2.3.9 A l l b u l k h e a d s r e q u i r e d t o b e " B " class d i v i

sions w i t h i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces, s h a l l e x t e n d f r o m
deck to deck and to the hull shell or other boundaries.
H o w e v e r , i f the c o n t i n u o u s " B " class ceilings o r l i n i n g s
a r e fitted o n b o t h s i d e s o f t h e b u l k h e a d t h e b u l k h e a d m a y
t e r m i n a t e at t h e c o n t i n u o u s c e i l i n g o r l i n i n g .
2 3 . 1 0 F o r the purpose o f appUcation o f the re
q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.1.1.7, 2.1.1.8 a n d 2.1.1.10 i t is necessary
t o f o l l o w F i g . 2.3.10 a n d Tables 2.3.10-1 a n d 2.3.10-2.
T a b l e 2 . 3 . 1 0 - 1 i s u s e d f o r t h e methodic,
T a b l e 2.3.10-2
i s u s e d f o r t h e methods IIC a n d .
F i g . 2.3.10 S t r u c t u r a l m e m b e r s
402
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
T a b l e
Nos.
Requirements to materials
Structural member
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Moldings
Panels
P a i n t e d surfaces, linings, textiles, films
Decorations
Plinth
Insulation
Surfaces a n d paints i n concealed a n d
inaccessible places
D r a u g h t prevention seals
Furring
Linings
Primary deck covering
Floor covering
Scuttle frame
Scuttle frame surface
Scuttle frame surface i n concealed a n d
inaccessible places
Ceiling panel
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Noncombustibility
(refer t o
2.3.4)
Noncombustibility
(refer t o
2.1.1.5)
Low
flamespread
(refer t o
2.1.1.8)
Total
volume o f
combustible
materials
(refer t o
2.1.1.10.1)
Calorific
value
(refer t o
2.1.1.10)
Ships
2.3.10-1
Smoke and Hardened

toxic
combuvapors
stibility
(refer t o
generation
2.1.1.6)
(refer t o
2.1.1.7)
X
X
X
X
X
x
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
A p p l i e d to paints, varnishes a n d other coatings.

V a p o r b a r r i e r s u s e d f o r c o a t i n g o f t h e c o o l i n g s y s t e m s p i p i n g ( r e f e r t o 2.1.1.5) m a y b e c o m b u s t i b l e , p r o v i d e d t h e y a r e l o w f l a m e spread.
I n corridors a n d stairways enclosures only.
2
T a b l e
Nos.
Requirements to materials
Structural member
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Moldings
Panels
Decorations
Plinth
Insulation
Surfaces a n d paints i n concealed a n d
inaccessible places
D r a u g h t prevention seals
Furring
Linings
Primary deck covering
Floor covering
Scuttle frame
Scuttle frame surface
Scuttle frame surface i n concealed a n d
inaccessible places
Ceiling panel
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Noncombustibility
(refer t o
2.3.4)
Noncombustibility
(refer t o
2.1.1.5)
Low
flamespread
(refer t o
2.1.1.8)
Total
volume o f
combustible
materials
(refer t o
2.1.1.10.1)
Calorific
value
(refer t o
2.1.1.10)
Smoke
generation
(refer t o
2.1.1.7)
2.3.10-2
Hardened
combustibility
(refer t o
2.1.1.6)
x
x
x"
x"
x
x
X
X
X
X
X
^ n l y i n corridors a n d stairways enclosures servicing a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces a n d control stations.

A p p l i e d t o such a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces, w h i c h are b o u n d e d b y non-combustible b u l k h e a d s , ceilings a n d linings.
W h e n c o m b u s t i b l e materials a r e fitted o n n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e b u l k h e a d s , ceilings a n d linings i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces.
"Applied to paints, varnishes a n d other coatings.
' V a p o r b a r r i e r s u s e d f o r c o a t i n g o f t h e c o o l i n g s y s t e m s p i p i n g ( r e f e r t o 2.1.1.5) m a y b e c o m b u s t i b l e , p r o v i d e d t h e y a r e l o w f l a m e - s p r e a d .
I n corridors a n d stairways enclosures only.
2
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
403
2.4 O I L T A N K E R S
2.4.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s C h a p t e r a r e a d
d i t i o n a l t o t h o s e set o u t i n 2 . 1 a n d 2.3 (except
f o r 2 . 3 . 3 ) w h e n o n l y method
1 f i r e p r o t e c t i o n i s
adopted and apply to o i l tankers and combination
carriers o f 500 gross tonnage a n d u p w a r d s .
2.4.2 T h e m i n i m u m f i r e i n t e g r i t y o f b u l k h e a d s
a n d decks s e p a r a t i n g adjacent spaces s h a l l be as
prescribed i n Tables 2.4.2-1 a n d 2.4.2-2 w i t h regard
to the following.
F o r d e t e r m i n i n g t h e appropriate fire integrity
standards t o be appUed t o divisions between adjacent
spaces, t h e spaces a r e classified a c c o r d i n g t o t h e i r fire
r i s k as f o l l o w s :
(1) c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s : s p a c e s
accommodating
w h e e l h o u s e a n d n a v i g a t i o n r o o m ; spaces a c c o m
m o d a t i n g ship r a d i o equipment; fire stations; m a i n
machinery c o n t r o l r o o m i f i t is located outside m a
c h i n e r y space; spaces a c c o m m o d a t i n g centraUzed fire
a l a r m system;
(2) corridors a n d lobbies;
(3) a c c o m m o d a t i o n s p a c e s a s d e f i n e d i n 1 . 5 . 2 ,
except corridors;
(4) s t a i r w a y s :
interior stairways, lifts, totally enclosed emer
gency escape t r u n k s a n d escalators ( o t h e r t h a n those
w h o l l y c o n t a i n e d w i t h i n t h e m a c h i n e r y spaces) a n d
enclosures thereto.
A s t a i r w a y w h i c h is enclosed o n l y a t o n e level
s h a l l be r e g a r d e d as p a r t o f t h e space f r o m w h i c h i t is
separated b y a fire door;
(5) service spaces ( l o w r i s k ) :
s t o r e r o o m s h a v i n g a r e a s less t h a n 4 m a n d n o t
h a v i n g provisions f o r the storage o f f l a m m a b l e U quids, drying rooms, laundries a n d refrigerated pro
vision storerooms insulated with non-combustible
m a t e r i a l s ; spaces a c c o m o d a t i n g electrical d i s t r i b u t i o n
b o a r d s h a v i n g a n a r e a o f less t h a n 4 m ;
(6) m a c h i n e r y spaces o f c a t e g o r y A :
Installations";
m a c h i n e r y spaces e x c l u d i n g spaces referred t o i n
(6) a n d spaces a c c o m m o d a t i n g electrical e q u i p m e n t
( a u t o m a t i c t e l e p h o n e stations, spaces f o r a i r c o n
ditioning ducts);
(8) c a r g o p u m p r o o m s a s d e f i n e d i n 1 . 5 . 7 . 1 ;
( P ) s e r v i c e spaces ( g r e a t e r f i r e r i s k ) : g a U e y s a n d
pantries containing appUances f o r h o t f o o d preparation,
saunas, p a i n t lockers a n d storerooms w i t h a n area
o f 4 m a n d o v e r , spaces f o r storage o f f l a m m a b l e U q u i d s , w o r k s h o p s a n d s i m i l a r spaces, w h i c h a r e n o t p a r t
o f m a c h i n e r y spaces; r e f r i g e r a t e d p r o v i s i o n s t o r e r o o m s
insulated w i t h combustible materials;
2
(10) o p e n d e c k s :
o p e n d e c k spaces a n d enclosed p r o m e n a d e s h a v i n g
n o f i r e risk. T h i s m e a n s t h a t t h e i r f u r n i s h i n g s s h a l l b e
r e s t r i c t e d t o d e c k f u r n i t u r e . I n a d d i t i o n , s u c h spaces
shall be naturaUy ventilated b y p e r m a n e n t openings.
deckhouses);
2.4.3 E x t e r i o r b o u n d a r i e s o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s a n d
deckhouses enclosing accommodation and including a n y
overhanging decks w h i c h support such accommodation,
shall be constructed o f steel a n d be " A - 6 0 " class f o r t h e
w h o l e o f t h e p o r t i o n s w h i c h face t h e cargo area a n d
o n t h e o u t w a r d sides f o r a distance o f 3 m f r o m t h e e n d
b o u n d a r y f a c i n g t h e cargo area.
T h e distance o f 3 m shall be measured h o r i z o n
tally a n d parallel t o the centreUne o f the ship f r o m the
b o u n d a r y facing t h e cargo area at the each deck level.
T h e i n s u l a t i o n above shall be p r o v i d e d u p t o the
underside o f n a v i g a t i o n bridge deck.
L o w e r part o f the navigation bridge facing the
c a r g o a r e a s h a l l be " A - 6 0 " class.
2.4.4 A r r a n g e m e n t o f o p e n i n g s s h a l l m e e t t h e
requirements o f 2.4.4.1 t o 2.4.4.3.
2.4.4.1 E x c e p t a s p e r m i t t e d i n 2 . 4 . 4 . 2 , access d o o r s ,
a i r i n l e t s a n d o p e n i n g s t o a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces, ser
vice spaces, c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s a n d m a c h i n e r y spaces shaU
n o t face t h e c a r g o area. T h e y shaU be l o c a t e d o n t h e
transverse b u l k h e a d n o t facing the cargo area o r o n the
o u t b o a r d side o f t h e s u p e r s t r u c t u r e o r d e c k h o u s e a t t h e
distance o f a t least 4 p e r cent o f t h e ship l e n g t h b u t n o t
less t h a n 3 m f r o m t h e e n d o f t h e s u p e r s t r u c t u r e o r
deckhouse facing t h e cargo area. H o w e v e r , this distance
need n o t exceed 5 m .
Access t o forecastle spaces c o n t a i n i n g sources o f
ignition m a y be permitted t h r o u g h doors facing cargo
area provided the doors are located outside ha
zardous areas (refer t o 19.2, P a r t X I "Electrical
Equipment").
2.4.4.2 T h e R e g i s t e r m a y p e r m i t a c c e s s d o o r s i n
superstructures o r deckhouses o n transverse bulk
h e a d s f a c i n g t h e c a r g o a r e a o r o n side b u l k h e a d s
w i t h i n 5 m (distance specified i n 2.4.4.1), t o cargo
c o n t r o l r o o m s a n d t o s u c h service spaces as p r o v i s i o n
rooms, lockers a n d storerooms, provided they do n o t
give d i r e c t o r i n d i r e c t access t o a n y a n o t h e r space
containing or providing for accommodation, control
s t a t i o n s o r service spaces s u c h as galleys, p a n t r i e s o r
w o r k s h o p s o r s i m i l a r spaces c o n t a i n i n g sources o f
v a p o u r i g n i t i o n . B o u n d a r i e s o f s u c h space s h a l l be o f
" A - 6 0 " class except f o r b o u n d a r y facing t h e cargo
area. W i t h i n t h e limits specified i n 2.4.4.1 i t is a l l o w e d
to f i t bolted plates f o r the r e m o v a l o f machinery.
W h e e l h o u s e doors a n d w i n d o w s m a y be located
w i t h i n t h e U m i t s specified i n 2.4.4.1, so l o n g as t h e y
are designed t o ensure t h a t the wheelhouse c a n be
m a d e r a p i d l y a n d efficiently gas a n d v a p o u r t i g h t .
404
Rules for
the Classification
and Construction
CN
J5.
<
<
<
<
J5
lJ5
, 0)
S i
(
5
CN
of Sea-Going
Ships
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
CN
405
at
H
a
43
9
>
ft
< < <
ft
2
BI
si
CN
>
I
ft
ft
406
Rules
2.4.4.3 T h e R e g i s t e r m a y p e r m i t a c c e s s t o a d e c k
f o a m system r o o m where f o a m tanks and control station
are located w i t h i n t h e distances specified i n 2 . 4 . 4 . 1
provided the requirements o f 2.4.4.2 are fulfilled and the
door is located flush w i t h a bulkhead.
2.4.5 W i n d o w s a n d s i d e s c u t t l e s f a c i n g t h e c a r g o
a r e a a n d l o c a t e d o n t h e sides o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s a n d
deckhouses w i t h i n t h e limits specified i n 2.4.4.1 shall
be o f t h e fixed ( n o n - o p e n i n g ) type. S u c h w i n d o w s
a n d sidescuttles, except w h e e l h o u s e w i n d o w , shall be
o f " A - 6 0 " class.
E x c e p t t h a t " A - 0 " class standard is acceptable f o r
w i n d o w s a n d sidescuttles outside t h e l i m i t specified
in 2.4.4.1.
2.4.6 T h e R e g i s t e r m a y p e r m i t a n a v i g a t i o n p o sition t o be fitted above t h e cargo area where this is
f o r n a v i g a t i o n p u r p o s e s o n l y , a n d i t shall be separated f r o m t h ecargo t a n k deck b y means o fa n open
space w i t h a h e i g h t o f a t least 2 m . T h e fire p r o t e c t i o n
o f such a n a v i g a t i o n p o s i t i o n shall be as required f o r
c o n t r o l stations i n 2.4.2 a n d o t h e r provisions, as
applicable, o f this Part.
W h e r e t h e c o n t r o l station is o n t h e forecastle
deck o r i nt h ef o r w a r d part o f the ship equipped w i t h
a fore cargo gear, a n emergency exit shall be p r o v i d e d
t o e n s u r e safe escape i n case o f f i r e .
2.4.7 M a c h i n e r y s p a c e s s h a l l b e p o s i t i o n e d a f t o f
cargo tanks a n d slop tanks; they shall also be situated
aft o f p u m p r o o m s a n d cofferdams, b u t n o t n e cessarily a f t o f t h e fuel o i l tanks. A n y m a c h i n e r y
space shall be isolated f r o m cargo t a n k s a n d slop
tanks b y cofferdams, p u m p rooms, fuel o i ltanks, o r
ballast tanks.
P u m p r o o m s c o n t a i n i n g p u m p s a n d t h e i r accessories f o r b a l l a s t i n g those spaces s i t u a t e d adjacent t o
cargo tanks a n d slop tanks, a n d p u m p s f o r fuel o i l
transfer m a y be used f o r isolation o f machinery
spaces f r o m c a r g o t a n k s a n d slop t a n k s p r o v i d e d t h a t
such p u m p r o o m s h a v e t h e same safety standard as
that required f o r cargo p u m p rooms. T h e l o w e r
p o r t i o n o ft h e p u m p r o o m b u l k h e a d m a y be recessed
i n t o m a c h i n e r y spaces o f c a t e g o r y A t o a c c o m m o d a t e
p u m p s . T h e d e c k h e a d o f t h e recess m a y b e n o t m o r e
than o n e third o f the m o u l d e d depth above t h e keel.
I n ships o f n o t m o r e t h a n 25000 t deadweight, f o r
r e a s o n s o f access a n d s a t i s f a c t o r y p i p i n g a r r a n g e ments a n d o n agreement w i t h t h e Register, the deck
h e a d o f t h e recess m a y b e a t a level o f u p t o o n e h a l f
o f the m o u l d e d depth above t h e keel.
A cargo t a n k o r a slop t a n k adjoining machinery
spaces b y a c o r n e r s h a l l b e i s o l a t e d t h e r e f r o m b y a
corner cofferdam.
T h e design a n d dimensions o f cofferdams shall
c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 2.7.5.2, P a r t I I " H u l l " .
C o r n e r cofferdams inaccessible f o r inspection
shall be fitted w i t h suitable media.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
N o cargoes o r wastes shall be stowed i n cofferdams.

V o i d space o r ballast w a t e r t a n k p r o t e c t i n g fuel
o i l t a n k as s h o w n i n F i g . 2.4.7, need n o t be c o n sidered as a cargo area e v e n t h o u g h t h e y h a v e a
cruciform contact w i t h t h e cargo o i lt a n k o r slop
t a n k . T h e v o i d space p r o t e c t i n g fuel o i l t a n k is n o t
considered as a c o f f e r d a m required above. V o i d
spaces m a y be l o c a t e d as s h o w n i n F i g . 2 . 4 . 7 e v e n
t h o u g h they have a c r u c i f o r m contact w i t h t h e slop
tank.
2.4.8 P u m p r o o m s s h a l l b e c l o s e d i n b y g a s t i g h t
bulkheads.
P e r m a n e n t a p p r o v e d gastight Ughting enclosures
m a y be installed i n bulkheads a n d decks separating
p u m p r o o m s f r o m o t h e r spaces. T h e s e enclosures a r e
intended for Ughting o f p u m p rooms provided that they
are sufficiently durable a n d t h a t fire integrity a n d gastightness o f the b u l k h e a d o r deck is preserved.
2.4.9 C o n t r o l s t a t i o n s , c a r g o c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s ,
a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces (except f o r i s o lated cargo handUng gear lockers) shall be positioned
aft o f a l l cargo t a n k s , slop t a n k s a n d spaces i s o l a t i n g
c a r g o o r slop t a n k s f r o m m a c h i n e r y spaces, b u t n o t
necessarily a f t o f the fuel o i l tanks a n d ballast tanks,
a n d shall be arranged i n such a w a y t h a t a single
failure t o a deck o r bulkhead shall n o t permit the
entry o f gas o r fumes f r o m t h e cargo tanks i n t o a n y
o f t h e a b o v e spaces. T h e recess p r o v i d e d i n accordance w i t h 2.4.7 m a y be disregarded w h e n det e r m i n i n g t h e l o c a t i o n o f t h e said spaces.
Enclosed s m o k i n g r o o m s shall be provided
w i t h i n t h e a c c o m m o d a t i o n area. T h e s e spaces s h a l l
be f o r m e d b y " B - 1 5 " class d i v i s i o n s , a n d facings shall
be m a d e o f m a t e r i a l s h a v i n g l o w f l a m e spread characteristics.
2.4.10 W h e r e d e e m e d n e c e s s a r y a n d o n a g r e e m e n t
w i t h t h e Register, c o n t r o l stations, cargo c o n t r o l
r o o m s , a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces m a y be
positioned f o r w a r d o fthe cargo tanks, slop tanks a n d
spaces w h i c h i s o l a t e c a r g o t a n k s a n d slop t a n k s f r o m
m a c h i n e r y spaces b u t n o t necessarily f o r w a r d o f fuel
o i l t a n k s o r b a l l a s t t a n k s . M a c h i n e r y spaces o t h e r t h a n
category A m a y be permitted f o r w a r d o f t h e cargo
tanks a n d slop tanks provided they are isolated f r o m
the cargo tanks a n d slop tanks b y cofferdams, p u m p
r o o m s , fuel o i l tanks o r baUast tanks.
A l l o f t h e a b o v e - m e n t i o n e d spaces s h a l l b e subject t o a n equivalent standard o f safety a n d a p p r o priate availabiUty o f fire-fighting
arrangements.
C o n t r o l stations, cargo c o n t r o l r o o m s , accommodat i o n a n d service spaces s h a l l b e a r r a n g e d i n s u c h a
w a y t h a t a single failure o f a deck o r a b u l k h e a d shall
n o t p e r m i t t h e entry o f gas o r fumes f r o m t h e cargo
t a n k s i n t o s u c h spaces. I n a d d i t i o n , w h e r e d e e m e d
necessary f o r t h e safety o f n a v i g a t i o n o f t h e ship,
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
407
Plan
Section
Void or BWT
-c
BWT
<. ic
slop tank
FOT
^_X J
FOT
(aft)/
slop tank (fore)
c o r >.
1_
,
' .
xr
slop

tank
4J- 4J- - V
.-1... - - -.
J L .
. .
J__i
. J C
>.
BWT
^ "-- V
*--^
Vi" ,
vr
_ . _ -
j i : :
Cargo
Void or BWT
sp.
4J- -- .- V
-- r-. -"t -1... r
4J" - j rvj-
L.
FOT
^-^
Machinery
space/
Accommodation
space
Mach.
Area
BWT Ballast water tank

FOT Fuel oil tank
COT Cargo oil tank
F i g . 2.4.7
m a c h i n e r y spaces c o n t a i n i n g i n t e r n a l c o m b u s t i o n
engines n o tbeing m a i n p r o p u l s i o n m a c h i n e r y h a v i n g
o u t p u t greater t h a n 375 k W m a y be located f o r w a r d
o f the cargo area.
P a i n t lockers, regardless o f their use shall n o t be
p o s i t i o n e d a b o v e t h e t a n k s a n d spaces as d e t e r m i n e d
i n 2.4.9.
2.4.11 N o a c c e s s h o l e s t o f u e l o i l t a n k s l o c a t e d i n
the double b o t t o m below cargo tanks are permitted
i n c a r g o t a n k s a n d i n t h e m a c h i n e r y space.
2.4.12 M e a n s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d t o k e e p d e c k
spills a w a y f r o m t h e a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service
spaces. T h i s m a y b e a c c o m p l i s h e d b y p r o v i s i o n o f a
permanent continuous coaming o f a height at
least 3 0 0 m m f r o m side t o side. S i m i l a r m e a s u r e s a n d
arrangements shall be provided f o r stern loading.
2.4.13 M a n h o l e s , o p e n i n g s f o r c l e a n i n g c a r g o
tanks a n d other openings shall n o t be arranged i n
c o m p l e t e l y enclosed o r i n semi-enclosed spaces.
2.4.14 T h e f o l l o w i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s s h a l l b e a l s o
m e t i n c o m b i n a t i o n carriers:
.1 t h e slop t a n k s s h a l l b e s u r r o u n d e d b y coffer
dams, except w h e r e t h e boundaries o f t h e slop tanks
are t h e hull, m a i n cargo deck, cargo p u m p r o o m
b u l k h e a d o r fuel o i l b u n k e r tank. These cofferdams
shall n o t be open t o a double b o t t o m , pipe tunnel,

p u m p r o o m o r o t h e r enclosed space, as w e l l as t h e y
shall n o tbe used f o r carriage o fcargo o r ballast a n d
they need n o t be connected w i t h cargo o r ballast
systems.
M e a n s shall be provided f o r filling t h e coffer
dams with water a n d draining them.
W h e r e the b o u n d a r y o f the slop t a n k is t h e cargo
p u m p r o o m bulkhead, the p u m p r o o m shall n o t be
open t o t h e double b o t t o m , pipe tunnel o r other en
closed space. H o w e v e r , o p e n i n g s p r o v i d e d w i t h gastight bolted covers m a ybe permitted;
.2 h a t c h e s a n d t a n k c l e a n i n g o p e n i n g s t o s l o p
tanks shall be o n l y p e r m i t t e d o n t h e o p e n deck; they
shall be fitted w i t h closing arrangements, except
w h e r e they consist o f bolted plates w i t h bolts a t w a
tertight spacing. C l o s i n g arrangements shall be fitted
w i t h securing devices c o n t r o l l e d b y responsible per
son o u t o f ship officers;
.3 a r r a n g e m e n t o f o p e n i n g s f o r c a r g o h a n d U n g
operations i n decks a n d bulkheads separating t h e
spaces f o r t h e carriage o f o i l a n d o i l p r o d u c t s f r o m
t h e spaces n o t i n t e n d e d o r fitted f o r t h e i r carriage is
permitted only provided equivalent tightness f o r o i l
products a n d their vapours is ensured;
408
Rules
.4 d e t a i l e d i n s t r u c t i o n s s h a l l b e e x h i b i t e d o n
board, covering safety measures t o be t a k e n d u r i n g
loading o r unloading o fthe ship a n dw h e n d r y cargoes
are carried w i t h o i l p r o d u c t residues i n t h e slop tanks.
2.4.15 W h e r e t h e e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l p r o t e c t i o n i s
fitted o n the ship i t shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e following
requirements:
.1 w h e r e t h e e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l p r o t e c t i o n
of
structures o r their elements is fitted, anodes c a n be
made o fzinc, magnesium o r a l u m i n i u m alloys;
.2 m a g n e s i u m a l l o y a n o d e s a n d e l e c t r o c h e m i c a l
protection systems w i t h superimposed current are n o t
permitted i n o i lcargo tanks a n d tanks adjacent t o
t h e m o f ships c a r r y i n g o i l products;
.3 a l u m i n i u m a l l o y a n o d e s a r e o n l y p e r m i t t e d i n
cargo tanks a n d tanks adjacent t o cargo tanks o f
ships c a r r y i n g o i l products i n locations w h e r e t h e
p o t e n t i a l energy does n o t exceed 2 7 5 J. T h eh e i g h t o f
the anode shall be measured f r o m t h e b o t t o m o f t h e
t a n k t o t h e centre o f t h e anode, a n d its weight shall
be t a k e n as t h e w e i g h t o f t h e a n o d e as fitted, i n c l u d i n g t h e fitting devices a n d inserts.
However, where a l u m i n i u m alloy anodes are l o cated o n h o r i z o n t a l surfaces such as b u l k h e a d girders
a n d s t r i n g e r s n o t less t h a n 1 m w i d e a n d f i t t e d w i t h
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
a n u p s t a n d i n g f l a n g e o r face f l a t p r o j e c t i n g n o t less
t h a n 7 5 m m above t h e h o r i z o n t a l surface, t h e height
o f t h e a n o d e m a y be m e a s u r e d f r o m t h e surface.
A l u m i n i u m alloy anodes shall n o t be located
under tank hatches o r openings ( i n order t o avoid
any m e t a l parts falling o n t h e fitted anodes), unless
protected b y adjacent structure;
.4 t h e a n o d e s s h a l l h a v e s t e e l c o v e r s a n d t h e s e
shall be sufficiently rigid t o a v o i d resonance i n the
anode support a n d be designed so that they retain t h e
anode even w h e n i t is wasted. A n o d e s shall be fitted
w i t h d e l i m i t e r s f r o m sides a n d b o t t o m m a d e o f t h e
material w h i c h does n o tspark while contact w i t h the
a n o d e . T h e steel inserts s h a l l b e attached t o t h e
structure b y means o fa continuous weld o f adequate
section, t h e w e l d e l e m e n t s s h a l l b e free o f stress
concentrations. Alternatively they m a ybe attached t o
separate supports b y bolting, provided a m i n i m u m o f
t w o bolts w i t h l o c k n u t s are used.
H o w e v e r , t h e w a y s o f a t t a c h m e n t a r e subject t o
T h e supports a t each e n do fa n anode shall n o t be
attached t o separate items w h i c h are likely t o m o v e
independently.
3 FIRE-FIGHTING EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

3.1
G E N E R A L
3.1.1 G e n e r a l .
3.1.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h i s S e c t i o n a r e a p pUcable t o a l l fire-fighting e q u i p m e n t a n d systems
fitted i n s e a - g o i n g s h i p s f o r t h e p u r p o s e o f fire p r o tection o f the ship concerned.
W h e r e p r o v i s i o n i s m a d e i n a s h i p f o r e x t r a fire
extinguishing systems i n a d d i t i o n t o those prescribed
by this Section, such systems shall also c o m p l y w i t h
the r e q u i r e m e n t s set o u t b e l o w , t o a n extent a p p r o v e d
by t h e Register.
D u r i n g d e s i g n a n d m a n u f a c t u r e o f fire e x t i n guishing systems requirements o f F i r e Safety Systems
C o d e a n d Sections 1 5, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d
Piping" shall be compUed with.
3.1.1.2 F i r e - f i g h t i n g e q u i p m e n t a n d s y s t e m s s h a l l
be so constructed t h a t t h e y w i l l be efficient a n d
readily available f o r o p e r a t i o n u n d e r a l l service c o n ditions (refer t o 2.3.1, P a r t V I I " M a c h i n e r y Installations").
3.1.1.3 C o n t a i n e r s a n d p r e s s u r e v e s s e l s u s e d i n
fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s s h a l l m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
set f o r t h i n 6.4, P a r t X " B o i l e r s , H e a t E x c h a n g e r s a n d
Pressure Vessels".
3.1.1.4 T h e u s e o f a fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m
w h i c h either b y itself o r under expected conditions o f
use gives o f f t o x i c gases i n s u c h q u a n t i t i e s as t o e n danger t h e persons shall n o t be permitted. I t is proh i b i t e d t o i n s t a l l i n s h i p s n e w fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g p l a n t s
utiUzing h a l o n 1 2 1 1 , h a l o n 1301 h a l o n 2402, as w e l l
as p e r f l u o r i d e c a r b o n s .
3.1.2 F i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s .
3.1.2.1 I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e w a t e r fire m a i n s y s t e m
and i n accordance w i t h the purpose f o r w h i c h they
are i n t e n d e d , a l l ship's spaces shall b e p r o t e c t e d b y
o n e o f t h e fixed fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s a c c o r d i n g
to T a b l e 3.1.2.1, unless expressly p r o v i d e d otherwise.
T h e Register m a y consider the use o f other
equivalent systems, ensuring equivalent protection.
F o r m a c h i n e r y spaces o f c a t e g o r y A a n d p u m p
r o o m s s p e c i f i e d i n 1 . 5 . 7 . 1 , e q u i v a l e n t fire e x t i n guishing systems c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e requirements
o f 3.9m a y be used instead o f pressure water-spraying
systems a n d c a r b o n dioxide s m o t h e r i n g systems.
F o r p r o t e c t i o n o f spaces specified i n 1.5.4.3,
1.5.4.4 a n d 1.5.9, t h e R e g i s t e r m a y p e r m i t t h e u s e o f
fixed fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m o t h e r t h a n p r e s c r i b e d
b y T a b l e 3.1.2.1, i f t h e full-scale test i n c o n d i t i o n s
s i m u l a t i n g spilled p e t r o l e u m b u r n i n g i n t h e said space
P a r t VI. F i r e
S3
Protection
409
+ +

i t
S

S
+
ft!
+ + + +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
> tJO
i a
1 s ~
L g - w - 43
ft
$ ft
i g . - s .a
!
s S"g-g
( - t
8 - 3 - 8:
T J ^
> a^"ra
! 5"
fe
-2 1
,..
410
Rules for
the Classification
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
P a r t VI. F i r e
411
Protection
w i l l p r o v e t h a t a l t e r n a t i v e s y s t e m i s n o t less effective
i n fire fighting ( r e f e r t o M S C / C i r c . 9 1 4 ) .
3.1.2.2 C a l c u l a t i o n o f t h e n e c e s s a r y q u a n t i t y o f
the
fire-extinguishing
m e d i u m shall be m a d e f o r each
protected space. T h e m a x i m u m c a l c u l a t i o n values
s h a l l b e t a k e n f o r t h e q u a n t i t y o f s t o r e d fire e x t i n guishing medium.
Fire extinguishing system shall be fitted w i t h
v a l v e s n o r m a l l y c l o s e d f o r t r a n s f e r o f fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m t o t h e a p p r o p r i a t e space.
W h e r e t w o o r m o r e adjacent spaces presenting
d i f f e r e n t d e g r e e s o f fire r i s k a r e n o t s e p a r a t e d b y
gastight o r watertight bulkheads o r decks, o r where
fuel o i l c a n f l o w f r o m o n e space i n t o a n o t h e r a n d t h e
possibility o f such flowing is n o t eliminated structurally, t h e choice o f fire extinguishing m e d i u m a n d ,
consequently, o f a fire extinguishing system shall be
m a d e t o c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t h e fire
p r o t e c t i o n o f t h e s p a c e w h i c h a f f o r d s t h e g r e a t e s t fire
risk, a n d t h e calculation o f t h e necessary quantity o f
fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m a n d t h e r a t e o f a p p U c a t i o n
shall be m a d e o n t h e basis o f t h e t o t a l area o r v o l u m e , respectively, o f a l l spaces t h u s c o m m u n i c a t i n g .
W h e n calculating t h e necessary quantity o f t h e
fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m a n d i t s a p p U c a t i o n r a t e
f o r fixed g a s fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s , t h e a d j a c e n t
spaces w i t h i n d e p e n d e n t v e n t i l a t i o n s y s t e m s n o t sep a r a t e d b y a t least " A - 0 " class d i v i s i o n s shall be
considered as t h e s a m e space.
3.1.2.3 W h e r e a fixed g a s fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m is used, t h e openings t h r o u g h w h i c h a i r m a y
penetrate t o o r gas m a y escape f r o m a protected
space shall be capable o f being closed f r o m outside
the protected space. W a t e r t i g h t a n d gastight d o o r s i n
the b u l k h e a d separating adjacent m a c h i n e r y spaces
m a y be considered as closures o f openings i n such
b u l k h e a d o n l y w h e r e they a r e o f a self-closing type o r
operated r e m o t e l y a n d t h e fire extinction stations,
f r o m w h i c h t h e e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m m a y be discharged, are provided w i t h t h e signalUng o fthe fully
closed doors. I n t h e absence o f such signalUng, t h e
calculation o f t h e required a m o u n t a n d t h e rate o f
discharge o fextinguishing m e d i u m shall be based o n
the requirement o f providing f o r t h e total v o l u m e
(area) o f t h e adjacent spaces.
3.1.2.4 I n m u l t i - d e c k s h i p s , o n e ' t w e e n d e c k i s
considered as separated f r o m another 'tweendeck o r
h o l d b y a gastight deck, provided t h e cargo hatchways, other hatchways a n d openings i n this deck are
closed w i t h w a t e r t i g h t o r gastight steel h a t c h closures
and covers, w h i l e watertight stops are fitted where t h e
deck is pierced i n w a y o f the framing. I n t h e absence
o f such closures a n d stops, t h e spaces shall b e c o n sidered as c o m m u n i c a t i n g , a n d t h e extinguishing
m e d i u m calculation shall be m a d e o n t h e basis o f the
t o t a l v o l u m e o f t h e spaces.
3.1.2.5 W h e r e a s p a c e p r o t e c t e d b y m e a n s o f
carbon dioxide smothering system a n d aerosol
fire
extinguishing system contains a i r reservoirs t h e required quantity o f extinguishing m e d i u m shall be
calculated o n t h e basis o f the designed v o l u m e o f t h e
p r o t e c t e d space p l u s t h e excess o f t h e free v o l u m e o f
the compressed air. I f arrangements are m a d e f o r
discharging t h e compressed a i r outside t h e protected
space, b y m e a n s o f reUef valves a n d fuses p r o v i d e d o n
the a i r reservoirs then a n increase o f t h e quantity o f
carbon dioxide i n the carbon dioxide smothering
systems need n o t be provided a n d t h e v o l u m e o f the
a i r i n t h e a i r r e c e i v e r s i n t h e a e r o s o l fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g
systems w h i l e assessment o f t h e quantity o f t h e
aerosol generating c o m p o u n d m a y be n o t considered
(refer t o 3.11.1.3).
3.1.2.6 I n o r d e r t o p r e v e n t e x c e s s i v e p r e s s u r e i n
s p a c e s p r o t e c t e d b y fire s m o t h e r i n g s y s t e m s , d u e t o
discharge o f e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m , such spaces shall
b e fitted w i t h b r e a t h e r v a l v e s , w h e r e n e c e s s a r y , o r
other available means (e.g. a i r pipes o r ventilation
ducts) shall be used.
3.1.2.7 S p a c e s f o r f u e l o i l u n i t s ( r e f e r t o i t e m 1 8
o f T a b l e 3.1.2.1) enclosed inside engine r o o m s m a y
h a v e e i t h e r a n i n d e p e n d e n t fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m
o r t h e y m a y b e p r o t e c t e d b y t h e fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g
system o f the engine r o o m .
3.1.2.8 W h a t e v e r a fixed fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m
is specified i n T a b l e 3.1.2.1 f o r b o i l e r spaces o f o i l
tankers i n w h i c h crude o i l o r clops are used f o r boilers, p r o v i s i o n shall b e m a d e f o r 1 3 5 1 capacity f o a m
extinguisher i n compUance w i t h 5.1.10 o r a n equival e n t f o a m u n i t b o t h e q u i p p e d w i t h fixed f o a m g e n erators capable o f deUvering f o a m t o t h eboiler fronts
and t o trap under burners, valves a n d connections.
T h i s fire extinguisher (unit) shall be r e m o t e operated
f r o m outside t h e boiler r o o m .
3.1.2.9 T h e s y s t e m s s h a l l b e s o a r r a n g e d a s t o
provide the delivery o f extinguishing m e d i u m t o the
entire space protected, i n c l u d i n g t h e enclosed p o r t i o n s t h e r e o f (e.g. c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s , w o r k s h o p s , etc. i n
m a c h i n e r y spaces).
3.1.2.10 T h e u s e o f s t e a m m a y b e p e r m i t t e d b y
the Register d e p e n d i n g o n t h e p a r t i c u l a r case as a n
a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e d fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m ;
the boiler o r boilers available f o r supplying steam
s h a l l h a v e a n e v a p o r a t i o n o f a t least 1,0 k g o f s t e a m
per h o u r f o reach 0,75 m o f the gross v o l u m e o f t h e
largest space so protected.
3.1.2.11 W h e r e g a s , w h i c h i s a g a s e o u s p r o d u c t o f
o i l f u e l c o m b u s t i o n , i s u s e d a s a fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g
m e d i u m , t h e systems using i t f o r protection o f m a c h i n e r y a n d c a r g o spaces shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e F i r e
Safety Systems Code.
3.1.2.12 L i q u i d c a r g o e s w i t h t h e f l a s h p o i n t
a b o v e 6 0 C o t h e r t h a n o i l p r o d u c t s o r U q u i d c a r g o e s
3
412
Rules
liable t o t h e requirements o f I M O C o d e o n C o n struction a n d E q u i p m e n t o f Ships C a r r y i n g Dangero u s C h e m i c a l s i n B u l k a r e treated as those w i t h l o w

fire r i s k a n d r e q u i r i n g n o fixed f o a m fire extinguishing system.
3.1.2.13 F o r p r o t e c t i o n o f c a r g o s p a c e s f i t t e d
w i t h partially weathertight hatchway covers o n board
containerships (refer t o M S C / C i r c . 1 0 8 7 ) , t h e requirements o f Section 2 o f the above Circular shall
serve as a guide w h e n calculating t h e a m o u n t o f
c a r b o n d i o x i d e i n t h e c a r b o n dioxide fire extinguishing systems. I f t h e clear gaps between h a t c h w a y
covers exceed 5 0 m m , fixed pressure w a t e r - s p r a y i n g
s y s t e m s h a l l b e f i t t e d i n t h e c a r g o spaces.
3.1.2.14 D e e p - f a t c o o k i n g e q u i p m e n t , i n s t a l l e d i n
e n c l o s e d s p a c e s o r o n o p e n d e c k s , s h a l l b e fitted w i t h a n
a u t o m a t i c o r m a n u a l fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m t e s t e d
according t o t h e international standard I S O 1 5 3 7 1 "Fire
Extinguishing Systems forProtection o f Galley Deep-Fat
Cooking Equipment". Controls f o r manual operation
o f t h e fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s h a l l b e c l e a r l y l a b e l e d .
W h e n actuating this system t h e following shall b e provided:
.1 a u t o m a t i c s h u t d o w n o f electrical p o w e r s u p p l y
to t h e deep-fat c o o k i n g equipment;
.2 t h e a l a r m s g i v i n g w a r n i n g o f a c t u a t i o n o f t h i s
system i n a galley where deep f a tc o o k i n g equipment
is fitted.
Deep-fat cooking equipment shall be equipped
with m a i n a n d auxiliary thermostats with individual
failure w a r n i n g systems.
3.1.3 A r r a n g e m e n t a n d e q u i p m e n t o f f i r e e x t i n c tion stations.
3.1.3.1 M e c h a n i c a l e q u i p m e n t , s u c h a s f o a m
m i x e r s , r e s e r v o i r s , c y l i n d e r s o r vessels c o n t a i n i n g
extinguishing m e d i u m o r compressed air, inert gas
generators, o r h i g h expansion f o a m generators, ref r i g e r a t i n g plants, etc., as w e l l as t h e s t a r t i n g c o n t r o l s
o f a l l fire extinguishing systems, except f o rt h e w a t e r
fire m a i n system, shall be arranged as a rule i n fire
e x t i n c t i o n s t a t i o n s o u t s i d e t h e p r o t e c t e d spaces.
Spaces f o r storage o f fire extinguishing m e d i u m l o c a t e d b e l o w d e c k o r h a v i n g n o access f r o m t h e o p e n
deck shall be provided w i t h mechanical ventilation
system i n compliance w i t h 12.9.1, Part V I I I "Systems
and Piping".
T h e storage r o o m s f o r fixed gas fire extinguishing
systems o f fire extinction stations shall be used f o r n o
other purpose.
P u m p s , o t h e r t h a n those servicing t h e fire m a i n ,
required f o r t h e w a t e r supply t o fire extinguishing
systems, their sources o fp o w e r a n d controls shall be
fitted o u t s i d e t h e space o r spaces p r o t e c t e d b y s u c h
systems a n d shall be so arranged as t o prevent failure
o f a n y s y s t e m i n case o f fire i n t h e space o r spaces
protected.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
3.1.3.2 F i r e e x t i n c t i o n s t a t i o n s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h
.1 a n y entrance t o t h e fire e x t i n c t i o n stations shall
be, as a r u l e , f r o m t h e o p e n d e c k a n d s h a l l b e i n d e p e n d e n t o f t h e p r o t e c t e d space. I f t h e s t a t i o n i s l o cated b e l o w deck, i t shall be located n o m o r e t h a n o n e
deck b e l o w t h e o p e n deck a n d shall be directly accessible b y a s t a i r w a y o r l a d d e r f r o m t h e o p e n deck.
T h e m e a n s o f c o n t r o l l i n g t h e fixed fire exting u i s h i n g s y s t e m shall be r e a d i l y accessible a n d shall
be g r o u p e d i n as f e w locations as possible a t p o s i t i o n s
n o t l i k e l y t o b e c u t o f f b y a fire i n t h e p r o t e c t e d space;
.2 s t a t i o n s s h a l l n o t b e a r r a n g e d f o r w a r d o f t h e
collision bulkhead;
.3 b u l k h e a d s a n d d e c k s ( i n c l u d i n g d o o r s a n d o t h e r
means o f closing a n yopening therein), w h i c h f o r m the
boundaries between t h e m a n d adjacent
enclosed
spaces s h a l l b e gastight. S u c h storage r o o m s f o r fire
extinguishing m e d i u m shall be considered as fire
c o n t r o l stations w h e n a p p l y i n g fire i n t e g r i t y tables;
.4 t h e s p a c e s h o u s i n g s t a t i o n s s h a l l b e p r o t e c t e d
by heat insulation a n d shall be fitted w i t h heating, i f
it is essential f o r n o r m a l o p e r a t i o n o fthe station t h a t
positive temperature is maintained therein. T h e
t e m p e r a t u r e i n t h e spaces h o u s i n g c a r b o n d i o x i d e
e x t i n c t i o n s t a t i o n s s h a l l n o t e x c e e d 4 5 C;
.5 a i r t e m p e r a t u r e i n t h e s t a t i o n s h a l l b e c o n trolled b y means o f t h e r m o m e t e r so fitted therein that
its readings are visible b o t h f r o m inside t h e station
and, t h r o u g h a scuttle, f r o m outside t h e station; i n
case o f r e m o t e c o n t r o l o f t e m p e r a t u r e l i m i t t h e scuttle
need n o t be required;
.6 fire e x t i n c t i o n s t a t i o n s f o r c a r g o spaces s h a l l b e
provided w i t h telephone o r other means o f c o m m u nication w i t h t h em a i n fire c o n t r o l station a n d w i t h t h e
m a c h i n e r y space, i f o p e r a t i o n o f t h e fire e x t i n c t i o n
station is dependent o n t h e equipment located i n t h e
m a c h i n e r y space;
.7 e n t r a n c e d o o r s s h a l l b e o p e n e d o u t w a r d s a n d
k e p t p e r m a n e n t l y l o c k e d a n d o n e set o f keys f o r t h e
l o c k s s h a l l b e k e p t i n a closed case w i t h a glazed d o o r
located near the lock;
.8 a l l v a l v e s a n d o t h e r a r r a n g e m e n t s o f t h e stat i o n shall be provided w i t h nameplates identifying
t h e m w i t h t h e spaces w h o s e p r o t e c t i o n is c o n t r o l l e d
by the individual valves o r arrangements. I n addition,
a schematic p l a n o f t h e fire extinguishing system
s h o w i n g t h e c o n t r o l s a n d t h e spaces p r o t e c t e d , as w e l l
as b r i e f i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r s t a r t i n g a n d o p e r a t i n g t h e
system shall be displayed i n a conspicuous position
within the station.
3.1.3.3 F o r l o c k e r s o f a d e c k a r e a o f l e s s
than 4 m , containing combustible materials a n d
substances (refer t o 1.5.3.2.2) w h i c h d o n o t give access t o a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces c a r b o n d i o x i d e p o r table fire extinguisher p r o v i d i n g a m i n i m u m v o l u m e
2
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
o f free gas t o 4 0 p e r c e n t o f t h e gross space v o l u m e ,

m a y be accepted i n lieu o f f i x e d fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g
systems. T h e i n l e t p o r t shall be a r r a n g e d i n a l o c k e r
b u l k h e a d t o a l l o w discharge o f extinguishing m e d i u m
w i t h o u t e n t r y i n t o t h e p r o t e c t e d space. T h i s p o r t a b l e
fire extinguisher shall be s t o w e d adjacent t o the p o r t .
A l t e r n a t i v e l y , a p o r t o r h o s e c o n n e c t i o n m a y be
p r o v i d e d t o facilitate the use o f fire m a i n water.
3.1.3.4 I n passenger ships c o n t r o l s f o r a n y req u i r e d fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m f o r m a c h i n e r y spaces
a n d t h e c o n t r o l s specified i n 2 . 1 . 4 . 1 , 2.1.4.2.3, as w e l l
as i n 1 2 . 2 . 1 1 a n d 13.1.3, P a r t V I I I " S y s t e m s a n d
P i p i n g " shall be located together o r shall be g r o u p e d
i n as f e w places as possible. A safe access t o these
places f r o m the o p e n deck shall be p r o v i d e d .
3.1.3.5 R e q u i r e m e n t s f o r d i s t r i b u t i o n o f fire ext i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m b o t t l e s o f e q u i v a l e n t f i x e d gas
fire extinguishing systems.
Fire extinguishing m e d i u m bottles stored i n a
protected space shall be d i s t r i b u t e d t h r o u g h o u t the
space w i t h bottles o r g r o u p s o f bottles located i n at
least six separate l o c a t i o n s . D u p l i c a t e p o w e r release
lines s h a l l be a r r a n g e d t o release a l l bottles s i m u l t a n e o u s l y . T h e release lines s h a l l be so a r r a n g e d t h a t i n
t h e e v e n t o f d a m a g e t o a n y p o w e r release Une, five
s i x t h o f the fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g gas c a n still be discharged. T h e b o t t l e valves are considered t o be p a r t
o f t h e release Unes a n d a single f a i l u r e s h a l l i n c l u d e
also failure o f the bottle valve.
F o r s y s t e m s t h a t n e e d less t h a n s i x c y U n d e r s
(using the smallest bottles available), the total
a m o u n t o f e x t i n g u i s h i n g gas o n t h e b o t t l e s s h a l l be
such t h a t i n the event o f a single failure t o one o f the
release Unes ( i n c l u d i n g b o t t l e v a l v e ) , five s i x t h o f the
fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g gas c a n still be d i s c h a r g e d . T h i s
m a y be achieved b y f o r instance u s i n g m o r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g gas t h a n r e q u i r e d so t h a t i f o n e b o t t l e is n o t
discharging due t o a single fault, the r e m a i n i n g bottles w i l l discharge the m i n i m u m five s i x t h o f t h e req u i r e d a m o u n t o f gas. T h i s c a n be a c h i e v e d w i t h
m i n i m u m t w o bottles. H o w e v e r , N O A E L values
calculated at the highest expected engine r o o m t e m p e r a t u r e are n o t t o be exceeded w h e n d i s c h a r g i n g t h e
t o t a l a m o u n t o f e x t i n g u i s h i n g gas s i m u l t a n e o u s l y .
Systems that can n o t c o m p l y w i t h the above, for
instance systems using o n l y one bottle located inside
t h e p r o t e c t e d space, c a n n o t be accepted. S u c h systems shall be designed w i t h the bottle(s) located
o u t s i d e the p r o t e c t e d space, i n a dedicated r o o m i n
c o m p U a n c e w i t h 3.1.3.2.
3.1.3.6 F i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m p r o t e c t i n g the
cargo h o l d s m a y be stored i n a r o o m located
f o r w a r d the cargo holds, but aft o f the colUsion
bulkhead, provided that b o t h the local m a n u a l release m e c h a n i s m a n d r e m o t e c o n t r o l ( s ) f o r the release
o f the m e d i a are f i t t e d , a n d t h e l a t t e r is o f r o b u s t
413
c o n s t r u c t i o n o r so p r o t e c t e d as t o r e m a i n o p e r a b l e i n
case o f fire i n t h e p r o t e c t e d spaces. T h e r e m o t e c o n trols shall be placed i n the a c c o m m o d a t i o n area i n
order t o faciUtate their ready accessibility b y the
crew. T h e c a p a b i U t y t o release d i f f e r e n t q u a n t i t i e s o f
fire extinguishing m e d i u m i n t o different cargo holds
so p r o t e c t e d s h a l l be i n c l u d e d i n t h e r e m o t e release
arrangement.
3.1.4 Pipes and fittings.
3 . 1 . 4 . 1 P i p e s s h a l l be so l a i d as t o c o m p l y w i t h t h e
.1 the necessary pipes f o r c o n v e y i n g fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m i n t o t h e p r o t e c t e d spaces shall be
p r o v i d e d w i t h c o n t r o l v a l v e s so m a r k e d as t o i n d i c a t e
clearly t h e spaces t o w h i c h the pipes are led. S u i t a b l e
p r o v i s i o n s shall be m a d e t o p r e v e n t i n a d v e r t e n t release o f the m e d i u m i n t o t h e space.
This requirement does n o t apply to the f o a m
extinguishing systems intended t o deliver f o a m f r o m
outside the cargo tanks by means o f m o n i t o r s and
portable a i r - f o a m nozzles o r f o a m generators producing average expansion f o a m ;
.2 w h e r e a c a r g o space f i t t e d w i t h a gas fire ext i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m is u s e d as a p a s s e n g e r space, t h e
gas c o n n e c t i o n s h a l l be b l a n k e d d u r i n g s u c h use;
.3 l a y i n g t h e p i p e s o f f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s
t h r o u g h spaces c o n t a i n i n g fuel o i l a n d l u b r i c a t i n g o i l
s h a l l n o t be p e r m i t t e d .
Pipes o f fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g systems, shall n o t be
l a i d t h r o u g h r e f r i g e r a t e d spaces;
.4 gas fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g systems m a y pass
t h r o u g h a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces, p r o v i d e d t h e y h a v e
s u f f i c i e n t w a l l t h i c k n e s s , a n d t h e i r gas t i g h t n e s s a f t e r
i n s t a l l a t i o n o n b o a r d a ship is tested b y test pressure
o f n o t less, t h a n 5 N / m m . B e s i d e s , p i p e U n e s r u n n i n g
t h r o u g h the a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces shall be c o n nected by welding o n l y a n d shall n o t have condensate
drainage openings or other openings w i t h i n such
spaces;
.5 a l l f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s s h a l l be so designed as t o p e r m i t p e r i o d i c a l c h e c k s i n o p e r a t i o n .
Systems fitted w i t h pipes a n d nozzles f o r supply
o f fire extinguishing m e d i u m shall have arrangements for checking t h e m i n operation using compressed air.
A n o n - r e t u r n s h u t - o f f v a l v e shall be f i t t e d o n the
pipeUne supplying compressed air to the m a n i f o l d o f
the fire smothering station;
.6 gaskets a n d flexible j o i n t s used i n fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g systems shall be m a d e o f n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e
m a t e r i a l s resistant t o the effect o f the e x t i n g u i s h i n g
medium, and marine environment;
.7 i n p i p i n g sections w h e r e v a l v e a r r a n g e m e n t s
introduce sections o f closed piping, such sections
shall be f i t t e d w i t h a pressure relief v a l v e a n d the
o u t l e t o f the v a l v e shall be led t o o p e n deck.
2
414
Rules
3.1.4.2 P i p e s s h a l l b e m a d e o f s t e e l .
Copper, copper-and-nickel o r bimetallic pipes
( o n e o f t h e layers b e i n g steel o r c o p p e r ) m a y b e used
as e q u i v a l e n t t o steel pipes.
C a r b o n steel pipes s h a l l h a v e a n t i - c o r r o s i v e
coating b o t h inside a n d outside.
The fittings o f fire extinguishing systems, including sprinklers a n d sprayers, shall be m a d e o f materials
resistant t o t h e fire extinguishing m e d i u m a n d t o
m a r i n e environment. Nozzles a n d sprinklers shall be
o f type a p p r o v e d b y t h e Register a n d tested i n c o m pUance w i t h appUcable provisions o f M S C / C i r c . 6 6 8
and MSC/Circ.728 o r the I M O resolution A.800(19)
considering amendments introduced b y I M O resolutions M S C . 2 6 5 ( 8 4 ) / C o r r . l a n d M C S . 2 8 4 ( 8 6 ) , as appUcable.
3.1.5 S t a r t i n g o f s y s t e m s .
3.1.5.1 A s y s t e m s h a l l b e p u t i n t o o p e r a t i o n
w i t h o u t a n y s u p p l e m e n t a r y change-over a t t h e station a n d shall operate quickly a n d efficiently under
all service c o n d i t i o n s , i n c l u d i n g those w h e n t h e t e m perature is b e l o w zero a n d d u r i n g a fire.
The m e a n s o f c o n t r o l o f a n y fixed gas fire ext i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s h a l l b e r e a d i l y accessible, s i m p l e
to operate a n d shall be grouped together i n as f e w
l o c a t i o n s as possible a t p o s i t i o n s n o t U k e l y t o be c u t
o f f b y a fire i n a p r o t e c t e d space.
A t each l o c a t i o n there shall be clear instructions
relating t o the operation o fthe system having regard
to t h e safety o f personnel.
3.1.5.2 T h e p o s s i b i U t y o f s p o n t a n e o u s s t a r t i n g o f
a fire extinguishing system shall be excluded u n d e r
a n y service c o n d i t i o n s , i n c l u d i n g t h e effect o f such
factors as pitching a n d rolUng, shaking a n d v i b r a t i o n .
3.1.5.3 R e l e a s e m e c h a n i s m s s h a l l b e s o a r r a n g e d ,
a n d i f n e c e s s a r y s o p r o t e c t e d , t h a t a free access t o t h e m
is p r o v i d e d a n d t h e i r m e c h a n i c a l d a m a g e i s p r e c l u d e d .
3.1.5.4 A r r a n g e m e n t s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d f o r t h e
a t t a c h m e n t o f seals t o t h e s t a r t i n g devices o f t h e
system.
3.1.5.5 I r r e s p e c t i v e o f r e m o t e c o n t r o l p r o v i s i o n
the system shall be capable o fbeing m a n u a l l y started
directly a t the fire e x t i n c t i o n station, a n d t h ep u m p
at t h e place o f its location.
3.1.5.6 R e m o t e c o n t r o l s y s t e m ( b y a i r , n i t r o g e n ,
carbon dioxide, etc.) shall be provided w i t h t w o cyUnders, gas q u a n t i t y i n each o f t h e m being sufficient
for a single start.
3.1.5.7 W h e r e p r o v i s i o n i s m a d e f o r m e c h a n i c a l
devices i n t h e r e m o t e starting system, t h e i r valves
shall be controlled w i t h the help o f h a n d wheel o r
levers t o be positively connected t o t h e valve stems o r
spindles.
3.1.5.8 A u t o m a t i c d i s c h a r g e o f f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g
m e d i u m is n o t p e r m i t t e d except f o r cases s t i p u l a t e d
b y 3.3, 3.6.3 a n d 3.11.2.7.
and Construction
3.2 W A T E R F I R E M A E S
of Sea-Going
Ships
S Y S T E M
3.2.1 N u m b e r a n d c a p a c i t y o f f i r e p u m p s .
3.2.1.1 I n s h i p s p r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e f o r
p u m p s , fire m a i n s , h y d r a n t s a n d hoses c o m p l y i n g as
applicable w i t h t h e requirements o f this Chapter.
The n u m b e r o f fixed independently d r i v e n fire
p u m p s a n d t h e m i n i m u m pressure a t all hydrants a t
water deUvery t h r o u g h a n y adjacent hydrants b y t w o
p u m p s s i m u l t a n e o u s l y o f t h e q u a n t i t y o f w a t e r spec i f i e d i n 3 . 2 . 5 . 1 s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h o s e s p e c i f i e d
in Table 3.2.1.1, t h e length o f hoses c o m p l y i n g w i t h
the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 5.1.4, a n d t h e n o z z l e o u t l e t diameters c o m p l y i n g w i t h 5.1.5.
T a b l e
Passenger ships
Gross tonnage
U n d e r 500
500 t o 1000
1000 t o 4 0 0 0
4000 t o 6000
6000 a n d
upwards
3.2.1.1
Other ships
Number
of pumps
Minimum
pressure a t
hydrants,
in M P a
Number
of p u m p s
Minimum
pressure at
hydrants,
in M P a
2
2
2
3
3
0,30
0,30
0,30
0,40
0,40
1
2
2
2
2
0,20
0,25
0,25
0,25
0,27
N o t e s : 1. T h e n u m b e r o f p u m p s i n d i c a t e d a b o v e d o e s n o t
include the e m e r g e n c y fire p u m p , i f fitted.
2. T h e m a x i m u m p r e s s u r e a t a n y h y d r a n t s h a l l n o t e x c e e d
pressure, a t w h i c h t h e effective c o n t r o l o f a fire h o s e c a n b e
demonstrated.
F o r ships o f restricted areas o fn a v i g a t i o n , w h i c h

are n o t engaged i n i n t e r n a t i o n a l voyages (except f o r
passenger ships) a n d have a gross tonnage u n der 2000, t h e r e q u i r e m e n t o f T a b l e 3.2.1.1 concerning
the n u m b e r o f p u m p s m a y be w a i v e d subject t o a
special agreement w i t h t h e Register.
O n f l o a t i n g cranes w i t h a gross tonnage u n der 2000, o n e fire p u m p m a y be installed.
The pressure developed b y t h e fire p u m p s shall be
sufficent t o ensure t h e o p e r a t i o n o f other fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g systems u s i n g w a t e r (e.g., f o r pressure w a t e r
s p r a y i n g , f r o t h e x t i n g u i s h i n g , etc.) a n d supplied f r o m
the same fire p u m p s .
3.2.1.2 P a s s e n g e r s h i p s o f l e s s t h a n 1 0 0 0 g r o s s
tonnage a n d cargo ships o f 2 0 0 0 gross tonnage a n d o v e r
s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a n e m e r g e n c y fire p u m p o f a
capacity n o t less t h a n 2 5 m / h a n d cargo ships o f less
t h a n 2 0 0 0 gross tonnage shall b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a n
e m e r g e n c y fire p u m p o f a c a p a c i t y n o t l e s s t h a n 1 5 m / h
i n d e p e n d e n t l y d r i v e n , i f fire i n a n y s i n g l e c o m p a r t m e n t
m a y r e n d e r a l l m a i n fire p u m p s o r t h e i r s o u r c e s o f p o w e r
inoperable. Source o f p o w e r a n d sea connection shall be
l o c a t e d o u t s i d e s p a c e s i n w h i c h t h e m a i n fire p u m p s o r
their sources o f p o w e r are installed (refer also t o 3.2.4.2
and 3.2.5.7).
3
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
415
m = l f i % ^ L { B + D + 2S);
L = l e n g t h o f t h e s h i p ( r e f e r t o 1.1.3, P a r t " H u l l " ) , i n m ,
excluding the length o fthe spoil hopper, if n o tanks a n d
other storages f o r combustible materials a r e installed
therein, i n h o p p e r dredgers a n d h o p p e r barges;
= moulded breadth, i n m ;
D = depth t o t h eb u l k h e a d deck amidships, i n m ;
= coefficient equal to:
0,016 f o r p a s s e n g e r s h i p s h a v i n g s u b d i v i s i o n i n d e x R e q u a l
t o , o r m o r e t h a n , 0,5;
0,012 f o r p a s s e n g e r s h i p s h a v i n g s u b d i v i s i o n i n d e x R l e s s
t h a n 0,5;
0,008 f o r a l l o t h e r s h i p s ;
R = s u b d i v i s i o n i n d e x d e t e r m i n e d i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 2.3,
Part V "Subdivision".
largest cargo ship w h i c h t h e d o c k c a n carry, f o r t h e

o p e r a t i o n o f t h e w a t e r fire m a i n system.
O n non-self-contained floating docks receiving
w a t e r f o r t h e w a t e r fire m a i n system f r o m t h e shore
the emergency fire p u m p need n o t be installed.
3.2.1.9 E a c h fixed fire p u m p e x c e p t o f e m e r g e n c y
shall be capable o fsupplying a t least t w o jets o f w a t e r
required b y 3.2.6.2.
3.2.1.10 T h e c a p a c i t y o f e a c h fixed p u m p , o t h e r
t h a n a n e m e r g e n c y p u m p , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
80 p e r c e n t o f t h e t o t a l r e q u i r e d c a p a c i t y d i v i d e d b y
t h e r e q u i r e d n u m b e r o f fire p u m p s , b u t i n a n y c a s e
n o t less t h a n 2 5 m / h .
I f t h e n u m b e r o f fire p u m p s e x c e e d s t h e r e q u i r e d
n u m b e r , t h e feed o f t h e a d d i t i o n a l p u m p s shall be a t
least 2 5 m / h a n d i t shall be sufficient t o s u p p o r t a t
least t w o nozzles i n accordance w i t h 3.2.6.2.
3.2.1.11 I f o t h e r fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s u s i n g
w a t e r s u p p l i e d b y f i x e d fire p u m p s a r e p r o v i d e d i n
ships, t h e capacity o f these p u m p s shall be sufficient
f o r t h e o p e r a t i o n o f t h e w a t e r fire m a i n s y s t e m h a v
i n g t h e c a p a c i t y n o t less t h a n 5 0 p e r c e n t d e t e r m i n e d
by F o r m u l a (3.2.1.5) a n d f o r parallel operation o f
one o f t h e other systems requiring t h e largest q u a n
t i t y o f w a t e r . I n t h e case c o n c e r n e d t h e q u a n t i t y o f
w a t e r f o r t h e w a t e r fire m a i n system shall be suffi
cient f o r d e l i v e r i n g a t least t w o jets o f w a t e r t h r o u g h
the largest nozzles used i n t h e ships, b u t m o r e t h a n
six j e t s a n d m o r e t h a n 9 0 m / h f o r c a r g o s h i p s a r e n o t
required. Possible increase o f w a t e r
discharge
t h r o u g h each h y d r a n t d u e t o t h e pressure rise i n t h e
p i p e s r e q u i r e d f o r t h e o p e r a t i o n o f t h e o t h e r fire e x
tinguishing systems shall be t a k e n into consideration.
I n a l l cases f o r passenger ships a n d cargo ships o f

m o r e t h a n 5 0 0 gross tonnage t h e required fire p u m p s
shall provide the following water supply f o r
fire-fighting
purposes at t h e pressure specified i n Table 3.2.1.1:
.1 i n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s - n o t less t h a n t w o t h i r d s o f
the q u a n t i t y sucked f r o m t h e holds b y bilge pumps;
.2 i n c a r g o s h i p s - n o t l e s s t h a n f o u r t h i r d s o f t h e
q u a n t i t y s u c k e d f r o m t h e h o l d s o f t h e s a m e size
passenger ship b y each independent bilge p u m p ac
cording t o the requirements o f 7.1, Part V I I I "Sys
tems a n d Piping".
3.2.1.6 F o r c a t a m a r a n s a n d s i m i l a r s h i p s , t h e
t o t a l capacity o f fire p u m p s shall be d e t e r m i n e d as
twice t h e capacity value f o ro n e hull.
3.2.1.7 I n a l l s h i p s o t h e r t h a n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s t h e
t o t a l capacity o f fire p u m p s need n o t exceed 1 8 0 m / h ,
unless a larger capacity is required i n order t o ensure
the simultaneous operation o f other systems using
water.
3.2.1.8 T h e c a p a c i t y , p r e s s u r e h e a d a n d n u m b e r
o f fire p u m p s f o r f l o a t i n g docks shall be chosen i n
accordance w i t h the quantity o f water required b y the
T h e q u a n t i t y o f w a t e r f o r fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s
t e m s , o t h e r t h a n f o r t h e w a t e r fire m a i n s y s t e m , s h a l l
be d e t e r m i n e d i naccordance w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s i n
3.3.2.2, 3.4.2, 3.5.2 ( w i t h i n o n e m a i n vertical zone),
3.6.5 a n d 3.7.
3.2.2 L o c a t i o n o f f i r e p u m p s .
3.2.2.1 I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s o f 1 0 0 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e
a n d u p w a r d s , s e a v a l v e s , fire p u m p s a n d a s s o c i a t e d
sources o fp o w e r shall be so located as t o ensure t h a t
a fire i n a n y o n e c o m p a r t m e n t w i l l n o t r e n d e r a l l
pumps simultaneously inoperative.
3.2.2.2 I n c a t a m a r a n s a n d s i m i l a r s h i p s , f o r
w h i c h n o t less t h a n t w o p u m p s a r e r e q u i r e d i n c o m
pUance w i t h T a b l e 3.2.1.1, i t is recommended that
one p u m p be fitted i n each hull.
I n t h i s case, w a t e r s u p p l y b y each p u m p t o t h e
w a t e r fire m a i n o f a n y h u l l o f t h e s h i p s h a l l b e e n
sured.
3.2.3 B a s i c r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r f i r e p u m p s .
3.2.3.1 I n a l l s e l f - p r o p e l l e d s h i p s , fixed fire p u m p s
shall have a n independent p o w e r source.
I n cargo ships between 500 a n d 1000 gross tonnage,
one o f the pumps shall have a n independent drive.
3.2.1.3 E m e r g e n c y f i r e p u m p , i f f i t t e d , s h a l l m e e t
the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.2.4.
3.2.1.4 I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f 3 . 2 . 1 . 2 i n
p a s s e n g e r s h i p s o f less t h a n 1 0 0 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e a n d
i n cargo ships t h e emergency fire p u m p shall be also
f i t t e d i n t h e f o l l o w i n g cases:
.1 t h e t w o m a i n f i r e p u m p s , t h e i r s e a s u c t i o n s a n d
the fuel supply o r source o fp o w e r f o reach p u m p are
situated w i t h i n c o m p a r t m e n t s separated a t least b y
" A - 0 " class d i v i s i o n s , so t h a t a fire i n a n y o n e c o m
p a r t m e n t w i l l n o trender b o t h fire p u m p s inoperable;
.2 o n e m a i n f i r e p u m p s i s l o c a t e d i n a c o m p a r t
m e n t having m o r e t h a n o n e bulkhead o r deck ad
jacent t o thecompartment containing the other m a i n
fire p u m p .
3.2.1.5 T h e t o t a l c a p a c i t y o f f i x e d f i r e p u m p s ,
except f o r a n emergency p u m p , i f a n y , w i t h t h e
p r e s s u r e a t a n y h y d r a n t n o t less t h a n t h a t s p e c i f i e d i n
T a b l e 3.2.1.1, shall ensure discharge o fw a t e r f o r fire
f i g h t i n g i n a q u a n t i t y , i n m / h , n o t less t h a n
3
Q =km
where
(3.2.1.5)
416
Rules
I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s o f less t h a n 1 5 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e
w i t h them a i n propulsion machinery o f power output
less t h a n 2 2 0 k W , t h e p u m p s d r i v e n b y t h e m a i n
engine m a y be used provided that t h epropulsion unit
(engine-shaft-propeller) is so designed as t o p e r m i t o f
fire p u m p o p e r a t i o n w h e n t h e ship is n o tu n d e r w a y .
3.2.3.2 F i x e d f i r e p u m p s i n c l u d i n g a n e m e r g e n c y
p u m p m a y be used f o r o t h e r s h i p b o a r d services, i f the
ship is p r o v i d e d w i t h a t least t w o i n d e p e n d e n t l y driven pumps, o n e o fwhich is at all times kept readily
available f o rits direct purpose.
W h e r e i n c o n f o r m i t y w i t h T a b l e 3.2.1.1 o n l y o n e
fire p u m p is fitted, i t m a y be used f o r o t h e r purposes
requiring short-time consumption o fwater (flushing
o u t o f decks, h a w s e pipes etc.).
A fire p u m p m a y be used f o r emergency drainage
o f m a c h i n e r y spaces.
3.2.3.3 I n c a r g o s h i p s w h e r e o t h e r p u m p s , s u c h a s
g e n e r a l service, b i l g e , ballast, a n d etc., a r e f i t t e d i n a
m a c h i n e r y space, p r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e t o ensure
t h a t a t least o n e o f these p u m p s , h a v i n g t h e capacity
a n d pressure required b y 3.2.1.11 a n dT a b l e 3.2.1.1, is
capable t o supply w a t e r t o t h e fire m a i n . H o w e v e r , i f
the ship is equipped w i t h t h e required n u m b e r o f fire
p u m p s o f necessary capacity a n d pressure, t h e n i t is
sufficient t o h a v e a c o n n e c t i o n o f t h e general service
p u m p w i t h w a t e r fire m a i n system. S u c h p u m p s shall
m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.2.3.2 a n d 3.2.3.4.
3.2.3.4 P u m p s a n d p i p i n g i n t e n d e d f o r f i r e fighting purposes shall n o t be used f o r t h e p u m p i n g
o f o i l a n d o t h e r f l a m m a b l e Uquids, n o r as ballast
p u m p s for tanks used for alternate carriage o f fuel o i l
a n d w a t e r ballast.
3.2.3.5 F i r e p u m p s s h a l l b e f i t t e d w i t h a p r e s s u r e
g a u g e o n t h e discharge side.
P u m p s capable o f developing i n t h e fire m a i n
hydrants a n d hoses a pressure exceeding t h e permissible v a l u e s h a l l be p r o v i d e d w i t h reUef valves set t o
operate a t a pressure n o t m o r e t h a n 10 p e r cent i n
excess o f t h e fire m a i n w o r k i n g pressure, a n d h a v i n g
the pipes t o discharge w a t e r i n t o t h e suction m a i n .
L o c a t i o n a n d adjustment o f these valves shall prevent
excessive pressure i n a n y p a r t o f t h e fire m a i n .
3.2.3.6 F i x e d f i r e p u m p s a n d t h e i r s e a v a l v e s s h a U
be located b e l o w the U g h t - d r a u g h t w a t e r U n e o f the ship.
A fixed emergency p u m p shall be installed i n
c o m p U a n c e w i t h 3.2.4.
F i r e p u m p s i n s t a l l e d o u t s i d e m a c h i n e r y spaces o f
c a t e g o r y A s h a l l h a v e a n i n d e p e n d e n t sea v a l v e i n
each c o m p a r t m e n t i n w h i c h they are located.
I n t h e case o f ice ships, a t least o n e o f t h e p u m p s
shall be connected w i t h t h e heated ice b o x (refer
to 4.3.1.2, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n dPiping").
3.2.3.7 A l l p u m p s , i n c l u d i n g t h e e m e r g e n c y
p u m p , s h a l l b e placed i n spaces w i t h p o s i t i v e t e m perature.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
3.2.3.8 O n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s o f 1 0 0 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e
a n d over a n d o n a l l passenger ships w i t h periodically
u n a t t e n d e d m a c h i n e r y spaces c o n t a i n i n g fire p u m p s ,
t h e w a t e r fire m a i n s y s t e m s h a l l c o n s t a n t l y b e u n d e r
pressure p r o v i d i n g i m m e d i a t e t h e supply o f a t least
o n e e f f e c t i v e w a t e r j e t f r o m a n y o f fire h y d r a n t s a n d
a u t o m a t i c start o f o n e o f the required fire p u m p s a t a
d r o p o f pressure.
O n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s o f less t h a n 1 0 0 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e , t h e w a t e r fire m a i n s y s t e m s h a l l e n a b l e t h e
a u t o m a t i c a n d r e m o t e s t a r t - u p o f a t l e a s t o n e fire
p u m p f r o m t h e n a v i g a t i o n bridge. I f the p u m p starts
automatically o r i f the b o t t o m valve c a n n o t be
opened f r o m location where t h e p u m p is remotely
started, t h e b o t t o m valve shall always be kept open.
3.2.3.9 I n c a r g o s h i p s w i t h a p e r i o d i c a l l y u n a t t e n d e d m a c h i n e r y space c o n t a i n i n g fire p u m p s o r
w h e n only oneperson is required o n watch provision
shall be made f o rremote starting o fone o fthe m a i n
fire p u m p s f r o m t h e n a v i g a t i o n b r i d g e a n d f r o m fire
station i favailable a n dfor immediate water supply i n
t h e fire m a i n w i t h o u t a d d i t i o n a l o p e n i n g o f t h e v a l v e s
in the p u m p r o o m . A t the location o f such arrangem e n t a w a t e r pressure indicator shall be installed.
W h e r e w a t e r fire m a i n system is u n d e r pressure
as r e q u i r e d i n 3 . 2 . 3 . 8 , r e m o t e s t a r t i n g n e e d n o t b e
provided.
O n t h e s h i p s o f less t h a n 1 6 0 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e ,
fulfilment o f this requirement m a y n o t be provided, i f
s t a r t i n g a r r a n g e m e n t o f t h e fire p u m p i n m a c h i n e r y
space is easily accessible.
3.2.4 F i x e d e m e r g e n c y f i r e p u m p .
3.2.4.1 T h e e m e r g e n c y p u m p s h a l l b e d r i v e n b y a
diesel engine o r a n electric m o t o r supplied w i t h p o w e r
f r o m t h e emergency source o f power.
3.2.4.2 T h e p u m p , i t s s o u r c e s o f p o w e r a n d s e a
valves shall be so located as n o t t o be rendered i n o p e r a t i v e b y a fire w i t h i n t h e spaces w h e r e t h e m a i n
fire p u m p s a r e l o c a t e d .
T h e e m e r g e n c y fire p u m p , i t s s e a w a t e r i n l e t , a n d
suction a n d deUvery pipes a n d isolating valves shall
be l o c a t e d o u t s i d e t h e m a c h i n e r y space. I f t h i s a r r a n g e m e n t c a n n o t be m a d e , t h e sea chest m a y be
fitted i n t h e m a c h i n e r y s p a c e i f t h e s e a i n l e t v a l v e i s
remotely controlled f r o m a position i n the same
c o m p a r t m e n t a s t h e e m e r g e n c y fire p u m p a n d t h e
suction pipe is as short as practicable. S h o r t lengths
o f suction o r discharge p i p i n g m a y penetrate t h e m a c h i n e r y s p a c e o r c o m p a r t m e n t s w h e r e m a i n fire p u m p s
are installed, p r o v i d e d t h e y are enclosed i n a substantial
steel casing, o r are i n s u l a t e d t o " A - 6 0 " class standards.
T h e pipes shall have substantial w a l l thickness, b u t i n n o
case less t h a n 1 1 m m , a n d s h a l l b e w e l d e d e x c e p t f o r t h e
flanged c o n n e c t i o n t o t h e s e a i n l e t v a l v e .
Location o f the p u m p a n d its drive shall allow
free access t o t h e m f o r m a i n t e n a n c e a n d r e p a i r .
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
3.2.4.3 W h e r e t h e p u m p i s l o c a t e d a b o v e t h e
lowest possible waterline, efficient arrangements shall
be m a d e f o r s e l f - p r i m i n g .
U n d e r all conditions o f heel, trim, pitch a n d roll,
likely t o be e n c o u n t e r e d i n t h e ship service, t h e t o t a l
suction head a n d the net positive suction head shall
p r o v i d e t h e fulfilment o f t h e r e q u i r e m e n t o f 3.2.4.6.
The design c o n d i t i o n s f o r fulfilment o f these r e quirements are defined i n MSC.l/Circ.1388.
3.2.4.4 T h e s p a c e c o n t a i n i n g t h e e m e r g e n c y f i r e
p u m p shall n o t be contiguous t o the boundaries o f
m a c h i n e r y spaces o f c a t e g o r y A o r those spaces
c o n t a i n i n g m a i n fire p u m p s . W h e r e this is n o t practicable, t h e c o m m o n b u l k h e a d between t h e t w o
spaces shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f
Table 2.3.3-1 f o rc o n t r o l stations.
W h e n a single access t o t h e e m e r g e n c y fire p u m p
r o o m is t h r o u g h a n o t h e r space a d j o i n i n g a m a c h i n e r y
space o f c a t e g o r y A o r t h e spaces c o n t a i n i n g t h e m a i n
fire p u m p s , " A - 6 0 " class b o u n d a r y is r e q u i r e d b e t w e e n
t h a t o t h e r space a n d t h e m a c h i n e r y space o f categ o r y A o r t h e spaces c o n t a i n i n g t h e m a i n fire p u m p s .
N o d i r e c t access s h a l l b e p e r m i t t e d b e t w e e n t h e
m a c h i n e r y space a n d t h e space c o n t a i n i n g t h e emergency fire p u m p a n d its source o f p o w e r . W h e n this is
impracticable, a n arrangement m a y be accepted
w h e r e t h e access i s b y m e a n s o f a n a i r - l o c k w h e r e t h e
d o o r t o t h e m a c h i n e r y space shall be m a d e
to " A - 6 0 " class a n d t h e second d o o r s h a l l b e m a d e a t
least o f steel, each o f the d o o r s b e i n g self-closing a n d
gastight, o r t h r o u g h a watertight d o o r capable o f
being o p e r a t e d f r o m a space r e m o t e f r o m t h e m a c h i n e r y space a n d t h e space c o n t a i n i n g t h e emergency
fire p u m p a n d u n l i k e l y t o be c u t o f f i n t h e event o f
fire i n t h o s e spaces. I n s u c h cases a second m e a n s o f
access t o t h e space c o n t a i n i n g t h e e m e r g e n c y fire
p u m p a n d its source o f p o w e r shall be provided.
N o hold-back hooks are permitted f o rthe above
doors.
3.2.4.5 A n y d i e s e l d r i v e n s o u r c e o f p o w e r s u p p l y i n g t h e emergency fire p u m p shall be easily started
manually i n cold condition at a temperature u p
t o 0 C. I f t h i s s o u r c e o f p o w e r i s i n s t a l l e d i n u n h e a t e d space, i t s h a l l b e fitted w i t h electrical m e a n s o f
cooling water o r lubricating o i l heating, w h i c h ensure
its q u i c k start. I f m a n u a l s t a r t o f t h i s source o f p o w e r
is p r a c t i c a l l y i m p o s s i b l e , t h e n o n a g r e e m e n t w i t h t h e
Register starting arrangements o r other compressed
air, h y d r a u l i c a l l y o r electrically d r i v e n s t a r t i n g m e chanisms shall be used. These mechanisms shall be
such as t o p r o v i d e starting o f the source o f p o w e r a t
least s i x times d u r i n g h a l f a n h o u r a n d , a t least twice
d u r i n g t h e first 10 m i n .
Service fuel t a n k f o r t h e p u m p drive shall contain fuel sufficient t o ensure the p u m p operation a t
f u l l l o a d f o r n o t less t h a n t h r e e h o u r s . B e s i d e s , o u t -
417
side t h e m a c h i n e r y space o f c a t e g o r y f u e l stores s h a l l

be available sufficient t o ensure t h e p u m p o p e r a t i o n
at full l o a d f o r a d d i t i o n a l 15 h .
3.2.4.6 T h e e m e r g e n c y f i r e p u m p c a p a c i t y s h a l l b e
n o t less t h a n 4 0 p e r c e n t o f t h e t o t a l r e q u i r e d c a p a c i t y
o f fire p u m p s considering 3.2.1.2.
3.2.4.7 T h e e m e r g e n c y f i r e p u m p c a p a c i t y s h a l l
c o m p l y w i t h 3.2.4.6.
W h e r e a fixed pressure water-spraying system
installed f o rt h e p r o t e c t i o n o f the m a c h i n e r y space i n
accordance w i t h 3.4 is supplied b y t h e emergency fire
p u m p , t h e n t h e emergency fire p u m p capacity shall
be adequate t o supply t h e s y s t e m a t t h e r e q u i r e d
pressure plus t w o jets o f water.
The capacity o f t h e t w o jets shall be calculated
f o r t h e l a r g e s t n o z z l e s u s e d i n t h e s h i p a t n o t less
t h a n 2 5 m / h . W h e n d e t e r m i n i n g t h e largest nozzles,
the nozzles i n t h e space w h e r e t h e m a i n fire p u m p s
are located m a y n o t be considered. T h e capacity o f
the fire p u m p w i t h the nozzle diameter o f 16m m shall
be 16 m / h , t h e capacity o f the p u m p w i t h t h e nozzle
diameter o f 19 m m 23,5 16 m / h accordingly, t h e
pressure a t hydrants being 0,27 M P a .
3.2.4.8 W h e r e t h e s e a i n l e t v a l v e i s i n t h e m a c h i n e r y space, measures s h a l l b e t a k e n so t h a t t h e
valve c a n be opened i n t h e event o f fire.
3.2.5 P i p i n g .
3.2.5.1 T h e d i a m e t e r s o f t h e f i r e m a i n a n d w a t e r
service pipes shall be sufficient f o r t h e effective dist r i b u t i o n o f t h e m a x i m u m required discharge f r o m
t w o fire p u m p s operating simultaneously. I n cargo
ships t h e diameter need o n l y be sufficient f o r t h e
discharge o f 140 m / h .
I n ships o f 5 0 0 gross tonnage a n d u p w a r d s a n d
floating cranes (refer t o 3.2.5.6) t h e pipes o f t h e fire
m a i n shall be rated a t a w o r k i n g pressure o f a t
least 1 M P a .
3.2.5.2 T o p r e v e n t f r e e z i n g , t h e p i p e l i n e s o f t h e
water fire m a i n system extended t o open decks o r
n o n - h e a t e d spaces s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h s h u t - o f f
fittings m o u n t e d i n h e a t e d spaces, a n d w i t h w a t e r
drainage arrangements.
3.2.5.3 E a c h fire p u m p s h a l l b e fitted w i t h s h u t o f f valves o n t h e suction a n d discharge pipes.
T h e use o f slide valves o n t h e s u c t i o n pipe is
permitted.
I n ships o f 5 0 0 gross tonnage a n d u p w a r d s t h e
v a l v e s o n t h e discharge side o f t h e p u m p s s h a l l b e o f a
non-return shut-off type.
3.2.5.4 I n o i l t a n k e r s , t h e fire m a i n s h a l l c o m p l y
w i t h the following supplementary requirements:
.1 o n t h e m a i n p i p e w h e r e i t i s l e d o u t o f t h e p o o p
a n d i n easily accessible places o n t h e cargo o i l t a n k
deck, cut-off valves shall be fitted a t t h e i n t e r v a l o f
not m o r e t h a n 4 0 m . E a c h o f such valves shall be
provided w i t h a n i n f o r m a t i o n plate t o indicate that
3
418
Rules
the valve shall be kept permanently open under

n o r m a l service c o n d i t i o n s ;
.2 b e f o r e e a c h c u t - o f f v a l v e o n t h e f i r e m a i n t h e r e
shall be fitted t w i n fire h y d r a n t s o f 7 0 m m diameter
so l o c a t e d t h a t t h e y a r e e q u a l l y spaced, o v e r t h e
length o f t h e ship a n d t h e fulfilment o f t h e requirem e n t s o f 3.2.6.2 is ensured;
.3 b e f o r e t h e c u t - o f f v a l v e f i t t e d i n t h e p o o p t h e r e
s h a l l b e a b r a n c h p i p e o n e i t h e r side, l e d o u t f r o m t h e
fire m a i n t o t h e f o r w a r d p a r t o f t h e p o o p deck; t h e
diameter o f each branch pipe shall be sufficient f o r
supplying w a t e r t h r o u g h t w o fire hoses connected t o
two h y d r a n t s fitted a t t h e e n d o f each branch; i n ships
o f 1000 gross tonnage a n d u p w a r d s t h e diameter o f
each h y d r a n t provided shall be about 7 0 m m , a n d i n
s h i p s o f less g r o s s t o n n a g e t h i s d i a m e t e r s h a l l b e
about 50 m m .
W h e r e fire p u m p s a r e fitted f o r w a r d o ft h e cargo
tanks, t w o m o r e similar pipes b r a n c h i n g f r o m t h e fire
m a i n o f t h e same diameter as above shall be p r o v i d e d
o n t h e after part o fthe forecastle deck, a cut-off valve
being fitted o n t h e fire m a i n w i t h i n t h e erection, after
the branches.
3.2.5.5 O n c a t a m a r a n s a n d s i m i l a r s h i p s , e a c h
h u l l shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h a w a t e r fire m a i n system
including water hydrants, hoses a n d nozzles.
3.2.5.6 O n a l l s h i p s o f 5 0 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e a n d
upwards, a n d o n floating cranes facilities shall be
available o n the open deck enabling a n international
s h o r e c o n n e c t i o n t o b e u s e d o n e i t h e r side o f t h e s h i p
(refer t o 5.1.18).
3.2.5.7 I s o l a t i n g v a l v e t o s e p a r a t e t h e p i p i n g
w i t h i n t h e m a c h i n e r y space o f category A c o n t a i n i n g
the fire p u m p ( o r p u m p s ) f r o m t h e m a i n outside i t
s h a l l b e f i t t e d i n p i p i n g i n easily accessible p o s i t i o n
( o u t s i d e t h e m a c h i n e r y space).
T h e fire m a i n s h a l l b e s o a r r a n g e d t h a t w h e n t h e
isolating valves are shut a l l t h e hydrants o n t h e ship,
e x c e p t t h o s e fitted i n t h e p i p i n g s e p a r a t e d f r o m w a t e r
s u p p l y , c a n b e s u p p l i e d w i t h w a t e r b y a n o t h e r fire
p u m p l o c a t e d o u t s i d e t h e m a c h i n e r y space.
3.2.6 F i r e h y d r a n t s .
3.2.6.1 E a c h fire h y d r a n t s h a l l h a v e a s h u t - o f f
valve a n d a standard quick-acting coupling. H y d r a n t s fitted o n o p e n d e c k s s h a l l a l s o h a v e q u i c k acting plugs, o r e q u i v a l e n t device.
3.2.6.2 T h e n u m b e r a n d a r r a n g e m e n t o f f i r e h y drants shall ensure a t least t h e delivery o f t w o w a t e r
jets f r o m different hydrants, o n e o f t h e jets being
delivered t h r o u g h a hose o f s t a n d a r d l e n g t h as stipulated under 5.1.4.1, t o a n y area o fthe ship w h i c h is
g e n e r a l l y accessible t o passengers a n d c r e w d u r i n g
the v o y a g e a n d t o a n y p a r t o f a n y cargo space t h a t is
e m p t y , r o - r o cargo space a n d f o r special-category
spaces t o a n y p a r t o f t h e space t h r o u g h s t a n d a r d
l e n g t h hoses. I n t h e l a t t e r case, t w o jets s h a l l b e de-
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
livered t o a n y p a r t o f t h e space t h r o u g h s t a n d a r d
length hoses. Besides, such h y d r a n t s shall be located
n e a r e n t r a n c e t o t h e p r o t e c t e d spaces. I n passenger
s h i p s t h e n u m b e r a n d l o c a t i o n o f fire h y d r a n t s i n t h e
a c c o m m o d a t i o n , service a n d m a c h i n e r y spaces s h a l l
be such t h a t this r e q u i r e m e n t m a y be c o m p l i e d w i t h
when all watertight doors a n d all doors i n m a i n
vertical zones a r e closed.
O n o p e n decks f o r containers t w o jets o f w a t e r
s h a l l b e d e l i v e r e d o n t o e a c h accessible v e r t i c a l side o f
the c o n t a i n e r b y standard l e n g t h hoses.
3.2.6.3 I t i s n o t r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t fire h y d r a n t s a r e
located closer than 2 0 m f r o m each other i n t h e internal
spaces a n d m o r e t h a n 3 0 m o n o p e n decks.
3.2.6.4 F i r e h y d r a n t s s h a l l n o t b e p l a c e d a t t h e
ends o f dead-end c o r r i d o r s , i n special electrical spaces
o r closed o r r a r e l y a t t e n d e d spaces.
3.2.6.5 I n s h i p s , c a r r y i n g d e c k c a r g o e s fire h y d r a n t s s h a l l b e l o c a t e d t o e n s u r e easy access, w h i l e
the pipes shall be located t o a v o i d being d a m a g e d b y
cargo.
3.2.6.6 I n m a c h i n e r y s p a c e o f c a t e g o r y A a t l e a s t
two hydrants shall be provided.
3.2.6.7 I n a l l s h i p s t h e r e s h a l l b e f i t t e d a fire h y drant located i n the f o r w a r d part o f the propeller
shaft tunnels.
3.2.6.8 A l l fire h y d r a n t s s h a l l b e p a i n t e d r e d .
3.2.6.9 I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s t w o fire h y d r a n t s s h a l l
be p r o v i d e d i n t h e shaft t u n n e l , being o n e o f t h e
m e a n s o f escape, i n t h e p r o x i m i t y t o t h e m a c h i n e r y
space o f category A .
W h e r e s o m e o t h e r space is used as a m e a n s o f
e s c a p e , t w o fire h y d r a n t s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d t h e r e i n a t
the entrance t o t h e m a c h i n e r y space o f c a t e g o r y A .
P r o v i s i o n o f 3.2.6.7 n e e d n o t b e m e t i n t h i s case.
3.3 S P R I N K L E R
S Y S T E M
3.3.1 G e n e r a l .
3.3.1.1 A u t o m a t i c s p r i n k l e r s y s t e m s s h a l l b e a
wet
pipe type, as specified b y I M O circular
MSC/Circ.1165. U p o n agreement w i t h the Register
for s m a l l exposited sections, as w e l l as a t c o n t r o l
stations, w h e r e w a t e r m a ycause damage t o essential
e q u i p m e n t , m a y b e fitted w i t h a d r y p i p e s y s t e m o r a
preaction system as p e r m i t t e d b y I M O circular
MSC/Circ.1165.
3.3.1.2 A s p r i n k l e r s y s t e m s h a l l b e a u t o m a t i c a l l y
set i n o p e r a t i o n a t t e m p e r a t u r e s i n t h e p r o t e c t e d
space r i s i n g t o t h e values i n d i c a t e d i n 3.3.4.2.
3.3.1.3 T h e a u t o m a t i c s p r i n k l e r s y s t e m s h a l l b e
k e p t charged a t t h e necessary pressure a n d shall have
p r o v i s i o n f o r a c o n t i n u o u s s u p p l y o f w a t e r as r e quired i n t h e present Chapter.
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
419
3.3.1.4 T h e a i r c y l i n d e r , c o m p r e s s o r , p u m p a n d
the pipes o f t h e sprinkler system, except f o r t h e piping connecting t h e sprinkler system t o t h e w a t e r fire
m a i n s y s t e m , s h a l l b e i n d e p e n d e n t o f a l l o t h e r systems.
3.3.1.5 A s p r i n k l e r p u m p a n d a p r e s s u r e t a n k
shall b e a r r a n g e d o u t s i d e t h e p r o t e c t e d space, a t a n
a d e q u a t e distance f r o m t h e m a c h i n e r y spaces o f category A . A gauge indicating t h e pressure i n t h e
system shall be provided at each section stop valve
and at a central control station.
3.3.1.6 M e a n s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d f o r t e s t i n g t h e
automatic operation o f the sprinkler p u m p o n reduction o fpressure i n t h e system.
3.3.1.7 W h e n s p r i n k l e r s y s t e m s e q u i v a l e n t t o t h e
systems specified i n t h e present C h a p t e r a r e used,
they shall be approved b y the Register according t o
the GuideUnes adopted b y the I M O resolution
A.800(19) considering amendments introduced b y
I M O resolutions MSC.265(84)/Corr.l a n d MSC.284(86).
W h e n a p p r o v i n g such systems special c o n s i d e r a t i o n
shall be given t o t h e fulfillment o f the requirements
o f 3.3.1.1 t o 3.3.1.3, 3.3.1.6, 3.3.2.1, 3.3.4.1, 3.3.5.1
a n d 3.3.5.2.
3.3.2 S p r i n k l e r p u m p s .
3.3.2.1 A n i n d e p e n d e n t p o w e r p u m p s h a l l b e
provided solely f o r t h e purpose o f continuing automatically t h e discharge o f w a t e r f r o m t h e sprinklers.
The p u m p shall be brought into action automatically
by t h e pressure d r o p i n t h e system before t h e standing
fresh w a t e r charge i n t h e pressure t a n k is completely
exhausted.
3.3.2.2 T h e p u m p a n d p i p i n g s y s t e m s h a l l b e
capable o f m a i n t a i n i n g t h e necessary pressure a t t h e
level o f t h e highest sprinkler t o ensure a continuous
f l o w rate o f water sufficient f o r the simultaneous
coverage o ft h e m i n i m u m floor area o f 280 m at the
application rate specified i n 3.3.4.1.
For appUcation t o a ship w i t h a total protected
a r e a o f less t h a n 2 8 0 m , t h e R e g i s t e r m a y specify t h e
appropriate area f o r sizing o f p u m p s a n d supply
components.
3.3.2.3 T h e p u m p s h a l l b e f i t t e d o n t h e d e l i v e r y
side w i t h a test v a l v e w i t h a s h o r t o p e n - e n d e d discharge pipe. T h e effective area t h r o u g h t h e valve a n d
pipe shall b e a d e q u a t e t o p e r m i t t h e release o f t h e
required p u m p o u t p u t while m a i n t a i n i n g t h e pressure
i n t h e system specified i n 3.3.3.2.
3.3.2.4 T h e s e a i n l e t t o t h e p u m p s h a l l w h e r e v e r
possible be i n t h e space c o n t a i n i n g t h e p u m p a n d
shall be so arranged that w h e n t h e ship is afloat i t will
n o t be necessary t o s h u t o f f the supply o f sea w a t e r t o
the p u m p f o r a n y purpose other than the inspection
or repair o f the p u m p .
3.3.2.5 P r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e f o r c o n n e c t i o n o f
the m a i n supply p i p i n g w i t h t h e ship's fire m a i n .
2
A lockable non-return shut-off valve shall be fitted a t

the connection concerned.
3.3.2.6 T h e r e s h a l l b e n o t l e s s t h a n t w o s o u r c e s o f
p o w e r f o r t h e pumps. W h e r e t h e sources o f p o w e r are
electrical, t h e p u m p shall be suppUed according
to 4.3.1.5, 19.1.1.1, 19.1.1.2 a n d 19.1.2.1.7, P a r t X I
O n e o fthe sources o fp o w e r f o r t h e p u m p m a y be
an internal c o m b u s t i o n engine w h i c h shall be so situated (besides compUance w i t h t h e instructions
o f 3.3.1.5) t h a t a fire i n a n y protected space w i l l n o t
affect t h e a i r supply t o t h e m a c h i n e r y .
3.3.3 P r e s s u r e t a n k .
3.3.3.1 T h e p r e s s u r e t a n k s h a l l b e f i t t e d w i t h :
.1 a n a u t o m a t i c p r e s s u r e m a i n t a i n i n g d e v i c e ;
.2 g l a s s g a u g e ;
.3 a r e l i e f v a l v e ;
.4 a p r e s s u r e g a u g e .
3.3.3.2 T h e p r e s s u r e t a n k s h a l l c o n t a i n a s t a n d i n g
charge o f fresh water equivalent t o the v o l u m e o f
water w h i c h w o u l d be discharged i n o n e m i n u t e b y
the sprinkler p u m p .
The v o l u m e o f t h e pressure t a n k shall be equal t o
at least twice t h a t o f t h e charge o f w a t e r specified
above.
Arrangements shall be made f o r maintaining
such a i r pressure i n t h e t a n k as t o ensure t h a t w h e r e
the perennial supply o f fresh water i n t h e t a n k has
b e e n u s e d t h e p r e s s u r e i n t h a t t a n k i s n o t less t h a n a
w o r k i n g pressure a t t h e sprinkler plus a hydrostatic
pressure f r o m t h e t a n k b o t t o m t o t h e highest
sprinkler.
Suitable means o f replenishing the air under
pressure a n d o f replenishing t h e fresh w a t e r charge i n
the t a n k shall be provided. M e a n s shaU be also p r o v i d e d t o p r e v e n t t h e passage o f sea w a t e r i n t o t h e t a n k .
3.3.3.3 P n e u m a t i c p r e s s u r e t a n k s s h a l l c o m p l y
w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r pressure vessels set o u t i n
P a r t X "Boilers, H e a t Exchangers a n d Pressure Vessels".
3.3.4 S p r i n k l e r s .
3.3.4.1 S p r i n k l e r s s h a l l b e p l a c e d i n a n o v e r h e a d
position a n d spaced i n a suitable pattern t o m a i n t a i n
a n a v e r a g e a p p U c a t i o n r a t e o f n o t less t h a n
5 1/min per 1 m over t h e h o r i z o n t a l area o f the
The Register m a ypermit the use o f other appUcation rate depending o n structural features o f t h e
W h i l e protecting w i n d o w s b y sprinklers, therequirements o f 2.2.4.4 shall be m e t .
3.3.4.2 T h e s p r i n k l e r s s h a U b e r e s i s t a n t t o c o r r o s i o n
b y m a r i n e a t m o s p h e r e . I n a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service
spaces t h e s p r i n k l e r s shaU c o m e i n t o o p e r a t i o n w i t h i n t h e
t e m p e r a t u r e r a n g e f r o m 6 8 t o 7 9 C, e x c e p t t h a t i n l o cations such as d r y i n g r o o m s w h e r e h i g h a m b i e n t t e m 2
420
Rules
peratures m i g h t b e expected, t h e o p e r a t i o n t e m p e r a t u r e
m a y b e i n c r e a s e d b y n o t m o r e t h a n 3 0 C a b o v e t h e
m a x i m u m deckhead temperature. I n saunas, p r o v i s i o n
shall be m a d e f o r e m p t y sprinkler systems w i t h t h e upper
o p e r a t i n g l i m i t o f 1 4 0 C. R e f r i g e r a t e d c h a m b e r s m a y b e
fitted w i t h d r y pipe sprinkler systems.
3.3.5 C o n t r o l v a l v e s .
3.3.5.1 E a c h s e c t i o n o f s p r i n k l e r s s h a l l i n c l u d e
means f o r giving a visual a n d audible a l a r m signal
automatically at one o r more indicating units whenever a n y sprinkler comes i n t o operation. S u c h a l a r m
systems shall be such as t o indicate i f a n y fault occurs
in the system. Such units shall indicate i n w h i c h
section served b y t h e system a fire h a s occurred a n d
shall be centralised o n t h enavigation bridge o r i n the
continuously manned central control station and, i n
addition, visible a n d audible alarms f r o m t h e u n i t
shall also be placed i n a p o s i t i o n other t h a n o n t h e
a f o r e m e n t i o n e d spaces t o ensure t h a t t h e i n d i c a t i o n
o f fire is i m m e d i a t e l y received b y t h e crew.
3.3.5.2 S w i t c h e s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d a t o n e o f t h e
indicating positions referred t o i n 3.3.5.1 w h i c h w i l l
enable t h e a l a r m a n d t h e indicators f o reach section
o f sprinklers t o be tested. A list o r p l a n shall be disp l a y e d a t each i n d i c a t i n g u n i t s h o w i n g t h e spaces
covered a n d t h e l o c a t i o n o f t h e zone i n respect o f
each section. Suitable instructions f o r testing a n d
maintenance shall be available.
3.3.5.3 A t e s t v a l v e s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d f o r t e s t i n g
the a u t o m a t i c a l a r m f o r each section o f sprinklers b y
a discharge o f w a t e r equivalent t o t h e o p e r a t i o n o f
o n e sprinkler. T h e test v a l v e f o r each section shall be
situated near t h e stop valve f o r t h a t section.
3.3.6 P i p e s .
3.3.6.1 S p r i n k l e r s s h a l l b e g r o u p e d i n t o s e p a r a t e sections, each
o f t h e m shall contain n o t more
t h a n 2 0 0 sprinklers. I n passenger ships, a n y section o f
sprinklers shall n o t serve m o r e t h a n t w o decks a n d shall n o t
be situated i n m o r e than o n e m a i n vertical zone. H o w e v e r ,
the Register m a y p e r m i t such section o f sprinklers t o serve
m o r e t h a n t w o deck o r b e situated i n m o r e than o n e m a i n
vertical zone, p r o v i d e d i t shall n o t reduce, o n t h e Register
opinion, t h e fire protection o f the ship.
3.3.6.2 P r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e i n e a c h s e c t i o n
for p u r g i n g t h e pipes w i t h compressed a i r a n d
flushing t h e m w i t h fresh water.
3.3.6.3 E a c h s e c t i o n o f s p r i n k l e r s s h a l l b e c a p a b l e
o f being isolated b y o n e stop valve o n l y after w h i c h a
gauge shall be provided.
The stop valve i n each section shall be readily
accessible i n a l o c a t i o n outside o f t h e associated
section o r i n cabinets w i t h i n stairway enclosures. T h e
valve's location shall be clearly a n d permanently i n dicated.
Measures shall be taken t o preclude unauthorized
persons f r o m operating t h e shut-off valves.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
3.3.6.4 T h e s u c t i o n p i p e s o f t h e p u m p s f e e d i n g a
sprinkler system shall be fitted w i t h
filters.
3.3.6.5 T h e d i a m e t e r s o f t h e p i p e s o f a s p r i n k l e r
system shall be such as t o ensure t h e o p e r a t i o n o f
sprinklers a t t h e w a t e r pressure a n d t h e rate o f discharge specified i n 3.3.2.2 a n d 3.3.4.1.
3.3.6.6 T h e p i p e l i n e s o f t h e s p r i n k l e r s y s t e m s h a l l
b e fitted w i t h n o n - r e t u r n s h u t - o f f v a l v e s p r e v e n t i n g
sea w a t e r f r o m p e n e t r a t i n g i n t o t h e p r e s s u r e t a n k a n d
the leakage o f water f r o m the tanks a n d the system.
3.4 P R E S S U R E W A T E R - S P R A Y I N G
S Y S T E M
3.4.1 I n m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s o f c a t e g o r y A a s w e l l a s
i n c a r g o p u m p r o o m s specified i n 1.5.7.1 pressure
water-spraying system shall be supplied f r o m a n i n dependent p u m p w h i c h shall be automatically p u t
i n t o action b y a pressure d r o p i n t h e system a n d f r o m
t h e fire m a i n . A n o n - r e t u r n s h u t - o f f v a l v e s h a l l b e
fitted o n t h e c o n n e c t i o n l i n e w i t h t h e f i r e m a i n .
The pressure water-spraying system f o r r o - r o
c a r g o spaces, v e h i c l e spaces ( r e f e r t o 1.5.4.3
a n d 1.5.4.4) a n d special c a t e g o r y spaces (refer
t o 1.5.9) s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f I M O
circular M S C . 1/Circ. 1430 "Revised GuideUnes f o r
the Design a n dA p p r o v a l o fF i x e d Water-Based FireF i g h t i n g Systems f o r R o - R o Spaces a n d Special C a tegory Spaces". S u c h system shall protect a l l p o r t i o n s
o f a n y d e c k a n d sites f o r v e h i c l e s i n t h e specified
spaces, s h a l l h a v e m a n u a l c o n t r o l a n d pressure g a u g e
at every d i s t r i b u t i o n b o x w i t h clear m a r k i n g i n d i c a t i n g p r o t e c t e d spaces, as w e l l as suitable m a i n tenance a n d service i n s t r u c t i o n s located a t t h e valves
section. C o n s i d e r i n g a substantial loss o f stabiUty,
w h i c h m a y occur d u e t o large concentration o f water
o n decks o f specified spaces d u r i n g s y s t e m o p e r a t i o n ,
measures shall be p r o v i d e d as stipulated i n 7.6.12,
Part V I I I "Systems a n d Piping".
I n spaces w h e r e f l a m m a b l e Uquids a r e s t o r e d t h e
s y s t e m m a y b e s u p p l i e d o n l y f r o m t h e fire m a i n .
W h e r e high-pressure water-spraying system is
used, t h e necessity f o r t h e reserve supply f o r such
s y s t e m s h a l l b e d e t e r m i n e d i n each case o n a g r e e m e n t
w i t h t h e Register, the rate o f water supply shall be
p r o v i d e d n o t less t h a n s p e c i f i e d i n 3 . 4 . 2 . 1 .
3.4.2 T h e n u m b e r a n d a r r a n g e m e n t o f t h e n o z z l e s
shall be such as t o ensure a n effective average dist r i b u t i o n o f w a t e r i n t h e spaces t o b e p r o t e c t e d o f n o t
less t h a n :
.1 5 1 / m i n p e r 1 m o f t h e h o r i z o n t a l a r e a o v e r
w h i c h fuel o i l is U k e l y t o spread o r cargo space area;
.2 1,5 1 / m i n p e r 1 m o f t h e l a r g e s t h o r i z o n t a l
c r o s s - s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f t h e fish m e a l h o l d .
I n c a r g o , w o r k i n g a n d special spaces, w h e r e t h e
system m a y be d i v i d e d i n t o sections, t h e p u m p shall
2
P a r t VI. F i r e
421
Protection
be capable o f s u p p l y i n g t w o sections o f the t o t a l

l e n g t h o f at least 4 0 m .
3.4.3 I n m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s o f c a t e g o r y A o f s h i p s
specified a n d i n c a r g o p u m p r o o m s i n 1.5.7.1 t h e
pressure w a t e r - s p r a y i n g s y s t e m shall be k e p t charged
under the required pressure u p t o the valves o n the
d i s t r i b u t i o n pipes. T h e p u m p s u p p l y i n g the w a t e r f o r
the s y s t e m shall be p u t a u t o m a t i c a l l y i n t o a c t i o n b y a
pressure d r o p i n the system.
3.4.4 F i l t e r s p r e v e n t i n g t h e s y s t e m a n d s p r a y
nozzles f r o m b e c o m i n g clogged shall be fitted o n the
suction pipe o f the p u m p supplying the system and o n
the c o n n e c t i o n pipe w i t h the fire m a i n .
3.4.5 D i s t r i b u t i o n v a l v e s s h a l l b e p l a c e d i n e a s i l y
a c c e s s i b l e p o s i t i o n s o u t s i d e t h e p r o t e c t e d s p a c e s s o as
n o t t o be r e a d i l y c u t o f f b y a fire i n t h e p r o t e c t e d space.
P r o v i s i o n s h a l l be m a d e i n t h e p r o t e c t e d spaces,
w h e r e people are p e r m a n e n t l y present, f o r r e m o t e
c o n t r o l o f d i s t r i b u t i o n v a l v e s f r o m these spaces.
3.4.6 S p r a y n o z z l e s s h a l l b e p l a c e d i n t h e p r o tected spaces as f o l l o w s :
.1 u n d e r n e a t h t h e c e i U n g o f t h e space;
.2 a b o v e e q u i p m e n t a n d m a c h i n e r y u s i n g f u e l o i l
or o t h e r f l a m m a b l e Uquids a n d o t h e r fire hazardous
objects;
.3 a b o v e b i l g e s , d o u b l e b o t t o m f l o o r c o v e r i n g s
a n d o t h e r surfaces o v e r w h i c h fuel o i l o r f l a m m a b l e
Uquids are Ukely to spread;
.4 a b o v e s t a c k s o f f i s h m e a l b a g s .
T h e spray n o z z l e s s h a l l be so disposed i n the
p r o t e c t e d space t h a t the area c o v e r e d b y o n e n o z z l e
will overlap that covered by adjacent nozzles.
3.4.7 P u m p o f t h e s y s t e m p r o v i d i n g p r o t e c t i o n o f
c a t e g o r y A m a c h i n e r y spaces a n d c a r g o p u m p r o o m s
shall ensure a supply o f w a t e r at the required pressure
to a l l sections o f t h e s y s t e m i n a n y c o m p a r t m e n t t o be
protected. T h e p u m p a n d its c o n t r o l s shall be i n stalled o u t s i d e t h e spaces t o be p r o t e c t e d .
The p u m p m a y be d r i v e n b y i n d e p e n d e n t i n t e r n a l
c o m b u s t i o n m a c h i n e r y w h i c h s h a l l be so s i t u a t e d t h a t
a fire i n the p r o t e c t e d space w i l l n o t affect the a i r
s u p p l y t o t h e m a c h i n e r y . I f t h e p u m p is electrically
driven f r o m the emergency generator, the generator
shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f S e c t i o n 9,
3.4.8 A v e r a g e r a t e o f w a t e r s u p p l y s p e c i f i e d
i n 3.4.2, s h a l l be i n c r e a s e d f o r t h e f o l l o w i n g spaces:
.1 2 0 1 / m i n p e r 1 m f o r b o i l e r s f r o n t a l p a r t s a n d
surfaces, fuel o i l u n i t s , c e n t r i f u g a l separator ( o t h e r
t h a n bilge w a t e r separators), a n d fuel filters;
.2 1 0 1 / m i n p e r 1 m f o r p i p e U n e s o f h e a t e d f u e l
located near the exhaust pipes o r similar heated surfaces o f m a i n a n d a u x i U a r y diesel engines.
3.4.9 F i x e d p r e s s u r e w a t e r - s p r a y i n g s y s t e m o f a n
approved type complying w i t h the provisions o f I M O
circular M S C . l / C i r c . 1 2 6 8 "GuideUnes for the A p p r o v a l
o f F i x e d Pressure W a t e r - S p r a y i n g a n d W a t e r - B a s e d
Fire-Extinguishing Systems f o r C a b i n Balconies" shaU
be installed t o protect cabin balconies o f passenger
ships w h e r e f u r n i t u r e a n d furnishings o n such balconies
are n o t as d e f i n e d i n 2.1.1.9.
3.5 W A T E R - S C R E E N
S Y S T E M
3.5.1 T h e p r e s e n t R u l e s p r o v i d e f o r t h e u s e o f t h e
w a t e r - s c r e e n s y s t e m i n t h e f o l l o w i n g cases:
.1 i n s p e c i a l p u r p o s e s h i p s w h e r e , s u b j e c t t o
special a g r e e m e n t w i t h the Register, w a t e r screens are
p e r m i t t e d i n U e u o f " A " class d i v i s i o n s , i n a c c o r d a n c e
w i t h 2.2.1.2;
.2 f o r p r o t e c t i o n o f v e r t i c a l s u r f a c e s o f s h i p s h u l l
i n c o m p U a n c e w i t h 6.6.6.
3.5.2 T h e d e s i g n c a p a c i t y o f t h e p u m p s s u p p l y i n g
the water-screen s y s t e m shall be sufficient t o p r o v i d e
at least 7 0 1 / m i n per Unear m e t r e o f the screen length.
3.6 D R E N C H I N G
S Y S T E M
3.6.1 T h e p r e s e n t R u l e s p r o v i d e f o r t h e u s e o f t h e
water drenching system for drenching the racks o f
magazines (refer t o 6.2.2.18 a n d T a b l e 3.1.2.1).
3.6.2 T h e d r e n c h i n g s y s t e m s h a l l b e f e d f r o m t h e
fire m a i n . T h e p u m p s a n d associated sources o f
p o w e r s h a l l be placed outside the space protected.
3.6.3 T h e s y s t e m s h a l l b e s t a r t e d f r o m o u t s i d e t h e
space.
I t is r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t the s y s t e m s h a l l be p u t
i n t o a c t i o n a t a t e m p e r a t u r e rise i n the space a b o v e
admissible.
3.6.4 T h e d r e n c h i n g s y s t e m o f m a g a z i n e s a n d t h e
pressure w a t e r - s p r a y i n g s y s t e m o f t h e c a r g o spaces
fitted f o r the carriage o f explosives m a y be used f o r
their flooding i n emergency.
3.6.5 T h e c a p a c i t y o f t h e p u m p s s u p p l y i n g t h e
s y s t e m s h a l l be sufficient t o ensure t h e f o l l o w i n g rates
o f w a t e r discharge for drenching magazine racks,
24 1 / m i n per 1 m o f t h e t o t a l m a g a z i n e f l o o r area.
2
3.7 F O A M F E R E E X T I N G U I S H I N G
S Y S T E M
3.7.1 G e n e r a l .
3.7.1.1 T h e f o a m f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s s h a l l
be capable t o p r o d u c e air m e c h a n i c a l f o a m f o r the
use as a n e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m d e p e n d i n g o n t h e
f o a m expansion ratio:
o f l o w expansion ratio (about 10:1);
422
Rules
of m e d i u m expansion ratio (between 50:1

and 150:1);
o f h i g h expansion ratio (about 1000:1).
F o a m fire extinguishing systems m a y include
units separately producing, b u t s i m u l t a n e o u s l y supplying l o w expansion ratio f o a m a n d m e d i u m expansion ratio f o a m (combination foam).
3.7.1.2 U s e s h a l l b e m a d e o f f o a m c o n c e n t r a t e o f
types a p p r o v e d b y t h e R e g i s t e r (refer t o 1.3.3.1).
F o a m concentrates f o rgenerating l o w expansion
and m e d i u m expansion f o a m shall be approved b y
the Register i n accordance w i t h M S C . l / C i r c . 1 3 1 2
a n d M S C / C i r c . 7 9 8 , respectively.
A f o a m concentrate f o r generating high expansion f o a m shall be approved b y the Register i n
compliance with I M O MSC/Circ.670.
A f o a m concentrate for generating l o w expansion
and m e d i u m expansion f o a m shall be capable o f
being used b o t h w i t h fresh w a t e r a n d sea w a t e r .
3.7.1.3 T h e c a p a c i t y o f f o a m f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g
systems a n d t h e q u a n t i t y o f a f o a m concentrate shall
be calculated depending o n t h e f o a m e x p a n s i o n r a t i o ,
the rate o f appUcation o fsolution a n d operation time
o f t h e s y s t e m g i v e n i n T a b l e 3.7.1.3 a n d i n 3 . 7 . 2 . 1 .
Operation o f a deck f o a m system at its required
output shall permit the simultaneous use o f the
m i n i m u m required n u m b e r o f jets o f water a t t h e
required pressure f r o m t h e fire m a i n , i n compUance
w i t h t h e requirements f o r w a t e r fire m a i n system,
w h i c h shall be possible o n deck over t h e full length o f
t h e ship, i n t h e a c c o m m o d a t i o n , service spaces, c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s a n d m a c h i n e r y spaces.
3.7.1.4 T a n k s f o r t h e s t o r a g e o f f o a m c o n c e n t r a t e
shall be fitted w i t h arrangements f o r filUng a n d
draining, a device f o r w a t c h i n g t h e level o f the U q u i d
and a m a n h o l e for cleaning a n dinspecting. T h e tanks
shall be o f sufficient capacity t o contain t h e full required a m o u n t o ff o a m concentrate.
I f n o excessive pressure i s r e q u i r e d t o b e created i n
tanks during the system operation, non-return valves
shall be fitted between such t a n k s a n d t h e fire m a i n .
W h e r e a f o a m concentrate using fresh water is
utiUzed i n t h e h i g h expansion f o a m system, a t fire
extinction station there shall be t h e reserve o f w a t e r
sufficient f o r a t least single f o a m fill u p o f t h e p r o tected space o f the largest v o l u m e . T h e r e m a i n d e r o f
the w a t e r m a y be suppUed f r o m ship's storage tanks.
E q u i p m e n t ( p u m p s , fittings, etc.) necessary f o r supplying fresh water t o the t a n k shall be arranged
o u t s i d e t h e p r o t e c t e d space, b e f e d f r o m t h e e m e r gency diesel-generator a n d have a capacity sufficient
to ensure c o n t i n u o u s o p e r a t i o n o f t h e s y s t e m as r e q u i r e d i n T a b l e 3.7.1.3.
3.7.1.5 T h e m i x e r s f o r m a k i n g a q u e o u s s o l u t i o n
of a f o a m concentrate o f the required concentration
shall be o fa n approved type. T h e mixers shall ensure
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
operation o f simultaneously used f o a m nozzles

and/or f o a m generators.
3.7.1.6 T h e m a i n c o n t r o l s t a t i o n o f t h e f i x e d d e c k
system shall be located i n t h e fire e x t i n c t i o n station
o u t s i d e t h e c a r g o spaces i n t h e v i c i n i t y o f a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces a n d b e easily accessible a n d ensure
c o n t r o l o f the system i n t h e event o ffire i n protected
areas. S a m p U n g device f o r m e a s u r e m e n t o f t h e percentage o f f o a m concentrate i n a s o l u t i o n shall be
fitted a t t h e fire e x t i n c t i o n station o n t h e fire m a i n a t
a m a x i m u m distance f r o m mixers, t h e pressure gauge
shall be fitted o n t h e pipe supplying water t o the
system.
The m a i n equipment o f t h e deck system (tanks
w i t h a f o a m concentrate, p u m p s , m i x e r s , etc) m a y be
located i n t h e engine r o o m .
3.7.1.7 D e c k f o a m s y s t e m s a p p U e d b y a c o m m o n
Une f r o m t h e fire m a i n m a y b e u s e d o n b o a r d p r o vided that the f o a m appUcators c a n be effectively
operated b y o n e person w h e n fire extinguishing
m e d i u m is suppUed a t a pressure required f o r m o n i tors. A d d i t i o n a l f o a m concentrate shall be provided
for 2 nozzles o p e r a t i o n d u r i n g t h e period o f t i m e
according t o T a b l e 3.7.1.3.
3.7.1.8 F i r e s a f e t y o f t h e e n c l o s e d p i p e t r u n k s i tuated w i t h i n t h e cargo tanks deck area shall c o m p l y
w i t h t h e requirements o f M S C .1/Circ. 1276.
3.7.2 F i x e d d e c k s y s t e m s .
3.7.2.1 T h e e x p a n s i o n r a t i o o f t h e f o a m g e n e r a t e d
by t h e system shall n o t generally be greater t h a n 12:1.
I f t h e system generates actually l o w expansion f o a m
w i t h e x p a n s i o n r a t i o s U g h t l y i n excess o f 1 2 : 1 , t h e
quantity o f the f o a m concentrate shall be calculated
as f o r t h e s y s t e m w i t h f o a m e x p a n s i o n r a t i o 1 2 : 1 .
W h e r e t h e system generates t h e f o a m w i t h expansion
ratio somewhat below 12:1, the quantity o fthe f o a m
concentrate shall be p r o p o r t i o n a l l y increased.
The system shall be capable o f discharging
t h r o u g h fixed discharge outlets i n n o m o r e t h a n
5 m i n , a quantity o f f o a m sufficient t o produce a n
effective f o a m b l a n k e t o v e r t h e largest single area
over w h i c h fuel o i l is Uable t o spread.
W h e r e m e d i u m expansion ratio f o a m is used i n
oil tankers, the a m o u n t o f the f o a m concentrate shall
b e n o t less t h a n t h e r a t e d q u a n t i t y a n d s u f f i c i e n t f o r
the operation o f t h e rated n u m b e r o f t h e f o a m generators a n d o n e m o n i t o r during 10 m i n .
3.7.2.2 O n o i l t a n k e r s f o a m s h a l l b e s u p p l i e d b y
means o f m o n i t o r s a n d portable f o a m generators o r
a i r - f o a m nozzles (refer t o 5.1.6 a n d 5.1.19) t o t h e
entire cargo deck area a n d t o a n y cargo t a n k whose
deck w a s ruptured. T h en u m b e r a n d location o f the
f o a m m a i n h y d r a n t s shall be such as t o ensure f o a m
supply t o a n y part o f the cargo tanks deck f r o m at
least t w o p o r t a b l e f o a m generators o r a i r - f o a m
nozzles.
P a r t VI. F i r e Protection
423
g I
g 3
H
" S i &-s
(2 P
.a
.9
""
=^
est
1
00
j .
g> -
sss
>
S
ill!
8 |1
>
J i l l :
1
-D
~ 1
: I
s -
2|
424
Rules
3.7.2.3 A t l e a s t 5 0 p e r c e n t o f t h e f o a m s o l u t i o n
supply rate required i n .1 a n d .2 o f F o o t n o t e 2 t o
T a b l e 3.7.1.3 s h a l l be delivered f r o m each m o n i t o r .
O n s h i p s o f less t h a n 4 0 0 0 t d e a d w e i g h t o n l y
portable f o a m generators o r a i r - f o a m nozzles m a y be
e m p l o y e d . H o w e v e r , i n such a case t h e capacity o f
each generator according t o 5.1.19 o r n o z z l e acc o r d i n g t o 5.1.6.1 shall be a t least 2 5 p e r cent o f t h e
f o a m s o l u t i o n supply rate required i n .1 a n d .2 o f
F o o t n o t e 2 t o T a b l e 3.7.1.3.
3.7.2.4 T h e n u m b e r a n d p o s i t i o n o f m o n i t o r s
shall be such as t o c o m p l y w i t h 3.7.2.2, 3.7.2.6
a n d 3.7.2.8. T h e s o l u t i o n - d e l i v e r i n g capacity o fa n y
m o n i t o r s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n i n d i c a t e d i n .3 o f
F o o t n o t e 2 t o T a b l e 3.7.1.3.
3.7.2.5 I t i s r e c o m m e n d e d t h a t a m o n i t o r s h a l l b e
p r o v i d e d w i t h a changing-over device f o r alternate
supply o fwater a n d f o a m . Pipes branching f r o m the
fire m a i n a n d f o a m s o l u t i o n supply p i p i n g shall be
connected t o t h e changing-over device.
I n lieu o ft h e changing-over device suitably interlocked s h u t - o f f valves m a y be fitted.
3.7.2.6 T h e d i s t a n c e f r o m t h e m o n i t o r t o t h e
farthest extremity o f t h e protected area f o r w a r d o f
that m o n i t o r shall be n o tm o r e t h a n 75 per cent o f the
m o n i t o r t h r o w i n still a i r conditions.
3.7.2.7 T h e f o a m f i r e m a i n i n e a s i l y a c c e s s i b l e
places o f t h e cargo deck shall be fitted w i t h c u t - o f f
sluice o r disc valves spaced 3 0 m apart. N e x t t o each
o f such valves there shall be provided a ni n f o r m a t i o n
plate t o indicate that the valve shall be kept perman e n t l y o p e n u n d e r n o r m a l service c o n d i t i o n s .
Before each cut-off valve fitted o n t h e f o a m
piping there shall be t w i n fire hydrants, 7 0 m m i n
inside diameter, f o r c o u p l i n g thereto fire hoses w i t h
a i r - f o a m nozzles located a t such distance that t h e
requirements o f 3.2.6.2 a r e m e t .
Branches f r o m t h e fire m a i n a n d f o a m p i p i n g t o t h e
m o n i t o r s shall also be fitted before t h e cut-off valves.
W h e r e m e d i u m expansion f o a m is used, t w i n fire
h y d r a n t s shall be substituted b y valve chests w i t h a
n u m b e r o f fire h y d r a n t s equal t o 5 0 p e r cent o ft h e
required n u m b e r o f f o a m generators.
3.7.2.8 I n o i l t a n k e r s , e a c h f o a m f i r e e x t i n c t i o n
station shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h a s h u t - o f f device l o cated o n t h e f o a m fire m a i n before i t extends b e y o n d
the boundaries o fthe station.
Before t h e s h u t - o f f device there shall be a b r a n c h
led o u t t o t h e f o r w a r d p a r t o f t h e p o o p deck, b o t h
starboard a n d port, t o m o n i t o r s a n d t w i n fire h y d r a n t ,
about 7 0 m m i n inside diameter, f o r coupling thereto
f i r e h o s e s w i t h a i r - f o a m n o z z l e s . F o r o i l t a n k e r s o f less
t h a n 4000 t deadweight, i t is sufficient t o provide o n l y
b r a n c h pipes t o t h e said fire hydrants.
W h e r e m e d i u m expansion f o a m is used, t w i n fire
h y d r a n t s shall be substituted b y valve chests w i t h a
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
n u m b e r o f fire hydrants equal t o 5 0 p e r cent o ft h e

required n u m b e r o f f o a m generators.
3.7.2.9 F o a m f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m f o r d r y
cargo spaces s h a l l m e e t t h e f o l l o w i n g r e q u i r e m e n t s :
.1 a s h u t - o f f v a l v e s h a l l b e f i t t e d w h e r e t h e f o a m
fire m a i n is l e d o u t t o t h e o p e n deck;
.2 p r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e f o r v a l v e c h e s t s w i t h f i r e
h y d r a n t s t o b e fitted o n t h e f o a m fire m a i n o n b o t h sides.
T h e distance b e t w e e n t h e v a l v e chests o f either side shall
n o t e x c e e d 4 0 m . T h e n u m b e r o f fire h y d r a n t s i n e a c h
v a l v e chest shall b e equal t o 5 0 p e r cent o f the required
n u m b e r o f f o a m generators.
3.7.2.10 I f a s h i p i s p r o v i d e d w i t h a f i x e d
low and/or m e d i u m expansion f o a m system, there
shall be provided branches f r o m solution pipe Unet o
entrances f r o m t h e u p p e r deck t o m a c h i n e r y spaces as
also t o t h e fuel o i l filUng positions. E a c h branch shall
be fitted w i t h t w o h y d r a n t s f o r c o u p U n g t h e r e t o fire
hoses w i t h a i r - f o a m nozzles o r f o a m generators.
3.7.2.11 I n s h i p s w h e r e m e d i u m e x p a n s i o n m e chanical f o a m is used, s o l u t i o n piping shall be connected t o fire m a i n t o p r o v i d e f o r t h e possibiUty o f
application o f such f o a m f o r e x t i n c t i o n o f fires i n
a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces t h r o u g h t h e fire
main. F o r this purpose provision shall be made f o r a n
appropriate n u m b e r o f portable f o a m generators a t
h y d r a n t s i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces.
3.7.2.12 T h e f o a m s h a l l b e d e l i v e r e d t o t h e h e U deck the area o fw h i c h is Umited b y t h e length o f the
operated heUcopters f r o m m o n i t o r s o r f o a m generators capable o fdelivering f o a m t o all parts o f the
heUdeck i n a l l weather conditions i n w h i c h heUcopters c a n operate. T h e system shall be capable o f
deUvering a discharge rate specified i n T a b l e 3.7.2.12
for a t least five m i n u t e s .
T a b l e
Helicopter overall length,
in m
u p t o b u t n o t i n c l u d i n g 15
f r o m 15 u p t o b u t n o t i n c l u d i n g 2 4
f r o m 24 u p t o b u t n o t i n c l u d i n g 35
3.7.2.12
Discharge rate
of f o a m solution,
in 1/min
250
500
800
HeUdeck fixed f o a m fire extinguishing system o n

ships a n d F O P w i t h distinguishing m a r k H E L I D E C K , H E L I D E C K - F o r H E L I D E C K - H i n the
character o f classification shall meet the requirements
o f 6.4.1.2, P a r t X V I I " D i s t i n g u i s h i n g M a r k s a n d
Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n t h e Class N o t a t i o n Specifying Structural a n d Operational Particulars o f
Ships".
3.7.2.13 I n s t e a d o f m o n i t o r s a n d f o a m g e n erators, permanent o r portable c o m b i n a t i o n f o a m
units m a y be used respectively.
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
3.7.3 F i x e d h i g h e x p a n s i o n f o a m f i r e e x t i n g u i s h ing system.

3.7.3.1 G e n e r a l .
3.73.1.1 T h e s y s t e m s h a l l b e o f a p p r o v e d t y p e a n d
capable o f fire e x t i n c t i o n a n d tested based o n t h e p r o c e d u r e i n A p p e n d i x 1 o f I M O c i r c u l a r M S C . 1/Circ. 1384.
3.7.3.1.2 T h e s y s t e m s h a l l b e c a p a b l e o f m a n u a l
release. I t s h a l l be designed t o p r o d u c e f o a m a t t h e
r e q u i r e d a p p U c a t i o n r a t e w i t h i n 1 m i n o f release.
A u t o m a t i c release o f t h e s y s t e m s h a l l n o t be perm i t t e d unless appropriate operational measures o r
interlocks are provided t o prevent a n y local applicat i o n systems o r other systems f r o m interfering w i t h
the effectiveness o f t h e system.
3.7.3.1.3 T h e s y s t e m a n d i t s c o m p o n e n t s s h a l l b e
suitably designed t o w i t h s t a n d a m b i e n t temperature
changes, vibration, h u m i d i t y , shock, clogging a n d
c o r r o s i o n n o r m a l l y encountered o n ships, w h i c h shall
be a p p r o v e d based o n test results i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h
the requirements o f Appendix 2 t o I M O circular
M S C . l / C i r c . 1 3 8 4 . Piping, fittings a n d related c o m p o n e n t s inside t h e p r o t e c t e d spaces (except gaskets)
s h a l l b e d e s i g n e d t o w i t h s t a n d 925C.
3.7.3.1.4 S y s t e m p i p i n g , f o a m c o n c e n t r a t e s t o r a g e
tanks, components a n d pipe fittings i n contact w i t h
the f o a m concentrate shall be compatible w i t h the
f o a m concentrate a n d be constructed o f corrosion
resistant m a t e r i a l s such as stainless steel, o r e q u i v a lent. O t h e r system piping a n d f o a m generators shall
be f u l l g a l v a n i z e d steel o r e q u i v a l e n t .
3.7.3.1.5 M e a n s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d f o r t h e c r e w t o
safely check t h e q u a n t i t y o f f o a m concentrate a n d t a k e
periodic c o n t r o l samples f o r f o a m quaUty. M e a n s f o r
testing t h e operation o f t h e system a n d assuring t h e
required pressure a n d f l o w shaU be p r o v i d e d b y pressure gauges a t b o t h inlets ( w a t e r a n d f o a m concentrate
supply) a n d at the outlet o f the f o a m proportioner.
A test v a l v e shaU b e instaUed o n t h e d i s t r i b u t i o n p i p i n g
downstream o f the f o a m proportioner, along with orifices w h i c h reflect t h e calculated pressure d r o p o f t h e
system. D i s t r i b u t i o n p i p e w o r k shaU have self-draining
capabiUty a n d a U sections o f p i p i n g shaU be p r o v i d e d
w i t h connections f o r flushing, draining a n d purging
w i t h a i r . A U nozzles shaU be able t o be r e m o v e d f o r
inspection i n order t o p r o v e clear o f debris.
3.7.3.1.6 O p e r a t i n g i n s t r u c t i o n s f o r t h e s y s t e m s h a U
be displayed a t each o p e r a t i n g p o s i t i o n . Besides, i n stallation, operation a n d maintenance instructions/
plans f o r the system shaU be suppUed t o t h eship a n d be
readily available o n board. T h e above instructions shaU
be i n E n g U s h a n d t h e w o r k i n g language o f the crew.
3.7.3.1.7 I f a n i n t e r n a l c o m b u s t i o n e n g i n e i s u s e d a s
a p r i m e m o v e r f o r t h e sea w a t e r p u m p f o r t h e system,
t h e fuel o i l t a n k t o t h e p r i m e m o v e r s h a l l c o n t a i n sufficient fuel t o enable the p u m p t o r u n o n fuU l o a d f o r a t
least 3 h . Sufficient reserves o f fuel shall be available
425
o u t s i d e t h e m a c h i n e r y space o f c a t e g o r y A t o enable t h e
p u m p t o be r u n o n full l o a d f o r a n additional 15 h .
I f t h e fuel t a n k serves o t h e r i n t e r n a l c o m b u s t i o n e n gines s i m u l t a n e o u s l y , t h e t o t a l fuel t a n k capacity shaU
be adequate f o r a U connected engines.
3.7.3.1.8 T h e a r r a n g e m e n t o f f o a m g e n e r a t o r s
a n d p i p i n g i n t h e p r o t e c t e d space shall n o t interfere
w i t h access t o t h e i n s t a l l e d m a c h i n e r y f o r r o u t i n e
maintenance activities.
3.7.3.1.9 T h e s y s t e m s o u r c e o f p o w e r s u p p l y , f o a m
concentrate supply a n dmeans o f controlUng the system
shaU b e r e a d i l y accessible a n d s i m p l e t o operate, a n d
shall be arranged a t positions outside t h e protected
space n o t Ukely t o b e c u t o f f b y a fire i n t h e p r o t e c t e d
space. A l l electrical c o m p o n e n t s d i r e c t l y c o n n e c t e d t o
the f o a m generators shall h a v e a t least a n D? 5 4 r a t i n g .
3.7.3.1.10 T h e f o a m g e n e r a t o r r o o m s h a l l b e v e n tilated t o protect against overpressure, a n d shaU be
heated t o a v o i d t h e possibiUty o f freezing. T h e f o a m
generators o f t h e outside a i r f o a m system shaU be l o cated where a n adequate a m o u n t o f fresh air supply c a n
be a r r a n g e d i n c o m p U a n c e w i t h its specification.
3.7.3.1.11 T h e q u a n t i t y o f f o a m c o n c e n t r a t e
available shall be sufficient t o produce a v o l u m e o f
f o a m equal t o a t least five times t h e v o l u m e o f t h e
largest p r o t e c t e d space enclosed b y steel b u l k h e a d s ,
at then o m i n a l expansion ratio, o r enough for 3 0 m i n
o f f u l l o p e r a t i o n f o r t h e largest p r o t e c t e d space,
w h i c h e v e r is greater.
3.7.3.1.12 M a c h i n e r y s p a c e s , c a r g o p u m p - r o o m s ,
vehicle spaces, r o - r o spaces a n d special c a t e g o r y
spaces s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a u d i b l e a n d v i s u a l
a l a r m s w i t h i n t h e protected space w a r n i n g o f t h e
release o f t h e system. T h e a l a r m s s h a l l o p e r a t e f o r t h e
l e n g t h o f t i m e n e e d e d t o evacuate t h e space, b u t i n n o
c a s e l e s s t h a n 2 0 s.
3.7.3.2 S y s t e m s f o r t h e p r o t e c t i o n o f m a c h i n e r y
spaces a n d c a r g o p u m p - r o o m s .
3.7.3.2.1 T h e s y s t e m s h a l l b e s u p p U e d b y b o t h
m a i n a n d emergency sources o fp o w e r i n compUance
w i t h 4.3.1, 9.3 a n d 19.1.2 o f P a r t X I "Electrical
equipment". T h e emergency power supply shall be
p r o v i d e d f r o m o u t s i d e t h e p r o t e c t e d space.
3.7.3.2.2 S u f f i c i e n t f o a m - g e n e r a t i n g
capacity
shall be provided t o ensure t h e m i n i m u m design filling rate for t h e system is m e t a n di n addition shall be
a d e q u a t e t o c o m p l e t e l y fill t h e largest protected space
w i t h i n 1 0 m i n . W h e r e such a m a c h i n e r y space i n cludes a casing (e.g. a m a c h i n e r y space o f c a t e g o r y A
containing internal combustion machinery, and/or a
boiler, w i t h a n engine casing), t h e v o l u m e o f such
casing, above t h e level u p t o w h i c h f o a m shall be
filled t o protect the highest positioned fire r i s k objects
w i t h i n t h e m a c h i n e r y space, need n o t b e i n c l u d e d i n
the v o l u m e o f t h e p r o t e c t e d space. T h e level u p t o
w h i c h f o a m shall be filled t o protect t h e highest p o -
426
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
s i t i o n e d f i r e risk o b j e c t s w i t h i n t h e m a c h i n e r y s p a c e
1 m above the highest p o i n t o f a n y such object; o r
the lowest part o fthe casing, whichever is higher.
I n t h i s case, as a m i n i m u m , t h e e q u i p m e n t l i s t e d
i n t h e d e f i n i t i o n s o f " M a c h i n e r y spaces o f c a t e g o r y A "
a n d " F u e l o i l u n i t " i n 1.2 o f P a r t V I I " M a c h i n e r y
I n s t a l l a t i o n s " s h a l l b e r e f e r r e d t o t h e f i r e risk o b j e c t s .
3.7.3.2.3 T h e a r r a n g e m e n t o f d e l i v e r y d u c t s o f t h e
outside a i r f o a m system/foam generators o f the inside
air f o a m s y s t e m s h a l l i n g e n e r a l b e d e s i g n e d b a s e d o n
the a p p r o v a l test results i nc o m p l i a n c e w i t h 3.7.3.1.1.
A m i n i m u m o f t w o generators/ducts shall be installed
in e v e r y space c o n t a i n i n g c o m b u s t i o n engines, b o i lers, p u r i f i e r s , a n d s i m i l a r e q u i p m e n t . S m a l l w o r k s h o p s ( w o r k i n g spaces) a n d s i m i l a r spaces listed
i n 1.5.3.2.2 a n d 1.5.8.1, m a y b e c o v e r e d w i t h o n l y o n e
f o a m generator/foam delivery duct.
3.7.3.2.4 F o a m d e l i v e r y d u c t s o f t h e o u t s i d e a i r
f o a m system/foam generators o f t h e inside a i r f o a m
system shall be uniformly distributed under the upperm o s t c e i l i n g i n t h e p r o t e c t e d spaces i n c l u d i n g t h e e n g i n e
casing. T h e n u m b e r a n d l o c a t i o n o f f o a m generators
s h a l l b e a d e q u a t e t o e n s u r e a l l h i g h risk a r e a s a r e
p r o t e c t e d i n a l l p a r t s a n d a t a l l levels o f t h e spaces.
E x t r a f o a m delivery ducts/foam generators m a ybe required i n obstructed locations. T h e f o a m delivery ducts/
f o a m g e n e r a t o r s s h a l l b e a r r a n g e d w i t h a t least 1 m free
s p a c e i n f r o n t o f t h e f o a m o u t l e t s , u n l e s s t e s t e d w i t h less
clearance. T h e f o a m delivery d u c t s / f o a m generators
shall be located behind m a i n structures, a n d above a n d
a w a y f r o m engines a n d boilers i n positions w h e r e damage f r o m a n explosion is unlikely.
3.7.3.3.2 S u f f i c i e n t f o a m - g e n e r a t i n g c a p a c i t y
shall be provided t o ensure the m i n i m u m design filling rate f o r t h e system, d e t e r m i n e d d u r i n g a p p r o v a l
testing i n accordance w i t h 3.7.3.1.1, is m e t a n d i n
addition shall be adequate t o completely fill t h e largest p r o t e c t e d space w i t h i n 10 m i n . H o w e v e r , f o r
systems p r o t e c t i n g v e h i c l e a n d r o - r o spaces a n d special c a t e g o r y spaces, w i t h decks t h a t a r e r e a s o n a b l y
g a s - t i g h t a n d t h a t h a v e a d e c k h e i g h t o f 3 m o r less,
t h e f i l U n g r a t e s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t w o t h i r d s o f t h e
design filUng rate determined d u r i n g a p p r o v a l testing
in accordance w i t h 3.7.3.1.land i n addition sufficient
to fill t h e largest p r o t e c t e d space w i t h i n 10 m i n .
3.73.2.5 T h e a r r a n g e m e n t o f t h e f o a m d e l i v e r y d u c t s
o f the outside air f o a m system shall be such t h a t a fire i n
t h e p r o t e c t e d space w i l l n o t affect t h e f o a m - g e n e r a t i n g
equipment. I f t h e f o a m generators are located adjacent
to t h e p r o t e c t e d space, f o a m d e l i v e r y ducts s h a l l b e i n stalled t o a l l o w a t least 4 5 0 m m o f s e p a r a t i o n b e t w e e n
t h e g e n e r a t o r s a n d t h e p r o t e c t e d space, a n d t h e separa t i n g d i v i s i o n s s h a l l b e class " A - 6 0 " r a t e d .
3.7.3.2.6 F o a m d e l i v e r y d u c t s s h a l l b e c o n s t r u c t e d
o f s t e e l h a v i n g a t h i c k n e s s o f n o t less t h a n 5 m m . I n
a d d i t i o n , stainless steel d a m p e r s (single o r m u l t i - b l a d e d )
w i t h a t h i c k n e s s o f n o t less t h a n 3 m m s h a l l b e i n s t a l l e d
at t h e openings i n t h e b o u n d a r y bulkheads o r decks
b e t w e e n t h e f o a m g e n e r a t o r s a n d t h e p r o t e c t e d space.
T h e d a m p e r s s h a l l b e a u t o m a t i c a l l y o p e r a t e d (electrically, pneumatically o r hydraulically) b y means o f
remote c o n t r o l o f the f o a m generator related t o them.
The dampers shall be arranged t o r e m a i n closed until
the f o a m generators begin operating.
3.7.33.5 T h e f o a m d e U v e r y d u c t s / f o a m g e n e r a t o r s
shaU b e a r r a n g e d w i t h a t least 1 m free space i n f r o n t o f
t h e f o a m o u t l e t s , u n l e s s t e s t e d w i t h less c l e a r a n c e .
3.733.6 T h edesign a n d arrangement o f outside
air f o a m fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s s h a l l b e i n c o m pUance w i t h 3.7.3.2.5 a n d 3.7.3.2.6.
3.73.4 S y s t e m s u s i n g o u t s i d e a i r w i t h g e n e r a t o r s
installed inside t h e p r o t e c t e d space.
3.73.4.1 T o p r o t e c t s p a c e s s p e c i f i e d i n 3 . 7 . 3 . 2
a n d 3.7.3.3, t h e fixed h i g h e x p a n s i o n f o a m fire extinguishing systems w i t h f o a m generators using outside a i r
b u t w i t h generators located inside t h e p r o t e c t e d space
a n d s u p p U e d b y f r e s h a i r d u c t s m a y b e a p p U e d . S u c h systems shaU be equivalent t o t h e outside air f o a m systems.
3.73.4.2 F o r a c c e p t a n c e , t h e f o l l o w i n g m i n i m u m
design features shall be considered:
.1 l o w e r a n d u p p e r a c c e p t a b l e a i r p r e s s u r e a n d
f l o w rate i n supply ducts;
.2 f u n c t i o n a n d r e U a b i U t y o f d a m p e r a r r a n g e m e n t s ;
3 arrangements a n d distribution o f air delivery
ducts including f o a m outlets; a n d
.4 s e p a r a t i o n o f a i r d e U v e r y d u c t s f r o m t h e p r o tected space.
3.7.3.3 S y s t e m s f o r t h e p r o t e c t i o n o f v e h i c l e , r o ro, special c a t e g o r y a n d c a r g o spaces.

3.7.3.3.1 T h e s y s t e m s h a l l b e s u p p U e d b y t h e
ship's m a i n p o w e r source.
3.7.3.3.3 T h e s y s t e m m a y b e d i v i d e d i n t o s e c t i o n s .
H o w e v e r , the capacity a n d design o fthe system shall
be based o n t h e p r o t e c t e d space d e m a n d i n g t h e
greatest v o l u m e o f f o a m . A d j a c e n t p r o t e c t e d spaces
need n o t be served simultaneously i f t h e boundaries
b e t w e e n t h e spaces a r e " A " class d i v i s i o n s .
3.7.33.4 A m i n i m u m o f t w o f o a m d e U v e r y d u c t s o f
the outside a i r f o a m system/foam generators o f t h e
inside a i r f o a m s y s t e m shaU b e i n s t a l l e d i n e v e r y space.
The arrangement o f f o a m deUvery ducts/foam generators shaU i n general be designed based o n t h e app r o v a l test results a n d be arranged t o u n i f o r m l y
d i s t r i b u t e f o a m i n t h e p r o t e c t e d spaces, a n d t h e l a y o u t
shall take into consideration obstructions that c a n be
expected w h e n cargo is loaded o n board. A s a m i n i m u m , ducts/generators shaU be led to/located o n every
second deck, i n c l u d i n g m o v a b l e decks. T h e h o r i z o n t a l
spacing o f the ducts/generators shaU ensure r a p i d supply o f f o a m t o a U p a r t s o f t h e p r o t e c t e d space. T h i s
shaU b e estabUshed o n t h e basis o f f u l l scale tests.
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
3.8 C A R B O N D I O X I D E S M O T H E R I N G
427
S Y S T E M
3.8.1 G e n e r a l .
3.8.1.1 T h e a m o u n t o f c a r b o n d i o x i d e , i n k g ,
G=\,19Vq>
where
(3.8.1.1)
V = r a t e d v o l u m e o f t h e p r o t e c t e d s p a c e ( r e f e r t o 3.1.2.2,
3.1.2.5), i n m ;
= factor equal to:
0,3 f o r d r y c a r g o h o l d s a n d o t h e r s p a c e s , e x c e p t t h o s e
indicated below;
0,35 f o r m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s , t h e r a t e d v o l u m e o f w h i c h i s
determined with regard t o the full v o l u m e o f casings;
0,4 f o r m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s , t h e r a t e d v o l u m e o f w h i c h i s
determined without a n yregard to the volume o f
casings f r o m the level a tw h i c h the horizontal area o f
t h e c a s i n g s i s e q u a l t o , o r less t h a n , 40 p e r c e n t o f t h e
horizontal cross sectional area o f t h e space itself
measured in the middle between the floor covering o f
the inner b o t t o m a n d t h e trunk b o t t o m a n d store
r o o m s s p e c i f i e d i n 1.5.3.2.2 ( r e f e r a l s o t o F o o t n o t e 3
t o T a b l e 3.1.2.1);
0,45 f o r v e h i c l e s s p a c e s a n d r o - r o s p a c e s w h i c h a r e n o t
special category spaces a n d a r e capable o f being
sealed, a n d f o r w h i c h a t least t w o thirds o f theg a s
required f o rtherelevant space shall b e introduced
w i t h i n 10 m i n .
3
F o r m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s s u c h v a l u e o f t h e f a c t o r cp
s h a l l b e t a k e n w h i c h r e s u l t s i n a g r e a t e r v a l u e G. I n
s h i p s o f less t h a n 2 0 0 0 t o n s g r o s s t o n n a g e , e x c e p t f o r
passenger ships, factors 0,35 a n d 0,4 m a y be reduced
t o 0,3 a n d 0 , 3 5 , respectively, i f t w o o r m o r e m a
c h i n e r y spaces, w h i c h a r e n o t f u l l y separated f r o m
each o t h e r , a r e c o n s i d e r e d as f o r m i n g o n e space.
3.8.1.2 W h e r e a c a r b o n d i o x i d e s m o t h e r i n g p i p i n g
is u s e d as a s m o k e d e t e c t i o n o n e , t h e c a r b o n d i o x i d e
distributing m a n i f o l d m a y be placed together w i t h t h e
C 0 release c o n t r o l s f o r e a c h space p r o t e c t e d b y t h e
s m o k e detection system near its detecting units. H o w
ever, i t is r e c o m e n d e d t h a t t h e p r o v i s i o n o f such
m a n i f o l d shall n o t preclude t h e possibility o f dischar
g i n g C 0 i n t o a n y o f t h e p r o t e c t e d spaces d i r e c t y f r o m
the fire extinction station, i f t w o o r m o r e m a c h i n e r y
spaces, w h i c h a r e n o t f u l l y s e p a r a t e d f r o m e a c h o t h e r ,
are c o n s i d e r e d as f o r m i n g o n e space.
2
3.8.1.3 T h e t o t a l c r o s s - s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f m a n i f o l d s
a n d t h e cross-section o f the distributing m a n i f o l d shall
be n o t m o r e t h a n t h e s u mo f t h e cross-sections o f t h e
cylinder valves simultaneously o p e n i n g f o r t h e largest
b y v o l u m e p r o t e c t e d space ( f o r high-pressure systems)
a n d n o t m o r e t h a n t h e cross-section o f t h e t a n k dis
charge valve ( f o r low-pressure systems).
3.8.1.4 T h e c r o s s - s e c t i o n s o f d i s t r i b u t i n g p i p e s f o r
i n d i v i d u a l p r o t e c t e d spaces shall b e n o t m o r e t h a n
the s u m o f t h e cross-sections o f cylinder discharge
valves s i m u l t a n e o u s l y o p e n i n g f o r t h e space c o n
cerned (for high-pressure system) o r n o t m o r e t h a n
the cross-section o f the t a n k discharge valve (for l o w pressure systems). T h e s u m o f t h e cross-sections o f
the discharge pipes shall n o t exceed t h e cross-section
o f t h e supply pipe except w h e r e t h e calculated pres

s u r e d r o p i n a n y p i p e c r o s s s e c t i o n i s n o t less
than 1 M P a .
3.8.1.5 T h e s u p p l y o f 8 5 p e r c e n t o f t h e r a t e d
amount o f carbon dioxide within n o t more
t h a n 2 m i n s h a l l b e e n s u r e d f o r m a c h i n e r y spaces.
F o r c o n t a i n e r a n d g e n e r a l c a r g o spaces ( p r i m a r i l y
i n t e n d e d t o c a r r y a v a r i e t y o f c a r g o e s s e p a r a t e l y se
c u r e d o r p a c k e d ) as w e l l as f o r spaces specified
i n 1.5.4.3.1 a n d 1.5.4.4.1, a t least t w o t h i r d s o f t h e gas
shall b e discharged i n t o t h e space w i t h i n 1 0 m i n . F o r
s o l i d b u l k c a r g o spaces, a t least t w o t h i r d s o f t h e gas
shall b e discharged i n t o t h e space w i t h i n 2 0 m i n . T h e
system controls shall be arranged t o allow o n e third,
t w o thirds o r t h e entire q u a n t i t y o f gas t o be dis
charged based o n t h e loading c o n d i t i o n o f the hold.
3.8.1.6 T h e t h i c k n e s s o f p i p e w a l l s s h a l l b e c a l c u l a t e d
i n accordance w i t h 2.3, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d Piping";
i n t h i s case, t h e d e s i g n pressure p i s a s s u m e d as e q u a l t o
the design pressure o f cylinders a n d tankers according
t o 3 . 8 . 2 . 1 a n d 3 . 8 . 3 . 1 a n d s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h e v a
lues specified i n T a b l e 2.3.8 o f t h e a b o v e P a r t .
3.8.1.7 C a r b o n d i o x i d e s h a l l b e s u p p U e d t o t h e
p r o t e c t e d spaces t h r o u g h n o z z l e s a r r a n g e d i n t h e
u p p e r p a r t o f these spaces. T h e p i p i n g f o r t h e dis
t r i b u t i o n o f fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m shall be ar
ranged a n d discharge nozzles so positioned that a
u n i f o r m distribution o f carbon dioxide is obtained.
W h e r e t h e f l o o r plates o f t h e m a c h i n e r y spaces o f
category A are placed higher t h a n o n e metre above
the t a n k top, a n u m b e r o fnozzles ( a b o u t 15 per cent
o f the total n u m b e r ) shall be fitted i n t h e upper
p o r t i o n o f t h e space b e l o w t h e plates.
3.8.1.8 T h e t o t a l s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f t h e o u t l e t s o f t h e
n o z z l e s o f t h e space c o n c e r n e d s h a U n o t e x c e e d 8 5 p e r c e n t
o f the total cross-section o f the distributing p i p i n g .
3.8.1.9 P e r f o r a t e d p i p e s m a y b e u s e d i n s t e a d o f
nozzles i n silencers, exhaust-gas boilers a n d s m o k e
stacks. T h e t o t a l area o f pipe p e r f o r a t i o n s shall be
b y 1 0 p e r c e n t less t h a n t h e p i p e c r o s s - s e c t i o n .
3.8.1.10 I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e a l a r m s r e q u i r e d
b y 4.3.4, signal whistles operated b y t h e released
c a r b o n dioxide pressure shall be fitted o n pipes laid i n
the spaces Usted i n 4 . 3 . 1 .
3.8.1.11 T h e s e a U n g m a t e r i a l s f o r t h e v a l v e s a n d
flexible hoses shall be usable a t l o w temperatures
d o w n t o - 6 0 C.
3.8.1.12 I n p i p i n g s e c t i o n s w h e r e v a l v e a r r a n g e
m e n t s i n t r o d u c e s e c t i o n s o f c l o s e d p i p i n g , s u c h sec
tions shall be fitted w i t h a pressure reUef valve a n d
the o u t l e t o f the v a l v e shall be l e d t o o p e n deck.
3.8.1.13 A l l d i s c h a r g e p i p i n g , p i p e f i t t i n g s a n d
nozzles i n t h e p r o t e c t e d spaces shall b e c o n s t r u c t e d o f
materials having a melting temperature which ex
c e e d s 9 2 5 C. T h e p i p i n g a n d a s s o c i a t e d e q u i p m e n t
shall be adequately supported.
428
Rules
3.8.1.14 A f i t t i n g s h a l l b e i n s t a l l e d i n t h e d i s charge piping t o p e r m i t t h e a i r testing.

3.8.2 H i g h - p r e s s u r e s y s t e m .
3.8.2.1 T h e n u m b e r o f c y l i n d e r s f o r s t o r i n g l i q u i d
c a r b o n d i o x i d e s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d d e p e n d i n g o n t h e filling
ratio ( a m o u n t o f carbon dioxide p e r 1 1 o f cylinder capacity) w h i c h is n o t t o b e m o r e than 0,675 kg/1 at t h e
design cylinder pressure 12,5 M P a a n d o v e r a n d n o t
m o r e t h a n 0 , 7 5 k g / 1 at t h e cylinder design pressure
15 M P a a n d over.
W h e n filling cyUnders, deviation o f n o t m o r e
t h a n b y 0,5 k g f r o m t h e r a t e d a m o u n t p e r cy U n d e r
is p e r m i t t e d .
I n cases specified i n 3.1.3.3 a n d 3 . 8 . 5 t h e f i l U n g
ratio shall be reduced b y 0,075 kg/1 against t h e above
values.
3.8.2.2 T h e c y U n d e r s s h a l l b e p l a c e d v e r t i c a l l y i n
rows o n the pads w h i c h m a y be made o f w o o d a n d
shall be accessible f o r i n s p e c t i o n a n d c h e c k i n g o f t h e
a m o u n t o f carbon dioxide contained therein. E a c h
cyUnder shall be m a r k e d w i t h its ordinal number.
P i l o t cyUnders shall be fitted i n t h e fire e x t i n c t i o n
station a n d be coated w i t h a distinguished paint.
3.8.2.3 A p i p e c o n n e c t i n g a c y U n d e r w i t h a
m a n i f o l d shall be as a r u l e seamless a n d m a d e o f r e d
copper. B u t use o f special flexible hoses m a d e o f
approved materials is permitted.
A n o n - r e t u r n v a l v e s h a l l b e fitted o n t h e p i p e
connecting the cyUnder a n d the manifold.
Arrangement o fthe manifolds shall provide their
complete draining.
3.8.2.4 A m a n i f o l d o f t h e c a r b o n d i o x i d e e x t i n c t i o n s t a t i o n s h a l l b e fitted w i t h a p r e s s u r e g a u g e
g r a d u a t e d t o a v a l u e a t least 1 M P a i n excess o f t h e
h y d r a u l i c test pressure o f t h e c a r b o n d i o x i d e c y l i n ders. T h e v a l u e o f t h e pressure g a u g e scale d i v i s i o n
shall n o t exceed 0,5 M P a .
3.8.2.5 A c a r b o n d i o x i d e e x t i n c t i o n s t a t i o n s h a l l
have arrangements f o r weighing t h e cyUnders o r
measuring t h e level o f Uquid therein.
3.8.2.6 V a l v e s o f c y U n d e r s .
3.8.2.6.1 T h e v a l v e s h a l l h a v e p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e s
complying w i t h the following requirements:
protective diaphragms shall break a t a pressure
r i s e i n t h e c y U n d e r s u p t o ( 1 , 3 0,1);?, i n M P a ( w h e r e
p is design pressure o f t h e cyUnder). F o rvalves w i t h
slotted diaphragms w h i c h are additionally fitted w i t h
protective diaphragms t h e breaking pressure o f slotted d i a p h r a g m s shall be a t least 1 M P a m o r e t h a n t h e
highest value o f the protective diaphragm breaking
pressure;
there shall be p r o v i d e d a checking device t o i n dicate t h a t t h e protective device h a s operated.
3.8.2.6.2 W h e r e t h e l e v e r t y p e d e v i c e i s u s e d t o
o p e n t h e valve this device shall ensure t h e full opening o f t h e valve b y t u r n i n g t h e lever t o a n angle
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
n o t m o r e t h a n 90 a n d s h a l l p e r m i t t h e v a l v e s t o b e
opened individually o r b y groups.
3.8.2.6.3 T h e c y U n d e r v a l v e s s h a l l b e fitted w i t h
scarfed pipes c u t short a t 5 t o 15 m m f r o m t h e c y Under b o t t o m ; t h e inside diameter o f t h e said valve
pipes a n d o f t h e pipes connecting t h e cyUnder valves
w i t h a m a n i f o l d s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 1 0 m m .
3.8.2.6.4 I f t h e d e s i g n o f t h e v a l v e s o f p i l o t c y Unders differs f r o m that o f t h e valves o f a l l other
cyUnders, they shall be coated w i t h a paint o f another
colour a n d have the inscription "starting".
3.8.2.7 T h e g a s f r o m t h e p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e s o f
cyUnders shall be discharged:
.1 t o t h e a t m o s p h e r e b e y o n d t h e b o u n d a r i e s o f
the station t h r o u g h a separate pipe provided w i t h a n
audible a l a r m at the outlet;
.2 t o t h e d i s t r i b u t i o n m a n i f o l d w h e r e p r o v i s i o n
shall be made for:
t w o pipes, o n e o fw h i c h is open-ended a n d fitted
w i t h a shut-off valve, a n dtheother isprovided w i t h a
protective diaphragm;
a signalling device t o indicate t h e presence o f
pressure i n t h e m a n i f o l d whose readings shall be
t r a n s m i t t e d t o t h e space w h e r e w a t c h keepers a r e
present a l l t h e time.
I n t h i s case, a c h e c k i n g device t o i n d i c a t e t h a t t h e
pro-tective device h a s operated is n o t required f o r t h e
valves.
3.8.3 L o w p r e s s u r e s y s t e m .
3.8.3.1 T h e r a t e d a m o u n t o f U q u i d c a r b o n d i o x ide shall be stored i n t a n k (tanks) a t t h e w o r k i n g
p r e s s u r e o f a b o u t 1,8 t o 2 , 2 M P a w h i c h i s e n s u r e d b y
m a i n t a i n i n g a t e m p e r a t u r e o f a b o u t 1 8 C.
The n o r m a l Uquid charge i n the container shall
be U m i t e d t o p r o v i d e sufficient v a p o u r space t o a l l o w
for expansion o f t h e Uquid under t h e m a x i m u m storage temperatures t h a n c a n be obtained corresponding t o t h e setting o fthe pressure reUef valves b u t shall
n o t exceed 9 5 p e r cent o f t h e v o l u m e t r i c capacity o f
the container.
3.8.3.2 A t a n k s h a l l b e s e r v e d b y t w o s e l f - c o n tained refrigerating plants, each consisting o f o n e
compressor, a condenser a n d a cooUng battery.
The refrigerating capacity a n d t h e automatic
c o n t r o l o f each u n i t shall be so as t o m a i n t a i n t h e
required temperature under conditions o f continuous
o p e r a t i o n d u r i n g 2 4 h a t s e a t e m p e r a t u r e s u p t o 3 2 C
a n d a m b i e n t a i r t e m p e r a t u r e s u p t o 4 5 C.
W h e n o n e o fthe plants is rendered inoperative, t h e
other shaU be automaticany b r o u g h t i n t o operation.
C o o l i n g batteries shall be separate f o r each plant
o r c o m m o n , b u t t h e y s h a l l c o n s i s t o f n o t less t h a n
t w o isolated sections, each h a v i n g a surface designed
for full output.
I n o t h e r respects, a refrigerating p l a n t shall m e e t
the requirements o f P a r t X I I "Refrigerating Plants"
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
429
for unclassed plants (except f o r 3.3, 3.4, 3.5

a n d 6.2.6), as w e l l as those o f 2.1.1, 2.3.11, 2.3.12
a n d 7.2.2 f o rclassed plants.
T h e s y s t e m c o n t r o l devices a n d t h e refrigerating
plants shall be located w i t h i n t h e same r o o m where
t h e pressure vessels a r e s t o r e d .
3.8.3.3 A t a n k s h a l l b e f i t t e d w i t h :
branches w i t h shut-off valves for filling t h e tank;
a discharge pipe;
a device f o r direct m o n i t o r i n g o f U q u i d c a r b o n
dioxide level, m o u n t e d o n t h e tank;
t w o reUef valves w i t h discharge pipes laid t o t h e
o p e n a i r a n d a r r a n g e d so as t o p r o v i d e d i s c o n n e c t i o n
o f a n y o f t h e m w i t h the remaining o n e connected
w i t h the container;
a pressure gauge;
h i g h ( n o t m o r e t h a n setting o f t h e reUef valve)
a n d l o w ( n o t l e s s t h a n 1,8 M P a ) p r e s s u r e ;
lowest acceptable level a l a r m device.
T h e setting o f each reUef valve shall be
a t l e a s t 1,1 1,2/?, a n d i t s t h r o u g h p u t s h a l l b e s u c h
that pressure i n t h e t a n k w i t h t h e valve fully o p e n
m a y n o t e x c e e d 1,35/? ( h e r e p i s w o r k i n g p r e s s u r e i n
the tank, i n M P a ) .
T h e value o fthe design pressure o fthe t a n k shall
be assumed e q u a l t o t h e greatest Ufting pressure o f a
reUef valve.
3.8.3.4 I f f i t t e d o u t s i d e t h e t a n k , t h e l e v e l g a u g e
pipe o f t h e device f o r r e m o t e m o n i t o r i n g o f t h e level
o f Uquid shall be shut o f f w i t h t w o valves (open
throughout the period o f operation) a n d provided
w i t h o n e c o n t r o l h y d r a n t o n l y , n o m i n a l l y filled
(100 p e r cent). T h e pipe a n d the c o n t r o l h y d r a n t shall
be t h e r m a l l y insulated.
3.8.3.5 I f t h e s y s t e m s e r v e s m o r e t h a n o n e s p a c e ,
means f o r c o n t r o l o f discharge quantities o f C 0
shall be p r o v i d e d , e.g. a u t o m a t i c t i m e r o r accurate
level indicators located a t t h e c o n t r o l position(s). I t
shall be also possible t o regulate t h e discharge
manually.
3.8.3.6 T h e t a n k a n d p i p e s l e d t h e r e f r o m a n d
p e r m a n e n t l y filled w i t h c a r b o n dioxide shall be p r o vided w i t h heat insulation preventing operation o f
the relief valve w i t h i n 2 4 h after t h einstallation is dee n e r g i z e d , a t t h e a m b i e n t t e m p e r a t u r e o f 4 5 C a n d
initial pressure equal t o t h e starting pressure o f t h e
refrigerating plant.
3.8.3.7 M a t e r i a l f o r a t a n k s h a l l m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.3, P a r t X I I I " M a t e r i a l s " . W e l d s shall
be r a d i o g r a p h e d as r e q u i r e d f o r class I I i n T a ble 3.3.2-2, P a r t X I V " W e l d i n g " .
3.8.3.8 S a f e t y r e U e f d e v i c e s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d i n
each section o f pipe that m a y be isolated b y block
valves a n d i n w h i c h there could be a build-up o f
2
pressure i n excess o f t h e design pressure o f a n y o f t h e

components.
3.8.3.9 T h e a l a r m s y s t e m s h a l l g i v e v i s u a l a n d
audible a l a r m signals:
w h e n t h e m a x i m u m ( n o t higher t h a n t h e setting
o f t h e r e U e f v a l v e ) a n d m i n i m u m ( n o t less
t h a n 18 b a r ) pressure is reached i n t h e tank;
w h e n the level o f liquid carbon dioxide i n the
t a n k is reduced t o t h e m i n i m u m acceptable level;
i n case o f r e f r i g e r a t i n g p l a n t f a i l u r e ;
w h e n t h e discharge o f c a r b o n dioxide begins.
T h e a l a r m signals shall be given a t t h e m a i n fire
c o n t r o l station a n d i n engineers' cabins.
3.8.4 R e l e a s e c o n t r o l .
3.8.4.1 C o n t r o l s o f s y s t e m s p r o t e c t i n g t h o s e
spaces, w h i c h a r e n o r m a l l y m a n n e d (refer t o 4.3.1),
shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 3.8.4.2.
3.8.4.2 T w o s e p a r a t e c o n t r o l s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d
f o r releasing c a r b o n d i o x i d e i n t o a protected space
and t o ensure the activation o f the a l a r m . O n e c o n t r o l
shall be used f o r opening t h e valve o f the piping
w h i c h conveys t h e gas i n t o t h e protected space a n d a
second c o n t r o l shall be used t o discharge t h egas f r o m
its storage containers. Positive means shall be p r o vided so that they c a n o n l y be operated i nthat order.
T h e t w o c o n t r o l s s h a l l b e l o c a t e d inside a release b o x
clearly i d e n t i f i e d f o r t h e p a r t i c u l a r space. I f t h e b o x
containing the controls is t o be locked, a k e y t o the
b o x shall be i n a break-glass-type enclosure conspicuously located adjacent t o t h e b o x .
3.8.4.3 T h e p i p e s s u p p l y i n g c a r b o n d i o x i d e f r o m
p i l o t cyUnders t o p r o t e c t e d spaces s h a l l b e f i t t e d w i t h
shutt-off valves i n t e r l o c k e d w i t h a device o p e n i n g
pilot cyUnders.
3.8.4.4 I n l o w p r e s s u r e s y s t e m s , r e l e a s e o f c a r b o n
dioxide shall be manual. W h e r e a n automatic control
system is provided t o supply rated a m o u n t o f carbon
d i o x i d e t o p r o t e c t e d spaces, m a n u a l r e g u l a t i o n o f gas
supply shall also be provided.
W h e r e t h e s y s t e m serves m o r e t h a n o n e spaces,
faciUties shall be p r o v i d e d t o c o n t r o l t h e a m o u n t o f
released c a r b o n d i o x i d e such as a n a u t o m a t i c f l o w meter o r a precision level indicator located a t the
control station(s).
3.8.5 L o c a l c a r b o n d i o x i d e f i r e e x t i n c t i o n
stations.
I n w e l l - f o u n d e d cases l o c a l s t a t i o n s w i t h n o t
m o r e t h a n five cyUnders ( n o t m o r e t h a n 125 k g o f
carbon dioxide) m a y be permitted f o r certain protected spaces.
I n a m a c h i n e r y space c a r b o n d i o x i d e cyUnders
m a y be placed f o r fire p r o t e c t i o n o f crankcases a n d
silencers o f i n t e r n a l c o m b u s t i o n engines, o f s m o k e
stacks a n d o t h e r enclosed c o m p a r t m e n t s .
430
Rules
3.9 E Q U I V A L E N T K I R K E X T I N G U I S H I N G S Y S T E M S F O R
MACHINERY SPACES A N D CARGO P U M P R O O M S
M E N T I O N E D I N 1.5.7.1
3.9.1 F i x e d g a s f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s e q u i v a lent t o c a r b o n dioxide s m o t h e r i n g systems shall be o f

an approved type complying w i t h the provisions o f
I M O circular M S C / C i r c . 8 4 8 "Revised GuideUnes f o r
the A p p r o v a l o f Equivalent F i x e d G a s Fire-Extinguishing Systems, as Referred t o i n S O L A S - 7 4 , f o r
M a c h i n e r y Spaces a n d C a r g o P u m p R o o m s " , c o n sidering t h e amendments introduced b y I M O circular
MSC.l/Circ.1267.
3.9.2 F i x e d w a t e r - m i s t f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s
shaU be o f a n approved type c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e p r o v i sions o f I M O circular M S C / C i r c . 1 1 6 5 "Revised G u i d e Unes f o r t h e A p p r o v a l o f E q u i v a l e n t W a t e r - B a s e d F i r e E x t i n g u i s h i n g Systems f o r M a c h i n e r y Spaces a n d C a r g o
P u m p - R o o m s " , considering theamendments introduced
b y I M O circulars M S C . 1/Circ. 1269, M S C . 1/Circ. 1385
and MSC.l/Circ.1386.
3.10 D R Y P O W D E R
S Y S T E M
3.10.1 G e n e r a l .
3.10.1.1 A n e x t i n g u i s h i n g p o w d e r a p p r o v e d b y
the Register f o rthis purpose shall be used i n the d r y
powder system.
3.10.1.2 N i t r o g e n o r o t h e r i n e r t g a s a p p r o v e d b y
t h e R e g i s t e r f o r this p u r p o s e s h a l l be used as a p r o pellent gas.
3.10.1.3 T h e s y s t e m s h a l l c o n s i s t o f :
powder installations that contain d r y powder
containers, propellent gas cyUnders a n da distribution
manifold;
hose stations;
pipes a n d fittings f o r b r i n g i n g t h e system i n t o
action a n d p o w d e r supply t o t h e hose stations.
3.10.1.4 P r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e f o r a r e m o t e
release o f t h e s y s t e m f r o m a n y hose s t a t i o n .
T h e system shall be brought into action i n
n o t m o r e t h a n 3 0 s after t h e o p e n i n g o f t h e release
cyUnder a t the remotest hose station operating f r o m
the powder installation concerned.
3.10.2 Q u a n t i t y o f d r y p o w d e r a n d p r o p e l l e n t g a s .
Capacity a n d number o fnozzles.
3.10.2.1 A r a t e d q u a n t i t y o f d r y p o w d e r s h a l l b e
stored i neach container o fthe powder installationt o
provide a m i n i m u m 4 5 c o n t i n u o u s discharge t i m e a t
rated consumption f o r a l l attached monitors a n d
h a n d hose Unes.
3.10.2.2 E a c h n o z z l e s h a l l b e c a p a b l e o f d i s c h a r g e
a t a r a t e n o t less t h a n 3 , 5 k g / s , t h e p o w d e r t h r o w
r a n g e b e i n g n o t less t h a n 8 m . I n d e t e r m i n i n g a
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
m a x i m u m distance o f coverage o feach h a n d hose Une

the length o fits hose shall be taken into account.
T h e capacity o f each fixed m o n i t o r shall be a t
least 1 0 k g / s , m a x i m u m distance o f coverage f o r
monitors having a capacity 10, 25 a n d 4 5 kg/s shall
be 10, 3 0 a n d 4 0 m , respectively.
3.10.2.3 T h e n u m b e r o f h a n d h o s e U n e s a n d
m o n i t o r s shall p r o v i d e t h e delivery o f t h e d r y chemical powder t o a n ypart o fthe cargo tank deck a n d
cargo p i p i n g f r o m t w oh a n d hose Unes o r a c o m b i nation m o n i t o r / h a n d hose Une.
A t least o n e h a n d hose line o r m o n i t o r shall be
located a f t o f t h e cargo area.
3.10.2.4 I n g a s c a r r i e r s o n e m o n i t o r s h a l l b e
provided i n t h e cargo area t o protect cargo m a n i f o l d
a n d capable o f discharge locally a n d remotely.
3.10.2.5 D r y p o w d e r f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m f o r
the p r o t e c t i o n o f spaces s t i p u l a t e d i n 1.5.3.2.2, s h a l l
e n s u r e t h e d e l i v e r y o f n o t less t h a n 0 , 5 k g p o w d e r / m
f o r n o t m o r e t h a n 1 0 s.
3.10.2.6 T h e q u a n t i t y o f t h e p r o p e l l e n t g a s s h a l l
p r o v i d e f o r a single e n t i r e release o f t h e d r y p o w d e r
f r o m the powder container.
3.10.3 P o w d e r f i r e e x t i n c t i o n s t a t i o n s .
3.10.3.1 T h e p o w d e r f i r e e x t i n c t i o n s t a t i o n s s h a l l
be p o s i t i o n e d o n t h e deck i n t h e cargo area.
3.10.3.2 T h e d r y p o w d e r s y s t e m s h a l l c o n s i s t o f a t
least t w o self-contained s t a t i o n a n d i n gas carriers
w i t h a c a r g o c a p a c i t y o f less t h a n 1 0 0 0 m o n l y o n e
such station m a y be fitted.
3.10.3.3 S h i p s f i t t e d w i t h b o w o r s t e r n c a r g o
loading a n d discharge m a n i f o l d shall be provided
w i t h a n a d d i t i o n a l d r yp o w d e r fire e x t i n c t i o n station
complete w i t h a t least o n e m o n i t o r a n d o n e h a n d
hose Une.
3.10.3.4 W h e r e a f i r e e x t i n c t i o n s t a t i o n h a s t w o
or m o r e hose stations, a n independent pipe w i t h release v a l v e s s h a l l ensure p r o p e r d r y p o w d e r d e l i v e r y
f r o m the m a n i f o l d t o each station.
T h e p o w d e r fire e x t i n c t i o n station shall p r o v i d e
for independent a n d simultaneous operation o f a l l
those stations.
3.10.4 H o s e s t a t i o n .
3.10.4.1 E a c h h o s e s t a t i o n s h a l l c o n s i s t o f r e mote-release cyUnders w i t h a n o n - k i n k a b l e h a n d hose
Une n o t m o r e t h a n 33 m i n length o r o f a m o n i t o r .
3.10.4.2 A l l h o s e s t a t i o n e q u i p m e n t , o t h e r t h a n a
monitor, shall be stored i n a watertight b o x o r
cabinet.
3.10.4.3 E a c h n o z z l e s h a l l b e f i t t e d w i t h a n o n / o f f
o p e r a t i o n a n d discharge device.
3.10.4.4 T h e c r o s s - s e c t i o n o f t h e n o z z l e s h a l l b e
e q u a l t o t h a t o f t h e f i r e h o s e l i n e o r less t h a n t h a t b y
n o t m o r e t h a n 5 0 p e r cent.
3.10.4.5 R e l e a s e c y U n d e r s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h
pressure gauges.
3
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
431
3.10.4.6 I n s t r u c t i o n s o n p u t t i n g t h e s y s t e m i n t o
action shall be available at the hose station.
3.10.5 D r y p o w d e r c o n t a i n e r s , p i p e s a n d f i t t i n g s .
3.10.5.1 P r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e i n t h e c o n t a i n e r
for a d r y p o w d e r discharge pipe c u t short a t a b o u t
100 m m f r o m t h e b o t t o m .
3.10.5.2 A d e v i c e s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d i n t h e l o w e r
part o f t h e container f o r gas f l o w i n t o t h e container
preventing thep o w d e r f r o m flowing back into t h egas
pipe.
3.10.5.3 T h e f i l l i n g r a t i o o f t h e c o n t a i n e r s s h a l l b e
t a k e n equal t o n o t m o r e t h a n 0,95.
3.10.5.4 P i p e s a n d f i t t i n g s s h a l l h a v e n o c o n
tractions a n d a b r u p t expansions o f cross-section.
3.10.5.5 T h e c r o s s - s e c t i o n a l a r e a o f t h e m a n i f o l d
i n t h e p o w d e r i n s t a l l a t i o n s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h e
total area o f t h e pipes connected thereto f o r si
m u l t a n e o u s discharge o f d r y p o w d e r o r shall be
n o t m o r e t h a n twice t h a t area.
3.10.5.6 P r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e o n t h e d i s
tribution manifold f o r a n arrangement f o r purging
the pipes after use.
3.10.5.7 A b e n d i n g r a d i u s o f t h e d r y p o w d e r p i p e
s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 1 0 p i p e d i a m e t e r s .
3.10.5.8 T h e d r y p o w d e r s h a l l b e d i s c h a r g e d i n t o
t h e spaces i n d i c a t e d i n 1.5.3.2.2 t h r o u g h nozzles.
Their construction, arrangement a n d n u m b e r shall
provide for u n i f o r m spraying o fpowder i n the entire
v o l u m e o f t h e space. T h e pressure a t t h e r e m o t e s t
nozzle shall be t a k e n a t least equal t o a m i n i m u m
pressure necessary f o r effective spraying o f p o w d e r .
3.11 A E R O S O L K I R K E X T I N G U I S H I N G
S Y S T E M
3.11.1 G e n e r a l .
3.11.1.1 T h e f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g a e r o s o l ( w h i c h i s
produced while c o m b u s t i o n o f solid fuel aerosol
generating compounds) generators used i n t h e aero
sol fire extinguishing systems shall be o f t h e type
3.11.1.2 T h e a e r o s o l f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m
shall include:
generators o f fire extinguishing aerosol;
r e m o t e c o n t r o l device;
predischarge alarms;
cables.
3.11.1.3 D e s i g n m a s s o f t h e a e r o s o l g e n e r a t i n g
agent, i n k g , shall be determined b y t h e f o r m u l a
G = ( V + i
VarfParfPa^krq
(3.11.1.3)
where
V =
=
n =
j =
Par/
P =
q =
V
d e s i g n (net) v o l u m e o f t h e p r o t e c t e d s p a c e , i n m ;
v o l u m e o f t h e y ' - t h a i r r e c e i v e r , i n m , r e f e r t o 3.1.2.5;
n u m b e r o f air receivers i n the protected space;
serial n u m b e r o f air receiver;
w o r k i n g p r e s s u r e i n t h e y'-th a i r r e c e i v e r , i n M P a ;
atmospheric pressure, i n M P a ;
n o r m a t i v e fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g capacity o f aerosol,
in kg/m ;
= f a c t o r o f s a f e t y e q u a l t o 1,5.
3
aTj
3.11.1.4 N o r m a t i v e f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g c o n c e n t r a
tion o faerosol depends o n the type o fgenerator a n d
usually doesn't exceed 0,2 k g / m .
3.11.1.5 T h e f o l l o w i n g m e a s u r e s s h a l l b e t a k e n a t
system actuation:
automatic activation o f the emergency a l a r m
systems i n t h e protected space i n accordance w i t h t h e
requirements o f 4.3;
automatic disconnection o f ventilation i n the
p r o t e c t e d space; a u t o m a t i c s h u t d o w n o f t h e electric
drives o f oil burner units o f boilers a n dincinerators i f
t h e y a r e l o c a t e d i n t h e p r o t e c t e d spaces.
3.11.1.6 T h e s y s t e m d i s c h a r g e t i m e s h a l l n o t e x
ceed 2 m i n .
3.11.1.7 A r r a n g e m e n t o f g e n e r a t o r s i n t h e p r o
tected space shall ensure e q u a l d i s t r i b u t i o n o f fire
extinguishing aerosol. I f there are shadow zones
f o r m e d b y equipment a n d boundaries fire extin
guishing aerosol shall be fed directly t o the shadow
zones.
3.11.1.8 G e n e r a t o r s s h a l l b e l o c a t e d a n d o r i e n t e d
w i t h consideration o f t h e t h e r m a l zone extent (refer
t o 3 . 1 1 . 2 . 2 ) s o t h a t t h e m i n i m u m safe d i s t a n c e a w a y
f r o m t h e generators t o escape routes a n d o t h e r areas
w h e r e p e r s o n n e l m a y b e p r e s e n t i s n o t less t h a n t h e
extent o f the thermal zone w i t h a temperature
o f 7 5 C, a n d t o c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e r i a l s n o t l e s s
than the extent o f the thermal zone w i t h a tempera
t u r e o f 2 0 0 C.
3
3.11.1.9 A e r o s o l s s h a l l h a v e n o n - o z o n e d e p l e t i n g
characteristics.
3.11.2 F i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g a e r o s o l g e n e r a t o r s .
3.11.2.1 F i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g a e r o s o l g e n e r a t o r
consists o f a casing, w h i c h contains a n aerosol gen
erating agent, starting device, electrical connection,
devices f o r m o u n t i n g t o t h e ship structures. C a s i n g o f
the generator shall be fitted w i t h t h e arrangement
(nozzle) f o r t h e release o f a n a e r o s o l .
3.11.2.2 E a c h t y p e o f g e n e r a t o r s h a l l h a v e i n
f o r m a t i o n a b o u t t h e distance (along t h e aerosol jet)
f r o m its exit o u t o f the generator t o the e n d o fthe
thermal zone with
a temperature
+ 7 5 C
a n d + 2 0 0 C.
7=1
'Refer also to MSC.l/Circ.1270 "Revised Guidelines for the A p p r o v a l o fFixed Aerosol Fire-Extinguishing Systems Equivalent t o
F i x e d G a s F i r e - E x t i n g u i s h i n g S y s t e m s , a s R e f e r r e d t o i n S O L A S 74, f o r M a c h i n e r y S p a c e s " .
432
Rules
3.11.2.3 T i m e f r o m t h e s t a r t u p o f t h e g e n e r a t o r
u n t i l o p e r a t i n g d u t y shall n o t exceed 10 s (refer
to 3.11.1.6).
3.11.2.4 T i m e o f o p e r a t i n g d u t y s h a l l n o t b e l e s s
t h a n 2 0 s (refer t o 3.11.1.6).
3.11.2.5 D e s i g n n u m b e r o f g e n e r a t o r s ( p i e c e s ) c a n
N=G/m
where
(3.11.2.5)
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
3.11.5 C a b l i n g .
3.11.5.1 C a b l i n g s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e ments o fSection 16,Part X I "Electrical Equipment".
3.11.5.2 E l e c t r i c c i r c u i t s c o n n e c t i n g g e n e r a t o r s
shall be dupUcated a n d w i d e l y separated. W i t h i n t h e
p r o t e c t e d space, electric circuits essential f o r t h e r e lease o f t h e s y s t e m s t a r t - u p s h a l l b e fire resistant
according t o M S C . l / C i r c . 1 2 7 0 .
G = design m a s s o f aerosol generating agent, i nk g ;

M = mass o f a charge i n o n egenerator, i nk g .
T h e n u m b e r o f generators i n t h e protected space

shall be such that i n the event o fdamage t o a n y o n e
p o w e r release Une o r generator, a t least t h e a m o u n t o f
agent needed t o achieve t h e test density c a n still be
discharged b y other generators h a v i n g regard
t o 3.11.1.7. W i t h t h e design n u m b e r o f generators
N = l , their n u m b e r shall be t a k e n as equal t o 2 a n d
w i t h N = 2 , as equal t o 3.
3.11.2.6 C a s i n g o f g e n e r a t o r , i t s f o u n d a t i o n a n d
details fastening i t t o t h e f o u n d a t i o n shall be m a d e o f
non-combustible materials.
3.11.2.7 T h e g e n e r a t o r s s h a l l b e d e s i g n e d t o
prevent
self-activation at a temperature
bel o w 2 5 0 C.
3.11.3 T h e f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g r e m o t e c o n t r o l
device.
3.11.3.1 T h e r e m o t e c o n t r o l d e v i c e s h a l l c o m p l y
w i t h Section 2, Part X I "Electrical Equipment".
3.11.3.2 T h e r e m o t e c o n t r o l d e v i c e s h a l l e n a b l e
d i s t a n t s t a r t i n g o f a l l generators p r o t e c t i n g t h e space.
T h e start-up o f generators b y groups is permitted
proceeding f r o m their n u m b e r a n d provided thereq u i r e m e n t s o f 3.11.1.6 a n d 3.11.2.3 a r e m e t .
3.11.3.3 I f s e v e r a l s p a c e s a r e p r o t e c t e d b y t h e
r e m o t e c o n t r o l device, i t shall enable divided start-up
o f generators i n each space.
3.12.3.4 T h e r e s h a l l b e t w o s o u r c e s o f p o w e r
supply m a i n a n d auxiUary f o r the remote
c o n t r o l device.
3.11.3.5 T h e r e m o t e c o n t r o l d e v i c e s h a l l e n a b l e
automatic m o n i t o r i n g o f running order o f starting
electric circuits w i t h address i n d i c a t i o n o f a faulty
circuit a n d also shall be capable o f checking operabiUty o f devices a n n o u n c i n g a b o u t v e n t i l a t i o n
starting a n d shutdown.
3.11.4 L o c a l s t a t i o n s o f t h e a e r o s o l f i r e e x t i n guishing.
L o c a l stations w i t h o n e o r t w o generators a n d the
starting arrangement m a y be fitted near entrance t o
the space ( w i t h o u t r e m o t e c o n t r o l device) i n justified
cases.
A l o n g w i t h that, provision shall be made f o r
periodical checks o f t h e aerosol fire extinguishing
system operability b y means o f starting w i t h theuse
of simulators.
3.12 F I X E D L O C A L A P P L I C A T I O N K I R K E X T I N G U I S H I N G
S Y S T E M S F O RU S E I NM A C H I N E R Y S P A C E S
3.12.1 F i x e d l o c a l a p p l i c a t i o n f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g
systems shall be fitted o n passenger ships o f 500 gross
tonnage a n d a b o v e a n d o n cargo ships o f 2000 gross
tonnage a n d above.
3.12.2 M a c h i n e r y s p a c e s o f c a t e g o r y
A
above 5 0 0m i nv o l u m e shall, i naddition t o the fixed
fire extinguishing system required i n T a b l e 3.1.2.1, be
protected b y a n approved type o f fixed water-based
o r equivalent local appUcation fire extinguishing
system complying w i t h
the requirements o f
I M O Revised GuideUnes (refer t o M S C . l / C i r c . 1 3 8 7 ) .
I n t h e case o f p e r i o d i c a l l y u n a t t e n d e d m a c h i n e r y
spaces t h e fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s h a l l h a v e b o t h
a u t o m a t i c a n d m a n u a l release capabiUties. I n t h e case
o f c o n t i n u o u s l y m a n n e d m a c h i n e r y spaces t h e fire
extinguishing system is o n l y required t o have a
m a n u a l release capabiUty.
3
W h e r e a u t o m a t i c release is p r o v i d e d t h e a v a i l abiUty o f m a n u a l release is o b U g a t o r y .

T h e m a n u a l release shall be located a t easily accessible p o s i t i o n inside a n d o u t s i d e t h e p r o t e c t e d
space. T h e m a n u a l release inside t h e p r o t e c t e d space
shall n o t be Uable t o be c u t o f f b y a fire i n t h e p r o tected areas.
T h e a u t o m a t i c release s h a l l b e a c t i v a t e d b y fire
detection system, indicating fire r i s k areas. Besides i t
shall be so designed as t o p r e v e n t accidental release o f
the local appUcation fire extinguishing system.
3.12.3 F i x e d l o c a l a p p l i c a t i o n f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g
systems are t o protect fire r i s k areas o f t h e f o l l o w i n g
m a c h i n e r y a n d e q u i p m e n t ( w i t h o u t t h e necessity o f
engine s h u t d o w n , personnel evacuation, o r sealing o f
the spaces):
.1 i n t e r n a l c o m b u s t i o n engines;
.2 i n c i n e r a t o r s ;
.3 p u r i f i e r s f o r h e a t e d f u e l o i l ;
.4 b o i l e r f r o n t s ( w h e r e n o z z l e s a r e f i t t e d ) ;
.5 i n e r t g a s g e n e r a t o r s ;
.6 f u e l h e a t e r s .
I n m u l t i - e n g i n e installations, a t least t w o sections
shall be arranged.
3.12.4 T h e a c t i v a t i o n o f a n y l o c a l a p p l i c a t i o n f i r e
extinguishing system shall give a visual a n d a distinct
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
audible a l a r m i n t h e protected space i n t h e m a i n

machinery control r o o m a n d i n the wheelhouse. T h e
alarm, w h i c h m a y be m o n o t o n e , shall indicate the
specific s y s t e m activated. T h e s y s t e m a l a r m r e q u i r e ments, described w i t h i n this paragraph are i n addit i o n t o , a n d n o t i n lieu o f , t h e fire detection a n d fire
a l a r m systems required elsewhere i n this Part.
3.12.5 E l e c t r i c a l e q u i p m e n t o f t h e s y s t e m a n d i t s
release a l a r m s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f 7.13, P a r t X I "Electrical E q u i p m e n t " .
3.12.6 N o z z l e s o n b o a r d s h a l l b e l o c a t e d i n t h e
same positions as d u r i n g their testing carried o u t
according t o t h e I M O Revised Guidelines (refer
to M S C . 1/Circ. 1387). A specific a r r a n g e m e n t o f
nozzles m a y be accepted b y t h e Register provided
such a r r a n g e m e n t a d d i t i o n a l l y passes fire tests i n
accordance w i t h the I M O Guidelines.
433
3.13 T E S T I N G O F F E R E E X T I N G U I S H I N G
S Y S T E M S
3.13.1 F i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s s h a l l b e t e s t e d
in compliance w i t h Table 3.13.1.
3.13.2 T h e o p e r a t i o n a l t e s t i n g o f t h e s y s t e m s s h a l l
be c o n d u c t e d i n c o n f o r m i t y w i t h Register a p p r o v e d
p r o g r a m s t o verify their serviceability, operation o f release devices, a n d w h e r e p r o t o t y p e ships a r e c o n c e r n e d ,
to c o n f i r m t h e stipulated t i m e f o r t h e fire extinguishing
m e d i u m discharge i n t o t h e p r o t e c t e d space.
O n p r o t o t y p e ships, a test discharge o f t h e rated
a m o u n t o f carbon dioxide into o n e o f the protected
spaces is r e q u i r e d f o r high-pressure c a r b o n d i o x i d e
systems.
T h e test discharge m a y be o m i t t e d i f reasonable
substantiations are submitted t o t h e Register.
434
Rules for
the Classification
and Construction
ft
ft, D.
ft,
i / v ft-
>>
ft,
i/v
o.
ft
a
x
ft
'
^ . g
"
1/V
S '
J5
.-
ft.
IJ2
8, ,
- -
of Sea-Going
Ships
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
435
4 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
4.1
GENERAL
4.1.1 A l l e l e c t r i c a l e q u i p m e n t , d e v i c e s , a l e r t s a n d
i n d i c a t o r s , feeders a n d w i r i n g o f fire d e t e c t i o n a n d
a l a r m systems shall fully c o m p l y w i t h the requirem e n t s o f 7.5 a n d 7.6, P a r t X I " E l e c t r i c a l E q u i p m e n t " ,
Code o n Alerts a n d Indicators and F i r e Safety Systems Code.
A l l fire d e t e c t i o n a n d a l a r m e q u i p m e n t a n d systems shall be designed t o w i t h s t a n d a m b i e n t t e m perature changes, vibration, h u m i d i t y , shock, impact
a n d c o r r o s i o n n o r m a l l y encountered i n ships.
4.1.2 I n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s , t h e c o n t r o l p a n e l s h a l l b e
located i n the o n b o a r d safety centre. A n indicating u n i t
t h a t is c a p a b l e o f i n d i v i d u a l l y i d e n t i f y i n g each detector
that has been activated o r m a n u a l l y operated call p o i n t
shall be located o n the n a v i g a t i o n bridge.
I n cargo ships, the c o n t r o l p a n e l shall be located o n
the n a v i g a t i o n bridge o r i n the fire c o n t r o l station. I n
cargo ships, a n i n d i c a t i n g u n i t shall be located o n t h e
n a v i g a t i o n bridge i f the c o n t r o l p a n e l is located i n the
fire c o n t r o l station. I n ships w i t h a cargo c o n t r o l r o o m ,
a n a d d i t i o n a l i n d i c a t i n g u n i t shall be located therein.
C l e a r i n f o r m a t i o n s h a l l be displayed o n o r adj a c e n t t o each i n d i c a t i n g u n i t a b o u t t h e spaces c o v ered a n d the l o c a t i o n o f the sections.
I n cargo ships a n d o n passenger c a b i n balconies,
i n d i c a t i n g u n i t s s h a l l , as a m i n i m u m , d e n o t e t h e s e c t i o n
in w h i c h a detector has activated o r m a n u a l l y operated
call p o i n t has operated. I n addition, controls for remote
closing o f the fire d o o r s a n d s h u t t i n g d o w n the v e n t i l a t i o n fans shall be centralized at the c o n t i n u o u s l y
m a n n e d central c o n t r o l station. T h e v e n t i l a t i o n fans
shall be capable o f r e a c t i v a t i o n b y the c r e w at t h e
continuously m a n n e d c o n t r o l station. T h e c o n t r o l panels i n the central c o n t r o l station shall be capable o f
indicating o p e n o r closed p o s i t i o n o f fire doors, o n o r
o f f status o f the detectors, a l a r m a n d fans.
4.1.3 F i r e d e t e c t i o n a n d f i r e a l a r m s y s t e m s h a l l
n o t be used f o r a n y o t h e r purpose, except f o r closing
fire doors f r o m the s w i t c h b o a r d a n d other similar
purposes (refer to 3.12.2). W h e r e fire doors are at the
same t i m e w a t e r t i g h t doors (refer t o 7.12, P a r t I I I
" E q u i p m e n t , A r r a n g e m e n t s a n d O u t f i t " ) they are n o t
to be a u t o m a t i c a l l y closed u p o n o p e r a t i o n o f fire
alarms.
D e t e c t o r s a n d m a n u a l c a l l p o i n t s shall be c o n nected t o dedicated sections o f the fire detection a n d
fire a l a r m s y s t e m . O t h e r fire safety f u n c t i o n s , s u c h as
a l a r m signals f r o m the s p r i n k l e r valves, m a y be perm i t t e d i n separate sections.
SYSTEMS
4.2 F E R E D E T E C T I O N
A N D FERE A L A R M
S Y S T E M S
4.2.1 F i x e d fire d e t e c t i o n a n d fire a l a r m s y s t e m s .

4.2.1.1 T h e f i x e d f i r e d e t e c t i o n a n d f i r e a l a r m
system shall be installed t o protect:
.1 a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces a n d c o n t r o l
stations (refer t o 4.2.1.2);
.2 C a t e g o r y A m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s p e r i o d i c a l l y
u n a t t e n d e d a n d C a t e g o r y A m a c h i n e r y spaces i n
which installation o f automatic and remote control
systems a n d equipment has been approved by the
Register instead o f c o n t i n u o s m a n n i n g o f the space
a n d the m a i n p r o p u l s i o n p l a n t a n d associated m a chinery including m a i n sources o f p o w e r are provided
to a variable degree w i t h a u t o m a t i c o r r e m o t e c o n t r o l
and permanently under supervision o f the watchkeeping staff at the c o n t r o l station;
.3 c a r g o s p a c e s i n w h i c h p a c k a g e d d a n g e r o u s
g o o d s a r e c a r r i e d ( r e f e r t o 7 . 2 . 7 ) as w e l l as c a r g o
spaces w h i c h are inaccessible, o n passenger ships,
except cases w h e n the ship is e n g a g e d i n v o y a g e s o f
so s h o r t d u r a t i o n , t h a t a p p l i c a t i o n o f t h i s r e q u i r e m e n t w i l l be unsuitable;
.4 spaces f o r c a r r i a g e o f v e h i c l e s , s p e c i a l c a t e g o r y
spaces a n d r o - r o spaces (refer t o 4.2.1.3). T h e fire
detection a n d fire a l a r m s y s t e m shall n o t be installed
o n weather decks used f o r the carriage o f vehicles
w i t h fuel i n their tanks;
.5 c a b i n b a l c o n i e s o f p a s s e n g e r ships, w h e n f u r n i t u r e a n d f u r n i s h i n g s o n s u c h b a l c o n i e s a r e n o t as
defined i n 2.1.1.9. A fixed fire detection a n d fire
a l a r m system for cabin balconies shall c o m p l y w i t h
the requirements o f the F i r e Safety Systems Code
and MSC.l/Circ.1242;
.6 enclosed spaces w i t h i n c i n e r a t o r s . Spaces
h a v i n g l i t t l e f i r e r i s k , s u c h as v o i d spaces w i t h n o
storage o f combustibles, private b a t h r o o m s , public
toilets, fire extinguishing m e d i u m storage r o o m s ,
cleaning gear lockers ( i n w h i c h f l a m m a b l e Uquids are
n o t stored), o p e n d e c k spaces a n d enclosed p r o m e n a d e s h a v i n g l i t t l e o r n o fire r i s k a n d t h a t a r e n a t u rally v e n t i l a t e d b y p e r m a n e n t openings, need n o t be
fitted w i t h d e t e c t o r s a n d m a n u a l c a l l p o i n t s .
4.2.1.2 W h e n p r o t e c t i n g a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d
service spaces a n d c o n t r o l stations t h e f o l l o w i n g s h a l l
be p r o v i d e d :
.1 s m o k e d e t e c t o r s s h a l l b e i n s t a l l e d i n a l l s t a i r w a y s , c o r r i d o r s a n d escape routes w i t h i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces as specified i n 4 . 2 . 1 . 2 . 2 t o 4.2.1.2.4.
T h e s m o k e detectors o n s t a i r w a y s shall be located at
the t o p level o f the stair a n d at every each second
436
Rules
level beneath. C o n s i d e r a t i o n shall be g i v e n t o i n

stallation o f special s m o k e detectors i n v e n t i l a t i o n
ducts;
.2 i n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 3 6 p a s
sengers the fixed fire detection a n d fire a l a r m s y s t e m
s h a l l be so i n s t a l l e d a n d a r r a n g e d as t o detect t h e p r e
sence o f s m o k e i n service spaces, c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s a n d
a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces i n c l u d i n g c o r r i d o r s , s t a i r w a y s
a n d escape r o u t e s w i t h i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces;
.2.1 the fixed fire detection a n d fire a l a r m system
shall be capable o f r e m o t e l y i d e n t i f y i n g each detector
individually. W h e r e the fixed fire detection a n d fire
alarm system do n o t include means o f remotely
identifying each detector individually, n o section
covering m o r e t h a n one deck w i t h i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n
spaces, service spaces a n d c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s s h a l l n o r
m a l l y be p e r m i t t e d except a section w h i c h covers a n
enclosed stairway;
.2.2 detectors fitted i n cabins, w h e n activated,
s h a l l also be c a p a b l e o f e m i t t i n g , o r cause t o be
e m i t t e d , a n audible a l a r m w i t h i n the space w h e r e t h e y
are located;
.2.3 a s e c t i o n o f d e t e c t o r s a n d m a n u a l l y o p e r a t e d
call p o i n t s shall n o t be situated i n m o r e t h a n o n e
m a i n vertical zone, except o n cabin balconies;
.2.4 t h e e n t i r e m a i n v e r t i c a l z o n e c o n t a i n i n g a t
r i u m (i.e. p u b l i c spaces i n c l u d i n g three o r m o r e
w e a t h e r decks) shall be protected o v e r the entire area
by the smoke detection system;
.3 i n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s c a r r y i n g n o t m o r e
t h a n 36 passengers, there shall be installed t h r o u g h
o u t each separate vertical o r h o r i z o n t a l zone, i n all
a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces, a n d w h e r e t h e
Register considers i t necessary, i n c o n t r o l stations,
except spaces p o s i n g n o s u b s t a n t i a l fire r i s k s u c h as
v o i d spaces, s a n i t a r y spaces, etc. either:
.3.1 a fixed fire detection a n d fire a l a r m system
so i n s t a l l e d a n d a r r a n g e d as t o detect t h e presence o f
fire i n s u c h spaces a n d p r o v i d e s m o k e d e t e c t i o n i n
c o r r i d o r s , s t a i r w a y s a n d escape r o u t e s w i t h i n ac
c o m m o d a t i o n spaces; o r
.3.2 a f i x e d fire d e t e c t i o n a n d fire a l a r m s y s t e m so
i n s t a l l e d a n d a r r a n g e d as t o d e t e c t t h e p r e s e n c e o f
s m o k e i n c o r r i d o r s , s t a i r w a y s a n d escape routes
w i t h i n t h e a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces i f there is a n a u
t o m a t i c s p r i n k l e r s y s t e m so a r r a n g e d as t o p r o t e c t
s u c h spaces (refer t o T a b l e 3.1.2.1);
.3.3 t h e f i x e d fire d e t e c t i o n a n d fire a l a r m s y s t e m
shall be capable o f r e m o t e l y a n d i n d i v i d u a l l y i d e n t i
fying each detector and m a n u a l l y operated call point;
.3.4 d e t e c t o r s f i t t e d i n c a b i n s , w h e n a c t i v a t e d ,
s h a l l also be c a p a b l e o f e m i t t i n g , o r cause t o be
e m i t t e d , a n audible a l a r m w i t h i n the space w h e r e t h e y
are located;
.4 d e t e c t o r s m a y b e o p e r a t e d b y h e a t , s m o k e o r
other products o f combustion, flame or any combina
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
t i o n o f these factors. D e t e c t o r s o p e r a t e d b y o t h e r fac

tors m a y be considered b y t h e Register, p r o v i d e d t h a t
t h e y a r e n o less s e n s i t i v e t h a n t h e a b o v e d e t e c t o r s .
W h e n fire detectors are installed i n freezers,
d r y i n g r o o m s , saunas, parts o f galleys used to heat
f o o d , l a u n d r i e s a n d o t h e r spaces w h e r e s t e a m a n d
f u m e s are p r o d u c e d , heat detectors m a y be used;
.5 i n c a r g o ships a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service
spaces a n d c o n t r o l stations d e p e n d i n g o n a p r o t e c
t i o n m e t h o d are protected by a fixed fire detection
a n d fire a l a r m system a n d / o r b y a n a u t o m a t i c
sprinkler system a n d fire a l a r m a n d detection system
as f o l l o w s :
. 5 . 1 w h e n m e t h o d 1 i s u s e d : a f i x e d f i r e d e t e c t i o n
a n d fire a l a r m s y s t e m s h a l l be so i n s t a l l e d a n d a r r a n g e d
as t o p r o v i d e s m o k e d e t e c t i o n i n a l l c o r r i d o r s , s t a i r w a y s
a n d escape r o u t e s w i t h i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces;
.5.2 w h e n m e t h o d I I C is used: a f i x e d fire detec
t i o n a n d fire a l a r m s y s t e m s h a l l be so i n s t a l l e d a n d
a r r a n g e d as t o p r o v i d e s m o k e d e t e c t i o n i n a l l c o r r i
dors, stairways a n d escape routes w i t h i n a c c o m
m o d a t i o n spaces. I n a d d i t i o n , a n a u t o m a t i c s p r i n k l e r
s y s t e m s h a l l be so i n s t a l l e d a n d a r r a n g e d as t o p r o t e c t
a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces, galleys a n d o t h e r service
spaces (refer t o T a b l e 3.1.2.1);
.5.3 w h e n m e t h o d I I I C is used: a f i x e d fire de
t e c t i o n a n d fire a l a r m s y s t e m s h a l l be so i n s t a l l e d a n d
a r r a n g e d as t o d e t e c t t h e p r e s e n c e o f f i r e i n a l l ac
c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service spaces, p r o v i d i n g s m o k e
detection i n c o r r i d o r s , s t a i r w a y s a n d escape routes
w i t h i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces, except spaces p o s i n g
n o s u b s t a n t i a l fire r i s k s u c h as v o i d spaces, s a n i t a r y
spaces, etc. I n a d d i t i o n , a f i x e d fire d e t e c t i o n a n d fire
a l a r m s y s t e m s h a l l be so i n s t a l l e d a n d a r r a n g e d as t o
provide smoke detection i n all corridors, stairways
a n d escape r o u t e s w i t h i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces.
H o w e v e r there is n o n e e d t o p r o v i d e fixed fire de
t e c t i o n a n d fire a l a r m s y s t e m i n service spaces b u i l t
a w a y f r o m the a c c o m m o d a t i o n block;
.6 i f the fixed fire detection a n d fire a l a r m system is
r e q u i r e d f o r p r o t e c t i o n o f spaces o t h e r t h a n spaces spe
cified i n 4.2.1.2,1, a t least o n e detector c o m p l y i n g w i t h
the requirements o f the International Code for Fire
S a f e t y S y s t e m s s h a l l be i n s t a l l e d i n e a c h s u c h space;
.7 n o section w i l l pass t h r o u g h a space t w i c e .
W h e n t h i s is n o t p r a c t i c a l (e.g., f o r large p u b l i c
spaces), t h e p a r t o f t h e section w h i c h b y necessity
passes t h r o u g h the space f o r a second t i m e shall be
installed at the m a x i m u m possible distance f r o m the
other parts o f the section;
.8 a section o f fire detectors w h i c h covers a r o - r o
space s h a l l n o t i n c l u d e a m a c h i n e r y space o f c a t e g o r y A .
4.2.1.3 T h e fire d e t e c t i o n a n d fire a l a r m s y s t e m
installed i n spaces i n t e n d e d f o r t h e carriage o f v e
hicles, special c a t e g o r y spaces a n d i n r o - r o spaces
shall p r o v i d e early detection o f fire. T h e type o f a u -
P a r t VI. F i r e
431
Protection
t o m a t i c detectors a n d arrangement thereof shall be

d e t e r m i n e d w i t h c o n s i d e r a t i o n o f effect o f v e n t i l a t i o n
and other appropriate factors. A f t e r installation,t h e
system shall be tested u n d e r n o r m a l v e n t i l a t i o n c o n
ditions t o determine t h e average t i m e o f its re
sponding. T h e fire detection a n d fire a l a r m system
m a y n o t b e fitted i n special c a t e g o r y spaces i f a n ef
fective w a t c h i n g i n t h e f o r m o f c o n t i n u o u s fire w a t c h
is m a i n t a i n e d i n t h e spaces t h r o u g h o u t t h e v o y a g e .
4.2.1A Detectors shall be located f o r o p t i m u m
performance. Positions near beams a n d ventilation
ducts o r other positions w h e r e patterns o f a i r f l o w
c o u l d adversely affect p e r f o r m a n c e a n d positions w h e r e
impact o r physical damage is likely shall be avoided.
Detectors w h i c h are located o n the overhead
shall be a m i n i m u m distance o f 0,5 m a w a y f r o m
bulkheads, except corridors, lockers a n d stairways.
T h e m a x i m u m spacing o f detectors shall be i n ac
cordance w i t h T a b l e 4.2.1.4.
T a b l e
Maximum
Maximum
floor area
distance apart
per detector, between centres,
in m
in m
Type o f
detector
Heat
Smoke
37
74
9
11
4.2.1.4
Maximum
distance a w a y
from bulkheads,
in m
4,5
5,5
T h e Register m a y p e r m i t departures f r o m t h ere

quirements o f T a b l e 4.2.1.4 based u p o n characteristics
o b t a i n e d d u r i n g tests a n d agreed w i t h t h e Register.
W h e n heat-pulse detectors are used i n m a c h i n e r y
spaces, t h e d e c k area served b y o n e detector s h a l l
be 5 0 m , a n d distance b e t w e e n centres is t o be n o t
more than 6 m .
4.2.1.5 A s a m p l e e x t r a c t i o n s m o k e d e t e c t i o n s y s
t e m o f a type approved b y the Register a n d meeting
the requirements o f 4.2.1.6 m a y be p r o v i d e d i n cargo
spaces specified i n 4.2.1.1.3 a n d 4.2.1.1.4, except
spaces s p e c i f i e d i n 1.5.4.3.2, 1.5.4.4.2 a n d 1.5.9.
4.2.1.6 A s a m p l e e x t r a c t i o n s m o k e d e t e c t i o n
system shall consist o f the following m a i n c o m p o
nents: s m o k e accumulators, s a m p l i n g pipes, threew a y valves, i f the system is interconnected t o a fixed
gas fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m , c o n t r o l p a n e l , a n d s h a l l
meet the following requirements:
.1 t h e s y s t e m s h a l l b e c a p a b l e o f c o n t i n u o u s o p
eration at all times. Systems operating o n a sequential
scanning principle m a y be permitted o n agreement
w i t h t h e R e g i s t e r p r o v i d e d t h a t i n t e r v a l (I) b e
t w e e n t w o scannings o f t h e s a m e space does n o t e x
c e e d 1 2 0 s a n d p r o v i d e s t i m e (T)
mentioned
i n 4.2.1.6.10. W i t h a 2 0 p e r cent allowance t h e i n
t e r v a l (I) i s d e t e r m i n e d b y t h e f o r m u l a
2
/=1,2
where N =
the n u m b e r o f scanning points;
.2 t h e s a m p l i n g p i p e a r r a n g e m e n t s s h a l l b e s u c h
t h a t t h e l o c a t i o n o f t h e fire c a n be readily identified;
.3 t h e s y s t e m s h a l l b e c o n s t r u c t e d a n d i n s t a l l e d s o
as t o p r e v e n t t h e l e a k a g e o f a n y t o x i c o r f l a m m a b l e
s u b s t a n c e s o r fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i a i n t o a n y a c
c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service space, c o n t r o l s t a t i o n o r
m a c h i n e r y space, as w e l l as t o a v o i d t h e p o s s i b i l i t y o f
i g n i t i o n o f f l a m m a b l e gas-air m i x t u r e ;
.4 a t l e a s t o n e s m o k e a c c u m u l a t o r s h a l l b e l o
cated i n every enclosed space f o r w h i c h s m o k e de
tection is required. H o w e v e r , w h e r e a space is
designed t o carry o i l o r refrigerated cargo, o r other
cargoes f o r w h i c h a s m o k e sampling system is re
quired, means m a ybe provided t o isolate t h e smoke
accumulators i n such compartments o n agreement
w i t h t h e Register. I n cargo holds where non-gastight
"tween deck panels" (movable stowage platforms) are
provided, smoke accumulators shall be located i n
both the upper a n d lower parts o f the holds;
.5 s m o k e a c c u m u l a t o r s s h a l l b e l o c a t e d f o r o p t i
m u m performance a n d shall be spaced so that n o part
o f t h e overhead deck area is m o r e t h a n 12 m mea
sured horizontally f r o m a n accumulator.
W h e r e systems a r e used i n spaces w h i c h m a y b e
mechanically ventilated, the position o f the smoke
accumulators shall be considered having regard t o
the effects o f v e n t i l a t i o n .
A t least o n e a d d i t i o n a l s m o k e a c c u m u l a t o r shall
be p r o v i d e d i n t h e u p p e r p a r t o f each exhaust v e n t i
lation duct. A n adequate
filtering
system shall be
fitted
at the additional smoke accumulator t o avoid
dust contamination.
S m o k e accumulators shall be positioned where
i m p a c t o r physical damage is unlikely t o occur;
.6 t h e n u m b e r o f s m o k e a c c u m u l a t o r s c o n n e c t e d
to each sampling pipe shall ensure compliance w i t h
the requirements o f 4.2.1.7;
.7 s m o k e a c c u m u l a t o r s f r o m m o r e t h a n o n e e n
closed space shall n o t be connected t o t h e s a m e
sampling point;
.8 s a m p l i n g pipes s h a l l b e s e l f - d r a i n i n g a n d p r o
tected f r o m i m p a c t o r d a m a g e d u r i n g cargo operations;
.9 t h e sensing u n i t s h a l l o p e r a t e b e f o r e t h e s m o k e
density within
t h e sensing
chamber
exceeds
6,65 p e r cent o b s c u r a t i o n p e r m e t r e ;
.10 a t l e a s t t w o s a m p l e e x t r a c t i o n f a n s , d u p l i
cating o n e another, shall be provided.
T h e fans shall be o fsufficient capacity t o operate
with the n o r m a l conditions o f ventilation i n the
p r o t e c t e d area. T h e c o n n e c t e d p i p e size s h a l l b e d e
termined w i t h consideration o f f a n suction capacity
a n d p i p i n g a r r a n g e m e n t shall satisfy t h e requirements
o f 4.2.1.7. T h e fans, depending o n capacity a n d
length o f piping, shall
p r o v i d e t i m e (T) o f t o t a l
s y s t e m o p e r a t i o n d e l a y n o t m o r e t h a n 1 5 s. T h e f a n
suction capacity shall be adequate t o ensure t h ere-
438
Rules
sponse o f t h e m o s t remote area w i t h i n t h e required

t i m e criteria i n 4.2.1.7;
.11 t h e s w i t c h b o a r d s h a l l h a v e m e a n s p e r m i t t i n g
observation o f s m o k e i nthe i n d i v i d u a l sampling pipe;
.12 m e a n s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d t o m o n i t o r t h e a i r f l o w t h r o u g h t h e s a m p l i n g pipes so designed as t o
ensure equal quantities are extracted f r o m each i n terconnected accumulator;
.13 s a m p l i n g p i p e s s h a l l b e a m i n i m u m o f 1 2 m m
inside diameter. W h e r e the pipes are used i n conj u n c t i o n w i t h fixed gas fire extinguishing systems, t h e
m i n i m u m size o f p i p e s h a l l b e s u f f i c i e n t t o p e r m i t t h e
fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m t o b e d i s c h a r g e d w i t h i n t h e
appropriate time;
.14 s a m p l i n g p i p e s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a r r a n gement f o r periodically p u r g i n g w i t h compressed air;
.15 c o n t r o l p a n e l s h a l l b e l o c a t e d o n t h e n a v i g a t i o n b r i d g e , i n t h e m a i n fire c o n t r o l s t a t i o n o r c a r b o n
dioxide extinction station. T h e indicating unit shall
be located o n t h e n a v i g a t i o n bridge i f t h e c o n t r o l
p a n e l i s l o c a t e d i n t h e m a i n fire c o n t r o l s t a t i o n o r
carbon dioxide extinction station.
Clear i n f o r m a t i o n shall be displayed o n o r adj a c e n t t o t h e c o n t r o l p a n e l a n d i n d i c a t i n g u n i t s desi g n a t i n g t h e spaces covered.
Provision shall be made for checking the control
panel o f the smoke detection system i n accordance
w i t h the procedure agreed w i t h t h e Register;
.16 p r o v i s i o n s h a l l b e m a d e f o r t e s t i n g f o r c o r r e c t
operation a n d restoring t o n o r m a l surveillance w i t h out the renewal o fa n y component;
.17 d e t e c t i o n o f s m o k e o r o t h e r p r o d u c t s o f
c o m b u s t i o n shall initiate v i s u a l a n d audible signals a t
the control panel a n d indicating units;
.18 p o w e r s u p p l i e s n e c e s s a r y f o r t h e s y s t e m o p e r a t i o n shall be m o n i t o r e d loss o f p o w e r . T h e loss o f
p o w e r shall initiate a visual a n daudible fault signal a t
the control panel a n d navigation bridge w h i c h shall
b e d i s t i n c t f r o m a fire s i g n a l ( r e f e r a l s o t o 7 . 5 . 4 ,
Part X I "Electrical Equipment");
.19 m e a n s t o m a n u a l l y a c k n o w l e d g e a l l a l a r m
a n d f a u l t signals shall be p r o v i d e d a t t h e c o n t r o l
panel. T h e audible a l a r m sounders o n the control
p a n e l a n d i n d i c a t i n g u n i t s m a y be m a n u a l l y silenced.
T h e c o n t r o l panel shall clearly distinguish between
normal, alarm, acknowledged alarm, fault a n d silenced conditions;
.20 t h e s y s t e m s h a l l b e a r r a n g e d t o a u t o m a t i c a l l y
reset t o t h e n o r m a l o p e r a t i n g c o n d i t i o n after a l a r m
a n d fault conditions are cleared;
.21 s u i t a b l e i n s t r u c t i o n s a n d c o m p o n e n t s p a r e s
shall be provided f o r t h e testing, maintenance a n d
repair o f the system.
4.2.1.7 A f t e r i n s t a l l a t i o n , t h e s y s t e m s h a l l b e
functionally tested using s m o k e generating machines
o r equivalent as a s m o k e source. A n a l a r m shall be
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
received a t t h e c o n t r o l panel i n n o t m o r e t h a n 180 s

for vehicle decks, a n d n o t m o r e t h a n 3 0 0 s f o r container a n d general cargo holds, after smoke is i n troduced at the most remote accumulator.
4.2.2 M a n u a l a l a r m s .
4.2.2.1 M a n u a l f i r e a l a r m s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d i n
the ships w h i c h i n compliance w i t h 4.2.1.1 are
e q u i p p e d w i t h f i x e d fire d e t e c t i o n a n d fire a l a r m
system.
4.2.2.2 M a n u a l l y o p e r a t e d c a l l p o i n t s s h a l l b e
i n s t a l l e d t h r o u g h o u t t h e a c c o m m o d a t e d spaces, service spaces a n d c o n t r o l stations, c o n s i d e r i n g t h e r e quirements o f 4.2.1.2.3.3. A m a n u a l l y operated call
p o i n t fitting i s n o t r e q u i r e d i n a n i n d i v i d u a l s p a c e
w i t h i n t h e a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces, service spaces a n d
control stations. A m a n u a l l y operated call p o i n t shall
be located a t each exit (inside o r outside) t o t h e o p e n
deck f r o m t h e corridor such that n o part o fthe corridor is m o r e t h a n 2 0 m f r o m a m a n u a l l y operated
call point.
4.2.2.3 S e r v i c e s p a c e s a n d c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s w h i c h
h a v e o n l y o n e access, l e a d i n g d i r e c t l y t o t h e o p e n
deck, shall have a m a n u a l l y operated call p o i n t
n o t m o r e than 2 0 m f r o m the exit (measured along the
access r o u t e u s i n g t h e d e c k , stairs a n d / o r c o r r i d o r s ) .
4.2.2.3.1 A m a n u a l l y o p e r a t e d c a l l p o i n t i s
n o t r e q u i r e d t o b e i n s t a l l e d f o r spaces h a v i n g little
fire r i s k , s u c h a s c a r b o n d i o x i d e r o o m s , n o r a t e a c h
e x i t f r o m t h e n a v i g a t i o n bridge, i n cases w h e r e t h e
control panel is located i n t h e navigation bridge.
4.2.2.4 I n s p e c i a l c a t e g o r y s p a c e s t h e m a n u a l c a l l
p o i n t s shall be installed so t h a t n o p a r t o f the space is
m o r e than 2 0m f r o m the call point a n do n ecall point
s h a l l b e i n s t a l l e d close t o e a c h exits f r o m s u c h spaces.
4.2.2.5 A l l b u t t o n s o f m a n u a l fire a l a r m s s h a l l b e
painted red a n d adequately illuminated b o t h i n norm a l a n d emergency conditions. T h e b u t t o n shall be
p r o t e c t e d w i t h glass.
4.2.2.6 A n y r e q u i r e d fixed fire d e t e c t i o n a n d fire
alarm system w i t h manually operated call points shall
be capable o f i m m e d i a t e o p e r a t i o n a t a l l times.
O n special a g r e e m e n t , p a r t i c u l a r spaces m a y b e
disconnected d u r i n g specific w o r k . I n t h i s case, t h e
means f o r disconnecting t h e detectors shall be designed t o a u t o m a t i c a l l y restore t h e system t o n o r m a l
surveillance after a predetermined time.
4.2.3 P r o t e c t i o n o f u n a t t e n d e d m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s .
4.2.3.1 U n a t t e n d e d m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s o f c a t e gory A , as w e l l as heated a i r ducts a n d m a i n boiler
uptakes, essential a u x i l i a r y boilers w i t h a steam capacity over 3 t / h a n d boilers w i t h thermal Uquids
( i n c l u d i n g e x h a u s t gas boilers) i n such spaces s h a l l b e
p r o v i d e d w i t h a n a u t o m a t i c fire a l a r m a n d fire d e tection system (refer also t o 2.2.4, P a r t I X
"Machinery").
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
4.3 F I R E W A R N I N G
439
A L A R M S
4.3.1 A u t o m a t i c a l a r m s t o w a r n t h a t t h e f i r e e x tinguishing m e d i u m is released shall be p r o v i d e d i n

t h e spaces a t t e n d e d b y c r e w m e m b e r s o n t h e i r duties
o r accessible t o t h e m u n d e r n o r m a l service c o n d i t i o n s , f i t t e d w i t h d o o r s o r access h a t c h e s f o r t h i s
purpose, including closed roll-on/roll-off cargo
spaces a n d h o l d s i n c o n t a i n e r - s h i p s c a r r y i n g t h e r m a l
c o n t a i n e r s . I n o t h e r c a r g o spaces, as w e l l as i n s m a l l
spaces
(compressor
rooms, paint
and
lamp
lockers, etc.), n o fire w a r n i n g a l a r m s are required.
4.3.2 T h e s i g n a l w a r n i n g o f p u t t i n g a t o t a l
flooding system i n t o action shall be given o n l y w i t h i n
the space i n t o w h i c h t h e e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m is t o
be discharged.
M e a n s o f audible a l a r m a c t u a t i o n shall be so
arranged t h a t t h e a l a r m c a n be h e a r d t h r o u g h o u t t h e
p r o t e c t e d space w i t h a l l m a c h i n e r y i n o p e r a t i o n a n d
be distinct f r o m o t h e r audible a l a r m s t h r o u g h a d justment o f sound pressure o r pattern.
4.3.3 C o n t r o l o f f i r e w a r n i n g a l a r m s s h a l l
be i n t e r l o c k e d b o t h w i t h t h e l o c a l a n d r e m o t e
c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s o f t h e fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m so as
to ensure its a u t o m a t i c start into operation at openi n g the d o o r s o f a n y locker c o n t a i n i n g starting devices.
Besides there shall be p r o v i d e d a n a u t o m a t i c
d e l a y ( n o t less t h a n 2 0 s) i n d i s c h a r g i n g t h e f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m i n t h e protected space f r o m t h e
starting o f fire w a r n i n g a l a r m f o r t h e personnel t o be
able t o leave t h e space before t h e fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g
m e d i u m is discharged.
4.3.4 T h e s i g n a l s h a l l b e c l e a r , d i s t i n c t a n d r e a d i l y
a u d i b l e i n a n o i s y space, a n d s h a l l be o f a t o n e distinct f r o m a l lo t h e r signals. I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e audible
signal, there shall be a visible signal: " G a s ! G o a w a y ! "
a n d f o r t h e spaces p r o t e c t e d b y t h e a e r o s o l fire extinguishing systems " A e r o s o l ! G o away!".
4.3.5 A u d i b l e a l a r m i n t h e c a r g o p u m p r o o m o f
o i l t a n k e r s shall be:
pneumatic, operated b y d r y a n d clean air; o r
e l e c t r i c a l l y - o p e r a t e d , i n t r i n s i c a l l y safe; o r
electrically-operated, t h e electric actuating m e chanism being located outside the p u m p r o o m .
440
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
5 FIRE-FIGHTING OUTFIT, SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS

5.1 F I R E - F I G H T I N G
OUTFIT
5.1.1 I t e m s o f f i r e - f i g h t i n g o u t f i t s h a l l c o m p l y
w i t h F i r e Safety Systems C o d e a n d be o f a p p r o v e d
type a n d ready f o r use at a n y time.
F i r e - f i g h t i n g o u t f i t shall be located i n a r e a d i l y
accessible place.
I n passenger ships the l o c a t i o n o f fire-fighting
o u t f i t shall be m a r k e d b y p h o t o l u m i n e s c e n t m a t e r i a l
or by Ughting. Such photoluminescent markers or
U g h t i n g shall m e e t the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 8.5.5, P a r t I I I
"Equipment, Arrangements and Outfit" and International Code for Fire Safety Systems.
5.1.2 D e p e n d i n g o n t h e p u r p o s e a n d s i z e o f t h e
ship the standards for supplying portable fire-fighting
appliances, apparatus a n d consumable materials shall
be i n c o m p U a n c e w i t h T a b l e 5.1.2. I t e m s o f o u t f i t i n
a d d i t i o n t o t h o s e specified i n t h e T a b l e 5.1.2 s h a l l be
p r o v i d e d o n ships c a r r y i n g d a n g e r o u s g o o d s i n accordance w i t h 7.2.10, o i l recovery ships according
t o 6.4.10, ships w i t h distinguishing m a r k s F F a n d
F F W S i n the class n o t a t i o n a c c o r d i n g t o 6.6.11 o f the
p r e s e n t P a r t , as w e l l as s h i p s e q u i p p e d w i t h h e U d e c k s
according t o 6.4.1.2, P a r t X V I I " D i s t i n g u i s h i n g
M a r k s a n d Descriptive N o t a t i o n s i n the Class N o tation Specifying Structural and Operational Particulars o f Ships".
5.1.3 T h e c o u p U n g s o f a l l p o r t a b l e i t e m s o f o u t f i t
(fire hoses, fire hose nozzles, portable f o a m generators, etc.) s h a l l be o f t h e s t a n d a r d q u i c k - a c t i n g
t y p e a n d size a d o p t e d f o r t h e g i v e n s h i p . U n l e s s o n e
hose a n d nozzle is p r o v i d e d f o r each h y d r a n t i n the
ship, there shall be c o m p l e t e i n t e r c h a n g e a b i l i t y o f
hose coupUngs a n d nozzles. A l l coupUngs a n d items
o f o u t f i t shall be m a d e o f a m a t e r i a l resistant t o
marine environment.
Items o f fire-fighting outfit installed i n the dang e r o u s areas, r o o m s a n d spaces as w e l l as o n t h e
o p e n decks o f o i l t a n k e r s a n d o i l r e c o v e r y ships, gas
carriers a n d c h e m i c a l t a n k e r s shall be o f type
preventing spark formation. A l u m i n i u m alloys m a y
be used f o r hose coupUngs a n d nozzles except
w e a t h e r decks o f o i l takers a n d chemical tankers.
5.1.4 F i r e h o s e s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g
requirements:
. 1 s h a U h a v e a l e n g t h n o t less t h a n 1 0 m , b u t n o t
more than:
.1.1 1 5 m i n m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s ;
.1.2 2 0 m i n s p a c e s o t h e r t h a n t h o s e s p e c i f i e d
i n 5.1.4.1.1 a n d o n w e a t h e r decks;
.1.3 2 5 m o n w e a t h e r d e c k s o f s h i p s w i t h m a x i m u m breadth m o r e than 30 m .
I n a n y case t h e fire hose l e n g t h s h a l l be sufficient

t o d e l i v e r a j e t o f w a t e r t o a n y o f t h e spaces w h e r e
their use m a y be required;
2 they shaU be m a d e o f a p p r o v e d materials resistant
to wear and destruction by microorganisms (rotting);
.3 f i r e h o s e s i n a s s e m b l y w i t h n o z z l e s s h a U b e
s t o w e d a t h y d r a n t s o r o n o p e n places o n reels o r i n
baskets. O n o p e n decks t h e y s h a l l be k e p t i n sprayp r o o f ventilated lockers o r enclosures. T h e lockers a n d
enclosures shall be m a r k e d w i t h letters " F H " (fire h y drant) painted red;
.4 i n p a s s e n g e r s h i p s , t h e r e s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d a t
least o n e fire hose f o r each o f the h y d r a n t s a n d these
hoses s h a l l be u s e d o n l y f o r fire f i g h t i n g o r testing a t
fire drills a n d surveys. A d d i t i o n a l l y , i n i n n e r spaces i n
passenger ships c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 36 passengers fire
hoses shall be connected t o h y d r a n t s at a l l times;
.5 o n c a r g o s h i p s :
.5.1 o f 1 0 0 0 a n d m o r e g r o s s t o n n a g e , t h e n u m b e r
o f fire hoses is d e t e r m i n e d o n e fire hose per each 3 0 m
o f l e n g t h a n d o n e s p a r e f i r e h o s e , b u t n o t less t h a n
five hoses per ship. T h i s n u m b e r doesn't include a n y
hoses r e q u i r e d f o r m a c h i n e r y o r b o i l e r spaces. T h e
Register m a y require t o increase n u m b e r o f hoses i n
order to ensure sufficient n u m b e r o f hoses a n d their
accessibiUty at a n y t i m e , considering the type o f ship
a n d character o f voyages m a d e by the ship. A ship
c a r r y i n g dangerous goods shall be equipped w i t h
three a d d i t i o n a l hoses a n d nozzles i n excess o f those
required above;
.5.2 o f l e s s t h a n 1 0 0 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e , t h e n u m b e r
of
fire
hoses
is calculated
in
accordance
w i t h 5.1.4.5.1. H o w e v e r , the n u m b e r o f hoses shall be
n o t less t h a n t h r e e .
5.1.5 S t a n d a r d n o z z l e s i z e s s h a l l b e 1 2 , 1 6
a n d 19 m m o r close t h e r e t o .
N o z z l e s sizes g r e a t e r t h a n 1 2 m m n e e d n o t be
u s e d i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n , service a n d w o r k i n g spaces.
I n ships u n d e r 150 gross t o n n a g e nozzles h a v i n g
10 m m i n d i a m e t e r are p e r m i t t e d t o be used. F o r
m a c h i n e r y spaces a n d e x t e r i o r l o c a t i o n s , t h e n o z z l e
size s h a l l be s u c h as t o o b t a i n m a x i m u m d i s c h a r g e
possible f r o m t w o jets at the pressure at each h y d r a n t
m e n t i o n e d i n T a b l e 3.2.1.1 f r o m the smallest p u m p ,
b u t n o z z l e s sizes g r e a t e r t h a n 19 m m n e e d n o t be
used.
N o z z l e s shall be o f a n a p p r o v e d dual-purpose
type w i t h a s h u t - o f f device. F i r e hose nozzles m a d e o f
p l a s t i c t y p e m a t e r i a l , e.g. p o l y c a r b o n a t e , a r e c o n sidered acceptable p r o v i d e d capacity a n d serviceabiUty are documented and the nozzles are f o u n d
suitable for the m a r i n e environment.
P a r t VI. F i r e
441
Protection
ft
<?
ft
8
a
ft
fl
& 2
2
S
a S s
'S? g
8
~ J
U-l
.ft
'ft
S
in
442
Rules for
ft
s3
e3
8
a
ft
the Classification
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
443
ft
'5
ft
'NT
ft
g -
.2
444
Rules for
the Classification
and Construction
of Sea-Going
s3

ft ft
Q
09
ft
^
^
?
u
>
ft
D. =
u
.
fi fi
Ships
P a r t VI. F i r e Protection
ft
s3
e3
8
a
ft
445
446
Rules
5.1.6 A i r - f o a m n o z z l e s f o r d e l i v e r y o f l o w - e x p a n s i o n
f o a m (refer t o 3.7) f r o m fixed fire extinguishing system
.1 o n cargo t a n k deck o f o i l t a n k e r s each n o z z l e
shall be capable o fdelivering 4 0 0 1 / m i n o f f o a m , i n this
case, t h e l e n g t h o f j e t d e l i v e r e d b y t h e fire h o s e a t stilla i r s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 1 5 m ( r e f e r a l s o t o 3 . 7 . 2 . 3 ) ;
.2 i n s h i p ' s s p a c e s e a c h n o z z l e s h a l l b e c a p a b l e o f
delivering a t least 2 1 / m i n o f f o a m s o l u t i o n p e r square
meter o f deck area;
3 p r o t o t y p e tests o f t h e m o n i t o r s a n d f o a m a p p l i cators shall be p e r f o r m e d t o ensure t h e f o a m expansion
a n d d r a i n a g e time o f t h e f o a m p r o d u c e d d o e s n o t d i f f e r
m o r e t h a n + 1 0 p e r cent o f t h a t d e t e r m i n e d i n 3.7.1.2.
5.1.7 F o a m e x t e n s i o n p i p e s w i t h a h o o k - s h a p e d b e l l m o u t h at thee n d (for low-expansion foam) a n d extension
pipes fitted w i t h light supports a t t h e m i d d l e ( f o r m e d ium-expansion f o a m ) shall be o fabout 4 m i n length.
A n extended air-foam nozzle having a hook-shaped
bell-mouth m a y be used i n addition t o t h e usual airf o a m nozzle instead o f a f o a m extension pipe.
5.1.8 P o r t a b l e f o a m a p p l i c a t o r u n i t
5.1.8.1 A p o r t a b l e f o a m a p p l i c a t o r u n i t s h a l l c o n s i s t
o f a f o a m nozzle/branch pipe, either o f a self-inducing
type o r i n c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h a separate inductor, capable o f being connected t o t h e fire m a i n b y a fire hose,
together w i t h a p o r t a b l e t a n k c o n t a i n i n g a t least 2 0 1
o f f o a m concentrate a n d a t least o n e spare t a n k o f
f o a m concentrate o f t h e same capacity.
5.1.8.2 T h e n o z z l e / b r a n c h p i p e a n d i n d u c t o r s h a l l b e
capable o f p r o d u c i n g effective f o a m suitable f o r extinguishing a n o i l fire, a t a f o a m s o l u t i o n f l o w rate o f a t
least 2 0 0 1/min a t t h e n o m i n a l pressure i n t h e fire m a i n .
5.1.8.3 T h e f o a m c o n c e n t r a t e s h a l l b e a p p r o v e d
by t h e Register based o n M S C .1/Circ. 1312.
5.1.8.4 T h e v a l u e s o f t h e f o a m e x p a n s i o n a n d d r a i nage time o f the f o a m produced b y the portable f o a m
applicator u n i t shall n o t differ m o r e than + 1 0 p e r cent
o f t h a t determined i n M S C .1/Circ. 1312.
5.1.8.5 T h e p o r t a b l e f o a m a p p l i c a t o r u n i t s h a l l b e
designed t o w i t h s t a n d clogging, a m b i e n t temperature
changes, v i b r a t i o n , h u m i d i t y , shock, impact a n d
c o r r o s i o n n o r m a l l y e n c o u n t e r e d o n ships.
5.1.8.6 T h e p o r t a b l e f o a m a p p l i c a t o r u n i t s s h a l l
be located near h y d r a n t s .
5.1.9 P o r t a b l e f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r s s h a l l b e o f t y p e a n d
design approved b y t h e Register t a k i n g into account t h e
I M O GuideUnes (refer t o I M O resolution A . 9 5 1 ( 2 3 ) )
and shall comply w i t h the following requirements:
. 1 n o fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m s h a l l b e u s e d
which, either b y itself o r under anticipated conditions
o f a p p U c a t i o n , w o u l d give o f f t o x i c gases i n a m o u n t s
dangerous t o h u m a n health;
.2 fire e x t i n g u i s h e r s s h a l l h a v e s a f e t y d e v i c e s
p r e v e n t i n g t h e pressure t h e r e i n t o rise a b o v e permissible Umits;
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
.3 f o r 1 0 0 p e r c e n t o f t h e first t e n fire e x t i n g u i s h e r s a n d 5 0 p e r c e n t o f t h e r e m a i n i n g fire e x t i n guishers capable o fbeing recharged o n b o a r d shall be

p r o v i d e d w i t h spare chargers. A total o f n o t m o r e
t h a n 6 0 p e r cent o fspare charges o f t h e total n u m b e r
o f fire e x t i n g u i s h e r s a r e r e q u i r e d . I n s t r u c t i o n s f o r
recharging shall be available o n board;
.4 f o r fire e x t i n g u i s h e r s w h i c h c a n n o t b e r e c h a r g e d o n b o a r d , a d d i t i o n a l p o r t a b l e fire e x t i n guishers o f t h e same quantity, type, capacity a n d
n u m b e r , as d e t e r m i n e d i n 5.1.9.3 a b o v e , s h a l l b e
provided i n U e uo f spare charges;
.5 fire e x t i n g u i s h e r s s h a l l b e m o u n t e d i n s p e c i a l
brackets o f quick-detachable type a t places easily
v i s i b l e a n d a c c e s s i b l e i n c a s e o f fire, a n d i n s u c h a w a y
that their serviceabiUty is n o t i m p a i r e d b y the
weather, v i b r a t i o n a n d other external factors.
T h e y shall be located at the height o f n o t m o r e
t h a n 1,5 m f r o m d e c k a n d n o t c l o s e r t h a n 1,5 m f r o m
sources o f heat;
.6 o n e o f t h e p o r t a b l e fire e x t i n g u i s h e r s i n t e n d e d
f o r u s e i n a n y space shall be s t o w e d close t o t h e e n trance t o t h a t space;
. 7 e a c h p o w d e r o r c a r b o n d i o x i d e fire e x t i n g u i s h e r s h a l l h a v e c a p a c i t y n o t less t h a n 5 k g , a n d
e a c h f o a m fire e x t i n g u i s h e r n o t l e s s t h a n 9 1.
M a s s o f a n y p o r t a b l e fire e x t i n g u i s h e r s h a l l n o t
e x c e e d 2 3 k g . P o r t a b l e fire e x t i n g u i s h e r s s h a l l h a v e
efficiency, w h i c h , i n compUance w i t h t h e recognized
i n t e r n a t i o n a l o r n a t i o n a l standard, is a t least
equivalent t o t h e efficiency o f a 9-Utre w e t t i n g agent
fire e x t i n g u i s h e r , w h i c h i s d e t e r m i n e d w h e n e x t i n g u i s h i n g m o d e l fire s e a t o f A c l a s s , r a t i n g 2 A ;
.8 p o w d e r f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r s s h a U b e selected w i t h r e gard for the purpose o f the p o w d e r extinguishing m e d i u m ;
. 9 i n t h e m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s fire e x t i n g u i s h e r s s h a l l b e
so located that a n extinguisher is n o t m o r e t h a n 1 0 m
w a l k i n g d i s t a n c e from a n y p o i n t i n t h e s p a c e ;
.10 c a r b o n d i o x i d e f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r s s h a U n o t b e
l o c a t e d i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces. I n c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s
a n d o t h e r spaces c o n t a i n i n g electrical o r e l e c t r o n i c
e q u i p m e n t o r faciUties r e q u i r e d f o r ship safety, fire extinguishers
shall be p r o v i d e d , charged w i t h t h e fire extinguishing
m e d i u m , w h i c h does n o t conduct electricity
a n d does n o t cause h a r m t o e q u i p m e n t a n d faciUties;
.11 p o r t a b l e fire e x t i n g u i s h e r s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d
w i t h a v i s u a l i n d i c a t i o n o f discharge;
.12 c a s i n g a n d o t h e r c o m p o n e n t s o f t h e fire e x tinguishers subject t o i n t e r n a l pressure shall be tested
b y h y d r a u U c pressure:
2 , 7 times e x c e e d i n g t h e m a x i m u m w o r k i n g p r e s s u r e ,
b u t n o t less t h a n 5 , 5 M P a f o r t h e l o w p r e s s u r e f i r e e x tinguishers
(with
w o r k i n g pressure
not more
t h a n 2 , 5 M P a a t e n v i r o n m e n t a l t e m p e r a t u r e o f 2 0 C);
determined i n accordance w i t h recognized n a t i o n a l s t a n d a r d o n safety o f pressure vessels
P a r t VI. F i r e
AA1
Protection
for h i g h pressure fire extinguishers ( w i t h w o r k i n g

pressure m o r e t h a n 2,5 M P a a t e n v i r o n m e n t a l t e m p e r a t u r e o f 2 0 C);
.13 f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r s s h a l l b e s u i t a b l e f o r o p e r a t i o n under exposure t o ambient temperatures according t o T a b l e 2.3.1-2, P a r t V I I " M a c h i n e r y
Installations" w i t h d u e regard f o rt h e materials used
a n d m a x i m u m degree o f filling established b y t h e
manufacturer. T h edegree o f filling f o r c a r b o n dioxide fire extinguishers shall n o t exceed 0,75 kg/1;
.14 m a t e r i a l s u s e d f o r t h e m a n u f a c t u r e o f f i r e
extinguishers, w h i c h c a n be exposed t o marine env i r o n m e n t d u r i n g o p e r a t i o n s h a l l b e selected w i t h
consideration f o rtheir compatibility;
.15 e a c h f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r s h a l l b e c l e a r l y m a r k e d
w i t h a t least t h e f o l l o w i n g i n f o r m a t i o n :
.15.1 m a n u f a c t u r e r ;
.15.2 t y p e s o f f i r e f o r w h i c h t h e f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r i s
suitable
a n d its fire-extinguishing
capability
(i.e. c a p a b i l i t y t o e x t i n g u i s h a m o d e l fire seat u n d e r
certain conditions);
.15.3 t y p e a n d n o m i n a l q u a n t i t y o f e x t i n g u i s h i n g
m e d i u m w i t h w h i c h t h e fire extinguisher is charged;
.15.4 i n f o r m a t i o n o n t h e R e g i s t e r a p p r o v a l ;
.15.5 i n s t r u c t i o n o n a c t u a t i n g t h e f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r
i n t h e f o r m o f several pictograms w i t h explanatory
n o t e i n t h e language understandable t o p o t e n t i a l user,
i n g e n e r a l case, i n R u s s i a n a n d i n E n g l i s h ;
.15.6 y e a r o f m a n u f a c t u r e ;
.15.7 r a n g e o f t e m p e r a t u r e s w i t h i n w h i c h t h e f i r e
extinguisher is operable;
.15.8 t e s t p r e s s u r e .
5.1.10 F o a m f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r s o f a t l e a s t 4 5
and 1351 shall meet the following requirements:
.1 fire e x t i n g u i s h e r s s h a l l b e l o c a t e d w i t h i n t h e
p r o t e c t e d space, i n r e g u l a r f i x e d places near t h e exits.
O n l y fresh water shall be used f o r charging the
fire extinguishers;
.2 t h e a i r f o r a n a i r - f o a m e x t i n g u i s h e r s h a l l b e
kept i n a cyUnder provided solely f o rthat particular
extinguisher. T h e quantity o fair i n t h ecyUnder shall
be a t least 2 5 p e r c e n t i n excess o f t h e r a t e d a m o u n t .
T h e air cyUnder shall be fitted w i t h a pressure gauge;
.3 f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r s h a v i n g c a p a c i t y o f n o t l e s s
than 135 1 shall be provided w i t h hoses winded o n
reels a n d p r o v i d e access t o a n y place o f b o i l e r r o o m ;
.4 l o c a t i o n o f 4 5 - U t r e f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r s ( o r t h e i r
e q u i v a l e n t s ) i n m a c h i n e r y spaces, specified i n 5 . 1 , 5 . 2
a n d 5.6 o f T a b l e 5.1.2, shall ensure t h e deUvery o f the
fire extinguishing m e d i u m t o a n y p a r t o f t h e fuel
system, t o pressure lubricating systems, drives casings
covering turbine parts lubricated u n d e r pressure,
engines a n d associated drives a n d other fire risk
equipment. I n cargo ships a fire extinguisher h a v i n g a
capacity o f4 5 1 ( o requivalent) m a ybe located outside t h e space f o r w h i c h i t i s i n t e n d e d .
5.1.11 C a r b o n d i o x i d e o r d r y p o w d e r f i r e e x t i n guishers o f a t least 1 6 a n d 4 5 k g shall m e e t t h e f o l lowing requirements:

.1 c a r b o n d i o x i d e fire e x t i n g u i s h e r s s h a l l n o t b e
used i n spaces o f s u c h v o l u m e t h a t t h e c o m p l e t e
discharge o f t h e carbon dioxide contained i n t h e cyUnders is Uable t o cause concentration o f c a r b o n d i o x i d e i n excess o f 5 p e r cent;
.2 a n e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m s h a U b e d e U v e r e d t o
a n y p a r t o f t h e protected space t h r o u g h fire hoses
o f 1 0 t o 15 m i n length a n d t h r o u g h pipes i f necessary;
.3 f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r s s h a l l b e p l a c e d n e a r t h e e x i t s
i n t h e spaces a n d s h a l l b e p r o t e c t e d against m e chanical damage.
5.1.12 M e t a l r e c e p t a c l e s c o n t a i n i n g s a n d o r d r y
sawdust impregnated w i t h soda shall comply w i t h the
.1 t h e capacity o f t h e receptacles s h a l l b e
at least 0,1 m ;
.2 e a c h r e c e p t a c l e s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a r e a d i l y
o p e n i n g w a t e r t i g h t cover, a scoop a n d a device f o r
holding the cover i n the open position.
5.1.13 F i r e s m o t h e r i n g b l a n k e t s s h a l l c o m p l y
.1 t h e y s h a l l b e s u f f i c i e n t l y s t o u t a n d d u r a b l e ;
.2 a s a r u l e , t h e y a r e t o b e m a d e o f n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e
m a t e r i a l ; clean unraised t h i c k felt m a y be used;
.3 b l a n k e t s s h a l l b e s t o w e d i n s p e c i a l c a s e s o r
lockers;
.4 t h e y s h a l l h a v e a n a r e a o f a t l e a s t 3 m a n d b e
similar t o a square o r circle i n shape.
5.1.14 C o m p l e t e s e t s o f f i r e f i g h t i n g t o o l s s h a l l
.1 o n e c o m p l e t e set s h a l l i n c l u d e o n e fire a x e a n d
one Ught-weight fire crowbar;
.2 t h e s e t s o f f i r e f i g h t i n g t o o l s s h a l l b e s t o w e d o n
regular boards. T h e fastening o f the tools shall permit
o f ready availabiUty o f the tools f o r use;
.3 i n s h i p s f o r t h e c a r r i a g e o f m o t o r v e h i c l e s w i t h
fuel ( o t h e r t h a n diesel o i l ) i n t h e i r t a n k s o n e set o f
tools shall be placed near t h e exits f r o m t h e accomm o d a t i o n a n d m a c h i n e r y spaces t o c a r g o spaces.
5.1.15 T h e f i r e m a n ' s o u t f i t s h a l l i n c l u d e :
.1 p e r s o n a l o u t f i t c o n s i s t i n g o f :
.1.1 p r o t e c t i v e c l o t h i n g o f m a t e r i a l a p p r o v e d b y t h e
competent bodies t o protect t h e s k i n f r o m t h e heat
radiating f r o m t h e fire a n d f r o m burns a n d scalding b y
steam. T h e o u t e r surface shall be water-resistant; t a r p a u U n a n d polyvinylchloride clothes are n o t aUowed f o r
the outer material o fthe fireman's outfit;
.1.2 b o o t s a n d m i t t e n s o f r u b b e r o r o f s o m e o t h e r
dielectric material;
.1.3 a r i g i d h e l m e t e n s u r i n g e f f e c t i v e p r o t e c t i o n
against impacts;
.1.4 a p o r t a b l e s a f e m a n u a l l a n t e r n w i t h a m i n i m u m burning period o f 3 h .
3
448
Rules
I n ships c a r r y i n g dangerous goods, i n o i l tankers

a n d o t h e r ships h a v i n g c a r g o spaces a n d spaces w h e r e
a flammable g a s , v a p o u r o r d u s t / a i r m i x t u r e i s p r e sent o r m a y arise, p r o v i s i o n shall be m a d e f o r explosion-proof lamps with explosion group l E x d
o r l E x p . T h e e x p l o s i o n g r o u p a n d t e m p e r a t u r e class
shall be consistent w i t h t h e category o f the cargo
carried. F o r example, they are l E x d I I A T 3 a n d l E x p
I I T 3 f o r o i l , kerosene a n d a n u m b e r o f gasolines;
.1.5 a f i r e a x e w i t h a h e l v e m a d e o f h a r d w o o d ; i f
the helve is m a d e o f some other material, i t shall be
insulated w i t h some suitable dielectric material;
.2 a self-contained c o m p r e s s e d
air-operated
breathing apparatus, the v o l u m e o f a i r contained i n
the cyUnders o f w h i c h shall be a t least 1200 1 o r o t h e r
self-contained breathing apparatus w h i c h shall be
capable o f f u n c t i o n i n g f o r a t least 3 0 m i n . C o m pressed air b r e a t h i n g apparatus shall be fitted w i t h a n
audible a l a r m a n d a v i s u a l o r o t h e r device w h i c h w i l l
alert t h e user before t h e v o l u m e o f t h e a i r i n t h e cyU n d e r h a s b e e n r e d u c e d t o n o l e s s t h a n 2 0 0 1.
E a c h breathing apparatus shall be provided w i t h
a f l e x i b l e f i r e r e s i s t i n g U f e U n e , n o t less t h a n 3 0 m
i n length. T h e UfeUne shall be subjected t o a test b y
statical l o a d o f 3,5 k N f o r 5 m i n a n d w i t h s t a n d this
l o a d w i t h o u t damage. T h e UfeUne shall be fastened t o
the harness o f the apparatus o r t o a separate belt b y
m e a n s o f a s n a p h o o k t o p r e c l u d e s p o n t a n e o u s sep a r a t i o n o f t h e Une f r o m t h e apparatus.
P r o v i s i o n shall be m a d e f o rt w o spare charges o r
t w o spare breathing apparatuses p e r each required
self-contained breathing apparatus. A l l a i r cyUnders
for the apparatus shall be interchangeable.
Passenger ships c a r r y i n g n o t m o r e t h a n 3 6 passengers a n d cargo ships equipped w i t h s u i t a b l y located
means f o r fully recharging breathing a i r cyUnders b y
clean a i r m a y have o n l y o n e spare charge f o r each
breathing apparatus o r o n e spare breathing apparatus
per each required self-contained breathing apparatus.
I n passenger ships c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 3 6 passengers, t w o spare charges o r t w o spare b r e a t h i n g
a p p a r a t u s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d p e r e a c h r e q u i r e d selfcontained breathing apparatus.
Passenger ships c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 3 6 passengers
constructed o n o r after 1 July 2010 shall be fitted w i t h
a suitably located means f o r fully
recharging
b r e a t h i n g a i r cyUnders, free f r o m c o n t a m i n a t i o n . A n
onboard means o f recharging breathing apparatus
cyUnders used d u r i n g drills shall be provided o r a
suitable n u m b e r o fspare cyUnders shall be carried o n
b o a r d t o replace those used. T h e means f o r recharging shall be either:
breathing a i r compressors suppUed f r o m t h e m a i n
and emergency switchboard, o r independently driven,
w i t h a m i n i m u m capacity o f 6 0 1/min p e r required
b r e a t h i n g apparatus, n o t t o exceed 4 2 0 1/min; o r
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
self-contained high-pressure storage systems o f suitable pressure t o recharge t h e breathing apparatus used
o n b o a r d , w i t h a capacity o f a t least 1200 1 p e r r e q u i r e d
b r e a t h i n g apparatus, n o t t o exceed 5 0 0 0 0 1 o f free air;
.3 a m i n i m u m o f t w o t w o - w a y p o r t a b l e r a d i o telephone apparatus o f a n explosion-proof type o r
i n t r i n s i c a l l y safe f o r e a c h fire p a r t y .
Fireman's outfit a n d personal equipment shall be
r e a d y f o r u s e a n d s t o r e d i n r e a d i l y accessible locations that are permanently a n d clearly m a r k e d a n d
w h e r e m o r e t h a n o n e fireman's o u t f i t o r m o r e t h a n
o n e set o f p e r s o n a l e q u i p m e n t is carried o n b o a r d
t h e y s h a l l b e stored i n w i d e l y separated places. I n
p a s s e n g e r s h i p s a t l e a s t t w o fireman's o u t f i t s a n d , i n
a d d i t i o n , o n e set o f p e r s o n a l e q u i p m e n t shall be
available a t a n y such place. A t least t w o
fireman's
outfits shall be stored i n each m a i n vertical zone.
5.1.16 P o r t a b l e e l e c t r i c d r i l l s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d
w i t h a n electric cable o f sufficient length. T h e useo f
p n e u m a t i c drills instead o f electric ones is p e r m i t t e d .
T h e electric o r p n e u m a t i c drills specified i ni t e m 1 1 o f
T a b l e 5.1.2 m a y be r e c k o n e d i n t h e n u m b e r o f t h e
items prescribed f o r other types o f ship's outfit.
5.1.17 P o r t a b l e d i s e l fire m o t o r - p u m p s s h a l l
.1 t h e p u m p s h a l l ensure s i m u l t a n e o u s o p e r a t i o n
o f a t l e a s t t w o fire h o s e n o z z l e s w i t h a n o u t l e t d i a m e t e r o f a t least 1 2 m m a t a p u m p discharge pressure
o f a t least 0 , 2 M P a a n d a t v a c u u m i n s u c t i o n p i p i n g
n o t less t h a n 0 , 0 5 M P a ; c e n t r i f u g a l p u m p s s h a l l b e
fitted w i t h a s e l f - p r i m i n g d e v i c e ;
.2 t h e p u m p m o t o r s h a l l b e capable o f b e i n g
readily started either b y h a n d o r b y special starters
both at above-zero a n d below-zero ambient temperatures. T h e m o t o r shall be provided w i t h a
quantity o f fuel t o ensure t h e operation o f the p u m p
f o r 1,5 h w i t h o u t r e f u e l l i n g ; t h e s h i p s h a l l c a r r y a n
a d d i t i o n a l reserve o f fuel f o r refuelUng;
.3 e a c h m o t o r - p u m p s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h suct i o n h o s e s , t o a t o t a l l e n g t h o f 8 m , fitted w i t h a
suction strainer a n d a non-return valve, t w o delivery
h o s e s , e a c h 1 0 m l o n g , t w o - d u a l p u r p o s e fire h o s e
nozzles w i t h a n o u t l e t d i a m e t e r o f a t least 1 2 m m a n d
a b r a n c h c o u p U n g f o rconnecting t w o hoses;
.4 t h e d i m e n s i o n s a n d t y p e o f c o u p U n g f o r t h e deUvery hoses a n d nozzles shall correspond t o those used i n the
f i x e d w a t e r fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s f i t t e d i n t h e s h i p ;
.5 t h e m o t o r - p u m p s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h t o o l s
a n d accessories i n c o m p U a n c e w i t h t h e m a n u f a c turer's specification;
.6 m o t o r - p u m p s f o r u s e i n s h i p s n a v i g a t i n g u n d e r
n o r t h e r n l a t i t u d e s shaU b e p l a c e d i n h e a t e d spaces, t o gether w i t h t h e suction a n d deUvery hoses a n d nozzles.
5.1.18 T h e i n t e r n a t i o n a l s h o r e c o n n e c t i o n ( r e f e r
t o F i g . 5.1.18) f o r w a t e r supply f r o m shore shall be i n
accordance w i t h t h e following specification:
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
449
F i g . 5.1.18
International shore c o n n e c t i o n (ship)
outside diameter o fflange 178 m m ;

inside diameter o f flange 64 m m ;
b o l t circle diameter 132 m m ;
holes 4 equispaced holes 19 m m diameter
equidistantly placed, slotted t o t h e flange periphery;
flange thickness a t least 14,5 m m ;
bolts 4 pes, each 16 m m i n diameter
and 50 m mi n length;
bolt nuts 4 pes, 16 m m i n diameter;
washers f o rbolts 8 pes.
O n o n e side t h e shore c o n n e c t i o n s h a l l h a v e a
flat-faced flange w i t h dimensions as above, a n d o n
the other a quick-acting coupUng w h i c h shall correspond t o t h e ship's h y d r a n t s a n d hoses b o t h i n d i mensions a n d design.
T h e shore connection, gasket, bolts a n d n u t s
s h a l l b e m a d e o f m a t e r i a l s s u i t a b l e f o r 1,0 M P a .
T h e shore c o n n e c t i o n complete w i t h gasket, f o u r
bolts, f o u r nuts a n d eight washers shall be stowed
t o g e t h e r w i t h o t h e r i t e m s o f f i r e fighting o u t f i t i n a n
easily accessible p o s i t i o n .
5.1.19 P o r t a b l e m e d i u m e x p a n s i o n m e c h a n i c a l f o a m
generators a n d portable c o m b i n a t i o n - f o a m p r o d u c t i o n
units shaU c o m p l y w i t h t h e foUowing requirements:
.1 concentrate s o l u t i o n discharge a t a pressure
o f 0 , 6 M P a , n o t less t h a n 3 6 0 1 / m i n ( r e f e r a l s o
to 3.7.2.2);
.2 f o a m j e t r a n g e , a t l e a s t 8 m ;
.3 r a t e d n u m b e r o f f o a m g e n e r a t o r s / u n i t s s h a l l b e
N=Qlq
where
(5.1.19.3)
Q = s o l u t i o n c a p a c i t y o f t h e s y s t e m , i n 1/min;
q = s o l u t i o n capacity o f a f o a m generator/unit, i n 1/min.
50 per cent o fthe f o a m generators/units a n d extension pipes required b y items 2.4 a n d 2.5 o f T a ble 5.1.2 shall be placed i n t h e p o o p , t h e r e m a i n d e r ,
i n t h e forecastle a n d m i d s h i p superstructure, i f any.
5.1.20 F o r a p p U c a t o r s h a l l c o n s i s t o f L - s h a p e d
p i p e w i t h l o n g s i d e o f a b o u t 2 m fitted f o r c o n n e c t i o n
t o fire h o s e s a n d s h o r t s i d e o f a b o u t 0 , 2 5 m e q u i p p e d
w i t h fixed n o z z l e f o r p r o d u c i n g w a t e r f o r o r fitted f o r
connecting water-spraying nozzle.
These appUcators shaU be located near the fire h y d rants a n dthose f o r breathing apparatus near t h e latter.
5.1.21 F i r e b u c k e t s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h t h e
h e m p rope o f sufficient length a n d shall be stowed o n
t h e o p e n decks i n easily accessible places. T h e buckets
shall be painted r e d a n d bear inscription "fire".
5.1.22 I n t a n k e r s a n d c o m b i n a t i o n c a r r i e r s g a s
analyzers shall meet the following requirements:
.1 p r o v i s i o n s h a l l be m a d e f o r u s e o f gas a n a l y zers w i t h gas s a m p U n g pipes as specified i n 9.14.2,
Part V i l l i "Systems a n d Piping";
.2 s u i t a b l e m e a n s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d f o r t h e c a U bration o f gas analyzers;
.3 g a s a n a l y z e r s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a s e t o f
spares suppUed b y t h e m a n u f a c t u r e r .
Alternatively ship m a y be additionany equipped
w i t h one portable instrument for measuring oxygen a n d
one for measuring flammable vapour concentrations, o r
w i t h t w o gas analyzers, each capable o f measuring b o t h
oxygen a n d flammable vapour concentrations.
5.1.23 I n a U p a s s e n g e r a n d c a r g o s h i p s o f 5 0 0
gross tonnage a n d o v e r p r o v i s i o n shall be m a d e f o r
emergency escape b r e a t h i n g devices ( E E B D ) o f a
Register-approved type w h i c h shaU be o n l y used f o r
emergency escape f r o m a c o m p a r t m e n t w i t h a h a zardous atmosphere. E E B D shaU n o t be used b y crew
f o r fighting f i r e s , e n t e r i n g o x y g e n d e f i c i e n t v o i d s p a c e s
o r t a n k s . I n s u c h cases a s e l f - c o n t a i n e d b r e a t h i n g a p p a r a t u s specified i n 5.1.15.2 shaU b e used.
E E B D shall meet the following requirements:
. 1 E E B D s h a l l p r o v i d e service d u r a t i o n o f at least 1 0 m i n ;
.2 E E B D s h a l l p r o t e c t e y e s , n o s e a n d m o u t h
d u r i n g escape a n d consist o f a h e l m e t fully c o v e r i n g
head, neck a n d m a y cover portions o fthe shoulders,
o r a m a s k f u l l y c o v e r i n g t h e face so as t o f o r m a
c o m p l e t e seal a r o u n d t h e eyes, n o s e a n d m o u t h ,
w h i c h is secured b y suitable means. T h e helmets a n d
masks shall be manufactured o f flame resistant m a terials a n d include a clear w i n d o w f o r viewing;
.3 a n i n a c t i v a t e d E E B D s h a l l b e c a r r i e d h a n d s - f r e e ;
.4 E E B D s h a l l b e d e s i g n e d s o t h a t t o e n a b l e q u i c k
a n d easy dressing. B r i e f instructions o r diagrams
clearly illustrating their use shall be clearly printed o n
each E E B D .
A n E E B D , w h e n stored, shall be suitably protected f r o m weather exposure.
Maintenance requirements, manufacturer's trad e m a r k a n d serial n u m b e r , shelf Ufe a n d date o f
manufacture shall be printed o n each E E B D . E E B D
intended f o rtraining shall have appropriate distinct
marking.
T h e n u m b e r a n d location o f E E B D shall be i n dicated o n fire c o n t r o l plans (refer t o 1.4).
450
Rules
5.2 S P A R E P A R T S A N D
for
TOOLS
5.2.1 A ship shall c a r r y spare parts a n d tools, the

n u m b e r o f w h i c h s h a l l be n o t less t h a n t h a t s p e c i f i e d
the Classification
and
Construction
of Sea-Going
in T a b l e 5.2.1. T h e quantities prescribed i n the Table

apply to fixed fire extinguishing systems only.
5.2.2 T h e spare p a r t s a n d t o o l s f o r the systems
shall be k e p t i n the fire e x t i n c t i o n s t a t i o n s .
S p a r e p a r t s shall be s u i t a b l y m a r k e d .
T a b l e
Nos.
1
Description o f spare parts a n d tools
Ships
5.2.1
N u m b e r per ship
W a t e r fire m a i n system:
.1 a fire h o s e o f e a c h l e n g t h a n d d i a m e t e r fitted c o m p l e t e w i t h c o u p l i n g s 1 p c o f e a c h
.2 c o n n e c t i o n c o u p l i n g s f o r e a c h s i z e f i t t e d ( i f t h e s h i p i s p r o v i d e d w i t h 2 p e s
hydrants of various diameters)
2 pes (of each diameter)
.3 q u i c k - a c t i n g c o u p l i n g s ( h o s e c o u p l i n g s )
.4 q u i c k - a c t i n g c o u p l i n g s ( h o s e c o u p l i n g s ) f o r s h i p s o f 4 0 0 0 g r o s s 4 p e s ( o f e a c h d i a m e t e r )
tonnage and upwards
.5 r u b b e r r i n g s f o r p a c k i n g o f j o i n t s b e t w e e n c o u p l i n g s , h o s e s a n d 5 p e r c e n t o f t o t a l n u m b e r , b u t n o t l e s s t h a n 10 p e s
apparatuses
.6 h o s e c l a m p s
4 p e s ( f o r s h i p s o f l e s s t h a n 300 g r o s s t o n n a g e , a s
m a n y a s t h e n u m b e r o f h o s e s , b u t n o t m o r e t h a n 4)
.7 w r e n c h e s f o r e n g a g i n g o r d i s e n g a g i n g c o u p l i n g s ( w h e r e n o z z l e s a r e a c c o r d i n g t o t h e n u m b e r o f h y d r a n t s .
fitted b y m e a n s o f a special wrench)
.8 f i r e h y d r a n t o f e a c h s i z e f i t t e d , i n a s s e m b l y
1 p c o f e a c h size
.9 h a n d w h e e l t o f i r e h y d r a n t o f e a c h s i z e f i t t e d
.10 v a l v e d i s k s w i t h p a c k i n g r i n g s t o f i r e h y d r a n t s o f e a c h s i z e f i t t e d
Sprinkler system:
.1 s p r i n k l e r h e a d s , i n a s s e m b l y
T h e n u m b e r o f spare sprinkler heads shall be
determined proceeding f r o m their type a n d
n u m b e r already fitted o n b o a r d :
6 - f o r s y s t e m s h a v i n g l e s s t h a n 300 h e a d s ;
12 - f o r s y s t e m s h a v i n g 300 t o 1000 h e a d s ;
24 - f o r s y s t e m s h a v i n g m o r e t h a n 1000 h e a d s
.2 w r e n c h e s f o r s p r i n k l e r h e a d s ( w h e r e h e a d s a r e f i t t e d b y m e a n s o f a 1 p c p e r s e c t i o n
special wrench)
1 set, a c c o r d i n g to d e l i v e r y specification
.3 p a r t s f o r c o n t r o l v a l v e
Pressure water-spraying, water-screen, drenching systems:
.1 s p r a y nozzles o f v a r i o u s types fitted i n the s y s t e m
5 per cent o f total n u m b e r o f s p r a y nozzles fitted
.2 w r e n c h f o r s p r a y n o z z l e s ( w h e r e n o z z l e s a r e f i t t e d b y m e a n s o f a 1 p c
special wrench)
F o a m fire extinguishing system:
.1 h y d r a n t o f e a c h size fitted, i n a s s e m b l y
1 pc
.2 f i x e d a i r - f o a m n o z z l e o r f o a m g e n e r a t o r
1 pc
.3 g a u g e g l a s s e s f o r t a n k s
1 pc
.4 r u b b e r r i n g s f o r j o i n t s
10 p e s
C a r b o n dioxide smothering system:
.1 cylinder valves, a s s e m b l e d ; f o r the n u m b e r o f cylinders:
b e l o w 50
1 pc
50 t o 100
2 pes
100 a n d o v e r
3 pes
.2 w r e n c h e s f o r a s s e m b l i n g a n d d i s a s s e m b l i n g c y l i n d e r v a l v e s a n d o t h e r 1 s e t p e r s t a t i o n
special valves
.3 p l u g s t o b e f i t t e d o n p i p e s l e a d i n g f r o m c y l i n d e r v a l v e s , w h e n 25 p e r c e n t o f t h e n u m b e r o f c y l i n d e r s
cylinders are removed
.4 p r o t e c t i v e d i a p h r a g m s
In accordance with the n u m b e r of cylinders
.5 t h r u s t b u s h e s a n d w a s h e r s f o r p r o t e c t i v e d e v i c e s
10 p e r c e n t o f t h e n u m b e r o f c y l i n d e r s
.6 n o n - r e t u r n v a l v e s
5 p e r cent o f total n u m b e r , b u t n o t less t h a n 1 pc
.7 d i s c h a r g e n o z z l e s o f e a c h t y p e a n d s i z e f i t t e d
2 pes
.8 s c a l e s f o r w e i g h i n g c y l i n d e r s o r c a r b o n d i o x i d e l e v e l g a u g e
1 pc
In accordance with delivery specification
.9 p a r t s o f t a n k c a r b o n d i o x i d e c o n t e n t s g a u g e s
Inert gas smothering system:
.1 c o n t r o l v a l v e (sluice valve) f o r a d m i t t i n g inert g a s i n t o p r o t e c t e d spaces 1 p c
In accordance with delivery specification
.2 p a r t s f o r a u t o m a t i c c o n t r o l
D r y powder system:
.1 p a r t s o f release a r r a n g e m e n t s f o r h a n d h o s e lines a n d m o n i t o r s
1 set o f e a c h
.2 n o z z l e s o f e a c h t y p e a n d s i z e
1 2 pes
.3 w r e n c h e s f o r a s s e m b l i n g a n d d i s a s s e m b l i n g v a l v e s , h a n d h o s e l i n e s , 1 s e t
nozzles
Aerosol system:
.1 g e n e r a t o r o f fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g a e r o s o l
One generator of each type used
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
451
Table
5.2.1
continued
N u m b e r per ship
Nos.
Description o f spare parts a n d tools
Miscellaneous items, f o r all systems:

.1 i n s t r u m e n t s a n d g a u g e s :
pressure gauges, v a c u u m gauges, thermometers o fe a c h type fitted i n
systems
.2 a d e q u a t e q u a n t i t y o f p a c k i n g m a t e r i a l f o r o n b o a r d r e p a i r s
.3 f u s e s f o r a u t o m a t i c c l o s i n g o f f i r e d o o r s a n d d a m p e r s
1 pc o feach
1 set
In accordance with number o fdoors a n d dampers

thus controlled
.4 s p a r e p a r t s f o r p u m p s , f a n s , c o m p r e s s o r s a n d e n g i n e s s e r v i n g f i r e I n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h S e c t i o n 5, P a r t V I I " M a c h i extinguishing systems
nery Installations"
.5 s p a r e p a r t s f o r e l e c t r i c a l e q u i p m e n t o f f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s
I n a c c o r d a n c ew i t h Section 21, P a r t X I "Electrical
Equipment"
6 R E Q U I R E M E N T S F O RFIRE PROTECTION O F SPECIAL P U R P O S E SHIPS

AND SPECIAL FACILITIES O N SHIPS
6.1 S H I P S E Q U I P P E D W I T H
HELIDECKS
6.1.1 F i r e p r o t e c t i o n o f s h i p s e q u i p p e d w i t h h e l i decks shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 6.4,

Part X V T J "Distinguishing M a r k s a n d Descriptive
Notations i n t h e Class N o t a t i o n Specifying Structurala n d
Operational Particulars o f Ships".
SHIPS
6.2.1 G e n e r a l
6.2.1.1 T h e f i r e p r o t e c t i o n o f s p e c i a l p u r p o s e
ships shall be arranged depending o n t h e n u m b e r o f
persons carried o n board:
.1 n o t m o r e t h a n 6 0 p e r s o n s s i m i l a r t o t h a t o f
cargo ships o f m o r e t h a n 5 0 0gross tonnage;
.2 m o r e t h a n 6 0 , b u t n o t m o r e t h a n 2 4 0 p e r s o n s
similar t o t h a t o f passenger ships c a r r y i n g n o t m o r e
t h a n 3 6 passengers;
.3 m o r e t h a n 2 4 0 p e r s o n s s i m i l a r t o t h a t o f
passenger ships c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 3 6 passengers.
6.2.1.2 F i r e p r o t e c t i o n o f w o r k i n g s p a c e s s p e c i fied i n 1.5.8 s h a l l be a r r a n g e d w i t h d u e r e g a r d f o r t h e
p u r p o s e o ft h e w o r k i n g space a n d e q u i p m e n t located
therein. A s a rule t h e fire protection o f w o r k i n g
spaces s h a l l b e a r r a n g e d s i m i l a r t o t h a t o f service
spaces specified i n 1.5.3.
6.2.2 S t o r e r o o m s f o r e x p l o s i v e s ( m a g a z i n e s ) .
6 2 . 2 . 1 I n special purpose ships t h e a r r a n g e m e n t o f
storerooms f o r explosives (magazines) m a y be perm i t t e d . T h e magazines shall be o f t h e f o l l o w i n g types:
.1 i n t e g r a l m a g a z i n e s f o r m i n g a n i n t e g r a l p a r t o f
the ship;
2 portable magazines that are non-integral, portable magazines w i t h a capacity o f 3 m o r greater;
.3 m a g a z i n e b o x e s t h a t a r e n o n - i n t e g r a l , p o r t a b l e
m a g a z i n e s w i t h a c a p a c i t y o f less t h a n 3 m .
3
6.2.2.2 I n t e g r a l m a g a z i n e s s h a l l b e l o c a t e d i n t h e
f o r w a r d o r after p o r t i o n o f t h e ship a n d be located
n o t less t h a n o n e w a t e r t i g h t s p a c e a p a r t f r o m t h e
propeller shaft, propeller a n d rudder. T h e y shall n o t
be l o c a t e d b e l o w a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces, c o n t r o l
stations a n d be adjacent t o t h e m .
6.2.2.3 I n t e g r a l m a g a z i n e s s h a l l n o t b e a d j a c e n t
to m a c h i n e r y spaces o f c a t e g o r y A , galleys a n d o t h e r
d a n g e r o u s spaces. I f i t i s necessary t o locate t h e
m a g a z i n e i np r o x i m i t y t o these areas, a c o f f e r d a m o f
a t least 0 , 6 m s h a l l be p r o v i d e d s e p a r a t i n g t w o spaces.
Such a cofferdam shall n o t be used f o r stowage a n d
shall be provided w i t h ventilation. O n e o f t h e bulkh e a d s f o r m i n g t h e c o f f e r d a m s h a l l b e o f " A - 1 5 " class,
i f i t is adjacent t o m a c h i n e r y space o f category A i t
s h a l l b e " A - 3 0 " class.
6.2.2.4 A c c e s s t o i n t e g r a l m a g a z i n e s s h a l l p r e f e r a b l y b e f r o m t h e w e a t h e r deck, b u t i n n o case
t h r o u g h spaces specified i n 6.2.2.2 a n d 6.2.2.3.
6.2.2.5 P o r t a b l e m a g a z i n e s a n d m a g a z i n e b o x e s
shall be located o n a weather deck i n a location protected f r o m direct i m p a c t o f t h e sea. T h e l o c a t i o n s h a l l
provide sufficient protection against w a r m a i r a n d h a zardous v a p o u r s being e m i t t e d f r o m galleys, p u m p
r o o m s , etc. D u e r e g a r d shall b e p a i d t o possible r i s k o f
subjecting certain explosives t o radio emissions.
6.2.2.6 M a g a z i n e b o x e s s h a l l b e l o c a t e d o n a
w e a t h e r deck a t least 0 , 1 m f r o m t h e deck a n da n y
deckhouse a n d i n a position suitable f o r jettisoning
the contents.
6.2.2.7 B u l k h e a d s a n d d e c k s b o u n d i n g i n t e g r a l
magazines shall be o f watertight construction o f
" A - 1 5 " class. I f t h e spaces adjacent t o t h e m a g a z i n e s
contain n o combustible materials the construction
m a y b e o f " A - 0 " class. I n s u l a t i o n s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d t o
prevent condensation o f moisture.
6.2.2.8 P i p i n g o f f r e s h o r s a l t w a t e r a n d d r a i n a g e
systems a n d piping o f systems installed i n t h em a gazines themselves m a y be r o u t e d t h r o u g h m a g a -
452
Rules
zines. P i p i n g o fo t h e r systems shall be p e r m i t t e d o n l y

if they are enclosed i n a watertight t r u n k .
6.2.2.9 T h e m a g a z i n e s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h
means t o ensure their effective closing a n d t o prevent
u n a u t h o r i z e d access.
6.2.2.10 R a c k s , s u p p o r t s a n d o t h e r m e a n s s h a l l b e
installed, t h e construction a n d capacity o f w h i c h shall
p r o v i d e safe s t o w a g e o f e x p l o s i v e s i n t h e i r a p p r o v e d
containers w i t h m i n i m u m dunnage a n d t o prevent t h e m
f r o m shifting a n d falling w h e n t h e ship is rolling.
T h e upper rack shall n o t be located higher
t h a n 1,8 m a b o v e t h e d e c k . T h e r a c k s s h a l l h a v e h o l e s
for water flowing f r o m the upper t o t h e lower racks
during operation o f t h e drenching system.
6.2.2.11 D e c k s o f m a g a z i n e s s h a l l b e c o v e r e d w i t h
a permanent non-slip, non-sparking covering.
6.2.2.12 A f r e e v o l u m e o f t h e m a g a z i n e , w h e n
loaded, shall be a t least 7 0 p e r cent o f t h e entire
m a g a z i n e v o l u m e . N o t m o r e t h a n 100 k g o f explosives
o r 1000 detonators shall be placed f o r each 1
6.2.2.13 I n t e g r a l m a g a z i n e s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d
w i t h n a t u r a l o r mechanical v e n t i l a t i o n fitted w i t h
flame arresters sufficient t o m a i n t a i n t h e magazine
t e m p e r a t u r e n o t h i g h e r t h a n 3 8 C.
6 2 2 . 1 4 Portable magazines shall have watertight
metal construction insulated w i t h non-combustible m a t e r i a l s o n t h e i n s i d e a s a c o n s t r u c t i o n o f " A - 1 5 " class.
6.2.2.15 P o r t a b l e m a g a z i n e s h a l l b e a r a l a b e l i n dicating mass i n light c o n d i t i o n a n d m a x i m u m permissible mass o f explosives.
6.2.2.16 P o r t a b l e m a g a z i n e s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d
w i t h e f f i c i e n t n a t u r a l v e n t i l a t i o n fitted w i t h f l a m e
arresters.
6.2.2.17 M a g a z i n e s s h a l l b e fitted w i t h a u t o m a t i c
heat detectors operating a t temperatures rising
a b o v e 4 0 C. A n a p p r o p r i a t e v i s i b l e a n d a u d i b l e
alarms actuated b y this detector shall be provided i n
the wheelhouse a n d i n the chief mate's cabin.
6.2.2.18 I n t e g r a l a n d p o r t a b l e m a g a z i n e s s h a l l b e
fitted w i t h d r e n c h i n g s y s t e m s i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3 . 6 .
T h e controls shall be clearly m a r k e d w i t h indication
o f their purpose.
6.2.2.19 M a g a z i n e s s h a l l b e fitted w i t h s c u p p e r s .
T h e scupper pipes shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h valves
w h i c h shall be kept permanently closed under n o r m a l
service c o n d i t i o n s . T h e valves shall be c o n t r o l l e d
f r o m outside the magazines.
6.2.2.20 I n t e g r a l a n d p o r t a b l e m a g a z i n e s s h a l l b e
clearly marked:
" T h e space is a m a g a z i n e " ;
" O p e n lights a n d flame shall be kept away";
"The magazine door shall be locked";
"Matches a n d lighters shall be removed prior t o
entering";
" D o n o t U f tw i t h c o n t e n t s " ( i n case o f p o r t a b l e
magazines).
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
6.2.2.21 M a g a z i n e b o x e s s h a l l h a v e w a t e r t i g h t
m e t a l c o n s t r u c t i o n w i t h w a l l s a n d l i d s n o t less
than 3 m m thick. Boxes exposed t o sunrays shall be
p r o t e c t e d w i t h solar screens.
6.2.2.22 M a g a z i n e b o x e s s h a l l b e c l e a r l y l a b e l e d :
"The container is a magazine box";
" O p e n Ughts a n d flame shall be kept a w a y " ;
"The b o x shall be locked".
6.2.2.23 E l e c t r i c a l e q u i p m e n t i n m a g a z i n e s s h a l l
c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 19.4.3, P a r t X I
"Electrical E q u i p m e n t " a n d other appUcable requirements o fthe above Part.
6.2.2.24 D e t o n a t o r s s h a l l b e s t o w e d s e p a r a t e l y
f r o m other explosives.
6.2.2.25 C h a r g i n g o f c a r t r i d g e s a n d o t h e r p r e paratory operations f o r using explosives shall be
m a d e i n charging r o o m s w h i c h shall be specially
provided f o r that purpose. Charging r o o m s shall be
a r r a n g e d i n steel enclosures a n d located o n t h e
weather deck apart f r o m c o n t r o l stations, accomm o d a t i o n a n d service spaces. B u l k h e a d s , d e c k s a n d
e q u i p m e n t o f t h e charging r o o m s shall be faced w i t h
non-sparking materials.
6.2.3 C a r r i a g e o f d a n g e r o u s g o o d s .
D a n g e r o u s g o o d s o n special purpose ships shall
be carried i n accordance w i t h t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f
Chapter 7 "Dangerous G o o d s " o fthe Code o f Safety
for Special Purpose Ships, 2008 ( I M O resolution
MSC.266(84)).
6.3 O I L T A N K E R S ( > 6 0 C)
6.3.1 T h e fire p r o t e c t i o n o f o i l t a n k e r s ( > 6 0 C)

shall be similar t o t h a t o f cargo ships h a v i n g regard
of the following:
.1 a f i x e d d e c k f o a m fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m
c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e requirements o f 3.7 shall be fitted;
.2 t h e w a t e r fire m a i n s y s t e m s h a l l a d d i t i o n a l l y
m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.2.5.4;
3 t w o a d d i t i o n a l sets o f f i r e m a n ' s o u t f i t i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h i t e m 10.2 o f T a b l e 5.1.2 shaU b e p r o v i d e d .
6.3.2 I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 6 . 3 . 1 t h e
following shall be provided:
.1 c a r g o t a n k s s h a l l n o t b e adjacent t o a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces;
2 a i r intakes a n d o t h e r openings leading t o acc o m m o d a t i o n spaces s h a l l n o t b e faced t o c a r g o area.
Entrance doors i n bulkheads o f superstructures
a n d deckhouses facing cargo area m a y be instaUed o n l y
i n cases i f t h e y d o n o t l e a d t o a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces;
.3 a c o n t i n u o u s c o a m i n g n o t l e s s t h a n 1 5 0 m m
h i g h e x t e n d i n g f r o m side t o side s h a l l b e fitted o n t h e
upper deck a t a distance o f a b o u t 2 m f r o m a superstructure w h e r e a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d service
spaces a r e a r r a n g e d ;
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
453
.4 m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s o f c a t e g o r y A s h a l l b e i n
general arranged a f t beyond cargo a n d slop t a n k
area.
6.3.3 W h e r e c a r g o h e a t i n g a r r a n g e m e n t s a r e f i t ted, p r o v i s i o n shall be m a d e t o prevent cargo f r o m
h e a t i n g u p t o t h e t e m p e r a t u r e w h i c h i s n o t less
t h a n 1 5 C l o w e r t h a n t h e f l a s h t e m p e r a t u r e .
6.4 O I L R E C O V E R Y S H I P S
AND BILGE W A T E R REMOVING SHIPS
6 . 4 . 1 T h e fire p r o t e c t i o n o f o i l r e c o v e r y s h i p s
shall be similar t o that o fo i l tankers a n d i n addition
m e e t t h e requirements o f 6.4.4 t o 6.4.10.
6.4.2 T h e fire p r o t e c t i o n o f o i l r e c o v e r y s h i p s
( > 6 0 C) s h a l l b e s i m i l a r t o t h a t o f o i l t a n k e r s
( > 6 0 C) a n d i n a d d i t i o n m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f
6.4.4 a n d 6.4.10.
6.4.3 T h e fire p r o t e c t i o n o f b i l g e w a t e r r e m o v i n g
s h i p s s h a l l b e s i m i l a r t o t h a t o f o i l t a n k e r s ( > 6 0 C )
a n d i n a d d i t i o n m e e t t h e requirements o f 6.4.10.
6.4.4 T h e h u l l , s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s , s t r u c t u r a l b u l k heads, decks a n d deckhouses shall be manufactured
o f steel. T h e u s e o f a l u m i n i u m a l l o y s f o r t h i s p u r p o s e
is n o t p e r m i t t e d .
6.4.5 T h e s p a c e s i n t e n d e d f o r r e m o v a b l e e q u i p m e n t w h i c h is used f o r o i l recovery shall meet the
.1 fire i n t e g r i t y o f t h e i r structures s h a l l m e e t t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 2.4.2 f o r service spaces o f c a t e g o r y (9);
.2 t h e y s h a l l b e p r o t e c t e d b y f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g
system according t o i t e m 6 o f Table 3.1.2.1;
3 m a y b e regarded as c o f f e r d a m s specified i n 2.4.7.
6.4.6 T h e s h i p s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a
fixed
drenching system f o r drenching o f ship's outside
surfaces w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g rate o f w a t e r discharge:
.1 1 0 1/min p e r 1 m o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e o u t s i d e
walls length;
.2 2 , 5 1 / m i n p e r 1 m o f c a r g o a r e a h o r i z o n t a l
surface.
T h e d r e n c h i n g s y s t e m specified i n 6.4.6.2 m a y
n o t be installed i f the fixed deck f o a m fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g
system ensures effective c o o l i n g b y w a t e r o f t h e entire
surface o f cargo area w i t h the u s e o f m o n i t o r s r e m o t e l y
controlled f r o m t h e navigation bridge.
6 . 4 . 7 T h e w a t e r fire m a i n s y s t e m a n d d r e n c h i n g
a n d f o a m fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s s p e c i f i e d i n 6 . 4 . 6
shall u s e sea w a t e r c o m i n g o n l y f r o m sea openings
arranged i n ship's b o t t o m .
6 . 4 . 8 R e m o t e s t a r t i n g o f fire p u m p s , fixed fire
e x t i n g u i s h i n g systems f o r m a c h i n e r y space o f categ o r y A a n d d r e n c h i n g systems specified i n 6.4.6 shall
be p r o v i d e d f r o m n a v i g a t i o n bridge.
6.4.9 T h e h i g h e x p a n s i o n f o a m s y s t e m s h a l l
n o t b e used f o r p r o t e c t i o n o f spaces specified i n 6.4.5.
2
6.4.10 T h e s h i p s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a fixed o r
p o r t a b l e o i l f l a s h p o i n t tester.
6.4.11 F o r s m a l l s h i p s o f u p t o 1 0 0 0 t d e a d w e i g h t
periodically engaged i n recovery o f oil products a tthe
s e a s u r f a c e , t h e fixed a u t o m a t i c s y s t e m f o r a t m o sphere m o n i t o r i n g m a y be replaced, o n agreement
w i t h t h e Register, b y a m o n i t o r i n g system w i t h portable analyzers specified i n i t e m 15.1 o f T a b l e 5.1.2.
A t m o s p h e r e m o n i t o r i n g shall be appUed during the
w h o l e p e r i o d o f stay o f t h e ship w i t h i n o i l spot i n
locations specified i n 9.14.5, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d
Piping".
6.4.12 I n s h i p s o f l e s s t h a n 1 5 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e w i t h
t h e m a i n p r o p u l s i o n m a c h i n e r y o f p o w e r o u t p u t less
t h a n 2 2 0 k W , t h e fire p u m p d r i v e n b y t h e m a i n e n gine m a y be used provided that t h e p r o p u l s i o n u n i t
(engine-shaft-propeller) is so designed as t o p e r m i t
this p u m p operation w h e n t h e ship is n o t under way.
6.5 B E R T H - C O N N E C T E D
SHIPS
6.5.1 T h e f i r e p r o t e c t i o n o f b e r t h - c o n n e c t e d s h i p s
used as f l o a t i n g hotels a n d hostels shaU b e designed depending o n t h en u m b e r o f persons w h o sojourn therein:
.1 u p t o 6 0 persons s i m i l a r t o t h a t o f cargo
ships o fm o r e t h a n 5 0 0 gross tonnage;
.2 f r o m 6 0 u p t o 2 0 0 p e r s o n s s i m i l a r t o t h a t o f
passenger ships c a r r y i n g n o t m o r e t h a n 3 6 passengers;
.3 m o r e t h a n 2 4 0 p e r s o n s s i m i l a r t o t h a t o f
passenger ships c a r r y i n g m o r e t h a n 3 6 passengers.
6.5.2 T h e f i r e p r o t e c t i o n o f f l o a t i n g d o c k s , p o w e r
plants, workshops a n d floating warehouses shall be
similar t o t h a t o fcargo ships o fm o r e t h a n 5 0 0 gross
tonnage. I f a special personnel o f 5 0 persons a n d
m o r e i s c a r r i e d o n t h e s e s h i p s , t h e fire p r o t e c t i o n
shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 6.5.1.2
o r 6.5.1.3.
6.5.3 F o r b e r t h - c o n n e c t e d s h i p s o p e r a t i n g a t
shore q u a y w a l l t h e Register m a y revise t h e requirem e n t s specified i n 6.5.1 a n d 6.5.2, t a k i n g i n t o account
o p e r a t i n g c o n d i t i o n s o f t h e s h i p a n d i t s fire p r o t e c t i o n determined b y t h e ship designer o n agreement
w i t h the customer.
6.6 S H I P S H A V I N G A D I S T I N G U I S H I N G M A R K
OF PROVISION WITH M E A N S F O R FIRE-FIGHTING
ABOARD O T H E R SHIPS
6.6.1 T h e fire p r o t e c t i o n o f s h i p s h a v i n g a d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k o f p r o v i s i o n w i t h m e a n s f o r firefighting

a b o a r d o t h e r ships shall be designed i n s i m i l a r m a n n e r t o o t h e r ships w i t h d u e regard f o r t h e
following:
454
Rules
.1 h u l l , superstructures, deckhouses a n d decks

s h a l l b e m a d e o f steel. I n ships h a v i n g d i s t i n g u i s h i n g
m a r k s F F 1 W S , F F 2 W S , F F 3 W S i n class n o t a t i o n , the
superstructures a n d deckhouses m a y be m a n u
factured o f a l u m i n u m alloys, provided they are p r o
tected w i t h fire p r o t e c t i o n systems i n compliance
w i t h 6.6.6 o r 6.6.7;
.2 s t r u c t u r a l f i r e p r o t e c t i o n s h a l l b e m a d e i n
c o m p l i a n c e w i t h t h e 1 m e t h o d .
6.6.2 S h i p s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a fire a n d
rescue operations c o n t r o l station. T h e c o n t r o l station
shall be placed so that t h e ship structures d o n o t
impair, as far as practicable, the v i s i o n o f the w a t e r
a r o u n d the ship.
6.6.3 T h e ships s h a l l h a v e :
special systems a n d e q u i p m e n t , the m i n i m u m n u m
ber o f w h i c h is indicated i n T a b l e s 6.6.3-1 a n d 6.6.3-2;
T a b l e
Distinguishing m a r k in the class notation
Special systems
Water-screen system
Drenching system
W a t e r fire m a i n s y s t e m
F o a m fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g
FF1
FF1WS
FF2
+
+
+
+
oyolCIIl
Dry powder system

Bilge system
4
êfer
Refer
Refer
"Refer
2
6.6.3-1
+
+
+
+
+
+
FF2WS FF3WS
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
3
t o 6.6.6.6.
t o 6.6.8.2.
t o 6.6.10.1.
t o 7.1.10, P a r t V I I I " S y s t e m s a n d P i p i n g " .
T a b l e
6.6.3-2
Distinguishing m a r k in the class

notation
Special
equipment
Pumps, in pes
Monitors:
water monitors, in pes
with supply rate o f each
monitor, in m /hour
jet r a n g e , i n m
f o a m monitors, in pes
Dry p o w d e r monitors ^, i n pes
Distribution valve mani
folds, in pes
FF1
FF1WS
FF2
FF2WS
FF3WS
2 4
2 3
4
2500
3
1200
2
lotftysoo/iooo
120
80 /0/120
150
2
1
4
_ )
_ )
1
4
1
2
1)
T h e s m a l l e r v a l u e i s f o r s h i p s r e f e r r e d t o i n 6.6.8.2.
A necessityi n installation a n d characteristics to b e indicated b y the
c u s t o m e r i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 6.6.9.2.
^ F o r s h i p s r e f e r r e d t o i n 6.6.10.1.
2 )
items o f fire-fighting outfit i n compliance

w i t h 6.6.11.1;
additional bilge arrangements (systems) a n d a d
d i t i o n a l reserve o f fuel i n accordance w i t h 7.1.10
a n d 13.7.7, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d P i p i n g " ;
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
a d d i t i o n a l i n t e r n a l service c o m m u n i c a t i o n s i n
compliance w i t h 7.2.2, P a r t X I "Electrical E q u i p m e n t " .
6.6.4 Special systems i n s t a l l e d o n b o a r d ships f o r
fire-fighting o n o t h e r objects a n d f o r their o w n p r o
tection (water-screen, drenching, w a t e r fire m a i n , f o a m
fire extinguishing, d r y p o w d e r systems) shall also
comply w i t h the requirements o f Section 3 o f this P a r t
a n d Sections 2 , 4 , 5, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d Piping".
W h e r e special systems o t h e r t h a n specified i n this
Section o f the Rules are installed, they shall c o m p l y
w i t h t h e requirements o f t h e Rules t o t h e extent
agreed w i t h t h e R e g i s t e r i n e a c h p a r t i c u l a r case.
6.6.5 T h e e q u i p m e n t o f special systems ( p u m p s ,
fittings, m o n i t o r s ) m a y beremote-controlled f r o m the
fire a n d rescue operations c o n t r o l station.
A i r - o p e r a t e d a n d hydrauUc c o n t r o l systems shall
be suppUed f r o m t w o independent sources o f p o w e r .
Electrically driven items shall comply w i t h t h e
requirements o f 5.1 t o 5.3, Part X I "Electrical
Equipment".
6.6.6 W a t e r - s c r e e n system.
6.6.6.1 I n ships h a v i n g distinguishing m a r k s F F 1 W S ,
F F 2 W S a n d F F 3 W S i n t h e class n o t a t i o n o u t e r v e r t i c a l
h u U surfaces, i n c l u d i n g superstructures a n d deckhouses,
shaU be protected w i t h the water-screen system.
The water-screen system shall totally cover t h e
ship and n o t impede visibility f r o m the wheelhouse,
fire a n d rescue operations c o n t r o l stations a n d
manually operated m o n i t o r platforms.
6.6.6.2 D o o r s a n d side scuttles o f ships h a v i n g
d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k s F F 1 o r F F 2 i n t h e class n o t a
tion, w h i c h are n o t fitted w i t h the above system, shall
c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 7.2.1.10, P a r t I I I
"Equipment, Arrangements and Outfit".
6.6.6.3 T h e c a p a c i t y a n d p r e s s u r e o f p u m p s ser
ving t h e system shall be sufficient t o supply water
t h r o u g h spray nozzles a t a rate indicated i n 3.5.2.
6.6.6.4 W h e r e t h e s y s t e m i s s u b d i v i d e d i n t o sec
tions, m a n u a l operation shall be provided f r o m t h e
place o f t h e i r i n s t a l l a t i o n i n spite o f the p r o v i s i o n o f
the remote control.
6.6.6.5 T h e water-screen s y s t e m s h a l l p r o t e c t also
the m a n u a l l y operated m o n i t o r platforms; the system
shall be p u t i n t o operation directly a t each m o n i t o r .
6.6.6.6 T h e ship shall b e f i t t e d w i t h water-screen
system i n c o m b i n a t i o n w i t h the drenching o r pressure
water-spraying system o r o n eo f these t w o systems
provided they a r e capable t o ensure adequate pro
t e c t i o n o fa l l t h e o u t e r surfaces o fthe ship. I n a n y
case t h e letters W S s h a l l b e r e t a i n e d i n class n o t a t i o n .
6.6.7 D r e n c h i n g a n d p r e s s u r e w a t e r - s p r a y i n g
systems
6.6.7.1 T h e drenching a n d pressure w a t e r - s p r a y i n g
systems i n ships h a v i n g distinguishing m a r k s F F 1 W S ,
F F 2 W S o r F F 3 W S i n t h e class n o t a t i o n shaU p r o t e c t
o u t e r v e r t i c a l surfaces o f t h e h u U , superstructures a n d
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
d e c k h o u s e s as w e l l as h o r i z o n t a l surfaces o f t h e h u l l
w h e r e i t is a p p r o p r i a t e w i t h r e g a r d t o 6.6.6.6.
6.6.7.2 T h e r a t e o f w a t e r d i s c h a r g e t o t h e p r o tected surface shall be at least 10 1/min per 1 m o f the
tier l e n g t h w h e r e t h e d r e n c h i n g s y s t e m is a p p U e d
a n d 10 1/min per 1 m o f the protected surface w h e r e
t h e pressure w a t e r - s p r a y i n g s y s t e m is appUed. I n t e n s i t y o f w a t e r discharge m a y be r e d u c e d t o 5 1/min
p r o v i d e d t h e p r o t e c t e d surfaces are o f " A - 6 0 " class.
6.6.7.3 F o r p r o t e c t i o n o f s u p e r s t r u c t u r e s a n d
deckhouses the sections o f the s y s t e m s h a l l be arranged o n each tier; the arrangement o f spray nozzles
shall ensure u n i f o r m discharge o f w a t e r o n t o the
protected o u t e r surface.
W h e r e the system is subdivided i n t o sections, the
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 6.6.6.4 shall be m e t .
6.6.8 Special w a t e r fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m
6.6.8.1 T h e s y s t e m is g e n e r a l l y i n t e n d e d f o r w a t e r
supply to water monitors, distribution valve m a n i f o l d s , as w e l l as f o r s u p p l y o f w a t e r - s c r e e n a n d
pressure w a t e r - s p r a y i n g systems. T h e s y s t e m m a y be
used for p u m p i n g o u t the water f r o m compartments
o f a ship i n distress (refer t o 7.1.10, P a r t V I I I "Systems and Piping").
The requirements for installation o f pumps, laying o f pipes, w a t e r i n t a k e arrangements, fittings a n d
tests s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e p r o v i s i o n s o f the present
P a r t a n d P a r t V I I I " S y s t e m s a n d P i p i n g " as f a r as
they are applicable a n d reasonable w i t h regard t o the
requirements given below.
6.6.8.2 T h e special w a t e r fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m
in ships h a v i n g distinguishing m a r k s F F 1 , F F 1 W S ,
F F 2 o r F F 2 W S i n the class n o t a t i o n shall be i n dependent.
I n ships h a v i n g distinguishing m a r k F F 3 W S i n
t h e class n o t a t i o n t h e ship w a t e r fire m a i n s y s t e m
m a y be u s e d as p a r t o f t h e special w a t e r fire e x t i n guishing system.
6.6.8.3 A v a i l a b i l i t y o f r e m o t e s t a r t i n g a n d c o n t r o l
of the system shall n o t prevent starting o f the pumps,
c o n t r o l o f m o n i t o r s a n d fittings f r o m the place o f
t h e i r i n s t a l l a t i o n ( r e f e r t o S e c t i o n 5, P a r t X I " E l e c trical Equipment").
R e m o t e - c o n t r o l l e d fittings shall h a v e devices f o r
their opening/closing during the time allowing to
prevent water hammers.
6.6.8.4 P r o v i s i o n shall be m a d e f o r o p e r a t i o n o f
p u m p s w i t h o u t o v e r h e a t i n g i n case o f n o o r s m a l l
supply o f water to consumers.
6.6.8.5 T h e n u m b e r o f m o n i t o r s s h a l l be n o t less
t h a n t h a t indicated i n T a b l e 6.6.3-2 a n d their arrangement shall:
provide supply o f water f r o m each m o n i t o r to
b o t h sides o f t h e ship;
prevent w a t e r f r o m being discharged t o the ship's
o w n deck a n d its equipment;
2
455
provide the water jet range i n accordance w i t h

T a b l e 6.6.3-2.
6.6.8.6 E a c h m o n i t o r shall h a v e a n i n d e p e n d e n t
connection to the m a i n o f the system.
6.6.8.7 D i s t r i b u t i o n v a l v e m a n i f o l d s s h a l l be arranged o n the w e a t h e r deck. T h e n u m b e r o f valves o n
the m a n i f o l d shall be d e t e r m i n e d b y the designer
u p o n agreement w i t h the customer.
6.6.8.8 T h e capacity o f t h e p u m p s s h a l l be calc u l a t e d so t h a t w a t e r c a n be s i m u l t a n e o u s l y deUvered
to m o n i t o r s , the n u m b e r o f w h i c h shall c o m p l y w i t h
T a b l e 6.6.3-2 depending o n the distinguishing m a r k
i n the class n o t a t i o n .
6.6.9 S p e c i a l f o a m fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m .
6.6.9.1 T h e special f o a m fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g system
shall be p r o v i d e d i n ships h a v i n g d i s t i n g u i s h i n g
m a r k s o f provision w i t h means for fire-fighting
a b o a r d o t h e r ships.
The system m a y use t e t a n y o r p a r t l y the e q u i p m e n t
o f t h e special w a t e r fire extinguishing system ( p u m p s ,
pipes, m o n i t o r s ) . T h e n u m b e r a n d type o f the e q u i p m e n t
o f the f o a m fire extinguishing system shall be d e t e r m i n e d
b y the designer o n agreement w i t h the customer.
6.6.9.2 S h i p s w i t h d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k s F F 2 ,
F F 2 W S o r F F 3 W S i n the class n o t a t i o n m a y h a v e the
system fitted w i t h a i r - f o a m nozzles, f o a m generators
or c o m b i n a t i o n f o a m u n i t s , i n t h i s case f o a m m o n i tors m a y be o m i t t e d .
6.6.9.3 S h i p s w i t h d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k s F F 1 o r
F F 1 W S i n t h e class n o t a t i o n s h a l l be f i t t e d w i t h f o a m
m o n i t o r s o r f o a m nozzles f o r m o n i t o r s o f the special
w a t e r fire extinguishing system, T h e n u m b e r o f f o a m
m o n i t o r s s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n t h a t i n d i c a t e d i n
T a b l e 6.6.3-2; the requirements f o r their i n s t a l l a t i o n
shall be i n Une w i t h those f o r m o n i t o r s o f the special
w a t e r fire extinguishing system.
6.6.9.4 T h e reserve o f f o a m concentrate s h a l l be
calculated o n the basis o f the o p e r a t i n g t i m e o f a
specified n u m b e r o f f o a m generators o r o n e m o n i t o r
d u r i n g at least 30 m i n .
6.6.9.5 T h e t y p e o f f o a m c o n c e n t r a t e shaU be c h o sen w i t h r e g a r d f o r w a t e r saUnity i n t h e prescribed ship
service area, a n d class o f Uquids, m a t e r i a l s o r g o o d s t h e
concentrate is i n t e n d e d t o e x t i n g u i s h (oil a n d p e t r o l e u m
p r o d u c t s , alcohols, k e t o n s , aldehydes, etc.).
6.6.10 S p e c i a l d r y p o w d e r s y s t e m .
6.6.10.1 T h e s y s t e m s h a l l be g e n e r a l l y i n s t a l l e d o n
ships s e r v i c i n g t h e o p e r a t i o n a r e a o f gas c a r r i e r s a n d
chemical tankers.
6.6.10.2 A p p l i c a b l e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.10 also
cover the special d r y p o w d e r system.
6.6.10.3 T h e p o w d e r rate t h r o u g h the m o n i t o r
s h a l l b e n o t less t h a n 4 0 k g / s .
T h e m o n i t o r s h a l l be placed o n a special p l a t f o r m
fitted w i t h devices f o r r e m o t e starting o f the system
(refer t o 6.6.6.5).
456
Rules
6.6.10.4 T h e q u a n t i t y o f the e x t i n g u i s h i n g p o w d e r
shall be d e t e r m i n e d b y the designer o n a g r e e m e n t
w i t h the customer.
6.6.11 Fire-fighting o u t f i t
6.6.11.1 I n a d d i t i o n t o the fire-fighting o u t f i t
specified i n T a b l e 5.1.2, t h e f o l l o w i n g o u t f i t s h a l l be
p r o v i d e d o n b o a r d ships:
fireman's outfits;
fire hoses;
dual-purpose m a n u a l fire nozzles;
portable a i r - f o a m nozzles, f o a m generators o r
combination f o a m units;
international shore connections;
c o m p l e t e sets o f f i r e - f i g h t i n g t o o l s ;
gas a n a l y z e r s f o r f l a m m a b l e v a p o u r s a n d gases;
induced-draught fans.
T h e n u m b e r a n d c o m p o s i t i o n o f the a d d i t i o n a l firefighting o u t f i t a n d spare parts t h e r e t o shall be determ i n e d b y the designer o n agreement w i t h the customer.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
6.6.11.2 A d d i t i o n a l fire-fighting o u t f i t s h a l l be
k e p t i n special s t o r e r o o m s .
P a r t o f the fire-fighting outfit (hoses, h a n d n o z zles, f o a m g e n e r a t o r s , a i r - f o a m nozzles, h o s e w r e n ches) m a y be placed at the fire stations n e a r each
distribution valve manifold.
6.6.113 F o r charging cylinders o f self-contained c o m pressed a i r b r e a t h i n g a p p a r a t u s ships shall be p r o v i d e d
w i t h compressors approved b y competent authorities.
T h e capacity and the n u m b e r o f simultaneously
charged cyUnders shall be specified b y the customer.
T h e r e shall be at least f o u r charged cyUnders o n
b o a r d the ship. T h e need f o r a c o m p r e s s o r t o be
p r o v i d e d o n b o a r d ship m a y be specially considered
by the Register depending o n the m a i n purpose o f the
ship a n d n u m b e r o f crew.
6.6.11.4 S h i p s s h a l l h a v e t w o searchUghts i n accordance w i t h 9.2.12, P a r t I I I " E q u i p m e n t , A r rangements and Outfit".
7 S P E C I A L R E Q U I R E M E N T S F O RSHIPS C A R R Y I N G P A C K A G E D
DANGEROUS GOODS AND DANGEROUS GOODS IN BULK
7.1
G E N E R A L
D a n g e r o u s g o o d s m e a n substances, m a t e and products covered by the I M D G Code.

D a n g e r o u s goods
i n b u l k mean any
m a t e r i a l s o t h e r t h a n U q u i d o r gas, c o n s i s t i n g o f m i x t u r e
o f particles, granules o r larger pieces o f m a t e r i a l , generaUy h o m o g e n o u s , covered b y the I M S B C C o d e , a n d
w h i c h a r e l o a d e d d i r e c t l y i n t o c a r g o spaces w i t h o u t t h e
use o f a n y i n t e r m e d i a t e package, i n c l u d i n g the same
m a t e r i a l s l o a d e d i n t o s h i p b o r n e barges.
I r r a d i a t e d n u c l e a r f u e l means material
containing u r a n i u m , t h o r i u m and/or p l u t o n i u m isotopes w h i c h has been used t o m a i n t a i n a self-sustaining nuclear chain reaction.
P l u t o n i u m means the resultant mixture o f
isotopes o f that material extracted f r o m irradiated
nuclear fuel f r o m reprocessing.
P a c k a g e means cargo container established by
the I M D G Code.
rials
7.1.1 T h e requirements o f the present Section are

a i m e d at p r o v i d i n g a d d i t i o n a l safety measures i n respect o f ships c a r r y i n g packaged d a n g e r o u s g o o d s
and dangerous goods i n bulk.
7.1.2 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h e present S e c t i o n , the
following additional definitions and abbreviations
have been adopted.
H i g h - l e v e l r a d i o a c t i v e w a s t e s mean
Uquid wastes resulting f r o m the o p e r a t i o n o f the first
stage e x t r a c t i o n s y s t e m o r t h e c o n c e n t r a t e d wastes
f r o m subsequent e x t r a c t i o n stages, i n a faciUty f o r
reprocessing irradiated fuel, o r solids i n t o w h i c h such
Uquid wastes have been converted.
I N F c a r g o means packaged irradiated nuclear fuel, p l u t o n i u m a n d high-level radioactive wastes
c a r r i e d as c a r g o i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h C l a s s 7 o f t h e
I M D G Code.
I M D G C o d e means the International M a r itime D a n g e r o u s G o o d s C o d e adopted by I M O res o l u t i o n M S C . 1 2 2 ( 7 5 ) , as a m e n d e d
by I M O
resolutions MSC.262(84).
I M S B C C o d e means the International M a r itime SoUd B u l k Cargoes C o d e adopted by I M O res o l u t i o n M S C . 2 6 8 ( 8 5 ) , as a m e n d e d .
I N F C o d e means the International Code for
the Safe Carriage o f Packaged Irradiated N u c l e a r
Fuel, Plutonium and High-Level Radioactive Wastes
o n B o a r d Ships adopted by I M O resolution
M S C . 8 8 ( 7 1 ) , as a m e n d e d .
7.2 S H I P S C A R R Y I N G P A C K A G E D D A N G E R O U S
O R DANGEROUS GOODS IN B U L K
GOODS
7.2.1 T h e requirements o f the present C h a p t e r

a p p l y t o t h e f o l l o w i n g t y p e s o f ships a n d c a r g o spaces:
.1 ships a n d cargo spaces n o t specially designed
for the carriage o f freight containers b u t intended for
the carriage o f packaged dangerous goods including
goods i n freight containers and portable tanks;
.2 p u r p o s e - b u i l t c o n t a i n e r ships a n d c a r g o spaces
intended for the carriage o f dangerous goods i n
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
freight c o n t a i n e r s a n d p o r t a b l e t a n k s (refer t o 8.4.8,

Part III "Equipment, Arrangements and Outfit");
.3 r o - r o s h i p s a n d r o - r o c a r g o s p a c e s , s p a c e s f o r
vehicles a n d special c a t e g o r y spaces i n t e n d e d f o r the
carriage o f dangerous goods. A r o - r o cargo space
c o m p l e t e l y o p e n f r o m a b o v e a n d o n b o t h sides m a y
be t r e a t e d as t h e w e a t h e r d e c k ;
.4 ships a n d cargo spaces i n t e n d e d f o r t h e carriage o f dangerous goods i n b u l k ;
.5 s h i p s a n d c a r g o s p a c e s i n t e n d e d f o r t h e c a r riage o f d a n g e r o u s g o o d s o t h e r t h a n l i q u i d s a n d gases
i n b u l k i n shipborne barges.
7.2.2 C a r g o a n d p a s s e n g e r s h i p s i n c l u d i n g c a r g o
a n d p a s s e n g e r s h i p s o f less t h a n 5 0 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e
intended for the carriage o f packaged dangerous
goods shall meet the requirements o f this Chapter
considering appUcable provisions o f I M O resolution
M S C . 2 6 9 ( 8 5 ) , A n n e x 2.
7.2.2.1 C a r g o s h i p s w i t h c a r g o s p a c e s i n t e n d e d
for the carriage o f dangerous goods i n b u l k shall meet
the requirements o f this Chapter; h o w e v e r , these req u i r e m e n t s f o r c a r g o s h i p s o f less t h a n 5 0 0 g r o s s
t o n n a g e m a y be reduced b y the Register w i t h a n
appropriate note i n the Certificate o f CompUance
w i t h the Special Requirements for Ship C a r r y i n g
D a n g e r o u s G o o d s , issued b y the Register.
7.2.3 I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e sent C h a p t e r , the applicable p r o v i s i o n s o f the I M D G
C o d e a n d I M S B C C o d e shall be m e t . P a c k a g e d
dangerous g o o d s shall be carried o n b o a r d ships i n
accordance w i t h the provisions o f the I M D G Code.
7.2.3.1 A f i x e d f i r e e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m o f t h e
type agreed w i t h the Register shall be p r o v i d e d i n
cargo spaces o f the f o l l o w i n g ships engaged i n the
carriage o f dangerous goods:
passenger ships constructed o n o r after 1 September 1984;
cargo ships o f 500 gross t o n n a g e a n d u p w a r d s
constructed o n o r after 1 September 1984.
7.2.4 D e p e n d i n g o n t h e m o d e s o f c a r r i a g e o f d a n g e r o u s g o o d s i n ships a n d c a r g o spaces specified i n 7.2.1
the requirements o f T a b l e 7.2.4-1 shaU apply; dependi n g o n t h e class o f d a n g e r o u s g o o d s c a r r i e d i n b u l k t h e
requirements o f T a b l e 7.2.4-2 shaU apply; depending o n
t h e class o f d a n g e r o u s g o o d s o t h e r t h a n those c a r r i e d i n
b u l k t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f T a b l e 7.2.4-3 s h a l l a p p l y .
7.2.5 T h e f o l l o w i n g a d d i t i o n a l m e a s u r e s s h a l l b e
taken to ensure supply of water:
.1 t h e w a t e r fire m a i n s y s t e m s h a l l ensure i m mediate availabiUty o f water supply at the required
pressure either by p e r m a n e n t pressurization i n the
fire m a i n o r b y suitably placed r e m o t e starting arrangements f o r the fire p u m p s f r o m the locations
referred t o i n 3.2.3.9;
.2 t h e w a t e r f i r e m a i n s y s t e m s h a l l e n s u r e t h e
deUvery o f the quantity o f water capable o f supplying
457
four nozzles w i t h applicators provided o n board

u n d e r t h e p r e s s u r e as specified i n 3.2.1.1 t o a n y p a r t
o f the cargo space w h e n e m p t y . U p o n a g r e e m e n t w i t h
the Register, this a m o u n t o f w a t e r m a y be applied b y
equivalent means. T h e number and arrangement o f
fire h y d r a n t s shall be such t h a t at least t w o w a t e r jets
o u t o f f o u r r e q u i r e d c a n be delivered t h r o u g h fire
hoses o f standard length to any part o f the e m p t y
cargo space a n d t h a t a l l the f o u r jets can be deUvered
t h r o u g h hoses o f standard length to any part o f cargo
r o - r o space;
.3 t h e w a t e r f i r e m a i n s y s t e m s h a l l e f f e c t i v e l y c o o l
a cargo space b y a pressure w a t e r - s p r a y i n g system
w i t h a rate o f w a t e r supply specified i n 3.4.2.1 o r b y
flooding (refer to 3.6.4).
Hoses capable to ensure the deUvery o f the req u i r e d q u a n t i t y o f w a t e r m a y be u s e d f o r t h i s p u r p o s e
i n s m a l l spaces a n d i n s m a l l areas o f larger c a r g o
spaces o n a g r e e m e n t w i t h t h e Register.
T h e drainage a n d p u m p i n g a r r a n g e m e n t s shall be
s u c h as t o p r e v e n t t h e b u i l d - u p o f free surfaces as
specified i n 7.14.2, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d P i p i n g " . I f
this is i m p o s s i b l e a c a l c u l a t i o n s h a l l be m a d e t o p r o v e
t h a t the ship w i t h the cargo space f l o o d e d w i t h w a t e r
c o m p U e s w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f S e c t i o n s 2 a n d 3,
Part V "Subdivision";
.4 i n U e u o f c o m p U a n c e w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f 7.2.5.3 t h e h i g h e x p a n s i o n f o a m s y s t e m m a y be used
i n a c c o r d a n c e w i t h 3.7.3 u s i n g a s u p p l y r a t e a n d t i m e o f
c o n t i n u o u s s u p p l y a c c o r d i n g t o T a b l e 3.7.1.3 f o r m a c h i n e r y o r b y o t h e r special suitable e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i a ;
.5 t h e t o t a l r e q u i r e d q u a n t i t y o f w a t e r s h a l l s a tisfy the requirements o f 7.2.5.2 a n d 7.2.5.3, i f appUcable, simultaneously calculated f o r the largest
designated c a r g o space. T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7.2.5.2
s h a l l be m e t b y t h e t o t a l c a p a c i t y o f t h e m a i n fire
p u m p s n o t including the capacity o f the emergency
fire p u m p , i f fitted. I f a d r e n c h e r s y s t e m is used t o
satisfy the r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7.2.5.3, the drencher
p u m p shall also be t a k e n i n t o a c c o u n t i n this t o t a l
capacity calculation;
.6 t h e p r e s s u r e w a t e r - s p r a y i n g s y s t e m r e q u i r e d i n
accordance w i t h 9.2, 9.3 a n d 9 . 4 o f M S C / C i r c . 6 0 8 / R e v . l
"Interim Guidelines for Open-Top Containerships" also
satisfies the r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r dangerous goods. T h e
q u a n t i t y o f w a t e r r e q u i r e d t o fire fighting i n t h e l a r g e s t
cargo space shaU b e capable t o ensure s i m u l t a n e o u s o p eration o f the pressure water-spraying s y s t e m and f o u r jets
from fire n o z z l e s .
7.2.6 E l e c t r i c a l e q u i p m e n t s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e
requirements o f 2.9.2, 2.9.3, 2.9.9, 2.9.10, 2.9.12,
16.8.1.6, 16.8.4.5, 16.8.6.1 a n d 19.11, P a r t X I "Electrical Equipment".
A n y other equipment w h i c h m a y constitute a
source o f i g n i t i o n o f f l a m m a b l e gases, v a p o u r s a n d
d u s t s h a l l n o t be p e r m i t t e d i n c a r g o spaces.
458
Rules
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T a b l e
Weather deck of Ships n o t
Ships and
cargo spaces ships a n d c a r g o specifically
designed
Requirements?^^
spaces listed i n
of paragraphs
N .
7.2.1.1 t o 7.2.1.5 ( r e f e r t o
7.2.1.1)
'^
+
+
7.2.5.1
7.2.5.2
7.2.5.3
7.2.5.4
7.2.6
7.2.7
7.2.8.1
7.2.8.2
7.2.9
7.2.10.1
7.2.10.2
7.2.11
7.2.12
7.2.13
7.2.14
7.2.15
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
7.2.4-1
Container
Closed cargo
Open cargo
Ships for the
Shipborne
c a r g o spaces spaces a s given spaces a s given carriage o f solid
barges
(refer t o
i n 1.5.4.3.1
i n 1.5.4.3.2
dangerous g o o d s (refer t o
7.2.1.2)
(refer t o
( r e f e r t o 7.2.1.3) i n b u l k ( r e f e r t o
7.2.1.5)
7.2.1.3)
7.2.1.4)
1
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
3
3
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+"
+
+
+
+
F o r application
o f the
requirements o f
7.2 t o d i f f e r e n t
classes o f
dangerous goods,
refer t o T a b l e
7.2.4-2
+
+
+
+
+
+
2
2
2
2
Special category spaces shall b e treated a sclosed ro-ro cargo spaces w h e n dangerous goods are carried.
I n special cases where t h ebarges are capable o fcontaining f l a m m a b l e v a p o u r s o r alternatively i fthey are capable o f discharging
f l a m m a b l e v a p o u r s t o a safe space outside the barge carrier c o m p a r t m e n t b ym e a n s o fventilation ducts connected t o the barges, these
requirements m a y b e reduced o rwaived, which is subject t o special consideration b y the Register.
F o r c l a s s e s 4 a n d 5 . 1 s o l i d s n o t a p p l i c a b l e t o c l o s e d f r e i g h t c o n t a i n e r s . F o r c l a s s e s 2, 3 , 6 . 1 a n d 8 w h e n c a r r i e d i n c l o s e d f r e i g h t
c o n t a i n e r s , t h e v e n t i l a t i o n r a t e m a y b e r e d u c e d t o n o t l e s s t h a n t w o a i r c h a n g e s p e r h o u r . F o r c l a s s e s 4 a n d 5.1 l i q u i d s w h e n c a r r i e d i n
closed freight containers, t h e ventilation rate m a yb e r e d u c e d t o n o tless t h a n t w o a i rc h a n g e s p e r h o u r . F o r t h ep u r p o s e o f this
requirement, a portable tank is a closed freight container.
"Applicable to decks only.
A p p l i e s o n l y t o c l o s e d c a r g o s p a c e s a s g i v e n i n 1.5.4.3.1, n o t c a p a b l e o f b e i n g s e a l e d .
N o t e . W h e r e v e r + appears i n the table, itm e a n s that this requirement is applicable t o all classes o fd a n g e r o u s g o o d s a sgiven i n
t h e a p p r o p r i a t e l i n e o f T a b l e 2.8.2-3, e x c e p t a s i n d i c a t e d i n t h e f o o t n o t e s .
2
T a b l e
Class o fdangerous
7.2.4-2
goods
4.1
4.2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
4.3
5.1
6.1
+
+
+
Requirements o fparagraphs
7.2.5.1
7.2.5.2
7.2.6
7.2.7
7.2.8.1
7.2.8.2
7.2.10
7.2.12
+"
+
+
+
2
2
2
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
2,4
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
2.4
+
+
+
^ h e hazards o f substances i n this class w h i c h m a y b e carried i n b u l k a r esuch that special consideration shall b e given t o t h e
construction a n d e q u i p m e n t o f the ship involved i n addition t o meeting t h erequirements o f this table.
O n l y applicable t o oilcake c o n t a i n i n g solvent extractions, a m m o n i u m nitrate a n d a m m o n i u m nitrate fertilizers.
O n l y applicable t o a m m o n i u m nitrate a n d a m m o n i u m nitrate fertilizers. H o w e v e r , the degree o fprotection i n accordance w i t h the
s t a n d a r d s c o n t a i n e d i n t h e I n t e r n a t i o n a l E l e c t r o t e c h n i c a l C o m m i s s i o n , p u b l i c a t i o n 79 E l e c t r i c a l A p p a r a t u s f o r E x p l o s i v e G a s
A t m o s p h e r e s , is sufficient.
"Only suitable wire m e s h guards are required.
T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f C o d e a r e s u f f i c i e n t .
2
7.2.7 R o - r o c a r g o spaces s h a l l b e f i t t e d w i t h a
fixed fire detection a n d fire a l a r m system c o m p l y i n g
w i t h t h e requirements o f 4.2.1. A l l other types o f
cargo spaces shall be fitted either w i t h a fixed fire
detection a n d fire a l a r m system c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e
requirements o f 4.2.1 o r sample extraction s m o k e
detection system complying w i t h the requirements
o f 4.2.1.6. I f a sample extraction s m o k e detection
system is fitted, particular attention shall be given t o
the requirements o f 4.2.1.6.3 t o prevent leakage o f

toxic s m o k e i n t o areas w h e r e people stay.
7.2.8 V e n t i l a t i o n o f c a r g o spaces s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e
f o l l o w i n g requirements o f P a r t V O " S y s t e m s a n d P i p i n g " :
.1 arrangement o fthe ventilation system, w i t h t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 12.1.7, 12.1.8, 12.7.1,
12.7.3
a n d 12.7.5. F o r b u l k cargoes o f class 4.3 a n d oil-cake
containing o i lextracting solvents, additionally w i t h
the requirements o f 12.7.7;
Part
VI. F i r e
Protection
459
I + + I + I I + ++
+ +
ra
H
+++
+ +
+ | | + + I I + ++
+ +
+ + |
. u
+ +
CN
'I

\
+ + + + + +
+ ++++++++++
+ +
+ + I l+l
+ +
++
+ +
+ +
+++++++
I + ++
+++
"
" C N
+ +
+ ++++++++++
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
+ +
++++
+ +++++
+ + + | I+
+ + + ++
+ +
+ +
+ +++++
+ +
+ +
+ +++++
+ +
+ +++++
+ +
+ ++++++++++
8
"
+ +
( N
+ +
+ +++
+ +
+ +++
+ +
- 3>
ft.E 9?
g S
'=
2 ' E S
+ +++
+ +
+ +++
+ +++
+ +
+ ++
+ +++++
+ ++
<-> S
*^
*3
j !
b b ^
CN |
2 2
8" 8 g
(2 I
/3
C N ^
CN
CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN CN
CN
L
0
"
-S - 85 S
tw
5 3 < ft " "
. s i . . S - P
-
I s I s s P est fc
(
S
ft
g s
J *3
U ' U

>-
ftr^
ft
<
tN
&<<<&<<
V - 0\
-rt
460
Rules
.2 c o n s t r u c t i o n o f v e n t i l a t i o n f a n s , w i t h t h e r e
quirements o f 12.7.4;
.3 n a t u r a l v e n t i l a t i o n s y s t e m i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h
the requirements o f 12.7.2 shall be p r o v i d e d i n e n
closed cargo spaces i n t e n d e d f o r t h e carriage o f
dangerous goods i n b u l k unless n o t fitted w i t h m e
chanical ventilation.
7.2.9 T h e b i l g e s y s t e m o f c a r g o s p a c e s s h a l l
comply with the requirements o f 7.14, Part V I I I
"Systems a n dPiping".
7.2.10 S h i p s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d w i t h t h e f o l l o w i n g
outfit:
.1 f o u r f u l l sets p r o t e c t i v e c l o t h i n g r e s i s t a n t t o
chemical exposure a n dintended for use i n emergency
situations. T h e protective clothing shall cover all skin
so t h a t n o p a r t o f t h e b o d y is u n p r o t e c t e d a n d , sub
ject t o cargo characteristics, shall meet t h e re
c o m m e n d a t i o n s o f I M D G C o d e o r C o d e ;
.2 a t l e a s t t w o s e l f - c o n t a i n e d b r e a t h i n g a p p a r a t u s
in addition t o those required b y item 10 o f
T a b l e 5.1.2. T w o spare charges suitable f o r t h e use
w i t h the breathing apparatus shall be provided f o r
each apparatus i n addition t o those required f o r the
fireman's outfit (refer t o 5.1.15.2).
7.2.11 P o r t a b l e f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r s w i t h a t o t a l
capacity o f a t least 1 2 k g o f d r y p o w d e r o r e q u i v a l e n t
s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d f o r c a r g o spaces. T h e s e e x t i n
guishers shall be i n a d d i t i o n t o a n y portable fire ex
tinguishers required b y t h e present Part.
7.2.12 B u l k h e a d s f o r m i n g b o u n d a r i e s b e t w e e n
cargo spaces a n d m a c h i n e r y spaces o f c a t e g o r y A
s h a l l b e o f " A - 6 0 " class, unless d a n g e r o u s g o o d s a r e
s t o w e d a t least 3 m h o r i z o n t a l l y a w a y f r o m such
b u l k h e a d s . O t h e r b o u n d a r i e s b e t w e e n s u c h spaces
s h a l l b e o f " A - 6 0 " class.
W h e n a cargo space is p a r t i a l l y located a b o v e t h e
m a c h i n e r y space o f category A a n d b o u n d i n g struc
tures d o n o thave t h e required insulation, such cargo
space is u n f i t f o r carriage o f d a n g e r o u s goods. T h e
same refers t o areas o f bare w e a t h e r deck located
a b o v e t h e m a c h i n e r y space o f category A .
7.2.13 E a c h o p e n r o - r o s p a c e h a v i n g a d e c k a b o v e
i t a n d e a c h space considered t o b e a closed r o - r o space
n o t capable o f being sealed shall be fitted w i t h a n
approved m a n u a l l y operated fixed pressure waterspraying system w h i c h shall protect all parts o fa n y
d e c k a n d vehicle p l a t f o r m i n s u c h space. T h e R e g i s t e r
m a y p e r m i t t h e use o f a n y other fixed fire extin
g u i s h i n g s y s t e m t h a t h a s b e e n s h o w n b y full-scale tests
t o b e n o t less e f f e c t i v e ( r e f e r t o 1.3.3). H o w e v e r , t h e
drainage a n d p u m p i n g arrangements shall be such as
to p r e v e n t free surfaces as specified i n 7.14.2, P a r t V I I I
"Systems a n d Piping". I f this is impossible, a calcula
tion shall be m a d e t o prove that t h e ship w i t h flooded
cargo space m e e t s t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f Sections 2
a n d 3, P a r t V "Subdivision".
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
7.2.14 I n s h i p s h a v i n g r o - r o s p a c e s , s u b d i v i s i o n
shall be p r o v i d e d b e t w e e n a closed r o - r o space a n d a n
adjacent o p e n r o - r o space. T h e s u b d i v i s i o n s h a l l b e
such as t o m i n i m i z e t h e passage o f dangerous v a
p o u r s a n d U q u i d s b e t w e e n s u c h spaces. A l t e r n a t i v e l y ,
such subdivision need n o t be provided i f the ro-ro
space is considered t o be a closed cargo space o v e r its
entire length a n d shall fully c o m p l y w i t h t h e relevant
special r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e present Chapter.
7.2.15 I n s h i p s h a v i n g r o - r o s p a c e s , s u b d i v i s i o n
shall be p r o v i d e d b e t w e e n a closed r o - r o space a n d
the adjacent weather deck. T h e subdivision shall be
such as t o m i n i m i z e t h e passage o f dangerous v a
p o u r s a n d U q u i d s b e t w e e n s u c h spaces. A l t e r n a t i v e l y ,
such subdivision need n o t be provided i f the ar
r a n g e m e n t s o f t h e closed r o - r o spaces a r e i n ac
cordance w i t h t h e requirements f o r t h e carriage o f
dangerous goods o n t h e adjacent w e a t h e r deck.
7.2.16 C a r g o s p a c e s i n s h i p s o t h e r t h a n r o - r o
ships shall n o t be adjacent t o a c c o m m o d a t i o n a n d
service spaces, except service spaces o f l o w fire r i s k
referred t o i n 1.5.3.2.3.
7.2.17 H a t c h c o v e r s o f d r y - c a r g o h o l d s s h a l l
comply with the requirements o f Part I I I "Equip
7.3 S H I P S C A R R Y I N G P A C K A G E D I R R A D I A T E D
NUCLEAR FUEL, PLUTONIUM A N D HIGH-LEVEL
RADIOACTIVE W A S T E S (INF CARGO)
7.3.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t C h a p t e r a r e
based o n t h e provisions o f t h e I N F Code a n d apply
t o a l l ships regardless o f t h e i r d a t e o f b u i l d a n d size,
i n c l u d i n g c a r g o s h i p s o f less t h a n 5 0 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e ,
engaged i n t h e carriage o f I N F cargo.
7.3.2 F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f t h e p r e s e n t C h a p t e r ,
ships c a r r y i n g I N F cargo are assigned t o t h e fol
l o w i n g t h r e e classes, d e p e n d i n g o n t h e t o t a l a c t i v i t y
o f I N F cargo w h i c h is carried o n board.
Class I N F 1 ship is a ship, h a v i n g certificate t o
c a r r y I N F c a r g o w i t h a n a g g r e g a t e a c t i v i t y less
than 4000 T B q .
carry irradiated nuclear fuel o r high-level radioactive
w a s t e s w i t h a n a g g r e g a t e a c t i v i t y less t h a n 2 1 0 6 T B q
and ship w h i c h is certified t o carry p l u t o n i u m w i t h
a n a g g r e g a t e a c t i v i t y less t h a n 2 1 0 5 T B q .
carry irradiated nuclear fuel o r high-level radioactive
wastes a n d ship w h i c h is certified t o carry p l u t o n i u m
w i t h n o restriction o f the m a x i m u m aggregate activity
of the materials.
The compliance o f the ship w i t h t h e requirements
o f this Chapter shall be certified b y t h e appropriate
d i s t i n g u i s h i n g m a r k a d d e d t o t h e class n o t a t i o n i n
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
accordance w i t h 2.2.13, P a r t I "Classification" a n d b y

the International Certificate o f Fitness f o r Carriage
o f I N F C a r g o issued b y t h e Register.
7.3.3 I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e
sent C h a p t e r , t h e applicable p r o v i s i o n s o f the I M D G
Code shall be complied with.
7.3.4 T h e I N F c a r g o w h i c h i s r e q u i r e d t o b e
c a r r i e d o n C l a s s s h i p s s h a l l n o t b e c a r r i e d o n
passenger ships.
7.3.5 T h e d a m a g e t r i m a n d s t a b i U t y s h a l l c o m p l y
w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 3.4.9, P a r t V " S u b d i v i s i o n " .
7.3.6 I n a d d i t i o n t o t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e
sent P a r t , t h e ship shall be fitted w i t h a fixed pressure
w a t e r - s p r a y i n g s y s t e m t o p r o t e c t c a r g o spaces w h i c h
shall ensure t h e rate o f w a t e r discharge as indicated
in 3.4.2.1. I n Class I N F 1 ships t h e pressure w a t e r spraying system need n o t be installed provided
the requirements o f 7.2.5.1 a n d 7.2.5.2 are c o m p U e d
with.
7.3.7 I n C l a s s I N F 3 s h i p s a c c o m m o d a t i o n s p a c e s ,
service spaces, c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s a n d m a c h i n e r y spaces
of category A shall be fitted f o r w a r d o r a f t o f t h e
c a r g o spaces, d u e r e g a r d b e i n g p a i d t o t h e o v e r a l l
safety o f t h e ship.
73.8 T h e c a r g o spaces o f t h e s h i p s h a U b e f i t t e d
w i t h temperature c o n t r o l systems c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 12.7.8, P a r t V I I I "Systems a n d P i p i n g " .
7.3.9 T h e s h i p h u l l s t r u c t u r e s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h
the requirements o fPart I I " H u l l " .
461
7.3.10 P e r m a n e n t d e v i c e s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d t o
secure packages o f I N F cargo w i t h i n t h e cargo
spaces. T h e devices s h a l l m e e t t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e
Guidelines f o r the Development o f the Cargo Se
curing M a n u a l .
7.3.11 T h e e l e c t r i c a l e q u i p m e n t o f s y s t e m s a n d
arrangements referred t o i n 7.3.6 a n d 7.3.8 shall
comply w i t h the requirements o fPart X I "Electrical
Equipment".
The requirements f o r t h e emergency source o f
electrical p o w e r t o supply these systems a r e set f o r t h
in Section 9, Part X I "Electrical Equipment".
7.3.12 D e p e n d i n g u p o n t h e c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s o f t h e
I N F cargo t o be carried a n d u p o n t h e design o f t h e
ship, additional arrangements a n d equipment f o r
radiological protection meeting the requirements o f
the c o m p e t e n t state a u t h o r i t i e s o n r a d i o l o g i c a l safety
shall, i f necessary, be provided.
7.3.13 E v e r y s h i p s h a l l c a r r y o n b o a r d a n a p
proved shipboard emergency plan based o n the
Guidelines f o r Developing Shipboard Emergency
Plans f o r Ships C a r r y i n g Materials Subject t o the
I N F Code adopted b y I M O resolution A.854(20).
7.3.14 E v e r y s h i p s h a l l c a r r y o n b o a r d e q u i p m e n t
(individual personnel protection outfit, appara
tus, etc.) f o r u s e i n e m e r g e n c y . T h e t y p e a n d a m o u n t
of such equipment depend u p o n theI N F cargo t o be
carried a n d is specified b y t h e s h i p b o a r d emergency
p l a n referred t o i n 7.3.13.
8 R E Q U I R E M E N T S F O RF I R E P R O T E C T I O N O F C A R G O S H I P S
O F L E S S T H A N 500 G R O S S T O N N A G E
8.1 G E N E R A L , D E F I N I T I O N S A N D A P P L I C A T I O N
8.1.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t S e c t i o n a r e
a i m e d a t e n s u r i n g t h e s a f e t y o f c a r g o s h i p s o f less
t h a n 5 0 0 gross t o n n a g e (except f i s h i n g vessels, che
m i c a l tankers a n d gas carriers) as regards their fire
protection.
8.1.2 T h e f o l l o w i n g d e f i n i t i o n h a s b e e n a d o p t e d
in the present Section.
G r o s s t o n n a g e is as defined i n I M O r e
solution A . 4 9 3 ( X I I ) , calculated i n accordance w i t h
the International C o n v e n t i o n o n Tonnage Measure
m e n t o f Ships, 1969.
8.1.3 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f t h e p r e s e n t S e c t i o n a r e
intended t o apply t o n e w a n d as f a r as reasonable
a n d p r a c t i c a b l e , t o e x i s t i n g c a r g o s h i p s o f less t h a n
500 gross t o n n a g e .
8.1.3.1 F o r s h i p s o f r e s t r i c t e d s e r v i c e , t h e R e g i s t e r
m a y reconsider the r e q u i r e m e n t s specified i n the present
Section t a k i n g i n t o a c c o u n t the service c o n d i t i o n s o f t h e
ship a n d the measures f o r its fire safety stipulated b y the
ship designer o n agreement w i t h t h e customer.
8.1.3.2 A s t o f i r e p r o t e c t i o n d o c u m e n t a t i o n , r e
quirements o f the present Rules shall be compUed
w i t h considering t h e provisions o f8.1.3.1.
8.2 K I R K C O N T R O L
PLANS
8.2.1 I n a l l s h i p s i n t h e w h e e l h o u s e o r i n c o n
spicuous positions i n corridors, general arrangement
plans shall be permanently exhibited, using graphical
symbols that are i n accordance w i t h I M O resolution
A.952(23), w h i c h s h o w clearly f o r each deck the
control stations, t h e fire-resistant a n d fire-retarding
divisions, together w i t h particulars of:
fire detection a n d fire a l a r m systems;
fire extinguishing appUances;
position o fthe fireman's outfits;
location a n d arrangement o fthe emergency stop
for o i l fuel u n i t p u m p s a n d f o r closing t h e valves o n
the pipes f r o m o i l fuel tanks;
462
Rules
m e a n s o f access t o d i f f e r e n t c o m p a r t m e n t s a n d
decks;
ventilating system, including particulars o f the
fan control positions, the position o f dampers and
identification n u m b e r s o f v e n t i l a t i n g fans.
8.2.2 A l t e r n a t i v e l y , t h e d e t a i l s r e q u i r e d b y 8 . 2 . 1
m a y be set o u t i n a b o o k l e t , a c o p y o f w h i c h s h a l l be
supplied t o each officer, a n d o n e c o p y is a t a l l t i m e s
t o be available o n b o a r d i n a n accessible p o s i t i o n .
8.2.3 G e n e r a l a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s a n d b o o k l e t s
shall be k e p t u p t o date, a n y alterations t o the fire
protection being recorded thereon.
8.2.4 I n a l l c a r g o s h i p s g r e a t e r t h a n o r e q u a l t o
1 5 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e , a d u p l i c a t e set o f g e n e r a l a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s s h a l l be p e r m a n e n t l y stored, a n d t h e b o o k let c o n t a i n i n g such plans shall be k e p t i n a w e a t h e r t i g h t
enclosure o u t s i d e t h e d e c k h o u s e , p a i n t e d r e d i n acc o r d a n c e w i t h t h e a p p U c a b l e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 1.4.3.
I n s h i p s o f less t h a n 1 5 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e , t h e d u p U c a t e set o f t h e p l a n s o r t h e b o o k l e t m a y be o m i t t e d
a n d the p o s i t i o n o f the b o o k l e t f o r the assistance o f
shoreside fire-fighting p e r s o n n e l shall be agreed w i t h
the Register.
8.2.5 D e s c r i p t i o n i n g e n e r a l a r r a n g e m e n t p l a n s
a n d b o o k l e t s shall be i n the official language o f the
f l a g state a n d i n t h e l a n g u a g e as s h o w n b e l o w :
for ships o f unrestricted service E n g U s h ;
f o r ships o f restricted service language recognized b y the flag state.
F o r ships engaged i n d o m e s t i c service o n l y , t h e
plans a n d b o o k l e t s m a y n o t be translated i n t o E n g U s h .
8.2.6 I n a l l s h i p s i n a d d i t i o n t o t h e a b o v e g e n e r a l
arrangement plans and booklets the instructions
concerning the maintenance and operation o f all the
equipment and installations o n board for the fighting
a n d c o n t a i n m e n t o f fire s h a l l be k e p t u n d e r o n e
cover, r e a d i l y available i n a n accessible p o s i t i o n .
and Construction
of Sea-Going
8.3 A L T E R N A T I V E D E S I G N A N D A R R A N G E M E N T S
8.3.1 A l t e r n a t i v e d e s i g n a n d a r r a n g e m e n t s w h i c h
m a y be applied o n ships shall c o m p l y w i t h p r o v i s i o n s
o f 1.7 ( e x c e p t 1 . 7 . 2 . 1 . 4 ) c o n s i d e r i n g t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s
o f 8.3.2 a n d 8.3.3.
8.3.2 T h e r e q u i r e d f i r e s a f e t y p e r f o r m a n c e c r i t e r i a
f o r the ship o r the space(s) concerned shall:
.1 be based o n fire safety objectives a n d the
functional requirements o f the present Section;
.2 p r o v i d e a d e g r e e o f s a f e t y n o t l e s s t h a n t h a t
achieved w h e n using the prescribed requirements;
.3 b e q u a n t i f i a b l e a n d m e a s u r a b l e .
8.3.3 T h e e n g i n e e r i n g a n a l y s i s o f a l t e r n a t i v e d e s i g n
a n d a r r a n g e m e n t s shall be evaluated a n d a p p r o v e d b y
the Register. A copy o f the Register-approved docu m e n t a t i o n shaU be carried o n b o a r d the ship.
8.4 S T R U C T U R A L K I R K
PROTECTION
8.4.1 T h e m i n i m u m f i r e i n t e g r i t y o f b u l k h e a d s
a n d decks separating adjacent spaces s h a l l m e e t the
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f T a b l e 8.4.1.
8.4.1.1 D i v i s i o n s u s e d t o s e p a r a t e s p a c e s n o t
m e n t i o n e d i n T a b l e 8.4.1 s h a l l be o f n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e
material.
I n s h i p s o f less t h a n 5 0 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e i t is a l lowed to install non-combustible bulkheads, Unings
a n d ceiUngs w i t h c o m b u s t i b l e c o v e r i n g at m o s t 2 m m
t h i c k e x c e p t c o r r i d o r s , s t a i r w a y e n c l o s u r e s as w e l l as
control stations where thickness o f covering shall
n o t e x c e e d 1,5 m m .
8.4.1.2 T h e h u l l , s u p e r s t r u c t u r e , s t r u c t u r a l b u l k heads, decks a n d deckhouses shaU be constructed o f
steel o r o t h e r e q u i v a l e n t m a t e r i a l . F o r t h e p u r p o s e o f
T a b l e
Nos.
Space
Ships
Separation by
F r o m space
Machinery space category
A-60
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
accommodation spaces
control stations
corridors
stairways
service s p a c e s o f h i g h fire risk
ro-ro spaces
vehicle spaces
Machinery space category
A-0
O t h e r t h a n a b o v e ( i t e m 1)
Galley
A-0
Unless specified otherwise
Service s p a c e s o f h i g h fire risk
B-15
U n l e s s s p e c i f i e d a b o v e ( i t e m 1)
Corridor. Staircase
B-0
C a r g o spaces (other than ro-ro spaces a n d vehicle spaces)
A-0
R o - r o spaces a n d vehicle spaces (except weather deck)
A-60
1. c o n t r o l s t a t i o n s
2. m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s o f c a t e g o r y
R o - r o spaces a n d vehicle spaces (except weather deck)
A-0
8.4.1
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
a p p l y i n g t h e d e f i n i t i o n o f steel o r o t h e r e q u i v a l e n t
material, t h eapplicable fire exposure shall be o n e h o u r .
Ships b u i l t o f m a t e r i a l s o t h e r t h a n steel shall be
specially considered.
8.4.1.3 S t a i r w a y s s h a l l b e e n c l o s e d , a t l e a s t a t o n e
level, b y divisions a n d self-closing doors o r hatches.
8.4.1.4 S t a i r w a y s s e r v i n g m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s , a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces, service spaces o r c o n t r o l stat i o n s s h a l l b e o f steel o r o t h e r e q u i v a l e n t m a t e r i a l .
8.4.1.5 O p e n i n g s i n " A " c l a s s d i v i s i o n s s h a l l b e
p r o v i d e d w i t h m e a n s o f closing w h i c h shall be a t least
as effective f o r r e s i s t i n g fires as t h e d i v i s i o n s i n w h i c h
they are fitted w h i c h is determined i n accordance
w i t h the Fire Test Procedures Code.
8.4.1.6 I n " A " c l a s s d i v i s i o n s , a r r a n g e m e n t s s h a l l
be m a d e t o p r e v e n t t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n o f heat t o u n insulated boundaries a t the intersections a n d terminal
points o f other structural members a n d penetrations
by insulating the horizontal a n d vertical boundaries
o r p e n e t r a t i o n s f o r a distance o f 4 5 0 m m e i t h e r side.
8.4.1.7 D o o r s s h a l l b e s e l f - c l o s i n g i n w a y o f m a c h i n e r y spaces o f c a t e g o r y A a n d galleys, except
w h e r e they are n o r m a l l y k e p t closed.
8.4.1.8 I n c a r g o s h i p s o f l e s s t h a n 3 0 0 g r o s s t o n nage, s t o r e r o o m s f o r f l a m m a b l e materials a n d substances m a y be arranged i n w a y o f a c c o m m o d a t i o n
spaces, b u t n o t adjacent t h e r e t o . W h e r e a separate
s t o r e r o o m f o r flammable liquids is impeded, i t is
permissible t o store t h e m i n steel v e n t i l a t e d lockers o r
cases. S u c h l o c k e r s o r cases s h a l l n o t b e a d j a c e n t t o
t h e a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces a n d t h e i r d o o r s s h a l l o p e n
outwards.
A l l e l e c t r i c a l e q u i p m e n t s h a l l b e i n t r i n s i c a l l y safe.
8.5 R E Q U I R E M E N T S F O R M A T E R I A L S
8.5.1 E x c e p t i n c a r g o s p a c e s o r r e f r i g e r a t e d
c o m p a r t m e n t s o f service spaces, i n s u l a t i n g m a t e r i a l s
shall be non-combustible.
8.5.2 I n s u l a t i n g m a t e r i a l s s h a l l n o t c o n t a i n a s bestos.
8.5.3 I n s p a c e s w h e r e p e n e t r a t i o n o f o i l p r o d u c t s
is p o s s i b l e , t h e s u r f a c e o f t h e i n s u l a t i o n s h a l l b e i m pervious t o o i l o r oil vapours.
8.5.4 V a p o u r b a r r i e r s a n d a d h e s i v e s u s e d i n c o n j u n c t i o n w i t h i n s u l a t i o n , as w e l l as t h e i n s u l a t i o n o f
pipe fittings, f o r c o l d service systems need n o t b e o f
non-combustible materials, but they shall be kept t o t h e
m i n i m u m q u a n t i t y practicable a n d t h e i r exposed surfaces s h a l l h a v e l o w f l a m e s p r e a d characteristics.
8.5.5 P a i n t s , v a r n i s h e s a n d o t h e r f i n i s h e s u s e d o n
exposed i n t e r i o r surfaces shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e
requirements
o f 2.1.1.7,
2.1.1.8.2.1,
2.1.8.2.2
a n d 2.1.1.8.3 a c c o r d i n g l y as regards
producing
excessive q u a n t i t i e s o f s m o k e , t o x i c gases o r v a p o u r s
463
and shall be o f t h e l o w flame spread type i n accordance w i t h the Fire Test Procedures Code.
8.5.6 P i p e s c o n v e y i n g o i l o r c o m b u s t i b l e U q u i d s
t h r o u g h a c c o m m o d a t i o n s a n d service spaces s h a l l b e
o f steel o r o t h e r a p p r o v e d m a t e r i a l s h a v i n g r e g a r d t o
the fire risk.
8.5.7 W h e r e p i p e s p e n e t r a t e " A " o r " B " c l a s s
divisions, the pipes o r t h e i r p e n e t r a t i o n pieces shall be
o f steel o r o t h e r a p p r o v e d m a t e r i a l s .
8.5.8 P r i m a r y d e c k c o v e r i n g s w i t h i n a c c o m m o d a t i o n spaces, service spaces a n d c o n t r o l stations
shall be o f a n approved material w h i c h will
n o t readily ignite o r give rise t o t o x i c o r explosive
hazards a t elevated temperatures, as defined b y t h e
Fire Test Procedures Code.
8.5.9 M a t e r i a l s r e a d i l y r e n d e r e d i n e f f e c t i v e b y
heat shall n o t be used f o r o v e r b o a r d scuppers, sanitary discharges a n d other outlets where t h e failure o f
the m a t e r i a l w o u l d give rise t o t h e danger o f f l o o d i n g .
8.6 F I R E - F I G H T I N G E Q U I P M E N T
A N D S Y S T E M S
8.6.1 F i x e d fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s w h e r e r e quired, shall meet the requirements o f the F i r e Safety

Systems Code.
8.6.2 M a c h i n e r y s p a c e s o f c a t e g o r y A o n s h i p s
w i t h gross tonnage greater t h a n o r equal t o 1 5 0 a n d
operating i n unrestricted o r restricted waters, except
ships f o r p o r t , roadstead a n d coastal n a v i g a t i o n shall
b e p r o v i d e d w i t h a n a p p r o v e d fixed fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g
system, as specified i n 8.6.1.
8.6.3 F i x e d fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m s n o t m a n datory under t h e requirements o f the present Section,
b u t i n s t a l l e d o n b o a r d s h i p s o f less t h a n 5 0 0 g r o s s
tonnage shall be o f a n approved type.
8.6.4 P r o t e c t i o n o f p a i n t l o c k e r s a n d f l a m m a b l e
Uquid lockers shall be agreed w i t h t h e Register.
8.6.5 S p a r e p a r t s a n d i n s t r u m e n t s f o r fixed fire
extinguishing systems shall be available o n board.
The n u m b e r o f spare parts a n d instruments shall be
determined a n d agreed w i t h t h e Register.
8.6.6 I n s h i p s o f l e s s t h a n 1 5 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e
w h e r e a r r a n g i n g a fire e x t i n c t i o n s t a t i o n o u t s i d e t h e
p r o t e c t e d spaces is h a r d l y feasible, as w e l l as i n spec i a l cases, o n s h i p s o f less t h a n 5 0 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e
w h e r e t h e v o l u m e o f i n d i v i d u a l p r o t e c t e d spaces does
n o t e x c e e d 1 0 0 m , c y U n d e r s c o n t a i n i n g t h e fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i u m m a y b e fitted w i t h i n t h e p r o tected space o n c o n d i t i o n t h a t such stations a r e
provided w i t h efficient remote c o n t r o l f o r i m mediately starting the system f r o m outside the protected space. T h e r e m o t e s t a r t i n g c o n t r o l p o s i t i o n
shall be distinctly indicated a n d Ughted b o t h f r o m t h e
m a i n a n d emergency sources o f electrical power.
3
464
Rules
8.7 W A T E R F I R E M A E S
S Y S T E M
8.7.1 F i r e p u m p s , p i p e l i n e s , h y d r a n t s a n d h o s e s
required b y t h e present Section shall be provided i n
all ships.
8.7.2 N u m b e r a n d c a p a c i t y o f f i r e p u m p s .
8.7.2.1 O n e m a i n fixed fire p u m p w i t h a n i n d e p e n d e n t p o w e r s o u r c e a n d o n e p o r t a b l e fire p u m p s h a l l
be provided, a n d t h e latter shall b e located considering
t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 8.7.2.7.1. F o r ice class ships t h e m a i n
fixed fire p u m p w i t h a n i n d e p e n d e n t p o w e r s o u r c e a n d
t h e fire p u m p s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d , a n d t h e l a t t e r s h a l l b e
fixed i n c o m p l i a n c e w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 8 . 7 . 2 . 7 .
8.7.2.2 T h e t o t a l c a p a c i t y o f t h e m a i n f i x e d f i r e
p u m p , i n m / h , s h a l l n o t b e less t h a n
3
Q = (0,U5jL(B+D)
where
+ 2,\lf
(8.7.2.2)
L = l e n g t h o f s h i p ( r e f e r t o 1.1.3, P a r t I I " H u l l " ) , i n m ;

B = greatest m o u l d e d breadth o f ship, i n m ;
D = moulded depth to bulkhead deck amidships, i n m .
T h e m a i n fixed fire p u m p capacity need n o t exceed 2 5 m / h .

8.7.2.3 R e U e f v a l v e s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d i n c o n j u n c t i o n w i t h m a i n fixed fire p u m p i f t h e p u m p is
capable o f developing a pressure exceeding t h e design
pressure o f t h e w a t e r service pipes, h y d r a n t s
a n d hoses.
A pressure gauge shall be fitted o n t h e discharge
end o f t h e m a i n fixed fire p u m p .
8.7.2.4 S a n i t a r y , b a l l a s t , b i l g e o r g e n e r a l s e r v i c e
p u m p s m a y be accepted as fire p u m p s , p r o v i d e d t h a t
they are n o tn o r m a l l y used f o r p u m p i n g fuel o i l .
8.7.2.5 P o r t a b l e f i r e p u m p s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h t h e
.1 t h e p u m p s h a l l be s e l f - p r i m i n g ;
.2 t h e p u m p s h a l l b e c a p a b l e o f m a i n t a i n i n g a p r e s sure sufficient t o produce a j e t t h r o w o f at least 1 2 m , o r
that required t o enable a j e t o f water t o be directed o n a n y
part o f the e n g i n e r o o m , w h i c h e v e r is t h e greater;
.3 a r r a n g e m e n t s s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d t o s e c u r e t h e
p u m p at itsanticipated operating position;
.4 t h e p u m p s e t s h a l l b e s t o r e d i n a s e c u r e , s a f e
a n d enclosed space, accessible f r o m o p e n d e c k a n d
clear o f t h e m a c h i n e r y space o fc a t e g o r y A . T h e r o o m
w h e r e t h e p u m p set is stored shall be i l l u m i n a t e d
f r o m t h e emergency source o f electrical power;
.5 t h e p u m p s e t s h a l l b e e a s i l y m o v e d a n d o p e r a t e d
b y t w o persons a n d b e readily available f o r immediate
use;
.6 t h e p u m p s e t s h a l l o p e r a t e t h e p u m p f o r a t
least three h o u r s . F o r electric p u m p s , their batteries
shall have sufficient capacity f o r three hours. I f the
fuel type used f o r t h e p u m p set h a s a flash p o i n t
b e l o w 6 0 C, f u r t h e r c o n s i d e r a t i o n t o t h e f i r e s a f e t y
aspects o f fuel o i l storage o n b o a r d shall be given.
A diesel m o t o r p u m p m a y b e u s e d as t h e p u m p set.
3
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
T h e p o w e r source f o rt h e p u m p shall be capable

o f being readily started i nitscold condition b y h a n d
(manual)
cranking
or
by
special
heating
arrangements.
T h e diesel m o t o r p u m p shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e
requirements o f 5.1.17 (except 5.1.17.2);
.7 t h e o v e r b o a r d s u c t i o n h o s e s h a l l b e n o n - c o l lapsible a n d o f sufficient length, t o ensure suction
under a l l operating conditions. A suitable strainer
s h a l l b e fitted a t t h e i n l e t e n d o f t h e h o s e .
8.7.2.6 I n s h i p s o f l e s s t h a n 1 5 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e
fitted
w i t h a fixed fire e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m i n t h e
engine r o o m , portable p u m p s m a ybe omitted.
8.7.2.7 A l t e r n a t i v e l y t o p o r t a b l e fire p u m p s ( r e f e r
t o 8 . 7 . 2 . 5 ) , fixed fire p u m p s m a y b e f i t t e d , w h i c h s h a l l
.1 t h e p u m p , i t s source o f p o w e r a n d sea c o n n e c t i o n s h a l l b e l o c a t e d i n accessible p o s i t i o n s , o u t s i d e t h e c o m p a r t m e n t h o u s i n g t h e m a i n fixed fire
p u m p required b y 8.7.2.1;
.2 t h e s e a v a l v e s h a l l b e c a p a b l e o f b e i n g o p e r a t e d
f r o m a position near t h e p u m p a n d be fitted b e l o w
the lightship waterUne;
.3 t h e p r e s s u r e o f w a t e r d e U v e r e d b y t h e p u m p
s h a l l b e s u f f i c i e n t t o p r o d u c e a j e t o f w a t e r o f n o t less
than 12 m i n length, a t a n y hose nozzle o f 12, 16
a n d 1 9 m m size o r a s n e a r t h e r e t o as p o s s i b l e .
F o r s h i p s o f less t h a n 1 5 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e , t h e j e t
o f w a t e r shall be agreed w i t h t h e Register i n each
p a r t i c u l a r case;
.4 p u m p i s r e q u i r e d t o s u p p l y w a t e r f o r t h e fire
e x t i n g u i s h i n g s y s t e m i n t h e space w h e r e t h e m a i n
fixed fire p u m p i s s i t u a t e d , i t s h a l l b e c a p a b l e o f s i multaneously supplying water t o this system a n d the
fire m a i n a t t h e r e q u i r e d r a t e s ;
.5 t h e p u m p m a y a l s o b e u s e d f o r o t h e r s u i t a b l e
purposes o n agreement w i t h t h e Register;
.6 t h e r o o m w h e r e t h e f i r e p u m p p r i m e m o v e r i s
located shall be i U u m i n a t e d f r o m t h e emergency source
o f electrical p o w e r , a n d shaU be w e l l ventilated.
8.7.3 F i r e h o s e s a n d n o z z l e s .
8.7.3.1 F o r f i r e h o s e s , t h e n o z z l e s i z e s s h a l l b e 1 2 ,
16 o r 19 m m o r as n e a r t h e r e t o as possible.
8.7.3.2 F o r a c c o m m o d a t i o n s a n d s e r v i c e s p a c e s ,
t h e n o z z l e size n e e d n o t exceed 1 2 m m .
8.7.3.3 T h e s i z e o f n o z z l e s u s e d i n c o n j u n c t i o n
w i t h a p o r t a b l e fire p u m p n e e d n o t e x c e e d 1 2 m m .
8.7.3.4 A l l n o z z l e s s h a l l b e o f a n a p p r o v e d t y p e
i n c o r p o r a t i n g a shut-off. Plastic fire hose nozzles m a y
be used i n accordance w i t h 5.1.5.
8.7.4 F i r e m a i n .
8.7.4.1 T h e d i a m e t e r o f t h e fire m a i n s h a l l b e
b a s e d o n t h e r e q u i r e d c a p a c i t y o f t h e m a i n fixed fire
p u m p a n d t h e d i a m e t e r o f t h e w a t e r service pipes
shall be sufficient t o ensure a n adequate supply o f
w a t e r f o r t h e o p e r a t i o n o f a t l e a s t o n e fire h o s e .
P a r t VI. F i r e
Protection
8.7.4.2 P i p e s o f t h e w a t e r f i r e m a i n s y s t e m s h a l l
c o m p l y w i t h a l lt h e requirements o f 3.2.5.2.
8.7.4.3 T h e v a l v e s o f w a t e r f i r e m a i n p i p e s s h a l l
be located w h e r e t h e y w i l l n o t be d a m a g e d b y cargo.
8.7.4.4 W h e r e a f i x e d f i r e p u m p i s f i t t e d o u t s i d e
the engine r o o m , i n accordance w i t h 8.7.2.7:
.1 a n i s o l a t i n g v a l v e s h a l l b e f i t t e d o n t h e f i r e
m a i n so that a t a l l t h e hydrants i n t h e ship, except
t h a t o r those i n t h e m a c h i n e r y space o f category A ,
can be supplied w i t h water;
.2 t h e i s o l a t i n g v a l v e s h a l l b e l o c a t e d i n a n e a s i l y
accessible p o s i t i o n outside t h e m a c h i n e r y space o f
category A .
8.7.5 P r e s s u r e i n t h e fire m a i n .
8.7.5.1 W h e n t h e m a i n f i x e d f i r e p u m p o r t h e
fixed fire p u m p specified i n 8.7.2.7 is d e l i v e r i n g w a t e r
t h r o u g h t h e fire m a i n , fire hoses a n d nozzles specified
i n 8.7.3, t h e pressure m a i n t a i n e d a t a n y h y d r a n t shall
be sufficient t o p r o d u c e a j e t t h r o w a t a n y nozzle o f
n o t less t h a n 1 2 m i n l e n g t h .
8.7.6 N u m b e r a n d p o s i t i o n o f fire h y d r a n t s .
8.7.6.1 F o r s h i p s e q u a l t o o r g r e a t e r t h a n
150 g r o s s t o n n a g e t h e n u m b e r a n d p o s i t i o n o f h y drants shall be such t h a t a t least t w o jets o f w a t e r n o t
emanating f r o m thesame hydrant, o n eo fw h i c h shall
be f r o m a single l e n g t h o fhose, as specified i n 5.1.4.1,
m a y reach a n y p a r t o f t h e ship n o r m a l l y accessible t o
the crew while t h e ship is being navigated a n d a n y
p a r t o f a n y cargo space w h e n e m p t y .
Furthermore, such hydrants shall be positioned
n e a r t h e accesses t o t h e p r o t e c t e d spaces.
8.7.6.2 F o r s h i p s l e s s t h a n 1 5 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e t h e
n u m b e r a n d position o f the hydrants shall be such
t h a t a t least o n e j e t o f w a t e r f r o m a single l e n g t h o f
hose, as specified i n 5.1.4.1, m a y reach a n y p a r t
n o r m a l l y accessible t o t h e crew, w h i l e t h e ship is
being n a v i g a t e d a n d a n y p a r t o f a n y cargo space
when empty.
Furthermore, such hydrants shall be positioned
n e a r t h e accesses t o t h e p r o t e c t e d spaces.
8.7.6.3 A t l e a s t o n e h y d r a n t s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d i n
each m a c h i n e r y space o f category A .
8.7.6.4 A n i s o l a t i n g v a l v e a n d a s t a n d a r d q u i c k a c t i n g c o u p l i n g s h a l l b e fitted a t e a c h fire h y d r a n t .
8.7.6.5 A l l e x p o s e d h y d r a n t s s h a l l c o m p l y w i t h
the requirements o f 3.2.6.1 a n d 3.2.6.5.
8.7.6.6 T h e h y d r a n t s s h a l l b e s o p l a c e d t h a t t h e
fire hoses m a ybe easily coupled t o t h e m .
8.7.6.7 A l l t h e h y d r a n t s s h a l l b e p a i n t e d r e d .
8.7.7 F i r e h o s e s .
8.7.7.1 F i r e h o s e s s h a l l b e o f a p p r o v e d n o n - p e r ishable m a t e r i a l resistant t o destruction b y m i c r o organisms (rotting).
8.7.7.2 T h e h o s e s s h a l l b e s u f f i c i e n t i n l e n g t h t o
p r o j e c t a j e t o f w a t e r t o a n y o f t h e spaces, b u t t h e i r
length, i n general, shall n o t exceed 18m .
465
8.7.7.3 F i r e h o s e s i n a s s e m b l y w i t h n o z z l e s s h a l l
be s t o w e d a t h y d r a n t s o r i n conspicuous p o s i t i o n s o n
reels o r i n baskets.
8.7.7.4 S h i p s e q u a l t o o r g r e a t e r t h a n 1 5 0 g r o s s
tonnage shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h fire hoses t h e n u m b e r
of w h i c h shall be o n ef o reach 3 0m length o fthe ship
a n d o n e s p a r e , b u t i n n o case less t h a n t h r e e i n a l l .
8.7.7.5 F o r s h i p s l e s s t h a n 1 5 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e , o n e
hose shall be provided f o r each hydrant. I n addition,
one spare hose shall be p r o v i d e d o n board.
8.7.7.6 U n l e s s o n e h o s e a n d n o z z l e i s p r o v i d e d
for each h y d r a n t i n t h e ship, there shall be c o m p l e t e
interchangeability o fhose coupUngs a n d nozzles.
8.8 F I X E D F E R E D E T E C T I O N
AND FERE A L A R M S Y S T E M S
8.8.1 A n a p p r o v e d f i x e d f i r e d e t e c t i o n a n d f i r e
alarm system shall be installed i n a l l machinery
spaces o f c a t e g o r y A a n d c a r g o p u m p r o o m s .
8.8.2 O n a g r e e m e n t w i t h t h e R e g i s t e r , b u t t o n s o f
m a n u a l fire a l a r m s m a y be p r o v i d e d o n board.
8.9 F I R E - F I G H T I N G
OUTFIT
8.9.1 P o r t a b l e f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r s .
8.9.1.1 A l l f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r s s h a l l b e o f t y p e a p proved b y the Register a n d shall c o m p l y w i t h the
r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 5.1.9, except 5.1.9.3 a n d 5.1.9.4.
8.9.1.2 T h e e x t i n g u i s h i n g m e d i a e m p l o y e d s h a l l
be suitable f o r e x t i n g u i s h i n g fires i n t h e c o m p a r t m e n t s i n w h i c h they a r e intended t o be used.
8.9.1.3 T h e e x t i n g u i s h e r s r e q u i r e d f o r u s e i n m a c h i n e r y spaces s h a l l b e o f a t y p e d i s c h a r g i n g f o a m ,
c a r b o n dioxide gas, d r y p o w d e r o r other a p p r o v e d
m e d i a suitable f o re x t i n g u i s h i n g o i l fires.
8.9.1.4 T h e n u m b e r o f p o r t a b l e f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r s
a n d spaces w h e r e t h e y shall be s t o w e d is d e t e r m i n e d
as f o l l o w s :
.1 a c c o m m o d a t i o n s a n d s e r v i c e s p a c e s o f s h i p s
g r e a t e r t h a n o r e q u a l t o 1 5 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e n o t less
t h a n 3 (three) fire extinguishers;
.2 a c c o m m o d a t i o n s a n d s e r v i c e s p a c e s o f s h i p s
less t h a n 1 5 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e n o t less t h a n 1 ( o n e )
fire extinguisher considering t h e appUcable requirem e n t s o f 8.9.1.5;
.3 m a c h i n e r y s p a c e s 1 ( o n e ) f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r
per every 375 k W o f internal c o m b u s t i o n engine
p o w e r ; h o w e v e r , t h e i r n u m b e r s h a l l b e n o t less
t h a n 2 ( t w o ) a n d n o tm o r e t h a n 6 (six).
8.9.1.5 A c c o m m o d a t i o n s p a c e s , s e r v i c e s p a c e s
a n d c o n t r o l stations shall be p r o v i d e d w i t h a sufficient n u m b e r o fportable fire extinguishers t o ensure
t h a t a t least 1 ( o n e ) extinguisher w i l l be readily
466
Rules
available f o r use i n every compartment o f the crew

spaces. I n a n y case, o n ships greater t h a n o r e q u a l
t o 1 5 0 g r o s s t o n n a g e t h e i r n u m b e r s h a l l b e n o t less
t h a n 3 (three), except w h e r e this is impractical f o r
v e r y s m a l l ships, i n w h i c h case 1 ( o n e ) e x t i n g u i s h e r
shall be available at each deck h a v i n g accommodat i o n o r service spaces, o r c o n t r o l stations.
8.9.1.6 T h e e x t i n g u i s h e r s s h a l l b e s t o w e d i n
readily accessible p o s i t i o n s a n d shall be spread as
widely as possible a n d n o t be grouped.
8.9.1.7 O n e o f t h e p o r t a b l e f i r e e x t i n g u i s h e r s i n tended f o r u s e i n a n y space shall be s t o w e d n e a r t h e
entrance t o t h a t space.
8.9.1.8 A s p a r e c h a r g e s h a l l b e p r o v i d e d f o r e a c h
required portable fire extinguisher t h a t c a n be readily
recharged o n board. I f this cannot be done, t h e same
n u m b e r o fduplicate (additional) extinguishers o f the
same capacity, type a n d fire extinguishing capability
shall be provided.
8.9.2 1 ( o n e ) f i r e b l a n k e t c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e r e quirements o f 5.1.13 shall b e provided.
8.9.3 A l l s h i p s g r e a t e r t h a n o r e q u a l t o 1 5 0 g r o s s
t o n n a g e shall c a r r y a t least o n e firefighter's o u t f i t
consisting o f a set o f p e r s o n a l e q u i p m e n t , b r e a t h i n g
apparatus a n d lifeline c o m p l y i n g w i t h t h e requirements o fI M O resolutionMSC.98(73).
8.10 A D D I T I O N A L F I R E S A F E T Y M E A S U R E S
FOR Oil TANKERS
8.10.1 T h e r e q u i r e m e n t s f o r t a n k e r s o f S O L A S
Chapter I I - 2 shall apply t o o i l tankers carrying crude
oil a n d petroleum products, having a flash point n o t
e x c e e d i n g 6 0 C a n d a R e i d v a p o u r p r e s s u r e w h i c h i s
b e l o w atmospheric pressure.
8.10.2 O i l t a n k e r s c a r r y i n g p e t r o l e u m p r o d u c t s
h a v i n g a f l a s h p o i n t e x c e e d i n g 6 0 C s h a l l c o m p l y
w i t h t h e requirements o f 6.3, except 6.3.1.1, a n d
o f 8.10.3 a n d 8.10.4.
T h e flash p o i n t shall be determined b y a closed
cup test u s i n g a n a p p r o v e d flash p o i n t apparatus.
8.10.3 C a r g o a r e a d e c k p r o t e c t i o n s h a l l b e c a r r i e d
out considering the following:
.1 a t least o n e a p p r o v e d m o b i l e f o a m a p p l i a n c e
shall be provided f o r use o n the cargo t a n k deck i n cluding t h e cargo manifolds.
T h e appliance shall have a f o a m solution capac i t y o f a t l e a s t 1 3 6 1.
and Construction
of Sea-Going
Ships
W h e r e t h e appliance is o f t h e inductor type i t

shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e requirements o f 5.1.8 f o r
a portable f o a m applicator u n i t connected t o t h e fire
main;
.2 u s e s h a l l b e m a d e o f f o a m c o n c e n t r a t e o f t y p e s
approved b y the Register considering the requirem e n t s o f 3.7.1.2.
8.10.4 T h e t y p e o f f o a m u s e d s h a l l b e s u i t a b l e f o r
the cargoes t o be carried.
8.11 S H I P S N O T F I T T E D
WITH PROPELLING M A C H I N E R Y
8.11.1 A r r a n g e m e n t s f o r f i r e p r o t e c t i o n , d e t e c t i o n
a n d e x t i n c t i o n i n ships n o t fitted w i t h p r o p e l l i n g
m a c h i n e r y shall be specially considered b y t h e
R e g i s t e r i n e a c h case a n d s h a l l d e p e n d o n t h e size a n d
purpose o f t h e ship a n d t h e presence o f accomm o d a t i o n spaces, m a c h i n e r y a n d c o m b u s t i b l e m a t e rials o n board.
8.12 S H I P S C A R R Y I N G P A C K A G E D D A N G E R O U S
O R DANGEROUS GOODS IN B U L K
GOODS
8.12.1 S h i p s c a r r y i n g p a c k a g e d d a n g e r o u s g o o d s
or dangerous goods i n b u l k shall comply w i t h the
requirements o f 7.2.
8.12.2 S h i p s c a r r y i n g p a c k a g e d i r r a d i a t e d n u c l e a r
fuel, p l u t o n i u m a n d high-level radioactive wastes
( I N F cargo) shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e r e q u i r e m e n t s o f 7.3.
8.13 O i l R E C O V E R Y S H I P S A N D B I L G E
REMOVING SHIPS
W A T E R
8.13.1 T h e f i r e p r o t e c t i o n o f o i l r e c o v e r y s h i p s
a n d bilge w a t e r r e m o v i n g ships shall c o m p l y w i t h t h e
requirements o f 6.4, except t h e requirements f o r fitting o f fixed deck f o a m fire extinguishing system, a n d
o f 8.10.2 t o 8.10.4.
SHIPS
8.14.1 T h e f i r e p r o t e c t i o n o f s p e c i a l p u r p o s e s h i p s
shall be i n compliance w i t h t h e requirements o f 6.2.

1
Russian Maritime Register o f Shipping
R u l e s for the Classification and Construction o fSea-Going Ships
Volume 1
T h e edition is prepared
by Russian Maritime Register o f Shipping
8, D v o r t s o v a y a N a b e r e z h n a y a ,
191186, S t . P e t e r s b u r g ,
Russian Federation
www.rs-class.org/ru/
Reset form
8.3.36
LIST OF CIRCULAR LETTERS AMENDING/SUPPLEMENTING NORMATIVE

DOCUMENT
ND 2-020101-082-E
Rules for the Classification and Construction of Sea-Going Ships (2015), Volume 1
(Normative document No. and title)
Item
No.
Circular letter No.,

date of approval
1.
314-26-794c
dated
30.12.2014
2.
3.
4.
314-26-796c
314-26-797c
312-11-812c
dated
dated
dated
12.01.2015
12.01.2015
15.04.2015
5.
312-11-819c
dated
01.06.2015
List of amended and

supplemented paras
Part I: 2.2.28, 2.3.3.
Part II: 3.3.1.1, 3.3.5.2, 3.3.5.3, 3.3.6.1.
Part II: 3.3.4.10, 3.3.4.11, Appendix 3.
Part II: 3.3.4.1.1, Appendix 4.
Part I: 2.2.3, 2.2.3.1.
Part II: 3.10.1.1.1.
Part III: 7.14.2.
11/05
Appendix to Circular Letter

No. 314-26-796c of
12.01.2015
Amendments to the Rules for the Classification and Construction

of Sea-Going Ships,
2014 ND No. 2-020101-077 and 2015 ND No. 2-020101-085
PART II. Hull
3.3 BULK CARRIERS AND OIL OR BVULK DRY CARGO CARRIERS
Paras 3.3.4.10 and 3.3.4.11 shall be renumbered 3.3.4.11 and 3.3.4.12 accordingly.
A new para 3.3.4.10 shall be introduced:
3.3.4.10 For ships of 150 m in length and more, intended to carry cargoes having bulk density of
1,0 t/m3 and more, and with:
single side skin construction;
double side skin, in which any part of longitudinal bulkhead is located within B/5 or 11,5 m,
whichever is less, inboard from the ships side at right angle to the centerline at the assigned
summer load line;
contracted for construction on or after 1 July 2006,
the strength of transverse, watertight, vertically corrugated bulkheads shall be additionally
verified in accordance with a special procedure, described in Annex 3, for the case of each of the
holds being flooded..
New Appendix 3 to Part II Hull shall be introduced:
APPENDIX 3
MEMBER SCANTLING ASSESSMENT OF TRANSVERSE WATERTIGHT
CORRUGATED BULKHEAD IN NON-CSR BULK CARRIERS WITH CARGO HOLD
FLOODED
1 APPLICATION AND DEFINITIONS
This procedure apply for bulk carriers specified in 3.3.4.10.
U n i f o r m l o a d i n g is the loading for which the maximum-to-minimum filling ratio for each
cargo hold does not exceed 1,20 with regard for a correction depending on cargo density.
N e t t h i c k n e s s tnet is the thickness obtained as a result of applying the strength criteria given
in Section 4 of this Appendix.
R e q u i r e d t h i c k n e s s is the sum of net thickness (tnet ) and the corrosion allowance (ts)
given in Section 6 of this Appendix.
2 LOADING MODEL
2.1 General provisions.
Loads considered to act upon the bulkhead are loads due to a combination of cargo loads and
those resulting from flooding a hold adjacent to the bulkhead in question. In any case, the
pressure of water flooding a hold without cargo shall be considered.
To assess the member scantlings of each bulkhead, the most unfavourable combinations of
loading and hold flooding shall be used proceeding from the following loading conditions
described in the loading manual:
uniform loading;
non-uniform loading;
loading with regard for individual loaded and empty holds being flooded.
The limits set for design loads in cargo holds shall be taken into consideration by the designer
when determining typical loading conditions to be included in the Loading Manual.
Partially non-uniform loading which may occur during cargo-handling operations in port may
not be considered where the final typical loading of the ship is uniform.
Holds in which pallet cargo is loaded shall be considered empty.
Except where considered empty. Except where the ship being non-uniformly loaded is intended
only for the carriage of iron ore or a cargo with a density of 1,78 t/m3 or above, it shall be
considered that the maximum cargo mass which may be present in a hold will fill it to the upper
deck level on the centreline plane.
2.2 Water head applied to a corrugated bulkhead as a result of hold flooding.
Water head, hf (refer to Fig. 2.2 of this Appendix) is the distance, in m, measured vertically,
with the ship in the upright position, from a reference point to a level removed to the distance df,
in m, from the base line and equal to:
.1 in general case:
D for the forward transverse corrugated bulkhead;
0,9D for other bulkheads.
If a ship is non-uniformly loaded with a bulk cargo with the density below 1,78 t/m3, the
following values may be adopted for the calculation:
0,95D for the forward transverse corrugated bulkhead;
0,85D for other bulkheads;
Fig. 2.2:
V volume of cargo;
P reference point;
D distance, in m, from the base line to the freeboard deck measured along the side
.2 for ships with a freeboard of B type and a deadweight below 50000 t:
0,95D for the forward transverse corrugated bulkhead;
0,85D for other bulkheads.
If a ship is non-uniformly loaded with a bulk cargo with the density below 1,78 t/m3, the
following values may be adopted for the calculation:
2.3 Pressure in unflooded holds filled with bulk cargo.
For any point on the bulkhead, the pressure pc, inkN/m2, shall be determined by the formula
= 1 2
where = bulk cargo density, in t/m3;
g = gravity acceleration equal to 9,81 m/s2;
h1 = vertical distance, in m, from a reference point to a horizontal plane corresponding to the
cargo surface level (refer to Fig. 2.2 of this Appendix) and distanced by d1, in m, from the base
line;
= 45 ( );
2
= repose angle generally adopted equal to 35 for iron ore and to 25 for cement.
The force FC, in kN, acting upon a corrugation shall be determined by the formula
= 1
(1 )2
2
2
where s1 = corrugation spacing, in m (refer to Fig. 2.3 of this Appendix);

=average height, in m, of the lower bulkhead support above the inner bottom;
= double bottom height, in m.
Fig. 2.3:
n neutral axis of corrugation;
tf corrugation face plate thickness;
tweb corrugation web thickness
2.4 Pressure in flooded holds.

2.4.1 Bulk cargo holds.
Two cases of hold loading shall be considered proceeding from the values of d1 and df:
.1 df d1.
For any point on the bulkhead lying between d1 and df above the base line, the pressure pc, f, in
kN/m2, shall be determined by the formula
, = ,
where = seawater density, in t/m3;
g = gravity acceleration (see 2.3 of this Appendix);
hf = water head (refer to 2.2 of this Appendix).
For any point on the bulkhead lying lower than d1 above the base line, the pressure pc, f, in kN/m2,
shall be determined by the formula
, = + [ (1 ]1 2 ,
where for , , 1 , refer to 2.3 of this Appendix;
perm = permeability of cargo, to be taken as 0,3 for ore (corresponding bulk cargo density for
iron ore may generally be taken as 3,0 t/m3), coal cargoes and for cement (corresponding bulk
cargo density for cement may generally be taken as 1,3 t/m3.
The force Fc, f, in kN, applied to a corrugation shall be determined by the formula:
, = 1 [
( 1 )
2
( 1 )+(, )
2
(1 )],
where for 1 , , 1 , , refer to 2.3 of this Appendix;

for df , refer to 2.2 of this Appendix;
(, ) = pressure on the level of the lower support section of the bulkhead, in kN/m2;
.2 df < d1.
For any point on the bulkhead lying between d1 and df above the base line, the pressure , , in
kN/m2, shall be determined by the formula
, = 1 2
where for , , 1 , , refer to 2.3 of this Appendix.
For any point on the bulkhead lying below df above the base line, the pressure , , in kN/m2,
shall be determined by the formula:
, = + [ 1 (1 ) ] 2 ,
where for , , , refer to 2.4.1.1 of this Appendix;
for , , 1 , refer to 2.3 of this Appendix.
The force , , in kN, applied to a corrugation shall be determined by the formula
, = 1 [
(1 )
2
2 +
(1 )2 +(, )
2
where for 1 , , , 1 , , , , refer to 2.3 of this Appendix;
( )],
for df, refer to 2.2 of this Appendix;

(, ) = pressure on the level of the lower support section of the bulkhead, in kN/m2.
2.4.2 Water pressure when a hold containing no cargo is flooded.

For any point on the bulkhead, the hydrostatic pressure pf due to the water head shall be
considered which results from hold flooding.
The force F, in kN, applied to a corrugation shall be determined by the formula
= 1
( )
2
where for 1 , , , , refer to 2.3 of this Appendix;

for , refer to 2.4.1.1 of this Appendix;
for df, refer to 2.2 of this Appendix.
2.5 Resultant pressure and resultant force.
2.5.1 Uniform ship loading.
For calculating member scantlings at any point on the bulkhead, the resultant pressure p, in kN/m2,
= , 0,8 .
The resultant force F, in kN, applied to a corrugation shall be determined by the formula
= , 0,8
2.5.2 Non-uniform ship loading.
For calculating member scantlings at any point on the bulkhead, the resultant pressure p, in kN/m2,
= , .
The resultant force , in kN, applied to a corrugation, shall be determined by the formula
= , .
3 BENDING MOMENT AND SHEARING FORCE IN BULKHEAD CORRUGATIONS
In bulkhead corrugations the bending moment M and the shearing force Q shall be determined by
the formulae given in 3.1 and 3.2 of this Appendix. The values of M an Q shall be used for checks
to be undertaken in accordance with 4.5 of this Appendix.
3.1 Bending moment.
For bulkhead corrugations, the design bending moment M, in kN/m, shall be determined by the
formula:
=
where F = resultant force, in kN (refer to 2.5 of this Appendix);

l = corrugation span, in m (refer to Fig. 2.3 and 3.1 of this Appendix).
3.2 Shearing force.
In the lower supporting sections of bulkhead corrugations, the shearing force, in kN, shall be
Q = 0,8F
where for F, refer to 2.5 of this Appendix.
Fig. 3.1:
l corrugation span;
* distance, in the centreline plane, between the lowest point of the upper
support for the bulkhead and the deck, which, when l is determined, shall
be adopted not greater than:
three times the height of corrugation section in the general case;
two times the height of corrugation section where the upper support of the
bulkhead has a rectangular cross section
4 STRENGTH CRITERIA
4.1 General.
4.1.1 The strength criteria given below apply to vertically corrugated transverse bulkheads (refer
to Fig. 2.3 of this Appendix).
In ships 190 m or above in length, the bulkheads in question shall be attached to the lower support
(transverse girder) and, as a rule, to the upper support (transverse girder) below the deck.
In ships less long, the corrugations may be attached to the inner bottom and deck. Where a lower
and/or upper support is fitted, the latter shall comply with the requirements of this Chapter.
The corrugation angle shown in Fig. 2.3 of this Appendix shall not be less than 55.
The requirements for the local net thickness of plates are given in 4.7 of this Appendix. Besides,
the requirements given in 4.2 and 4.5 of this Appendix shall be complied with.
The thickness of the lower part of corrugations determined in accordance with 4.2 and 4.3 of this
Appendix, shall remain without variation within 0,15l of the inner bottom at least, if a lower
support is not fitted for the bulkhead, or from the upper point of the lower support. The thickness
of the middle part of corrugations determined in accordance with 4.2 and 4.4 of this Appendix,
shall remain without variation within not more than 0,3l of the deck, if an upper support (transverse
girder) is not fitted for the bulkhead, or from the lower point of the upper support (transverse
girder) for the bulkhead.
The section modulus of corrugations in the remaining upper part of the bulkhead shall not be less
than 75 per cent of the value required for the middle part of the bulkhead and shall be corrected
proceeding from the tensile strength of the material.
4.1.2 Lower support of bulkhead. The height of the support shall generally be at least equal to
three times the height of the corrugation section.
The thickness and material of the upper horizontal/inclined supporting plate (flange plate) shall
not be lower than those stipulated under 4.1.1 for the bulkhead plating. In the upper part of vertical
or inclined supporting wall, on the height equal to the breadth of corrugation face plate
(corrugation face parallel to the bulkhead plane) from the upper supporting plate, the plate
thickness and material shall not be lower than required for the face plate in the lower cross section
of corrugation to ensure compliance with the requirement for the bulkhead strength. The plate
thickness of the supporting wall and the section modulus of stiffeners adjacent to the wall shall not
be less than required in 3.3, Part II "Hull" with due regard for the loading model to be determined
on the basis of Section 2 of this Appendix. The ends of vertical stiffeners adjacent to the supporting
wall shall be connected to brackets at the upper and lower section of the support. The distance
between the edge of the upper horizontal/inclined supporting plate (flange plate) and the surface
of corrugation face plate shall be in accordance with Fig. 4.1. The lower sections of supporting
walls shall be fitted on the plane of double bottom floors and spaced at least 2,5 times the average
height of corrugation section. The diaphragms of the support shall be fitted on the plane of
longitudinal web girders of double bottom to ensure and efficient attachment of the corrugated
bulkhead.
No openings are permitted in brackets and diaphragms in way of attachment to the horizontal
supporting plate. If corrugations terminate in way of the support, the former and the supporting
walls shall generally be attached to the upper horizontal/inclined supporting plate (flange plate)
with a complete penetration weld. The supporting wells and floors shall generally be connected to
the inner bottom plating with a complete penetration weld.
Fig. 4.1: s as-built flange thickness; d s

4.1.3 Upper support of bulkhead.
The upper support, if fitted, shall have a height generally equal to two or three times the height
of corrugation section. Support with a rectangular cross section shall have a height equal to two
times the height of corrugation section, as measured on deck level and at cargo hatch carling. The
support shall be structurally fixed between hatch-end beams by means of carlings or reinforced
brackets.
The breadth of the lower horizontal supporting plate (flange plate) shall generally be equal to
that of the upper horizontal plate of the lower support (flange). The upper supporting section of a
non-rec tangular shape shall have a breadth of at least two times the height of corrugation section.
The thickness and material of the lower horizontal supporting plate (flange plate) shall be the
same as those of the adjacent bulkhead plating.
If the same material is used for the wall and bulkhead, the thickness of the lower part of the
support wall shall be at least 80 per cent of that required for the upper part of bulkhead plating.
The supporting wall thickness and the section modulus of stiffeners adjacent to the supporting wall
shall not be less than required by the Register, with due regard for the loading model mentioned
in Section 2 of this Appendix. The stiffener ends adjacent to the supporting wall shall be connected
to brackets in way of the upper and lower section of the support. To support effectively the
corrugated bulkhead, the diaphragms shall be fitted inside the support on the plane of underdeck
web longitudinals reaching up to the hatch-end beams. No openings are permitted in brackets and
diaphragms in way of attachments to the lower horizontal supporting plate (flange plate).
4.1.4 Alignment.
On deck where no support is fitted, two transverse reinforced beams shall be fitted on the plane
of the corrugation face plates of the bulkhead.
On the double bottom where no support is fitted, the face plates of corrugations shall be fitted
on the plane of floors.
Corrugations and floors shall generally be attached to the inner bottom plating with a complete
penetration weld. The thickness and properties of the floor material under the corrugations shall
not be lower than those of the material used for corrugation face plates.
Besides, the openings for the passage of main framing girders of inner bottom through floors
under the corrugations shall be sealed.
Under the corrugations the floors shall be interconnected with special brackets complying with
the requirements of 3.3, Part II "Hull". To ensure an adequate load distribution between stiffeners,
the lower supporting wall shall be flattened in alignment with the corrugation face plate and
vertical stiffeners adjacent to the supporting wall, and their stiffening brackets in the lower support
shall be fitted on the plane of main framing girders of inner bottom. The supporting wall shall not
have a bend between the inner bottom plating and the upper supporting plate.
4.2 Bearing capacity of bulkhead in bending and the tangential stresses t.
The bearing capacity of a bulkhead in bending shall be in accordance with the following
relationship
103
0.95
0.5 , + ,
where M = bending moment, in kN/m (refer to 3.1 of this Appendix);

= section modulus, in cm3, of a corrugation half-breadth in the lower supporting section of
corrugations determined in accordance with 4.3 of this Appendix;
Zm = section modulus, in cm3, of the cross-sectional area of a corrugation mid-span, to be
determined in accordance with 4.4 of this Appendix;
, = permissible stresses, in N/mm2, for the lower supporting sections of corrugations in
accordance with 4.5 of this Appendix;
, = permissible stresses, in N/mm2, for the cross-sectional area of a corrugation mid-span in
accordance with 4.5 of this Appendix.
Always when the bearing capacity of a bulkhead in bending is determined, the value of Zm shall
not be adopted greater than l,15 or l,15 , whichever is the less (Zle is defined below).
Where
a) shedder plates are fitted in such a way that:
.1 they have no bend;
.2 they are attached to corrugations and to the upper horizontal/inclined plate (flange) of the
lower support with a full penetration weld made on one side or by another similar procedure;
.3 they have a minimal inclination of 45 and their lower end is a continuation of the lower supporting wall for the bulkhead;
.4 they have a thickness not less than 75 per cent of the corrugation face plate thickness;
.5 the properties of their material correspond at least to those of the material used for corrugation
face plates;
b) or where gasset plates are fitted in such a way that:
.1 if combined with shedder plates, their thickness, properties of their material and their welds
are in compliance with the above requirements;
.2 their height is equal to half the breadth of a corrugation face plate at least;
.3 they are fitted on the plane of the supporting wall for the bulkhead;
.4 they are generally attached to the upper horizontal/inclined plate (flange) of the lower support
for the bulkhead with a complete penetration weld, and with an incomplete penetration weld on
one side or similar weld to corrugations and shedder plates;
.5 thicknesses and properties of their material are at least similar to those of the corrugation face
plate material, the section modulus , in cm3, shall not be less than , in cm3, to be
= + 103
0.5 2 1
where Zg = section modulus, in cm3, of a corrugation half-breadth in accordance with 4.4 of this
Appendix, on the level of the upper ends of shedder or gasset plates, if fitted;
Q = shearing force, in kN (refer to 3.2 of this Appendix);
hg = height, in m, of shedder or gasset plates (refer to Figs 4.2-1, 4.2-2, 4.2-3 and 4.2-4 of this
Appendix);
for s1, refer to 2.3 of this Appendix;
= resultant pressure, N/m2, in accordance with 2.5 of this Appendix, determined on the level
of mid-length of shedder or gasset plates, if fitted;
= permissible stresses, in N/mm2, in accordance with 4.5 of this Appendix.
Fig. 4.2-1
Symmetrical shedder
plates:
1 shedder plate;
2 horizontal/inclined
supporting plate
(flange plate) of the
lower support for the
bulkhead;
Fig. 4.2-2
Unsymmetrical
shedder plates:
1 shedder plate;
2 horizontal/inclined
supporting plate
(flange plate) of the
lower support for the
bulkhead;
Fig. 4.2.-3
Symmetrial
gasset/shedder
plates:
1 gasset/shedder
plate;
2
horizontal/inclined
supporting plate
(flange plate)
Fig. 4.2-4
Unsymmetrial
gasset/shedder
plates:
1 gasset/shedder
plate;
2
horizontal/inclined
supporting plate
(flange plate)
3 vertical/inclined
supporting
wall of the lower
support for the
bulkhead
3 vertical/inclined
supporting
wall of the lower
support for the
bulkhead
of the lower support

for the bulkhead;
3 vertical/inclined
wall of the lower
support for the
bulkhead.
of the lower support

for the bulkhead;
3 vertical/inclined
wall of the lower
support
for
the
bulkhead
4.3 Section modulus of the cross-sectional area of corrugations in the lower supporting
section.
4.3.1 The section modulus shall be calculated for a compressed corrugation face plate having the
effective
breadth bef not grater than mentioned in 4.6 of this Appendix. Where a corrugation wall is not
stiffened with brackets fitted under the upper horizontal/inclined plate (flange) of the lower
support for the bulkhead (or below the inner bottom), the section modulus of the lower part of
corrugations shall be determined proceeding from 30 per cent efficiency of corrugation walls.
4.3.2 If efficient shedder plates are fitted in accordance with 4.2 of this Appendix (refer to
Figs. 4.2-1 and 4.2-2), the corrugation face plate area, in cm2, when determining its section
modulus in the lower supporting section, may be increased by
(2.5 ), but not more than by 2,5 ,
where a = corrugation face plate width, in m (refer to Fig. 2.3 of this Appendix);
tsh = net thickness, in mm, of shedder plate;
tf = net thickness, in mm, of corrugation face plate.
4.3.3 If efficient gusset plates are fitted in accordance with 4.2 of this Appendix (refer to
Figs. 4.2-3 and 4.2-4), the corrugation face plate area, in cm2, may be increased, when determining
its section modulus in the lower supporting section, by multiplying it by
(7 ),
where hg = gusset plate height, in m (see Figs 4.2-3 and 4.2-4), with hg4 < (10/7)sgu;
sgu = gusset plate breadth, in m;
tf = net thickness, in mm, of a corrugation face plate, as determined proceeding from the
building thickness.
4.3.4 Where corrugation walls are welded to an inclined upper plate (flange) of the lower
support for the bulkhead, which lies at an angle of not less than 45to the horizontal, the section
modulus of the corrugation cross section may be determined proceeding from full efficiency of
corrugation walls. If efficient gusset plates are fitted, the corrugation face plate area can be
increased in accordance with 4.3.3 when determining the corrugation section modulus. This does
not apply to shedder plates.
For angles less than 45, the efficiency of corrugation walls may be determined by linear
interpolation between 30 per cent for the angle of 08 and 100 per cent for the angle of 45.
4.4 Corrugation section moduli in areas outside the lower supporting section.
The section modulus shall be determined taking into consideration the corrugation walls
completely involved in bending and corrugation face plates having the effective breadth bef not
greater than that given in 4.6.1 of this Appendix.
4.5 Verification of permissible stresses.
Normal and tangential stresses and shall not exceed the permissible values a and , in
N/mm2, determined by the formulae:

= ,
= 0.5
where = minimal upper yield stress, in N/mm2, for the material.
4.6 Effective breadth of compressed corrugation face plate and corrugation testing for
shear resistance.
4.6.1 Effective breadth of compressed corrugation face plate.
The effective breadth bef, in m, of a compressed corrugation face plate shall be determined by the
formula:
bef = ,
where;
2.25
Ce =
1.25
2
, for > 1.25;
Ce = 1.0, for 1,25;

= net thickness, in mm, of corrugation face plate;
a = corrugation face plate breadth, in m (refer to Fig. 2.3 of this Appendix);
for ReH, refer to 4.5 of this Appendix;
E = elastic modulus of material, equal to 2,06 105 N/mm2 for steel.
4.6.2 Shear
Corrugation resistance shall be tested for walls in way of supporting sections.
Tangential stresses t shall not exceed critical stresses , in N/mm2, to be determined by the
formulae
c = E at E 2F ,
F = F (1 4F ) at
E
F
2
where:
R
F = eH ;
3
refer to 4.5 of this Appendix;
= 0,9 (1000)2, N/mm2;

= 6.34;
= elastic modulus of material in accordance 4.6.1of this Appendix;
t = net thickness of corrugation wall, in mm;
= corrugation wall breadth, in mm (refer to Fig. 2.3 of this Appendix).
4.7
Local net thickness of plates.
The local net thickness of bulkhead plates t, in mm, shall be determined by the formula
1.05
= 14.9
where = plate breadth, in m, to be adopted equal to the face plate or corrugation wall breadth,
whichever is greater (refer to Fig. 2.3 of this Appendix);
p = resultant pressure, in kN/m2, in accordance with 2.5 of this Appendix, in the lower part of
each bulkhead plating strake; the net thickness of the lowest strake in any case shall be
determined under the resultant pressure at the highest point of the lower support for the bulkhead
or in way of inner bottom where the lower support is not fitted, or at the highest point of shedder
places where the shedder or the gusset/shedder plates are fitted;
for ReH, refer to 4.5 of this Appendix.
In composite corrugated bulkheads, where the thickness of face plate and that of corrugation wall
are different, the net thickness of the narrower side shall not be less than tn, in mm, determined
by the formula
1.05
= 14.9
where sn = breadth of the narrower corrugation side, in m.

The net thickness of the wider corrugation side, in mm, shall not be less than the greater of the
following values:
1.05
= 14.9
2 1.05)
(440
2

,
where tnp shall be adopted not greater than the actual net thickness of the narrower corrugation
side or 14.9_ (1.05/_ ), whichever is the less.
5 LOCAL STRENGTHENING
Local strengthening shall be designed in accordance with the Register requirements, so that
forces and moments originating in the bulkheads could be transferred to adjacent structures,
among others, to double bottom and crossdeck structures. In particular, the thickness and the
types of shedder and gusset plates, determined according to 4.3 of this Appendix, shall comply
with the Register requirements, taking due regard of the loading model described in Section 2 of
this Appendix. Unless expressly provided otherwise, the type and dimensions of welds shall be
chosen according to 1.7, Part II "Hull".
6 CORROSION ALLOWANCE AND MATERIAL
REPLACEMENT
Corrosion allowance ts shall be equal to 3,5 mm.
If the measured thickness is below tnet + 0,5 mm, the bulkhead section shall be replaced. Where
the measured thickness is between tnet + 0,5 mm and tnet +1 mm, a protective coating may be
applied (the coating being applied in conformity with the manufacturer's recommendations), or
the residual thicknesses of the bulkhead section may be measured annually as alternative of
bulkhead section replacement..
Appendix to Circular Letter

No. 314-26-797 of 12.01.2015
Amendments
to the Rules for the Classification and Construction of Sea-Going Ships,
2014 ND No. 2-020101-077 and 2015 ND No. 2-020101-085
PART II. Hull
3.3
BULK CARRIERS AND OIL OR BULK DRY CARGO CARRIERS
Para. 3.3.4.1.1 shall be supplemented with the following text:

For ships of 150 m in length and more, intended to carry cargoes having bulk density of 1,0 t/m3
and more of:
single side skin construction; or
double side skin construction in which any part of longitudinal bulkhead is located within B/5 or
11,5 m, whichever is less, inboard from the ships side at right angle to the centreline at the
assigned summer load line;
contracted for construction on or after 1 July 2006,
the strength of double-bottom structural components shall be additionally verified in accordance
with a special procedure, described in Appendix 4, for the case of each of the holds being flooded..
1.
A new Appendix 4 to Part II Hull shall be introduced:

APPENDIX 4
ASSESSMENT OF PERMISSIBLE LOADING OF A CARGO HOLD IN VIEW

OF THE POSSIBILITY OF ITS BEING FLOODED FOR NULK CARRIERS
NOT COVERED BY COMMON STRUCTURAL RULES
1 APPLICATION AND DEFINITIONS
The loading of each hold determined in Section 4 of this Appendix shall not exceed the permissible
hold loading in flooded condition when loads given in Section 2 and the bearing capacity of double
bottom by shear given in Section 3 of this Appendix are used.
In no case the permissible hold loading in flooded condition shall exceed the design loading of an
intact hold.
2 LOADING MODEL
2.1 General.
The following loads are considered to be applied to the double bottom: external pressure from
the sea side and the combination of loads from cargo and water when the hold in which the double
bottom is fitted is flooded.
During calculations the most unfavourable combinations of loading and hold flooding
depending on the following loading conditions contained in the Loading Manual shall be used:
uniform loading;
non-uniform loading;
pallet cargo loading (rolled iron, for instance).
The permissible loading for a hold shall be determined for each type of loading condition in
case of maximum density of bulk cargo carried.
2.2 Water head acting upon the inner bottom.
Water head hf (refer to Fig. 2.2 of this Appendix) is the distance, in m, measured vertically,
with the ship in the upright position, from the inner bottom to a level re moved to the distance d f,
in m, from the base line and equal to:
in the general case:
D for the first hold;
0,9D for other holds;
for ships with type B freeboard which deadweight is below 50000 t:
0,95D for the first hold;
0,85D for other holds.
Fig. 2.2:
V = cargo volume;
D = distance, in m, from the base line to the freeboard deck measured along the side
3 BEARING CAPACITY OF DOUBLE BOTTOM BY SHEAR

3.1 The bearing capacity, C, of double bottom by shear shall be determined on its contour as the
sum of shearing forces in web girder cross sections:
.1 all floors attached to both bilge tanks;
less than half of the shearing forces in two floors adjacent to each lower support for a transverse
bulkhead or to a transverse bulkhead where no support is fitted (refer to Fig. 3.1 of this Appendix);
.2 all double-bottom stringers attached to both lower supports for transverse bulkheads or to trans
verse bulkheads where no supports are fitted. If stringers or floors terminate between holds and
are not directly attached to the lower support of a transverse bulkhead or a bilge tank wall, the
relevant shearing forces shall be assessed for a single cross section only. The floors and stringers
under consideration are those installed within the hold boundaries and formed by bilge tanks and
lower supports for transverse bulkheads (or by transverse bulkheads where no supports are fitted).
The bilge tank walls and floors fitted directly below the joints of lower sup ports for transverse
bulkheads (or of transverse bulkheads where no supports are fitted) to the inner bottom shall not
be considered during calculation. If the geometry and/or framing system of double bottom is not
in compliance with the above provisions, the bearing capacity C of double bottom shall be
determined according to the requirements of 3.3, Part II "Hull" or Strength Norms for Sea-Going
Ships on a special agreement with the Register. When determining the carrying capacity by shear,
net thicknesses of floors and stringers shall be used. The net thickness tnet, in mm, shall be
= 2.5
where t = thickness of floors and stringers, in mm.
Fig. 3.1:
1 lower support for transverse bulkhead;
2 transverse bulkhead;
3 floor adjacent to lower support for bulkhead;
4 floor adjacent to transverse bulkhead;
5 stringers;
6 floors
3.2 Shearing force in floors.
The shearing force 1, in kN, in the floor panel cross section adjacent to bilge tanks and the
shearing force 2, in kN, in the cross section of the ultimate panel of a lightened floor (i.e. the
lightened panel nearest to the bilge tank) shall be determined by the formulae:
1 = 103 ,
1
2 = 103 ,2 ,
2
where Af = cross-sectional area of a floor panel adjacent to bilge tanks , in mm2;

Af,h = net cross-sectional area of the ultimate panel of a lightened floor (i.e. the lightened panel
adjacent to the bilge tank), in mm2;
= permissible tangential stresses, in N/mm2, to be adopted equal to:
=
1620.6
(
0.8
)
or /3, whichever is less.
For floors attached to the lower supports for transverse bulkheads or to transverse bulkheads,
may be adopted as
= /3
where = minimal upper yield stress of material, in N/mm2;

s = spacing of stiffeners on the floor panel in question, in mm;
1 = 1,10;
2 = 1,20, whereas may be reduced to 1,10 at the Register discretion, provided the relevant
stiffeners comply with the requirements of Instructions for Determination of the Technical
Condition, Renovation and Repair of the Hulls of Sea-Going Ships (refer to Annex 2 of the Rules
for the Classification Surveys of Ships).
3.3 Shearing force in stringer.
The shearing force 1, in kN, in the cross section of the stringer panel adjacent to the lower
supports for transverse bulkheads (or to transverse bulkheads where no supports are fitted) and the
shearing force 2, in kN, in the cross section of the margin panel of the most lightened stringer
(i.e. the lightened panel nearest to the lower support for the transverse bulkhead or to the transverse
bulkhead where no support is fitted) shall be determined by the formulae:
1 = 103
2 = 103 , ,
2
where = cross-sectional area of stringer panel adjacent to the lower supports for bulkheads (or
to transverse bulkheads where no support is fitted), in mm2;
, = net cross-sectional area of margin panel of the most lightened stringer (i.e. the lightened
panel nearest to the lower support for the transverse bulkhead or to the transverse bulkhead where
no support is fitted), in mm2;
= permissible tangential stresses, in N/mm2, as specified in 3.2 of this Appendix;
1 = 1,10;
2 = 1,15, whereas 2 may be reduced to 1,10 1,10 at the Register discretion, provided the
relevant stiffeners are fitted to meet the requirements of the Instructions on Assessment of the Hull
Technical Condition (refer to Appendix 2 to the Rules for the Classification Surveys of Ships in
Service).
4 PERMISSIBLE LOADING OF HOLD
The permissible loading of hold W, in t, shall be determined by the formula
1
=
where F =1,1 for general loading conditions;
F = 1,05 for rolled iron;
= bulk cargo density, in t/m3 (refer to 2.1 of this Appendix). For steel products shall be
adopted equal to the steel density;
V =cargo volume, in m3, corresponding to the hold being filled to the level h1 by depth;
1 =
For bulk cargoes X shall be adopted as the lesser value of X1 or X2 determined by the formulae:
1 =
+(1 )
1+
(1)
2 = + ( ) ,
where X = X1 for steel products with perm = 0;

= seawater density, in t/m3;
E = 0.1 ship draught with a hold flooded, in m;
for df, D, refer to 2.2 of this Appendix;
hf = water head during flooding , in m (refer to 2.2 of this Appendix);
perm = cargo permeability (i.e. the relationship between the interstitial space and cargo volume),
whereas perm shall not be adopted greater than 0,3;
= 1 or 2 , whichever is the less, whereas:
1 =
2 =
,
,
= bearing capacity, in kN, of double bottom by shear in accordance with Section 3 of this
Appendix, while the shearing force 1 and 2 for each floor, whichever is the less, shall be
determined according to 3.2 of this Appendix, and the shearing force 1 or 2 for each
stringer, whichever is the less, shall be determined according to 3.3 of this Appendix;
= bearing capacity, in kN, of double bottom by shear in accordance with Section 3 of this
Appendix, while the shearing force 1 for each floor shall be determined according to 3.2 of
this Appendix, and the shearing force 1 and 1 for each stringer, whichever is the less, shall
be determined according to 3.3 of this Appendix;
, = =
=1 , ,
, = =
=1 ( 1 ) ,
n = number of floors between lower supports for transverse bulkheads (or between transverse
bulkheads where no supports are fitted);
= spacing of i-the floor, in m;
, = 1 for floors for which shearing forces are determined by 1 determined
according to 3.2 of this Appendix;
, = , for floors for which the shearing forces are determined by 2 determined
according to 3.2 of this Appendix;
= double bottom breadth between bilge tanks, in m (refer to Fig. 4 of this Appendix);
, = distance between two openings under consideration, in m (refer to Fig. 4 of this
Appendix);
1 = distance between bilge tank wall and the nearest main framing longitudinal of inner
bottom, in m.
Fig. 4
Appendix to the Circular Letter

No.312-11-812c of 15.04.2015
Amendments
to the Rules for the Classification and Construction of Sea-Going Ships (2015)
2.2 CLASS NOTATION OF A SHIP
2.2.3 The Register ice category marks and IACS polar class notations.
Here and elsewhere throughout the RS Rules, where the term ice category is applied, this term shall
be replaced by the term ice class(es).
Accordingly, the name of the paragraph shall be amended to read:
2.2.3 The Register ice class, IACS polar class and the Baltic ice class notations.
2.2.3.1 Shall be amended to read:
"2.2.3.1 Ice class notations are assigned to icebreakers and ice class ships in compliance with
the requirements of paras. 2.2.3.2 to 2.2.3.6.
The IACS polar class notations are assigned to polar class ships in accordance with the requirements
of Section 1, Part XVII "Distinguishing Marks and Descriptive Notations in the Class Notation
Specifying Structural and Operational Particulars of Ships".
The Baltic ice class notations are assigned to ice class ships in compliance with the requirements of
Section 10, Part XVII "Distinguishing Marks and Descriptive Notations in the Class Notation Specifying
Structural and Operational Particulars of Ships".
The IACS polar class notations are assigned at the shipowner's discretion. At the same time, for the
Register-classed ships intended for operation in Russian arctic seas as well as for ice breakers the
Register Ice category marks are assigned in compliance with paras. 2.2.3.2 and 2.2.3.3.3.
At the shipowner's discretion the IACS polar class notations and the Baltic ice class notations may be
applied simultaneously (double or triple ice class), provided such ships comply with the requirements
for both the IACS polar class ships and the Register ice strengthened ships.
PART II. HULL
3.10 STRENGTHENING OF ICE SHIPS AND ICEBREAKERS
3.10.1.1.1 Shall be supplemented with the text reading as follows:
"The requirements to the Baltic ice class ships (refer to 2.2.3.1 of Part I Classification) are given in
Section 10, Part XVII "Distinguishing Marks and Descriptive Notations in the Class Notation Specifying
Structural and Operational Particulars of Ships".
PART VII. MACHINERY INSTALLATIONS

1.1 APPLICATION
1.1.1 Shall be supplemented with the text reading as follows:
The requirements to machinery installations of the Baltic ice class ships (refer to 2.2.3.1, Part I
Classification) are given in Section 10, Part XVII "Distinguishing Marks and Descriptive Notations in
the Class Notation Specifying Structural and Operational Particulars of Ships".
PART XVII. DISTINGUISHING MARKS AND DESCRIPTIVE NOTATIONS IN THE CLASS
NOTATION SPECIFYING STRUCTURAL AND OPERATIONAL PARTICULARS OF SHIPS
Shall be supplemented with Section 10 reading as follows:
10 REQUIREMENTS TO SHIPS OF BALTIC ICE CLASSES
10.1 GENERAL
10.1.1 The requirements to ships of Baltic ice classes coincide with the requirements of the FinnishSwedish Ice Class Rules, 2010 and apply to ships being in service in the Baltic Sea water area in
winter.
10.2 BALTIC ICE CLASSES
The ships complying with the requirements of this Section may be assigned to Baltic ice class as
follows:
.1 ice class IA Super; ships with such structure, engine output and other properties that they are
normally capable of navigating in difficult ice conditions without the assistance of icebreakers;
.2 ice class IA; ships with such structure, engine output and other properties that they are capable of
navigating in difficult ice conditions, with the assistance of icebreakers when necessary;
.3 ice class IB; ships with such structure, engine output and other properties that they are capable of
navigating in moderate ice conditions, with the assistance of icebreakers when necessary;
.4 ice class IC; ships with such structure, engine output and other properties that they are capable of
navigating in light ice conditions, with the assistance of icebreakers when necessary;
.5 ice class II; ships that have a steel hull and that are structurally fit for navigation in the open sea
and that, despite not being strengthened for navigation in ice, are capable of navigating in very light
ice conditions with their own propulsion machinery;
.6 ice class III; ships that do not belong to the ice classes referred to in paragraphs .1 - .5.
10.3 ICE CLASS DRAUGHT
10.3.1 Upper and lower ice waterlines.
The upper ice waterline (UIWL) shall be the envelope of the highest points of the waterlines at which
the ship is intended to operate in ice. The line may be a broken line.
The lower ice waterline (LIWL) shall be the envelope of the lowest points of the waterlines at which
the ship is intended to operate in ice. The line may be a broken line.
10.3.2 Maximum and minimum draught fore and aft.

The maximum and minimum ice class draughts at fore and aft perpendiculars shall be determined in
accordance with the upper and lower ice waterlines.
Restrictions on draughts when operating in ice shall be documented and kept on board readily
available to the master. The maximum and minimum ice class draughts fore, amidships and aft shall
be indicated in the Annex to Classification Certificate (Form 3.1.2-1). If the summer load line in fresh
water is anywhere located at a higher level than the UIWL, the ships sides shall be provided with a
warning triangle and with an ice class draught mark at the maximum permissible ice class draught
amidships (see Annex 1)., the availability of which shall be also specified in the Annex to Classification
Certificate (Form 3.1.2-1).
The draught and trim, limited by the UIWL, must not be exceeded when the ship is navigating in ice.
The salinity of the sea water along the intended route shall be taken into account when loading the
ship.
The ship shall always be loaded down at least to the LIWL when navigating in ice. Any ballast tank,
situated above the LIWL and needed to load down the ship to this water line, shall be equipped with
devices to prevent the water from freezing. In determining the LIWL, regard shall be paid to the need
for ensuring a reasonable degree of ice-going capability in ballast. The propeller shall be fully
submerged, if possible entirely below the ice. The forward draught shall be at least:
(2 + 0,00025 ) ho [m] but need not exceed 4ho,
where
is displacement of the ship [t] on the maximum ice-class draught according to 10.3.1.
ho is level ice thickness [m] according to 10.5.2.1.
10.4 ENGINE OUTPUT
10.4.1 Definitions and explanations.
The engine output P is the maximum output the propulsion machinery can continuously deliver to the
propeller(s).
The definitions regarding the ship and some other parameters are given below:
L
length of the ship between the perpendiculars
LBOW
length of the bow
LPAR
length of the parallel midship body
maximum breadth of the ship
actual ice class draughts of the ship according to 3.2.2
A wf
m2
area of the waterline of the bow
degree
the angle of the waterline at B/4
1
degree
1 = 90.
the rake of the stem at the centerline. If the ship has a bulbous bow, then
the rake of the bow at B/4
degree
degree
flare angle calculated as = arctan (tan/sin) using angles and at each

location. For 10.4.3 flare angle is calculated using = 2
DP
diameter of the propeller
HM
thickness of the brash ice in mid channel
HF
thickness of the brash ice layer displaced by the bow
Fig. 10.4.1 Determination of the geometric quantities of the hull

10.4.2 The output of the main machinery shall not be less than the output calculated in accordance
with 10.4.3.
Regardless the output calculated according to Formula (10.4.3-1), the output of the main machinery
shall not be less than 1000 kW for ice class IA, IB and IC and less than 2800 kW for ice class
IA Super.
10.4.3 The output shall be calculated for the UIWL and LIWL. The output of the main machinery shall
be assumed equal to the maximum of the obtained values. In the calculations the ship's parameters
stated in 10.4.1 which depend on the draught shall be determined at the appropriate draught, but L
and B shall be determined only at the UIWL.
(10.4.3-1)
where Ke shall be taken as per the Table 10.4.3;
RCH is the ice resistance in Newton of the ship in a channel with brash ice and a consolidated
surface layer.
Table 10.4.3
Number of propellers
1 propeller
2 propellers
3 propellers
CP propeller or electric or
hydraulic propulsion machinery
2.03
1.44
1.18
FP
propeller
2.26
1.60
1.31
(10.4.3-2)
where
= 0,15cos2 + sinsin, but not larger than 0.45;
= 0,047- 2,115, and = 0, if < 45

H F = 0,26 + ( H M B ) 0,5
HM= 1,0 m for ice classes IA and IA Super;
HM= 0,8 m for ice class IB;
HM= 0,6 m for ice class IC;
1= 0 m for ice classes IA, IB IC;
for ice class IA Super;

f1 = 23 N/m2;
f2 = 45,8 N/m;
f3= 14,7 N/m;
f4= 29 N/m2;
2= 0 for ice classes IA, IB IC;
for ice class IA Super;

g1= 1530 N;
g2= 170 N/m;
g3= 400 N/m1,5;
The value
more than 20.
in Formula (10.4.3-2) shall not be taken as less than 5 and shall not be taken as
10.4.4 Formula (10.4.3.-2) may be used when the requirements given in Table 10.4.4 are complied
with.
Failing to comply with the specified conditions, as well as when the results of model tests are available
or based on more exact calculations or values based on sea trials tests, the use of Ke or RCH values
may be determined for the minimum speed of 5 knots in the following brash ice channels:
HM
HM
HM
HM
= 0,6 m for ice class IC

= 0,8 m for ice class IB
= 1,0 m for ice class IA
= 1,0 m and a 0,1 m thick consolidated layer of ice for ice class IA Super;
Table 10.4.4
Conditions of the formula application (10.4.3-2)
The minimum value
The maximum value
15
55
25
90
10
90
65,0
250,0
11,0
40,0
4,0
15,0
0,15
0,40
Parameter
, degree
1, degree
2, degree
L, m
B, m
T, m
LBOW/L
LPAR/L
0,25
0,75
DP/T*
0,45
0,75
Awf/(LB)
0,09
0,27
*
- For calculating the parameter the value amidships at the maximum draught shall be
taken.
10.5 HULL STRUCTURAL DESIGN

10.5.1 General.
The method for determining the hull scantlings is based on certain assumptions concerning the nature
of the ice load on the structure. These assumptions are from full scale observations made in the
northern Baltic.
It has thus been observed that the local ice pressure on small areas can reach rather high values.
This pressure may be well in excess of the normal uniaxial crushing strength of sea ice. The
explanation is that the stress field in fact is multiaxial (multicomponent).
Further, it has been observed that the ice pressure on a frame can be higher than on the shell plating
at midspacing between frames. The explanation for this is the different flexural stiffness of frames and
shell plating. The load distribution is assumed to be as shown in Figure 10.5.1-1.
Fig. 10.5.1-1 Ice load distribution on a ships side

The formulae and values given in these requirements may be substituted by direct analysis if they are
deemed by the Register to be invalid or inapplicable for a given structural arrangement or detail.
Otherwise, direct analysis shall not be utilized as an alternative to the analytical procedures prescribed
by explicit requirements in 10.5.3 10.5.5.
Direct analyses shall be carried out using the load patch defined in 10.5.2 (p, h and la). The pressure
to be used is 1.8p where p is determined according to 10.5.2.2. The load patch shall be applied at
locations where the capacity of the structure under the combined effects of bending and shear are
minimized. In particular, the structure shall be checked with load centred at the UIWL, 0.5h0 below
the LIWL, and positioned several vertical locations in between. Several horizontal locations shall also
be checked, especially the locations centred at the mid-span or spacing. Further, if the load length
la cannot be determined directly from the arrangement of the structure, several values of la shall be
checked using corresponding values for ca.
The acceptance criterion for designs is that the combined stresses from bending and shear, using the
von Mises yield criterion, are lower than the yield point y. When the direct calculation is using beam
theory, the allowable shear stress is not to be larger than 0,9y, where y = y/3.
If scantlings derived from these regulations are less than those required by the Register for not ice
strengthened ship, the latter shall be used.
NOTE 1. The frame spacings and spans defined in the following text are normally (in accordance with
the appropriate RS rules) assumed to be measured along the plate and perpendicular to the axis of
the stiffener for plates, along the flange for members with a flange, and along the free edge for flat
bar stiffeners. For curved members the span (or spacing) is defined as the chord length between span
(or spacing) points. The span points are defined by the intersection between the flange or upper edge
of the member and the supporting structural element (stringer, web frame, deck or bulkhead). Figure
10.5.1-2 illustrates the determination of span and spacing for curved members.
Fig. 10.5.1-2 Definition of the frame span (left) and frame spacing (right) for curved members
NOTE 2. The effective breadth of the attached plate to be used for calculating the combined section
modulus of the stiffener, stringer and web frame and attached plate shall be taken in compliance with
the applicable requirements of the RS normative documents. The effective breadth shall in no case
be more than what is stated in the appropriate requirements of the RS normative documents.
NOTE 3. The requirements for the section modulus and shear area of the frames, stringers and web
frames in 10.5.4, 10.5.5 and 10.5.6 are with respect to the effective member cross section. For such
cases where the member is not normal to the plating, the section properties shall be calculated in
accordance with the appropriate requirements of the RS normative documents.
10.5.1.1
Hull regions.
The ship's hull is divided into regions as follows (refer also to Fig. 10.5.1.1):
Bow region: From the stem to a line parallel to and 0,04L aft of the forward borderline of the part of
the hull where the waterlines run parallel to the centerline. For ice classes IA Super and IA the overlap
over the borderline need not exceed 6 meters, for ice classes IB and IC this overlap need not exceed
5 meters.
Midbody region: From the aft boundary of the Bow region to a line parallel to and 0.04L aft of the
aft borderline of the part of the hull where the waterlines run parallel to the centerline. For ice classes
IA Super and IA the overlap over the borderline need not exceed 6 meters, for ice classes IB and IC
this overlap need not exceed 5 meters.
Stern region: From the aft boundary of the midbody region to the stern.
L shall be taken as the ship's rule length in compliance with the requirements of the RS normative
documents.
(1) Ice belt, stern body

(2) Midbody region
(3) Bow region
(4) Border of the part of the side where waterlines are parallel to the centrelines
(5) UIWL
(6) LIWL
(7) Upper bow ice belt
(8) Fore foot
(9) 5 frame spacings
(10) - 0, 2 L
(11) refer to 10.5.1
(12) refer to 10.5.3.1
(13) refer to 10.5.1
Fig. 10.5.1.1 Ice strengthened regions of the hull
10.5.2 Ice load.
10.5.2.1
Height of the ice load area.
An ice-strengthened ship is assumed to operate in open sea conditions corresponding to a level ice
thickness not exceeding ho. The design ice load height (h) of the area actually under ice pressure at
any particular point of time is, however, assumed to be only a fraction of the ice thickness. The values
for ho and h are given in the following table.
Ice class
h0 [m]
h [m]
IA Super
1,0
0,35
IA
0,8
0,30
IB
0,6
0,25
IC
0,4
0,22
10.5.2.2 Ice pressure.

The design ice pressure is determined by the formula
, [MPa],
(10.5.2.2)
where
cd is a factor which takes account of the influence of the size and engine output of the ship. This
factor is taken as maximum cd = 1,0 and is calculated by the formula
,
where
,
the values of a and b are given in the following table:
Hull region
Bow
Midbody and stern
k 12
k 12
k 12
k 12
30
230
518
214
286
is the displacement of the ship at maximum ice class draught [t] (see 10.3.1);
P is the actual continuous engine output of the ship [kW] (see 10.4.2);
cp is a factor which takes account of the probability that the design ice pressure occurs
in a certain region of the hull for the ice class in question.
The value of cp is given in the following table:
Ice class
Region
Bow
Midbody
Stern
IA Super
1,0
1,0
0,75
IA
1,0
0,85
0,65
IB
1,0
0,70
0,45
IC
1,0
0,50
0,25
ca is a factor which takes account of the probability that the full length of the area under
consideration will be under pressure at the same time. It is calculated by the formula
, 0,35 c a 1,0
where
l0 = 0,6 m,
where la shall be taken as follows:

Structure
Time of framing
Shell
Transverse
Longitudinal
Transverse
Longitudinal
Frames
Ice stringer
Web frame
l a [m]
Frame spacing
1,7 frame spacing
Frame spacing
Span of frame
Span of stringer
2 web frame spacing
p 0 is the nominal ice pressure; the value 5,6 MPa shall be used.
10.5.3 Shell plating.
10.5.3.1 Vertical extension of ice strengthening for plating (ice belt).
The vertical extension of the ice belt shall be as follows (refer to Fig. 10.5.1.1):
Ice
class
Hull
region
Above UIWL
Below LIWL
Bow
IA
Super
IA
1.20 m
Midbody
0.60 m
Stern
1.0 m
Bow
0.90 m
Midbody
0.50 m
0.75 m
Stern
IB
and
IC
Bow
Midbody
0.70 m
0.40 m
0.60 m
Stern
In addition, the following areas shall be strengthened:

Fore foot: For ice class IA Super, the shell plating below the ice belt from the stem to a position five
main frame spaces abaft the point where the bow profile departs from the keel line shall have at least
the thickness required in the ice belt in the midbody region.
Upper bow ice belt: For ice classes IA Super and IA on ships with an open water service speed
equal to or exceeding 18 knots, the shell plating shall have at least the thickness required in the ice
belt in the midbody region.
heightwise - from the upper limit of the ice belt to 2 m above the ice belt;
lengthwise - from the stem to a position at least 0,2 L abaft the forward perpendicular.
A similar strengthening of the bow region is advisable also for a ship with a lower service speed, when
it is, e.g. on the basis of the model tests, evident that the ship will have a high bow wave.
Sidescuttles shall not be situated in the ice belt. If the weather deck in any part of the ship is situated
below the upper limit of the ice belt (e.g. in way of the well of a raised quarter decker), the bulwark
shall be given at least the same strength as is required for the shell in the ice belt. The strength of the
construction of the freeing ports shall meet the same requirements.
10.5.3.2 Plate thickness in the ice belt.
For transverse framing the thickness of the shell plating shall be determined by the formula
, [mm].
(10.5.3.2-1)
For longitudinal framing the thickness of the shell plating shall be determined by the formula
, [mm],
(10.5.3.2-2)
where
s is the frame spacing [m]
pPL = 0.75 p [MPa];
where p is as given in 10.5.2.2
f1 1.3
4.2
( h / s 1.8) 2
f 2 0.6
0.4
(h / s)
; maximum 1.0
; when h/s 1
f2 = 1.4 - 0.4 (h/s); when 1 h/s 1.8

where h is as given in 10.5.2.1
y is yield stress of the material [N/mm2], for which the following values shall be used:
y = 235 N/mm2 for normal-strength hull structural steel;
y = 315 N/mm2 or higher for high-strength hull structural steel
If steels with different yield stress are used, the actual values may be substituted for the above ones
if accepted by the Register.
tc is increment for abrasion and corrosion [mm]; normally tc shall be 2 mm; if a special surface coating,
by experience shown capable to withstand the abrasion of ice, is applied and maintained, lower values
may be approved upon the agreement with the Register.
10.5.4 Frames.
10.5.4.1 Vertical extension of ice strengthening for framing.
The vertical extension of the ice strengthening of the framing shall be at least as follows:
Ice class
Hull region
Above UIWL
Below LIWL
Down to double bottom or below top
of the floors
Bow
IA Super
1.2 m
Midbody
IA, IB and IC
2.0 m
Stern
1.6 m
Bow
1.6 m
Midbody
1.0 m
Stern
1.3 m
1.0 m
Where an upper bow ice belt is required (refer to 10.5.3.1), the ice-strengthened part of the framing
shall be extended at least to the top of this ice belt.
Where the ice-strengthening would go beyond a deck or a tanktop (or tank bottom) by no more than
250 mm, it can be terminated at that deck or tanktop (or tank bottom).
10.5.4.2 Transverse frames.
10.5.4.2.1 Section modulus and shear area.
The section modulus of a main or intermediate transverse frame shall be calculated by the formula
[cm3].
(10.5.4.2.1-1)
and the effective shear area is calculated from
[cm2],
(10.5.4.2.1-2)
where
p is ice pressure as given in 10.5.2.2 [MPa]
s is frame spacing [m]
h is height of load area as given in 10.5.2.1 [m]
l is span of the frame [m]
mt =
7m o
7 - 5h / l
f3 is a factor which takes into account the maximum shear force versus the load location and
the shear stress distribution, f3 = 1.2
y is yield stress as in 10.5.3.2 [MPa]
mo takes the boundary conditions into account. The values are given in the following table:
The boundary conditions are those for the main and intermediate frames. Load is applied at mid span.
Where less than 15% of the span, l, of the frame is situated within the ice-strengthening zone for
frames, ordinary frame scantlings may be used.
10.5.4.2.2
Upper end of transverse framing
The upper end of the strengthened part of a main frame and of an intermediate ice frame shall be
attached to a deck, tanktop (or tank bottom) or an ice stringer (refer to 10.5.5).
Where a frame terminates above a deck or a stringer which is situated at or above the upper limit of
the ice belt, the part above the deck or stringer may have the scantlings required by the Register for
an non ice-strengthened ship and the upper end of an intermediate frame may be connected to the
adjacent frames by a horizontal member having the same scantlings as the main frame.
10.5.4.2.3
Lower end of transverse framing.
The lower end of the strengthened part of a main frame and of an intermediate ice frame shall be
attached to a deck, tanktop (or tank bottom) or an ice stringer (refer to 10.5.5).
Where an intermediate frame terminates below a deck, tanktop (or tank bottom) or ice stringer which
is situated at or below the lower limit of the ice belt, the lower end may be connected to the adjacent
main frames by a horizontal member of the same scantlings as the main frames. Note that the main
frames below the lower edge of ice belt must be ice strengthened, see 10.5.4.1.
10.5.4.3 Longitudinal frames.

The following requirements are intended for longitudinal frames with all end conditions.
10.5.4.3.1 Frames with and without brackets.
The section modulus of a longitudinal frame shall be calculated by the formula
, [cm3],
(10.5.4.3.1-1)
and effective shear area of a longitudinal frame shall be:
, [cm2].
(10.5.4.3.1-2)
In calculating the actual shear area of the frames, the shear area of the brackets is not to be taken
into account.
In the formulae given above:
f4 is a factor which takes account of the load distribution to adjacent frames:
f4 = (1 0,2 h/s)
f5 is a factor which takes into account the maximum shear force versus load location and the
shear stress distribution:
f5 = 2,16
s is frame spacing [m]
l is total span of frame [m]
m is a boundary condition factor; m = 13,3 for a continuous beam; where the boundary
conditions deviate significantly from those of a continuous beam, e.g. in an end field, a smaller
boundary factor may be required. For frames without brackets a value m = 11.0 shall be used.
y is yield stress as in 10.5.3.2 [MPa].

10.5.4.4 General on framing.
10.5.4.4.1 The attachment of frames to supporting structures.
Within the ice-strengthened area all frames shall be effectively attached to all the supporting
structures. A longitudinal frame shall be attached to all the supporting web frames and bulkheads by
brackets. When a transversal frame terminates at a stringer or deck, a bracket or similar construction
shall be fitted. When a frame is running through the supporting structure, both sides of the web plate
of the frame shall be connected to the structure (by direct welding, collar plate or lug). When a bracket
is installed, it shall have at least the same thickness as the web plate of the frame and the edge shall
be appropriately stiffened against buckling.
10.5.4.4.2 Support of frames against tripping for ice class IA Super, for ice class IA in the bow
and midbody regions and for ice classes IB and IC in the bow region of the ice-strengthened
area.
The frames shall be attached to the shell by double continuous weld. No scalloping is allowed (except
when crossing shell plate butts).
The web thickness of the frames shall be at least the maximum of the following:
hw y
C
, hw is the web height and C = 805 for profiles and C = 282 for flat bars;
2.5 % of the frame spacing for transverse frames;
half of the net thickness of the shell plating, t tc. For the purpose of calculating the web
thickness of frames, the required thickness of the shell plating shall be calculated
according to 10.5.3.2 using the yield strength y of the frames;
9 mm.
Where there is a deck, tanktop (or tank bottom) or bulkhead in lieu of a frame, the plate thickness of
this shall be as above, to a depth corresponding to the height of the adjacent frames.
Frames that are not normal to the plating or the profile is unsymmetrical, and the span exceeds
4.0 m, shall be supported against tripping by brackets, intercostals, stringers or similar at a distance
not exceeding 1,3 m. If the span is less than 4,0 m, the supports against tripping are required for
unsymmetrical profiles and stiffeners the web of which is not normal to plating in the following regions:
IA Super
IA
IB and IC
All hull regions

Bow and midbody regions
Bow region.
10.5.5 Ice stringers.

10.5.5.1 Stringers within the ice belt.
The section modulus of a stringer situated within the ice belt (refer to 10.5.3.1) shall be calculated by
the formula
, [cm3].
(10.5.5.1-1)
The effective shear area shall be:
, [cm2],
where
The product p h shall not be taken as less than 0.15.
l is span of the stringer [m]
m is a boundary condition factor as defined in 10.5.4.3
(10.5.5.1-2)
f6 is a factor which takes account of the distribution of load to the transverse frames; to be taken
as 0.9
f7 is the safety factor of stringers; to be taken as 1.8
f8 is a factor that takes into account the maximum shear force versus load location and the shear
stress distribution; f8 = 1.2
y is yield stress as in 10.5.3.2.

10.5.5.2 Stringers outside the ice belt.
The section modulus of a stringer situated outside the ice belt but supporting ice-strengthened frames
shall be calculated by the formula
[cm3].
(10.5.5.2-1)
, [cm2],
(10.5.5.2-2)
The effective shear area shall be:
where
The product p h shall not be taken as less than 0,15.
l is span of stringer [m]
m is boundary condition factor as defined in 10.5.4.3
ls is the distance to the adjacent ice stringer [m]
hs is the distance to the ice belt [m]
f9 is a factor which takes account of the distribution of load to the transverse frames; to be taken
as 0.80
f10 is the safety factor of stringers; to be taken as 1,8
f11 is a factor that takes into account the maximum shear force versus load location and the
shear stress distribution; f11 = 1,2
y is yield stress of material as in 10.5.3.2.
10.5.5.3
Deck strips.
Narrow deck strips abreast of hatches and serving as ice stringers shall comply with the section
modulus and shear area requirements in 10.5.5.1 and 10.5.5.2 respectively. In the case of very long
hatches the Register may permit the product p h to be taken as less than 0.15 but in no case as less
than 0.10.
Regard shall be paid to the deflection of the ship's sides due to ice pressure in way of very long (more
than B/2) hatch openings when designing weatherdeck hatch covers and their fittings.
10.5.6 Web frames.

10.5.6.1 Ice load.
The ice load transferred to a web frame from an ice stringer or from longitudinal framing shall be
calculated by the formula
, [],
(10.5.6.1)
where
p is ice pressure as given in 10.5.2.2 [MPa], in calculating ca however, la shall be taken as 2S.
The product p h shall not be taken as less than 0,15
S is distance between web frames [m]
f12 is the safety factor of web frames; to be taken as 1,8.
In case the supported stringer is outside the ice belt, the force F shall be multiplied by (1- hs/ls), where
hs and ls shall be taken as defined in 10.5.5.2.
10.5.6.2 Section modulus and shear area.
The section modulus and shear area of web frames shall be calculated by the formulae
The effective shear area:
, [cm2],
(10.5.6.2-1)
where
Q is maximum calculated shear force under the ice load F, as given in 10.5.6.1
f13 is a factor that takes into account the shear force distribution, f13 = 1.1
is as given in the table below;
y is yield stress of material as in 10.5.3.2.

Section modulus:
, [cm3],
(10.5.6.2-2)
where
M is maximum calculated bending moment under the ice load F; this shall be taken as
M = 0.193 F l .
is given in the table below
A is required shear area
Aa is actual cross sectional area of the web frame, Aa = Af + Aw
Factors and can be obtained from the table below

A f /Aw
0
1.5
0
0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 1.6 1.8 2.0
1.23 1.16 1.11 1.09 1.07 1.06 1.05 1.05 1.04 1.04
0.44 0.62 0.71 0.76 0.80 0.83 0.85 0.87 0.88 0.89
where
Af is the actual cross section area of free flange
Aw is the actual effective cross section area of web plate.
10.5.7 Stem.
The stem shall be made of rolled, cast or forged steel or of shaped steel plates as shown in
Fig. 10.5.7.
Fig. 10.5.7 Examples of suitable stems

The plate thickness of a shaped plate stem and in the case of a blunt bow, any part of the shell where
30o and 75o (refer to 3.2.1 for angle definitions), shall be calculated according to Formula in
10.53.2 assuming that:
s is spacing of elements supporting the plate [m]
pPL = p [MPa] (refer to 10.5.3.2)
la is spacing of vertical supporting elements [m]
The stem and the part of a blunt bow defined above shall be supported by floors or brackets spaced
not more than 0,6 m apart and having a thickness of at least half the plate thickness. The
reinforcement of the stem shall extend from the keel to a point 0,75 m above UIWL or, in case an
upper bow ice belt is required (10.5.3.1), to the upper limit of this.
10.5.8 Stern.
The introduction of new propulsion arrangements with azimuthing thrusters or podded propellers,
which provide an improved manoeuvrability, will result in increased ice loading of the stern region and
the stern area. This fact shall be considered in the design of the aft/stern structure.
In order to avoid very high loads on propeller blade tips, the minimum distance between propeller(s)
and hull (including stern frame) shall not be less than h0 (refer to 10.5.2.1).
On twin and triple screw ships the ice strengthening of the shell and framing shall be extended to the
double bottom for 1,5 metres forward and aft of the side propellers.
Shafting and stern tubes of side propellers shall normally be enclosed within plated bossings. If
detached struts are used, their design, strength and attachments to the hull shall be duly considered.
10.6 RUDDER AND STEERING ARRANGEMENTS

The scantlings of rudder post, rudder stock, pintles, steering engine etc. as well as the capability of
the steering engine shall be determined according to the applicable rules of the Register. The
maximum service speed of the ship to be used in these calculations shall, however, not be taken as
less than stated below:
IA Super
IA
IB
IC
20 knots
18 knots
16 knots
14 knots
If the actual maximum service speed of the ship is higher, that speed shall be used.
The local scantlings of rudders shall be determined assuming that the whole rudder belongs to the
ice belt. Further, the rudder plating and frames shall be designed using the ice pressure p for the
plating and frames in the midbody region.
For ice classes IA and IA Super, the rudder (rudder stock and the upper part of the rudder) shall be
protected from direct contact with intact ice by an ice knife that extends below the LIWL, if practicable
(or equivalent means). Special consideration shall be given to the design of the rudder and the ice
knife for ships with flap-type rudders.
For ice classes IA and IA Super, due regard shall be paid to the large loads that arise when the rudder
is forced out of the midship position while going astern in ice or into ice ridges. Suitable arrangement
such as rudder stoppers shall be installed to absorb these loads.
Relief valves for hydraulic pressure in rudder turning mechanism(s) shall be installed. The
components of the steering gear (e.g. rudder stock, rudder coupling, rudder horn etc.) shall be
dimensioned to withstand loads causing yield stresses in the rudder stock.
10.7 PROPULSION MACHINERY

10.7.1 Scope.
These regulations apply to propulsion machinery covering open- and ducted-type propellers with
controllable pitch or fixed pitch design for the ice classes IA Super, IA, IB and IC.
The given loads are the expected ice loads for the whole ships service life under normal operational
conditions, including loads resulting from the changing rotational direction of FP propellers. However,
these loads do not cover off-design operational conditions, for example when a stopped propeller is
dragged through ice.
The regulations also apply to azimuthing and fixed thrusters for main propulsion, considering loads
resulting from propeller/ice interaction. However, the load models of the regulations do not include
propeller/ice interaction loads when ice enters the propeller of a turned azimuthing thruster from the
side (radially) or load cases when ice block hits on the propeller hub of a pulling propeller. Ice loads
resulting from ice impacts on the body of thrusters shall be estimated, but ice load formulae are not
available.
10.7.2 Definitions.
CP
controllable pitch
EAR
expanded blade area ratio
FP
fixed pitch
MCR
maximum continuous rating
LIWL
lower ice waterline
propeller diameter
propeller radius
chord length of blade section
c0.7
chord length of blade section at 0.7R propeller radius
external diameter of propeller hub (at propeller plane)
D limit
limit value for propeller diameter
Fb
kN
maximum backward blade force for the ships service life
Fex
kN
ultimate blade load resulting from blade loss through plastic bending
Ff
kN
maximum forward blade force for the ships service life
Fice
kN
(Fice)max kN
ice load
maximum ice load for the ships service life
h0
depth of the propeller centreline from lower ice waterline
Hice
I
thickness of maximum design ice block entering to propeller
kgm2
equivalent mass moment of inertia of all parts on engine side of

component under consideration
It
kgm2
equivalent mass moment of inertia of the whole propulsion system
shape parameter for Weibull distribution
slope for SN curve in log/log scale
M BL
n
kNm
blade bending moment
rev./s
propeller rotational speed
nn
rev./s
nominal propeller rotational speed at MCR in free running condition
N class
reference number of impacts per propeller rotational speed per ice class
N ice
total number of ice loads on propeller blade for the ships service life
NR
reference number of load for equivalent fatigue stress (108 cycles)
NQ
number of propeller revolutions during a milling sequence
P0 .7
propeller pitch at 0.7R radius
P0.7n
propeller pitch at 0.7R radius at MCR in free running condition
P0.7b
propeller pitch at 0.7R radius at MCR in bollard condition
kNm
torque
Q emax
kNm
maximum engine torque
Q max
kNm
maximum torque on the propeller resulting from propeller/ice interaction
Q motor
kNm
electric motor peak torque
Qn
kNm
nominal torque at MCR in free running condition
Qr
kNm
maximum response torque along the propeller shaft line
Q smax
kNm
maximum spindle torque of the blade for the ships service life
blade section radius
kN
propeller thrust
Tb
kN
maximum backward propeller ice thrust for the ships service life
Tf
kN
maximum forward propeller ice thrust for the ships service life
Tn
kN
propeller thrust at MCR in free running condition
Tr
t
kN
maximum response thrust along the shaft line
maximum blade section thickness

number of propeller blades
Z
i
[deg]
duration of propeller blade/ice interaction expressed in rotation angle
the reduction factor for fatigue; scatter and test specimen size effect
the reduction factor for fatigue; variable amplitude loading effect
the reduction factor for fatigue; mean stress effect

a reduction factor for fatigue correlating the maximum stress amplitude to
the equivalent fatigue stress for 108 stress cycles
0 .2
MPa
proof yield strength (at 0.2% offset) of blade material
exp
MPa
mean fatigue strength of blade material at 108 cycles to failure in sea

water
fat
MPa
equivalent fatigue ice load stress amplitude for 108 stress cycles
MPa
characteristic fatigue strength for blade material
ref
MPa
reference stress ref 0 .6 0.2 0 .4 u
ref 2
MPa
reference stress
fl
ref 2 0 .7 u or
ref 2 0 .6 0.2 0 .4 u whichever is less
st
MPa
maximum stress resulting from Fb or F f
MPa
ultimate tensile strength of blade material
MPa
principal stress caused by the maximum backward propeller ice load
MPa
principal stress caused by the maximum forward propeller ice load
MPa
maximum ice load stress amplitude
ice bmax
ice fmax
ice max
Table 10.7.2
Definition of loads
Fb
Definition
Use of the load in design process
The maximum lifetime backward force on a Design force for strength calculation
propeller blade resulting from propeller/ice of the propeller blade.
interaction, including hydrodynamic loads on
that blade. The direction of the force is
perpendicular to 0.7R chord line. See Figure
6-1.
Ff
Qsmax
The maximum lifetime forward force on a

propeller blade resulting from propeller/ice
that blade. The direction of the force is
perpendicular to 0.7R chord line.
The maximum lifetime spindle torque on a
propeller blade resulting from propeller/ice
that blade.
Design force for calculation

strength of the propeller blade.
of
In designing the propeller strength,

the spindle torque is automatically
taken into account because the
propeller load is acting on the blade
as distributed pressure on the leading
edge or tip area.
Is used for estimation of the response
thrust Tr. Tb can be used as an
estimate of excitation for axial
vibration calculations. However, axial
vibration calculations are not required
in the rules.
thrust Tr. Tf can be used as an
estimate of excitation for axial
vibration calculations. However, axial
vibration calculations are not required
in the rules.
torque (Qr) along the propulsion shaft
line and as excitation for torsional
vibration calculations.
Blade failure load is used to
dimension the blade bolts, pitch
control mechanism, propeller shaft,
propeller shaft bearing and trust
bearing.
The
objective
shall
guarantee that total propeller blade
failure shall not cause damage to
other components.
Design torque for propeller shaft line
components.
Tb
The maximum lifetime thrust on propeller (all

blades) resulting from propeller/ice interaction.
The direction of the thrust is the propeller shaft
direction and the force is opposite to the
hydrodynamic thrust.
Tf
The maximum lifetime thrust on propeller (all

blades) resulting from propeller/ice interaction.
The direction of the thrust is the propeller shaft
direction acting in the direction of
hydrodynamic thrust.
Qmax
The maximum ice-induced torque resulting

from propeller/ice interaction on one propeller
blade, including hydrodynamic loads on that
blade.
Ultimate blade load resulting from blade loss
through plastic bending. The force that is
needed to cause total failure of the blade so
that plastic hinge is caused to the root area.
The force is acting on 0.8R. Spindle arm shall
be taken as 2/3 of the distance between the
axis of blade rotation and leading/trailing edge
(whichever is the greater) at the 0.8R radius.
Maximum response torque along the propeller
shaft line, taking into account the dynamic
behavior of the shaft line for ice excitation
(torsional vibration) and hydrodynamic mean
torque on propeller.
Maximum response thrust along shaft line, Design thrust for propeller shaft line
taking into account the dynamic behavior of components.
the shaft line for ice excitation (axial vibration)
and hydrodynamic mean thrust on propeller.
Fex
Qr
Tr
Shaft
direction
Back side
Fb
Direction of
rotation
Fig. 10.7.2 Fb direction. Ice contact pressure at leading edge is shown with small arrows
10.7.3 Design ice conditions.
In estimating the ice loads of the propeller for ice classes, different types of operation as given in
Table 10.7.3-1 were taken into account. For the estimation of design ice loads, a maximum ice block
size is determined. The maximum design ice block entering the propeller is a rectangular ice block
with the dimensions H ice 2 H ice 3 H ice . The thickness of the ice block (Hice) is given in
Table
10.7.3-2.
Table 10.7.3-1
Ice class
IA Super
Operating characteristics
Operation of the ship
Operation in ice channels and in level ice
The ship may proceed by ramming
IA, IB, IC
Operation in ice channels

Table 10.7.3-2
Ice class
IA Super
IA
IB
IC
Hice
1,75 m
1,5 m
1,2 m
1,0 m
Shaft
direction
Back side
Fb
Direction of
rotation
Fig. 10.7.2 Fb direction. Ice contact pressure at leading edge is shown with small arrows
10.7.3 Design ice conditions.
In estimating the ice loads of the propeller for ice classes, different types of operation as given in
Table 10.7.3-1 were taken into account. For the estimation of design ice loads, a maximum ice block
size is determined. The maximum design ice block entering the propeller is a rectangular ice block
with the dimensions H ice 2 H ice 3 H ice . The thickness of the ice block (Hice) is given in
Table
10.7.3-2.
Ice class
IA Super
Table 10.7.3-1
Operating characteristics
Operation of the ship
Operation in ice channels and in level ice
The ship may proceed by ramming
IA, IB, IC
Operation in ice channels

Table 10.7.3-2
Ice class
IA Super
IA
IB
IC
Hice
1,75 m
1,5 m
1,2 m
1,0 m
10.7.4 Materials.
10.7.4.1 Materials exposed to sea water.
Materials of components exposed to sea water, such as propeller blades, propeller hubs, and thruster
body, shall have an elongation of not less than 15% on a test specimen, the gauge length of which is
five times the diameter.
A Charpy V impact test shall be carried out for materials other than bronze and austenitic steel. An
average impact energy value of 20 J taken from three tests shall be obtained at minus 10 C.
10.7.4.2 Materials exposed to sea water temperature.
Materials exposed to sea water temperature shall be of steel or other ductile material. An average
impact energy value of 20 J taken from three tests shall be obtained at minus 10 C.
This requirement applies to blade bolts, CP mechanisms, shaft bolts, strut-pod connecting bolts etc.
This does not apply to surface hardened components, such as bearings and gear teeth.
10.7.5 Design loads.
The given loads are intended for component strength calculations only and are total loads including
ice-induced loads and hydrodynamic loads during propeller/ice interaction.
The values of the parameters in the formulae shall comply with the units shown in 10.7.2.
If the propeller is not fully submerged when the ship is in ballast condition, the propulsion system shall
be designed according to ice class IA for ice classes IB and IC.
10.7.5.1 Design loads on propeller blades.
Fb is the maximum force experienced during the lifetime of the ship that bends a propeller blade
backwards when the propeller mills an ice block while rotating ahead.
Ff is the maximum force experienced during the lifetime of the ship that bends a propeller blade
forwards when the propeller mills an ice block while rotating ahead.
Fb and Ff originate from different propeller/ice interaction phenomena, not acting simultaneously.
Hence they shall be applied to one blade separately.
10.7.5.1.1 Maximum backward blade force Fb for open propellers.
(10.7.5.1.1-1)
(10.7.5.1.1-2)
where
Dlimit 0.85 H ice [m]

1 .4
n =nn for a CP propeller;

n =0,85 nn for an FP propeller.
10.7.5.1.2 Maximum forward blade force Ff for open propellers.
(10.7.5.1.2-1)
(10.7.5.1.2-2)
where
10.7.5.1.3 Loaded area on the blade for open propellers.

Load cases 1-4 shall be covered, as given in Table 10.7.5.1.3 below, for CP and FP propellers.
In order to obtain blade ice loads for a reversing propeller, load case 5 also shall be covered for
FP propellers.
Table 10.7.5.1.3
Load cases for open propellers
Load case
Force
Loaded area
Load case 1
Fb
Uniform pressure applied on the

back of the blade (suction side) to
an area from 0.6R to the tip and
from the leading edge to 0.2 times
the chord length.
Load case 2
50% of Fb

back of the blade (suction side) on
the propeller tip area outside 0.9R
radius.
Right-handed
propeller
blade seen from behind
Load case 3
Ff

blade face (pressure side) to an
area from 0.6R to the tip and from
the leading edge to 0.2 times the
chord length.
Load case 4
50% of Ff
Uniform pressure applied on

propeller face (pressure side) on
the propeller tip area outside 0.9R
radius.
Load case 5
60% of Ff or
Fb, whichever
is greater
Uniform pressure applied on

propeller face (pressure side) to
from the trailing edge to 0.2 times
the chord length
10.7.5.1.4 Maximum backward blade ice force Fb for ducted propellers.
(10.7.5.1.4-1)
(10.7.5.1.4-2)
where
n =nn for a CP propeller;

n =0.85 nn for an FP propeller.
10.7.5.1.5 Maximum forward blade ice force Ff for ducted propellers.
(10.7.5.1.5-1)
1
EAR
F f 500
D
H ice [kN], when D Dlimit
Z
1
D
(10.7.5.1.5-2)
where
D limit
2
d
1
D
H ice [m].
10.7.5.1.6 Loaded area on the blade for ducted propellers.

Load cases 1 and 3 shall be covered as given in Table 10.7.5.1.6 for all propellers.
Additional load case (load case 5) shall be considered for an FP propeller, to cover ice loads when
the propeller is reversed.
Table 10.7.5.1.6
Load cases for ducted propellers
Load case
Force
Loaded area
Load case 1
Fb

back of the blade (suction side) to
from the leading edge to 0.2 times
the chord length.
Load case 3
Ff

blade face (pressure side) to an
area from 0.6R to the tip and from
the leading edge to 0.5 times the
chord length.
Load case 5
60% of Ff or Uniform pressure applied on

Fb, whichever propeller face (pressure side) to
is greater
from the trailing edge to 0.2 times
the chord length.
Right handed propeller

blade seen from behind
10.7.5.1.7 Torque Qsmax

The spindle torque Qsmax around the axis of the blade fitting shall be determined both for the maximum
backward blade force Fb and forward blade force F f , which are applied as in Table 10.7.5.1.3 and
Table 10.7.5.16.
If the above method gives a value which is less than the default value given by Formula (10.7.5.1.7)
below, the following Qsmax value shall be used:
(10.7.5.1.7)
where F is either Fb or F f , whichever has the greater absolute value.
10.7.5.1.8 Load distributions for blade loads
The Weibull-type distribution (probability that Fice exceeds (Fice)max) is used for the fatigue design of
the blade.
(10.7.5.1.8)
where
k=0,75 shall be used for the ice force distribution of an open propeller
k=1,0 for that of a ducted propeller blade.
Fice is the random variable for ice loads on the blade 0 Fice (Fice)max.
Propability of exceeding for N=1E7
1,E+00
0
0,2
0,4
0,6
0,8
1,E-01
Weibull distribution/k=1
1,E-02
Weibull distribution/k=0.75
1,E-03
1,E-04
1,E-05
1,E-06
1,E-07
Fice/(Ficemax)
Fig.10.7.5.1.8 The Weibull-type distribution

10.7.5.1.9 Number of load cycles per propeller blade during the operational life of the ship.
The number of load cycles per propeller blade in the load spectrum shall be determined according to
the formula
N ice k1k 2 k 3 k 4 N class n
(10.7.5.1.9)
where
Ice class
Impacts in life, n
Propeller location
Propeller location factor k1
IA Super
9106
IA
6106
Centre propeller
1
IB
3,4106
IC
2,1106
Wing propeller
1,35
Propeller shroud availability

Propeller type factor k2
Non available
1
Type
Propulsion type factor k3
Fixed
1
Available
1,1
Azimuthing
1,2
The submersion factor k4 is determined from the equation

k 4 = 0.8 - f
when
f 0
= 0.8 - 0.4 f
when 0 f 1
= 0.6 - 0.2 f
when 1 f 2.5
= 0.1
when
f 2.5
where the immersion function f is

f
ho H ice
D/2
1,
For components that are subject to loads resulting from propeller/ice interaction with all the propeller
blades, the number of load cycles (Nice) shall be multiplied by the number of propeller blades (Z).
10.7.5.2 Axial design loads for open and ducted propellers.
10.7.5.2.1 Maximum ice thrust Tf and Tb.
T f 1.1 F f [kN]
Tb 1.1 Fb [kN] .
10.7.5.2.2 Design thrust along the propulsion shaft line for open and ducted propellers.
The design thrust along the propeller shaft line shall be calculated with the formulae below. The
greater shall be taken as the design load for both directions. The factors 2.2 and 1.5 take into account
the dynamic magnification resulting from axial vibration.
Tr T 2.2 T f [kN] ,
Tr 1.5 Tb [kN] .
If the hydrodynamic bollard thrust, T, is not known, T shall be taken as follows:

Propeller type
T
CP propellers (open)
1,25 Tn
CP propellers (ducted)
1,1 Tn
FP propellers driven by turbine or electric motor
Tn
FP propellers driven by diesel engine (open)
0,85 Tn
FP propellers driven by diesel engine (ducted)
0,75 Tn
Here Tn is the nominal propeller thrust at MCR in the free running open water condition.
10.7.5.3 Torsional design loads.
10.7.5.3.1 Design ice torque on propeller Qmax for open propellers.
Qmax is the maximum torque on a propeller resulting from ice/propeller interaction.
d P
Qmax 10.9 1 0.7

D D
0.16
d P
20.7 1 0.7
D D
0.16
Qmax
nD
0.17
nD
0.17
D 3 [kNm], when D Dlimit
D 1.9 H ice1.1 [kNm], when D D limit ,
where
D limit 1 .8 H ice [m].
n is the rotational propeller speed in bollard condition. If not known, n shall be taken as
follows:
Propeller type
CP propellers
FP propellers driven by diesel engine
Rotational speed n
nn
nn
0.85 nn
For CP propellers, the propeller pitch, P0,7 shall correspond to MCR in bollard condition. If not known,
P0.7 shall be taken as 0,7P0,7n, where P0,7n is the propeller pitch at MCR in free running condition.
10.7.5.3.2 Design ice torque on propeller Qmax for ducted propellers.
d P
Qmax 7.7 1 0.7

D D
Qmax
0.16
d P
14.6 1 0.7
D D
nD
0.16
0.17
nD
D 3 [kNm] when D D limit ,
0.17
D 1.9 H ice1.1 [kNm] when D D limit ,
where
D limit 1 .8 H ice [m]
n is the rotational propeller speed in bollard condition. If not known, n shall be taken as
follows:
Propeller type
CP propellers
n
nn
nn
0.85 nn
For CP propellers, the propeller pitch, P0.7 shall correspond to MCR in bollard condition. If not known,
P0.7 shall be taken as 0.7P0.7n, where P0.7n is the propeller pitch at MCR in free running condition.
10.7.5.3.3 Ice torque.

The propeller ice torque excitation for shaft line transient torsional vibration analysis shall be described
by a sequence of blade impacts which are of a half sine shape (see Figure 10.7.5.3.3.)
The torque resulting from a single blade ice impact as a function of the propeller rotation angle is then
Q ( ) C q Qmax sin 180 / i , when 0... i
Q ( ) 0, when = i ...360
Cq and i parameters are given in Table 10.7.5.3.3.

Torque excitation
Propeller/ice
interaction
Single ice block
Single ice block
Two ice blocks (phase
shift 360/2/Z deg.)
Case 1
Case 2
Case 3
Table 10.7.5.3.3
i
Cq
0.75
1.0
0.5
90
135
45
The total ice torque is obtained by summing the torque of single blades, taking into account the phase
shift 360deg./Z. In addition, at the beginning and at the end of the milling sequence a linear ramp
functions for 270 degrees of rotation angle shall be used.
The number of propeller revolutions during a milling sequence shall be obtained from the formula
N Q 2 H ice .
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0
Q/Qmax
1
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0
Q/Qmax
Q/Qmax
The number of impacts is Z N Q .
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
1
0,9
0,8
0,7
0,6
0,5
0,4
0,3
0,2
0,1
0
0
Rotation angle
Rotaion angle [deg]
200
400
600
800
1000
1200
1400
Rotation angle [deg]
Fig.10.7.5.3.3 The shape of ice torque excitation for 4 blades propeller for 90, and 135 degree singleblade impact sequences and 45 degree double blade impact sequence
10.7.5.3.4 Design torque along propeller shaft line.
If there is not any relevant first blade order torsional resonance within the designed operating
rotational speed range extended 20% above the maximum and 20% below the minimum operating
speeds, the following formula of the maximum torque can be used:
Qr Qe max Qmax
I
It
[kNm],
If the maximum torque, Qemax, is not known, it shall be taken as follows:

Propeller type
Propellers driven by electric motor
CP propellers not driven by electric motor
FP propellers driven by turbine
Qemax
Qmotor
Qn
Qn
0.75 Qn
If there is a first blade order torsional resonance within the designed operating rotational speed range
extended 20% above the maximum and 20% below the minimum operating speeds, the design torque
(Qr) of the shaft component shall be determined by means of torsional vibration analysis of the
propulsion line.
10.7.5.4 Blade failure load.
Fex
300 c t 2 ref
0.8 D 2 r
[kN],
where
c, t, and r parameters shall be determined at the weakest section outside the root filet.
10.7.6 Design.
10.7.6.1 Design principle.
The strength of the propulsion line shall be designed according to the pyramid strength principle.
This means that the loss of the propeller blade shall not cause any significant damage to other
propeller shaft line components.
10.7.6.2 Propeller blade.
10.7.6.2.1 Calculation of blade stresses.
The blade stresses shall be calculated for the design loads given in 10.7.5.1. Finite element analysis
shall be used for stress analysis for final approval for all propellers. The following simplified formulae
can be used in estimating the blade stresses for all propellers at the root area (r/R < 0.5). The root
area dimensions based on Formula (10.7.6.2.1) can be accepted even if the FEM analysis would
show greater stresses at the root area.
(10.7.6.2.1)
where
constant C1 is the
actual stress
stress obtained with beam equation

shall be taken as 1.6.
. If the actual value is not available, C1
M BL (0.75 r / R ) R F , where
F is the maximum of Fb and Ff.
10.7.6.2.2 Acceptability criterion.
The following criterion for calculated blade stresses shall be fulfilled:
ref 2
st
1.5
If FEM analysis is used in estimating the stresses, von Mises stresses shall be used
10.6.6.2.3 Fatigue design of propeller blade.
The fatigue design of the propeller blade is based on an estimated load distribution for the service life
of the ship and the S-N curve for the blade material. An equivalent stress that produces the same
fatigue damage as the expected load distribution shall be calculated and the acceptability criterion
for fatigue shall be fulfilled as given in this section. The equivalent stress is normalised for 108 cycles.
If the following criterion is fulfilled, fatigue calculations according to this chapter are not required:
exp B1 ref 2 B log( N ice ) B
where B1, B2 and B3 coefficients for open and ducted propellers are given in the Table 10.7.6.2.3-1.
Table 10.7.6.2.3-1
Open propeller
0.00270
1.007
2.101
B1
B2
B3
Ducted propeller
0.00184
1.007
2.470
For calculation of equivalent stress two types of S-N curves are available.
1. Two slope S-N curve (slopes 4.5 and 10), see Figure 10.7.6.2.3-1.
2. One slope S-N curve (the slope can be chosen), see Figure 10.7.6.2.3-2.
The type of the S-N-curve shall be selected to correspond to the material properties of the blade. If
the S-N-curve is not known the two slope S-N curve shall be used.
Stress amplitude
Stress amplitude
Slope 4.5
Slope 10
exp
1,E+04
1,E+06
1,E+08
1,E+10
Number of loads
Slope m=8
Slope m=10
exp
1,E+04
1,E+06
1,E+08
1,E+10
Number of loads
Fig. 10.7.6.2.3-1 Two-slope S-N curve
Fig/ 10.7.6.2.3-2 Constant-slope S-N curve
Equivalent fatigue stress

The equivalent fatigue stress for 108 stress cycles which produces the same fatigue damage as the
load distribution is:
fat ice max
where
ice max
0.5 ice f max ice b max
In calculation of (ice)max, case 1 and case 3 (or case 2 and case 4) given in 10.7.5.1 are
considered. Case 5 is excluded from the fatigue analysis.
Calculation of parameter for two-slope S-N curve
The parameter relates the maximum ice load to the distribution of ice loads according to the
regression formula
C1 ice max
C2
fl
C3
log( N ice ) C4
where
fl
v m exp ,
The following values shall be used for the reduction factors if actual values are not available:
= 0.67, = 0.75, and m = 0.75.
The coefficients C 1 , C 2 , C 3 , and C 4 are given in Table 10.7.6.2.3-2.
Table 10.7.6.2.3-2
C1
Open propeller
0.000711
Ducted propeller
0.000509
C2
0.0645
0.0533
C3
-0.0565
-0.0459
C4
2.22
2.584
Calculation of parameter for constant-slope S-N curve

For materials with a constant-slope S-N curve the factor shall be calculated from the following
formula
N
G ice
NR
1/ m
(ln( N ice ))
where
k = 1.0 for ducted propellers and k = 0.75 for open propellers;
values for the parameter G are given in Table 10.7.6.2.3-2. Linear interpolation may be used to
calculate the value for other m/k ratios than given in the Table 10.7.6.2.3-2.
m/k
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
Table 10.7.6.2.3-2
Value for the parameter G for different m/k ratios
G
m/k
G
m/k
G
5.5
8
6
287.9
40320
6
8.5
11.6
720
119292
6.5
9
24
1871
362880
7
9.5
52.3
5040
1.133106
7.5
10
120
14034
3.623106
10.7.6.2.4 Acceptability criterion for fatigue.

The equivalent fatigue stress at all locations on the blade shall fulfil the following acceptability criterion:
fl
fat
1.5
where
fl
v m exp ,
The following values shall be used for the reduction factors if actual values are not available: =
0.67, = 0.75, and m = 0.75.
10.7.6.3 Propeller bossing and CP mechanism.

The blade bolts, the CP mechanism, the propeller boss, and the fitting of the propeller to the propeller
shaft shall be designed to withstand the maximum and fatigue design loads, as defined in 10.7.5.
The safety factor against yielding shall be greater than 1.3 and that against fatigue greater than 1.5.
In addition, the safety factor for loads resulting from loss of the propeller blade through plastic bending
as defined in 10.7.5.4 shall be greater than 1.0 against yielding.
10.7.6.4 Propulsion shaft line.
The shafts and shafting components, such as the thrust and stern tube bearings, couplings, flanges
and sealings, shall be designed to withstand the propeller/ice interaction loads as given in 10.7.5. The
safety factor shall be at least 1.3.
10.7.6.4.1 Shafts and shafting components.
The ultimate load resulting from total blade failure as defined in 10.7.5.4 shall not cause yielding in
shafts and shaft components. The loading shall consist of the combined axial, bending, and torsion
loads, wherever this is significant. The minimum safety factor against yielding shall be 1.0 for bending
and torsional stresses.
10.7.6.5 Main active means of ships steering (AMSS).
In addition to the above requirements, special consideration shall be given to those loading cases
which are extraordinary for propulsion units when compared with conventional propellers. The
estimation of loading cases shall reflect the way of operation of active means of ships steering. In
this respect, for example, the loads caused by the impacts of ice blocks on the propeller hub of a
pulling propeller shall be considered.
The steering mechanism, the fitting of the unit, and the body of the thruster shall be designed to
withstand the loss of a blade without damage. The loss of a blade shall be considered for the propeller
blade orientation which causes the maximum load on the component being studied. Typically, topdown blade orientation places the maximum bending loads on the AMSS body.
Azimuth thrusters shall also be designed for estimated loads caused by thruster body/ice interaction.
The thruster body shall stand the loads obtained when the maximum ice blocks, which are given in
10.7.3, strike the thruster body when the ship is at a typical ice operating speed. In addition, the design
situation in which an ice sheet glides along the ships hull and presses against the thruster body shall
be considered. The thickness of the sheet shall be taken as the thickness of the maximum ice block
entering the propeller, as defined in 10.7.3.
10.7.6.6 Vibrations.
The propulsion system shall be designed in such a way that the complete dynamic system is free
from harmful torsional, axial, and bending resonances at a 1-order blade frequency within the
designed running speed range, extended by 20% above and below the maximum and minimum
operating rotational speeds.
A detailed vibration analysis shall be carried out in order to determine that the acceptable strength of
the components can be achieved.
10.7.7 Alternative design procedure.
10.7.7.1 Scope.
As an alternative to 10.7.5 and 10.7.6, a comprehensive design study may be carried out to the
satisfaction of the Register. The study shall be based on ice conditions given for different ice classes
in 6.3. It shall include both fatigue and maximum load design calculations and fulfil the pyramid
strength principle, as given in 10.7.6.1.
10.7.7.2 Loading.
Loads on the propeller blade and propulsion system shall be based on an acceptable estimation of
hydrodynamic and ice loads.
10.7.7.3 Design levels.
The analysis shall indicate that all components transmitting random (occasional) forces, excluding
propeller blade, are not subjected to stress levels in excess of the yield stress of the component
material, with a reasonable safety margin.
Cumulative fatigue damage calculations are to indicate a reasonable safety factor. Due account shall
be taken of material properties, stress raisers, and fatigue enhancements.
Vibration analysis shall be carried out and shall indicate that the complete dynamic system is free
from harmful torsional resonances resulting from propeller/ice interaction.
10.8 MISCELLANEOUS MACHINERY REQUIREMENTS

10.8.1 Compressed air system.
The capacity of the air receivers shall be sufficient to provide without reloading not less than 12
consecutive starts of the propulsion engine, if this shall be reversed for going astern, or 6 consecutive
starts if the propulsion engine shall not be reversed for going astern.
If the air receivers serve any other purposes than starting the propulsion engine, they shall have
additional capacity sufficient for these purposes.
The capacity of the air compressors shall be sufficient for charging the air receivers from atmospheric
to full pressure in one (1) hour, except for a ship with the ice class IA Super, if its propulsion engine
shall be reversed for going astern, in which case the compressor shall be able to charge the receivers
in half an hour.
10.8.2 Cooling water system.
The cooling water system shall be designed to ensure supply of cooling water when navigating in ice.
For this purpose at least one cooling water inlet chest shall be arranged as follows:
1. The sea inlet shall be situated near the centreline of the ship and well aft if possible.
2. As guidance for design the volume of the chest shall be about one cubic metre for every
750 kW engine output of the ship including the output of auxiliary engines necessary for the
ship's service.
3. The chest shall be sufficiently high to allow ice to accumulate above the inlet pipe.
4. A pipe for discharge cooling water, allowing full capacity discharge, shall be connected to the
chest.
5. The open area of the strainer plates shall not be less than four (4) times the inlet pipe sectional
area.
If there are difficulties to meet the requirements of paragraphs 2 and 3 above, two smaller chests may
be arranged for alternating intake and discharge of cooling water, thus, the requirements of 1,4,5 shall
be met.
Heating coils may be installed in the upper part of the sea chest.
Arrangements for using ballast water for cooling purposes may be useful as a reserve in ballast
condition but cannot be accepted as a substitute for sea a inlet chest as described above.
Annex 1
Ice class draught marking
Subject to 10.3.2, the ship's sides shall be provided with a warning triangle and with a
draught mark at the maximum permissible ice class draught amidships (see Figure 1).
The purpose of the warning triangle shall provide information on the draught limitation of
the ship when it is sailing in ice for masters of icebreakers and for inspection personnel
in ports.
Fig. 1 Ice Class Draught Marking

Notes to Fig. 1
1. The upper edge of the warning triangle shall be located vertically above the ICE mark,
1000 mm higher than the Summer Load Line in fresh water but in no case higher than the deck
line. The sides of the triangle shall be 300 mm in length.
2. The ice class draught mark shall be located 540 mm abaft the centre of the load line ring or 540
mm abaft the vertical line of the timber load line mark, if applicable.
3. The marks and figures shall be cut out of 5 - 8 mm plate and then welded to the ship's side.
The marks and figures shall be painted in a red or yellow reflecting colour in order to make the
marks and figures plainly visible even in ice conditions.
4. The dimensions of all letters shall be the same as those used in the load line mark.
*******

2 020101 082 e (T1) PDF

Transféré par

Informations du document

Titre original

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

2 020101 082 e (T1) PDF

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

R U S S I A N M A R I T I M E REGISTER OF SHIPPING

Electronic version of printed

Rules f o r t h e Classification a n d Construction o f Sea-Going Ships o f Russian M a r i t i m e Register o f

GENERAL REGULATIONS FOR T H E CLASSIFICATION A N D OTHER

RULES FOR T H E CLASSIFICATION A N D CONSTRUCTION OF SEA-GOING

1. C h a p t e r 1.1: i n p a r a 1.1.1 t h e d e f i n i t i o n " A s h i p o f r i v e r - s e a n a v i g a t i o n " h a s b e e n specified c o n s i d e r i n g

2.9: the r e q u i r e m e n t o f p a r a 2.9.15 has been specified.

Openings i n shell plating and their closing

Passage o f ships f r o m one p o r t to

3.12 F i x e d local application fire extinguishing

Ships carrying packaged dangerous goods

1.2.1 T h e R e g i s t e r c a r r i e s o u t s u r v e y s o f a n d a s signs class t o c i v i l ships. T h e R e g i s t e r is a m e m b e r t o

h e r e i n a f t e r referred to as "the Register",

and F O P and the tonnage measurement characteristics o f i n l a n d n a v i g a t i o n ships i n its registry.

for the Classification

unless o t h e r w i s e specified i n t h e subsequent editions

1.5.1 T h e R e g i s t e r e n t r u s t s c a r r y i n g o u t i n s p e c tions t o experts adequately skilled a n d p e r f o r m i n g

failure to p e r f o r m or improper performance o f cont r a c t u a l c o m m i t m e n t s b y t h e R e g i s t e r a n d t h e suff e r e d losses.

SURVEYS O F SHIPS AND F O P I N SERVICE

Shipping Regulations for the D a n u b e , 1975;

R U L E S F O RT H E CLASSIFICATION AND CONSTRUCTION

Definitions and explanations pertinent to the

h e r e i n a f t e r referred to as "the Rules".

for the Classification

are n o t passengers o r m e m b e r s o f the crew o r

Date o f contract for c o n s t r u c t i o n

for the Classification

A s h i p o w n e r is a physical person o r legal

1.2.1 R u l e s f o r t h e C l a s s i f i c a t i o n a n d C o n s t r u c tion o f Sea-Going Ships apply to:

A n y statements t o the effect a supervised i t e m

for the Classification

class h a v e n o t been fulfilled w i t h i n t h e specified

Ships a n d floating facilities, c o m p l y i n g fully o r t o

T h e class n o t a t i o n assigned b y t h e R e g i s t e r t o a ship

for the Classification

permitted ice navigation conditions given i n

Service areas a n d conditions for ships o f arctic categories

N o t e . T h e classification o f ice a d o p t e d a c c o r d i n g t o t h e " S e a Ice N o m e n c l a t u r e " o f t h e W o r l d M e t e o r o l o g i c a l O r g a n i z a t i o n ( W M O ) :

Ice concentration a n d type

open floating first-year ice

open floating first-year ice

open floating first-year ice

close floating first-yearice

very close floating a n d

N a v i g a t i o n Ship Certificate issued b y t h e Register

applied t o such ships a t t h e shipowner's discretion

for the Classification

2.2.5 Distinguishing m a r k s f o r restricted a r e a s o f

2.2.5.2 T h erestrictions provided f o r b y 2.2.5.1

The Sea of Azov

Throughout the year

N o restrictions, including the Gulfs o f Bothnia, F i n l a n d , R i g a , the Z u n d , G r e a t a n d T h r o u g h o u t the year

E x i t t o the S k a g e r r a k Straits i n the waters t o t h e E a s t o f t h e line the C a p e S k a g e n M a r c h t o S e p t e m b e r

The White Sea

T h e O n e z h s k y , D v i n s k y a n d K a n d a l a k s h s k y G u l f s , as well as 20-mile coastal area t o the

The Ionian Sea

The Kara Sea

The Caspian Sea

20-mile coastal area f r o m p . D i k s o n t o r . P y a s i n g

T h e L a p t e v S e a a n d 20-mile coastal area f r o m t h e m o u t h o f r. Y a n a t o t h e m o u t h o f r. K o l y m a

T h e S e a o f M a r m o r a N o restrictions f r o m B o s p o r u s t o Dardanelles Straits

Throughout the year

T h e M e d i t e r r a n i a n S e a F r o m R h o d e s Strait i n 20-mile coastal area t o the p o r t s o f Israel inclusive w i t h calls a t M a r c h t o N o v e m b e r